
[space] Ashby Knowledge Base

[title] Agency Onboarding Guide
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Ashby Admin Onboarding/

This onboarding guide is for recruiting agencies setting up their Ashby account. For companies looking to add agency users to their Ashby account, check out [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1).

Welcome to Ashby! We’re so excited to help you get started and hit those goals!

As an agency, you’re likely to set up and use Ashby in a rather different way from companies hiring for their own teams. This guide will take you through the key steps to get your account setup, along with some more advanced features that you can implement. Let’s do this!

:::hint{type="success"}
For a general overview of Ashby, check out our [101 Webinar](https://ashby.ewebinar.com/webinar/ashby-university-101-17218?session=replay\&showform=1).
:::

## Set up basic integrations and your job board theme.

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers the basic technical setup to get everything working. This section should take less than 20 minutes to complete.
:::

- Firstly, we'd recommend setting up your integration with either [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM)  or [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7)  so you and your team can use all of Ashby's features.
- [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](docId\:f2OtyumVmeJaAt1DYRJYW)&#x20;
- Set up the [Zoom](docId\:S9XGV03nQ8KCAR0_ifd9l) integration (if your team uses Zoom)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Looking to integrate with other software? Check out the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and our [Integrations](docId\:L-qok2y-8x1s8wHKVoobO) guides for further information.

**Note:** Most integrations must be set up by an Admin user of the partner’s platform. Some job board integrations like [Wellfound (formerly AngelList Talent)](docId\:c4xKfeoY3Z9dgJ-lCTEGc) must be set up on the partner’s end.
:::



## Add and open client jobs for applications

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers how to add jobs and job-specific information, like the department and location information. Agencies usually set up the client company as a department, with respective functions (Engineering, Sales, etc) as a sub-team.
We would recommend having a job description ready to speed up the setup process.
:::

- [Set up departments & locations ](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8)to assign to your jobs
- Create [Interview Plans ](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux)to establish clear stages within each job's pipeline
- Open and post your first Jobs&#x20;
- Want to test your job? [Create test candidates and test out the workflow](docId\:Fu_sif2S_xnQHNRF7AnaW)&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Note:** The [Indeed/Glassdoor](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/indeed-glassdoor) integration is enabled by default. Please disable it while you’re setting up your jobs to ensure test postings aren’t listed.
:::

## Setting up re-usable templates in Admin.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can create templates to help establish job pipelines in advance and create a clear email tone for candidate outreach. **We highly recommend setting these up in advance to save time in the long run.**
:::

- [Interview Plans ](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux)allow you to determine the pipeline stages across jobs in advance.
- [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR): Ensure that you have structured feedback forms and interviews in place for a consistent experience for candidates and interviewers.
- [Email Templates](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ) speed up candidate communication and ensure consistency.

## Tools for sourcing and outreach

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers the different tools we have in place for reaching out to leads, adding them into Ashby and taking action on them. Handy for all your sourcing needs!
:::

- Install the [Chrome Extension](docId\:Je_BiJ1sj2ro6WT9vtTfP) to easily add and take action on leads via LinkedIn, Gmail and GitHub
- Create [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4) to engage potential candidates and gauge their interest
- Looking to import candidates into Ashby? Check out the [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ) to speedily add your data to Ashby

:::hint{type="success"}
If you’d prefer to integrate with sourcing tools you currently use, our full list of integration guides for sourcing tools can be found [here](docId\:JkCtjNNIE2F6GpbI9z7b9).
:::

## Job Status and Reporting

:::hint{type="info"}
Pull data and export reports to share with your clients to keep them informed on job pipelines.
:::

You can also check out the following guides to further acquaint yourself with Ashby's reporting capabilities:

- [Ashby Analytics: Key Reporting Concepts](docId\:HuKCp0EIHAKDk4xUcuhnm)
- [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)&#x20;
- [Ashby Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

## Onboard your team

:::hint{type="info"}
Share the following guides with your team to help them get started with Ashby! Your team members will also be able to select their role in our in-app widget for additional guidance.
:::

- [Getting Started for Hiring Managers](docId\:Ku4nmt5UeOs8wfRgFxQNY)&#x20;
- [Getting Started for Interviewers](docId:2_WbM9Pju_SOWws1jhpZZ)&#x20;
- [Getting Started for Recruiters](docId\:QyoLopAyBDwsEm-GsXjy3)&#x20;
- [Getting Started for Recruiting Coordinators](docId\:ZHSO6kJXpXFsZbESO2rLl)&#x20;
- [Getting Started for Sourcers](docId\:xWkjWMMZhmSU_xSKtG_R3)&#x20;

## Some Additional Recommendations

:::hint{type="info"}
Hooray! You’ve completed this onboarding guide. Find below some additional tools that we’d recommend checking out.
:::

- [Public Booking Links](docId\:FyG7-O-Qk73981CicoxjU)&#x20;
- [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo)&#x20;
- [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs)&#x20;
- [Surveys & Questionnaires](docId\:TsYWj3bt2uaEEA7SRZ5Xz)&#x20;


[title] Bulk Import: Email Import
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/Bulk Import/Untitled/

The email import feature lets you add candidates to Ashby by forwarding resume files to a specific email address. You can attach up to 10 resumes per email. A common use case for this feature is sharing the import email addresses with external recruiters. If a candidate sends their resume to a recruiter via email, the recruiter can forward it to Ashby using the import email address.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have many resume files you'd like to upload, contact [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com). We can assist with bulk uploads on the backend.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/baff6f2c9bd148e4995b953acf4b0e39"}

# Accessing the feature

There are both job-specific and general candidate upload email addresses. You can access these email addresses in two places.

You can find all email addresses, including the general email address, on the [Import via Email](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-import/email-import) page in Admin, in the **Data Management** section.&#x20;

To access the general candidate upload email address, select `Upload Candidate` on the **Import via Email** page. Uploading candidates via the general candidate upload email address adds them as a lead without considering them for a specific job.

![Screenshot of the Import via Email page showing the general candidate upload email address.](https://cdn.zappy.app/45b5ec538fcbd5fbf18c78e414f7cc59.png)

You can also find job-specific email addresses on the **Settings** page of the corresponding job. These email addresses are only active on a job when the job is open.

![Screenshot of the job specific upload candidate via email address. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/8c2e8ef14393fe39cc593a9acac7385f.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Anyone with access to these email addresses can use them, so be thoughtful about who you share them with. We advise against sharing the email address directly with candidates or on your job board to avoid spam applications.
:::

# File requirements

Your files must meet the following requirements to be parsed as resumes:

- The file must be a PDF. Image files (e.g., .jpeg, .png, .gif) cannot be parsed as resumes and are ignored.
- The document must contain a name and at least one unique identifier, such as an email address, phone number, or social link, for the candidate profile to be created.
- You may attach up to 10 resumes per email.

# Upload confirmations

You receive a confirmation email letting you know whether each resume was successfully uploaded. Uploads fail when Ashby cannot parse the file.

Common reasons a file won't parse include:

- The file is an image or GIF, rather than a text-based PDF (for example, a scanned document where someone photographed a page and converted it to PDF)
- The document is in an unexpected format, such as demographic information appearing in an unusual location
- The file doesn't include a name and identifier (email, phone number, or social link). Without these, Ashby can't create a candidate profile.

If a file can't be parsed, you need to manually create the candidate profile and upload the resume. Even when manually uploaded, the candidate's data is not automatically parsed from the resume.

# Reviewing uploaded candidates

When you upload a resume, Ashby creates a candidate profile, parses the resume details and stores them in the **Summary** tab of the candidate profile, and makes the resume available to view in the **Resume&#x20;**&#x74;ab.

Ashby adds candidates uploaded using the general candidate upload email address to your account as leads, and you can find them using **Candidate Search**.

![Screenshot of the Candidate Search showing candidates uploaded as leads. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/c4bd6155040f5c3a62bc038a5ddb83e7.png)

Ashby adds candidates uploaded using job-specific email addresses to the **Application Review** stage of the job they were uploaded to.

![Screenshot of job specific resume uploads in the Application Review stage.](https://cdn.zappy.app/4e4cb9ffc473ccd46f2f1a39ff9fa758.png)

# FAQs

### Can I set up auto-forwarding for importing candidates via email?

This currently isn't possible. You need to send resumes to the provided email addresses manually to create candidates.

### How can candidates submit their resume by email?

We advise against sharing the candidate upload or job-specific email addresses on your job board or directly with candidates, to avoid spam applications. We recommend advising candidates to send resumes to an internal company email address, and then forwarding those resumes to Ashby manually.

### How does the email import handle duplicate candidates?

If you use the email import to send a resume for a candidate profile that already has any active job consideration, including one for a different job, Ashby flags the duplicate and sends an error. If the existing candidate profile has no active job considerations and only has archived job considerations, Ashby does not raise an error. Instead, Ashby updates the resume and creates a new job consideration.

![Screenshot of "The following resume matched candidates that already have an application and resume for this job" error.](https://p-yvfbeggm.b0.n0.cdn.zight.com/items/P8uoAv8r/cf1a8d2f-50fa-44f3-b978-ae09476b3f20.jpg?v=d0a76a0e64e2429cac6a11114f9efb41)


[title] Getting Started for Hiring Managers
[path] Getting Started: User Guides/

Welcome to Ashby! We couldn't be more excited to help you get started using Ashby as a hiring manager. This guide assumes your Ashby instance is already set up and covers how to navigate Ashby and use the most commonly used features for hiring managers.

# Log in to Ashby

To sign in, head to https\://app.ashbyhq.com. Ashby uses Google sign-in, Microsoft 365 sign-in, and magic links. If your company has SSO set up with Ashby, use this option to log in. More on signing in can be found at [Signing in to Ashby](docId\:vH7B6OAp3CIRSFeHtCYoA).

# Configure your personal settings

A key first step is configuring your personal settings in Ashby. In [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info), you can do the following:

- Set your personal info, including your job title, user avatar, timezone, and social links
- Set your notification settings - determine the activities you should be notified about and where you'd like to be notified
- Set up personal email templates
- Set up OAuth if needed (confirm with your admin if this needs to be completed as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 setup)

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full walkthrough, check out [Updating Personal Settings](docId\:Bb_jro6kp6bWBkWTHtAZT)&#x20;
:::

# Navigate Ashby

## Home page

If you are only interviewing candidates in the pipeline and don't have any other interaction with candidates, you likely have `Limited Access` in Ashby.

To get started, log in to Ashby at [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com) using one of the login options. You should already have an account set up. Once logged in, you land on your home page, where you can access interview briefings and tasks. For a full breakdown of the home page, check out [Home Page](docId\:mzsz9lMAG1AX7n1BoZCzj).

### Add and track referrals

To submit  :

1. Navigate to the **Referrals** section of the [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page.
2. Click `+ Referral`.
   - Creating a direct referral? Click `Add Direct Referral`, then complete the referral form with the candidate's details.
   - Creating a referral link? Click `Create Referral Link` and give your referral link a title. You can then opt to link to a specific job posting using the `Link to specific job posting?` checkbox and selecting a job posting from the dropdown.

![Screenshot of the home page with the Referrals section hightlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/26278f4b47c38aac31f08c40ab4ba5c3.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Our full guide on referrals can be found at [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr)
:::

## Candidate profile

Depending on your permissions, you may have access to view candidate profiles and take action on job considerations. For further information on navigating a candidate profile, check out [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).

## Candidate pipeline

The Pipeline Overview provides you a view of candidates across all positions you have access to and allows you to quickly jump between them.&#x20;

For more on the pipeline view, check out [Candidate Pipeline](docId\:c7vCHI2hsjQZ0AynA8c-b).

## Jobs - dashboard view

The Job Dashboard at Jobs > [Dashboard](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/pipelines)  is a high-level overview of the active jobs you follow, have a role on, and have access to. You can also access the `Job Board` from this page. We recommend bookmarking this page to quickly see all of your active jobs in one place.

![Job dashboard view with button linking out to the job board](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wj37MTayKjo_1XZbYkRcB_job-dashboard-view.jpg)

# Common use cases for hiring managers

## Application review

Check out [Application Review](docId\:d_nxB_Kdz4fJru4hBCaLb) for a full guide covering bulk reviewing candidate applications and advancing and archiving candidates.

## Opening and posting jobs

To create a job, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, then click the Create a Job button and follow the steps in the job creation wizard. At this point, you can open the job right away, or configure it further. In the **Settings** section, there are further configuration options on four tabs.

When you're ready to open the job, click the `Job Status` button and select `Mark as Open`. An open job isn't automatically posted to your Ashby job board or any third-party job boards, but you can add candidates to the pipeline.

When you're ready to post the job to your job board, you can set up a job posting on the **Job Postings** tab. You can create as many postings as you'd like for a job. Once published, the posting shows up on your Ashby job board (e.g., jobs.asbhyhq.com/ashby).

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide on creating a job and job postings, check out [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt)
:::

# FAQ

### My profile picture has synced over from Google Workspace, but it’s very pixelated. Why?

Images synced over from Google Workspace do not have a high enough resolution. We recommend users upload their avatar within [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info) to fix this.

![Screenshot of User Avatar section.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3bd9ae2c6b84fa648351e2310d15c63c.png)


[title] Agencies Users
[path] Users & Permissions/Agency Users & External Recruiters/

This guide covers how agency users can use Ashby to submit and track candidates. Review [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1)  for instructions on how to set up Agencies and add agency users.

## Agencies Overview

The Agencies feature allows you to submit candidates directly to jobs, leave notes on their profiles, and their progress.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/19f538812bc74a45b04acbc9987f4d65?sid=026581fc-f323-4cc9-997e-32ed01a65630"}

## Navigation

Once your Agency is set up within Ashby, you'll be able to sign in to Ashby here: [https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin). You can sign in using Google or Microsoft Sign In, or the Magic Link option.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you are logged into Ashby when added as an agency user to a new company, you will need to log out of Ashby, then log back in before you will be able to see the new company's profile in Ashby.
:::

Once logged in, you'll land on your home screen where you can access the key features of Ashby you'll need to add and track candidates.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9b4fa6d06f6f667cd10bf6a59c3f78ef.png)

**This screenshot highlights seven key areas of the home page:**

1. Candidates: In the candidates dropdown you'll have access to the Candidate Pipeline and Candidate Search features. The candidate pipeline shows the stages your candidates are in, candidate search allows you to filter for candidates using basic or advanced filters.
2. Jobs: In the jobs dropdown you'll have access to the Jobs Dashboard. The Jobs Dashboard gives you a high-level view of the number of candidates in each pipeline stage by the job.
3. Notifications: View your notifications within Ashby here.
4. Add: The `+ Add` button allows you to manually add a candidate to a job.
5. Search: Use `Command + K` or `CRTL + K` to search for candidates and jobs you have access to.
6. Personal Settings: Update your avatar, timezone, notification settings, and more.
7. Tasks: When you're @mentioned in notes on candidate profiles, you'll see tasks where you can reply to the @mentions.

## Add Candidates using the + Add button

You can add individual candidates by clicking the `+ Add` button and then selecting Candidate at the top right of your screen. Enter the candidate's details (you can also upload a resume here if needed) and link them to a job to create their candidate profile.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/aa8703991a79b7387d52226d3196de34.png" size="90" width="1415" height="375" position="center" darkWidth="1415" darkHeight="375" showCaption="false"}

## Add Candidates using Email Import

You can add up to 10 candidates at once by sending their resumes to a job-specific email address. Navigate to the Settings Page on a job and scroll to the bottom of the page to find the email address.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0b782ce38d56b3def946426e6a686bc6.png)

## Candidate Profile

The Candidate Profile is where you add and view details about the candidate.  You can create tasks for yourself, your team, and your partners by @mentioning them and checking the `Create Task` checkbox.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5fbfa1d363772f7b9b37bb630dd831bc.png)

**1) Activities and Progress** Here you can view the candidates progress through interview stages.

**2) Summary** Candidate information like their name, email and location can be found here.

**3) Resume** If the candidate has a resume, you can view the uploaded document here.

**4) Feed** Here you can view notes, feedback and emails relating to the candidate (if you have access to see these). You can use the *Notes* and *Emails* buttons to filter the feed accordingly.

**5) Add Note** Add notes and create tasks for yourself or other members of your team here.

## Candidate Pipeline

The Candidate Pipeline allows you to view your candidates across jobs and stages. You can use the search bar to search for specific candidates and the filters to pull candidates that meet a specific criteria. From there, you can click on the the arrow next to a job to view the pipeline and the candidates in each stage.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8bf4c18b2abe091281bce884ec26f009.png)

**1) Search**  Search for a candidate by name here.

**2) Filters &#x20;**&#x46;ilter by specific criteria to pull the candidates you’re looking for here.

**3) Jobs and pipelines**  Jobs you have access to will be listed here, click the arrow to the left of the job title to open the pipeline and view the candidates in each stage.

## Tasks

When someone @mentions you on a candidate's profile or you have an overdue task to submit feedback on a candidate, a task will be created on your home page. You'll receive notifications via email until the task is resolved.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bc8ece9544dc25c2089fb29fcb405f3e.png)

## Personal Settings

Your Personal Settings are where you manage account settings specific to you, including your name, avatar, and notification settings. Under Notifications, you have the option to enable or disable email notifications for when:

- You are mentioned in a note
- A candidate is hired
- A candidate is moved to a new interview stage
- Someone replies to a note that you wrote
- You have overdue tasks (report sent daily)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2e9d0c5713c320e99d4cd8ee1a9ef91d.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I’m setting up agencies in my Ashby account - where can I find more information on configuring agencies and agency users?

- You can read more on setting up agencies and agency users at [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1)&#x20;
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I switch an agency user to be an employee user instead, so I can assign them different permissions?

You can, yes. This is usually used when you’d like to provide an agency user with additional access to certain roles (for example, the ability to schedule candidates and view all candidates considered for the role).

- Head to Admin > Organization Setup > Agencies
- Select the agency and the agency user in question. Head to the Permissions tab on the user’s profile.
- In the Agency drop-down, click the x beside the agency name. This will remove the link between the user and the agency.
- The user will automatically be given the Limited Access access role. If you’d like to provide them with a specific access role to a job or department, set them to have Elevated Access, the determine the level of access they should have and the roles, departments or locations they should have access to. More on this at Ashby Permissions.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/a3570f37f8c08042f5bda2f6572839fd.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="805" height="297" darkWidth="805" darkHeight="297" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

If you’d like to switch an employee user to be an agency user, use the *Agency* dropdown on the user’s profile to select an agency and assign it to the user.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/56c6af278f69976be5ef68a68558a45c.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="805" height="638" darkWidth="805" darkHeight="638" showCaption="false" indent="2"}
:::


[title] Agencies Setup
[path] Users & Permissions/Agency Users & External Recruiters/

This guide outlines how to set up agencies in your instance. If you've been added as an agency user, check out [Agencies Users](docId\:sMNQ8t0NuSBVnjbYJy0rS) for information on navigating Ashby.

# Agencies setup overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/74b5776f88fe4b9cb2ea362f46ad5bc1?sid=a459c348-012b-4f01-8df9-3d6b767e8717"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions:**

- Only Organization Admins can configure an agency and add agency users.
:::

# Create an agency

To create an agency:

1. Navigate to [Admin > Organization Setup > Agencies](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/agencies/list).
2. Click `Create Agency`.
3. Enter the agency name.
4. Click `Submit`.

![The Create Agency button to add a new agency.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7308f33206b3247f9de07c69c3bd0f61.png)

Once created, click the newly created agency and specify an agency source.

![The Create New Source button to add a new source for your agency.](https://cdn.zappy.app/11bb8aaad721467b32d0392e7aa30e45.png)

If a corresponding source for the agency doesn't already exist, click `Create New Source` to add one. This source is automatically applied to all candidates added through this agency.

Once you assign a source to the agency, the `Create New Source` button no longer appears. To create a new source to add to an existing agency, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Candidate Sources](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources). For more information, see [Source Types and Sources](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA).

# Grant agency permissions

With agencies, you set permissions at the agency level, and Ashby applies them to all agency users. You can grant agency users External Recruiter access to specific jobs and departments as needed. Those with External Recruiter access can only view candidates they add to a job, or candidates for which their agency is listed as the source.

![Assign the agency access role and teams.](https://cdn.zappy.app/73739a981a3099dd53a152c3171b81a6.png)

To grant an agency access to a job:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Agencies**.
2. Select the agency in question from the **Agencies** list, then scroll to the **Job Access Roles** section.
3. Click the `+` icon to provide access to the specific team or job required.
4. Choose the access role. For agency users, this is always External Recruiter.
5. Use the `Restrict to Team/Job` dropdown to select the department or job the agency user should have access to.

# Agency settings

The [Agency Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/agencies/agency-settings) page lets you give users or external recruiters added to the agency additional access to areas of a candidate's profile.

Once you add agency users, use the radio buttons on the **Agency Settings** page to control whether they can see notes on a candidate, emails exchanged with the candidate, and/or completed feedback forms for the candidate. These settings apply to all agency users.

![Setting overall agency access settings.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ee810c6d96225df2fc8dc18522e174a9.png)

Agency users can still only view candidates they've added or candidates whose agency is listed as the source.

# Add users and send invites

Once you set up permissions, you can add agency users.

1. Click `Create New Agency User`.
2. Enter their name.
3. Click `Create`.

![The Create New Agency User button.](https://cdn.zappy.app/27a7ac117b7b254e0181fbd35c03789d.png)

Next, enter their email address and activate their profile.

![Activating a user.](https://cdn.zappy.app/2ed5a1d0eee351de5669739d85a0e5e6.png)

Once set up, you have the option to send an invite email by clicking `Send Invite Email`.

# Send invite email

Once an agency user is set up, you have the option to send them an invite email. You can only send invite emails to agency users, not to employees.

![An example of an invite email sent to an agency user.](https://cdn.zappy.app/bc294f15101d32f7ac4e5e542f238def.png)

# FAQ

## Agency user access

### What can I do if the agency user hasn't received their invite email?

Even if they haven't received the invite, agency users can still access Ashby via the [main sign-in page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin). You can also resend their invite emails from the **Agencies** section in Ashby.

From there, they can sign in with Google, Microsoft, or the magic link option.

### Can agencies log in without a Google Workspace or Microsoft account?

Yes! We now support user login via a magic link sent to a user's email.

### I have SSO set up on my account - how does this impact agency users?

If you're adding agencies and agency users, reach out to Support or your CSM if you have single sign-on (SSO) set up on your Ashby account.

If you add agency users in the **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees** section so they can have additional permissions, ensure they're listed in your identity provider (IdP) so they can log in to Ashby.

### I have SSO set up for my Ashby organization and want to enforce SSO-only logins, even for agency users. How do I do this?

Add the agency users to your identity provider so they can log in to Ashby in this case.

### What can agencies see on the candidate profile?

By default, agency users can view the stage the candidate is in, notes that they've written or have been tagged in, sourcing information, the hiring team, and the candidate summary.

You can adjust whether agency users can see notes, emails, or feedback in the [Agency Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/agencies/agency-settings) section. These settings apply to all agency users.

### Can agency users access the internal job board?

No, agency users can't access the internal job board from their home page. They also can't visit the internal job board URL or direct internal job posting URLs.

### Can agency users see notes on a candidate's profile?

If your [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1) are set so agencies can see notes, agency users can view notes on the candidate's profile that aren't marked private.

### Can agency users still see candidates after the candidate's been rejected or archived for the role?

Yes, agency users can still see candidates linked to their agency even if the candidate is in the Archived stage.

### Can agency users email a candidate, schedule an interview for them, or change their stage?

No, agency users can only add new candidates, view the candidate profile, and add notes to the candidate feed. They can't take actions like emailing a candidate from Ashby, scheduling an interview, or changing the candidate's stage.

### Can I switch an agency user to be an employee user instead, so I can assign them different permissions?

### Can I switch an agency user to be an employee user instead, so I can assign them different permissions?

Agency users do not have the ability to email or schedule candidates; to allow them to take those actions ro assign them other permissions, there are a few changes that would need to be made on your end and in their Ashby profile.

**If you do not have SCIM or SSO configured:**

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Agencies** and click on the agency and user in question.&#x20;
2. In their profile’s **Permissions** tab, locate the Agency drop-down menu and click the `X` beside the agency name; this will remove the link between the user and the agency. 

![The screenshot shows an agency user's profile open on the permissions tab with the X highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-B1-J4yoCGGT10dpDAcjp_agencies-ashby-2026-09-24-at-112914-am.jpg)

Once the link has been removed, they will automatically be converted to a Limited Access employee user. You can then update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the **Permissions** tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find in **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. You can read more about that assigning access at [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).&#x20;

**If you have Google Workspace and SSO configured**

1. Add the agency user as a domain user within your Google Workspace account settings; doing so will automatically provision a new separate account for them in Ashby via the Google Workspace integration. They will be provisioned as a Limited Access user.&#x20;
2. Once they’ve been added, you can update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the Permissions tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees.**

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. 

The user will then log into Ashby using the Sign in with SSO option instead of the Magic Link option.

**If you have Microsoft 365 and SSO configured**

1. Add the agency user as a user within your Microsoft 365 account settings; doing so will automatically provision a new, separate account for them in Ashby. They’ll be provisioned as a Limited Access user.
2. Once they’ve been added, you can update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the Permissions tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees.**

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. 

The user will then log into Ashby using the Sign in with SSO option instead of the Magic Link option.

**If you have SSO and SCIM configured**

1. First, you will need to create a user record in your IdP directory. You will need to create a new email address for them that utilizes your domain, so that it can be verified via SSO during the login process.
2. Once they have been added to your directory, a new, separate account will automatically be provisioned for them in Ashby on the next directory sync. They will be added as a Limited Access user. Once they’ve been added, you can update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the Permissions tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees.**

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. 

The user will then log into Ashby using the Sign in with SSO option instead of the Magic Link option.

## Agency user management

### How do I archive an agency?

To archive an agency:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Agencies](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/agencies/list).
2. Click the agency in question.
3. Scroll to the bottom of the page to find the option to archive the agency.

You can restore an archived agency at any time.


[title] Getting Started for Sourcers
[path] Getting Started: User Guides/

Welcome to Ashby! We couldn't be more excited to help you get started. This guide will cover the most common ways sourcers use Ashby.

## Log In to Ashby

To sign in, head to [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/). Ashby uses Google sign-in, Microsoft 365 sign-in and magic links. If your company has SSO set up with Ashby, please use this option to log in. More on signing in can be found at [Signing in to Ashby](docId\:vH7B6OAp3CIRSFeHtCYoA).

## Configure your personal settings

A key first step is configuring your personal settings in Ashby. In [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info), you can do the following:

- Set your personal info, including your job title, user avatar, timezone and social links
- Set your notification settings - determine the activities you should be notified about and where you'd like to be notified
- Set up personal email templates
- Set up OAuth if needed (please confirm with your admin if this needs to be completed as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 setup)

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full walkthrough, please check out [Updating Personal Settings](docId\:Bb_jro6kp6bWBkWTHtAZT)&#x20;
:::

## Navigate Ashby

### Home Page

If you will only be interviewing candidates in the pipeline and won't have any other interaction with candidates, then you'll likely have `Limited Access` in Ashby.&#x20;

To get started, log in to Ashby at [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/) using one of the login options. You should already have an account set up. Once logged in, you'll land on your home page, where you'll be able to access interview briefings and tasks. For a full breakdown of the home page, please check out [Home Page](docId\:mzsz9lMAG1AX7n1BoZCzj)&#x20;

**Add and track referrals**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To submit :

- Head to the Referrals section of the [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page
- Click `+ Referral`
  - Creating a direct referral? Click `Add Direct Referral `then complete the referral form with the candidate details.
  - Creating a referral link? Click `Create Referral Link `and give your referral link a title. You can then opt to link to a specific job posting using the `Link to specific job posting?` checkbox and selecting a job posting from the dropdown
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/26278f4b47c38aac31f08c40ab4ba5c3.png)


:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Our full guide on referrals can be found at [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr)
:::

### Candidate Profile

Depending on the permissions you are given, you may have access to view candidate profiles and take action on job considerations. For further information on navigating a candidate profile, check out [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).

### Candidate Pipeline

The Pipeline Overview provides you a view of candidates across all positions you have access to and allows you to quickly jump between them.&#x20;

For more on the pipeline view, check out [Candidate Pipeline](docId\:c7vCHI2hsjQZ0AynA8c-b).

## Jobs - dashboard view

The Job Dashboard at Jobs > [Dashboard](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/pipelines)  is a high-level overview of the active jobs you follow, have a role on, and have access to. You can also access the `Job Board` from this page. We recommend bookmarking this page to quickly see all of your active jobs in one place.

![Job dashboard view with button linking out to the job board](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wj37MTayKjo_1XZbYkRcB_job-dashboard-view.jpg)

## Common Ashby Areas for Sourcers

:::hint{type="info"}
This section will walk you through the key activities you'll complete as a Sourcer including creating and sending outbound email sequences, sourcing candidates from LinkedIn with the [Chrome Extension](docId\:Je_BiJ1sj2ro6WT9vtTfP), and bulk importing leads via email or CSV file. We also support integrating with other sourcing platforms; find the full list in the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) (you will need Organization Admin access to view the integrations marketplace).
:::

### Create and send outbound sequences

**You can create a send outbound email with features like:**

- **Sending emails on behalf of other users** - you can request access to other team members’ email addresses, and send sequences as them for a more personal touch.
- **Linking sequences to jobs** - you can link sequences to jobs to enable enrolling leads in both in one step.
- **Auto-advancing and archiving** - leads will advance through lead stages based on your email communication. If they never follow up you can use job-sequence linking to automatically archive their consideration.
- **Custom tokens** - we support default and custom tokens including a default personalization token that can be embedded in the sequence. Capture a few notes while reviewing a person’s profile, then send them an email that’s already unique to them!

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring and sending sequences, check out [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4) and [Sequences: InMail and Connection Request Stages](docId\:Qbf62_UsXyctMQzHE07HA).
:::

### Use the Ashby Chrome Extension

**You can quickly source candidates from LinkedIn with options to:**

- **Create lead profiles with one click** - visit a person’s profile, open the extension and click Add to Ashby to create a profile that captures email communication, applications, and more in one place.
- **Add leads to jobs,&#x20;**&#xNAN;**, and&#x20;** - you can add a person to a job or to a relevant talent pool if you’d like to get in touch with them later.
- **Mention team members in notes to prompt them to review** - you can create notes and tasks for team members by @mentioning them.
- **Add tags, schedule follow-ups, and more!**

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on the Ashby Chrome extension, check out [Chrome Extension](docId\:Je_BiJ1sj2ro6WT9vtTfP).
:::

### Create talent pools with projects

**Keep track of leads in&#x20;**&#xNAN;**, and take the following bulk actions:**

- **Emails and&#x20;** - keep leads warm by messaging them using one-off emails or enrolling them in sequences.
- **Enroll in jobs** - When you’re ready, add them to jobs.

:::hint{type="info"}
Check out [Projects](docId\:NeOuKpzGi4kDAtdSyMhez) for a more detailed overview on project setup
:::

### Bulk import lists of candidates (required Organization Admin access)

Import many candidates at once with the following options:

- **Email import** - attach up to 10 resumes at a time to an email and send it to a job-specific address to create candidate profiles.
- **CSV import** - upload any number of candidates in a CSV file.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on importing data, check out [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ)&#x20;
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### My profile picture has synced over from Google Workspace but it’s very pixelated. Why?

Images synced over from Google Workspace do not have a high enough resolution. As such, we’d recommend users upload their avatar within [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info) to fix this.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3bd9ae2c6b84fa648351e2310d15c63c.png)
:::


[title] Manage Access Roles
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

You can view permission levels for each access role, customize existing access roles, and create your own custom roles within Ashby. Access roles are primarily used to provide job, location, or department-specific access to users with elevated access, or to limit access for organization admins.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** You must have Organization Admin access to edit or create new access roles.
:::

Access roles can be viewed on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

You can create new custom access roles and amend existing access roles on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌\*         | ✅\*         | ✅\*  | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
\*Customers on the Foundations plan can only edit the External Recruiter access role. Legacy Plus and Plus customers can modify existing roles and create up to three custom access roles. Enterprise customers can modify and create as many custom access roles as needed.
:::

# Access roles

To view your active access roles and create new ones, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Access Roles](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/permissions/access-roles).

All existing access roles and their permissions are listed in a grid. You can also use this as a reference when assigning access roles to users with elevated access.

![The access role grid with an additional access role added - all permissions are listed here for easy reference.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gaQcQwFVZT76nuS6AtMbW_access-roles-ashby-2026-07-14-at-43139-pmgrid.jpg)

# Assigning multiple access roles

You can assign multiple access roles when a user needs different permissions in different parts of your organization. For example, you can give someone Analyst access across the organization for reporting, then give them Hiring Manager access for a specific team where they need to review applications, schedule interviews, or edit candidates.

A team access role and a job-specific role can also work together when the user has a broad responsibility across a team and an additional responsibility for one job. For example, a recruiter can receive Hiring Team Member access for every job on the Marketing team through a team access role, then receive Hiring Manager access for one Marketing job they own. The team role provides baseline access across the team, while the job-specific role supports the additional work on that one job.

:::hint{type="info"}
Use a job-specific role when a user needs more access or permissions for one job than their broader team or location role provides. You can also use a job-specific role to make access more restrictive for one job when the user has wider permissions through a team or location role.
:::

Multiple roles work when each role applies to a distinct job, team, or location. They can also be useful when you want to extend a user’s access for one responsibility without replacing the access they already have elsewhere.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LJhkX9-fTkojJ-sh3NDxk_employees-ashby-2026-09-22-at-82504-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="831" height="497" darkWidth="831" darkHeight="497" alt="Ashby Access Roles settings showing an Analyst role for the Customer Support team across all locations, a Hiring Manager role for the Customer Support Specialist job, and a TA Specialist role for the Product Documentation Specialist job." showCaption="false"}

Before assigning another role, check whether both roles apply to the same job or have overlapping job-specific scopes. Assigning two different job-specific roles to the same job can trigger this error:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2AkdHD75rjw6Yi1jNiV_i_vp-approver-role-offer-fields-plain-2026-09-21-at-84222-am.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="493" height="83" darkWidth="493" darkHeight="83" alt="Error message stating, “This user already has a role assigned to them with conflicting policies.”" showCaption="false"}

Ashby needs one effective permission for each job. When two job-specific roles conflict, Ashby cannot combine them into a single policy.

:::hint{type="info"}
Department and location access roles generally do not trigger this specific error when they overlap with a job-specific role. Ashby uses the access scope to determine which permissions apply. For overlapping team and location scopes, the more restrictive role generally applies.
:::

## Resolving conflicting policies

If you see the conflicting policies error, use one of these approaches:

1. Create one custom access role that contains all of the permissions the user needs, then assign that role to the user.
2. If the permission should apply across a department or location, assign a department or location access role with the needed permission instead of adding another job-specific role.

# Creating a new access role

To create a new access role:

1. Click `+ Add Access Role`.
2. Give your role a title, then use the checkboxes to determine the access that the role should have. You can pick from the following options:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RaYghmjCxm2zGEF96ajiw_create-access-role-stripes.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="880" height="1612" darkWidth="880" darkHeight="1612" alt="The permission stripes when creating an access role" showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can See Notes:** Can view notes added to a candidate profile (with the exception of private notes).
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can Add Notes:** Can add notes to the candidate profile (to enable this option, the Can See Notes option must be enabled). This has been separated out from Can Add/Edit Candidates for additional flexibility.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Can See Candidate Profiles:** Can view candidate profiles.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can Add/Edit Candidates:** Can add new candidates in Ashby and edit existing candidate profiles (to enable this option, the Can See Candidate Profiles option must be enabled).
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can See Private Fields:** Private notes/fields permissions allow access to private fields, data exports, candidate experience survey submissions and results, offers, and files marked as private. To enable this option, the Can See Candidate Profiles option must be enabled.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can See Email Communication:** Can view emails exchanged with the candidate that have synced back to Ashby.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Can See Feedback Forms:** Can view feedback forms that have been added or completed on the candidate profile.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can Submit Feedback on Behalf of Others:** Can complete feedback forms on behalf of other users (to enable this option, the Can See Feedback Forms option must be enabled).
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Can Email/Schedule Candidate:** Can email or schedule interviews for candidates (to enable this option, the Can See Candidate Profiles option must be enabled).
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can Add/Edit Jobs:** Can create or edit jobs.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can See Hired Candidates:** Can view candidates in the Hired stage of the job's pipeline.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can Add/Edit Hired Candidates:** Can add or amend candidates in the Hired stage of the job's pipeline (to enable this option, the Can See Hired Candidates option must be enabled).
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can Make One-Off Edits to Approval Process:** Can adjust an approval process on a one-off basis (more on this in [Offer Approvals](docId\:oFX_SMDkYnZv-l6UuJVgH)).
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="2"}
**Can See Meeting Recordings:** Can view AI Notetaker recordings of interviews for the job.
:::

3. Click `Create`. When assigning permissions and adding access roles to users, your new access role will now show in the **Access Role** dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DuOobT1FawnFEEdi0nuIh_access-roles.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1314" height="370" darkWidth="1314" darkHeight="370" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

# Editing and archiving an access role

To amend an existing access role, click on it within the **Active Access Roles** table.

![A custom Recruiting Coordinator access role highlighted on the access role table.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Iorziu20DeW8feOv2tutK_access-roles-ashby-2026-07-15-at-102058-am.jpg)

You can then use the checkboxes beside each permission to amend that role's access. Click `Update` to confirm your changes.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GWiNzTA2C2Hpl-j7Gdk-2_editing-the-permissions-of-an-access-role.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1140" height="1626" darkWidth="1140" darkHeight="1626" showCaption="false"}

You can click on the **History** tab to view any previous changes made to the access role. The history lists the date and time the change was made, who made the change, and the changes that were made.

To archive an active access role, click the `Archive` option in the top-right corner of the Update Access Role pop-up.

:::hint{type="info"}
Archiving an access role does not impact any users who already have this access role applied to them within their permissions. It only stops the access role from being added to users in the future.
:::

# Restoring an access role

If you've archived an access role by mistake, use the `Active` dropdown filter to view all access roles or only archived access roles. Then click on the access role you'd like to restore.

![The Active drop-down for access roles.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/76I8EFSQfcf1gXSgFOIA9_access-roles-ashby-2026-07-15-at-102400-am.jpg)

On the **Update Access Role** pop-up for the access role, click the `Restore` button in the top-right corner. Once restored, this access role is available when providing access to elevated access users.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xXbZH1-2JIbTD83SgI2IQ_access-roles-ashby-2026-07-15-at-102310-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1154" height="1628" darkWidth="1154" darkHeight="1628" alt="Restoring a custom access role." showCaption="false"}

# FAQ

### Can I add Quality of Hire permissions to custom access roles?

Quality of Hire permissions are added separately. You can read more about this access role in [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

### Can I make edits to the built-in access roles?

Yes. Refer to the **Active Access Roles** table when assigning these permissions in the future, as the defaults listed in [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk) no longer apply if adjustments are made.

### I already have more custom access roles than I'm supposed to have on my plan — will some of my roles be deleted?

No. If you already have existing custom access roles in your account, you retain those access roles, even if they are above your plan's thresholds.

### Why can't I assign another job-specific access role?

Two job-specific roles assigned to the same job, or to overlapping job-specific scopes, can produce a conflicting policies error. Ashby needs one effective permission policy for that job and cannot combine conflicting job-specific roles. Department and location access roles generally do not trigger this specific error because Ashby uses their access scope to determine which permissions apply.

[title] SSO and SCIM
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

Ashby supports Single Sign-On (SSO) via Security Assertion Markup Language (SAML) and OpenID Connect (OIDC) connections, along with Directory System for Cross-domain Identity Management (SCIM) through WorkOS.

SSO can be configured on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

SCIM can be configured for accounts on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# SSO and SCIM overview

SSO and SCIM are essential tools for modern businesses. Ashby integrates with WorkOS to provide seamless SSO and SCIM capabilities, ensuring secure access and efficient user management for your organization.

# Getting started

## How do I set up SSO/SCIM for my organization?

1. Reach out to our support team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) with the following details:
   - The email address where you'd like any error messages or notifications directed (IT service account recommended)
   - Whether you'd like to set up SSO, or both SSO and SCIM
2. Support will follow up, providing you with a setup link. Once you receive the link, follow the on-screen instructions to integrate your identity provider with Ashby via WorkOS. The steps are tailored to your identity provider.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Okta provisioning settings**

When configuring the Ashby app's provisioning settings in Okta, set the `Application username format` to `Email`, not `Custom`. This setting ensures Okta correctly matches existing Ashby accounts if you unassign and later reassign a user. If you leave this setting as a custom expression, such as one that references the Okta internal user ID, reassigning a previously removed user can fail with a `user already exists` error because Okta cannot find the existing account to reactivate.
:::

3. Test the integration to ensure everything is working correctly. Confirm with support once you've completed the setup process.

:::hint{type="info"}
For SSO, you can connect multiple domains, with different identity providers if needed. You can also set up multiple WorkOS connections for SCIM and users from the connected systems will flow into Ashby.
:::

## What attributes are pulled via SCIM?

Once you've configured SCIM on your company's account, you can determine the attributes that are synced over by navigating to **Admin > Integrations > SCIM**.

In the **Fields to Sync** section, use the toggles to confirm the information that syncs from WorkOS.

![Screenshot of the Fields to Sync section in Ashby's SCIM integration settings](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AFZRULsD0DpHcolyNBwpY_scim-fields-to-sync.jpg)

The following fields can be synced:

- Job Title
- Name Updates
- Cost Center
- Department
- Division
- Groups
- Manager

Job Title, Name, and Manager are immediately useful for storing up-to-date information on all your employees without having to manually maintain it in Ashby.

Cost Center, Department, and Division can be useful for further reporting on or grouping employees. These fields are pulled over as Employee custom fields in Ashby and information synced to these fields appears in the **Employment Info** section of the employee's profile in **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.

![Screenshot of synced employee fields displayed on the employee profile page in Ashby](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HYWv_8e8KhqnD6eGpKgHD_synced-employee-fields-on-the-employee-profile.jpg)

# Troubleshooting

## "User already exists" error when reassigning a user in Okta

If you unassign a user from the Ashby app in Okta and later reassign them, you may see a `user already exists` error, and the user remains deactivated in Ashby. This happens when Okta's `Application username format` for the Ashby app does not match the identifier used to provision users. Okta cannot find the existing deactivated record, so it attempts to create a new one instead of reactivating it.

To fix this, open your Okta admin console, open the Ashby app's provisioning settings, and confirm that `Application username format` is set to `Email`. Once the identifiers align, unassigning and reassigning a user correctly reactivates their existing Ashby account. If you already see this error and have deactivated users stuck in a conflict, contact [Ashby Support](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for help clearing the affected records.

# Pricing

## How much does the SSO/SCIM service cost?

- SSO is included for Plus and Enterprise plans.
- For those on the Foundations plan, SSO is a paid add-on. It costs $100 per month, billed monthly or annually, depending on your plan.

# FAQs

### What is SSO?

SSO (Single Sign-On) allows users to access multiple applications with a single set of credentials. This means you don't have to remember multiple passwords for different services.

### What is SCIM?

SCIM (System for Cross-domain Identity Management) is a standard that automates the exchange of user identity information between identity domains or IT systems.

### Which identity providers do you support?

Through our integration with WorkOS, we support a wide range of identity providers, including but not limited to Google Workspace, Microsoft Azure AD, and Okta. See [WorkOS integrations](https://workos.com/docs/integrations) for a full list of identity providers.

### Do you support Just in Time (JIT) provisioning?

Ashby does not support just-in-time (JIT) provisioning through SSO. Submit a feature request to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) if you're interested in this option.

Users signing in through SSO must already have an Ashby account. To automate user provisioning, please configure Directory Sync (SCIM).

If Directory Sync isn't configured, but Google or Microsoft sign-in is enabled, then Limited Access user accounts will be created when a user signs in for the first time.

### I have users in Ashby that are not in my directory. If I set up SCIM, will those users still be active when the Directory Sync is enabled?

No, any users that are in Ashby but not in your directory are deactivated in Ashby once the sync is enabled. Before Directory Sync is enabled, confirm that the list of users in your directory is the full list of users that need to access Ashby.

### Do you support log streams or domain verification?

We do not support log streams or domain verification.

### How do I get the setup link for SSO/SCIM integration?

Contact your Customer Success Manager or our support team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

### Is the SSO/SCIM integration secure?

Absolutely! Our integration with WorkOS ensures that all data is encrypted and securely transmitted. We adhere to industry best practices to ensure the safety and privacy of your data. Learn more about [Ashby's security practices](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/security).

### I'm facing issues with the SSO/SCIM setup. What should I do?

If you encounter any issues during the setup or have questions about the integration, reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com). We're here to help!

### Can I use both SSO and SCIM together?

Yes, you can use both SSO and SCIM together. While SSO streamlines the login process, SCIM ensures efficient user management across platforms.

### Can permissions be mapped with SCIM?

At this time, we only support provisioning users, not mapping permissions or access roles via SCIM. Users are added, via Directory Sync, as Limited Access users. You can change their permission level in their employee profile once the user account has been created within Ashby via the sync. For more on permission levels, see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

### Once configured, how often do SCIM syncs happen?

SCIM syncs happen hourly. We also respond to webhooks.

### Why isn't the manager field populating when I sync via Okta?

Ashby resolves managers by email address, so the manager attribute on your Okta user profile must contain the manager's email and not an Okta ID or display name. To check, open the profile of an affected user in Okta and confirm what the manager field is set to. If it shows an ID or a name, you'll need to update your Okta profile or attribute mapping so the manager field passes through a valid email address. Once that's in place, Ashby will resolve and populate the manager on the next sync.

[title] Ashby Admin Onboarding
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/


[title] Navigating Ashby
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides walk through key areas of Ashby, including signing in, the home page and candidate pipelines.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
💻 [Signing in to Ashby](docId\:vH7B6OAp3CIRSFeHtCYoA)&#x20;

👤 [Updating Personal Settings](docId\:Bb_jro6kp6bWBkWTHtAZT)&#x20;

🔔 [Notifications & Notification Settings](docId\:A85ZAqFvmgeJNBLAPkETL)&#x20;

👍 [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr)&#x20;

👥 [Candidate Pipeline](docId\:c7vCHI2hsjQZ0AynA8c-b)&#x20;

🗑️ [Clearing Cache & Local Storage](docId\:CevJLcD4pS3NeKQqEBVFB)&#x20;
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for more information? Check out the [Ashby Platform Overview](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-platform-overview) course in Ashby Academy!
:::


[title] Job Templates
[path] Jobs & Openings/

In Ashby, you can create job templates to save you time when configuring and opening similar jobs. This guide covers both creating templates from scratch and generating templates from existing roles.

## Creating a Job Template from scratch

To create a new job template, head to Jobs > Jobs > [Job Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/templates) and click `Create Job Template`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/573d81680e8a3f7b5f320d9aa234e586.png)

Add in the template’s title, team and location. Only a title is required for a job template - you can add the location and department to each job generated from this template if you’d prefer to keep this blank for now.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ebeb0210328e7e919e64d9163745460c.png" size="70" width="638" height="353" darkWidth="638" darkHeight="353" position="center" showCaption="false"}

From here, your template will be generated. You can then configure the job template’s settings, interview plan and any postings.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/95d7ed742583af886c6fb124b14945d2.png)

**1) Settings:** Here you can amend the title, team, location, employment type, any custom fields, compensation settings and the hiring team for this template.

**2) Interview Plan:** Confirm the stages of your pipeline and add in activities to configure interviews, take-home activities, automated emails, etc in advance. You can read more on each activities via the guides below:

[Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)

[Take-home Activities](docId\:hdevBy04F4IDGuOGM2kWH)

[Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB)

**3) Job Postings:** Create a draft posting, add in a job description and configure job posting settings for your template here.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Be sure to activate your job template once you’re ready to start using it. You can activate your template by clicking the `Inactive` drop-down and selecting `Activate`.

If you’d like to deactivate or archive a job template, you can click the `Active `drop-down and opt to deactivate it.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f2d88e87e7fe31c5327af2f2d277d9d8.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bc819f82cdacbdc669e3a772e11a8e12.png)


:::
::::



## Creating a Job Template from an existing job

If you already have a job that you’d like to create a template from, click into the job from Jobs > Jobs and then click `More`. Select `Create Template` from the drop-down. You’ll be asked to title your template before it’s created for you.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2d24413afdb6c6b86dd4967b32fd73a2.png)

Remember to activate your job template before you try to use it for a new role! You can make adjustments to the template at any time.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f2d88e87e7fe31c5327af2f2d277d9d8.png" size="60" width="421" height="170" darkWidth="421" darkHeight="170" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Creating a job from a template

To create a new job, head to Jobs > Jobs and click `Create Job`. Use the `From Template` drop-down to select the template you’d like to generate a job from.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3a5964ded7c9f8703b9524b5b26d249f.png" size="84" width="600" height="242" darkWidth="600" darkHeight="242" position="center" showCaption="false"}

If you didn’t specify a location and department on your template, this will need to be added to the job before it can be created.

:::hint{type="warning"}
You can make amendments to the job that has been generated from a template. Adjustments make to these jobs will not impact the template they’ve been generated from.
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why is direct booking unavailable on my job template?

This message will disappear on jobs generated from this template. It shows as unavailable on the template because the template itself is not an active job.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I delete job templates?

It’s not possible to delete job templates in-app. Please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for assistance with this.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I limit Elevated Access users with access to create jobs to only use job templates?

You can. To enable this option navigate to Admin > Jobs & Applications > [Job Management](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/job-management) and switch on the `Elevated Access Users Must Create Jobs From Job Templates` option.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I make a job template confidential?

You can! Click `More` when viewing your template and select `Make Confidential`. Only the creator of the job template can adjust the confidential status.
:::


[title] Referrals and Referral Links
[path] Navigating Ashby/

Any user or employee can add a referral or create a referral link in Ashby from their home page, regardless of their permissions. This article explains how to add direct referrals, create and track referral links, configure your referral form and settings, and report on referral data. Share this guide with your users to give them more information on adding referrals via Ashby.

# Permissions and access

Users without a paid seat can add referrals and create referral links. Users do need to have an Ashby account to add referrals.

Custom referral filters are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Direct referrals vs. referral links

With a direct referral, you add one candidate's details at a time and submit them to be reviewed for a role.

With a referral link, you post the job board or a specific job posting to your network (for example, on LinkedIn), and Ashby credits anyone who applies via that link to you.

# Adding a direct referral

Watching this video is optional — the written steps below cover the same content.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/591cab69862c4acb9bdc64d1da06284a"}

You can refer a candidate directly for a role in the Referrals section of the [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page.

![The Referrals section of the Home page.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YyCrTRkMC0F1ubT0fmEn2_home-ashby-2026-08-12-at-110826-am.jpg)

1. Navigate to the **Home** page and find the **Referrals** section.
2. Click `+ Referral`.
3. Select `+ Add Direct Referral`.

When adding a direct referral, you need to add the candidate's name and email address and the specific role they are being referred for.

![The form to refer a candidate directly. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/2f6b5c4fb912b68bfb6913b344bc121c.png)

You can also upload a resume and add their phone number, a link to their website, and any notes. An admin can customize the referral form, so you may see some additional or different options here from the form pictured.

Ashby automatically adds a referred candidate to the **Application Review** stage in the candidate pipeline for the specified role.

:::hint{type="info"}
When submitting a direct referral, the **Job** field shows job posting titles when available.

If the job posting title isn't available (for example, if the job posting is unlisted or unpublished), the **Job** field shows the job title.
:::

# Adding a referral from the top menu

You can also add a referral directly to a role by hovering over the `+ Add` button from the top menu and selecting **Referral**.

![Adding a referral using Add on the navigation bar.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aTPeM4j-0EiVwqTbHUODB_adding-a-referral-using-the-add-button.png)

Once you click **Referral**, you need to add the candidate's name and email address and the specific role they are being referred for, just like in the process above.

# Creating a referral link

Referral links allow you to post a link to a specific job posting (or to the job board in general), and Ashby automatically credits candidates who apply via that link to you. A good use case for referral links is sharing a job to a social media platform or another wider forum.

Watching this video is optional — the written steps below cover the same content.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/635e957bf9ce4081aa396878db0d3ff6"}

You can create a referral link in the same **Referrals** section at the bottom of the [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page.

![Referrals section at the bottom of the Home page.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bx1ZEHGvAirYllDicXaXD_home-ashby-2026-08-12-at-110826-am.jpg)

1. Navigate to the **Home** page and find the **Referrals** section.
2. Click `+ Referral`.
3. Select `+ Create Referral Link`.

When creating a referral link, you can opt to either have the link direct to a specific posting or to all open job postings listed on your job board.

To create a link for a certain posting, check the **Link to specific job posting** checkbox, then select the posting from the drop-down menu that follows. To have the link direct to your job board with open postings, leave this box unchecked when creating the link.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Your job posting must be published and listed on your external job board before you can link to it with a referral link.
:::

![Creating a referral link.](https://cdn.zappy.app/dcb181560d306a8751e388e41f8edb33.png)

# Tracking referrals

You can view all of your personal referrals and their application status by clicking [All Referrals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/referrals/direct/active). From there, you can view Active referrals (those still in the pipeline), Archived referrals (those who have been archived or rejected), and Hired referrals. Use the radio buttons to view each list of referrals accordingly.

:::hint{type="info"}
All referrals will only show the referrals you have submitted. To see how to pull a list of all active referrals submitted by all users, check out the [reporting options below](#).
:::

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eRTm5B6TsAeFQfeaCymQV_all-referrals.jpg)

- **Direct Referrals:** Referrals that the user has added directly to Ashby from their home page.
- **Referrals from Referral Links:** Referrals that applied via the user's referral link.
- **Referral Links:** A list of all current referral links with the option to copy them to clipboard.
- **Active:** A toggle to view all active referrals (referrals currently in the interview pipeline).
- **Archived:** A toggle to view all archived or rejected referrals.
- **Hired:** A toggle to view all hired referrals.
- **Candidate:** The candidate's name.
- **Referred For:** The role they were referred for.
- **Submitted At:** When the referral was added.
- **Status:** The current stage the candidate is at in the pipeline.
- **Add Referral:** The option to add another referral.

# Tracking and amending referral links

You can head to the [Referral Links](https://app.ashbyhq.com/referrals/links) section in **All Referrals** to view and amend your referral links.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wdJU3__X3_OwWCt3w3Rre_referral-links.jpg)

- **Title:** The name of your referral link.
- **Job Posting:** The job posting your referral link leads to (if applicable).
- **Referrals:** Number of referrals who applied via this referral link.
- **Referral Link:** The referral link itself.

# Referral form and settings

You can edit your referral form and set referral settings in **Admin > Sourcing >&#x20;**[Referrals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/referral-forms).

## Referral settings

![The referral settings.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b8aa27996d2fd77896678e78cec2c3ae.png)

Referral settings allow you to set limits on allowing referrals. You can set the following rules:

- **Allow all referrals:** Ashby adds the referral to a job consideration in a lead or active stage that already exists for the candidate (if applicable). Ashby creates a new job consideration if there isn't an existing one to match the referral to.
- **The candidate is being considered for the referred job:** If the candidate has an existing job consideration in any stage of the role they're being referred for, Ashby prevents the referral.
- **The candidate already exists in Ashby:** Ashby prevents referral submissions for existing candidates, even if no one has considered them for the role.

If a user tries to submit a referral that your rules disallow, they receive a message letting them know that Ashby hasn't allowed the referral, with details of the settings in place.

![The error shown when a user tries to add a candidate already in Ashby.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f65734d064cd3eadcfd94d3fbdad279c.png)

Use the `Allow referral links?` option to determine whether users can create referral links.

The `Restrict referral status?` option determines whether all users referring candidates can view their current interview stage. If enabled, only users with the appropriate permissions to view the candidate profile can view their current interview stage.

![The Allow referral links toggle.](https://cdn.zappy.app/a5a49c3948a61863bc9b7f963c55c9d9.png)

![Restricting referral statuses so only specific information is visible.](https://cdn.zappy.app/628ea6c0fcfe948e4b03e948c07991cd.png)

## Adding filters to specify the roles that can accept referrals

You can specify criteria to determine the roles that users can submit referrals or generate referral links for.

1. Switch on the `Allow referrals only for specific jobs?` option.
2. Click `Add Field to Match`.
3. Select the determining fields and configure your criteria.

Any jobs matching this criteria can accept referrals or can be used to generate referral links.

![Switching on referrals for specific jobs.](https://cdn.zappy.app/d3e80f3bb1079a105a56d6b22dba6b17.png)

For example, in the pictured case, users can only submit referrals for jobs in the engineering department.

![Setting referrals to only be available for specific jobs and setting the criteria.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e9ddbc753de444485060778c55a9bdad.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby applies your criteria on top of your existing referral settings, and added criteria doesn't impact existing referrals or existing referral links.
:::

## Referral confirmation email

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby only sends referral confirmation emails to candidates submitted via the **Direct Referral** option. Those who apply via a referral link receive an inbound application confirmation instead (if enabled). Ashby also doesn't send this to existing candidates if a user adds the referrer manually via the **Credited To** field on the candidate profile.
:::

If you'd like referred candidates to receive a confirmation email at the point of submission:

- Select your email template using the **Referral Confirmation** dropdown. This sets the **Referral Confirmation** icon to **Enabled**.
- Use `Preview Email` to preview the email sent to the referral, or click `Edit Email` to be taken to the email template to make further edits.

![Adding a referral confirmation email.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KOv7pqOd3AHYHMzNUtw14_referral-confirmation-settings.jpg)

## Editing your referral form

Click on your **Default Referral** form to make any amendments, such as adding or removing fields or adjusting the title of the form.&#x20;

![Click on the Default Referral Form within your referral settings to edit it.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fGMbrNj0JcnNGshMtf-wQ_referrals-ashby-2026-08-12-at-112417-am.jpg)

The candidate's name, job, and email address are required fields and you can't remove them. You can add the following field types to your default referral form.

- **Short Answer**
  Single line of unformatted text. Ashby auto-populates LinkedIn URL responses on the candidate's profile.
- **Long Unformatted Answer**
  Multiple lines of unformatted text.
- **Phone**
  Only domestic or international phone numbers.
- **Email**
  Only valid email addresses.
- **Multiple Choice**
  Select a single option.
- **Checkboxes**
  Select multiple options.
- **Date**
  Only dates that a user can select via a date picker.
- **Yes/No**
  Yes, no, or, if not required, no answer.
- **Number**
  Only allows whole numbers (e.g., 1) or decimals (e.g., 1.5).
- **Resume\***
  Upload a single file and set it to the candidate's resume field. You can only add this once to a form.
- **Candidate's location**
  Set the candidate's location. You can only add this once to a form.
- **Other location**
  Allow another location to be added to the form.
- **URL**
  A clickable link to a website.
- **File\***
  Upload a single file.

:::hint{type="warning"}
File upload questions support files up to 50 MB in standard document, image, and video file types such as:

- **Documents:** PDF, DOC, DOCX
- **Images:** JPG, JPEG, PNG
- **Videos:** Common video formats such as MP4

Ashby doesn't support executable file types (such as .exe) and certain text-based formats (such as .md). If a candidate needs to submit content in an unsupported format, we recommend converting the file to a supported document type, such as PDF, before uploading.
:::

- **Candidate's Education History**
  See the candidate's education history. You can only add this once to the form.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
When adding the candidate's education history field to your form, you can specify the information asked for. You can opt to include or exclude the school, degree, field of study, start date, and end date fields as needed. Check the `Allow multiple entries` checkbox to allow those completing the form to add multiple qualifications. You can also set a minimum and maximum number of entries using the **Min** and **Max** fields.

![The education history section of the form where you can specify the details asked for. ](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f2NAhMfa7xJdZfczD0K___education-history-field-on-a-form.jpg)

Information added to this field always completes the **Education** section of the candidate's profile.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
It's not possible to create additional referral forms. If you'd like to add additional questions, edit the default referral form.
:::

# Reporting on referrals

Below are some examples of reports you can run to view key referral data.

## Referrals leaderboard

To track referrals in intervals, by the user who referred them, navigate to **Reports > Build Report** and select **Count Over Time**.

- **Subject:** Job Considerations
- **Time Field and Interval:** Job Consideration's Started At, to show \[insert your chosen time range here] per \[set your interval here].
- **Filter:** Job Consideration's Source Type is Referral.
- **Grouped By:** Job Consideration's Credited To.

![An example of a referrals leaderboard report.](https://cdn.zappy.app/709eab362fe58f982331323d5a65f9b0.png)

## Viewing all currently active referrals

To see a list of currently active referrals from all users, navigate to **Reports > Build Report** and select **Custom List**.

- **Subject:** Job Considerations
- **Filter:** Job Consideration's Source Type is Referral, Job Consideration's Outcome equals Active.
- **Fields to Show:** Job Consideration's Candidate, Job Consideration's Job, Job Consideration's Credited To, plus any additional fields you'd like to include.

![An example of a report showing all active referrals.](https://cdn.zappy.app/60673b85344af25abd199652a94f2a59.png)

# FAQs

### A candidate I've referred has disappeared from my referrals list — where are they?

Head into [All Referrals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/referrals/direct/active) and be sure to check the **Archived** and **Hired** lists. If a user rejects or hires the candidate, they no longer show in the **Active** list.

### How do I delete a referral link?

To delete or edit the title of a referral link, head to [Your Referral Links](https://app.ashbyhq.com/referrals/links), click on the title of the link in question, and then click the red trash can icon to delete it.

![Deleting a referral link using the trash can icon](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Bh1Nz8DQ7QddQm8wdrNgG_deleting-a-referral-link.jpg)

**You can't restore referral links after deletion.** Links already shared outside of Ashby continue to work, but Ashby doesn't credit new applications submitted via these links to you. The deletion doesn't impact past applications.

### If a user refers a candidate after they've applied for a role, how are sources attributed?

If a candidate applies for a role, then an Ashby user refers them for the same role, the original source (in this case Inbound: Applied) remains on the candidate profile. Ashby updates the **Credited To** field so the referrer's name is included on the job consideration.

![The attribution section of a candidate's profile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/9c8f9e40a9679fac64be3ba67dd8df40.png)

If you allow users to refer candidates that have already been considered for the role, you can opt to use the `Referred By` field when reporting to ensure that your reporting still includes these referrals, despite the initial source listed in the **Source** field.

### Can a referral be edited once the candidate has been submitted?

If the referrer has access to view and edit the candidate's profile, they can make any corrections or updates as needed to candidate information. If the referrer is unable to view the candidate profile or make adjustments, they need to reach out to a user with access to make these updates for them once they submit the referral.

### Can I add in a referral on behalf of another user?

No, the referrer needs to log into their own Ashby account to refer the candidate. Ashby always credits the candidate to the user who added the referral or generated the referral link. An admin can amend the user in the `Credited To` field within the candidate profile if needed.

### Is it possible to change out the source added to referrals or referral links?

No, the source applied is fixed. If you would like to create a link that applies a custom source, check out [Tracking the source of an application](docId\:xhGtzHhc5AZ2C48VKiI8H).

### Can referrals be submitted via the integration for Slack?

No, this isn't currently possible.

### I see a referral I submitted is now in the Archive stage — can I view any feedback?

We recommend reaching out to the hiring manager or person in your organization responsible for managing the role's pipeline for further information.

### How do I set up application requests to go out to direct referrals automatically?

We don't support adding application requests directly in the referral confirmation sent to referred candidates. If you add the \{Application Request Link} substitution token to your organization's [referral confirmation template](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/referral-forms), the email fails.

Instead, for direct referrals, we recommend [configuring an application request automation](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/application-requests#configuring-application-request-automation) with conditions specifying that the job consideration is a direct referral (for example, `Job Consideration's Is Direct Referral` is `Yes`).

You can also opt to configure a catch-all for candidates who don't have an application completed by a certain stage (for example, setting a condition field to be `Job Consideration's Reached Stage Type` with the value as `Active`) to ensure any candidates in active stages are prompted to submit an application for the job consideration. If you create application request automations for referrals, we recommend disabling your referral confirmation template. You can use the application request automation instead to send the referral confirmation and application request in a single email.

![An example of an application request automation for direct referrals. ](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Q5tMOHK8mo0l7QKEzjg_E_application-request-released-slab-2026-03-09-at-115603-am.jpg)


[title] Notifications & Notification Settings
[path] Navigating Ashby/

In this guide, we cover how to configure the notifications you receive and how to set notification settings.

# How do I choose when I receive notifications and the type of notifications I receive?

You can amend your notification settings in **Personal Settings >** [Notifications](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/notifications). The events you can receive notifications for are listed here. Use the checkboxes to determine if you want to receive notifications for an event or not.

![The screenshot shows the Notifications page in Personal Settings.](https://cdn.zappy.app/c3ae4f7b2187f13f7d90d3fe06b7b396.png)

You can receive notifications via email and via Slack, if you have the integration for Slack in place. More about this integration at [Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo).

![The screenshot shows an example of an email notification](https://cdn.zappy.app/cda9e288425e7ce6c4c09f8cdc20ae1d.png)

![The screenshot shows an example of a Slack notification](https://cdn.zappy.app/ff54e2c4dc32f3a325aa7c38cf2e3ce3.png)

:::ExpandableHeading
### Open this dropdown to view a full list of the events you can receive email or Slack notifications for:

- Overdue feedback
- When feedback is submitted for a candidate
- When you are mentioned in interview feedback
- When you are mentioned in a note
- When someone replies to a note which you wrote
- When a new candidate note is created
- When a candidate submits an application
- When a candidate is moved to a new interview stage
- When a candidate is hired
- When an external recruiter submits a new application
- When a candidate referral is submitted
- When the candidate submits a candidate experience survey
- When a candidate submits a questionnaire
- When an employee survey is requested
- When an employee survey is overdue
- When a candidate is hired
- When an application is submitted by an external recruiter
- When an e-signature document is completed
- Candidate review requested
- Candidate review completed
- When a candidate I'm scheduling books a Direct Booking interview time
- When a candidate I'm scheduling cancels an interview booked via Direct Booking
- When a candidate I'm scheduling requests rescheduling an interview booked via Direct Booking
- When a candidate I'm scheduling submits calendar availability
- When a candidate I'm scheduling unsubmits calendar availability
- When an interviewer declines an invite for an interview
- When a candidate declines an invite for an interview
- When an interviewer declines an invite for an interview that I scheduled
- When a candidate declines an invite for an interview that I scheduled
- When an interviewer is automatically replaced after declining an interview invite
- When an interviewer's training role is automatically updated on an interview that I scheduled
- When an interviewer's training role is automatically updated on an interview that I scheduled
- When your interviewer training role is changed on an interview that you're participating in
- When you have a take-home assignment to review (Take-home Assignments Created in Ashby)
- When your review is no longer required for a take-home assignment (for take-home Assignments Created in Ashby)
- When you are assigned a schedule request
- When a user is added to a queue
- When a take-home assessment is ready for review
- When a take-home assessment review is no longer needed
- When a candidate finishes an assessment (for assessments created with 3rd-party Assessment Tools like HackerRank, etc.)
- When a candidate replies to an email you sent on behalf of another user
- When another employee requests access to your email address
- When another employee approves or rejects your email sharing request
- When a pending sequence task is due
- When a candidate replies to your text message
- When a candidate that the user is following replies to any text message
- When a candidate consents to receive text messages
- When a candidate does not consent to receive text messages
- When I am asked to approve or reject a candidate's offer
- When an approval request for a candidate offer is approved or rejected
- When I am asked to approve or reject a job approval
- When an approval request for a job is approved or rejected
- When I am asked to approve or reject an opening approval
- When an approval request for an opening is approved or rejected
- When a trainee needs approval to complete an Interview Pool stage I manage
- When an external workflow is completed
:::

You can also determine the digests you receive in the **Digests** tab. You can choose from the following:

- A daily summary of all interview briefings for candidates you are scheduled to meet today.
- A daily summary of all overdue tasks. You can opt to include or exclude tasks created in notes and/or overdue follow-up tasks in these digests.

![The screenshot shows the Digests tab under Notifications.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f7171cc2a7e9254c23031eb5c5038b45.png)

# Which jobs or job considerations do I receive notifications for?

You receive notifications for the jobs and job considerations you are following or you are on the hiring team for.

## What is a hiring team in Ashby?

Hiring team roles are separate from permissions and access roles in Ashby. They serve to describe the person's relationship to the job or job consideration for reporting and notification purposes. Roles include Hiring Manager, Recruiter, Recruiting Coordinator, and Sourcer.

To view the hiring team for your job, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, then go to the **Settings** section of your job.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/79Hq7okYp8UwFzsH8jBRq_irene-mcintosh-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-121436-pm.jpg)

For individual job considerations, you can view the hiring team in the **Activities & Progress** tab of the job consideration on the candidate's profile.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DqVUuPV9Ua1IjTJWXhcID_irene-mcintosh-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-121436-pm.jpg)

## How do I follow a job in Ashby?

If you'd like to follow a job, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, then click on your chosen job. Click `More` once in the job's pipeline, then `Follow this job`. You now receive notifications for this job.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Y4YO5K3QZNueltic2YBy0_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-121728-pm.jpg)

You can unfollow a job by heading back into the job and clicking `More` again. You see an `Unfollow this job` option. If you are on the hiring team for a job, then unfollowing the job does not stop notifications for this role.

## How do I follow a candidate in Ashby?

When on the candidate's profile, click `More`, then `Follow`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iTG9L217fZ0rDd-g_ZxBb_tim-tatler-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-121815-pm.jpg)

If you'd like to unfollow the candidate, click `More` again while viewing the candidate's profile, then click `Unfollow`.

# Interviewer notifications

Throughout the interview process, users listed as interviewers on an interview panel receive feedback reminders. These can be sent either via email, via Slack or both. You can control whether you receive feedback reminders and how they are received in **Personal Settings > Notifications**.

If you are unable to adjust the settings for the Overdue Feedback event, this is due to an Organization Admin setting these as required in **Admin > Organization Setup > Feedback Reminders**.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring feedback reminders as an admin, check out [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR).
:::

# Additional notifications via Alerts

**Custom Alerts can be configured on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:**

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

If you don't see a notification option for an event you'd like to be notified for, you can set up a custom list report and then create an alert for this report, so you can receive notifications on updates on this report via email or Slack.

For a full guide on creating alerts, check out [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW). A library of existing alert template options can be found within **Reports > Report Builder** under the [Alerts Templates ](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/templates/alerts)tab.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Alerts can only be configured for custom list reports.
:::

# FAQs

### Can I amend another user's notification settings?

No, users can only amend their own notifications on the **Notifications** page within **Personal Settings**.

### A candidate submitted their availability and I didn't get a notification - why?

This may be because another user is set as the meeting organizer and only meeting organizers are notified when a candidate adds their availability. More on this at [What is a Meeting Organizer?](docId\:C1tlsDkvUJ7S15oA8POQl)

### Can I amend the content or customize notifications or daily briefings?

No, currently the content of email and Slack notifications is set and can't be customized.

### Do interviewers get notified if an interview is cancelled?

Interviewers receive a notification if the interview is canceled, but are not notified if the interview is updated (if calendar invites are sent when rescheduling, they receive an updated calendar invite). If the candidate reschedules via a direct booking link, the interviewer receives an updated invite for the interview.

Those following a candidate or a job can receive these notifications by checking the `When a candidate declines an invite for an interview notification` option in **Notifications** within their **Personal Settings**.

### What types of notifications can an approval reviewer receive?

Email and Slack. They also see an approval task on their **Home** page when logging in. To amend approval notification settings, users navigate to [Notifications](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/notifications) within their **Personal Settings** and use the checkboxes to determine their notification preferences.

### Do confidential jobs trigger notifications?

If a user has access to the confidential job and follows it or is on the hiring team for the role, they receive notifications. The notifications they receive are based on their notification settings in **Personal Settings**.

### Do referrers get notifications on candidates they have referred?

If the user is a member of the hiring team or following the job, they receive notifications on their referred candidate, along with notifications on other candidates considered for the same role. If they aren't on the hiring team or following the job, they do not receive notifications.

If you'd like to send users notifications for candidates they've referred, consider building an alert for this. More on this at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW).

### Can I switch off interviewer feedback reminders completely for a specific user?

No, interview feedback reminders are sent if interview feedback is set as required on the interview (more on this in [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR)). This setting is interview-specific and can't be amended per user.

If your feedback is no longer required for an interview, you can click the three dots to the right of the task within **Tasks** on your **Home** page, then click `Resolve without Feedback` to stop overdue feedback email notifications.

You can still access the interview details and the feedback form via the `Past Interviews` link within the **Interviews** section of your **Home** page.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d52f28e5c48d31a831d36eb3e30b2f52.png)

### Can I set Slack or email notifications to go out when an offer is signed?

This currently isn't possible. Ashby sends email notifications to the user who initiated the e-Signature offer request, and to those signing the offer.

The user who initiated the e-signature offer request receives notifications when signatories view and sign their offer letter, and when all parties have signed the offer letter. Each signatory receives a notification after signing the offer letter, including their signed copy.

If you set a signing order for the e-Signature request, signers waiting for the other party to sign first receive advance notice that an e-signature request is on its way but is not yet ready for their signature.

[title] Ashby Admin Onboarding
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Ashby Admin Onboarding/

We're excited to welcome you to Ashby and help you hit your hiring goals! This article covers the key setup areas to get you started, along with more advanced options we recommend configuring early to optimize your experience. Each guide this article links to opens in a new tab, so you won't lose your place.

:::hint{type="info"}
**Are you a new Ashby Admin?**

For a guided video walkthrough of everything in this article, take the [Admin Essentials](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-admin-essentials) track in Ashby Academy. It pulls together the Academy's admin lessons into one sequenced path, so you don't have to piece together each step on your own.
:::

## Set up your company theme and explore integrations

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers the basic technical setup to get things working and takes less than 20 minutes.
:::

- Set up your integration with either [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) or [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7) so you and your team can use all of Ashby's features.
- [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](docId\:f2OtyumVmeJaAt1DYRJYW)
- Set up the [Zoom](docId\:S9XGV03nQ8KCAR0_ifd9l) (if your team uses Zoom)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Looking to integrate with other software? Check out the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and our [Integrations](docId\:L-qok2y-8x1s8wHKVoobO) for further information.

**Note:** Most integrations must be set up by an Admin user of the partner's platform. Some job board integrations, such as [Wellfound (formerly AngelList Talent)](docId\:c4xKfeoY3Z9dgJ-lCTEGc), must be set up on the partner's end.
:::

***

## Set up your first job

:::hint{type="info"}
In this section, you'll set up a job and test the workflows for adding candidates to Ashby. This section takes five to 10 minutes — we recommend having a job description ready.
:::

- [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8) to assign to your jobs
- Create [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux) to establish clear stages within each job's pipeline
- Open and post your first [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt)
- [Create test candidates and test out the workflow](docId\:Fu_sif2S_xnQHNRF7AnaW)

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Note:** The [Indeed](docId\:ZqLv2m_n0QgmNLJqfVJqH) integration is enabled by default. Disable it while you're setting up your jobs to ensure test postings aren't listed.
:::

***

## Create reusable templates in Admin

:::hint{type="info"}
You can create reusable templates for various objects, including one-off emails, sequences, interviews, and feedback forms. We highly recommend getting at least some of these templates in place to save time in the long run, although you can revisit this later.
:::

- Configure [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux) to build out the pipelines that candidates go through as part of your interview process.
- Create shared [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR) that can be used across multiple jobs and interview activities.
- Create shared [Application Forms](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI) to assign to your job postings.
- Add [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ) to speed up and standardize candidate communications.
- Create [Job Templates](docId\:X1iE8z5PxR7FJKsPv6QEU) to configure job settings, interview plans, and job posting information in advance.
- Review [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml) to determine the defaults that apply across your interviews.

***

## Set up scheduling and enhance your job with activities

:::hint{type="info"}
At this point, you're ready to use all basic Ashby features! Ashby also supports further streamlining your process by adding interview scheduling and other [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7) to each stage. Once added, these activities automatically populate on your candidates' profiles when they move into a stage, so you know exactly what to do next.
:::

- [Scheduling & Interviews: An Introduction](docId\:XW-3IRIvOnBHO_UF37LbH)

Choose a scheduling workflow:

- [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)
- [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM)
- [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN)

Review and enable other activity options:

- [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7)

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Note:** Once you've customized your job with activities, you can turn it into a [job template](docId\:X1iE8z5PxR7FJKsPv6QEU) to reuse whenever you open a new job.
:::

***

## Set up your team's permissions

:::hint{type="info"}
With the basic setup complete, it's time to configure your team's permissions!
:::

- [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)
- Want to set up additional access roles or automations? Check out [Permissions Automation](docId:6h_16t-zWcRXYoP7wYXhk) and [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_).

We recommend leaving most users with limited access, as they can get the information they need about the candidates they interview from the interview briefing.

***

## Onboard your team

:::hint{type="info"}
Onboarding your team is easy! Share our Getting Started Guides with your hiring team via email or Slack (Ashby does not currently send automated new user emails). These guides instruct them on how to log in and start using Ashby within 10 minutes.
:::

- [Getting Started for Hiring Managers](docId\:Ku4nmt5UeOs8wfRgFxQNY)
- [Getting Started for Interviewers](docId:2_WbM9Pju_SOWws1jhpZZ)
- [Getting Started for Recruiters](docId\:QyoLopAyBDwsEm-GsXjy3)
- [Getting Started for Recruiting Coordinators](docId\:ZHSO6kJXpXFsZbESO2rLl)
- [Getting Started for Sourcers](docId\:xWkjWMMZhmSU_xSKtG_R3)

***

:::hint{type="success"}
With your current setup, you're ready for hiring excellence! Check out more of our resources to further enhance your team's experience. Happy hiring!

Curious about more advanced setup? Check out [Advanced Setup](docId\:PWOXjaiesmhYGaSUTulN-).
:::


[title] Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions
[path] Users & Permissions/


[title] Organization Setup
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/


[title] Job Board: Configuring Your Setup
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

Ashby provides a responsive job board you can customize with your company's brand assets and host directly, or integrate with your existing careers page using the Ashby API or job board embedding. In this article, learn to add your company logos, brand colors, and custom messaging to your Ashby job board theme.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**

- Have your company's brand assets ready, and check out the [Ashby Job Board](https://jobs.ashbyhq.com/ashby) for an example of a configured job board.
- Only users with Organization Admin access can adjust job board theme settings.
- Check out [Routes for integrating your Ashby job board with your careers page](docId:24OsjSAQlgxF1P8kQ8pQZ) for more customizable job board options.
:::

# Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8746a614a6464440918baa0f1b3ce0be"}

To edit your job board theming, navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**. This theme page applies styling and logos to any public-facing pages Ashby generates, including your job board and direct booking landing pages.

# Identity

In the **Identity** section, you can update your job board slug, organization name, and link to your public website.

Your job board slug is the part of your job board URL that identifies your organization — for example, the slug in `jobs.ashbyhq.com/acme-corp` is `acme-corp`. If you change your slug, ensure there are no spaces. We recommend using hyphens to separate words if necessary.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Changing your job board slug when jobs are already posted to external job boards (e.g. LinkedIn) causes issues with redirecting candidates until the job boards update the postings to match the new job board link. This can take around 24 hours to update.
:::

# Job board embedding

:::hint{type="info"}
You have the option to embed your Ashby job board in your existing careers page. To enable, follow the instructions outlined in [Routes for integrating your Ashby job board with your careers page](docId:24OsjSAQlgxF1P8kQ8pQZ).
:::

**Example embedded job boards:**

- [Ashby](https://www.ashbyhq.com/careers)
- [YCombinator](https://www.ycombinator.com/careers)

# Logos & social sharing

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby uses your logos on all external pages. Review what each logo option is used for and file recommendations below for the best experience.
:::

## Square

Mobile Ashby pages use the square logo. We recommend using a square PNG, JPG, or SVG file of at least 48 x 48 pixels.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7f25a7e4c8dd16f5f82897055c7261fd.png" size="70" alt="An example of a square logo on the mobile view of a job board." isUploading="false" width="742" height="1012" darkWidth="742" darkHeight="1012" showCaption="false"}

## Wordmark

Desktop screens use the wordmark logo. If your wordmark appears small on Ashby, reduce the border or margin. We recommend using a horizontal rectangular PNG, JPG, or SVG file at least 160 pixels high.

![An example of a logo on a job board when viewed on a desktop.](https://cdn.zappy.app/d0ed4da5be420c3f3b708494ece8c276.png)

## Social media

Social media sites like LinkedIn and X (Twitter) use the social media logo when you post jobs. If you don't include a social media image, Ashby uses your square logo instead.

Most platforms do not reliably render SVG images, so we recommend using a PNG or JPG file at least 1000 pixels wide and a ratio of width to height of about 1.7 to 1 (1000 pixels wide by 588 pixels high).

![An example of the logo uploaded to the social media field being displayed on a social media post.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8568be6bf880633355e156d224dcadb8.png)

## Social sharing

The Social Sharing section allows you to preview and further configure how your job board links appear when shared on social platforms. You can use the LinkedIn, X (Twitter), and Other Platforms tabs to get further information on how platforms determine how to display links and to preview your logo accordingly.

We recommend uploading both a square logo and a social media logo. If you do not upload a logo in the **Social Media** section, Ashby uses the logo uploaded in the **Square** section instead. If you don't upload a logo in either the Social Media or Square sections, Ashby displays nothing for preview. In both cases, you see a warning message, either confirming that the square logo is in use or that a logo hasn't been found.

![The social sharing menu, showing the warning when a square or social media logo hasn't been updated.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/M3bHhJN0QIB-gbdUL4J5W_brand-reteam-default-ashby-2026-06-30-at-35619-pm.jpg)

In the Social Sharing **LinkedIn** tab, you can preview your logo and determine whether it needs further editing (like if the logo is off-center, as shown in the example below). LinkedIn uses Open Graph HTML tags to determine how to display links to your job board. Ashby automatically sets these up for you.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xwyVNRuBmvvjZ1sTG5vRG_linkedin-preview-logo.jpg)

Under the Social Sharing **X (Twitter)** tab, you can set your card size using the `X (Twitter) Summary Card Type` dropdown (the default small card size or a large card size if your logo gets cut off). You can also determine which image displays using the `X (Twitter) Image` dropdown, selecting from either the social media or square logo.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Rb01VdiWfC3RptZMeqJbU_brand-reteam-default-ashby-2026-07-03-at-92324-am.jpg)

The **Other Platforms** tab serves as a general catchall with a large card preview that approximates what most other platforms display.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xJyJFY2yJjcdyVPM06FR9_linkedin-preview-logo.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Previews shown in social sharing are approximations. Always check the documentation and post inspector tools for the platforms you use to make sure you are following best practices.
:::

# Job board options

:::hint{type="info"}
Use these options to control visual elements on the job board, including filters and grouping jobs.
:::

## Brand colors

Ashby uses your brand colors on buttons and links across all external pages, including:

- Job boards
- Direct booking and candidate availability pages
- Surveys and quizzes
- Data privacy and compliance consent requests

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/96d4b95a83f3db63dc4e99cbd3046e0f.png)

## Custom CSS

You can upload a CSS file to further customize your job board. Download an example of a CSS file on our [Job Board Example](https://www.ashbyhq.com/job-board-embed-examples/full-job-board#css) page. You can also implement [at-rules](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/At-rule) for further customization.

## Show job filters?

Choose to hide or display department, location, location type, and employment type filters on your job board. These filters allow candidates to set criteria and view the most relevant open positions to them.

The filters also show a count of job postings per department, location, or employment type when a candidate viewing your job board opens the drop-down menu.

![The department, employment type, location and location type filters.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JfACf8wbB9vDZtOi2rFct_job-board-filters.jpg)

## Show location address

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring locations, check out [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8).
:::

You can display location street addresses on your job postings. To display the location address across all job postings on your job board, check the `Show Location Address?` checkbox.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4AeXrEo9JKM0teMqq55Bo_job-location-address-as-displayed-on-a-job-board.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have not assigned an address to a location, the job posting displays just the location name (or candidate-facing location name).
:::

## Group by teams?

Choose to group jobs by department or sub-team on your job board. Each team in a department appears as a separate section on your job board.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZKo-vfQm0QgCQkySxogSd_departments-and-sub-teams.jpg)

## Show autofill field on application forms?

Check the `Show Autofill Field on Application Forms?` checkbox to let candidates autofill fields from their resume details. If enabled, an `Autofill from resume` option shows above the **Your Details** section for the candidate in the Application section of your job posting.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/INN0DJ57EeZ_IlOsZv9HI_director-of-platform-engineering-abbye-inc-2026-07-02-at-105019-am.jpg)

The candidate can click `Upload File` to upload their resume, and Ashby automatically populates application fields with the resume details.

## Override job postings' back URL

If you set a URL here, this is where the back button on your job postings directs to (instead of your ashbyhq.com job page). If you use the lightweight API option to post listings directly, this option takes users back to your custom careers page instead. More on this at [Using the lightweight job posting API to list openings on your site.](docId\:jg1Yi4Wefy9gHzO_3flgp).

## Disable Ashby-hosted jobs page?

If you enable this option, candidates can't access your organization's job postings via your ashbyhq.com job board. This option is for users with a custom-built job board. You can read more at [Can I disable my Ashby job board?](docId\:C27lUArRmlvwKIwwOtpO4)

# Messaging

In this section you can customize messaging displayed to the candidate as they navigate your job board and submit applications.

## After the candidate submits application

Customize the confirmation message the candidate sees after they submit an application.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a1168dc85638cdda60b119bd2db420b9.png)

## No-reply address display name

In this field, you can change the sender display name candidates see on their application confirmation email and other emails from the Ashby no-reply address.

The display name cannot be empty and has a maximum length of 30 characters.

If you want to set up a custom company address, see the [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx) guide for more information.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oX38W9Vqmnlzz-2QCYYO1_no-reply-sender-name.jpg)

## Top and bottom description

The `Top Description` and `Bottom Description` fields are rich text editors that support adding formatted text, code, links, and images to the top and bottom of your job board.&#x20;

- Content you add to the `Top Description` field will show below your company logo and above your open positions and filters.
- Content you add to the Bottom Description field will show underneath your open positions.

![The screenshow shows an example of a bottom description.](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2b5c8b4884385ebe86a491d6d165654.png)

## Job post description opening and closing

The `Job Post Description Opening` and `Job Post Description Closing` fields are rich text editors that support adding formatted text, code, links, and images to the top and bottom of every job posting on your job board. These are good places to add general company or application information that is relevant for all jobs.

![The about company section that can be added to be included in all job posts.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f7395d563492a8d0cbaa683c31e8016f.png)

# Application spam protection

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Job Board: Application Spam Protection](docId\:X-5S-dFs2svZqcrHwUMgj) for further information.
:::

# Cookie consent

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Job Board: Cookie Consent Settings](docId\:h7yW5LWJWIQ246ocTQ_lE) to configure.
:::

# FAQs

### In what order are job postings listed on my Ashby job board?

Ashby displays jobs by department, in alphabetical order. For example, Ashby lists Customer Success department roles alphabetically before Engineering department roles. You can enable the `Show job filters?` checkbox if you have many roles and want candidates to filter postings by department, location, or employment type.

### My thumbnail hasn't been updated on LinkedIn after I've uploaded a new file. Can I manually update it?

Yes. You can use LinkedIn's Post Inspector to view when LinkedIn last updated your data and request a re-scrape. Access it at [LinkedIn Post Inspector](https://www.linkedin.com/post-inspector/).

### Can I add a tracking pixel to my job board?

Yes! Send your tracking pixel URL to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com). The tracking pixel fires only when candidates submit an application on your job board.

[title] Sales Tax FAQ
[path] Billing & Plans/

Effective as of 12/1/2024, Ashby will begin collecting Sales Tax across all customers and jurisdictions in the U.S. where required.

This guide covers commonly asked questions but if your question isn’t covered here, please reach out to [billings@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:billings@ashbyhq.com).

### Why do I see the message “Access Denied” when trying to access Billing Settings?

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you see a message that your billing settings are managed outside of Ashby, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to make changes.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you see this message when trying to access your [Billing Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/billing/settings), it means you have not been assigned Billing access within Ashby. You can reach out to your internal Billing contact to update your billing information.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Ashby 2024-10-29 at 11.25.38 AM.jpg](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2TatbpNJQdQyGfj8eqUqo_e2e70dcb-8e03-47dd-a205-81c7d4718ad6.png)


:::
::::

### Why is there Sales Tax on my invoice?

Sales tax on Software as a Service (SaaS) varies based on the state or country’s tax laws. Many jurisdictions have changed their tax regulations to classify SaaS as a taxable service. To comply with these laws, we are required to charge sales tax where applicable.

### Why are you charging sales tax now but weren’t before?

As our company has expanded, we now have nexus in additional jurisdictions. Consequently, sales tax will be applied to more invoices.

### I don’t have to pay tax on other SaaS tools that I have. Why are you charging me but they aren’t?

Different companies may have different tax obligations based on their business locations and economic nexus. We are required to collect sales tax in certain jurisdictions due to our presence there.

### My headquarters moved from X to Y. How does this affect my sales tax?

First, the difference in sales tax laws between jurisdictions X and Y could affect both the applicable tax rates and the taxability of SaaS services.

Second, your sales tax obligation could change based on if the invoicing company has a presence in location Y. If the company has no presence in Y then they would not collect sales tax on your behalf. However, you would be required to report and pay use tax on your own (if applicable).

### What happens if I don’t pay the sales tax?

If you don’t pay sales tax we will require an exemption certificate to keep on file. Otherwise, we are legally required to collect and report sales tax on your behalf. Outstanding balances on your invoice may lead to disruptions in your service.

### Am I responsible for sales tax on prior invoices?

We will not go back and apply or collect sales tax on prior invoices. However, you are likely obligated to pay use tax on those invoices to your local taxing authority.

### What if I am exempt from sales tax?

If your business qualifies for tax exemption, please send a valid exemption certificate for your state or country to [billings@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:billings@ashbyhq.com). Upon verification, we will remove sales tax from your invoices.

### What if my address is wrong?

- Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup
- Navigate to Billing
- Navigate to Settings
  - Note: you must be a Billing User to access these setting&#x73;**.** If you believe you should be added as a Billing User to manage your company’s billing settings, please reach out to your existing Billing User or to [billings@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:billings@ashbyhq.com) to be added.
- Under Billing Information, review your company’s billing information and address. To add or update, click `Edit in Stripe`*.*
- You will be taken to a Stripe-hosted billing page. Click `Update information`*.*
- Update your billing address and information and click `Save`*.*

[title] Build an entirely custom careers page using the Ashby API
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

# Overview

If you’re looking to have the most flexibility when it comes to adding your Ashby job postings to your external site, you can use the Ashby API.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The full Ashby API isn’t intended to be used directly from a browser. In these cases, you can opt to proxy the requests through another server or opt to use the lightweight job posting API option. More on this at [Using the lightweight job posting API to list openings on your site.](docId\:jg1Yi4Wefy9gHzO_3flgp)&#x20;
:::

This approach to posting your jobs to your external careers page is the most amount of effort, but also provides full flexibility in how you design your careers page. The Ashby API documentation can be found in our [developer guides](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/docs/creating-a-custom-careers-page).

Companies using this approach: [PostHog](https://posthog.com/careers)

:::hint{type="info"}
For other ways to add your jobs board to your external careers page, please see [Routes for integrating your Ashby job board with your careers page](docId:24OsjSAQlgxF1P8kQ8pQZ).
:::

# FAQ

### Why doesn’t the View Posting link within my job posting take me to the specific job posting on my careers page?&#x20;

If you're using a custom careers page powered by Ashby's API or an embedded job board, you may notice that clicking the `View Posting` button within a job posting does not automatically route to the job posting on your careers page as expected.

This behavior is typically related to how your careers page handles URL parameters. The `View Posting` button relies on the `ashby_jid` URL parameter to identify which job to display. For example:

`https://yourcompany.com/careers?ashby_jid=<job-id>`

For this to work correctly, your careers page needs to include logic that reads the `ashby_jid` parameter and routes the visitor to the corresponding job posting page.

In most cases, your website should:

1. Detect the `ashby_jid` parameter in the URL.
2. Match it to the correct job.
3. Redirect or render the appropriate job details page.

Without this routing logic in place, visitors may be directed to your general careers page instead of the specific role.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This configuration is managed on your website, so your web or development team needs to implement this routing behavior. If you need further information on how Ashby provides job identifiers or how to structure the link, feel free to reach out to Support.
:::




[title] Self-serve Importing Candidates via Bulk Import
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/Bulk Import/

If you are importing data via our self-serve bulk CSV import option, this guide will walk you through the recommended steps to add active and historical data while you’re onboarding.&#x20;

If you are importing all of your active and historical data using the Bulk CSV import tool, we would recommend doing this in three stages:

1. Import active candidate data into your active job pipelines
2. Import historical candidate data for your records and reporting purposes
3. Request a resume import (optional)

## Importing Active Candidate Data

If you have open roles in your previous ATS with active candidates in the pipeline, we would recommend setting up the departments, teams and jobs you’re actively hiring for manually in Ashby so you can continue hiring activities with minimal downtime.

For more information on creating jobs, check out [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt) . Once you’ve set up these jobs in Ashby, you can import your active candidate data using the CSV import tool. More on this at [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ).

Please note that with the bulk CSV import tool, the following is imported:

- Candidate demographics
- Current job application
- The current interview plan stage
- Current status

The following is *not* imported

- Resumes and other files
- Notes
- Long text fields

## Import Historical Candidate Data

Once you have imported active candidates, you can then import historical candidates data via the same Bulk CSV import tool.

In order to add candidates to job pipelines, those jobs would need to exist in Ashby, so you may need to create additional jobs if you’d like the candidate’s job application and interview plan stage to be imported.

:::hint{type="info"}
Jobs do not need to be open in Ashby for candidates to be added to the pipeline. If you are importing candidates to jobs that are closed in Ashby, be sure to uncheck the `Only match open jobs` checkbox within the Import Settings at the mapping stage of your import.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/678ee7e1e71fab1ffda251d4043d54f0.png)


:::

## Request a Resume Import (Optional)

When importing data via a CSV file in the Bulk Data Upload section of Ashby, resumes are not imported. If you’d like to bulk import candidate resumes, reach out to your CSM or support\@ashbyhq.com for further assistance with this.

[title] Updating the domain or adding a secondary domain to an Ashby account
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

If your organization has recently changed domain, or has a secondary domain, please reach out to support\@ashbyhq.com to update the domains on your Ashby account accordingly.

## Updating your domain on your Ashby account

Please be sure to confirm the following before reaching out to Support to update your domain:

- Your systems admin has changed your company's primary domain in either Google Workspace or Microsoft 365, along with the primary domain in your identity provider if you are using SSO and/or SCIM with Ashby.
- Employees are actively using their email addresses with the new domain.

Support will confirm the above with you, along with the following before any updates are made:

- Whether all user email addresses should be updated to use the new domain in their profiles in Ashby.
- Whether you use auto-sync for your identity provider (if you have SCIM in place for signing in to Ashby). If so, users will sync as soon as the domain change has been made on Ashby’s side. This sync will remove any users not in your directory and add any directory users who are not already in Ashby. Please confirm you are ready for users to sync.
- In addition to making your new domain your primary domain, whether you would like your previous domain to be added as a secondary domain.
- Whether the new domain in the existing workspace or a separate workspace.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note: If this is a new domain for a separate Google Workspace instance and you’d like to set up domain-wide delegation for your other workspace, you will need to go through the scope setup process within the Google console of your separate instance. More on this [here](#).
:::

## Adding a secondary domain to your Ashby account

Support will confirm with you as to whether this secondary domain is part of the same workspace or a separate one prior to adding the secondary domain.

### Your domain is a secondary domain within the same Google Workspace instance or Microsoft tenant

In the case where the secondary domain is in the same Google Workspace instance, then Support will add the secondary domain to your account and no further action will need to be taken on your side.

### Your domain is a domain within a separate Google Workspace instance

If this is a new domain for a separate Google Workspace instance and you’d like to set up domain-wide delegation for your other workspace, you will need to go through the scope setup process within the Google console of your separate instance.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
If you already see the Ashby client ID listed in Security > API Controls > Domain-wide Delegation within your separate Workspace instance, then no further action is needed on your part.
If the Ashby client ID is not listed in Domain-wide Delegation, then follow the steps at [Google Workspace: Domain-wide Delegation](docId\:i_NrK4oNwVNZAqQlLUtnI), using the same client ID and authorizing the same scopes set for your primary domain to configure the integration in the same way for your second domain.
:::

If the secondary domain is part of a separate instance, then users in the secondary workspace will not sync over to Ashby automatically and will need to have accounts provisioned for them manually. More on this at [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8)&#x20;

Email and calendar sync will only work after the user logs in to Ashby using their Google account.

### Your domain is a domain within a separate Microsoft 365 tenant

If you are adding a new domain for a separate Microsoft 365 tenant, then users in the separate tenant would need to go through the individual OAuth process. Application-wide authorization can only be set up for one tenant. More on the Microsoft 365 integration process at [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7).

Users will not sync over to Ashby automatically if they are part of the secondary tenant, so would also need to be added manually via the steps at [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8)

Email and calendar sync will also only work after the user logs in to Ashby using their Microsoft account.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is there a charge or cost for amending or updating the domains on my Ashby account?

No, there is no additional charge for updating domains or adding secondary domains.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I’m changing the company name while changing my domain, what changes need to be made across my Ashby account as part of the rebrand?

Check out [How do I change my company name in Ashby?](docId\:ZYdOog2zJquHMXBSPDOpU) for more information.
:::


[title] Getting Started for Recruiting Coordinators
[path] Getting Started: User Guides/

Welcome to Ashby! We couldn't be more excited to help you get started. This guide covers the most common ways recruiting coordinators use Ashby.

:::hint{type="info"}
**New to Ashby as a Recruiting Coordinator?**

&#x20;For a guided video walkthrough of everything in this article take the [Recruiting Coordinator Essentials](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-recruiting-coordinator-essentials) track in Ashby Academy. It pulls together the Academy's coordinator lessons into one sequenced path, so you don't have to piece together each step on your own.
:::

# Log in to Ashby

To sign in, head to [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/).

Ashby uses Google sign-in, Microsoft 365 sign-in, and magic links.

If your company has Single Sign-On (SSO) set up with Ashby, use this option to log in.

:::hint{type="info"}
More on signing in can be found at [Signing in to Ashby](docId\:vH7B6OAp3CIRSFeHtCYoA).
:::

# Configure your personal settings

A key first step is configuring your personal settings in Ashby.

In [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info), you can do the following:

- Set your personal info, including your job title, user avatar, timezone, and social links
- Set your notification settings: determine the activities you should be notified about and where you'd like to be notified
- Set up personal email templates
- Set up OAuth if needed (confirm with your admin whether this is required as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 setup)

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full walkthrough, check out [Updating Personal Settings](docId\:Bb_jro6kp6bWBkWTHtAZT)
:::

# Navigate Ashby

## Home page

If you are only interviewing candidates in the pipeline and have no other interaction with candidates, you likely have Limited Access in Ashby.

To get started, log in to Ashby at [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/) using one of the login options. You should already have an account set up. Once logged in, you land on your home page, where you can access interview briefings and tasks.

For a full breakdown of the home page, check out [Home Page](docId\:mzsz9lMAG1AX7n1BoZCzj)

### Add and track referrals

To submit referrals:

1. Head to the **Referrals** section of the [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page.
2. Click `+ Referral`.
3. To create a direct referral, click `Add Direct Referral` and complete the referral form with the candidate details.
4. To create a referral link, click `Create Referral Link` and give your referral link a title. You can then opt to link to a specific job posting using the `Link to specific job posting?` checkbox and selecting a job posting from the dropdown.

![Highlights the Referrals section on the home page.](https://cdn.zappy.app/26278f4b47c38aac31f08c40ab4ba5c3.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Our full guide on referrals can be found at [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr)
:::

## Candidate profile

Depending on the permissions you are given, you may have access to view candidate profiles and take action on job considerations.

For further information on navigating a candidate profile, check out [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).

## Candidate pipeline

The Pipeline Overview provides you a view of candidates across all positions you have access to and allows you to quickly jump between them.

For more on the pipeline view, check out [Candidate Pipeline](docId\:c7vCHI2hsjQZ0AynA8c-b).

## Jobs - dashboard view

The Job Dashboard at Jobs > [Dashboard](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/pipelines)  is a high-level overview of the active jobs you follow, have a role on, and have access to. You can also access the `Job Board` from this page. We recommend bookmarking this page to quickly see all of your active jobs in one place.

![Job dashboard view with button linking out to the job board](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wj37MTayKjo_1XZbYkRcB_job-dashboard-view.jpg)

# Common Ashby areas for recruiting coordinators

:::hint{type="info"}
This section will walk you through the key activities you'll complete as a recruiting coordinator, including opening and posting jobs, scheduling interviews, generating offer letters, and adding candidates to your HRIS.
:::

## Opening and posting jobs

To create a job, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, then click the `Create a Job` button and follow the steps in the job creation wizard. At this point, you can open the job right away — or configure it further. In the `Settings` section, there are further configuration options on four tabs.

When you're ready to open the job, click the *Job Status* button and select `Mark as Open.` An open job isn't automatically posted to your Ashby job board or any third-party job boards but you will be able to add candidates to the pipeline.

When you're ready to post the job to your job board, you can set up a job posting on the Job Postings tab. You can create as many postings as you'd like for a job. Once published, the posting will show up on your Ashby job board (e.g., jobs.asbhyhq.com/ashby).

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide on creating a job and job postings, check out  [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt) .
:::

## Scheduling interviews

With Ashby, you can schedule interviews manually, or create a structured interview process that automates the details of finding times and creating calendar invites.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
For the full details of setting up and scheduling interviews, check out [Scheduling & Interviews: An Introduction](docId\:XW-3IRIvOnBHO_UF37LbH) to view the options available.
:::

## Generating offers and offer letters

When a candidate moves to the Offer stage in the candidate pipeline, an offer activity will be generated in the Activities section of their candidate profile. Click Create Offer to complete the Offer Details form. The form data will be used to populate substitution fields in the Offer Letter PDF that is generated.&#x20;

You can also send out e-signature requests (sent via DropBox Sign) and create offer letter templates to help structure your processes further.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide, check out [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh) and [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW)
:::

## Add candidates to your HRIS

When a candidate accepts an offer, you see an option to push hired candidates to your HRIS system. Clicking the button that appears will create a new Employee in the system, including the latest Offer data.

All HRIS integration options can be found in the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).

# FAQ

### My profile picture has synced over from Google Workspace but it's very pixelated. Why?

Images synced over from Google Workspace do not have a high enough resolution. We'd recommend uploading your avatar within [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info) to fix this.


[title] Job Board Setup
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/


[title] Seat-based Pricing
[path] Billing & Plans/

This guide provides more information on seats and seat-based pricing. Have additional questions not answered here? Reach out to contracts\@ashbyhq.com for further assistance.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Not all Ashby accounts are on seat-based pricing. Our Foundations Plan, for companies of \<100 employees, is priced based on their total workforce size, structured into five simple pricing tiers. You can view the [Foundations Plan pricing tiers](https://www.ashbyhq.com/pricing).
:::

While many Applicant Tracking System (ATS) providers choose to price their product(s) based on the total size of your organization, here at Ashby we believe that seat-based pricing more closely aligns to the range of needs at larger organizations. We also believe that the transparency created in this model means you are not surprised by black-box price hikes at renewal.

# How you are billed for users

Ashby bills you for users who have been provisioned a paid seat in your organization. Other user types are free.

**Paid seats**

- Elevated Access Users
- Organizational Admin Users

**Free**

- Limited Access Users
- Agency Users

For more information on these roles and their permissions, see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

# Adding paid seats during your billing period

Ashby provides a flexible seat policy that allows customers to add seats at any time in-app, and seat assignments can be viewed and managed in the Ashby [Seat Management Dashboard](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users/seat-management-dashboard). At the end of each quarter, Ashby will issue a prorated invoice for any additional seats over the limit through the end of the current billing period.

**Here's an example:**

In this example, let’s say you’ve purchased 20 Ashby All-in-One paid seats at $795/user/year each. If at the end of the quarter you have provisioned 5 additional paid seats, to bring your total to 25, we will send you a pro-rated invoice for those 5 seats.

To calculate the prorated cost for each new user, divide the cost per user by 365 days, then multiply by the remaining days in the contract. If in this scenario you have 335 days remaining at the end of the quarter to the end date of your contract then the per user cost is the following: ($795/365 days) \* 335 days = $729.65 per user.

If you pay by credit card, this amount will be charged, or if you pay by invoice this amount will be invoiced at the end of the quarter.

# FAQ

### Who needs a paid seat?

- Your Talent Acquisition (TA) team, including operations
- Hiring Managers with open roles to fill
- Leadership or heads of departments for analytics

### How many paid seats do I need?

There are many factors that influence this including company size, growth rate, and hiring practices. Your Ashby Account Executive can help you scope your deployment.

### Do I need to talk to Ashby Sales or Support to add seats?

No. We've designed the provisioning process to minimize friction when you need to add additional paid seats to keep hiring moving quickly. Billing takes place after the fact with the calculations noted above.

### Can I reassign paid seats?

Yes! By transitioning one Elevated Access user to Limited Access and promoting a different Limited Access user to Elevated Access you have reallocated permissions, without increasing the total number of paid seats. This is common practice for occasionally active Hiring Managers.

### If I reduce the quantity of paid seats I have provisioned will I be issued any credit?

No, once you have purchased a paid seat, you have it available to use through to the end of your subscription term. At your renewal you can reduce the quantity of paid seats.

### Why does Ashby Success have a user? Will that count against my paid seats?

No, the Ashby Success user will never count against any of the seats that you've purchased. Our Support and Customer Success teams use it to access your account upon request when working with your team.

### How do I provision a new user?

For more on provisioning users, see How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?.

[title] Reporting on Data Retention Rules, Violations of Rules and Consent Choice
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Data Management/

This guide runs through reports you can run to help track candidates that are considered as in violation of your data compliance rules set in Ashby, data compliance overrides, data retention rules applied to candidates and when past and future consent requests are sent.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring data retention rules in Ashby, check out [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9).
:::

## When are candidates considered in violation?

Candidates are considered in violation of data retention policies in Ashby if they violate an enabled rule and they aren’t passing another enabled rule.  For example:

- A candidate that has an inactivity date in the past (and is thus violating an Inactivity Based Retention Rule), is not in violation if they have submitted consent.
- A candidate who has not submitted consent (and is thus violating a Consent Based Retention Rule) is not in violation if they have an inactivity date set in the future (by an Inactivity Based Rule).

This allows for you to flexibly combine the two types of rules to have a rule keep a candidate out of violation, even if they violate a different rule.

Candidates additionally are never in violation while they have an application in an active stage.

## What fields are available for data compliance rule reporting in Ashby?

| Field Name                                            | Definition                                                                                                                                     |
| ----------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Is In Violation of Data Compliance?                   | Whether a candidate is in violation of any data compliance rules                                                                               |
| Data Compliance Override Date                         | The override date after which a candidate is marked as in violation of data compliance rules                                                   |
| Data Compliance Override Reason                       | The reason that was provided when ignoring compliance violations or overriding the compliance date                                             |
| Is Data Compliance Ignored?                           | Whether data compliance rules were ignored for this candidate                                                                                  |
| Consent Based Data Retention Rule                     | The consent based data compliance rule used to determine the candidate's retention date.                                                       |
| Data Retention Consent End Date                       | The candidate has given consent to keep their data up through this date                                                                        |
| Inactivity Based Data Retention Rule                  | The inactivity based data compliance rule used to determine the candidate's retention date.                                                    |
| Inactivity Based Data Retention Date                  | The date after which a candidate's data should be anonymized or deleted according to the organization's inactivity based data compliance rules |
| Last Data Consent Request Sent At                     | The date this candidate was most recently sent a data consent request. This includes both initial consent requests and extension requests.     |
| Last Automated Consent Extension Request Sent At      | The date this candidate was most recently sent an automated consent extension request.                                                         |
| Next Automated Consent Extension Request Scheduled At | The date the next automated consent extension request is scheduled to be sent.                                                                 |



## Filtering a candidate search report for those in violation of your data compliance rules

You can quickly find candidates that are in violation of your rules using Ashby’s Reporting functionality.  Here is a Candidate Search that finds those candidates by using the `Is In Violation of Data Compliance` field and setting the value to `Yes` to quickly find candidates that are being considered as in violation.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rLi7RgUodMkIeDJxr3iOI_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-26-at-101408-am.jpg)

## Reporting on Data Consent Choices

You can filter, group by or add the `Last Data Consent Request Choice` field as a column to a report. This allows you to filter and view candidate consent choices.

Values for the consent choice will be one of:

- **Pending:** the candidate hasn't responded to the request
- **Opted In:&#x20;**&#x53;ubmitted and agreed
- **Opted Out:** Submitted without agreeing

Below is a candidate search or candidate list report filtering for candidates who have the Last Data Consent Request Choice field set to Pending.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xBEA67dwZI_ZBZT4Zy-xv_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-26-at-92248-am.jpg)

## Reporting on Consent Extension Requests

Other reporting fields you can use to either filter results when reporting or show on a custom list report include Last Data Consent Request Sent At, Last Automated Consent Extension Request Sent At and Next Automated Consent Extension Request Scheduled At.

You can use these to show when the last consent extension request email was sent and when the next one is due to be sent respectively. Below is a custom list report listing the following fields as columns:

Job Consideration's Candidate

Job Consideration's Job

Job Consideration's Candidates Last Data Consent Request Sent At

Next Automated consent Extension Request Scheduled At

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RxW22WodBpl-PxU-MoiUj_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-26-at-93343-am.jpg)

## Reporting based on applied data compliance rule

Want to also filter, group by or display the data compliance rule being applied to the candidate or lead? You can use the `Inactivity Based Data Retention Rule` (covers both Inactive Lead and Inactive Applicant rules) and `Consent Based Data Retention Rule` fields when building reports.&#x20;

You can use this to filter or show the specific data retention rule that is being applied to a candidate. For example, below is a custom list report with the Candidate subject, filtered to show all candidates that have an inactivity based retention date assigned. The report is set to show the following columns.

Candidate's Name

Candidate's Job Consideration's Job

Candidate's Inactivity Based Data Retention Date

Candidate's Inactivity Based Data Retention Rule

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n-zm3rwmgAhGqNjmyBnsb_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-26-at-94356-am.jpg)

## Reporting on data consent overrides

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on overriding data consent dates, check out [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9)&#x20;
:::

If you have overridden consent dates or overridden and ignored data retention rules for candidates completely, you can use the Data Compliance Override Date, Data Compliance Override Reason and Is Data Compliance Ignored? fields to filter, group and show on your reports as needed.

Below is an export candidate search or list that filters for candidates who have the Is Data Compliance Ignored? field set to Yes.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0ggFZmW6GS1ECOZyjdVFR_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-26-at-101036-am.jpg)


[title] Using the lightweight job posting API to list openings on your site.
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

One route to post jobs to your external careers page is to use the lightweight job posting API to list openings on your site, then link out to the application form.

If you use [Custom Tracking Links](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/custom-tracked-links) (more on these at [How can I track the source of an application? ](#)) and also make your own custom links to your job site using the Ashby API, you will need to copy the `utm_source` param from your job board's URL and add it to the links that you create on your job page.

This approach allows you to use our JSON API for listing postings and then linking out to the hosted careers page for the actual application. For further information on setting this up, check out the [Ashby Job Postings API page](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/docs/public-job-posting-api) in our developers guides.

:::hint{type="info"}
For other ways to add your jobs board to your external careers page, please see [Routes for integrating your Ashby job board with your careers page](docId:24OsjSAQlgxF1P8kQ8pQZ).
:::


[title] Which features are available on each Ashby All-In-One Plan?
[path] Billing & Plans/

***

This guide summarizes the Ashby All-In-One plans and their paid add-ons.

:::hint{type="info"}
For the current feature-by-feature comparison, see the [Ashby Pricing page](https://www.ashbyhq.com/pricing).
:::

# Plans available

This guide covers the following Ashby All-In-One plans:

## Foundations&#x20;

Get started in minutes, then scale with confidence as your organization grows.

Ashby All-In-One Foundations includes an Applicant Tracking System (ATS), scheduling and sourcing tools, [core dashboards](docId\:nhvbeIsfV8wiqLWeEmF2t), a [report template library](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi), basic [offer functionality](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh), and 100+ [integrations](docId\:L-qok2y-8x1s8wHKVoobO).

## Legacy Plus

Ashby All-In-One Legacy Plus includes the features available in Foundations, plus [custom advanced analytics](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW), additional scheduling and workflow automation, [approvals](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo), and advanced customization options.

## Plus

A powerful all-in-one recruiting platform designed to support growing teams at scale.

Ashby All-In-One Plus includes the features described for Foundations and Legacy Plus, along with additional survey options and recruiting events. The plan also includes setup for [single sign-on (SSO) and System for Cross-domain Identity Management (SCIM)](docId\:xjHaGVxjEDuAKq_CN6EUE).

## Enterprise&#x20;

An enterprise-grade recruiting platform designed to support large organizations with sophisticated hiring needs.

Ashby All-In-One Enterprise includes the features available in Foundations, Legacy Plus, and Plus, plus enterprise capabilities such as [managed access roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_), [Workday integration](docId\:Lser77iHgverWT8Ovu5gx), and advanced diversity analytics.

# Compare plan features

The [Ashby Pricing page](https://www.ashbyhq.com/pricing) includes the current plan comparison, with features listed under each plan.

# Paid add-ons

Add-on availability can vary by plan and account.

For current availability and pricing, refer to the [Ashby Pricing page](https://www.ashbyhq.com/pricing).

## Foundations

- Single sign-on (SSO) setup (see [SSO and SCIM](docId\:xjHaGVxjEDuAKq_CN6EUE) for more)
- Additional AI credits and email lookups for sourcing.
  For more on purchasing email lookups, see [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE); for more on AI credits, see [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm).
- [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z)

## Legacy Plus

- [SSO and SCIM](docId\:xjHaGVxjEDuAKq_CN6EUE)
- Additional AI credits and email lookups for sourcing.
  For more on purchasing email lookups, see [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE); for more on AI credits, see [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm).
- [AI Notetaker](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/ai-notetaker)

## Plus

- Additional AI credits and email lookups for sourcing.
  For more on purchasing email lookups, see [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE); for more on AI credits, see [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm).
- [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1)
- [AI Notetaker](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/ai-notetaker)

## Enterprise

- Additional AI credits and email lookups for sourcing.
  For more on purchasing email lookups, see [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE); for more on AI credits, see [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm).
- [AI Notetaker](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/ai-notetaker)

For more information about pricing, plan availability, or add-ons, contact your Ashby representative.

[title] Routes for integrating your Ashby job board with your careers page
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

When it comes to connecting your Ashby job board with your website or existing careers page, you have a number of options. The different options provide different levels of customization and flexibility, so you can find an option that suits your company's needs.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- You will need Organization Admin permissions to access **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**
:::

# Linking out to your Ashby job board

This is a straightforward option that allows you to point customers to your Ashby job board. To get your Ashby job board URL:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards >&#x20;**[Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/brand).
2. Click the `Job Board` button in the top-right corner.
3. Copy the URL on the following page.

You can then add this URL to a button on your website, use it for a hyperlink, and more.

# Embed your job board on your careers page

If you would prefer to have applicants stay on your website when applying to a job, you can opt to embed your job board into your careers page. You can enable the embedding option within **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**. Ashby then gives you the code for your careers page.

You have the option to add CSS to your embedded job board for further customization, giving you some flexibility with the styling of your job board.

# Use the lightweight API to post jobs to your jobs page

This approach allows you to use our [JSON API for listing openings](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/docs/public-job-posting-api) and then link out to the hosted careers page for the actual application. Applicants still submit applications via the Ashby job board, but your careers page displays the opening details, giving you more flexibility with how the job posting data is displayed.

# Create a completely custom jobs page

This approach to posting your jobs to your external careers page requires the most effort, but it also provides full flexibility with how you design your careers page. Review [Ashby's API documentation](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/docs/creating-a-custom-careers-page) for further information.

# FAQs

### Are custom domains supported?

No, custom domains aren't currently supported. We suggest embedding your job board via script or using an iFrame.

### Can we customize the Ashby job board further?

Yes, you have the option to upload a CSS file in the **Job Board Options** section of [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme). You can download an [example CSS file](https://www.ashbyhq.com/job-board-embed-examples/full-job-board#css) to get started. You can also implement [at-rules](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/Guides/Syntax/At-rules) for further customization.


[title] Embedding Ashby Job Boards in an external Careers Page
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

Customers often wish to use alternatives to the provided Ashby-hosted job boards (https\://jobs.ashbyhq.com). To provide a more branded experience, Ashby supports embedding the Ashby Job Board directly in your own careers website.

# Embedding Ashby Job Board in an External Careers Page

Embedding your Ashby Job Board directly in your careers page only takes a few minutes to setup.

1. Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**.
2. Under **Job Board Embedding,** check the `Allow Job Board Embedding` option.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3520075b022175528077862fd846e730.png" size="80" width="1158" height="715" darkWidth="1158" darkHeight="715" position="center" alt="Shows the job board theme setting page with the Allow Job Board Embedding checkbox highlighted." showCaption="false"}

3. Add the URL for your job page into the `Custom Jobs Page URL` field.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If you need links to job postings on a custom jobs page to be anchored to a specific place on the page rather than loading at the top of the page, add that anchor to the end of your URL.  For instance, if your positions list is at the bottom of your careers page, and renders with anchor "#positions" at the end of the URL, add that anchor to the end of the URL in this field.
:::

4. Once you have set your `Custom Jobs Page URL`, you’ll see instructions on how to embed your job board.  Follow those instructions to edit your careers page and embed your job board.
   - Place this tag on your page where you want the Ashby Job Board to be embedded:
     `<div id="ashby_embed">`
   - Add this script tag at the end of your page’s HTML body tag:
     `<script src="https://jobs.ashbyhq.com/[FILL IN JOB BOARD SLUG HERE]/embed?version=2"></script>`

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/d004c420ea3bf16559f328e7a9d69b3c.png" size="100" width="892" height="226" darkWidth="892" darkHeight="226" position="center" alt="Shows the instructions to embed the Ashby job board that appear in the UI." showCaption="false" indent="1"}



# Adding CSS to your job board embed

In the **Allowed Custom CSS URLs** section, you can determine the URLs that can be used to load external CSS into your embedded job board. Add your Custom CSS URL or URLs into the **Allowed Custom CSS URLs** field, then click `Submit` to add them.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2ba84eac449f68bbff3900df59cfb2b7.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
One URL should be entered per line. URLs have to match exactly to that of where the CSS file is hosted. If this field is left empty, then CSS cannot be configured on the embedded job board.&#x20;

For further information, check out [this page with examples](https://www.ashbyhq.com/job-board-embed-examples).
:::

Once you've added your Allowed Custom CSS URLs, please ensure they are added to your iframe script too. It should look something like the following:

`<div id="ashby_embed"></div>`

`  <script>`

`    window.__Ashby = {`

`settings: {`

`ashbyBaseJobBoardUrl:"https://jobs.ashbyhq.com/ashby-embed-demo-org"`

`customCssUrl: "https://www.ashbyhq.com/job_board_example_css/full-job-board.css"`

` }`

`}`

`  </script>`

If the CSS URLs are not included within the script tag, then the CSS will not be applied to your embed.

# Embedding a Single Application

The embed script also supports embedding a single application. To do this, you can add the following attributes to the `<div id="ashby_embed">` tag:

- `data-jid="<JID>"`: with this attribute set, the embed code will always load that specific job post, identified by the “JID” (e.g. “45134452-f53b-4d4c-915e-4a4615fb6c93", for a job post with the URL https\://jobs.ashbyhq.com/ashby/45134452-f53b-4d4c-915e-4a4615fb6c93)
- `data-tab="application"`: with this attribute set, the embed code will load the above application on the application tab (as opposed to the job description tab).
- `data-noChrome="true"`: with this attribute set, the embed code will hide navigation, title, and sidebar “chrome.” Combine this with other attributes to embed an application form that feels like it’s a part of your site.

:::hint{type="info"}
For other ways to add your jobs board to your external careers page,  see [Routes for integrating your Ashby job board with your careers page](docId:24OsjSAQlgxF1P8kQ8pQZ).
:::

# FAQ

### When I decline cookies on my careers page, my embedded job board doesn’t show up. Why?

Some cookie banner tools, like Termly, can block the iframe from showing up on your careers page.

### Why am I receiving a `jobs.ashbyhq refuses to connect` error on my career page?

The `refused to connect` message usually means the embed can’t complete its origin check. A few quick tweaks typically resolve it.

1. Ensure you are using this exact embed tags provided on the [Themes (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) page.
2. Remove any editor wrappers

Ensure the code isn’t wrapped by a WYSIWYG in \<p>, \<br>, or \<span> tags. The `<div id="ashby_embed"></div>` and the \<script> tag should be inserted as raw HTML in the page template or a raw/HTML block (and not inside a paragraph).

### Why doesn’t the View Posting link within my job posting take me to the specific job posting on my careers page?&#x20;

If you're using a custom careers page powered by Ashby's API or an embedded job board, you may notice that clicking the `View Posting` button within a job posting does not automatically route to the job posting on your careers page as expected. Referral links to specific job postings may also display the same behavior and direct candidates to the main job board on your career's page.

This behavior is typically related to how your careers page handles URL parameters. The `View Posting` button relies on the `ashby_jid` URL parameter to identify which job to display. For example:

`https://yourcompany.com/careers?ashby_jid=<job-id>`

For this to work correctly, your careers page needs to include logic that reads the `ashby_jid` parameter and routes the visitor to the corresponding job posting page.

In most cases, your website should:

1. Detect the `ashby_jid` parameter in the URL.
2. Match it to the correct job.
3. Redirect or render the appropriate job details page.

Without this routing logic in place, visitors may be directed to your general careers page instead of the specific role.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This configuration is managed on your website, so your web or development team needs to implement this routing behavior. If you need further information on how Ashby provides job identifiers or how to structure the link, feel free to reach out to Support.
:::


[title] How do I change my Ashby timezones?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

Learn how to set your organization's default timezone and how each user can customize their own timezone. For more information on setting your availability, please check out [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo)****

## Organization Timezone

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The organization timezone is the default timezone for your organization. If your organization allows calendar sync, all new users will use their calendar's primary timezone for their user timezone, otherwise they will default to using the organization timezone.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b7481162fb5c4c14059cfc93806d9d0f.png)


:::
::::

**Adjusting your Organization Timezone**

1. Navigate to your Admin section.
2. Open Interviews & Schedulin&#x67;*.*
3. Select Meetings & Time Zon&#x65;*.*
4. Navigate to the [Time Zone](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/meetings-and-time/timezone) tab.

## User Timezone

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Each user can specify their personal timezone. If calendar sync is enabled, the default timezone will be their calendar's primary timezone. Otherwise, the user has the option to specify a custom timezone or use the organization timezone.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/63df9274f52aa716414ec2ec630f7757.png)


:::
::::

### Changing your user time zone

1. Navigate to your Personal Setting&#x73;*.*
2. Select your preferred timezone on the Your Information page.

### Changing another user’s time zone.

Admins can also see and adjust user timezones when viewing the employee profile.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9dd3290212dfe3d9c3a935a9e74a0582.png)

1. Head to Admi&#x6E;*.*
2. Click Organization Setup, then Employee&#x73;*.*
3. Select an employee and adjust their time zone using the Timezone dropdown on the Basic Info tab.

## Can a timezone be set on a candidate’s profile?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Yes! If a location is set on the candidate’s profile within the Summary tab, then their timezone will be assigned based on that location.

The timezone can be manually amended or added using the drop-down menu underneath the Location field. This timezone will then be used across all interviews for this candidate.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4f34abe6caf53e9c1c5ee94cfe7be125.png)


:::
::::

## FAQ

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Where can I find the timezone set on my Google Calendar?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When viewing your Google calendar within your Google account, click the cog icon at the top of the page, then select *Settings.*

In the Time Zone section of your settings, you’ll be able to see any primary and secondary timezones set.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/57ba20af41b6745ea8a5b545eac46bd2.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eb2d7f4b15620d196b40efd85f915198.png)
:::
::::






:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Where can I find the timezone set on my Microsoft 365 Calendar?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When viewing your calendar within Outlook, click on the cog icon at the top of the page to access your settings.

Within the View section of your Calendar settings, navigate to the Time zones section to confirm your time zone is correct.

If the time zone listed for your calendar is different to the one listed in the Work hours and location section of your settings, then a message will show beneath the time zone set on your calendar asking if you’d like to update your work hours time zone to match. We would recommend ensuring that these time zones match in your Microsoft 365 account to avoid any confusion.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eb325ba18b781bb1472b3d8555c6c156.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/afc61d1ecd22906a71771cf052eeb697.png)
:::
::::
:::::


[title] Data Privacy FAQ
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Data Management/

This guide outlines frequently asked questions from security and legal teams. This FAQ page is for informational purposes only. Although we do our best to keep this information up-to-date, you should always refer to our [Terms](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/terms), [Privacy Policy](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/privacy), or your signed agreements with Ashby for the most accurate information. Reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) if you have questions not addressed on this page.

# Data privacy FAQ overview

Protecting the privacy of your data is very important to us at Ashby, just as we know that protecting the privacy of your candidates' and employees' data is important to you.

We offer flexible tools you can use to integrate Ashby with your compliance processes, letting your team stay focused on an efficient and effective recruiting pipeline. Our tools are used by organizations around the world who are subject to regulatory environments including the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA), and others.

If you're an Ashby user or admin, all the information you need to use our features is right here within the Ashby Knowledge Base, including documentation for:

- [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)
- [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc)
- [Compensation](docId:0Zkrmoq_22RNbDT3KwGuM)
- [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9)
- [Surveys & Questionnaires](docId\:RlbgZsGQLmqCKGbBnYQyp)

The rest of this document contains answers to common questions from security and legal teams with more specific technical, operational, or implementation concerns to help you decide if Ashby is the right fit for you.

# Frequently asked questions

## Ashby permissions

### What are the Ashby permission levels?

There are three levels of global access that can be assigned to users:

- Limited Access
- Elevated Access
- Organization Admin

Ashby assigns users Limited Access by default. You can assign specific access roles for jobs, locations, and departments to Elevated Access users and Organization Admins to provide or limit access as needed. For more information on permissions and to view the default access roles, see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

### Can I create custom access roles?

Yes, you can create custom access roles to determine the specific areas of Ashby that users with that role can access. For more information, see [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_).

### Can changes to user permissions be viewed?

Yes. On the **Employees** page in **Admin**, Organization Admins can click on a user's profile and navigate to the **History** tab to view a log of permission changes. The log includes a timestamp, the changes made, and the name of the user who made them.

## Anonymizing and deleting candidates

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for instructions for deleting or anonymizing a candidate? See [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc).
:::

Ashby offers two options for permanently erasing candidate personally identifiable information (PII): hard deletion and anonymization.

- **Hard deletion** permanently removes all data associated with the candidate. This includes PII as well as metadata and historical information about the hiring process and outcome. This may be preferred when the data is erroneous or is otherwise reducing reporting accuracy.
- **Anonymization** permanently removes PII from the candidate record. Ashby retains metadata and non-identifiable information for historical reporting purposes. Most organizations prefer this as their default deletion method, since it meets regulatory requirements for data erasure without sacrificing hiring process insights.

### When is the data permanently erased?

When you anonymize a candidate from within Ashby, the erasure takes place immediately and cannot be undone from within Ashby. When you delete a candidate, Ashby first "soft deletes" it, but this can be undone by the same user, an admin, or by Ashby Support. After 10 days, Ashby permanently erases it from our application database.

After the backup retention window of 30 days expires, Ashby permanently erases the data from our backend.

### What fields are considered PII for the purpose of anonymization?

Any candidate data field tagged internally as potential PII must be anonymized. When new candidate data fields are added to the platform, we evaluate them to determine if they constitute PII and mark them accordingly. The list of anonymized fields includes, but is not limited to:

- Name
- Email addresses
- Phone numbers
- Education & Employment History
- Candidate Custom Fields
- Social Links
- Notes
- Follow Ups
- Files
- Emails
- Scorecards

For any required fields that can't be totally removed, such as candidate name, Ashby replaces the data with random IDs, such as "Candidate 014a9974-b9d4-4619-9276-8e69326dc8f0", or the string "This data has been anonymized."

## Does Ashby have a FedRAMP ATO?

No. Ashby does not have a Federal Risk and Authorization Management Program (FedRAMP) Authorization to Operate (ATO). Ashby is designed to store and process recruiting-related data, not sensitive public or governmental records. If you decide to use Ashby, you need to take responsibility for not sharing this sensitive data with us.

However, we do have organizations with stricter compliance requirements who are happily using Ashby after implementing technical measures that guarantee any sensitive data is filtered out before it reaches our systems.

Reach out if you're considering that!

## Can Ashby execute a HIPAA BAA?

No. Ashby cannot execute a Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) Business Associate Agreement (BAA). Ashby is designed to store and process recruiting-related data, not sensitive protected health information. If you decide to use Ashby, you need to take responsibility for not sharing this sensitive data with us.

However, we do have organizations with stricter compliance requirements who are happily using Ashby after implementing technical measures that guarantee any sensitive data is filtered out before it reaches our systems.

Reach out if you're considering that!

[title] Linking out to your Ashby job board
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

Ashby allows you to configure your job board theme in the [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) section. You can find more on this at [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](docId\:f2OtyumVmeJaAt1DYRJYW).

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**&#x20;

- Ensure your Ashby job board is configured before linking out to it from your company website.&#x20;
:::

Once you've configured your theme, the simplest way to integrate Ashby into your website is to link out to your Ashby job board (for example, via a See Open Positions link).

To get your Ashby job board URL:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**.
2. Click the `Job Board` button in the top-right corner.
3. Copy the URL on the following page.

:::hint{type="info"}
For other ways to add your job board to your external careers page, see [Routes for integrating your Ashby job board with your careers page](docId:24OsjSAQlgxF1P8kQ8pQZ).
:::


[title] Admin & Organization Settings
[path] /

# Organization Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This section covers key areas of the Admin area of Ashby, along with some other core setup features.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🌎  [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8)&#x20;

🔍 [Source Types and Sources](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA)&#x20;

👤 [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs)&#x20;

✅ [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo)&#x20;

🔓 [SSO and SCIM](docId\:xjHaGVxjEDuAKq_CN6EUE)&#x20;

❓ [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Job Board Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides go through configuring your Ashby job board, setting up an internal job board and posting jobs to your external careers page.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
💼 [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](docId\:f2OtyumVmeJaAt1DYRJYW)&#x20;

📋 [Internal Job Board](docId\:qFJslDMoUUpMByBx6A0IQ)&#x20;

💻 [Posting Jobs on Your Careers Page](docId:24OsjSAQlgxF1P8kQ8pQZ)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Data Management

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This documentation walks through Ashby's data privacy and compliance features.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🕵️ [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9)&#x20;

❓ [Data Privacy FAQ](docId\:PLBbqnqJhoJxQMb6DoU-3)&#x20;
:::
::::




[title] Lever → Ashby Recruiting API Migration Guide
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/API Migrations/

This article covers how to initiate the API data migration from Lever to Ashby Recruiting, including how to configure the information needed to start the sync, what is imported and post-migration tasks.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are using Lever Basic and don't have access to generate Lever API credentials, review [Historical Import Migrations](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh).
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions and prerequisites:**

- You need to have Super Admin access in Lever with permissions to manage API credentials and manage integrations to generate an API key.
- You will need to be an Organization Admin to add the API key details in Ashby.
:::

# API key setup

## Generate an API key

As a first step, create a Lever API key with `read` permissions enabled for all endpoints. To do this:

1. Navigate to **Settings > Integrations and API > API Credentials** and click `Generate New Key`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/75db7af6c91c2c031a05f13153d2275a.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1071" height="654" darkWidth="1071" darkHeight="654" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Under the *Permissions* header, select `Select all read` permissions to grant read-only rights to all data.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3e34e0cf22e7171beb86f687262f5bf3.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="777" height="202" darkWidth="777" darkHeight="202" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Toggle on `Confidential data access` to ensure the migration includes your team's confidential jobs and applications.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3b778a45927934b06a22ff40ddb91597.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="756" height="251" darkWidth="756" darkHeight="251" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
If you cannot enable confidential scopes, contact [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) or your Customer Success Manager (CSM). We can configure the migration to skip confidential data so everything else syncs correctly, but you need to add any confidential data manually.
:::

4. Scroll to the bottom of the page and click `DONE`. This is required to finalize the API key generation.
5. Enter a name for your API key and click `Generate key`.
6. Click the `Copy Key` button next to the API key (which can be found next to the 'Key name' field).

:::hint{type="info"}
Lever's full guide on generating an API key can be found at [Generating and using API credentials](https://help.lever.co/s/article/Generating-and-using-API-credentials).
:::

## Add API key to Ashby

1. Sign in to your Ashby account.
2. Add the API key to the Lever API Key field in your [Ashby Lever Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/lever).

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MmyrdWeACCBwvHMLBm_PA_lever-integration-api-key-setup.jpg)

:::hint{type="success"}
Notify your Customer Success Manager (CSM) or Startup Customer Success Team when this is done, and we import your data.
:::

# Post-migration tasks

The following tasks should be completed once your migration from Lever is complete.

## Map your Lever sources

First, you need to map any sources you want migrated to Ashby. To do so, follow these steps:

1. Add any sources you want to migrate at **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Source Types and Sources](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA) .

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
For more on configuring sources, check out [Source Types and Sources](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA).
:::

2. Map your sources from Lever to Ashby at [Admin > Data Mapping > Lever Source Mapping](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-mapping/lever-source-mapping).
3. Click `Apply to Applications…` in the top right corner to apply them.

## Setting up permissions in Ashby

We don't migrate user permissions from Lever, so you need to configure permissions for your users within Ashby. For more information on setting up users and user permissions check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

## Disable Lever integrations

To complete the transition to Ashby, you need to ensure no new candidates are going into Lever moving forward. To accomplish this you should:

- Disable any job board integrations (e.g., LinkedIn) in Lever and enable the corresponding job board integrations in Ashby.
- Redirect your career page to your Ashby job board instead of your Lever job board.
- Close out your jobs in Lever (be sure your CSM has confirmed the sync is complete and off before taking this step).

After you complete these steps, proceed to [Ashby Admin Onboarding](docId\:aSKvbp-DfF9riogKAZshI), but don't add any jobs, departments, etc. already in Lever, since these were migrated.

# FAQ

### What is migrated from Lever?

- Jobs and job postings
- The interview plan configured in Lever
- Candidates and their application details (resumes, applications, files, interviews, feedback, tags, notes, and referral information)
- Data retention dates are not migrated. More on this below.
- Offers (offer data and offer letters)
- Interview and feedback form templates
- Users (without permissions)
- EEOC data
- Teams, Departments, and Locations (based on their links to jobs)
- Archive Reasons
- Confidential data, including Application Forms, Job Postings, and Candidates, is migrated when your API key has `Confidential data access` enabled. Without this permission, the sync fails and skips any sections containing confidential data.
- Requisitions (Openings in Ashby — Requisition IDs are mapped to Opening IDs)

**For Lever customers we cannot migrate:**

- Email templates
- Historical email communication in the candidate's feed
- Nurture sequences
- User permissions
- Offer Letter Templates
- Profile Forms
- Candidate Location
- Candidate consent dates/data retention dates

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
You can import data retention dates via a CSV import to add this information to migrated candidates once the API migration is complete. More on this can be found at [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9).
:::

### I have openings with multiple headcount attached to them. Can these be migrated?

We do not support directly migrating openings or requisitions from Lever that have multiple headcount. If you need further assistance, reach out to your CSM or the Support team.

### Will something happen to feedback forms or other things we create in Ashby prior to the migration?

If you create an object in Ashby (e.g., a feedback form template), it remains unchanged by the migration. That said, the migration moves over the objects listed above, so we recommend completing the migration first to prevent duplicating effort.

### I updated a candidate profile, but it changed back overnight. What's happening?

Letting your CSM know when they can disable the Applicant Tracking System (ATS) sync is a part of the migration process. Until that's completed, any changes you make to migrated data may be overridden.

### Why are some migrated candidates named Unknown in Ashby?

If a candidate is anonymized in Lever, they are named `Unknown` in Ashby.

### I'm seeing candidates that have migrated over from Lever with their source set as `Unspecified`. Why?

A source has not been applied to these candidates yet. Ensure that your sources are mapped appropriately via the [Lever → Ashby Recruiting API Migration Guide](docId\:Ybylw_cYkXHr0pvyKx5rk) steps above.

[title] Conditional Form Fields
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

In some cases, you may only want a question to appear in a form if the candidate answers another question in a specific way. For example, if a candidate answers 'Yes' when asked if they require sponsorship for the role they are applying for, you may want to then ask further questions based on that response. Conditional form fields allow you to create this kind of branch logic and collate additional information only when it's needed.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

You must have access to edit the forms the conditional form fields will be configured for (either as an Organization Admin or an Elevated Access user with additional permissions). More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).
:::

Conditional form fields can be configured on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Creating conditional form fields

Conditional form fields are available when configuring fields for the following forms and surveys:

- [Application Forms](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI)&#x20;
- [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR)&#x20;
- [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB)&#x20;
- [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr)&#x20;
- [Sourcing Forms](docId:0uEUEalX1VA_AY8S18ldO)&#x20;
- Forms for [Events](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS)&#x20;
- [Questionnaires](docId\:KgRji3jGZ-8tZR5bb1-kh)&#x20;
- [Quality of Hire Surveys](docId:8HGJn7fBdlsBnk1fK-2Db)&#x20;
- [Diversity Surveys](docId\:PSv0-HgPj3RvnmKMISJI4)&#x20;
- [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) Forms

Once you have added the field to your form, take the following steps to set it as conditional:

1. Click the eye icon to the bottom-right of the field

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ETG1mDf5MQAJFG98_GP_p_add-conditions-button-conditional-form-fields.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1482" height="970" darkWidth="1482" darkHeight="970" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="The eye icon to the bottom-right of the form field"}

2. Determine your conditions
   1. Click `+ Filter` if the Advanced toggle is off or `+ Add Field to Match` if the Advanced toggle is on

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r5nrl6ZiGifZrojR8eoBw_advanced-filter-conditional-form-fields.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1604" height="744" darkWidth="1604" darkHeight="744" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Setting a condition for a conditional form field using the Advanced field option"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="decimal" listStart="2" indent="2"}
Select the form field that will trigger your conditional field
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dh_Tnsj0py0_S8BAOnVdi_advanced-form-selection-conditional-form-fields.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1466" height="736" darkWidth="1466" darkHeight="736" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Selecting an application form field to use in the conditions for this form field"}

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
Location, rich text, education history and file field types are not supported for creating conditions.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="decimal" listStart="3" indent="2"}
Determine the answer that will trigger the conditional form field to show to the candidate
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KpJHJlMD2aOILuJX6n-Sm_set-condition-conditional-form-fields.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1282" height="632" darkWidth="1282" darkHeight="632" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Setting the answer for a form field as part of your form field conditions"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="decimal" listStart="4" indent="2"}
Select additional form fields and specify answers as needed
:::

3. Click `Save` to confirm your conditions
4. Click `Save Form Changes` on your form to save the form updates

Once you have saved your conditions, the eye icon shows in purple for that field so you can easily identify conditional form fields when editing forms moving forward.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/W_meWXoqSUvJJvgVvnpVY_identifying-form-fields-with-conditions.jpg)

# Editing conditional form fields

To edit your form field conditions, open the form that contains your conditional form field and click the eye icon on the field in question.

:::hint{type="info"}
Remember to save any changes to both the form field and the form.
:::

# Removing conditions from a form field

To make a form field show for all form submissions, follow these steps to remove your conditions and the form fields conditional form status:

1. Open the form and click the eye icon on your conditional form field
2. Hover over the form field set as part of your conditions and click the trash can icon to the left of it.&#x20;
   - If you set multiple conditions, remove all form fields in your conditions to revoke the conditional status.
3. Once you remove all conditions, a message confirms that the question always shows when no condition is set

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3xUNNYU4rPFGDtZCTIYRo_default-application-form-application-form-ashby-2026-07-03-at-110154-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1282" height="506" darkWidth="1282" darkHeight="506" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

4. Click `Save`
5. Click `Save Form Changes`

# Setting conditional form field conditions using operators (optional)

While configuring your conditional form field rules, you'll see the operators `And`, `Or`, and `Not`. These provide further flexibility for assigning multiple form fields to your conditions.

![The And Or and Not operators used for configuring criteria](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wopCpc7njNP90gqcPdDhj_conditional-form-field-criteria.png)

**And:** This option adds an **All are true** condition to the rule, so you can set multiple conditions; as long as all of the conditions are met, the conditional form field is shown to the candidate.

So in this example, if the candidate answers 'Yes' to the question 'Will you now or in the future require sponsorship?' and then 'Other' to 'Please specify the visa', then Ashby presents this question to them.

If they select other answers, this form field doesn't show as part of the form.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2fVHk53pO-R3NvsTnNt3R_all-are-true-conditional-form-fields.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1272" height="868" darkWidth="1272" darkHeight="868" alt="The And operator for a conditional form field, showing as All are true" showCaption="false"}

**Or:** This option adds an **Any can be true** condition to the rule. If any of the answers match any of the conditions set, Ashby displays the conditional form field to the candidate.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kimBuUNxYXUWyY-Ee8SHc_any-can-be-true-conditional-form-fields.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1272" height="856" darkWidth="1272" darkHeight="856" alt="The Or operator on a conditional form field showing as Any can be true" showCaption="false"}

**Not:** This option adds a **The following is not true** condition to the form. Candidates who do not meet the conditions specified in the rules see the conditional form field.

![The Not operator or The following is not true on a conditional form field](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wVwlg0mCQqDr4W-ukI66S_not-operator-conditional-form-fields.jpg)

You can also add these operators within one another for additional flexibility.

If you use the `Not` operator and want to add multiple conditions that the candidate needs to meet to see the conditional form field, you can select the `And` operator after setting up your first condition to add another.&#x20;

Here in our example, you can see **The following is not true** first, followed by **All are true**. This means all of the questions below need to be answered with alternative answers to the ones specified for the conditional form field to show.

:::hint{type="info"}
With the final question 'Please specify the visa', **Any can be true** determines that either of two answers to that specific question results in the conditional form field **not** showing for the candidate. The overriding `Not` operator will still be applied.
:::



::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/thhCQm3mcqMjYDWIKybxW_default-application-form-application-form-ashby-2026-07-03-at-111912-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1274" height="1248" darkWidth="1274" darkHeight="1248" alt="An example of criteria using the Not operator first, then And and finally Or for a specific question" showCaption="false"}


[title] Are there any job board integrations that do not require an account with the third-party job board?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

Ashby offers several job board integrations that don't require you to set up an account with the third-party job board. This article lists those integrations, along with any additional setup steps required for each.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- You must be an Organization Admin to configure integrations in **Integrations > Integrations**.
:::

- [ZipRecruiter](docId\:ROP__KyjbYVVy0obt0tzV)
- [X Hiring](docId\:PAvklSZzmBYclslBxXhKU)
- [Skillsire](docId\:WCDRi38WawgXjhy5r1x2a): As part of the setup, you need to reach out to the Skillsire team to complete the integration. Further promotion options are also available.
- [Himalayas](docId\:HMxKMC-ok0MUIga1q_XhV): Further promotion options are available with Himalayas featured jobs.
- [Levels.fyi](docId\:eIhxqfxZOCwhG090I50F7): As part of the setup, you need to reach out to the Levels.fyi team to complete the integration.
- [Careerjet](docId:5B9lPLWBEsHYvtZRH_YXq): Additional promotion options are available once the integration is in place. Reach out to the Careerjet team for further information.

[title] Jobs & Openings
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Looking for guidance on setting up jobs and job postings? Look no further - here you can find information on configuring jobs, job templates and postings.&#x20;

You can also find out more about setting up openings for headcount and creating confidential jobs.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🧑‍💼  [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt)&#x20;

📄 [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB)&#x20;

👯 [Job Templates](docId\:X1iE8z5PxR7FJKsPv6QEU)&#x20;

💰 [Compensation](docId:0Zkrmoq_22RNbDT3KwGuM)&#x20;

💼 [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ)&#x20;

🤫 [What is a confidential job?](docId\:oVlnsSHWbpwbIdNMraTwY)&#x20;

❓ [When and how do I close out a job?](docId\:wNJuw9oiZleJwTS_bBA21)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Historical Import Migrations
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/File-based Migrations/

Follow this guide to import your historical data from your previous ATS into Ashby

## Import Overview

File-based migrations are a two-step process:

1. Importing active candidates and job considerations so they can be added to open jobs
2. Importing historical data for your records and reporting purposes

Below, you will find a table listing the supported ATS options for which we can run a file-based migration and where you can submit a request to export your data.



| **Legacy ATS**                       | **Supported Data**                                                             |
| ------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| BambooHR                             | https\://help.bamboohr.com/s/article/1891039#applicant-tracking-ats            |
| Gem ATS                              | https\://help.gem.com/external/gem-ats-data-export-schema - support\@gem.com   |
| Gem Sourcing Import                  | https\://help.gem.com/external/gem-data-export-formatschema - support\@gem.com |
| Homerun                              | https\://help.homerun.co/en/                                                   |
| iCIMS                                | https\://careers.icims.com/customer-team                                       |
| Jobvite                              | https\://help.jobvite.com/hc/en-us/requests/                                   |
| Lever CSV                            | https\://help.lever.co/hc/en-us/requests/                                      |
| Paycor                               | https\://www\.paycor.com/services-support/                                     |
| Paylocity                            | https\://www\.paylocity.com/contact/client-support/administrator-support/      |
| Pinpoint                             | https\://www\.pinpointhq.com/contact/                                          |
| SmartRecruiters                      | https\://www\.smartrecruiters.com/about-us/contact-us/                         |
| Spark Hire Recruit (formerly Comeet) | https\://recruit-support.sparkhire.com/hc/en-us                                |
| Team Tailor                          | https\://www\.teamtailor.com/en/contact/                                       |
| Workable                             | https\://help.workable.com/hc/en-us/requests/new                               |

## Importing Active Candidates

If you have open roles in your previous ATS with active candidates, we would recommend setting up the departments, teams and jobs you’re actively hiring for manually in Ashby so you can continue hiring activities with minimal downtime.

For more information on creating jobs, check out [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt) . Once you’ve set up these jobs in Ashby, you can import your active candidate data using the CSV import tool. You can access the CSV import tool by navigating to Admin > Data Management > Bulk Data Import. More on this at [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ).

## Exporting Historical Data

To import historical data, you will need to export your data from your previous ATS. Once you’ve received your exported data from your previous ATS, your CSM or Onboarding team will send you a link via SendSafely so you can upload your exported files.

## Importing Historical Data into Ashby

Once we’ve received your files, our engineering team will get to work on the import.

We import the following data:

| **Legacy ATS**  | **Supported Data**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| BambooHR        | - Jobs — all imported as archived. Job titles are matched against existing Ashby jobs before creating a new one.
- Candidates - email, phone, LinkedIn/Twitter/website links, location, and education history
- Applications - into Lead, Application Review, Hired, or Archived. Bamboo does not provide hired or archived dates. Those dates are approximate based on the apply date.
- Custom field answers - application questions are mapped to candidate custom fields in Ashby
- Candidate comments - imported as plain candidate notes
- Resume and cover letter files - uploaded as file attachments                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Lever           | • Historical Jobs<br />• Candidates<br />• Applications<br />• Resumes<br />• Users<br />• Notes<br />• Interview Feedback<br />• Interview Stages                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| iCIMS           | Job (Optional)<br />• Title<br />• External Req ID<br />Candidate<br />• Name<br />• Email<br />• LinkedIn<br />• Phone number<br />• Added at date<br />• Source<br />• Credited to<br />• Resume<br />• User-selected custom fields<br />Application<br />• Submitted at<br />• Last activity<br />• Source<br />• Credited to<br />• Recruiter<br />• Archive Reason<br />• Interview stage (mapped to Lead, Active, Hired, or Archived)<br />Offer<br />• Offer status<br />• Created at<br />• Decided at<br />• Offer custom fields<br />Forms<br /> Selected forms will be imported as candidate notes. The note's created at date will be the date of submission, so they should show chronologically in the feed. The author of the note will be the submitter of the form (if they exist as a user in Ashby). <br />Interviews<br /> A record of the interview, all meetings of the interview with times and attendees will be imported as a candidate note. The note's created at date will be of the time of the first meeting in the interview, so they should show chronologically in the feed.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Teamtailor      | *We import the following data*<br />• Candidates<br /> ◦ Name, email, phone, social links, tags, source ◦ Notes, Feedback (imported as notes) Candidates will be matched against existing candidate profiles (based on email address).If a matching candidate profile isn’t found, a new candidate will be created. <br />• Applications<br /> (added to Ashby as job considerations) Existing applications will be searched for when importing applications - if an existing job consideration isn’t found in Ashby a new one is created. If a new job consideration is created, it will be added to one of the following stages of the job’s interview plan: Lead, Application Review, Hired, Archived. If an existing application already exists, it will not be updated with the historic information (in the case of the candidate’s application being moved forward in Ashby, rendering the imported information obsolete). <br />• Jobs<br /> (optional) Jobs will be matched against the job titles of existing jobs before creating a new one. If a new job is created, then they will follow the default interview plan on your Ashby account.As far as Team and Location go, they will be added to the job if a match is found when importing. If no match is found, a generic location and team is used. If jobs are not imported, then applications will be imported to a generic job. <br />*We will not import the following:*<br />• Job Postings<br />• Interview Plans<br />• Openings                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| SmartRecruiters | *What do we import?*<br />• Jobs<br />• Users<br />• Candidates<br />◦ Name, email, phone, location<br />◦ Notes, Feedback (imported as notes)<br />• Applications (with rejection reasons)<br />◦ Stages are mapped to default interview plan stages5<br />*What don't we import?&#x20;*<br />• Candidate sources<br />• Files<br />• Resumes<br />*Additional Information*<br />• Stages will be mapped to matching default interview plan stage<br />• Feedback will be added as notes on the candidate profile                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Workable        | *We will import the following*<br />• Jobs<br />• Candidates<br /> (including tags if these are in the candidate CSV file) Interview stages for candidates aren’t mapped due to lack of data provided from Workable. Therefore we import candidates into the following stages: Application Review, Hired, or Archived. <br />• Applications<br />• Messages and Comments (these are added as notes in Ashby)<br />• Ratings (these are mapped as scorecards in Ashby)<br />• Resumes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Jobvite         | • Jobs<br />• Candidates<br />◦ Name, email, resume, offers, phone, location<br />• Applications<br />• Notes<br />• Feedback<br /><br />*What don't we import?&#x20;*<br />•Candidate sources                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Comeet          | *We import the following*<br />• Candidates<br /> (including feedback listed as a note, notes, tags, resume, email, phone, social links and source) Candidates will be matched against existing candidate profiles (based on email address). If a matching candidate profile isn’t found, a new candidate will be created. <br />• Applications<br /> (added to Ashby as job considerations) Existing applications will be searched for when importing applications - if an existing job consideration isn’t found in Ashby a new one is created. If a new job consideration is created, it will be added to one of the following stages of the job’s interview plan: Lead, Application Review, Hired, Archived. If an existing application already exists, it will not be updated with the historic information (in the case of the candidate’s application being moved forward in Ashby, rendering the imported information obsolete). <br />• Jobs<br />Jobs will be matched against the job titles of existing jobs before creating a new one. If a new job is created, then they will follow the default interview plan on your Ashby account. As far as Team and Location go, they will be added to the job if a match is found when importing. If no match is found, a generic location and team is used. If jobs are not imported, then applications will be imported to a generic job.<br /><br />*We will not import the following&#x20;*<br />• Job Postings<br />• Interview Plans<br />• Openings                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Gem ATS         | *What do we import?*<br />- Candidates
  - Candidates are matched to existing Ashby profiles using email.
  - If no match is found, a new candidate is created.
  - Any resumes included in the export are imported and linked to the correct candidate/application (Gem assigns internal resume IDs and we map those back to real filenames).
- Applications
  - Gem ATS exports application data across multiple CSV files; we combine these into Ashby job considerations.
  - Existing applications are matched when possible; otherwise, new applications are created.
  - Application history is reconstructed from Gem’s data:
    - Gem’s stage history is added as a note on the candidate profile
    - The application creation date
    - The application termination date (rejection or hired)
      - If Gem did not include a proper “Hired” terminal stage, we infer and create a final Hired stage.
      - Archived applications are recreated with the correct archive reason, and the default Ashby archive stages are removed/rebuilt for accuracy.
- Application Feedback
  - Scorecards from Gem are converted into notes
  - If question/answer files are populated, we include mappings into the note where possible.
- Jobs
  - Job records can be imported if the customer includes them.
  - Job titles are matched against existing Ashby jobs before creating a new one.
  - Location and Team are added to the job if a match exists; otherwise, a generic option is used.
  - If jobs are not imported, applications are added to a generic job.<br />Departments & Offices<br />- Gem exports include CSVs for Departments and Offices.
- We support matching or creating these entities, but:
  - Department hierarchy is partially supported.
  - Office hierarchy (like regions → offices) is not currently supported.
  - Customers with complex hierarchies may require mapper updates.<br />*We do not import the following from Gem ATS:*<br />- Job Postings
- Interview Plans
- Scheduled Interview Events (scorecards *are* imported)
- Openings
- Complex hierarchical location/department structures |



## Post-Import

Once the import is complete, you’ll be notified by your Success Manager or the Scaled Success team. If any information you’re expecting to see is missing, do let them know.

[title] Can I disable my Ashby job board?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

This guide covers how to disable your Ashby-hosted job board if you have a custom-built job board.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions and prerequisites:**

- To disable the Ashby-hosted job board, a user must have Organization Admin access.
- You should have a custom-built job board in place prior to disabling your Ashby job board.
:::

# Disabling your Ashby-hosted job board

If you have a custom-built job board and don't want your jobs.ashbyhq.com job board to be accessible, you have the option to disable it. To do this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**.
2. Check the `Disable Ashby-hosted jobs page` checkbox.

![The Disable Ashby-hosted job page? checkbox](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/75UjqmrSJ1jhukvtBIVsJ_disable-ashby-hosted-jobs-page-checkbox.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you opt to disable your job board, then your board and job postings are no longer accessible via jobs.ashbyhq.com or via the unauthenticated job posting API. Job postings are still accessible via the authenticated job posting API. It can take a few minutes for your job board to become inaccessible.
:::

# Adding your custom-built page URL

To ensure that any referral links generated also point to your fully custom careers page (more on referrals at [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr)), you can set your custom job page URL by doing the following:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**.
2. Under **Job Board Embedding**, check the `Allow Job Board Embedding?` checkbox.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/z7y5t2jFuXAw06K8n8TAl_brand-abbye-inc-default-ashby-2026-07-29-at-121625-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1874" height="1536" darkWidth="1874" darkHeight="1536" alt="The Allow Job Board Embedding? checkbox" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Once `Allow Job Board Embedding?` is checked, you're prompted to add your custom-built job page URL.

Adding your custom page link here updates both each user's referral link and specific job referral links that are generated with your custom job page URL. The referral link contains a UTM source that you can then configure to carry over to your postings for those following referral links. You can opt to get the Ashby job posting ID from the job-specific referral link URL to then redirect to the corresponding post on your custom careers page as needed.

[title] Greenhouse → Ashby Recruiting API Migration
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/API Migrations/

This guide covers how to configure the API migration from Greenhouse to Ashby. The migration only retrieves data, and does not create, update, or delete anything in your Greenhouse account.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**

- You must be an Organization Admin in Ashby to configure the migration settings.
- You must have **Can manage ALL organization's API Credentials** access in Greenhouse to configure the required API credentials.
:::

# Step one: Generate API credentials

To create your API credentials (also referred to as a Client ID and Client Secret pair) for the Greenhouse migration:

1. In Greenhouse, click the **Configure** icon > **Dev Center** > **API Credential Management**.
2. Click `Create new API credentials`.
3. Fill in the fields:
   - **API type:** Harvest V3 (OAuth)
   - **Description:** Something identifiable, e.g., "Data Sync Integration" (do not include "Ashby" in the description).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Xdfq59m22BkK0h_u3rvaw_creating-a-new-credential-in-greenhouse.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1890" height="540" darkWidth="1890" darkHeight="540" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="The Create new credential page in Greenhouse."}

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
If you see a Partner field, select **Custom integration**.
:::

4. Click `View and Store Credentials`.
5. Save your Client Key and Client Secret, and then click `I have stored the client credentials`.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
Greenhouse shows the Client Secret only once. If you click past this screen without copying it, you need to rotate the credential to generate a new one. The Client ID remains visible afterward, but the secret does not. Copy both values to a secure location.
:::

6. Proceed to the permissions/scopes screen.

## Set the required scopes

Select read scopes on all objects. This grants "list" access, meaning Ashby can list data for each object.

Click the dropdown next to **Select All**, then go through each option and select anything with ‘List’ in the name.

For example, you may see items such as:

- `harvest:candidates:list`
- `harvest:applications:list`
- `harvest:notes:list`
- `harvest:application_stages:list`

Once all List Scopes have been selected, scroll to the bottom of the page and click `Save`.

# Step two: Configure webhooks

You need to configure 15 webhooks for the API migration. This step ensures that Ashby and Greenhouse sync key events accurately.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring webhooks, see [Setting up Greenhouse Webhooks](docId\:HgfQAxE7EcYxqsb2WjkoR).
:::

# Step three: Enter your API credentials in Ashby

Navigate to your Greenhouse Integration settings in Ashby by using [this link](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/greenhouse). This is where you enter your API credentials and subdomain.

![The Greenhouse integration page in Ashby.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/g78VJPz06n0oUWkk_RlSv_greenhouse-api-migration-docs-harvest-v1-to-v3-google-docs-2026-08-14-at-90916-am.jpg)

- **Client ID:** Enter your client ID (or client key).
- **Client Secret:** Enter your generated client secret.
- **Custom Subdomain:** Enter your custom subdomain to enable linking directly to candidate profiles from Ashby.

:::hint{type="success"}
Adding the API credentials initiates your initial data sync. After your initial data sync completes, regular syncs continue once per hour to automatically ingest new data and updates. Ashby displays the last successful sync time in your Ashby user's timezone.
:::

## What information is migrated from Greenhouse?

The API migration pulls the following data from Greenhouse:

- Departments
- Offices
- Jobs
- Openings
- Job Stages
- Custom Fields
- Candidates (including candidate notes)
  - The migration does not pull over candidate consent dates or data retention dates. You can import data retention dates via a CSV import to add this information to migrated candidates once the API migration is complete. For more information, see [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9).
- Users (the migration explicitly does **not** map user permissions)
- Scorecards
- Sources
- Candidate Tags
- Job Posts
- Offers (the migration pulls over existing offers, offer data, and offer letters, which you can find within candidate profiles, but it does **not** pull over offer letter templates)
- Resumes
- Rejection Reasons
  - Ashby syncs rejection reasons and rejection reason custom fields.
    - Ashby syncs rejection reason fields in Greenhouse as custom fields for archive reasons in Ashby.
- Rejection Questions
- Scheduled Interviews
- Degrees
- Disciplines
- EEOC
- Email Templates
  - Ashby migrates both organization and personal email templates.
    - Ashby does not replace placeholder tokens, so you must update templates to include substitution tokens in Ashby.
- Close Reasons
- Demographic Questions (these come over as a Diversity Survey in Ashby)
- Application form submissions

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby can also sync and map emails upon request.
:::

# FAQs

### Will something happen to feedback forms or other things we create in Ashby prior to the migration?

If you create an object in Ashby (e.g., a feedback form template), the migration leaves it unchanged. That said, the migration moves over the objects listed above, so we recommend completing the migration first to prevent duplicating effort.

### Help! I updated a candidate profile, but it changed back overnight!

Letting your Customer Success Manager (CSM) know when they can disable the ATS sync is part of the migration process. Until that step is complete, any changes you make to migrated data may be overridden.

### Do you migrate prospects from Greenhouse?

Ashby doesn't map any prospect-related data, so Ashby maps candidates who only have a prospect application as candidates with a Lead status. They do not have a job consideration attached to their profile.

### Why can't I see the email templates migrated from Greenhouse in my account?

Because you need to replace the substitution tokens in your email templates with Ashby tokens, Ashby syncs email templates over as Archived templates. We recommend updating your email templates and then restoring them to use them moving forward.

To amend and restore your email templates, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Email Templates**. Then use the **Active** dropdown to switch the view to see all email templates.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/84f92011f15b80ac08e132a92c62fec8.png" size="80" alt="The Active dropdown - change this to All to view all email templates." isUploading="false" width="1187" height="190" darkWidth="1187" darkHeight="190" showCaption="false"}

Click the email template in question and make the required updates, clicking the `T` icon in the email toolbar to access and add substitution tokens (for more information, see [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6)). Once you've updated your email template, click `More`, then `Restore`, to make it an active template.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5fb62e164662b3982f761079a328ea9a.png" size="70" alt="The option to restore archived email templates." isUploading="false" width="798" height="300" darkWidth="798" darkHeight="300" showCaption="false"}


[title] Home Page
[path] Navigating Ashby/

This guide covers how to navigate the Ashby home page, including how to access interviews you are on the panel for and where to view outstanding tasks.

# Overview

When you log into Ashby, you land on the home page. Here you can find the following:

![This screenshot shows the Home Page view in Ashby.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wbkv8xnupEwiiLHe3IiKR_home-page-screenshot.jpg)

- **Navigation bar:** Navigate to various areas of Ashby to view your candidates and jobs, set up reports and dashboards, and set up your Ashby organization. Depending on your access role, you may not be able to see all options on your navigation bar. You can find more on permissions at [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).
- **Views:** You can pin commonly viewed reports and dashboards here. Click `+ Add` and choose a report, recruiting plan, or dashboard to add to the **Views** list. You can then click between the **Home** view and your reports and dashboards to quickly access the data you need.
- **Interviews:** Here you can see a list of upcoming interviews you are scheduled as an interviewer for and access interviews to add your feedback and scores. Click on an interview to view the briefing, the candidate and interview details, and the feedback form to complete. Depending on the visibility settings for the organization, you may also be able to see other users' feedback prior to the interview (more on [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV)). Click `Past Interviews` to view a list of all interviews you have been on the panel for previously.
- **Tasks:** View and action any tasks assigned to you here. Tasks can include:
  - Approvals: Reviewing and approving or rejecting offers, jobs, and/or openings as part of a configured approval process.
  - Feedback: Providing feedback for an interview.
  - Follow-ups: Any overdue follow-up tasks assigned to you on a candidate's profile.
  - Mentions: Any tasks generated as part of a note being added to a candidate's profile. The task is assigned to you and appears here if you are @mentioned in the note.
  - Sequences: Any actions that need to be taken as part of a sequence (for example, sending InMail via LinkedIn).
  - Surveys: If you have been assigned a survey to complete.
- **Activities:** The **Activities** section of the home page shows how many candidates need action taken on their job considerations. They are split into the following categories:
  - Application Review: The number of candidates currently in the Application Review stage.
  - Interviews to Schedule: Candidates who need to be scheduled for an interview. This number includes any candidates who have submitted feedback via a candidate availability link who are awaiting scheduling.
  - Overdue Follow-ups: Candidates who have overdue follow-up tasks on their profiles.
  - Pending Offers: Candidates in the Offer stage who have yet to receive an offer, who are yet to accept or reject a sent offer, or who have rejected an offer. This number also includes any offers that are awaiting approval.
  - Active Candidates: The current number of candidates in Active stages of the pipeline.
- **Application Review:** If you are set as the Recruiter on the hiring team of a job, or are set as the reviewer on an application review activity, you see any applications you're assigned to review here.
  If there are outstanding review activities assigned to you as the recruiter when you are removed from the job or job consideration's hiring team, you continue to see that job in the **Application Review** section until those outstanding assigned activities are completed.
- **Jobs:** Any jobs you are following are listed here, along with a count of the candidates in the pipeline (not including candidates who have been archived).
- **Internal Job Board:** If your organization has the internal job board option enabled (more on this at [Internal Job Board](docId\:qFJslDMoUUpMByBx6A0IQ)), then you can view your organization's internal job board here.
- **Referrals:** You can add referrals directly or create referral links from here. More on adding referrals can be found at [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr).

# FAQs

### How do I leave feedback for an interview I'm on the panel for?

Once you've been scheduled as part of the panel on an interview, you see the upcoming interview in the **Interviews** section of your home page.

![An interview in the Interviews section of the home page.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3QcaKsBCxaD8GA-4SBbD__an-interview-listed-in-the-interviews-section-of-the-home-page.jpg)

You can click on this interview to see the briefing, candidate details, and feedback form. Head to the **Your Feedback** tab or click the `Enter Feedback` button to access the feedback form.

If the interview has already passed, you can also click on the interview details within the **Interview Feedback** activity in the **Tasks** section of your home page to access your feedback form.

![A feedback task for a past interview in the Tasks section of the home page.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JsM2QQqRhlymq2aOhH-_I_a-past-interview-in-the-tasks-section-of-the-home-page.jpg)

### How do I skip leaving feedback for an interview?

If your feedback is no longer required for an interview, you can click the three dots to the right of the task within **Tasks**, then click `Resolve without Feedback` to stop overdue feedback email notifications and remove the task from your home page.

You can still access the interview details and the feedback form via the `Past Interviews` link within the **Interviews** section of your home page.

![The resolve without feedback option on a feedback task.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/K9fTb_7uSmzfoyQCGTCtH_home-ashby-2026-08-18-at-12309-pm.jpg)

### There's a ? icon in the top navigation bar — what is that for?

You can click the `?` icon to do the following:

- If you need to reach out to Support, you can find the email address to contact us on this menu.
- Try out Ashby HelpHub for in-app assistance.
- Access documentation in Ashby Knowledge Base and Analytics Help.
- Access Ashby Academy for further learning.
- Install the Ashby Chrome Extension (more on this at Chrome Extension).
- View new product updates under **What's New?**

### Where can I view my feedback and records of previous interviews I've been on the panel for?

To view information about all previous interviews you've been on the panel for, click `Past Interviews` within the **Interviews** section on the home page. You can then see your interview history. You can click on any of the interviews listed to view the interview information, including your feedback.


[title] Bulk Import: CSV Import
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/Bulk Import/Untitled/

The CSV import feature supports creating candidate profiles and openings in bulk by uploading a CSV file containing the details you want to upload. There is no explicit limit to the number of candidates or openings you can upload at once. Ashby uploads large files in batches. Once the upload starts, you can leave the page and return when it is complete. Common use cases for this feature include:

- Migrating candidates from your legacy ATS (if Ashby doesn't support an alternative)
- Uploading your annual headcount plan
- Uploading leads from projects or talent pools in your legacy sourcing tool

:::hint{type="warning"}
When you import very large files (over 100,000 rows of candidates), you may experience a network error. In these cases, we recommend splitting the file into a few smaller files and uploading them as separate CSVs.
:::

# Overview

This video is optional viewing. All of the steps are documented below.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/064995350936406a9591cce3fb2b1a96"}

# Permissions and access

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions**

- By default, only users with Organization Admin access can complete CSV imports.
- You can grant Elevated Access users the ability to bulk import data if needed. For more information, see [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).
:::

# Step one: Prepare your file

The quality of the data you import into Ashby impacts the quality of data you get out of it. To ensure high quality, we recommend preparing your file before uploading it to Ashby.

Before you start, review the following:

- CSV file requirements
  - File uses the .csv file format
  - File has headers for every column
  - File uses comma delimiters
  - File has the same number of columns in every row
- Data quality suggestions
  - Data is complete (Are there gaps in your data? If so, consider resolving this before importing)
  - Data is accurate (Is this data correct?)
  - Data is relevant (Are there data points that don't add to your knowledge about the candidates? If so, consider archiving outside of Ashby)
  - Data is timely (Is this historical data that will be frustrating to filter out later? If so, consider archiving outside of Ashby)
- Additional tips
  - Use Google Sheets' cleaning tools
  - Make sure there isn't any formatting, just data
  - Make sure there isn't any unexpected metadata at the top or bottom of the file
  - If you are importing information into a custom checkbox field (for more on custom fields, see [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs)), be sure to use a semicolon if you are adding multiple values (for example, Remote; In-Office; Hybrid)

You can use the following templates as a starting point (optional):

- [](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1SZmAn605_5Z5OOql38bf4_kBSEJYY-FzAe2rmvxYtE0/edit#gid=1204658108)
- [Job Import Template](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1bpK7LI58FoQtyP4_Ek4wc8Xn0DCWyQ19UOx68qlYrBg/edit?gid=0#gid=0)
- [Opening Import Template](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/18p7WhFsgPH1iRtFd8rpJAQhsp6zQo830popBX1J6Y7s/edit?usp=sharing)

# Step two: Import a CSV file

Once you're ready to upload your data, you do so in four stages:

1. Upload your file
2. Mapping
3. Starting the Import
4. Summary

## Import

To import a file:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Data Management >&#x20;**[Bulk Data Import](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-import/bulk-import).
2. Click `Upload CSV` in the top right corner of the page.
3. Select the import type, then locate and select the file to import.
4. Determine the import settings (if applicable), then move on to mapping the data.

## Mapping

The mapping step allows you to match any structured field to a corresponding column in your file. If there are columns you don't want to upload, ignore them by clicking the `Ignore this column` button, and the importer skips them. Check that all fields you'd like to import have been mapped. If a field defaults to being ignored, click `Select Field on Candidate` to determine the field the value should be mapped to.

Once you've mapped your fields, click `Start Import` to kick off the import.

:::hint{type="info"}
Once you've initiated an import, it can take some time to complete. There are no explicit limits on the number of candidates or openings you can upload at once. If your list is large, Ashby uploads your data in batches and it takes longer to complete. You can leave the page and come back later once an upload finishes.
:::

## Summary

The summary view shows a list of the entries you've uploaded and any skipped due to errors. For candidates, you have a variety of bulk actions you can take on the candidate profiles that are generated.

![An example summary page for a candidate import.](https://cdn.zappy.app/14b3709b0c9bb316e93a145d8e6710aa.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If there's an issue with the upload, you can delete it with the `Delete All Imported X` button.&#x20;
:::

# What you can import via CSV

## Candidates

Using this option creates individual candidate profiles. To upload or update candidates using a CSV file:

1. Click `Upload CSV` in the Bulk Upload section of Admin, then select `Candidatess`.
2. Select your CSV file to start uploading it.
3. Determine the Import Settings
   - **Import Mode:** This setting allows you to determine whether the import should only create new entries, only update existing entries, or both create new entries and update existing ones.
   - **Enable email enrichment?** You have the option to enrich profiles with emails in bulk. This option requires the candidate name and LinkedIn URL to be included in the import.
   - **Only match open jobs:** By default, Ashby only maps applications to open jobs, but you can uncheck this checkbox to map applications to all jobs.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/dfbff5a9bfd14b9e429f2c90442305e9.png" size="100" alt="The bulk candidate import page open to the Import Settings section. " isUploading="false" width="1613" height="579" darkWidth="1613" darkHeight="579" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Click `Start Import`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Many structured data fields can be uploaded, so review the upload options in Ashby before completing your upload. If you're unsure, confirm by reaching out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).
:::

The following fields can be imported:

| Fields                            | Description                                                                                                         |
| --------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Name                              | Candidate's Full Name; we also support separate first and last name options.                                        |
| Current Employer                  | The candidate's current employer.                                                                                   |
| Current Job (Position)            | The candidate's current job title.                                                                                  |
| Email Address (Personal, Primary) | The candidate's email address.                                                                                      |
| Phone Number (Personal, Primary)  | The candidate's phone number.                                                                                       |
| Tag(s)                            | Either apply existing tags you have in Ashby or create new ones and apply them to this candidate.                   |
| Social Profile URLs(s)            | URLs for social profiles like LinkedIn, Twitter, Github, and portfolios.                                            |
| Source Type                       | Top-level source, Ashby's default options include Inbound, Internal, Sourced, Referral. Required to apply a source. |
| Source                            | Sub-source, required to apply a source to a job consideration.                                                      |
| Credited To                       | Email of the user who sourced this candidate.                                                                       |
| Job                               | This is the job they are/were considered for. Required to apply a source.                                           |
| Current Interview Stage Name      | Current stage the candidate is in for the job they are/were considered for.                                         |
| Project                           | Talent pool or list of candidates you're not actively considering.                                                  |

### Importing candidates: best practices

- To import data like the job and stage a candidate is associated with, or the source of their application, you first need to ensure that information exists in Ashby:
- If you'd like to include your candidate's source, you must include both a `Source Type` and a `Source` column in your file. Source Types are top-level values that Sources are nested under to simplify reporting. To add a source, you must also include a source type. These should already be added [on the Sources page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources) in Ashby Admin before importing.
- If you'd like to upload candidates to specific jobs, those jobs must be set up in Ashby first. By default, Ashby only maps applications to open jobs, but you can uncheck the `Only match open jobs` checkbox to map applications to all jobs. The name of the job in Ashby must exactly match the name of the job in the CSV. You can archive any historical jobs once the import is complete.
- When adding or updating existing candidates, ensure that each row contains the candidate's name and an identifying field. An identifying field can be an email address, a phone number, or a social profile URL (LinkedIn or GitHub).
- If two rows contain the same identifying data (for example, two candidate rows having the same email address), you get an error. Ensure that each candidate is listed only once in the CSV file to avoid this issue.
- If importing any dates as part of your candidate data, the date/time should be an ISO 8601-compliant string (e.g., 1982-05-25, 2017-04-22T20:47:05.335-04:00).
- If you have any concerns about your data quality before importing, we suggest starting fresh with Ashby and archiving your historical candidates' data somewhere you can find it.
- If you are importing hired candidates, you cannot import data like the Hired At date or other offer information directly into offer fields in Ashby.
- You cannot upload feed data like emails, feedback forms, applications, resumes, and surveys using the bulk CSV import feature.&#x20;

### Candidate attribution

`Credited To` and `Source` are collectively known as the "Attribution" fields. Candidates may have attribution fields. Individual applications may have attribution fields. They may not necessarily be the same. The candidate's attribution fields are intended to be the original source for that candidate's entry into Ashby. Therefore, Ashby attempts to keep the candidate source from updating as you consider candidates for new jobs or make changes to applications. In those cases, Ashby updates the application's attribution fields. The attribution fields in the CSV uploader reflect this behavior:

- If the imported information creates a new candidate, the attribution fields in the import file always apply to the candidate.
- If a candidate already exists in Ashby for the imported information, and you are also importing information about an application, Ashby only updates the application's attribution field.
- If you would like to update a candidate's attribution fields, only include candidate information in your import.
- If you are updating the Credited To field, include the email of the user or employee the candidate should be credited to, not their name. This field only accepts email addresses.

### Post-upload actions

Once candidates are imported, you can take bulk actions on the import list. To complete these actions, select individual candidates, or all candidates using the checkboxes, then click the button that corresponds with the action you'd like to take.&#x20;

![The Summary page for a candidate import, showing bulk action options. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/14b3709b0c9bb316e93a145d8e6710aa.png)

Ashby supports the following bulk actions:

- `Consider for Job`: add candidates to a job consideration (if the file didn't include the job consideration already).
- `Add to Project`: add candidates to a project. Projects are a simple way to keep track of candidates who are not currently interviewing but whom you want to stay in touch with for the future.
- `Set Tags`: add tags to candidate profiles.
- `Email`: send candidates a one-off email using a shared email template or one of your personal email templates.
- `Enroll in Sequence`: add candidates to an email sequence.
- `Request Review`
- `More`:
  - Transfer
  - Anonymize
  - Delete
  - Remove from Project
  - Mark as Do Not Contact
  - Set Tags
  - Send Data Consent Request
  - Add to Event

:::hint{type="info"}
If there's an issue with the upload, you can delete it with the `Delete All Imported Candidates` button. This will not impact candidates that were only updated by the import.
:::

## Candidate follow-ups

You can bulk add follow-ups across candidate profiles:

1. Click `Upload CSV` in the Bulk Upload section of Admin, then select `Candidate Follow-up`.
2. Select your CSV file to start uploading it.
3. Map your file fields to fields in Ashby, then click `Start Import` to kick off the import.

When it comes to mapping data after uploading your CSV file, you can map the following data fields.

| **Field Name**  | **Description**                              | **Formatting Notes**                                                                                                                                              | **Example**                                            |
| --------------- | -------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| Candidate Email | The email of the candidate to follow up with |                                                                                                                                                                   | [abbye@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:abbye@learn-ashby.com) |
| Date            | The date when the follow-up is due           | The date/time should be an ISO 8601-compliant string (e.g., 1982-05-25, 2017-04-22T20:47:05.335-04:00)                                                            | 2025-10-31                                             |
| Note            | Notes for the follow-up                      |                                                                                                                                                                   | Please reach out to this candidate                     |
| Status          | The status of the follow-up                  | Ashby imports the following as *resolved*: completed, resolved, done, cancelled, skipped, expired. Ashby imports follow-ups with all other statuses as *pending*. | Completed                                              |
| Assignee Name   | The name of the assignee of the follow-up    |                                                                                                                                                                   | Emily Example                                          |
| Assignee Email  | The email of the assignee of the follow-up   |                                                                                                                                                                   | [abbye@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:abbye@learn-ashby.com) |

Once the import is complete, the follow-up tasks appear on the candidate's feed. If the follow-up is due, it also shows on the assignee user's home page as a task.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/32d36b83f862c1be54eb47e5cc863e12.png" size="82" width="482" height="182" position="center" darkWidth="482" darkHeight="182" showCaption="false" alt="An imported follow up."}

## Jobs

If you need to add or update jobs in bulk, you can upload them by doing the following:

1. Click `Upload CSV` in the Bulk Upload section of Admin, then select `Jobs`.
2. Select your CSV file to start uploading it.
3. Determine the Import Settings
   - **Import Mode:** This setting allows you to determine whether the import should only create new entries or only update existing entries. Create and Update is not available for importing jobs. If you are both creating and updating jobs, you need to do two separate imports.
4. Map your file fields to fields in Ashby, then click `Start Import` to kick off the import.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are looking to update jobs that are already in Ashby, be sure to include either the requisition ID or the Ashby job ID fields in your CSV file.

You can use [this template](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1bpK7LI58FoQtyP4_Ek4wc8Xn0DCWyQ19UOx68qlYrBg/edit?gid=0#gid=0) to ensure your data is formatted correctly before uploading, or see the information below on exporting a CSV of existing job data to use as a template for an import to update jobs.
:::

You can map and import the following fields for creating and updating jobs in Ashby:

| **Field Name**             | **Description**                                                                                               | **Formatting Notes**                                                                                                                                           | **Example**                                                                                                    |
| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Title**                  | The title of the job                                                                                          |                                                                                                                                                                | Backend Engineer                                                                                               |
| **Team**                   | The department or team connected to the job                                                                   | Must exactly match an existing team in your Ashby account.                                                                                                     | Product                                                                                                        |
| **Location**               | The location connected to the job                                                                             | Must exactly match an existing location in your Ashby account.                                                                                                 | New York                                                                                                       |
| **Job Status**             | The status of the job                                                                                         | Can be Open, Closed, Archived, or Draft                                                                                                                        | Open                                                                                                           |
| **Requisition ID**         | The requisition ID linked to the job.                                                                         |                                                                                                                                                                | 123                                                                                                            |
| **Ashby Job ID**           | The internal job ID within Ashby.                                                                             | This field should only be used for updating jobs.                                                                                                              |                                                                                                                |
| **Employment Type**        | The type of employment linked to the job.                                                                     |                                                                                                                                                                | Full-time, Part-time, Contractor                                                                               |
| **Closed At**              | If the job has been closed, the date that the job was closed at.                                              | The date/time should be an ISO 8601-compliant string (e.g., 1982-05-25, 2017-04-22T20:47:05.335-04:00)                                                         | 2025-05-25                                                                                                     |
| **Hiring Manager**         | The hiring manager linked to the job (must be an active user in Ashby — add the user's email address)         | Multiple hiring managers should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                             | [abbye@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:abbye@learn-ashby.com), [jared@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:jared@learn-ashby.com) |
| **Recruiter**              | The recruiter linked to the job (must be an active user in Ashby — add the user's email address)              | Multiple recruiters should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                  | [abbye@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:abbye@learn-ashby.com), [jared@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:jared@learn-ashby.com) |
| **Recruiting Coordinator** | The recruiting coordinator linked to the job (must be an active user in Ashby — add the user's email address) | Multiple recruiting coordinators should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                     | [abbye@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:abbye@learn-ashby.com), [jared@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:jared@learn-ashby.com) |
| **Sourcer**                | The sourcer linked to the job (must be an active user in Ashby — add the user's email address)                | Multiple sourcers should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                    | [abbye@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:abbye@learn-ashby.com), [jared@learn-ashby.com](mailto\:jared@learn-ashby.com) |
| **Custom Fields**          | See [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) for more information on supported field types.              | Ensure that the fields are in the appropriate format to match the job-specific custom field (for example, importing yes/no answers into a yes/no custom field) | High Priority (Y/N)?                                                                                           |

### Creating jobs

When creating jobs via the bulk import option, the job Title, Team, and Location are required. Ensure that these fields are included in your CSV file.

### Updating jobs

When updating jobs via bulk import, either the Ashby Job ID or Requisition ID is required (the job title, location, and team are not required). If you provide both in the import, Ashby uses the Ashby Job ID, and you can then update the Requisition ID via the bulk import.

You can also use the template above to update job details, or you can create a job export using the steps below.

### Creating a CSV export of job data for bulk updates

:::hint{type="info"}
Custom reports are not available on the Foundations plan.
:::

To create a CSV export of job data to use as a base to update your jobs in Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Reports > Report Builder**.
2. Select the custom list report option.
3. Set the subject to `Jobs`.
4. Use the filters to determine the jobs you'd like to export (for example, filtering by the job department).
5. Click `Add Field to Show` to select the specific job fields you'd like to bulk update.
   - Be sure to include the Ashby Job ID and/or Requisition ID fields in your report, as one of these fields must be provided to update your jobs.

![An example of a custom list report that you can use to export job data.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8fb1deba9498847f39791bbb56a5e9c8.png)

Click `Export CSV` (listed above your results on the right-hand side) to export the data in the CSV format.

### Manually locating the Ashby job ID

- In addition to using CSV exports, you can locate the job ID by navigating to **Jobs > Jobs**, clicking into the job in question, and then copying the ID number from the URL.
- The requisition ID is listed within the **Settings** section of the job. If you do not have requisition IDs assigned to your jobs, use the Ashby job ID instead.

### Mapping your job fields for updating jobs

![Finding a job ID within a URL when viewing a job.](https://cdn.zappy.app/158dd08a09cc85d76d753f013f00efcb.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/19f13cbf11c20a7eda2fa26bfb7feb8f.png)

When mapping your job data, map only the field with the job or requisition ID and any fields with updated data to the fields on your jobs. Click `Ignore this column` beside any fields that you don't want to import or update on your jobs.

:::hint{type="warning"}
When updating existing jobs via CSV import, any mapped hiring team field (Hiring Manager, Recruiter, Recruiting Coordinator, or Sourcer) overwrites the hiring team role on the job.

To avoid removing existing team members by accident, include all hiring team roles you'd like to keep on the job in your CSV and map all hiring team role fields during import.

For example, if you want to update the Recruiter but keep the current Hiring Manager on a job, your CSV must include both fields with the appropriate data.
:::

You must map or ignore all fields in your CSV before you can start your import.

![Ignore columns for data you do not want to import.](https://cdn.zappy.app/9ba99c8210e1bcd1bad807d16196e957.png)

### Post-upload actions

We don't currently support taking bulk actions on jobs after they've been uploaded. To manage your jobs in Ashby, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select the job in question to make amendments.

## Openings

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ) for more information on how to use the Openings feature. [Use this template](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/18p7WhFsgPH1iRtFd8rpJAQhsp6zQo830popBX1J6Y7s/edit?usp=sharing) to ensure your data is formatted correctly before uploading. Bulk imports for Openings are not available on the Foundations plan.
:::

Using this option creates individual openings on the Openings tab within the Jobs section of Ashby. The table below outlines the supported fields and corresponding formatting examples.

![Opening details - when you generate openings, these fields will be populated with the data you map.](https://cdn.zappy.app/5271ce4b3bbfb5f99daf8f93468192e3.png)

To import openings:

1. Click `Upload CSV` in the Bulk Upload section of Admin, then select `Openings`.
2. Select your CSV file to start uploading it.
3. Map your file fields to fields in Ashby, then click `Start Import` to kick off the import.

The following fields can be imported.

| **Field Name**                       | **Description**                                                                  | **Formatting Notes**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              | **Formatting Example**                                                           |
| ------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Opening ID (required)**            | Numeric or alphanumeric ID associated with a unique opening.                     | There shouldn't be any duplicate IDs.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             | `ASHBY-1`                                                                        |
| **Status**                           | The opening's current status.                                                    | Can be one of Draft, Approved, Open, Closed, or Filled.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           | `Draft`                                                                          |
| **Description**                      | One line text field describing the opening.                                      | Limited to 240 characters.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | `Senior Backend Engineer`                                                        |
| **Team**                             | The name of the existing team in Ashby.                                          | The format is case-sensitive and should exactly match an existing team in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  | `Engineering`                                                                    |
| **Job(s)**                           | Expects one or more jobs.                                                        | Multiple jobs should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           | `Senior Backend Engineer (EMEA),Senior Backend Engineer (AMER)`                  |
| **Ashby Job ID**                     | The internal job ID within Ashby.                                                | This can be used to identify specific Ashby jobs when you have multiple jobs with the same job title.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |                                                                                  |
| **Location(s)**                      | Expects a comma-separated list of names of locations that already exist in Ashby | Multiple locations should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | `Europe,North and South America`                                                 |
| **Recruiter(s) (Role)**              | Email address(es) of the Recruiter(s) associated with the opening.               | Multiple Recruiters should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     | `ravan@learn-ashby.com`                                                          |
| **Recruiting Coordinator(s) (Role)** | Email address(es) of the Recruiting Coordinator(s) associated with the opening.  | Multiple Recruiting Coordinators should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | `abbye@learn-ashby.com,jared@learn-ashby.com`                                    |
| **Hiring Manager(s) (Role)**         | Email address(es) of the Hiring Manager(s) associated with the opening.          | Multiple Hiring Managers should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                | `kelsey@learn-ashbyhq.com`                                                       |
| **Sourcer(s) (Role)**                | Email address(es) of the Sourcer(s) associated with the opening.                 | Multiple Sourcers should be added as comma-separated values                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | `joel@learn-ashby.com`                                                           |
| **Employment Type**                  | Type of employment associated with the role.                                     | Expects one of the following values: Full time, Part time, Intern, Temporary, Contract                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | `full time`                                                                      |
| **Is Backfill?**                     | Indicates if this opening is a backfill.                                         | Expects common boolean values: Yes/No, Y/N, 1/0                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | `Yes`                                                                            |
| **Target Hire Date**                 | Date an offer is expected to be accepted                                         | The date/time should be an ISO 8601-compliant string (e.g., 1982-05-25, 2017-04-22T20:47:05.335-04:00)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | `2023-04-22`                                                                     |
| **Target Start Date**                | Date the hire is expected to start                                               | The date/time should be an ISO 8601-compliant string (e.g., 1982-05-25, 2017-04-22T20:47:05.335-04:00)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | `2023-05-29`                                                                     |
| **Compensation Range**               | The compensation range associated with the opening.                              | Expects a string formatted as `min_value/max_value/currency_code/interval`. Requires at least one of min or max value (for an exact salary, include just one value). The currency code should be an ISO 4217-compliant alphabetic code (e.g., USD, JPY). Accepted interval values: once, per hour, per day, per week, bi-weekly, per month, per year, per half year, per half month, per quarter. | `70000/80000/USD/per-year`<br />`70000//USD/per-year`<br />`/80000/USD/per-year` |
| **Additional custom fields**         | Expects values that align with the custom fields your team creates.              | See [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) for more information about the field types supported.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           | `Tier 3`                                                                         |

### Post-upload actions

We don't currently support taking bulk actions on openings after they've been uploaded. To manage your uploaded openings, visit the [Openings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/openings) page in the Jobs section of Ashby.

### Bulk updating openings

If you'd like to bulk update openings, you can do so by importing a CSV of updated opening data. When bulk importing updates for openings, be sure to check the following:

- The opening IDs in the CSV match the IDs of the openings you are looking to update.
- The names of teams/departments and locations exactly match those you have set up in Ashby.

When mapping your opening data, map only the field with the opening ID and any fields with updated data to the fields on your openings. Click `Ignore this column` beside any fields that you don't want to import. You must map or ignore all fields in your CSV before you can start your import.

![The option to ignore a column when importing openings.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f515d50470fb2324dc949c4875486b51.png)

## Employees

The Employee import is intended for importing key interviewer information into employee profiles at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.&#x20;

To import employee data:

1. Click `Upload CSV` in the Bulk Upload section of Admin, then select `Employees`.
2. Select your CSV file to start uploading it.
3. Determine the Import Settings
   - **Import Mode:** This setting allows you to determine whether the import should only create new entries, only update existing entries, or both create new entries and update existing ones.
4. Map your file fields to fields in Ashby, then click `Start Import` to kick off the import.

The following data can be imported.

| **Field Name**             | **Description**                                                                                  | **Formatting Notes**                                                              | **Formatting Example**                                                                             |
| -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Name**                   | The name of an employee.                                                                         |                                                                                   | Rosie Recruiter                                                                                    |
| **Email (required)**       | The email address of an existing employee.                                                       | Must exactly match the email of an existing user if updating employees.           |                                                                                                    |
| **Job Title**              | The employee's job title.                                                                        | No character limit. This title may be shown to candidates this person interviews. | Recruiter                                                                                          |
| **Daily Interview Limit**  | The greatest number of interviews the employee can be booked for in a day via direct booking.    | Must be an integer greater than or equal to zero.                                 | 3                                                                                                  |
| **Weekly Interview Limit** | The greatest number of interviews the employee can be booked for in a week via direct booking.   | Must be an integer greater than or equal to the daily interview limit.            | 7                                                                                                  |
| **Interviewer Pools**      | See [Interviewer Training](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb) for more information.                   | Multiple pools should be added as comma-separated values                          | Business Operations,Managers                                                                       |
| **LinkedIn Profile URL**   | The employee's LinkedIn Profile URL.                                                             |                                                                                   | [https://www.linkedin.com/in/abbye-eva-908364ab/](https://www.linkedin.com/in/abbye-eva-908364ab/) |
| **Custom Fields**          | See [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) for more information on supported field types. |                                                                                   | People Manager (Y/N)?                                                                              |

You can also import an employee's status (as activated or deactivated) to update their profile status in Ashby.&#x20;

# FAQs

### What candidate data can I upload via the bulk CSV import feature?

- Things you can import:
  - Candidate demographics
  - Current job application
  - The current interview plan stage
  - Current status
- Things you can't import:
  - Resumes\*
  - Other files
  - Notes
  - Long text fields

\*The Ashby team can upload resume files separately. Reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to request this.

### How does Ashby handle duplicate candidates?

The bulk import feature catches duplicates by checking across candidate information including GitHub and LinkedIn URLs and emails. If Ashby finds matches, it doesn't create a new candidate and instead updates the existing candidate with any new information. If you are using the email import feature and sending over a resume for a candidate profile that already exists, Ashby flags the duplicate and you receive an error.

### Something went wrong; how do I undo the upload?

If you'd like to undo your upload, you can delete all uploaded candidates or openings at the bottom of the summary page once an upload is complete. This does not affect candidates or openings that were only updated during the import.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a0dda0c7ffe398ea831500cd66039aa9.png)

### Can I import data into custom fields when importing via the bulk CSV importer?

Yes. You can select custom fields at the mapping stage. For more information, see our [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) guide.

### Can I import a candidate and consider them for multiple jobs as part of the import process?

No. When importing candidates, you can only add them to the pipeline of one job. You need to add further job considerations to the candidate's profile after the import.

### I have multiple jobs with the same job title. How do I ensure the candidate is imported to the correct role?

If you have multiple jobs with the same job title in Ashby, you can do the following to map the candidate to the correct job based on requisition ID:

1. Add an existing requisition ID or create a new one in the **Requisition ID** field on the job. To add a requisition ID to a job in Ashby, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, then go to the **Settings** tab within the job or jobs in question.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e5e5befea79541aafad1d4e744fd4781.png" size="74" width="779" height="492" darkWidth="779" darkHeight="492" position="center" showCaption="false"}

2. Ensure that the requisition ID is also added to your CSV file (if you didn't have a requisition ID for the role to begin with).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/8cec2e8ab892758015cb29f3df272baa.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="344" height="96" darkWidth="344" darkHeight="96" showCaption="false"}

3. Import your candidates and opt to map the **Requisition ID** field in your CSV file to the Job Consideration's **Job Title** field.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7cea9e2a33cc90fb5fcb59a0117368a1.png" size="86" width="707" height="141" position="center" darkWidth="707" darkHeight="141" showCaption="false"}

### Can I apply a job template to a job I import via a CSV file?

You can't currently apply a job template to jobs imported via a CSV file.

### The locations in my import file have commas (for example, New York, New York). How do I import these?

When a location value in the CSV contains a comma, the importer interprets it as a column separator and throws an error. To get around this wrap those values in brackets and quotes: \["New York, New York"] in the original file.


[title] Job Board: Application Spam Protection
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

Ashby's application spam protection verifies submitted job application forms and attempts to detect whether a real candidate is submitting the form or if it might be a bot. This setting lets you adjust the threshold at which Ashby rejects applications.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & Prerequisites:&#x20;**&#x4F;nly those with Organization Admin access can adjust job board theme settings.
:::

To set your protection level:

- Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**
  - If you have [Multiple Brands](docId\:jwP6kjsKgGJZAadNNfU5D)  configured, select the brand in question
- Scroll to the Application Spam Protection section at the bottom of the page
- Use the `Protection Level` drop down to set protection level

You can choose from the following options:

- **Strict** — Only use this level as a last resort. Some candidates experience problems submitting their applications.
- **Permissive (Recommended)** — This is the recommended level. You might get spam applications once in a while.
- **Less Permissive** — The chance of getting spam applications is very low. Candidates might experience problems submitting their applications from time to time.
- **No Protection** — Ashby turns off spam protection entirely and accepts all application submissions.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4dd09c023db0dc55993cca0eeead6ab7.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you receive many spam applications, you can try a stricter setting. A strict setting might cause Ashby to reject applications from actual candidates.
:::

For more information on flagging applications, check out [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl). Looking to limit the number of applications one candidate can submit? Check out [Application Limits](docId\:DTFh2I3HX_EkQBVgwW8FI).




[title] Reporting on Approvals
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/Untitled/

# Overview

Some approval fields are available to add as columns to custom list reports or to group results by in segmentation or count over time reports.

Custom reports can be configured on the Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** Approval processes must be configured and used before they can be reported on. For more on creating and using approval flows, check out [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo).
:::

# Approval fields for offers

| Column field name                                                        | Description                                                                                        |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process Approved At          | The timestamp showing the date and time the offer was approved.                                    |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Created At         | The timestamp showing the date and time the approval request was created.                          |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Completed Approver | The approvers on the completed approval.                                                           |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Approver           | The approvers on the approval (including pending, cancelled, overridden, approved, and completed). |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Requester          | The requester on the approval.                                                                     |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Rejection Note     | If an approval was rejected, the note included as part of the rejection.                           |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Rejected By        | The approver who rejected the approval.                                                            |
| Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Status             | The status of the offer approval.                                                                  |

# Approval fields for openings

| Column field name                                       | Description                                                                                        |
| ------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Approved At        | The timestamp showing the date and time the opening was approved.                                  |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Created At         | The timestamp showing the date and time the approval request was created.                          |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Completed Approver | The approvers on the completed approval.                                                           |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Approver           | The approvers on the approval (including pending, cancelled, overridden, approved, and completed). |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Requester          | The requester on the approval.                                                                     |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Rejection Note     | If an approval was rejected, the note included as part of the rejection.                           |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Rejected By        | The approver who rejected the approval.                                                            |
| Opening's Current Approval Process's Status             | The status of the opening approval.                                                                |

These allow you to see approvers for openings, and offers at a glance and also open up auditing opportunities.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Reporting fields for job approvals are not currently available.&#x20;
:::

# Example reports

## Offers pending approval

The example report below provides a list of offers pending approval, including the approvers and those approvers who have completed their step of the approval process.

![An example report showing all offers pending approval](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F4ycVWHxBEzd6RTGAs-CW_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-05-22-at-114836-am.jpg)

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Offers

**Filters:** Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Status = Pending

**Columns:** Job Consideration's Candidate

Job Consideration's Job

Job Consideration's Job's Team

Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Completed Approver

Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Approver

## Approval information for an audit

You may want to pull a custom list report showing offer information, including the approvers, and configure [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) to go to your HR team. The example report setup below includes some offer details and the approval details in one table.

![An example report for an offer approval audit](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Iqvrxok_43-knzpGxM2DR_offer-approval-audit-report.jpg)

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Job Considerations

**Filters:** Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Approved At \[set your time range here]

**Columns:** Job Consideration's Candidate

Job Consideration's Job

Job Consideration's Job's Team

Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Version's HRBP (this is a custom field, more on configuring this below)

Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Completed Approver

Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Approver

Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Approval Process's Requester

Job Consideration's Offer's Latest Version's Salary

## Configuring the HRBP custom field

You can create an offer custom field to have the option to add an HR team member or HRBP to the offer and pull it into the report dynamically. To configure this custom field:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields**.
2. Click on the `Offer` tab, then the `+ New` button.
3. Give your custom field a title, then set it to be an Employee custom field.

Now when you are creating an offer, you can set an employee who is on your HR team as the user in this field. They then appear in the HRBP column of your report.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on setting up custom fields, check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).
:::

## Creating an alert for your audit report

If you'd like to send Slack and email notifications with report information to your HRBP or other users for audit, you can configure an alert once you've saved your custom list report.

Click the `Alerts` button, then `Add Alert`.

Configure the alert settings:

- When the alert should be sent (a full list periodically or new records as soon as they are added).
- How they should be sent (via email or Slack).
- Who they should be sent to:
  - If you have a group of specific users this report should go to, click `+ Add user or email` to add them as recipients individually.
  - If you've configured a custom HRBP field, you can set this field as a recipient field by clicking `+ Add user role` and selecting the appropriate field.

![Setting up an alert for an audit report](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jngrPJRBdxFuwNjDnEQxg_alert-setup-for-audit.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
You can read more about configuring alerts in [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW).
:::


[title] How do I generate an API key?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

This guide covers how to generate and manage Application Programming Interface (API) keys on the [API Credentials](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/credentials) page in **Admin**.﻿

:::hint{type="info"}
For further information on the API, check out [Ashby's API documentation](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/).
:::

# Permissions & access

API Keys are available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to generate API keys in Ashby.
:::

# Video overview

This video overview is optional - see below for step-by-step written instructions.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/1d65b74344cd455ea4c11ec47752ea61"}

# Create a new API key

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations >** [API Credentials](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/credentials).
2. Click `+ New` to open the API key setup wizard.
3. Name the key, specify a version, and, optionally, select an Integration Partner.
4. Click `Create API Key` to continue.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3BK2E_Yy5zHBh_YSZr4vv_api-credentials-ashby-2026-09-22-at-11100-pm.jpg" size="90" isUploading="false" width="785" height="455" darkWidth="785" darkHeight="455" alt="Create an API Credential dialog in Ashby with fields to name the API key and optionally select an integration partner, followed by steps for API Scopes and Credentials." showCaption="false"}

5. Select the endpoint permissions. By default, the key has no permissions.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7PdNXtZ8teeMWxGEvQBlC_api-credentials-ashby-2026-09-22-at-11332-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="784" height="877" darkWidth="784" darkHeight="877" alt="Create an API Credential dialog on the API Scopes step, showing endpoint permission modules with Read and Write checkboxes and options to select all permissions." showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Use the checkboxes to allow access to each module and determine whether to grant read or write access to that module.&#x20;
:::

::::hint{type="info"}
:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Hover over each module to view the endpoints it can access.
:::
::::

6. Scroll down to **Other Permissions** and determine whether to grant any additional permissions, including:
   - Allowing access to confidential jobs and projects
   - Allowing access to non-offer private fields
   - Allowing updates to application history
   - Allowing access to quality of hire data
   - Allowing access to Hiring Manager Experience survey data
   - Allowing on-behalf-of requests (enabling the API key to perform actions as a specific user)

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pOxS0FDL8NhI1M9MasAwO_api-credentials-ashby-2026-09-22-at-11530-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="766" height="865" darkWidth="766" darkHeight="865" alt="Create an API Credential dialog on the API Scopes step, showing additional permissions for accessing confidential jobs, private fields, application history, quality of hire data, Hiring Manager Experience survey data, and on-behalf-of requests." showCaption="false"}

7. After choosing your scopes, click `Save and Continue`, then copy your API key on the final step.

:::hint{type="danger"}
You will not be able to access your API key after closing the setup wizard, so ensure it is copied and/or  kept in a safe place.
:::

# View API key details

After you generate a key, click it to review its details, including who created it, the date and time it was added, and the last time it was used.

You can edit the API key's permissions and scope if needed. Click `Save` to apply your changes.﻿

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0PE6oyLYrF_HXSBThgYnV_editing-an-api-key.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1154" height="1618" darkWidth="1154" darkHeight="1618" showCaption="false" alt="API key settings showing an active key with default source options and endpoint permissions, with Read access enabled for Candidates and Interviews."}

## API key versioning

When viewing your API key, you will also see the version the API key was created with. Our [API documentation](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/introduction) includes versioning for your reference.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NpWNP-pw-ywh6ettYupzo_api-key-with-version.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1182" height="1358" darkWidth="1182" darkHeight="1358" alt="An API key with an active API version." showCaption="false"}

If a version is not supported or has been retired, a warning will be shown within the API key's details.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DpqNHj42DV29XLq_hleFA_api-key-on-a-depreciated-version.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1312" height="1200" darkWidth="1312" darkHeight="1200" alt="An API key with a retired API version." showCaption="false"}

The version and an indicator will also be displayed in your API key list at **Admin > Integrations > API Keys**. An indicator will show beside the version:

- If the indicator is green, the API version is still active.
- If the indicator is orange, the API version is deprecated and a new API key should be generated to avoid disruption.
- If the indicator is red, the API version is unsupported and a new API key should be generated to avoid disruption.

![Active key list including the status, version and integration partner.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ju3t0EKCQwfrAm6kqc_Et_add-api-key-version-selection-equest-107908-ashbyhqashby-2026-09-10-at-93158-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If a version is ever retired, you will be given at least 6 months notice.
:::

# Disable an API key

To disable a key, click the key name to open the API key details, then click `Disable`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VyCAvirXXrnvYXWwPP5da_deleting-an-api-key.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1154" height="1618" darkWidth="1154" darkHeight="1618" showCaption="false" alt="API key settings showing an active key with the Disable button highlighted in the upper-right corner."}

# FAQs

### Can I copy a key again after closing the setup wizard?

You cannot view or copy keys after closing the setup wizard, so be sure to copy the key before closing. We remind you before you close a window if the key is not on your clipboard.

### What is the API rate limit?

The API rate limit is 1000 requests per minute per API key.

﻿

[title] Visibility Options for Users
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

Once you have set permissions levels for users, you can further amend what they can access in Ashby.&#x20;

For more on access roles and permissions in general, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)&#x20;

In Ashby, you can further control what your users have access to by amending visibility settings. Some of these settings are controlled by the access role/roles provided to users, others can be specified on the user's profile and others can be set company-wide.

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidate Profile Application Visibility is a company-wide setting that controls whether users can see limited summaries of job considerations outside their assigned job access. See more at [Controlling Visibility of Additional Job Considerations in the Candidate Profile](docId:1d0Z3V0C8TSD92_4RjLtH).&#x20;
:::

## Confidential Jobs

:::hint{type="info"}
More on setting up confidential jobs at [What is a confidential job?](docId\:oVlnsSHWbpwbIdNMraTwY)&#x20;
:::

To hide a role from many or all other users, you could opt to make the job confidential. When a job is made confidential, only the creator, users who have been given access to the role and Organization Admins with access to all confidential roles will be able to see it.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can set a job as confidential or non-confidential, either at the point of creating the job or when editing it. Check the Is Confidential? checkbox in the job wizard to create a confidential job.

To set an existing job as confidential, click `More `when viewing the job. Then click `Make Confidential`. Only the job creator (or an Organization Admin with access to all confidential jobs) can set a role as confidential or not confidential after the job has been created.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Making a new job confidential](https://cdn.zappy.app/85f289349da59d583a8962efc67f0689.png "Making a new job confidential")

![Making an existing job confidential](https://cdn.zappy.app/a6f0f47c3a48d9daacd9290a32a233bc.png "Making an existing job confidential")


:::
::::

## Feedback visibility

You can edit whether and when users with Limited Access, Elevated Access and Organization Admin access can see interview feedback, along with whether feedback should be shown in interview briefings and completed feedback notification emails in Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > [Feedback Visibility](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-visibility). You can set feedback to be visible before they've submitted their own feedback, never be visible or to only show to users after they’ve submitted their own interview feedback.

You can also opt to show feedback from other interviewers on interview briefings. If you opt to toggle off the `Show other feedback on interview briefing?` option, only the current interview panel or interview schedule feedback will be displayed in the briefing.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Interview Feedback Visibility**
These settings determine whether a user can see interviewer feedback from interviewers on the same panel or interview schedule.

**Other Feedback Visibility**
This setting determines whether the user can view feedback left outside of their panel. This includes non-interview feedback, like feedback requested via the More > Request Feedback without Scheduling option on the candidates profile.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2ff005a7e46cbbe033c1c1ea6040607f.png)


:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that  settings are applied based on a user's access to the job in question. Regardless of the user's overall permissions, if they do not have access to view feedback forms for the role they're interviewing for, then the option you set for the `Settings for Limited Access Users` dropdown will apply to them.

As an example, if you're an Organization Admin but haven't been given an access role that gives you access to view feedback forms for a Frontend Engineer role on top of your global permissions, then you will have the `Settings for Limited Access Users` option applied to you if you are on the interview panel for that role.&#x20;

For more on permissions, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk). Want to set up a new access role? Check out [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_).
:::

Below you can find a table listing when each setting would be applied for different global permission/access role combinations:

| **Scenario**                                                                                               | **Feedback Visibility Settings Applied**        |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- |
| Organisation Admin AND has an Access Role with “Can See Feedback Forms” enabled that applies to the job    | Organization Admin feedback visibility settings |
| Organisation Admin AND has an Access Role without “Can See Feedback Forms” enabled that applies to the job | Limited Access feedback visibility settings     |
| Organization Admin AND has no access role that applies to the job in question                              | Limited Access feedback visibility settings     |
| Elevated Access AND has Access Role with “Can See Feedback Forms” enabled that applies to the job          | Elevated Access feedback visibility settings    |
| Elevated Access AND has an Access Role without “Can See Feedback Forms” enabled that applies to the job    | Limited Access feedback visibility settings     |
| Elevated Access AND has no access role that applies to the job in question                                 | Limited Access feedback visibility settings     |
| Limited Access                                                                                             | Limited Access feedback visibility settings     |

:::hint{type="danger"}
If interviewers aren’t required to give feedback (set as part of the [interview](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR) setup), then the feedback visibility settings will not apply.
:::

### Interview Briefing

You can set feedback from other interviews and non-interview feedback to show in an interview briefing. To switch this on, toggle on Show other feedback on interview briefing in the Interview Briefing section.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b833465885d7167ffb548cf64cd30807.png)

### Email Notifications

If you’d also like to show all feedback in notification emails when a candidate’s feedback is submitted, you can toggle on the `Show full feedback in notification emails?` option in the Email Notifications section. This setting will apply to all users in the organization but the content each user will see will depend on their assigned visibility permissions.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/724fa1ecd165de4a0d9c60c414269123.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9ff6b32eae7876746889536085bb4c23.png)

## Limiting a team member’s access to their own candidate profile

### Auto-linking candidate and employee profiles

If an employee is added in Ashby and a candidate with the same name was hired within the last 100 days, then the candidate profile will be auto-linked to the employee profile. This means that they will not be able to view their own profile and feedback.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can view profiles that have been auto-linked by clicking the *Review Candidate Links* button on the *Employees* page within *Admin*. Please note that this button will only be visible if you have auto-linked profiles to review.

On the following page you will be able to see a list of all recently auto-linked profiles awaiting confirmation. Within the *Actions* section, you can click *Keep Link* to confirm the candidate and employee have been linked correctly, or *Remove Link* to remove the candidate profile link from the employee profile.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/51f421403533d8a311ea513bb84293b8.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dd8d9bb17e0dd349d51b701778f6ce33.png)


:::
::::



### Manually linking candidate and employee profiles

If an employee was hired through Ashby, you can link their employee profile to their candidate profile in Ashby manually too. This prevents them from seeing their own profile (feedback, notes, etc.) independent of their permissions.


::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To manually link an employee profile to a candidate profile:

- Head to Admin > Organization Setup > Employees
- Click on the user profile in question and click `Candidate Profile`
- Click `+ Add Link`, then select the candidate profile using the Search candidates to link… field. You will also have the option to select a specific application.&#x20;
- Click `Submit` to confirm and link the employee profile to the candidate profile


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ea1135b729f92315305240df56764a0f.png)


:::
::::



## Private Notes and Emails

You can make notes and emails private by checking the `is note private?` checkbox underneath the note or email in question. When a note or email is marked private the responses will automatically be set to private as well. Only users with Organization Admin and Elevated Access - Admin Private can see private notes within the candidate's feed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a1d2a6d419dee53acae63ec5c396b379.png)

## Private Custom Fields

Ashby supports job, candidate, and offer custom fields. You can set job and candidate custom fields as private by checking the Is Private? checkbox when creating or editing a custom field. Private custom fields can only be viewed by Organization Admins and users with Elevated Access - Admin Private permissions.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ed2a45616dca2b7db3d3c654b1b61c20.png)

## Email Visibility

To amend your  settings, head to Admin > Organization Setup > [Email Visibility](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-settings).

In the Email Visibility by Interview Stage section, you can check the *Hide Emails* checkboxes for the Offer and Hired stages. When enabled, emails sent when a candidate is in one of these stages will be hidden on the candidate's profile for all users. This includes Organization Admins.

You can also toggle on the options to disable the sync for hired candidates, internal candidates and for candidates on confidential jobs. When enabled, candidates in the *Hired* stage and/or internal candidates and/or those considered for confidential jobs will not have their emails saved in Ashby.

Please note that any emails sent to the candidate via Ashby will show in the candidate’s feed on their profile even if the sync is disabled for the candidate. The candidate’s response to the email sent via Ashby will not be synced back to the candidate feed within their profile.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/621d975d983cc1100dff2d3e16d32c64.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What is the difference between the Hiring Team on a job and Permissions?

The Hiring Team on a role describes a person’s relationship to the role and enables notifications for the role.&#x20;
The Hiring Team is managed on the job’s Settings page. Being on the Hiring Team does not grant a user permission to take action on the role, so if a user is set as a Hiring Manager within the hiring team, they will need to have permissions added to access and take action on candidates and within the job itself. Permissions are managed on their employee profile.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set an Organization Admin to have access to all confidential jobs and projects in Ashby?

You can - on the Permissions tab of the user’s profile on the Employees page, there’s a Can See and Manage All Confidential Jobs and Projects field.

Here you can determine whether the Organization Admin has access to all confidential roles and projects or not.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9d4bc975d35bf388c2b379f8883c243e.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is it possible to set different feedback visibility settings for different jobs or interview stages?

No, the feedback visibility settings are global, including the feedback displayed on the interview briefing is the Show other feedback on interview briefing? option is enabled.

If you’d like specific fields of certain feedback forms to not be visible, you can opt to set fields on your feedback forms to private.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d5ee8ab140733c42834e1fd32e1b798d.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I update employees’ permissions in bulk?

Not yet, but this is on the roadmap. Keep an eye on our change logs for updates!
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### When a candidate profile is linked to an employee profile, does Ashby populate social links automatically into the employee profile Social Link settings?

Yes, Ashby copies social links from the candidate profile into the employee profile’s Social Link settings. All candidate social link types are copied except Website. For instance, LinkedIn, GitHub, Twitter, Medium, StackOverflow, YouTube, CodePen, etc. are all included.
:::


[title] Ashby Knowledge Base
[path] /

Ashby is a powerful all-in-one recruiting tool that will help you hire at ⚡️ speed.

# Getting Started

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Use these guides to learn the basics of Ashby and to set up your account.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🎉 [Ashby Admin Onboarding](docId\:aSKvbp-DfF9riogKAZshI)&#x20;

🤝 [Getting Started for Hiring Managers](docId\:Ku4nmt5UeOs8wfRgFxQNY)&#x20;

⭐️ [Getting Started for Interviewers](docId:2_WbM9Pju_SOWws1jhpZZ)&#x20;

🔍 [Getting Started for Sourcers](docId\:xWkjWMMZhmSU_xSKtG_R3)&#x20;

💼 [Getting Started for Recruiters](docId\:QyoLopAyBDwsEm-GsXjy3)&#x20;

📆 [Getting Started for Recruiting Coordinators](docId\:ZHSO6kJXpXFsZbESO2rLl)
:::
::::

:::hint{type="warning"}
If your security team has questions about Ashby please refer them to [Understanding And Managing Ashby’s Access Requests for Security Teams](docId\:opeZk2wNhAx5RDuFrzyxK) and [Data Privacy FAQ](docId\:PLBbqnqJhoJxQMb6DoU-3)&#x20;
:::

# Initial Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides cover navigating your Ashby account, configuring migrations and adding providing users with access to Ashby
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
⚙️ [Initial Setup & Migrations](docId\:nxOVkz6CnItXYq5uVZUEh)&#x20;

👤 [Users & Permissions](docId\:HJhWMhsyhdZZT-8IV1YPi)&#x20;

🗺️ [Navigating Ashby](docId\:cbkJu_5MOyGgNWUa5mbVW)&#x20;

💲 [Billing & Plans](docId\:uk-8LtXjIbToMqAimYWfF)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Key Features

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you'll find guides on key features within Ashby including jobs, scheduling and surveys.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🛠️ [Admin & Organization Settings](docId\:nN-zUJOyUGqy_4IKS7K8a)&#x20;

💼 [Jobs & Openings](docId\:qhRJUfz5cVUZr8i10w5wG)&#x20;

📋 [Applications](docId\:X54AtZ1NdMhKnpWYkBPGo)&#x20;

🔍 [Sourcing & Outreach](docId\:OaIgvy1hrf8bHGoaMLGwM)&#x20;

👥 [Candidates](docId\:sdI5eblKU4-wS7xJjCiDR)&#x20;

🕙 [Interviews & Scheduling](docId\:c926LNibBQiwL1Kug8oxH)&#x20;

📝 [Surveys, Assessments & Activities](docId\:JVCRZmY4TbQ9rYlqcojXC)&#x20;

✉️ [Emails & Candidate Texting](docId\:DVGvo8zQhzkFf86ziVwTY)&#x20;

🤝 [Offers & E-Signatures](docId\:uxCIrGzS-zEVbFM1RFQP-)&#x20;

🤖 [AI Features in Ashby](docId:8DIfXGq3vCQGQLP62DYvO)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Integrations

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Ashby integrates with third party tools & services, and here you'll find all of the documentation you need to get them up and running.

Click a category to view the integration options available. If you don't see the integration option you're looking for, try checking their documentation too.&#x20;
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🏢 [Platform](docId\:tvg-r4MzuQJ9g-HIKUYLU)&#x20;

👍 [Candidate Experience](docId:9zAwHl62DbPAlNCrlEtfI)&#x20;

🔍 [Sourcing](docId\:JkCtjNNIE2F6GpbI9z7b9)&#x20;

💼 [Job Board](docId\:FjmQVNaJ9NxVQ6LpJTPFw)&#x20;

📝 [Assessments](docId\:eqlZP4_NF4mgwfnLmDYIn)&#x20;

🎥 [Video Interviewing](docId\:z4k__WkJabCd2oTTXCUYK)&#x20;

🎉 [Post Hire](docId:855ICIl3w2_HDuk2YcZYv)&#x20;

🤖 [Other](docId\:SAfGYC4TWFCqGSHlj4IUm)&#x20;
:::
::::



# Reporting & Analytics

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Guides for Ashby Analytics users or those looking to discover Ashby's reporting capabilities.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📊 [Getting Started with Analytics](docId:3jo4s9tD3LmXr1NazclJQ)&#x20;

⚙️ [Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup](docId:0O00-GVDLy4a8FaxQEeVJ)&#x20;
:::
::::



# Additional Resources

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you can find some additional resources including Ashby Academy, product releases and our API documentation.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🎓 [Ashby Academy](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/)

💡 [Product Updates](https://www.ashbyhq.com/product-updates)

🔓 [Trust Center](https://trust.ashbyhq.com/)

💻 [API Documentation](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/)
:::
::::




[title] Advanced Setup
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Ashby Admin Onboarding/

This guide covers some more advanced areas of setup that aren't included in the [Ashby Admin Onboarding](docId\:aSKvbp-DfF9riogKAZshI) guide.

## Outbound Sourcing

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers features related to sourcing candidates. If you’re still gaining brand awareness, we recommend investing in this section relatively early.
:::

- Start curating [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4) to send to leads you’re interested in
- If you’re working with external recruiters/agencies, set them up as [agencies](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1)  in your account to start adding candidates (Note: if they are doing activities beyond sharing candidates, you may need to set them up as an Employee)
- Some agencies have software that can be integrated with your account. Check out the **Sourcing** section of the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and set up any third-party sourcing tools you use
- Familiarize yourself with [Projects](docId\:NeOuKpzGi4kDAtdSyMhez) and [Tags](docId\:kRTcgZ4XMHdCMDypRRNgo). You should understand when to use each:
  - **Projects** are lists of candidates that you can take bulk action on
  - **Tags** can be applied to candidates to make them more discoverable in searches

## Inbound Applications

:::hint{type="info"}
If your brand is a bit more established, we recommend investing in this section to save time through automation and create a streamlined experience for your inbound applicants.
:::

- If you have high-volume jobs like internships or junior engineer roles, set up [Auto-Reject Rules](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota) to reject applications that don’t fit criteria set from questions on your application forms
- If you have internal openings, setup the [Internal Job Board](docId\:qFJslDMoUUpMByBx6A0IQ) to enable your existing team to apply to roles before opening them to the public
- Setup [EEOC Surveys](docId\:pvVzo8-M3-2DF2RGT3tRA) on your application forms to capture self-reported demographic information for compliance
- If you’d like to capture additional details like pronouns, you can also set up [Diversity Surveys](docId\:PSv0-HgPj3RvnmKMISJI4)
- If your candidates need to sign an NDA before interviewing, set one up using [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt)

## Interviewing

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers more automation when you’re actively interviewing and tools on the candidate profile that help you practice good candidate management.
:::

- By now, you’ve hopefully chosen and implemented an embedded scheduling option; next, explore other [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7) that can be added to interview plans like [Take-home Activities](docId\:hdevBy04F4IDGuOGM2kWH)
- Practice good candidate management by getting into the habit of taking the following actions on the [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV) :
  - Setting follow-up reminders for yourself and other team members
  - @ mentioning your colleagues on candidate profiles to create notes and tasks
  - Setting [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) to capture additional details about your candidates to create a richer profile

## Post Interviewing

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers features for when candidates exit your pipeline.
:::

- Setup [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB) to capture feedback on your process from your candidates
- Setup [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh) (optionally, using [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW)) to send and store offers in one place
- Integrate your HRIS and/or other **Post Hire** applications in the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) to enable sending candidate data from Ashby once someone joins the team

## Reporting and Alerts

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers resources for getting up and running with Ashby Analytics.
:::



- Review [Navigating Ashby Analytics](docId\:c4qQtPv0ApCJKHA63irlY) to understand the basics
- Review the [Job Dashboard](docId:0QSDvWTdGrs9QVXNo3qrq) on one of your jobs to familiarize with Ashby Analytics
- Build custom [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) to cover a variety of use cases. Check out the [Alerts Library](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm) for inspiration

## Admin and Customization

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers more of Admin, including customization options.
:::

- Visit [Admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/overview) to add custom:
  - [Archive Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-archive-reasons) to personalize the reasons applications are rejected
  - If you’ve added [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs), and [select which should be included in the Interviewer Briefing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interview-briefing-settings)
  - Manage your accounts various [Visibility Options](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV)
- If your team does headcount planning at regular intervals or has evergreen roles, explore [Openings Management ](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ)


[title] Users & Permissions
[path] /

Here you can find guides on adding users to your Ashby account and setting their permissions. New to Ashby? You can find guides to get acquainted with Ashby at [Getting Started: User Guides](docId:22WJYKU0UdzrQz8JBcD0N).

# Provisioning users & assigning permissions

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides cover managing users and their permissions in Ashby. You can also read more on configuring access roles within Ashby and automating permissions allocation.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
👤 [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8)

🔓 [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)

👥 [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_)

🔑 [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e)

🤖 [Permissions Automation](docId:6h_16t-zWcRXYoP7wYXhk)

👀 [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV)
:::
::::

# Agency users & external recruiters

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Looking to add external recruiters to your Ashby account to add sourced candidates? Our guides here walk through how to create an agency and how to get started as an agency user.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🤝 [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1)

🔍 [Adding Agency Sources](docId\:Wt-Nquzn6ysQKsT6YE-R2)

👥 [Agencies Users](docId\:sMNQ8t0NuSBVnjbYJy0rS)
:::
::::


[title] Bulk Import Options
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/Bulk Import/

This guide explains how to upload candidate data using the Email importer or the Bulk CSV importer.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
If you want to import data from your legacy ATS, we may support a migration option for it. See [Migrations](docId:5B1bivkknuZghXjCFBqYZ) for more information.
:::

# Bulk import options

You can bulk import data into Ashby in two ways: email import and CSV import.

## Email import

Use the email import option if you are looking to import small batches of resume files and create candidates. This import option can only be used to import candidates.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide, check out [Bulk Import: Email Import](docId\:Nv5I1KugtR-kd-C-JlZbc).
:::

## CSV import

Import a CSV file if you want to import structured data like:

- Candidate data (name, email, job title)
- Candidate follow-ups
- Jobs
- Openings
- Employees

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide, check out [Bulk Import: CSV Import](docId\:ShDUViIklU7fGocJqqOcW).
:::

# FAQs

### Can I import historical candidate notes using the Ashby MCP?

If you have an AI client connected to the Ashby MCP, you can add notes to candidate profiles after completing your CSV import.

1. Prepare your CSV with one or more note columns alongside your standard candidate data, such as `Recruiter Notes` and `Sourcing Notes`.
2. Complete your [CSV import](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/bulk-import-csv-import). When mapping columns, ignore the note columns because the CSV importer does not support importing notes.
3. Open an AI client, such as Claude, with the Ashby MCP connected.
4. Share the same CSV and ask the AI client to create one separate note on each candidate profile for each note column. Ask it to match candidates by name and email, and show a preview before writing.

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
For example:
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
"I have a CSV with candidates already imported into Ashby. It includes columns called "Recruiter Notes" and "Sourcing Notes". For each candidate, create a separate note in Ashby for each column. Match candidates by name and email, and show me a preview before writing."
:::

You can repeat this process for multiple note columns, and it does not require developer access. The person running the workflow needs the `Can Add Notes` permission and access to the candidate profiles. The Ashby MCP uses the connected user's existing Ashby permissions. See the [Ashby MCP Server (Beta) guide](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/ashby-mcp-server-beta) to get started.

[title] How do I hand Ashby over to a new admin?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

If you’re handing Organization Admin responsibilities over to another user, this guide will help you identify some key areas in Ashby to update prior to leaving the organization.

## Amending user permissions

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that only Organization Admins are able to adjust user permissions. Organization Admins are not able to adjust their own permissions.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/cb60eeba9305411d8c5b57b88e7307d2"}

To set a new user as an Organization Admin, navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > Employees and select the new admin user from the list. Navigate to the *Permissions* tab and set the user’s global access role to Organization Admin.

You can also opt to give the user billing, DEI survey, candidate texting, hiring manager experience survey and confidential jobs and projects access within the Global Access section.

If the user had Elevated Access previously, please ensure all access roles to jobs, locations and departments are removed so they have full Organization Admin access.

## Integration Settings

**Integrations**

If you have configured integrations within Ashby and will be removed as an admin from the integrated platforms, please ensure that admin access to integration partner accounts is passed over to the appropriate users.

:::hint{type="info"}
For integrations where an admin activates the integration by logging into their account (like Zoom), we would recommend setting up a department or service admin account for the integration, rather than having an admin user account used to configure the integration.
:::

If the integration was enabled via an admin user’s account, ensure that either a department account, or an active admin user on the Zoom account deactivates and reactivates the integration within Ashby to avoid any errors or issues moving forward. Deactivating and reactivating the Zoom integration will not impact Zoom links for existing interviews.

**Google Workspace**

If the admin leaving is also a super admin in Google Workspace, navigate to the Google Workspace integrations tile within [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace). If the email listed in the Primary Google Workspace Admin field is that of the admin leaving the company or handing over access, switch this email out to another super admin user’s email to ensure the integration continues to work as expected.

**Microsoft 365**

Generally, Microsoft 365 tenant-wide admin consent grants access to the application itself. As such, the integration shouldn’t need re-authentication unless access is revoked.

## Auto-Reject rules and automation

If the admin user has set up auto-reject automation across job postings, these will need to be assigned to another user to avoid errors when the admin user account is deactivated. Even if the sender email address is set as an alias, an authenticated user will still be required to send the email.

To transfer auto-reject rule ownership, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for assistance.

Please check over any sequences or email activities and ensure that the admin user’s email isn’t set as the sender email for any email automation. This includes survey automation rules. Switching the sender email to another user will ensure that automations will continue to run smoothly.

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Switching sender emails on a sequence template

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To switch a sender email address on a sequence template:

- Navigate to Sourcing > Sequences
- Click on the sequence in question, then click `Edit Template`*.*
- Find the appropriate stage, then use the From dropdown to select the new sender’s email address
- Changes to the template will be automatically saved.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7f6fc4d0c8c5ad6f293ea773bd115ca4.png)
:::
::::




:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Switching sender emails on an automated email activity on an interview plan

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To switch a sender email address over to a different user on an email activity:

- Head to Jobs > Jobs and choose the job and/or job template you’d like to edit.
- Head to the Interview Plan tab of the job or job template.
- Navigate to the stage with the email activity and click `Modify`, then `Edit.`
- On the Automation tab, select the new sender email using the Send on behalf of dropdown.&#x20;
- Your changes will be saved automatically.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/120c5eb5416dd73b9bcd514b758901da.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Switching sender emails on a questionnaire automation

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Head to Jobs > Jobs and choose the job and/or job template you’d like to edit
- Head to the Interview Plan tab of the job or job template
- Navigate to the stage with the automated questionnaire activity and click `Modify`, then `Edit`
- On the Questionnaire tab, select the new sender email using the Send on behalf of dropdown. Click `Submit` to save your changes.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4c00c51fd0e8d63a8590b3bb4cc8d43a.png)
:::
::::




:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Switching sender emails on a survey automation

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Navigate to Admin > Jobs & Applications > Candidate Surveys and select the survey in question.
- Click `View Draft Configuration`, then, `Create a Draft Configuration`. You can opt to copy the existing rules to your draft and adjust accordingly, or set up completely new rules from scratch.
- Adjust the sender email address using the From dropdown.
- Click `Activate Draft Configuration` to use your newly drafted rules moving forward.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bc23e6540ebe2f4794907a5a375dfcf4.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cde30d8265c65e26fd6d0e9c12fdf801.png)
:::
::::


:::::

## Reschedule any interviews involving the admin user

If the admin user is on any future interview panels for any jobs, reschedule the interviews in Ashby to assign a different interviewer in their place. If you have schedule interview activities in place, adjust the interviewers listed within the activity to avoid any errors moving forward. You can read more on configuring schedule interview activities at [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) and more on rescheduling interviews to change interviewers [here](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo).

If any future interviews have been scheduled to the admin’s personal calendar (versus a shared calendar, more on this at [What is a shared calendar?](docId:7L9yaj7bNYKhfMH-vpkdR)), then we would recommend cancelling and then scheduling the interview again.

## Updating and communicating the new points of contact

To update points of contact, navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > [Points of Contact](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/points-of-contact). You can then update key contacts there as needed.

## Terminating a previous admin after handover is complete

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that only Organization Admins are able to deactivate or terminate users.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8b05f6673b6a4c9da0c4b56d08e17e38"}

Once you’ve determined that the previous admin no longer needs access to Ashby, navigate to their employee profile in Admin > Organization Setup > Employees, then click `Actions`. You’ll then have the option to deactivate or terminate the user.

Deactivating an account means the user loses access to Ashby and terminating an account means the user loses access to Ashby but all of their access roles are also removed from their profile. We recommend terminating the user account if they will never need access to the Ashby account again.

[title] Signing in to Ashby
[path] Navigating Ashby/

This guide helps users sign in to Ashby and troubleshoot login issues. For more information on amending user permissions, head to [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for information on signing up for Ashby? Head to [ashbyhq.com](https://www.ashbyhq.com/) for further information and to get in touch.
:::

## How to sign in to Ashby

To sign into Ashby, head to [https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin) and select the preferred sign in option.

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
You don’t set a password for your Ashby account, you can instead log in via the following options.

**1. Sign in with Google:** Sign in using your Google account.

**2. Sign in with Microsoft:** Sign in using your Microsoft account

**3. Sign in with a magic link:** An email will be sent to your email address containing a link that you can click to sign in.
**4. Sign in with SSO:** If your company has SSO set up with Ashby, click this option to sign in.

:::hint{type="info"}
If your company has SSO set up and requires you to sign in via SSO, even if you click a different login option, you will be signed in with SSO.
:::




::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b9822acd429fb2ad4fc84e4f3bd68477.png)


:::
:::::

:::hint{type="success"}
If you are a user on multiple Ashby accounts, you’ll be asked to select an account on the following page before being taken to Ashby.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To switch between accounts in Ashby, hover over your name and icon in the top-right corner. From there, other accounts you have access to will be listed under the `Sign Out` option.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1b2b6c9c7b16c4655ba60dd33ba5c068.png)


:::
::::

## Troubleshooting Tips

:::hint{type="info"}
Here are some steps you can take if you’re running into issues signing in to Ashby.
:::

- If you run into any errors when signing in, try logging in with a magic link if this wasn’t the initial option chosen. The email with your magic link should come from WorkOS. Try checking your Spam or Trash folders if you don’t receive an email within a few minutes.
- Try to log into Ashby via another browser. It could be that an extension on your current browser is getting in the way of you signing in, or that your browser needs to be updated.
- Reach out to an Organization Admin on your account to confirm that you are listed on the [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) page as an active user. If your account has been deactivated, the Organization Admin can head to Actions on your profile and click Activate to re-activate your account.
- If the login issues continue, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) so we can investigate this further. Please include the browsers you’ve tried logging in with, along with any extensions you’re using (these can be found at chrome://extensions/) and a screen recording or screenshots of errors you’re seeing in your message.

[title] User Permissions
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

This guide covers the different global access roles you can grant in Ashby. Along with global access roles, you can also provide job, location and department-specific access roles. This ensures that your users only have access to the information they need to.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on user sync and adding new hires as users in Ashby, check out [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8)
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & Prerequisites:** You must be an Organization Admin to view user permissions and edit another user's permissions or access roles. If you are not an Organization Admin, reach out to one if you would like to know your permission level or have your access amended.

Organization Admins cannot edit their own permissions and will need to ask another Organization Admin to edit their access for them.
:::

# Permissions Overview

### What are the Ashby permission levels?

Ashby supports three global user roles, or permission groups, that apply to your entire organization:

- [Limited Access](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)&#x20;
- [Elevated Access](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)&#x20;
- [Organization Admin](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)&#x20;

# Permission Types

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers global user roles and job/team/location access roles for users in the Employees section of your Ashby account. For your external recruiting partners, check out [Agencies Users](docId\:sMNQ8t0NuSBVnjbYJy0rS)&#x20;
:::

## Limited Access

Limited Access is the default permission option. These users can see information related to the specific interviews they are associated with. They cannot access candidate profiles, view candidate notes, access the candidate pipeline, jobs, sequences, or reports but will be able to view candidate resumes as part of their interview briefing.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/09de11064aa04b55808f8fb9e60d02a5"}

This permission set is best suited for your users who only log into Ashby to submit interview feedback and referrals. Share the [Getting Started for Interviewers](docId:2_WbM9Pju_SOWws1jhpZZ) guide with these users to help them get up and running with Ashby.

Limited Access users cannot pin reports or dashboards to their home page.

## Elevated Access

Elevated access users can see candidate profiles, jobs, sequences, and reports for the teams, locations and/or jobs to which they have been granted access.&#x20;

When assigning a user Elevated Access and an access role to a job, you will be able to see further details about the job you’re assigning (such as the job requisition ID and the location assigned to the job). This can help ensure the user gets access to the correct role if you have multiple jobs with the same name.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Users may have access to a candidate profile without having access to every job consideration on that profile. See [Controlling Visibility of Additional Job Considerations in the Candidate Profile](docId:1d0Z3V0C8TSD92_4RjLtH) to review the visibility options for job considerations that users do not have access to.&#x20;
:::

The following access roles can be assigned to those with Elevated Access:

- **Quality of Hire (QoH in the grid below):** This is a role for users who need access to Quality of Hire survey data, either for specific departments and jobs, or for the entire organization (more on this at [Quality of Hire Surveys](docId:8HGJn7fBdlsBnk1fK-2Db)).&#x20;
- **External Recruiter:&#x20;**&#x54;hese users can see candidate profiles but have no further permissions. This is a role assigned for users who are a part of an agency. You can read more about setting up agency users at [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1) .
- **Analyst:&#x20;**&#x41; user who should only be able to view candidate profiles and email communication. This access role is used a lot for users running reports.
- **Hiring Team Member (HTM in the grid below):** This user has access to view candidate profiles, along with email communication and any feedback. This role is for users who need access to more candidate information than the details listed in an interview briefing but who won’t be reviewing applications or scheduling interviews. Those with hiring team member access will not be able to email or schedule interviews for candidates.
- **Hiring Manager (HM in the grid below):** This user has access to view candidate profiles, review applications and contact and edit the candidate. They can also use the Ashby Chrome extension. This is likely a user who is managing the candidate pipeline for a specific role or department (scheduling interviews, archiving candidates based on feedback, etc).
- **Admin:&#x20;**&#x54;his is a user who has all the access to manage candidates and the job pipeline. They can also create new jobs and submit feedback on behalf of other users. This is likely a user who oversees pipelines and can set up new roles but who isn’t involved in the offer process. They have access to the candidate profile
- **Admin - Private (Private in the grid below):** This user has all the same permissions as the Admin access role plus access to generate and edit offers and view any private notes or fields (like salary expectations or other sensitive information). This user also has access to view hired candidates.
- **No Access:&#x20;**&#x54;his role can be added to an employee profile if the user is an Organization Admin or has an Elevated Access role across the organization and you’d like them to not have  access to a certain job or department. They will not have any access to the job, location or department this role is assigned to them for.

The grid below outlines the actions these users can take on candidate profiles and jobs. This permission set is best suited for your users who log into Ashby to view and take action on candidate profiles and jobs, but shouldn’t have access to change global admin permissions like Hiring Managers, Sourcers, and Recruiting Coordinators.&#x20;

Share the [Getting Started for Hiring Managers](docId\:Ku4nmt5UeOs8wfRgFxQNY) or [Getting Started for Recruiting Coordinators](docId\:ZHSO6kJXpXFsZbESO2rLl) guides with new elevated access users to help them get up and running with Ashby.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can assign multiple access roles to a single user. For example, you can grant someone Hiring Manager access to the Marketing team and grant them Analyst access for the entire organization, so they only have additional access granted as needed.

Elevated Access users can also be granted a limited set of Admin permissions. You can read more on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).
:::

## Elevated Access - Access Roles Grid

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that these are the default permissions settings for access roles in Ashby. If access roles have been amended via the [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_) tool, please review your active access roles at Admin > Organization Setup > [Access Roles](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/permissions/access-roles), or reach out to an organization admin for assistance.
:::

Click on the image below to open up the access role grid.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OEU-hsBzeAr3KBofnnRzT_default-access-roles-permission-grid.jpg)

## Organization Admin&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
In most cases, Organizations Admins should not be assigned Job/Team Access roles, as they limit the features they have access to. If you include job or team access roles, the user’s permissions for the specific job(s) or team(s) will be scoped down as shown in the Elevated Access chart above.
:::

Organization Admin is the most permissive option. These users can see and edit candidate profiles, jobs, sequences, reports for all candidates and jobs, and merge candidate profiles. They can also make changes in the [Admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) section and to feedback/notes added by other users.

This permission set is best suited for users charged with configuring your team’s Ashby account like Recruiting Team Members and Co-Founders.

Potential limitations for an Organization Admin's access include:

- If their candidate profile is linked to their employee profile, they can’t see their own info. More on this at [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV).
- They can not see confidential jobs unless explicitly granted access to them by the person that created the job, or by being given access to all confidential roles using the `Has access to all confidential jobs and projects within assigned permissions` option within the Permissions tab of their profile
- If an Organization Admin has specific permissions set for a role or team, the actions they can take for that role or team will be limited by the scoped-down permissions. Refer to the chart above for details on what is allowed for those permission levels. If those scoped-down permissions should not be applied, they can be removed by another Organization Admin.
- Organization Admins do not have access to Quality of Hire information by default, they would need to be assigned the Quality of Hire access role alongside their Organization Admin global access role.

:::hint{type="info"}
These users should review [Ashby Admin Onboarding](docId\:aSKvbp-DfF9riogKAZshI) and [Getting Started for Recruiters](docId\:QyoLopAyBDwsEm-GsXjy3) to get up and running with Ashby.
:::

# Assigning permissions

The default permission option granted to users is Limited Access, which should cover most users. To amend a user's permissions:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users)
2. Search for the user by their name in the employee list or by using the search field
3. Click on their profile to open up their profile details
4. Click on the **Permissions** tab, then select their Global User Role from the dropdown menu.&#x20;
5. If you select Elevated Access, you must also add at least one team or job access role for that user to be able to view jobs and candidates considered for those jobs.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6fb7415bd3dd4d70b5bbde63b8370044"}

## Visibility Options

For more on additional visibility options, check out [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV).

## Custom Permission Roles

Custom Permission Roles allow you to create new roles alongside those listed above for Elevated Access users, determining the access levels that best suit your needs if those available by default aren’t suitable. You can also amend the existing access roles to adjust access as needed.
For more on this, check out [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_) .

:::hint{type="info"}
Want to learn more? Check out the [User Permissions](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/permissions) course in Ashby Academy!
:::

# FAQ

### What is the difference between the Hiring Team on a job or job consideration and job access roles for Elevated Access users?

The Hiring Team on a job or job consideration describes a user’s relationship to the role and enables role-based notifications. It does not automatically give the user permission to view or take action on candidates or the job. Job access roles determine what an Elevated Access user can access and do for specific jobs, teams, locations, or departments.

To provide a hiring manager access to a specific job, an Organization Admin must assign the user `Elevated Access` and a job-specific `Hiring Manager` access role.

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users).
2. Search for and select the employee.
3. Open the `Permissions` tab and select `Elevated Access` as the **Global User Role**.
4. Add the `Hiring Manager` access role and scope it to the specific job under the **Access Roles** section.

If the user already has access through a team or location access role, add the job-specific role alongside it when they need additional permissions for that job.&#x20;

To assign access automatically, configure [Permissions Automation](docId:6h_16t-zWcRXYoP7wYXhk) and map the Hiring Manager hiring team role to the access role you want to assign. Ashby then assigns the mapped job access role when the user is added as the Hiring Manager on a job and removes it when they are removed from the Hiring Team.

### Can I update employees’ permissions in bulk?

This isn't currently possible.

### I’m an Organization Admin, why can’t I access this data?

It is likely that your account has job/team access roles assigned. In most cases, Organizations Admins should not be assigned Job/Team Access roles, as they limit the features they have access to. If you run into this, ask another Organization Admin to remove those roles from your profile.

### What permissions are necessary to be able to use the Chrome extension?

Users need at least Elevated Acces&#x73;*&#x20;-&#x20;*&#x48;iring Manager permissions to source with the Chrome extension.

### What happens to user permissions when I delete a team or department the user has access to?

When you archive a team or department, then choose to delete it completely, any users or agencies with access to that department will be highlighted in the **Delete Team** pop-up.
From there, you can select another team to assign user permissions to. If they shouldn’t have permission to access another team, you can keep the drop-down set to No Team to remove the permissions for that user.

![Modifying permissions when deleting a team.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n0dsRHtoXWgoVXZjdhOBs_setting-user-permissions-archbee-document-2026-05-01-at-100833-am.jpg)

### What is the External Recruiter access role and what access does this provide?

The External Recruiter role is intended for agency users. Those with External Recruiter access will only be able to view the candidates they add to a job, or candidates that their agency are listed as the source on.
We’d recommend checking out our [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1)  guides and setting up an agency if you’d like to provide agency users with access. These users will also be able to add candidates to the jobs they have access to.

### What is the Quality of Hire access role and what access does this role provide?

The Quality of Hire access role is for those who need access to data from Quality of Hire surveys, either for specific departments and jobs, or for the entire organization (more on this at [Quality of Hire Surveys](docId:8HGJn7fBdlsBnk1fK-2Db)). Please note that adding Quality of Hire access role will not restrict the account permissions to just viewing Quality of Hire surveys and will act in addition to existing permissions in Ashby.

Those who have surveys assigned to them (the hiring manager, for example), will be able to see the data from the surveys they’ve been assigned to without needing this access.

### What permission level do I need to change a candidate’s stage or archive their job consideration?

To change the stage the candidate’s job consideration is in or archive their job consideration, you would need to have Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access or higher to the job, team, or location.

### What permission level do I need to add a note to a candidate profile?

A user would need to have Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access or higher to the job, team or location to have the option to leave notes on a candidate profile.

### Can I assign permissions based on location?

If you have users who should have access to jobs in a specific location, you can now use location-based access roles to assign as needed. Location-based access roles are assigned within the Permissions tab of a user’s profile.

![Assigning location-based access roles.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/78Ixu3YGv3-x6k6jBJ_qE_setting-user-permissions-archbee-document-2026-05-01-at-100911-am.jpg)

In this case, if a job is both in the Engineering team and the location on the job is set to North America, the role with the more restrictive permissions should apply (so in this example, the user would have Hiring Team Member access to the engineering role based in North America). To override this, you could set an additional access role that applies specifically to roles both in the Engineering team in New York and provide that more permissive access role there.

![Creating an additional access role. The role with the more restrictive permissions should apply.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NsWD63Ism0nvswsYU4ZBO_team-and-location-access-roles-list.jpg)

**What if the roles overlap?**

In some cases, permissions may overlap. See the example below;

![Setting team and location access roles.](https://cdn.zappy.app/a838795678e0e076d2d62243a5217cc0.png)

So this user has Admin level access to roles that have their location set to San Francisco and are in the Product Engineering sub-team. They also have Admin Private access to the Product Engineering roles that have their location set to London and the HR roles based in Europe.

### Who can see the details of a candidate’s offer?

Only Organization Admins and those with Elevated Access - Admin Private access can view offer details.

### Can I view the details of any changes that were made to user permissions?

Yes, you can view any changes that were made to a specific user’s permissions by heading to their profile within the **Employees** page and clicking on the **History** tab. You'll see a timestamp, an indication of who made the change, and a description of the change. You can read more on this at [Auditing and Reporting on User Permissions and User Active Dates](docId\:Pec90pudqBILJNIKTtMLM).

![The History tab on a user's permissions showing any updates.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CK8H31xraOJCwmDmkMLeT_history-tab.jpg)

### Can a user see information about their own interview/hiring process in a report?

Users won’t be able to see themselves or data about their own journey in the hiring process in reports if their Ashby profile is linked to their employee profile (more on this at [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV)). This can result in newly added users seeing slightly different data from other users when viewing reports (for example, one less hire listed in their hire reports, as they would be included as a hire but have their candidate data hidden from them).

### Can I give a user access to a single candidate's profile?

This isn't possible currently. Access roles are only granted on a job, job department and/or job location basis.

### How do permissions work with Openings?

For more on the roles that can open and link openings to jobs, check out [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).

### Can I switch an agency user to be an employee user instead, so I can assign them different permissions?

You can, yes. This is usually used when you’d like to provide an agency user with additional access to certain roles (for example, the ability to schedule candidates and view all candidates considered for the role).

1. Head to **Admin > Organization Setup > Agencies**
2. Select the agency and the agency user in question. Head to the Permissions tab on the user’s profile.
3. In the `Agency` drop-down, click the `x` beside the agency name. This will remove the link between the user and the agency.
4. The user will automatically be given the Limited Access access role. If you’d like to provide them with a specific access role to a job or department, set them to have Elevated Access, the determine the level of access they should have and the roles, departments or locations they should have access to.&#x20;

If you’d like to switch an employee user to be an agency user, use the `Agency` dropdown on the user’s profile to select an agency and assign it to the user.


[title] Internal Job Board
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

When you enable the internal job board option, admins and hiring managers can post roles on a job board that only your employees can access. Employees need to log in to Ashby to access the job board.

# Permissions & access

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions:**

- You must be an Organization Admin to enable the internal job board and adjust the display settings.
- You must be logged in to Ashby to view your organization's internal job board.
:::

Internal job boards are available on Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Enabling the internal job board

You can enable the internal job board option on the [Internal Job Board](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/internal-job-board) page in **Admin > Job Boards**. Once enabled, click the `Copy URL` button to copy the link to your internal job board. You can then share this link with your employees so they can log in and view internal roles.

![The Copy URL button on the internal job board page.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/S3yhFS0EHlf2iO9WHcCk7_internal-job-board-ashby-2026-08-05-at-105241-am.jpg)

You can also set your job board and messaging settings including:

- **Internal Job Post Description Opening:** This content will be placed at the top of every internal job posting description.
- **Internal Job Post Description Closing:&#x20;**&#x54;his content will be placed at the bottom of every internal job posting description.
- **Show Requisition ID on Job Board:** Display requisition ID on each job in the job board.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/943343095e65852c9381c94c87c9e5d4.png" size="100" alt="The job requisition ID being listed on a posting on the internal job board." isUploading="false" width="837" height="309" darkWidth="837" darkHeight="309" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Show Hiring Team Info on Job Board:&#x20;**&#x44;isplay hiring team info on each job posting in the job board.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/71d88c6d75c0d63eabcfa362e313a2c3.png" size="100" alt="Hiring team information being shown as part of a posting on the internal job board." isUploading="false" width="888" height="342" darkWidth="888" darkHeight="342" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Show Hiring Team Info on Job Postings:&#x20;**&#x44;isplay hiring team info within each individual job posting.
- **Roles to Display in Hiring Team Info:** Select which roles to display in the hiring team info. You can choose to display the hiring manager, recruiter, recruiting coordinator and/or the sourcer.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c8c61b8b9ef046a1629a9460138bf450.png" size="100" alt="The hiring team displayed on the job posting. " isUploading="false" width="972" height="713" darkWidth="972" darkHeight="713" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

# Posting a job internally

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on job postings, check out [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB).
:::

When creating your job posting for the role in question, click the **Job Boards** drop-down menu in the **Basic Info** tab. From here, you can post your job to your external job board, your internal job board, or both using the checkbox beside each option.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bH-We1FHaoQokQZC8MzLP_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-08-05-at-110159-am.jpg" size="90" isUploading="false" width="818" height="320" darkWidth="818" darkHeight="320" alt="The job boards dropdown, showing the external and internal checkboxes." showCaption="false"}

You can then determine the visibility for both your external and internal job boards:
**Listed:** The job posting is listed directly on the specified job board.
**Unlisted:** The job posting is only accessible via a direct link.

![The Basic Info settings for a job posting.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZLw-ox6Koug2W_urvXwhk_a-job-posting-with-the-job-boards-selected.jpg)

# Accessing the internal job board

Employees can access the internal job board via the copied and shared link or from their [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page once you enable the internal job board option.

![Accessing the internal job board from the Home page.](https://cdn.zappy.app/a852a47c58423d4a00a6288b617e2f33.png)

The internal job board has a similar layout to the external job board, but Ashby does not display logos set up on the [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) page. Ashby shows job post description opening and closing text configured in your internal job board settings. You can still filter jobs by Department, Location, and Employment Type.

![An example of an internal job board.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b360db81818b7a7b23eb25343d96d10c.png)

# FAQs

### Why is my job posting showing as Unlisted?

This is usually because the `List on External Job Board` or `List on Internal Job Board` toggles are set to Unlisted for the job posting. Navigate to the job posting, then to the Basic Info tab and ensure that the appropriate toggles are set as Listed.

### Can employees without Ashby access view the internal job board?

No, employees need to log in to view the internal job board.

### How can I identify an internal candidate or application from the internal job board?

A candidate who applies from a posting listed on your internal job board has their source listed as Internal: Internal Transfer. You can filter for candidates with this source when doing a candidate search, or check the source listed in the Attribution section of the candidate's profile.

![The internal: internal transfer source in the Attribution section of the candidate profile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/6baa17c573a4d2b6166125acc22472e6.png)

### Can agency users access the internal job board?

No, agency users cannot access the internal job board from their home page. Ashby also prevents them from directly visiting the internal job board URL and direct internal job posting URLs.

### Can applicants be added to a different stage in the interview plan if they apply via the internal job board?

No, Ashby adds candidates who apply via your internal job board to the Application Review stage.

[title] Bulk Import
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/


[title] File-based Migrations
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/


[title] Workday ATS -> Ashby Recruiting API Migration Guide
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/API Migrations/

Data migration from Workday uses several Workday APIs, each of which requires varying user and permission configuration.

The setup requires three steps:

1. Configuring Ashby's Integration System User (ISU)
2. Configuring domain and business process security for Ashby's ISU
3. Creating the "API Client for Integrations" for Ashby

:::hint{type="warning"}
In each step, we advise you to copy down some important information that needs to be configured within Ashby to connect your Ashby and Workday instances. The prompts to copy information appear in warning callouts like this one.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
For information on Workday integrations, see [Workday](docId\:Lser77iHgverWT8Ovu5gx).
:::

# Configuring Ashby's ISU

1. Log in to your Workday application using an administrator account.
2. In the application's search box, search for "create user" and select **Create Integration System User**.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXcYa7Avc718NkWih6VkQZE6rXMI-zfedLHSUz1XcUDF5pBXQuPkuZQfMFiehJJd_c-7tb-gL8L37WMkcMX_54QV-ZKbWe12UA1qipVsl-u8Aba3lYfTV7KYFK5t4COjA0AsWF2-4A?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g" size="70" alt="Screenshot of the Create Integration System User screen in Workday" isUploading="false" width="331" height="116" darkWidth="331" darkHeight="116" showCaption="false"}

3. Enter a username and password.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Copy down the **username** and **password** for future configuration within Ashby.
:::

4. Leave the **Require New Password at Next Sign In** checkbox unchecked. This user accesses Workday programmatically and does not need to set a new password.
5. Leave **Session Timeout Minutes** at its default value of 0. This prevents the user's sessions from timing out prematurely.
6. Select **Do Not Allow UI Sessions**. This prevents the account from logging into Workday.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXeQIbIesSasrQzKH0x6NtR_0dgv_XTJyrBqWkyvb4HD4yBCaXsJ09uQRtDDIyk3AVPj1pfj9qok8bWs1PzmtnVoGnkCZsfse8GVfZN8pP_Y0uiZSoHcHAHN6WUWbeCVmfAOmXLPFw?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g" size="90" alt="Screenshot of the ISU session settings screen in Workday, showing the Session Timeout Minutes and Do Not Allow UI Sessions options" isUploading="false" width="777" height="842" darkWidth="777" darkHeight="842" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
If possible, make sure the password does not expire. Otherwise, Ashby's sync stops when the password expires. You can do this by going to the **Maintain Password Rules** task and adding Ashby's ISU to the **System Users exempt from password expiration** field.
:::

# Configure domain security for Ashby's ISU

## Create a security group

In this step, you create an unconstrained integration system security group in Workday and assign the ISU created in the previous step to this group.

1. In the search box, search for "security group" and select **Create Security Group**.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdJs97Huc1WP8NunuyttRt9wb7LcL1UgQuUawYHH5IsItHxw8gqzn0Jmcc-yM-eyCuy-ppuipsYcEYQ8ewEkPyrH0o3Yt3NVX_b1S73sG_qG1cagfuVm-3D28BAgDKqDPuw7A1l0Q?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g" size="70" alt="Screenshot of the Create Security Group task in Workday" isUploading="false" width="283" height="119" darkWidth="283" darkHeight="119" showCaption="false"}

2. Complete the **Create Security Group** task.
3. Select **Integration System Security Group (Unconstrained)** from the **Type of Tenanted Security Group** dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXc9jfx6qmeCxH2g3NsY2h_PM0BbT2JbOZdAv66mzKUvmGts4KtohjXw5y8SuQymLZiIj67l7bQ5ZsbMH1de9fpN9IqVfwKTlYcPWEaAroliP4MNuw-MghLQ9eWsyRvChs4FdR94?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g" size="70" alt="Screenshot of the security group member assignment page in Workday" isUploading="false" width="444" height="174" darkWidth="444" darkHeight="174" showCaption="false"}

4. After the security group is created successfully, you see a page where you can assign members to the security group.
5. Add the new ISU created in the previous step to this security group.

## Configure domain security policy permissions

In this step, you grant domain security policy permissions that allow Ashby access to recruiting and HR data domains related to the Ashby Analytics integration.

1. Enter "Security Group Membership and Access" in the search box and click the report link.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXevV_tMSzF7X23jb15FYQEMBzUkmh7LWjG_Fzx0SchLh3e7lYf8iJh7xNgSxGTjmZ0AgytMYK8vqJE8msOXnvdbwMIe9l7G6uuzAieDzUo_0pBPbG3V_MARD6Omgs7Fn-V2VzsK?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g" size="80" alt="Screenshot of the Security Group Membership and Access report in Workday, showing the ellipsis menu with the Maintain Domain Permissions option" isUploading="false" width="379" height="131" darkWidth="379" darkHeight="131" showCaption="false"}

2. Search for and select the security group created in the previous step.
3. Click the ellipsis (`...`) next to the group name and select **Security Group > Maintain Domain Permissions for Security Group**.
4. Add the following domains to the **Domain Security Policies** list.

:::hint{type="info"}
In rows where multiple domains are listed, all domains after the first may be included or inherited by the first domain, depending on your Workday instance's security configuration. Where no reason is listed in a row, the reason from the nearest row above applies.
:::

| **Domain Security Policy**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | **Operation**   | **Reason**                                                                                          |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Organization: Cost Center                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | Get Only        | Sync org relationships for jobs and job role assignees                                              |
| Manage: Organization Integration                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Manage: Organization Roles                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Staffing Organizations: Cost Center                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Worker Data: Organization Information<br />Worker Data: Management Chain<br />Worker Data: Organizations                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Worker Data: Active and Terminated Workers                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | Get Only        | Sync basic worker information for Ashby user account and employee data                              |
| Person Data: Legal Name                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Person Data: Preferred Name                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Person Data: Name                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Person Data: Home Email                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Person Data: Work Email                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Person Data: Home Contact Information                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Person Data: Public Work Email Address Integration                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Pre-Hire Data: Name and Contact Information<br />Pre-Hire Data: Contact Information<br />Pre-Hire Data: Names                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Worker Data: Public Worker Reports                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Worker Data: Worker ID                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Worker Data: Workers                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Worker Data: All Positions                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Worker Data: Current Staffing Information<br />Worker Data: Historical Staffing Information                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  | Get Only        | Sync worker position data                                                                           |
| Worker Data: Employment Data                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Job Directory                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                | Get Only        | Sync job requisition data                                                                           |
| Job Information                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Job Profile: View                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Job Postings: External                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Job Postings: Internal                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Job Postings                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Job Requisitions for Recruiting                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Job Requisition Data                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Manage: Evergreen Requisitions                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| All Prospects                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                | Get Only        | Sync prospect data                                                                                  |
| Prospects<br />Prospect Sharing                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Reports: Prospect                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Candidate Data: Job Application<br />Candidate Data: Assessment Results<br />Candidate Data: Bundle Resumes<br />Candidate Data: Eligibility Results<br />Candidate Data: Interview Feedback Comments<br />Candidate Data: Interview Feedback Results<br />Candidate Data: Language Skills<br />Candidate Data: Offer Details<br />Candidate Data: Quick Stats<br />Candidate Data: Sharing<br />Candidate Data: Attachments | Get Only        | Sync candidate and application data, including resume files                                         |
| Candidate Data: Interview Schedule                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Candidate Data: Other Jobs                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Candidate Data: Questionnaires                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Candidate Data: Questionnaire Total Score                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Questionnaire Results                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Manage Pre-Hire Process: View Pre-Hire Interviews                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Candidate Data: Gender                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Get Only        | Sync candidate EEOC data                                                                            |
| Candidate Data: Ethnicity                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Candidate Data: Personal Information<br />Candidate Data: Military Status<br />Candidate Data: Nationalities<br />Candidate Data: Sexual Orientation<br />Candidate Data: Sexual Orientation & Gender                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Find Candidates: Internal and External                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Find Candidates: External                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Pre-Hire Data: Employment Agreement<br />Employment Agreement: Employee Contracts                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | Get Only        | Sync candidate offer data                                                                           |
| Pre-Hire Data: Start Date and Location                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Purge Person Data<br />Purge Single Entity Data                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              | Get Only        | So we can delete candidates and applications that have been merged into others                      |
| Manage: Recruiting Agency                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | Get Only        | Sync recruiting agency data                                                                         |
| Integration Build                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            | Get Only        | Access to low-level identifiers to connect Workday objects together (e.g., a job to a location)     |
| Business Process Administration<br />Business Process Definition View<br />Business Process Delegation                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | Get Only        | Access to business process history (for job application process history)                            |
| Business Process Reporting                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Manage: Business Process Definitions                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         | Get Only        |                                                                                                     |
| Reporting Audits                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             | Get Only        | Allows running reports via REST API WQL                                                             |
| Workday Query Language                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | View and Modify | "View and Modify" appears to be required here, even though we can only run queries that fetch data. |
| Manage: Candidate Job Application Notes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      | Get Only        | Sync job application notes                                                                          |

## Configure business process permissions

To see certain historical information for a job application, Ashby needs elevated access on recruiting-specific business processes.

To give Ashby the right access, you need to go to each business process as follows (using "job application" as an example in step 1):

1. Go to **bp: job application**.
2. Select **Related Actions** (the `...` menu at the top) > **Business Process Policy > Edit**.
3. Scroll down to **Who Can Do Actions on Entire Business Process**.
4. Go to the **View All** section.
5. Add the integration system security group you created in the previous steps.

Ashby needs this for the following recruiting business processes (substitute each of the following in your Workday search):

- "Assess Candidate"
- "Employment Agreement"
- "Interview"
- "Job Application"
- "Offer"
- "Rate Interview"
- "Ready for Hire"
- "Reference Check"
- "Review Candidate"
- "Screen"

:::hint{type="info"}
Your Workday instance may not have a business process for each of these.
:::

# Create the "API Client for Integrations" for Ashby

To facilitate mapping the Workday recruiting process into Ashby, we need a report of candidate application history. We use this to understand stage transitions for candidates and build interview plans in Ashby.

We run this report using Workday Query Language (WQL) via Workday's REST API. Access to the REST API requires a special API client to be configured.

1. Open the **Register API Client for Integrations** task via Workday search.
2. Use the following configuration:
   - **Client Name**: Ashby API Access
   - **Non-Expiring Refresh Tokens**: ✅
   - **Scope**: System, Recruiting, Staffing, and Pre-Hire Process (allows high-level access to recruiting and reporting data; data within is still guarded by domain security)
   - **Included Workday Owned Scope**: ✅ (access to Workday-owned fields)
3. Click `Okay`.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The client ID and secret are needed to configure REST API access for Ashby.
:::

4. On the page that appears, copy down the client ID and secret.
5. Click the `...` menu next to the client name in the blue header at the top, then select **API Client > Manage Refresh Tokens for Integrations**.
6. In the **Workday Account** box in the dialog that appears, find and select Ashby's ISU, then click `Okay`.
7. On the next page, check the **Generate New Refresh Token** box, then click `Okay`.
8. Copy down the refresh token that appears on the next page.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The refresh token is needed to configure REST API access for Ashby.
:::

9. Go to the **View API Clients** report via Workday search.
10. On this page, there are three endpoints at the top. Copy these down.

:::hint{type="warning"}
These endpoints are needed to configure REST API access for Ashby.
:::

## Collect final tenant information

Most of the Workday-side configuration is now complete. We just need to collect a few final pieces of information before configuring the connection in Ashby.

### Workday tenant ID

Your Workday tenant ID is found in the URL when you're logged into Workday. For example, if the URL is [https://impl.workday.com/example/d/home.html](https://impl.workday.com/example/d/home.html), your tenant ID is "example".

:::hint{type="warning"}
Copy your tenant ID for configuration within Ashby.
:::

### WSDL URL

Your Web Services Description Language (WSDL) URL can be found by following the [Workday Public Web Services article](https://community.workday.com/articles/6120#endpoint).

In short:

1. Type "Public Web Services" in the Workday search bar.
2. Under **Reports**, select **Public Web Services**.
3. From the **Public Web Services** list, select any entry and click the ellipsis icon to reveal a dropdown menu. Select **Web Service > View WSDL**, which displays the full WSDL in a separate window.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXc-up-ul-XHkHOYHjwcdDb74yMH2v-D77gCTKM41DjJ5foAmpEa9_y7b6BljGHaX05AQdd4BUqhTNI2INlJl6I16XjkoaJDpJXXl7iTrWcX2q4n3wohW_JmKVjglXaMCkQoS2gF?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g" size="80" alt="Screenshot of the Public Web Services list in Workday, showing the ellipsis dropdown menu with the View WSDL option" isUploading="false" width="480" height="410" darkWidth="480" darkHeight="410" showCaption="false"}

4. The WSDL URL is the link in your browser bar.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Copy the WSDL URL for configuration within Ashby.
:::

# Configure the connection in Ashby

Now that you've collected all of the information needed, you're ready to configure the connection in Ashby.&#x20;

Navigate to [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/workday](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/workday), where you see the screen below.

![Screenshot of the Workday integration configuration screen in Ashby, showing fields for WSDL URL, ISU credentials, and REST API settings](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfowSttyBPT6Zqwb79dWuDvNjAUHaVu903mru7ZSMqM2ca5B1NxEysR9TYjGiNJKs2t0Iv_NU5U_FK9XZjI1rUgUEWP_RaqIWNGxhNasM12xxQKtx7i_5gGsf0LJFIs9FwUKUMB_g?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g)

## Steps

:::hint{type="warning"}
Your Workday tenant ID is case-sensitive. Take care when entering it in step 2.
:::

1. In the first box, paste the WSDL URL.
2. In the **Workday ISU Username** field, enter the ISU username you created for Ashby, followed by `@` and your tenant ID (e.g., `Ashby_ISU@acme`).
3. In the **Workday ISU Password** field, paste the ISU password.
4. In the **Workday REST API Base URL** field, paste the "host" part of the endpoints you copied when configuring the REST API client. It looks something like `https://wd5-services1.myworkday.com`, which is just the part of the URLs that ends in `myworkday.com`. They should all be the same, though yours may start with `wd4-services1` for example.
5. In the **Workday REST API Client ID** field, paste the client ID you copied when configuring the REST API client.
6. In the **Workday REST API Client Secret** field, paste the client secret you copied when configuring the REST API client.
7. In the **Workday REST API Client Refresh Token** field, paste the refresh token you copied when configuring the REST API client.

:::hint{type="success"}
Once this is complete, let us know so we can monitor the initial sync and make sure all is well.
:::

# What is migrated from Workday?

## Objects migrated

- Job requisitions (non-confidential)
- Evergreen job requisitions
- Teams and departments
- Locations
- Openings
- Candidates (non-confidential)
- Job considerations and applications
- Interview feedback ratings
- Sources
- Candidate attachments, including resumes

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Resume attachments will be imported on the second sync (after the first successful full sync of candidates and job applications). Subsequent delta syncs will import the Resume immediately.
:::

- Disposition reasons
- Work experience
- Education
- Contact information (name, email, phone, and social links)
- EEOC forms
- Employees (as inactive users, so they can be assigned hiring team roles)

## Objects not migrated

- Job templates
- Job postings
- Custom fields
- Candidate tags
- Candidate pools
- Emails and messages
- Email templates
- Application forms
- Questionnaires for the candidate
- Confidential jobs
- Confidential prospects

[title] Create test candidates and test out the workflow
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Ashby Admin Onboarding/Ashby Admin Onboarding/

This guide will walk you through adding a new candidate in Ashby for testing purposes. If you are planning on testing out emails, be sure to use an email address that you have access to.
For more on the candidate profile in general, check out [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).

## How do I add a test candidate in Ashby?

To add a new candidate in Ashby:

- Click `+ Add `on the top navigation bar, then Candidate.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XCqA0B1hx3vz5P4ms07n-_candidate-profile-archbee-document-2026-02-17-at-121934-pm.jpg)

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Add in the candidate's details, then click `Next`.&#x20;
  - If you have a dummy resume, you can upload it using the `Upload File` button. It will then be parsed so candidate information will be filled out from the provided file.
- If you'd like to add the candidate to a job's pipeline, consider them for the job.
  - This is optional, click `Skip` if you just want to create a profile for the candidate.
  - You can also add in a source and credit the candidate to a user at this stage.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0d4d08ccf3940eae34f68162ab49351b.png)
:::
::::


[title] API Migrations
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/


[title] Initial Setup & Migrations
[path] /

This section covers getting started with Ashby. If you are setting up Ashby from scratch, check out our Ashby Admin Onboarding guides, or our Agency onboarding guides if you're setting up an Ashby account as an agency working with multiple companies.

Coming over to Ashby from another ATS? You can find our migration documentation here too.

# Ashby Onboarding Guides

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Welcome to Ashby! These guides will walk you through the initial steps of setting key Ashby settings.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🎉 [Ashby Admin Onboarding](docId\:aSKvbp-DfF9riogKAZshI)&#x20;

🤝 [Agency Onboarding Guide](docId\:ATHpcBf_FzBFHdMjYBq3c)&#x20;

🏛️ [Advanced Setup](docId\:PWOXjaiesmhYGaSUTulN-)&#x20;

🎓 [Accessing Ashby Academy](docId:7udY7VEQdCLTo7DaA82Av)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Migrations

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you're migrating from another ATS, these guides will walk you through pulling your data into Ashby.&#x20;
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
➡️ [Migrations](docId:5B1bivkknuZghXjCFBqYZ)

➡️ [Historical Import Migrations](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)&#x20;

📁 [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Security

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If your security team has questions, our security docs are a great place to start.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
[Understanding And Managing Ashby’s Access Requests for Security Teams](docId\:opeZk2wNhAx5RDuFrzyxK)&#x20;

[Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3)&#x20;

[Requested permissions for the Chrome Extension, Slack and other Integrations](docId\:csqqlcymwuHBz2vfDe3P4)&#x20;
:::
::::




[title] What is a shared calendar?
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Ashby Admin Onboarding/Ashby Admin Onboarding/

***

When setting up Ashby, we recommend configuring a shared calendar as part of your Google Workspace integration. If you're using the Microsoft 365 integration, this is known as a group calendar.

:::hint{type="info"}
- For more information on Google Workspace integrations, see [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) .
- For more information on Microsoft 365 integrations, see [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7) .
:::

# What does a shared calendar do?

## Makes rescheduling interviews easy

A shared or group calendar is a calendar that every user who can schedule or reschedule interviews should have access to. When interviews are scheduled, calendar invites go out to the candidate and to the panel, and events are also added to a calendar specified either within the schedule interview activity or when manually scheduling the interview.

Calendars can be set on the **Communication** tab within the schedule interview activity:

![How to select the calendar the event is added to when completing a 'Schedule Interview' activity.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f304ae5098dbe1962cef0920a10eb0f8.png)

Or when manually scheduling an interview by configuring the **Invite Settings**:

![How to select the calendar the event is added to when manually scheduling an interview.](https://cdn.zappy.app/5d95bb009f787a9bfeaf98883b625b78.png)

We recommend setting up a shared calendar so that, if an interview needs rescheduling, users who can reschedule have access to the calendar the interview event is on and therefore the ability to edit it. They can then successfully reschedule the interview in Ashby.

If the calendar for the interview or schedule interview activity is set to a **Personal Calendar of Scheduler**, the event is added to the personal calendar of the user scheduling. As users don't usually have edit access to one another's calendars, this can cause errors when trying to reschedule interviews added to personal calendars.

![Screenshot showing a scheduling failure due to inability to access the scheduler's personal calendar.](https://cdn.zappy.app/eb99dcac3eea5e77b0a2374c6c766c3a.png)

## All interviews visible on one calendar

Having a shared calendar for all interviews also allows those with access to view all scheduled interviews in one place, while ensuring that interview events they aren't on the panel for aren't added to their personal calendar and blocking availability unnecessarily.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8ea58cdcbd7049d68133fe6d40199d2a"}

# How do I create and add a shared calendar to my Ashby account?

::::ExpandableHeading
## Google Workspace shared calendar setup

The person setting up the Google Workspace integration and the person adding the shared calendar must both belong to the same primary domain that is authorized in Ashby.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/88562786fe99401482632be33453c4b2?sid=d5fec72b-7f48-4069-8894-9610a12693fc"}

### Create and share a calendar in Google Calendar

To set up your shared Google calendar:

1. Create a new calendar in Google Calendar.
2. Click on your new calendar in the left-hand menu.
3. Scroll to the **Share with specific people** section.
4. Add everyone who schedules interviews by entering their email addresses and give them at least **Make changes to events** permissions.
5. Scroll to **Integrate Calendar** and copy the full calendar ID.

### Integrate the shared calendar with Ashby

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Google Workspace > Shared Calendars**.
2. Click `Add Calendar`.
3. Paste the calendar ID in the email/calendar ID field and click `Add`.

### Who can book interviews on a shared calendar

Whether an interview can be booked on a shared calendar or meeting room is determined by each scheduler's own Google permissions, not by the Ashby integration's permissions. Each user who schedules interviews in Ashby must have permission in Google to create and edit events on every shared calendar and meeting room they are expected to use. Ashby does not grant or proxy this access.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Before a user can schedule interviews onto a shared calendar, they must be added to that calendar in Google with at least **Make changes to events** permission. See [Google's instructions for sharing a calendar](https://support.google.com/calendar/answer/37082) for steps on how to do this.
:::
::::

::::ExpandableHeading
## M365 group calendar setup

### Create a group calendar in Microsoft 365

To get started:

1. Create a Microsoft 365 Group.
2. Add the people who will be scheduling interviews to that group as members.
3. This group has a calendar attached to it that all added members can write to.

![Screenshot of the Microsoft 365 Group setup interface.](https://cdn.zappy.app/09a9307441e45b802f3aa84b3f771370.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Important group requirements:**

- It must be Public.
- It must be a Group (not a Distribution List or Shared Mailbox).
- Teams capabilities must be enabled.
- It must be mail-enabled (not a security group).
- Make sure **Hide this group from the global address list** is unchecked.

These requirements are critical for the calendar to sync correctly with Ashby.
:::

### Integrate the group calendar with Ashby

To integrate your group calendar:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations Marketplace** and open the Microsoft 365 integration settings.
2. Click the **Group Calendars** tab.
3. Click `Add Calendar`.

![Screenshot of the Group Calendars tab in the Microsoft 365 integration settings in Ashby, with the Add Calendar button visible.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/K3bJOQ9Hmrpm3cD4UuSby_image.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
This calendar becomes the default calendar when scheduling interviews.

Anyone scheduling on that calendar needs to complete the individual Microsoft 365 authorization in **Personal Settings**.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
**Things to note**

- To schedule interviews onto this calendar, users need to authorize with Individual OAuth in **Personal Settings**.
- The organizer of the meeting is the group name, and interviewers are attendees. Name the group something that can be externally facing, as it appears on candidate invites.
- When a new calendar is authorized, users should re-authenticate in their **Personal Settings**.
:::
::::

# FAQs

### What's the difference between booking on a shared calendar and booking on the interviewer's personal calendar?

We recommend setting up a shared calendar as part of your [Google Workspace integration](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/google) to ensure that you can reschedule interviews easily. When adding an interview to a calendar, only those with write access to that calendar can reschedule the interview. As such, setting up a shared calendar that everyone has write access to ensures that other users can reschedule or switch interviewers in Ashby if a team member becomes unavailable.

If an interview is scheduled to a personal calendar and another user tries to reschedule the interview, they receive the following error message if they don't have write access to the personal calendar in question.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eb99dcac3eea5e77b0a2374c6c766c3a.png)

Once you have a shared calendar set up, you can choose to schedule interviews on that calendar within the interview plans for each job or job template. If some interviews have already been booked on a personal calendar, we recommend canceling and rebooking them to ensure they're added to the shared calendar.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b119afebd4cf43928403f41e6d0a3353"}

### Why can't I schedule to the shared calendar?

If you aren't able to schedule people to the shared calendar, you haven't been added to it. You can adjust this in the settings of that calendar:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a5e88e8b4847434abe6a8151701166b9"}

### Why am I seeing two calendar events for an interview on my personal calendar?

When booking an interview and sending out calendar invites, calendar events are sent to three calendars. Separate calendar events are sent out for interviewers and candidates so party-specific interview information can be included.

- One set for the calendar the overall interview is scheduled on.
- One for the interviewer's calendar\*.
- One for the candidate's calendar.

\*If there are multiple interviewers on the panel, an event is sent out for each interviewer's individual calendar.

If the overall interview is scheduled on an interviewer's personal calendar, they receive the calendar event for the calendar the overall interview is scheduled on, and also receive the calendar event for themselves as an interviewer.

To avoid multiple events, ensure the shared calendar is selected when setting up a schedule interview activity and when booking one-off interviews. It's also important to ensure that all users who are scheduling interviews have write access to the shared calendar. Once scheduled, the calendar an interview is scheduled on cannot be changed — the interview needs to be cancelled and rebooked.

### Can I configure multiple shared calendars?

You can, yes. You can follow the steps [above](#) multiple times to add more shared calendars. This is helpful if you'd like to set up a shared calendar per department.

### What does 'Default Interview Calendar' mean?

If you have a shared calendar in place, you see this option when setting up a schedule interview activity, along with the name or names of shared calendars you have set up as part of your [Google Workspace integration](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/google/shared-calendars).

![Screenshot showing the Default Interview Calendar option in the schedule interview activity settings in Ashby.](https://cdn.zappy.app/641c57f3e67a860595be15e80887097d.png)

If only one shared calendar is set up in your account, 'Default Interview Calendar' refers to that shared calendar, as it is automatically set as the default. If you have set up multiple shared calendars, you can select the default in your [Google Workspace integration settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/google/shared-calendars).

### I set up the shared calendar. Why isn't it being used for my existing interview plans?

The shared calendar becomes the default for any schedule interview activity created after it is added to your account.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby does not automatically update existing schedule interview activities, so those activities continue to use the previous calendar.
:::

To update an existing schedule interview activity:

1. Navigate to the job and select the `Interview Plan` tab.
2. Find the schedule interview activity you would like to edit and select `Modify` > `Edit`.
3. Go to the `Communication` tab.
4. In the `Calendar` dropdown, select the shared calendar instead of the scheduler's personal calendar.

![Ashby Recruiter Screen Interview Schedule settings with the Calendar field highlighted and set to “Personal Calendar of Scheduler.”](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lLalyEjIAXyfftXky6n34_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-23-at-112545-am.jpg)

Repeat these steps for each existing scheduling activity you want to use with the shared calendar.

:::hint{type="info"}
Updates to a schedule interview activity apply to interviews that haven’t been scheduled yet. Already-scheduled interviews retain their original calendar and details, including when using Quick Reschedule. To apply the update, fully cancel the interview and schedule it again.
:::

### Can I customize the colors of the Ashby events in my shared Google calendar?

This isn't currently possible in Ashby.

### Does availability pull from the shared calendar? If an interview is already booked at one time, does that mean another with other interviewers can't be booked at the same time?

Availability is pulled from your interviewers' personal Google calendars, not from your shared calendar. If one interviewer is scheduled for an interview on Monday at 11am and another interviewer is available at that time and assigned to the panel on a different interview, they can also be booked for Monday at 11am.

### Can I book two concurrent interviews on the same shared calendar?

Yes, you can schedule concurrent interviews on the shared interview calendar. Ashby flags scheduling conflicts for interviewers based on events in their individual calendars.

### How do I add people to the shared calendar?

If a user isn't able to schedule people to the shared calendar, they haven't been added to it. To add them, go to the **Shared with specific people or groups** section in your calendar's settings in Google Calendar, then click `+ Add people and groups` to add additional users.

### How do I delete a shared calendar in my Ashby account?

Navigate to the Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration panel within the **Integrations Marketplace**.

Click on the **Shared Calendars** or **Group Calendars** tab, then click `More` and `Delete` on the shared calendar you'd like to remove. Note that this action cannot be undone.

![Screenshot of the Shared Calendars tab in Ashby showing the More and Delete options for removing a shared calendar.](https://cdn.zappy.app/01dca8e6226dd43901cde59d976f0c69.png)


[title] Security Information
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/


[title] Migrations
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby supports three types of : API migration, file-based migration and self-serve bulk import.&#x20;
:::

::::Tabs
:::Tab{title="API Migration"}
This route directly integrates with the Legacy ATS. Once an API Key is input, the migration will complete automatically within 2-3 days, depending on the amount of data needing to be migrated. This option is currently only supported for all Greenhouse and Workday, along with some Lever migrations.
:::

:::Tab{title="File-based migration"}
This option requires retrieving exported data from the legacy ATS and providing that information to Ashby to manually import. This option is currently supported for a limited number of migrations.
:::

:::Tab{title="Self-serve bulk import"}
This route uses the [bulk import tool](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ) . It only supports importing candidate data in a CSV file which generally means it is not a comprehensive view of the candidates' lifecycle with a team.&#x20;

We can also import folders of resume files in bulk - please contact your CSM or reach out to Support for assistance with this.&#x20;

This option is supported for all migrations. If you do not see your legacy ATS listed below, this is likely the route you would need to take to import candidate data.
:::
::::

| **Legacy ATS**                                  | **API Migration** | **File-Based Migration** | **Self-Service + Resume Import** |
| ----------------------------------------------- | ----------------- | ------------------------ | -------------------------------- |
| [Greenhouse](docId\:cRJSTuGNmwNJ59jlL3-Tp)      | 🟢                | 🔴                       | 🟢                               |
| [Lever](docId\:Ybylw_cYkXHr0pvyKx5rk)           | 🟡                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| **Workday**                                     | 🟢                | 🔴                       | 🟢                               |
| [Workable](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)        | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [Teamtailor](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)      | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [Paycor ](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)         | 🔴                | 🟡                       | 🟢                               |
| [Homerun](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)         | 🔴                | 🟡                       | 🟢                               |
| [Smartrecruiter ](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh) | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [Pinpoint ](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)       | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [Jobvite](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)         | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [Comeet ](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)         | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [iCIMS](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)           | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [Recruitee](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ)       | 🔴                | 🔴                       | 🟢                               |
| [Gem ATS](docId\:aG2Ad1X27eIYCjhXyCrVh)         | 🔴                | 🟢                       | 🟢                               |
| [Other ATS?](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ)      | 🔴                | 🔴                       | 🟢                               |

🟢 - indicates this option is supported for all migrations

🟡 - indicates this option is supported for some migrations

🔴 - indicates this option is supported for no migrations

## Glossary of terms across platforms

When navigating Ashby, you may see terms that you’ve come across before in other ATS’s but used in a slightly different context. By the same token, concepts in Ashby may be named differently in other ATS systems too. See the table below for examples of terms used in Ashby All-In-One versus the terms for the same or a similar concept in Greenhouse, Workday, iCIMS and Lever.

| Ashby                       | Greenhouse                 | Lever                                  | Workday                              | iCIMS                                      |
| --------------------------- | -------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------ |
| Job Consideration           | Application                | Opportunity                            | Job Application                      | Application                                |
| Job                         | Job                        | Job                                    | Job Requisition                      | Job                                        |
| Job Board                   | Job Board                  | Job Board/Job Site                     | Career Site                          | Career Site                                |
| Custom tracking link        | Job board tracking link    |                                        | Recruiting Sources for Auto-Tracking | Links to Auto-Fill Candidate Source Fields |
| Interview                   | Interview                  | Interview                              | Interview                            | Interview                                  |
| Interviewer Participation   | Interviewer Participation  | Interviewer Participation              |                                      |                                            |
| Interview Stage Transition  | Interview Stage Transition | Interview Stage Transition             | \[Stage] Decision                    | Workflow Status Change                     |
| Feedback Form               | Scorecard                  | Feedback Form                          | Questionnaire (Type: Interview)      | Feedback Form                              |
| Candidate                   | Candidate                  | Candidate                              | Candidate                            | Candidate                                  |
| Archive Reason              | Rejection Reason           | Archive Reason                         | Disposition Reason                   | Rejection Reason                           |
| Sequence                    | Campaigns                  |                                        | Campaign                             | Automated Campaigns                        |
| Substitution Tokens         | Tokens                     | Auto-text Tokens                       | External Field                       | Email Variables                            |
| Application Form            | Application Questions      |                                        | Job Application Template             | iForms                                     |
| Opening                     | Opening                    | Requisition (Depends on Lever package) | Position                             | Requisition                                |
| Diversity Survey            | Demographic Survey         |                                        | Voluntary Disclosures                | iForms                                     |
| EEOC Survey                 | EEOC Questionnaire         | EEO Questions/Surveys                  | Voluntary Disclosures                | iForms                                     |
| Candidate Experience Survey | Candidate Survey           | Candidate Experience Survey            | Questionnaire (Type: Recruiting)     | iForms                                     |


[title] Adding Agency Sources
[path] Users & Permissions/Agency Users & External Recruiters/

You can add sources on the [Sources page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources) in admin. Click [Add Source Type](https://cdn.zappy.app/1963ea0fce021e2443c25dc4cee379e9.gif), enter a name, then click Create. There are a few other ways to engage external recruiters with Ashby:

- Once you've set up a job, external recruiters can:&#x20;
  - Forward resumes to to job-specific email addresses, or
  - You can upload .csv files of candidates

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on importing options, check out [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ)&#x20;
:::

- You can add external recruiters as users in Ashby (more on this at [Agencies Users](docId\:sMNQ8t0NuSBVnjbYJy0rS) and [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1))


[title] Additional User Permissions
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

When assigning access roles, you have the option to assign a limited set of Admin permissions to Elevated Access users. If you don’t have access to manage Additional User Permissions reach out to an Organization Admin on your team.

## Additional User Permissions Overview

Additional User Permissions allow Organization Admins to share access to a limited set of Admin features with Elevated Access Users.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c183a64b9e99451cb340c7c1560cc1c7"}

## Granting Permissions

Organization Admins will see a new section titled Additional User Permissions under the Permissions tab for Elevated Access users. This can be used for determining which parts of Admin the user has access to.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5196fcd9e285f2ae589adc2243ab3508.png)

The current granular permissions supported are:

| Permission Title                   | Permission Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ---------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Email Templates                    | Add shared email templates that can be accessed by your entire team                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Shared Interview Plans             | Add and edit shared interview plans within Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interview Plans                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Shared Interviews & Feedback Forms | Add and edit shared interview and feedback form templates to use when setting up schedule interview activities and scheduling one-off interviews                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Sources                            | Add source types and sources to associated candidates with                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Job Board Tracking Links           | Create custom tracked links to add to job board listings                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Candidate Tags                     | Create tags to help organize candidates                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Interviewer & Meeting Room Pools   | Create groups of interviewers and meeting rooms to assign to interviews                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Bulk Data Imports                  | This allows Elevated Access users to view, create and run Candidate imports (but not Openings, Jobs or Employee imports).<br />Please note: if the import would take actions that require additional user admin permissions (e.g. creating tags, creating sources), then the user must have those permissions. If they do not, the import row will fail with an error message. Duplicate candidates may appear if existing candidates exist on roles the user does not have access to. |
| Archive Reasons                    | Add and edit archive reasons applied to job considerations when they are rejected                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Close Job Reasons                  | Add and edit close reasons that are applied to a job when closing it out                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Manage Openings                    | The elevated access user will be able to see the openings they have access to and also any openings that aren’t linked to jobs.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Scheduling Defaults                | Be able to amend the  initially applied to schedule interview activities and one-off interviews                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Offer Letter Templates             | This grants the user access to the Offers section of Admin. Users can configure offer custom fields, offer document substitution tokens, offer templates, and offer template settings.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |



## Accessing Admin as an Elevated Access User

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Elevated Access users who have been granted some Organization Admin permissions will have an Admin tab with the accessible items in the Admin navigation menu. These users will have full access to manage the items they have been granted access to.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2022-03-03 at 1.37.28 PM.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/832cafdac408fcdca151e1f6898e8602.png)


:::
::::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why can’t I grant access to \[insert feature not currently supported]?

The current list of features is associated with managing jobs and candidates and will unblock your users the vast majority of the time. If there is another feature you’d like to give them access to, please email [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) and we’ll submit a feature request.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is there a way to stop interviewers from editing feedback after submission?

Interviewers can edit their own feedback, even after submission. We don’t currently have a setting to prevent this.
:::


[title] Auditing and Reporting on User Permissions and User Active Dates
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

This guide covers how to view employee permission history and some examples of user activity reports you can create in Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** You must have Organization Admin access to view employee profiles.
:::

# Viewing Employee Permission History

You can view a log of any changes to an employees permissions within their employee profile. To do this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**
2. Click on the user profile in question to open up their profile details
3. Navigate to the **History** tab

From here, you’ll be able to see any changes made to the user’s permissions, along with who made the change and a timestamp showing when the change was made.

![The history tab on an employee profile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3bb88c6ec2953c47c4de8b019054c349.png)

Changes that are logged include:

- User being activated, deactivated or terminated
- Changes to their global access role
- Access roles being granted, including the jobs or department the access role has been provided for
- Access roles being revoked.

# Viewing when a user was last active

## Employees Page

You can now add a Last Active Date? column on the Employees page. This will show the last date a user logged in to Ashby. Click the column icon and toggle on the `Last Active Date?` option to add it to the Employee view.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/b4ff0d0d5d62c5bc96ba5c72759ed9b4.png" size="78" width="287" height="271" darkWidth="287" darkHeight="271" position="center" alt="The toggle list of columns on the Employees page" showCaption="false"}

![The Last Active Date column on the Employees page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q8_5pHMi6t3Y_4_wcLxov_employees-acent-ashby-2026-05-01-at-102616-am.jpg)

## Reporting on user activity

This is also available as a field for reporting and filtering, so you can view active employees by their last active date or create other reports focussed around user activity.

Here’s an example of a report grouping users with paid/free seats by their last active date:

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:&#x20;**&#x45;mployees

**Timeframe Timestamp:** Last Active Date

**Group By:&#x20;**&#x45;mployee's Required Paid Seat?

![A count over time report showing the last active date of employees, grouped by if the employee has a paid seat.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AXc1cpOA-m4XwvH-YE2zb_last-active-date-split-by-paid-seat.jpg)


[title] Agency Users & External Recruiters
[path] Users & Permissions/


[title] Getting Started: User Guides
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Looking to share onboarding guides with users you've just added to assist with training? Here you can find documentation to help then get acquainted with key areas of Ashby based on their role.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
⭐️ [Getting Started for Interviewers](docId:2_WbM9Pju_SOWws1jhpZZ)&#x20;

🔍 [Getting Started for Sourcers](docId\:xWkjWMMZhmSU_xSKtG_R3)&#x20;

🗓️ [Getting Started for Recruiting Coordinators](docId\:ZHSO6kJXpXFsZbESO2rLl)&#x20;

💼 [Getting Started for Recruiters](docId\:QyoLopAyBDwsEm-GsXjy3)&#x20;

🤝 [Getting Started for Hiring Managers](docId\:Ku4nmt5UeOs8wfRgFxQNY)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Troubleshooting: Clearing Cache & Local Storage
[path] Navigating Ashby/

When troubleshooting an issue, you may be asked to clear your web browser’s cache or local storage by our Support team.

You can clear your cache and local storage by heading [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/support/clear-cache) within your Ashby account. Click `Clear` to clear your browser cache and local storage for [ashbyhq.com](https://ashbyhq.com/).

:::hint{type="warning"}
Please note: This does not clear cookies.
:::


[title] Updating Personal Settings
[path] Navigating Ashby/

You can update your avatar, complete individual OAuth and manage your notification settings in your [Personal Settings.](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info)

## Recommended setup

As part of your Ashby setup we recommend that you:

1. [Update your avatar](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info) to a recent photo for your candidates to recognize you
   1. The image should be a square (of any size) and preferably have some margin around the photo’s subject. 400 x400 px is a good place to start.
2. [Update your notification settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/notifications) to control which email and/or Slack updates you receive
3. [Share your email with your recruiting team](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing) to send emails on your behalf (this is optional)
4. [Set your meeting hours](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/meeting-hours) for when you’re available for interviews



## Personal settings

You can access your personal settings by navigating to your name in the upper right corner, and then selecting `Personal Settings`.  Below is a description of the various settings areas you can update.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Ril4cmiwctcVawpG8IrEo_candidate-pipeline-acent-ashby-2026-06-01-at-110712-am.jpg)

- **Your Information:** Add and update information like your email address, your avatar and job title. You can also manually set your timezone here if it is not syncing from your Google Calendar.
- **Notifications:** Set when and where you receive notifications, either via email or via Slack (if the integration is in place). More on this at [Notifications & Notification Settings](docId\:A85ZAqFvmgeJNBLAPkETL)
- **Email Templates:** Create personal email templates that you can send out to candidates. More on creating email templates at [Emails](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).
- **Email Settings:** Here you can configure email sync, opt to use tracking links, set up email signatures, or enable an "undo send" delay for emails you send out via Ashby.
- **Email Sharing:** Request access to send emails on behalf of another user. You can also opt to share your email address with others. More on this at [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx).
- **Meeting Hours:** Set your availability for interviews here. For additional information, check out [Meeting Hours](#)
- **Google Workspace Settings/Microsoft 365 Settings:** Connect your Google or Microsoft account to provide calendar/email access if needed. If you are not sure whether to complete OAuth in Personal Settings, please reach out to an admin at your company.
- **Integration Settings:** Personalize settings for your organization's integrations here.
- **Refer Ashby and Earn:** Access your Ashby referral link here to refer Ashby as a product to other companies.
- **Bulk Action History:** View a log of bulk actions taken by you as a user.
- **Recently Deleted:** Review candidates deleted within the last ten days, with the option to restore or permanently delete them. More on this at [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc).
- **Social Links:** Add URLs to social profiles (for example LinkedIn) here. These will then show up for the candidate if you are an interviewer on the panel they are on.

# FAQ

### My profile picture has synced over from Google Workspace but it’s very pixelated. Why?

Images synced over from Google Workspace do not have a high enough resolution. As such, we’d recommend users upload their avatar within [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info) to fix this.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3bd9ae2c6b84fa648351e2310d15c63c.png)

### Can I add an email signature in Ashby?

Yes. Email signatures can be added to Ashby via two routes:

- If you have the [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) integration in place, then your Gmail signature should sync over and can be added to emails
- You can set up an email signature in **Personal Settings >** [Email Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email)

Within **Email Settings**, you have the following options:

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pZKkDtcIIJdUYFBZRAc2I_ashby-2026-01-29-at-111923-am.jpg)

- **Enable Email Signature:** Opt to automatically include your email signature in all emails sent from Ashby moving forward
- **Before quoted content:** Enable this to insert your email signature before quoted text in replies and remove the "--" that precedes it
- **Email Signature to use:** Determine whether you would like to use your Gmail signature (if applicable) or a custom one you can set up in Ashby
- **Gmail/Custom Signature:** You can preview your Gmail signature here, or add your custom signature here.

When creating your custom signature, you can embolden, italicize or underline text. You can also insert bulleted or numbered lists, links or images.

If you've made changes to your Gmail signature and don't see the correct signature when previewing it in Ashby, you can click `Refresh` to import the new signature immediately.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
The `Refresh` button will be greyed out if you haven't authorized your Gmail account from the Google Workspace Settings page in **Personal Settings**.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kXfJj6gejPEnDPn0mQ5SX_ashby-2026-01-29-at-112139-am.jpg)
:::

### Can I set another user's personal settings?

Users can only set their own personal settings. You cannot impersonate or log in as another user to set personal settings on their behalf, and admin users cannot set another user's personal settings either.


[title] Billing & Plans
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The guides here cover billing questions and further information about the All-In-One plans available.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
💳  [Billing FAQ](docId\:Tr2E6HPHkU0qi5ST46IXw)&#x20;

❓ [Sales Tax FAQ](docId\:M1o1-53m_xDEBGAI6W25J)&#x20;

🪑 [Seat-based Pricing](docId:4pomJ36Zok_ZIwAiGD3AW)&#x20;

💵 [Purchasing AI Credits and Email Lookups](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE)&#x20;

📋 [Ashby All-In-One Plans](docId\:NFSszyif8rep9ZYcws72j)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Billing FAQ
[path] Billing & Plans/

Welcome to the Billing FAQ section for Ashby! Here, we've compiled answers to the most commonly asked questions about billing. If you can't find the answer you're looking for, please reach out to our support team for assistance.

## General Information

### How can I update my billing information?

If you have access to [Billing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/billing) on your Ashby account, you can amend your billing information and payment settings in the Settings tab.

If you see a message that your billing settings are managed outside of Ashby, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to make changes.

### What payment methods do you accept?

We accept most major credit cards, including Visa, Mastercard, and American Express. For plans over a certain amount, we support invoicing. Please contact [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for further details.

### When will I be billed for my subscription?

You will be billed for your subscription on a monthly or yearly basis, depending on the specific plan you have selected. Your billing date will typically be the same day of the month that you originally signed up for the subscription.

### What happens if my payment fails?

If your payment fails for any reason, we will attempt to contact the billing email on file for an alternative payment method. If the payment continues to fail or we cannot reach you to settle your outstanding balance, your subscription may be suspended until the balance is paid.

### How do I pay a past due invoice?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you have an overdue invoice, you will see a red dot beside Admin on the navigation bar. On the Admin page, you’ll see a banner saying you have an overdue invoice.

You can click `Go to Invoices` to then see the overdue invoice. An overdue invoice will have a red `Pay Now` button beside it, next to the option to download the invoice.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a8f6f7950bfee1b329b2a5c6b2c1b22f.png)


:::
::::

### How do I download an invoice?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
In [Billing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/billing), head to the Invoices tab. From here, you should see a list of invoices with a `Download`  button next to each.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fdb025ec9b84aa7ea42f2abe3f1b10f0.png)


:::
::::

### I would like to switch my payment method to invoicing.

Invoicing is currently only available to customers on an annual plan. We require monthly plan customers to have a credit card on file that can be processed on their monthly billing date. For any additional billing or payment support, please reach out to [billings@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:billings@ashbyhq.com).

### What's your refund policy?

We offer a 30-day money-back guarantee for month-to-month plans. If you're not satisfied with our service within the first 30 days, contact [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com), and we'll process a full refund.

### How can I request access to the Billing section of Ashby?

You can request access by reaching out to any of the listed Billing Users on the Billing page [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/billing). If there are no Billing Users listed, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to be added. Please note as a Billing User, you will be the point-of-contact with Ashby's Billing Team for any billing-related correspondence.

### How do I assign a user access to the Billing section of Ashby?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Only an existing Billing user can add a new Billing user. You can either give a user access to Billing by amending their permissions to include access to Billing on the [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) page, or by adding them as a Billing user within Billin&#x67;*.*

The option to add additional users to the list of Billing Users can be found within the Settings tab.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4be81041e4fafb8fbe789382a92baf53.png)


:::
::::

### How do I update my billing address?

If you have access to [Billing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/billing) on your Ashby account, you can amend your billing address within your billing information. Clicking the `Edit in Stripe` link next to Billing Information to be taken to a new tab where you can amend your billing information.

### What is the Billing Email listed under Billing > Settings > Billing Information and how is that different from the "Billing User"?

We manage our customer billing and process payment with Stripe which requires a billing email. This email will be the recipient of automated email notification from Stripe, like invoices, receipts, or failed payment notifications. The Billing User can view and manage all billing settings and invoices in Ashby but will not receive these automated Stripe emails. However, should there be any billing issues, our Billing team may reach out to any Billing User(s) to help resolve. Any Billing User can update the Stripe Billing Email.

### How do I upgrade my Ashby plan?

If you are on the Foundations or Plus plans, reach out to your CSM or Sales contact to discuss your needs and start the upgrade process. For a full list of the features available on each plan, check out our [Pricing page](https://www.ashbyhq.com/pricing).

## Subscription Cancellation

### How do I cancel or pause my Ashby subscription?

If you are on annual billing, or are month-to-month but have a dedicated CSM and you’d like to cancel your Ashby subscription, please reach out to contracts\@ashbyhq.com or your contract manager for assistance. Please note that once you cancel, you’ll still have access to your subscription until the end of the current billing cycle.

If you are on a month-to-month billing and do not have a dedicated CSM, you have the ability to cancel your subscription in-app. To do this:

- Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > Billing.
- Click `Manage Subscription`.
- Confirm your reason for cancelling - you will also have the option to add in any feedback.
- After confirming your cancellation reason, you will be provided with an option to submit a request to export your data. This request will be sent to the Support team for processing.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you request a copy of your data as part of the cancellation process, please note that the export is not an instant, in-app download. Once your request is submitted, our team will process it manually in accordance with our data policies.You’ll receive an email notification with a secure link to access your export once it’s ready.
:::

- You will then have the option to permanently delete all of your account’s data after it is deactivated. Please note that this action is irreversible.
- Confirm your cancellation request. Your request will then be sent to the team for processing. You will still have full access until the end of your billing cycle.

### I've submitted a cancellation request but I want to reverse it - is this possible in-app?

It is! Once you’ve submitted your cancellation request, you can reverse it by navigating back to Admin > Organization Setup > Billing and then clicking the `Reactivate your subscription` link in the red banner listing your deactivation date. You can then review your next charge date and confirm the reactivation accordingly.&#x20;

### Can I get a refund if I cancel my subscription?

We offer a 30-day money back guarantee for new subscribers. After this period, we do not offer full or partial refunds for canceled subscriptions. However, if you cancel your subscription before the next billing cycle begins, you will not be charged for the upcoming period.

### My account has been suspended for billing issues, what do I do?

In order to re-activate your service, any overdue invoices will need to be paid. You can view and pay any overdue invoices on the *Invoices* tab in [Billing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/billing). Once paid, the Billing team will reach out to confirm your account has been reactivated.

## Other

### Can I switch to an annual subscription?

Yes! Please get in touch with [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com), and you’ll hear back from our Contracts Management Team within 2-3 business days.

### How do I purchase additional email lookups?

For more on purchasing email lookups in-app, check out [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE)&#x20;

[title] Set up Departments & Locations
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

This article covers how to configure departments and locations. Both are required for jobs and job postings and can be used for reporting and filtering candidates, jobs and job considerations.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & prerequisites:**

- You must have Organization Admin access to configure departments and locations.
:::

# Permissions and access

Locations and departments can be configured on Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Department setup

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/400388c721cf41e7a7fd591446d8bcae"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Watching the video is optional. Follow the steps below to set up a department.
:::

To set up a department:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Departments & Teams](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/teams).
2. Click `+ New Department`, then enter the department or team name.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2dn8oZhCvLzOLaygE3brU_creating-a-new-department.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1028" height="476" darkWidth="1028" darkHeight="476" alt="The Create Department pop-up where you can enter the department details." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. You can also specify the department the new team/department is a part of. If it is a sub-team to be grouped under a department, select the parent department. If it is a top-level department, leave the **Is under** field blank.
4. Click `Create`.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can adjust the department a sub-team is under or remove parent teams after creating the department.
:::

## Editing a department

To edit a department:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Departments & Teams](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/teams).
2. Click on the department or region you would like to edit.
3. When editing, you also have the option to set a candidate-facing name for your department. If you set one, it is displayed on the job posting listed on your Ashby job board if you opt to list your posting.
4. Make adjustments to the team name or assigned region. Changes are auto-saved.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yxWCrcEZXL85xzM1JsTFZ_editing-a-teamdepartment.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1044" height="874" darkWidth="1044" darkHeight="874" alt="The screenshot shows an existing department." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
The Department Usage section shows all jobs and job postings associated with the department that are impacted by updates.
:::

## Archiving and restoring a department

To archive a department:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Departments & Teams](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/teams).
2. Click on the department or region in question.
3. Click `Archive`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QmrHcZm8S9wRyAQnDBAme_archiving-a-department.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1041" height="561" darkWidth="1041" darkHeight="561" alt="The screenshot shows an existing department with the Archive button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. If the department is linked to jobs, job postings, or has sub-teams, you are prompted to reassign jobs and review the impacted sub-teams. Edit the sub-teams separately and adjust or remove the team they are under before archiving a parent department if you do not want the teams to be archived along with the parent department.
5. Click `Start` to confirm your changes and archive the department. You can review the changes once complete.

To restore a department:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Departments & Teams](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/teams).
2. Click the `Active` dropdown and change it to `All`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/x9RuaGmJwrWhkiGEBaMb-_departments-teams-ashby-2026-09-02-at-101751-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2966" height="482" darkWidth="2966" darkHeight="482" alt="The screenshot shows the Departments & Teams page with the Active dropdown highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Click on the department or region in question.
4. Click `Restore`, then `Restore` on the following pop-up to confirm.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VpU1dc3hqkO5-wOAK5A_I_departments-teams-ashby-2026-09-02-at-101852-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1024" height="828" darkWidth="1024" darkHeight="828" alt="The screenshot shows an archived department with the Restore button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you archive a department, you also have the option to delete it when opening the department's details. Deleted departments cannot be restored.
:::

# Location setup

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/bc3363b275f840749d2f567c7acd011a"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Watching the video is optional. Follow the steps below to set up a location.
:::

To set up a location:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).
2. Click `+ New Location` to create a new location, or click `+ New Region` to create a region to group locations by.
3. When setting up locations, add location details if you want those jobs to appear on external job boards like LinkedIn and Indeed. Location details include the following:

- **Name:** The name of the location. This is both internal and candidate-facing if you don't set a candidate-facing name. This is required.
- **Is under region:** Determine the region the location is under.
- **Address:** Enter a street address.
- **City:** Add the city name.
- **State/province/region:** Add further region details.
- **Postal Code:** Enter the postal code.
- **Country:** Determine the country here.
- **Location Type:** Specify the type of location (for example, Remote or Hybrid) from the **Location Type** dropdown.
- **Candidate-Facing Name:** If you want a different name listed on your job board and for job postings that have this location set, enter it here.

![The screenshot shows the Create Location pop-up, where you can enter the location details.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IHONFe91gov66clKSvxee_locations-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-100509-am.jpg)

## Region setup

Regions are used to group together locations and other regions. To configure a region:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).
2. Click `+ New Region`.
3. Add the region name and set whether it is underneath another region.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RmwYZF4DWD8_KE9bDWfm7_creating-a-region.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="860" height="550" darkWidth="860" darkHeight="550" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Addresses can only be assigned to locations, you cannot assign a location to a region.
:::

Regions will then show in your location list with drop-down arrows. You can click the arrow to open up the list of locations and sub-regions within that region.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-FdJByihx7T4ljYqzw0xz_regions-with-locations.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1042" height="536" darkWidth="1042" darkHeight="536" alt="The screenshot shows the Locations page with two regions, one is open and the other is collapsed." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

## Editing a location

To edit a location:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).
2. Click on the location in question.
3. Make adjustments to the location name, address, and type as needed. Changes are auto-saved.
4. Review the **Location Usage** section to see how many jobs and job postings your location is linked to.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uElMcUXITevzCn6AIakG7_editing-an-existing-location.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1296" height="1064" darkWidth="1296" darkHeight="1064" alt="This screenshot shows the edit screen for an existing location." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
You can view the history of changes made to the location on the **History** tab.
:::

## Archiving and restoring a location

To archive a location:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).
2. Click on the location in question.
3. Click `Archive` and confirm by clicking `Archive` on the following pop-up.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q_rk5qCHmIrkrUcvx4Vmp_archiving-a-location.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1308" height="554" darkWidth="1308" darkHeight="554" alt="The screenshot shows an existing department with the Archive button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you archive a location, you can no longer link it to jobs, but existing assignments are preserved. An archived location can be unarchived at any point in time.
:::

To restore a location:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).
2. Change the `Active` dropdown to `All` to view all locations, including archived ones.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JsNVPcUP7W9gYClPOcXjX_locations-ashby-2026-09-02-at-102405-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2972" height="536" darkWidth="2972" darkHeight="536" alt="This screenshot shows the Locations screen with the Active dropdown highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Click on the location in question.
4. Click `Restore` and `Restore` on the following pop-up to confirm.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/e69_vSZt38G125_HRbvCx_restoring-a-location.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1292" height="502" darkWidth="1292" darkHeight="502" alt="The screenshot shows an archived location with the option to Restore or Delete." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you archive a location, you also have the option to delete it when opening the location's details. Deleted locations cannot be restored.
:::

# FAQs

### When editing a location or department, I can see yellow dots in certain areas. What do these mean?

When amending a location, you see a **Location Usage** section. When editing a department, you see a **Department Usage** section.

![The screenshot shows an existing location where you can view the Location Usage section.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xJSMrUvul5wg2iddZxZQh_location-details-and-usage.jpg)

In these sections, you see the number of jobs and job postings linked to this location or department. If the dot beside a value is green, it means no jobs or job postings are currently using the location or department. If the marker beside a value is yellow, there are jobs or job postings linked to this location or department that are updated if you make changes.

### Can I pull my interview locations from my job locations list?

No, interview locations are different from job locations. Interview locations are set within the **Communications** tab of your interview activity and can either be a custom location, a phone number, or video conferencing (Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, or Zoom). For more on setting a default interview location, check out [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml).

### How do I give a user access to jobs within a specific department?

User permissions can be configured within **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**. For more on providing users access to specific departments, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

### Can I show the location's street address in my job postings?

You can set street addresses to be displayed on your job postings. To display the location address across all job postings on your job board, navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)** and check the `Show Location Address?` checkbox within the **Job Board Options** section.

![The Show Location Address checkbox that can be enabled on the Theme (Job Board) page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PxM7Gfuy1SSlCmhFApRs4_show-location-address-checkbox.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
If an address has not been assigned to some of your locations, only the location name (or candidate-facing location name) is displayed on job postings assigned that location.
:::


[title] Ashby Mobile
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

This guide covers how to use Ashby mobile, our web application where you can manage your candidate pipelines on the go. Sign in using your phone's web browser at [app.ashbyhq.com/signin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin) or [m.ashbyhq.com/signin](https://m.ashbyhq.com/signin).

## Mobile Overview

Ashby Mobile allows you to manage your candidate pipeline on the go. You can use it take the following actions:

- View interview briefings.
- Complete feedback forms.
- View and add feedback for a take-home assignment.
- View job pipelines.
- View candidate profiles.
- Add notes to a candidate profile.
- Archive a candidate.
- Approve or reject jobs, offers and openings.

To access Ashby on mobile, open your mobile browser and navigate to [http://app.ashbyhq.com/signin](http://app.ashbyhq.com/signin) or [m.ashbyhq.com/signin](http://m.ashbyhq.com/signin).&#x20;

Next, sign in to Ashby using one of the login options. Once signed in, you can [add Ashby to your home screen](https://www.howtogeek.com/667938/how-to-add-a-website-to-your-android-home-screen/) for fast access. For information on adding Ashby to your home screen on an iPhone, check out [this guide](https://support.apple.com/en-gb/guide/iphone/iph42ab2f3a7/ios).

## Home Screen

When you initially log into Ashby, the home page will show any upcoming interviews and any overdue feedback (listed as Task&#x73;*)*. The navigation bar at the top of the page will allow you to view:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1mJAatorz-Vx9yvPHw1WM_ashby-mobile-home-page.jpg" size="68" width="1000" height="1042" position="center" showCaption="false"}

**Interviews:&#x20;**&#x56;iew upcoming interviews and tasks to provide feedback.

**Tasks:&#x20;**&#x56;iew upcoming interviews and tasks including providing feedback and completing pending employee surveys.

**Jobs:** View the jobs that you are on the hiring team for and have access to.

**Search:** Pull up a specific job by title, or candidate profile by the candidate’s name.

**User icon:** Use this to view the account you are logged into and to sign out.

**Referrals:** Add and view referrals here. For more on this check out [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr).

**Internal Job Board:** Click this to view the internal job board.

## Interviews and Feedback

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When logging in, you can view any upcoming interviews. Click on any upcoming interview to view the briefing.

The briefing will show the interview details, the candidate information (including their resume and summary if available). The interviewer instructions and the hiring team are also displayed.

Once the interview is complete, fill out the feedback form immediately to keep the process moving. You can click Provide Feedback within the interview details to access the feedback form.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c4f1098ed12c8e8c4c443751c6b16e82.png)
:::
::::



**Feedback Form Tasks**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you log in to Ashby post-interview via mobile, you can click on any of the feedback tasks to complete the feedback form. The interview details will be shown but the interviewer instructions will not be displayed within the task information.

You can click Provide Feedback to complete the feedback form.

If you log in post-interview, you can click on any of the feedback tasks to complete the feedback form. The interview details will be shown but the interviewer instructions will not be displayed within the task information.

You can click Provide Feedback to complete the feedback form.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d1f9ec32a3be5346a5acb42429a217e7.png)
:::
::::

****

## Tasks

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can click the Tasks option to view and take action on any  that have been assigned to you, including providing feedback, replying to notes, completing Quality of Hire or Hiring Manager Experience surveys and approving an offer, opening or job.

You can click on the task to be taken to the feedback form, survey, candidate profile, or approval details.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![A list of tasks to be completed, including replying to a note and approving a job.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ca518c3cf73f8a706c107d2d67115956.png "A list of tasks to be completed, including replying to a note and approving a job.")

![The approval details on Ashby mobile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/bd62c1bb64e05b7017ba7b2580be4776.png "The approval details on Ashby mobile")


:::
::::

## Jobs

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
On the Jobs page, you’ll find a quick view of the jobs you have access to including a count of candidates. The list will show roles you follow or have a role on first, then list the remaining jobs you have access to.

Click on a job to view a list of candidates, grouped by the pipeline stage they are currently in. Click on a candidate’s name to access their [candidate profile](docId:3sYrRuL6WTF7Uvmw-9g4c).

You can also access your Ashby Job Board via the `Job Board` button in the top right corner of the main Jobs page.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/718c35f7a6f7536f12f8069488e5807b.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/be45608ab9f532b48da3b12e320288f3.png)
:::
::::

## Application Review

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To access the bulk application review page in Ashby Mobile:

- Click `Jobs` and select the job in question
- Ensure you are on the Application Review stage of the job's pipeline
- Click `Review X Applications`
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PdrnObguBoJv48BlnX_5a_ashby-mobile-2026-02-17-at-31920-pm.jpg)
:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can view the following on the bulk application review page on Ashby Mobile:

**Resume:** View the candidate's resume

**Summary:&#x20;**&#x56;iew the candidate's basic information, their work experience and their education.

**Application Feed:** Information provided on the submitted application form.

At the bottom of the screen, you have the options of adding a note, clicking `Advance stage` to move the candidate into the next stage of the pipeline or clicking `Archive` to reject the candidate and move them to the Archived stage.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cCoZkvBjEcHA4UhQVUJAB_ashby-mobile-2026-02-17-at-33236-pm.jpg)
:::
::::

## Search

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The search feature allows you to search for both candidates and jobs. Searching for a candidate will take you to their candidate profile, which contains details about the candidate and buttons for adding notes and archiving candidates.

Searching for jobs takes to you to a filtered view of candidates by pipeline stage. Making updates to jobs is not currently supported on mobile.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cfb7098ef59d02ef1bfee7211bd38746.png)
:::
::::

## Candidate Profile

The candidate profile on the mobile version of Ashby highlights details about the candidate and provides a feed of their application activity and progress.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NM2GH4B-4oAWHfamC-veA_ashby-mobile-2026-03-12-at-42042-pm.jpg" size="54" width="982" height="1548" position="center" showCaption="false"}

You can click the `Overview`, `Stages`, `Experience` and `Feed` tabs to jump to specific areas of the candidate profile.

**Overview:&#x20;**&#x54;his takes you to the top of the candidate profile to view their name, source and current or most recent role. There are also buttons that you can click to view the following information:

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Resume:** Click the `Resume` button to see a PDF version of the candidate's resume.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Email:&#x20;**&#x43;lick the `Email` button to view the candidate's email address. On the following pop-up, you will also have the option to copy the email address or send an email to the candidate.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Phone:&#x20;**&#x43;lick the `Phone` button to view the candidate's phone number. On the pop-up, you will also have the option to copy the phone number or call it.
:::

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If the candidate has a LinkedIn profile, GitHub profile and/or website link on their profile, these will also show as buttons in the Overview section. You can click each button to open the link.
:::

**Stages:&#x20;**&#x54;his section contains information about the candidate's job consideration, including the job the candidate is being considered for and the stages that the candidate has been through. Completed and upcoming interviews are also displayed here. Initially, just the overall score provided by interviewers will be displayed - click the arrow to the right of the score to view the interviewer's completed feedback form.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/W32b_QZ8Gxj_YPpHo7kxe_ashby-mobile-2026-03-12-at-92024-am.jpg" size="82" width="942" height="604" position="center" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

**Experience:** View the candidate's work experience and education data. Any candidate  will also be listed in this section.

**Feed:&#x20;**&#x54;he feed showing:

- The candidate's application
- Interview feedback
- Notes left on the candidate profile
- Actions taken on the candidate's job consideration
- Emails to the candidate

The following buttons are available at the bottom of the screen to take action on the candidate's job consideration.

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Add Note:** Click this button to add a note to the candidate profile.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
**Archive:** Click this button to archive the candidate. You will be required to select an archive reason and will have the option to send a rejection email.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
If the candidate is in the Application Review stage of the job's interview plan, you will see the options `Advance Stage` and `Archive` along with `Add Note`. If a candidate is in a stage outside of Application Review, it is not possible to change their stage on mobile.


::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2Z90yyfljkczoqP-EThOU_ashby-mobile-2026-03-12-at-90426-am.jpg" size="52" width="970" height="1494" position="center" showCaption="false"}
:::



## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does Ashby have an iOS or Android app?

No, Ashby Mobile is accessed via mobile browser. You can bookmark the page to access the web app similar to using a mobile app.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can approvals be completed through the mobile version of Ashby?

They can indeed. Pending  will be listed as a task on the user’s home page. More on this [here](docId:3sYrRuL6WTF7Uvmw-9g4c).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I view take-home submissions via the mobile version of Ashby?

You can, yes. Click the `View Submission` button on the take-home activity to view the submitted files and any notes.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/er2T8mcbOfyrdc-KnG-Qi_ashby-mobile-2026-03-27-at-101244-am.jpg" size="76" width="984" height="1196" position="center" showCaption="false"}
:::


[title] Virus Scanning FAQ
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

Ashby scans files uploaded by candidates for known malicious file signatures.

If a file is found to be potentially malicious, we will display a warning dialog whenever you try to download the file. If you choose to accept the risk, you can download the file by clicking `Download Anyway`.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Please remember that Ashby’s virus scanning feature is not a guarantee against infection. We always recommend that you treat files submitted by candidates with the same caution as files you download from other web sites.
:::

## What files are scanned?

All files uploaded by candidates through Ashby’s job boards and application forms are scanned. This includes resumes, cover letters, take-home assignments, and any other files uploaded by the candidate.

We also scan candidate resumes uploaded through Ashby's public API by our integration partners, resumes uploaded to Ashby by email, and resumes submitted through employee referrals.

## How will I be notified if a file is potentially malicious?

If Ashby detects a potentially malicious file, you will see a warning dialog when you attempt to download the file to your desktop:

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MTJLYqdefgpLErZM1dTQC_screenshot2024-03-05at75512am.png" size="70" width="579" height="237" darkWidth="579" darkHeight="237" position="center" alt="Screenshot 2024-03-05 at 7.55.12 AM.png" showCaption="false"}

## How should I proceed if I see a warning dialog?

We recommend treating all files you receive from candidates with caution, regardless of the presence of a virus scanner warning.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Remember that virus scanners are not a guarantee against infection; it is possible for a file to be dangerous even if it passes a virus scan, and it is also possible for a non-malicious file to flagged incorrectly.
:::

## What other warnings should I be aware of?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Ashby will also display a warning if the file scan is in progress, or if there is an error scanning the file. This can happen if the file is password-protected, is too large to scan, or if there is an issue with the file format which prevents our virus scanner from processing it.

We err on the side of caution and display a warning in these cases, but a delay or a failure to scan does not generally mean the file is malicious. If you choose to accept the risk, you can download the file by clicking Download Anyway.

If the scan is still in progress, you will see a File Scan in Progress message.

If the scan could not be completed, you will see an Unable to Scan message.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![If the scan is still in progress, you will see a “File Scan in Progress” message.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ATcJ5Mhb3Z_uoZ1DOHiWR_screenshot2024-03-05at75624am.png)








![If the scan could not be completed, you will see an “Unable to Scan” message.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8vtzzEonv-wjoo8nu6lbT_screenshot2024-03-07at24726pm.png)


:::
::::



## How can I safely handle malicious files?

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby isn’t in a position to make specific security recommendations to our customers; the correct level of caution depends on your platform, risk profile, and what other mitigations you have in place. If you have concerns about downloaded files, we encourage you to consult with a computer security expert for specific guidance in your situation.
:::

Regardless of the presence or absence of a virus scanning warnings, we always recommend following general security practices. These include the use of strong passwords and two-factor authentication on important cloud accounts, not executing macros in documents, backing up important files securely in a way that can’t be easily overwritten, and always keeping your operating system, browser and other applications up to date with the latest security patches.

[title] How do I set up job board connections?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

This article explains how to set up job board connections. Ashby currently supports automatically posting free limited listings to LinkedIn, Indeed, and Google Jobs. Configure the job boards you'd like to integrate with below. Google Jobs picks up your jobs automatically, and you can't disable this integration at this time.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions and prerequisites:**

- You must be an Organization Admin to configure integrations in **Integrations > Integrations**.
:::

# Integrate with LinkedIn limited listings

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on this, check out [LinkedIn Job Posting](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp)
:::

# Integrate with Indeed

By default, your jobs post automatically to Indeed. If you'd like to disable this option, go to the [Indeed integration settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/job-boards/built-in/indeed-listings) and turn both toggles off.

The Indeed integration supports two options:

- You can enable or disable the integration entirely.
- You can enable or disable Easy Apply.

Easy Apply allows candidates to complete their applications directly from Indeed. When this is disabled, they're redirected to your Ashby job board to fill out an application.

Your jobs show up on Indeed within two business days. Any updates you make to jobs in Ashby appear within the same time frame.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on the Indeed integration, check out [Indeed](docId\:ZqLv2m_n0QgmNLJqfVJqH)
:::

# Generate custom tracking links

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on this, check out [Tracking the source of an application](docId\:xhGtzHhc5AZ2C48VKiI8H)
:::


[title] Custom Fields
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

Custom fields allow you to add additional fields to a candidate's profile, a job, an offer, or an opening that you and other users can fill out, allowing for a further level of customization.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions:**

- Only Organization Admins can create custom fields.
:::

Candidate, Job, and Project custom fields can be configured on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Archive Reason custom fields can be configured on the Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Custom fields overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/faf2f0455e0a4dc4ab72327448096289"}

The video above walks through creating a candidate custom field and viewing it on the candidate profile. You can find a walkthrough for creating and viewing each custom field type below.

# Creating custom fields: Object types

Custom fields can be associated with six primary object types in Ashby.

| Object Type | Description                                                                                                                                                          |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Candidate   | These fields are used to capture details specific to individual candidates. They appear on the **Summary** tab of the candidate profile.                             |
| Job         | These fields are used to capture details specific to individual jobs. They appear on the **Settings** page of a job.                                                 |
| Offer       | These fields are used to capture details about an offer. They appear on the offer activity that appears when a candidate is in the offer stage.                      |
| Opening     | These fields are used to capture details specific to individual openings. They appear at the bottom of the opening form.                                             |
| Projects    | These fields are used to capture details specific to projects. The custom fields show within the **Settings** section of the project.                                |
| Employee    | These fields are used to add additional information to user profiles on the *Employees* page. Custom fields for employees can be accessed on the **Basic Info** tab. |

# Creating custom fields: Candidate custom fields

:::hint{type="info"}
When you add a custom field for candidates, it appears on the **Summary** tab of their profiles, ready to fill out. New custom fields also apply retroactively to existing candidate profiles, as well as new ones.

Candidate custom fields can be used for adding information like preferred name, full legal name, pronouns, and more!
:::

## Field types

| Field Type              | Description                                                           |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Yes/No                  | Toggle yes or no                                                      |
| Short Answer            | Input a single line of text                                           |
| Date                    | Select a single date                                                  |
| Multiple Choice         | Select a radio button                                                 |
| Checkboxes              | Select one or more checkboxes                                         |
| Number                  | Input a single numeric value                                          |
| Currency                | Determine a currency or select a default currency                     |
| Long Unformatted Answer | Input multiple lines of text                                          |
| URL                     | Add a URL into this field                                             |
| Employee                | A single-select dropdown showing all employees in your Ashby instance |

## Create a candidate custom field

Navigate to the candidate custom field view, then click `+ New` in the top right corner of the page.

![The custom fields page open on the Candidate tab](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/m7HDdskYRFUzea2qeYTmB_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-41012-pm.jpg)

A configuration form appears with the following options:

- **Title**: Name your field.
- **Description**: Optionally, add a description that appears below the title.
- **Field Type** (see options above)

Once you create the custom field, you see additional options when editing it.

![Editing a candidate custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/80UBv-wt7RBRFVSs0Cppe-20260324-113009.jpg)

- **Is Private?**: If checked, only those with Elevated Access or Organization Admin access can view the field. This could be used for fields with sensitive information like candidate salary expectations.
- **Substitution Token:** Create a token to pull data from this field into an offer letter or e-signature document. If you opt to generate a token for a multiple choice custom field, you get a follow-up option, **Customize Substitution Text**. More on this in [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) below.
- **Enable in Email Templates?**: If checked, the data can be included in emails. Ashby creates a token that you can add to email templates to pull this information over. More on this at [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6).  This option is not supported for checkbox and long unformatted answer custom field types.
- **Show in Chrome Extension?**: If checked, the field is accessible in the Chrome extension and within Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The option`Show in Chrome Extension?` is only available for candidate custom fields.
:::

## Find candidate custom fields on the candidate profile

Once created, candidate custom fields appear on the **Summary** tab of the candidate profile. These fields can also be used:

- In [email templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates) as custom tokens
- In the [interview briefing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interview-briefing-settings) as custom viewable fields
- In searches and reports

![Finding a candidate custom field on the Summary tab of their profile.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JY1HaUw1QHIXmHgS6jIsI_custom-fields-archbee-document-2026-08-03-at-110409-am.jpg)

# Creating custom fields: Job custom fields

:::hint{type="info"}
Job custom fields can be created to add additional internal information about a job. Just as with a candidate, you can fill in the field title, add a description, and pick a field type for data input. With a job custom field, you have the additional field type option of a number range.
:::

## Field types

| Field Type              | Description                                                           |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Yes/No                  | Toggle yes or no                                                      |
| Short Answer            | Input a single line of text                                           |
| Date                    | Select a single date                                                  |
| Multiple Choice         | Select a radio button                                                 |
| Checkboxes              | Select one or more checkboxes                                         |
| Number                  | Input a single numeric value                                          |
| Currency                | Determine a currency or select a default currency                     |
| Number Range            | A range of numbers with a lower and upper bound                       |
| Long Unformatted Answer | Input multiple lines of text                                          |
| URL                     | Add a URL into this field                                             |
| Employee                | A single-select dropdown showing all employees in your Ashby instance |

## Create a job custom field

Navigate to the job custom field view, then click `+ New` in the top right corner of the page to open the `New Custom field` menu.

![The custom fields page open on the Job tab](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RTuviInFfkVaJzTHG4xt3_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-40744-pm.jpg)

A configuration form appears with the following options:

- **Title**: Name your field.
- **Description:** Optionally, add a description that appears below the title.
- **Field Type:** Determine the type of information that should be added to this field.
- **Is Required?:** If checked, the job cannot be opened or moved out of its draft state unless this field is completed.

When editing the custom field, you see additional options.

![Editing a job custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/B6t05WvG9pQPRZRRGvFp1_custom-fields-ashby-2026-08-03-at-101827-am.jpg)

- **Is Private?**: If checked, only those with Elevated Access or Organization Admin access can view the field.
- **Require Reapproval?:** If the value in this field is changed and you have an approval process in place for the job, reapproval is required.
- **Substitution Token:** Create a token to pull data from this field into an offer letter or e-signature document. If you opt to generate a token for a multiple choice custom field, you get a follow-up option, **Customize Substitution Text**. More on this in [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) below.
- **Restrict which jobs include this field?:** Here you can set criteria using filters. Only the jobs meeting your set criteria have this custom field.
- **Enable in Email Templates:** When enabled, you can pull the content in this custom field into an email generated from an email template. This option is not supported for checkbox and long unformatted answer custom field types. More at [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6).

## Find job custom fields on the jobs' settings

Once created, the custom field shows in the **Settings** tab within a job. Newly added custom fields show for all jobs, regardless of when you created the job. These fields can be used:

![Finding a job's custom field within the Settings section of a job.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/09vgvGBfhq_ldxdNtFJRS_custom-fields-archbee-document-2026-08-03-at-110309-am.jpg)

- In searches and reports
- To record job-specific requirements or preferences

:::hint{type="info"}
If you try to open a job without completing required job custom fields, you see a `Missing Value` message when amending the job status.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7208e866530dd1d71d3ff3e4d24c802e.png" size="70" alt="Unable to mark a job as open due to a required field not being completed." isUploading="false" width="376" height="285" darkWidth="376" darkHeight="285" showCaption="false"}

You can create and amend a draft job without completing the required fields.

# Creating custom fields: Offer custom fields

Navigate to the offer custom field view, then click `+ New` in the top right corner of the page to open the `New Custom field` menu.

![The custom fields page open on the Offer tab](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AxJz_RBmF3Pg8hXz1VV7M_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-41132-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
You can add offer custom fields to an offer to collect additional information from a candidate. Optionally, set these fields up as tokens to automatically populate information in the candidate's offer letter. For more information on creating offer letters, visit [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh).
:::

## Field types

| Field Type              | Description                                                           |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Yes/No                  | Toggle yes or no                                                      |
| Short Answer            | Input a single line of text                                           |
| Date                    | Select a single date                                                  |
| Multiple Choice         | Select a radio button                                                 |
| Checkboxes              | Select one or more checkboxes                                         |
| Number                  | Input a single numeric value                                          |
| Currency                | Determine a currency or select a default currency                     |
| Long Unformatted Answer | Input multiple lines of text                                          |
| URL                     | Add a URL into this field                                             |
| Employee                | A single-select dropdown showing all employees in your Ashby instance |

## Create an offer custom field

- **Title**: Name your field.
- **Description**: Optionally, add a description that appears below the title.
- **Field Type** (see options above)
  - Depending on type selected, an options panel may appear.
- **Is Required?**: Determine if the field must be filled out.

Once you create the custom field, you have additional options when editing it too:

![Editing an offer custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YYME6htvF2V8uLLyiWEao_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-03-24-at-111849-am.jpg)

- **Instructions:** If instructions are provided on the offer custom field, this shows to team members when they fill out a candidate's offer (instead of showing the custom field's description). These instructions can also be set with rich text formatting, which also shows when filling out the candidate's offer.
- **Require Reapproval**: If the field's data is changed, the offer must be re-approved.
- **Substitution token**: Create a token to pull data from this field into an offer letter or e-signature document. If you opt to generate a token for a multiple choice custom field, you get a follow-up option, **Customize Substitution Text**. More on this in [Multiple choice custom fields: Customize substitution text](#) below.
- **Default Value:** Determines the default value to use when this field is used in a fillable form. The default value can only be pulled from a custom field with the same field type (for example, Multiple Choice in this case), or it can be set to a static value instead.
- **Hide this field if a default is chosen?** If a default value is found using the Default Value option above, hide this field in the offer form.
- **Make this field non-editable?** If a default value is selected, then the field cannot be overridden manually within the offer details.
- **Restrict which offer forms include this field?**: Specify which jobs or departments should display this custom field on offers.

## Find offer custom fields on the candidate profile

When you click `Create Offer` on the profile for a candidate in the Offer stage, the field shows on the **Create New Offer** pop-up. These fields can be used:

- To capture specific offer details or terms.
- To replace fields in .docx, .pdf, and Dropbox Sign e-signature requests
- To record special instructions or notes related to the offer.

![Viewing a custom offer field when completing offer details.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YZ1njcPPMg3CEp_xhEWAd_custom-fields-archbee-document-2026-08-03-at-110206-am.jpg)

# Multiple choice custom fields: Customize substitution text

If you opt to generate a token for a multiple choice custom field, you have the option to customize the text added by the token to your offer letter or e-signature document, depending on the choice selected for your custom field.

- Once you generate the token within the Substitution Token section of the custom field, click `Customize Substitution Text` to open the Customize Substitution Text window.
- The window shows each option that can be selected for your multiple-choice custom field.

![Customizing substitution text for an offer custom field.](https://cdn.zappy.app/878e717c96c18171247d01220b17a7f8.png)

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Select an option from the Options list, then add in the text that should replace the substitution token within the offer letter or e-signature document when that option is selected within the offer details.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
For example, if you select Full-Time for the offer, the token becomes "full-time employment" when added to the offer letter template.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
If you don't want the token to be replaced by text for specific options, toggle on the `Replace with no text` option. This option removes the token from the document and doesn't add substitute text in its place.
:::

![Setting a custom field value to be replaced with no text.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f39b52284ddcefc58182c732b3c41e14.png)

- Click `Save` to save any amendments made to the option substitution text. Make sure to save amendments to each option as you go to avoid losing your changes.
- The number of custom text options set for each option appears within the `Customize Substitution Text` button for your reference. So here, text options have been set for two out of the four options available.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/15ce86c6460f161ff789fc07138920e2.png" size="60" alt="The Customize Substitution Text button with the number of values set." isUploading="false" width="641" height="497" darkWidth="641" darkHeight="497" showCaption="false"}

# Creating custom fields: Project custom fields

:::hint{type="info"}
You can add custom fields specifically for your projects. Use these to specify and house information in your project's **Settings** page. You can show these custom fields as additional columns when viewing projects, or filter by custom fields as needed.
:::

## Field types

| Field Type              | Description                                                           |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Yes/No                  | Toggle yes or no                                                      |
| Short Answer            | Input a single line of text                                           |
| Date                    | Select a single date                                                  |
| Multiple Choice         | Select a radio button                                                 |
| Checkboxes              | Select one or more checkboxes                                         |
| Number                  | Input a single numeric value                                          |
| Long Unformatted Answer | Input multiple lines of text                                          |
| URL                     | Add a URL into this field                                             |
| Employee                | A single-select dropdown showing all employees in your Ashby instance |

## Creating a project custom field

To create a custom field for your projects, navigate to [Custom Fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields/project) within **Admin**, then click the **Projects** tab. Click `New` to create a new custom field.

![The custom fields page open on the Project tab](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XyX6JrazQBlKqDyZz0WEN_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-41416-pm.jpg)

When creating a new custom field, you add the following:

![Editing a project custom field after creating it.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Vul-zNX7OMtyrc_xDcd-S-20260324-114032.jpg)

- **Title:** The name of your field, used for filtering and the header if you add a column for this custom field to your project.
- **Description:** A description that shows internally to clarify the information to be added to this custom field.
- **Field Type:** Specify the format of the information added to this field.
- **Is Required?:** Does this information need to be included?
- **Show in Project List by Default?** Check this if the custom field should be shown as a column when viewing your project list.

## Completing project custom fields

To add information to the custom fields on a project, navigate to **Sourcing > Projects**. Click the project in question, then click **Settings**. Your custom fields appear under the **Basic Info** section.

![Viewing a project custom field within the Settings section of a project.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TEGXMTHd_B8JUQb5GXoAn_custom-fields-archbee-document-2026-08-03-at-111637-am.jpg)

If a custom field is set as Required, you see a warning message below an empty field requesting that you select an option or complete the field.

![A required project field that has been left blank.](https://cdn.zappy.app/2ad466819099ffe5b4c5896d2da11129.png)

If a required field was previously filled and the information is removed, when navigating to another field, you see a message prompting you to complete the field. If you navigate away from the page leaving the field empty, the field reverts to containing the previously entered information.

## Filtering by a project custom field

To filter by a project's custom field, ensure that the `Advanced` toggle is on for filtering. From there, click `Add Field to Match` to select the custom field you'd like to filter by.

![Filtering projects by the custom field.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fCLgyHtaClo8Bz8tg6Ogh_filtering-by-a-custom-field.jpg)

Once you select the filter, specify the field information you want to use to find specific projects.

![Selecting the project custom field to filter by.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8dt94feD6y0BSvIsOiypF_leads-from-an-event-filter.jpg)

# Creating custom fields: Opening custom fields

:::hint{type="info"}
You can create openings custom fields to add additional internal information about an opening. Just as with a job, you can fill in the field title, add a description, and pick a field type for data input. With an opening custom field, you have the additional field type option of a compensation range. Learn more about openings in [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).
:::

## Field types

| Field Type              | Description                                                           |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Yes/No                  | Toggle yes or no                                                      |
| Short Answer            | Input a single line of text                                           |
| Date                    | Select a single date                                                  |
| Multiple Choice         | Select a radio button                                                 |
| Checkboxes              | Select one or more checkboxes                                         |
| Number                  | Input a single numeric value                                          |
| Compensation Range      | A compensation range and interval                                     |
| Number Range            | A range of numbers with a lower and upper bound                       |
| Long Unformatted Answer | Input multiple lines of text                                          |
| URL                     | Add a URL into this field                                             |
| Employee                | A single-select dropdown showing all employees in your Ashby instance |

## Create an opening custom field

Navigate to the opening custom field view, then click `+ New` in the top right corner of the page.

![Creating an opening custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eSRg7TNcyHAMmLpQlheUV_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-41333-pm.jpg)

A configuration form appears with the following options:

- **Title**: Name your field.
- **Description**: Optionally, add a description that appears below the title.
- **Field Type:** Determine the type of custom field you'd like to configure.
- **Is Required?**: If checked, an opening cannot be moved from its draft state unless the required field is completed.

When editing the custom field, you see additional options:

![Editing an opening custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/e-NPKr__55ELdo6B48CHV-20260324-114945.jpg)

- **Substitution Token:** Click the `Click to Generate Token` button to create a substitution token for this custom field.
- **Restrict which openings include this field?** Set criteria here to determine the openings that should include this field.

You can edit default opening custom fields to set them as required. You can't set criteria to limit the jobs that include default fields.

## Find opening custom fields on openings

Once created, the custom fields appear at the bottom of the opening form.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7a6a9ab907237ab9e1f4d315e9ef8e44.png" size="50" width="576" height="921" darkWidth="576" darkHeight="921" position="center" alt="Finding an opening custom field when creating or viewing opening details." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
When clicking the **Draft** tab below the opening ID to adjust the opening status, if any required fields aren't completed, you see a Missing Value message.
You can create and amend a draft opening without completing the required fields. The Missing Value message appears only when you change the opening status.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/9b400fdbc7d520f36d21270babae4230.png" size="70" width="575" height="307" darkWidth="575" darkHeight="307" position="center" alt="You are unable to open an opening or submit it for approval if required fields aren't completed." showCaption="false"}

# Creating custom fields: Employee custom fields

:::hint{type="info"}
When adding custom fields for employees, these show on the **Basic Info** tab of each user's profile on the [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) page.
:::

## Field types

| Field Type              | Description                                                           |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Yes/No                  | Toggle yes or no                                                      |
| Short Answer            | Input a single line of text                                           |
| Date                    | Select a single date                                                  |
| Multiple Choice         | Select a radio button                                                 |
| Checkboxes              | Select one or more checkboxes                                         |
| Number                  | Input a single numeric value                                          |
| Long Unformatted Answer | Input multiple lines of text                                          |
| URL                     | Add a URL into this field                                             |
| Employee                | A single-select dropdown showing all employees in your Ashby instance |

## Create an employee custom field

To create an employee custom field, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields** and select the **Employees** tab. Click `+ New` in the top right corner of the page.

![The custom fields page open on the Employee tab](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RQ57SfMjsU_EVkfNGxaAM_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-41542-pm.jpg)

A configuration form appears with the following options:

![Creating a new employee custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jXCcHl3D2lDsgky0PKUOv-20260324-115310.jpg)

- **Object Type**: Specified as *Employee*.
- **Title**: Name your field.
- **Description**: Optionally, add a description that appears below the title.
- **Field Type:** Select the field type from the drop-down to determine the information that should be added to this field.

When editing an employee custom field after creating it, you see an additional option:

- **Enable in Email Templates?**: If checked, the data can be included in emails. Ashby creates a token that you can add to email templates to pull this information over. This option is not supported for checkbox and long unformatted answer custom field types. More on this at [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6).

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
Substitution tokens are not supported for checkbox and long unformatted answer custom field types.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NeuO-BcGjwLLDPsMR83p3_enable-employee-custom-fields-in-email-templates.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1166" height="520" darkWidth="1166" darkHeight="520" alt="Editing an employee custom field. " showCaption="false" indent="1"}

## Completing the field on a user profile

To access the employee custom field, navigate to the **Employees** page, then click a user's profile. You can find custom fields on the **Basic Info** tab of their profile.

![Viewing a custom field on the employee's profile.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/V7ohs5Bmn4eRgN3gsKaVB_custom-fields-on-an-employee-profile.jpg)

# Creating custom fields: Archive detail custom fields

:::hint{type="info"}
You can create custom fields to capture additional data when archiving or rejecting a candidate in Ashby. This option is only available on the Plus and Enterprise plans.
:::

## Field types

| Field Type              | Description                                                           |
| ----------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Yes/No                  | Toggle yes or no                                                      |
| Short Answer            | Input a single line of text                                           |
| Date                    | Select a single date                                                  |
| Multiple Choice         | Select a radio button                                                 |
| Checkboxes              | Select one or more checkboxes                                         |
| Number                  | Input a single numeric value                                          |
| Currency                | Determine a currency or select a default currency                     |
| Long Unformatted Answer | Input multiple lines of text                                          |
| URL                     | Add a URL into this field                                             |
| Employee                | A single-select dropdown showing all employees in your Ashby instance |

## Create an archive detail custom field

Navigate to the Archive Detail custom field view, then click `+ New` in the top right corner of the page.

![The custom fields page open on the Archive Detail tab](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2yB3tigiYZIlXpntRQeOd_archive-detail-custom-fields.jpg)

A configuration form appears with the following options:

![Creating an archive detail custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nWaa300smoyup5lqRsVvd-20260324-115550.jpg)

- **Title**: Name your field.
- **Description**: Optionally, add a description that appears below the title.
- **Field Type** (see options above)
  - Depending on type selected, an options panel may appear.
- **Is Required?** Determine whether a value must be added to this field.

When editing an existing archive detail custom field, you see some additional options.

![Editing an archive detail custom field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DKrucUx47inbYlvmz4Pth-20260324-115712.jpg)

- **Is Private?:** Determine whether or not all users can see this field, or if only those with Organization Admin or Elevated Access - Admin Private access can see this field.
- **Restrict which archive forms include this field?** If you check this box, you can set criteria for when this field should appear when archiving a candidate. For example, you could opt to add a filter based on archive reason, so if a candidate gets a competing offer, you can add further details for your reference.

Click `+ Add Field to Match` to select the field to filter by, then specify the value or values for your criteria.

## Find archive detail fields when archiving a candidate

If you click `Archive` on a candidate's job consideration to reject them, your archive details custom fields show on the archive form.

![The archive reason custom field shows when selecting an archive reason for a candidate.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Y-Viw2F4MuoDG4A_zHnCX_archive-reason-custom-fields.jpg)

If you have restricted the archive forms that include your custom fields, only those that meet your criteria display your created fields.

## Listing archive form details in custom list reports

Once you complete the archive form, you can run reports using your archive detail custom fields to view this information. You can either display your archive detail custom fields on a report (as fields to show) or use them as filters on a report.

For example, you could build a custom list report, filtering for archived candidates, then opt to add your archive detail custom fields as fields to show so this information is easily accessible.

Navigate to **Reports > Build Reports > Custom List**.

**Subject:** Job Considerations

**Time Field and Interview:** Job Consideration's Started at to show \[insert your chosen time range here] per \[set your interval here].

**Filter:** Job Consideration's Outcome is Archived.

**Fields to Show:** Job Consideration's Candidate, Job Consideration's Job, and any archive reason custom fields you'd like to include.
You can also opt to include information like the furthest stage group reached and the job consideration's archive reason.

![An example of a report with archive form custom field details included.](https://cdn.zappy.app/bdc7c013153b82b8163b7c1eaa554988.png)

# FAQs

### I can't view a custom field I should see. What do I do?

Check with an Organization Admin to see if the `Is Private` option is enabled for that field. They can either disable it or adjust your permissions.

### How do I archive or restore a custom field?

You can archive or restore a custom field when editing it. Click the `Archive/Restore` button in the top right corner of the field to take the appropriate action.

### Why can't I archive certain custom fields?

Default custom fields (e.g., Reason for Outreach) cannot be archived. Check for the `Default` tag when editing them to identify default fields.

### How do I sort my fields?

Fields appear in the same order they appear on the Custom Fields page in Admin.

If you use a multiple choice or checkbox field, you can sort the options alphabetically or in reverse alphabetical order.

### Can I show information added to a candidate custom field to an interviewer on their interview briefing?

Yes. Navigate to **Admin > Interviewer Briefing Info**. From there, you can select the fields you'd like to show to your interviewing panel when they look at the interview briefing.

Want to get this information from the candidate's application form? Check out our guide on [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN) to find out how to link application form fields to candidate custom fields.

### Can I import data into custom fields when importing via the bulk CSV importer?

Yes. You can select custom fields at the mapping stage. Find more information on custom fields in our [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) guide.

### I have a lot of custom fields — what filtering options are available?

When filtering custom fields, you can filter by status (Active or Archived), by field type (e.g., Yes/No, Short Answer), or by field source (e.g., a custom offer field syncing over from an integration Human Resources Information System (HRIS)).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1c39f65151cb9b1e0b614157ec3df664.png" size="60" alt="Filtering custom fields by field type, field source or status." isUploading="false" width="308" height="536" darkWidth="308" darkHeight="536" showCaption="false"}

### Can I use archive detail custom fields to migrate and map Greenhouse rejection questions?

Yes, Ashby maps Greenhouse rejection questions as archive detail custom fields during migration. If you need to have these remapped, reach out to your Customer Success Manager (CSM) or [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] Job Board: Cookie Consent Settings
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

Ashby's Cookie Consent feature lets your organization capture and store candidates' cookie preferences on Ashby-hosted job board pages, in line with privacy regulations such as the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and the California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA). When a candidate visits your job board, they see a banner that lets them accept, reject, or partially accept tracking cookies. Their decision is recorded server-side and persists across sessions, so candidates are not re-prompted unless the banner content meaningfully changes.

This article explains how cookie consent works, how to enable it, what candidates see, and what your organization's consent records contain.

# &#x20;Permissions and access

Cookie consent is available on all Ashby plans.

| **Foundations** | **Legacy Plus** | **Plus** | **Enterprise** |
| --------------- | --------------- | -------- | -------------- |
| ✅               | ✅               | ✅        | ✅              |

Org Admins can enable and manage cookie consent settings.

# How cookie consent works

When a candidate visits your Ashby-hosted job board for the first time, they see a banner that prompts them to review and set their cookie preferences. Candidates can `Accept All` cookies, accept `Necessary Only`, or opt to `Customize Settings` to make granular selections across four categories:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9kIWOAm6s3fEXa-58zIS7_image.png" size="57" isUploading="false" width="569" height="737" darkWidth="569" darkHeight="737" showCaption="false"}

- **Necessary:** Required for the job board to function. Candidates cannot opt out of this category.
- **Analytical:** Powers session recording and behavioral analytics that help us understand how candidates interact with the job board.
- **Performance:&#x20;**&#x43;ookies that support job board speed and reliability.
- **Marketing:&#x20;**&#x43;ookies used to measure the effectiveness of recruiting campaigns and job board promotion. This includes any tracking pixels set by your organization.

The candidate's decision is recorded on Ashby’s servers. On subsequent visits, the banner does not reappear unless Ashby updates the banner version (for example, if new cookie categories are introduced or the banner copy changes), the candidate has cleared their cookies, is using a different browser or device, incognito mode, or a year has passed. When a banner update occurs, all candidates with stored preferences are re-prompted on their next visit.

:::hint{type="info"}
The banner text and re-consent triggers are managed globally by Ashby and cannot be customized at the organization level.
:::

## Consent records

Every consent decision generates a record that includes:

- A unique consent ID
- The candidate's selections across all four categories
- The timestamp of the decision
- The banner version the candidate saw

Consent records are anonymous by design. No candidate personally identifiable information (PII) is captured or linked to the consent record. The consent ID traces a decision back to a session, not to a specific individual.

Records are archived daily to long-term storage to support compliance retention requirements. There is currently no in-product interface to view individual records. If your organization receives a compliance request, contact [Ashby Support](https://www.ashbyhq.com/support) to request access to a specific record.

# Enabling cookie consent

To enable cookie consent:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Theme (Job Board)**.
2. Locate the **Cookie Consent** toggle.
3. Click the toggle to turn cookie consent On. The cookie consent banner is immediately active on your hosted job board pages.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_f3QsmfEZRQTU3mH7lUom_image.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1007" height="171" darkWidth="1007" darkHeight="171" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Note:&#x20;**&#x49;f your organization uses multiple brands, the toggle is also available on each individual Brand page. To enforce consent consistency across your brands, enable the cookie consent banner on every brand. If only some brands have the banner enabled, scripts run by default on brands where it's disabled, regardless of choices candidates made on other brands.
:::

# What candidates see

On their first visit to your hosted job board, candidates see a **Cookie Management** banner at the bottom of the page.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iO-XSHh28YgYYplbKvL6-_image.png)

The banner displays the consent options and lets candidates make individual selections before proceeding. Candidates can also update their preferences at any time by returning to the banner, which is accessible via a persistent button in the bottom right of the job board.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/92sNVnK7DVno1_psz7ujE_image.png" size="77" isUploading="false" width="765" height="755" darkWidth="765" darkHeight="755" showCaption="false"}

Preferences are stored in the candidate's browser and recorded on Ashby's servers as an audit record. If a candidate clears their browser cookies, they are re-prompted on their next visit and a new consent record is created.

# FAQs

### Does cookie consent apply to our careers site or embedded job widget?

It depends on who renders the page.

- Ashby-rendered job board pages — covered. This includes your job board at **jobs.ashbyhq.com/yourcompany** and custom-domain Ashby job boards like **careers.yourcompany.com** if you've pointed DNS at Ashby.&#x20;
- Your own careers site or marketing site — not covered. If you embed Ashby job listings on a page your team builds and serves (e.g., via the embedded widget on your main **yourcompany.com** site), Ashby's banner does not appear on that page. See [Embedding Ashby Job Boards in an external careers page](https://docs.ashbyhq.com) for more on embedded widget behavior.

### Can we customize the consent banner text or categories?

No. The banner copy and the four cookie categories are set globally by Ashby and are not customizable per organization. When Ashby updates the banner, all organizations and their candidates are affected simultaneously.

### What happens if a candidate clears their browser data?

If a candidate clears their browser's cookies, their stored preferences are removed from their device. The next time they visit the job board, they are shown the consent banner again and prompted to make a new selection. A new consent record is created for that session.

### What if a candidate has cookies disabled at the browser level?

If a candidate's browser settings block cookies entirely, they will still see the consent banner on every visit because Ashby cannot store their previous decision in their browser. Consent records are only created when a candidate interacts with the banner directly. Organizations that need an auditable record of every candidate's decision should be aware that browser-level blocking falls outside of what this feature can capture.

### What happens if our organization has the cookie consent banner disabled?

If the cookie consent banner is turned off for your organization, non-essential scripts on your job board run by default — the same behavior that applied before this feature existed. In that state, any cookies those scripts attempt to set are subject only to the candidate's own browser settings. Ashby does not generate consent records when the banner is disabled.

[title] Where can I hear about the latest product updates?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

If you’d like to keep on top of the latest releases in Ashby, check out the Product Updates page [here](https://www.ashbyhq.com/product-updates).

## Overview

Ashby’s [Product Updates page](https://www.ashbyhq.com/product-updates) contains information on our latest releases, including featured releases and a feed listing updates.

## Featured updates

At the top of the page, we have featured updates, where you can see any major new releases. Click on a feature to find out more about it.

## Update Feed

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Underneath the Featured Updates section, you can view a feed listing releases, organized from newest to oldest with the latest release listed first.




You can use the checkboxes to the right of the feed to filter releases by product, feature area, all-in-one plan or release tier.



You can click on the update title or `Read More` on your chosen feature in the feed to get more information.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/16814f316cd92325c2fa37393358cdd8.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/171f1aaec47d29361f2ad7b90cf45ef6.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8ed2a24f4a2a517952b187524ab8813d.png)


:::
::::

## FAQ

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I subscribe to product updates via Slack?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Head to the RSS page within your Slack marketplace.
2. Click *Add to Slack.*
3. Set up the subscription details using our feed URL and the channel you’d like to post to.
   The feed URL is https\://www\.ashbyhq.com/product-updates/feed.xml - alternatively, you can click on the RSS icon on the Product Updates page
4. Now, whenever a post is published for the first time to the Product Updates page, you will receive a slack notification in the specified Slack channel.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GlJZx-qlldH7hrGuRKCkA_rss.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/edbc71b229dfacfb27a269841d0a0ae6.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6250ab270e703817e6ff67e49e135ea4.png)


:::
::::




:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I subscribe to product updates via email?

It currently isn’t possible to directly subscribe for email updates. We’d recommend subscribing via Slack, or setting up an RSS to email feed reader.
:::


[title] Data Management
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/


[title] Creating & Opening Jobs
[path] Jobs & Openings/

Jobs are the central records for roles within Ashby. This guide explains how to build your hiring foundation by creating and configuring jobs, distinguishing between jobs, openings, and postings, and using the job wizard to build new roles.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites & Permissions**

- You must configure departments and locations before creating jobs. See [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8) to configure them.
- An interview plan is not required to create a job draft, but you must assign one before opening a job. See [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux) for full details on the various ways to set these up.
- Only those with Elevated Access - Admin, Elevated Access - Admin Private, and Organization Admin access can create or edit jobs.
:::

# Understanding jobs, job postings, and openings

To manage your hiring effectively, it is important to understand how Ashby categorizes these three distinct entities:

- **Job:** A job is the central record for a role. Creating a job and setting it to *Open* allows you to add candidates to your pipeline and begin the interview process.
- **Job Posting:** A job posting is the public or internal advertisement for a job. You use postings to collect applications through your Ashby job board or third-party sites like LinkedIn.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
A job posting isn't required to open a job, but you can add as many job postings to a job as you like. Job postings are hosted on your organization's Ashby job board and can be configured to automatically post to third-party job boards like [LinkedIn Job Posting](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp) and [Indeed](docId\:ZqLv2m_n0QgmNLJqfVJqH). Learn more in our [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB) article.
:::

- **Opening:** An opening represents a specific headcount for a job. If you are hiring three candidates for the same job, you create one job with three openings rather than three separate jobs.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
Openings are not available on Foundations plans. For more information on openings, see [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).
:::

# How to navigate the job admin view

Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** in the top menu bar to create and manage jobs and job templates. You can also access your organization's job board from the job admin view.

## Jobs page

The **Jobs** page gives a quick overview of every job that you have access to. You can search this view or filter it by team, location, and/or job status. Click a job to visit the Candidate Pipeline for that particular role.

![A full view of the jobs admin page is shown.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dz7V2sLnmSHbLcvfRBdnn_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-114156-am.jpg)

### Tips on getting the most out of the Jobs page

- The **Search** field on the left side above the job list allows you to search for a job by title.
- Use `+ Filter` above the search bar to apply filters that scope the number of results down to, for example, a department or a source. Pick one or more options to view results matching all the selected values. Filter criteria appear next to the search bar. To remove criteria from your filter, hover over them and click the `X`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PmCK3sUMQTsiBJ47uFQ6n_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-114704-am.jpg" size="74" width="768" height="251" position="center" alt="The screenshot shows basic filtering criteria applied to the jobs list, and the X that appears to remove the criteria when you hover over it." darkWidth="768" darkHeight="251" showCaption="false"}

- Activate the `Advanced Filters` toggle on the right to define more complex filtering criteria with the AND, OR, and NOT operators.

![The screenshot shows the advanced filtering logic and the location of the Advanced filters togger in the upper right.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Hhl3MPY_fbcfLmpBdQocY_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-25255-pm.jpg)

- You can view the list of jobs matching your criteria in `Table` or `Pipeline` view by toggling the options. You can view key details about jobs including the number of active candidates, team/department, location/region, linked interview plan, status, and job posting status.

![The screenshot shows a view of the jobs list, and highlights the Pipeline vs Table view toggle in the upper right.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/i7n0_aWF7J_sD4XDLyQwU_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-25556-pm.jpg)

- In the upper right, click `+ Create Job` to create a new job, or click `Job Board` to open your Ashby job board.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9pl4U6-m_oQSiGHIGDOkm_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-44526-pm.jpg" size="46" width="527" height="375" position="center" alt="The screenshot shows the Create Job and Job Board buttons in the upper right." darkWidth="527" darkHeight="375" showCaption="false"}

# How to create a job

You can create a job with just a title, location, department, and interview plan. You can create jobs from scratch or from an existing job template. Follow the steps below to create a job.

## Creating a job with the job creation wizard

To create a job, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** in the top menu bar, then click `+ Create Job`. This opens the job wizard.

![The 'Create Job' button on the latest version of the jobs page](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HDCrVUD6lYqwFJ-EJSY95_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-02-17-at-93618-am.jpg "The 'Create Job' button on the latest version of the jobs page")

You can also create a job by hovering over the `+ Add` button in the top right of the navigation bar and clicking `Job`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nPl_tsANcJays6muzcfB3_zight-2026-02-17-at-093803.png" size="58" width="736" height="516" position="center" caption="Creating a job via the 'Add' button on the navigation bar." alt="Creating a job via the 'Add' button on the navigation bar." darkWidth="736" darkHeight="516" showCaption="true"}

When you create a job via the job wizard, you specify the job details through the following steps:

### Step one: Define job information

First, fill in basic job information. See the field descriptions below.

![The screenshot shows the first step of the job creation wizard with fields to input basic job information.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/X7XNkPXJDGjoiAwifOfFs_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-41310-pm.jpg)

- **Templates:** Optionally, you can select a job template to create your job from. For more information, see [Job Templates](docId\:X1iE8z5PxR7FJKsPv6QEU).
- **Title:** The job title.
- **Openings:** If your job should be connected to an opening, you can link your opening here. For more information, see [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).
- **Team:** Assign a department to your job. You can create a new team inline by clicking the `Create` button within the **Select Team...** dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5NtaStw8jB-N7tr2_b6k6_jobs-ashby-2026-07-23-at-122045-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1640" height="1574" darkWidth="1640" darkHeight="1574" showCaption="false" alt="The option to create a team in-line when creating a new job."}

- **Location:** Assign a location to your job. You can create a new location inline by clicking the `Create` button within the **Select Location...** dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7DUZoAsyJzzFZmti5QfEB_jobs-ashby-2026-07-23-at-121937-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1630" height="1578" darkWidth="1630" darkHeight="1578" showCaption="false" alt="The option to create a location in-line when creating a new job."}

- **Is Confidential?** Setting a job as confidential means only the user creating the job and users who are given specific access to the job can access it. This isn't commonly used. For more information, see [What are confidential jobs?](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/what-is-a-confidential-job)
- **Brand:** If you have [Multiple Brands](docId\:jwP6kjsKgGJZAadNNfU5D) enabled, you can assign a brand to your job here.

### Step two: Assign an interview plan

Here you can specify the interview plan that your job uses. The interview plan you select determines the stages in the candidate pipeline. You can skip this step by clicking the `Skip` button.

![The screenshot shows the Interview Plan step of the job creation wizard with the option to select from various shared interview plans.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uO7gkPXPtWgk-RkrkbKzq_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-41203-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on setting up interview plans, see [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux).
:::

### Step three: Specify the hiring team

In the **Hiring Team** section, you can select hiring team members from existing Ashby users and assign them roles.

![The screenshot shows the Hiring Team step within the job creation wizard where specific users can be added as members of the hiring team.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2k6DJ2cRyP-Vy6ZJJFMwC_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-41056-pm.jpg)

These roles are separate from [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk) and serve to describe the person's relationship to the job for reporting and notification purposes.

Roles include Hiring Manager, Recruiter, Recruiting Coordinator, and Sourcer. You can add more than one user to the same hiring team role.

:::hint{type="info"}
Scheduling notifications only go to the Meeting Organizer set on an interview (or the user scheduling the interview if a Meeting Organizer is not set). For more information, see [What is a Meeting Organizer?](docId\:C1tlsDkvUJ7S15oA8POQl)
:::

### Next steps

Now that you have the basics of your draft in place, you can continue the job setup with the following options:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BV-rNNye45Io0QczAKg53_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-45405-pm.jpg" size="86" width="860" height="546" position="center" alt="The screenshot shows the fourth step in the job wizard process, which gives options to set up interviews, the job posting, or additional information next." darkWidth="860" darkHeight="546" showCaption="false"}

- **Interviews:** Add activities to your interview plan like interviews, take-home assignments, email prompts, and more. For more information, see [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7).
- **Job Posting:** Create and publish a job posting to add the role to your Ashby job board, specify the application form applicants should complete, and configure auto-reject rules. For more information, see [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB).
- **Additional Information:** Add compensation information to the role, fill out job-specific custom fields, and complete other fields within the job's **Settings** page.

Continue reading below to learn about the job's settings.

## Configuring job settings

You have the option to configure your jobs in great detail. The more details you add up front, the more time you save in the hiring process for the job.

Navigate to the **Settings** tab of the job from the menu on the left side of your job to begin configuring the settings. Descriptions of each field on the **Settings** tab are below.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Dx3kf8aFkLu0N_mYZt5BW_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-50405-pm.jpg" size="62" width="835" height="751" position="center" alt="Shows the settings tab of a job and highlights where the settings tab is located." darkWidth="835" darkHeight="751" showCaption="false"}

- **Basic Info:** In this section, you can edit the job's title, team or department, location, and employment type by clicking on the fields and making any adjustments.
- **Custom Fields:** This section only appears if you have custom fields configured that apply to the job. For more information, see [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).
- **Compensation:** Enable and amend job compensation settings for this role here. For more information, see [Compensation](docId:0Zkrmoq_22RNbDT3KwGuM).
- **Hiring Team:** You can select hiring team members from existing Ashby users and assign them roles. These roles are separate from [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk) and serve to describe the person's relationship to the job for reporting and notifications. Scheduling notifications only go to the Meeting Organizer set on an interview (or the user scheduling the interview if a Meeting Organizer is not set). Roles include Hiring Manager, Recruiter, Recruiting Coordinator, and Sourcer. See more in the section below.
- **Upload Candidates via Email:** Ashby generates an email address here when you open the job. Sending an email to this address with attached resumes creates candidates and adds them to this specific job in one step. You may attach up to 10 resumes per email.

### Quickly editing job details from the job pipeline

You can also view and update key job details directly from the **Jobs Pipeline** page.

To view the jobs pipeline, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select the `Pipeline` view on the right side.

![Selecting the pipeline view on the Job page - you can then click the appropriate pill to be taken to the page to make adjustments.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xVkzYePLRummcq5RSuH4t_jobs-ashby-2026-06-30-at-22023-pm.jpg)

Click any of the following pills on a job card to edit that field:

- **Hiring Team avatars** — opens the Edit Hiring Team sidebar (available to users with edit access to the job)
- **Location** — navigates directly to the relevant section of Job Settings
- **Employment Type** — navigates directly to the relevant section of Job Settings
- **Department** — navigates directly to the relevant section of Job Settings

In table view, you can also click the same fields to quickly edit these settings. In addition, the **Opening** cell in table view takes you directly to the job's **Opening** tab.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The Department, Location, and Employment Type pills are not clickable for analytics-only organizations.
:::

## Job controls

Within each job, you find the job status indicator just below the job title on the left, and a `More` button in the top right that contains management options:

![Points out the job status indicator on the left, and the More button and available options on the right.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JuUFZ7gjnZNkJpqPHX93w_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-06-at-50554-pm.jpg)

- **Job Status:** This setting controls whether candidates can be considered for the role and if it appears on the Job Dashboard. It does not control job postings. Use this dropdown to set your draft job to open (to accept candidates), close out an open job, or set a closed job as a draft again if needed.

### More button options

- **Make Confidential:** Allows you to set the job so only you can access it, if you are the job's author. You can also allow other users access to the role via their permissions.
- **Copy:** Creates a copy of this job as a draft. All copied job postings are unpublished.
- **Create Template:** Creates an inactive job template that has the same attributes as this job. All job postings are moved to unpublished.
- **Follow this job:** Get customizable notifications when any candidate for this job submits an application, is hired, or moves to a new interview stage.

:::hint{type="success"}
You've successfully created and configured your job settings! Now you may want to revisit setting up the job's [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux), [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7), and [Compensation](docId:0Zkrmoq_22RNbDT3KwGuM) sections before opening the job.

**Learn more:**

- Set up rules to [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota).
- Send [automated Application Confirmation Emails](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/emails-and-email-templates#application-confirmation-template).
- Configure [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB) within your interviews.
- See our [Job Board Integrations](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/job-board).
:::

# How to open a job

Once you've configured all details of your job, you can open the job, which is the next step toward collecting applications from candidates!

:::hint{type="warning"}
The steps required to open a job depend on your Ashby plan level and admin settings.

Those with Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans may need to associate an Opening to the job before you can open it. To learn more about openings, see [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).
:::

## Moving from "Draft" to "Open"

When ready to open the job, click into the job and locate the job status indicator beneath the job title. The status should say "Draft" for a newly created job. Click it to reveal options. If you are missing required information within your job details, the `Open` option is grayed out with a message indicating what is missing.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KhksJ8NW3rFdubgfoHgYD_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-07-at-91034-am.jpg" size="56" width="486" height="415" position="center" alt="Image points out the job status indicator beneath the job title and its menu options. &#x22;Open&#x22; is greyed out and a message indicating missing information is shown." darkWidth="486" darkHeight="415" showCaption="false"}

Once you've filled in all required information, the `Open` option becomes active. Select it, and your job status indicator turns green to indicate the job is now open.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/39T968sE-lCQGNvA3AXOv_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-07-at-91630-am.jpg" size="56" width="443" height="479" position="center" alt="Shows the job status indicator set to Open and green in color." darkWidth="443" darkHeight="479" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="success"}
Congrats! You've created and opened a job! To start collecting applications, you must post the job. See [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB) to create a job posting.

You also may be wondering about closing or archiving filled or canceled jobs. See [When and how do I close out a job?](docId\:wNJuw9oiZleJwTS_bBA21) for more information.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for more information? See the [Creating and Managing Jobs](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/jobs) course in Ashby Academy!
:::

# FAQs

### Can I set an application deadline?

Yes! You set up the application deadline within the job posting. See [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB) for more information.

### Can I filter my jobs or job reports by job posting listing status?

You can build a job postings report that shows listed, unlisted, or unpublished postings. To filter for jobs based on their listing status on your external job board, select the `External Job Board Visibility` field under **Filters** when building a job posting report.

For jobs that are listed, unlisted, or not posted on your internal job board, select the `Internal Job Board Visibility` job field. You can then select from the same options on the filter's dropdown menu.

For more detailed information, see [Reporting on Job Postings](docId\:o2cT7Pt-pE-SlGfIC7Vy_).

### What does the My Jobs filter do on the Jobs > Jobs page?

You can click `My Jobs` on the **Jobs > Jobs** page to view only the jobs that you are directly involved in. Ashby considers you involved in a job if you are assigned to the hiring team for that role or are following the job.

### Can I open a job without it being listed on my Ashby job board?

Yes. Once you mark a job as Open, it only appears on your Ashby job board if you have job postings that are published and set as listed. For more information, see [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB).

### Can I add notes to a job?

You can't add notes to a job, but you can create job-specific custom fields to house specific job information. For more information, see [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).

### My organization requires openings for jobs — can I open a job without having an opening linked to it?

If your organization has `Require Opening for Jobs` enabled within **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Openings**, you must have an opening attached to your job to be able to open it. If you do not see the option to skip adding an opening, reach out to an Organization Admin to adjust the opening settings for you (if you are not an Organization Admin), or create an opening and link it to your job.

### Can I delete a job?

You can't delete a job in-app. Reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for assistance.

### Can I set up a process where a job needs to be reviewed by other team members prior to it being opened?

Yes, you can set up approval processes for jobs if they need to be reviewed before opening. For more information, see [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo).

### Can I bulk edit the hiring team on specific job considerations?

Yes, see [How to Bulk Update the Hiring Team on a Job](docId\:PEa3bqz8dWS-ZVQDIgMKh).

### Can I add myself to the hiring team on a job or job consideration?

Yes. As long as you have Elevated Access - Admin access or higher to the role, department, or location, you can add yourself to the hiring team on a job or job consideration.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Adding yourself to the hiring team does not impact your access to the role or your overall permissions. It only determines whether you receive notifications about the role and job considerations. To edit your permissions, reach out to an Organization Admin on the account (even if you yourself are an Organization Admin).
:::

### Are calendar invites set to private by default on the Communications tab for confidential roles?

Yes. If you create new interviews or new interview activities on the interview plan for a confidential role, Ashby sets the calendar invites to private by default in the **Communications** tab. This means non-attendees cannot see interview details, and only see a busy event on interviewer calendars.

If you do not want interview events to be set to private, or want to check the privacy status, navigate to the **Communications** tab of your scheduled interview activity. You can adjust the privacy using the `Is Private?` option.

### How do Ashby's confidential jobs work with reporting? Who can see confidential job data in reports?

Only users with access to the confidential job can see the confidential job data in reports. Users can only see the job data that they have access to when building and reviewing reports in Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby generates an alert's report data on behalf of the user who creates the alert, so all of the creator's account permissions apply.

If you send the Entire List from an alert to a specified user rather than a *User involved as* recipient ([Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)), the user receiving the report can see all of the report data in the alert email. As part of your alert setup process, be sure to add filters to remove any jobs (including confidential jobs) or specific data that you don't want alert recipients to see.
:::

### Can a job have more than one Hiring Manager on the hiring team?

Yes. A job can have more than one Hiring Manager on its hiring team. Ashby does not limit a job to one Hiring Manager.

To add another Hiring Manager:

1. Navigate to the job’s `Settings` section.
2. Scroll to **Hiring Team** and click `Edit`.
3. Click `+ Add Member`.
4. Select `Hiring Manager` as the role, choose the user, and submit the update.

If the job has job considerations, choose which job considerations the updated hiring team applies to. For more information, see [How to Bulk Update the Hiring Team on a Job](docId\:PEa3bqz8dWS-ZVQDIgMKh).

[title] Source Types and Sources
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

This document details how to set up and use sources to track where candidates are applying from.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions:** Only Organization Admins and users with Elevated Access with the Sources additional permission can configure sources and source types. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).

Users with Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access or higher can add, switch, or remove sources on the candidate profile.
:::

# Overview

Sources identify where a candidate and their job consideration originated. If a candidate has multiple job considerations, each application has its own source.

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby's default source types are Inbound, Internal, Referral, and Sourced. If you create hiring events (more on these at [Events](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS)) or configure agencies (more on these at [Agencies Setup](docId\:HPRDN81J0nbGGnh4s-JE1)), source types are also created as defaults.
:::

You can create new top-level source types or sources beneath them. Source types are helpful for grouping sources in reports. Once configured, you can link sources to candidates, custom tracking links, and Application Programming Interface (API) keys.

# Create source types and sources

To create a new source or source type:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Candidate Sources](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources).
   - To add a new source type, click the `+ New Source Type` button.
   - To add a new source, click the `+ New Source` button.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HPelpBIH7RuZZcSxprqsO_new-source-type-creation.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2838" height="940" darkWidth="2838" darkHeight="940" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="The Sources page with the New Source Type button highlighted"}

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fP_cx9VcrUL1EPRyYLXya_new-source-button.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2834" height="858" darkWidth="2834" darkHeight="858" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The Sources page with the New Source button highlighted"}

2. Add a name for your source and determine a source type if you are creating a new source.
3. Click `Create`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0g0y-aTRzROzOpCp6Zwhk_creating-a-new-source.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="1293" height="1618" darkWidth="1293" darkHeight="1618" showCaption="false" alt="Enter a name and specify a source type when creating a source, then click Create."}

# Add and view sources on a candidate profile

You can manually add and view sources in the **Attribution** section, within the **Activities & Progress** section of a candidate profile.

![The source field on a candidate profile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FncgD3AqTUELoDylYkXDZ_attribution-section-with-source-area-highlighted.jpg)

To add or update a source on a job consideration, click in the `Source` field and select the source from the dropdown menu. If you can't see the one you want, start typing the source name and it populates automatically. To add or update a source, click the field and select the source from the dropdown menu. If you can't see the one you want, start typing the source name and it will populate.

If you'd like to create a new source from this spot on the candidate's profile, click the `Create` button within the dropdown to create a new source inline.

![Creating a new source in-line on the candidate profile](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VtNRDNr8LZIM762b3sisw_source-types-and-sources-archbee-document-2026-07-28-at-103240-am.jpg)

To remove a source from a candidate profile, click the `x` to the right of the source name.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SmOI7tW8FxaIY8q0h1bLF_edie-mills-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-07-09-at-93138-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1424" height="378" darkWidth="1424" darkHeight="378" showCaption="false" alt="The x to the right of a source name that you can click to remove the source from a job consideration "}

# Add a source to a custom tracking link

:::hint{type="info"}
You can read more on setting up custom tracking links at [Tracking the source of an application](docId\:xhGtzHhc5AZ2C48VKiI8H).
:::

You can add sources to custom tracking links to automatically apply a source from an external job board.

1. Navigate to [Admin > Job Boards > Custom Tracking Links](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/custom-tracked-links).
2. Set up a custom tracking link, including the source in the appropriate field.
3. Click `Add`

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6ar9u084UY1UEAyd3Fmb6_source-field-for-a-custom-tracking-link.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="799" height="1622" darkWidth="799" darkHeight="1622" showCaption="false"}

# Add a source to an API key

:::hint{type="info"}
You can read more on setting up API keys at [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ)
:::

You can also add a source to an API key.

1. Navigate to [Admin > Integrations > API Keys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys).
2. Create an API key.
3. Click the key to view its details.
4. Add the source in the **Default Source** field.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0hyUW4x_L8TOGbFDDv6HV_adding-a-source-to-an-api-key.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="1300" height="1028" darkWidth="1300" darkHeight="1028" showCaption="false"}

# Merging sources

:::hint{type="danger"}
Merging sources cannot be undone.
:::

If you have multiple similar sources, you can merge them into a single source. To do this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Candidate Sources](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources).
2. Click the `Merge` button.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/a-6KAtyBsOIHY1A_K_nCh_merging-source.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2829" height="962" darkWidth="2829" darkHeight="962" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Select your **From** source and your **To** source before clicking `Merge`. The **From** source merges into the **To** source, and all candidates and job considerations with the **From** source applied to them have the **To** source associated with them moving forward. The **From** source is then archived.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/T_UAZqTj8LccLnorxi1Vt_sources-ashby-2026-07-09-at-102835-am.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="880" height="1612" darkWidth="880" darkHeight="1612" showCaption="false"}

# Archiving and restoring sources and source types

To archive a source or source type, click on the source in question on the [Candidate Sources](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources) page, then click `Archive`. If you archive a source, you can no longer link it to candidates, but existing assignments are preserved.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F8257aJ7yOo7CU7T1cP9S_archiving-a-source.jpg)

If you'd like to restore a source or source type, click the **Active** filter and switch it to **All**.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/P04QRBM3JnDaW68Me3J2s_activeall-dropdown.jpg)

You now see all sources and source types listed, including those that have been archived. Select the source or source type you'd like to restore, then click `Restore`.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ljkoIdY-HTpZ4pLQ9RTSH_restoring-a-source.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
You cannot restore a source if the source type is archived. Restore the source type first, then the source.
:::

# FAQ

### Can I archive a source with a Default tag on it?

The following default sources cannot be archived currently:

- Referral
- Referral Link
- Applied
- Chrome Extension
- Recruiting Event
- Internal Transfer

These sources also can't be set as the From source when merging sources (as the From source is archived after the merge). Other default sources can be archived.

[title] Multiple Brands
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

The Multiple Brands feature allows you to manage multiple brand identities within a single account, giving candidates a seamless branded experience across job boards, candidate flows, and forms. This feature is ideal for organizations with multiple brands or subsidiaries and can help each brand maintain its unique presence under a unified system.&#x20;

Multiple brands can be enabled for organizations on the Plus and Enterprise plans. Plus plan organizations can have a maximum of five brands:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="info"}
For details on setting up each branded job board with an existing careers website, check out [Can we post our jobs to our existing careers page?](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/can-we-post-our-jobs-on-our-existing-careers-page)
:::

## Overview

The Multiple Brands feature is built to support organizations with more than one brand or business line under a single data ownership structure, like a parent company with subsidiaries. With this feature, you can:

- Create branded job boards, job posts, and candidate touch points for each brand.
- Create brand-specific referral and custom tracking links for source tracking.
- Manage and configure external integrations, like LinkedIn, individually for each brand.

## Is my team’s use case suitable for Multiple Brands?

This feature is best for companies with shared data ownership among brands, like subsidiaries under a parent company.

| **Use Case**                                      | **Recommended?** | **Notes**                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------------------------------------------- | ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Parent Company with Subsidiaries                  | Yes              | Multiple brands recommended. A parent company with several subsidiaries can set up each subsidiary as a brand while maintaining centralized data ownership.                               |
| Firms with Portfolio Companies                    | Maybe            | If the firm maintains data ownership for each portfolio company, the Multiple Brands feature may be used. For independent data ownership, create separate organizations for each company. |
| Companies that require independent data ownership | No               | Multiple brands not currently recommended in this case. Separate organizations are recommended to maintain privacy compliance.                                                            |

## Key Features

### Branded Job Boards and Candidate Flows

- **Distinct Job Boards**: Create unique job boards for each brand with specific URLs, logos, colors, and custom branding options.
- **Branded Candidate Flows**: Ensure candidates experience branded elements such as:&#x20;
  - Booking links
  - Availability requests
  - Surveys (including EEOC)
- **Branded custom tracking and referral links**

The brand experience is determined by the brand assigned to the job on the `Settings` tab.

## Configuring Multiple Brands

### Create and configure your first additional brand and the brand's job board settings

1. Navigate to Admin > Job Board > **Theme (Job Board)**
2. This will open up the Brands page. Your default brand will be shown here at first. To create an additional brand, click `Set up Multiple Brands`, then `Continue`

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_eiQVjw74-tSvNLFBnjQL_brand-abbye-inc-acent-ashby-2026-02-06-at-105758-am.jpg" size="100" width="2356" height="764" position="center" alt="The Brands page in Ashby with the Set up Multiple Brands option highlighted" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. On the following page, add in the legal entity name. The legal entity name added here should be the name used for data consent requests, EEOC and other legal contexts. We also recommend adding in a recruiting privacy policy URL.
4. Click `Continue`

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HSB6Atel-Bn9kjXvEzORR_multiple-brands-setup-acent-ashby-2026-02-06-at-110034-am.jpg" size="100" width="2354" height="840" position="center" alt="The Legal Entity Name and Recruiting Privacy Policy setup page." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

5. You will then be prompted to enter a display name and email address for your default shared alias.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nMtI3udWaLjMOLpMTgAc5_multiple-brands-overview-setup-data-privacy-and-faq-2026-02-06-at-111221-am.jpg" size="100" width="2448" height="830" position="center" alt="The Organization Default Shared Alias Configuration page." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
This will be used as the sender when emails are sent from the default no-reply address in cases where the brand is not specified or accessible. These examples include:

- Data compliance automation emails
- Survey form emails (if sent via bulk actions without filtering by job)
- Bulk action emails (if sent via bulk actions without filtering by job)
:::

6. Click `Continue` to confirm
7. Add your brand name and job board slug for your new brand.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
At this point, we recommend ensuring that your email templates do not unintentionally reference brand names in them. The `Organization Name` substitution token can be used in email templates as this will adapt to the brand associated with the job.

We also recommend checking surveys and other forms do not reference specific brand names in questions, especially when using NPS fields. We recommend using 'us' and 'our company' instead.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/i0_us6h5jZYzhGFfffEXB_multiple-brands-setup-acent-ashby-2026-02-06-at-111555-am.jpg" size="100" width="2358" height="1042" position="center" alt="The Final Checks and New Brand section of the Multiple Brands Setup page." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

8. Click `Create Brand` to confirm and create your new brand. You will then be taken to set you new brand's job board settings.
9. Configure the new brand’s job board settings, including:
   1. **Job board URL:** the first part of the URL on your brand's Ashby job board
   2. **Brand name:** The publicly facing name of the brand
   3. Logo and color scheme for branded candidate experience

:::hint{type="info"}
Visit [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/job-board-configuring-your-setup) for full details on brand job board configuration options
:::

Moving forward, when you navigate to Admin > Job Board > Theme (Job Board), you will be able to select a brand before making adjustments to that brand's job board.

### Adding Additional Brands

Once you've configured Multiple Brands, you can add a new brand by heading to Admin > Job Board > **Theme (Job Board)** and clicking `+ New Brand`. You'll then be able to add in additional brand details like theb public facing name and website.

![The Brands page with the New Brand button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0EZguVUc3O0Bo4mrLCq2z_multiple-brands-overview-setup-data-privacy-and-faq-2026-02-06-at-112959-am.jpg)

## Associating jobs with an alternative brand

1. Navigate Jobs > **Jobs** to view your job list
2. When in a job, head to the `Settings` tab, then select the brand in the `Brand` dropdown.
   1. This assignment controls how each job appears on postings on branded job boards and in candidate communications. Each job’s brand controls the branding visible on job boards and other candidate-facing communications.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
Jobs can only be connected to one brand. It's not possible to link a job to multiple brands
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/54200cebe27cd77474b55e4c016724a4.png" size="78" width="691" height="592" darkWidth="691" darkHeight="592" position="center" alt="The Settings page of a job with the Brand listed in Basic Info." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

### Integration Support for External Job Platforms

Each brand can be configured with its own integration settings for all job board integrations.

To configure job board integration settings for each of your brands:

1. Navigate to Admin > Integrations > **Integrations Marketplace**
2. Select the integration in question and open the dropdown menu to the top right to navigate between brand configuration pages.&#x20;
3. Configure each to your team’s specifications (it’s not required to setup the integration for each brand).

Jobs that are associated with the selected brands will then be pushed to the third-party job board you've set up the integration with.

![Accessing the list of brands within an integration tile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/07b448f51a2c6b67ba4e7393fc912ea7.png)

## Multiple brands: candidate texting (optional)

Multiple brands candidate texting allows you to assign different phone numbers to different brands for texting candidates. If you do not opt to enable this option, then text messages across all brands will be sent via the organization's default phone number.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Prerequisites:

- You will need to have candidate texting configured on your account prior to configuring phone numbers of each brand. Read more on setting up candidate texting at [Candidate Texting Onboarding](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/candidate-texting-onboarding) and [Candidate Texting](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/EQo_-candidate-texting).
- You will also need to have at least one additional brand configured to have the option to enable multiple brands texting.
:::

### Enabling multiple brands candidate texting

To enable candidate texting for multiple brands:

1. Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > **Candidate Texting**
2. On the **General** tab, switch on `Enable Multiple Brands Texting`

Once this is enabled, brands will no longer be able to use the organization's default phone number and will need to have a phone number assigned to them. Any brands that do not have a phone number assigned to them will not be able to send texts.

### Add a phone number and assign it to a brand

Once you have candidate texting and multiple brands configured on your account, you can assign a phone number to each brand. To do this:

1. Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > **Candidate Texting**
2. Click on the **SMS tab**
3. Any brands that are not associated with a phone number will be highlighted as not having a phone number assigned in a yellow alert above the table of phone number and linked brands.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LKvLdkY5WVMvPT-z0A_Oi_multibrand-candidate-texting-restricted-early-access-slab-2026-02-24-at-104350-am.jpg" size="100" width="2688" height="724" position="center" alt="The Candidate Texting page with the error showing that 1 brand does not have an associated phone number." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

4. Click `Add a Phone Number` on this alert to add a new phone number. You'll have options to filter by the country code, the area code, starting pattern, ending pattern and search pattern when finding and adding a new phone number.
5. Click `Search Phone Numbers` to view a list of phone numbers matching your criteria and select a number from the results by clicking `Add` next to the phone number you'd like to use moving forward.



::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dN2WSB3y3Ha2aIIlpkIdo_multibrand-candidate-texting-tutorial-2026-02-24-at-104714-am.jpg" size="100" width="1498" height="744" position="center" alt="The Advanced Phone Number Search screen." showCaption="false" indent="3"}

1. Find the newly added phone number and click the `+` icon in the Actions section of the table to associate it with a brand. Select the brand from the list pop up and click `Associate` beside the brand in question to confirm the association.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/M7hF9YYYgDqzFRDbcBx_5_multibrand-candidate-texting-tutorial-2026-02-24-at-105507-am.jpg" size="88" width="949" height="710" position="center" alt="The menu showing the option to associate a brand with a phone number." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If you would like to filter the table to only view phone numbers that haven't been associated with a brand, toggle on the `Show unassociated only` option above the Actions column of the table.

![The multi-brand Candidate Texting page with the option to show unassociated phone numbers.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1fkgVPdlvRq4oDXK8mxQN_candidate-texting-acent-ashby-2026-02-24-at-105936-am.jpg)
:::

### Removing brand association from phone numbers

Want to remove brand association from a phone number? Click the crossed out link icon within the **Actions** column of the table. Click `Remove` to confirm. The phone number will still be listed as available to link to other brands or re-link to the brand it was associated with before.

![The Candidate Texting page with the option to remove brand association from a phone number highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9rQHXMCD_xydOP3P1Dyt4_candidate-texting-acent-ashby-2026-02-24-at-110452-am.jpg)

### Deleting and restoring phone numbers from your account

If you'd like to remove a phone number completely, click the trash can icon in the **Actions** column of the table.&#x20;

![The Candidate Texting page with the option to remove a phone number highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6QX9SHGEZ32Kj2HXYrrKv_multibrand-candidate-texting-tutorial-2026-02-24-at-110757-am.jpg)

Click `Delete` to confirm the request to delete the phone number from your account. The phone number will be held for 30 days to allow incoming messages to be resolved, then will be removed. A deletion date with show in the Marked for Deletion column for your reference.

If within those 30 days you decide you'd like to keep that phone number moving forward, click the circular arrow icon in the Actions column, then `Restore` to restore the number and make it active again.

![The Candidate Texting page with the option to restore a phone number highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jo_EILwiKTMO_uOFsL23w_multibrand-candidate-texting-tutorial-2026-02-24-at-111214-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Deleted phone numbers cannot be restored after the date shown in the Marked for Deletion column.
:::

### Disable multiple brands texting

To disable candidate texting for multiple brands:

1. Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > **Candidate Texting**
2. On the **General** tab, switch off `Enable Multiple Brands Texting`
3. Click `Disable` to confirm

When multiple brands is disabled, all brands will be assigned your organization's default phone number.

All mappings set up when enabling multiple brands texting will be preserved in case you opt to re-enable multiple brands texting.

### Multiple brands: brands and texts on the candidate profile

:::hint{type="info"}
This section will cover the areas of the Texts tab on the candidate profile that help you to identify texts from brands and sending a candidate text as a specific brand. For more on candidate texting in general, check out [Candidate Texting](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/EQo_-candidate-texting).
:::

***Filter texts on the candidate feed by brand***

Above each text message listed on the text feed you will see the name of the brand that send the message. You can hover over the brand here to view the receiver's number, the hiring team member who sent the text and a timestamp of when the message was sent.
Above each candidate's response, you will see the name of the brand their response has been sent to.

![A text conversation with a candidate highlighting the brand the text was sent from and to.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DVjXRhGmZ9Kde2pNeDKb0_text-messages-to-candidate.jpg)

If you'd like to only see the texts sent from a specific brand on the Text tab of the candidate profile, use the `Show texts with:` dropdown to filter texts as needed.

![The option to filter texts by the brand the text was sent from.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0uaBAmQH_1Ylq_JZBA0-b_multibrand-candidate-texting-tutorial-2026-02-24-at-114021-am.jpg)

***Sending a text from a brand***

Once you have multiple brands with associated phone numbers, you can select the brand from the `From` dropdown to determine who should send the text to the candidate

![The menu for texting a candidate showing the From dropdown where you can select a specific brand.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2L2gfjrRcnYXgQSxNMKP2_consent-given-screenshot.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If the candidate has yet to opt in or opt out of receiving text messages, a message asking them to message START to consent to receiving texts or STOP to opt-out of future messaging will be sent on behalf of the organization using the legal entity name provided. If the candidate consents, this consent applies to all brands within your organization, so individual brands within your account don't need to reach out each time.
:::

## FAQ

::::ExpandableHeading
### What's currently supported for the feature?

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Creating an unlimited number of brands on the theme page in Admin
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="2" indent="2"}
Each brand has:&#x20;
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
A fully customizable Theme page
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="2" indent="3"}
It's own Ashby hosted careers page
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="3" indent="2"}
The theme for each brand is applied to:&#x20;
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Ashby hosted careers page (job board)
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="2" indent="3"}
Direct booking links
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="3" indent="3"}
Candidate availability links
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="4" indent="3"}
Survey and questionnaire pages
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="5" indent="3"}
Data privacy and compliance landing pages
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="4" indent="2"}
All external job board integrations support multiple brands:&#x20;
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="5" indent="2"}
Internal job boards are supported but don't currently support a custom brand (the same case as accounts that don't use multiple brands)
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="6" indent="2"}
Opt-out settings for Settings: candidates can either unsubscribe per job or unsubscribe from all sequences across the organization.
:::
::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I delete a brand?&#x20;

Brand deletion is not supported currently. Please avoid creating unnecessary brands.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I've enabled multiple brands on my account and want to disable it. Can I do this?

Please reach out to Support for assistance with disabling multiple brands on your account.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What if I need independent data ownership for each brand?&#x20;

Multiple brands features is focused on the candidate experience. Internally, data in your account lives in the same instance.

In cases where each brand requires independent data ownership, we recommend you use multiple Ashby accounts instead of the multiple brands feature. These accounts can be made easier to switch between by adding the same email addresses to both accounts.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I configure external job board integrations for each brand?

Each brand allows you to set up a unique LinkedIn Company ID and Indeed in the Integration Settings for branded job posts. Use the dropdown to select the brand, then determine the integration settings for that specific brand.&#x20;
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### If I’m using the multiple brands feature, can I integrate with both Microsoft 365 and Google Workspace? Can I integrate with multiple instances of either Google Workspace or Microsoft 365?

Below you can find a table listing what is and isn't possible with corresponding documentation.

| Scenario                                                                 | Is this supported?    | Relevant guide                                                                                                                   |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Multiple domains within a single Google Workspace account                | Yes                   | [Updating the domain or adding a secondary domain to an Ashby account](docId\:e9kgGNJ4ZFJwQ6CnJNpiS)                             |
| Multiple domains within a single Microsoft 365 tenant                    | Yes                   | [Updating the domain or adding a secondary domain to an Ashby account](docId\:e9kgGNJ4ZFJwQ6CnJNpiS)                             |
| Multiple domains across more than one Google Workspace                   | Yes, with limitations | [Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?](docId\:UWUiWFMUI_xNxVloeX5my)  |
| Multiple domains across more than one Microsoft 365 tenant               | Yes, with limitations | [Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?](docId\:UWUiWFMUI_xNxVloeX5my)  |
| Multiple domains across both Google Workspaces and Microsoft 365 tenants | No                    | [Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?](docId:92txkuC2vVMOrzXEPtMKJ)                   |
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I restrict employee permissions based on brand?

Not currently. A workaround for this would be to configure brand-specific departments, ensure the jobs for each brand are connected to the correct department and then assign permissions based on department. For more on setting up departments, check out [Set up Departments and Locations](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/set-up-departments-and-locations). For more information on permissions, check out [User Permissions](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/user-permissions).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I restrict entities other than jobs based on brand (e.g. email templates, tags, etc.)?

No, only jobs can be restricted by brand in Ashby currently.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How does a migration into Ashby work with multiple brands?

All jobs from previous ATS systems will be synced to the default brand. We don’t currently support customising this but job brands can be edited post-migration.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if multibrand texting is enabled and a brand does not have a phone number associated?

A warning message will appear on the SMS tab of the candidate texting page at Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting: X brands do not have an associated phone number. Brands without an assigned number will not be able to send text messages until a phone number is associated. Automations for jobs under unassociated brands will fail to send SMS.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How does multi-brand texting affect interview scheduling automations?

When automatic interview scheduling is configured to send booking links via SMS, the system uses the job's assigned brand to determine which phone number to send from. The candidate receives the text from that brand's associated phone number.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Do I need to update my existing schedule templates when enabling multi-brand texting?

No, your existing schedule templates will continue to work. They'll automatically use the phone number associated with each job's brand. However, ensure all brands that have jobs with SMS scheduling enabled have phone numbers associated and that you do not have brand names directly added as plain text to your text message templates to avoid confusion.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How does the system determine which phone number to use for automated texts?

The phone number is determined depending on whether you have multi-brand texting enabled or not:

- Multi-brand texting enabled: Uses the phone number associated with the job's brand
- Multi-brand texting disabled: Always uses the default brand's phone number, regardless of the job's brand
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What if my organization has multiple brands but I haven't enabled multi-brand texting?

All text messages will be sent from your default brand's phone number. The system automatically falls back to the default brand when multi-brand texting is disabled.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if I disable multi-brand texting after already setting up multiple phone numbers with different brands?

When you disable multi-brand texting:

1. All brands will fall back to the default phone number. All outgoing text messages will be sent from your organization's default phone number, regardless of which brand the job belongs to.
2. Phone number associations are preserved. Your existing phone number-to-brand associations remain in the database. If you re-enable multi-brand texting later, your previous configuration will still be there.
:::


[title] Job Postings
[path] Jobs & Openings/

***

Job postings are used when you want your job to appear on your Ashby or third-party job boards, allowing you to collect applications from candidates. Create a job posting to add the job description, additional locations, the application form, and override compensation information for the specific instance of the job you're hiring for. This article outlines the steps required to successfully create and publish a job posting.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- To *set up* a job posting, you must create a job first.
- To *publish* a job posting, your job must be set to "Open", and may require an active Opening to be assigned depending on your settings and plan type.

You can read more on creating and opening jobs at [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt)
:::

# Permissions & access

Job postings are available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

To create or edit a job and its postings, users must have one of the following:

- **Elevated Access - Admin**
- **Elevated Access - Admin (Private)**
- **Organization Admin**

Users with custom access roles must also have the **Can add/edit jobs** permission scoped to the relevant job, team, or location.

# Creating and publishing a job posting

## Step 1: Start the job posting draft

1. Navigate to the job you'd like to post by going to **Jobs >&#x20;**[Jobs](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/all) in the top navigation bar.
2. Select the `Job Postings` tab within the job.
3. Click `New Draft` to get started.

![Shows the Job Postings menu option on the left and the New Draft button on the right.](https://cdn.zappy.app/6ee06ede5f7c010e980cb23b92387818.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
You can create a draft job posting while your job is in a Draft state, but your job must be set to Open in order to publish your job posting.
:::

## Step 2: Add the job description and basic info

Once you've created your draft, you have five different tabs where you can fill in posting details:

- Description
- Basic Info
- Application Form
- Automation
- Compensation

We'll cover the `Description` and `Basic Info` tabs in this section.

### Description

![Shows the description fields for a new job.](https://cdn.zappy.app/5295d2fae3ba4b405229d41c6b8b36c6.png)

**Social Description:** The description information added to the Social Description field shows when the posting is shared on social media (for example, linked in a post on LinkedIn). There is a limit of 200 characters.

**Description:** Applicants see this information when they view this job on your Ashby job board (on the Overview tab). Ashby also sends the description to any third-party job boards you choose to integrate with. You can add links, images, and videos to your description using the toolbar at the bottom of the field.

### Basic info

![Basic Info settings for the Master Scribe job, showing job board visibility, Berlin as the primary location, San Francisco as an additional location, and On-site as the location type.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/m4elNrEDyKb51hV-WwZFJ_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-22-at-21146-pm.jpg)

- **Title:** Enter the title as you would like it to appear on the posting. By default, the title used when creating the job appears.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Amending the title here will not impact the title of the job internally in Ashby. For example, if the Head of Marketing job title was amended to display as Head of Digital Marketing in this field, the job posting would reflect the new title but the job will still show as Head of Marketing to an internal user when viewing the job in Ashby.
:::

- **External Visibility:** Here you can choose to list your job publicly on your Ashby job board or third-party job boards (Listed), or not (Unlisted).&#x20;

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If a job posting is published but set as Unlisted, an applicant can still access it if they have a direct link to the posting. For unlisted postings added to the internal job board, users would still need to sign in to be able to view the posting.
:::

- **Third-Party Job Boards:** If you have any third-party job board integrations in place, you can choose the job boards that you'd like to display this posting using the checkboxes in the drop-down.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If you are using an XML feed to pull your job postings to LinkedIn (rather than the direct integration listed in [Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace)), deselecting LinkedIn from the checkboxes here will not stop your job posting from being listed on LinkedIn. This option will only work for the direct LinkedIn integration.
:::

- **Location:** Determine the location that should be listed on your posting. Changing the location here, like changing the title, will not impact the location listed on the job internally in Ashby. Click `Create` within the dropdown to create a new location inline.
- **Additional Locations:** If candidates can work from various locations, you can add additional locations here. Each additional location displays in the **Locations** section of the job posting on your Ashby job board. Click `Create` within the dropdown to create a new location inline.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cNHP2U0hhNl4kTCn_Lklb_add-an-in-line-location-to-a-job-posting.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1604" height="1598" darkWidth="1604" darkHeight="1598" alt="Creating a location in-line on a job posting" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
When a job posting has multiple locations (a main location and additional locations) listed, third-party job boards automatically create separate job postings for each location. For example, if a job posting has a main location of New York and additional locations of San Francisco and Los Angeles, three separate job postings would be created on the third-party job board.
:::

- **Location Type:** Indicates whether a job is on-site, hybrid, or remote. It appears on the job posting and is shared with supported third-party job boards. This defaults to the location type set on th&#x65;**&#x20;Location field**, but can be overidden with this field.&#x20;
- **Application Deadline:** Set a date and time that applications must be submitted by. Candidates see the deadline date and time in their own time zone. If you set a deadline, a setting appears that, when enabled, allows you to automatically unpublish the posting once the deadline has passed.

## Step 3: Associate or edit the application form

On the `Application Form` tab, you can choose which application form candidates see when they apply for the job.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/b4bc49028cab6d3ef41fbb2278bb9004.png" size="76" width="890" height="740" darkWidth="890" darkHeight="740" position="center" alt="Shows the application form tab of a job." showCaption="false"}

Your organization's default application form is automatically assigned for this job posting; however, you can switch to a customized form or unlink and make edits to the form that are unique to this posting.

To understand how to create a customized application form, see [Create application forms in Admin](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI).

To understand how to change the form associated with this job posting, or to unlink and edit the default form, see [Where forms are assigned](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI).

## Step 4: Configure application automations

Ashby can automatically send application confirmation emails, as well as auto-reject candidates based on certain criteria. Configure these settings under the `Automation` tab within the job posting.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/2c03a8c107a0cdac61adc31922766d94.png" size="86" width="891" height="513" darkWidth="891" darkHeight="513" position="center" alt="Shows the automation tab of a job." showCaption="false"}

### Auto-Confirm Application

If your organization has [Application Email Confirmations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/application-email-confirmation) set up, this automation is automatically enabled and set to "Use organization's default template." If you'd like to use a specific email template for applications submitted for this posting, use the drop-down to select a template.

:::hint{type="info"}
[Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ) is a great article to learn all about creating email templates for various roles and reasons.

If you need to create the default application confirmation email template for your organization, see the section on [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).
:::

### Auto-Reject Application

To auto-reject candidates based on certain criteria, create a configuration by selecting the `Create a Configuration` button and setting your criteria. For information on setting up and editing these configurations, see [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota).

Once you've created your configurations, you can turn on the `Auto-Reject Enabled` toggle.

## Step 5: Confirm compensation details

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6cdaf94e808e2e7788dbbf6c3a4456bd.png" size="88" width="883" height="702" darkWidth="883" darkHeight="702" position="center" alt="Shows the compensation tab of a job." showCaption="false"}

On the `Compensation` tab of your job posting, you can determine whether you'd like to display the compensation on the posting (both in the posting details and on the posting listing when viewing jobs on your Ashby job board), as well as optionally add additional compensation information. If no additional information is added, compensation information for the job posting defaults to the information included on the job.

:::hint{type="info"}
Full details on setting up compensation information can be found in our article on [Compensation](docId:0Zkrmoq_22RNbDT3KwGuM).
:::

## Final step: Publish your job posting

:::hint{type="warning"}
To publish your posting, the job it is tied to must be set to `Open` (to accept inbound applications) and a job description must be added to the job posting.

If you have set compensation to be displayed on your posting, you also need to ensure that you have at least one valid salary range in place in the `Compensation` tab to publish your posting.
:::

When ready to publish, click the `Publish` button in the upper right corner of the posting. If the button is greyed out, that indicates there is required information missing in your job posting. Hover over the button to see details, and update the posting until the button turns purple.

# Viewing your job posting

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on customizing your job board, check out [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](docId\:f2OtyumVmeJaAt1DYRJYW).
:::

Once published, you see a `View Posting` button in the upper right corner of the admin view of your job posting. Click this button to view how candidates see the posting on your job board.

![Shows what the Overview of the job posting will look like when clicked on by a candidate from your job board.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XOHg78jHn7OK9mvumBSyT_head-of-recruiting-kara-joseph-new-demo-2026-02-17-at-111656-am.jpg)

When opening the posting, you see the following:

- **Job Posting Title:** The job title appears in the upper left. It is taken directly from the `Title` field in the `Basic Info` tab of the job posting.
- **Location:** The location and any additional locations added to the job posting show on the left side.
- **Employment Type:** Ashby pulls this from the `Employment Type` field in the `Settings` tab of the job itself (not the job posting).
- **Location Type:** Ashby pulls this from the job posting's `Basic Info` tab. Indicates to candidates whether the job is on-site, hybrid, or remote.
- **Department:** Ashby pulls this from the `Team` field within the job's `Settings` tab.
- **Deadline to Apply:** If you have set a deadline in the job posting's `Basic Info` tab, it is listed here (shown in the applicant's time zone).
- **Compensation:** If you have opted to display compensation information, it is displayed here.
- **Overview:** On the right two thirds of the screen, this is where the description you've added to your posting in the `Description` field is displayed.
- **Application:** The application form can be completed by clicking into the `Application` tab.

Additionally, if you have the job posting set to `Listed` in the `Basic Info` tab, it shows with other listed jobs when viewing your job board:

![Shows what the job listing will look like on your job board.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f287d5f55653892116cfd5ad7cf88dd5.png)

# Managing job postings

Once created, your job postings live under the `Job Postings` tab of the corresponding job. From here, you can manage various aspects of the job posting, including setting it as the default, unpublishing, or deleting the posting altogether.

## Default job posting

The first posting you create for a job automatically becomes the default posting, and this is indicated under the **Status** column of the `Job Postings` tab.

![Job Postings table showing two Group Product Manager postings, with an arrow highlighting the Default and Listed status of the first posting.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kfPYw5QCoADC-rcQS7gU1_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-03-at-12049-pm.jpg)

You can change which posting is the default by clicking into it and selecting `More`, and then `Make Default`.

![Group Product Manager job posting with the More menu open and the Make Default option highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fAtEONMagRBz-IJ1Hhor__group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-03-at-23130-pm.jpg)

The posting marked as the default impacts certain elements of the hiring process for the role:

- **Application Requests:** When application request links are sent manually or automatically to invite candidates to apply, the details shared are based on the default job posting, which is assigned to the application. This also means that any automations configured on the default job posting are applied to these applications.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
You can learn more about sending application requests in [Application Requests](docId:-1cI2DUBbnESgdM-dW8wW).
:::

- **Email Template Tokens:** For applications that don't have an explicit job posting assigned (e.g. manually created applications, or applications transferred from another job), email template tokens like "job posting description" and "job posting URL" fall back to the default posting.
- **Interview Briefing Documents:** The job posting section shown to interviewers in briefing documents also uses this same fallback to the default posting for applications without an explicit posting attached.

## Unpublishing and deleting job postings

You can unpublish a published job posting by clicking into the posting and selecting `Unpublish` in the top right. Unpublishing a listing removes it from job boards until it is published again.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VZi8r8zG-I1eciL14zU4T_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-22-at-24259-pm.jpg" size="90" isUploading="false" width="852" height="313" darkWidth="852" darkHeight="313" alt="Master Scribe job posting with the Unpublish button highlighted at the top of the page." showCaption="false"}

Additionally, job postings can be deleted if needed by selecting `More` > `Delete`.

- Deleting a posting cannot be undone.
- You cannot delete a published job posting, so unpublish it first.
- If you have multiple postings and need to delete the default posting, you must first set a different posting as the default.
- If you have only one job posting, you can delete it.

:::hint{type="success"}
Congrats! You've learned how to create, view, and manage your job postings. If you'd like to understand how to build job posting reports, check out [Reporting on Job Postings](docId\:o2cT7Pt-pE-SlGfIC7Vy_).
:::

# FAQs

### Can I create multiple job postings for one job?

Yes. On the `Job Postings` tab, click the `New Draft` button again to create an additional job posting. Applications from all postings on the job are added to the same pipeline.

### Is it possible to see the number of clicks on a job posting?

It is not currently possible to track clicks or other activities on a job posting within Ashby.

### How does LinkedIn display a job posting with multiple locations?

When a job posting has multiple locations (a main location and additional locations) listed, LinkedIn automatically creates a separate job posting for each location. So if a job posting has a main location of New York but additional locations of San Francisco and Los Angeles set in Ashby, three separate job postings are created in LinkedIn.

### How do I get a direct link to a job posting?

If you have set your posting to Unlisted and would like to send a direct link to a lead, navigate to your published posting and click the `View Posting` button. You can then copy the URL from the posting to share.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/60c45de672cc92e7e715263a6b49d3f6.png)

### Can I preview a job posting?

To preview a job posting, set it as Unlisted and click `View Posting` on the job posting.

### What if I have one job with multiple locations?

You have two options:

- **Add multiple job postings to a job**, each with a different location. Your job board will have a job posting for each location.
- **Add multiple locations to one job posting.** This makes the career page look cleaner (no duplicate jobs).

### Does the Ashby XML feed include the workplace type (Remote, Hybrid, or On-Site) in the job posting details?

Yes, the XML feed includes this information, so the workplace type is indicated on third-party job boards like LinkedIn and Indeed.

You can specify the location type within the Location Details section of your location settings at **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/108edf6bd76767ed7fe6407a22ff4ded.png)

### My job posting is currently unlisted and candidates are still able to apply - why?

If your job posting was listed on your Ashby job board at any time, the job posting links can be scraped by external job boards, meaning candidates can still submit applications. If a candidate also has the specific job posting URL, they can apply for the job via that posting, even if the posting is unlisted. Candidates can also share the unlisted job posting URL. To stop candidates from applying via that job posting completely, it needs to be unpublished.

### What is the difference between an unlisted and an unpublished job posting?

**Unlisted:** The job posting is published but can only be accessed via a direct link, and the posting does not appear on your main Ashby job board. Candidates can apply via the direct link.

**Unpublished:** Candidates cannot access this job posting at all and cannot apply for the job via this posting until it is published.

### How do I create or edit an application form for a job posting?

Application forms are assigned to job postings, not directly to jobs. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, select the job, and open the `Job Postings` tab. Select an existing posting to edit its application form, or click `New Draft` to create a new posting. Then open the `Application Form` tab and select `Change Link` to use a shared form or `Unlink & Edit` to customize the form for that posting.

See [Application Forms](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI) for more information.

[title] Importing interviewer tags from Goodtime
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

Goodtime Interviewer Tags can be imported into Ashby as [Interviewer Pools](docId:3NHQZ_eQLHGVlgjxgaZdJ)  using the Employee Bulk Import tool. See [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ) for more details on how bulk importing works.

## CSV Import Overview

The [CSV Import feature](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-import/bulk-import) supports creating candidate profiles, openings, and employees in bulk by uploading a CSV file containing the details you want to be uploaded. There is no explicit limit to the number of candidates, openings, or employees that can be uploaded at once. Large files will be uploaded in batches. Once the upload starts, you can leave the page and return it when it is complete. Common use cases for this feature include:

- Importing candidates from a legacy ATS
- Importing headcount planning data
- Importing employee tags from a legacy scheduling tool

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/064995350936406a9591cce3fb2b1a96"}

## Importing Employees

The Employee Import is intended for importing key interviewer information into Employee profiles, including:

1. Email (this field is required to accurately match data to the correct profile)
2. Custom Fields (learn more in [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) )
3. Job Title
4. LinkedIn URL
5. Daily Interview Limit
6. Weekly Interview Limit
7. Interviewer Pools (learn more in [Interviewer Training](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb))

:::hint{type="info"}
If you’re interested in importing additional employee fields reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to submit a feature request.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/42985679f40440b92c86b70097ef7221.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0c12fd93d10cd99dba10ef4fc150b347.png)

## Formatting Goodtime Data

To import employee tags into Ashby, you’ll want each employee to be contained in a single row and tags to be stored as comma-separated values. Your spreadsheet should look like this before exporting to CSV:

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/372e1e7d68243cf42977166129fd6fea.png)

**You can&#x20;**[use this template](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1CBB7AFFquSbANE4hcfxIZuLWASP5337OXwDsBhNZgrw/edit?usp=sharing)**&#x20;to ensure your tags are formatted correctly.**

The following table outlines all supported Employee Import fields; only email and tags are required to add users to Pools from GoodTime.



| Field Name                   | Description                                                                                     | Formatting Notes                                                                 | Formatting Example                                     |
| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| Email (required)             | The email address of an existing Ashby Employee                                                 | Must exactly match the email of an existing user                                 | ravan\@ashbyhq.com                                     |
| Interviewer Pools (required) |  See [Interviewer Pools](docId:3NHQZ_eQLHGVlgjxgaZdJ)                                           | Multiple pools should be added as comma separated values                         | Business Operations,Managers                           |
| Job Title                    | The employee’s job title                                                                        | No character limit. This title may be shown to candidates this person interviews | Project Manager                                        |
| Daily Interview limit        | The greatest number of interviews the employee can be booked for in a day via direct booking    | It must be a positive integer greater than or equal to zero                      | 3                                                      |
| Weekly Interview limit       | The greatest number of interviews the employee can be booked for in a week via direct booking   | Must be a positive integer greater than or equal to the daily interview limit    | 7                                                      |
| LinkedIn Profile URL         | The employee’s LinkedIn Profile URL                                                             |                                                                                  | https\://www\.linkedin.com/in/ravan-charles-43a95140/  |
| Custom Fields                | See [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) for more information on supported field types |                                                                                  | People Manager (Y/N)?                                  |


[title] Getting Started for Recruiters
[path] Getting Started: User Guides/

Welcome to Ashby! We couldn't be more excited to help you get started using Ashby as a recruiter. This guide assumes your team has set up their Ashby account using the [Ashby Admin Onboarding](docId\:aSKvbp-DfF9riogKAZshI) guide, and covers how to navigate Ashby and use the most commonly used features for recruiters.

:::hint{type="info"}
**New to Ashby as a Recruiter?**

&#x20;For a guided video walkthrough of everything in this article take the [Recruiter Essentials](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-recruiter-essentials) track in Ashby Academy. It pulls together the Academy's recruiter lessons into one sequenced path, so you don't have to piece together each step on your own.
:::

# Log in to Ashby

To sign in, head to [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/).

Ashby uses Google sign-in, Microsoft 365 sign-in, and magic links.

If your company has Single Sign-On (SSO) set up with Ashby, use this option to log in.

:::hint{type="info"}
More on signing in can be found at [Signing in to Ashby](docId\:vH7B6OAp3CIRSFeHtCYoA).
:::

# Configure your personal settings

A key first step is configuring your personal settings in Ashby.

In [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info), you can do the following:

- Set your personal info, including your job title, user avatar, timezone, and social links
- Set your notification settings: determine the activities you should be notified about and where you'd like to be notified
- Set up personal email templates
- Set up OAuth if needed (confirm with your admin whether this is required as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 setup)

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full walkthrough, check out [Updating Personal Settings](docId\:Bb_jro6kp6bWBkWTHtAZT)
:::

# Navigate Ashby

## Home page

If you are only interviewing candidates in the pipeline and have no other interaction with candidates, you likely have Limited Access in Ashby.

To get started, log in to Ashby at [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/) using one of the login options. You should already have an account set up. Once logged in, you land on your home page, where you can access interview briefings and tasks.

For a full breakdown of the home page, check out [Home Page](docId\:mzsz9lMAG1AX7n1BoZCzj)

### Add and track referrals

To submit referrals:

1. Head to the **Referrals** section of the [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page.
2. Click `+ Referral`.
3. To create a direct referral, click `Add Direct Referral` and complete the referral form with the candidate details.
4. To create a referral link, click `Create Referral Link` and give your referral link a title. You can then opt to link to a specific job posting using the `Link to specific job posting?` checkbox and selecting a job posting from the dropdown.

![Highlights the Referrals section on the home page.](https://cdn.zappy.app/26278f4b47c38aac31f08c40ab4ba5c3.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Our full guide on referrals can be found at [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr)
:::

## Candidate profile

Depending on the permissions you are given, you may have access to view candidate profiles and take action on job considerations.

For further information on navigating a candidate profile, check out [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).

## Candidate pipeline

The Pipeline Overview provides you a view of candidates across all positions you have access to and allows you to quickly jump between them.

For more on the pipeline view, check out [Candidate Pipeline](docId\:c7vCHI2hsjQZ0AynA8c-b).

## Jobs - dashboard view

The Job Dashboard at **Jobs >&#x20;**[Dashboard](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/pipelines) is a high-level overview of the active jobs you follow, have a role on, and have access to.

You can also access the `Job Board` from this page.

We recommend bookmarking this page to quickly see all of your active jobs in one place.

![Job dashboard view with button linking out to the job board](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wj37MTayKjo_1XZbYkRcB_job-dashboard-view.jpg)

# Navigate Admin

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have Organization Admin access, this section covers the settings you can customize in the **Admin** section of Ashby.
:::

Many of the features you use in Ashby can be customized in **Admin**. This quick tour covers:

1. Where you can adjust user permissions (on the [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) page).
2. Customizing the interview process including [interview plans](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interview-plans), [interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews), and [feedback forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-forms).
3. Customizing more settings including [archive reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-archive-reasons), [email templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates), and [custom fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields).
4. Bulk importing candidates using [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ).

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ef727211565d4407a97513ff2c341ff2"}

# Common use cases

:::hint{type="info"}
This section walks you through the key activities you complete as a recruiter, from opening and posting jobs to adding candidates to your Human Resources Information System (HRIS).
:::

## Opening and posting jobs

To create a job:

1. Navigate to [Jobs > Admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/all), then click `Create a Job` and follow the steps in the job creation wizard.
2. At this point, you can open the job right away, or configure it further.
3. In the **Settings** section, there are further configuration options on four tabs.
4. When you're ready to open the job, click `Job Status` and select `Mark as Open`. An open job isn't automatically posted to your Ashby job board or any third-party job boards, but you can add candidates to the pipeline.
5. When you're ready to post the job to your job board, set up a job posting on the **Job Postings** tab. You can create as many postings as you'd like for a job. Once published, the posting appears on your Ashby job board (for example, jobs.ashbyhq.com/ashby).

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide on creating a job and job postings, check out [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt) .
:::

## Advancing and archiving candidates

:::hint{type="info"}
More about advancing and archiving candidates in [Application Review](docId\:d_nxB_Kdz4fJru4hBCaLb).
:::

## Scheduling interviews

With Ashby, you can schedule interviews manually, or create a structured interview process that automates the details of finding times and creating calendar invites.

:::hint{type="info"}
For the full details of setting up and scheduling interviews, check out [Scheduling & Interviews: An Introduction](docId\:XW-3IRIvOnBHO_UF37LbH) to view the options available.
:::

## Generating offers and offer letters

When a candidate moves to the Offer stage in the candidate pipeline, Ashby generates an offer activity in the **Activities** section of their candidate profile. Click `Create Offer` to complete the Offer Details form. The form data populates the substitution fields in the offer letter PDF.

You can also send out e-signature requests (sent via Dropbox Sign) and create offer letter templates to help structure your processes further.

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide, check out [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh) and [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW)
:::

## Add candidates to your HRIS

When a candidate accepts an offer, you see an option to push hired candidates to your HRIS system. Clicking the button creates a new employee in the system, including the latest offer data.

All HRIS integration options can be found in the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).

# FAQ

### My profile picture has synced over from Google Workspace but it's very pixelated. Why?

Images synced over from Google Workspace do not have a high enough resolution. We'd recommend uploading your avatar within [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info) to fix this.


[title] Data Privacy and Compliance
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Data Management/

Ashby provides tools to help you maintain compliance with local and federal data privacy regulations when storing candidate data. You can configure these tools in [Admin > Data Management > Data Privacy & Compliance](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-compliance).

## Permissions & access

Only Organization Admins can configure data compliance rules in Ashby. See the table below for a full breakdown of access roles.

| Access role                                                    | Can configure rules? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                    |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                    |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                    |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ❌                    |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                    |

On the **Data Privacy and Compliance** page, you have access to three tabs:

- [Inactivity Rules](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-compliance/inactivity)
- [Consent Rules](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-compliance/consent)
- [Privacy & Legal](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-compliance/settings)

![The Data Privacy and Compliance rule configuration page in Ashby. The Inactivity Rules tab is selected.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LMLSr3pbgH1ks6TPVVXa4_data-privacy-compliance-acent-ashby-2026-03-17-at-113834-am.jpg)

# Data compliance: Inactivity and consent rules

You can use a combination of inactivity and consent-based rules to put a flexible policy in place that helps you track which candidate data should be removed from your system.

## Inactivity rules

Inactivity rules are set based on when the candidate became inactive.

There are two types of rules:

- **Inactive Lead Rule:** A rule that governs how long you should keep the data of Lead candidates. This is a retention rule for candidates that are seen as inactive because they have no applications or only have applications that are in Lead stages.

![The menu to edit an inactive lead rule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vGGMrAEuHx3C3wKCjo0sn_example-inactive-lead-rule.jpg)

- **Inactive Applicant Rule:** A rule that governs how long you should keep the data of Inactive candidates. This is a retention rule for candidates who are seen as inactive because they only have applications in the Archived stage.

![The menu to edit an inactive applicant rule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sHjoPPBc8iheEs_WXovGM_example-inactive-application-rule.jpg)

### Amending the default inactivity-based rule

After clicking on one of your default inactivity-based rules, you can further configure it by:

- Updating basic information, such as adding an internal description for reference.
- Amending the retention period, which defines the time period after which the Inactive Lead or Inactive Applicant is marked as needing to be anonymized or deleted.
- Configuring a Rule Filter using the `Add Field to Match` option to add fields and establish criteria. Candidates who meet the set criteria have the rule applied to them.

Once you have reconfigured the rule, you have the option to re-evaluate your inactivity or consent-based rule for candidates matching your rule filters in the **Danger Zone** section. Click `Re-evaluate X Candidates` to take this action.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Re-evaluating the rule for candidates does not delete or anonymize candidates automatically. It only flags those in violation of your configured rule.
:::

### Creating an additional inactivity-based rule

You can create additional inactive lead and inactive application rules. These allow you to set different location criteria and retention periods, giving you greater flexibility and compliance control over candidate data.

See below for examples of rule configurations.

To create a new inactivity-based rule:

1. Ensure you are on the **Inactivity Rules** tab of the **Data Privacy & Compliance** page.
2. Click `+ New` and select either `+ Inactive Lead Rule` or `+ Inactive Applicant Rule`.

![The Data Privacy and Compliance page with the New button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UpEAeciLBp5pD2C0XpnRL_data-privacy-compliance-acent-ashby-2026-03-17-at-113935-am.jpg)

3. For additional inactivity rules, complete the following information:
   - **Title:** Click the current title of the rule to rename it.
   - **Description (Optional):** Add an internal description for your rule.
   - **Retention Period:** If the inactive lead or applicant matches your rule, the retention period determines how long after the candidate was created (for an inactive lead rule), or how long after the candidate's final application was archived (for an inactive applicant rule), before they are considered in violation of your configured rules.
   - **Location:** Determine your location criteria:
     - **Global:** Covers all locations configured in Ashby. You can only configure one rule per type with the Global Location setting (to avoid conflicts).
     - **Specific Locations:** Specify the locations this rule applies to. For more on configuring locations, see [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8).
     - **Advanced:** Switch on the `Advanced` option and click `+ Add Field to Match` to set your criteria using a range of location fields and values. You can also set further criteria in the **Additional Criteria** section.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you do not enable the **Advanced** toggle and specify location fields, the locations you select for data rules within the **Locations** section refer to the locations assigned within your job's **Settings** section.
:::

![The Locations section of configuring a new data retention rule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/J5OMtQbYNG8ofbXmNnRgF_new-inactive-applicant-rule-acent-ashby-2026-03-17-at-115705-am.jpg)

4. Once you are ready to enable your rule, switch on `Is Enabled` in the **Basic Info** section and select `Save Changes` at the bottom of the page.

![The Basic Info section of a data retention rule with Is Enabled highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GHUPk5MKnHx_1JTGcX-CO_is-enabled-toggle.jpg)

5. In the **Danger Zone** section, you also have the option to re-evaluate candidates who meet your rule criteria and apply the rule to them if they qualify. Click `Re-evaluate X Candidates` to take this action.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Re-evaluating the rule for candidates does not delete or anonymize candidates automatically. It only flags those in violation of your configured rule.
:::

## Consent rules

Consent-based rules are set based on the date consent was given by a candidate.

### Amending the default consent-based rule

After clicking into the default consent-based rule, you can further configure it by:

- Adding a description for internal reference.
- Choosing the consent request period, which defines how long a period of consent Ashby requests from the candidate when requesting consent via your jobs page or via automation settings.
- Creating a rule filter, which restricts which candidates this rule applies to.
- Setting up consent collection on Job Posting pages in the **Jobs Page Settings** section. The consent collection option appears underneath the application form on the job posting.
- Setting up automation settings to automatically send an email with a link to a consent form based on a set of rules. You can use this to collect consent from non-applicants, such as sourced candidates (for example, those added via the Chrome extension) or candidates that were manually added to Ashby.
- Setting up consent extension automation settings to automatically request a consent extension prior to the consent retention date.

![The edit menu for the default consent-based rule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sLi6SgKifYUGdSQhMgAhV_default-consent-rule-acent-ashby-2026-03-17-at-13346-pm.jpg)

### Creating an additional consent rule

You can create additional consent rules to set different location criteria and retention periods. For examples of multiple rule configurations, see the examples below.

To create a new consent rule:

1. Ensure you are on the **Consent Rules** tab of the **Data Privacy & Compliance** page.
2. Click `+ New` and select `+ Consent Rule`.

![The consent rules tab with the New button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rJwNwI8NsmTotjPQ3uU2m_data-privacy-compliance-acent-ashby-2026-03-17-at-14625-pm.jpg)

3. For additional consent rules, complete the following information:
   - **Title:** Click the current title of the rule to rename it.
   - **Description (Optional):** Add an internal description for your rule.
   - **Consent Request Period:** The request period defines how long a period of consent Ashby requests from the candidate when requesting consent via your jobs page or via automation settings.
   - **Custom Consent Form Text:** Optional custom consent form text specifically for this rule. If left blank, the consent form text set within the **Direct Consent Request Settings** is used instead.

![The basic info section of a consent rule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mOxMFa8G6ibZ7FtMKJyuX_consent-rule-basic-info.jpg)

- **Location:** Determine your location criteria:
  - **Global:** Covers all locations configured in Ashby.
  - **Specific Locations:** Specify the locations you have configured in Ashby that this rule applies to. For more on configuring locations, see [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8).
  - **Advanced:** Switch on the `Advanced` option and click `+ Add Field to Match` to set your criteria using a range of location fields and values. You can also set further criteria in the **Additional Criteria** section.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you do not enable the **Advanced** toggle and specify location fields, the locations you select for data rules within the **Locations** section refer to the locations assigned within your job's **Settings** section.
:::

![The location section of the consent rule menu with the Advanced toggle on, displaying the Additional Criteria section.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RP1SROibyiDXwEexGRDjk_locations-and-additional-criteria.jpg)

## Consent rules: Jobs Page Settings

On the **Jobs Page Settings** tab of your consent rule, you can enable the `Collect Consent on Jobs Pages` option. Once enabled, you can configure criteria so only the job pages that meet the filters you set request consent.

![The Jobs Page Settings section of a consent rule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SIPHfTpomHdOHDZV2H-CI-20260318-115118.jpg)

When candidates complete an application on your career page, Ashby automatically adds a note below the custom consent form text and above the consent checkbox. The note tells candidates how long the consent period lasts, based on the rule's **Consent Request Period**. You cannot hide this note from the job page.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cVwWEWfi_Lqi-IPNFexQA_customer-support-specialist-tier-3-moonfall-industries-demo-2026-09-29-at-82109-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="758" height="418" darkWidth="758" darkHeight="418" alt="Candidate Data Consent section on a Moonfall Industries job application, displaying consent terms, a highlighted note that the consent period lasts for one year, an “I agree” checkbox, and a purple Submit Application button." showCaption="false"}

If both the rule-level and Direct Consent Request custom text are blank, Ashby uses this built-in default:

“Do you agree to allow \[legal entity name] to contact you about job opportunities for up to \[consent period]?”

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BWY64_TpF59yedsJR1AIb_realm-guide-moonfall-industries-demo-2026-09-29-at-82154-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="714" height="294" darkWidth="714" darkHeight="294" alt="Job application consent question asking whether the candidate agrees to be contacted by Moonfall Industries about job opportunities for up to five years, with an “I agree” checkbox and Submit Application button." showCaption="false"}

## Consent rules: Automation Settings

Within the **Automation Settings** tab, you see two options: Initial Consent and Consent Extension.

![Global Consent Rule page with the Automation Settings tab highlighted, showing options to configure automated consent form delivery to candidates.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xXJj8rg-jcldo5PAzfLRZ_royal-records-consent-ashby-2026-09-10-at-14259-pm.jpg)

### Initial consent automation settings

Initial consent automation settings allow you to determine the conditions under which the first consent request is sent.

Click `Get Started` to create a draft.

![Global Consent Rule Automation Settings page with no automation configured and an arrow pointing to the Get Started button.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/o0a0YhRrWYPTFXJC5gp8A_global-consent-rule-ashby-2026-09-10-at-14433-pm.jpg)

In the **Condition** section, you can add filters by clicking `Add Field to Match`. You can then specify any criteria candidates must meet to be sent the initial consent request email.

Use the **Email Template** field to determine the template sent to the candidate, and the **Delay** dropdown to specify when the email is sent.

:::hint{type="info"}
The email template must use the `Data Consent Request Link` token to be selectable in the dropdown menu.
:::

If you need to add an additional automation rule to create a separate set of criteria, click `Create New Automation Rule`.

![The menu to create a new automation rule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/A-BWrZyuAluARLBpiPPYF_new-consent-rule-acent-ashby-2026-03-17-at-20330-pm.jpg)

Once you are ready to use your rule or rules, click `Save & Publish`. When a candidate meets the conditions you have set in your automation, they receive the email you specified in the **Email Template** field.

![Global Consent Rule Automation Settings page in editing mode with an arrow pointing to the Save & Publish button.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3UzJsaVw58ZEs941Tikco_global-consent-rule-ashby-2026-09-10-at-14858-pm.jpg)

### Consent extension automation settings

Consent extension automation rules allow you to determine when a consent extension request email is sent to the candidate.

Click `Get Started` to start setting up your automation rule.

![Global Consent Rule Automation Settings page with the Consent Extension tab selected and an arrow pointing to the Get Started button for configuring consent extension automation.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vtP_CIBlUmmAh9MYtY9XB_global-consent-rule-ashby-2026-09-10-at-15205-pm.jpg)

Use the `Advance notice period` field to determine how far in advance the request is sent. In the pictured example, the consent extension request email is sent 21 days prior to the date listed in the **Consent Retention Date** field on the candidate's profile.

You can then determine the email template and the sender email address using the **Email Template** and **From email address** fields.

:::hint{type="info"}
The email template must use the `Data Consent Request Link` token to be selectable in the dropdown menu.
:::

To add a filter to your rule, click `Add Field to Match` in the **Filter** section to set your criteria. If this section is left blank, all candidates the consent rule applies to are sent an extension request prior to their consent expiring.

To create an additional consent extension automation rule, click `Create New Automation Rule`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/X0-UO0LjyUOCeGMq8VIRW_global-consent-rule-ashby-2026-09-10-at-15412-pm.jpg)

Once you are ready to use your rule, click `Save & Publish`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DZnSMdYsriaDuPh8H1nY8_global-consent-rule-ashby-2026-09-10-at-15710-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Once you activate your consent extension configuration rule, it is applied to all candidates meeting your criteria.
:::

::::ExpandableHeading
## Open for examples of rule configurations

:::hint{type="warning"}
The examples below are purely illustrative. Consult your legal team and organization's policies when configuring your own data compliance rules within your Ashby account.
:::

### Example based on candidate location

In our first example, our test company has different retention periods for inactive candidates who are located in Germany. An additional inactive applicant rule can be created with the appropriate retention period and the `Advanced` option switched on in the **Locations** section. The Advanced option allows them to use the `Candidate's Location` field, meaning this is the field evaluated when applying the rule.

![Illustrative example of an inactive applicant rule configured based on candidate location.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r63-h8Penq73foVnR2h-L_illustrative-example-inactive-applicant-rule.jpg)

### Example based on job posting location

In this second example, the test company wants to set a different consent request period and different consent form text for job postings with their locations in the United States. When configuring an additional consent rule based on job posting location, the **Advanced** toggle should be switched on and the `Candidate's Job Consideration's Job Posting's Location` field can be used to determine the value fields. The consent period can then be set in the **Consent Period Request** section, and the alternative consent form text can be added to the **Custom Consent Form Text** field.

![Example of a consent rule configured based on job posting location.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wcbIMy8ouuZbIHl-KdlSA_example-consent-rule-job-posting-location.jpg)
::::

# Privacy & legal settings

On the **Privacy & Legal** tab of the **Data Privacy & Compliance** page, you can set the following:

- Recruiting Privacy Policy
- Legal Entity Name
- Automated Processing Legal Notice

![The Privacy and Legal tab of the Data Privacy and Compliance page in Ashby.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vVGxQRBylJMKDVEFPGopQ_data-privacy-compliance-acent-ashby-2026-03-17-at-21535-pm.jpg)

## Recruiting privacy policy

Add a link to a privacy policy here that contains details of how you manage candidate data. This link appears on any consent forms that candidates complete.

You can set a **Recruiting Privacy Policy** in the [Data Privacy & Compliance](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-compliance) section of Admin, under the **Privacy & Legal** tab. When you do so, a link to the policy appears on any consent forms that candidates fill out.

## Legal entity name

The legal entity name is used for data consent requests, Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC), and other legal contexts. You can leave this blank to use your Organization Name.

## Automated processing legal notice

Here you can configure a legal notice to inform candidates that their data may be processed using AI.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on Ashby's AI tools, see [Ashby AI Features](docId\:isi4AsubJJXiHYTbEekfa).
:::

# Viewing data compliance status on candidate profiles

You can view a candidate's data retention dates (as determined by the rules above) on the candidate profile under the **Summary** tab. To find data retention details for a candidate, navigate to the **Summary** section on the candidate profile. You see a **Data Retention** section that displays the date after which the candidate is considered in violation of your rules.

![A candidate profile, open to the Summary section.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6KUyoI8J51uBXf-7ZzGSJ_data-privacy-and-compliance-ashby-knowledge-base-2026-03-17-at-30601-pm.jpg)

If you have consent extension automation settings in place, you see the date that the consent extension request is sent.

You can click `Override` to get the following options:

- **Override & Ignore:** Choose to ignore data retention rules for the candidate completely.
- **Override Date:** Choose a date for data retention that takes precedence over any other rules.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jD9Oi5j9lFoFqkJuw00eM_data-privacy-compliance-updates-archbee-document-2026-03-17-at-30625-pm.jpg" size="50" alt="The options to override or ignore data retention rules on the candidate profile." isUploading="false" width="608" height="376" darkWidth="608" darkHeight="376" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you opt to choose a new date for data retention via the **Override Date** option, the consent extension request date adjusts to fit the new date.
:::

# Taking action on candidates who are in violation

When Ashby flags candidates as in violation of your data compliance rules, it does not anonymize or delete them automatically. To review candidates who are in violation, use [Candidate Search](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidate-searches/new) and filter `Candidate's Is In Violation of Data Compliance?` to `Yes`.

:::hint{type="info"}
For instructions on anonymizing or deleting candidates individually or in bulk, see [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc).
:::

Run this search periodically to catch candidates who newly reach your retention threshold.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on reporting on data retention rules and violations, see [Reporting on Data Retention Rules, Violations of Rules and Consent Choice](docId\:d-2p7dAdxKo_J2HULe31-).
:::

# What happens if multiple compliance rules apply to a candidate or lead?

Multiple compliance rules may apply to a candidate or lead if:

- They apply to a job posting with multiple locations, and one or more locations have different inactivity or consent rules configured for them.
- A candidate otherwise meets the criteria set for more than one inactivity and/or consent rule.

If multiple rules apply to a candidate, the rule with the longest retention period applies. For example, if Rule A says delete or anonymize data after one year and Rule B says delete or anonymize data after three years, the candidate's retention date is set by Rule B (three years).

# How does location hierarchy work with compliance rules?

Location hierarchy across jobs and job postings is supported in compliance rules.

For example:

If the rule is scoped to the United States region and the job location is set to California, the rule **will** match because the United States location is the region the California location is linked to.

If the rule is scoped to the California location and the job location is set to the United States region, the rule **will not** match because California is a descendant of the United States region, and the specification is respected.

# FAQs

### Should I anonymize or delete candidates?

When candidates are marked as in violation, any action taken (deleting or anonymizing) must be done manually. Anonymizing candidates removes any personally identifiable information (PII) but retains enough information to provide useful data for your analytics and reporting workflows. Anonymization cannot be undone.

### Can I override a data retention date when importing candidates via a CSV file?

Yes. Once you have uploaded your comma-separated values (CSV) file, you can map the date listed in your file to the **Data Compliance Override Date** field in Ashby. If you would also like to include an override reason, you can map these fields to the **Data Compliance Override Reason** field in Ashby. When importing these fields, the override is included on the candidate profile and takes precedence over any other data retention dates.

![Screenshot showing the CSV import field mapping for the Data Compliance Override Date and Override Reason fields.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7f3c19045c8c4bde22ba7d3f9f80b563.png)

For more on importing candidates via CSV, see [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ).

### How does anonymizing a candidate work with the email events on the candidate's feed?

Once a candidate has been anonymized, a record of email events still shows on the candidate's feed (including the date and time the email was sent). However, the subject, body, and the candidate's email address are anonymized.

### What happens if a candidate receives an initial consent email but doesn't click the link and follow the steps to provide consent?

In this case, the **Consent Retention Rate** field on the candidate profile still shows No Consent Collected, as the candidate has yet to provide consent.

### I'm seeing multiple consent form completion events within the Forms section of a candidate's job consideration. Why is this?

If a candidate has applied for a role multiple times, they may have also completed the consent form multiple times as part of the application. As duplicate applications are merged, only one job consideration shows on the candidate profile, but each application and consent form completed is listed within the singular job consideration for your reference.

For more on this, see [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb).

### How are inactivity-based rules and consent-based rules applied to hired candidates?

Candidates in the Hired stage are treated as active candidates. This is because hired candidates have an active employment relationship with your organization, which provides a legitimate business interest for retaining their data. The employment of the hired candidate also creates a legal basis for data retention that supersedes the need for consent-based or inactivity-based retention rules to be applied. As such, they are not considered or marked as in violation of the rules you configure in Ashby.

### What happens when a rule is disabled?

You can disable a data compliance rule by switching off the `Is Enabled?` toggle when viewing the rule details. When a rule is disabled, all candidates who had that rule as their applied rule are re-evaluated. If another applicable rule exists, it becomes the new applied rule. If no other rule applies, the candidate's retention date for that category is cleared.

### What happens when a rule is archived?

You can archive a rule by opening the rule details and clicking the `Archive` button. A rule must be disabled before it can be archived. Once archived, it cannot be re-enabled (it is effectively retired). The same re-evaluation that happens on disable applies here as well. Archived rules are hidden from the active rules list but remain in the system for audit purposes.

### What happens to automated consent emails when a consent rule is archived or disabled?

Any scheduled automated consent extension emails tied to that rule are canceled. This prevents outdated or irrelevant emails from being sent to candidates.

### If multiple consent rules apply to the same job posting, which consent form is shown to applicants?

The consent form from the rule with the longest retention period is displayed. This ensures candidates are asked for consent under the most protective rule.

[title] How do I change my company name in Ashby?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

If you’re rebranding or are making changes that would require you to amend your company name in Ashby, this guide will cover the key areas to make adjustments, along with any caveats to be aware of when making the switch.

If you have further questions on changing your company name, don’t hesitate to reach out to your CSM or the Startup Success team.

## Domain Changes

If you are changing domains, please reach out to your CSM or [onboarding@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:onboarding@ashbyhq.com) for assistance. Once your team are actively using email addresses with the new domain, we can update the domain linked to your account to ensure your users can still send emails and schedule via Ashby.

If your previous domain has become a secondary domain, do mention this when you reach out and we can ensure this secondary domain is added.

## Organization Name

You can adjust your company name on the [Theme (Job Board) page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) within Admin. Amend the value in the Organization Name field to change the company name on the account.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8cf8f0ac0f8491c64d86d6f2371fc3e6.png)

## Job Board Slug

You can also change the slug for your job board on the [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) page in Admin.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This will change the part of your Ashby job board URL that points to your company’s job board, so please note that updating this will have an impact on some job board integrations like LinkedIn. The links in LinkedIn postings will update in 24 hours.

If you’ve generated links to add to third-party job boards that we don’t integrate with, these will need to be updated with your new URL.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/138162452b40890d09d3022bc776c3b7.png)

## Job Board Logos

To ensure your new branding is reflected on your job board, you can upload any new logos in the Logos section of the [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) page.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Square**

The square logo is used on mobile Ashby pages. We recommend using a square PNG, JPG, or SVG file of at least 48 x 48 pixels.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7f25a7e4c8dd16f5f82897055c7261fd.png)




:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Wordmark**

The wordmark logo is used on desktop screens. If your wordmark appears small on Ashby, please reduce the border/margin. We recommend using a horizontal rectangular PNG, JPG, or SVG file at least 160 pixels high.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d0ed4da5be420c3f3b708494ece8c276.png)


:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Social Media**

The social media logo is used when you post jobs on social media sites like Twitter and LinkedIn. If you don't include a social media image, your square logo will be used instead.

We recommend using a PNG, JPG, or SVG file at least 1000 pixels wide and a ratio of width to height of about 1.7 to 1 (1000 pixels wide by 588 pixels high).


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8568be6bf880633355e156d224dcadb8.png)

****
:::
::::

## Job Postings

### Messaging

When changing your company name, be sure to check the fields in the Messaging section of the Theme (Job Board) page to update any descriptions or messages as needed.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/490cc3b3f40ad66e02ddda0a51f819f3.png" size="86" width="780" height="602" darkWidth="780" darkHeight="602" position="center" showCaption="false"}

1\) After Candidate Submits Application: The message that candidates see after applying for a job on your job board.

2\) No-Reply Address Display Name: The sender name that will show when sending emails via Ashby’s no-reply email address.

3\) Top Description: This is an optional description that will show above your job filters and listed jobs on your job board.

4\) Bottom Description: This is an optional description that will show below your jobs on your job board.

5\) Job post Description Opening: Any information added here will be shown above each job posting’s description.

6\) Job Post Description Closing: Any information added here will be shown underneath the job posting description.

### Individual Postings

If the core descriptions in each of your job postings mention your previous company name, be sure to amend each posting to reflect your new one.

You can amend individual job postings within each job. Head to [Jobs>Admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/jobs/all), then click on the job you’d like to update. From here, head to *Job Postings* and \*\*select the job posting you’d like to update.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c82ca1f40c0d52e011bf12836264a198.png)

## Email Templates and Interview Invites

:::hint{type="info"}
We’d recommend using the Company Name substitution token in your email templates and calendar invites - this token will pull your company name from the Organization Name field on the Theme [(Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) page.
:::

When making a company name change, be sure to check your email templates and calendar invite templates to ensure the company name wasn’t added directly into any of them and update it if needed.

### Email Templates

To check and update your email templates, head to [\*Admin>Organization Setup>Email Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates).\* You can then click on each email template to view and edit the content.

### Interview Calendar Invites

**Scheduling Defaults**

You can adjust the default calendar invites sent out in your  at [Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Scheduling Defaults](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/scheduling-defaults/communication). Both the content of the interview calendar invite for candidates and invite for interviewers can be adjusted here.

**Individual Interview Activities**

If you have some custom content in your candidate and interview calendar invites for certain schedule interview activities, you can adjust this content within the schedule interview activity (on the Communications tab).

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/cae42c87de634e9795353b0b65cfb2fe"}

## Offer Letter and E-Signature Document Templates

### Offer Letter Templates

If you have updated offer letter templates, you can add these on the [Offer Letter Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/offer-letter-templates/5201ebaf-9f80-4354-a2ea-9d8a0cde1537) tab within Admin>Offer&#x73;*.* You can either opt to upload new templates via the *+ New* button, or update existing templates by selecting the existing offer letter template and clicking `Browse files to upload`. Select the new template, then click *Open* to add the new template.

### E-Signature Document Templates

Please note that non-offer e-signature documents can be configured on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

You can add new e-signature document templates or update existing ones in Admin>Integrations>E-Signature Document&#x73;*.* Navigate to the [E-Signature Document Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/esignature-documents/templates) tab and either click `+ New` to upload a new document, or select an existing document and click `Browse files to upload` to replace the current template with a new one.

## Sequences

You can check your sequence templates for any hard-coded mentions of your company by heading to [Sourcing>Sequences](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/sequence-templates).

Click on the sequence you’d like to review and then Edit Template to view each stage of your sequence.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2145af3819adf46c663c0ae5076430b9.png)

## Surveys

If your company name is mentioned in any of your survey questions, head to [Admin>Jobs & Applications>Candidate Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/diversity-surveys). Use the tabs to navigate between custom diversity surveys, candidate experience surveys and questionnaires to select and adjust each survey as needed.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that the company name listed on the EEOC form will change automatically when the Organization Name is updated on the [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) page.
:::



## Application Form Questions

If your company name is included in any of your application form questions, you can adjust these in [Admin>Jobs & Applications>Application Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/application-forms) if they are shared application forms. More on shared forms at [What are ‘Shared’ Interviews, Application Forms, and Feedback Forms?](docId\:UjNXOKXGS1_RQ1UDzXXTa)&#x20;

If you do not see the application form you’d like to amend there, the application form may have been set up directly when configuring the job posting. As such, the application form questions would need to be changed directly on the form in the job posting.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8c30e7ec4034407ab04b74255c1c74a1"}


[title] Migrations: Rescheduling Interviews Post-Migration
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Migrations/API Migrations/

As you transition from your previous ATS to Ashby, it's crucial to seamlessly manage scheduled interviews from the date you switch over and beyond. This guide outlines the recommended best practice and steps for rescheduling interviews in Ashby.

## Why do I need to reschedule migrated interviews?

Rescheduling previously scheduled interviews in Ashby is considered a best practice during the switch to Ashby. This not only ensures clarity for candidates and interviewers but also addresses the following:

1. **Alleviating Confusion:** By rescheduling in Ashby, you eliminate confusion regarding the interview's location and how and where interviewers should submit their feedback.
2. **Maintaining Data Integrity:** Failure to reschedule may result in interviewers using outdated calendar invites, potentially leading to feedback submissions outside of Ashby. Once the sync is off we will no longer be able to sync feedback submitted in your legacy ATS, meaning if it was submitted there, you'd need to ask the user to additionally submit in Ashby for the data to be up to date. This can disrupt the hiring process and compromise data integrity.
3. **Mitigating Access Issues**: If you're losing access to your previous ATS around the go-live date on Ashby, rescheduling interviews in Ashby becomes imperative to ensure your end users know where to access their ATS.

## Rescheduling the Interview

:::hint{type="info"}
Rescheduling cannot be completed until after the sync has been disconnected from Greenhouse or Lever. If you have migrated from a different ATS, you will also need to schedule Interviews in Ashby as we do not import these Interviews.

We also recommend dedicating a block of time shortly after the sync has been disconnected to reschedule all interviews.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/88096ac61d8b4362929ecff0a1622ac9"}

- On the candidate profile on the **Activities & Progress** tab, select `New Interview` and `Schedule New Interview`

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c1ea544c376a5f320a80a57bac0f6f0e.png)

- Select `Manual Schedule`
- On the right side, select the Interview template you need for this interview. Want to know more about interviews? Check out [Feedback Forms and Interviews ](#)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/619d2cb11f297105cc4b3252dddbef25.png)

- Select the date and time for the interview and the interviewer(s). Once everything looks good, select Configure Calendar Invites on the top right.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/197882c5832463fd1537a5109b635745.png)

- Once you have updated the invites, reminders and confirmation emails (if applicable) select Schedule and you are all set! Both the candidate and interviewer will be notified of the new interview details.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b76c0524fb650c30dcf39efc67151f24.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8fb2f96acfb3470fc4c6585a8088f8cb.png)

- Once you have successfully rescheduled all interviews in Ashby, we recommend that you also delete the original interviews in your legacy ATS so there is no confusion.
- To ensure a seamless candidate experience, we recommend sharing this template (or something similar) to candidates:

  Dear \[Candidate’s name],

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Recently, we have transitioned to a new ATS, Ashby, to enhance our recruitment processes and provide an improved experience for both candidates and our team. As a result, there have been changes to our interview scheduling system.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
You are scheduled for an interview on \[Date and Time] and we want to ensure a seamless experience for you. By the end of the day, we will be sending over a new interview invite for your interview. We kindly request you to use the updated calendar link to access the details for your upcoming interview.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
This new invite will lead you to the revised interview schedule, location details and any additional information you may need to prepare. If you encounter any issues or have questions about the new process, please do not hesitate to reach out to \[contact details]. We’re here to assist you and ensure that you have all the information you need for a successful interview experience.
:::

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Thank you for your understanding and flexibility during this transition!
:::


[title] Understanding And Managing Ashby’s Access Requests for Security Teams
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Security Information/

:::hint{type="info"}
This guide outlines frequently asked questions from security teams. Please note that this page is for informational purposes only. Although we do our best to keep this information up-to-date, you should always refer to our [Terms](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/terms), [Privacy Policy](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/privacy), our [Trust Center](https://trust.ashbyhq.com/) or your signed agreements with Ashby for the most accurate information. Please reach out to support\@ashbyhq.com if you have questions not addressed in this page.
:::

# Overview

This guide helps IT and security teams understand how Ashby integrates with your systems and what access it requires, to enable evaluating tradeoffs. It includes:

- A breakdown of Ashby’s platform and security model
- Integration options for SSO, and SCIM
- Links to more detailed, relevant documentation

Use this guide to make informed decisions that balance integration benefits with your organization’s risk posture.

# About Ashby

## What does Ashby do?

Ashby is an all-in-one recruiting platform that replaces several software classes your Talent team may use. As a result, Ashby’s integration with IT systems requires access similar to the software it replaces. Below is a summary:

| **Software Class** | **Comparable Software**        | **Data Access**                 |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------ | ------------------------------- |
| **ATS**            | Greenhouse, Lever              | HRIS Read/Write (e.g., Workday) |
| **Sourcing/CRM**   | Gem, SourceWhale, Interseller  | Email Read/Send                 |
| **Scheduling**     | Calendly, GoodTime, Modernloop | Calendar Read/Write             |

Ashby requests the minimum access necessary to provide full functionality. While you can limit access, it may impact the Talent team’s experience. This document aims to help you assess your options and their tradeoffs to make an accurate risk assessment of Ashby.

## Security, Privacy, and Reliability at Ashby

The integrations we request give Ashby access to data sensitive to your company, and we take this responsibility seriously. Here are the measures we take:

- Conduct annual SOC2 Type II audits and White-Box pentests.
- Use vulnerability detection tools for infrastructure, third-party packages, and applications.
- Employ a global team of reliability engineers for high availability and security.
- Provide resources for compliance with privacy laws like GDPR and CCPA (GDPR Overview).

All data in Ashby:

- Is encrypted at rest and in transit.
- Is logically separated per customer and stored behind a VPC.

For details, see our [Security Overview](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/security).

## What access does Ashby request?

Ashby integrates with Google Workspace and Microsoft 365 to provide features that enhance hiring speed and efficiency. These integrations increase the risk profile of Ashby as a vendor, but provide significant benefits to your Talent team.

Ashby requests access to the emails and calendars of your team members involved in the hiring process. Ashby will store a subset of this data in our database to allow us to provide a fast and reliable user experience. Our database is encrypted at rest, logically separated by customer, and behind a VPC. All data transmitted between your IT systems, Ashby’s servers, and Ashby’s clients are encrypted in transit. For more information, please read our security overview.

### Email (via Google Workspace and Microsoft 365)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on these two integrations, check out [Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3)&#x20;
:::

Ashby supports email syncing via Google Workspace and Microsoft 365 when relevant to the hiring process. Only emails from Ashby users with an Elevated Access or Organization Admin role are synced since these roles are assigned to employees involved in the hiring process.

**From these users, we only store emails sent from Ashby or involving a candidate:**

- Emails containing a to, cc, or bcc with the candidate’s email and subsequent emails marked by the email provider as being in the email thread.
- Emails sent from Ashby and subsequent emails marked by the email provider as being in the email thread.
- If the candidate's domain matches your organization's auth domain, emails will not be synced for that candidate. If the candidate has two email addresses linked to their profile (one with the organization's auth domain and one without) emails including the email address without the organization's auth domain will still be synced.

**Ashby provides additional controls within the application to:**

- Mark emails as private and automatically mark emails during the offer stage as private. Viewing these emails requires an explicit access role in Ashby.
- Hide emails when a candidate moves to offer and hired stages.
- Not sync emails related to a candidate after they are hired.
- Not sync emails related to a candidate considered for a confidential job

### Calendar (via Google Workspace and Microsoft 365)

Ashby supports calendar syncing via Google Workspace and Microsoft 365.

**What gets synced:**

- All accessible calendars and events, including shared calendars (e.g., “Interviews” calendar).
- Personal calendars are used to determine interviewer availability.

**Privacy and visibility controls:**

- Ashby respects calendar settings:&#x20;
  - Events marked as "Private" are not shown in detail.
  - Events shown as "Free" or "Busy" will only display availability.
- Calendar visibility settings are honored during scheduling to protect sensitive information.

## How does Ashby manage user access?

Ashby offers a secure and flexible authorization model with granular permissions to manage user access. We also apply a strict permission system within Ashby where users are granted access to jobs and candidate records on a need-to-know basis (see “Access Control” below).

Our default user access is very limited, and can’t access any candidate or job data. Employees cannot access their candidate profile (their candidate profile must be linked to their employee profile in Ashby to prevent this). And we support truly confidential jobs that only the creator and those they give access to can see.

### Our Authorization Model

By default, Ashby assigns new users a "Limited Access" role. These users can:

- Submit interview feedback for interviews they participated in.
- Submit referrals or applications for internal jobs.

Limited access users cannot:

- View sensitive information, such as jobs or candidates.
- Sync or send emails through Ashby.

Ashby provides granular permission settings for administrators to customize user access. Full details are available in Ashby Knowledge Base.

### Single Sign-On (SSO) and Directory Sync

Ashby supports SSO via Google Workspace, Office 365, or Okta.

- **User Offboarding:** Offboarded users in your directory automatically lose Ashby access.
- **User Onboarding:** New users are automatically assigned the **"Limited Access"** role.

### Account Sync for Non-Employee Accounts

When syncing with your domain provider (Google or Microsoft), non-employee accounts, such as contractors or service accounts, may also appear in Ashby.

**By default:**

- Non-employee accounts are assigned the "Limited Access" role.
- These users can log in and be scheduled for interviews but cannot view sensitive data like jobs or candidates.

**Management Options:**

- **Disable Access:** Organization Admins can revoke access for any synced account.
- **Contractor Access:** For contractors requiring limited access, Ashby supports Agency Users. Learn how to share your account selectively.

### Audit Logging

Ashby maintains audit logs to track changes to important records.

- Logs are not currently accessible via the product or API but can be provided upon request through Ashby Support.

### Ashby Bot and Ashby Success Users

On the Employees page, you will see two system users:

- **Ashby Bot**: Used to associate API usage and automation with a specific user for auditing purposes.
- **Ashby Success (success\@ashbyhq.com)**: Used by our support team (with your permission) to assist with troubleshooting or changes.

:::hint{type="info"}
These users cannot be removed, as they are required to provide support and maintain system functionality.
:::


[title] Creating and Editing Approval Processes
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/

You can create an approval process when multiple stakeholders need to review and sign off on a workflow. Ashby currently supports configuring approvals for openings, jobs, and offers.

This guide covers configuring approval processes for your team to use. For more on submitting approvals, see [Submitting Approval Requests](docId\:q_7MtZIwsZ3x25oW5lInR). For more on approval settings and notifications, see [Configuring Approval Settings and Notifications](docId\:f61FMV6nVXPF_zTK7E8y6).

# Permissions and access

Approvals can be set up on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

- Only Organization Admins can configure an approval process and approval settings.
- Organization Admins and users with the **Can make one-off edits to approval process** permission stripe can make one-off edits to an offer approval process.
- Users with any access role in Ashby can be set as an approver.

:::hint{type="info"}
When an approval request is submitted, approvers can approve or reject the request from their inbox using the approval notification. They do not need to have a specific access role or level of permissions to approve or reject the approval request via email or via Slack. They need to have at least Elevated Access to the role in question to be able to view the candidate's profile prior to approving, but users with Limited Access can be set as an approver and submit an approval.
:::

# When would I use each type of approval process?

| **Approval Type** | **Use Case**                                                                                                              | **Common Approvers**                 |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ |
| Opening Approval  | Commonly used to validate that headcount has been approved by finance.                                                    | Finance, Talent                      |
| Job Approval      | Commonly used to ensure the accuracy of the interview plan stages and other job settings and the quality of job postings. | Talent                               |
| Offer Approval    | Commonly used to ensure appropriate stakeholders have reviewed offers.                                                    | CEO, Finance, Talent, Hiring Manager |

# Create an approval process

Navigate to [Approvals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals) in **Admin** to build an approval process. Before you click `+ New`, make sure you have selected the correct object type tab. Options include:

- Offer
- Job
- Opening

![The screenshot shows the Approvals page with the + New button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YibDpjoZnaJIUI8o3u6Uc_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-111937-am.jpg)

# Configure a new approval process

To configure a new process, first set your scope, then add steps and approvers to each step.

## Setting a scope

You set criteria by clicking `+ Add Field to Match`, choosing your fields, and then determining your criteria using field values. The approval's scope contains the criteria Ashby must match to trigger an approval flow.

As an example, you could set your scope to only run this approval process for jobs within the Recruiting department. The approval process then only runs for roles that have the Recruiting team assigned to them.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Tr4Pwc_4jdnsaFPN9F566_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-103620-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="964" height="470" darkWidth="964" darkHeight="470" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows a draft job approval process with a Scope defined."}

## Steps

Steps are the rounds of review within an approval. Click `+ Add Step` to add additional stages to your review process.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/L7_XMBluvuinfDWO_5Hxj_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-103707-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="968" height="658" darkWidth="968" darkHeight="658" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows a draft job approval process with the + Add Step button highlighted."}

You can add names to your steps to more easily identify them. Click the pencil icon to the right of the step name to amend it.

![The screenshot shows an approval step with the Step 1 and edit pencil icon highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/psAPz52rIVncV89ObPHfP_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-103824-am.jpg)

### Conditional steps

Conditional steps allow you to set scopes within approval steps. This means you can create additional stages for offers, jobs, and openings that may need further review without the need to configure a whole new approval flow for those edge cases.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Conditional steps in Approvals are only available on the Plus and Enterprise plans.
:::

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

To set a step to only run if specific conditions are met by the offer, job, or opening, click the `Always` dropdown within your step and set it to `When condition matches`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby evaluates the conditions of your scope when an approval request is submitted. For example, if you are creating an opening and an approval process is in place, Ashby reviews your approval flow scopes when the approval request is submitted. The opening uses the approval flow it matches the scope for.
:::

![Screenshot of the approval step with the Always dropdown set to When condition matches.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vAlLgj3Ff6AgA7JXmBb9w_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-104014-am.jpg)

To set your step conditions, click `+ Add Field to Match` to select a field and then determine the values that are part of your criteria.

In the example below, this step of a job approval process only runs if the job's location is set to EMEA. If the job's location is not EMEA, Ashby skips that step.

![The screenshot shows a step of an approval process that will only run if the job's location is set as EMEA.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NmXEvaHhrH8npALvPGnuG_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-104440-am.jpg)

## Approvers

Approvers are the specific stakeholders completing the review. Click `+ Add Approver` within a step to add a stakeholder to a step. You can include multiple approvers at each step or select a pool of users based on their role on the job consideration. You can then choose whether all, one, or some approvers need to provide approval.

Once you finish configuring your approval, click `Create`. It becomes active immediately.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vJbnGDL7L1POBb3RKz7Mw_approvals-setup.jpg" size="70" width="1026" height="1410" position="center" darkWidth="1026" darkHeight="1410" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows a drafted offer approval with the Create button at the bottom of the popover."}

## Ordering the process list

Ashby evaluates activated processes in the order they are listed, so review your approval list as part of your setup. If multiple processes have a scope that applies, Ashby uses the one highest on your list. In the example pictured below, if an offer linked to a job in the Product Support department was also linked to a job with the location set as New York City, the Product Support Offer Approval flow is used because it is higher on the list.

![An approvals list for offer approvals. The Product Support Offer Approval flow is higher on the list and takes priority if the offer meets the conditions of multiple flows.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8e2vgrDtgVY_VDdQM5Ja8_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-111857-am.jpg)

You can drag and drop each process to re-prioritize as needed. Hover over the six dots to the left of the approval flow's title, then click and drag the flows to re-order them.

![The offer approval flow list with the area to click and drag flows to order them highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XEZyXocH1QpGDbCJFLHgG_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-112253-am.jpg)

As an example, if you have a general catch-all approval flow, move it to the bottom of your Approvals list so Ashby considers all other flows first.

## Example approval processes by scope types

:::hint{type="info"}
Setting the scope is highly flexible, but the most common options selected are the department and the role. Examples of each are below.
:::

### Scope by department

In this example, the scope field is set to the job's department. All job considerations that an offer is generated for in the engineering department follow this example process.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/cf690af4dda746bbabfdb8985f24c141"}

### Scope by role

In this example, the scope field is set to rely on a specific recruiter. All job considerations that an offer is generated for where Arthur is set as the recruiter on the hiring team follow this example process.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/89aaf40c7eac456e92a6b97b2a6f4e26"}

# What an approver sees

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on this, see [Configuring Approval Settings and Notifications](docId\:f61FMV6nVXPF_zTK7E8y6)
:::

# Editing an approval

To edit an approval:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Approvals**.
2. Select the approval tab and click the approval.
3. Click `Edit` within the approval details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F2fTjji92lxvP_-g-qd3V_approvals-ashby-2026-07-24-at-125452-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1168" height="742" darkWidth="1168" darkHeight="742" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Screenshot of the approval process details view with the Edit button highlighted."}

4. Edit, remove, or add scopes and/or steps as needed, then click `Save Changes` to apply the new approval setup to approval requests moving forward.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby evaluates approval setups when an approval request is submitted. If you have approvals in flight when editing an approval setup, Ashby does not apply the new approval process to them.
:::

# Reporting on approvals

:::hint{type="info"}
For a list of available fields and reporting options, see [Reporting on Approvals](docId\:r4E_CrGlyBF1NF5rPpoIc).
:::

# FAQ

### How many processes can I have?

You can create unique approval processes that take effect under certain conditions. As only one approval process applies to each offer, the order of processes in the list determines the priority with which these processes take effect. You can optionally configure a default fallback process that runs when no other process applies.

### Is it possible to set the Hiring Manager on the hiring team of a job as an approver instead of selecting a specific person?

Yes. You can select a pool of users as approvers based on their role on the job. You can pick from pulling an approver from the Job Consideration's Recruiters, Recruiting Coordinators, Sourcers, and/or Hiring Managers.

![Screenshot showing the approver role selection dropdown with options for Recruiters, Recruiting Coordinators, Sourcers, and Hiring Managers.](https://cdn.zappy.app/cfb3a9a7c0183b8e93399bc35cc76195.png)

### Can I set an approval chain via the API?

The enterprise offer approval API tool is only available on the Enterprise plan. When creating an approval, you have the option to set it to be managed via the API.

To create an approval within Ashby, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Approvals** and click `+ New`.

![Screenshot of Approval admin settings with the New button highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7b2e0bb42c2e16d5024e9199c6fa2f32.png)

Toggle on the `Managed by the API?` option in the Steps section. Optionally, set up criteria in the scope section if only offers that meet certain criteria should be managed via the API.

![Screenshot of the "Managed by the API?" option enabled.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3636ea11a353dc3843f740533aa3f1b1.png)

When a recruiter creates and submits an offer, a **Waiting for external process** message appears in the offer overview. This means that Ashby is waiting for an approval chain to be submitted via an API call.

![Screenshot of the "Waiting for external process" message.](https://cdn.zappy.app/79ee634485cdfa55f0cd9871157c0440.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
To pull data via the API to update the approval chain, you can use the `approvalDefinition.update` request. For details, see the [approvalDefinition.update API reference](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/approvaldefinitionupdate).

Once the approval chain is received, the approval steps are added to the offer.

This option is currently only available for offers.
:::

### Why isn't the 'Hired' stage appearing in the dropdown when I click on 'Change Stage'?

The Hired stage does not appear in the `Change Stage` dropdown if there are active Offer Approvals set up in the [Admin > Approvals > Offers section](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer). To complete the offer process, click `Offer Accepted` within the offer's settings. The candidate's stage automatically changes to Hired.

### How do I archive an approval process?

Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Approvals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer) and click the approval process. From here, you can edit, copy, or archive the approval process.

![Screenshot of edit, copy, and archive buttons on an approval flow.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7a658c8b57c6714720e392d57ec9aed1.png)

You can restore archived approval processes by changing the `Active` dropdown to `Archived` when viewing your approvals.

![Screenshot of approvals list with Active list expanded to show the Archived option.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7f67c955b3d6de45d91730070d637775.png)

Click the process you want to restore, then click `Restore`.

![Screenshot of an archived approval showing the Restore button.](https://cdn.zappy.app/aacb1df067e67cddcbedeb0674504d90.png)

### How do job approval processes work with confidential jobs?

As part of the setup process for a job approval workflow, you can check the `Is Confidential?` checkbox within the **Scope** section.

![Screenshot of the approval process highlighting the "Is Confidential?" checkbox.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Tn4jIceBBIG3VSpsBzv8O_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-115719-am.jpg)

If you check this checkbox, the approval process only applies to confidential jobs that meet the criteria set in the approval scope. If you leave the checkbox unchecked, the approval process does not apply to confidential jobs, even if they meet the other scope criteria.

[title] Candidate Pipeline
[path] Navigating Ashby/

This guide covers the candidate pipeline view that can be found within the [Pipeline](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidates/pipeline/active) section of Ashby or under Candidates > [Candidate Pipeline](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidates/pipeline/active)*.*

## Overview

### Stage Groups

The Pipeline view displays all of the job considerations on the open jobs you have access to in Ashby. You can click between different stage categories to view candidates in each stage for every open job.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ffb9a0a6f8cb525fe7438ea0bc371498.png)

Leads: Candidates in the lead stages of your interview plan.

Application Review: Candidates in the Application Review stage. You can click on this option, then Review X Applications to access the bulk application review tool and access candidates across all of your open jobs.

Active: Candidates that are in the Active stages after Application Revie&#x77;*,* up to and including those candidates in the Offer stage.

Pending Offer: Candidates in the offer stage. Clicking this option will list all candidates in the offer stage, along with the offer status (Needs Offer, Waiting on Offer Approval, Waiting on Offer Acceptanc&#x65;*).*

Hired: Candidates who have been hired for a job.

Archived: Candidates who have been rejected for a job.

### Viewing Candidates in the Pipeline

To view the candidates in each stage for a specific role, click the arrow to the left of the job title.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a95676548d90d4b8eb4bf37b1c976a1a.png)

Candidates will be listed in the interview stage they’re in within this expanded view. Click on a candidate to be taken to their profile.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ec2c70ec4adc1e546a9f35524debb91d.png)

### Taking Bulk Action on Candidates in the Pipeline

If you opt to view a role’s pipeline, you can click `Select` to then specify a group of candidates, then use the buttons to take bulk actions on your chosen candidates.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/59a19df244c6bc697ca171d7d467269d.png)

You can take the following bulk actions on selected candidates when selecting them within the job’s pipeline\::

- Change Stage
- Archive
- Email
- Enroll in Sequence
- Transfer
- Consider for Job
- Set Tags
- Add to Project
- Start Assessment
- Update Hiring Team Role
- Send Data Consent Request

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3ccf37b56134278d4b6f32805b3ddf74.png)

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once you have determined the candidate records and the action to be taken on them, you will then be taken to the bulk action wizard to confirm the bulk action.

In the Selection section, you’ll be able to see the criteria you’ve set for this bulk action and the number of records that match this criteria. Be sure to take time to review this information.

If the action is destructive (for example, deleting candidates), you will be asked to confirm that you are aware the action is destructive by checking the `I confirm that this action is destructive` checkbox.

Once you’ve reviewed the bulk action and the records that the action will be taken on, click the `Start X on X records` button to continue.

If you are performing a bulk action on a small set of records, you will be asked to confirm the bulk action to be taken, along with the number of records the action is to be taken.

If the action is being taken on a large number of records, you will be prompted to type the action into the specified field before the action across the chosen records can be performed. The number of records impacted will also be listed in the prompt window.

Once you’ve typed the action into the field, click `Perform` to perform the bulk action across your specified records.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3bbcdf2fae657f2ea5afd0db337b897e.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5f5697a4e267539e5d6ddde28343fcaf.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/93f39730978d3180c46005b4422a6ed4.png)
:::
::::



:::hint{type="warning"}
The bulk action type and the number of records included in the bulk action determines the number of confirmation prompts you’ll receive:
:::

*Deleting or Anonymizing Candidates*
Up to 24 candidates: Inline prompt.
24+ candidates: Confirmation window with typing prompt.

*Archiving, Marking as Do Not Contact or Sending a Survey*
Up to 24 candidates: Inline prompt.
24+ candidates: Confirmation window with typing prompt.

With any other bulk actions, if you are taking the action on 24 candidates or more, you will see the inline prompt to confirm your bulk action before it is performed.

If you opt to close out the bulk action wizard window at the point where the bulk actions are being process, you will be able to see the progress in a minimized version of the wizard.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e56c241e10064ba280b9c69408341d99.png" size="46" width="346" height="75" darkWidth="346" darkHeight="75" position="center" showCaption="false"}

To open the wizard back up, click the `Restore bulk action pullout` button.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once the bulk action has been performed, you will be able to view a log of all the changes on the confirmation page. Click `Close` to close out the bulk action wizard when you’re done.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9074248ae416cc8615e70e829bc20c82.png)


:::
::::



## Filters

Just like with candidate search, you can add filters to the pipeline report to only view jobs and candidates that meet your criteria.

You can switch between adding basic and advanced filters using the `Advanced` toggle.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/42795c2254492c4009a428cd1ab1b382.png)

### Basic Filters

When it comes to setting the criteria for your candidate search, Ashby has basic filters. These are the most commonly used filters. Basic filters are enabled when the `Advanced` toggle is switched off.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a9da43516807e09616d392c318ded5d6.png)

1: **+ Filter** Click this to open up a list of commonly used filters. These include a full text search of the candidate’s resume, location, current interview stage, tags added to the candidate profile and projects they’ve been added to.

2:**&#x20;Job is…** Click this to select a job to filter for.

3: **Department is…** Click this to select a department to filter jobs by.

### Advanced Filters

You can switch on the Advanced toggle to search through a wider range of filters. When turning on this toggle, you will see an option to `+ Add Field to Match` instead. Click this to search through the full range of filters available.

### Save as ‘New’

You can also save a specific set of filtering criteria as a filter tab on the *Pipeline* page. Once you’ve set up your filters, click the Save as ‘New’ tab option. You’ll be asked to name this filter. This can be particularly helpful when you’re looking to jump between multiple pipeline filters.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/45436849b66ed4624afbc7de49b9f399.png)

Once named, this will show as an additional filtering option beside the My Candidates tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dcf3f3d4af3c597f618a12022c569d0d.png)

### My Candidates

Along with the New Filter tab and saving new filters, you can also use the My Candidates tab to filter the candidate pipeline. This will pull all active job considerations for the open jobs and candidates that you are on the hiring team for or following.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07a6f6849091b6802ac435981e79f268.png)

### AI Assistant Filter (Beta)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you would like to opt-in for this feature, head to Admin >Organization Setup >[Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access) within Admin.
:::

You can use the AI Assistant filter option to automatically generate a filter based on a prompt you provide.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fa3404fb02fb122d1444266b1e503cf6.png)

To get started, click on the AI Assistant option and start typing the filter you’re looking to set up. The assistant will then add filters to your report when you click `Generate Filter`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f87e924ac82ee6d23c480667e3ec7bf5.png" size="84" width="1018" height="461" darkWidth="1018" darkHeight="461" position="center" showCaption="false"}

If your filters look good, you can click the 👍 icon to provide your feedback. If the filters don’t match what you were expecting, you can leave feedback by hitting the 👎 icon.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6b0b910cff1c6b7550b42425d4a078d2.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I access the job details from within the Pipeline section of Ashby?

You can - click the arrow icon to the right of the job title to be taken to the job itself.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f3c1c1cc4f46ac6fac5cb6dd41662a2c.png)
:::

::::ExpandableHeading
### How does the color coding work on the Pipeline view?

:::hint{type="success"}
When visualizing the Candidate Pipeline via the card (kanban) view, the colors on each card are based on either time or activity.
:::

**If there are structured activities (interviews, take home assignments, etc) in the active stage, the card colors of the status banners mean the following:**

| **Card Color** | **Activity**                                                                               | **Examples**                                                                             |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Green**      | Up to date                                                                                 | Scheduled                                                                                |
| **Yellow**     | Waiting on candidate to submit availability, accept offer, interview needs scheduling, etc | Needs Scheduling, Booking Link Sent, Submitted Availability, Waiting on Offer Acceptance |
| **Red**        | Hiring team needs to take action                                                           | Needs Decision, Waiting on Feedback                                                      |

**If there are no structured activities for that specific stage, the card will say In Stage Since, and the color coding of the status banners mean the following:**

| **Card Color** | **Time**          |
| -------------- | ----------------- |
| **Green**      | In stage \<2 days |
| **Yellow**     | In stage 2-5 days |
| **Red**        | In stage 5+ days  |
::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I create a version of the Candidate Pipeline as a report?

There is a Candidate Pipeline report template option in Reports > [Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/templates/metrics), yes. You can opt to add additional filters, hide stages and group stages as needed prior to saving this as a report.

Once a report is saved, you can pin it to your home page by clicking the `+ Add` button under Views on the left-hand side.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cec67dd0daf14b71b6b2284f43768d3d.png)

Then search for and select your candidate pipeline report to pin it. You’ll be able to then click on the report to pull it up quickly when on your home page.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9610e63117f3e526a1eb337ccab8a59e.png)
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I filter my pipeline based on whether the candidate’s job consideration has a resume attached or not?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can, yes. Enable advanced filtering, then click `Add Field to Match` and search for and select the Job Consideration’s Has Resume Uploaded? filter. Set the filter to equal Yes to view candidates who have a resume attached to their job consideration, or select No to view all candidates who don’t have a resume attached to their job consideration.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cbc5553ca26f08e7323735a1583cef20.png)


:::
::::
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I bulk change the archive reason on candidates?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can, yes. To change archive reasons in bulk:

- Navigate to the Candidate Pipeline section of your job
- Select the Archived stage and use the checkboxes to select the candidate job considerations you’d like to update
- Click `Change Archive Reason`
- Select the new archive reason from the New Archive Reason dropdown
- Click `Start Change Archive Reason on X Records`
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9399107c40a0b70fd3eeb99f968f5f17.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b5ae9e368695c2f787974da010069f11.png)


:::
::::
:::::


[title] How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?
[path] Billing & Plans/

You can now purchase email look-ups, AI credits and texting credits from within Ashby if you are a billing admin on your Ashby account.

## Overview

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you’d like to purchase additional email lookups, navigate to Admin > Sourcing > Email Lookup&#x73;*.* When viewing your remaining lookups, click `Purchase Additional` to start the process of buying more lookups.

Alternatively, you can also navigate directly to Admin > Organization Setup > Billing to purchase lookups, AI credits and texting credits under the `Subscriptions` tab.

You can either purchase additional email lookups as a one-off or an additional amount recurring each month. AI and texting credits can only be purchased as a recurring additional amount in-app currently.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d9faaf503869852dbfc2a9c7b5acd230.png)


:::
::::



### One-off Email Lookups

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can purchase additional email lookups in batches of 300. The additional lookups will expire after 30 days.

To make a one-off purchase, select the One Off option in the Purchase Additional Email Lookups section. One-off purchases must be paid for immediately, and, as such, require that you have a payment method on file. If there is no payment method, you will be prompted to add one before you can proceed.

Once you click `Add a payment method`, you be taken to Stripe to either add in your payment card details or link to an account. Once your payment details have been added, you can then proceed to determine the number of lookups you’d like to process. Click `Purchase for…`, then `Confirm` to complete your purchase.

Please allow up to ten seconds for your purchase to be completed and for your email lookups to be updated in the Current Email Lookups section. You will receive an invoice via email confirming the purchase.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3d0df11dafb900c774eaee6c2d8a6265.png)


:::
::::

### Recurring Lookups

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
If you’d like to have these additional lookups added each month, then select the Recurring option within the Purchase Additional Email Lookups section. You will then be able to determine the number of email lookups you’d like to purchase.

:::hint{type="info"}
We can only support in-app purchases of recurring email lookups that expire monthly. If you would like to set up email lookups that expire annually, please reach out to contracts\@ashbyhq.com.
:::

Email lookups can be purchased in batches of 300 but with recurring lookups, you will also be shown a preview of the recurring costs. In the example pictured, the account is on an annual plan.

There are two costs associated with recurring lookups: firstly, the recurring cost that'll be attached to future invoices. This takes the monthly cost of the email lookups and scales it to the customers billing cycle. In this example, $100/month on an annual cycle means they're adding $1,200 to the subscription.

The second cost is an immediate prorated charge for email lookups for the rest of the current billing cycle. The $1,200 for the additional email lookups is multiplied by the fraction of the current billing cycle that's remaining. It is prorated to the day, so in the above example where the user is one day into the billing cycle, we'll charge $1200 multiplied by (364/365 days), which comes out to be $1,196.71.

After clicking `Purchase`, you can then click `Confirm` to complete the transaction. You will receive an invoice via email confirming the purchase.


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c17403df6579b13f1e93ae0ecd629196.png)
:::
:::::

### Purchasing additional AI credits

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on how AI credits are used, check out [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr), [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl),  [AI Talent Rediscovery](docId\:d-gjG_O-jKBQagm_KsMZe) and [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm). More information on adding AI credits can be found below.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
In the AI Credits section of Billing, both the credits used and credits remaining will be listed. Click `Add More` to start the process of purchasing more credits.

Using the Number of AI Credits dropdown, please select the number of additional AI credits you’d like to add to your account. If you are on the Plus or Enterprise plans, you can purchase AI credits in increments of 5000. If you are on the monthly Foundations plan, you can buy AI Credits in 1000 credit increments.

The cost added to future invoices and the immediate charge will be listed underneath the Number of AI Credits field for you to review. Click `Purchase` to confirm the purchase.

For reference, the account pictured is on a monthly plan, so a recurring purchase of an additional 5000 credits a month would add $500 to each monthly invoice moving forward.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9f0e1193b8d9d1e12857edf8609cd15f.png)
:::
::::





### Purchasing additional texting credits

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on candidate texting, please check out [Candidate Texting](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84).&#x20;
:::

In the Texting Credits section of Billing, both the credits used and credits remaining will be listed. Click `Add More` to start the process of purchasing more credits. You can purchase texting credits in increments of 1000.

Using the Number of Texting Credits dropdown, please select the number of additional AI credits you’d like to add to your account.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f89e8a4e2b14801287695d0e65cd0821.png" size="72" width="521" height="692" darkWidth="521" darkHeight="692" position="center" showCaption="false"}

The cost added to future invoices and the immediate charge will be listed underneath the Number of Texting Credits field for you to review. `Click Purchase` to confirm the purchase.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/9a235c1cc4ff72c29534b94c44c3ff20.png" size="82" width="924" height="626" darkWidth="924" darkHeight="626" position="center" showCaption="false"}

For reference, the account pictured is on a monthly plan, so a recurring purchase of an additional 1000 credits a month would add $90 to each monthly invoice moving forward.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/992393b93078a30651150c3b8d351f3a.png)



## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I’ve purchased email lookups by mistake/I’ve purchased more email lookups than I intended to - what should I do?





Please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for assistance with this.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How are email lookups deducted? Is it per email or per lookup?

Credits are used per lookup. For example, if you try to check the same candidate three times, it will use 3 credits if emails are successfully returned each time, but if you check once and we return 2 emails in that one lookup attempt, we charge you one credit.
:::


[title] Is it possible to post jobs to multiple careers pages?
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Job Board Setup/

If you’d like to push your jobs to separate careers pages, then this is possible via the API. You can find Ashby’s API documentation for creating a custom careers page [here](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/docs/creating-a-custom-careers-page).

If you need to display different jobs on each careers page based on subsidiaries, we’d recommend setting up your subsidiaries as [departments](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/teams) in Ashby. You can then filter your API requests by department to only pull postings relevant to the sub-organization when building your careers page.

For more information on setting up departments, check out our guide [here](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8).

[title] Configuring Approval Settings and Notifications
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/Untitled/

As part of setting up your approval process, you can also determine the details that should be included in approver notifications. Adding offer, job, or opening details to the appropriate approval notifications can help answer any questions from approvers and streamline your approvals.

:::hint{type="info"}
For a guide on configuring approval processes, see [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo).
:::

# Permissions & access

Approvals can be set up on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Only Organization Admins can set approval notification details and settings.

# Approval settings

You can access and amend your approval settings on the [Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/settings) tab in **Admin > Organization Setup > Approvals**.

![Screenshot of the Approval Settings tab.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-04UDJ-MmnBk6yiy3BX-d_approvals-ashby-2026-10-01-at-92245-am.jpg)

**Allow Unauthenticated Approvals From Email Notifications:** If you enable this option, users in the approval chain can approve or reject approval requests directly from email notifications they receive without needing to log in to Ashby. Each approval notification sent via email includes a secure unique link that automatically authenticates users when used. Users need to have email notifications enabled for approval requests to use this setting.

**Include Interview Feedback in Offer Approval Email Notifications:** When you enable this option, Ashby includes interview feedback in the body of approval email notifications, alongside the offer and opening details. Approvers can see interview feedback in their approval email when you enable this option.

**Attach Candidate's Resume to Offer Approval Email Notifications:** When enabled, offer approval email notifications include the candidate's latest resume.

**Include AI Summary in Offer Approval Email Notifications:** When you enable this option, offer approval email notifications include an AI-generated summary of the candidate and interview feedback.

# Configuring approval notifications

To set the details to be included in approval notifications:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Approvals**.
2. Click `Configure Offer Notifications`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OsyE_JHIg-0TOthPw95L7_approvals-ashby-2026-09-25-at-112338-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2974" height="862" darkWidth="2974" darkHeight="862" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Screenshot of the Approvals admin page with the Configure Offer Notifications button highlighted."}

3. Using the checkboxes, determine the details that should be included in offer, job, and opening approval notifications. You can have different settings for notifications and what the approver sees on the approval in-app. Custom field details can also be included.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
If you check or uncheck a checkbox next to a heading (for example Offer Details), then this checks or unchecks all fields listed in that section.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oEA0w5ZP7B3D665HKTiIb_approvals-ashby-2026-09-30-at-110934-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="866" height="430" darkWidth="866" darkHeight="430" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Screenshot of the notification configuration popover showing field checkboxes for offer, job, and opening approval notifications."}

4. Click `Save` to confirm the notification changes. Ashby adds the selected fields to those approval notifications moving forward.

# How do approval notifications appear to an approver?

Once an approval request is submitted, approvers can receive notifications via Slack and/or email depending on their notification settings.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on notifications, see [Notifications & Notification Settings](docId\:A85ZAqFvmgeJNBLAPkETL).
:::

In an approval request email or Slack notification, the approver sees the key job, offer, or opening details. If approvers have left previous notes, these also appear in the notification. The approver has the option to approve or deny directly from the notification. If the approver clicks `Approve X` from the email notification, they also have the option to add a note to their approval.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4vIP2rfOJl2hL2uc_4SjV_ashby-the-marketeer-job-is-aan-ashbycom-learn-ashby-mail-2026-04-10-at-123733-pm.jpg" size="76" width="952" height="676" position="center" caption="An email notification for an approval request." darkWidth="952" darkHeight="676" showCaption="true"}

If the approver receives a notification via Slack, they have the option to approve, approve with a note, or deny.

![Screenshot of an approval request notification in Slack showing the Approve, Approve with Note, and Deny options.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/28pCqCpRkj4ja68XCVzIQ_ashby-dm-learn-ashby-slack-2026-04-10-at-123337-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
An approver does not need to have a specific access role or permission level to approve or reject the approval request via email or via Slack. They need to have at least Elevated Access to the role in question to be able to view the candidate's profile prior to approving.
:::

If the approver opts to view the approval in-app, the fields selected in the **Use in App** column show on the approval details. The approver can click `View previous versions` to view previous versions of the offer or opening (this isn't available for job approvals).

![The screenshot shows an offer approval with the View previous versions button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HuNPqIcK4PIls3WCy1FBP_irene-mcintosh-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-30-at-112033-am.jpg)

# FAQs

### Can I rearrange the order the fields show in for approval notifications?

Yes. Use the grid icon on the left side of the field to click and drag to rearrange the field order.

![The screenshot shows the Offer Notifications popover with the drag and drop icons highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1zOsg8zpFxUAKOdfKeSKR_approvals-ashby-2026-09-25-at-113009-am.jpg)

### Can a user be cc'd in to receive approval notifications?

Currently, only those involved in the approval process receive notifications about the approval flow.

### If an Organization Admin forces through an approval, does the approver receive a notification?

The approver does not receive a notification, but if they try to click `Approve`, they see that the approval already occurred and no action is needed.

### Will incomplete or blank offer fields be included in the email sent to an approver?

The offer approval email only includes fields that have been filled in, including offer custom fields.


[title] Submitting Approval Requests
[path] Admin & Organization Settings/Organization Setup/Untitled/

This article covers how to submit approvals for openings, jobs, and offers. For information on setting up approvals and approval settings, see [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo).

# Permissions and access

Approvals can be set up on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

- Users with any access role in Ashby can be set as an approver.

# Using an approval process

Once activated, all approval types follow a similar flow.

- Complete the fields for the opening, job, or offer.
- Review the submission details and the approval flow before submitting the request.
- Approvers receive a notification prompting them to approve the request. Once they submit their response, the process moves on to the next approver.

## Opening approvals

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on openings, see [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).
:::

Use opening approvals to approve new headcount in Ashby.

When you create an opening, it is in a `Draft` state. You can then move it into the next state by clicking the `Draft` tag. You have the option to approve it or create an approval request.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BxnFqKl_UCmq1YC9lnj88_opening-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-112822-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="860" height="398" darkWidth="860" darkHeight="398" showCaption="false" alt="Screenshot of an opening in Draft state with the Draft tag highlighted."}

Review the approval flow details, then click `Submit Request` to start the approval flow. When submitting for approval, you have the option to add a note.

![Screenshot of the opening approval submission popover with the Submit Request button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IPOZA8qve-SqaY19L38T3_opening-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-112951-am.jpg)

Once the approval flow is complete, the opening moves into the `Approved` state. From there, you can `Open` the opening and allow people to hire against it.

### Sending a reminder for an opening approval request

If you need to send a reminder for an opening approval:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Openings**.
2. Click the opening in question, then click `View Approval`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BWlCZYoJsprGaQ3BaWQR-_opening-view-approval.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1038" height="420" darkWidth="1038" darkHeight="420" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Screenshot of an opening with the View Approval button highlighted."}

3. On the following popover, click `Send Reminders`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CxWzBhGBf1LPrcPdi7BtB_opening-acent-ashby-2026-04-10-at-125112-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1358" height="546" darkWidth="1358" darkHeight="546" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Screenshot of the opening approval popover with the Send Reminders button highlighted."}

4. Confirm the recipients and add a message if needed, then click `Send Reminder to X Approvers`.

### Opening reapproval fields

On approved openings, changes to fields set to `Require Reapproval` trigger a new approval cycle before taking effect. Changes to fields that do not require reapproval are applied immediately when you save.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vGPJjm87vIEWDLHpGv7Js_custom-fields-ashby-2026-06-25-at-121703-pm.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="795" height="533" darkWidth="795" darkHeight="533" showCaption="false" alt="Screenshot of the Custom Fields settings showing the Require Reapproval option."}

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn how to create custom fields and mark them as requiring reapproval, see [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).
:::

Fields that require reapproval have a yellow reapproval icon next to them to easily identify which fields fall under this condition.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/om52go8bEPlMytwONa-mC_opening-ashby-2026-06-25-at-51437-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="571" height="317" darkWidth="571" darkHeight="317" showCaption="false" alt="Screenshot of an opening showing the yellow reapproval icon next to a field that requires reapproval."}

When you make a change to a field that requires reapproval and select `Save Changes`, a window with the **Pending Changes** appears. Verify the details are correct, and select `Submit Request` to send to the approver(s).

![Screenshot of the Pending Changes window with the Submit Request button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ecSJ8eNYEd9kZbvoAarIU_opening-ashby-2026-06-25-at-122715-pm.png)

The approver receives a notification and can review a comparison of the changes.

While a reapproval is pending, the opening stays in an **Approved** state, so its connection to any linked jobs is not disrupted.

At the top of any openings with pending changes, a banner appears with a button allowing you to `View Changes` at any time. You can edit or cancel pending changes by selecting the respective buttons within this pane.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6D285tDwZx_vj9-j0-tfa_opening-ashby-2026-06-25-at-123629-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="740" height="449" darkWidth="740" darkHeight="449" showCaption="false" alt="Screenshot of the View Changes banner at the top of an opening with pending changes."}

If an approver rejects the changes, you receive a notification and the opening reverts to its last approved version.

## Job approvals

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on jobs, see [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt).
:::

Use job approvals to approve the opening of a role. Once you create your job, click the `Draft` dropdown under the job title to see the option to `Send for Approval`. Click this to view the approval process and click `Submit Request` to start the approval flow.

![Screenshot of a job with the Draft dropdown open showing the Send for Approval option.](https://cdn.zappy.app/26b45c37cdf35841e00619d46d7af611.png)

Reviewers commonly ensure the interview plan has all steps needed to assess candidates' role fit, and the job postings meet quality standards.

![Screenshot of the job approval flow details with the Submit Request button.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8b868a85808788c0cdb33bd28b22e893.png)

### Sending a reminder for a job approval request

If you need to send a reminder for a job approval request:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**.
2. Click the job in question, then click `View Approval`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dJJr4JPyG7V4uVZf8K9Oe_view-approval-on-a-job.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1276" height="504" darkWidth="1276" darkHeight="504" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Screenshot of a job with the View Approval button highlighted."}

3. On the following popover, click `Send Reminders`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5soaEoh4QVrsbc96Epnwa_send-reminders-for-job-approval.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1376" height="604" darkWidth="1376" darkHeight="604" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Screenshot of the job approval popover with the Send Reminders button highlighted."}

4. Confirm the recipients and add a message if needed, then click `Send Reminder to X Approvers`.

### Canceling and restarting an in-progress job approval

If you edit a job and make amendments to a job field that requires approval, Ashby restarts the approval request using the updated approval process, if one exists.

To set job [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) as fields that require reapproval if edited:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields**.
2. Click the `Jobs` tab.
3. Create a new custom field or click an existing custom field to amend it.
4. Ensure the `Require Reapproval` checkbox is checked.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qnnglPSQHNPQuR7MFsJ5S_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-04-14-at-35412-pm.jpg" size="68" width="1030" height="742" position="center" alt="A custom field with the Require Reapproval checkbox highlighted." darkWidth="1030" darkHeight="742" showCaption="false"}

To edit a job:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**.
2. Locate and click the job in question.
3. Navigate to the **Settings** section of the job and edit a field that requires reapproval.
4. Confirm the correct approval process is showing and click `Submit Request`.

## Offer approvals

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on offers, see [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh).
:::

Use offer approvals to approve the offer details before generating an offer letter and extending an offer to a candidate. Once you create the offer and click `Submit`, you see the approval process details. Review the approval process and offer details, then click `Submit Request` to start the approval flow.

![You can see the approval flow details prior to submitting your request on an offer.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kRirKy65wzACI05MDMBnw_jolene-parsons-product-support-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-113444-am.jpg)

### Sending a reminder for an offer approval request

If you need to send a reminder for an offer approval request:

1. Navigate to the candidate's profile, then click `View Offer` on the offer activity.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Al_EFIuvM3H4XRZdKuPRx_sally-enrique-marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-04-10-at-10218-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1520" height="566" darkWidth="1520" darkHeight="566" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Screenshot of the offer activity on a candidate profile with the View Offer button highlighted."}

2. Within the Offer Overview popover, click `Send Reminders`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UMApo2fqS5Uub3sborCmm_send-reminders-for-offer.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1340" height="688" darkWidth="1340" darkHeight="688" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="Screenshot of the Offer Overview popover with the Send Reminders button highlighted."}

3. Confirm the recipients and add a message if needed, then click `Send Reminder to X Approvers`.

### Offer re-approval fields

On offers, changes like the candidate's last name or address often don't require reapproval, but adjustments to fields like salary and start date may require the approval process to run again. Reapproval fields allow your team to determine which fields do and don't require a new approval process. You can select your reapproval fields via the `Configure Offer Reapproval Fields` option on the [Approvals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer) page.

![Screenshot of the Approvals page with the Configure Offer Reapproval Fields option highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Fa5q1_PmvETjsbf3Z2AYi_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-113738-am.jpg)

Use the Yes/No radio buttons to determine the fields that should trigger an offer reapproval in the popup. Your changes are saved automatically.

![Screenshot of the offer reapproval fields configuration showing Yes and No radio buttons for each field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ic5cp1nfwMKtzzxqd8x5P_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-113836-am.jpg)

### Enabling editing of offer approval processes on a one-off basis

Having the option to edit offer approval processes on a one-off basis can be useful in the case of any unexpected changes, such as assigning a delegate if the usual approver is on paid time off (PTO) or looping in an additional approver for a specific offer.

To have the option to edit an approval process on a one-off basis, either before the offer approval is submitted or during the active approval process, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Approvals** > [Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/settings). From here, using the **Allow Editing One-Off Offer Approval Processes** dropdown, select an option to determine the users who are allowed to make these edits.

![Screenshot of the Approval Settings page with the Allow Editing One-Off Offer Approval Processes dropdown.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VkHu585E2aK07IaOhmBRY_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-114202-am.jpg)

**Never:** Never allow offer approval processes to be adjusted on a one-off basis.

**Organization Admins only:** Only those with Organization Admin access can adjust offer approval processes on a one-off basis.

**Organization Admins and Elevated Access users:** Organization Admins and those with the required permissions as part of their Elevated Access role can adjust offer approval processes on a one-off basis.

:::hint{type="info"}
The user needs to have **Elevated Access - Admin Private** access to view the offer and adjust the offer approval.
:::

### Adjusting the approval process for an offer

:::hint{type="warning"}
You cannot make one-off changes to the approval process once the offer has been approved.
:::

You can make one-off amendments to your offer approval process either before you send the approval request for an offer, or during the approval process.

If you make changes to the approval process on the offer before submitting your request for approval, or while the approval process is in flight, click `View Offer` on the offer within the candidate profile.

![Screenshot of the offer activity on a candidate profile with the View Offer option highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IEiiFkl8jyWNbT01HdEex_jolene-parsons-product-support-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-114554-am.jpg)

Click `Configure Approval Process` from within the **Approval Process** section of the offer.

![Screenshot of the offer showing the Configure Approval Process button in the Approval Process section.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NJr3BE1TjV1tyuae8MoqV_jolene-parsons-product-support-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-114731-am.jpg)

On the following screen, you can add or remove approvers from steps, add steps, or remove steps.

Once you make your adjustments, click `Use Approval Process` to confirm your changes. Your amendments appear on the offer.

![Screenshot of the approval process editor with the Use Approval Process button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8JwyG04jNBP18RG7h7oC2_jolene-parsons-product-support-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-114857-am.jpg)

These changes do not impact the original offer approval process set up within **Admin > Organization Setup > Approvals**.

The option to make one-off approval amendments is only available for the offer approval process. It is not available for opening or job approval processes.

# FAQs

### Can I trigger a reapproval process for jobs and openings once they've been approved?

For **jobs**, you cannot currently trigger a reapproval process for a job once it is approved. If reapproval fields are configured for specific custom fields, they only trigger reapproval while the initial approval is still in progress, not once it is complete. For example, if a change is made after approver 1 has approved a job but before approver 2 has done so, the approval process restarts and the first approver must provide approval again.

For **openings**, changes to fields marked as requiring reapproval trigger a new approval cycle before taking effect, even after the opening is fully approved. Changes to fields that do not require reapproval are applied immediately when you save. For more details, see the **Opening reapproval fields** section above.

### Why am I seeing an approval gap message for openings and how do I resolve it?

You're seeing an approval gap message because your existing opening approvals have filters applied in their configurations. For example, you may have specified that an opening must be part of a specific team for that approval process to be triggered, or some other similar criteria. When you create an opening that doesn't meet the criteria of any configured approval flow, Ashby doesn't trigger an approval process, resulting in an approval gap.

To prevent approval gaps, create one approval flow with no filters as a fallback, as shown below. This ensures that any openings that don't match criteria in your existing configurations still trigger an approval workflow.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sL6m_iQn4mb0V9gHFiIyx_approvals-acent-ashby-2026-02-20-at-102538-am.jpg" size="90" alt="Screenshot of an approval process with no scopes." isUploading="false" width="1276" height="932" darkWidth="1276" darkHeight="932" showCaption="false"}


[title] How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

This guide covers how to add, deactivate, and reactivate employees as users in your Ashby account.

:::hint{type="danger"}
If you have SCIM enabled, all users are synced via SCIM, so adding users manually or via user sync is overridden.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & prerequisites:** Only organization admins can manually manage users or edit user permissions.
:::

# Adding new users if you have user sync enabled

If you have the Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integrations in place and allow users to sync over automatically, any new users are automatically provisioned once they're added to your tenant.

To check if you have user sync enabled, an organization admin can take the following steps:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations**.
2. Click on the Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration panel (depending on the integration you are using).
   1. For Google Workspace integrations, confirm whether the `Sync Google Workspace Users?` and/or `Automatically Enable Synced Users?` checkboxes are checked.

:::hint{type="info" indent="3"}
![The screenshot shows the Google Workspace integration tile with the user sync options highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_XwRsTjH2NBKJcZEqeMTx_google-workspace-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-110449-am.jpg)

**Sync Google Workspace Users?:** When checked, users set up in your connected Google Workspace sync to Ashby automatically.

**Automatically Enable Synced Users?:** When checked, synced users are enabled so they can be configured and scheduled for interviews before they have signed into Ashby.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="decimal" listStart="2" indent="2"}
For Microsoft 365 users, confirm whether the `Sync Microsoft Users?` and `Automatically Enable Synced Users?` checkboxes are checked.
:::

:::hint{type="info" indent="3"}
![The screenshot shows the General Settings section of the Microsoft 365 integration panel.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3FXQiB96NEfjg0YNGilME_microsoft-365-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-111159-am.jpg)

**Sync Microsoft Users?:** Automatically syncs users in your Microsoft tenant into Ashby.

**Automatically Enable Synced Users?:** Automatically syncs and enables users from your connected Microsoft tenant so they can be configured and scheduled for interviews before they have signed into Ashby.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are not seeing a user being synced and active as expected and you've checked the settings above, check that the user is active in your workspace or tenant.
:::

# Adding new users to Ashby manually

If you are not using the user sync option, or have user sync on and want to add users outside of your workspace or tenant, you can add them manually.

## Provisioning a new user

To add a user manually:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users).
2. Click `New` and enter the user's name and email address.
3. Click `Create`.
4. Complete any other details in the user's profile.
5. The user shows as a New Unprovisioned Employee initially. To activate their account, click `Actions` on their profile, then `Activate`.

![The screenshot shows an employee profile with the Actions panel open and highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jeslmMvv2bOsGgw41aKO2_employees-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-112604-am.jpg)

The new user can now log into Ashby and you can assign their permissions. For more on permissions and access roles, see [User Permissions](#).

## Deactivating and terminating users in Ashby

:::hint{type="info"}
You can deactivate or terminate an active user or employee account if they shouldn't have access to Ashby. Deactivating an account means the user loses access to Ashby and is downgraded to Limited Access upon reactivation. Terminating an account means the user loses access to Ashby and all of their access roles are also removed from their profile.
:::

To deactivate or terminate a user account:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees** and click on the user in question.
2. Click `Actions` on their profile, then `Deactivate` or `Terminate`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IxvKk67zXVUIQzwC4jcnI_deactivating-and-terminating-an-employee-profile.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1422" height="433" darkWidth="1422" darkHeight="433" alt="The screenshot shows an employee profile with the Actions panel open and highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
**What is the difference between deactivated and terminated users?**

Deactivating a user is recommended when they are still with your company but you no longer want them to have access to Ashby. Terminating a user removes all of their access roles and stops their access to Ashby, so this option is recommended when the user is no longer with the company.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Deactivating or terminating an employee removes them from interviewer pools, but deactivating an employee does not remove them from an interview they've already been scheduled to participate in. Interviews need to be manually rescheduled with a new interviewer.
:::

## Reactivating a user profile in Ashby

To reactivate a user's account in Ashby, adjust the `Is Active?` filter that shows all active users by default on the **Employees** page. The filter can show up in two different formats, depending on whether you have basic or advanced filters toggled on.

- Advanced filters off:

![The screenshot shows the Employees page with the filter option highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EjU08iHJOrDePBkTaEYn2_basic-is-active-filter.jpg)

- Advanced filters on:

![The screenshot shows the Employees page with the filter option highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jOq_6ZwrybUCNmWzJXsXU-20260421-104200.jpg)

Once you've adjusted the filtering as needed, locate and click on the profile you'd like to reactivate, click `Actions`, then `Activate` to reactivate the user profile.

:::hint{type="warning"}
When reactivating a deactivated employee, they will reactivate as a Limited Access user.  You will need to upgrade them to Elevated Access for any previous access roles to be restored.
:::

# FAQ

### Can I import employees in bulk?

You can import a CSV file of employee data to create or update employee profiles in Ashby. For more on this, see [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ).

### When adding a user's email to their profile, I see "This email is already used by another user." Why?

This is because a user with this email address already has a profile within your account. View your deactivated and terminated user list, as they should be listed there (for more on amending those filters, see the Reactivating a user profile section above). You can then head into their profile, click `Actions`, then `Activate` to reactivate their profile.

### Will newly added and activated users receive an email confirming their access or inviting them to log in to Ashby?

No, new users do not receive an email notification with an invite, but as soon as their account is active, they can sign in at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin). Share this link with them so they can log in for the first time.

### Can I view all users (activated, deactivated, and terminated) in one list?

Yes — remove the default filter that only pulls active users to view the full user list. Click the trash can icon to the right of the filter to remove it.

![The screenshot shows the Employees page with the basic filter options. The trash can icon is highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LX__BjFrScJ8miwu7J52e_employees-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-120434-pm.jpg)

### Can I add external recruiters as users?

You can. If these users should only be able to view candidate profiles linked to their agency, see [Agencies Setup](#) for more information on setting up agency users.

### Can I amend an employee's email on their profile?

If an employee's email has changed (or if there was a typo in the entered email when their account was initially created), click into their profile on the **Employees** page, then edit the email address listed in the **Email** section of **Basic Info**.

### Can I delete a user/employee in Ashby?

Users listed on the **Employees** page can currently have their profiles deactivated or terminated. It is not possible to delete profiles completely.

### Can I switch an agency user to be an employee user instead, so I can assign them different permissions?

Agency users do not have the ability to email or schedule candidates; to allow them to take those actions ro assign them other permissions, there are a few changes that would need to be made on your end and in their Ashby profile.

**If you do not have SCIM or SSO configured:**

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Agencies** and click on the agency and user in question.&#x20;
2. In their profile’s **Permissions** tab, locate the Agency drop-down menu and click the `X` beside the agency name; this will remove the link between the user and the agency. 

![The screenshot shows an agency user's profile open on the permissions tab with the X highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-B1-J4yoCGGT10dpDAcjp_agencies-ashby-2026-09-24-at-112914-am.jpg)

Once the link has been removed, they will automatically be converted to a Limited Access employee user. You can then update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the **Permissions** tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find in **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. You can read more about that assigning access at [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).&#x20;

**If you have Google Workspace and SSO configured**

1. Add the agency user as a domain user within your Google Workspace account settings; doing so will automatically provision a new separate account for them in Ashby via the Google Workspace integration. They will be provisioned as a Limited Access user.&#x20;
2. Once they’ve been added, you can update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the Permissions tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees.**

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. 

The user will then log into Ashby using the Sign in with SSO option instead of the Magic Link option.

**If you have Microsoft 365 and SSO configured**

1. Add the agency user as a user within your Microsoft 365 account settings; doing so will automatically provision a new, separate account for them in Ashby. They’ll be provisioned as a Limited Access user.
2. Once they’ve been added, you can update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the Permissions tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees.**

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. 

The user will then log into Ashby using the Sign in with SSO option instead of the Magic Link option.

**If you have SSO and SCIM configured**

1. First, you will need to create a user record in your IdP directory. You will need to create a new email address for them that utilizes your domain, so that it can be verified via SSO during the login process.
2. Once they have been added to your directory, a new, separate account will automatically be provisioned for them in Ashby on the next directory sync. They will be added as a Limited Access user. Once they’ve been added, you can update their global user role from Limited Access to Elevated access via the Permissions tab in their Ashby user profile, which you would find at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees.**

After changing their global user role, you can then add a team-wide or job-specific access role; the Hiring Manager access role provides the necessary permissions they’ll need in order to email and schedule candidates, but you can assign any role with more permissions if you would like to give them additional permissions on top of emailing and scheduling. 

The user will then log into Ashby using the Sign in with SSO option instead of the Magic Link option.

[title] Accessing Ashby Academy
[path] Initial Setup & Migrations/Ashby Admin Onboarding/

Ashby Academy is an on-demand learning hub designed to help you build confidence and practical skills in Ashby. The courses provided cover best practices and workflows ranging from foundational concepts to advanced use cases.

Ashby Academy is open to anyone and does not require an Ashby product account. Ashby Academy is open to anyone and does not require an Ashby product account.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Please note that your Academy login is separate from your Ashby platform login.
:::

## How to access Ashby Academy

Navigate to the Ashby Academy here: [https://academy.ashbyhq.com](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/). From there, you have two ways to sign in or create an account.

### Option 1: Sign up or log in using a connected account

On the sign-up screen, you can choose to continue with one of the following login methods:

- Google
- Facebook
- LinkedIn
- Apple

:::hint{type="success"}
If you’ve used one of these methods before, be sure to use the same option again when logging back in.
:::

### Option 2: Create an account with email and password

You can also create an account manually by entering:

- Your name
- Your email address
- A password of your choice

Once your account is created, you can log in anytime using that email and password.

## Common login issues and quick fixes

If you’re having trouble accessing Ashby Academy, here are a few things to check:

**Using the wrong login method&#xA0;**&#xA;If you originally signed up with Google, LinkedIn, Apple, or Facebook, you’ll need to use that same option to log back in.

**Account not found**
This usually means an Academy account hasn’t been created yet for that email. Try signing up first.

**Page not loading or acting oddly**
Try opening the Academy in an incognito/private browser window or clearing your browser cache.

:::hint{type="info"}
Forgotten your password? Use the `Forgot your password?` link on the login screen to reset it.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SUSP2sKpJUavy4p11woDB_home-2026-01-20-at-35509-pm.jpg" size="40" width="882" height="1164" position="center" showCaption="false"}

****
:::


[title] Getting Started for Interviewers
[path] Getting Started: User Guides/

Welcome to Ashby! This guide covers the most common ways interviewers use Ashby — interviewing and referring candidates.

## Log in to Ashby

To sign in, head to [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/). Ashby supports Google sign-in, Microsoft 365 sign-in, and magic links. If your company has SSO set up with Ashby, use this option to log in. More on signing in can be found at [Signing in to Ashby](docId\:vH7B6OAp3CIRSFeHtCYoA).

## Configure your personal settings

A key first step is configuring your personal settings in Ashby. In [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info), you can do the following:

- Set your personal info, including your job title, user avatar, timezone, and social links
- Set your notification settings — determine the activities you should be notified about and where you want to be notified
- Set up personal email templates
- Set up OAuth if needed (confirm with your admin if this needs to be completed as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 setup)

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full walkthrough, check out [Updating Personal Settings](docId\:Bb_jro6kp6bWBkWTHtAZT).
:::

## Navigate Ashby

### Home page

If you only interview candidates in the pipeline and have no other interaction with candidates, you likely have Limited Access in Ashby.

To get started, log in to Ashby at [https://app.ashbyhq.com](https://app.ashbyhq.com/) using one of the login options. You should already have an account set up. Once logged in, you land on your home page, where you can access interview briefings and tasks. For a full breakdown of the home page, check out [Home Page](docId\:mzsz9lMAG1AX7n1BoZCzj).

### Add and track referrals

To submit referrals:

1. Locate the **Referrals** section on the right side of the [Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/home/upcoming) page.
2. Click `+ Referral`.
   - Creating a direct referral? Click `Add Direct Referral`, then complete the referral form with the candidate details.
   - Creating a referral link? Click `Create Referral Link` and give your referral link a title. You can then opt to link to a specific job posting using the `Link to specific job posting?` checkbox and selecting a job posting from the dropdown.

:::hint{type="info"}
Our full guide on referrals can be found at [Referrals and Referral Links](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr).
:::

## Interviewing with Ashby

As an interviewer, you receive interviewer-only calendar invites that contain links to interview briefings. These briefings contain the schedule, instructions on how to conduct the interview, information about the candidate, a place for you to enter your feedback, and feedback from other interviewers on the panel.

To access the interview briefing for an interview:

1. Navigate to the Home page
2. Click on the interview within the `Tasks` section of the page, or click` View Past Interviews` and then select the interview from the list to open the interview briefing.

:::hint{type="info"}
Calendar events for interviews also contain a direct link to the interview briefing in Ashby.
:::

### Reviewing interview briefings on desktop

When you click on one of your upcoming interviews, Ashby takes you to the interview briefing page. The interview briefing page includes all information about the candidate and the interview you are scheduled for. You also receive a link to the interview briefing in your calendar invite for the interview.

At the top of the interview briefing there are a list of oval "pills" that show key context and statuses—such as the associated job, which you can click to open the candidate pipeline if you have access, and recording-related updates when applicable.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6q77OwaoTk4UUyFU5kMV__interview-briefing-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-05-05-at-114935-am.jpg)

There are several tabs within the interview briefing that contain different information:

- On the **Overview** tab, you can review the date and time, the room (if applicable), the hiring team, and the interviewers
- On the **Briefing** tab, you can review the interview instructions and a candidate summary including the candidate source, custom fields, work experience, and education
- On the **Resume** tab, if available, you can review the PDF version of the candidate's resume
- On the **Job Posting** tab, you can view the job posting that the candidate applied to
- The **Recording** tab shows only when [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z) is being used and a recording is in progress, completed, or removed. Here you can see meeting recordings and AI notes if using AI Notetaker.
- On the **Your Feedback** tab, you can complete the scorecard for the candidate
- On the **All Feedback** tab, you can review the feedback from other interviews after you've submitted your own. Feedback being visible is dependant on your company's feedback visibility settings. More on this at [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV).

### Reviewing interview briefings on mobile

If you open Ashby on a mobile device, you see your mobile home page, which also shows all upcoming interviews and overdue scorecards and links to each interview briefing.

You can also open any link to the interview briefing (e.g., on your calendar invite or in an email notification) from a mobile device.

Just as in the desktop version, you can learn about upcoming interviews and submit feedback when they are completed.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/073c414f0cd3f467a10047fd1ad37bfc.png" size="60" width="494" height="782" darkWidth="494" darkHeight="782" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### Accessing and completing feedback forms

After an interview, you may need to complete a feedback form for the candidate. You can find and complete the interview feedback form on the **Your Feedback** tab of the interview briefing.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sdd0d2kJ-gKOa-fW7y7lm_interview-briefing-emma-ryland-smythe-ashby-2026-06-30-at-103345-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1366" height="1050" darkWidth="1366" darkHeight="1050" alt="An interview briefing. Click the Your Feedback tab to access the feedback form." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on conducting interviews and leaving feedback, check out the [Conducting Interviews with Ashby](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/interviewing-in-ashby) course in Ashby Academy!
:::

## FAQ

### My profile picture has synced over from Google Workspace but it's very pixelated. Why?

Images synced over from Google Workspace do not have a high enough resolution. We recommend uploading your avatar within [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info) to fix this.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3bd9ae2c6b84fa648351e2310d15c63c.png)

### Can interviewers add a note on a candidate profile about the interviews?

This is dependant on your permissions in Ashby. If you are a Limited Access user, you will access the candidate profile or add notes to the candidate feed, but you will be able to complete a feedback form for the interview you are on the panel for.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
If you need to confirm your permissions or access level, check in with an Organization Admin. They will be able to view your permissions at **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees.**
For more on permissions, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).
:::




[title] Permissions Automation
[path] Users & Permissions/Provisioning Users & Assigning Permissions/

Organization Admins can now map  roles to Access roles. As such, when a user is assigned an hiring team role for a job, their permissions will automatically be updated so they have an appropriate access role. The job access role will then be unassigned automatically if the user is removed from the hiring team.
You can also automatically upgrade and downgrade global access roles for users when they no longer have any Job access roles on active jobs.

Permissions automation can be configured on all plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/735349d558cb4c5ab8843f7197b50bb8"}

## Setup

To configure your permissions automation, navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > [Permissions Automation](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/permissions/permissions-automation). Click `Configure`*,* this will open up the Configure Automation Permissions wizard.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/83ddad0bfb41690ccf2fa9556ec03577.png)

The first step is enabling the option to automatically assign access roles to users based on the roles they are assigned within the job’s hiring team. Enable `Automatically Assign Job Access Roles`. Once this is enabled, you will be able to use the Select a security role dropdown beside each hiring team role to determine the access role each role should be automatically assigned.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7b19c21505234c77caed4d67391b8b40.png)

So, for example, if you set the Hiring Manager hiring team role to have Admin access, then when a user is assigned the Hiring Manager role on a job’s hiring team, they will automatically be granted Elevated Access - Admin access to the job.

For more on the permissions the default job access roles grant, check out the [Access Roles page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/permissions/access-roles) in your Ashby account.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dec62aaf5586be370682a4e939905ba8.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
You do not need to assign access roles to all hiring team roles. Leave the dropdown menu as Select a security role beside any hiring team roles that shouldn’t automatically assign an access role.
:::

### Handling Conflicts

The next step in the wizard is setting up how conflicts will be handled. Conflicts arise when a user has already been given an access role via the team or location. If a job-level access role has been provided already, this will not be overridden.

Set a hierarchy here by dragging the access roles into order, the top access role taking top priority. So if a user here was given Admin - Private access by a team-level role but the automation gives them Admin access, if Admin access is higher up on the priority list, then this will override the team-wide permissions for this specific job. If Admin was lower on the list, then the auto-assignment would be skipped when they’re added to the hiring team.

![In the pictured case, if a user was assigned Admin access by the automation but already had Admin Private access to the job through a team or location access role, they would retain Admin Private access.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3334b0ce9aeacaafb7309bdae79b8be4.png)

In the pictured case, if a user was assigned Admin access by the automation but already had Admin Private access to the job through a team or location access role, they would retain Admin Private access.

### Global Role Automation

In this step, you can enable the option to automatically adjust a user’s global access role. So, if they’re a limited access user and are added to the hiring team for a job, they are automatically upgraded to have elevated access, along with the job access role assigned to their hiring team role.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/83f76d5d35aac58cfa145a15f435178c.png)

This will also downgrade elevated access users to limited access if they no longer have an access role on any draft or open jobs.

Check the Automatically Adjust User Roles checkbox to enable this option, or leave it unchecked if you’d prefer to adjust global access roles manually.

**Review and Backfill**

Here you can opt to backfill access roles for users who are on the hiring teams for open and draft jobs by checking the Apply updates to existing jobs and employees checkbox.

If you do opt to apply the updates to existing jobs and employees, the number of impacted jobs will be listed in a warning message. To continue, click `Save & Apply`, or `Save` if you choose to apply any changes to existing user permissions manually.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6686adb98c608bd76ef1d5c340449c5a.png)

## Amending or disabling Permissions Automation

Once you’ve set up your initial configuration, the automation details, including the assignments and role conflict configuration can be viewed on the Permissions Automation page.

Click `Configure` again to make any adjustments or disable any automations.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2d8a0b524345d9a4a1880f87af82ef1.png)

## Enabling and disabling automatic upgrading and downgrading for specific users

You can control the users who get their permissions automatically upgraded and downgraded from within their profile. Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > Employees, then click on a user profile and head to the *Permissions* tab.

From here, use the Allow Automatic Upgrading and Downgrading Yes/No option to determine if the Automatically Adjust User Roles automation should apply to them.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cc4909d7f8c6736f14c4ea898cf0b786.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Are permissions automation settings applied to confidential jobs?

Yes. If you have automation for permissions in place and add users as hiring team members to a confidential job, those users will be granted the appropriate access role determined by your automation setup.
:::


[title] Interviews & Scheduling FAQs
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/


[title] Automated Activities
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Activity Configuration/

You can now automate the sending of direct booking links, candidate availability links, questionnaires, emails and take-home assessments from within your job’s interview plan. These automations are triggered as candidates transition from stage to stage in your pipeline.

Assessments sent via an integration (for example, via HackerRank or Bryq) can also be automated.

Automated activities can be configured on the Foundations, Plus, Enterprise and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Setting up automation on a Schedule Interview activity.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on setting up \{\{sch}}, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)&#x20;
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8690652ecce7433d86c46d223f935e10"}

When setting up or amending your schedule interview activity, click on the Automation tab. Then check the `Automate on Stage Entry` checkbox.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f3065da31b1215f2f9ba261b0ed06f62.png)

From there, you’ll be asked to specify the automation type (whether you’d like to send out a direct booking link or a candidate availability link automatically).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a6b27da478cad29ca875a953b5a9af26.png)

If you haven’t already, ensure that an email template is set up for direct booking links or candidate availability links in the Communication tab of your schedule interview activity.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4cc2939c73e3d060f3737f1a67006a6f.png)

This is the email that will be sent out to the candidate automatically when they’re moved to this stage of your pipeline.

## Setting up automation for a Send Email activity.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that only emails to the candidate can be automated - it’s not currently possible to automate Send Email activities for interviewers or hiring team members. If you are looking to set up automated booking confirmation emails or interview reminders, please check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/42298989e07744faaf8d254f0d19850a"}

On the interview plan for your job, click `+ Add Activity`*,* then select the *Send Email* activity option.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4571cff3bed4314a66cb3317e853a069.png)

Select the email template that you’d like to send out as part of this activity. Click `Submit` to create the activity.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5f8e8855f29052ed70d5581d5182bb83.png)

To automate the sending of the email, click `Modify`*,* then `Edit` for this activity, then click on the Automation tab. Check the `Automate on Stage Entry?` checkbox.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/96e42da8019d46cc77f96e6fc5c8c728.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2d9b18dbe762662501dde6c9ad855bee.png)

The email will then be automatically sent when the candidate is moved to the stage the automated activity is in.

When a candidate is initially moved to the stage with the automated activity in it, you will have the option to stop the automated email from being sent.

If you haven’t already, ensure that an email template is set up for direct booking links or candidate availability links in the Communication tab of your schedule interview activity.

This is the email that will be sent out to the candidate automatically when they’re moved to this stage of your pipeline. You will have the option to undo the automation each time it is triggered.

## Setting up automation for a Questionnaire activity.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/cdc38bfb35ee454ba667da672a37805e"}

Head to the interview plan for your job, then click `+ Add Activity`, then select the `Questionnaire` option.

When selecting your questionnaire and email template, check the `Automate on Stage Entry?` checkbox so the questionnaire is sent when the candidate is moved to the specified stage.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/79e054f205991308ce1299ce8235e45c.png)

## Automation for a Take-home assessment.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ba4c83dc6a914369b8dd63a17832de48"}

On the interview plan for the role in question, click `+ Add Activity` in the stage you’d like to add the take home assessment to, then select the `Take-home` option.

When setting up your take-home, you can opt to select an email from your email templates to be sent out as part of the automation on the Communication tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/15850bf531459b0654a3f353241988eb.png)

On the Automation tab, you can then check the `Automate on Stage Entry?` checkbox, then select the user that the take-home email should be sent on behalf of.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f2159e3b303b487711c3b21de24e1c88.png)

## Setting up automation on an assessment sent via an integration

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b474eb94f20d4077a82fb3c1ef497e1c"}

To create an activity on your interview plan, head to your job, then click on the Interview Plans tab.

From there, you can click the `+ Add Activity to…` option on the stage you’d like to add the assessment to.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/96dfb11b9cc49b6f404a0fc3d95d3287.png)

Then select the Assessment integration you’d like to use from the Add Activity sidebar. Select the assessment that you’d like to send to candidates to complete from the dropdown.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/30c30b02913afeb0c62a0a52ceac6d4f.png)

Once selected, you can head to the Settings tab of the Assessment Configuration page and check the `Automate on Stage Entry?` checkbox.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c3a441537219c569ff1315138d172b26.png)

From now on, candidates moved to this stage will have the assessment sent to them automatically. To stop automation for future candidates, uncheck this checkbox.

## How to confirm a stage has an automated activity

If a stage has an automated activity added to it, a lightning bolt icon will show beside the stage name.

This icon will show on the candidate pipeline for your job, on the *Interview Plan* for the job on the stage name when moving or advancing a candidate to the next stage (both via the `Change Stage` button and in Application Review if the following stage has an automated activity). This iconography can also be seen when choosing the stage candidates should be added to when considering them for a job.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5d66d8e80ecbdeb96d9715492fea143c.png)

## Can I stop an automatic activity for a specific candidate or candidates?

**Changing a stage for a single job consideration**

When a single candidate is moved to a stage with an automated activity, you will see the option to `Undo` the activity. You’ll have 15 seconds after the candidate is moved into the stage to undo the automated activity.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8a03f6ee076a46f63574d184664f444e.png)

**Changing a stage in bulk for multiple job considerations**

When changing job consideration stages in bulk, a warning message will appear confirming that some activities are configured to automatically start.

You can opt out of starting these activities automatically by unchecking the `Start Automatic Activities? `checkbox.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3083164a24d5550691b6f80040ab9087.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I delay or schedule the automation of the activity as part of the automated activity setup?

Currently, automated activities will run as soon as the candidate has been moved to the specified stage. It’s not possible to delay or schedule the automation of the activity as part of the activity automation setup.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set up an automated activity to move a candidate to another stage automatically?

No, it’s not possible to create an automation to change a candidate’s stage.
:::


[title] Surveys, Assessments & Activities
[path] /

# Activity Configuration

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Activities help you streamline your hiring process. Ashby has additional automation options with activities to save your team time.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🤖 [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7)&#x20;

🤖 [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB)&#x20;

✅ [Conditional Activities](docId\:Jvb9OShyBJXZujJEb1my7)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Assessments

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Looking to set up assessments as part of your pipeline? These guides will help you get started.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📝 [Setting Up Take-Home Activities](docId\:jyUO0TCr0SMDW4Aqsv_zU)&#x20;

📩 [Send and Review Take-Home Assignments](docId:2kBGatiPHfazXfVZCknUy)&#x20;

🤖 [Setting Up Assessment Integrations](docId\:wQw13Y75mGiAnUx97bEGj)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Surveys & Questionniares&#x20;

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides will take you through each of Ashby's survey options, including surveys for candidates and for users.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📋 [Surveys & Questionnaires](docId\:RlbgZsGQLmqCKGbBnYQyp)

📋 [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB)&#x20;

📋 [Diversity Surveys](docId\:PSv0-HgPj3RvnmKMISJI4)&#x20;

📋 [EEOC Surveys](docId\:pvVzo8-M3-2DF2RGT3tRA)&#x20;

❓ [Questionnaires](docId\:KgRji3jGZ-8tZR5bb1-kh)&#x20;

🏆 [Quality of Hire Surveys](docId:8HGJn7fBdlsBnk1fK-2Db)&#x20;

📋 [Hiring Manager Experience Surveys](docId\:Fl73J4CypI6sF86H7Tzra)&#x20;

❓ [Example Survey Questions](docId:8XNQU9jkIfBEj9nkyF7sW)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] What is a grouped interview plan?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

If you are using multiple different interview plans, you can use this feature to bucket your interview stages across plans into a common set of stages for reporting.

Grouped interview plans are one of the most powerful ways to bring consistency, clarity, and scalability to your hiring process. When used well, they create a standard backbone for interviews across teams and improve data quality, reduce manual work, enable better forecasting, and help teams to deliver a more predictable candidate experience.

# Grouped interview plan overview

If you are using multiple different interview plans, you can set up a grouped interview plan to bucket your interview stages into a common set of stages for reporting.

## Why should I set up a grouped interview plan?

A strong Grouped Interview Plan helps with creating the following:

- A standardized framework that reduces one-off customization
- Clean, comparable data through consistent stage and activity mapping
- Scalable interview structures that don’t require ongoing adjustments
- Structured data capture that powers accurate, repeatable reporting
- A repeatable setup process that supports hiring growth without redesigning interview flows

Because the grouped interview plan defines your company’s reporting structure, stability at this layer is essential. Grouped interview plans are built for long-term consistency, not continuous adjustment.

The grouped interview plan also plays a critical role in how you configure conditions across Ashby. Features like [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB), [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW), and other automated workflows rely on stage groups fields to trigger consistently at the right moment in the process. Without a grouped interview plan, you would need to align conditions across multiple stage names, creating unnecessary complexity and increasing the chances of misconfiguration. With a grouped interview plan, these triggers become seamless and reliable.

The Grouped Interview Plan sits at the top of a hierarchy that other pieces map into:

- The **Grouped Interview Plan** defines the stage groups.
- [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux)  map their stages into those stage groups.
- [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7) sit on stages inside Interview Plans and power automation.

# How to configure a grouped interview plan

## Adding stages to your grouped interview plan

To add stages to your grouped interview plan:

- Navigate to Admin, then select Data Management from the left sidebar, then [Grouped Interview Plan](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-mapping/grouped-interview-plan)
- Check the `Enable Group Interview Plan?` checkbox.
- To add the high-level interview plan stages to the Lead, Active and Completed sections, scroll to the section in question, type the new stage name into the field to the left of the `+ Add` button, then click `+ Add`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/19ZOb4bvX0rPoKUA4qn1r_grouped-interview-plan-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-25721-pm.jpg" size="100" width="2418" height="878" position="center" alt="Adding a new stage to the grouped interview plan" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

Any changes you make will be saved automatically.

## Deleting stages from your grouped interview plan

To delete a stage from your grouped interview plan, click on the trash can icon to the right of the stage in question.

![Click the trash can icon to remove a stage group](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MiJWdQ50jr1yylwc3JQqJ_grouped-interview-plan-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-34138-pm.jpg)

If the stage you're trying to delete is mapped to your interview plans, you will be given a choice: either you can remove the grouped stage group mapping from those interview plan stages or select a different grouped stage to map your interview plan stage to.&#x20;

![Checking the group stages checkbox](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CCDH4epuEmKu1HHZeG6Fz_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-30959-pm.jpg)

# Map plan stages to grouped interview plan

Once your grouped plan is configured, you can map the stages within each of your interview plans to the corresponding stages in your grouped plan.&#x20;
To map stages:

- Navigate to Admin, then Interviews & Scheduling in the left-hand sidebar, then Interview Plans.
- Select an interview plan to map
- Use the Stage Group drop-down menus to select the grouped interview plan stage you'd like to map your interview plan stage to.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0dVvnMX7iAi5V3eXv0QGx_interview-plans-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-30256-pm.jpg)

# Grouping Stages when reporting

When creating a report relating to your interview pipeline, you will see the checkbox option to `Group Stages?`

Checking this box will use your grouped interview plan stages, bucketing your individual interview plans and showing a streamline version of the report. If you are using the new report builder, this is in the **Vizualization** section of the report builder.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CCDH4epuEmKu1HHZeG6Fz_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-30959-pm.jpg)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### How many stages should my Grouped Interview Plan have?

Most Grouped Interview Plans work best with 3–6 active stage groups. These stage groups should represent the major milestones you want to measure consistently across roles. Essentially, if you need to report on passthrough or performance for a step in the process, it likely deserves its own stage group in your grouped interview plan.

The grouped interview plan should only include high-level milestones. Do not include hold stages or administrative steps. Those belong in interview plans and can still be reported on by stage name if needed.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I've created my Grouped Interview Plan and now when I pull reports, I am getting a lot of "unspecified" results or data is missing entirely. Why?

Firstly, confirm that all of your interview plan stages are mapped to the grouped interview plan. Any interview plan (shared or custom) that isn’t mapped will appear as “unspecified” in reporting because Ashby doesn’t know which stage group those stages belong to.

You can review and update this in Admin → Interview Plans (available to Organizational Admins or Elevated Users with permission to edit Interview Plans). Make sure each plan is mapped to the correct stage groups in the grouped interview plan so all reporting can roll up cleanly. If the Stage Group says "Unmapped," it needs to be mapped to the appropriate Grouped Interview Stage.&#x20;
:::


[title] What tools are available to help identify fraudulent applications in our pipeline?
[path] Applications/

There are a couple of routes you can take in Ashby to help surface fraudulent applications. This information can be correlated with other threat intelligence information in your company's SIEM systems.

More on Ashby's candidate fraud detection option can be found at [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl).

## Manually review LinkedIn profile URLs

It can help to manually check whether the LinkedIn Profile URL provided in the application leads to a real profile. While not completely fail-safe, this can help with spotting red flags early on in the review process.

## Use the candidate.listClientInfo endpoint to review IP data

You can call our [candidate.listClientInfo](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/candidatelistclientinfo) endpoint and review the data within the response. This can help you to identify:

- A large number of applications from the same IP address
- Unusual IP locations inconsistent with your job’s target regions

## Building an integration between Ashby and threat intelligence tools using Ashby’s APIs

:::hint{type="info"}
You can build custom integrations between Ashby and third-party threat intelligence services like Grey Noise or Spur to identify potentially suspicious application activity. This requires custom development using our APIs but can provide valuable security insights for teams with the ability to do so. Below you can find an example setup.
:::

### Example Integration

1. **Set up a webhook listener** - Configure Ashby webhooks (e.g. on `applicationSubmit` or `interviewScheduleCreate`) to notify your integration when new applications are received or interviews are scheduled.
2. **Retrieve candidate IP data** - When your webhook is triggered, use the `candidate.listClientInfo` endpoint to retrieve the IP address and user agent information:

:::CodeblockTabs{indent="2"}
```text
POST https://api.ashbyhq.com/candidate.listClientInfo `{`

`"candidateId": "[ID from webhook payload]"`

`}`
```
:::

3. **Fetch candidate details** - Use the `candidate.info` endpoint to get email, phone, and location information:

:::CodeblockTabs{indent="2"}
```text
POST https://api.ashbyhq.com/candidate.info 

{

"candidateId": "[ID from webhook payload]"

}
```
:::

4. **Check against threat intelligence** - Send the IP address to a service like Grey Noise or Spur:

:::CodeblockTabs{indent="2"}
```text
GET https://api.greynoise.io/v2/noise/context/[IP address]
```
:::

:::CodeblockTabs{indent="2"}
```text
GET https://api.spur.us/v2/context/[IP address]
```
:::

5. **Process the results** - Analyze the threat intelligence response for risk indicators:
   - Is the IP associated with malicious activity?
   - Is the candidate using a VPN from an unexpected country?
   - Does their claimed location match their IP location?
   - Are they using anonymizing services?
6. **Take appropriate action** - Based on the risk assessment, some options could include:

:::CodeblockTabs{indent="2"}
```text
POST https://api.ashbyhq.com/candidate.createNote

{

"candidateId": "[ID]",

"note": "Security Alert: IP shows high-risk indicators. Grey Noise score: 85/100",

"sendNotifications": true

}
```
:::

- **Move suspicious applications** to a special review stage:

:::CodeblockTabs{indent="2"}
```text
POST https://api.ashbyhq.com/application.change_stage

{

"applicationId": "[Application ID]",

"interviewStageId": "[Security Review Stage ID]"

}
```
:::

- **Tag candidates** for internal tracking:

:::CodeblockTabs{indent="2"}
```text
POST https://api.ashbyhq.com/candidate.addTag

{

"candidateId": "[ID]",

"tagId": "[Security Review Tag ID]"

}
```
:::

### Implementation Example

A basic workflow might look like this:

1. Create a serverless function (AWS Lambda, Azure Functions, etc.) that receives Ashby webhooks
2. When a new application is submitted, the function:
   - Retrieves the candidate's IP and personal information from Ashby
   - Checks the IP against Grey Noise or Spur
   - If suspicious indicators are found (VPN usage from high-risk country, known malicious IP, etc.), adds a security note and moves the application to a Security Review stage

### Some Possible Setup Options:

For engineering teams looking to implement this integration, you may want to consider one or more of the following:

1. Create a dedicated security review stage in your interview process
2. Set up relevant tags for tracking suspicious applications
3. Document clear protocols for how recruiters should handle flagged applications

This integration can help proactively identify potential corporate espionage attempts, fraudulent applications from prohibited countries, or other security risks before they progress through your hiring pipeline.

## Other Best Practices

- Using [Tags](#) to help your team label and track suspicious applications
- If you're seeing a consistent pattern, consider updating your job posting or application form to include a simple validation step (e.g., "Include a sentence about why this role at our company interests you")
- For high-volume roles, some teams introduce short screening questions or exercises to help weed out low-effort submissions early

[title] Can I transfer a candidate’s job consideration to another job or interview plan?
[path] Candidates/

This guide covers using the transfer option to move an existing active job consideration on Ashby. This allows users to transfer applications to a different job, interview plan, or both while still keeping one application on their profile. This can be useful when you've decided that a candidate is a better fit for a different role or should be evaluated through an alternate interview plan.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions and prerequisites:**

- A candidate can only be transferred to an open job.
- Users with Elevated Access and an access role with the permission stripe to Add/Edit Candidates for the job, department and/or location can transfer or consider a candidate for another job.
:::

## Transferring versus considering for another job

**Transfer a candidate's job consideration when:**

- The role is essentially the same or a similar opportunity (for example, a renamed job or corrected posting) that the candidate should be considered for instead
- You want to preserve all historical context and timing for this specific job consideration and just move it to a different job
- Time-to-hire continuity, taking into account when the candidate was first considered for a role

**Consider the candidate for another job when:**

- The candidate is being considered for a new or different opportunity
- You want reporting dates to reflect both job considerations
- The opportunity represents a new hiring process

# How to transfer an application

There are two ways to initiate a transfer: via the More button on the candidate's profile or on the candidate pipeline.

## Transferring via the candidate profile

To transfer a candidate via their candidate profile, click `More`, then `Transfer`.

![More, then Transfer on the candidates profile.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H9gmbEuEASCn8IDsxQfNP_transferring-a-candidate-application.jpg)

Using the following pop-up, confirm the job, the interview plan and the attribution for the application, then click `Transfer` to confirm.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hLQ-008qEwVuVlGb7cuDm_transfer-job-consideration-screen.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1312" height="1026" darkWidth="1312" darkHeight="1026" alt="The pop-up where you can set the job, interview plan and attribution for the application transfer." showCaption="false"}

## Transferring applications via the job pipeline

Using the `Select` option, select one or more candidates that you'd like to transfer to another job. From there, you can click the `More` button and select `Transfer to Another Job` from the dropdown.

![More and Transfer to Another Job for multiple applications in a job pipeline.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WU94TWmnk3jaSubFdLWK9_group-product-manager-ashby-2026-08-03-at-22759-pm.jpg)

Once selected, you can specify the job and the interview stage you'd like candidates to be transferred to. You also have the option to override the attribution fields. Once you've configured your transfer, click `Start 'Transfer' on X records`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EIK3ALvR6iigad0HBw7h9_bulk-action-transfer.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1164" height="1598" darkWidth="1164" darkHeight="1598" alt="The bulk action screen for transferring multiple applications to another job or interview plan." showCaption="false"}

When you transfer an application in Ashby to another job pipeline, Ashby retains all historical information within the application history. That means you can see all of the details prior to the change on the **Candidate Profile**. Ashby also retains any notes, application forms, completed surveys, feedback forms, and referral forms, so if the candidate is moved to a new job via the `Transfer` option, you won't lose that data.

For reporting, since Ashby retains all the application history, your Time in Process, Time to Hire, and Time to Offer calculations continue to be accurate for transferred candidates.

Any scheduled and upcoming activities such as interviews and take-home activities remain scheduled after a transfer. You can manually delete any activities you don't need before transferring an application.

The job consideration's hiring team is overwritten and takes on the hiring team of the job that the candidate transfers into.

# FAQ

### How do I remove or reject a candidate from a job consideration?

While viewing the job consideration on the **Candidate Profile**, click the `Archive` button. You can then select an archive reason and optionally schedule a rejection email to be sent to the candidate.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IqtvJWRqtKq7wQXlsHbDN_archiving-a-candidate-using-the-archive-button.jpg" size="90" isUploading="false" width="1404" height="262" darkWidth="1404" darkHeight="262" showCaption="false"}


[title] Can I search Ashby from my Chrome browser?
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

You can, yes. This guide walks through how to configure a new search option in your browser with Ashby as the query engine. This option is only available for the Chrome browser.

If you’re looking to add Ashby as a search option in Google Chrome:

- Navigate to your Chrome settings.
- Head to the Search engine tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e85d2aa60f0fef5c71d63b3e50193d1a.png)

- Click Manage search engines and site search.
- In the Site Search section, click `Add`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b49506f88e4580ecec24775f655a8b42.png)

- From here, complete the Name, Shortcut and URL fields on the following screen.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/37e23b1cc4074379222c2e146602aa0d.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
When adding in your URL, add `?search=%s` to the end of your homepage URL.
:::

- Click `Add` to confirm.



To use your newly configured site search, use the shortcut you specified in the Shortcut field to then see the option to search Ashby in your browser search bar.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b8d5cadc9d56a514f44bdd2870769c06.png)


[title] How do I export candidate data?
[path] Candidates/

This document explains how to export candidate data from Ashby.

### Exporting Data via a Custom List Report

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on creating custom reports, check out [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)
:::

Custom Reports can be set up on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/0aafcf2694b143bc979793c81d8fb9d0"}

If you’d like to download a list of candidates that meet a certain criteria, you can do the following:

1. Navigate to Reports > Build > Custom List.
2. Select the Candidates subject, and add the relevant Fields to Show (Name, Email Address, LinkedIn URL, etc).
3. Add filters to the report if necessary, e.g. Started At time range, Job, Source, etc.
4. Click `Export CSV` in the Results section.

### Exporting Data via the Candidate Profile

You can also export candidate data from an individual candidate’s profile under `More`*.* This option can be used if a candidate requests a copy of their data.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a1b31a1c4c5cfe04dc9747c54973c2f6.png)

Once you click `Export Candidate Data`, you’ll then be able to select whether you’d like to export the candidate’s data, or their profile and interview feedback.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/57615154a7c05910bc46733bf8f74170.png" size="74" width="628" height="331" darkWidth="628" darkHeight="331" position="center" showCaption="false"}

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you opt to export their data, you can use the checkboxes to select the specific fields you’d like to export.

You can select whether you’d like to export the candidate profile information, social links, employment and education history, emails and notes.

You can opt to export emails and notes that have been marked as private too. Once you’ve selected everything you’d like to export, click `Download PDF`*.*
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a01b7c2ea723554822bb2440127bab90.png)
:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you opt to export candidate feedback, you will also have the option to include the AI feedback summary for the candidate and private feedback answers in the exported file.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ed1e1a640ff8d8113251293ecf0719c1.png)
:::
::::



### Can I bulk export resumes?

Currently it’s not possible to bulk export resumes in-app. You can export resumes on a candidate-by-candidate basis by clicking on the resume’s file name on the Summary tab of the candidate’s profile, then downloading the file from there. If you do need to export resumes in bulk, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for assistance.

[title] Interviews: Advanced Setup
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/


[title] Applications
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you'll find everything applications-related, including setting up forms for your job postings, reviewing applications and enabling our candidate fraud detection tool.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📋 [Application Forms](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI)&#x20;

✍️ [Application Requests](docId:-1cI2DUBbnESgdM-dW8wW)&#x20;

🌍 [Global Application Rules & Auto-Reject](docId\:IKrmhOTiN7-kgkYdkF4v_)&#x20;

↔️ [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN)&#x20;

🤖 [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota)&#x20;

🔍 [Application Review](docId\:d_nxB_Kdz4fJru4hBCaLb)&#x20;

🕵️ [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl)&#x20;

ℹ️ [Tracking the source of an application](docId\:xhGtzHhc5AZ2C48VKiI8H)&#x20;

❓ [Updating the status on a job consideration](docId\:ewbN0Qqig4A-0KacGiKxQ)&#x20;

❌ [Application Limits](docId\:DTFh2I3HX_EkQBVgwW8FI)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Meeting Rooms & Meeting Room Pools
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Setup/

Just like with interviewers, you can sync over and create a pool of meeting rooms. You can assign a pool of meeting rooms to an interview activity so one room is assigned from a selection when an interview is scheduled.

This is a helpful tool if you have multiple rooms that are suitable for interviewing in and you don’t want to assign just one room to interviews.

## Setting up and syncing meeting rooms from Google Workspace

Meeting Rooms that have been set up as resources within the Google Admin console will sync over to Ashby and can be assigned to interviews, schedule interview activities and meeting room pools.

To add a meeting room as a resource in Google Workspace:

- Sign into the Google Admin console (you must have an administrator account)
- Navigate to Menu > Directory > Buildings & Resources > Overview
- In Resource Management, click `Open`*.* Click the yellow `+` button to add a new resource
- Enter the resource information, then click `Add Resources`

:::hint{type="info"}
For other options, including uploading resources in bulk, check out Google’s documentation [here](https://support.google.com/a/answer/1033925?hl=en#zippy=).
:::

## Setting up and syncing meeting rooms from Microsoft 365

You can set up room and equipment mailboxes in Microsoft 365 - these will then sync over to Ashby to be used as part of scheduling. More on setting up these mailboxes can be found in Microsoft’s documentation [here](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/microsoft-365/admin/manage/room-and-equipment-mailboxes?view=o365-worldwide#set-up-room-and-equipment-mailboxes).

## Creating a meeting room pool

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To create a meeting room pool, navigate to Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > [Meeting Room Pools](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/meeting-room-tags). Click `+ New` to create a new pool. You’ll be prompted to add in a name for your pool.

Once your pool has been created, click on it within the list and then click `+ Add Meeting Room` to add the a meeting room to your pool.

Select a meeting room, then click `Submit` to add it to the pool. Repeat this until you have all of the appropriate rooms added to your pool.

To remove a room from your pool, click `Actions` beside the room on your list, then `Remove from Pool`.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0eb8ce9bad4c372155ee93c1d405d7f5.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c4deb39890a4cc055b0da5a8cc4c6670.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b07c4c740ba098b0729857d503ab603f.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c8e22b63317341964b3819b9150c4d87.png)
:::
::::





## Assigning a meeting room pool to a schedule interview activity.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on setting up schedule interview activities, please check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)&#x20;
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To add your meeting room pool to your schedule interview activity, head into the Interview Plan on your job and click on the schedule interview activity in question to amend it.

On the Schedule tab, scroll to th&#x65;*&#x20;Room&#x20;*&#x73;ection and click `Set default room`*.* This will set the default room/rooms used for this particular activity.

From here, use the first drop-down menu to select `Meeting Rooms from Pool`, then select your chosen pool using the second drop-down menu.

Now when scheduling this particular interview, a room will be selected from our pool, rather than a specific room being used every time.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3b62a6315dba701b247b3bc345ff81d4.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bdf4ec0dfc9583d8e1606fb772dbbc50.png)
:::
::::

## FAQ

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Where are meeting rooms pulled from?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Meeting Rooms are synced over via your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration. Please note that it can take up to 4 hours for rooms to sync over depending on how many meetings room are being synced.

Any meeting rooms listed under All Rooms and Resources when you click Add Rooms for an event on your Google Calendar should show as room options in Ashby.

In Microsoft 365, meeting rooms can be seen on the Rooms & Equipment page within the Microsoft 365 admin center.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bb83b0ac89f3134bdb2b13225439de9f.png)
:::
::::




:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I pick a room from a meeting room pool when manually scheduling interviews?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can, yes. When using the calendar interface to select the interview type, interviewers and date and time of the interview, click the `Add Room By Pool` option. You can then select the pool you’d like to choose rooms from.

Once you’ve selected your chosen pool (or pools) via the drop-down menu, click `Choose Meeting Room` to see the rooms in your selected pool/pools.

Review the meeting rooms available within your pool, then click Select Meeting Room to confirm the meeting room you’d like to add to your interview.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/091807c6de5bc7aa526fc09cec14e3fd.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e343f4ce47b2bc4b40836589103830c1.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/24dd90ffd1d57917fa4fe0ad91d1ac62.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I schedule multiple meeting rooms for a single interview event?

This isn’t currently possible. Only one meeting room can be assigned when scheduling the interview.
:::


[title] Setting Scheduling Defaults
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

Scheduling defaults let you set company-wide communication and direct booking/candidate availability settings. Ashby uses these default settings while scheduling unless you specify different values on Interview Plans or individual Interview Schedules.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions:**

- By default, only Organization Admins can set scheduling defaults
- Elevated Access users can be granted access to set scheduling defaults as an additional permission. For more, see [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).
:::

# Scheduling defaults overview

The Scheduling Defaults section consists of multiple tabs where you can configure various settings.

These settings dictate organization-wide defaults, and you can override them in certain areas, such as on specific interview plans or individual interview schedules.

# Communication

The **Communication** tab controls how you configure calendar invites and which email templates Ashby uses for candidate-facing communication. The following sections describe each configuration.

## Settings

:::hint{type="info"}
Settings control key details of calendar invites, including the location, which Ashby uses to automatically generate conferencing links or input the candidate's phone number.
:::

![The scheduling default settings, including location, privacy settings and templates for direct booking and candidate availability.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Pe-UYQ-4v9cdtFwc0B4Os_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-10-at-42500-pm.png)

- **Location:** Set the default interview location for calendar invites. Options include integrated video conferencing tools (Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Zoom), Phone Call, or a Custom method.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
If you select Zoom as the location, specify a Zoom host so Direct Booking links generate correctly.
:::

- **Is Private?:** When enabled, Ashby hides calendar invite details, including the title and attendee list, from anyone who is not an attendee.
- **Direct Booking Email Template:** Ashby uses this template when sending a direct booking request from the candidate profile.
- **Candidate Availability Email Template:** Ashby uses this email template when sending a candidate availability request from the candidate profile.
- **Candidate Interview Confirmation:** Ashby sends the email template specified here as an interview confirmation once the candidate schedules.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
For more information, see [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM) and [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).
:::

## AI Notetaker

This section appears only when your organization has AI Notetaker enabled. Toggled on, it enables AI Notetaker by default on all interviews if at least one participating interviewer has it enabled. You can turn it off at the interview level if desired.

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must enable AI Notetaker at **Admin > Opt-in Features > AI Notetaker** to configure this setting.

This is also where you can manage users with AI Notetaker enabled.

See [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) for more info.
:::

![AI notetaker settings for scheduling defaults.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XsC5FQmsP2odLZmBXg840_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-10-at-43400-pm.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on how AI Notetaker works during scheduling, see [Scheduling and Conducting Interviews with AI Notetaker](docId\:DHujlxck8syMCi5neuqbR).
:::

## Candidate interview confirmation

This section controls the confirmation communication candidates receive after Ashby schedules an interview.

![Candidate interview confirmation settings for scheduling defaults.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Dyl-TULIQ29TcWHvyy-E8_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-10-at-45835-pm.png)

- **Candidate Confirmation Email Template:** Select the email template sent to the candidate as a confirmation once an interview is scheduled. Ashby uses this template both for Direct Booking confirmations and as the base template for confirmation emails in the manual scheduling flow.
- **Send Confirmation Email with Direct Booking?:** A toggle that controls whether the confirmation email above is automatically sent when a candidate books via a Direct Booking link. This toggle only becomes visible after you select a Candidate Confirmation Email Template. If you remove the template while this toggle is on, Ashby blocks the removal with a validation error until you turn off the toggle.
- **Direct Booking Confirmation Email Sender:** Determines who sends the confirmation email when a Direct Booking link triggers it. Options typically include the interview organizer or a configured sender address.
- **Candidate Confirmation SMS (Short Message Service) Template:** (appears when candidate texting is enabled) Select the SMS template sent to the candidate as a confirmation once an interview is scheduled.
- **Send Confirmation SMS with Direct Booking?:** (appears once you select a template in the previous setting) A toggle that controls whether the confirmation SMS above is automatically sent when a candidate books via a Direct Booking link. Follows the same behavior as the email toggle above.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Note on manual scheduling:** When manually scheduling an interview, the confirmation email defaults to off even if you configure a template here. The exception is the first time a user manually schedules from an Interview Plan activity that has a confirmation template set, in which case the email defaults to on. Ashby remembers each user's preference for subsequent schedules.
:::

## Manage candidate invites

The **Candidate Invite Grouping** setting under this section allows you to set the default grouping for candidate calendar invites on multi-event schedules. The options are:

- **One invite per block:** Sends separate invites for each block of consecutive interview events. This is the default.
- **One invite per interview:** Sends a separate invite for each individual interview event. Splitting invites can make longer schedules easier for candidates to follow by reflecting breaks between interviews. Each candidate invite also gets its own conferencing link, so candidates and interviewers can join separate calls for each event, if preferred.
- **One invite per day:** Sends a single invite spanning all events scheduled in a given day, including any gaps between interviews.

![Manage candidate invites settings and the candidate invite grouping dropdown.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lDrwrGyctrk9v9i2-uV2-_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-14-at-23604-pm.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
- Invite grouping only applies to multi-event scheduling.
- The option you choose impacts how Ashby creates conferencing links. Candidates and interviewers may need to join different conference rooms for each event (if you select one invite per interview), or you could have a single conferencing link for an interview block or whole day if you choose one of those options.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on how this is set up in schedule interview activities, see the **Communication** section of [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

## Calendar invite templates

This section controls the default title and body content of the calendar invites sent to candidates and interviewers.

### Invite to candidate template

Set the default title and description for the candidate's calendar invite. You can use [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6) (such as candidate name, job title, and interview type) in both fields.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Candidate invites do not support rich text formatting; the description renders as plain text.
:::

![Invite to candidate template settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/s_CiZlKJSwVUxJOXkZuzb_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-10-at-50508-pm.png)

### Invite to interviewers template

Set the default title and description for interviewers' calendar invites. You can use [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6) and rich text formatting (bold, bullet points, links, etc.) in the description field.

![Invite to interviewers template settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-kJeWFM1WMpoOuPv4H1dE_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-10-at-50730-pm.png)

## Slack channel

:::hint{type="warning"}
This section appears only when the Slack integration is active for your organization.
:::

This section sets the org-wide defaults for Slack interview channels. When Ashby creates a Slack channel for an interview, it applies these defaults unless you override them at the Interview Plan activity level.

![The Slack interview channel settings for scheduling defaults.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BBCyBh7fV1NJDOBr_wn5T_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-10-at-51017-pm.png)

- **Channel Title:** Sets the default name for the Slack channel created for each interview. The T icon lets you insert substitution tokens (such as candidate name, job title, or interview stage) into the title.
- **Add Hiring Team Roles:** Determines which hiring team roles Ashby automatically adds to the channel when it creates one. Ashby includes interviewers on the panel by default. You can add additional roles — such as Coordinator, Recruiter, Hiring Manager, and Sourcer — here.
- **Add Specific Users:** In addition to role-based membership, you can add specific named users to every interview channel by default.
- **Default Message:** Sets a default message that Ashby automatically posts to the Slack channel when it creates one.
- **Invite Organizer:** Determines whether Ashby automatically invites the person who schedules the interview (the organizer) to the Slack channel when it creates one.
- **Archive Timing:** Controls when Ashby automatically archives the Slack channel once the candidate moves to a terminal state (Hired or Archived). Options are:
  - *Immediately:* Ashby archives the channel as soon as the candidate reaches a terminal state.
  - *Delayed:* Ashby archives the channel after a configurable amount of time (hours or days), set in the **Archive Delay** field, following the candidate reaching a terminal state, up to a maximum of 30 days. This gives the hiring team a window to complete any wrap-up conversation before Ashby closes the channel.

:::hint{type="warning"}
You cannot enable the automatic creation of Slack channels globally from Scheduling Defaults. This is intentional — enabling channels globally would create channels for every interview, including early-stage screens where a dedicated channel is rarely needed. Instead, Scheduling Defaults lets you pre-configure how channels look and who Ashby invites when it creates them, while you make the decision to create a channel at the individual Interview Plan activity level or at the point of manual scheduling.
:::

# Direct booking & candidate availability

:::hint{type="info"}
These settings apply to any Direct Booking or Candidate Availability requests you create based on this schedule.
:::

Direct Booking requests allow candidates to schedule a time to interview from appointment slots determined by interviewers' calendar availability and any meeting hours you define. You can use it only for schedules with a single event.&#x20;
Candidate Availability requests allow candidates to submit one or more timeslots during which they are available. You can then view these times while using Manual Schedule to schedule a preferred time for both you and the candidate.

## Available Times

The following settings can be configured in the **Available Times** section of the **Direct Booking & Candidate Availability** tab of your scheduling defaults.

![The available times settings for scheduling defaults.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_nJPoXMjeqOJsmUm3Bvl4_scheduling-defaults-available-times.jpg)

- **Minimum Scheduling Notice (Hours):&#x20;**&#x44;etermines the earliest time a candidate can select (starting from the current date).
- **Rolling Days Available:** Determines the range of dates available to a candidate on a meeting request.
- **Direct Booking Availability Increments (Minutes):** Determines the frequency of the available timeslots for this event when a candidate schedules via a Direct Booking Link.
- **Minimum Days of Availability:&#x20;**&#x44;etermines the minimum number of days the candidate must select when submitting times via a Candidate Availability Link.
- **Allow Candidates to Suggest Times?** Candidates can share their availability if they cannot find a suitable time when scheduling with a direct booking link.

## Candidate-Facing Options

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidate-facing options determine options that allow the candidate to add additional information or reach out via email when using a direct booking link or candidate availability link.
:::

![This image shows the Candidate-Facing Options section, where you can enable the Show Email Button To Candidate? and Allow Candidates To Add an Availability Note? options.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lL7aMKkiOfL0O4d--nOf-_candidate-facing-options-in-scheduling-defaults.jpg)

- **Show Email Button To Candidates?&#x20;**&#x57;hen enabled, candidates will see an option to email the meeting organizer associated with the direct booking or candidate availability link. This can be found when clicking the three dots in the top-right corner of the booking confirmation page or when clicking `Can't Find a Time?` during scheduling.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZL5HdOZ253jxbv6NrinyK_emailing-the-meeting-organizer.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2136" height="802" darkWidth="2136" darkHeight="802" alt="The option to email the meeting organizer on the scheduling confirmation page." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Allow Candidates To Add an Availability Note?** When enabled, candidates can add a note when submitting their availability.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GRHxhGqwjtRsArEAEnVbm_adding-a-note-to-candidate-availability.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1990" height="1448" darkWidth="1990" darkHeight="1448" alt="The option to submit a note along with the candidate availability." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
The note will appear within the activity. Hover over `Note` to view the note information and a timestamp.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5XCm2kWlypbeowMmNfhvm_zight-2026-08-03-at-120525-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1454" height="458" darkWidth="1454" darkHeight="458" alt="Hovering over the Note option to view the note." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Alternatively, open up the activity details using the arrow on the right-hand side of the activity to view the availability and the note history.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dcUeo7L7rxkh_W3f4VSyp_notes-on-the-open-activity-details.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1460" height="864" darkWidth="1460" darkHeight="864" alt="The open activity details showing the note and candidate availability" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
The note will also appear with the candidate column on the interview calendar when manually scheduling the interview. Hover over the `Note` button to view it.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Gs0ZCrwQkYnbtafl78sd3_zight-2026-08-04-at-43435-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2506" height="954" darkWidth="2506" darkHeight="954" alt="Viewing the note when manually scheduling the candidate. " showCaption="false" indent="1"}

## Meeting buffers

:::hint{type="info"}
Meeting buffers add protected time around booked interviews to prevent back-to-back scheduling.
:::

![Meeting buffer settings for scheduling defaults.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9KmLEbKPHEsbrbSlo3HwZ_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-14-at-14213-pm.png)

- **Pre-Meeting Buffer (Minutes):** Blocks time before a booked interview that cannot be scheduled.
- **Post-Meeting Buffer (Minutes):** Blocks time after a booked interview that cannot be scheduled.

After a candidate books a Direct Booking interview, meeting buffer windows appear as unavailable on interviewers' calendars in **Quick Schedule**.

## Reschedule limits

Reschedule limits control how many times and how close to the interview a candidate can self-reschedule via their booking confirmation link. These settings create a default value for each job's interview plan, but you can override or adjust them at the interview plan level if desired.

![Reschedule limit settings for scheduling defaults.](https://images.archbee.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CLNJfJTCW_BNpv_wwxw75_backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-06-04-at-24349-pm.jpg?format=webp)

- **Maximum Number of Reschedules:** Sets a cap on the total number of times a candidate can reschedule a given interview. Setting this to zero prevents any candidate-initiated rescheduling entirely. Leaving the field blank means there is no limit.
- **Reschedule Cutoff Window (Hours):** Blocks self-serve rescheduling within a specified number of hours before the interview start time. For example, setting this to 24 means a candidate cannot reschedule if the interview is less than 24 hours away. Leaving the field blank means there is no cutoff.

If you configure both limits, Ashby blocks rescheduling as soon as either condition is met. When Ashby blocks a candidate, it directs them to contact the coordinator or organizer directly to reschedule. Only candidate-initiated reschedules count toward the Maximum Number of Reschedules; manual reschedules a recruiter performs do not consume a slot.

# Reminders

The **Reminders** tab is where you configure pre-interview reminders for both candidates and interviewers, as well as scheduling reminders triggered when candidates have not yet acted on a Direct Booking or Candidate Availability link.

![The reminders tab settings for scheduling defaults.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4NUJEbhhcxSvJeWCX7axY_scheduling-defaults-acent-ashby-2026-02-02-at-25930-pm.jpg)

- **Interview Reminders:** Ashby sends these to candidates and interviewers ahead of a scheduled interview:
  - You can send candidate reminders via email only.
  - You can send interviewer reminders via email, or via Slack if the Slack integration is active.
  - For each reminder, configure: the delivery channel (Send), the sender address (From), how far in advance to send it (When), and the email template to use (Using Template).
- **Candidate Scheduling Reminders** — Ashby sends these automatically when a candidate has not yet taken action on a link:
  - **Availability Request Reminder:** Triggers when the candidate has not submitted their availability by the configured time after Ashby sends the request.
  - **Direct Booking Reminder:** Triggers when the candidate has not used their Direct Booking link to schedule by the configured time after Ashby sends it.

Reminders you configure in Scheduling Defaults serve as the baseline for all interviews. You can override them on individual Schedule Interview Activities within an Interview Plan, and adjust them when manually scheduling an interview. Any activity-level reminder configuration includes a Reset option to revert to these defaults.

:::hint{type="info"}
More information on configuring interview reminders can be found at [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

# Automation

The **Automation** tab contains settings that control how Ashby handles automated interviewer management and scheduling workflows. Settings here apply by default across all interview schedules, and you can override them at the Interview Plan level.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This tab is only available for organizations that are on an Enterprise plan, or that have purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1). See the linked article for more information.
:::

![Automation settings for scheduling defaults](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3pmwwUHa3RJNzoap2U-ja_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-14-at-23055-pm.png)

- **Automatically Replace Interviewer on Decline?:** When toggled on, Ashby automatically replaces a declining interviewer with another eligible member from the interviewer pool assigned to that slot.
- **Cutoff:** Sets how many hours before the interview start time auto-replace still triggers. Ashby does not act automatically on declines it receives within the cutoff window. You can use the default cutoff (24 hours) or set a custom value.
- **Generate suggested schedules when availability is submitted?:** Controls parameters used when Ashby proposes candidate interview schedules:
  - **Allow Breaks:** When enabled, Ashby may include gaps between interview events when generating proposed schedules.
  - **Maximum Days to Schedule:** Sets the maximum number of days over which Ashby can spread a multi-day interview schedule.

# FAQs

### Why can't I format candidate calendar defaults?

Each email provider has different standards around formatting calendar invites; we've disabled formatting for candidate invites to create the best experience for all candidates.

### Can I pull my interview locations from my job locations list?

No, interview locations are different from job locations. You set interview locations within the Communications tab of your interview activity; they can be a custom location, a phone number, or video conferencing (Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, or Zoom).

[title] How are interview time zones determined and how do I change them?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

The interview’s primary timezone is automatically determined by the timezone of the user who generated the interview activity. This typically happens by moving the candidate forward to the next stage in the interview process or manually creating a new interview. However, the person who creates the interview activity may not be the same person or in the same time zone as the one who ultimately schedules or attends the interview.

&#x20;In order to ensure that timezones show correctly for interviewers, you can manually change the primary interview timezone for that specific schedule interview activity.

The candidate's time zone is determined by the candidate's location in their profile; however, this can be changed or set in the same place as setting the primary interview timezone.

&#x20;Follow the instructions below to update the primary interview and candidate timezones:

1. &#x20;Navigate to an existing schedule interview activity under the candidate's **Activities & Progress** feed and select `Schedule` > `View all scheduling options`, or manually start scheduling a new interview.
2. &#x20;On the next screen, navigate to the **Timezones** tab. Adjust the `Primary interview timezone` and `Candidate timezone` fields as needed.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/W34eM-CeKktYtPJiDgFAA_schedule-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-28-at-35532-pm.jpg" size="84" width="801" height="396" position="center" darkWidth="801" darkHeight="396" showCaption="false"}

3. Calendar invites will display in each recipient's own calendar timezone. You can preview invites under the **Communications** settings as you complete the scheduling workflow.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
If the event description includes an `Interview Panel Summary` token, the summary will show times in interview's primary timezone for interviewers. For the candidate, they will show in the candidate's timezone if available.
:::


[title] Assigning Interviewers
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

This article explains how to assign interviewers to interviews in Ashby. It covers setting up interviewers on the schedule interview activity in your job's interview plan, as well as how to assign interviewers during the scheduling process itself — including when no interviewers were pre-configured.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are an interviewer, we recommend reading [Getting Started for Interviewers](docId:2_WbM9Pju_SOWws1jhpZZ).
:::

# Setting up interviewers in the interview plan

We recommend watching the video below for a full step-by-step guide. The written information below serves as a summary.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f667f36301254e87b55cfa285c6e8ead"}

When setting up schedule interview activities, click **Interviewers** within **Configure** to add interviewers. From there you can build your panel using the **Interviewer Slot** and **Employees** options.

:::hint{type="info"}
More on schedule interview activities at [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

## Adding interviewer slots

You can create a slot using the `Add Interviewer Slot` button and determine the total number of interviewers that can be on your interview panel.

Adding interviewer slots uses AND logic, meaning each identified interviewer participates. The `AND` between each slot indicates that a user assigned to interviewer slot #1 is on the panel, along with a user assigned to interviewer slot #2.

![In this example, the candidate will only see times when both interviewers are available to take the interview together.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7a74311fab0d3769cb3221b06a61306e.png "In this example, the candidate will only see times when both interviewers are available to take the interview together.")

### How multiple interviewers and load balancing are handled in Ashby

If you have multiple interviewing slots with users assigned to each slot, the availability shown is based on the times that each combination of interviewers from your interviewer slots are available.&#x20;

If multiple users are assigned to one interview slot, the candidate sees the availability for all possible interviewers.&#x20;

The interview is assigned based on the date and time selected. If multiple interviewers assigned to the same slot are available at the selected time, the interview is assigned to the interviewer with the fewest interviews. All interviews scheduled in the past 30 days and the next 30 days are considered in the interview count.

## Adding specific employees as interviewers

This drop-down is where you assign who can be booked for the interviewer slot in question. You can assign multiple employees to an interviewer slot if anyone from a certain group of employees can take that slot to interview a candidate.

You see `OR` between selected users, showing that either Interviewer 1 or Interviewer 2 takes that specific interviewer slot on the panel.

![In this example, the candidate will see the availability for each interviewer and the interviewer will be assigned based on the interview time selected.](https://cdn.zappy.app/53782de8ff05ed454f3805d45581b3d9.png "In this example, the candidate will see the availability for each interviewer and the interviewer will be assigned based on the interview time selected.")

You can also combine AND and OR logic on the same panel. For example, if one specific interviewer must always be on the panel but their co-interviewer can be one of two people, add a second interviewer slot and assign both options to it. The first slot uses AND logic (that interviewer is always included), while the second slot uses OR logic (either of the assigned employees takes that slot depending on availability).

## Adding interviewers based on hiring team role

If you want to assign interviewers based on their role in the hiring team, or set the interviewer as the user who moved the candidate to this particular stage, those are also options in the `Employees` dropdown when creating interviewer slots.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4RCUOu_qHrxog48eSk-Nt_marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-02-13-at-105132-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If no interviewers are assigned to the schedule interview activity, the interview activity may be created on the candidate profile without an interviewer. You can read more about this behavior in [Why are interviewers missing from a scheduled interview event?](#)
:::

## Adding interviewer pools

Want to assign an interviewer pool instead? Change the `Specific Employees` dropdown to `Employees from Pool`, then determine your pool or pools to include. You can also specify whether only qualified employees, only trainees, or all employees in the pool or pools can be selected to be assigned to this slot.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2EZt3UhcS36MYpoLZPFwI_marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-02-13-at-105546-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
**What's an interviewer pool?**
You can set up interviewer pools to group your employees and assign them to interviewer slots more easily. For example, you could add those who are in a specific timezone to a pool and assign that pool to an interviewer slot to pull interviewers who have suitable availability to interview candidates for a role in a specific location. You can read more on configuring pools at [Interviewer Pools](docId:3NHQZ_eQLHGVlgjxgaZdJ).
:::

# Assigning interviewers during the scheduling process

How interviewers are assigned at scheduling time depends on how the schedule interview activity was configured in the interview plan, as well as whether you are manually scheduling or using auto-schedule (available only for Enterprise customers or those who have purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) ):

- **Specific employees assigned in the interview plan** — the interviewer panel is pre-populated automatically when you schedule.
- **A hiring team role or interviewer pool assigned in the interview plan** — an interviewer is selected automatically with auto-schedule, or must be manually selected based on the role or pool configuration.
- **No interviewers assigned in the interview plan** — the activity appears on the candidate's profile without an interviewer. Interviewers must be manually added regardless of whether manual or auto-scheduling is used.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If no interviewers are assigned to the schedule interview activity, the interview activity may be created on the candidate profile without an interviewer. You can read more about this behavior in [Why are interviewers missing from a scheduled interview event?](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo)
:::

You can also create an ad hoc interview outside of the interview plan using the `+ New Interview` button on the candidate's profile, which lets you assign interviewers directly at scheduling time.

## Using the '+ New Interview' button: quick schedule and direct booking links

:::hint{type="info"}
Two interview options are discussed here: generating a direct booking link and quick scheduling. The following guides cover both options for instant scheduling via the `+ New Interview` link on a candidate profile:

[Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM)

[Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN)
:::

### Instant direct booking links

When using the `+ New Interview` option to generate a booking link, interviewers can be assigned on the pop-up that follows after choosing the `Create Direct Booking Link` option. Choose users from the **Interviewer** drop-down as part of the interview's settings. Each interviewer you assign via this route is assigned a slot on the panel.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/7e20c6d86b2a453381aa4aba23aea4e6"}

### Manual schedule

If you schedule the candidate directly via the `Schedule New Interview` option, you can add interviewer slots and assign interviewers to them accordingly. You can also add alternates for each interviewer slot. Once added, you can view the alternates' calendars when selecting an interview time to compare their availability with the current interviewer's. You can then opt to switch out the current interviewer for the alternate if needed.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/2aacef2c1e68483ea17ee68922efda87"}

# Changing or removing interviewers

Interviewers on scheduled interviews can be changed by clicking `Reschedule` on the activity in the candidate's profile and selecting `Manual Reschedule`. &#x20;

![Highlights the Reschedule button on the interview activity in the candidate profile](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JB2a9A10R3mog4ynAAFKP_shelley-pearce-marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-02-17-at-101040-am.jpg)

Then, click the trash can icon next to the interviewer you wish to update.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NNWdPXI3KkWazmfwLyGDx_luz-lueilwitz-klein-summary-ashby-2026-09-08-at-120610-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="480" height="408" darkWidth="480" darkHeight="408" alt="Points out the trach can icon next to the interviewer to update and highlights the available update options including Clear user and Remove slot" showCaption="false"}

You can select `Clear user` to remove the interviewer and select a new one, or `Remove slot` to reduce the number of interviewers in the session overall.

:::hint{type="info"}
See more details on updating interview details in [Rescheduling and Canceling Interviews](docId\:W5tqq19dz2ecykj7TjS8m) .
:::

# FAQ

### Can I make a note of any requirements or requests from specific interviewers on their profile?

Yes! On the [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) page, select the user in question and navigate to the **Interviewer Info** tab on their profile. From there, you can add any requirements or requests to the **Preferences** field. This information is then available when scheduling an interview.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/49bbf8b6f311e76145fd786397c62143.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/26e2ed0c1b04598e88032f910a7e7705.png)

### Can interviewer information (like their role or LinkedIn profile URL) be added to the candidate-facing interview details?

Yes, you can set interviewer information like their role and social links to be visible to the interviewing candidate. Head to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Scheduling Communication](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/scheduling-communication) and enable the `Include Job Title` and `Social Links in Agenda?` options.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bb07f8b72338ba24426676f52655d703.png)

Once enabled, if you want certain social links (or social links for a specific interviewer) to not show within the interview event details, head to the interviewer's user profile in **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees** and scroll to the **Social Links** section on the **Basic Info** tab. From there, you can click on the eye icon beside a social link to set it to not show to the candidate.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fe77bec26d484de5c6b455aa31264969.png)

Interviewers can add details like their job title and social links in the **Personal Info** section of their [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info). This information can also be added on their behalf in the **Basic Info** tab of their profile on the **Employees** page.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b34375455c4721933c40183bed1996a1.png)

Once their information has been added, their job title and social links show on both the confirmation page when the candidate books via a direct booking link and when the Interview Panel Summary token is used.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4a478125645bdc05c93084d620d50e68.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f4dfcb796899da8403e5d1909576c511.png)

### Why are interviewers missing from a scheduled interview event?

When a candidate is moved into a stage that triggers an interview activity, the activity is created immediately based on the current configuration of the interview plan's activity. If no interviewers are assigned at that time, the interview activity is created without interviewers.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FqpFv6hKcISqMamSbkfaJ_product-documentation-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-04-03-at-105624-am.jpg" size="70" width="1049" height="488" position="center" caption="Schedule Interview Activity with no Interviewers" alt="Ashby interview scheduling interface displaying a 30-minute 'Intro Call with Hiring Manager' under a phone screen schedule, with configuration options visible but no interviewers assigned." showCaption="true" darkWidth="1049" darkHeight="488"}

If you add an interviewer to the schedule interview activity in the interview plan, that update can appear on the interview activity on the job consideration. However, if the scheduling process has already started and a different interviewer has already been selected, Ashby does not override that selected interviewer with the newly added one.

### Do interviewers receive reminders to leave feedback for an interview?

Feedback reminders can be configured to be sent via email or Slack. For more on this, check out [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR) .

### Can I set limits for how many interviews and interviewer can conduct per day or week?

Yes!  See [Setting Interviewer Limits and Pausing Interviewers](docId\:O6_1Cxuwi30KVzhN6eFzV) for instructions.

[title] Sequences: InMail and Connection Request Stages
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

You can create sequences with additional stage types like LinkedIn InMail or Connection Requests. Check out [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4) for a full guide on setting up a sequence.

# Video overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/392c742aab6c4578a98f676ab193302d?sid=4f74936c-0a3c-468a-b91d-602ed7bcfb4b"}

# Permissions & access

See the chart below for information on the permissions needed to enroll candidates in a sequence.

| Access Role                                                      | Can enroll candidates in a sequence? |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ |
| Limited Access                                                   | ❌                                    |
| Agency User                                                      | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked with an agency) | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                        | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                             | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                                 | ✅                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                          | ✅                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                  | ✅                                    |
| Organization Admin                                               | ✅                                    |

# Sequence setup

When setting up the stages within your sequences, you can select the stage type as any of the following:

- **Email:** Send an email to a candidate.
- **LinkedIn InMail:** Notify you or a team member to request a Connection on LinkedIn.
- **LinkedIn Connection:** Notify you or a team member to send an InMail on LinkedIn.

![Shows the sequence setup window with the type dropdown expanded to show available options, including Email, LinkedIn InMail, and LinkedIn Connection.](https://cdn.zappy.app/5ff18dd98e2c62312913214b6070dc03.png)

# Taking action on the notification

If you set up a stage type to either LinkedIn InMail or LinkedIn Connection, when that stage is reached, you or the sender specified when enrolling candidates are notified. You receive both an email notification and a task on your home page to send the connection request or InMail.

![Shows the home page sequence task for a recipient.](https://cdn.zappy.app/1865bddfc4dfe89f55901d42dbe2554d.png)

Clicking the task on your home page takes you to the candidate's LinkedIn profile. The email also contains a link to the candidate's profile so you can quickly take action.

The LinkedIn Connection message or InMail copy shows in a pop-up once on the candidate profile.

1. **Copy:** Copy the text from the template to add to your connection request or InMail message. You can either click `Copy` or click the text itself to copy it.
2. **Skip Stage:** Opt to skip this stage and continue the sequence.
3. **Mark Complete:** Confirm that this step has been taken and the sequence can continue.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2f1f37ba35576d3cc9ba3d7283e72c4b.png)

# Logging LinkedIn outreach and responses in Ashby

:::hint{type="info"}
If the message is sent as part of a sequence, it automatically syncs to the candidate's profile when you click `Mark Complete` on the pop-up.
:::

Any manual LinkedIn outreach and responses received can be recorded in Ashby. This can be done:

- On the candidate's profile.
- Via the Ashby Chrome Extension.
- When setting a response on a sequence.

You can select the activity type (outreach or response), along with the outreach type (LinkedIn InMail or LinkedIn Connection). You also have the option to add the text used in the outreach message.

The first manually logged LinkedIn reply is also counted in the Sequence Reply Rate report in [Sourcing Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/home) if a sequence is running for the candidate in question. A message shows whether the response has been linked to a sequence or not before logging the activity.

## Logging activity on a candidate profile

To log outreach or a response from the candidate's profile:

1. Navigate to the **Feed** tab on the candidate's profile.
2. Select `Log Outreach` or `Log Response` from the action bar at the top of the feed.
3. Specify the outreach type and add the message text if needed.
4. Click `Log [activity]` to confirm and add the activity to the feed.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/akHY7COGpzoSw8KLSyK2F_image.png)

## Logging activity on the Chrome Extension

While viewing the candidate's LinkedIn profile, click the `Log Activity` button at the bottom of the extension.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/bbdc3edf7ca19bdb7bf8e70adc36f5ff.png" size="60" alt="Screenshot of the Ashby Chrome Extension showing the Log Activity pop-up with outreach type options and the Log Activity button highlighted." isUploading="false" width="372" height="782" darkWidth="372" darkHeight="782" showCaption="false"}

On the following `Log Activity` screen, select whether you're recording outreach or a response, the outreach type, and add the message text if needed. Click `Log Activity` to confirm.

Once confirmed, you see your message on the **Feed** tab in the Chrome extension. The Chrome Extension has a Last Communication widget on the **Profile** tab so you can check the last outreach or response activity there too.

## Logging activity on the sequence record

When setting the response as Interested or Not Interested manually, set a Response Type (LinkedIn InMail, LinkedIn Connection, or Email) alongside the response status. You also have the option to add the message text. Click `Set Response` to confirm.

![Screenshot of a sequence record in Ashby with the Set Response pop-up open, showing fields for Response Type, Response Status (Interested or Not Interested), and optional Response Text.](https://cdn.zappy.app/cf972413eca4b8a8f11028e16d33ba34.png)

# Reporting on sequences with LinkedIn outreach

We have a range of default templates for sourcing reporting in the [Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/templates) section of **Reports**. The templates allow you to track outreach activities sent and how many received responses, both by outreach type (initial, follow-up, etc.) and by outreach activity (via email, LinkedIn InMail, LinkedIn Connection).

![Screenshot of the Report Templates page in Ashby with the Sourcing section highlighted, showing outreach activity report templates including Overall Outreach Activities by Type, All Outreach Activities by Channel, and First Outreach Sent by Sender.](https://cdn.zappy.app/99e57c5f200e7d44fcd7c9ab47170d01.png)

## Custom reporting

You can filter by Outreach Activity's Type or set Outreach Activities as a subject to specifically pull initial and follow-up LinkedIn outreach statistics or activities for custom reporting.

![Screenshot of the All Outreach Activities by Channel report in Ashby showing a stacked bar chart with outreach counts broken down by type, including email, LinkedIn InMail, and LinkedIn Connection outreach, over time.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7aeb023144c4961dc070d0609ceb1a8e.png)

## Sequence home reporting

The first manually logged LinkedIn reply is also counted in the Sequence Reply Rate report generated in [Sourcing Home](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/home) if a sequence is running for the candidate in question.

![Screenshot of the Sourcing Home page in Ashby showing the Sequence Reply Rate report with a bar chart displaying sequence reply counts over time.](https://cdn.zappy.app/9d2b3bf356439cb5aa974a3e1affc5ff.png)

# FAQ

### Can you automatically trigger an email sequence after initially sending an InMail if there is no response?

Yes! Once the stage is marked as complete for sending an InMail or skipped, the sequence continues to run and sends out an email as expected when reaching that next stage.

### Can I start a sequence with a LinkedIn InMail or LinkedIn Connection?

You can, yes. Previously, the first stage needed to be an automated email but that's no longer required.

### My sequence status has a Paused status and won't resume when I click Resume Sequence. Why?

If the sequence's next step is a LinkedIn InMail or connection step, then the step needs to be marked as completed before the sequence can continue. Clicking `Resume Sequence` will not work in this case. More on marking a step as complete in [Sequences: InMail and Connection Request Stages](docId\:Qbf62_UsXyctMQzHE07HA).

[title] What's the difference between interview plans and interviews?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

To automate areas of your interview process, we recommend setting up interview plans, interviews and schedule activities. These three tools work together to set up your candidate pipeline, structure the interview and feedback process and prompt you when a candidate needs scheduling.

## Overview

An interview plan sets up the pipeline of your interview process, so you can add in or amend the stages a candidate will go through from when they are added as a lead through to when they are hired. These can be set up in [Interview Plans](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interview-plans). Only one interview plan can be assigned to a job at a time.

The interview tool allows you to set up templates that include a briefing for interviewers and assign a feedback form for them to complete post-interview. They can be configured in [Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews).

## Interview Plans

:::hint{type="info"}
For an overview on how interview plans work, check out [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux)
:::

Interview plans determine the stages your candidates will pass through when interviewing with your team. Interview plans are created in Admin, then assigned to jobs. All jobs require an interview plan. You can see the stages of your interview plan displayed in the Candidate Pipeline section of the role it’s assigned to.

### Viewing an interview plan setup

Here’s an example of an interview plan:

You can see that it’s split into three sections; Lead, Active and Completed.

Lead: These stages are used for sourced candidates, both when finding suitable candidates and when reaching out to them to gauge their interest. Please note that the New Lead, Reached Out and Replied stages cannot be removed from an interview plan.

Active: These are stages that reflect your hiring process from when an application is received, right up to an offer being extended.

Completed: These are your stages that show the application result - either Archived (or rejected), or Hired.

### Viewing an interview plan on a job

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When you click into a job, you can see these stages laid out in the Candidate Pipeline tab. You can click on the stage sections at the top of the Candidate Pipeline view to view your leads within the Leads section, and view candidates in Application Revie&#x77;*,* your Active stages and those who are in the Offer stage. Hired and Archived candidates are also accessible via the Hired and Archived buttons.

When clicking on an option, you’ll be able to see the stages you’ve set up. In Active for example, you can see each of the interview stages that were added to your interview plan and then the candidates listed in each stage.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6faa1880f726f9e89871a3e8ec5c6a8e.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/48f887ae7dcff91795ef1b49312f682c.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b3a3fbb9f73eda2e303068e234177a8b.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0b90bbc84934cff25e4f2a4dd2e1bfdc.png)


:::
::::

:::hint{type="success"}
If you have multiple interview plans, we’d recommend setting up a grouped interview plan. This will allow you to categorize interview stages to allow for easy reporting in the future. You can find information on configuring this at [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq).
:::

## Interviews

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on setting up interviews, check out [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR)
:::

Interviews allow you to create interview instructions for your interviewers and assign feedback forms for them to fill out once the interview has been completed. These templates are used when setting up schedule activities and using the `Add shared interview` option.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/75a64d194c244eaf9eb4b2a9c5b42ce7"}

Once an interview is scheduled, the interviewer will see the upcoming interview on their home page.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
They can click on the interview to see the date and time of the interview, the briefing, the feedback form to be completed and any previous feedback (account settings permitting). Once the interview is completed, they will see a task on their home page to fill out the feedback form assigned.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d5a8a5d475f8980fde6a204bb8eb52f8.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/364d64ccd7f6c7130ff73cc9d7ce60a1.png)


:::
::::

## Schedule Activities

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on setting up schedule activities, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

Schedule Interview Activities can be set up on the Interview Plan of a job or job template. When adding a schedule interview activity to your interview plan, once a candidate is moved to the stage with that activity, you’ll be prompted to schedule them in for an interview.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a3f8e262a7ec4f9b85689dc2b3cab3e1"}

When adding the activity to your interview plan, you can assign interviewers, assign an interview that you created in [Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews), and configure your settings in advance. As such, once you receive the activity prompt for a candidate when they move from stage to stage, you can email out a direct booking or candidate availability link, or book them in manually from that prompt.

[title] Interviewer Training
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Scheduling Add-On/

Interviewer Training is designed to streamline the process of training and qualifying interviewers within your organization.

:::hint{type="warning"}
- Unlimited Interviewer Training is a part of the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) .&#x20;
- This add-on is included in the **Enterprise** plan and can be purchased as an add-on for those on the **Plus** plan.&#x20;
- The Plus plan allows one interview pool with a training path without purchasing the add-on.
- Interviewer Training and the Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on are not available to customers on the Foundations or Legacy Plus plans.&#x20;
:::

## Overview

Interviewer Training offers a comprehensive solution for training and managing interviewers directly in Ashby. It ensures that interviewers are well-prepared and integrates seamlessly into the interview scheduling process.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/265e16213d394c88a1e93c2c74abd0a5"}

## Why should you use interviewer training?

As your organization grows, managing your interviewer pool will become increasingly complex. Having an efficient system for keeping track of who is qualified to conduct a given interview will help your Talent team remain efficient over time. Interviewer Training supports:

- Centralized Management: Easily manage and view all your interviewer pools, qualified members, and trainees from a single dashboard.
- Structured Training: Set up structured training plans with stages to ensure interviewers are adequately prepared.
- Flexible Scheduling: Specify the inclusion of trainees in interview schedules, allowing them to learn from fully qualified members.
- Automated Progress Tracking: Automatically move trainees to the next step in their training after completing an interview, with optional approval stages.

## Key terminology

Before diving in, here is some terminology and the related definitions

| **Term**             | **Definition**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Interviewer Pools    | Formerly known as Interviewer Tags, a pool is a group of Ashby users that can filtered for in an interviewer slot.                                                                                                                                |
| Interviewer Training | An add-on feature within Interviewer Pools, a series of one or more qualifying stages that trainees progress through by participating in interviews.                                                                                              |
| Interviewer Role     | The designation assigned to a trainee when they are scheduled for an interview based on their training stage. Current options are Shadow and Reverse Shadow. These appear as small icons next to the interviewer’s name on the candidate profile. |
| Qualified Member     | A user within a pool that is already trained.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Trainee              | A user within a pool that isn’t fully trained yet.                                                                                                                                                                                                |

## Setting up for interviewer training

In order to use the interview training feature, interviewer pools that contain your trainees must be set up first, along with the stages of your training program.

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Interviewer Pools](docId:3NHQZ_eQLHGVlgjxgaZdJ) for more information on initial setup. The instructions below detail adding trainees and interview stages.
:::

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interviewer Pools** to view all existing pools, qualified members, and trainees.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5ypLBex12SnfJZ5WwYVZa_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-125228-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="857" height="683" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Select an existing interview pool, or create a new one, that you'd like to add trainees to.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
A **trainee** is a person that needs to be trained before being considered qualified to lead interviews.
:::

3. Navigate to the pool's **Settings** tab and toggle `Requires Training?` on (if not on already).

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AMW9buxBci_M9wC6AfuqR_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-40046-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="834" height="705" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. When you turn on training for the first time, you'll see new fields for training stages populate on the page. &#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OxK1QCeeyOpnjs_x35Fk6_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-41004-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="835" height="541" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Update the fields within the stages to define your program:
   - **Interviewer Role**: Determine whether at this stage, the interview will Shadow or Reverse Shadow.
     - **Shadow**: The trainee watches and learns in the interview.
     - **Reverse Shadow**: The trainee leads the interview with supervision.
   - **Interviews Required**: Indicate how many interviews the trainee must participate in during this stage before moving forward.
   - **Require Approval Before Proceeding?**: Check this box if you would like someone to manually approve their progression to the next stage. If unchecked, trainees will automatically move forward.
   - **+ Add Stage**: If you need additional stages, click this button to add them. You can add as many as you need.
   - **Archive**: If you need to remove a stage, you can click `Archive` in the top right corner of the stage.
6. Once the training stages are configured, navigate back to the **Interviews** tab to add your trainees. Under the **Trainees** section, select `+Add Trainee`.
7. Add the trainee by name, identify where in the training stages they should begin (e.g. if someone has already done some shadowing, you can move them to a further stage), and update how many interviews they have completed in that stage.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xpohc7eJQbxS9hJ4xVT5W_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-41832-pm.jpg)



8. Hit `Submit` to add them. Repeat for additional trainees.

## Adding trainees to interview slots

When you want to add trainees to an interview:

1. Navigate to the **Job > Interview Plan > Schedule Interview activity** and `Modify` or create a new one.
2. Determine the interview event that you'd like to add the trainee to.
3. On the schedule interview event, click `+ Add Interviewer Slot` to add a qualified interviewer first. Use the dropdown to select qualified employees from a pool or a specific employee.
4. Click `+ Add Interviewer Slot` again to add a trainee slot. For a trainee slot, you must select a pool, and if you would like only trainees to fill that spot, set the third dropdown to **Trainees Only**.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1BcZqA7YSwgIajFdMkJN5_head-ux-designer-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-114214-am.jpg)

## Scheduling interviews with trainees

When moving a candidate to a stage with an interview, the Schedule Interview activity will show both interviewer slots and trainee slots, as defined on the interview event.

If manually scheduling the interview and there is more than one trainee in the pool, you will be able to select the trainee who will participate. If using auto-scheduling or there is only one trainee, they will be assigned automatically based on availability. Trainees will be labeled with the interview pool they're in ("Bar Raiser"), and role ("(S)"), and you can hover over it to see how far they've gone in the current stage.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IM5yi3eDLzPP99D3LQSV5_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-43847-pm.jpg" size="66" width="474" height="491" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
While it's typical, you are not required to include a qualified member on an interview with a trainee. For an interview to count towards a trainee's progress, they must be assigned to a trainee slot for the interview.
:::

## Viewing scheduled interviews

Once scheduled, trainees will have a tag indicating their training stage on the candidate profile.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/emH_cJWkG94-L6NeyRDhd_albertha-kuhic-schinner-group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-44402-pm.jpg" size="94" width="772" height="257" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Interview participants can view their roles (e.g., reverse shadow) on the home page and within the interview briefing. This role is visible wherever relevant.

## Training stage progression & management

After an interview is completed, it counts toward the trainee's quota to move forward in the training stages. The interview will be credited as complete at the time the interview ends, rather than once feedback has been added or skipped by the trainee.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If a trainee declines an interview request, it will not be counted toward their progression.
:::

You can see current progress by navigating back to the interview pool they're in and looking them up. If the training stage requires approval, it will pause for approval once all requirements are met.

Once a trainee completes all stages they’ll move into your qualified members pool.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r-vl377AeNXHsi2kdUnUL_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-44917-pm.jpg)

Clicking `View Progress` will show you a summary of the interviews they have participated in during their training program.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/abyThjgxir-a5H_NAmC0U_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-45108-pm.jpg)

&#x20;Clicking the `Actions` button allows you to manually manage their progress as well as their membership within the pool.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tfEkTqQXMjk3yCOJl3tR-_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-45348-pm.jpg)

- **Update Training Progress:** Allows you to manually update the number of interviews they have completed, or move them forward or backward in stages.
- **Move to Qualified Members:** This will bypass the rest of the training and mark them as qualified.
- **Pause Membership:** While paused, employees cannot be assigned to interviews until they are unpaused.
- **Remove from Pool:** If the employee no longer belongs in this group, you can remove them by selecting this option.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What permission level does a user need to approve stage completion?

The approver must be an Organization Admin.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I pause an interviewer’s membership in a pool or stop them from being scheduled for any interviews?

You can, yes! You can either pause an interviewer within a specific pool (so they can’t be booked for interviews where that pool is assigned) or globally (so they aren’t automatically scheduled for any interviews).

**Pausing an interviewer from within a pool.**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To pause an interviewer’s membership in a pool, head to Admin>Interviewing & Scheduling>[Interviewer Pools](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviewer-tags) and click on the pool in question. Click `Actions` next to the interviewer in question, then click `Pause Membership`*.*

When an interviewer is paused, a Paused tag will show beside their name in the pool.

You can also unpause the interviewer at any time by clicking on them from within the interviewer pool again, and selecting `Resume Membership`*.*


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/358a39506fc8294a6302f52b263461a6.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9c5ed65dcdd4a70129eeddb6cf678cc8.png)
:::
::::

**Pausing an interviewer across all interviews**
Please note that the option to pause interviewers is only available on the Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you'd like to pause an interviewer for all interviews (for example, if the interviewer is on vacation), navigate to their user profile within Admin > Employees and head to the Interviewer Info tab. Turn on the `Pause Interviewer` option - you will also have the option to add a reason for the pause that will show up when a user tries to manually schedule that interviewer.&#x20;

You can also schedule an interviewer pause. Click `Set start date` to determine the date and time the pause should start. Click `Set end date` to determine when the pause should end. If you don't opt to set an end date, the pause will continue indefinitely until it is disabled on the user's profile.&#x20;

Click `Submit` to confirm the pause. You can switch the pause off at any time by switching off the `Pause Interviewer` option.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gP0798uYbcjzxy0QvWe0s_employees-acent-ashby-2026-01-26-at-41429-pm.jpg)



![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/G3Rma6-ZjbicpSzjOWlNr_employees-acent-ashby-2026-01-26-at-41506-pm.jpg)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can interviewers be notified when they’re enrolled in training and when they graduate?

Yes! You can set these up on a global level or for individual interview pools.

To set notifications up on a global level, head to Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interviewer Pools, and click on the `Settings` tab. From here, you can use the toggles to determine whether interviewers receive a notification when they’re enrolled and/or when they graduate.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cf3e8a3e88b5ab6268d2c228c1a486c9.png)

Once you toggle on the appropriate options, you’ll have the option of using the built-in email templates, or select your own. You’ll also have the option to preview the email.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/24b0ff3ae4a1650ef39893cf89439387.png)

**For an individual interviewer pool** you can click on the Notifications tab within the pool to toggle on the options to send email notifications when interviewers are enrolled and/or when they graduate.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ae40654367be9e2bdc8de45f5db820db.png)

Once you toggle on the appropriate options, you’ll have the option of using the built-in email templates, or select your own. You’ll also have the option to preview the email.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/24b0ff3ae4a1650ef39893cf89439387.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I've assigned a trainee slot linked to an interviewer pool to one of my interviewer activities but there are no trainees left in the pool - what happens now?

If a trainee interviewer slot for an interviewer pool is assigned to an interview and the specified pools no longer contain any trainees (e.g. all have graduated), the trainee slot will automatically be treated as optional when scheduling using direct booking. This ensures that direct booking links continue to work even if a trainee isn't available.
:::


[title] Feedback Forms and Interviews
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

In this article, you learn how to create feedback forms and interview templates. By default, the templates you create are available to all jobs. When you update these templates, all jobs linked to them are also updated.

# What's the difference between feedback forms and interviews?

| **Template Type** | **Description**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Feedback forms    | A standalone form where you capture interviewer ratings or scores for a candidate.<br />These are accessible as a part of an interview template and by clicking `More` > `Submit Feedback Without Interview` on a candidate profile.                                                                                                                                 |
| Interviews        | A set of interviewer instructions and where you assign the feedback form where you capture interviewer ratings of a candidate. These are accessible when scheduling one-off meetings with candidates and are also used as a part of the Schedule Interview activity. This is essentially where you can determine a briefing and the form that interviewers complete. |

In Ashby, you have the option to set up reusable templates in Admin and one-off objects on a per-job basis. We recommend creating templates, as this makes updating many jobs at once easy in the future.

:::hint{type="info"}
The best practice is to set up standalone feedback forms within **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Feedback Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-forms) and link them to interviews in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Shared Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews). That way, when you update the feedback form, any associated interviews are updated as well.
:::

# Permissions and access

Only Organization Admins can configure shared interviews and feedback forms by default. You can grant Elevated Access users permission to edit shared interviews and feedback forms if needed. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).

Feedback forms and shared interviews can be set up on all Ashby All-in-one plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Shared feedback forms

:::hint{type="info"}
If you want to reuse the same feedback form across multiple interviews, you can create shared feedback forms.
:::

Shared feedback forms are standalone pre-configured questionnaires for application reviewers and interviewers to fill out to rate a candidate.

## Create a shared feedback form

**To set up a feedback form:**

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Feedback Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-forms).
2. Click `+ New`, then enter a title for your form.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OGEWHaK9meEhPgrqIO7ZD_feedback-forms-ashby-2026-09-28-at-95313-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2954" height="506" darkWidth="2954" darkHeight="506" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows the Feedback Forms page of Ashby with the + New button highlighted."}

3. You can add sections to your form if you want to add structure to a form with a lot of questions (for example, a section per skill being tested).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/L5fA2StbT2__aWjcECpCF_add-section.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1032" height="1522" darkWidth="1032" darkHeight="1522" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="A feedback form with the Add Section button highlighted."}

4. You can then add fields to the feedback form by clicking `Add Question`. The following fields are supported:

- Short Answer
- Phone
- Email
- Multiple Choice
- Checkboxes
- Date
- Yes/No
- Number
- Score
- Other location
- Currency (an amount and a currency code)
- URL
- Long Formattable Answer

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vBbw5HR01rzJt2y9DQ13g_assessment-reflection-feedback-form-ashby-2026-09-28-at-95736-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1034" height="1584" darkWidth="1034" darkHeight="1584" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows a feedback form with the Add Question highlighted and the menu to pick a field type."}

Once you add a question, you can set it as Required or Private:

**Required:** An interviewer must complete this field when submitting feedback.
**Private:** Only those with Organization Admin access or Elevated Access - Admin Private access can see those fields when viewing or completing feedback. Private fields can be added for information like salary expectations.&#x20;

You can also take the following action with a feedback form question field:

- Click the link icon to link the field to a candidate custom field (more on this at [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN)).
- Click the eye icon to set conditions for the feedback form question field to show up (more on this at [Conditional Form Fields](docId:0Djc8ec1xuE0JLdgPOcfH))
- Click the copy icon to duplicate the feedback form question field.
- Click the trash icon to delete the feedback form question field.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MFEdidmJfQhRQVjS2leBl_assessment-reflection-feedback-form-ashby-2026-09-28-at-100055-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="922" height="282" darkWidth="922" darkHeight="282" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows the Required, Private and linking, conditions, duplicate and delete options."}

:::hint{type="info"}
If the feedback form order needs to be amended, click `Reorder` and then click and drag the questions and sections into place. Feedback form changes save automatically.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RMaQNXIdT87VT_AEEEISc_assessment-reflection-feedback-form-ashby-2026-09-28-at-100325-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1028" height="674" darkWidth="1028" darkHeight="674" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows a feedback form with the Reorder option highlighted and open."}
:::

### Best practices when designing feedback forms for use with AI features

Your organization may use Ashby's artificial intelligence (AI) features, such as [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z), to improve the objectivity and efficiency of generating feedback post-interview.

We recommend the following ways to optimize your feedback forms for use with AI features:

- **Phrase questions clearly:** The AI uses the question as a guide for the summary.
- **Include context:** Use the question description to provide instructions on what to include, how to format the answer, or what specific evidence to look for.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/twgxhXkUoMAEBXxWG7kAN_assessment-reflection-feedback-form-ashby-2026-09-28-at-100735-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="916" height="558" darkWidth="916" darkHeight="558" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows an example of a feedback form question with a description."}

Providing this context upfront ensures AI answers are relevant and saves time by capturing the data your team finds most valuable for hiring decisions.

## Use shared feedback forms

:::hint{type="info"}
You can link a feedback form to an interview and use it ad-hoc on a candidate profile.
:::

## Link a feedback form to an interview

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Shared Interviews** and click on the interview you want to link the feedback form to.
2. On the **Feedback Form** tab, click `Change Link` to switch out the feedback form for the newly created one.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5hgjkJwDjxz8w7F-GZYxP_change-link.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1052" height="498" darkWidth="1052" darkHeight="498" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows an interview open on the Feedback form tab with the Change Link button highlighted."}

3. If you used a custom feedback form for that interview previously, you see the option to `Delete & Link to Shared`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lgXB9K2Q-4BXQloXiZCaY_delete-and-link-to-shared.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1052" height="1296" darkWidth="1052" darkHeight="1296" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows an interview open on the Feedback form tab with the Delete & Link to Shared option highlighted."}

When you link a feedback form to an interview, that form appears on the interview briefing for any interviewer participating in that interview on the **Your Feedback** tab.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MAgIykgurUqpz5Eaj6dgs_interview-briefing-irene-mcintosh-ashby-2026-09-28-at-101248-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1312" height="924" darkWidth="1312" darkHeight="924" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows a record of an interview from the interviewer's perspective with the Your Feedback tab open and highlighted."}

## Use a feedback form on a candidate's profile

To submit feedback without it being associated with an interview scheduled through Ashby, navigate to the candidate's profile, then click `More` and `Submit Feedback` to fill out a feedback form.

You can also click `More` and `Request Feedback without Scheduling` to ask another user to add feedback for the candidate without scheduling an interview.

![The screenshot shows the candidate profile with the More menu open and the Request Feedback without Scheduling option highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iD_3GCQhEpuKrzdU8tW3U_request-feedback-without-scheduling.jpg)

# Shared interviews

Shared Interviews allow you to set up interviews that can be used across multiple jobs and stages, while custom interviews can only be set up and used for a specific job on a specific stage.

You can create new shared interview types in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Shared Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews), then reuse them across jobs.

## Create a shared interview

**To set up a shared interview:**

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Shared Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews).
2. Click `+ New`, then enter a title and click `Create`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RQBpMRGgSEYNfaXtVsdhy_shared-interviews-ashby-2026-09-28-at-103433-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1693" height="317" darkWidth="1693" darkHeight="317" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows the Shared Interviews page with the + New button highlighted."}

3. In the **Overview** tab, you can set the following:
   - **Internal Title:** Set an internal title for your interview. Only those scheduling and interviewing can see this interview title.
   - **Candidate-facing Title:** Set a title that the candidate sees on their candidate invite and when scheduling.
   - **Groups:** Set up groups to sort your interviews into categories.
   - **Is Feedback Requested?:** Determine if interviewers are requested to leave feedback. **This setting applies to all interviewers assigned to the interview.**
   - **Is Feedback Required?:** Determine whether feedback is required or optional for this interview type. If feedback is required, interviewers receive reminders via email automatically to provide feedback. You can adjust interviewer reminder settings in **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Interviewer Notifications](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/notifications/).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7fkeAXH-AOX9vTk5PvNnv_assessment-review-interview-ashby-2026-09-28-at-103533-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="522" height="335" darkWidth="522" darkHeight="335" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows an interview open on the Overview tab."}

4. In the **Instructions** tab, add information for your interviewers like specific interview questions and any additional details they need while interviewing. Instructions here show in the Briefing section of the interview, so any further briefing details for this specific interview type should be added here.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rdVh7L96ixK-rvuFci4mv_assessment-review-interview-ashby-2026-09-28-at-103623-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="524" height="241" darkWidth="524" darkHeight="241" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows an interview open on the Instructions tab."}

5. In the **Feedback Form** tab, create a custom feedback form or link to an existing feedback form you've already configured.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/S-WvPxy5KwJCJfhFGNWJB_assessment-review-interview-ashby-2026-09-28-at-103644-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="527" height="497" darkWidth="527" darkHeight="497" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows an interview open on the Feedback form tab."}

## Link an interview to a job

:::hint{type="info"}
You can link an interview and a feedback form to a job using a Schedule Interview activity. Learn more about schedule interview activity setup at [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

**To link an interview to a job:**

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**.
2. Select a job, then click **Interview Plans** on the left menu of the job.
3. Scroll to the interview plan stage you'd like to add the interview to and click `+ Activity to [stage name]`, then `+ Add Activity`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-I6RfoPXogzMXT6j6Ds1V_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-103745-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1449" height="641" darkWidth="1449" darkHeight="641" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows a job open on the Interview Plan tab, with the Add Activity to First Round menu open."}

4. Click `Schedule Interview` to create the initial activity.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6bPLTCXtbkhvA_eRBXw4X_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-103811-am.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="370" height="234" darkWidth="370" darkHeight="234" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows the Add Activity menu with the Schedule Interview option highlighted."}

5. To link your shared interview to your activity, click `+ Shared Interview` on the **Schedule** tab and select one of your interviews. You can then also assign interviewers and meeting rooms to the activity as needed.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/l90-4kFTzc7MKemI3Jz-R_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-103846-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1001" height="469" darkWidth="1001" darkHeight="469" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows a schedule interview activity with the Add Shared Interview option highlighted. "}

## Use shared interviews for one-off scheduling

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on manually scheduling candidates, see [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN).
:::

You can use an interview to schedule one-off interviews on a candidate's profile. Click `+ New Interview` on the candidate's profile, then choose whether to schedule manually or generate a direct booking link for a candidate.

**Direct Booking Link:&#x20;**&#x57;hen creating a one-off direct booking link, you can select the interview type via the **Interview** drop-down menu.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/42-OPEV5_L_0M891sFOLE_irene-mcintosh-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-104023-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="379" height="515" darkWidth="379" darkHeight="515" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The screenshot shows the menu to create an instant direct booking link with the Shared interview dropdown highlighted."}

**Manual Schedule:&#x20;**&#x57;hen manually scheduling the candidate, click `Add Interview` on the calendar interface to determine the interview type.

![The screenshot shows the Manual Scheduling calendar with the Add Interview option highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PYznZevWMgmYtOQDdstA7_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-104118-am.jpg)

# Feedback reminders for interviewers

If an interviewer is on a panel for an interview or a take-home where feedback is required by default, they receive one email a day prompting them to leave feedback.&#x20;

## Feedback reminder settings

To confirm an interview is set to have feedback required by default, click on the interview in question in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Shared .](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews)

![The screenshot shows the shared interview settings, with feedback requested and feedback required by default enabled.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wd7V5fXbczICG0ZOJQTkT_initial-phone-call-interview-ashby-2026-09-28-at-90933-am.jpg)

To adjust the interviewer notification settings, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Feedback Reminders](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/notifications/). You can adjust the following:

- The required channels for feedback (email or Slack). If enabled, users cannot turn off the notifications in **Personal Settings > Notifications**.
- Set the schedule for the first interview reminder and then the cadence of the following reminders.
- Set when interview reminders should be stopped:
  - Set whether interviewer notifications are stopped after a candidate is hired.
  - Set whether interviewer notifications are stopped after a candidate is archived.
  - Adjust the number of days notifications are sent for.

![The screenshot shows the interview feedback reminders settings on the Feedback Reminders page.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QzaUrNH-c7Y1UYXB5ye-h_feedback-reminders-ashby-2026-09-28-at-90610-am.jpg)

You can also set whether pending feedback is completed by default when a candidate changes stage in your interview process.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F2eHpExELiG2sQ5RiZbzx_feedback-reminders-ashby-2026-09-28-at-122459-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="733" height="606" darkWidth="733" darkHeight="606" showCaption="false"}

If Complete pending feedback by default is enabled, then when you move a candidate to another stage, the interview, take-home or assessment feedback that is outstanding will be marked as completed and notifications will stop being sent.

## Manually sending feedback reminders

Feedback reminders can also be sent manually from the feedback entry on the candidate's feed. Navigate to the candidate profile, find the feedback entry on their feed and click `Send Feedback Reminders`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xFIYKHqkZO7jJ1BVungLj_ariadne-shepard-product-marketing-manager-ashby-2026-09-28-at-92037-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="938" height="722" darkWidth="938" darkHeight="722" alt="The screenshot shows a record of feedback being due on the candidate feed with the option to Send Feedback Reminders highlighted." showCaption="false"}

You can then determine whether the notification should be sent via email, Slack or both and add an optional message. Click `Send Reminder` to sent the notification.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6DhkHqr_8Cu8s3J4A-cSN_send-feedback-reminders-pop-up.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1008" height="680" darkWidth="1008" darkHeight="680" alt="The screenshot shows the Send Feedback Reminders window." showCaption="false"}

Users can submit feedback from Slack. They can click the `Submit Feedback` button within the notification to start the feedback submission process.

![An example of a feedback request in Slack with the Submit Feedback button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iC87h6RRT2OrW2Nh770oo_feedback-reminder-from-slack.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on the interviewer experience, see [Getting Started for Interviewers](docId:2_WbM9Pju_SOWws1jhpZZ) .
:::

# FAQs

### How can I delete the record of a feedback form from the candidate profile?

To delete a feedback form, click `More` at the bottom of the feedback form submission, select `Delete from Ashby`, then click `Yes`.

Only Organization Admins and the user who submitted a feedback form can delete a feedback form from the candidate's feed (if they have access to it).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mzopJ5QdDI7_uo2zOU06R_editing-feedback.jpg" size="70" alt="The screenshot shows a record of feedback on a candidate profile, with the More menu option and showing the options to edit or delete the record from Ashby." isUploading="false" width="508" height="269" darkWidth="508" darkHeight="269" showCaption="false"}

### What happens when I archive a feedback form?

Archiving a feedback form does not immediately remove it everywhere. The impact depends on how and where the form is being used.

**Existing scheduled interviews**

Ashby ties feedback forms shown on interview briefings to the interview settings, not the form's active status. If an interview is not updated to use a new, active feedback form, the archived form continues to appear on the interview briefing and interviewers can still complete it. If you change the interview's feedback form to a different active form, the interview briefing updates and the archived form no longer appears for the interview.

**Reporting**

You cannot report on archived feedback forms. If a report references a question from an archived feedback form, the report shows an error. Archived feedback form questions are no longer available as reportable fields.

**How can I keep reporting on this data?**

If you need to continue reporting on responses after archiving a feedback form, you can use [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN) to link feedback responses to a candidate custom field. This allows future reports to reference the custom field instead of the archived feedback form.

### Can I delete the default feedback form?

You can archive other feedback forms by navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Feedback Forms**, clicking on the feedback form in question and clicking `Archive`.

You cannot delete the default feedback form, but you can amend it.

### Can I edit my feedback on a feedback form after submitting it?

If the interview is in the past, you can click the `Past Interviews` button in the Interviews section of the **Home** page to view all interviews that have already taken place. Once you submit your feedback, you can make adjustments to your comments by navigating back to the interview in question and going to the **Your Feedback** tab. From there, you can click `Edit Feedback` to update your feedback.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/M6pLOXgDdu9ipBMb9sRwX_home-ashby-2026-09-28-at-104830-am.jpg)

If you have access to the candidate profile, you can also scroll to the interview in question on the candidate's feed, then click `More` and `Edit` for the feedback in question.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mzopJ5QdDI7_uo2zOU06R_editing-feedback.jpg" size="70" alt="The screenshot shows a record of feedback on a candidate profile, with the More menu option and showing the options to edit or delete the record from Ashby." isUploading="false" width="508" height="269" darkWidth="508" darkHeight="269" showCaption="false"}

If you edit feedback, the edits directly update the feedback form fields. We do not offer versions of feedback; Ashby only shows the latest version.

### Can I remove the Overall Recommendation field from my feedback form?

Ashby includes the Overall Recommendation field by default, and you cannot remove it from a feedback form. This is because the score added to this field is used for reporting and for interview feedback summaries.

### Where do I set the duration of the interview?

You set the interview duration when creating a schedule interview activity, when creating a direct booking link, or when manually scheduling an interview.

### Can I export feedback form templates?

While exporting candidate feedback is possible (more on this at [How do I export candidate data?](docId\:J3Gm_pcw4mQH81oWDenlg)), you cannot currently export feedback form templates.

### Can I add multiple feedback forms to an interview type?

No, you can only assign one feedback form to an interview.

### Can I fill out a feedback form on behalf of an interviewer?

If you have Elevated Access - Admin, Elevated Access - Admin Private, or Organization Admin access, navigate to the **Feedback** tab within the feed on the candidate's profile. If there are any feedback forms that are yet to be completed, you can click the `Write Feedback` button to complete the feedback form on the interviewer's behalf.

### Do I have to assign a feedback form to an interview?

Yes, you must link a feedback form to an interview if `Is Feedback Requested` is set to Yes on the **Overview** tab of the interview type.

### What happens when I change the question type on a feedback form question?

If you switch the question field type on a feedback form, this can impact reporting. For example, if you switch a checkbox or multiple choice question field to a short answer field, you can no longer report on the checkboxes selected within previously completed feedback forms. As such, we recommend making minimal changes to question fields once you finish creating and start using feedback forms for interviews.

### An interviewer can't see all sections of the feedback form but I can. What's happening?

Some questions on the feedback form may be marked as *Private*. Navigate to either the shared feedback form at **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Feedback Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-forms) or to the schedule interview activity within the job's interview plan if the form is a custom feedback form. Confirm whether the interviewer should be able to add information to this field on the feedback form and uncheck the **Private** checkbox if this was set by mistake.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3ehTcl-MyLYIBHecplvUP_default-feedback-form-feedback-form-ashby-2026-09-28-at-105228-am.jpg" size="70" alt="The screenshot shows a feedback form field with the Private checkbox checked." isUploading="false" width="382" height="132" darkWidth="382" darkHeight="132" showCaption="false"}

### How do I add a feedback form to a group or category on the Feedback Forms page?

Once you create your feedback form, navigate to the full list of feedback forms at **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Feedback Forms**, then click the three dots beside the **Uncategorized** tag. Click `Add to Group`, then select the group you want to add your feedback form to.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e0a4812231d9a30d676f6288a1ef3872.png)

### Can I send a request to a user to leave feedback even if they weren't on the panel for an interview?

Yes! On the candidate's profile, click the `More` button, then `Request Feedback without Scheduling` to get started.

![The screenshot shows the candidate profile with the More menu open and the option to Request Feedback without Scheduling highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1QQsUZbDMNzmbCHpMa-Cg_request-feedback-without-scheduling.jpg)

You can then specify the interview type and the user who should complete the feedback form.

Once submitted, the user sees the request on their home page, both in the **Interviews** section and in their tasks. Clicking on either the task or interview prompt takes them to the feedback form they should complete.

:::hint{type="info"}
This option is to request feedback from an interviewer not already on the panel, rather than reminding an interviewer who is already assigned to the interview to leave feedback.
:::

### Can I send an interviewer a link to a feedback form in Ashby?

Ashby doesn't provide a standalone link to a feedback form. Instead, you can send the interviewer a link to the interview briefing, where they can open and submit their feedback form.&#x20;

To share the feedback form through the interview briefing:

1. Navigate to the candidate's profile and find the interview in the **Activity** feed.
2. Click `View Briefing`.
3. Copy the briefing link and send it to the interviewer.

The interviewer opens the briefing and completes the form from the `Your Feedback` tab. Interviewers can also find the briefing link in their interviewer-only calendar invite.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you want to nudge interviewers who haven't submitted feedback yet, click `Send Feedback Reminders` from the interview activity.
:::


[title] Assessments
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/


[title] What is a Meeting Organizer?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

## How do I set a meeting organizer for an interview?

### Schedule Interview Activity

:::hint{type="info"}
💡 For more on setting up , please check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)&#x20;
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/7fc5b933a4754fa5b6e976c81181ee32"}

If you’ve created schedule interview activities as part of your scheduling setup, you can set the meeting organizer from within the activity itself. We recommend using this option if you know the main point of contact for this interview in advance.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To edit a schedule interview activity:

- Navigate to Jobs > Jobs
- Select a job
- Click on the Interview Plan tab.
- Click on the activity you’d like to amend, or click `Modify`, then `Edit`on the activity.
- Navigate to the Direct Booking & Candidate Availability tab.
- At the bottom of this tab, you will see the `Meeting Request Organizer` drop-down. Select a user from this drop-down to determine who should receive notifications for this specific interview.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fcc4f2192c4890d78eabe3dcb117b0fe.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/315c54798e758cfeebf7ec0e178ce223.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4318a8d366859e07f12f57a030798323.png)


:::
::::

### Instant Booking

If you’re creating an interview from the candidate’s profile, either by clicking `+ New Interview` or by clicking `More`, then `Schedule New Interview` on the candidate’s profile, you can specify the meeting organizer both when sending out a direct booking link or a candidate availability link.

**Direct Booking Links**

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/eaacfe969c6a40d6a91e260437e853e4"}

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To set a meeting organizer for an interview booked via an instant booking link:

- Click `+ New Interview` on the candidate’s profile, then `Create Direct Booking Link`
- Determine the interview details like interview type, duration and interviewers.
- In the `Organizer` drop-down, select your meeting organizer.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/74dd88437c46c4104e0f8e23641c0caf.png)


:::
::::



**Candidate Availability links**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you’re generating an instant candidate availability link to send out to the candidate.

- Click `+ New Interview`, then `Schedule Interview` on the candidate’s profile.
- Click Template on the *Schedules* sidebar
- Navigate to the Direct Booking & Candidate Availability tab.
- Scroll to the `Meeting Request Organizer` drop-down within the *Organizer* section.
- Select the user you’d like to set as the organizer.
- Create your candidate availability link from the Current tab.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a0ead6e410fbe2c7992c12cbe387384f.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2f749ae7914ac07e9d2bf3931c623b9c.png)
:::
::::

## Can I change the meeting organizer?

You can only change the meeting organizer up until the candidate schedules via a direct booking link or submits their availability for an interview.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/86047247e0554423aabd7f503cd63426"}

To change the meeting organizer on an interview activity that has already been generated:

- Head to the candidate profile
- Click Schedule on the interview activity, then click View All Scheduling Options
- Click Template on the Schedules sidebar
- Navigate to the Direct Booking & Candidate Availability tab.
- Scroll to the `Meeting Request Organizer` drop-down within the Organizer section.
- Select the user you’d like to set as the organizer.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that if you are switching the meeting organizer for an interview generated from a schedule interview activity on your interview plan, you will need to click `Unlink & Edit` to make any adjustments for that specific interview. The schedule interview activity template in the interview plan will not be impacted by your edits.
:::



## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What does the error The meeting organizer needs permissions to communicate with the candidate mean?

This means that the user that has been specified in the `Meeting Organizer` field doesn't have the permission to communicate with the candidate, when this is a required permission for a meeting organizer to have.

To amend the user’s permissions, navigate to Admin, then to Employees. From here, update the user to have at least Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access to the job or department the role is a part of. You can read more on permissions at Ashby Permissions.

If you are unable to access the Employees page, please reach out to an Organization Admin to make the update.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if I leave the Meeting Request Organizer field blank?

If this field is left blank, the user who creates the Candidate Availability or Direct Booking link will be set as the Meeting Organizer.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set multiple meeting organizers for one interview, or send notifications to other users about candidate availability if they’re not the meeting organizer?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This is not currently possible. If another user should be notified when a candidate submits their availability, we would recommend creating a custom list report (more on these at [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)):
**Subject:** Job Considerations
**Filters:** Job Consideration’s Activity Status (equals Availability Submitted). You can also add additional filters to only pull results from a specific job, department, etc.

**Fields to Show:** Select any job consideration information you would like to have displayed in the notification.

Once you’ve saved the report, you can opt to set up an alert so notifications are sent to users. You can read more on setting up alerts at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW).
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/40cfaacd3be63e16ad44f7bf20df0dbe.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I determine a default meeting organizer within my Scheduling Defaults?

No, this can only be done for  or specific interviews.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I change the meeting organizer on an already scheduled interview?

No, once the candidate has scheduled via the direct booking link or submitted their availability, the meeting organizer can no longer be changed on that interview. The interview would need to be cancelled and then either created again or amended from within the interview activity in order to make changes.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if I manually schedule the interview generated by a schedule interview activity?

The meeting organizer will automatically be set to the user scheduling the interview if the interview is manually scheduled from the schedule interview activity. The meeting organizer set within the schedule interview activity will be overridden.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Help! Interviews are being scheduled on the meeting organizer’s calendar, rather than on our shared calendar?

This can happen if the meeting organizer hasn’t been given the appropriate permissions to schedule to the shared calendar the interview is being scheduled on. For more on shared calendar setup, check out [What is a shared calendar?](docId:7L9yaj7bNYKhfMH-vpkdR)&#x20;
:::


[title] Reporting on Job Postings
[path] Jobs & Openings/

You can add Job Postings as a subject when building reports in Ashby. This article covers what fields can be added to reports, along with a few example reports.

# Available Job Posting reporting fields

Below are the available Job Posting fields that can be reported on, with a brief description of each field.

| **Field**                               | **Definition**                                                                                                                                        |
| --------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job Posting Title                       | The title given to the job posting.                                                                                                                   |
| Status                                  | The status of the job posting (published or unpublished).                                                                                             |
| Social Description                      | The text added to the Social Description section of your job posting.                                                                                 |
| External Visibility                     | Whether the post is set as listed or unlisted on your public-facing job board.                                                                        |
| Internal Visibility                     | Whether the post is set as listed or unlisted on your internal job board.                                                                             |
| Location                                | The location listed on the job posting.                                                                                                               |
| Application Deadline                    | The deadline set for applications (if enabled). Appears as a date with a timestamp or a null value.                                                   |
| Automatically Unpublish?                | Only available to display if an application deadline has been set.                                                                                    |
| Application Form Title                  | The title of the application form assigned to the job posting.                                                                                        |
| Application Form Type                   | Whether the application form is a shared or custom application form.                                                                                  |
| Job                                     | The job the job posting is assigned to.                                                                                                               |
| Auto-Confirm Application Enabled?       | Whether an application confirmation email has been configured for this job posting.                                                                   |
| Auto-Confirm Application Email Template | The email template sent as part of the application confirmation email.                                                                                |
| Auto-Reject Application Enabled?        | Whether auto-reject rules have been configured and activated for the job posting.                                                                     |
| Auto-Reject Application Email Template  | The email template sent as part of the auto-reject configuration.                                                                                     |
| Created At                              | The date and time the job posting was originally created.                                                                                             |
| Published At                            | The date and time of the last publication of the job posting. Postings can be unpublished and re-published, so this is a most-recent event timestamp. |

# Job Posting report examples

:::hint{type="warning"}
Custom reports are not available on the Foundations Plan.

For foundational information on building custom reports that is not covered below, see [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW).
:::

## Use case: View all application deadlines reached in the next seven days

1. Navigate to **Reports**, then **Report Builder**. For this report, select `Custom List`.
2. Configure the below settings, filters, and fields:
   - **Subject:** Job Postings.
   - **Filters:** Job Posting's Application Deadline = is in date range (set to the next seven days).
   - **Fields to Show:** Job Posting's Title, Job Posting's Application Deadline.

![Screenshot of a custom list report in Ashby Report Builder configured to show job postings with application deadlines within the next seven days](https://cdn.zappy.app/7e5fe35908a571cd7bc85d0e7e1cc84d.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
To receive notifications about this report, you can set up an alert. More on this at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW).
:::

***

## Use case: View all job postings published and listed externally within the last three months, grouped by the posting location type

1. To build this custom report, navigate to **Reports > Report Builder** and select the `Segmentation` option.
2. Configure the below settings, filters, and fields:
   - **Subject:** Job Postings.
   - **Time Range:** Job Posting's Published At to show the last three months.
   - **Filters:** Job Posting's External Visibility = Listed.
   - **Group By:** Job Posting's Location Type.

![Screenshot of a segmentation report in Ashby Report Builder showing job postings grouped by location type](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Ie0Lhu-DdRXQTfdYMtrWF_count-by-segment-report-ashby-2026-10-05-at-51335-pm.png)

***

## Use case: View all job postings with a custom application form linked to them

1. To build this custom report, navigate to **Reports** > `Build Report` and select the `Custom List` option.
2. Configure the below settings, filters, and fields:
   - **Subject:** Job Postings.
   - **Filters:** Application Form Type = Custom.
   - **Fields to Show:** Job Posting's Title, Job Posting's Application Form Type, Job Posting's Job Title.

![Screenshot of a custom list report in Ashby Report Builder filtered to show job postings with a custom application form](https://cdn.zappy.app/c409f74e081b9246cfc63e214b6bb1a6.png)


[title] Application Limits
[path] Applications/

Application limits let you automatically block excessive applications and prevent rejected candidates from reapplying, reducing unnecessary review work for your team. This article covers how to configure rules, review blocked applications, and unblock submissions.

# Permissions & access

You must be an Organization Admin to configure application limits and manage blocked application submissions. Organization Admins can also enable a setting to allow non-admin users to manage blocked submissions within their access scope.

Application limits are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Application limits overview

Candidates may apply to the same job multiple times after being rejected or apply excessively to multiple open roles before a decision is made, resulting in lost time for recruiters who must review superfluous applications.

Application Limits allows your team to configure rules that automatically block excessive applications.

You can also include a message to candidates on the application page to inform them of these limits before they apply again.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/0d69ab247f7442e6985d01487bb54f70"}

# What types of rules are currently supported?

| Rule Type                            | Description                                                                                              |
| ------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Throttling applications              | Limit the number of times a candidate can apply to any job within a scope over a certain number of days. |
| Repeat applications for the same job | Block rejected candidates from reapplying to the same role within a certain number of days.              |
| Repeat applications for any job      | Block rejected candidates from reapplying to any role within the scope within a certain number of days.  |

# Configure application blocking rules

## Create a new rule

Navigate to Application Limits to build a rule. Click `+ New Application Limit Configuration` in the top right corner to start creating a new rule.

![Highlights the new application limit configuration button.](https://cdn.zappy.app/0bc13c659183d7e412c6917c9b4389c5.png)

## Configure a new rule

You have the following options for configuring a rule:

- Description
- Scope (filtering to establish the jobs that this configuration will apply to)
- Blocking Rules&#x20;
  - Throttling Applications
  - Repeat applications for the same job after a rejection
  - Repeat applications for any job after a rejection
- Display Message to Candidate (what the candidate sees if they apply and their application is blocked)
- Application form callout (displaying a message at the top of the application form explaining the application limit to the candidate)



::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5746867b6efe16ce6c8d94d991901e90.png" size="70" width="646" height="929" isUploading="false" darkWidth="646" darkHeight="929" alt="Shows the configuration options screen for creating a new rule." showCaption="false"}

## Ordering and editing rules

If you have multiple rules, you can sort them in order of preference. If an application matches multiple rules, the rule highest on the list applies.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/74cac71b86b74cf7b6790a3d3c695397"}

To edit a rule, click it to open the right-hand panel and make your changes, then click `Save` to apply them.

# Example rules

## Global rule

You can leave the **Scope** section empty for the application limits you configure to apply to all jobs.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/941b204b5b2b626e33915318c5484d6e.png" size="70" width="649" height="932" isUploading="false" darkWidth="649" darkHeight="932" alt="Shows leaving the Scope section empty for a global rule" showCaption="false"}

## Department rule

If you want to set up application limits for a specific department or team, click the `+ Add Field to Match` option and search for and select the **Department** option. From there, you can use the **Search for team** drop-down to select the department. You can select multiple departments if you want the application limits to apply to more than one.

![Shows adding a specific department to the scope.](https://cdn.zappy.app/cac39f1f4dc3b9865559e1811e6c5ac0.png)

# Using application blocking rules

## Candidate view of blocked application

### Application form callout

If you add an application form callout to your rule, the message you entered displays above the application form for the candidate to read before they submit their application.

![Shows how the application form callout shows up on a job posting from the candidate view](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6TFLO0bM6TJ2oyEZG5qbX_screenshot2023-06-07at90956pm.png)

### Blocked application message

If a candidate's application is blocked, they see the message you added in the **Display Message to Candidate** field when configuring your rule. If you leave this field blank, the candidate sees the message from the **After Candidate Submits Application** field on the Themes (Job Board) page.

![Shows the candidate view of the blocked application message](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/anI5JdR1XLbuOcnQno3-G_screenshot2023-06-07at91931pm.png)

## View blocked application submissions

Click the `Blocked Application Submissions` tab on the **Application Limits** page to view a list of blocked applications.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3372527044c244a3875f9a69dc8048b5.png)

- **Candidate**: The name of the applicant. Click their name to view their profile.
- **Job**: The role they applied for. Click the job title to go to the job settings.
- **Source**: The application limit that blocked the application. Click the source to view the rule details.
- **Blocked At**: The date and time the application was blocked.
- **Status**: The current status of the application.

## Unblock an application submission

If a candidate's application was blocked and you want to add it back to the pipeline for review, you can unblock it.

1. Go to the **Blocked Application Submissions** section.
2. Click the unblock option in the **Status** field of the application.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e1959eb4eb7e7c0f3dda24777e4b733f.png)

1. Confirm the unblocking.



::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/9b0af6392823bf0a770f932fcd41697e.png" size="60" width="456" height="300" isUploading="false" darkWidth="456" darkHeight="300" alt="Shows the unblock confirmation message" showCaption="false"}

Once unblocked, the candidate is added to the **Application Review** stage of the job's pipeline.

# FAQ

### Are application limits applied to applications submitted via Indeed?

Application limits do not apply to applications submitted via Indeed.

### Can you see blocked applications on the candidate profile?

Organization Admins can view blocked applications in the **Views** section of the candidate's profile. The three most recent blocked applications are listed, and the total number of blocked applications is displayed.



::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/w-B3m3tPIqfHN_gxPp1mW_blockedapplications.png" size="40" width="438" height="972" isUploading="false" darkWidth="438" darkHeight="972" alt="Shows where the Views section in the candidate profile is, on the left side panel in the candidate profile." showCaption="false"}

### How does Ashby know if a candidate has applied before?

Ashby uses the email address entered by the candidate on the application form to identify prior applications for application-limit rules.

As a result, if a candidate submits a different email address on a later application, Ashby may not recognize the application as belonging to the same applicant. For more information on how Ashby identifies duplicates, see [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb)&#x20;

[title] Application Review
[path] Applications/

***

There are two ways to advance and archive candidates who are in the **Application Review** stage: bulk application review and reviewing via the candidate's profile. This guide covers how to use either option to move candidates through your pipeline.

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby also has some AI tools to help optimize your process. Check out the guides below for more:

[AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr)
[Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl)
:::

# Permissions & access

Individual and bulk appliation review are available on all Ashby plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

You must have **Elevated Access - Hiring Manager** privileges or higher on the job to review applications.

# Overview

Our bulk application review page allows you to review all candidates in the Application Review stage, either across all jobs or for any given job. Candidate review allows you to review one-off candidates by navigating to their candidate profiles, leaving feedback, and archiving or advancing the candidate accordingly.

# Changing stages and archiving with bulk review

When there are hundreds of applications to review for a single job posting, it's important to be able to do so efficiently. Use our bulk application review feature to quickly organize, annotate, and take action on many applications at once.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6b4b68dec736477da0e455ac7002b995"}

You can navigate to the bulk application review page by heading to **Jobs > Jobs**, then clicking `Application Review` above the stages in your active pipeline.

![Application Review stage for a single job](https://cdn.zappy.app/9d49d910bc97a03089d3e018c656fe7e.png "Application Review stage for a single job")

To review applications across all jobs in bulk, head to the [Candidate Pipeline](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidates/pipeline/active), then select the Application Review stage of the pipeline.

![Application Review stage on the Candidate Pipeline](https://cdn.zappy.app/a5057c33cc74a1e4df96fa5d0c491f01.png "Application Review stage on the Candidate Pipeline")

On the Application Review page, you see a list of applicants to review. Review them in bulk by clicking the `Review X Applications` button.

![Bulk Application Review button](https://cdn.zappy.app/6ae8d121d00ada33383f63ae14e4ef11.png "Bulk Application Review button")

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4eec6a64f86b1cb0536178faffc7a347.png)

**1)** Candidate name

**2)** Role they have applied for

**3)** Tabs to jump between showing all application information, showing only application form answers, and showing only the candidate's resume.

**4)** Information added in the application form fields.

**5)** Candidate resume.

**6)** The option to move to the next application.

**7)** The option to specify the order in which applications are reviewed, either starting with the newest application or the oldest.

**8)** Access to layout settings and [keyboard shortcuts](https://cdn.zappy.app/243dc745ad70397caff30ac897919979.png).

**9)** **Advance:** Advance the candidate to the next stage.

**10) Custom Next Steps…:** Take additional custom action on the application, including rejecting the candidate but adding them to a project, transferring the candidate to be considered for another role, or emailing the candidate.

**11)** **Reject:** Reject the candidate — you must select a rejection reason before rejecting them.

**12)** **Enable Rejection Email:** Slide the toggle on to set up a rejection email — you can also set this email to be scheduled to go out after a specific amount of time has passed. You're prompted to select an email template, a from address, and determine whether the email should be scheduled or sent immediately.

**13)** **Score:** The overall score for the candidate's application.

**14)** **Tags:** Add tags to the candidate's profile. Read more at [Tags](docId\:kRTcgZ4XMHdCMDypRRNgo).

**15)** **Notes:** Add notes directly to the candidate's profile.

## Changing stages and archiving on the candidate profile

When you want to review and advance or archive an individual candidate, you can do so from their candidate profile.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/1ee3454817364ec2b726ec98804c05ff"}

1. Navigate to the candidate profile using [candidate search](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidate-searches/new) or finding them in the [candidate pipeline](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidates/pipeline/active).
2. Click the `Review` button on their Application Review activity to add feedback on their application and/or submit a decision.
3. Click `Change Stage` and select the stage you'd like to move them to from their profile to advance them.
4. To archive a candidate, click `Archive`, select an archive reason, and optionally email the candidate a rejection email.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c69ec5a19e830c01ddfccbe9e6a3c567.png)

# FAQs

### When using bulk application review mode, can you see if the candidate applied for another role?

Yes! If a candidate has applied for multiple roles, you're able to see their other applications in bulk application review. You can also view all jobs the candidate is being considered for in the **Considered For Jobs** section on their profile.

### Which feedback form is used when reviewing application forms? Can I change the feedback form for application reviews?

The default feedback form is used for feedback at the Application Review stage. To change the feedback form, this needs to be done for each job or job template. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select the job in question. Then head to the **Interview Plan** tab. Click `Modify` on the Review Application activity on the interview plan.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/801d76e10a5b8f09082498e3fc3ef1da.png)

Click *Change Link* to switch the feedback form out for another shared feedback form you have configured, or click *Unlink & Edit* to make specific edits to that form. Any changes made to an unlinked form only apply to that specific activity and do not have an impact on the default feedback form.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/135fbfeb0fde09fe350b798d52f75d60.png)

### What is the difference between In Stage Since and Needs Decision in the Status column of Application review?

Needs Decision means there's a structured activity in the stage (for example, a custom review application activity) and action is required, while In Stage Since is when a candidate is in a stage that doesn't have a structured activity, so a call to action isn't required.

If you are using the default review application activity in the Application Review stage of your interview plan, this is not seen as a structured activity. If you opt to add a custom review application activity, this is seen as a structured activity.

### When using bulk application review, which resume will I see?

When reviewing candidates in bulk application review, Ashby shows the resume attached to the application if one exists.

If both the candidate profile and the application have a resume, bulk application review displays the application resume.

If the resume on the candidate profile is more current, you see a `See Latest Resume` option. Clicking `See Latest Resume` takes you to the candidate profile so you can review the newer file there.

[title] Tracking the source of an application
[path] Applications/

You can use custom tracking links to automatically track inbound candidate sources from beyond Ashby's built-in job board integrations. More on these at [How do I set up job board connections?](docId\:tLYNCWpte0eBbJBqN9Wi4)

# Overview

A custom tracking link has a tag added to the end of the URL that relates to a specific source in Ashby. When a candidate applies through a tracked link, Ashby automatically applies the source to that specific job consideration.

You do not need to add a custom tracking link for built-in job board integrations like Indeed. When those integrations are enabled, Ashby automatically applies the associated job board as the source.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are using the automated posting or job wrapping options in LinkedIn, we recommend setting up a custom tracking link. More on the LinkedIn integration options at [LinkedIn Job Posting](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp).
:::

# Permissions & access

Custom tracking links are available across all plans:

| **Foundations** | **Legacy Plus** | **Plus** | Enterprise |
| --------------- | --------------- | -------- | ---------- |
| ✅               | ✅               | ✅        | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
Only Organization Admins and users with Elevated Access with the Job Board Tracking Links additional permission can configure custom tracking links. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).
:::

# Creating custom tracking links

## Set up a source

Set up a source at [Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Sources](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources). Click `+ New Source`, enter your source name, and assign a source type.

![Sources page in Admin showing active candidate source categories, with the New Source button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Z7nBqXFwjyHumIKDVBaoW_sources-ashby-2026-09-15-at-90000-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
If the source you would like to use already exists, move on to the [Creating your custom tracking link steps](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/tracking-the-source-of-an-application#creating-your-custom-tracking-link). See more on creating sources at [Source Types and Sources](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA).&#x20;
:::

## Creating your custom tracking link

1. Navigate to [Admin > Job Boards > Custom Tracking Links](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/custom-tracked-links).
2. Click `+ New` to create a new custom tracking link.

![Custom Tracking Links page showing existing tracked links with their titles, sources, credited users, and URLs, with the New button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aGZGYpg1QyungJiInmN6w_custom-tracking-links-ashby-2026-09-15-at-90133-am.jpg)

3. Enter a title and select the source to apply to candidates who apply via that link.
4. Optionally, select a user to add to the `Credited To` field and enter a tracking code. If you choose not to enter a tracking code, one is generated automatically.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/c-V3dX89WvMF-yRPYd23D_custom-tracking-links-ashby-2026-09-15-at-90230-am.jpg" size="40" isUploading="false" width="359" height="339" darkWidth="359" darkHeight="339" alt="Create Tracked Link form with fields for Title, Source, Credited To, and Tracking Code." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are using [Multiple Brands](docId\:jwP6kjsKgGJZAadNNfU5D), you need to select the brand you'd like to configure a custom tracking link for using the dropdown to the right of the `+ New` button.

![Custom Tracking Links page with a dropdown filter highlighted in the upper-right corner next to the “New” button.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JzJpw7611c-d9r2GVOTsA_custom-tracking-links-select-brand.jpg)
:::

# Using custom tracking links

Once you create the link, you can share it or add it to job boards. When a candidate applies through the tracked link, Ashby automatically applies the specified source to their job consideration. You can view a candidate's source in the **Attribution** section of their profile.

![Ashby candidate profile for Persephone Fraser showing the Product Documentation Specialist job, interview progress at “The First Judgement” stage, and the Attribution section with the source set to “Inbound: Climatebase.”](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9H9ZmXbJprXXtbzoZ7ksW_persephone-fraser-product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-15-at-90819-am.jpg)

## Tracking links for individual jobs

When creating a tracking link, the link goes to the main job board. To get the link for a specific job:

1. Navigate to the main custom tracking link generated for the job board in [Admin > Job Board > Custom Tracking Links](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/custom-tracked-links).
2. On your job board, click on the specific job.
3. Copy the link from the browser's URL field.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b7c100a449c041c59b8a8e961ec9b677"}

# FAQs

### Why does an application still show a tracking link source if the candidate applies later through a job board?

Ashby saves the code from a custom tracking link in the candidate's browser. If they return later through a different path, such as a regular job board URL, and apply without opening another tracking link, Ashby may still use the saved code to attribute the application.

This is especially noticeable when someone opens a referral link and later test applies to their own job through the regular job board in the same browser. The application may still show the referral link as its source.

This behavior resembles first-touch attribution when no later tracking link replaces the saved code, but it is not strict first-touch attribution when candidates open multiple tracking links. Each time a candidate opens a custom tracking link, Ashby saves that link's code in their browser and overwrites any previously saved code. If the candidate applies through a different custom tracking link, Ashby attributes the application to the custom source associated with the link they used to apply.

### How are applications from Indeed Easy Apply or ZipRecruiter Apply attributed?

Applications submitted through Indeed Easy Apply or ZipRecruiter Apply are sent directly to Ashby by Indeed or ZipRecruiter. The candidate's browser is not involved, so browser-based tracking link attribution does not apply. Ashby assigns the built-in integration source, such as `Indeed Listings`, `Indeed Sponsored`, or `ZipRecruiter Organic Posting`.

### Can custom tracking links only be used for external job boards?

Custom tracking links can be used any time you'd like to track an external source. Though most commonly used with job boards, they can be used to allow employees or friends of the company to share links externally (e.g. on social media) and still be credited as the source.

### What do I enter in the 'Tracking Code' field when adding a tracking link?

You can enter any unique value in the `Tracking Code` field, or select `Add` without entering a value to generate one automatically. Ashby uses this code to associate applications with the custom source and tracking link.

The tracking code is the unique character string added to the end of the URL. Some job boards, such as LinkedIn Job Wrapping, ask for the tracking code or source code so they can add it to application links and ensure applications are attributed to the correct source.

### Does Ashby support Google Analytics or other conversion tracking?

Ashby doesn't integrate with Google Analytics, so we recommend using the iFrame embed version of the career page and embedding your pixel there. For more information, see [Embedding Ashby Job Boards in an external Careers Page](docId\:P9swm4igvSOKByLEIRwRX).

### The third-party job board allows me to enter the UTM code directly - can I just add in the code there, then have it applied to postings via that route instead?

A lot of third-party job boards support this and yes, you should be able to add the tracking code there, then it is applied to all postings on that third-party job board moving forward.

[title] Managing Recruiting Blocks for Your Organization
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Scheduling Add-On/

Organization Admins can enable personal Recruiting Blocks, review which users have the feature enabled, and override an individual user's preference when needed. This article explains how the organization-level settings work.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
For setup steps, scheduling behavior, and troubleshooting, see [Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q).
:::

# Permissions & access

Recruiting Blocks are part of the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) and are included on the Enterprise plan.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ➕    | ✅          |

Organization Admins can enable or disable the organization-level capability for personal Recruiting Blocks.

# Recommended rollout checklist

Before enabling personal Recruiting Blocks broadly:

- Decide whether your organization wants personal blocks, schedule-level blocks, or both.
- Confirm that interviewers’ primary Google or Microsoft calendars are connected and that Ashby can read event titles.
- Explain that personal blocks replace normal availability for the user’s interviews when enabled.
- For schedule-level blocks, define a naming convention for suffixes and communicate who creates the matching calendar events.
- Use reporting to monitor which users have personal Recruiting Blocks enabled.

# Enabling personal Recruiting Blocks for your organization

:::hint{type="warning"}
Schedule-level Recruiting Blocks are configured on individual . You can use schedule-level Recruiting Blocks without enabling personal Recruiting Blocks for the organization.
:::

Turn on the organization-level capability before users can enable personal Recruiting Blocks in their personal settings.

1. Go to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >&#x20;**[Meeting & Time Zone](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/meetings-and-time/meeting-hours) and open the `Recruiting Blocks` tab.
2. Turn on `Allow Personal Recruiting Blocks`.

![Screenshot of Ashby’s Recruiting Blocks settings page, highlighting the enabled “Allow Personal Recruiting Blocks” toggle under Personal Recruiting Blocks.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oPKSvjvdB-OJsfmWvy9xa_recruiting-blocks-ashby-2026-09-17-at-80330-am.jpg)

When this setting is off, users see that their organization has disabled personal Recruiting Blocks and cannot turn on the feature in their personal settings.

![Screenshot showing that the organization has disabled Recruiting Blocks in personal settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k2--aBhH98bXHaj6qg93y_meeting-hours-recruiting-blocks-ashby-2026-09-17-at-95337-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you want to use Recruiting Blocks only for specific , leave `Allow Personal Recruiting Blocks` turned off. You can still configure schedule-level Recruiting Blocks within individual . For information on setting up schedule-level Recruiting Blocks, see [Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q).&#x20;
:::

# Viewing users with personal Recruiting Blocks enabled

Use reporting to identify which employees have personal Recruiting Blocks enabled.

1. Create or open a report with `Employee` as the subject.
2. Add the `Personal recruiting blocks preference` field.
3. Review which users have the preference enabled or disabled.

![Ashby Custom List report showing employees and their Personal Recruiting Blocks Preference.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wEibOlL5GufpdailqlQLg_report-builder-ashby-2026-09-17-at-91825-am.jpg)

# Updating an individual user’s personal preference

An Organization Admin can enable or disable a user’s personal Recruiting Blocks preference from the user’s interviewer information.

Use this control when a user configured Recruiting Blocks incorrectly and scheduling needs to continue using their normal availability or when you need to help troubleshoot a user’s setup.

1. Go to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users).
2. Search for the user and open their profile.
3. Select the `Interviewer Info` tab.
4. Scroll to the **Recruiting Blocks** section.
5. Enable or disable the user’s personal Recruiting Blocks preference.

![Employee interviewer information showing the Recruiting Blocks preference.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7YoRk_vKsFETl2yajHVcN_employees-ashby-2026-09-17-at-92334-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Changing a user’s preference does not create, delete, or rename calendar events. If the user enables Recruiting Blocks again without matching events on their primary connected calendar, Ashby may show no availability for their interviews.
:::

The user can turn their own personal preference back on from personal settings after an administrator changes it.

# Troubleshooting organization setup

### A user cannot enable personal Recruiting Blocks

Confirm that **Allow Personal Recruiting Blocks** is enabled in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Meeting & Time Zone >&#x20;**[Recruiting Blocks](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/meetings-and-time/recruiting-blocks).&#x20;

### We want schedule-level blocks but not personal blocks

Leave **Allow Personal Recruiting Blocks** turned off. Users with the required job permissions can still configure Recruiting Blocks on individual .


[title] Diversity Surveys
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

You can use [Diversity Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/diversity-surveys) to capture information from your candidates at any point in the interview process.

## Diversity Surveys Overview

Ashby supports the ability to collect diversity surveys from applicants on jobs, or at any stage of the hiring process. Users can create and customize any number of surveys and configure rules for how and when to collect them from candidates. You can then analyze the results of these surveys to measure performance against your DEI goals.

See the table below for more information on the access roles that have the ability to set up surveys in Ashby and who can send out a survey.

| Access Role                                                    | Can Configure Surveys? | Can Send Out Surveys to Candidates? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌                      | ✅                                   |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌                      | ✅                                   |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ❌                      | ✅                                   |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                      | ✅                                   |

## Set up your surveys

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can set up diversity surveys in the [Admin Section](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/diversity-surveys) of the app. Navigate to Admin > Jobs & Applications > Candidate Surveys and click the `+ New`button on the Diversity tab.

You’ll be prompted to give your new survey a title prior to being able to add questions to your diversity survey. Click `Add Question` and select a question type to build out your survey. You can select the following field types:

- Short Answer
- Long Unformatted Answer
- Phone
- Email
- Multiple Choice
- Checkboxes
- Date
- Yes/No
- Number
- Other Location
- URL


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2022-02-18 at 12.35.28 PM.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/1f0474810fc37666ad80f9149f219487.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f76abecc676dad9cc96c133798babe96.png)
:::
::::

## Share your surveys

Diversity surveys can be shared in three different ways:

### Collecting on the application tab of each job&#x20;

You can set up a filter to describe which jobs pages a survey should be collected on. When you set this up, the survey will be shown alongside the application form when an applicant applies on your jobs pages.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/86ef54d0a8e9e61b85eee6621e49665c.png)

### Directly Requesting Surveys

You can directly request a survey from the candidate profile by doing the following:

- On the candidate profile, click the `More` dropdown
- Select `Create a Diversity Survey Request`
- You will be asked to choose which survey to send and which application it should be associated with.
- Create the survey request using the `Create` button, or optionally also schedule an email with a link to the survey using the `Create and Email` button.

:::ExpandableHeading
::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/830eeaf0a3a04d669429f8cb27f16631"}
:::

### Setting up automation rules

You can set up automation rules so that you don’t need to directly request surveys from candidates manually.&#x20;

Instead, you can set up a series of conditions that trigger automatically sending a survey to a candidate.

:::hint{type="info"}
Our article on [Utilizing Stage Groups](docId:8ypvcP02S-0aiiEloOmRx) walks through the different fields you can select to customize the automation.
:::

To set up automation for your diversity survey:

- Create a new draft configuration of automation rules by clicking `Create a Draft Configuration`

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c08cabbaad30e6d25f4e5687adb5e490.png)

- Specify your conditions by clicking `+ Add Field to Match`, choosing fields and then creating filters based on those

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07404f68d2beddc73231492c636e8d80.png)

- Select an email template from the Email Template dropdown that will be used to send out your survey
- Configure any email delay using the Delay dropdown
- Specify a sender email address
- Activate the configuration
- Toggle on the `Enable Survey Automation` toggle once the draft has been activated

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c08cabbaad30e6d25f4e5687adb5e490.png)

The conditions of each rule will get checked whenever a candidate changes stages. Ashby will find the first rule that matches and a survey will be created and an email with a link to the survey will be scheduled.

## Report on your results

Custom Reports can be configured on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

You can report on the questions in a diversity survey in our standard reports.  The fields will be available for grouping under Job Consideration > Diversity Survey.

![Screen Shot 2022-02-18 at 12.57.48 PM.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/39db06066939411f296d4c86fbebb382.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I view pending surveys?

*Viewing pending surveys*

You can view any pending survey requests on the candidate profile under Current Activities.  From here you can email the survey again or delete the request.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e5b1c8a58cbd36dce5f41b77c6592039.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What does the survey look like to the candidate?

When a candidate follows the link in a survey request email, they’ll be brought to a page where they can fill in the survey.

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AYsAKZuvOlfjlTRF8_gha_screenshot2022-02-18at125625pm.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### When are a survey’s automation conditions evaluated?

The conditions in survey delivery automation settings are evaluated during stage transition events. This means a candidate will need to be moved forward to the next or archived in order for a survey to be sent.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Where can I access diversity survey responses?

Diversity survey responses can only be viewed in aggregate through our reporting functionality. We put measures in place to prevent reporting from being able to pinpoint a candidate (e.g. drill downs are disabled). If a candidate fills out a diversity survey, neither the activity or their responses show on their candidate profile.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Are surveys anonymous?

Yes; by default, diversity survey responses are anonymous.
:::

::::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I limit who can edit DEI reports?

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
You can, yes! To get started, switch on the Restrict editing DEI reports feature in Admin>Data Management>Reporting Permissions [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/reporting-permissions).

When the setting is enabled, users without the access to edit or create DEI reports will not be able to choose DEI fields as Fields to Show or Group By fields. Saved reports containing those fields will still be visible, but the reports will not be editable.

Once enabled, you will then also be able to determine who can edit these reports in each user’s profile on the [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) page.

When in a user’s profile, you will see the option to allow them to create and update DEI reports on the Permissions tab.

Admins with can create and update DEI Reports permission can grant or revoke the permission for others. The permission is automatically granted to the admin user who turns on the Restrict Editing DEI Reports setting.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that this does not impact the visibility of diversity data in shared reports. Those with Organization Admin access or Elevated Access - Admin Private access can view diversity data in reports.
:::
::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/520bf20de3bee0955f431730bebcbb65.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0e612b021989099319736879bacee65c.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c5997275294b11c1c85fc70a56a97949.png)
:::
:::::
::::::


[title] Surveys & Questionnaires
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/


[title] Do Not Contact Company Lists
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

This feature allows your organization to define a list of companies from which your recruiting team prefers not to source or reach out to candidates. Organizations use this feature to support internal hiring guidelines, such as when managing sensitive partnerships, client relationships, or active M\&A scenarios.

:::hint{type="info"}
This feature is designed solely to support unilateral, internal recruiting policies. It is not intended to implement any agreement with other employers to limit hiring or recruiting. Customers control and manage all list entries and are responsible for ensuring that their use complies with applicable laws and company policies.
:::

Do Not Contact company lists are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Configuring a Recruiting Exclusion List

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/209f5b8f89b74612be476ae853b0138b"}

To configure Do Not Contact rules from scratch:

- Navigate to *Admin > Sourcing > Do Not Contact Rules*
- Click *+ Add New Rule*

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8958c89533241edf042c847aab6af2eb.png)

- Select a company from the list provided (all companies across existing candidate profiles will be pulled into this list)

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
* Confirm the rule name and configure the following rule information:&#x20;
  - Internal notes (optional)
  - Expiry date (optional)
  - Block Outbound Sequences: Enable this if you would like to prevent users from enrolling this candidate in an outbound sequence.
  - Employee scope. The following employee scope options are available for matching against this rule:&#x20;
    - Current employees only
    - All employees (employed at the specified company at any time)
    - All employees (employees employed within a specified limited time period)
  - Click *+ Add* to add any additional variations on the company name to the rule.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e4e65f4eda429291b04a3aa37cc37e53.png)
:::
::::

## Importing a Do Not Contact List

If you have multiple rules you’d like to configure, you can import a CSV of rules. To import a Do Not Contact rule list:

- Navigate to *Admin > Sourcing > Do Not Contact Rules*
- Click *Import CSV* and select your CSV file to upload from your computer



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9a6b94a53cc51763b6cd72fcda0a0879.png)

The following fields can be included in the CSV file. Please note that the name and name variant is required for creating the rule.

| Header name          | Description                                                                                                                                                        | Example                                                                                                                      |
| -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Rule Name            | The rule display name. Rows with the same rule name are grouped under the same rule.                                                                               | Portfolio Companies                                                                                                          |
| Company Name         | Employer/Company names to match against.                                                                                                                           | Acme Inc                                                                                                                     |
| Notes                | Optional notes to display the reason for the rule or other important information internally.                                                                       | These are companies within our portfolio. Employees from these companies should not be sourced or contacted about our roles. |
| Employment Scope     | Controls which employment history entry is considered for this rule. Use ‘current\_only’ to match only current employer, or ‘all’ to match all employment history. | all                                                                                                                          |
| Scope Months         | Number of months to look back on when employment scope is set as ‘all’. Leave empty to check all employment history without a time limit.                          | 3                                                                                                                            |
| Expires At           | Expiry date in YYYY-MM-DD format.                                                                                                                                  | 2025-04-22                                                                                                                   |
| Blocks Email Sending | If enabled, produces an campaign limiting error that blocks sending. If not enabled, only a warning will show and campaign emails will not be blocked.             | Yes                                                                                                                          |

:::hint{type="success"}
You can use [this template](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1ZiPgk61Jg3Sg-bMC0P-lKccpb5K6T_824ZtgoHKyaLw/edit?gid=0#gid=0) to ensure your data is formatted correctly before uploading.
:::

## How does the Do Not Contact messaging show in Ashby?

If a candidate matches a configured Do Not Contact rule, a *Do Not Contact* red tag will show in the top-right of the candidate’s profile, to the left of the Follow-up, Email, Archive and other action buttons. You can hover over the tag to view the rule that is being applied to this particular candidate.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6a38b7bfb924773bdab435e69172a11b.png)

If you opt to email the candidate and sequence sending has been blocked by your configured rule, then when a user tries to send a sequence to the candidate, they will see an error referring to the configured rule.

If sequence sending has not been blocked as part of your rule configuration, then the email will be sent to the candidate.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/28f5fc8312e927e926b7a3b6a8fd54ae.png" size="74" width="370" height="94" darkWidth="370" darkHeight="94" position="center" showCaption="false"}

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If viewing the candidate in the Chrome Extension, you’ll also see a banner displayed during your sourcing workflow. Note that a candidate must be added or exist in Ashby to trigger the red banner warning.&#x20;
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f5nWuwoxZeP_Vw49aZjVZ_image.png)
:::
::::


[title] Public Booking Links
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Setup/

Public booking links are most commonly used for scheduling interviews with leads. Ashby automatically creates the necessary candidate and job consideration, moves them to the correct interview stage, and schedules the interview.

For more information on sending direct booking links or candidate availability links to candidates already in Ashby and in active stages, check out [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).

:::hint{type="warning"}
During setup, make sure you have set a Meeting Request Organizer and that the schedule template is Direct Booking link compatible.
:::

# Overview

Public booking links give your team more flexibility when scheduling with leads, candidates, and people not yet added to Ashby. Like direct booking links, these links are associated with a specific job and interview stage. If a person isn't in Ashby yet, they are added as a candidate to the appropriate job and stage upon booking.

You might use a public booking link when initially reaching out to gauge a lead's interest in a role, for example, offering to meet with them to discuss the role and their experience via LinkedIn InMail. When they schedule via the public booking link, they are automatically added to Ashby, considered for the role, and moved to the appropriate stage so these actions don't need to be completed manually.

# What happens when a lead books with a public booking link?

The table below covers how Ashby responds to a lead booking via a public booking link, based on whether they're already in Ashby and being considered for a role.

| **Scenario**                     | **What happens in Ashby**                                                                                                                     |
| -------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Candidate doesn't exist in Ashby | - Create the candidate<br />- Create the job consideration<br />- Move candidate to the correct interview stage<br />- Schedule the interview |
| No active job consideration      | - Create the job consideration<br />- Move candidate to the correct interview stage<br />- Schedule the interview                             |
| Existing job consideration       | - Move candidate to the correct interview stage<br />- Schedule the interview                                                                 |

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you are seeing duplicate candidates, check out the [Why do I see duplicate job considerations?](docId\:FyG7-O-Qk73981CicoxjU) FAQ for more information.
:::

# Configure public booking links

1. Navigate to the **Interview Plan** page on an open job and click `Edit` on a **Schedule Interview** activity.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7miOLwpxUKJgqHboe_847_untitled.png" size="100" alt="Screenshot of the Interview Plan page with the Edit button highlighted on a Schedule Interview activity." isUploading="false" width="3016" height="1886" darkWidth="3016" darkHeight="1886" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Under the **Direct Booking & Candidate Availability** tab, scroll down to the Meeting Request Organizer drop-down and select your organizer. This person will be notified when a candidate responds to meeting requests you create for this interview.&#x20;
3. Locate the `Enable Public Booking Link` setting. Once enabled, a reusable link appears. You can regenerate or disable the link at any time.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OrfCkxoj_ltCSgePgSuDZ_untitled-1.png" size="100" alt="Screenshot of the Direct Booking and Candidate Availability tab showing the Enable Public Booking Link toggle and the generated reusable link." isUploading="false" width="3104" height="1974" darkWidth="3104" darkHeight="1974" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

# Scheduling on a public booking link

When someone receives a public booking link, they go through a scheduling flow similar to direct booking.

![Screenshot of the public booking link scheduling flow showing available time slots.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sl0cS0q-Ylc93HmT__WHa_untitled-2.png)

Once they confirm their time, they are prompted to submit contact information at the end. Note that a phone number field appears if the location is set to **Phone Call** for the interview.

![Screenshot of the contact information form shown after a time slot is confirmed, including an optional phone number field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/v2xpIyHmWzxv1nI04t2v5_untitled-3.png)

Once this is submitted, Ashby automatically sets up the candidate, job consideration, and interview schedule, and creates calendar events.

![Screenshot of the confirmation screen showing the completed interview setup with calendar events created.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1hcKFMbQVHRv8d8L-6SHr_untitled-4.png)

1. A candidate is created or updated once they submit via the public booking link.
2. A job consideration is created automatically.
3. The interview is scheduled with invites sent out and calendar events created.
4. The correct interview stage is assigned based on the public booking link.

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidates receive a unique meeting URL they can use to cancel or reschedule the interview.
:::

# Using a public booking link substitution token in a sequence

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers how to send out a link to an interviewer's calendar availability in sequences using a public booking link. New to sequences? Read more about getting them set up in [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4).
:::

To use a public booking link substitution token in a sequence, first ensure the sequence is linked to a job.

![Screenshot of the sequence settings showing the Job field with a job linked.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4VOj3KIT3wSWDVoPRav4Z_untitled-5.png)

When editing your sequence templates, search for the `Public Booking Link for First Planned Interview` substitution token.

![Screenshot of the substitution token search showing the Public Booking Link for First Planned Interview token selected.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZlS0g7TcuhUw06x0dKdgP_untitled-6.png)

This substitution token defaults to the first public booking link in an Active Interview stage enabled for your job's interview plan.

In the example below, both (1) and (2) have public booking links enabled. The public booking link token in the sequence defaults to the interview schedule for (1).

![Screenshot of the interview plan showing two interview stages with public booking links enabled, labeled (1) and (2).](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xxR3-ltRMxw3nVM7nY3BK_untitled-7.png)

When a recipient schedules themselves via the public booking link, the sequence automatically stops and they are marked as "Recipient Replied" and "Interested."

![Screenshot of the sequence template editor showing the substitution token inserted into the message body.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4Zp7mB27nEB9CpA0oXD74_untitled-8.png)

# FAQs

### Can public booking links be used in lead stages?

When using the `Public Booking Link for First Planned Interview` substitution token in sequences, Ashby pulls in the first public booking link in an **Active Interview** stage.

You can still create public booking links for lead stage interviews, but they are not currently used in sequences.

### Where is the best place to access the public booking link?

Public booking links are currently accessible through the schedule template only.

### How do I know the source of a candidate created through a public booking link?

Source tracking is not currently supported through public booking links. We recommend adding people you send the link to via the Ashby Chrome Extension. Once they book, their existing profiles are updated if there is an email match, or you can merge them as duplicates if the details aren't an exact match.

### Why do I see duplicate job considerations?

Ashby deduplicates or flags duplicate candidate profiles using a person's LinkedIn URL, name, and email address. A separate profile can be created when you add a candidate via the extension without an email address and then send them a public booking link where they add their email.

In this case, the first profile is created via the Chrome extension using their LinkedIn URL, and the second is created via the booking link using their email address.

You can merge these duplicate candidate profiles as you see them. Alternatively, if you send out the public booking link without adding a person to Ashby first, a candidate profile is created for them in the appropriate stage once they book a time.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more detail, see [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb)&#x20;
:::

### Can I create a public booking link to be used across multiple jobs?

Like direct booking links, public booking links are associated with a specific job and interview stage. It's not possible to create a booking link that can be used across multiple jobs or interview stages.

### Can interviewer pools be used with public booking links?

Yes — if you assign an interviewer pool to an interviewer slot for a schedule interview activity, you still have the option to enable public booking links on that activity. Read more in [Interviewer Pools](docId:3NHQZ_eQLHGVlgjxgaZdJ).

### How does attribution work for the source when using a public booking link?

If a candidate books via a public booking link, their source is listed as Sourced: Public Booking Link. A user is not assigned to the **Credited To** field automatically, because the user who configured the public booking link may not be the same user who sent it out.

To complete the **Credited To** field, navigate to the **Attribution** section within the **Activities & Progress** section of the candidate profile and/or job consideration. Select the appropriate user from the **Credited To** dropdown.

![Screenshot of the Attribution section on a candidate profile showing the Credited To dropdown.](https://cdn.zappy.app/927e6792659fdf15364468ad5022ac98.png)

### Can I create a candidate availability public booking link?

No, this isn't currently possible.

### Can a public booking link be used to schedule with multiple interviewers?

Yes, when multiple interviewers are assigned to the interview schedule, the public booking link surfaces availability based on the combined availability of all assigned interviewers. This means candidates can book times that work for all interviewers configured in the schedule.

### A candidate has scheduled with a public booking link. Can I ask them to complete an application form?

You can send a candidate an application request. The completed application form will then be added to the existing candidate profile. More on this at [Application Requests](docId:-1cI2DUBbnESgdM-dW8wW).


[title] How do I change the archive reason on an archived job consideration?
[path] Candidates/

If you've already archived a candidate but want to change the archive reasons listed on their job consideration, you can update it directly from their profile. This article covers how to change an archive reason on a single job consideration or in bulk, where to set up new archive reasons, and how to add a note explaining why you archived a candidate.

# Change an archive reason

To change the archive reason on an archived job consideration:

1. Navigate to the candidate's profile and to the job consideration in question.
2. On the **Activities & Progress** tab of their profile, locate the **Interview Progress** section.
3. Click the pencil to the right of the archive reason listed underneath the **Archive** stage of their interview progress.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Sln7XciUCL4zCHzd6_FfQ_artie-mayhew-ux-designer-ashby-2026-08-20-at-103707-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1474" height="348" darkWidth="1474" darkHeight="348" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Select the correct reason from the list of existing archive reasons. You will also have the option to add a note and fill out any archive reason custom fields. Click `Submit` to save your changes.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can review an added archive note and other archive reason fields by clicking `Details` to the right of the archive reason.

![The opened details showing the archive note.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/s_iT-2FhuOg3gLgBQqDj0_archive-reason-and-a-note.jpg)
:::



Archive Reason custom fields can be configured on the Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Where do I set up a new archive reason?

You can add and edit archive reasons by navigating to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >&#x20;**[Archive Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-archive-reasons). Click `+ New` to add a new archive reason, or click an existing archive reason to make edits.

If you create a new archive reason, specify a reason and a reason type for reporting purposes.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on best practices for configuring archive reasons, check out [Best Practices: Managing & Analyzing Archive Reasons](docId\:r1tYNIVQjQ5ikc3v8ctTF).
:::

# Can I change archive reasons on archived job considerations in bulk?

Yes. To change archive reasons in bulk:

1. Navigate to the **Candidate Pipeline** section of your job.
2. Select the **Archived** stage and use the checkboxes to select the candidate job considerations you want to update.
3. Click `Change Archive Reason`.
4. Select the new archive reason from the **New Archive Reason** dropdown.
5. Click `Start Change Archive Reason on X Records`.


[title] Debriefs
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Setup/

Debrief activities can now be scheduled for your hiring team and interviewers. You can add a debrief to a schedule interview activity as part of the template, or add it via the candidate’s profile as a one-off activity.

Debriefs are available on the Foundations, Plus, Legacy Plus and Enterprise Plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ddd0680886f04d89bd5482b96b8c3b71"}

## Creating a debrief activity

### Setting your debrief defaults

You can configure your default debrief settings in Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > [Debrief Defaults](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/debrief-defaults/debrief-schedule). These settings will be applied to debriefs you create moving forward but can be amended for each individual debrief.

On the Schedule page, you can determine the duration and who should attend the debrief. You can set attendees based on their hiring team role on the job, opt to include past interviewers or not and also add any additional attendees.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e8f0a885dfee691187dfe816c0babc85.png)

On the Communication tab, you can determine the calendar the debrief should be scheduled on, the location and customize the calendar invite templates sent out to interviewers.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bd498201ea8c0fa382f6631085044dd9.png)

On the Reminders tab, you can configure any reminders to be sent out to interviewers attending the debrief.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/85c33b858c7edd8f122726a466803860.png)

### Adding a debrief activity to a schedule interview activity

When creating or amending a Schedule Interview activity on your job’s interview plan (more on this [here](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)), you’ll see the option to add a debrief activity at the bottom of the Schedule tab.

Toggle on the `Include ‘Schedule Debrief Activity’` option to automatically create a debrief activity once the interview has been scheduled in.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fd76c01d1d11d063a8e1bea4a484884d.png)

### Adding a debrief activity to the candidate’s profile.

You can also schedule one-off debriefs as needed directly from the candidate profile. If you need to manually schedule a debrief click the `+ Add Activity` option. on the candidate profile. From there, select `Debrief`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/23da7885da78dae7278c0f335cc775a2.png)

## Scheduling the debrief

To start scheduling the debrief, click on the Schedule button on the debrief activity. Select `Manual Schedule` to get started.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7e6824dc1e31dfdea7267f4d7faf2063.png)

The panel for the debrief will be determined by your debrief default settings but you can opt to remove and add attendees as needed. You will also have the option to title your debrief and select the timezone if needed. Hit `Continue` to be taken to the Proposals tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/855eb1f4b413eab7af6e918f207611d2.png)

The auto-scheduler will automatically generate some proposed times for your debrief. You can click `View Details` for more information and then choose the option you’d like to schedule in with the `Use Schedule` button. If you’d prefer to manually schedule the debrief, click on `Manually Schedule`*&#x20;Instead.* This will take you to the Panel tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8d5f703e01b621990d3e7278c9bff3f5.png)

The Panel tab will show you each user’s calendar so you can determine a time that works for everyone. Once you’ve found a time that’s suitable, click `Configure Calendar Invite`*.*

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5ae0a4c0cd12ea91380cf78e54f2a825.png)

On the Calendar Invite tab you can view the calendar invites that will be sent out to your panel. You can click the `Edit` tab to adjust the debrief location and make any edits to the calendar invites. The Reminders tab will allow you to create or amend any reminders to be sent out.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5e1adfcb9fc7dbbe19ebe3a3a8c1ad61.png)

## The debrief activity

Just like with an interview, once scheduled, a debrief will show as an upcoming interview on each panel member’s home page.

At the time of the debrief, each panel member can click into the debrief on their home page to see the candidate’s resume and all feedback left so far.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/721e2e7c952c64bcfcb12f9d2bc53067.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I leave feedback on a debrief?

No, there isn’t a tab to leave feedback for a debrief or an option to link a feedback form to a debrief. You can review the candidate overview, the debrief briefing and the feedback left for the candidate within the debrief details if you are on the debrief panel.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does the candidate get notified or receive a calendar invite for the debrief?

No, only the users or interviewers you specify as on the debrief panel will be notified of and receive calendar invites for the debrief. The candidate will not be notified.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I cancel a debrief?

To cancel an upcoming debrief, navigate to the candidate’s profile and click Actions on the debrief activity, then select Cancel Interview.
:::


[title] Openings Management
[path] Jobs & Openings/

Openings in Ashby let you set up and track individual positions linked to your jobs, so you can manage multiple hires under a single job without creating duplicate jobs. They're especially useful for evergreen roles, where you can track the opening and closing date of each position independently while keeping the same job open.

Headcount planning is essential to achieving operational excellence in hiring. Openings help your team understand whether you have the knowledge and skills needed to achieve your goals, reduce costs on hiring workflows that don't yield results, and accurately track open headcount and hiring metrics at the individual position level.

This article covers how to enable and configure openings, create and manage them, link them to jobs and offers, and report on hiring progress.

:::hint{type="info"}
Learn the full openings workflow in our [Managing Openings in Ashby](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/manage-openings) course. It walks through jobs vs. openings, openings setup, approvals, linking openings to jobs and hires, and reporting on headcount and time to fill.
:::

# Permissions & access

Openings Management is available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

The table below outlines the roles that have access to configure openings settings and set up openings.

| Access Role                                                    | Has access to enable/configure opening settings? | Can see openings (for departments and jobs they have access to)? | Can create an opening? | Can link an opening to a job? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- | ----------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                                                | ❌                                                                | ❌                      | ❌                             |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                                                | ❌                                                                | ❌                      | ❌                             |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                                                | ✅ \*                                                             | ✅ \*                   | ❌                             |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                                                | ✅ \*                                                             | ✅ \*                   | ❌                             |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                                                | ✅ \*                                                             | ✅ \*                   | ❌                             |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌                                                | ✅ \*                                                             | ✅ \*                   | ❌                             |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌                                                | ✅ \*                                                             | ✅                      | ✅                             |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ❌                                                | ✅ \*                                                             | ✅                      | ✅                             |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                                                | ✅ \*                                                             | ✅                      | ✅                             |

:::hint{type="info"}
\*If you provide a user with *Manage Openings* access as part of their permissions, they can see all openings for the jobs and departments they have access to, along with any openings that aren't linked to a job. Users with Manage Openings permissions can also create openings. For more, see [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).

If the user does not have *Manage Openings* set as part of their permissions, they can see openings linked to the jobs they've been given access to. Team or department assignment alone does not grant visibility to standalone openings. If *Manage Openings* is not enabled within their permissions, the user cannot see openings that aren't linked to any jobs.

Only Organization Admins can configure openings settings, but Elevated Access users with the *Manage Openings* permissions can create an opening and link it to a department. Only those with Elevated Access - Admin Access or higher can link an opening to a role that they have access to.
:::

# Overview

Watch the video below for an overview of openings in Ashby, or follow the steps in this article.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/2a3557fcda8a492091379b3725bd1729"}

# Openings: best practices

Openings allow you to ensure that hiring only happens against approved headcount.

To that end, follow these best practices:

- When you are actively hiring for a job, link it to at least one approved opening.
- Whenever you make a hire, create the offer in Ashby and link it to an approved opening (if you enable Strict Mode, Ashby requires this).

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
For more on creating offers and sending them out to candidates, see [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh).
:::

- We recommend inputting your forward-looking hiring plan into Ashby (for example, for the next quarter or next half year). You can input openings as `Approved` but not `Open` just yet. You can input openings ahead of opening the corresponding jobs (often, you know you want to hire for a certain role, but it's far enough out that you don't have a job description yet and haven't completed an intake meeting).
- Mark an opening as `Open` as soon as you actively start hiring for it. This allows you to track time-to-fill accurately (the time from when a specific opening was opened to when it was filled with a hire) on the opening level, allowing for accurate reporting.

# Enabling openings in Admin

To enable the openings feature:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Openings**.
2. Toggle on the `Enable Manual Opening Management` option.
3. Configure the additional options to suit your organization. Settings are described in the bullet points below.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9BLIFId8Icz9Xz-aazIUb_openings-ashby-2026-08-18-at-30154-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1298" height="1566" darkWidth="1298" darkHeight="1566" alt="screenshot of some of the settings under the Openings admin area" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Enable Manual Opening Management** - use this to enable/disable the openings feature for your organization.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Opening Identifier Prefix** - you can append an opening identifier to the beginning of the automatically generated numeric value.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Next Opening Identifier Number** - add the next opening identifier here (if you want it to start on a specific number).
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Require Openings for Jobs** - when toggled on, your team is required to link openings when opening new jobs. We recommend leaving strict mode off while setting up openings so your team isn't blocked.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Require Openings for Hires** - when toggled on, offers can't be generated and candidates can't be moved to the Hired stage without having an opening attached to their offer.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Enable Requisition ID on Jobs**: When Openings Management is enabled, the Requisition ID field on a job's **Settings** tab is hidden by default (since Openings are the recommended way to track headcount). Toggle this on if you need to retain the Requisition ID field — for example, if you're mid-transition from using Req IDs or have a custom integration that relies on this field. This is uncommon.

The below fields appear when this setting is enabled:
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
**Auto-Name Job Requisition Identifiers?** - If enabled, job custom requisition identifiers are automatically generated.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
**Job Requisition Identifier Prefix** - If enabled, confirms the prefix to be used for job requisition identifiers when creating a new job.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
**Next Requisition Identifier Number** - If enabled, confirms the next number to be used in job requisition identifiers when creating a new job.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Require Team** - If enabled, the Team field on Opening is required going forward. A draft opening may still be created without a Team.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Require Location** - If enabled, the Location field on Opening is required going forward. A draft opening may still be created without a Location.
:::

# Create openings

:::hint{type="info"}
If you set up an opening, it defaults to draft mode. This allows you to create future openings without linking them to a job and open them immediately.
:::

## Create a draft opening on the Openings page

To create an opening on the Openings page:

1. Navigate to [Jobs > Openings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/openings).
2. Click `Create Opening` in the top right corner of the page.

![Shows the create opening button in the top right of the Openings page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Nj4ITY3PdTpgWKj1JtBL8_openings-management-archbee-document-2026-02-02-at-95245-am.jpg)

3. Fill out the form and click `Create Draft`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ca8c5839cf6b9b1359320e9b231d1c30.png" size="70" width="700" height="694" darkWidth="700" darkHeight="694" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Shows the opening details form with the Create Draft button in the bottom right."}

## Create a draft opening on a specific job

To create an opening for a specific job:

1. Navigate to the **Openings** tab of the job.
2. Click `Create Job Opening` in the top right corner of the page.
3. Fill out the form and click `Create Draft`.

![Highlights the Create Job Opening button in the Openings tab of a job.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DVRRKX3M6GTVFIhzIkmXR_openings-management-archbee-document-2026-02-02-at-95921-am.jpg)

## Create a draft opening via the top navigation bar

1. Click the `+ Add` button on the top navigation bar and select `Opening`.
2. Fill out the form and click `Create Draft`.

Watch the video below for a walkthrough of this process, or refer to the steps above.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/d45d440a35c946e68c1d0e17751925ca"}

:::hint{type="info"}
You can also import openings. For more, see [Bulk Import Options](docId\:SORNCJ66lgHRfLrAcXETJ).
:::

## Approving and setting openings as open

To approve or start the approval process for a draft opening, click the `Draft` status dropdown within the opening details.

If there's an approval process in place, you see a `Create Approval Request` option. Click it to review the approval process and create an approval request.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lqdvLK6f8IsxOhW9pPMtg_opening-acent-ashby-2026-02-02-at-101809-am.jpg" size="60" alt="Shows the create approval request option that appears when an opening approval process is in effect." isUploading="false" width="862" height="382" darkWidth="862" darkHeight="382" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring approvals, see [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo).
:::

If there is no approval process configured with criteria matching that of the opening, you see the option to approve the opening when you click the `Draft` status. This applies the Approved status to the opening.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DR_gECcl28rZ82ifks8kQ_opening-acent-ashby-2026-02-02-at-102159-am.jpg" size="70" alt="Shows the Approve option under the status dropdown." isUploading="false" width="692" height="332" darkWidth="692" darkHeight="332" showCaption="false"}

After the opening is listed as Approved, click the `Approved` status within the opening details, then `Open` to open the opening and start hiring for it.

![Shows the dropdown with options to Open or return the opening to Draft status once the draft has been approved.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SXaVm1LHMgxj7mZdyy8FN_opening-acent-ashby-2026-02-02-at-102316-am.jpg)

# View openings

## View all openings

To review all openings in one place, navigate to **Jobs > Openings**.

Options on this page include:

![A numbered screenshot showing the various locations of the buttons and options described below.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nLcu_X6THwpsc3BQAud25_openings-acent-ashby-2026-01-16-at-113956-am.jpg)

1. **Create Opening** - create a new opening in the results section of the page.
2. **Filter** - you can filter openings using opening fields.
3. **Saved Filters** - you can save filters to access a subset of your openings quickly.
4. **Results** - the full list of openings.
5. **Opening** - each row represents an opening. Click on the ID of an opening to view the details or to make any amendments, add details, or update the opening status.

![Screenshot of the open details popover that appears when you click on the opening ID.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/S8U5ClhVpwGACgF324fUt_opening-acent-ashby-2026-01-16-at-114545-am.jpg)

## On a specific job

To view an opening on a specific job, navigate to the job, then click **Openings** in the left menu.

Organization Admins can create new openings from this page. Elevated Access users can add an existing opening to a job.

Options on this page include:

![A numbered screenshot identifying where each of the below items appear in the UI.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OfIgkUm-WELRxLd0fiEKl_lead-designer-acent-ashby-2026-01-16-at-114845-am.jpg)

1. **Filter** - you can filter openings using opening fields.
2. **Saved Filters** - you can save filters to access a subset of your openings quickly.
3. **Add Existing Opening to Job** - apply an opening you've already configured to this job.
4. **Create Job Opening** - create a new opening for this role.
5. **Search** - search for specific openings if you have a long list.
6. **Opening** - each row represents an opening. Click on the ID of an opening to view the details.

# Use openings

:::hint{type="info"}
Once openings are created, they can be linked to jobs and candidates.
:::

## Open jobs and link to openings

If your organization requires jobs to be linked to openings, attach the approved opening when opening the job.

The `Open Job` screen displayed when you opt to open the job asks you to select an opening from the `Opening` drop-down.

If you link a draft opening to a job and then open the job, the opening automatically opens as well.

![Shows the window to link a job to an opening.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GO_gW93N_iXqc5SOk7UIv_image.png)

## Detaching an opening from a job

To remove an opening from a job, click on the opening in question, either from **Jobs > Openings** in Ashby or within the **Openings** section of the job.

In the **Jobs** tab, click the `X` on the role you'd like to remove the opening from.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uc0CSwtGQPcUzZw1vy4Ej_openings-re-draft-archbee-document-2026-02-02-at-95652-am.jpg" size="80" alt="Highlights the small X icon to remove a job from an opening." isUploading="false" width="1946" height="1104" darkWidth="1946" darkHeight="1104" showCaption="false"}

Want to attach the opening to a new job? Click the `Select Jobs` dropdown to select another job.

## Extend offers

When extending an offer for a job, you can link it to an opening. Once that opening is filled, you need to create a new opening on the job before extending any new offers.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have `Require Openings for Hires` enabled within your Openings settings, you need to specify an opening when creating an offer.
:::

When adding an opening to an offer, ensure the opening is set to Open.

If the opening isn't directly linked to the job, switch off the `Only show openings of job?` option to choose from all openings with the Open status.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vCPiy2-EVnGMzzTfJZHGo_openings-re-draft-archbee-document-2026-02-02-at-95750-am.jpg" size="70" alt="Highlights the Only show openings of Job? toggle button." isUploading="false" width="1396" height="908" darkWidth="1396" darkHeight="908" showCaption="false"}

# Reporting on openings versus jobs

If you have openings enabled in Ashby, you have the option to report on them separately from jobs.

If you select `Openings` as the subject when setting up a custom report, each individual opening is reflected in the results.

If you set `Jobs` as the subject, data relating to the job the openings are linked to is displayed in the results.

## Reporting time to fill for openings

If you generate a Time to Fill for Openings report and have multiple openings for a single job, each opening represents the active filling of a position for that job.

The average is calculated from when the opening was first opened to when it was filled.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3f07VQ-lWZpiK14sTtqQr_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-16-at-115944-am.jpg)

The report uses the dates openings were created and filled.

On the **Jobs Dashboard** in **Core Dashboards**, the time to fill report shows how long jobs have been open and how many hires were made against these jobs, and calculates a ratio.

# FAQ

### What fields are supported on openings?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Opening ID
- Description
- Team
- Jobs
- Location
- Roles
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
- Add Member
- Employment Type
- Is Backfill?
- Target Hire Date
- Target Start Date
- Compensation Range
:::
::::

### Can I set the Team and Location fields on my openings to be required?

You can, yes! Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >** [Openings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/headcount-planning), then enable the `Require Team` and `Require Location` options.

Going forward, draft openings can be created without the required information but can't be moved out of their draft state until the required fields are completed.

![Screenshot showing the toggles to enable the require team and require location settings.](https://cdn.zappy.app/963ec32bbf6ef1845d043e5f9e016911.png)

### Is the compensation range visible to everyone?

Currently, all users who can see openings can also see the compensation range. We are still refining permissions and plan to change this.

### What's the difference between jobs and openings?

The table below outlines what is included in each and what you'd use them to capture.

|                    | **Jobs**                                                                                                                                                               | **Openings**                                                                                                                                                                               |
| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Include**        | - The public job description<br />- The interview plan and all of its activities<br />- All active candidates under consideration for that job                         | - Your hiring plan (where one opening represents one open headcount)<br />- Which candidate was hired against which open headcount<br />- How long it took to fill an individual headcount |
| **Use to capture** | - The types of hires you want to make<br />- How you want to assess candidates for these types of jobs<br />- How you want to advertise these jobs on your career page | - Headcount information to accurately report on hiring goals, progress, and timing<br />- Get approval where needed when additional headcount is added to a plan                           |

### What about the Requisition ID field on a job's settings page?

Ashby supports a Requisition ID field on jobs to be compatible with some uncommon use cases.

The main reasons to use this field instead of openings are:

- For every job, you ever only make one hire.
- For organizations with custom integrations: you are integrating with a third-party system that is syncing headcount plans into Ashby and you want each of these headcounts to create a unique job.

:::hint{type="info"}
We recommend syncing third-party headcount data into openings instead of jobs.
:::

### What statuses are applied to openings?

You can view the status of an opening within the Status column, either when viewing openings across the company or on the job it's linked to.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qszYxRyJx2M4NiQ1v7Iqn_openings-management-archbee-document-2026-02-02-at-100107-am.jpg" size="60" alt="Highlights the status column on the Openings list page." isUploading="false" width="814" height="694" darkWidth="814" darkHeight="694" showCaption="false"}

An opening can have one of the following statuses:

- **Draft:** This opening is still in draft and can be opened, marked as approved, or submitted for approval (if approvals are required).
- **Approved:** The opening has been approved and is ready to open.
- **Open:** This opening can now be filled by a hired candidate.
- **Filled:** A candidate has been hired and has filled this opening.
- **Closed:** The opening has been closed out without a candidate being hired into it. This can be moved back to a *Draft* state if needed by clicking `More` when in the closed opening's details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iMQbZqbgCEkblNarkyvq6_openings-management-archbee-document-2026-02-02-at-100155-am.jpg" size="70" alt="Highlights the More button in the upper right corner and the Restore option." isUploading="false" width="922" height="412" darkWidth="922" darkHeight="412" showCaption="false"}

- **Archived:** This opening is hidden from the default openings view and would need to be restored before it could be moved back to a draft state. To restore an archived opening, open the archived opening's details, click `More`, then `Restore`. You also have the option to delete an archived opening completely. You can delete an archived opening, but not an archived job.

### How do openings work when assigned to confidential jobs?

If the opening is only assigned to a job set as confidential, only those with access to the confidential job can see the opening.

If the opening is also linked to other non-confidential jobs, others can access the opening but won't see the confidential job linked to it.

### How do I configure close reasons for openings?

When you close out an opening, you are asked to provide a reason. Use the `Reason for closing` dropdown to assign a reason.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BscaYtknSWNPCEHcwX8SZ_opening-acent-ashby-2026-03-16-at-35539-pm.jpg" size="70" alt="Shows the window to close an opening and select a reason." isUploading="false" width="874" height="314" darkWidth="874" darkHeight="314" showCaption="false"}

Close reasons for openings pull from close job reasons in **Admin > Organization Setup > Close Job Reasons**.

If you do not have any reasons listed, navigate to [Close Job Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/close-job-reasons) to set up reasons before closing out the opening.

[title] Reporting on Candidate Review Requests
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

This guide covers the candidate review request reporting subject and fields, along with some example reports. For more on configuring candidate reviews, check out [Candidate Reviews](docId\:URozLu2ekwLBdHrVKLKbo).

# Candidate review request subject and fields

A candidate review request subject is available for reporting, allowing you to pull data on the status of a review request, the requester and the reviewer.

The following fields are available for the candidate review requests subject:

| **Field**    | **Definition**                             |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------ |
| Title        | The title of the review request.           |
| Reviewer     | The person assigned to the review.         |
| Requested By | The person who created the review request. |
| Created At   | When the review request was created.       |
| Status       | The status of the review request.          |

The review submission details will also be available when reporting on this subject. The following fields can be found within Review Submission Details:

| **Field**              | **Definition**                                             |
| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| Overall Recommendation | The overall recommendation given in the review submission. |
| Submitted At           | When the review was submitted.                             |

# Examples of candidate review request reports

## Segmentation report covering overall recommendations for completed candidate reviews.

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x53;egmentation

**Subject:** Candidate Review Requests

**Timeframe:** Set your chosen timeframe here.

**Filters:** Review Request's Status = Complete (you can also add additional filters like job or department).

**Groupings:** Overall Recommendation

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VI7V3bXJ0xCNrK5ppmO14_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-15-at-104110-am.jpg)

## Custom List showing all pending candidate review requests and reviewer

:::hint{type="info"}
When creating a custom list report, you can export this list or configure [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) to send regular notifications about this report.
:::

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x43;ustom List

**Subject:** Candidate Review Requests

**Filters:** Review Request's Status = Not Started or In Progress (can also add additional filters like Created At to set a timeframe)

**Columns:** Review Request's Title, Review Request's Reviewer, Review Request's Requested By, Review Request's Created At, Review Request's Status.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/phLzTWHaykqVrqq8ypGjo_custom-list-not-started-or-in-progress-candidate-review-requests.jpg)


[title] Reporting on Candidate Fraud Status and Signals
[path] Applications/

# Overview

You can report on a candidate's fraud status and also any signals detected. The following fields are available for reporting on candidate fraud:

| Fields        | Definition                                                                       |
| ------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Fraud Status  | The fraud review status for candidates flagged for fraud.                        |
| Fraud Signals | The specific fraud signals triggered for this candidate across all fraud checks. |

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on enabling candidate fraud detection, check out [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl). For more on running the candidate fraud detection tool on a candidate's profile and reviewing results, review [Running Candidate Fraud Detection Checks & Reviewing Fraud Signals](docId\:utOwntvTiXHyR2gC-Eu2a).
:::

# Example reports for candidate fraud

Below you can find some examples of reports you can run using the above fields. When reporting on candidate fraud signals, we would usually recommend using the Candidate subject.

## Segmentation report covering candidate fraud status across applications

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x53;egmentation

**Subject:** Candidates

**Timeframe:** Added At \[determine your chosen timeframe here]

**Filters:** You can filter by job, department, etc here.

**Groupings:** Candidate Fraud Status

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/V7AWfvO4eTXu9-3I6sAID_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-10-at-111737-am.jpg)

## Most common candidate fraud signals for candidates who have been flagged as fraudulent

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x53;egmentation

**Subject:** Candidates

**Timeframe:** Added At \[determine your chosen timeframe here]

**Filters:&#x20;**&#x43;andidate Fraud Status = Marked Fraudulent or Multiple Fraud Signals - Unreviewed (to include any flagged candidates who are yet to be checked)

**Groupings:** Candidate Fraud Signals

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PlX3htRwQQ6YOcUEkyO9m_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-10-at-112224-am.jpg)

## Create an exportable list of flagged candidates including the fraud signals

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x43;ustom List

**Subject:** Candidates

**Filters:&#x20;**&#x43;andidate Fraud Status = Marked Fraudulent or Multiple Fraud Signals - Unreviewed (to include any flagged candidates who are yet to be checked)

**Columns:&#x20;**&#x41;ny candidate information you'd like to include but ensure that Candidate Fraud Signals is included as a column.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zLiPR_E99D5koslrvd-nV_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-10-at-112829-am.jpg)

## Candidate fraud flag rate, grouped by the job the job consideration is for

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x53;egmentation

**Subject:** Candidates

**Timeframe:** Added At \[determine your chosen timeframe here]

**Groupings:&#x20;**&#x43;andidate's Job and Candidate's Fraud Status

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Ut9eUvB4TVQiOk6lpaXsk_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-05-06-at-121138-pm.jpg)

# Using calculated fields to create custom fraud risk ratings or thresholds

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** Only Organization Admins can create calculated fields.
:::

Calculated fields are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on calculated fields in general, check out [Calculated Fields](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x)&#x20;
:::

If you'd like to configure your own custom fraud risk thresholds, you can create a calculated field to configure buckets to categorize fraud signals. To do this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Data Management > Calculated Fields**
2. Click `+ New` , add a title and create the calculated field with the following settings before clicking `Create`:
   - Object Type: Candidates
   - Type: Filter Bucket Field

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0bY7_teZCVMR9g6CvrAe4_calculated-fields-creation.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="882" height="670" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. Click `+ Add Bucket` to create a new bucket. Title each bucket to set the threshold names (for example High Risk)
4. Within each bucket, set your criteria that, when matched will add the candidate to this bucket
   - To bucket candidates based on fraud signals, click `+ Add Field to Match`, then select the candidate fraud signals that, when flagged, will add the candidate to this bucket.&#x20;
   - Any fraud signals that are not assigned to a specific bucket will result in the candidate being added to the Other bucket
5. Click `Save` to save your custom field

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oEkFR8t8Zn05D6k38eDbl-20260506-104317.jpg" size="100" width="1668" height="1416" position="center" alt="An example setup of a calculated field for candidate fraud thresholds" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

Once created, your calculated field can be used to filter or group report results.&#x20;

![Using the newly created calculated field for grouping a report.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3VjDZ8YS5X5g1y6skpocK_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-05-06-at-120250-pm.jpg)


[title] Suggested Meeting Rooms
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Scheduling Add-On/

Suggested meeting rooms let you determine which meeting rooms are suggested first when scheduling. If you have a lot of meeting rooms configured in Google Workspace or your Microsoft 365 tenant, use this feature to prioritize rooms that are suitable for interviews and exclude those you would not want to book, like wellness rooms, call booths, or rooms reserved for specific teams. Any excluded rooms remain available to select, but appear below the suggested rooms rather than at the top of the list.

# Permissions & access

:::hint{type="warning"}
- This feature is part of the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1).
- The add-on is included in the Enterprise plan. If you're on the Plus plan, you can purchase it as an add-on.
- Suggested meeting rooms and the Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on are not available on the Foundations or Legacy Plus plans.
:::

# Setting your suggested meeting rooms

To set your criteria for suggested meeting rooms:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Meeting Rooms**.
2. Click the **Settings** tab.
3. Toggle on `Filter suggested interview rooms`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yofcGV3tYTZa_53sdFImC_filter-suggested-meeting-rooms-toggle.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1510" height="844" darkWidth="1510" darkHeight="844" alt="Enable filter suggested interview rooms before setting your criteria for suggested meeting rooms." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Click `+ Add Field to Match` to select the fields and build out your criteria.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
As you set your criteria for suggested rooms, you can see how many rooms are suggested. Click `X Suggested Rooms` next to the `Reset` button to see the matches.

![The X Suggested Rooms option that will open the rooms that meet your criteria for review.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mwlhz1QpslNMpwwQe7OIa_example-with-not-operator.jpg)
:::

5. Click `Save` to confirm your criteria. The `Reset` button sets your criteria back to its last saved state.

# Excluding rooms using the `Not` operator

To define which rooms to exclude from suggestions, you can use the `Not` operator to add a `The following is not true` condition to the fields you select. Only meeting rooms that do not meet the criteria appear as suggested meeting rooms.

![An example of suggested meeting room criteria set with a NOT operator.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QH_mskAwLDFhZvi1ryYxg_meeting-rooms-example-with-a-not-operator.jpg)

# How suggested meeting rooms work with scheduling

When manually scheduling an interview, the suggested rooms show at the top of the list in the **Room** dropdown.

Any rooms filtered out of the suggested list remain selectable, but appear in a section titled **Not Suggested for Interviews**.

![Viewing suggested meeting rooms when manually scheduling an interview.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F0dk9mVV34UgeuRagtI9b_selecting-rooms-when-scheduling.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on manually scheduling interviews, check out [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN).
:::

# Setting conditions with `And` and `Or` operators (optional)

While configuring your rules, you use the `And` and `Or` operators, too. While the `Not` operator is more commonly used with suggested meeting rooms, these provide further flexibility for assigning multiple fields to your conditions.

`And`: This option adds the `All are true` condition to the rule, so you can set multiple conditions. As long as all of the conditions are met, the meeting room is suggested when scheduling moving forward.

So in the example below, if the meeting room has a capacity larger than one but smaller than 10, it appears as a suggested meeting room.

![An example of suggested meeting room criteria set with the AND operator.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F8oQvGZnBJGlrjEanEZ-4_meeting-rooms-and-operator-example.jpg)

`Or`: This option adds the `Any can be true` condition to the rule. If the meeting room matches any of the criteria set, it appears as a suggested meeting room.

In the example below, any rooms in the specified meeting rooms pool, or any that contain "Conference," appear on the suggested meeting rooms list.

![And example of suggested meeting rooms criteria using the OR operator.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kixXp_adOGSFIHljzYd0o_meeting-rooms-or-operator-example.jpg)

You can also add these operators within one another for additional flexibility. Below is an example using the `And` and `Not` operators. Here the room needs to have a capacity greater than one and not have Call Booth in the room name.

![An example of suggested meeting room criteria set with multiple operators.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hgPr3k7ENNm3VQqhVG8nZ_meeting-rooms-example-with-not-and-and-operators.jpg)


[title] Setting Interviewer Limits and Pausing Interviewers
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

This article covers how to set limits on the number of interviews your interviewers can take per day or per week, and how to pause interviewers from being scheduled. These tools help prevent interviewer fatigue and ensure availability is managed fairly across your organization.

# Permissions & access

Only Org Admins can set or adjust interviewer limits and pause interviewers.

# Setting interviewer limits per employee

On the [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users) page, click on a user and navigate to the **Interviewer Info** tab to set the maximum number of interviews the interviewer can take each day and each week.

Once an interviewer reaches their maximum number of interviews, their availability does not show to the candidate when booking for that day or week.

These limits do not apply when using the `Manual Schedule` option for booking interviews.

:::hint{type="info"}
Interview events that do not require feedback do not count against interviewer limits.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ae2f062c85ab41df9cdacf8e0f916e58"}

# Setting org-wide interviewer limits

Interview limit defaults can be set org-wide by navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interviewer Limit Defaults**. Defaults set here apply to any interviewer, but are overridden if that interviewer has different limits set up on their employee profile. On this page, you can define how many interviews your interviewers are allowed to participate in per day and per week.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/S34kBFyJ0mGCmo8CTzBak_interviewer-limit-defaults-acent-ashby-2026-04-07-at-23140-pm.jpg)

# Pausing interviewers

You can either pause an interviewer within a specific pool (so they can't be booked for interviews where that pool is assigned) or globally (so they aren't automatically scheduled for any interviews).

## Pausing an interviewer from within a pool

To pause an interviewer's membership in a pool, head to **Admin > Interviewing & Scheduling >** [Interviewer Pools](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviewer-tags) and click on the pool in question. Click `Actions` next to the interviewer in question, then click `Pause Membership`. When an interviewer is paused, a **Paused** tag shows beside their name in the pool.&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/358a39506fc8294a6302f52b263461a6.png)

You can unpause the interviewer at any time by clicking on them from within the interviewer pool and selecting `Resume Membership`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9c5ed65dcdd4a70129eeddb6cf678cc8.png)

## Pausing an interviewer across all interviews

The option to pause interviewers is only available on Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

If you want to pause an interviewer for all interviews (for example, if the interviewer is on vacation):

1. Navigate to their user profile within **Admin > Employees** and head to the **Interviewer Info** tab.
2. Turn on the `Pause Interviewer` option. You can also add a reason for the pause that appears when a user tries to manually schedule that interviewer.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gP0798uYbcjzxy0QvWe0s_employees-acent-ashby-2026-01-26-at-41429-pm.jpg)

3. To schedule a pause, click `Set start date` to set the date and time the pause starts.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/G3Rma6-ZjbicpSzjOWlNr_employees-acent-ashby-2026-01-26-at-41506-pm.jpg)

4. Click `Set end date` to set when the pause ends. If you don't set an end date, the pause continues indefinitely until disabled on the user's profile.
5. Click `Submit` to confirm the pause.

You can turn the pause off at any time by switching off the `Pause Interviewer` option.


[title] Rescheduling and Canceling Interviews
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

This article explains how to reschedule or update interview details and how to cancel interviews in Ashby. For guidance on initially assigning interviewers or setting up interviews, see [Assigning Interviewers](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo)  and [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).

# Rescheduling or updating interview details

You can reschedule or update single- or multi-event interviews as long as feedback has not been submitted.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6d95e4b40c704ebebf19711e1a453a06"}

To reschedule an interview or change other interview details, such as the interviewer, click `Reschedule` on the interview event, then `Manual Reschedule`.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JB2a9A10R3mog4ynAAFKP_shelley-pearce-marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-02-17-at-101040-am.jpg)

When rescheduling, you can adjust various interview details, such as the date, time, interview type, interviewer, and number of interviewer slots.

To change the interviewer, select `Clear User` and then use the drop-down menu to select another interviewer.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/443ea6b2a19f9896227d72a74a7c98e9.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="479" height="451" darkWidth="479" darkHeight="451" showCaption="false"}

- **Clear User**: Removes the selected interviewer but keeps the interview slot. You can then use the `Select User…` dropdown to select another interviewer.
- **Remove Slot**: Removes the slot completely to reduce the size of your panel by one.

If you opt to resend calendar invites when rescheduling, the new interviewer receives a calendar invite and the candidate receives an updated invite. We recommend resending the calendar invite when rescheduling.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can remove an interviewer who has already provided feedback when rescheduling. Once removed, their feedback no longer shows in Ashby.
:::

# Canceling interviews

Single or multi-event interviews can be canceled from the candidate profile.

1. Select the `Reschedule` button and then `Cancel Interview` (for single-event interviews) or `Select and Cancel Interviews` (for multi-event interviews).
2. If canceling a multi-event interview, select which specific interviews you'd like to cancel. Uncheck the box for interviews you want to keep, and select `Next`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/z8MzpOhILxndXabadIK0l_image.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="618" height="399" darkWidth="618" darkHeight="399" showCaption="false"}

3. Choose to update the candidate and interviewer invites now, or update them later on the following screen.
4. Select `Cancel Interviews` to cancel the interview(s).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0ahAN-tCJU4FOG69IUB6V_luz-lueilwitz-klein-jr-knowledge-manager-ashby-2026-09-02-at-40946-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="605" height="400" darkWidth="605" darkHeight="400" showCaption="false"}


[title] Projects
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

This guide covers how to set up and use a project to create and track a talent pool you're not actively interviewing

# Projects Overview

Projects help you keep track of talent that you're not actively considering for any particular role you currently have open. Navigate to [Sourcing→Projects](https://app.ashbyhq.com/projects) to get started.

# Set up a project

To set up a project, head to Sourcing, then [Projects](https://app.ashbyhq.com/projects).

From there, click the `+ New` button. From there, you’ll be able to title your project and add in a description for users to reference when adding candidates.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/108fb30d68dfb8225334c5065ff3c672.png)

If you have any project custom fields set up, you’ll also be asked to fill out those fields if required. Click `Create` to confirm the project details and create it.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uX_L3Tw2rpE4bFErgdpJh_creating-a-project.jpg)



# Add candidates to a project

Once you have setup a project, you can add candidates to that project from the Chrome Extension. Click the `+` icon in the Projects section of the Chrome extension, then select the project from the list. The candidate will then be added to the selected project.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LoOe0Y9l3a5sHON4_rrCB_image1.png" size="58" width="371" height="581" darkWidth="371" darkHeight="581" position="center" alt="image (1).png" showCaption="false"}

You can also add a candidate to a project from their candidate profile via the `More` tab and the `Add to Project` option.

![Adding a candidate to a project via their candidate profile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/4ca751aca21213daa9b443cec144f61d.png)

**Adding candidates to a project in bulk**

You can also add candidates to a project in bulk on the Candidate Search page. You can read more about filtering candidates at [Candidate Search](#).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a03a5d9c39ee3236b09638402911b19f.png)

Find candidates that meet your criteria by setting up filters as needed, then check the checkboxes next to the candidates you’d like to add to your project.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5ae77b64c879756383b44dc3d8b63be3.png)

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Click `Add to Project` and select the project in question. Click `Start` to kick off the process of adding candidates to your project.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3d43e38e82069faba30bace6791bd3df.png)
:::
::::

# Bulk candidate actions on projects

You have options to complete individual and bulk actions for candidates in projects including emailing, enrolling in sequences, and adding them to job considerations. Either check the checkbox next to each candidate or use the `Select All `option to select all candidates in the project, then use the buttons to take action.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Ol8iRgBFUh53v7gskugm3_project-view.jpg)

**Consider for Job:** Consider all selected candidates in the project for a role.

**Add to Another Project:** Add all selected candidates to another project you’ve configured.

**Remove from Project:** Remove all of the selected candidates from the project.

**Archive:** Archive selected candidates from a job consideration

**Set Tags:&#x20;**&#x41;dd tags to selected candidates.

**Email:** Send an email to all selected candidates in the project.

**Enroll in Sequence:** Enroll all selected candidates in a specific sequence.

**Request Review:** Request a candidate review - more on this at [Candidate Reviews](docId\:URozLu2ekwLBdHrVKLKbo)&#x20;

**Transfer:&#x20;**&#x54;ransfer selected candidate job considerations from one job to another. More on this at [Can I transfer a candidate’s job consideration to another job or interview plan?](docId\:FN4VK3fmmC2pOhXo3SY_y)

**Anonymize:** Anonymize the selected candidates (more on this at [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc)&#x20;

**Delete:&#x20;**&#x44;elete the selected candidates (more on this at [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc)).

**Mark as Do Not Contact:&#x20;**&#x4D;ark the candidate as Do Not Contact (more on this at [Can I mark a candidate as Do Not Contact?](docId:_Mj-DewLnurpGtpvCZo81)&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
There are also a few additional options available under the `More` menu.
:::

Once you have determined the candidate records and the action to be taken on them, you will then be taken to the bulk action wizard to confirm the bulk action.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3bbcdf2fae657f2ea5afd0db337b897e.png" size="60" width="578" height="737" darkWidth="578" darkHeight="737" position="center" showCaption="false"}

In the Selection section, you’ll be able to see the criteria you’ve set for this bulk action and the number of records that match this criteria. Be sure to take time to review this information.

If the action is destructive (for example, deleting candidates), you will be asked to confirm that you are aware the action is destructive by checking the `I confirm that this action is destructive` checkbox.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5f5697a4e267539e5d6ddde28343fcaf.png" size="62" width="321" height="235" darkWidth="321" darkHeight="235" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Once you’ve reviewed the bulk action and the records that the action will be taken on, click the `Start X on X records `button to continue.

If you are performing a bulk action on a small set of records, you will be asked to confirm the bulk action to be taken, along with the number of records the action is to be taken.

If the action is being taken on a large number of records, you will be prompted to type the action into the specified field before the action across the chosen records can be performed. The number of records impacted will also be listed in the prompt window.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/93f39730978d3180c46005b4422a6ed4.png)

Once you’ve typed the action into the field, click `Perform` to perform the bulk action across your specified records.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The bulk action type and the number of records included in the bulk action determines the number of confirmation prompts you’ll receive:

*Deleting or Anonymizing Candidates*
Up to 24 candidates: Inline prompt.
24+ candidates: Confirmation window with typing prompt.

*Archiving, Marking as Do Not Contact or Sending a Survey*
Up to 24 candidates: Inline prompt.
24+ candidates: Confirmation window with typing prompt.
:::

With any other bulk actions, if you are taking the action on 24 candidates or more, you will see the inline prompt to confirm your bulk action before it is performed.

If you opt to close out the bulk action wizard window at the point where the bulk actions are being process, you will be able to see the progress in a minimized version of the wizard.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e56c241e10064ba280b9c69408341d99.png" size="58" width="346" height="75" darkWidth="346" darkHeight="75" position="center" showCaption="false"}

To open the wizard back up, click the `Restore bulk action pullout` button.

Once the bulk action has been performed, you will be able to view a log of all the changes on the confirmation page. Click `Close` to close out the bulk action wizard when you’re done.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/9074248ae416cc8615e70e829bc20c82.png" size="66" width="567" height="747" darkWidth="567" darkHeight="747" position="center" showCaption="false"}

# Project Custom Fields

Candidate, Job and Project Custom Fields can be configured on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="info"}
Now you can add custom fields specifically for your projects. You can use these to specify and house information in your project’s *Settings* page. You can show these custom fields as additional columns when viewing projects or filter by custom fields as needed.
:::

### Creating a Project Custom Field

To create a custom field for your projects, head to [Custom Fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields/project) within Admin, from there, click the Projects tab. Click `New` to create a new custom field.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f4cb4d54c57a653db9ce53d57f7f66c3.png)

When creating a new custom field, you’ll be asked to add the following;

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Title: The name of your field, used for filtering and the header if you add a column for this custom field to your project.

Description: A description that will show internally to clarify the information to be added to this custom field.

Field Type: Specify the format of the information added to this field.

Is Required?: Does this information need to be included?

Show in Project List by Default?: Check this if the custom field should be shown as a column when viewing your project list.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/db16dd1aaa874cd047ce89b1e11a8a1d.png)
:::
::::

### Completing Project Custom Fields

To add information to the custom fields on a project, navigate to Sourcing, then [Projects](https://app.ashbyhq.com/projects). Click on the project in question, then click `Settings.` Your custom fields will be listed under the Basic Info section.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9accece5ab9af6987a521ffe3d880016.png)

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If a custom field is set as required, you’ll see a warning message below an empty field requesting that you select an option or complete the field.

If a required field was previously filled and the information is removed, when navigating to another field, you’ll see a message prompting you to complete the field. If you navigate away from the page leaving the field empty, the field will revert to containing the previously entered information.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2ad466819099ffe5b4c5896d2da11129.png)


:::
::::

### Filtering by a Project Custom Field

To filter by a project’s custom field, ensure that the `Advanced` toggle is on for filtering. From there, click `Add Field to Match` to select the custom field you’d like to filter by.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bab601450ec803dc39718d8177b1afc7.png)

Once the filter has been selected you can then specify the field information you’d like to use to find specific projects.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e6c0c6fa8489fcc6a42a97f19cef26e5.png)

# Confidential Projects

Confidential Projects are only available on the Plus, Legacy Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Making a project confidential

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ae4d30954b7e4eba80aea407ed7ac55c"}

You can set a project as confidential either when creating a project, or viewing the list of candidates in a project.

Click `New` to create a new project and on the following screen, you can set the project as confidential by checking the `Is Confidential? `checkbox on the creation tab.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/0fc0575e07d7fec8d9e3ff5b7c505b33.png" size="64" width="481" height="312" darkWidth="481" darkHeight="312" position="center" showCaption="false"}

When editing a project, you can either click on the Access tab in the left-hand navigation bar, or click `More`, then `Access`*.*

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1375b756b43e12ab4d84960f8f9eda09.png)

A pop-up will then give you the option to make the project confidential.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7517f14ca6c3addb8452e430a61010df.png" size="80" width="520" height="213" darkWidth="520" darkHeight="213" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Once the role has been made confidential, you will have the option to allow other users access via the Access List drop-down or set the project back to public via the `Make Public` button. Please note that only users with *Elevated Access* and up can be added to a confidential project.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f61d89c31b4c912c06cc49caa52d0ac8.png" size="78" width="522" height="274" darkWidth="522" darkHeight="274" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Users who do not have access to the project will not be able to see it on their list of projects when logging in. They will not see if a candidate has been added to a confidential project either.

Once a new user is given access, you can then provide them with one of two roles: Member or Admin.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4f5e2aca63db0849f6900d7dcb5ca017.png)

**Member:&#x20;**&#x54;his user has full access to the project but can’t manage access permissions.

**Admin:** This user has full access to the project including being able to amend acces permissions.

:::hint{type="info"}
Only the project creator can switch a confidential project back to public.
:::

You can view the visibility settings for all your projects on the Projects [page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/projects), as an additional Visibility column will appear on the Results table.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5c5ce830604fadabefae18b509f042fa.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What permissions do I need to access a project?

If you have Elevated Access permissions, you will be able to view all shared projects but will only be able to view or add leads to projects if they are considered for a job or jobs you have access to. You will also be able to view or add any leads to the project if they have not been considered for a role yet.
You will need Elevated Access and to be added to a confidential project to have access to it. Again, you will only be able to view or add leads to the project if they have been considered for jobs you have access to, or if they haven’t been considered for a job yet.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### If a candidate has been added to a confidential project and hasn’t been added to any public projects or considered for public jobs, can other users see that candidate?

When a candidate is linked only to a confidential project (and no job considerations), the candidate's profile will not appear or be accessible for other users. This level of privacy ensures that high-profile candidates or candidates linked to sensitive roles are only accessible on a need-to-know basis, which can be achieved by granting access to others for the confidential project.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set an Organization Admin to access all confidential jobs and projects in Ashby?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can - on the Permissions tab of the user’s profile on the *Employees* page, there’s a Can See and Manage All Confidential Jobs and Projects field.

Here you can determine whether the Organization Admin has access to all confidential roles and projects or not.

To filter by a project’s custom field, ensure that the `Advanced` toggle is on for filtering. From there, click `Add Field to Match` to select the custom field you’d like to filter by.

Once the filter has been selected you can then specify the field information you’d like to use to find specific projects.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9d4bc975d35bf388c2b379f8883c243e.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How is Last Outbound Activity tracked in Projects?

Only outreach sent or logged directly in Ashby counts toward Last Outbound Activity. This includes one-off emails, sequences, and any communication logged as outreach.
Synced emails sent outside of Ashby do not count.
:::


[title] Sourcing & Outreach
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Ashby has a number of different tools to assist with sourcing efforts including the Chrome Extension, sequences, projects, sourcing forms and more.

Want to have users review candidates prior to them being added to your pipeline? Check out our candidate reviews tool.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🔍 [Chrome Extension](docId\:Je_BiJ1sj2ro6WT9vtTfP)&#x20;

💌 [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4)&#x20;

📨 [Sequences: InMail & Connection Requests](docId\:Qbf62_UsXyctMQzHE07HA)&#x20;

👥 [Projects](docId\:NeOuKpzGi4kDAtdSyMhez)&#x20;

📋 [Sourcing Forms](docId:0uEUEalX1VA_AY8S18ldO)&#x20;

📰 [Newsletters](docId\:h9M9sIQyi8ESS69a3z0mr)&#x20;

🗓️ [Events](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS)&#x20;

✅ [Candidate Reviews](docId\:URozLu2ekwLBdHrVKLKbo)&#x20;

❌ [Do Not Contact Company Lists](docId\:OPIrwZevCbUH13_pIGTGJ)&#x20;

✉️ [Open Rates and Reporting on Sequences](docId\:xF6w8L12q2t7yUEJ3TnQw)&#x20;

❓ [Can I search Ashby from my Chrome browser?](docId:47P0E3vEaAu25HbUfqB-_)&#x20;
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Getting started with sourcing? Check out the [Sourcing in Ashby](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/sourcinginashby) course in Ashby Academy.
:::


[title] How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?
[path] Candidates/

***

This guide covers how duplicates are detected and how merging candidate profiles works in Ashby. Creating duplicate candidates is automatically prevented in most cases, but when duplicates do exist, you can merge them manually.

# How duplicate detection works in Ashby

Ashby matches duplicates based on the following candidate criteria:

- Email address(es)
- Name
- Social links (LinkedIn, GitHub, Twitter)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Duplicates are not flagged for agency users.
:::

Ashby performs the below checks to avoid creating duplicate candidate profiles:

- If the email used to apply matches an existing candidate profile, Ashby adds the application to that existing candidate — no duplicate is created.
- If the email used to apply matches an employee's current work email, Ashby first checks whether that employee has a linked candidate profile before creating a new one:
  - If the employee has one linked candidate and the names match, the application is automatically added to the existing candidate.
  - If the names don't match, a new candidate is created and flagged as a potential duplicate for manual review.
  - If the employee has no linked candidate, a new candidate is created and linked to the employee.
  - If the employee has two or more linked candidates, a new candidate is created and all candidates linked to the same employee are flagged as potential duplicates for manual review.

:::hint{type="info" indent="3"}
Ashby can identify close-but-not-exact name matches (e.g., Jon Smith vs. Jonathan Smith).
:::

# How to merge candidate profiles

When Ashby detects a duplicate candidate profile, a `Duplicate Candidate` button appears on both candidate profiles, to the left of the `Follow Up`, `Email`, `Change Stage`, `Archive`, and `More` options at the top of the profile.

![Screenshot of a candidate profile showing the Duplicate Candidate button to the left of the Follow Up, Email, Change Stage, Archive, and More options.](https://cdn.zappy.app/c9592353a137c9597078de22423e6ba3.png)

Click `Duplicate Candidate` to view the potential profile matches that have been flagged and take action accordingly. Any differences between the candidate profiles are highlighted, and you also have the option to view candidate resumes. Click the possible duplicate candidate's name to open their profile in a new tab if you'd like to make further checks. If more than one duplicate is detected, use the `Previous` and `Next` arrows to move between candidate profiles.

![Screenshot of the Possible Duplicate Candidate screen showing two profiles side by side with differences highlighted and options to view resumes and navigate between duplicates.](https://cdn.zappy.app/381eb8803281e9f8f3282dd0b462056b.png)

You have two options to take action on the duplicate warning:

1. `Not a Duplicate`: Confirm that this profile is not a duplicate to remove the `Duplicate Candidate` message and keep the profiles separate.
2. `Merge Profiles`: Merge the two candidate profiles together. On clicking `Merge Profiles`, a preview of the merged candidate information appears before you confirm. Confirm the merge by clicking `Merge`. This action is irreversible.

:::hint{type="info"}
The candidate you took the merge action on (listed under **This Candidate** on the **Possible Duplicate Candidate** screen) retains its candidate ID after merging.
:::

![Screenshot of the merge preview screen showing a combined view of candidate information before confirming the merge.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8927128f1cb911f33f26027ba4f19a9b.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If there is more than one duplicate, the duplicate profile is not immediately removed when action is taken. When looking at additional duplicates, click the `Previous` arrow to see the merged or marked-as-distinct candidate. Action buttons are disabled for profiles you've already taken action on.
:::

# What if a candidate is considered for a job on both profiles?

If both profiles that are merged have job considerations, all job considerations remain intact on the merged profile.

For example, if the candidate has been considered for the same role on both profiles, when the two profiles are merged, there are two job considerations on the one candidate profile for your records.

If two job considerations are listed on the candidate profile and you'd like them to only be considered for the role once, archive the job consideration you don't plan to move forward with.

![Screenshot of a candidate profile showing two job considerations for the same role after a merge.](https://cdn.zappy.app/6a37b9445bb71fed04d5280d0c9c26a9.png)

# Does the Chrome Extension pick up on existing profiles in Ashby?

Yes. When the Chrome Extension is opened on a LinkedIn profile, Ashby searches for a match based on the LinkedIn URL.

If a match exists, that person's profile and existing job considerations are displayed so you can add data to the existing profile rather than creating a new one.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/793a5cab40cf08e47f0bebb12d77cf77.png" size="56" width="393" height="701" darkWidth="393" darkHeight="701" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the Chrome Extension showing an existing candidate profile match from LinkedIn." showCaption="false"}

If no match is found, a new profile can be added. Once a profile is added, Ashby checks it against all three criteria. If a duplicate is found, a duplicate warning appears, and the two profiles can be merged.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/cc8647304dfb417ace1045eca3dc9e25.png" size="56" width="395" height="687" darkWidth="395" darkHeight="687" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the Chrome Extension showing a duplicate warning after a new profile is added." showCaption="false"}

# Which users can merge profiles?

Any user with edit access to both profiles can merge them. For more information on which access levels can edit candidate profiles, see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

# Is it possible to unmerge profiles?

It is not currently possible to automatically unmerge profiles, but most data from the second profile can be found on the **Summary** tab of the merged profile in the `Other` sections.

![Screenshot of the Summary tab on a merged candidate profile showing the Other sections containing data from the second profile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8347a656cdd7ea29e10d74e7419f6ed4.png)

To manually unmerge profiles, create a new, separate candidate profile and then copy and paste the second candidate's details into the newly created profile, and/or upload any of the second candidate's files or resume. You can then remove the second candidate's details and files from the original profile to avoid further confusion.

# FAQs

### What happens if a candidate applies for the same job twice?

If a candidate applies for a role again using the same information when they already have an active job consideration, only one job consideration appears on their profile. An additional job consideration is not created.

Both application forms can be seen in the **Forms** section of the feed on the candidate's profile.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/a10261628c57e8afdfc979d0f7a86668.png" size="70" width="578" height="230" darkWidth="578" darkHeight="230" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the Forms section on a candidate's profile feed showing two application forms for the same role." showCaption="false"}

If you regularly see candidates applying for the same role multiple times, see our guide on [Application Limits](docId\:DTFh2I3HX_EkQBVgwW8FI).

If the candidate applies with different information, an additional candidate profile is created but may be flagged as a duplicate.

### What happens when an internal employee applies using their work email?

If the email used to apply matches a current employee's work email, Ashby checks whether that employee has a linked candidate profile before creating a new one.

For full logic, see  [How duplicate detection works in Ashby](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb) above.

### What happens if a candidate was sourced and added to a job as a lead, then applied for the same job themselves?

In this case, the candidate continues to have just one job consideration on their profile for the role but is moved to the Application Review stage.

### How do custom fields work with merged candidates?

When merging candidates, the custom fields associated with the job considerations from both the original candidate profile and the merged duplicate are preserved after the merge. The custom fields associated with the primary candidate profile (under the **Candidate** view) are not updated by the duplicate candidate profile as part of the merge.

### If duplicate candidates have different data retention dates, what happens when they are merged?

The primary profile's retention dates (the profile listed under **This Candidate** when merging profiles — see [How to merge candidate profiles](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb) above) are kept on the merged profile. If you have sent any consent emails to a candidate prior to merging and the candidate provides consent via a link sent to them, the Consent Retention Data is updated.

### Can I view all candidates flagged as duplicates in bulk?

Not currently. Duplicate candidates must be reviewed individually from each candidate's profile. Open the candidate profile, select `Duplicate Candidate`, and use the previous and next arrows to review each potential duplicate associated with that profile.

[title] Interview Plans
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

Interview plans determine the stages your candidates will pass through when interviewing with your team. Interview plans are created in Admin, then assigned to jobs. All jobs require an interview plan. You can see the stages of your interview plan displayed in the **Candidate Pipeline** section of the role it’s assigned to.

In this guide, we describe what an interview plan is, the types of interview plans, and how to set them up.

# Permissions & access

See the table below for information on the roles that have access to set up and edit shared interview plans.

| Access Role                                                    | Has Access? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌           |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ❌\*         |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅           |

\*Only Organization Admins can configure shared interview plans by default. Elevated Access users can be given access to edit shared interview plans if needed. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).

# Viewing an interview plan setup

Here’s an example of an interview plan:

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/0cae5204dbfaf31438bda6be3b2f3c0a.png" size="62" width="510" height="697" darkWidth="510" darkHeight="697" position="center" alt="Shows the Interview Plan for a Designer role with the Lead, Application Review, and Active sections visible." showCaption="false"}

Interview plans have multiple sections, including:&#x20;

**Lead:** These stages are used for sourced candidates, both when finding suitable candidates and when reaching out to them to gauge their interest. Additional stages can be added to customize the section.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The *New Lead, Reached Out&#x20;*&#x61;nd *Replied* stages cannot be removed from the interview plan.
:::

**Application Review:&#x20;**&#x54;his stage reflects that the candidates are being assessed for further action based on their applications. It is not customizable.

**Active:** This section allows you to add the stages that reflect your hiring process from when an application is received, right up to an offer being extended.

**Offer:** This section contains the stages that accompany extending an offer to a candidate and can be customized on certain plans.

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Configuring Offer Stage Admin Settings](docId:3jpy1oPy9Ud7V7SbdZAhS) for more information on editing this section.
:::

**Completed:&#x20;**&#x54;hese are your stages that show the application result - either Archived (or rejected), or Hired.

# Viewing an interview plan on a job

When you click into a job, you can see these stages laid out in the **Candidate Pipeline** tab. You can click on the stage sections at the top of the **Candidate Pipeline** view to view your leads within the **Leads** section, and view candidates in **Application Review**, your **Active** stages and those who are in the **Offer&#x20;**&#x73;tage. Hired and Archived candidates are also accessible via the `Hired` and `Archived` buttons.

![Shows the candidate pipeline highlighted with a box under the Customer Support Specialist role.](https://cdn.zappy.app/48f887ae7dcff91795ef1b49312f682c.png)

When clicking on an option, you’ll be able to see the stages you’ve set up. In Active, for example, you can see each of the interview stages that were added to your interview plan and then the candidates listed in each stage.

![Shows the Active interview stage under the Customer Support Specialist role, with the interview stages visible and candidates within each stage also listed.](https://cdn.zappy.app/0b90bbc84934cff25e4f2a4dd2e1bfdc.png)

# Creating an interview plan

There are two types of interview plans in Ashby: shared and custom. Shared interview plans are templates that can be applied across multiple jobs, while custom interview plans are unique to specific jobs.

:::hint{type="success"}
A grouped interview plan is a special plan used to consolidate the stages across your other plans into one unified set of stages for reporting.  For more on grouped interview plans, check out [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)
:::

## Creating a shared interview plan

:::hint{type="info"}
Shared interview plans help to standardize your interview stages across many jobs. We recommend setting up shared interview plans.
:::

To create a shared plan, navigate to Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interview Plans and click `+ New Shared Plan`. Input a plan name, then click `Submit`*.*

![Shows the New Shared Plan button in the top right of the screen.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3034182449557451c1c4d841cbe8b3ad.png)

To add an active stage, click into the `Add active stage` textbox and search for or create the new stage name. Then click `+ Save` to add the stage.&#x20;

![Shows the add active stage field highlighted, where additional stages can be added to an interview plan section.](https://cdn.zappy.app/370f6711731f7571fb4a710f38eb155e.png)

## Configure your interview plan

There are four options for editing your interview plan stages:

1. Use the dragging icons to the left of the stage names to change the position of the stages you create
2. Click on the name to open the menu to select or create a new name for an existing stage
3. Click the trash can icon to delete a stage
4. Click the revert arrow icon to revert a change
5. Confirm your edits by clicking `Save Edits`*.*

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c909b3c23e8e4d77c552a35f2d1bee75.png)

## Creating a custom interview plan

:::hint{type="info"}
Custom interview plans make it easy to edit the stages for a single job without having admin permissions or affecting other jobs.
:::

### Create a new plan for a job

When creating a new job, you can skip adding one of your existing shared plans. When you do so, you’ll have the option to add a custom plan to the job. Click `+ Add Custom Plan` to create a new custom plan.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cc3d57ad8876fd1c2d5dcced7dbf0df9.png)

### Replace a shared plan with a custom plan

If you create a job with a shared plan but decide later you’d like to customize it (for example, add additional stages for the plan for just this role), you can click `More` in the upper right, and then select `Convert to Custom Plan`. This will create a custom plan that will replace the shared one that was added to the job previously.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NbI4dpCKD0_dMNDBYM46y_group-product-manager-ashby-2026-07-31-at-34043-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="948" height="516" darkWidth="948" darkHeight="516" showCaption="false"}

If you’ve created a custom plan, but decide you’d like to switch to an existing shared one, click `Switch to Shared Plan`.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aOGCK1u7A1LjyFjhrZEz2_image.png)

This will let you select the replacement and map the stage from the previous to the new plan to ensure candidates transfer seamlessly.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IaJntA4TsY-hjtrdjYX8K_group-product-manager-ashby-2026-07-31-at-34322-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1770" height="1652" darkWidth="1770" darkHeight="1652" showCaption="false"}

### Turning a custom plan into a shared plan

If you’ve created a custom plan and want to make it accessible for more jobs, you can convert it a shared plan by clicking `Edit Plan Stages…` then `Promote to Shared Plan`*.*

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5553a065c1cc08c196382a32c3935681.png)

### Edit stages on a custom plan

Once you’ve created a plan, you need to add stages. In most cases, you’ll do this in the `Active Stage Name` section of the plan, as these are the stages where your candidates are actively interviewing with your team.

To add an active stage, click into the `Add Active Stage` checkbox, then search for or create the new stage name. Click `+ Save` to add the stage to your interview plan. Stages will be added between the Application Review and Offer default stages, and you can use the dragging icons to the left of the stage names to rearrange all stages between the two.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9d67ded1f3cab96ffd744b1deab47a84.png)

### Configuring your custom plan stages

There are four options for editing your interview plan stages:

1. Use the dragging icons to the left of the stage names to change the position of stages you create
2. Click on the name to open the menu to select or create a new name for an existing stage
3. Click the trash can icon to delete a stage
4. Click the revert arrow icon to revert a change
5. Confirm your edits by clicking `Save Edits`*.*

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f6f97ca86740c40d9b24b96c40314ea4.png" size="74" width="725" height="711" darkWidth="725" darkHeight="711" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Add activities to your interview plans (recommended)

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7) for more information on the activities you can add to your interviews plans on jobs
:::

Adding activities helps streamline your processes by storing and automatically prompting you to complete key tasks when a candidate moves into a stage. Activities can only be added to an interview plan once it has been assigned to a job or job template.&#x20;

For example, when you add a `Schedule Interview` activity to the **Initial Screen** stage of your interview plan, as shown:

![Schedule Interview activity on the interview plan](https://cdn.zappy.app/1d627a1fe17180866dd3ec52e49d0819.png)

A corresponding activity will appear in the **Activities & Progress** feed any time a candidate moves into that stage in the pipeline:

![Schedule Interview activity on a candidate profile](https://cdn.zappy.app/ac5c19ed5bf589fd936befc2d1b96432.png)

# Reuse configured interview plans

:::hint{type="info"}
While activities can’t be added directly to the interview plans in Admin, there are two ways to reuse configurations: you can either create job templates or make copies of jobs.
:::

## Create job templates

[Job Templates](docId\:X1iE8z5PxR7FJKsPv6QEU) are reusable versions of entire jobs that you can choose what you want to configure upfront, then use as a starting point when creating new jobs. If you add an activity to an interview plan on a job template, when you create a job using that template, the activity will be added to the newly created job's interview plan, saving you time.

Job templates can be configured with as much or as little detail as possible to give you a headstart on setting up a new job. To make a template, visit **Jobs > Jobs** then click on Job Templates.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0d16d64b2f3dc19e9030e534cf9e2150.png)

## Copy existing jobs

A copy is an exact replica of an existing job. To make a copy, visit a job, then click `More`> `Copy` in the top right corner of the page. Any activities on the original job's interview plan will then be copied over to the newly created job.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/42aca3592cee49ceaaa0c5a17dc1a065.png)

# FAQ

### Why are some of the stages grayed out and uneditable?

The following stages are grayed out and cannot be removed, moved, or renamed within your interview plan:

- **New Lead, Reached Out, and Replied**
  Candidates automatically move through the New Lead, Reached Out, and Replied stages based on your email communication with them. These stages cannot be removed.
- **Application Review**
  The Application Review stage has Application Review mode, which is unique to that stage.
- **Offer**
  An offer activity automatically appears when a candidate moves into the Offer stage.
- **Hired**
  If you've integrated an HRIS, you're prompted to transfer your new hire's data when they move into the Hired stage.
- **Archived**
  A candidate moves to the Archived stage when their job consideration is archived, or to Hired when hired for the role. You cannot add additional custom stages to the Completed section of an interview plan.

### Can I have multiple interview plans on a job?

Ashby no longer supports adding multiple interview plans to a job. If there are optional stages in your interview plan, we recommend indicating that in the title of the stage, and skipping those stages with candidates where appropriate.

### This is very flexible; what's the best practice?

- You can make edits to standardized processes across many jobs
- Reporting is automatically grouped by the stages on the shared plans

### Can I add stages to the Completed section of my interview plan?

No, you cannot add additional Completed stages to your interview plan. You cannot edit the Archived and Hired stages. When adding Active stages to your interview plan, you cannot add them after the Offer stage.

### Can I delete an interview plan?

You can archive an interview plan by navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interview Plans**. Click the interview plan in question, then click `Archive`. The plan can no longer be used when creating jobs moving forward.

### Can I restore an archived interview plan?

You can! Switch the `Active` filter to `Archived` when viewing your interview plans at **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interview Plans**.

![Alt text needed — describe what this screenshot shows](https://cdn.zappy.app/a7ea78fbc4385cf93865ce721e92b81c.png)

Select the archived interview plan in question, then click `Publish` to reactivate it. It can then be used when creating jobs moving forward.

![Alt text needed — describe what this screenshot shows](https://cdn.zappy.app/61df75bcbfaf934058c6fae3a877d3ef.png)


[title] Why is there no availability on my direct booking links?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

This guide will cover some common reasons as to why your availability isn’t showing up correctly when scheduling interviews via a direct booking link.

Sometimes direct booking links don’t reflect the availability you expect for scheduling interviews. Common reasons include:

- You have a busy event on your calendar at that time
- Your personal, team, or interview [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo) exclude that timeframe
- You have a Pre and/or Post Meeting   in place on the corresponding [scheduling interview activity](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)
- Recruiting Blocks are enabled, but Ashby cannot find a matching block event for the interviewer or schedule.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If your organization is on the Enterprise plan or has purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1), check whether Recruiting Blocks are enabled for the interviewer or schedule. Direct booking only shows times inside matching Recruiting Block events. See [Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q) for more information.
:::

In all of these cases, you can use the `Troubleshoot Availability` option to confirm the reason, and use the information to fix it. The troubleshooting tool will display all possible time slots with an exclamation mark or a check mark beside it.

- Exclamation mark: This time is not available for booking. You can click on the time slot to see why.
- Check mark: This time slot is available for booking.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c7e50d96c35c4d72ac87a3a58441660f"}

***


[title] What are ‘Shared’ Interviews, Application Forms, and Feedback Forms?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

We highly recommend using shared application forms, feedback forms, and interviews rather than custom ones, since you can't report on custom versions unless they're connected to a custom field via [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN).

# What does ‘Shared’ mean?

‘Shared’ refers to application forms, feedback forms, and interviews that you can use across as many jobs as needed.

- You can set up shared interviews in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Shared Interviews**.
- You can create shared feedback forms in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Feedback Forms**.
- You can set up shared application forms in **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Forms**.

# What does ‘Custom’ mean?

‘Custom’ refers to an application form, feedback form, or an interview that has been created or customized specifically for one job, interview, or interview activity, and you can't link it to multiple instances unless you promote it to ‘shared’ status.

# Shared application forms

When configuring a job posting for your job, you can select the application form you'd like the applicant to complete when applying for that role. You see two options when assigning or amending the application form: `Unlink & Edit` and `Change Link`.

![An application form linked to a job posting with the Unlink & Edit and Change Link buttons highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1okUJCsaVowMqt-y__jWM_application-form-on-a-job-posting.jpg)

`Unlink & Edit`: Using this option to amend the application form only edits the form for that specific role, creating a custom application form. The amended application form is not saved as a shared application form for use across other jobs.

`Change Link`: You can switch from one shared application form to another using this option. If you're looking to set up additional application forms to use across multiple jobs, we'd recommend doing this on the [Application Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/application-forms) page.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring job postings, check out [Job Postings](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB).
:::

# Shared feedback forms

You can assign feedback forms to your interviews on the [Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews) page. Similarly to application forms, you see the `Unlink & Edit` and `Change Link` options when selecting your feedback form on the **Feedback Form** tab.

![A shared feedback form with the Unlink & Edit and Change Link options highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RSSsLnB6MzwblIulrCeB7_intro-call-with-hiring-manager-interview-ashby-2026-07-09-at-124911-pm.jpg)

`Unlink & Edit`: Just like application forms, you can click this option to amend the current form and create a custom one. Any changes you make here apply only to this job and don't apply to the shared feedback form.

`Change Link`: Use this option to switch to a different shared feedback form set up on the [Feedback Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-forms) page. You can use shared feedback forms across as many jobs as you'd like.

# Shared interviews

When adding a schedule interview activity to a stage in a job's interview plan, you see the option to `Create New Interview` or `Add Shared Interview`.

![A schedule interview activity that shows the option to create a new interview or use a shared one.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Oc6lFkPt_bcW3Y8ZO9dXm_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-07-09-at-125109-pm.jpg)

`Create New Interview`: If you create a new interview, it's a one-off custom interview that you can only use for that schedule activity. The custom interview you create here isn't available when clicking `Add Shared Interview` on other interview activities until it's given ‘shared’ status.

`Add Shared Interview`: If you would like to create interviews that you can use across multiple jobs, we'd recommend setting up an interview in the [Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews) section of your Ashby account. When clicking `Add Shared Interview`, you can then select your shared interview of choice from the list.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring schedule interview activities, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

# How do I switch from a custom form or interview to a shared one?

:::hint{type="danger"}
The custom form or interview isn't saved or retrievable after you switch to a shared form.
:::

If you'd like to switch from a custom form or interview to a shared one, you can take the following steps.

## Switching from a custom application form to a shared application form

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, then **Job Postings**.
2. Click the **Application Form** tab.
3. Click `Delete & Link to Shared`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6so4w0uCPS-zCDuAM9CPd_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-07-09-at-23245-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1788" height="1154" darkWidth="1788" darkHeight="1154" alt="The Delete & Link to Shared option for an application form" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Select the shared application form from the dropdown.

## Switching from a custom feedback form to a shared feedback form on a shared interview

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Shared Interviews**.
2. Click on the interview with the custom feedback form assigned to it.
3. Click the **Feedback Form** tab.
4. Click `Delete & Link to Shared`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8TUc0Cnf13uRWymhY0He7_delete-and-link-to-shared-feedback-form.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1284" height="1218" darkWidth="1284" darkHeight="1218" alt="The Delete & Link to Shared option for a feedback form" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Select the shared feedback form from the dropdown.

## Switching from a custom feedback form to a shared feedback form on a custom interview

1. Navigate to the schedule activity by heading to **Jobs**, clicking **Interview Plan**, and clicking on the schedule interview activity.
2. Click on the **Custom Interview** field to open up the interview details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RhllQ7LQBPuMyzWqkDAqG_custom-interview-event-on-a-schedule-interview-activity.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2496" height="1026" darkWidth="2496" darkHeight="1026" alt="The custom interview section on a schedule interview activity." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Click on the **Feedback Form** tab on the custom interview.
4. Click `Delete & Link to Shared`.
5. Select the shared feedback form from the dropdown.

## Switching from a custom interview to a shared interview

1. Navigate to the schedule activity by heading to **Jobs**, clicking **Interview Plan**, and clicking on the schedule interview activity.
2. Click on the **Custom Interview** field to open up the interview details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RhllQ7LQBPuMyzWqkDAqG_custom-interview-event-on-a-schedule-interview-activity.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2496" height="1026" darkWidth="2496" darkHeight="1026" alt="The custom interview section on a schedule interview activity." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Click `Delete & Link to Shared`.
4. Select the shared interview from the dropdown.

# Promote a custom interview, application form or feedback form and make it into a shared one

You can promote custom application forms, feedback forms, and interviews, turning them into shared application forms, feedback forms, and interviews.

## Promote a custom application form to a shared application form

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, then **Job Postings**.
2. Click the **Application Form** tab.
3. Click `Promote to Shared`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XpUc4XjHf-Qnn6Mm2AG7f_promote-to-shared-application-form.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1782" height="1152" darkWidth="1782" darkHeight="1152" alt="The Promote to Shared option on an application form" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Type a title for your new application form and click `Promote to Shared`.

## Promote a custom feedback form to a shared feedback form from a shared interview

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Shared Interviews**.
2. Click on the interview with the custom feedback form assigned to it.
3. Click the **Feedback Form** tab.
4. Click `Promote to Shared`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JWgxIkSsZo8N477I1ZrVT_promote-to-shared-feedback-form.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1290" height="1240" darkWidth="1290" darkHeight="1240" alt="The Promote to Shared option on a feedback form on a shared interview" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Type a title for your new feedback form and click `Yes`.

## Promote a custom feedback form to a shared feedback form from a custom interview

1. Navigate to the schedule activity by heading to **Jobs**, clicking **Interview Plan**, and clicking on the schedule interview activity.
2. Click on the **Custom Interview** field to open up the interview details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RhllQ7LQBPuMyzWqkDAqG_custom-interview-event-on-a-schedule-interview-activity.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2496" height="1026" darkWidth="2496" darkHeight="1026" alt="The custom interview section on a schedule interview activity." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Click the **Feedback Form** tab.
4. Click `Promote to Shared`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AoiWFvDw7v7iaKbJqgV0w_promote-to-shared-feedback-form-schedule-interview-activity.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1280" height="1240" darkWidth="1280" darkHeight="1240" alt="The Promote to Shared option on a feedback form on a custom interview" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Type a title for your new feedback form and click `Yes`.

## Promote a custom interview to a shared interview

1. Navigate to the schedule activity by heading to **Jobs**, clicking **Interview Plan**, and clicking on the schedule interview activity.
2. Click on the **Custom Interview** field to open up the interview details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RhllQ7LQBPuMyzWqkDAqG_custom-interview-event-on-a-schedule-interview-activity.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2496" height="1026" darkWidth="2496" darkHeight="1026" alt="The custom interview section on a schedule interview activity." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Click `Promote to Shared`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/61hijMd7N62s9Ir_-Fx2e_promote-to-shared-interview.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1308" height="722" darkWidth="1308" darkHeight="722" alt="The Promote to Shared option on a feedback form on a custom interview" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Type a title for your new interview and click `Yes`.

[title] Activities
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Activity Configuration/

When set up, activities automatically appear on a candidate's profile when they are moved to a stage. This streamlines the candidate management process and enables a consistent experience across candidates. For more on structured interviewing, check out [Scheduling & Interviews: An Introduction](docId\:XW-3IRIvOnBHO_UF37LbH)&#x20;

## Activities overview

Activities enable you to automate tasks like drafting emails, and setting up calendar invites for candidates that are in your interview process.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Ashby currently supports six activity types:

- Schedule Interview
- Take-Home
- Application Review
- Send Email
- Schedule Questionnaire
- E-Signature Document


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c6fbcdb13342f682856ee18e499cbdee.png)


:::
::::

See the table below for information on the roles that have access to set up and edit activities.

| Access Role                                                    | Has Access? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌           |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ✅\*         |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅           |

:::hint{type="info"}
\*Elevated Access - Admin and Elevated Access - Admin Private users will only be able to edit the activities on the roles they have access to.
:::

## Schedule interview

The Schedule Interview activity automatically adds a [schedule template](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) to a candidate's profile when they are moved to a particular stage, determining the interview, feedback form, interviewers and interview settings in advance.  For more on configuring these, please check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).

## Take-home

The Take-home activity automatically adds a prompt to send a take-home assignment activity to a candidate's profile when they are moved to a particular stage. This activity supports uploading the candidate's submission so the reviewer can view and score directly in Ashby.

Learn more in the [Take-home Activities](docId\:hdevBy04F4IDGuOGM2kWH) guide

## Application review

The Application Review activity is a default activity on the application review stage in an interview plan. It enables the profile to be included in bulk application review (more on this at [Application Review](docId\:d_nxB_Kdz4fJru4hBCaLb). The Application Review activity can also be added to other active stages in the interview plan (except for the Offer stage), to provide a prompt in other stages for the candidate’s application to be reviewed.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once you add a review application activity to your job or job template’s interview plan, you’ll be prompted to select a reviewer (or a role on the hiring team to determine that users with that role will complete the review application activity). You will also be able to determine a feedback form.

If you are adding or editing an Review Application activity, you’ll be prompted to determine the job considerations you’d like new assigned reviewers applied to.

You’ll be able to choose between current and future job considerations (so adding or amending the activity for those currently in the pipeline and applications moving forward) or only future job considerations.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/491c2cf02e23f380244a9394d6408a87.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1f22752911c8f974074e3d3ab6f02382.png)


:::
::::

## Send email

The Send Email activity automatically adds a prompt to email a candidate, along with an email template to a candidate's profile when they are moved to the specified stage. Want more information on setting up email templates? Check out [Emails](#).

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that the Send Email activity should only be used to email the candidate. If you’d like to receive notifications when a candidate has moved stages, this is an option you can enable within your notifications. More on this at [Notifications & Notification Settings](docId\:A85ZAqFvmgeJNBLAPkETL)&#x20;
:::



## Schedule Questionnaire

The Schedule Questionnaire activity allows you to select a questionnaire and an email template in advance. Then when a candidate is moved to the specified stage, a prompt will appear to send the questionnaire out to them using your specified email template. You can read more on configuring questionnaires at [Questionnaires](#)

## E-Signature Document

The E-Signature Document activity prompts you to specify the document template you’d like to use. When the candidate is moved to the specified stage, you’ll be prompted to send them the e-signature document. More on configuring e-signature documents can be found at [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt).

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I automate an activity, so action is automatically taken when a candidate moves to a new stage?

You can automate activities, yes. More on this can be found at [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I copy an existing activity from an interview plan stage on one job to an interview plan stage on another?

You can, yes! When you are on a job’s interview plan and click `Add Activity To…` on an interview plan stage you’ll see the option to add a new activity and a `Copy Activities` option.

Click `Copy Activities`, then select the job, interview plan, interview stage you’d like to copy activities from. Choose the activities you’d like to copy. The selected activities will be copied into the original stage you chose.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/054b398690f04905b7feb878486c220b"}

Once an activity is copied over, if the activity uses a shared interview type or feedback form (more on those at [What are ‘Shared’ Interviews, Application Forms, and Feedback Forms?](docId\:UjNXOKXGS1_RQ1UDzXXTa) , then those will be reference in the copy. Any custom interview types or feedback forms will be copied over and can be amended without impacting the original activity that was copied.&#x20;
:::


[title] Handling Multiple Applications from One Candidate
[path] Applications/

This article explains how Ashby handles situations where the same candidate appears more than once for the same role or across multiple roles. It covers when Ashby prevents duplicate job considerations from being created, what to do when duplicate job considerations already exist, and when to use `Transfer` versus `Consider for Another Job`.

# Permissions and access

The actions covered in this article require elevated access with a role that includes the permission to add and edit candidates for the relevant job, department, or location.

# How Ashby handles multiple applications

In Ashby, a single candidate profile can have multiple applications across different roles. The system prevents duplicate applications from being created in most common scenarios. When a situation falls outside those cases, the recommended approach is to keep the job consideration you want to move forward with and archive any duplicate or unwanted ones.

This table succinctly outlines the most common scenarios and the recommended action for each. Further details are explained in the remainder of the article below.

| **Scenario**                                                                      | **What happens**                                                                                                         | **Recommended action**                                              |
| --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Candidate applied to the same role again using the same information               | Ashby keeps one job consideration. Both application forms appear in the **Forms** section of the candidate profile feed. | Continue using the existing job consideration. No cleanup needed.   |
| Candidate was sourced as a lead and later applied to that same role               | Ashby keeps one job consideration and moves the candidate to Application Review.                                         | Continue using the existing job consideration. No cleanup needed.   |
| Duplicate profiles were merged and both had a job consideration for the same role | Both job considerations remain on the merged profile.                                                                    | Archive the job consideration you do not plan to move forward with. |
| Candidate applied with different information                                      | An additional candidate profile may be created and flagged as a duplicate.                                               | Review and merge the duplicate profiles if appropriate.             |
| Candidate should move to a different posting for the same underlying opportunity  | N/A                                                                                                                      | Use `Transfer`.                                                     |
| Candidate should be considered for a genuinely separate opportunity               | N/A                                                                                                                      | Use `Consider for Another Job`.                                     |

# When to use Transfer

Use Transfer when the role is essentially the same opportunity and you want to move the existing job consideration to a different job or interview plan while preserving its history and timing. Transfer is the right choice when:

- The job was renamed, corrected, or restructured in a way that should still count as the same hiring process.
- You want to preserve time-to-hire, time-in-process, and related reporting continuity for the original timeline.

When you transfer a job consideration, Ashby retains the application history, notes, application forms, completed surveys, feedback forms, and referral forms. The started date stays the same, and reporting continues to reflect the original timeline.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Any scheduled or upcoming activities remain scheduled after a transfer. Delete any activities you no longer need before initiating the transfer.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
For step-by-step instructions, see [Can I transfer a candidate’s job consideration to another job or interview plan?](docId\:FN4VK3fmmC2pOhXo3SY_y)
:::

# When to use Consider for Another Job

Use `Consider for Another Job` when the candidate is being evaluated for a new or different opportunity and you want that process tracked separately. This action creates a brand new job consideration on the candidate profile rather than moving the existing one. The new job consideration gets its own started date, and pipeline and time-to-hire reporting start fresh.

If your team wants reporting to reflect two distinct opportunities, `Consider for Another Job` is the better choice over `Transfer`.

# Cleaning up duplicate job considerations after a merge

If duplicate candidate profiles were merged and both profiles had job considerations for the same role, both job considerations remain on the merged profile for your records.

If the candidate should only be considered once for that role, continue using the correct job consideration and archive the one you do not plan to move forward with.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby does not currently support merging or deleting job considerations directly from the candidate profile. Archiving is the standard cleanup path when duplicate job considerations exist for the same role.

If you archived the wrong job consideration by mistake, you can return it to the active pipeline. Select `Change Stage` on the candidate profile and choose the appropriate interview stage to move the candidate back.

The archive reason on an archived job consideration can also be updated at any time.&#x20;

For more information, see [How do I change the archive reason on an archived job consideration?](docId:3Y56OStuThrqyKYcHOnJG)
:::

# Application request behavior

Transferring a candidate to another job does not generate a new application request, because the system already has the candidate's information. Considering a candidate for a separate job can generate an application request for that job if they meet the configured criteria. Application request automations also only run when the candidate does not already have an application submitted for that job consideration.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information, see [Application Requests](docId:-1cI2DUBbnESgdM-dW8wW).
:::

# Preventing repeat applications

If your team regularly sees candidates reapplying to the same role or applying excessively across open roles, **Application Limits** is the best tool to address this. Application Limits can be configured to:

- Throttle the number of applications a candidate can submit across any job within a defined scope and time window.
- Block rejected candidates from reapplying to the same role within a specified number of days.
- Block rejected candidates from reapplying to any role within the scope within a specified number of days.

:::hint{type="info"}
For setup instructions, see [Application Limits](docId\:DTFh2I3HX_EkQBVgwW8FI).
:::

# FAQs

### Can multiple application submissions exist without multiple job considerations?

Yes. If a candidate reapplies to the same role using the same information while they already have an active job consideration, Ashby keeps one job consideration and shows both application forms in the **Forms** section of the candidate profile feed.

### Can I merge two duplicate job considerations for the same role?

No. Ashby does not currently support merging or deleting job considerations directly from the candidate profile. If both job considerations already exist, choose one to move forward with and archive the other.

### Should I use Transfer or Consider for Another Job?

Use Transfer when you want to preserve the job consideration's history and reporting continuity across what is effectively the same opportunity. Use Consider for Another Job when the candidate should enter a separate process with its own reporting timeline.

### What happens if I archived the wrong job consideration?

Select `Change Stage` on the candidate profile and choose the appropriate interview stage to move the candidate back into the active pipeline. You can also update the archive reason on any archived job consideration at any time.

### How do I merge candidate profiles that were flagged as duplicates?

See [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb) for a full walkthrough.

[title] Candidate Reviews
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

Candidate Reviews let you create review requests and assign them to users to gather feedback on candidates or leads across multiple workflows, including projects, candidate searches, events, sourcing forms, and a job's candidate pipeline. You can also request feedback on active candidates already moving through a job's hiring process.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites and permissions:&#x20;**&#x55;sers with Limited Access can only view reviews they have been assigned to or have completed, but they can be assigned to candidate reviews. Users with Elevated Access or above can view all candidate reviews within **Sourcing > Candidate Reviews**.
:::

Candidate review requests are available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/2a171a06b97a421398678e27492d901f"}

# Creating a review request

Review requests can be sent while viewing candidates in projects or from within a [Candidate Search](docId:-ZYXRHB2dhZQNQWl3ugx1), from the audience list on an event, from the submissions list for a sourcing form, and from the candidate pipeline for a job. You can also create new review requests from the list of candidates in the *Review* section of an existing candidate review.

Like any other bulk action, select the candidates you would like to request a review for using the checkboxes to the left of their name. Then click `Request Review` from the bulk actions list.

![Selecting candidates and clicking Request Review from the bulk actions list](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xZ2Xs9rTC72ZTrNAbeuGT_d-designers-acent-ashby-2026-05-12-at-94438-am.jpg)

In the request review wizard, complete the following fields:

- **Title:** Provide a title for your request for reference.
- **Reviewer:** From the drop-down, select the user who will be assigned to review the selected candidate or candidates.
- **Notes:** Add any clarifying information for the reviewer.

Then click `Send Request` to confirm and send the request to the assigned user.

![The request review wizard](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZnHr5secxEFR8vh9UkcLP_candidate-review-wizard.jpg)

# Reviewing a candidate

Once a user has been assigned a candidate review, it appears as a task on their home page. Click `Start Review` to view candidate details, add a score, and write any notes.

![The candidate review task on the home page](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6E01GGBjz54ozbTlJXmOb_home-acent-ashby-2026-05-12-at-94624-am.jpg)

You can also access candidate reviews in **Sourcing > Candidate Reviews**. Click on the review in question to open the list of candidates to be reviewed.

- To review one specific candidate, click on the candidate's name within the list to open their details and add a score.
- To review all candidates in the list, click `Review X Candidates` to get started.
- To review a subset of candidates on the list, select the checkboxes beside the candidates to review and click `Review X Candidates` to begin.

## Candidate review page

![The candidate review page](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7gtN1l9vX0lWsH7qTWhaq_designer-review-acent-ashby-2026-05-12-at-94737-am.jpg)

- **All** Click this toggle to view candidate information and their resume in one place.
- **Info** Click this to view only the candidate information, such as their email, location, work history, and education. This hides the resume.
- **Resume** Click this to view only the resume and hide the candidate information.
- **Reviewed** View the total number of candidates in the review and click the arrows to jump between candidates needing review. You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move between candidates.
- **Requested By** The user who requested the review.
- The note with additional information is displayed underneath the details of the user who requested the review.
- **Score** Give an overall score for the candidate from 1 (Strong No) to 4 (Strong Yes). This is a required field.
- **Notes** Add any clarifying information here if needed.
- **Candidate Notes:** Add a note to the candidate profile. This is only available to users with the permissions to add notes.

:::hint{type="info"}
If the reviewer has access to the candidate profile, their name appears as a hyperlink. Click the candidate's name to view their profile.
:::

To complete the review, click `Submit`. If multiple reviews are being completed in the same session, this button automatically moves the reviewer to the next candidate.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bbqON6JDK-DrPfYYXFNZZ_customer-support-recruiter-screen-review-ashby-2026-09-15-at-100415-am.jpg" size="50" isUploading="false" width="407" height="603" darkWidth="407" darkHeight="603" alt="Recruiter Screen Review form with “4 - Strong Yes” selected, notes entered recommending the candidate move forward, and the Submit button highlighted." showCaption="false"}

To exit the review screen, close the window or press `ESC` on your keyboard. The review screen also closes automatically once all reviews have been submitted.

The reviewer is then returned to the review page, which lists all candidates in the review along with their information and any feedback scores or notes. If all reviews have been completed, the review automatically updates to Completed.

![The review page showing all candidates and their feedback scores](https://cdn.zappy.app/a24eb070ab2a483a9c827d5ab1749609.png)

To mark all candidates as reviewed — even if not all reviews have been submitted — click the status drop-down under the review title and select `Complete Review Request`.

![The status drop-down showing the Complete Review Request option](https://cdn.zappy.app/e88b9dbb00b5744f690b69f6eb3c971b.png)

Once the review status is set to Complete, a notification is sent to the review requester and the reviewer can no longer submit additional reviews.

# Viewing reviewed candidates

To view all candidate reviews and their status, navigate to **Sourcing >&#x20;**[Candidate Reviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/reviews/all).

By default, you see all requested reviews listed, along with their status, reviewer, requester, the request notes, and the timestamp showing when the request was submitted.

![The Candidate Reviews list showing all requested reviews](https://cdn.zappy.app/44033bec0aa544d4de7b6850bc04459a.png)

Click on a review to view a list of all the candidates included in that review, along with their scores and notes.

![A review showing all candidates with their scores and notes](https://cdn.zappy.app/5723449d2ad60337aab33b33368150f9.png)

Candidates can be sorted alphabetically or reverse-alphabetically by name, or by score (ascending or descending). Click the field you'd like to sort by to make adjustments.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9IdEzBFXMhzcSoTw4CVfX_no-job-review-ashby-2026-09-15-at-100622-am.jpg)

The results — showing the number of candidates reviewed, the average score, and the Approved rate (the percentage of candidates that scored 3 or higher) — are displayed on the right-hand side of the list.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/69fb47e7bea8fef422a58812b2187991.png" size="44" width="329" height="390" darkWidth="329" darkHeight="390" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidate reviews can also be viewed on each candidate's profile within their feed. Click the **Feedback** tab to view the review feedback specifically.
:::

## AI-generated candidate review summary

To generate an AI summary of the feedback given in a candidate review request, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access) and enable the **AI-Generated Candidate Review Summary** option.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/fb640928bdf9464d0bb599a1aa3e8e7f.png" size="60" alt="The AI-Generated Candidate Review Summary option in Opt-In Features" isUploading="false" width="290" height="120" darkWidth="290" darkHeight="120" showCaption="false"}

Once a candidate review is complete, the summary is generated and displayed under the review results. Click on each theme listed to view the review that prompted the theme, along with the score and relevant note.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/120bc82a60e395b42ab630cf50f881e8.png" size="60" alt="An AI-generated candidate review summary showing themes and scores" isUploading="false" width="445" height="510" darkWidth="445" darkHeight="510" showCaption="false"}

# Saved views and review filters

When viewing the candidate review list, you can use pre-created filters or configure your own to access the reviews most relevant to you.

![The candidate reviews page and options to filter](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aycZOj-MwuIXrug__rUqv_candidate-reviews-acent-ashby-2026-05-22-at-111921-am.jpg)

**New Filter** Create your own filter. Click `Save as New` (4) to give your filter a title and save it.

**Received Requests** Use this filter to view all review requests assigned to you.

**Sent Requests** Use this filter to view all review requests you have sent.

**Save as New** Save a new filter once you've set your criteria.

**Filter** Use the `+ Filter` button to add fields to filter by. A status filter is included by default — remove it by clicking the trash can icon (7).

**Basic/Advanced toggle** Switch between basic and advanced filters.

**Trash can** Remove any filters you don't want to apply.

**Search** Search for a review request by name.

# Taking bulk action on candidates in a candidate review

To take action on multiple candidates at once, use the checkboxes beside each candidate within the review to select who the action should apply to. Buttons displaying the available bulk actions appear above the candidate list.

![Bulk action buttons appearing above the candidate list](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RIPCIezM2_2js1zDiIjSe_gray-rangers-acent-ashby-2026-03-25-at-125403-pm.jpg)

Bulk action options include:

- Consider for Job
- Add to Project
- Set Tags
- Change Stage (this option is hidden when candidates span multiple jobs or have no active applications)
- Email
- Email in Sequence
- Request Review

:::hint{type="info"}
Additional bulk actions can be found in the `More` dropdown.
:::

# Notifications

To receive email or Slack notifications when a candidate review is requested or completed, enable these in **Personal Settings > Notifications**. For more information, see [Notifications & Notification Settings](docId\:A85ZAqFvmgeJNBLAPkETL).

![The Notifications settings page](https://cdn.zappy.app/5c1811e6c250672da189af8dca7ea811.png)

# FAQs

### Which keyboard shortcuts are supported in candidate review?

When reviewing, use the arrow keys `(← or →)` to move between candidates. Use `option + L` when reviewing a candidate to open their LinkedIn profile, if one is associated with their candidate profile.

### Can Limited Access users configure requests for other users to complete?

No. Users with Limited Access can only complete requests assigned to them and view requests they have been assigned to or have completed.

### Can candidate reviews be set as confidential?

Not currently. All candidate reviews are visible to users with Elevated Access or above within **Sourcing > Candidate Reviews**.

### Can a candidate review be deleted?

Yes, a candidate review can be deleted from the candidate's feed in their profile. Find the review, then click `More` in the bottom-right corner of the review entry and select `Delete from Ashby`.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QbA0ZJzRZgpKGRXrFqvKV_deleting-a-candidate-review-from-ashby.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1032" height="530" darkWidth="1032" darkHeight="530" alt="More and Delete from Ashby on a candidate review within the candidate's feed." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="danger"}
This action cannot be undone - it is not possible to restore a deleted candidate review.
:::




[title] Manually Scheduling Interviews
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

Ashby provides a variety of features that make it easy to schedule interviews and collect feedback on candidates. This article focuses on the manual scheduling flow, showing how to schedule an interview manually from an existing interview activity or by creating a new one. This is an option you can use if you've already determined a suitable time with the candidate.

# Permissions and access

See the table below for information on who can schedule a candidate for an interview, either by sending out a direct booking link or manually scheduling interviews.

| Access Role                                                    | Has Access? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌           |
| Agency User                                                    | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ✅           |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅           |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ✅           |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅           |

# Scheduling overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/e7109cd8656a42caa4aa44e61a5db311"}

# Scheduling interviews

## Step 1a: Scheduling from an existing interview activity

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you do not have an existing interview activity to schedule from — for example, for a one-off or ad hoc interview — see **Step 1b** below.
:::

When a [schedule interview activity](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) has been configured on a job's interview plan, it appears automatically in the **Activities & Progress** section of the candidate's profile when they are moved to that stage. You can manually schedule an interview directly from this activity, which is the recommended and most common way to manually schedule.

:::hint{type="info"}
Auto-scheduling interview activities is available for those with the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) .
:::

To manually schedule an interview from an existing activity:

1. Open the candidate's profile and locate the interview activity in the **Activities & Progress** section.
2. Click `Schedule` on the activity.
3. Select `Manual Schedule`.

The calendar interface opens with the interview type and interviewer panel already filled in. From here, continue to [Step 2: Select the time, attendees, and meeting rooms](#).

:::hint{type="info"}
If the activity includes a confirmation email template, the candidate confirmation email defaults to `On` the first time you manually schedule from that activity. This is the opposite of the default when starting a new interview from scratch, where it defaults to `Off`. You can toggle this on the **Candidate Confirmation Email** tab before clicking `Schedule`. Your preference is saved for future interviews you schedule.
:::

## Step 1b: Start scheduling by creating a new interview

If you do not have an existing interview activity to schedule from or need to create one ad hoc, you can manually create the interview and then schedule it.

1. To create the interview, open the candidate profile of the candidate you want to schedule an interview for.&#x20;
2. Select `More` > `Schedule New Interview`, then click `Manual Schedule`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2fd75d7586ae11a52c6375e0f996bb2b.png)

Alternatively, click `+ New Interview`, `Schedule Interview`, then `Manual Schedule`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a4ec46fbb5a25aff01c534fb75188f16.png)

3. Continue to Step 2 below.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can configure your interview plans to automatically prompt your team to schedule interviews when candidates reach an active stage. More on this at [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

## Step 2: Select the time, attendees, and meeting rooms

When scheduling interviews manually, the calendar interface is where you set up the bulk of the schedule. On this screen you decide:

- Which day the interview takes place (for scheduling multi-day interviews, see the FAQ below)
- Which interviews take place
- Which interviewers participate
- The start time and duration of each interview

### Current schedule and date

The first column in the calendar view shows the current schedule — a summary of all events the candidate is participating in on the day of the interview.

Use the date picker to switch the day on which the interview takes place. Click the date to open the full calendar, or use the arrows to move between days.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tZ_f2ROeMVebWaBD2JYFw_schedule-earl-rath-acent-ashby-2026-06-04-at-105411-am.jpg)

### Scheduling options

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/R0D9rKHafAsXuyltHyu2e_schedule-earl-rath-acent-ashby-2026-06-04-at-105620-am.jpg)

Check **Multi-Day Schedule** to jump to other dates on the calendar without automatically switching the date of the interview. This is useful when scheduling multiple interview events in one go.

Check **Candidate Availability** to overlay the candidate's availability on the calendar, if they have submitted it.

Use the **See Employee Calendar** dropdown to preview the calendars of potential interviewers. You can filter or scroll to find the calendar you'd like to see. For onsite interviews, use **See Room Calendar** to view room availability.

### Interview settings panel

On the right side of the screen, there is a panel that shows interview details including the interview type, time, the interviewers, and rooms.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4VSapZxeo_gBzcbL45RPX_schedule-earl-rath-acent-ashby-2026-06-04-at-110016-am.jpg" size="62" width="479" height="483" position="center" darkWidth="479" darkHeight="483" showCaption="false"}

Click `Add Interview` to add additional interview events to the same day. To schedule interviews across different days, see [How do I use multi-day scheduling?](docId:4J-Ogip_ouVgScipIIxYY) .

Use the interview dropdown to select or change the interview type. You can click `+ New Shared Interview` in the interview selector dropdown to create a new shared interview type inline.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MMhmg1wexdORt1jW1c21z_product-marketing-manager-ashby-2026-07-23-at-21453-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1002" height="1574" darkWidth="1002" darkHeight="1574" showCaption="false" alt="The option to create a new shared interview type in-line."}

Once you've selected an interview type, use the panel controls to configure your interview further:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EWCEYkSjz74of6vnqQnkY_schedule-earl-rath-acent-ashby-2026-06-04-at-110445-am.jpg" size="58" width="475" height="242" position="center" darkWidth="475" darkHeight="242" showCaption="false"}

- **Feedback Required ☆** — When turned off, the interviewer is not reminded to submit feedback to complete this interview. They can still submit feedback if needed.
- **Hide/View Calendar 🗓** — Shows or hides the selected interviewer's calendar.
- **Delete Slot 🗑** — Removes an interviewer from the interview panel.
- **Alt.** — Shows the number of alternate interviewers defined on the schedule template. Defaults to zero if none are defined.
- **Add interviewer slot** — Adds an additional interviewer to the panel. Once added, their calendar with their availability appears alongside the current schedule.

:::hint{type="info"}
Hover over the `i` icon next to the interviewer's name to see their daily and weekly interview limits (if set) along with any interviewer preferences set on their profile. The `i` icon shows in yellow if the interviewer is nearing their limits, or in red if the interviewer has met or exceeded their interview limits. More on setting limits and preferences can be found at [Assigning Interviewers](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo).
:::

### Adding rooms

When you click `Add Room`, the meeting room selector surfaces the most relevant rooms at the top based on a few criteria:&#x20;

- Availability during the interview time,
- Interviewers' working location,&#x20;
- And rooms recently or frequently used by those interviewers in Ashby.&#x20;

Rooms are grouped by building or location, and buildings are prioritized when they're relevant to the selected interviewers; for example, where an interviewer is working that day or where they've recently held interviews.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gXlCLgKAC0AJVsQ5BwXDN_candidate-pipeline-acent-ashby-2026-06-04-at-112356-am.jpg" size="38" width="350" height="591" position="center" darkWidth="350" darkHeight="591" showCaption="false"}

Available rooms appear at the top of each building's list with a green checkmark, so you can confirm a room works before selecting it.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
When you first open the selector, it may take a brief moment to load availability while Ashby checks room calendars. You can search for a room by name while results are loading if you already know which one you want.
:::

If you update the interview time or swap out an interviewer, reopening the room selector refreshes the results based on your latest selections.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Two things to know about how recommendations work:

- Working location-based recommendations are only available for interviewers who have set a working location in Google Calendar. If your organization uses Microsoft 365, or if working location data isn't available for a given interviewer, recommendations fall back to that interviewer's frequency of room use in Ashby instead.
- For organizations with a large number of meeting rooms, Ashby evaluates availability for up to 100 rooms it considers most relevant to the interview. Rooms beyond that threshold may appear in results without an availability status. If you're looking for a specific room outside those results, use the search field within the selector.
:::

### Selecting a room from a pool

If your organization has meeting room pools configured, you can select a room from a pool rather than specifying a room directly. Follow these steps:

1. Click `Add Room By Pool`.
2. Select the pool you'd like to choose rooms from using the dropdown menu.
3. Click `Choose Meeting Room` to see the rooms in your selected pool or pools.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/24dd90ffd1d57917fa4fe0ad91d1ac62.png" size="44" width="433" height="230" position="center" darkWidth="433" darkHeight="230" showCaption="false"}

4. Review the meeting rooms available within your pool, then click `Select Meeting Room` to confirm the meeting room you'd like to add to your interview.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e343f4ce47b2bc4b40836589103830c1.png" size="52" width="476" height="384" position="center" darkWidth="476" darkHeight="384" showCaption="false"}

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/091807c6de5bc7aa526fc09cec14e3fd.png" size="50" width="437" height="433" position="center" darkWidth="437" darkHeight="433" showCaption="false"}

## Step 3: Configure calendar invites and communications

Once you've selected an interview time and picked the interview panel, you're ready to set up and send calendar invites. In this step, you can preview and edit calendar invite information for both the candidate and your interviewers, determine the invite settings, and configure interview reminders and confirmation emails.

### Calendar invites - single interview event

On the **Calendar Invites** tab, you can determine whether calendar invites are sent to the candidate and/or interviewers using the `Send Candidate Invite` and `Send Interviewer Invite` toggles. We generally recommend sending out calendar invites when scheduling an interview.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9a06c24d3d048a0f3807c38bf6a2bb54.png)

In the **Candidate Invite** and **Interviewer Invite** sections, you can preview the calendar invites that are sent out. To make any changes to either invite, click `Edit`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/939389684835d454066c53b60f9a4ed3.png)

### Calendar invites - multiple interview events

If you've added multiple interview events to your interview, you see some additional options when it comes to sending out calendar invites in the `Manage Candidate Invites` section. You can select from the following options:

**Send one invite per block:** The candidate receives a separate calendar invite for interview events that are more than 30 minutes apart. If they have two interview events with a 15-minute break between the two, they receive one calendar invite. If they have two interview events with a one-hour break in between, they receive two calendar invites.

**Send one invite per interview:** The candidate receives a separate calendar invite for each interview event, regardless of how far apart they are.

**Send one invite per day:** The candidate receives a calendar event per day they have interview events. So if they have one interview event on Monday and the other two on Tuesday, they receive two calendar invites. If they have one interview event on Monday, one on Tuesday, and one on Wednesday, they receive three calendar invites.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have video conferencing (Zoom, Google Meet, Teams) set as the location for your interview, each calendar invite has a unique meeting link. As such, the option you choose for sending out the calendar invites may impact the number of unique links generated.
:::

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/T6XU_yri0fsfpnCX86pda_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-102650-am.jpg)

You can also click `Edit` on each interview calendar invite to update the calendar invite title and description per invite, so if you have specific information relevant to only one interview event, it can be added only to the relevant invite.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MMZwy0tN60pdXH5YV-GtP_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-105734-am.jpg)

### Invite settings

On the **Invite Settings** screen, modify the details of both invites.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/aa8f01bfed40de46727dbeba7ce70bb3.png)

1. The **Calendar** dropdown menu lets you select which calendar the calendar events are scheduled to. This calendar also receives a calendar invite, along with the candidate and interviewer calendars. The calendar cannot be changed on reschedule. As such, we recommend setting up a shared calendar to house these interview events to allow for easy rescheduling and so you have one calendar where you can view all scheduled interviews. For more information, check out [What is a shared calendar?](docId:7L9yaj7bNYKhfMH-vpkdR)
2. The **Location Type** dropdown menu and **Location** field let you add physical or remote location details. Set custom text, or select one of the integrated options. The integrated options automatically generate a unique video conference link and include it in the invite. Current video conference integrations are:
   - Google Meet
   - Zoom
   - Microsoft Teams
3. The **Is Private** toggle lets you set invites as private. When enabled, the calendar invite details (e.g. title, attendees) are hidden from others and interviewers are only marked as busy.

Finally, if you have the Coderpad, CodeSignal Interview, or HackerRank integrations in place, you can also specify which events (if any) use the integration. A unique assessment link is generated for each event that the integration has been enabled for and is automatically included in both candidate and interviewer invites.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/X6XcJ4BXyM6JdWSkIt__O_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-110442-am.jpg)

### Interview reminders

On the **Interview Reminders** tab, you can configure reminders for both candidates and interviewers.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f1fbdd3f31030066503378c88c2e0e10.png)

To add an interview reminder for a candidate, click `Add Candidate Reminder`. To add a reminder for interviewers on your panel, click `Add Interviewer Reminder`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bcece22b8d4efc7c09719945faeb441b.png)

1. Send: Determine the delivery method for your reminder. For candidates, reminders can only be sent via email. For interviewers, they can be sent via email or Slack if you have the integration in place.
2. From: Determine the sender of the reminder.
3. When: Configure how many minutes, hours, or days before the interview the reminder is sent.
4. Using Template: Confirm your email template for the reminder here. For more on setting up email templates, check out [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).
5. Delete: Remove this reminder for this interview.
6. Add Candidate Reminder: Create a new reminder for this interview.
7. Reset: Reset the reminder to your organization's scheduling defaults. More on this at [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml).
8. Combine Daily Reminders for Candidates?: If you're scheduling multiple interview events across a number of days for this interview, use this option to determine how reminders are sent to the candidate. More on this at [How do I use multi-day scheduling?](docId:4J-Ogip_ouVgScipIIxYY)

### Candidate confirmation email

If you'd like to send a confirmation to the candidate for their interview, you can configure a confirmation email on the **Candidate Confirmation Email** tab.&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8933c67c442a50c9c7230044c685898b.png)

1. Send Candidate Confirmation Email: Toggle this on to send out the configured confirmation email when you click `Schedule`.
2. Confirmation Email Template: Determine the email template that is sent to the candidate.
3. Preview: You can view your template here and make any adjustments to the body and subject of your confirmation email as needed.
4. From: Use the dropdown to determine the sender of your confirmation email.

You may also see an **AI Notetaker** tab on this page if your organization uses [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z).

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby offers a `Candidate Confirmation Email Defaults` option for opt-in until it is enabled for all users on October 21, 2026. You can access and enable this option by heading to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features&#x20;**&#x61;nd setting the `Enable` drop-down to Enabled.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nnGg1YKGzjc9Sbrrw-_K1_opt-in-features.jpg)

This option applies only the confirmation email template settings from your scheduling defaults or your schedule interview activity template to the interview without taking your last interview draft into account.

When you manually schedule a new interview with `Candidate Confirmation Email Defaults` turned on, the `Send Candidate Confirmation Email` toggle defaults to disabled if:

- Candidate confirmation emails are turned off in **Scheduling Defaults**.
- The communication settings for the schedule interview activity template do not override the setting (i.e a template has not been selected in the `Candidate Confirmation Email Template` field).

![The screenshot shows the Candidate Confirmation Email page with the Send Candidate Confirmation Email toggle turned off.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ljhYn0XH4k_HcMPooDzIZ_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-23-at-91123-am.jpg)

Without this option enabled, the `Send Candidate Confirmation Email` toggle is enabled under the same conditions if your last scheduled draft had the confirmation email enabled.
:::

## Final step: Schedule the interview

Once you've reviewed and configured the calendar invite, reminders, and confirmation email, click `Schedule` to complete the scheduling process.

# Rescheduling interviews

When you need to reschedule interviews, navigate to the current schedule through the `Reschedule` button on the activity (where you can click `Manual Reschedule` or `Request More Availability`).

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ehYrE1mLvxrgYScbRLbQv_shelley-pearce-marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-02-17-at-101040-am.jpg)

You can also click the `View Schedule` option beneath the interview details, then click the `Manual Schedule` button on the following **Current Schedule** page.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6jujhmrR4oa8j3PSvYdOO_shelley-pearce-marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-02-17-at-101236-am.jpg)

If you've navigated to `Reschedule`, then `Manual Reschedule`, you're immediately taken to the calendar and interview details to make any changes. When rescheduling, all details except for the interview calendar (or the **Calendar** field within **Invite Settings**) can be modified. This includes changing interviewers — select a new interviewer in the calendar interface the same way you would when scheduling for the first time. The only events that are updated are the ones directly impacted by the reschedule; all other invites are not resent. Review the [Step 2: Select the time, attendees, and meeting rooms](#) section above for more details.

## Rescheduling via Google Calendar

Ashby supports a two-way syncing option whereby if you move an interview event in Google Calendar to a new date and/or time, the changes are synced and reflected in Ashby.

The calendar event needs to be moved on the account's shared interview calendar (the calendar determined in the **Communication** tab of your interview) if it wasn't scheduled via the direct booking option.

For an interview scheduled via a direct booking link, the calendar invite can be moved on the shared calendar, or the meeting organizer can move the interview on their personal calendar if they don't have access to the shared calendar.

These changes are then synced back to Ashby and new calendar invites are sent out. You do not need to resend the invites from Google.

If the interview is rescheduled via Google Calendar, an event is added to the candidate's feed showing that rescheduling happened outside of Ashby.

Updates to the schedule in Ashby are dependent on Google syncing times. They should show in Ashby within a minute or so, but could take longer.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c80580323747dc44015cd051310c1483.png)

# Canceling interviews

When you need to cancel interviews, either click `Actions` on the scheduled interview and select `Cancel Interview…`, or click `View Schedule`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e9a7d52db1eb5ecf6bdf7d71ce6b1a64.png)

When viewing the current interview schedule, you see the option to cancel the interview.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e471ae83d33947ee15c2937a448d5bf2.png)

When cancelling an interview, candidates receive a cancelled event notification (similar to the invite notification they receive when an interview is scheduled and calendar invites are sent). This happens both when cancelling directly from the candidate profile and when cancelling the interview as part of archiving the candidate's job consideration.

# FAQ

### How do I schedule multi-day interviews?

For a full guide, check out [How do I use multi-day scheduling?](docId:4J-Ogip_ouVgScipIIxYY).

### How do I see calendar invite details?

You can review calendar details at a glance by visiting the current activities section of the candidate profile and toggling the event using the `Details` button. In this view, you see the date and time of the interview, the location, and the organizer.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fc827d270c387bb0ee530647ed24188e.png)

### Can I schedule calendar invites to be sent?

No. Calendar invites can either be sent at the time of scheduling or sent manually from the scheduled interview activity on the candidate's profile. Indicators on the interview activity on the candidate profile will show whether or not calendar invites have been sent and if candidates and interviewers have accepted or declined the calendar invite.

To send a calendar invite manually for an interview that has already been scheduled:

1. Click More Actions on the interview activity on the candidate profile

::Image[How do I save time scheduling interviews?]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/a1EBywH9eNsJPzZYhBwjm_edie-mills-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-07-09-at-92332-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1916" height="748" darkWidth="1916" darkHeight="748" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Click `Send Invite to Candidate` and/or `Send Invite to Interviewers` to send the calendar invites immediately.

Create schedule interview activities to streamline scheduling. This pre-populates standard activities when a candidate reaches a certain stage (e.g., application review). More on this at [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).

### How do I request candidate availability?

You can read more on requesting candidate availability at [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).

### Can I reschedule an interview that I didn't schedule?

We recommend setting up a shared interview calendar and adding anyone on your hiring team who scheduled interviews to prevent scheduling issues when team members are away. More on this at [What is a shared calendar?](docId:7L9yaj7bNYKhfMH-vpkdR).

### How does Ashby determine scheduling status for interview stages?

For more information on the scheduling status on a candidate profile, check out [Understanding Candidate Activity Statuses](docId:6wG2UjwlJaTBGDGO1IYmZ).


[title] Interviews & Scheduling
[path] /

Scheduling in Ashby is very flexible and we have options for both manually scheduling and for setting up automation in Ashby. In these guides, we walk through how to set up scheduling in Ashby, from the basic setup, right through to more advanced options and our Advanced Scheduling Add-On.

# Initial Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A structured hiring process will help you identify & choose the best suited candidates. These guides will take you through the best practices for your scheduling setup, including setting up activities to set your interview settings in advance
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🕙 [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo)&#x20;

🗓️ [Scheduling & Interviews: An Introduction](docId\:XW-3IRIvOnBHO_UF37LbH)&#x20;

📝 [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux)&#x20;

📋 [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR)&#x20;

📅 [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml)&#x20;

⚙️ [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)&#x20;

🔗 [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM)&#x20;

👥 [Interviewers: Limits, Assigning & Rescheduling](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo)&#x20;

🗓️ [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN)&#x20;

❓ [How do I use multi-day scheduling?](docId:4J-Ogip_ouVgScipIIxYY)&#x20;
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for more information on Ashby's scheduling features? Check out the [Scheduling in Ashby](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-scheduling) course in Ashby Academy! For more on conducting interviews and writing up feedback, [Conducting Interviews with Ashby](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/interviewing-in-ashby) is also available.
:::

# Advanced Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Looking to scale up your processes? Here are some more advanced options for your scheduling setup.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📅  [Keywords](docId\:kPccUDjtUDRzq8rypJBnO)&#x20;

🌎 [Public Booking Links](docId\:FyG7-O-Qk73981CicoxjU)&#x20;

👥 [Interviewer Pools](docId:3NHQZ_eQLHGVlgjxgaZdJ)&#x20;

🗓️ [Meeting Rooms & Meeting Room Pools](docId\:ejHK524h-knpQV9zy-lgy)&#x20;

💼 [Debriefs](docId\:g8xyRdbKqB7EVnAfIa7V_)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Advanced Scheduling Add-On

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Click these guides for more information about our Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
➕ [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1)&#x20;

🧑‍🎓 [Interviewer Training](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb)&#x20;
:::
::::

# FAQ

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Some frequently asked questions about our interviewing and scheduling tools.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
[Am I warned when scheduling if an interviewer has already been a part of the interviewing process?](docId:7vT0DzhPXl7j61CzwYSNN)&#x20;

[Why is there no availability on my direct booking links?](docId:1YrO8-XXh3EhEM0lYeDjk)&#x20;

[What's the difference between interview plans and interviews?](docId\:MQd6oLbuyTfto8ptxgVbt)&#x20;

[What is a Meeting Organizer?](docId\:C1tlsDkvUJ7S15oA8POQl)&#x20;

[What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)&#x20;

[What are ‘Shared’ Interviews, Application Forms, and Feedback Forms?](docId\:UjNXOKXGS1_RQ1UDzXXTa)&#x20;

[How does editing interview plans impact passthrough rate reports?](docId\:eGXkkYuoOsteAyoHeOQ8A)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Conditional Activities
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Activity Configuration/

Conditional activities allow you to set criteria for activities on your interview plan. If candidates meet that criteria when moved to the stage the activity is in on your pipeline, the activity will be generated and added to their job consideration.

For more on configuring activities in general, check out the following guides: [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer), [Take-home Activities](docId\:hdevBy04F4IDGuOGM2kWH) and [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7).

### Conditional Activities

Conditional Activities can only be configured on the Enterprise plan.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

Now you have the option to create conditional activities, or add criteria to your existing activities. Only candidates who meet the criteria you set will have the activity generated on their job consideration when moved to a new stage in your pipeline.

So, one example could be that for a Backend Engineer role, a candidate could only be prompted to be scheduled for a technical quiz interview if their experience level has been determined as junior. This could have been determined in a previous interview and added as a [custom field](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) to the candidate’s profile, or perhaps determined by the candidate themselves when filling out their [application form](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI).

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/1ad997d4c7bf4eac9487f3ae46ad9d5e"}

To add a condition to your activity, navigate to the Interview Plan tab within your job, then either create a new activity using the `Add activity to...` option, or amend an existing one by clicking `Modify`, then `Edit`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ab0ac5b73f4b19d7bffc0cc64a6bda1e.png)

To add your conditions, click on the Conditions tab. Click `Enable condition ?`, then `Add Field to Match` to select your filters and determine the criteria the candidate would need to meet for this activity to be generated for them when moved to this stage.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ea8e6333c354902621008af6b376aecb.png)

Once you’ve determined your criteria, click `Save` to confirm your criteria and activate your conditions. You can click `Reset` to remove any unsaved changes.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a3a6971dbf7d6b6bc3926b847c02fff0.png)

Moving forward, if a candidate is moved to the stage your conditional activity is in, then the activity will only be automatically generated and added to their job consideration if they meet your criteria.

If the candidate meets your criteria, the activity will be added to the Current Activities section of their job consideration.

![If the candidate meets your criteria, the activity will be added to the Current Activities section of their job consideration.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ce541995093c6ebcc66720e3bf7fe5cd.png)

If the candidate doesn’t meet the conditions set, then the activity will not be generated when they move to the specified stage.

![If the candidate doesn’t meet the conditions set, then the activity will not be generated when they move to the specified stage.](https://cdn.zappy.app/953f2db030e1720a287f8560700c3f1c.png)

Any schedule interview activities that are set as conditional will be marked with a Condition indicator on your Interview Plan page within your job for your reference.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3fbac728d4db49dd9944c535fb3d7356.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I create conditional interview stages within my interview plan?

This currently isn’t possible.


:::


[title] Candidates
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you can find out more about navigating the candidate profile and taking action on candidates, including anonymizing, deleting and exporting data.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
👤 [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV)&#x20;

🔍 [Candidate Search](docId:-ZYXRHB2dhZQNQWl3ugx1)&#x20;

🏷️ [Tags](docId\:kRTcgZ4XMHdCMDypRRNgo)&#x20;

📁 [Candidate Files and File Categories](docId:3qLy7d8DDumaWkNbDexVb)&#x20;

❌ [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc)&#x20;

📂 [How do I export candidate data?](docId\:J3Gm_pcw4mQH81oWDenlg)&#x20;

👥 [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb)&#x20;

📋 [Asking for Reference Feedback in Ashby](docId:2NT-wzsiCEHCtE8hIu-IN)&#x20;

↔️ [Transferring Candidate Job Considerations](docId\:FN4VK3fmmC2pOhXo3SY_y)&#x20;

🎨 [Card colors in the candidate pipeline](docId\:lZreBrFf3PjfRorVdwSgF)&#x20;

⬅️ [Changing archive reasons on job considerations](docId:3Y56OStuThrqyKYcHOnJG) &#x20;

❓ [Can I mark a candidate as Do Not Contact?](docId:_Mj-DewLnurpGtpvCZo81)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Global Application Questions & Global Auto-Reject Rules
[path] Applications/

This feature allows you to create global application questions that are displayed below your application form on the job postings that meet the criteria you set. You can also set auto-reject rules that automatically archive candidates based on their answers to your global application questions. This gives you the option to configure application questions and auto-reject rules across many job postings, so any company-wide or department-specific questions can be linked to job postings quickly.

# Permissions & access

Global application questions and auto-reject rules can only be configured on the Enterprise plan:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

# Overview

This video provides a walkthrough of global application questions and auto-reject rules. Watching is optional. Follow the steps below to get started.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/051e16a3e8184b888fdf6df6f7d9b470"}

# Configuring global application questions

To configure global application questions:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >** [Global Application Questions](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/global-application-questions/questions).
2. Click `+ New` to add a question. You then select a question field type. You can pick from the following:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3kbrbFndTjBUnR2ANblF9_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-103108-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2982" height="850" darkWidth="2982" darkHeight="850" alt="Screenshot of the Global Application Questions page with the New button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Short Answer**: single line of unformatted text. LinkedIn URL responses are auto-populated on the candidate's profile.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Long Unformatted Answer**: multiple lines of unformatted text
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Phone**: only domestic or international phone numbers
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Email**: only valid email addresses
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Multiple Choice**: select a single option
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Checkboxes**: select multiple options
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Date**: only dates that can be selected via a date picker
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Yes/No**: yes, no, or, if not required, no answer
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Number**: only allows whole numbers (e.g. 1) or decimals (e.g. 1.5)
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**File**: upload a single file
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Other location**: input a location
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**URL**: a clickable link to any website
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Education History:&#x20;**&#x43;onsisting of school name, degree, major, start date, and end date.
:::

3. Add in your question. Check the `Required` checkbox if this field should always be completed.

## Form field connectors (optional)

You can configure your question to connect to another candidate field in Ashby. The answer provided to the question fills the connected field on the candidate profile automatically.

To use form field connectors with your global application question:

1. Click the link icon in the bottom right corner of your question.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/thjsrpcVioA4UEYhqOznP_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-93549-am.jpg" size="100" alt="Screenshot showing the link icon in the bottom right corner of a global application question used to connect it to a candidate field" isUploading="false" width="1056" height="708" darkWidth="1056" darkHeight="708" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. On the following pop-up, either select the existing candidate field you would like to connect the question to, or opt to create a new candidate custom field directly in the wizard.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XVrt17Lm-MwCthOXbljSc_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-94054-am.jpg" size="100" alt="Screenshot of the pop-up for selecting or creating a candidate field to connect to a global application question" isUploading="false" width="1116" height="1076" darkWidth="1116" darkHeight="1076" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If this is a new question with no existing responses, you don't need to take any further action. You see the connected field listed within the question setup.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Md0XRIT_ZkZuEuJqxYeFE_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-94308-am.jpg" size="80" alt="Screenshot showing the connected candidate field listed within the question setup after successfully linking a global application question" isUploading="false" width="930" height="342" darkWidth="930" darkHeight="342" showCaption="false" indent="1"}
:::

If the global application question has existing responses, you can opt to backfill those responses into the candidate custom field in the **Backfill Custom Field** section, underneath the **Scope** section.

![Screenshot of the Backfill Custom Field section showing the Backfill X Answers option](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/M-9UV2ZKQ992pms4VAU1b_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-95902-am.jpg)

1. Click `Backfill X Answers` to start the backfilling process.
2. Click `Overwrite` on the following pop-up to confirm.

If the question is multiple choice, the choices need to be mapped during the backfill process. To do this:

1. Click `Map Previous Answers` in the **Backfill Custom Field** section.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3RsR3-xcTAdPbgEqtb88O_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-102357-am.jpg" size="100" alt="Screenshot showing the Map Previous Answers option in the Backfill Custom Field section" isUploading="false" width="956" height="294" darkWidth="956" darkHeight="294" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. If you have a question with set choices, set how those choices should map to the new field when backfilling.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AAdSIvBmI7vffiGDcC2zS_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-102430-am.jpg" size="100" alt="Screenshot of the choice mapping interface used when backfilling a multiple-choice global application question to a new field" isUploading="false" width="1102" height="872" darkWidth="1102" darkHeight="872" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Click `Overwrite` to confirm and start the backfill.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can navigate away from the page while the backfill is processing. You can return to the panel to view the progress.

![Screenshot showing the backfill progress indicator in the configuration panel](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/olPuykRUoTK1sLx-dm95d_global-application-questions-ashby-2026-09-25-at-100540-am.jpg)
:::

## Question settings & scopes

On the **Create Application Form Question** menu, you can add your question and determine whether it is required or not. You can then set your scope, so your application form question is only included on the job postings that meet your criteria. Click `+ Add Field to Match` to add your requirements. For example, you can opt to only display your created question for jobs in a specific department.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you'd like the question to be displayed on all postings, leave the **Scope** section blank.
:::

Once you determine your criteria in the **Scope** section, you can then choose the job boards the posting should show on using the `Select job boards` drop-down. Click `Create` to add your question to the **Active Questions** list.

![Screenshot of the scope settings and job board selection options in the Create Application Form Question menu](https://cdn.zappy.app/ab615cb89daf6096d78084f6e50b443c.png)

## Editing or archiving a global application question

If you need to make any amendments or archive a question, click on the question within the **Active Questions** list, then click `Edit` to make changes, or `Archive` to remove the question from all postings going forward.

![Screenshot showing the Edit and Archive options for a global application question](https://cdn.zappy.app/496ccbde8566d2ee1f142002e4ef5b3e.png)

### Switching out the form field the global application question is connected to

You can switch out the form field your question is connected to by doing the following:

1. Ensure the global application question is open in `Edit` mode.
2. Click on the link icon on the question and select the new candidate field the global application question should map to.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Kk6lXef2ZOf51__UlhRIQ_preferred-working-location.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1038" height="768" darkWidth="1038" darkHeight="768" alt="The screenshot shows a global application question in Edit mode with the link option showing an existing connection highlighted." showCaption="false"}

When switching the form field, you also have the option to backfill answers to the new field. Click `Backfill X Answers` to start the backfilling process, or `Map Previous Answers` if the question is multiple-choice.

## Re-ordering global application questions

The global application questions you configure appear beneath the job posting's application form and above any diversity or Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) surveys. If more than one question meets the criteria in your scope, the questions are shown in the order they are listed in the **Active Questions** list.

To change the order in which your global application questions are shown, click and drag them into your desired order using the sliders to the left of each question.

![Screenshot showing the drag-and-drop sliders used to re-order global application questions in the Active Questions list](https://cdn.zappy.app/835d0252f3bf1132cf319ca3d667673d.png)

# Configuring auto-reject rules for global application questions

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring rejection conditions, including more information on operators, see [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota).
:::

To create an auto-reject rule for a global application question:

1. Click the `Auto-RejectRules` tab, then click `+ New`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c900a0f13d86c1ebd11254029682f927.png" size="100" alt="Screenshot of the auto-reject rule configuration panel showing the title field and Add Field to Match option" isUploading="false" width="1277" height="410" darkWidth="1277" darkHeight="410" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Give your auto-reject rule a title, then click `Submit`.
3. Click `+ Add Field to Match` to determine your rejection conditions. The fields available are from your global application questions.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6d91ff9802e629fd6333d7ba18960d57.png" size="80" alt="Screenshot of the Archive Reason and Rejection Email Template settings in the auto-reject rule configuration" isUploading="false" width="637" height="445" darkWidth="637" darkHeight="445" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Once you determine the conditions that need to be met for the candidate to be rejected, use the `Archive Reason` drop-down to confirm the archive reason that is applied when they are rejected.
5. Use the `Rejection Email Template` drop-down to select the email template used to send a rejection email. Once you select a template, set the delay for the rejection email (in days) and the sender address.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/939f6a0b0be4e48d0ac1b3ef79c06190.png" size="100" alt="Screenshot of the Activate button used to finalize and publish an auto-reject rule configuration" isUploading="false" width="563" height="188" darkWidth="563" darkHeight="188" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

6. Click `Activate` to finalize your configuration. Your auto-reject rules are then live and applied to candidates who meet your set criteria going forward.

## Editing & archiving an auto-reject rule

Click on an auto-reject rule within the **Rules** list to pull up the rule configuration. Click `Edit` to create a new draft configuration. Remember to activate the draft to ensure your changes are applied on future applications. Click `Archive` to archive the auto-reject rule. It is not applied to future applications.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/81949835a7298cef2606865b9c70559c.png" size="100" alt="Screenshot showing the rule configuration panel with Edit and Archive options for an auto-reject rule" isUploading="false" width="594" height="124" darkWidth="594" darkHeight="124" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

# FAQ

### Can I restore an archived global application question or auto-reject rule?

No, once a global application question or auto-reject rule for a global application question has been archived, this cannot be undone.

[title] Setting Up Take-Home Activities
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Assessments/

Take-home activities let you configure an assignment for a candidate and either send a self-submission link or upload the candidate's submission to Ashby for review.
This guide explains how to configure take-home activities, add them to interview plans, set up email templates, and automate delivery.

:::hint{type="info"}
For instructions on sending and reviewing take-home activities, see [Send and Review Take-Home Assignments](docId:2kBGatiPHfazXfVZCknUy).
:::

# Permissions & access

Take-home activities are available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
Organization Admins can set up shared take-home assignments, while Elevated Access users with the `Can add/edit jobs` permission can configure take-home activities.  You can update access by amending the permissions for your account’s access roles. For more information, see [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_).
:::

Users at any permission level can review submitted take-home assignments if they’re assigned as reviewers.

# Setting up a take-home assignment

You can add a take-home assignment to the corresponding stage of a job's interview plan.

## Creating a shared take-home activity

Create a shared take-home assignment if you'd like to use a take-home across multiple interview plan stages and jobs.

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Take-home Assignments](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/take-home-assignments).
2. Click `+ New`, add a **Title**, and click `Create`.

![Take-home Assignments page in Ashby showing a list of active assignments, with the New button highlighted in the upper-right corner.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oEmkuLMs5RrkyZRAvLIHn_take-home-assignments-ashby-2026-09-24-at-125857-pm.jpg)

On the next screen, you will set up the remaining take-home settings in the **Overview**, **Notes**, **Assignment**, and **Feedback form** tabs.&#x20;

### Overview tab

- **Title (internal):** Set an internal title for your take-home assignment.
- **Candidate-facing title:** Set a candidate-facing title for your assignment.
- **Groups:** Use these to organize your take-home assignments so you can filter for them as needed. Click `+ Add` to add an existing group.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can add options to this list by selecting `+ Create Top-Level Group` to create a top-level group, or hovering to the right of a group name and selecting `...` > `+ Create Sub-Group` to create a sub-level group on the main take-home page under the **Groups** section.

Departments and teams set up in **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Departments & Teams](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/teams) show here by default and cannot be removed.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/t9Ga8vr8Nucc72wkrzIGk_operational-improvement-proposal-interview-ashby-2026-09-24-at-10307-pm.jpg" size="50" isUploading="false" width="688" height="600" darkWidth="688" darkHeight="600" alt="Take-home Assignments page in Ashby showing options to create a top-level group or a sub-group within an existing group." showCaption="false"}
:::

- **Feedback requested:** If disabled, Ashby does not request feedback from any reviewers, and the `Feedback form` tab does not appear in the take-home setup.
- **Feedback required by default:** Reviewers are required to leave feedback for the take-home assignment. If `Feedback requested` is disabled, this field is also disabled.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vxHuIPfg0m1sYloNlMyFQ_shared-take-home-setup.jpg" size="70" alt="Shared take-home setup showing the Overview, Notes, Assignment, and Feedback Form tabs." isUploading="false" width="1046" height="680" darkWidth="1046" darkHeight="680" showCaption="false"}

### Notes tab

Use the `Notes` tab to explain what reviewers should evaluate in the candidate's submission.
Include the skills, criteria, or other context reviewers need to assess the work consistently.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KADiH6oRa_EBWy4taA2IX_operational-improvement-proposal-interview-ashby-2026-09-24-at-92655-am.jpg" size="80" alt="Take-home assignment Notes tab showing reviewer evaluation criteria." isUploading="false" width="604" height="593" darkWidth="604" darkHeight="593" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
These notes are visible to reviewers, but not to candidates.
:::

### Assignment tab

:::hint{type="warning"}
The Assignment field is required for candidates to self-submit their work.
:::

Use the `Assignment` tab to write the instructions candidates see after they open the take-home submission link.

Consider including:

- The goal or scenario
- The steps candidates should complete
- The expected format, file type, or length of the submission
- The estimated time to complete the assignment
- Links to websites, forms, or other resources candidates need to use
- Any requirements that help candidates understand what to submit

:::hint{type="info"}
This field accepts free text, so include enough detail for candidates to complete the task without additional context.
:::

For example, you can explain that an assignment takes two to three hours, request a Google Doc or PDF, specify a page range, and provide the task instructions.

![Take-home Assignment tab showing candidate instructions and submission expectations.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/216CaUD1RcPQOZSvoowHQ_operational-improvement-proposal-interview-ashby-2026-09-24-at-92807-am.jpg)

### Feedback form tab

Use the `Feedback form` tab to assign the feedback form reviewers complete when submitting feedback on the assignment.
For more on configuring feedback forms, see [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR).

## Add the take-home activity to your interview plan

To add your take-home assignment to an interview stage:

1. Navigate to your job, then to the `Interview Plan` tab.
2. Scroll to the stage you'd like to add your take-home activity to and click the `Add Activity to "Stage Name"` option.

![Interview Plan stage showing the Add Activity To control.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/C4YMTQsWvqVu8pA43L2v7_backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-20620-pm.jpg)

3. Click `+ Add Activity`.
4. Select `Take-home`.

![Add Activity menu with the Take-home option available.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nhwZBz16IcYCm77kVFecE_backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-20735-pm.jpg)

5. Create a new take-home or add a shared take-home that you've already configured.

![Interview Plan stage showing a configured take-home activity.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sbRj1LX37sewTh6auvNmc_set-up-a-take-home-assignment.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you create a take-home assignment directly from the take-home activity within an interview plan, this creates a job-specific, custom take-home.
Custom take-homes do not show on the [Take-home Assignments page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/take-home-assignments) in Admin, but you can add them to this page by selecting the `Promote to Shared` button within the take-home assignment.
You can also delete the custom take-home assignment and use a shared take-home assignment instead by selecting `Delete & Link to Shared`.

![Take-home Configuration for a Coding Assignment in Ashby, with options highlighted to delete and link the assignment to a shared take-home or promote it to a shared take-home.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kBOuGcrZovGzyC35cfnz8_coding-assignment-interview-ashby-2026-09-24-at-11527-pm.jpg)
:::

### Assigning reviewers

Assign reviewers by clicking the `Add Reviewer` button, then select reviewers using the drop-down options.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SraWDvY0LRNKCzoKH1KCU_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-24-at-12311-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1044" height="343" darkWidth="1044" darkHeight="343" alt="Take-home Configuration page in Ashby showing a Coding Assignment with the Add Reviewer button highlighted." showCaption="false"}

Much like interviewers on a scheduled interview activity, you can add multiple reviewers to one slot to create a round-robin assignment, or add multiple reviewer slots so multiple people review the take-home assignment.

# Setting up an email template

Now that you've configured the take-home activity, configure an email template to streamline sending instructions to the candidate.

## Email template for self-submission (recommended)

With self-submission, you can embed the `Take Home Submission Link` token in the email template.

![Email template containing the Take Home Submission Link token.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/09rvwInE5W7MHvn9Ful50_take-home-email-template.jpg)

If you create an email template with a self-submission link, you can specify this template in the `Communication` tab of your take-home activity.
When the activity is generated on the candidate profile, you can quickly generate and send an email using the specified template.

![Take-home activity Communications tab with an email template selected.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Jd3QRufgapGgJw4COGYCU_take-home-assessment-email-template.jpg)

You can also attach a document directly to an email template if you'd prefer to send the assignment details directly to the candidate.
The candidate then sends their submission directly via email and a user submits the assignment on their behalf using the `Submit Directly` option in the take-home activity.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on creating email templates, see [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).
:::

# Automating take-home assignments

You can automatically send take-home assignments to candidates when they enter a specific stage to streamline your workflow.

*Watching the following video is optional. You can also follow the steps below.*

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ba4c83dc6a914369b8dd63a17832de48"}

1. After [adding the take-home activity to your interview plan](docId\:jyUO0TCr0SMDW4Aqsv_zU) and setting up an **Email Template** under the `Communication` tab, navigate to the `Automation` tab.
2. Enable `Automate on Stage Entry?`, then select the user the take-home email should be sent on behalf of.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kgGlS-odTEEdX7NV3uqWn_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-24-at-13433-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1062" height="329" darkWidth="1062" darkHeight="329" showCaption="false" alt="ADD ALT TEXT — screenshot of the Automation tab showing the Automate on Stage Entry toggle and user selector."}

When you move a candidate to the stage with the automation, you see a note that the automated activity is starting.
You can also undo this.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AOIIRxr1pYq60CAQzHilC_automation-starting-activity.jpg" size="50" alt="Confirmation message indicating that the automated take-home activity is starting." isUploading="false" width="738" height="260" darkWidth="738" darkHeight="260" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
You cannot use this automation route to schedule the take-home activity email.
Ashby sends the email when a candidate moves to the stage the take-home activity is assigned to.
:::

# Configure reviewer notifications

## Reviewer notifications

When a submission is complete, reviewers are notified via email or Slack that the take-home is ready for review. Only assigned reviewers receive notifications by default.

![Email notification informing a reviewer that a take-home submission is ready.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hA1seIRmFC11jeU0Dl_en_email-notification-of-take-home.jpg)

Feedback reminders can be configured in **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Feedback Reminders](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/notifications/). You can configure the following:

- The required channels for feedback (email or Slack). If enabled, users cannot turn off the notifications in **Personal Settings > Notifications**.
- Set the schedule for the first interview reminder and then the cadence of the following reminders.
- Set when interview reminders should be stopped:
  - Set whether interviewer notifications are stopped after a candidate is hired.
  - Set whether interviewer notifications are stopped after a candidate is archived.
  - Adjust the number of days notifications are sent for.

![Take-home and assessment feedback reminder settings with Email and Slack required, scheduled to begin 10 minutes after an assignment is ready for review and repeat hourly, with reminders stopping when the candidate is archived or after two days without feedback.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tu1gprTHz8j0O4DNKjWcO_feedback-reminders-ashby-2026-09-28-at-123202-pm.jpg)

Users can submit feedback from Slack. They can click the `Submit Feedback` button within the notification to start the feedback submission process.

You can also set whether pending feedback is completed by default when a candidate changes stage in your interview process.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F2eHpExELiG2sQ5RiZbzx_feedback-reminders-ashby-2026-09-28-at-122459-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="733" height="606" darkWidth="733" darkHeight="606" alt="Feedback Reminders settings showing configurations for interview and take-home feedback, with “Complete pending feedback by default” enabled and highlighted." showCaption="false"}

If `Complete pending feedback by default` is enabled, then when you move a candidate to another stage, the interview, take-home or assessment feedback that is outstanding will be marked as completed and notifications will stop being sent.

:::hint{type="success"}
After setup, see [Send and Review Take-Home Assignments](docId:2kBGatiPHfazXfVZCknUy) to send submissions, review candidate work, and manage reviewer follow-up.
:::

# FAQs

### Why didn't my automated take-home activity send?

Automated take-home activities require you to fill out the `Assignment` section in the take-home settings. This field is required for candidates to self-submit their work.
If the `Assignment` section is blank when a candidate moves into the stage that triggers the automation, the take-home email does not send.

To resolve this:

1. Navigate to your take-home settings, either via the activity on the job's interview plan or by navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Take-home Assignments](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/take-home-assignments) if you're amending a shared take-home.
2. Add text to the `Assignment` tab.
3. Re-trigger the automation by moving the candidate back into the stage, or manually send the take-home if needed.

Once the `Assignment` section is completed, the automation sends successfully going forward.

### Can I copy an existing activity from an interview plan stage on one job to an interview plan stage on another?

You can. When you are on a job's interview plan and click `Add Activity to "Stage Name"` on an interview plan stage, you can see the option to add a new activity and a `Copy Activities` option.

*Watching the following video is optional. You can also follow the steps below.*

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/054b398690f04905b7feb878486c220b"}

1. Click `Copy Activities`.
2. Select the **Job** and **Interview Stage** you'd like to copy activities from.
3. Choose the activities you'd like to copy.

The selected activities are copied into the original stage you selected.

Once you copy an activity, if the activity uses a shared feedback form (more on those in [What are ‘Shared’ Interviews, Application Forms, and Feedback Forms?](docId\:UjNXOKXGS1_RQ1UDzXXTa)), those are referenced in the copy.
Any custom feedback forms are copied over and can be amended without impacting the original activity you copied from.

### How do I edit the take-home assignment information on the take-home activity?

If it is a shared take-home assignment, navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Take-home Assignments**, find the take-home assignment you would like to edit, and make any edits needed.
You can edit and turn a shared take-home assignment into a custom assignment by clicking the `Unlink & Edit` button.
You can also change the shared take-home assignment by clicking `Change Link`.

![Take-home Configuration page in Ashby showing a shared Take Home Assignment linked to the interview plan, with the Unlink & Edit button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9XKvsR2Z_E6_yuXQP2wiB_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-24-at-14546-pm.jpg)

If it is a custom take-home assignment, navigate to the job's interview plan, find the take-home activity, and click `Modify` > `Edit`.
Select the name of the take-home assignment and edit the settings from there.

### Can I create a one-off or ad-hoc take-home assignment for a specific candidate?

You must set up take-home assignments as activities within the interview plan.
There is currently no route to add ad-hoc take-home assignments from a candidate's profile.

### What happens if I edit a take-home assignment template or feedback form after it has been generated and sent to the candidate?

If you adjust the take-home activity on your interview plan (edits to the overview, notes, or the assignment shown to the candidate), those changes don't appear on take-home assignments that have already been generated on the candidate profile. Take-home assignment activities generated after the edit include the amendments.
If you adjust the feedback form assigned to the take-home assignment activity, the changes do appear on take-home activities that have already been generated on the candidate profile.
When you click `Collect Submission` or copy the self-submission link from the activity, you can review and edit the assignment shown to the candidate before sending.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2vy0eTTQOAZ6Zgzza-KDR_camille-preaker-product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-25-at-81708-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="592" height="446" darkWidth="592" darkHeight="446" alt="Editing the assignment section of a take-home before sending it to a candidate." showCaption="false"}


[title] Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

Direct booking and candidate availability links simplify your scheduling workflow. By allowing candidates to choose times directly on an interviewer's calendar or provide their own availability, you reduce the back-and-forth emails typically required to book an interview. This article explains how to configure these links and use them effectively within your hiring process.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- We recommend that Org Admins configure organization-level [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo) when using these features.
- If needed, individuals can also set specific hours they are available via the instructions in [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo).
- To get the most out of the feature, your organization should have a calendar integration configured to display interviewer availability.
:::

# Permissions & access

Direct booking and candidate availability links are available on all plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

To schedule interviews or send booking links, you must be an **Org Admin** or have one of the below access levels for the job:

- **Elevated Access - Hiring Manager**
- **Elevated Access - Admin**
- **Elevated Access - Admin Private**

# Understanding direct booking and candidate availability links

## Direct booking

Direct booking links allow candidates to view the interviewer's availability based on their set meeting hours and calendar availability. They then select a suitable date and time to schedule their interview directly. These links are specific to the candidate, job, and interview stage. Direct booking links can be used when the interview activity has only **one interview event**. Only one direct booking link can be created for an activity at a time.

:::hint{type="info"}
Direct booking links are specific to the candidate, job, and interview stage. If you want to create links for use across multiple candidates (such as for sourcing sequences), check out [Public Booking Links](docId\:FyG7-O-Qk73981CicoxjU). Note that public booking links must still be linked to a job and interview stage.
:::

## Candidate availability

Candidate availability links allow candidates to share their available time slots so that you can book an interview in a slot that works for them. The candidate does not see any interviewer availability using this method. You then manually schedule their interview based on the times they provide. These links are useful when an activity has multiple interview events (like an onsite with multiple panels) or when you haven't assigned interviewers yet.

# Sending links to candidates

You can send links via two routes: configuring schedule interview activities to streamline the process, or generating one-off links directly from the candidate profile.

:::hint{type="warning"}
While not required, we recommend setting up email templates using substitution tokens for sending these links, and then configuring the correct Direct Booking and Candidate Availability templates in your [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml). This enables you to use standard email templates that automatically pull in the correct direct booking or candidate availability link when used.

See [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ) for steps on creating email templates.

The substitution tokens to use are:

- To pre-fill the email with a direct booking link, click the `T` icon in the toolbar and select the `Direct Booking Link` substitution token.
- To pre-fill the email with a candidate availability link, click the `T` icon in the toolbar and select the `Candidate Availability Link` substitution token.
:::

## Generating direct booking and candidate availability links for existing interviews

Setting up schedule interview activities within a job's interview plan allows you to configure interviews for each stage in advance. When you move a candidate to a stage, Ashby pre-populates the next interview's details so you can quickly email the booking or availability link. We recommend this workflow to streamline your process.

When an event is generated from a schedule interview activity, it appears in the candidate's **Activity & Progress** timeline. You can select whether you'd like to send them a direct booking link or a candidate availability link by selecting the appropriate option.

### Sending direct booking links on existing interviews

- Select `Draft Direct Booking Email` to send a direct booking link via email.
- Select `Draft Direct Booking SMS` to send a link via SMS.
- Or simply select the `overlapping squares (copy)` icon to copy the direct booking link so you can paste it to the candidate using a method of your choosing.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nZTHigvDilca3wljcgwm-_earl-rath-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-24849-pm.jpg)

### Sending candidate availability links on existing interviews

- Select `Draft Availability Request` to start drafting an email to the candidate with the availability link included.
- Select the `overlapping squares (copy)` icon to copy the candidate availability link so you can paste it to the candidate using a method of your choosing.
- You can also edit the availability window in which the candidate must submit their availability.  See [Editing the availability window](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM) below for more details.



### Configuring and sending the candidate communication

Once you've made your selection to send a direct booking or candidate availability link, you must configure the communication you wish to send, whether it is an email (shown below), text, or other.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wK_cFy42Lme9ghpDNaDDE_earl-rath-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-25250-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have email templates created for direct booking and candidate availability requests and assigned in scheduling defaults, they automatically populate, as shown in the screenshot above.
:::

Once you click `Send`, the candidate receives the message and can book their interview or submit their availability at the included link. The interview entry in the timeline also updates with a status tag indicating that the link has been sent.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DhAeR357wyA-OU-xngXyi_earl-rath-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-30841-pm.jpg)

## Instant direct booking and candidate availability links

If you need to schedule a one-off interview, you can generate links directly from the candidate's profile.

### Generating direct booking links for one-off interviews

To generate a link:

1. Under the **Interview Progress** section of the **Activity & Progress** timeline, click `+ New Interview`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/amauLSqt2VbSqqKXK_uI3_earl-rath-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-21-at-31008-pm.jpg" size="90" width="816" height="527" position="center" darkWidth="816" darkHeight="527" showCaption="false"}

2. Select `Create Direct Booking Link`.
3. Set the interview details (type, location, interviewers, and organizer) in the pop-up.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
The **interview type** you select determines the interviewer instructions and feedback form.
:::

4. Click `Create Booking Link`.
5. Select `Share via Email` or click `Copy Link` to send it via another channel.
6. If you selected `Share via Email`, the email editor appears, populating the Direct Booking Request email template set by Org Admins in [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml). Click `Send` to send.

### Generating candidate availability links for one-off interviews



::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/5657cedd199c4385bfb8c0d7be0448d9"}

To generate a link:

1. Click `+ New Interview` > `Schedule Interview` > `New Interview`.
2. Navigate to the **Template** tab in the left-hand menu.
3. Click `Add Shared Interview` to define the interview events.
4. Click `Configure Interviewers` to assign the team.
5. Navigate to the **Current** tab and click `Create Candidate Availability Link`.
6. On the candidate profile, hover over **Request Candidate Availability** to copy the link or draft an email.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Only one direct booking or candidate availability link can be active under a single interview activity. If you try to create another link while a previous link is still active, you receive an **Active Meeting Request already exists** error.
:::

## Editing the availability window

Prior to sending candidate availability links, you can specify a window of dates for candidates to submit their availability.

1. Click `Schedule` on the interview activity.
2. Hover over **Request candidate availability** and click `Edit Availability Window`.

![Screenshot of the candidate availability window showing Rolling Days option selected](https://cdn.zappy.app/14112b3563df189611795b781ca8a9a4.png)

3. Choose **Rolling Days** or **Custom Date Range**:
   - **Rolling Days:** A dynamic window starting from the earliest available interview date. The window adjusts depending on when the candidate clicks the link. For example, if the window is set to 14 days and the candidate clicks the link on the 1st, they see availability up until the 15th. If they return on the 3rd, they see availability up until the 17th.
   - **Custom Date Range:** A fixed start and end date (or just an end date) that remains the same regardless of when the candidate visits the link.
4. Once you establish your scheduling window, finalize your availability window. To remove or add dates within the availability window, click them on the **Finalize Availability** calendar.

![Screenshot showing the calendar view for selecting available dates within the availability window](https://cdn.zappy.app/eac84bb18b67cd7110329067a5fc344a.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you see a date grayed out, it is outside your minimum notice. Hover over it to confirm.

Company holidays and weekends are excluded by default.&#x20;

![Screenshot of the Finalize Availability calendar view](https://cdn.zappy.app/336e36ccb6608ebbf48e527ffed8e633.png)
:::

5. Click `Save and Copy Link` to apply changes and copy the link to send to the candidate.

# What the candidate sees

Candidates land on a page that uses your organization's **Theme** settings.

- **For direct booking:**
  - Candidates initially enter a landing page that displays the interviewer's or organizer's avatar. The avatar displayed depends on the setup. If one specific interviewer is assigned to a one-on-one interview, their avatar appears. Otherwise, the meeting organizer's avatar appears.
  - The candidate can select a date on the calendar and is shown available time slots based on the interviewers' calendars.
  - Once the candidate selects a time and clicks `Book`, everyone receives a calendar invite.
  - They can reschedule by selecting `Reschedule` using the same link.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If **Reschedule Limits** have been set up on the interview plan for this interview, there may be limits to how many times a candidate can reschedule and how close to the interview they're allowed to reschedule.  See [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) for more on these settings.
:::

- **For candidate availability:**
  - Candidates see a landing page followed by a calendar date picker.
  - Once they select dates and click `Next`, they can specify their available hours on each day.
  - The candidate clicks `Submit` to share their availability, and the meeting organizer receives a notification to finish scheduling manually.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can preview what the candidate sees by navigating to the links yourself.
:::

# Scheduling interviews after receiving availability

Once a candidate submits availability, the organizer is notified and the interview activity on the candidate's profile is updated.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Kg2RAPDV3qPcgmNvHRajp_polly-pocket-scaled-customer-success-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-04-30-at-23301-pm.jpg)

1. Click `Start Manual Schedule` on the interview activity.
2. Click the `Interview Date` field to see the candidate's available slots — dates with availability are marked with a green dot on the calendar.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ExY7rC64bLiEgS9wQ3oOM_schedule-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-30-at-23710-pm.jpg" size="86" width="1190" height="1158" position="center" darkWidth="1190" darkHeight="1158" showCaption="false"}

3. Use the `Candidate Availability` dropdown to compare the candidate's availability to the interviewer's calendar, or use additional menus to include room, video conferencing, or additional employee calendars.
4. Click `Configure Communications` then `Schedule` to book the interview.

# FAQ

### Why is direct booking unavailable on my job template?

The template itself is not an active job. This message disappears on jobs generated from the template.

### Why do I see a "Missing Value For" message in an email template?

This occurs when the data Ashby is looking for doesn't exist yet, such as trying to send a link before the activity is generated or the link is created.

### How do I reschedule an interview?

You can find details in our article on [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN). Candidates can also click `Reschedule` on their confirmation page if they used direct booking.

### Can I invalidate a link after generating it?

Yes. To cancel a direct booking link, click `Schedule` on the interview activity, then `Cancel Direct Booking Link`. For availability links, click `Actions` then `Cancel Candidate Availability Link`.

### Why am I getting an "Active Meeting Request already exists" error?

This happens if a direct booking link is already active for that activity. Click `Cancel Direct Booking Link` before generating an availability link.

### Can I send both a direct booking and a candidate availability link to a candidate in one email?

If you have multiple schedule interview activities for a stage, multiple activities populate when you move the candidate to that stage. You can generate a direct booking link for one activity and a candidate availability link for the other. If you include both the `Direct Booking Link` and `Candidate Availability Link` substitution tokens in your email template, both pull the appropriate URLs from their respective activities.

### Can I assign multiple locations to a direct booking link?

No. You can only assign one location to a schedule interview activity or direct booking link. It is not currently possible to assign multiple locations or set conditional locations.

### Do candidate availability links take interviewer calendars into account?

No. These links only ask for the candidate's availability. You must manually cross-reference their times with your interviewers' schedules afterward.

### Can candidates edit their availability after submitting?

Yes. They can use their original link to return to the confirmation page and click `Edit Availability` (if unscheduled) or `Update Availability` (if already scheduled). Changes are only saved if the candidate clicks `Submit`.

[title] Tags
[path] Candidates/

This document outlines the tag options currently supported in Ashby. Tags can enhance the discoverability of candidate profiles, create more flexibility in reporting, and more. Ashby currently supports candidate tags.

# Creating candidate tags

You can create candidate tags in two ways: in the **Candidate Tags** section of **Admin**, or directly on the candidate profile.

To create a candidate tag in **Admin**:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Settings > Candidate Tags**.
2. Click `+ New`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dARl2av1ZGJVLo7cFDEh3_adding-a-new-tag-new-button.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2920" height="796" darkWidth="2920" darkHeight="796" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The new button to create a tag in Admin"}

3. Add a title for your tag, then click `Create`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Tytkg7JdpIfSuHXB55_qF_create-button-adding-a-new-tag.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="986" height="1620" darkWidth="986" darkHeight="1620" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Add in a title and click Create to create your tag."}

To create a candidate tag directly on the candidate profile, first enable inline creation. To do this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Settings > Candidate Tags**.
2. Click the `Settings` tab.
3. Enable the `Enable inline tag creation` toggle.

![The Settings section to enable inline tag creation.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/O5BtzWihGdXWdwrVgNDkQ_settings-tab-for-enabling-inline-creation.jpg)

Then, on the candidate profile:

1. Click `Add tags` underneath the candidate's name and details.
2. Type the tag name, then click `+ Create new tag` to both create the tag and add it to the candidate profile.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5fuAaLauTmobLTwyvUe_-_creating-a-tag-inline.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="740" height="650" darkWidth="740" darkHeight="650" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Adding tags inline on the candidate profile once inline creation is enabled."}

# Applying candidate tags

To apply a tag to the candidate profile:

1. Click `Add tags` underneath the candidate's name and details.
2. Search for and select the tag from the list to apply it.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oy-b-ZPY-fSo3lfgDXpdl_ariadne-shepard-ux-designer-ashby-2026-07-21-at-20426-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1190" height="774" darkWidth="1190" darkHeight="774" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Adding tags to the candidate profile."}

# Using candidate tags

You can use tags to filter candidate searches and pipelines, generate reports, and trigger alerts.

## Candidate search

Use candidate tags to filter a candidate search by:

1. Navigate to **Candidates > Search**.
2. Click `+ Filter` or `Add Field to Match` to add a filter. The button you see depends on whether the `Advanced` toggle is on or off.
3. Search for and select Tags. Once selected, choose the tags to filter by, and the candidate list displays all candidates with that tag applied to their profile.

![Filtering a candidate search by candidate tag.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8AXuy2yBTF4zKMGY5wh3R_candidate-search-report-ashby-2026-07-21-at-20906-pm.jpg)

## Candidate pipeline

Use candidate tags on the candidate pipeline by:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**.
2. Select a job to open the candidate pipeline.
3. Click `+ Filter` or `Add Field to Match` to add a filter. The button you see depends on whether the `Advanced` toggle is on or off.
4. Search for and select Tags. Once selected, choose the tags to filter by, and the candidate pipeline displays all active candidates with that tag applied to their profile.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2EyWrnQvlKm_G1DwxJZDJ_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-07-21-at-21546-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3410" height="1182" darkWidth="3410" darkHeight="1182" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Filtering a candidate pipeline to only show active candidates with a specific tag."}

## Reports and alerts

Tags are available as filters for reports too, so you can filter and group results based on tags applied to candidates.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on creating custom reports, check out [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW).&#x20;
:::

# FAQs

### Who can use tags?

All users who have access to edit candidate profiles can add tags to them. For details on which access levels can do this, see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

### Should I use tags to nurture candidates?

[Projects](docId\:NeOuKpzGi4kDAtdSyMhez) are dedicated to building talent pools, while you can use tags for a variety of other efforts. Overusing tags can create visual clutter on candidates' profiles.

### Can I automatically apply a tag to a candidate?

This kind of automation isn't currently possible. You need to add tags manually.


[title] Candidate Experience Surveys
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

You can use [Candidate Experience Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/candidate-experience) to capture feedback from your candidates at any point in the interview process. Candidate Experience Surveys support standard survey question types, as well as NPS Rating and Linear Rating question types.

:::hint{type="info"}
Want a deeper walkthrough of the full Candidate Experience Surveys workflow? The [Candidate Experience Surveys course](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/candidate-experience-surveys) in Ashby Academy walks through how to configure survey forms, settings, and automation, understand the candidate's experience completing the survey, review responses, and report on Candidate NPS and survey trends.
:::

# Permissions & access

Candidate Experience Surveys are available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
Only Organization Admins can configure Candidate Experience Surveys.

Organization Admins, or Elevated Access users with an **Admin Private** role, can view Candidate Experience Survey responses.

If your organization has custom access roles configured, users granted a role with the **Can See Private Fields** permission stripe can also see Candidate Experience Survey responses. For more on custom access roles, see [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_).
:::

# Overview

Ashby supports sending Candidate Experience Surveys to applicants at any stage of the hiring process. You can create and customize any number of surveys, and configure rules for how and when to collect them from candidates. You can then analyze the results of these surveys to make your recruitment process more effective.

# Set up your survey

To set up a candidate survey:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Candidate Surveys**.
2. Click `+ New` on the Candidate Experience tab.

![The New button on the Candidate Experience Survey page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1-gLvgRr-aWCDzfm-CjZN_setting-up-a-candidate-experience-survey.jpg)

## Add questions to your survey

Candidate Experience Surveys can contain the following field types:

- Short Answer
- Long Formattable Answer
- Phone
- Email
- Multiple Choice
- Checkboxes
- Date
- Yes/No
- Number
- Other Location
- URL

Some additional field types are only available for Candidate Experience Surveys:

- **NPS Rating:** A survey can have only one NPS Rating question. This is a question on the standard NPS scale from 0 to 10. You can edit the question and the labels on the scale.
  - Scores of 9 or 10 are considered promoters.
  - Scores of 7 or 8 are considered passive.
  - Scores of 6 or below are considered detractors.

![An NPS Rating question. You can edit the question and the labels on the rating scale.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ffImnyw8nR4tbSi2ruGXs_nps-candidate-survey-question.jpg)

- **Linear Rating:** A survey can have any number of Linear Rating questions. This is also a question on a 0 to 10 scale, but is specific to this survey. Use these to ask more detailed rating-type questions of your candidates. You can edit the question and the labels on the scale for Linear Rating questions too.

![A linear rating question. You can edit the question and the labels on the scale accordingly for linear rating questions too.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UYa0zkv50CHJqGKfwkjHR_linear-question-for-surveys.jpg)

# Configure your survey submission mode

Go to the **Settings** section on any Candidate Experience Survey to update the Survey Submission Mode.

There are three different survey submission modes:

- `Do Not Allow Anonymous Submission`: All submissions are tied to the candidate and visible on their profile.
- `Allow Anonymous Submission`: The candidate can opt into an anonymous submission. When you select `Allow Anonymous Submission`, candidates see a final question at the end of the survey, letting them choose whether to submit their feedback anonymously.
- `Enforce Anonymous Submission`: All submissions are anonymous.

![The survey submission mode field on the Settings tab of the survey.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WgRa2VoGl6MXBpyqe2geb_candidate-experience-survey-settings-section.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
To view anonymized surveys, go to **Reports > Candidate Experience Surveys** in the top navigation bar. You can view submissions that aren't anonymized on both the Candidate Experience Surveys page and the candidate's profile, on the **Forms** tab.
:::

# Send your survey

You can send Candidate Experience Surveys in two ways.

## Directly requesting surveys from the candidate profile

You can directly request a survey by doing the following:

1. Navigate to the candidate's profile.
2. Click `More`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8DlpIEQXjK6fKsw87E7u2_more-button-on-a-candidate-s-profile.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3328" height="1604" darkWidth="3328" darkHeight="1604" alt="The More button on a candidate's profile" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Select `Create a Candidate Experience Survey Request`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-eijx2vvquqULf7NSK41R_selecting-create-a-candidate-experience-survey-request-on-a-candidate-profile.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3326" height="1630" darkWidth="3326" darkHeight="1630" alt="Selecting Create a Candidate Experience Survey Request from the candidate profile" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Choose which survey to send and which application to associate it with.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lNiNm8syeXv7eTT4UZe0w_create-candidate-experience-survey-request.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1402" height="624" darkWidth="1402" darkHeight="624" alt="The screen to select a survey and job consideration when creating a candidate experience survey request" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Create the survey request using the `Create` button, or optionally schedule an email with a link to the survey using the `Create and Email` button.

## Setting up automation rules to send surveys automatically

You can set up automation rules so you don't have to request surveys from candidates manually. Instead, set up a series of conditions that trigger an email with a survey link to be drafted, scheduled, and sent to a candidate.

You can set up automation rules for a survey within the **Automation** section of the candidate experience survey.

:::hint{type="info"}
Our article on [Utilizing Stage Groups](docId:8ypvcP02S-0aiiEloOmRx) walks through the different fields you can select to customize the automation.
:::

To set up automation for your candidate experience survey:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Candidate Surveys**.
2. Open your survey details in the Candidate Experience tab.
3. Click the **Automation** tab, then click `Get Started`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ebBYiBsp6jdsu5QCKG4tm_product-candidate-experience-sate-experience-survey-ashby-2026-07-15-at-115530-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1614" height="796" darkWidth="1614" darkHeight="796" alt="The automation tab on a candidate experience survey." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Specify your conditions by clicking `+ Add Field to Match`, choosing fields, and then specifying criteria. More on using the `AND`, `OR`, and `NOT` operators below.
5. Select an email template from the `Email Template` dropdown to send your survey.
6. Configure any email delay using the `Delay` dropdown.
7. Specify a sender email address.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YPHZ5n7zR4_nbnF-iW5Hu_product-candidate-experience-sate-experience-survey-ashby-2026-07-15-at-115736-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1616" height="1628" darkWidth="1616" darkHeight="1628" alt="Configuring a basic survey automation." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

8. Click `Save & Publish` to enable your automation, or `Save Changes` to save your setup without enabling it.

:::hint{type="success"}
Ashby checks the conditions of each rule whenever a candidate changes stages. Ashby finds the first rule that matches, then creates a survey and schedules an email with a link to it.
:::

### Configuring criteria for automation rules

When configuring your candidate survey automation, you can use the `AND`, `OR`, and `NOT` operators. These give you more flexibility when assigning multiple form fields to your conditions.

`AND`: This option adds an `All are true` condition to the rule, so you can set multiple conditions; as long as all the conditions are met, the conditional form field is shown to the candidate.

In the example below, the `All are true` condition matches only candidates who have both reached the Onsite stage group and been archived for the role.

![An example of a survey automation with the AND operator.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q5Scy_dLtzXiv0fk9OqR5_and-operator-example.jpg)

`OR`: This option adds an `Any can be true` condition to the rule. If any of the candidate's answers match any of the set conditions, Ashby displays the conditional form field to the candidate.

In the example below, the candidate survey automation runs if the candidate's job consideration outcome is Hired, or if Onsite is the furthest stage group their consideration reached in the pipeline.

![An example of a survey automation with the OR operator](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uHsw6iuFGV2hsMLO2ZdsH_or-operator-for-a-candidate-experience-survey.jpg)

`NOT`: This option adds a `The following is not true` condition to the form. Candidates who don't meet the conditions specified in the rules see the conditional form field.

In the example below, any job consideration without an outcome of Active causes the candidate experience survey automation to run.

![An example of an automation with the NOT operator.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Okv9jFjePEQA-QnTxNnTv_product-candidate-experience-sate-experience-survey-ashby-2026-07-15-at-124549-pm.jpg)

# View your results

## Viewing individual results

You can view individual survey results on the **Forms** tab of the candidate's profile, if you haven't set responses to be anonymous, or the candidate didn't submit their response anonymously.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Organization Admins, or Elevated Access users with an **Admin Private** role, can view Candidate Experience Survey responses.

If your organization has custom access roles configured, users granted a role with the **Can See Private Fields** permission stripe can also see Candidate Experience Survey responses. For more on custom access roles, see [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_).
:::

![The Forms section of the candidate profile with a submitted candidate experience survey.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bQlx6jbY5OBvVP5cTupvp_candidate-experience-survey-submission.jpg)

## Viewing all survey results

Navigate to **Reports > Candidate Experience Surveys** in the top navigation bar to view survey results across candidates.

![Viewing all candidate survey responses.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3WnhFOHWg6pQog0_AD95e_candidate-experience-surveys-in-reports.jpg)

You can add filters to only view Candidate Experience Surveys that meet your criteria. Click `+ Filter`, or `+ Add Field to Match` if using advanced filtering, to set your conditions. If you'd like to save your filter, click `+ Save as New` to add a tab for that specific view with the filter applied.

![Saving a set of conditions as a view for candidate experience survey responses.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1p9PZfKw2uJTvRJHyuDwh_saving-conditions-as-a-view.jpg)

## Reporting and analysis

You can report on candidate experience survey data in two ways in Ashby reports.

When you want to report on survey request volume, completion, or submitted responses, start with the Candidate Experience Survey subject in Report Builder. This subject includes survey requests and submitted responses, including anonymous submissions that are not tied to a candidate or job consideration.

When you want to analyze survey data alongside application data, use the `Job Consideration` subject. Under Job Consideration, you will see two Candidate Experience Survey field groups:

- **Candidate Experience Survey:** fields related to the survey request itself, such as when it was created, whether it has been submitted, and the submission mode.
- **Candidate Experience Survey Submission:** fields related to the submitted response itself, such as the NPS score, whether the response was from a promoter, passive, or detractor, and when it was submitted.

Use the Candidate Experience Survey subject when you need the most complete count of surveys, including anonymous responses. Use the Job Consideration subject when you want to break survey data down by application-related fields such as job, department, recruiter, stage, or outcome.

### Candidate NPS Score report

Additionally, there is a prebuilt report template called **Candidate NPS Score** that shows your company’s Candidate NPS over time. This report uses the standard formula % of promoters - % of detractors, giving a score from -100 to 100. Scores of 9 or 10 are promoters, scores of 7 or 8 are passives, and scores of 6 or below are detractors.

![The Candidate NPS score report within report templates.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ye4HoNa1AkuENt4enpoKy_candidate-nps-score-report.jpg)

You can use filters in this report to review Candidate NPS across your organization by dimensions like team and then drill further into changes over time.

### Custom list report: Detractor Alert

:::hint{type="warning"}
Custom reports cannot be configured on the Foundations plan. Candidate information isn't available to add as columns to the report if submissions are set to anonymous.
:::

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Filters:** Job Consideration's Candidate Experience Survey's Survey Submission's is Detractor = Yes

**Columns:** Any candidate information you'd like to have included in the report.

![An example of a detractors custom list report.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0Y4Fqa4mPIRKSU9q_0RkG_report-builder-ashby-2026-07-16-at-22351-pm.jpg)

From here you can add an alert to receive a notification when a new record is added to this report. For more on this, see [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW).

# FAQs

### How do I view pending surveys?

You can view any pending survey requests on the candidate's profile, under **Current Activities**. From here, you can email the survey again or delete the request.

![An example of a candidate experience activity on a candidate profile. This one is waiting on the candidate's submission.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3d10f96e91a9a0f18751261b50df85f6.png)

### What does the survey look like to the candidate?

When a candidate clicks the link in a survey request email, it takes them to a page where they can fill out the survey. This survey uses the same brand elements as the Direct Booking Landing page. You configure these on the **Theme** page in **Admin** (see [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](docId\:f2OtyumVmeJaAt1DYRJYW)).

Candidate progress on candidate experience surveys, questionnaires, and EEOC surveys is automatically saved. If a candidate leaves a survey without submitting it, their answers will be saved when returning to continue the survey.

![An example survey from the candidate's perspective.](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_Xq2rfVPuaa6B2WG6uGve_screenshot2022-01-28at103618am.png)

### When are a survey's automation conditions evaluated?

Ashby evaluates the conditions in survey delivery automation settings during stage transition events. This means a candidate needs to move forward to the next stage, or be archived, before Ashby sends a survey.

Ashby sends the survey to the candidate as soon as they meet the criteria. If they move to the next stage and meet the criteria again, Ashby doesn't send the same survey a second time. If the candidate meets the conditions for a different Candidate Experience Survey, Ashby will send that separate survey.

### What happens to the survey automation if you archive someone, and then unarchive them for the same job consideration?

In this case, Ashby still sends the survey to the candidate. You can manually delete the survey request from the candidate's profile if needed.

[title] Candidate Profile
[path] Candidates/

This guide walks through the candidate profile, highlighting where candidate information is stored and the actions you can take.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites and permissions:**

- Limited Access users do not have access to view candidate profiles.
- Elevated Access users have access to profiles for the roles and departments they have been given the access role for. Your access role may limit your ability to see emails and notes within the candidate's feed.
- Organization Admins have access to view all candidate profiles (aside from confidential roles they haven't been given explicit access to and those they have their permissions restricted for with access roles).
- Agency users can only view the candidate profiles that have their agency listed as the source.
:::

# Overview

The candidate profile is where all information about a candidate is stored. You'll likely use this profile to schedule and email candidates, view candidate information, and progress the candidate through the job pipeline.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/d4608d102d3242cf902a4dfc99570c88"}

# How to add a candidate

To create a new candidate profile in Ashby:

1. Click `+ Add` on the top navigation bar, then `Candidate`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BlgJaykV5r0V27X41PS7J_home-acent-ashby-2026-05-26-at-20324-pm.jpg" size="100" width="2872" height="576" position="center" alt="The Add button on the top navigation bar" darkWidth="2872" darkHeight="576" indent="2" showCaption="false"}

2. Add the candidate's details, then click `Next`.
   - If you have a resume, upload it using the `Upload File` button. It will then be parsed so candidate information is filled out from the provided file.
3. If you'd like to add the candidate to a job's pipeline, consider them for the job.
   - This is optional — click `Skip` if you just want to create a profile for the candidate.
   - You can also add a source and credit the candidate to a user at this stage.

# Navigating the candidate profile

This screenshot shows an example candidate profile:

![A view of the candidate profile.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/d8lxdCbP8fFd9nD3w8jhm_elliot-treutel-backend-engineer-ashby-2026-07-31-at-12627-pm.png)

1. **Candidate name:** The candidate's current company and icons linking to social profiles are also listed with the candidate's name. If an email address and phone number are listed on the candidate profile, they appear under the candidate's name. Click on the email address or phone number to copy it to your clipboard.
2. **Add tags:** Search for and add tags to the candidate's profile, making them easier to organize and search for. More on this at [Tags](docId\:kRTcgZ4XMHdCMDypRRNgo).
3. **Views:** There are three view options:
   1. **Candidate:** An overview of the candidate details, including a list of all roles they've been considered for and projects they are a part of.
   2. **Considered for jobs:** Jump between candidate job considerations to get more information on each consideration, such as the interview progress.
   3. **Blocked applications:** If you have application limits in place and are an Organization Admin, you can see the total number of blocked applications. The three most recent blocked applications are also listed under **Show Recent**.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Candidate Profile Application Visibility controls whether users can see limited summaries of a candidate’s other job considerations when they don’t have access to the related jobs. Learn more at [Controlling Visibility of Additional Job Considerations in the Candidate Profile](docId:1d0Z3V0C8TSD92_4RjLtH).
:::

4. **Activities and progress:** View current activities (such as interviews to be scheduled or drafted emails to be sent), along with interview progress, the hiring team, and source details of the job consideration.
5. **Summary:** View the candidate details, such as their email address, phone number, social links, any candidate custom fields, and additional uploaded files. Candidate custom fields are also listed here to be filled out. You can read more on configuring custom fields at [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).
6. **Resume:** If the candidate has a resume or CV uploaded, it can be viewed here. Resumes are displayed on job considerations and on the candidate view of the candidate profile.
7. **New activity:** Click this to add an assessment or debrief activity ad hoc for the candidate's job consideration.
8. **Interview progress:** View the stages the candidate has passed through as part of your job pipeline.
9. **New interview:** Create a new interview activity ad hoc to schedule the candidate. More on this at [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN).
10. **Attribution:** View the source and the user this candidate's job consideration is credited to.
11. **Hiring team:** The hiring team for this user's job consideration. Based on their notification settings, those on the hiring team receive notifications for events that occur for this job consideration.
12. **Follow up:** If you'd like to be reminded to return to a candidate's profile later, select a date and create a follow-up here. You can add a note to your follow-up that can be viewed when the user hovers over the note icon on the `Follow up` button.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LvAi_6OM1kD2CgOBpajP5_zight-2026-05-27-at-115434.jpg" size="100" width="670" height="246" darkWidth="670" darkHeight="246" position="center" alt="The note icon on the follow up button" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

13. **Email:** Draft and send an email to the candidate.
14. **Change stage:** Move the candidate to another stage in your pipeline.
15. **Archive:** Reject the candidate or lead for the specified job consideration and move them to the Archived stage of the interview process. You'll be asked to select one from the list of archive reasons, and have the option to add a note and/or send or schedule a rejection email.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/veNyKIeyoz2Np6yEwkQj9_archiving-a-candidate-for-a-job-consideration.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1198" height="766" darkWidth="1198" darkHeight="766" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

12. **More:** Access additional options on the candidate's profile, including creating a survey request, enrolling the candidate in a sequence, considering them for another role, and leaving feedback for the candidate without scheduling an interview.
    - Actions you can take within the `More` menu include.
      - **Enroll in sequence:** Enroll the candidate in sequences. More on this at [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4).
      - **Schedule new interview:** Schedule the candidate for an interview.
      - **Submit feedback:** Add feedback for a candidate interview or submit feedback without scheduling an interview.
      - **Request feedback without scheduling:** Use this option to send a request to another user to submit their feedback without scheduling an interview.
      - **Consider for job:** Consider the candidate for another job.
      - **Transfer:** Transfer this job consideration to a new job. More on this at [Can I transfer a candidate’s job consideration to another job or interview plan?](docId\:FN4VK3fmmC2pOhXo3SY_y)&#x20;
      - **Export candidate data:** Select the candidate data you'd like to export and generate a PDF of your chosen data.
      - **Add to project:** Add the candidate to projects.
      - **Create diversity survey request:** Create a diversity survey request for the candidate. More on this at [Diversity Surveys](docId\:PSv0-HgPj3RvnmKMISJI4).
      - **Create EEO survey request:** Create an EEOC survey request for the candidate. More on this at [EEOC Surveys](docId\:pvVzo8-M3-2DF2RGT3tRA).
      - **Create a candidate experience survey request:** Create a candidate experience survey request for the candidate. More on this at [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB).
      - **Create questionnaire request:** Create a questionnaire request for the candidate. More on this at [Questionnaires](docId\:KgRji3jGZ-8tZR5bb1-kh).
      - **Send e-signature request:** Generate an e-signature request to send out to the candidate. More on this at [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt).
      - **Follow:** Follow candidates to get notifications on actions taken on this candidate and their job considerations. More on notifications at [Notifications & Notification Settings](docId\:A85ZAqFvmgeJNBLAPkETL).
      - **Find emails:** Look up emails and social links using our data enrichment providers.
      - **Merge:** Merge the candidate profile with a duplicate. More on this at [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb).
      - **Add referral:** Add a referral to this candidate's profile from an employee.
      - **Change application status:** Manually amend the status of the application. This should rarely be used.
      - **Mark as do not contact:** Prevent future email outreach from Ashby. This also cancels all scheduled emails to this candidate.
      - **Manage subscriptions:** Manage and amend the candidate's subscription status for receiving sequence emails, etc.
      - **Anonymize:** Anonymize the candidate's data. More on this at [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc). This action cannot be undone.
      - **Delete:** Remove this candidate from Ashby. More on this at [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc).
      - **Check for Fraud:** Perform a manual fraud check on this candidate. For more on this, check out [Running Candidate Fraud Detection Checks & Reviewing Fraud Signals](docId\:utOwntvTiXHyR2gC-Eu2a).
13. **Feed:** A list of all notes and feedback left on the candidate's profile, along with any email communication, referrals, and forms that the candidate has completed. More on this at [Candidate Profile: Candidate Feed](docId\:q_ODlkYiRm8WPz9Ua_KFv).

# FAQ

### Help! I can't schedule or email a candidate!

Check with an admin to ensure you have the correct permissions. You can find more about access roles at [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

### Can I unarchive a candidate if they were rejected or archived by accident? How do I restore their job consideration and move them back into the active pipeline?

If you have archived a candidate by mistake, click `Change Stage` on their profile and select the interview stage you would like to move them back to. If you would like to keep a record of the archived job consideration (if the candidate was initially rejected but then considered again later for the same role), you can opt to consider the same candidate for the role again.

### Where can I view the archive reason and archive fields on the candidate profile?

1. Navigate to the candidate's profile and to the job consideration in question.
2. On the **Activities & Progress** tab of their profile, locate the **Interview Progress** section. The archive reason will be listed in the Archived stage.
3. You can review an added archive note and other archive reason fields by clicking `Details` to the right of the archive reason.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/apWvOFjTR_ur_wvcAs2SK_archive-reason-and-a-note.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1176" height="296" darkWidth="1176" darkHeight="296" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

### How does color coding work with status banners and on the candidate pipeline view?

You can read more on this at [What do the card colors mean on the Candidate Pipeline report?](docId\:lZreBrFf3PjfRorVdwSgF).

### Can I schedule an email to a candidate?

If you don't want to send an email to a candidate right away, you can schedule an email. Click `Email` on the candidate's profile to create a draft. While drafting the email, click the `Send` drop-down to determine when the email should be sent. You can choose from three options:

- **Immediately:** Send the email as soon as `Send` is clicked on the draft.
- **Date and time:** Specify a date and time for the email to be sent.
- **After time passed:** Specify the number of days, weeks, etc. that the email should be sent after. You have the option to determine the days the email should be sent on (a weekday, any day of the week, or a specific day of the week) and also the time the email should be sent.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RM_iCD48NTDQYQKUfAiPd_ariadne-shepard-digital-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-05-27-at-115815-am.jpg" size="100" width="716" height="712" darkWidth="716" darkHeight="712" position="center" alt="The options when scheduling an email." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

Click `Schedule` to confirm. The email activity under **Current Activities** on the candidate's profile shows **Scheduled Email**. To amend or reschedule a scheduled email you have drafted, click `View` on the **Scheduled Email** activity. You can then make any adjustments and click `Reschedule` to confirm your changes.

![A scheduled email activity on the candidate's profile.l](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Jiei1-B8fut_2DJY1uXpd_a-scheduled-email-activity.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
You can only view and reschedule a scheduled email if you are the user who originally drafted and scheduled the email.
:::

Users with access to email the candidate have the option to delete the scheduled email activity. To delete a scheduled email, click the three dots to the right of `View` on the scheduled email activity and select `Delete`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1oDsJyWPL2pamrsWvvJZh-20260527-110244.jpg" size="88" width="1470" height="238" darkWidth="1470" darkHeight="238" position="center" alt="Deleting a scheduled email activity" showCaption="false"}

### How do I consider a candidate for a job from their profile?

If you'd like to consider the candidate for a role, click `More` on their profile, then `Consider for Job`. You can then select the role you'd like to consider the candidate for, determine the stage in the pipeline they should be added to, and their source.

### Can I make files uploaded to the Other Files section of the candidate profile private?

You can. To make a file under **Other Files** private, click the three dots beside the file, then `Edit`.

![Editing a file on the candidate's profile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Cw0bk_0q4svffwRe9xn9D_ariadne-shepard-digital-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-05-27-at-120418-pm.jpg)

On the following page, you will be able to set the file as public or private using the `Privacy` drop-down.&#x20;

![Editing the privacy on a file.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rcbZ9_Sknmdt8eMKs0gT-_editing-a-file-s-privacy.jpg)

Like with private notes and fields, only those with Organization Admin or Elevated Access - Admin Private access can view these fields.

### If I add a follow-up to a candidate's profile, will I still receive a notification to follow up with the candidate even if they've been archived?

Yes. Archiving the candidate does not automatically cancel the follow-up task. If the follow-up isn't resolved on the candidate profile, a notification is still sent.

### What happens if a candidate was sourced and added to a job as a lead, then applied for the same job themselves?

In this case, the candidate continues to have just one job consideration on their profile for the role but is moved to the Application Review stage.

### If I request feedback from a user without an interview, will they be able to view the full candidate profile?

If a user is asked to submit feedback without an interview, they can see the candidate's resume, a briefing, and some basic candidate details. If they do not have the permissions to view the candidate profile already, they are not able to see it as part of their task to provide feedback.

### Can I add multiple users to the Credited To field?

No, only one user can be added to this field.

### How do I leave feedback for a candidate?

If you have been scheduled for an interview, a feedback task shows on your home page (more on this at **Home Page**). This task shows for Limited Access users, Elevated Access users, and Organization Admins. If you would like to submit feedback without scheduling an interview for the candidate, click `More`, then `Submit Feedback` on the candidate's profile. You can then select your feedback form and complete your feedback. You need Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access or above to take this route.

If you'd like another user to leave feedback, click `More` on the candidate's profile, then `Request Feedback without Scheduling`. You can then determine the interview type (and feedback form) and the user who should leave feedback. Once confirmed, this generates a feedback request on the user's home page. All users can see feedback request tasks on their home page, but only those with Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access (or higher) can generate the request. Only one user can be specified at a time and you can select from the shared interviews you've created in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Interviews**.

### How do I edit or add new archive reasons? Where do I set up a new archive reason?

Add or edit archive reasons by heading to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >&#x20;**[Archive Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-archive-reasons). Click `+ New` to add a new archive reason, or click on an existing archive reason to make any edits.

### How do I add or amend a candidate's social links on their profile (for example, their LinkedIn profile link)?

While viewing the candidate profile, head to the **Summary** tab. Navigate to the **Social Links** section, then click `Add` to add a new social link. To edit a social link, click the three dots beside the link in question, then select `Edit`. Once you've made your amendments, click `Submit` to confirm the changes.

### What permission level do I need to change a candidate's stage or archive their job consideration?

To change the stage a candidate's job consideration is in or archive their job consideration, you need Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access or higher to the job, team, or location.

### What happens when I update a candidate's resume with a new file?

The resume uploaded on the application form is displayed on both the application and candidate profile.

If the application's resume is updated, it updates both the application and the candidate profile's resume.

### What happens if I delete the resume on the candidate profile or a candidate's job consideration?

If you delete the resume from the application, only the application's resume is deleted. The candidate profile's resume is then used for the application. If you delete the candidate profile's resume and a resume exists on the application, the application resume is now displayed on the candidate profile.

### If a candidate submits an outdated resume, can they refresh or add their new resume to their profile themselves?

No. In these cases, receive the new resume or CV from the candidate via email and then manually replace the resume within the candidate profile in Ashby. The candidate can provide a new resume if they are applying for another job via your job board.

### When should I transfer a candidate to another job and when should I consider a candidate for another job instead?

Under the `More` option on the candidate's profile, you see the option to transfer a candidate's job consideration and the option to consider them for another job.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3Dok43LhBi58pyT0wMiHt_ariadne-shepard-digital-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-05-27-at-114210-am.jpg" size="60" width="770" height="962" darkWidth="770" darkHeight="962" position="center" alt="The option to consider a candidate for a new job or transfer them" showCaption="false"}

**Transferring** a candidate moves their existing job consideration to a different job pipeline.

When you transfer a candidate, the following happens:

- All historical data is retained, including:
  - Application history
  - Notes
  - Application forms
  - Surveys
  - Interview feedback
  - Referral forms
- The `Started At` date stays the same.
- Reporting continues to reflect the original application timeline.

Transfer a candidate's job consideration when:

- The role is essentially the same or a similar opportunity (for example, a renamed job or corrected posting) that the candidate should be considered for instead.
- You want to preserve all historical context and timing for this specific job consideration and just move it to a different job.
- Time-to-hire continuity matters, taking into account when the candidate was first considered for a role.

**Considering for another job** creates a brand-new job consideration for the candidate.

When you consider a candidate for another job:

- The `Started At` date reflects the date the new job consideration was created and added to the candidate's profile.
- Time-to-hire and pipeline metrics start fresh for the new job consideration.
- The candidate profile details remain the same, but a new job consideration is added to their profile.

Use `Consider for Job...` when:

- The candidate is being considered for a new or different opportunity.
- You want reporting dates to reflect both job considerations.
- The opportunity represents a new hiring process.

### How can candidate profiles be linked to employee profiles upon hire?

See [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV) for more information.

### Can I view or edit a candidate's hired date?

When a candidate is in the Hired stage, the hired at date appears below the Hired stage row in the **Interview Progress** section of the **Activities & Progress** feed.

::Image[]{src="https://p-yvfbeggm.b2.n0.cdn.zight.com/items/YEu9KQyk/446dbf64-d1e0-4ef3-9884-f6b31debfa98.png?source=viewer&v=0fdde91c2a08f2c40ebbe87570857aec" size="80" width="677" height="451" isUploading="false" darkWidth="677" darkHeight="451" alt="Shows the Interview Progress section of the Activities and Progress feed, highlighting where the Hired date appears on a candidate profile." showCaption="false"}

Users with both the **Can edit candidate** and **Can see private fields** permissions see a pencil icon next to the date. Selecting it opens the **Edit Candidate's Hired Date** window, where you can set the date to one of three sources:

- **Custom Date:** Select any date from the calendar picker.
- **When stage changed to "Hired":** Sets the date to when the application's stage was
  moved to Hired.
- **When offer was accepted:** Sets the date to the offer acceptance date.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q2g24V5cR3SSDhptofm3a_ralph-altenwerth-head-of-recruiting-ashby-2026-06-29-at-34817-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="739" height="495" darkWidth="739" darkHeight="495" alt="Shows the Edit Candidate's Hired Date window with a calendar picker and the available options." showCaption="false"}

After selecting `Set Hired Date`, the hired at date updates in the **Interview Progress** area.&#x20;

If you manually overrode the date, hovering over it shows a tool tip indicating a manual override is in place. To undo a manual override, open the modal again and select `Reset to Default`. This returns the hired at date to the default behavior configured in your org's [offer stage admin settings](docId:3jpy1oPy9Ud7V7SbdZAhS).

:::hint{type="warning"}
Users without both the **Can edit candidate** and **Can see private fields** permissions can see the hired at date but cannot edit it. They do not see the pencil icon.

If you sync candidates from other systems, such as Workday or Lever, a manual hired at date override takes precedence over synced data. A re-sync updates the underlying system dates but will not overwrite a manually set hired date. If you expect a date changed in the external system to flow through, undo the override first.
:::


[title] Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates
[path] Candidates/

***

In Ashby, you can delete candidates or anonymize them to remove data from your account. Both options are available in the `More` menu in a candidate's profile.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Before deleting or anonymizing a candidate, confirm they are not being actively considered for any jobs. If they are still being considered for a role, archive all their job considerations first.
:::

# Permissions & access

The following access roles can delete and anonymize candidates in Ashby.

| Access role                                                    | Can delete/anonymize a candidate? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                                 |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                                 |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                                 |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                                 |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                                 |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ✅                                 |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅                                 |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ✅                                 |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                                 |

# Overview

You can find both options in the `More` section of a candidate's profile.

![Screenshot showing the More menu on a candidate profile in Ashby](https://cdn.zappy.app/053ba6113a092322c077f483c3c1c7db.png)

# Anonymizing candidates

To anonymize a candidate, click `More` on the candidate profile, then `Anonymize`.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/4524c91c08cf442dae0e9e7fb94ccf8c"}

When you anonymize a candidate, Ashby removes personally identifiable information (PII) from their profile, but the information can still be used for reporting (archive reasoning, stage reached, etc.). You cannot undo anonymization.

After you anonymize a candidate, Ashby adds an activity to their profile with a timestamp of the date and time they were anonymized.

![Screenshot showing the anonymization activity entry on a candidate's profile feed](https://cdn.zappy.app/51e9f1db469d86fd852c699478425c09.png)

# Deleting candidates

To delete a candidate, click `More` on the candidate profile, then `Delete`. When you delete a candidate, Ashby treats it as a soft deletion.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a73a1727604a40b5b06f910f6e640c65"}

You can restore candidates or fast-track a permanent deletion via the [Recently Deleted](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/restore-deletions) page found within each user's Personal Settings. If a candidate is not restored within 10 days, Ashby permanently deletes them. The Recently Deleted page lists the date of permanent deletion.

![Screenshot showing the Recently Deleted page with an arrow pointing to the Restore button.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4usjx6cc7OpQui_KqHvwP_ashby-2026-09-10-at-114450-am.jpg)

# Bulk anonymizing and deleting candidates

Ashby flags candidates who violate your data compliance rules, but it does not anonymize or delete them automatically. Use [Candidate Search](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/candidate-search) to find these candidates and take action on them in bulk.

1. Navigate to **Candidates > Search**.
2. Toggle on the **Advanced** filter and apply the `Candidate's Is In Violation of Data Compliance?` filter, then set it to `Yes`.

![Screenshot of Candidate Search with the Advanced filter panel open and the data compliance violation filter applied](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/v_TkCiK6DlFeIanhdY_4S_candidate-search-report-ashby-2026-09-10-at-112213-am.jpg)

3. Select all candidates in the results using the checkbox in the list header.
4. Click `More`.
5. Select `Anonymize` to remove PII from the selected profiles, or select `Delete` to delete the selected profiles.

![Screenshot showing the More menu in Candidate Search with the Anonymize and Delete options visible](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/44FTQQIeC4UydsZnO_Zpn_candidate-search-report-ashby-2026-09-10-at-112311-am.jpg)

6. Review the candidates and confirm the bulk action. If Ashby displays an additional confirmation prompt for a large action, enter the requested confirmation text and click `Perform`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Run this search periodically to catch candidates who newly reach your retention threshold. For more information about identifying candidates who are in violation of your data compliance rules, see [Reporting on Data Retention Rules, Violations of Rules and Consent Choice](docId\:d-2p7dAdxKo_J2HULe31-).
:::

# FAQ

### Can I configure rules to help maintain compliance with data laws?

Ashby has data privacy and compliance features that can assist with this. For guidance on these features, see [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9).

### A candidate has multiple job considerations or applications on their profile for the same job. Can I delete an application on their profile?

It's not possible to merge or delete job considerations on a candidate's profile. If the candidate should only be considered for the role once, archive the other job considerations you don't plan to move forward with.

### How does anonymizing a candidate work with the email events on the candidate's feed?

Once a candidate is anonymized, a record of email events still shows on their feed, including the date and time the email was sent. However, the subject, body, and the candidate's email address are anonymized.

### Can I automate anonymizing or deleting candidates?

No. Ashby flags candidates who are in violation of your data compliance rules, but it does not anonymize or delete them automatically. You can use [Candidate Search](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidate-searches/new#filter=PQBZzn1i1_jTn3jQjOQq-ERojnVBwqUWHmq6ccNnDWrB-sOClJ70Fcywd69PrUb62xOWfnNW0_lH6hU4f4YNJJGjPNGuYUPrBRVVBSw4AIeDnV-pUqCba2_FqLGDu8AiG4eBFg7ifiAojnzJ4MWxJuG91J78OEoMxHfwYFadhmyWKaYTHRNmuJqgXW26) to find candidates where `Candidate's Is In Violation of Data Compliance?` equals `Yes`, then [anonymize or delete the results in bulk](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/anonymizing-and-deleting-candidates#bulk-anonymizing-and-deleting-candidates).

### Are AI Notetaker recordings, notes, and transcripts deleted when a candidate is deleted or anonymized?

Yes, recordings, transcripts, and notes are all deleted when a candidate is anonymized or deleted.

[title] EEOC Surveys
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

Ashby supports the ability to collect Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) surveys from applicants on jobs pages or at any stage of the hiring process.

# Overview

Ashby supports the ability to collect an EEOC survey from applicants on jobs pages or at any stage of the hiring process. Users can configure rules for how and when to collect them from candidates. You can then analyze the results of these surveys to measure performance against your Diversity, Equity, and Inclusion (DEI) goals.

# Permissions & Access

EEOC surveys can be configured on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Only Organization Admins can enabled and adjust the settings for EEOC surveys. Users with the permission stripes Can See Candidate Profiles and Can Email/Schedule Candidates can generate and send surveys.

# Set up EEOC surveys

You can set up EEOC surveys in **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Surveys**. Click the WWOC tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/628e7970584d3488ea593a3d590e48f7.png)

EEOC surveys can be collected in three different ways:

## Collecting on the application tab of each job

You can set up a filter to determine which job postings the survey is collected on.

If you enable the `Collect alongside application on job postings?` toggle, you can click the `+ Filter` button to determine the criteria that must be met for the survey to be shown on specific job postings.

If you leave the filter blank, the EEOC form is collected on all postings.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0efe0a6488755a12256383c34066a348.png)

## Directly requesting surveys

You can directly request a survey by taking the following steps:

1. On the candidate profile, click the `More` dropdown.
2. Select `Create EEOC Survey Request`.
3. Choose which survey to send and which application it should be associated with.
4. Create the survey request using the `Create` button, or optionally also schedule an email with a link to the survey using the `Create and Email` button.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c27c11d22a18bd6675898a633872d208.png)

## Setting Up Automation Rules

You can set up automation rules so that you don’t need to directly request surveys from candidates manually.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can set up a series of conditions that trigger automatically sending a survey to a candidate. Our article on [Utilizing Stage Groups](docId:8ypvcP02S-0aiiEloOmRx) walks through the different fields you can select to customize the automation.
:::

To set up automation for your EEOC survey:

1. Head to the **Automation Settings** section of the **EEOC Survey page** and create a new draft configuration by clicking `Create a Draft Configuration`

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/bcd2e19f90fd81cf11fa59b99d79d73d.png" size="100" width="1140" height="301" darkWidth="1140" darkHeight="301" position="center" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Specify your conditions by clicking `+ Add Field to Match`, choosing fields and then creating filters based on those

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6ad66366ee7b6ed941a98417aea7cac5.png" size="100" width="1137" height="675" darkWidth="1137" darkHeight="675" position="center" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Select an email template from the **Email Template** dropdown to use when sending out your survey.
4. Configure any email delay using the **Delay** dropdown.
5. Specify a sender email address.
6. Activate the configuration.
7. Toggle on the `Enable Survey Automation` toggle once you have activated the configuration.

The conditions of each rule are checked whenever a candidate changes stages. Ashby finds the first rule that matches, creates a survey, and schedules an email with a link to the survey.

# View results

## Reporting and analysis

You can report on the questions in an EEOC survey in our standard reports. EEOC surveys are their own reporting subject. For more on reporting subjects, check out the [Ashby Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj) guide.

# FAQ

### How do I view pending surveys?

You can view any pending survey requests on the candidate profile under **Current Activities**. From here you can email the survey again or delete the request.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e6e598a773c475e31fac34d439838d75.png)

### What does the survey look like to the candidate?

When a candidate follows the link in a survey request email, they are brought to a page where they can fill in the survey.

Candidate progress on candidate experience surveys, questionnaires, and EEOC surveys is automatically saved. If a candidate leaves a survey without submitting it, their answers will be saved when returning to continue the survey.

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zqPN2Atdgfb2_hGuj44an_screenshot2022-02-18at10734pm.png)

### When are a survey's automation conditions evaluated?

The conditions in survey delivery automation settings are evaluated during stage transition events. This means a candidate needs to move to the next stage or be archived for a survey to be sent.

### Are surveys anonymous?

Yes. By default, survey responses are anonymous.

### Can I limit who can edit DEI reports?

You can, yes! To get started, switch on the Restrict editing DEI reports feature in **Admin > Data Management > Reporting Permissions**.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/520bf20de3bee0955f431730bebcbb65.png)

When the setting is enabled, users without access to edit or create DEI reports cannot choose DEI fields as **Fields to Show** or **Group By** fields. Saved reports containing those fields are still visible, but are not editable.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0e612b021989099319736879bacee65c.png)

Once enabled, navigate to each user's profile on the Employees page. On the **Permissions** tab, you see the option to allow them to create and update DEI reports. Admins with the **Can Create and Update DEI Reports** permission can grant or revoke the permission for others.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c5997275294b11c1c85fc70a56a97949.png)

The permission is automatically granted to the admin user who turns on the **Restrict Editing DEI Reports** setting.

:::hint{type="info"}
This does not impact the visibility of diversity data in shared reports. Those with Organization Admin access or Elevated Access - Admin (Private) access can view diversity data in reports.
:::

### What information is asked for on the EEOC survey?

- Gender
- Race
- Veteran Status

If the Is your organization a government contractor? option is set to **Yes**, the survey asks for the same information.

If your organization would like to invite employees to voluntarily disclose whether they have a disability, we recommend including optional questions in a diversity survey. You can read more on configuring these at Diversity Surveys.

### Can I edit the EEOC survey questions?

No, all questions are multiple choice with pre-populated answer options and cannot be edited.


[title] Interviews: Initial Setup
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/


[title] What is a confidential job?
[path] Jobs & Openings/

Setting a job as confidential allows you to restrict visibility to a select group of users. This is useful for sensitive roles or internal backfills that should not be visible to the broader organization or listed on your public Ashby job board.

When a job is made confidential, it is only visible to:

- The job creator.
- Users explicitly granted access to the role.
- **Org Admins** with the "access to all confidential roles" permission enabled.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This feature is available on Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.
:::

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Creating a job and setting it as confidential

While using the job creation wizard to set up your job, check the `Is Confidential?` checkbox to mark the job as confidential.

While this isn’t a commonly used option, this can help if you are setting up jobs that only users who have been given specific access should be able to see.

![Job creation wizard pop up showing the Is Confidential? checkbox at the bottom.](https://cdn.zappy.app/abf3e613679e0df17069634f53aa8de9.png)



# Setting an existing job as confidential

If you have already created a job and want to strictly limit user access to the job, click `More` when viewing the job, then select `Make Confidential`*.*&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
Only the user who created the job or Organizational Admins can mark the job as confidential or non-confidential.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/010428cbcb65e977bf0bd692ea6e379e.png" size="52" width="394" height="465" darkWidth="394" darkHeight="465" position="center" showCaption="false"}

# Sharing the confidential job’s job posting with candidates

Because confidential jobs are unlisted, they will not appear on your public job board. However, you can still share the posting with specific candidates via a direct link.

To find the link, navigate to **Job Postings** within the job and select `View Posting`. You can then copy the URL from your browser's address bar to share it with potential candidates.

![Shows the View Posting button in the top right of a job posting.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3e937f42cbf9393624db0afe87e04502.png)

# Permissions & Access

## Can Organization Admins view confidential jobs?

**Org Admins** can view confidential jobs if they created the job, were explicitly added to it, or have a global permission enabled.

To grant an **Org Admin** access to all confidential jobs:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.
2. Select the user and go to the **Permissions** tab.
3. Toggle the `Has access to all confidential jobs and projects within assigned permissions` option to `Yes`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LarbDTtnKvHZvfC0nOwrf_employees-acent-ashby-2026-04-15-at-23826-pm.jpg" size="60" width="424" height="191" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## How do I assign users access to a confidential job?

You can grant specific users access to a confidential job without giving them global access.

To assign access:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.
2. Select the user and go to the **Permissions** tab. (The user must have **Elevated Access** or **Org Admin** status).
3. Scroll to the **Job Access Roles** section and click `+ Add`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/374c7bf07597144bf8e3293cab96033f.png" size="82" width="845" height="244" darkWidth="845" darkHeight="244" position="center" alt="The Job Access Roles section in an employee profile featuring the '+ Add' button." showCaption="false"}

4. Select the desired access role and choose the specific confidential job from the **Job** dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/4ad52607b200580a102144560b868011.png" size="96" width="816" height="225" darkWidth="816" darkHeight="225" position="center" alt="The 'Add Job Access Role' modal displaying dropdowns to select an access role and a specific confidential job." showCaption="false"}

5. Click `Submit` to save.

# Reporting

## Who can view confidential job data in reports?

Only users with access to the confidential job can see its data in reports. If a user lacks access, report results will only reflect the non-confidential roles they are permitted to see.

This protection extends to candidate profiles. If a candidate is only considered for a confidential role, their profile remains hidden from unauthorized users. If an unauthorized user attempts to access a direct link to such a profile, they will see a permissions error message.

![Shows the permissions error message a user would see if they do not have permissions to view a candidate profile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/945a5452eb227f70fbdb311185c5bced.png)

# FAQ

### Can interview calendar invites be set to Private for confidential jobs?

Yes. If a job is marked confidential during creation, the `Is Private?` toggle is automatically enabled for all interviews in that pipeline. If you mark a job as confidential after creation, new interviews will be private by default, but existing ones must be updated manually.

When an invite is private, details are hidden from non-attendees viewing the interviewer’s calendar.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Note:** If scheduling on a shared/group calendar where users have edit access, details may still be visible. We recommend using personal calendars for these instances.
:::

### Will confidential jobs be pulled through to third-party job board integrations like LinkedIn and Indeed?

No. Because the job posting is set to **Unlisted**, it will not be shared with third-party job board integrations.

### What happens if a candidate is considered for both a confidential and a non-confidential job?

The candidate remains searchable and visible to anyone with access to the non-confidential job. However, the confidential job consideration will remain hidden from users who do not have explicit access to that confidential role.

### If a user has access to the department a confidential job is linked to, can they see the confidential role?

No. Departmental permissions only apply to non-confidential roles. Access to a confidential job must be granted specifically via a **Job Access Role**.

### Can I set a candidate as confidential?

This is not currently a feature in Ashby.

### If I set up specific shared interview types and feedback forms for confidential roles, can they be seen by other Org Admins?

Yes. Shared interview types and feedback forms are visible to all users with permission to manage those areas. To maintain complete privacy, we recommend creating custom interview types or feedback forms directly within the confidential job or using a confidential job template.

### How do openings work when assigned to confidential jobs?

If an opening is only linked to a confidential job, it is only visible to users with access to that job. If an opening is linked to both confidential and non-confidential jobs, unauthorized users can see the opening but will not see the link to the confidential job.

### How do job approval processes work with confidential jobs?

In the **Scope** section of an approval workflow setup, you can select the `Is Confidential?` checkbox.

- **Checked:** The approval process only applies to confidential jobs meeting your criteria.
- **Unchecked:** The approval process will not apply to confidential jobs.


[title] Compensation
[path] Jobs & Openings/

With Ashby's compensation features, your team can easily add structured compensation information to your jobs, job postings, and job board.

# Permissions & access

Compensation features are available on all Ashby plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

To manage organization-wide compensation default settings, you must have **Org Admin** permissions.

To manage job-level compensation settings, you must have **Elevated Access** with edit permissions on the job or the department tied to the job or job template.

# Pay transparency overview

With Ashby's pay transparency features, your team can easily add structured compensation information to the settings page of a job or customize it at the job posting level. Organization Admins can set whether compensation information is required and whether it should appear on job postings and the job board.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/895a9a1ebbc944169c1cd05d2e55c5e9"}

# Admin settings

The **Compensation Settings** page in **Admin** allows Organization Admins to set defaults for displaying compensation across job postings and on the public job board.&#x20;

Navigate to **Admin > Job Board > Compensation** to configure. Descriptions of each setting are explained below.

## Require on job postings

Decides if any or all job postings in certain locations require compensation. When required, the publish option is disabled on job postings until this information has been added.

- Not Required
- Require for all job postings
- Require for certain locations

![Screenshot of the Require on Job Postings setting in Admin Compensation Settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/3c78ce0fe0752f7477c417319a2cb0db.png)

## Display options

### Display on job postings?

If compensation is present on the job or job posting, decides if it should be visible on the posting by default. This option is enforced on jobs and postings where set to required.

### Display on job board?

If compensation is present on the job or job posting, decides if it should be visible on the job board by default.

![Screenshot of the Display Options settings in Admin Compensation Settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/d9c02a71fe7e5762c8b9a684f23f213e.png)

## Compensation Tier Guide URL

A link to this page is shown on job postings with multiple compensation tiers.

![Screenshot of the Compensation Tier Guide URL field in Admin Compensation Settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/02ed3ec101f7f2d54c9c96d74ce98666.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
While you can link to an overall compensation tier guide here, individual compensation bands must be set on the job, job posting, or job template and cannot be set globally.
:::

## Compensation philosophy

You can add text to this field that displays below your compensation tiers on your job postings.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Compensation philosophy only shows on your Ashby-hosted job board pages. This information is not pulled to external job boards via XML feed or integration.
:::

![Screenshot of the Compensation Philosophy field in Admin Compensation Settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/9f46dfaf9b7ec495484ec9602f9a9fb4.png)

## Default currency and equity options

### Default currency type

The default currency for all job and job posting compensation.

### Default equity type

The default equity type for all job and job posting equity if offered.

![Screenshot of the Default Currency and Equity Options in Admin Compensation Settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/e8185f540d67098dd3c02f391f93ffe3.png)

# Job settings

The **Settings** tab on a job or job template has a **Compensation** section, where Organization Admins and Elevated Access users with the ability to edit the job can add compensation information. Compensation information added to the job is also added to all the job's postings. Job posting compensation can also be unlinked and customized individually.&#x20;

Navigate to the specific **Job > Settings > Compensation** section to configure the below settings.

![Screenshot of the Compensation section on the Job Settings tab](https://cdn.zappy.app/d1661db1819aadd5213454751dbfd5bf.png)

- **Add compensation:** When enabled, settings propagate across all postings on the job but can be customized by editing each individually.
- **Compensation tiers:** Add compensation tiers to show compensation ranges to applicants on your job board.
- **Display on job postings?** Decides if candidates see compensation on this job's job postings by default.
- **Display on job board?** Decides if candidates see compensation summaries on the job board for this job's job postings by default.
- **Compensation Tier Guide URL:** A link to this page is shown on job postings with multiple compensation tiers.

# Job posting settings

Job postings inherit the compensation settings applied on the job's settings page by default, but can be customized on each job posting.

![Screenshot of the Compensation section on the Job Posting settings tab](https://cdn.zappy.app/d7c17472e317bc74cf970861d7b57aee.png)

- **Compensation tiers:** Add compensation tiers to show compensation ranges to applicants on your job board.
- **Display on this job posting?** Decides if candidates see compensation on this job posting.
- **Display on job board?** Decides if candidates see compensation summaries on the job board for this job posting.
- **Compensation Tier Guide URL:** A link to this page is shown on job postings with multiple compensation tiers.

# Understanding compensation tiers

Jobs often have different compensation ranges based on criteria such as the market value of the role in the candidate's location. With compensation tiers, you can detail base compensation, equity, commission, and bonus information for each tier. If you have previously defined compensation tiers for a job, job template, or job posting, you can copy them over to another.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Tier information appears in the order added and currently cannot be re-ordered.
:::

![Screenshot of the Compensation Tiers section showing example tiers](https://cdn.zappy.app/5d7e3fb25946f2205297df919120eb73.png)

# Copying compensation tiers to a job, job template, or job posting

You can copy compension tiers to jobs, jobs templates or job postings. To do this:

1. Navigate to the **Compensation** section of the relevant entity:&#x20;
   - **Job:** **Jobs > Jobs**, then go to the **Settings** tab of the job and scroll to **Compensation**.
   - **Job template:** **Jobs > Jobs** (or **Admin** if you're using the old jobs view), toggle on the **Template** view, select the template, and scroll to the **Compensation** section of its **Settings** tab.
   - **Job posting:** **Jobs > Jobs**, click on the job, select **Job Postings**, select the posting, then go to the **Compensation** tab.
2. Click `Copy From... `to open the Copy Compensation Tiers wizard.

![Screenshot of the Copy From option in the Job Compensation Settings](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/269y0gxgoEWfVXwN-hY4P_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-02-20-at-33658-pm.jpg)

3. Using the wizard, select whether you are copying compensation tiers from an existing job or job posting.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LdQ8jWFqaJ1LwYLCx1fVr_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-02-20-at-33719-pm.jpg" size="72" width="744" height="636" darkWidth="744" darkHeight="636" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the Copy Compensation Tiers wizard with the Select a job dropdown" showCaption="false"}

4. Select the job or job posting via the `Select a job` dropdown.
5. Review the compensation tiers, then click `Copy`.

# Job Consideration's Compensation Substitution Token

To add compensation information to emails, you can add the Job Consideration's Compensation substitution token to your email templates. For more on this substitution token, check out [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6). For more on creating email templates, check out [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).

# FAQs

### Will compensation data be sent to third-party job boards?

Yes! Where supported, this data is included in job postings on third-party job boards.

### Can compensation data be populated from openings?

Compensation from openings cannot be used to populate compensation bands.

### Can I report on compensation data?

Reporting on compensation data is not currently available.


[title] Understanding Candidate Activity Statuses
[path] Candidates/

This article provides a comprehensive overview of the candidate activity statuses available in Ashby as a candidate moves through the pipeline. These statuses typically appear in green, yellow, or red bars within the candidate pipeline or on the candidate's profile and give your team real-time visibility into where a candidate stands in your hiring process, helping you identify next steps and keep your pipeline moving efficiently.

![This report shows the Candidate Pipeline for the Corporate Usability Analyst role. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dhou7fea-VEDfR1FSKkXj_screenshot2022-12-23at72359am.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
See [What do the card colors mean on the Candidate Pipeline report?](docId\:lZreBrFf3PjfRorVdwSgF) to understand how status colors on the candidate pipeline and profile are determined.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**
To view and manage candidate statuses, you must have the necessary permissions to view candidate profiles and application details within your Ashby environment.
:::

# How the overall status is determined

If a candidate has multiple active activities (e.g., two different interview types happening in the same stage), Ashby calculates an overall status to display at the top of the candidate profile and in your pipeline views.

The overall status reflects the **earliest chronological status** across all active processes. For example, if a candidate has two active interviews and one interview is **Scheduled&#x20;**&#x62;ut another in the same stage **Needs Scheduling**, the overall status will remain **Needs Scheduling** until the second activity is addressed, because Needs Scheduling occurs earlier in the linear progression of interview statuses. This ensures that no steps are missed during the hiring process.

# Candidate-level status

Candidate-level statuses represent the person's overall relationship with your organization, independent of any specific application thread.

| Status   | Description                                                                           |
| -------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Lead** | The candidate has no active applications (e.g., for sourced candidates or prospects). |

# Application statuses

Application statuses indicate the next step required to progress the interview and are designed to be linear. They progress automatically as actions are taken and only revert to earlier statuses in specific scenarios like cancellations or link invalidation. They are described in their general linear order below.

| Status                      | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| --------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Needs Scheduling**        | An interview or take-home assignment is active but not yet scheduled. This includes "On-hold" interviews and take-homes waiting to be sent.                                                                                                                            |
| **Scheduling Requested\***  | A scheduling request has been sent, but not scheduled. This status can **only** be reached from Needs Scheduling. If a scheduling request is created or submitted while an activity is *not* in Needs Scheduling, the status will not change to Scheduling Requested.  |
| **Booking Link Sent**       | A direct booking link was sent via Ashby. **Note:** Copying and sending links outside of Ashby will not trigger this status change.                                                                                                                                    |
| **Waiting on Availability** | An availability request was sent via Ashby. Like booking links, this status only triggers if sent directly through the platform.                                                                                                                                       |
| **Availability Submitted**  | The candidate has provided their times. If a candidate "un-submits" their availability, the status reverts to Waiting on Availability.                                                                                                                                 |
| **Scheduled**               | An interview is officially on the calendar. This status is reached automatically from any prior status once all current activities are scheduled.                                                                                                                      |
| **On Hold\***               | Technically treated as Scheduled, but displays as On Hold in when an interview is scheduled as a hold but not yet confirmed.                                                                                                                                           |
| **Waiting on Feedback**     | The status moves here automatically once the scheduled interview time has passed.                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| **Waiting on Submission**   | A take-home assignment was sent, and we are waiting for the candidate to upload their work.                                                                                                                                                                            |

:::hint{type="warning"}
\*These statuses are only available with the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) or on Enterprise plans.
:::

## Status reversions and invalidations

While the process is linear, certain actions will cause a status to move backward:

- **Invalidating Links:** If a booking or availability link is invalidated, the status reverts to Needs Scheduling (or Scheduling Requested if a request exists).
- **Cancellations:** When you cancel a scheduled interview, it reverts to Needs Scheduling or Scheduling Requested. Even if availability was previously submitted, it will not automatically return to Availability Submitted status.
- **Activity Deletions:** If you delete all active activities, the status may revert to In Stage Since, showing the duration of time since the last stage was entered.
- **Re-requesting Availability:** Once availability is submitted, re-requesting it using the same link will **not** revert the status to Waiting on Availability unless the original link is first invalidated.

## Manually changing the application status

While this should be rarely needed, it is possible to manually update the application status if needed.  To do so, select `More` in the upper right corner of the candidate's profile.  Then, select `Change Application Status`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vaV7cWcyWl9mDeZu73dAF_rosie-satterfield-engineering-manager-ashby-2026-09-14-at-12433-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="836" height="894" darkWidth="836" darkHeight="894" alt="Highlights the Change Application Status option under the More menu on a candidate profile" showCaption="false"}

Then, select the status you'd like to change it to from the drop-down.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lxlB-cs9MTNIFrGgeg0ca_rosie-satterfield-engineering-manager-ashby-2026-09-14-at-12407-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="872" height="568" darkWidth="872" darkHeight="568" alt="Shows the window to manually update the application status of a candidate" showCaption="false"}

# Assessment statuses

Use these statuses to monitor the progress of external or technical assessments.

| Status                    | Description                                                                      |
| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Waiting on Assessment** | An assessment has been sent to the candidate, but it has not been completed yet. |
| **Assessment Submitted**  | The candidate has finished the assessment, and the results are ready for review. |

:::hint{type="info"}
Check out [Reporting on Integration Partner Assessments](docId:09FAbIRx2zRiLCDdLDsH4) for more information on tracking assessments using reports.
:::

# Pipeline and decision timing statuses

These statuses help you manage transitions between hiring stages and track how long candidates remain in certain parts of the process.

- **Needs Decision:** The next step is a hiring decision. This occurs when an interview or take-home activity is marked as "Complete."
- **In Stage Since:** When no other specific status applies, Ashby emphasizes the total time spent in the current stage.
- **Last Interaction:** Primarily used for data imported from other systems (like Greenhouse or Lever) to track the recency of activity.

# Offer statuses

These statuses reflect the final stages of the hiring process where an offer is being prepared or considered.

| Status                          | Description                                                                                      |
| ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Needs Offer**                 | The candidate has cleared the final interview stages and an offer needs to be generated.         |
| **Needs Offer Approval**        | An offer has been drafted but requires internal approval before it can be sent to the candidate. |
| **Waiting on Offer Acceptance** | The offer is in the candidate's hands, and we are waiting for their response.                    |
| **Candidate Accepted Offer**    | The candidate has officially accepted the offer.                                                 |
| **Candidate Rejected Offer**    | The candidate declined the offer. These candidates remain actionable for future roles.           |

# Terminal statuses

- **Hired:** The candidate has been officially marked as hired for the application.
- **Archived:** The application process is closed. The candidate-level view may still show other active applications if they are being considered for other jobs.

# FAQs

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I update a candidate's status?

Statuses often update automatically based on your actions (like sending a link). However, you can manually progress a candidate by dragging and dropping on the pipeline or clicking the `Change Stage` button in the candidate profile.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens to the status if an interview is canceled?

If a Scheduled interview is canceled, the status reverts to Needs Scheduling or Scheduling Requested. If an interview is deleted without a replacement, it may fall back to **In Stage Since**.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I move a candidate from "Scheduled" back to "On Hold"?

No. Once an interview is Scheduled, it cannot move back to On Hold. You would need to delete or cancel the scheduled interview and schedule a hold interview instead.&#x20;
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I filter my dashboard by these statuses?

Yes! You can use the Filter button on your dashboard to sort your candidate list by specific activity statuses, such as **Needs Scheduling** or **Waiting on Feedback**.
:::


[title] Can I mark a candidate as Do Not Contact?
[path] Candidates/

## Overview

You can mark a candidate as Do Not Contact. To do this, head to the candidate profile and click the `More` button. From here, select `Mark as Do Not Contact`*.*

Marking a candidate as Do Not Contact will cancel all scheduled emails and prevent further email outreach from being sent via Ashby.

Please note: This will not remove the candidate’s profile from Ashby. For more on deleting and anonymizing candidates, please check out Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4d18afa2a280debf4bf8351aaa834000.png)

Once a candidate has been marked as Do Not Contact, a red Do Not Contact notification will show at the top of their profile.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ba417fc2b533753ca84fc6c9e2ee9c9f.png)

### Attempting to send an email to a candidate marked as Do Not Contact

If a candidate has been marked as Do Not Contact, you will not be able to send them emails or enroll them in a sequence. If you try to email them, you will see an error that says *Cannot start the campaign or send the email because it is invalid*.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f91795c9a258595ee49fccfc58b590e0.png)

If you try to enroll them in a sequence, you will see an error that says `This candidate is marked as Do Not Contact.`

### Can I remove the Do Not Contact status?

You can! Click `More` on the candidate’s profile, then select `Allow Contact`*.* You’ll then be able to send emails to the candidate via Ashby moving forward.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1941c90162227cfb07226d73ea264216.png)



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2b2d5dcf5b18075c6010511f5fe50efa.png)

### Can I stop candidates who have been marked as *Do Not Contact* from applying for roles multiple times?

You can set up Application Limits to avoid duplicate applications. For more on this, check out [Application Limits](docId\:DTFh2I3HX_EkQBVgwW8FI) .

[title] Setting Up Assessment Integrations
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Assessments/

This guide walks you through setting up an assessment integration on an interview plan. You learn how to add an assessment activity to a stage of an interview plan, configure reviewers, and start an assessment for a candidate. This article uses CodeSignal and Bryq as the example integrations, but the workflow is the same for all assessment partners.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

You need an active integration with your assessment partner before you can configure the activities in Ashby.
:::

# Set up an assessment activity

The first step is to add an assessment to an interview plan. To do this, choose a job:

1. Go to **Jobs > Jobs**.
2. Select a job you would like to add an assessment to.
3. On the job page, choose **Interview Plan** on the left side.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/baa5da3bbc3556f27945637a43977b2e.png" size="100" alt="This screenshot shows the pipeline for a job with the Interview Plan option highlighted in the navigation bar." isUploading="false" width="875" height="329" darkWidth="875" darkHeight="329" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. On the next screen, add your assessment as an activity to a stage of the interview plan. Click `Add Activity To` on the stage of the interview plan you want to create the activity for, then click `+ Add Activity`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/09c8ccaba6b297220a800556888fee01.png" size="100" alt="Click Add Activity To to add an activity to your job's pipeline." isUploading="false" width="694" height="369" darkWidth="694" darkHeight="369" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
If you have any configured, your assessment integrations appear in the **Integrations** section in the **Add Activity** list.
:::

5. Select an assessment integration, then choose the assessment type from the dropdown on the next screen. The list in the dropdown is pulled from your account with the assessment partner (for example, the list of available CodeSignal tests in your CodeSignal account).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/41e3b7a2f191ac06b1932a6e8435e1ba.png" size="100" alt="Selecting your activity type from the list provided. Integrations you have configured will appear at the bottom of the list." isUploading="false" width="447" height="879" darkWidth="447" darkHeight="879" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

Once you select an assessment type, you can configure reviewers on the added activity.

Reviewers added here are notified to leave feedback on the assessment (just like a take home or scheduled interview) when Ashby is notified that the assessment is complete. Reviewers are not required.

![The following page will allow you to set the assessment type and reviewers.](https://cdn.zappy.app/54a52f1a3efd4c07b095618b44eb131d.png)

# Start the assessment

Once a candidate moves to the stage of the interview plan where you added the assessment activity, a new `Start Assessment` button appears on the candidate's profile. Click it to open a modal, where you can adjust, one final time, the kind of assessment type (from the configured assessment partner) that the candidate takes.

![The activity to start the assessment will show on the candidate's profile once they've been moved to the stage the activity is in.](https://cdn.zappy.app/699b57e003fe2e37329e481e648c4c59.png)

Once you start the assessment, the assessment partner notifies the candidate, and Ashby displays updates in the dropdown. Here's what a completed assessment looks like:

![Once the assessment has been completed, a link and the session details will show in the activity details.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3YS1tI9CUL9RUEt6SqlYr_untitled.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full list of assessment integration options, check out the [Assessments](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/assessments) category.
:::


[title] Auto-Reject Applications
[path] Applications/

This guide covers how to streamline your application review process by using the auto-reject feature.

# Auto-Reject overview

Auto-Reject allows you to reject candidates whose application submissions match certain conditions automatically. Rejection conditions apply to the selected application form for a given job. For example, if you have a location-based application question, you can configure a rule within the job posting to automatically reject candidates located outside of the targeted area.

Auto-reject rules can only be configured to run at the point of the candidate's application submission and cannot run at other stages in the interview process.

Watch the following optional video for an overview of Auto-Reject, or follow the steps below.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a7ce4a7d139e4430af19e08d634d2a61"}

# How to set up an auto-reject configuration

To set up an Auto-Reject condition:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select a job.
2. Navigate to **Job Postings**, then click on a listing to access the posting tabs.
3. Select the **Automation** tab. The tab contains job-specific automation options including automatic application confirmation emails and auto-reject.
4. Click `Create a Configuration`, then configure the fields below.

![The screenshow shows the Draft Auto-Reject Configuration page.](https://cdn.zappy.app/eaa9bc42e427728cab5a0927a5c45081.png)

**This screenshot highlights 6 key areas of auto-reject configuration setup:**

1. Conditions run in order. If a candidate is rejected by one condition, future conditions are skipped. If a rejection condition is empty, it is skipped.
2. The Rejection Condition is based on application questions. Select a question and configure the conditional behavior. For example, if the rejection condition is 'Application Form's Name contains A', 'Aaron' would be rejected and 'Bob' would not be.
3. The Archive Reason is added to the candidate profile when an application is auto-rejected using the rejection condition.
4. Configure the number of business days to delay the rejection email to candidates.
5. Select the rejection email template to send to the candidate. These must be preconfigured in **Email Templates**.
6. Select the from address the rejection email is sent from.

You can click `+ Create New Auto-Reject Rule` to create additional auto-reject rules. Ashby applies auto-reject rules to applications in the order they are listed.

![The screenshot shows the rejection configuration section with the Create New Auto-Reject Rule option highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/fda16761e55c3eadbdc5faaeaea288c2.png)

Once configured and activated, Auto-Reject evaluates all new applications. Auto-reject does not currently support applying the rule to historical applications.

## Setting up a Rejection Condition

When setting up your auto-reject conditions, first click `Add Field to Match`. You can select a question on your application form and determine the answers that trigger the auto-reject tool.

Once you've selected your question, you see the following options for determining an answer that leads to automatic rejection. This example is for a question with a multiple-choice answer field.

![The screenshot shows a condition being configured using the equals options on an application form field. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/53991ba5f52e5ecdec7e62f12f165919.png)

**Is empty/unassigned:** No answer has been added or selected. Select this if you want to automatically reject a candidate if they have not answered the question.

**Is not empty/unassigned:** Any answer has been added in response to the application form. Selecting this automatically rejects any candidate who has answered the question.

**Equals:** Select or add a value here. If the candidate has responded with the exact same answer, they are rejected automatically.

Depending on the field type, you may see additional options. Here is another example where the field type is one that can be typed into directly, rather than selecting a specific answer, as above.

![The screenshot shows a rejection configuration being set up using the contains option.](https://cdn.zappy.app/47d900c578db43d7ac433bab0ece0da9.png)

**Contains:** The answer contains the text you add to the **Add text to match** field beside the drop-down menu. If the applicant's answer contains this text, they are rejected automatically.

**Starts with:** Ashby rejects the application if the answer starts with the text specified in the **Add text to match** field.

**Ends with:** Ashby rejects the application if the answer ends with the text specified in the **Add text to match** field.

**Similar to:** Ashby rejects the application if the answer is similar to the text in the **Add text to fuzzy match** field. For example, if *localization* is added to the **Add text to fuzzy match** field and the applicant includes the word *local* in their application, this constitutes a fuzzy match.

## Auto-Reject operators

While configuring your auto-reject rules, you see the operators **And**, **Or**, and **Not**.

![The screenshot shows rejection conditions being configured with the auto-reject operators highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/9c10e5c763b72f0c1c2cb40fb061b735.png)

**And:** This option adds an **All are True** condition to the rule, so you can set multiple conditions and, as long as all conditions are met, the candidate is rejected. In this example, the candidate is rejected if they select No for both of the specified questions. If they select *Yes* for one of the two, they are not rejected automatically.

![The screenshot shows rejection conditions with the All are true operator.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7f8bc7bf26014835281029faac53de8b.png)

**Or:** This option adds an **Any can be True** condition to the rule. If any of the conditions listed are met, the candidate's application is rejected automatically. In this example, if the candidate selects No for either question, their application is rejected automatically.

![The screenshot shows rejection conditions with the Any can be true operator.](https://cdn.zappy.app/6d5512ddbf0e403178d7fc2331249e49.png)

**Not:** This option adds a **The following is not true** condition to the form. Candidates who do not meet the criteria specified in the rules are rejected automatically. In this example, if the candidate does not select Yes as their answer to the question, they are automatically rejected.

![The screenshot shows rejection conditions with the The following is not true operator.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7f4b00c3333497f5e5fe7efcabd85110.png)

You can also add these operators within one another! If you are using the *Not* operator and want to add multiple conditions the candidate needs to meet, select the `And` operator once you've set up your first condition to add another. In this example, both questions need to be answered *Yes* for the candidate to pass through to the **Application Review** stage. If a candidate answers Yes to one question and No to the other, they are rejected automatically.

![The screenshot shows rejection conditions with the The following is not true and All are true operators.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e08916b762be08263329d91fb031c593.png)

# How to edit an auto-reject configuration

When there is an active configuration and Auto-Reject is enabled, you need to create a new draft condition to make edits. The active condition continues to run until the draft condition is activated.

1. Click `View Current Configuration`.
2. Click `Create a New Draft...` and configure the draft condition.
3. Click `Activate`.

![The screenshot shows an auto-reject configuration with the Create a New Draft option highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/02980bbc8a7c9e6f85d11893f3808d44.png)

# Turning off auto-reject on a job posting

To deactivate an active configuration, switch off the `Auto-Reject Enabled` toggle in the **Automation** tab of the selected job posting.&#x20;

![The screenshot shows Auto-Reject Applications with Auto-Reject Enabled on.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8b236d361a778d64d355282eb87c50d7.png)

Once disabled, the tag beside the **Auto-Reject Application** heading turns red and displays Disabled.

![The screenshot shows Auto-Reject Applications with Auto-Reject Enabled off.](https://cdn.zappy.app/c40e5108296fe4584d044a600ce52124.png)

# Search for candidates that have been auto-rejected

If you'd like to review rejected candidates, you can find all archived candidates within the candidate pipeline of your job in the **Archived** view. You can then add an advanced filter to display only auto-rejected candidates.

![The screenshot shows a job with the Archived section of the timeline open.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8df02919e16f4b11bde97dd84bc23158.png)

**To search for those candidates:**

1. Navigate to the **Archived** candidates view in the candidate pipeline.
2. Select the `Advanced` filter option.
3. Search for the `Auto-Rejected` filter and set it to equal Yes.

## Auto-reject information on candidate profiles

![The screenshot shows the candidate's profile with the feed showing that the candidate was rejected by Ashby Bot.](https://cdn.zappy.app/70a0f2a08088be9f254e397b6b9808f6.png)

**This screenshot highlights two key auto-reject activities on the candidate profile:**

1. For delayed emails, you find a Scheduled Email activity under **Current Activities**. You have the option to view the scheduled email, modify it, or delete it.
2. In the feed, you find a notification that the candidate was moved to the **Archived** stage by Ashby Bot.

# FAQ

### How do auto-reject rules interact with application requests?

If an application is submitted through an application request link, Ashby does not check those applications against auto-reject or application limit rules.

### Can I reject candidates who have applied multiple times?

You can set up application limits if you are seeing candidates apply multiple times for the same role or department. More on configuring these at [Application Limits](docId\:DTFh2I3HX_EkQBVgwW8FI).

### Can I configure auto-reject rules for interview stages?

No, auto-reject rules can only be configured on the job posting and so will only be applied to applications at the point of submission via your job board.

### I'm unable to select an archive reason when configuring auto-reject. Why?

Organization Admins have access to Archive Reasons by default. Users with Elevated Access roles do not automatically inherit this permission, so it needs to be granted separately under their Additional User Permissions. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).


[title] Scheduling & Interviews: An Introduction
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

***

This guide provides an overview of the different tools available for scheduling in Ashby and how they work together to support an excellent candidate experience.

# Initial setup

Before setting up your interview plans and interviews, we recommend setting up a shared calendar and reviewing our meeting hours guide.

[What is a shared calendar?](docId:7L9yaj7bNYKhfMH-vpkdR)

[Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo)

# Interview plans: Creating your pipeline

The [Interview Plans](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interview-plans/shared-plans) section of Ashby allows you to set up the stages that candidates go through when considered for a role.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gd3d3zPt3igGRBRNhI6HH_interview-plans-ashby-2026-07-22-at-32541-pm.png)

The plan is split into various stages:

1. **Lead:** The stages used to gauge a sourced candidate's interest.
2. **Application Review:&#x20;**&#x55;sed when a candidate's application is under review.
3. **Active:** These are the interview stages the candidate goes through before being archived (rejected) or receiving an offer.
4. **Offer:&#x20;**&#x54;his can be configured with the various stages a candidate must go through once it has been determined that you'd like to extend an offer, such as background checks, references, or offer submission.
5. **Completed:** The result of the candidate's application — either Archived or Hired.

:::hint{type="info"}
You specify the interview plan when creating a job. For more, see [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt).

For more on creating interview plans, see [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux).
:::

# Interviews: Adding a briefing and assigning a feedback form

[Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews) allow you to provide:

1. **Instructions:** Information added in this tab shows as a briefing to your interviewers when they are on a panel.
2. **Feedback form:** Assign the form that interviewers use to submit their feedback after the interview.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/a7abc72ae41dfcfc4dd651bffb2c46be.png" size="70" alt="Creating the interview" isUploading="false" width="456" height="429" darkWidth="456" darkHeight="429" showCaption="false"}

You can select your interview type when scheduling within each stage of your interview plan — either when scheduling a one-off interview on a candidate's profile, or when setting up schedule interview activities to automate your scheduling process.

When the interview is scheduled, interviewers can click the interview on their home page to view the briefing and feedback form within the interview details.

![Where interviewers can find their briefing and feedback form for a scheduled interview](https://cdn.zappy.app/d215ca0d1f65529d9dea823498971e2f.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Feedback forms are created in the [Feedback Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-forms) section. For more on setting up feedback forms, see [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR) and [What are ‘Shared’ Interviews, Application Forms, and Feedback Forms?](docId\:UjNXOKXGS1_RQ1UDzXXTa)
:::

# Schedule interview activities: Automating elements of your process

Schedule interview activities can be set up within each stage of your job's interview plan.

These activities allow you to select an interview type, interviewers, and set the interview's settings in advance. When a candidate is moved to the stage that contains this activity, Ashby automatically adds a scheduling prompt to their profile.

![Schedule interview activity setup](https://cdn.zappy.app/91cb76fadb6014048c4b96e069bca22f.png)

Based on the activity's settings, a direct booking link with the panel's availability can also be generated automatically to send to the candidate. You can also send a candidate availability link.

![Scheduling prompt on a candidate profile](https://cdn.zappy.app/0daa39ba351b749acfc636535f72f22d.png)

## What is a direct booking link?

A direct booking link gives the candidate the interviewing panel's availability so they can schedule their interview directly.

## What is a candidate availability link?

A candidate availability link is sent to the candidate so they can enter their own availability for an interview. The interview is then scheduled manually based on the slots the candidate provides.

This is commonly used for multi-event interviews (like an onsite with multiple interviews testing different skills).

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on creating activities, see [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) and [Assigning Interviewers](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo).

For more on scheduling links, see [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM) .
:::

# Grouped interview plan: Reporting on your pipelines

If you have multiple interview plans, we recommend setting up a [Grouped Interview Plan](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-mapping/grouped-interview-plan) to group the stages within your interview plans together when reporting on your pipeline.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/m_SYhK86aXy1Frc4oamPB_grouped-interview-plan-ashby-2026-07-22-at-33437-pm.png)

The grouped interview plan allows you to set overarching stages that the stages within your separate interview plans can be mapped to. For example, a **Screening** stage in your grouped interview plan could cover Initial Screen, Recruiter Screening, and Hiring Manager Screen stages across three different interview plans.

Once your grouped interview plan is in place, head back to your [interview plans](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interview-plans/shared-plans) and map their stages to the grouped interview plan stages you've created.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/droWqLFWrs8sFIMfVbzuG_interview-plans-ashby-2026-07-22-at-33612-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="711" height="534" darkWidth="711" darkHeight="534" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
When creating a report relating to your interview pipeline, you see the checkbox option `Group Stages?`. Checking this box uses your grouped interview plan stages, grouping your individual interview plans and keeping your reports organized.

![The option to 'Group Stages' on a report will give you the option to use your grouped interview plan when displaying results](https://cdn.zappy.app/428ea5ee86827fea1c3c05d1f4e5c1d3.png)

For more on setting up a grouped interview plan, see [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)
:::


[title] Setting up Schedule Interview Activities
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

This guide covers how to add  to job interview plans to set up a structured interview process within Ashby. These activities are typically used whenever you need to schedule interviews with specific interviewers, as opposed to take home activities, application reviews, or questionnaires which do not have interviewers assigned.

Research has found that running a structured interview process in which each candidate is assessed in the same way better predicts job performance and reduces the impact of bias on hiring decisions.

Ashby facilitates building a structured interview process by adding schedule interview activities to the interview plan associated with a given job. These activities contain complete interviewer instructions, feedback forms, and standardized candidate communication, ensuring consistency across the interview cycle.

# Permissions: Configuring schedule interview activities

See the table below for information on the roles that have access to set up and edit schedule interview activities.

| Access Role                                                    | Has Access? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌           |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ✅\*         |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅           |

\*Elevated Access - Admin and Elevated Access - Admin Private users can only edit the schedule interview activities on the roles they have access to.

# Creating a schedule interview activity

:::hint{type="info"}
If you want to establish settings to be used by default across schedule interview activities, check out our guide on [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml).
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/40acc6e38d4f402b9a04ed9b6f41d96f"}

1. Navigate to the job, then go to the **Interview Plan**.
2. Identify the interview stage you want to add activities to, click `Add Activity to...`, and then select `Schedule Interview`.
3. Next, configure the activity's various settings below.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you add a new schedule interview activity to a job's interview plan, the activity is also added to candidates already in that stage. With other activity types (such as *Send Email*), the activity is not added to job considerations already in that stage.
:::

## Copying a schedule interview activity from another job

You can also copy an existing activity from an interview plan stage on one job to another. When you are on a job's interview plan and click `Add Activity To...` on an interview plan stage, you see the option to add a new activity and a `Copy Activities` option.

Click `Copy Activities`, then select the job, interview plan, and interview stage you want to copy activities from. Choose the activities you want to copy. The selected activities are copied into the original stage you chose.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/054b398690f04905b7feb878486c220b"}

Once an activity is copied over, if the activity uses a shared interview type or feedback form (more on those at [What are ‘Shared’ Interviews, Application Forms, and Feedback Forms?](docId\:UjNXOKXGS1_RQ1UDzXXTa) ), then those are referenced in the copy. Any custom interview types or feedback forms are copied over and can be amended without impacting the original activity that was copied.

# Configuring a schedule interview activity

There are six tabs within a schedule interview activity that can be configured, and each one is covered in its specific section below.

![Screenshot of the six tabs within a schedule interview activity: Schedule, Communication, Meeting Hours, Direct Booking & Candidate Availability, Reminders, and Automation](https://cdn.zappy.app/790a689badabe11dfda297f7c03fa25f.png)

- **Schedule:** Confirm the interview type (including feedback form), your interviewing panel, and any interview rooms.
- **Communication:** Configure the calendar invites sent out to both candidate and interviewer.
- **Meeting Hours:** You can set specific meeting hours for this interview activity. More on setting meeting hours at [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo).
- **Direct Booking & Candidate Availability:** Set scheduling limits and a meeting  here.
- **Reminders:** Configure any reminders that should be sent to interviewers and candidates pre-interview.
- **Automation:** Automate the sending of a direct booking link or candidate availability link.

## Schedule

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/cef308736d954b18a49006e55309342c"}

On the **Schedule** tab, you add one or more interviews along with their interview instructions and feedback forms. You can also assign specific interviewers or pools of interviewers to each slot on the panel.

### Selecting the interview type

The first step on the **Schedule** tab is selecting the interview type. You have the option to either link to an existing shared interview or create a new interview for the job in the **Add Event** section.

![Screenshot showing the Add Event section on the Schedule tab, with options to add a shared interview or create a new interview](https://cdn.zappy.app/54e7bae3228d0b56bda478f112e1ce3d.png)

We recommend clicking `+ Add Shared Interview` when determining your interview event to select from the list of interview types you set up in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Interviews](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviews). The feedback form you have linked to your shared interview type is used for the activity.

If you click `+ Create New Interview`, this creates a new interview type that can only be used for this specific activity. You can either assign a shared feedback form or create a new one specifically for the activity as part of the setup.

![Screenshot of the Create New Interview option and associated feedback form selection](https://cdn.zappy.app/fe10966f7cb6d69548969aa3a37b426d.png)

You can add multiple events to a schedule interview activity; however, you cannot use direct booking links to schedule and should instead send out candidate availability links. Multiple events may be used when you want to schedule a series of activities all at once, such as a virtual panel event with multiple rounds of interviews with various interviewers. For more on scheduling activities with multiple interview events, check out [How do I use multi-day scheduling?](docId:4J-Ogip_ouVgScipIIxYY)

Indicators in the top-left corner show whether direct booking links or candidate availability links can be generated for the activity automatically. If these show in green, you can send out direct booking links and/or candidate availability links to schedule your interview.

:::hint{type="info"}
More on both direct booking and candidate availability links in [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM)
:::

![Screenshot showing the green indicators in the top-left corner of the schedule interview activity indicating that direct booking and candidate availability links can be generated](https://cdn.zappy.app/4461ef8ceada9fe4a270d4b724bdbdb7.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you're adding multiple interviews within one schedule template and are setting Zoom, Google Meet, or Microsoft Teams as the location, a unique meeting link is generated for each calendar invite sent out to the candidate.
:::

### Assigning interviewers

Once you've configured your interview type or types, you can then assign interviewers so Ashby can determine the calendars that availability is being pulled from for direct booking links or manual scheduling.

When you click `Interviewers` within the **Configure** section, you can determine how many slots are on the panel, and either assign specific users to those slots or select a pool of interviewers if multiple interviewers could take one slot on that panel.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on assigning interviewers, check out [Assigning Interviewers](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo)
:::

![Screenshot of the Interviewers panel in the Configure section, showing interviewer slots and pool selection options](https://cdn.zappy.app/a0d49a44fa3b4a61ee11a487a4057b5e.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have a rotating interviewer pool and you don't know up front who will be conducting a given interview, you can create a separate schedule interview activity within the same interview stage for each interviewer. You can then remove the schedule interview activities that don't need to be used for that specific candidate once they're moved to that stage.
:::

Along with assigning your own pools to interviewer slots, you also have the option to select Hiring Team Roles and pull users with those roles on job considerations to be on the panel.

![Screenshot showing the Hiring Team Roles option in the interviewer slot configuration](https://cdn.zappy.app/198f5a1492f18ed6ebc56d12a5ce40f9.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
- Hiring team roles are assigned within each job's settings, and these roles are not pulled from the permissions set on a user's profile on the Employees page.
- Interviewers must be assigned to all slots before your changes can be saved. If no interviewer slots are created for a schedule interview activity, you can only schedule the interview via the candidate availability or manual schedule options.
:::

### Meeting rooms

If you have meeting rooms synced over via your Google Workspace integration, you can configure a default room to be used for your schedule interview activity. Click `Set Default Room` to specify your interview room.

![Screenshot of the Set Default Room option in the schedule interview activity configuration](https://cdn.zappy.app/c9e1ff00d0e1959d6e55843f990614c1.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If multiple rooms could be used, you can also set up a meeting room pool. More on this at [Meeting Rooms & Meeting Room Pools](docId\:ejHK524h-knpQV9zy-lgy).
:::

### Timing and sequencing

:::hint{type="warning"}
The ability to set **Timing** settings on schedule interview activity events is only available if you have the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) or are an Enterprise customer. This is a part of the auto-schedule feature set.
:::

If you are an Enterprise customer or Plus customer with the Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on, you may also see a `Timing` button under the **Configure** section.

![Screenshot of the Timing button in the Configure section of a schedule interview activity](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bxI8Rx3B8G2HR_OZMYvmL_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-01-at-33250-pm.jpg)

Selecting this button allows you to indicate whether an event under your schedule interview activity must be scheduled at a fixed time. Additionally, if you have multiple events as a part of this interview activity (such as a panel with multiple interview sessions), you can determine the sequence in which they should occur, if any.

![Screenshot of the Timing settings panel showing fixed time and sequence options for interview events](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xxBjTDJQIs9hha_S3mItm_potions-master-ashby-2026-06-23-at-115348-am.jpg)

### Visually reordering interview events

On schedule interview activities with multiple interview events, the order in which interview events display on the page can be reordered by selecting the `Reorder` button in the top right corner and dragging and dropping the events.

![Screenshot showing the Reorder button and drag-and-drop interface for reordering interview events](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UIyYWgWyu7H9ztIhhhCet_director-of-platform-engineering-ashby-2026-06-23-at-115719-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Reordering events in this manner **does not** impact the sequence you have defined under the Timing settings for Auto Schedule. It only impacts the visual display of events on the page and the order of events while manual scheduling.
:::

## Communication

On the **Communication** tab, you can modify the details of both the Candidate and Interviewer calendar invites.

- The **Calendar** dropdown menu lets you select which calendar the calendar events are scheduled to. All calendar events for interviewers and interviewees are added to this calendar. The calendar cannot be changed on rescheduling. If you are not permitted to add events to this calendar, events are added to your personal calendar instead. We recommend keeping this as Default Interview Calendar, or selecting the name of the shared calendar you have set up to add interview events to. If only one shared calendar is set up in your account, 'Default Interview Calendar' refers to that calendar — it is automatically set as the default. If you have multiple shared calendars, you can [select the default in your Google Workspace integration settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/google/shared-calendars).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/641c57f3e67a860595be15e80887097d.png" size="100" alt="Screenshot showing the Default Interview Calendar option in the schedule interview activity setup" isUploading="false" width="1653" height="396" darkWidth="1653" darkHeight="396" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- The **Location** dropdown menu allows you to add physical or remote location details. Set custom text, or select one of the integrated options. The integrated options automatically generate a unique video conference link and include it in the invite. Current video conference integrations include Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, and Zoom. You can also choose to set a Phone Call as the location, which pulls in the candidate's primary phone number. You can only assign one location to a schedule interview activity or direct booking link — it is not currently possible to assign multiple locations or set conditional locations. If your interview requires two locations (for example, one session over Zoom and another in-person), create two separate schedule interview activities, one for each location.
- The **Is Private?** toggle lets you set invites as private. When toggled on, the calendar invite details (e.g. title, attendees) are hidden from others and interviewers are only marked as busy.
- The **Direct Booking Email Template&#x20;**&#x61;n&#x64;**&#x20;Direct Booking SMS Template** dropdowns allows you to choose an email or SMS template for these communications. This [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM) is used when sending a Direct Booking request from the candidate profile.
- The **Candidate Availability Email Template** dropdown allows you to choose an email template. This email template is used when sending a Candidate Availability request from the candidate profile.
- The **Candidate Confirmation Email Template** dropdown allows you to select an email template. This email template is used when a confirmation is sent out once an interview has been scheduled. Once you select your email template, you then see the option to automatically send this confirmation email if the candidate books via a direct booking link, and the option to select a sender.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sLH7FFEZDvLiUTvZQ4Qnu_setting-up-schedule-interview-activities-archbee-document-2026-06-26-at-91635-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1956" height="668" darkWidth="1956" darkHeight="668" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
When a user schedules an interview manually for the first time, if a confirmation email is set within the interview activity, the confirmation email defaults to being sent. This can be switched off in the **Communication** tab when manually scheduling the interview. If the user chooses to turn off the email confirmation, confirmations will default to being off for the future interviews that user schedules (unless they opt to switch them on again).

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/E7h_SlH2c0aSr0ENTofFR_setting-up-schedule-interview-activities-archbee-document-2026-06-26-at-92144-am.png)
:::

- **Candidate Invite Grouping:** This setting under **Manage Candidate Invites** lets you choose how candidate calendar invites should be grouped for this multi-event schedule. By default, this is linked to your organization's Scheduling Defaults, and any change made there automatically applies here too. You can override this per schedule template if a different grouping is preferred for a specific interview stage, or when [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN). Select \`Reset to organization defaults\` to relink the setting to your org defaults at any time.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Luiif0FtuGjsnufH1S7kN_group-product-manager-ashby-2026-07-14-at-24017-pm.png)

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
- Invite grouping only applies to multi-event scheduling.
- The option you choose impacts the way conferencing links are created. Each distinct candidate invite gets its own conferencing link.  Candidates and interviewers may need to join different conference rooms for each event (if one invite per interview is selected), or you could have a single conferencing link for an interview block or whole day if choosing one of those options. &#x20;

  For more on this setting, see [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml) .
:::

- The **Invite to Candidate Template** and **Invite to Interviewers Templates** let you enter the title and description for each calendar invite, for both candidates and for the interviewers on your panel. Use tokens to fill in standard details, or add entirely custom text that the candidate sees.

## Meeting hours (optional)

On the **Meeting Hours** tab, you can set a primary interview time zone as well as any custom meeting hours for this interview. These meeting hours are used when determining what interview times are available to candidates when they reach this interview stage. By default, meeting hours are set to 9 to 5 in the interviewer's timezone, but you can set a primary interview timezone to override individual timezones.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Setting specific meeting hours for an interview activity isn't commonly used. Relying on the interviewer's calendar availability or their own meeting hours is typically enough. You can read more on this at [Meeting Hours](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo).
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/65998a7e46df41caaf0dee7c29b5234b"}

To set meeting hours for a schedule interview activity, head to the **Interview Plan** section of your job, then click `Modify` on the schedule interview activity in question. In the **Meeting Hours** tab, you can toggle on `Enable Custom Meeting Hours?` to set specific hours for that interview activity only.

This overrides the availability set for the company meeting hours and the meeting hours set in the user's personal settings. Ashby still considers conflicts on the user's Google Calendar when displaying availability.

![Screenshot of the Enable Custom Meeting Hours toggle in the Meeting Hours tab](https://cdn.zappy.app/00e344bafed063db55af676d576f6655.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for how to update the timezone on a particular interview? See [How are interview time zones determined and how do I change them?](docId\:ofi_CI85GMEJVAaG8S2RT)
:::

**Recruiting Blocks:** If your organization is on the Enterprise plan or has purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1), you can also control availability for this schedule with Recruiting Blocks. Schedule-level Recruiting Blocks are configured from this tab and use matching calendar events on interviewers’ primary connected calendars. They are useful when a specific role, interview type, or hiring event needs dedicated interviewer capacity. See [Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q) for more information.

## Direct booking and candidate availability (optional)

If you're using direct booking or candidate availability links, you have options to set parameters around when meetings can be scheduled and how much candidate availability should be submitted.&#x20;

Direct Booking requests allow candidates to schedule a time to interview from appointment slots determined by interviewers' calendar availability and any meeting hours you define. It can only be used for schedules with a single event.

Candidate Availability requests allow candidates to submit one or more time slots during which they are available. You can then view these times while using Manual Schedule to schedule a preferred time for both you and the candidate.

:::hint{type="info"}
These settings will apply to any Direct Booking or Candidate Availability requests that you create based on this schedule interview activity.
:::

### Available Times

![Setting the Available Times settings for a schedule interview activity](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nMqApA2VNhoLxbIiC_iDl_available-times-section-of-direct-booking-and-candidate-availability.jpg)

- **Minimum Scheduling Notice (Hours):&#x20;**&#x44;etermines the earliest time a candidate can select (starting from the current date).
- **Rolling Days Available:** Determines the range of dates available to a candidate on a meeting request.
- **Direct Booking Availability Increments (Minutes):** Determines the frequency of the available timeslots for this event when a candidate schedules via a Direct Booking Link.
- **Minimum Days of Availability:&#x20;**&#x44;etermines the minimum number of days the candidate must select when submitting times via a Candidate Availability Link.
- **Allow Candidates to Suggest Times?** Candidates can share their availability if they cannot find a suitable time when scheduling with a direct booking link.

### Candidate-Facing Options

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidate-facing options determine options that allow the candidate to add additional information or reach out via email when using a direct booking link or candidate availability link.
:::

![This image shows the Candidate-Facing Options section, where you can enable the Show Email Button To Candidate? and Allow Candidates To Add an Availability Note? options.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lL7aMKkiOfL0O4d--nOf-_candidate-facing-options-in-scheduling-defaults.jpg)

- **Show Email Button To Candidates?&#x20;**&#x57;hen enabled, candidates will see an option to email the meeting organizer associated with the direct booking or candidate availability link. This can be found when clicking the three dots in the top-right corner of the booking page.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZL5HdOZ253jxbv6NrinyK_emailing-the-meeting-organizer.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2136" height="802" darkWidth="2136" darkHeight="802" alt="The option to email the meeting organizer" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Allow Candidates To Add an Availability Note?** When enabled, candidates can add a note when submitting their availability.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GRHxhGqwjtRsArEAEnVbm_adding-a-note-to-candidate-availability.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1990" height="1448" darkWidth="1990" darkHeight="1448" alt="The option to submit a note along with the candidate availability." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
The note will appear within the activity. Hover over `Note` to view the note information and a timestamp.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5XCm2kWlypbeowMmNfhvm_zight-2026-08-03-at-120525-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1454" height="458" darkWidth="1454" darkHeight="458" alt="Hovering over the Note option to view the note." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Alternatively, open up the activity details using the arrow on the right-hand side of the activity to view the availability and the note history.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dcUeo7L7rxkh_W3f4VSyp_notes-on-the-open-activity-details.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1460" height="864" darkWidth="1460" darkHeight="864" alt="The open activity details showing the note and candidate availability" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
The note will also appear with the candidate column on the interview calendar when manually scheduling the interview. Hover over the `Note` button to view it.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Gs0ZCrwQkYnbtafl78sd3_zight-2026-08-04-at-43435-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2506" height="954" darkWidth="2506" darkHeight="954" alt="Viewing the note when manually scheduling the candidate. " showCaption="false" indent="1"}

### Meeting Buffers

:::hint{type="info"}
Meeting buffers add protected time around booked interviews to prevent back-to-back scheduling
:::

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9KmLEbKPHEsbrbSlo3HwZ_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-07-14-at-14213-pm.png)

- **Pre-Meeting Buffer (Minutes):** Blocks time before a booked interview that cannot be scheduled.
- **Post-Meeting Buffer (Minutes):** Blocks time after a booked interview that cannot be scheduled.

After a Direct Booking interview is booked, meeting buffer windows are shown as unavailable on interviewers' calendars in **Quick Schedule**.

### Reschedule Limits

Reschedule limits control how many times and how close to the interview a candidate can self-reschedule via their booking confirmation link. These settings create a default value for each job's interview plan, but can be overridden or adjusted at the interview plan level if desired.

![](https://images.archbee.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CLNJfJTCW_BNpv_wwxw75_backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-06-04-at-24349-pm.jpg?format=webp)

- **Maximum Number of Reschedules:** Sets a cap on the total number of times a candidate can reschedule a given interview. Setting this to 0 prevents any candidate-initiated rescheduling entirely. Leaving the field blank means there is no limit.
- **Reschedule Cutoff Window (Hours):** Blocks self-serve rescheduling within a specified number of hours before the interview start time. For example, setting this to 24 means a candidate cannot reschedule if the interview is less than 24 hours away. Leaving the field blank means there is no cutoff.

If both limits are configured, rescheduling is blocked as soon as **either** condition is met. When a candidate is blocked, they are directed to contact the coordinator or organizer directly to reschedule. Only candidate-initiated reschedules count toward the Maximum Number of Reschedules; manual reschedules performed by a recruiter do not consume a slot.

### Meeting Request Organizer.

Here you can also determine the meeting organizer, the user who should receive notifications about a candidate's scheduling or availability submissions. More on this at [What is a Meeting Organizer?](docId\:C1tlsDkvUJ7S15oA8POQl).

![Screenshot showing the Meeting Request Organizer setting in the Direct Booking and Candidate Availability tab](https://cdn.zappy.app/8cbce98ae42b4099974cf13ad7b739f5.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
### Setting a candidate availability window

When scheduling with a candidate availability link, you have the option to specify a window of dates for candidates to submit their availability within either a rolling window that adjusts dynamically, or a fixed custom date range. For full steps, see [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM) .
:::

## Interview reminders

:::hint{type="info"}
This section covers reminders about the upcoming interview. If you are looking to set up scorecard or feedback reminder notifications, these are sent automatically if the interview is set as required. You can read more on setting up interviews at [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR).
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b22f2da5ce5441cb95cce8ed357ec126"}

If you have an upcoming interview with multiple events in one day, you can opt to either limit the reminders to one per day, so all events are included in one reminder email, or send a reminder for each calendar event.

Multiple calendar invites are sent if there's a gap between interview events.

### Set up interview reminders

Two default reminder email templates are included for you to use immediately. You can customize these templates or create new email templates in **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Email Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates). More on setting up these templates can be found at [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).

Interview reminders can be configured in the **Reminders** tab, either for all interviews in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Scheduling Defaults](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/scheduling-defaults/communication), or within specific schedule interview activities on the interview plans of your jobs.

![Setting up a reminder in the Schedule Defaults section of Admin](https://cdn.zappy.app/b1b691426f7001b450e1a6bdef9a6d28.png)

You can also amend or add additional interview reminders when scheduling a candidate's interview via Manual Schedule.

Click `Add Candidate Reminder` or `Add Interviewer Reminder` to get started. You can then specify when the notification should be sent, who the notification is from, and the template used for the reminder.

![Screenshot of the Add Candidate Reminder and Add Interviewer Reminder options in the Manual Schedule view](https://cdn.zappy.app/8d98ff649e05f5584ecd3ed156801ae4.png)

If you haven't already, ensure an email template is set up for direct booking links or candidate availability links in the **Communication** tab of your schedule interview activity.

This is the email sent to the candidate automatically when they're moved to this stage of your pipeline. You have the option to undo the automation each time it is triggered.

![Screenshot showing the email template configuration for direct booking links and candidate availability links in the Communication tab](https://cdn.zappy.app/b8f601149cc870b2ec886689c9271d98.png)

1. **Send:** Determine how the reminder should be sent. For candidates, you only have the option to send an email. If you have the Slack integration in place, you can opt to send an email or Slack reminder to interviewers.
2. **From:** Determine the sender email address for the candidate's reminder. This can either come from the default no-reply email address or the scheduler's email address.
3. **When:** Configure the number of days, minutes, or hours prior to the interview that the reminder should be sent.
4. **Using Template:** Select the reminder template to use.
5. **+ Add Candidate Reminder:** Create or add an additional reminder.
6. If your interview has multiple events (and potentially gaps between those events), you can opt to send one reminder for all calendar events that day or a reminder for each event.
7. **Reset:** If you have Scheduling Defaults in place, click this option to revert back to those defaults.

When the reminder email is sent, the substitution tokens within your interview template are pre-filled with the appropriate details.

![An example of a candidate's interview reminder.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ff9957869ef832027ae1d889d823ef91.png)

### Multiple interview events

If you have an upcoming interview with multiple events in one day, you can opt to either limit the reminders to one per day, so all events are included in one reminder email, or send a reminder for each calendar event.

Multiple calendar invites are sent if there's a gap between interview events.

![Screenshot showing the reminder configuration options for interviews with multiple events in one day](https://cdn.zappy.app/6929e475191bb9ad4038907aa75fca6a.png)

### Configuring candidate scheduling reminders

If you are generating candidate availability or direct booking links from your schedule interview activities, you can also configure candidate scheduling reminders on the `Reminders` tab of your schedule interview activity. These reminders are automatically sent if the candidate has yet to take the following action:

- **Candidate Availability Link:** If the candidate hasn't submitted their availability by the time specified in your reminder configuration, then an email or text is generated from the template selected and sent to them as a reminder.
- **Direct Booking Link:** If the candidate hasn't scheduled an interview using the direct booking link provided by the time specified in your reminder configuration, then an email or text is generated from the template selected and sent to them as a reminder.

If the candidate submits availability or schedules using their direct booking link, the reminders are cancelled automatically.

:::hint{type="info"}
For SMS reminders, you need to have candidate texting enabled on your account. For more on this, check out [Candidate Texting Onboarding](docId\:LrSCwWBh0I1RwPuqxdQrN) and [Candidate Texting](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84).
:::

To add a candidate scheduling reminder, click `+ Availability Request Reminder` or `+ Direct Booking Reminder` to create the reminder. From here, you can set your reminder settings.

![Screenshot of the candidate scheduling reminder configuration interface](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KYS98MrZw1wlezOy_nQAZ_candidate-scheudling-reminder.jpg)

When setting up your scheduling reminders, you can configure the following:

- **Send:** How the reminder is sent to the candidate — either via SMS or email.
- **From:** Determine the sender of the email. This can be the meeting organizer or a no-reply email.
- **When:** Configure when the reminder should be sent. This can be specified in days, hours, or minutes since the request was sent.
- **Using Template:** Select the email or text template to use to generate the content of the reminder.

:::hint{type="info"}
Default reminder templates for candidate availability and direct booking link schedule reminders are available within **Admin > Organization Setup > Email Templates**. These can be edited as needed.
:::

You can set up multiple reminders. After setting up your reminder, click `+ Availability Request Reminder` or `+ Direct Booking Reminder` to add another one.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Reminders are only created and sent if the candidate availability link or direct booking link has been sent directly via Ashby. If the link has been copied and shared with the candidate outside of an email from Ashby, reminders are not sent.
:::

After you send the link to the candidate, you see the scheduled reminders on the interview activity on the candidate's profile. You can manually delete these as needed. Hover over the tab with the bell icon to view when the reminders are due to be sent. To make changes, click the tab.

![Screenshot showing scheduled reminders displayed on the interview activity on a candidate's profile](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vhQa7Zm_ffqCxBkPHVJFz_ariadne-shepard-product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-02-02-at-31903-pm.jpg)

On the `Manage Scheduled Reminders` pop-up, click the trash can icons beside any reminders you want to remove. You can click `Delete All` to remove all of them.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PrU2-ZpxWWOfS5YpKzy1l_ariadne-shepard-product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-02-02-at-32052-pm.jpg" size="70" alt="Screenshot of the Manage Scheduled Reminders pop-up showing trash can icons for individual reminders and a Delete All option" isUploading="false" width="580" height="394" darkWidth="580" darkHeight="394" showCaption="false"}

## Automation

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8690652ecce7433d86c46d223f935e10"}

When setting up or updating your schedule interview activity, click the **Automation** tab. Then check the `Automate on Stage Entry` checkbox.

![Screenshot showing the Automation tab with the Automate on Stage Entry checkbox](https://cdn.zappy.app/f3065da31b1215f2f9ba261b0ed06f62.png)

From there, specify the automation type — whether to send a direct booking link or a candidate availability link automatically.

![Screenshot showing the automation type selection options: direct booking link or candidate availability link](https://cdn.zappy.app/a6b27da478cad29ca875a953b5a9af26.png)

If you haven't already, ensure an email template is set up for direct booking links or candidate availability links in the **Communication** tab of your schedule interview activity.

![Screenshot showing where to set up an email template for direct booking or candidate availability links in the Communication tab](https://cdn.zappy.app/4cc2939c73e3d060f3737f1a67006a6f.png)

This is the email sent to the candidate automatically when they're moved to this stage of your pipeline. You have the option to undo the automation each time it is triggered.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/234a5e6c08a706c882fd0a59f9c585ce.png" size="64" width="497" height="186" darkWidth="497" darkHeight="186" position="center" showCaption="false"}

# FAQ

### Why should I set up schedule interview activities?

Adding schedule interview activities to your job or job template's interview plans helps automate your scheduling process. You can set up the interview type, interviewer, and interview location in advance.

From there, when a candidate is moved to that stage in your pipeline, you are prompted to schedule an interview and all of the interview settings are generated automatically. If direct booking links or candidate availability links can be generated, then they are produced automatically.

### What happens to scheduled interviews when I make changes to the feedback form or briefing assigned to them?

If you make changes to the shared feedback form on the Feedback Forms page or to the briefing on the Interviews page, any interviews with that feedback form assigned reflect those changes.

### I've updated the interview type on a schedule interview activity in my job's interview plan. What happens to scheduled interviews?

If you change the interview type on your schedule interview activity, the changes are applied to candidates who are currently in the interview stage, as well as candidates entering that stage moving forward. If the interview has already been scheduled for the candidate, the interview type is not updated and the interview would need to be rescheduled to update the interview type as needed.

### Why am I seeing two calendar events for an interview on my personal calendar?

When booking an interview and sending calendar invites, Ashby sends calendar events to three calendars. Ashby sends separate calendar events for interviewers and candidates to include party-specific interview information.

- One for the calendar the overall interview is scheduled on.
- One for the interviewer's calendar.
- One for the candidate's calendar.

If there are multiple interviewers on the panel, an event is sent to each interviewer's individual calendar.

If the overall interview is scheduled on an interviewer's personal calendar, they receive the calendar event for the calendar the overall interview is scheduled on along with the calendar event for them as an interviewer.

To avoid multiple events, ensure the shared calendar is selected when setting up a schedule interview activity and when booking one-off interviews. Once scheduled, the calendar cannot be changed. The interview needs to be cancelled and rebooked.

### Why does an interview slot in my schedule template show that the slot is invalid when I add an interviewer into that slot?

This can happen if the interviewer:

- Is a service account
- Has their user account disabled in Ashby
- Is globally paused for all interviews
- Doesn't have a Google Workspace or Microsoft calendar

[title] Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Scheduling Add-On/

The Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on extends Ashby's scheduling capabilities with a suite of tools designed to reduce manual coordination work and give your team more visibility into the scheduling process. This article outlines the key features included in the add-on — including Interviewer Training, Auto Schedule, Scheduling Requests, the Interviews Dashboard, and Hold Scheduling — and describes feature setup and usage in detail.

This add-on is available on the All-in-One Recruiting Plus Plan as a purchasable add-on and is included in the Enterprise plan. Those on the Foundations Plan must upgrade to the Plus Plan to purchase it.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ➕    | ✅          |

# Interviewer training

The Interviewer Training feature automatically tracks shadows and reverse shadows as interviewers progress through a structured training program, moving them into the qualified pool once they meet the requirements. This removes the need to manually manage who is ready to interview and ensures your interview panels stay consistent as your team grows.

For full setup instructions, including how to configure training stages, add trainees, and manage progression, see [Interviewer Training](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb).

# Auto schedule

The Auto Schedule feature automatically generates schedules based on your team's calendars. Schedulers can select from a short list of options, then finish out the scheduling process.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/97d7eaa332d644018e17a060aac91828"}

## Setup requirements

- Ensure you have interviewers set up on schedule interview activities. Their calendars are used to find suitable times when providing proposals. You can read more on configuring interviewers in [Assigning Interviewers](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/76a41d2a4548ea4aa5dead4a316c782d.png)

- If there are multiple events under a schedule interview activity and they should happen in a certain order, ensure you have adjusted the **Timing** configuration for each event. Timing settings are only available with the Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on or for Enterprise customers.

:::hint{type="info"}
Understand timing settings in [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

## Usage

1. On the schedule interview prompt on the candidate's profile, click `Schedule`, then `Auto-Schedule`.
2. Confirm the interview activity settings as a first step. You can opt to unlink the interview from the interview activity to make any last-minute changes.
3. Select the dates you're considering for the interview, confirm the primary timezone, and determine whether interviews with multiple events can be scheduled over multiple days, or allow breaks between interviews for flexibility.
4. Once these details are confirmed, you are presented with proposed times. Select a time from the list. You can then view the panel and configure your invites prior to scheduling the interview.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If interviewers have a lot of availability across the interview dates specified, all possible time slots may not be listed in the **Proposed Schedules** tab.
:::

# Scheduling requests and Interviews Dashboard

Scheduling Requests are simple forms directly in Ashby that your team can use to create scheduling tasks for Recruiting Coordinators. Once submitted, interviews with requests can be viewed in the Interviews Dashboard.

The Interviews Dashboard is a tool that anyone can access to manage interview scheduling, check on the scheduling status of interviews, and take action on Scheduling Requests. The scheduling status of those interviews and requests updates in real time.

:::hint{type="info"}
The Interviews Dashboard is where scheduling requests and interviews can be tracked and actioned. For the interview core dashboard containing key interview metrics and data, see [Core Dashboards](docId\:nhvbeIsfV8wiqLWeEmF2t).
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/e2fef0852f40416098a4ddc070f85425"}

## Setup requirements

1. Enable scheduling requests by navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Scheduling Requests & Queues**.
2. Switch on the `Enable scheduling requests?` option to allow scheduling requests to be created on Interview Schedule Activities on candidate profiles.
3. Create scheduling request queues. See the [Scheduling request queues](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) section below for detailed instructions.
4. (Optional) Create scheduling request forms. See the [Scheduling request forms](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) section below for detailed instructions.
5. (Optional) Create additional priority levels. See the [Create additional priority levels](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) section below for detailed instructions.

### Scheduling request queues

Scheduling Request Queues enable your team to assign Scheduling Requests to a queue instead of directly to a specific Recruiting Coordinator. These can be helpful when you have multiple coordinators responsible for scheduling within a certain part of the business, or across your whole company.

Each queue can have multiple members. When a Scheduling Request is assigned to a queue, members of that queue see those requests in the Interviews Dashboard and can claim them based on their bandwidth. Recruiting Coordinators can be members of more than one queue, and membership is easy to adjust — for example, if you need someone to cover a queue while another member is out of office.

To create queues for scheduling requests:

1. Click `+ New` on the **Scheduling Request Queues** tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eda545c1e460ed0d90628725404e6ea6.png)

2. Name your queue.
3. Add members to your queue. These are users who will be prompted to handle the scheduling requests assigned to this queue.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e59a8424154224bcc9cc0cde9cf13ded.png)

### Scheduling request forms (optional)

If you'd like to require a request form, switch on `Require request forms for scheduling requests?`

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/4372f35dd60b26b108c20db126855489.png" size="86" width="1113" height="188" darkWidth="1113" darkHeight="188" position="center" showCaption="false"}

To create and edit existing forms, navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Scheduling Requests**:

1. Click `+ New` on the **Scheduling Request Forms** tab.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5daa4410050f63b25c7ecb42caafc740.png" size="68" width="1135" height="637" darkWidth="1135" darkHeight="637" position="center" showCaption="false"}

2. Name your scheduling request form.
3. Add fields to your form by clicking `Add Question`. If you'd like to split a longer form into sections, click `Add Section`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1bcd435e44c6d5cd13151aa31608173b.png" size="56" width="637" height="573" darkWidth="637" darkHeight="573" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### Create additional priority levels (optional)

:::hint{type="info"}
Scheduling Requests can be classified with a priority level to ensure that the most important scheduling tasks are picked up first. Three priority levels are available by default, and these can also be customized. Priority labels and descriptions are visible in the Interviews Dashboard to easily distinguish between different types of requests.
:::

To create additional priority levels to assign to scheduling requests, navigate to the **Priority** tab of **Scheduling Requests**:

1. Click `+ New` on the **Priority Levels** tab and name your new priority level.
2. Add a description or details as needed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/74855f56fa35e35f22984e8601f79180.png)

### Add the Interviews Dashboard to your homepage

:::hint{type="info"}
Once you've configured your scheduling request settings, you can prompt your team to start submitting scheduling requests. As part of this, we recommend that you and those involved with completing or tracking scheduling requests add the Interviews Dashboard to their home page.
:::

To add the **Interviews Dashboard** to your homepage, locate the **Views** list on the left side of your homepage, click `+ Add`, then select `Interviews Dashboard`. The Interviews Dashboard is where you can track any generated scheduling requests.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f5101b3d58e95d448ec78812802b4343.png)

## Creating a scheduling request

To create a Scheduling Request:

1. Click the `Create Scheduling Request` button (or `Schedule` > `Create Schedule Request`) on the scheduling activity.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1404eb34ac48709f0986dd32ab9951af.png)

2. Add the interview priority, the request assignee (or queue), and optionally select a request form and complete it prior to submitting the request.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/a3f3579f9b1a92c88834679f235b96d7.png" size="68" width="718" height="698" darkWidth="718" darkHeight="698" position="center" showCaption="false"}

**Customizing schedule details**

- If you need to view and amend any of the interview schedule details linked to the schedule request, click the **Schedule** tab.

:::hint{type="info"}
This can be helpful for cases where necessary changes to the schedule for a specific candidate's interview are already known. Instead of writing out detailed instructions in your request for a Recruiting Coordinator to follow, you can make those adjustments immediately and save several steps for your team.
:::

- If you'd like to customize the schedule for a specific candidate, you can unlink it from the linked template pulled from the activity on your job's interview plan. To do this, click `Customize Schedule`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Note that this unlinks the schedule from the template on your job's interview plan.

From here, you'll be using a custom template for this activity, so changes to the template on the interview plan no longer impact this specific interview activity. You can make changes to the interview schedule (for example, add, remove, or rearrange interview events), change interview length, adjust interviewer slots, update meeting rooms, and toggle whether to include a debrief.
:::

- If you need to revert any changes and go back to the original template provided by the interview schedule activity on your interview plan, click `Switch to Linked Master Template`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c6b75970b1a6c18a4bfc600f853cc518.png" size="72" width="697" height="658" darkWidth="697" darkHeight="658" position="center" showCaption="false"}

- Once you've reviewed your schedule and schedule request details, click `Submit` to submit your request. Any changes to your schedule save automatically, whether you choose to submit the request or not. This means that the assignee picking up the request works on the latest version of this schedule activity and doesn't need to make any amendments themselves — they can just open the request and schedule it with the needed amendments already made.
- If you need to make changes to the request, click `View Scheduling Request`, then click `Edit Request`. Make any changes, then click `Submit Request` again to confirm your changes.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/22bdaa0ee1f3641444edcd56e04aab12.png)

## Viewing scheduling requests

You can view scheduling requests and the status of other interview activities via the Interviews Dashboard on your home page.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/934d211c5278f1733ab0c5134931307e.png)

- To add additional filters, click the `Filter` button to select fields to filter by. Once you've configured your filters, click `Save as New` to save your filter so you can return to it easily in the future.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/04bf0093c974974f140566fad51f27b1.png)

- If a scheduling request has been sent to a queue, you can claim the request to assign it to yourself to action. To do this, click `Claim` in the **Request Details** column.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/143649277c148ec0a340ecb2e8278b97.png)

- If you need to make any adjustments to the scheduling request, hover over the information in the **Request Details** column. You can then click `Edit` on the Scheduling Request pop-up to make any edits without leaving this page.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/39d3a29a6120d3dbe740336ce96bebfb.png)

- Requests can also be viewed while scheduling for easy reference.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a86189944f1790c9a8105cefb76d24cd.png)

## Interview Schedule Activity status

Interview Schedule Activities have a status assigned to them within the **Status** column of the Interviews Dashboard. The status of an activity updates automatically as it progresses through the scheduling process. You can read more about each status below:

| Status                                 | Definition                                                                                                                                   |
| -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Needs Scheduling/Needs to be Scheduled | A scheduling request has not been generated for this interview and it is yet to be scheduled                                                 |
| Scheduling Requested                   | A scheduling request has been submitted for this interview                                                                                   |
| Waiting on Candidate Booking           | A direct booking link has been sent out to the candidate but they have yet to schedule                                                       |
| Waiting on Candidate Availability      | An availability link has been sent out to the candidate but they have yet to submit their availability for an interview                      |
| Candidate Availability Submitted       | The candidate has provided their availability via a candidate availability link and is waiting to be scheduled                               |
| Scheduled                              | The interview has been scheduled (this status shows regardless of whether calendar invites have been sent or not at the point of scheduling) |
| Waiting on Feedback                    | The date and time of the interview has passed and interviewer feedback is yet to be completed                                                |
| On Hold                                | The interview date and time has been put on hold, rather than scheduled                                                                      |
| Complete                               | The interview date and time has passed and feedback has been completed or skipped                                                            |

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for information on statuses that display on the candidate profile? See [Understanding Candidate Activity Statuses](docId:6wG2UjwlJaTBGDGO1IYmZ).
:::

## Scheduling Request status

Scheduling Requests also have an associated status, which can be seen in the Interviews Dashboard.

| Status      | Definition                                                                                                                         |
| ----------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Unsubmitted | A scheduling request draft was started but has not yet been submitted.                                                             |
| Unassigned  | The scheduling request has been submitted and added to a queue, but has not yet been assigned to a specific Recruiting Coordinator |
| Assigned    | The scheduling request has been directly assigned to a Recruiting Coordinator, or claimed by one off a queue                       |
| Completed   | The interview related to this Scheduling Request has been scheduled, marking the request as completed.                             |

# Auto schedule automations

## Auto-replace interviewer on decline

When an interviewer declines an interview before the configured cutoff time (24 hours by default), they are automatically swapped for an available alternate interviewer in the schedule and the invites are resent.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/342d3d0b6a594d068ab7161635d0fa5b"}

### Setup steps

1. Navigate to the job, then the `Interview Plan` tab.
2. On the relevant schedule interview activity in the job's interview plan, click `Modify` > `Edit`.
3. Add interviewers and make sure alternates are available. You can do this by using an interviewer pool or adding multiple interviewers to a slot. This allows Ashby to replace the original interviewer automatically if they decline.
4. Go to the `Automation` tab within the same schedule interview activity.
5. Toggle the `Automatically Replace Interviewer on Decline?` setting on.
6. Use the default cutoff of 24 hours, or set a custom cutoff duration that is shorter or longer.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rQASFFNSWDVDBDSizsgZ__director-of-platform-engineering-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-22539-pm.jpg)

## Automatically scheduling upon receiving candidate availability

Automation can be put in place that automatically emails you with interview proposal times when a candidate submits their availability. You can then select a proposed time and schedule the candidate from there.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a1bb5c15b354466ea6dbb718b53dfa0f"}

### Setup steps

Before using this automation, open the relevant schedule interview activity on your interview plan and go to the `Automation` tab.

1. Turn on `Generate suggested schedules when availability is submitted?`
   This tells Ashby to generate proposed interview times automatically after the candidate submits their availability.
2. Make sure the job has a **Hiring Team** assigned. When the candidate submits their availability, Ashby sends the suggested schedules to users on the hiring team so they can review the options and complete scheduling.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f4de0c0cbc9c9c9518460b3828450aad.png)

### Usage

From the candidate's profile, open the interview activity and select **Schedule** > **Request Candidate Availability**.

Once the candidate submits their availability, Ashby generates suggested schedules and notifies the hiring team so they can choose a time and finish scheduling the interview.

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn more about candidate availability links, see [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).
:::

# Hold scheduling

The Hold feature enables you to place \[HOLD] calendar events on interview calendars. This does not email or send invites to the candidate. The option to add a hold event is available when either manually scheduling or using auto-schedule options to book an interview. The option is available at the **Calendar Invites** stage of scheduling.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f94895434d3046e08afd8e56c469b5ff"}

When used, you have the following options:

- **Hold Silently:** Events are placed on interviewers' calendars, but no notification is sent for the initial invite or for subsequent updates while the interview schedule is held.
- **Hold & Notify:** Events are placed on interviewers' calendars, and they are notified for the initial invitation. They are not updated for subsequent updates while the interview schedule is held.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/82181fe636e55c928340450acf3e302d.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
The Hold option is not available when rescheduling an interview.
:::

## Usage

- Click the `Hold` button in the scheduling workflow for either auto-schedule or manual scheduling.

# Recruiting Blocks

Recruiting Blocks let teams reserve specific calendar times for interviews. If your organization is on the Enterprise plan or has purchased the Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on, you can use them. They work with direct booking, auto-scheduling, and manual scheduling. See [Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q) for more information.

# FAQ

### Do schedule requests show as a task on the user's Home page?

Not currently, but they can be accessed from the Interviews Dashboard.

### If an interviewer has been scheduled in one interviewer slot, can they also be auto-scheduled in place of an interviewer on the same interview (i.e. take up multiple slots across one or multiple events within an interview)?

Interviewers who have already been selected for other interview slots are excluded as possible auto-replacements. If no other interviewers are available, an auto-replacement will not take place.

### What fields are available for reporting on schedule requests?

For scheduling requests, you have the following fields for reporting.

Subject: Job Consideration > Interview Schedule

| **Has Scheduling Request?** | Whether a scheduling request has been submitted for this interview schedule. |
| --------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- |

Subject: Job Consideration > Interview Schedule > Request

| **Requested By** | The person who submitted the scheduling request     |
| ---------------- | --------------------------------------------------- |
| **Assignee**     | The person who has been assigned the request        |
| **Submitted At** | The point in time at which the request was created. |
| **Priority**     | The priority assigned to the scheduling request     |

### How are multiple interviewers and load balancing handled with auto-schedule?

If you have multiple interviewing slots with users assigned to each slot, the availability used is based on the times that each combination of interviewers from your interviewer slots are available.&#x20;

If multiple users are assigned to one interview slot, availability is looked at for all possible interviewers.&#x20;

The interview is assigned based on the date and time selected. If multiple interviewers assigned to the same slot are available at the selected time, the interview is assigned to the interviewer with the fewest interviews. All interviews scheduled in the past 30 days and the next 30 days are considered in the interview count.

[title] Controlling Visibility of Additional Job Considerations in the Candidate Profile
[path] Candidates/

Use the **Candidate Profile Application Visibility** setting to control whether users can see limited information about a candidate's job considerations for jobs they cannot access. This setting helps organizations provide a high-level view of a candidate's recruiting activity while preserving job-level access controls.

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby offers a **Candidate Profile Application Visibility** option for opt-out until it is enabled for all organizations on October 25, 2026. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access) and set the `Preview` pop-out to `Enabled` or `Disabled`.

![Ashby Admin Opt-In Features page showing the upcoming Candidate Profile Application Visibility setting, with a rollout date of October 25, 2026 and options to preview or go to the setting.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YXNHMZK1p9zIThcVj57L3_656001193-fc8b6d17-b3f3-4fe2-988a-c1550f9cd855png-2968964-2026-09-22-at-94946-am.jpg)
:::

# Permissions & access

This setting is available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Organization Admins can manage this setting from **Admin > Jobs & Applications >** [Job Management](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/job-management).

Users must already have access to the candidate profile and at least one of the candidate's job considerations to see limited application summaries.

:::hint{type="info"}
Job access roles continue to control access to the full application and job consideration details.
:::

# Enable or disable Candidate Profile Application Visibility

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >** [Job Management](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/job-management).
2. Find the **Candidate Profile Application Visibility** setting and toggle the setting to `Yes` or `No`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/i7YLKyPw8HG04o4YIQP-h_job-management-ashby-2026-09-24-at-73141-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="928" height="376" darkWidth="928" darkHeight="376" alt="Ashby Admin Job Management settings with Candidate Profile Application Visibility set to No." showCaption="false"}

3. Click the `Preview` button to view an example of what users would see with each setting. Choose whether users see all job considerations or only the job considerations they have access to:
   - **Users can see a short summary of all other applications:** Users who can access a candidate profile will see a limited summary of the candidate's other job considerations, including applications for jobs outside their assigned access.
   - **Users can only see applications they have explicit access to:** Users only see job considerations for jobs they have permission to access.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H048IKgkZHh3Z7nXBPIy1_656001194-5360f2aa-b072-4dfb-9229-07a601dd8da2png-29021902-2026-09-23-at-104937-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1420" height="912" darkWidth="1420" darkHeight="912" alt="Candidate Profile Application Visibility settings modal with options to show users a summary of all other applications or only applications they have explicit access to, with the explicit-access-only option selected." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Click `Save`.

## Visibility when the setting is enabled

Users who can access a candidate profile will see a limited summary of the candidate's other job considerations, including a record of job considerations for jobs outside their assigned access.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Permissions will still apply when it comes to accessing further information on the job or job consideration.
:::

Users will be able to view the following:

- The job title, current interview stage, and archive reason, when applicable. All other job consideration details, such as the full application, feedback, and notes, will remain hidden from the user if they do not have access to the job.&#x20;
- Users will see a lock icon and the message "You don't have access to view this job consideration" when they cannot access the job.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eJwppzSWHlzp0kS46AltB_darlene-mccullough-summary-ashby-2026-09-22-at-110302-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="796" height="422" darkWidth="796" darkHeight="422" alt="Candidate profile showing multiple job considerations, with a tooltip indicating the user does not have access to view the Infrastructure Engineer job consideration." showCaption="false"}

Limited summaries appear consistently in:

- The **candidate profile** sidebar
- The `Activities & Progress` tab
- [Bulk Application Review](docId\:d_nxB_Kdz4fJru4hBCaLb)
- [Talent Rediscovery](docId\:d-gjG_O-jKBQagm_KsMZe)

## Visibility when the setting is disabled

Users only see job considerations for jobs they have permission to access in the **candidate profile** sidebar, `Activities & Progress`, **Talent Rediscovery**, and **Bulk Application Review**.

:::hint{type="info"}
Disabling this setting does not remove a user's existing access to candidate profiles or job considerations within their assigned jobs.
:::

## Compare the visibility options

### Candidate profile sidebar

When the setting is enabled:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/d7CJU8qtox0_wap535cT5_lyra-thornwood-summary-ashby-2026-09-24-at-74714-am.jpg" size="30" isUploading="false" width="432" height="532" darkWidth="432" darkHeight="532" alt="Candidate view showing the Backend Engineer job in Application Review and a locked, archived Engineering Manager job under Considered for Jobs." showCaption="false"}

When the setting is disabled:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Nb22Flve-3HOZ7qw59Onq_lyra-thornwood-backend-engineer-ashby-2026-09-24-at-74256-am.jpg" size="30" isUploading="false" width="422" height="604" darkWidth="422" darkHeight="604" alt="Candidate view showing the candidate was considered for the Backend Engineer job in the Application Review stage on September 24, 2026, with a link to view the job." showCaption="false"}

### Activities & progress tab

When the setting is enabled:

![Candidate Activities & Progress view showing the Backend Engineer job in Application Review and a locked, archived Engineering Manager job under Considered for Jobs.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Fl4P1ne_S1GyZxIlKp_BT_lyra-thornwood-summary-ashby-2026-09-24-at-74637-am.jpg)

When the setting is disabled:

![Candidate Activities & Progress view showing no current activities and the Backend Engineer job in the Application Review stage under Considered for Jobs.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/20epvlTDjdZpQoJ5B41Sw_lyra-thornwood-summary-ashby-2026-09-24-at-74357-am.jpg)

### Bulk application review

When the setting is enabled:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dSM37s3_7_QZK16IUnXnp_candidate-pipeline-ashby-2026-09-24-at-75417-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="933" height="118" darkWidth="933" darkHeight="118" alt="Candidate pipeline card for Lyra Thornwood for the Backend Engineer job, showing an unspecified status and a locked Engineering Manager consideration that was archived after a failed onsite." showCaption="false"}

When the setting is disabled:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1iBkoaO3Omt8IUikMFFrV_candidate-pipeline-ashby-2026-09-24-at-75323-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="922" height="116" darkWidth="922" darkHeight="116" alt="Candidate pipeline card for Lyra Thornwood for the Backend Engineer job, showing an unspecified status and “In Stage Since • 15min ago.”" showCaption="false"}

### Talent Rediscovery

When the setting is enabled:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UUGWjUtAbK26YL7a2Q3xF_backend-engineer-ashby-2026-09-24-at-81705-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="828" height="300" darkWidth="828" darkHeight="300" alt="Talent Rediscovery card for Jarrod Franey showing no previous feedback, applications for Frontend Engineer and Infrastructure Engineer with their latest stages, and a most recent position as Site Reliability Engineer at InMotion Hosting." showCaption="false"}

When the setting is disabled:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/323zPRzjXh25Op9eDtVyj_backend-engineer-ashby-2026-09-24-at-81450-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="829" height="243" darkWidth="829" darkHeight="243" alt="Talent Rediscovery card for Jarrod Franey showing no previous feedback, a most recent application for Infrastructure Engineer that reached Application Review and was marked “Not Willing to Relocate,” and a most recent position as Site Reliability Engineer at InMotion Hosting." showCaption="false"}

# FAQs

### Why can a user see a candidate profile but not open a job consideration?

A user can have permission to view a candidate profile while having limited access to the candidate's job considerations. When **Candidate Profile Application Visibility** is enabled, Ashby shows a limited summary for job considerations outside the user's job access without linking to the restricted job consideration.

### Are confidential jobs included in the limited summaries?

No. Ashby hides confidential jobs from users who do not have access to them.

### Where do limited summaries appear?

They appear in the **candidate profile** sidebar, the `Activities & Progress` tab, **Talent Rediscovery**, and **Bulk Application Review**. The setting is designed to keep job considerations visibility consistent across these areas.

### Does this setting affect Talent Rediscovery?

Yes. Talent Rediscovery follows the same job consideration visibility rules, so candidate information remains consistent across Ashby. When the setting is enabled, Talent Rediscovery can show a limited summary of non-confidential job considerations outside the viewer's job access. When the setting is disabled, users only see job considerations for jobs they can access, so the most recent application may not appear if the viewer does not have permission to see that job.

:::hint{type="info"}
We recommend keeping this setting enabled because Talent Rediscovery is more useful when users have a complete, high-level picture of a candidate's job consideration history.
:::


[title] When and how do I close out a job?
[path] Jobs & Openings/

This guide covers when and how to mark a job as Closed in Ashby.

# When should I close out a job?

We recommend closing out a job:

- If you have hired for all available positions for a role and don't plan on hiring for that role again in the near future.
- If you are no longer hiring for the role and don't plan to reopen it soon.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have any evergreen roles that you are always hiring for, we recommend using Openings to track positions accordingly. You can read more about these in our [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).
:::

# How to mark a job as closed

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and open the role.
2. Click the `Open` tag under the job title.
3. From the dropdown, select `Mark as Closed`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/a5c899cdacd2cf4a3856942af7827711.png" size="68" width="378" height="252" darkWidth="378" darkHeight="252" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Shows the Mark as Closed option under the Open tag on the job"}

4. Select a reason from the **Reason for closing** drop-down, then click `Close`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/9b7a10078b4e4dc8784fb70c66e6ffce.png" size="70" alt="Shows the Close Job modal with the Reason dropdown" isUploading="false" width="495" height="193" darkWidth="495" darkHeight="193" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you need to set up more job closing reasons, you can do this in **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Close Job Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/close-job-reasons).
:::

5. The job is now marked as closed and all job postings are removed from your Ashby job board.
6. Click `Archive Job Consideration/s` to archive any existing candidates in the pipeline.

![Highlights the Archive Job Consideration button on the job](https://cdn.zappy.app/93c8f9b36c21e49d147dc77af6d1013f.png)

7. Select an archive reason for the candidates. You can also choose to notify candidates of the rejection and cancel any feedback notifications for interviewers.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5f30060b31c7be3ce31e5d67a6352a23.png" size="78" width="548" height="508" darkWidth="548" darkHeight="508" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Shows the Bulk Action Archive model with the archive reason dropdown available"}

# FAQs

### How do I archive a closed job?

Once a job is in a Closed status, you can archive it from the job status menu. Open the job, click the `Closed` status dropdown under the job title, and select `Archive`. Archiving removes the job from your Jobs view. Archived jobs can be restored as a draft if needed.



::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8Dr4wDwW_W2KVg8uPkZDB_potions-master-ashby-2026-08-26-at-44629-pm.png" size="60" isUploading="false" width="334" height="181" darkWidth="334" darkHeight="181" alt="Shows the Archive option under the Closed tag on a job" showCaption="false"}

### Can I take a copy of or create a template from a closed job?

Yes! Search for the job by title, or adjust the filters in **Jobs > Jobs** to view a list of closed jobs. Click the trash can icon to remove the filters completely, or amend the existing ones to only show closed jobs.

Click on your job, then click `More`. From here, you see the options to create a copy of the job or create a template from it.

For more on templates, check out [Job Templates](docId\:X1iE8z5PxR7FJKsPv6QEU).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1fffba522a21e824e44170bf3309ef1e.png)

### How do I stop new applications without closing out the job's pipeline completely?

Unpublish your job postings to stop them from showing on your job board. Candidates are then unable to apply for the role. You can still add candidates to your pipeline internally in Ashby.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/08ecf00142d1e38362d12097cd8bc68f.png)

### Can I amend the open or close date of a job?

For assistance with this, reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] How do I update the status on a job consideration?
[path] Applications/

This guide covers statuses that can be applied to job considerations how to manually update the status of a job consideration.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Please note that manually updating the status on a job consideration should be rarely used. If you are looking for more information on handling a rejected or rescinded offer, check out [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh).
:::

Click `More` on the candidate profile, and scroll to the bottom of the list and select the `Change Application Status` option. You have the option to change the status to:

- Archived
- Assessment Submitted
- Candidate Accepted Offer
- Candidate Availability Submitted
- Candidate Rejected Offer
- Hired\*
- Last Active
- Needs Decision
- Needs Offer
- Needs Offer Approval
- Needs Scheduling
- No Status
- Scheduled
- Waiting On Assessment
- Waiting On Candidate Availability
- Waiting On Candidate Booking
- Waiting On Candidate Offer Response
- Waiting On Feedback
- Waiting On Take Home Submission

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/df1c16d3e2280fd7e4112197d79a6408.gif)

The **Hired** stage will not appear in the `Change Stage` dropdown if there are active Offer Approvals set up in the [Admin > Approvals > Offers section](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer). You will need to complete the offer process by creating the offer, then clicking the `Offer Accepted` option within the offer’s settings. Once that has been done, the candidate’s stage will automatically change to **Hired**.




[title] Application Requests
[path] Applications/

You can send out application requests to candidates who have been entered into Ashby without filling in an application form (for example, those who have been sourced or referred). This tool helps to ensure you have complete information across your candidates and job considerations.

You can either send application requests manually or configure automation rules to send out application requests automatically. Once completed, the application form will be added directly to the candidate's job consideration.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Application request links are candidate and job consideration-specific. The same link cannot be used across multiple candidates.

Application requests are always tied to the default job posting on a job. If you do not have a default job posting, you'll need to set one for application requests to work.  See [Default job posting](docId:9CSzLysZFNBnQL7z031JB) for more information.
:::

Application requests are available on the Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/5afed3b6aaa94a08ae3e516686b8cbcb"}

## Creating an application request email template

We would recommend setting up an email template with an application request link substitution token as a first step. An email template with this substitution token is required for automation rules and can also help streamline the process of manually generating application requests.&#x20;

To create a new email template for application requests:

- Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > [Email Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates)
- Click `New Template`
- Add in the subject and body for your email template. To add in the application request link substitution token, click the `T` icon on the template toolbar and select the `Application Request Link` token.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/c-F5Emokh2Qz3yKAfFiy8_email-templates-acent-ashby-2026-01-09-at-25647-pm.jpg)

## Configuring application request automation

Application request automation allows you to set criteria and your email settings in advance. Then any candidates meeting the set criteria will receive an email with an application request link so they can complete their application form.

To configure an automation rule:

- Navigate to Admin > Jobs & Applications > [Application Request Automations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/application-request-settings)
- Set up your draft configuration:

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UdTEFqRL-DBUsOAZ4KhNX_application-request-automations-acent-ashby-2026-01-09-at-30212-pm.jpg)

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Click `Add Field to Match` within the Condition section to determine your fields and values. Candidates who match the conditions you create here will trigger the automation.
:::

:::hint{type="warning" indent="3"}
Please note that conditions are evaluated each time a candidate moves to a new stage in your process. The following conditions are also built in to your application request conditions:

- The candidate must not be in an Archived state
- The candidate must not already have an application submitted for this job consideration.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Use the `Email Template` dropdown to select the email template used to email the candidate. Please note that the email template must include the Application Request Link substitution token.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Confirm the sender of the email. If you would like it to come from another user in your Ashby account, check out [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx) for more information on sending emails on another user's behalf.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
If you'd like to configure an additional automation rule, click `Create New Automation Rule﻿`
:::

- Once you've configured your automation rules, click `Activate Draft Configuration` and then `Enable Automation?` to activate your configuration. Moving forward, candidates who meet your criteria will trigger the automation.

## Manually generating an application request

If you'd like to send out application requests manually, you can take the following steps:

- Navigate to the profile of the candidate in question
- Click `More`, then `Send Application Form to Candidate`
- Confirm the job listed in the `Job` dropdown
- Click `Create` to generate the application request activity, or `Create and Email` to generate the activity and draft up an email to the candidate



![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/W5Igt5J5jaPizTvpAycRs_irene-mcintosh-customer-support-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-01-09-at-30347-pm.jpg)

## Viewing and amending the application request

Once generated, an activity will be added to the candidate's profile so you can track the activity status.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6PNXkVbjGqzBuQnLWcqe4_trudy-wilson-infrastructure-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-01-09-at-30639-pm.jpg)

You can click the three dots to the right of the activity to take the following actions:

- **Copy Application Request Link:** Copy the application request URL to share with the candidate directly
- **Mark as Sent:** Mark the application request link as sent and update the status of the activity
- **Delete Application Request:** Remove the application request activity from the candidate's profile.

Once the candidate has completed the application request, the activity will be resolved and removed from the Current Activities section of their profile. The completed form will show within the Forms section of the candidate's feed, along with a note that the candidate applied via an application request.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DcercfpXkWrk-YNDoPyYT_irene-mcintosh-customer-support-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-01-09-at-30821-pm.jpg)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why isn't the email template showing up under the automation configuration?

The application request token must be used in the email template for it to show up.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens after a candidate completes the application?

- The request is removed from the current activities section of the candidate's profile
- The application is marked as originating from a request
- Moving them to a new stage will not trigger another request


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does transferring a candidate to a new job trigger a new application request?

No. Transfers do not generate a new request because the system already has the candidate's information.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does considering a candidate for a different job trigger a new application request?

Yes. If you consider a candidate for a separate job (not a transfer), they can receive an application request for that job if they meet the criteria you have set.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Which job posting is used when a job has multiple postings?

The one marked as the default job posting.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What are the requirements for a job posting to be valid for application requests?

- The job's job posting must be published (does not need to be publicly listed)
- Must be on the external primary job board as internal-only postings will not work


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if the job posting becomes inaccessible after the email is sent?

The email cannot be recalled, but an error will display on the application request on the candidate's profile indicating the issue. The candidate's link will no longer work when clicked.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/d44bd397a75cb2a6bc4dbf641772ccce.png" size="78" width="1266" height="400" position="center" showCaption="false"}


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What conditions cause an error or prevent the request from sending?

- The job consideration's job is closed
- A published job posting doesn't exist for that job
- The default job posting is set to display on the internal job board only.


:::

::::ExpandableHeading
### Will automation work on all candidates who meet the conditions configured by the user?

There are some additional conditions we have under the hood that the user can't see but the candidate must meet. These are:

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
1\) Candidate must be not in the Archived stage for that job consideration&#x20;
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
2\) Candidate must not already have an application form submitted for this job consideration
:::


::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do auto-reject rules and application limits interact with this?

If an application is submitted through an application request link, we don't check those applications against auto-reject or application limit rules.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I set up application requests to go out to direct referrals automatically?

We don't support adding application requests directly in the [referral confirmation](docId\:T9YYsVWgNnSWSpaeQCmHr) sent to referred candidates. If the \{Application Request Link} substitution token is added to your organization's [referral confirmation template](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/referral-forms), the email will fail.

Instead, for direct referrals, we would recommend [configuring an application request automation ](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/application-requests#configuring-application-request-automation)with conditions specifying that the job consideration is a direct referral (for example `Job Consideration's Is Direct Referral` is `Yes`).&#x20;

You can also opt to configure a catch-all for candidates who don't have an application completed by a certain stage (for example, setting a condition field to be `Job Consideration's Reached Stage Type` with the value as `Active`) to ensure any candidates in active stages are prompted to submit an application for the job consideration. If you create application request automations for referrals, then we would recommend disabling your referral confirmation template. The application request automation can be used instead to send the referral confirmation and application request in a single email.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Q5tMOHK8mo0l7QKEzjg_E_application-request-released-slab-2026-03-09-at-115603-am.jpg)


:::


[title] Application Forms
[path] Applications/

Ashby provides a convenient default application form that is pre-configured in your site, or you can create customized application forms that can be applied to one or many jobs. In this guide, we cover customizing the default application form and creating alternate forms that can be linked to your jobs.

# Permissions & access

Application forms are available on all Ashby plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
- To create and update default or shared application forms, you must have **Organization Admin** permissions.
- To update an application form on a job posting, you must be an **Elevated Access** user with edit permissions on that job.
:::

# Application forms overview

Application forms are templates that define what candidates fill out when they apply to a job posting. Ashby gives every organization a default application form, lets admins create additional reusable forms in **Admin**, and lets individual job postings either link to a shared form or unlink and customize their own version.

## The main entities to know

| **Entity**                           | **What it is**                                                                                                      | **Where it's managed**                                                                              | **How it's used**                                                                                                                   |
| ------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Default application form             | The org-wide starter form that is automatically included on job postings unless changed.                            | **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Forms**                                                 | Acts as the baseline form for postings across the organization.                                                                     |
| Shared application form              | A reusable form template meant to be used across multiple jobs and postings.                                        | **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Forms**                                                 | Assigned from a posting via `Change Link`.                                                                                          |
| Custom/job-specific application form | A posting-specific version created when you `Unlink & Edit` from a job posting; changes only apply to that posting. | **Job > Job Postings >** select posting **> Application Form**                                      | Useful when one posting needs exceptions from the shared or default version.                                                        |
| Application request                  | A way to send an application form to sourced or referred candidates who did not apply normally.                     | Manual from candidate profile, or **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Request Automations** | Uses the form associated with the job's default job posting. See [Application Requests](docId:-1cI2DUBbnESgdM-dW8wW) for more info. |

## Where forms are assigned

Application forms are assigned on the job posting, not on the job itself. To set or change one, navigate to **Job > Job Postings >** select the posting **> Application Form** tab.

From there, admins (or users with the right access) can:

- Click `Change Link` to switch the posting to a different shared application form.
- Click `Unlink & Edit` to create a custom version just for that posting.

## Where forms are edited

There are two editing locations, depending on the kind of form:

- Shared and default forms are created and edited in **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Forms**.
- Custom/job-specific forms are edited from the **Application Form** tab on the job posting after using `Unlink & Edit`.

If you create a useful custom form at the posting level, you can click `Promote to Shared` so it becomes reusable in **Admin** for other jobs and postings.

## What admins should know before setup

- Every job posting starts with the default form unless you swap it out.
- Reusable forms are shared; one-off forms are custom. Shared forms are better when you want consistency across jobs.
- Custom/unlinked forms have reporting tradeoffs. You cannot filter by application form answers on an edited or custom form. Shared forms are recommended because custom forms are not reportable unless connected via form field connectors.
- Form field connectors let you map an application question to a candidate field so submitted answers populate candidate data and can be backfilled to earlier applications. Learn more at [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN) .
- Private questions are available for some field types; candidates can answer them, but responses are only visible to Organization Admins and users with the right Admin Private access on the job.

## Recommended setup approach

1. Start by defining your default form in **Admin** for questions most jobs should ask. See [Customize the default application form](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI) below to learn how.
2. Create additional shared forms in **Admin** for common variants by team, department, or workflow. See [Create application forms in Admin](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI) below.
3. On each job posting, choose the right shared form via `Change Link`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MS6aE1AZ6FtNhuZj26siB_director-of-platform-engineering-acent-ashby-2026-05-12-at-14756-pm.jpg" size="68" width="876" height="560" position="center" darkWidth="876" darkHeight="560" showCaption="false"}

4. Only use `Unlink & Edit` when a posting truly needs a one-off variation, as this reduces consistency and reporting flexibility.
5. Use form field connectors for any application answers you want to reuse in candidate fields, automations, or reporting workflows.

# Customize the default application form

The default application form can be customized and used as the starting point for all subsequent application forms.

**To customize the default application form:**

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organizational Settings > Application Forms**.
2. Locate the **Default Application Form**.
3. Edit the existing questions, or scroll to the bottom of the form to add new ones.
4. Once you're finished customizing, click `Save Form Changes` at the bottom of the form.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d7fc485f70c6f5ad6e276fb9142ba94f.png)

# Create application forms in Admin (recommended)

You can create more application forms for your jobs or teams in **Admin > Organizational Settings > Application Forms**.

**To create a reusable application form that can be linked to many jobs:**

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organizational Settings > Application Forms**.
2. Click `+ New`, then give your form a title.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/19be3ba170b27187ad245c8eaf86b6d2.png)

3. Click `Add Question` to add a field.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/28a33e389b552184d365791f4b6c7b4c.png)

4. Select the field type, then input the prompt. See the available application form field types below for a description of each field type and important notes.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/34b25c82edb137230518a76fd0953e90.png)

You can also reorder questions and sections by either clicking and dragging them, or by using the `Reorder` button on the form and determining the question order from there.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/b50cf9fd8757c256def76c24a6b2f72f.png" size="76" width="743" height="694" darkWidth="743" darkHeight="694" position="center" showCaption="false"}

5. Once you have added all the questions and sections, click `Save Form Changes`.

# Available application form field types

- **Short Answer** — Single line of unformatted text. LinkedIn URL responses are auto-populated on the candidate's profile.
- **Long Unformatted Answer** — Multiple lines of unformatted text.
- **Phone** — Only domestic or international phone numbers.
- **Email** — Only valid email addresses.
- **Multiple Choice** — Select a single option.
- **Checkboxes** — Select multiple options.
- **Date** — Only dates that can be selected via a date picker.
- **Yes/No** — Yes, no, or, if not required, no answer.
- **Number** — Only allows whole numbers (e.g. 1) or decimals (e.g. 1.5).

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
**Number** field type does not allow numbers (such as zipcodes) starting with 0. Use **Short Answer** for zipcodes or other fields that may have leading zeros.
:::

- **Resume\*** — Upload a single file and set it to the candidate's resume field. Can only be added once to a form.
- **Candidate's location** — Set the candidate's location. Can only be added once to a form.
- **Other location** — Allow another location to be added to the referral.
- **URL** — A clickable link to a website.
- **File\*** — Upload a single file.
- **Candidate's Education History** — See the candidate's education history. Can only be added once to the form. School names are standardized at submission, so variations, misspellings, and aliases ("MIT," "M.I.T.," "Massachusetts Institute of Technology") all resolve to a single school record.

:::hint{type="info"}
When adding the candidate's education history field to your form, you can specify the information asked for. You can opt to include or exclude the school, degree, field of study, start and end date fields as needed. Check the `Allow multiple entries` checkbox to allow those completing the form to add multiple qualifications. You can also set a minimum and maximum number of entries using the **Min** and **Max** fields.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f2NAhMfa7xJdZfczD0K___education-history-field-on-a-form.jpg)

Information added to this field always completes the **Education** section of the candidate's profile.
:::

# Question settings

## Required fields

All form question types support making fields required. To enable, check `Required` at the bottom of the question tile.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e6e7c50db028164926c3611258e2de54.png)

## Private fields

Some form question types support private fields. These fields are visible to candidates, but their responses are only visible to Organization Admins and users with Elevated Access - Admin Private [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk) on a job.

To enable, check the `Private` checkbox at the bottom of the question tile.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can link application form answers to custom fields on a candidate's profile. Learn more in [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN).
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f51bcbf136c5a1434ac7c5095a728df2.png)

# FAQs

### Is conditional logic supported on the application form questions?

Yes, you can read more on this at [Conditional Form Fields](docId:0Djc8ec1xuE0JLdgPOcfH).

### Can I automatically screen candidates based on their application form answers?

Yes. Check out [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota) for more information.

### What is the file size limit for resumes?

50MB is the maximum file size for resume uploads. Resumes need to be 16MB or smaller to be processed for full text searches and auto-filling application fields.

### Can I promote a custom application form and make it into a shared application form that can be used across multiple jobs and job postings?

Yes. When editing a custom application form within a job's job posting, you'll see a `Promote to Shared` option. Click this and confirm the shared application form's title, then click `Promote to Shared`. You can then access the shared application form within **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Forms**.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0b11adadec84cb29ec639bebf3105899.png)

### Can I set up a form to add candidates to a project, rather than consider them for a role?

Check out [Sourcing Forms](#) for more information on creating a form that allows candidates to sign up for your talent pool.

### Where can I view completed application forms on the candidate's profile?

Completed application forms can be accessed in the candidate's feed under the **Forms** tab.

[title] Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings
[path] Applications/

***

Candidate Fraud Detection allows you to manually run fraud checks and automatically flag inbound job applications that contain potential fraud signals. These fraud signals are identified based on specific criteria, and the applications are segmented for manual review, helping you streamline the identification of potentially fraudulent applications.

This article explains how Candidate Fraud Detection works and the steps to configure it in your Admin settings.

# Permissions & access

Candidate Fraud Detection is available across all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
Only those with **Organizational Admin** privileges can configure Candidate Fraud Detection settings.
:::

# How it works

When Candidate Fraud Detection is enabled, this tool analyzes four signal categories on applications:

- Device
- IP address
- Email address (only if this information has been provided as part of the candidate's application)
- Phone number (only if this information has been provided as part of the candidate's application)

The analysis of these areas is used to identify suspicious patterns that could be indicative of fraudulent activity.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Once Candidate Fraud Detection is enabled, Ashby automatically analyzes new applications as they are submitted. Existing applications are not analyzed automatically, but you can run fraud checks on them manually or in bulk. See [Running Candidate Fraud Detection Checks & Reviewing Fraud Signals](docId\:utOwntvTiXHyR2gC-Eu2a) for more information.
:::

# Enabling the Candidate Fraud Detection tool

## Enabling admin settings

Candidate Fraud Detection must be enabled in your admin settings before it can be enabled for specific applications.

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features** and scroll to the **Security** section.
2. Enable the **Fraud Detection** toggle:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zGVxOAhNPisfFkL9tr6G3_opt-in-features-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-45035-pm.jpg" size="78" width="794" height="257" position="center" alt="Screenshot showing the Fraud Detection tile toggled on." darkWidth="794" darkHeight="257" showCaption="false"}

3. Scroll back up and locate the **Candidate Fraud Signal Summary** tile. To receive an AI-generated summary of fraud signals (recommended), turn this on.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ABEd4Yf-vQmsOFErZEexE_opt-in-features-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-45229-pm.jpg" size="62" width="539" height="402" position="center" alt="Screenshot showing the Candidate Fraud Signal Summary tile toggled on." darkWidth="539" darkHeight="402" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Using Candidate Fraud Detection requires two AI credits per candidate. Enabling Candidate Fraud Signal Summaries does not add any additional charge on top of this.

- Information on how AI credits are allotted can be found in [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm).
- For information on purchasing additional credits, see [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE)
:::

## Enabling fraud detection on all jobs or specific jobs

To enable fraud detection across all jobs, or jobs that match a set of filters:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Security**.
2. Check `Enable By Default`. Stopping here enables fraud detection on all jobs.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UUBL0EqKbO9nadkNnNB44_security-settings-ashby-2026-06-23-at-95354-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="604" height="334" darkWidth="604" darkHeight="334" showCaption="false"}

3. To run fraud detection by default only on certain jobs, select the `+ Add Field to Match` button to add filter criteria — for instance, jobs only in a specific department or for high-volume roles.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KWLAvT_mIKi2yjXlUDFP7_security-settings-ashby-2026-06-23-at-100546-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Hovering over the three dots next to each criterion, or over the `+ Add Field to Match` button, allows you to choose from `And`, `Or`, or `Not` operators, defining whether all criteria must be true, any criteria can be true, or the criteria must not be true in order to trigger fraud detection. In the screenshot above, `Or` logic is used, indicating that if any of the criteria below are met (the job is in the Engineering department **or** the job is Product Manager), Candidate Fraud Detection triggers by default.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/P0pUH0dHJbtug4HMzhhVm_security-settings-ashby-2026-06-23-at-101100-am.jpg)
:::

## Enabling/disabling fraud detection for specific jobs

:::hint{type="info"}
By default, fraud detection runs across all jobs when enabled within the **Security** section of **Admin**. You can also enable fraud detection for specific jobs only, or turn off fraud detection for certain jobs if you have it set as enabled by default.
:::

To access and update the fraud detection settings for a specific job:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select the relevant job.
2. Navigate to the **Settings** section of the job.
3. Use the `Enable Fraud Detection` setting to enable or disable the tool as required.

![Screenshot showing the Fraud Detection setting enabled under the Settings tab of a job.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JxfrWNvn0wNYgtccrHtBd_backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-03-19-at-43315-pm.jpg)

# FAQs

### Can I give feedback on the AI summary provided when fraud signals are detected?

Yes. Click the three dots on the AI summary and select `Give Feedback`.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/8fa801e2a213087be60ca316e279f766.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="588" height="284" darkWidth="588" darkHeight="284" showCaption="false"}

From there you can give a positive or negative rating and add any comments. Feedback is greatly appreciated.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/537c556a273395596abd29db7ffd2aa8.png" size="60" isUploading="false" width="532" height="342" darkWidth="532" darkHeight="342" showCaption="false"}

### How do I enable the AI-generated Candidate Fraud Signal Summary option?

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features**.
2. If you have not yet opted in to AI features, opt-in is required before enabling this feature.
3. Check the **AI-Generated Candidate Fraud Signal Summary** checkbox to enable this specific AI feature.

:::hint{type="info"}
This step enables the AI-generated summary only, not the Candidate Fraud Detection tool as a whole.
:::

### Can I filter candidates by their fraud status?

Yes. Use the **Fraud Status** field to filter candidates by their status when it comes to fraud detection. Use the drop-down to select the fraud status you are looking for. The available options are:

- Multiple Fraud Signals - Unreviewed
- Marked Fraudulent
- Marked False Positive
- Marked Uncertain - Flagged for Monitoring

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/cd6cc2535b3aee6e30c33b1e422fc691.png" size="50" width="609" height="477" position="center" darkWidth="609" darkHeight="477" showCaption="false"}

### Are fraud signal detection checks only run at the Application Review stage?

Yes. Candidate fraud signal checks are currently only run automatically at the Application Review stage, and only at the point of application submission.

### Are there reporting options for candidate fraud signals?

Yes. You can find report examples and further information in [Reporting on Candidate Fraud Status and Signals](docId\:Ghcyswv8jAfYvMttF2ias).

[title] How can I ask for and add reference feedback in Ashby?
[path] Candidates/

While we don’t have a specific tool to ask for references in Ashby, here is a guide covering how you can ask for reference information and record reference checks.

## Using Questionnaires to request reference information from a candidate

To request reference contact information from a candidate, you can opt to create a [Questionnaire](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/questionnaire). We have more on setting these up at [Questionnaires](docId\:KgRji3jGZ-8tZR5bb1-kh)&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
Ensure you have an email template in place [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates) with a substitution token for `Questionnaire Link` - otherwise you will not be able to set up the automation options.
:::

You can opt to either add a questionnaire activity to your interview plan to automatically prompt you to send out the questionnaire or set up automation within the questionnaire setup itself.

## Add a Questionnaire activity to your interview plan

To add a Questionnaire activity to your interview profile, head into your job, then click Interview Plan on the left-hand sidebar. Find the stage where you plan to check the candidate’s references, then click `Add Activity To…` then `Add Activity` and `Questionnaire`. Select the reference questionnaire and determine the email template you’d like to use to send out the request.

When creating the activity, you will also have the option to add automation, so the questionnaire is sent out as soon as the candidate is moved to the specified stage.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8cd8fefd62eb4cbeb1b0ca2b7bfcafaf"}

### Set up Questionnaire automation

You can also automate the sending of a questionnaire with our new automation option. This can done on the Automation tab within the reference survey itself. More on automating questionnaires at [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB).

We would recommend this option if you’d like to send out the questionnaire for any candidate who meets the criteria set, rather than setting it up on each job’s interview plan.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/77952da4c7b94ce5bcb02fc8bb3321b8"}

### Sending a one-off reference request from the candidate profile

To send the questionnaire out to the candidate on a one-off basis, you can do this on the candidate’s profile under `More` and `Create Questionnaire Request`*.*

You will have the option to just generate a questionnaire request and link, or to generate the link and email it out to the candidate.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6ea64414be184ff180726dcee0686a9e"}

## Submitted reference checks via a feedback form within Ashby

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ed74083fc34d409b9eef0e946ad43d9f"}

Once you’ve received the reference information from the candidate, we recommend scheduling any meetings outside of Ashby.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you’re asking specific questions or getting specific information from the reference, we recommend setting up a new feedback form specifically for reference checks. You can read more about setting up feedback forms at [Feedback Forms and Interviews](docId\:hLojGXRvp_xkuw1amMKUR).

To add any information or feedback from the reference, head to the candidate’s profile and click the `More` button in the top-right corner, then choose `Submit Feedback `from the drop-down. You can then select your reference-specific feedback form and fill out the fields needed, then submit it.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3f9fb6d045f2d74c756f179332c34ec8.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4e87e1af7aacdf43581ded0d6864c33b.png)
:::
::::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I send a direct booking link to a reference?

No, if you are meeting with a candidate’s reference, the meeting would need to be set up outside of Ashby. Direct booking links are used to schedule interviews with the candidate themselves.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I ask for references and follow this reference check process if the candidate has already been hired?

Yes, you can still follow the steps above to ask for references and add reference feedback.
:::


[title] Interviewer Pools
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Setup/

Interviewer Pools is an admin tool to help you group and manage interviewers based on their qualifications or other attributes. If you have certain individuals who are qualified to lead certain interviews, for instance, you can assign an interview pool when setting up the interview activity to select from multiple qualified interviewers.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Interviewer Pools can be used independently on in conjunction with [Interviewer Training ](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb), which is a part of the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1).
:::

# Permissions & access

The Interviewer Pools tool is available on the Foundations, Plus, Enterprise and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

See the table below for information on the roles that have access to create to interviewer pools.

| Access Role                                                    | Has Access? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌           |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ❌\*         |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅           |

:::hint{type="info"}
\*Only Organization Admins can configure interviewer pools by default. Elevated Access users can be given access to this feature if needed. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e) .
:::

# Interviewer pool setup steps

1. To create a pool, navigate to [Interviewer Pools](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interviewer-tags) in **Admin**. Click `+ New` in the top right corner and give the pool a name.

![Highlights the + New button to add a new interviewer pool.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8d587893b94945e0b169f733e67439bf.png)

2. On the page for the pool you just created click `+ Add Interviewers` under the **Qualified Members** section. Search and/or select an employee from the **Employee** drop-down. Click `Submit` to add the employee.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XwfsEIEClDmvLuJxwdsIh_interviewer-pools-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-34243-pm.jpg" size="90" width="842" height="386" position="center" darkWidth="842" darkHeight="386" alt="Shows the Add Interviewer window where you can add an employee and click Submit." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
You can also add employees to interview pools as **qualified members** via the **Interview Info** tab of their profile. Adding an employee directly to an interviewer pool's qualified members using this method will remove them from the pool's training path if they are currently training for that pool.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
The section to add **Trainees** is only for Enterprise plans with [Interviewer Training](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb)  enabled, or those who have purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) .
:::

# Managing interviewer pools

Once you have created an interviewer pool, you can update it at any time by navigating to **Admin > Interviewer Pools** and clicking on the pool name.

On the **Interviewers** tab, you can add or remove additional interviewers from the pool as needed.  The search bar allows you to search for specific members to take action on them.

![Shows the interviewer list in the pool with the name 'henry' added to the search bar and the results.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-d5WdEwDUg1o4_pr0w-eC_image.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have interviewer training in your plan, you will see an option to pause membership in the pool.  This will prevent the employee from being added to interviews when this pool is used.

To pause an interviewer globally (e.g. prevent them from being added to interviews for a duration of time, such as when on vacation), you can navigate to their **employee profile > Interviewer Info** and turn on `Pause Interviewer`. For more information, see [Assigning Interviewers](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo) .
:::

On the **Settings** tab, you can rename the interviewer pool or toggle the training settings if your plan includes training.

![Points out the interviewer pool name field where the interview pool can be renamed at any time.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zHpExltA7RusfUjivz8d5_interviewer-pools-ashby-2026-08-19-at-102721-am.png)

If at any point an interviewer pool is no longer needed, you can select the `Archive` button in the top right to archive the pool.

Using the filter in the above right of the pool list, you can opt to view all archived pools.  Clicking on a pool and selecting `Restore` will restore the pool to the active list.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/11I9pbA0ChxXTSd1aUNtO_interviewer-pools-ashby-2026-08-19-at-103403-am.png" size="60" isUploading="false" width="320" height="176" darkWidth="320" darkHeight="176" alt="Shows the active/archived filter with Archived selected to view only archived pools." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
The Notifications tab is only relevant to those with interviewer training included in their plan.  See [Interviewer Training](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb) for more information.
:::

:::hint{type="success"}
Congrats, you've learned to create and manage interview pools! See [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) for more information on adding pools to interview activities, or [Interviewer Training](docId\:c_EO5ek8Ip34Bcrzy2ePb) for how to use pools of trainees.
:::

# FAQ

### Are there limits on how many interview pools I can create based on my plan?

No, any plan type can create as many interviewer pools as they need.  Foundations, Legacy Plus, and Plus customers without the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) are limited to a single interviewer pool that has a training path.


[title] Am I warned when scheduling if an interviewer has already been a part of the interviewing process?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

When manually scheduling interviews, the *i* icon beside the interviewer’s details will turn yellow if they have already been a part of the process or if they referred the candidate for the role. You can hover over the *i* icon for additional information and decide whether you would like to continue or replace the interviewer.

Please note this is currently only available when scheduling interviews using the Manual Schedule option. The same warnings will not be shown when generating direct booking links or creating schedule interview activities.

### Overview

When scheduling an interview using the Manual Schedule option,`i` icons appear beside each interviewer on the calendar interface. You can hover over these icons to view information like their interview limits and interviewer preferences. You can read more on setting interview loads and preferences in [Assigning Interviewers](docId\:U87FcsBRUH9pkClYl2QKo).

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If an interviewer has already interviewed the candidate for this job consideration, or if they referred the candidate, then the *i* icon will show in yellow, indicating a warning.

The interviewer information will still be displayed when you hover over the `i` icon but with a Warnings section. In this example we can see the interviewer has already interviewed the candidate. The details of the previous interview are also included for your reference if applicable.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1f712049a65aab5c62b9968ad53e2425.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b242d148ff8c9795644ee8836640fcde.png)


:::
::::

### Will the warnings show if I’m choosing alternate interviewers to schedule from an interview pool?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Yes, when you opt to select an alternate from an interviewer pool, any interviewers who referred the candidate or who have already interviewed them will have a yellow `i` icon beside their details. Again, you can hover over the icon to view any warnings.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4e4379a6d28c3a85e3ddde998b8cf47e.png)

![Screenshot 2025-01-10 at 12.35.32.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/978e017db2e2c6651cd972f2ca00d618.png)


:::
::::


[title] Interviews: Advanced Scheduling Add-On
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/


[title] Keywords
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Setup/

Scheduling Keywords allow you to identify events on interviewer’s calendars that can be scheduled over by either you or a candidate when booking interviews.

Scheduling Keywords are available on Foundations, Plus, Enterprise and Legacy Plus plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/bba9c9ecc524490e8bbfc53b6b876584?sid=0a1ce439-7acc-4ba6-9155-e38c1e05f749"}

## Adding Scheduling Keywords

Scheduling Keywords can be created within Admin  > Interviews and Scheduling > [Scheduling Keywords](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/scheduling-keywords). When setting up your scheduling keywords, you can assign them to one of two different categories:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Free:** If these keywords are detected in a calendar event title, candidates will be able to schedule interviews over this event when booking via a direct booking link. When manually scheduling using Manual Schedule, interviews booked over or overlapping these events will not be counted as a scheduling conflict.

**Soft Conflicts:** Calendar events with these keywords in the event title can’t be booked over by candidates booking with a direct booking link. If scheduling an interview using Manual Schedule, any interviews that overlap with these events will be seen as a soft conflict.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem


![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b890e1fe326958c79ac8d6e5cb969c38.png)
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that if the calendar event is set as Free instead of Busy within the event settings in the interviewer’s Google or Microsoft 365 calendar, then candidates will be able to schedule over these when scheduling with a direct booking link, even if it’s labelled as a soft conflict in Ashby.
:::

Click in the `New keyword…` field, type in your keyword and then click the *+* icon to add the keyword to the list. Keywords are not case sensitive but any spaces or special characters will be respected. You cannot add the same keyword to both the Free and Soft Conflict lists.

## Scheduling when Scheduling Keywords are being applied

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
*Free Scheduling Keywords*

When using Manual Schedule to book in interviews, any calendar events with titles that contain any scheduling keywords in the Free category will show up in light purple.

When scheduling over that event, the interviewer will show as available. Here is an example where ‘Quick sync’ is a scheduling keyword that has been added in the Free category.

If sending a direct booking link out to the candidate, they will also see this time as available to book.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem


![](https://cdn.zappy.app/174ab4eb1a96e54cfbed5839e3ee7b6d.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e8bf1e3946b0a7bf44da8f7d1c214408.png)
:::
::::



*Soft Conflict Scheduling Keywords*

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When using Quick Schedule to schedule in an interview, calendar events with titles that contain any scheduling keywords in the Soft Conflict category will show in light orange.

If scheduling over that event, a soft conflict will be highlighted beside the interviewer’s details.

A soft conflict event will not show as available to candidates booking via a direct booking link.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f3c7eda74eef742427d616707b31a337.png)


:::
::::



## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Are scheduling keywords still detected on calendar events that are set as *Private*?

If an event set as Private includes a scheduling keyword in the event title, we will still identify and mark is as Free or Soft Conflict accordingly. The title of the event would still show as *Busy* and the keyword identified will not be shown when scheduling.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dedcdbf93993f0ee11eb13f83f50155e.png)
:::


[title] Meeting Hours
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Initial Setup/

Meeting hours allow you to set regular availability for scheduling interviews. Meeting hours can be set for the company, for individual interviewers, and for schedule interview activities.

:::hint{type="info"}
Busy events on Google or Microsoft calendars also sync and block off availability if you have either integration configured. Any dates your interviewer is unavailable or out of office (OOO) sync over and are reflected in their availability.
:::

# Permissions & access

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions**
Only Organization Admins can amend company-wide meeting hours. Each user with their calendar connected in Ashby can adjust their own personal meeting hours. Those with Elevated Access - Admin or higher can set specific meeting hours on schedule interview activities.
:::

# Set company meeting hours

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/873ebbf301e84c499d780075f0f18242"}

In **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >&#x20;**[Meetings & Time Zone](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/meetings-and-time/meeting-hours), you can set the meeting hours for the company as a whole.

If personal meeting hours or interview schedule activity hours have not been set, the hours listed here show as the interviewer's availability. Ashby takes into account events marked as busy on the interviewer's Google calendar when showing their availability.

Click and drag on the schedule to add or remove meeting hours. Purple indicates available hours, and the white areas indicate times that are not available for scheduling.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/82d3d9089c4fb2d4c51847f4abae31fb.png)

## How do meeting hours work with interviewer time zones?

Meeting hours show in the interviewer's time zone. If your interviewer is in MDT and the company meeting hours are set from 9:00am–5:00pm, this is reflected as 9:00am–5:00pm MDT for that interviewer, provided they have not set their own personal meeting hours.

# Recruiting Blocks

Recruiting Blocks are different from Meeting Hours. If your organization is on the Enterprise plan or has purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1), you can use Recruiting Blocks. Meeting Hours define recurring availability windows. Recruiting Blocks use specifically titled calendar events to identify when an interviewer or schedule can be booked. See [Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q) for more information.

# Company holidays

On the **Company Holidays** tab of **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Meeting Hours**, you can determine any company-wide or public holidays on the company calendar. Once company-wide holidays are added, the entire team is marked as unavailable for interviews for the full day.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4b4be3de7da7ee41d4a419e9788a8b8a.png)

This means:

- When using Manual Scheduling, interviewers show as unavailable for meetings on company holidays.
- When using Direct Booking, candidates cannot schedule interviews on company holidays.
- When requesting candidate availability, candidates cannot select company holidays.
- When requesting proposed schedules for debriefs, Ashby excludes company holidays from the proposed dates.

# Set personal meeting hours

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/be57ed984a404c83bddc1f0b9d019609"}

Navigate to **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Meeting Hours](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/meeting-hours) to set your personal meeting hours. Select the `Enable Custom Hours?` checkbox and set your available hours.

Meeting hours set here override company meeting hours when you are specified as an interviewer. Ashby takes into account conflicts on your Google calendar when showing your availability.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1196b7e933dab139f1aaedfb85c23521.png)

# Timezone

On this tab, you can set your organization's default time zone. This time zone is used for any users who haven't synced their Google Calendar in Ashby, or who haven't specified their own time zone in their personal settings.

Read more about [how timezones work here](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b7481162fb5c4c14059cfc93806d9d0f.png)

# Set meeting hours for a schedule interview activity

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) for more information on setting meeting hours within schedule interview activities.
:::

# Troubleshooting availability

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b389f991db1040f8862fb0df4911143e"}

After generating a direct booking link for an interview, you can use the `Troubleshoot Availability` option to check that availability is showing as expected.

To access the `Troubleshoot Availability` option, click `Actions` on the activity, then select `Troubleshoot Availability`. If you test your booking link and don't see your availability reflected correctly, this tool helps you diagnose why.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/37f717e4c2b80344eeb68833d6e5acde.png)

If a time slot shows as unavailable when it shouldn't be, click the exclamation point beside it to see why.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/da5fce72ef7f3a5b63ca7ea448f8b879.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If unavailable times show a `This time is outside user's meeting hours` message when troubleshooting, check the meeting hours for the schedule activity first. Then have the interviewers listed check their meeting hours in their personal settings. If either are active and set, they override company meeting hours.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Why is there no availability on my direct booking links?](docId:1YrO8-XXh3EhEM0lYeDjk)  for more information on troubleshooting availability.&#x20;
:::

# FAQs

### How can I ask the candidate for their availability for an interview?

When setting up an interview for a candidate, you can create a candidate availability link. The link prompts the candidate to select when they are available. You can then schedule the interview based on the availability they provide. For more information, see [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).

### My Google events aren't blocking off my availability — why?

If the event is on an external personal calendar that is shared with your company Google account, those events are not taken into account. Add those events to your company calendar to block them from your interview availability.

If the event is on your company Google calendar, check if the event is set to `Free`. Only events set to `Busy` block your availability.

If interviews have been booked in Ashby but the calendar invites have not been sent out, those interviews block availability for the interviewers on the panel.

### Do my Google working hours translate to meeting hours in Ashby automatically?

They do not — we recommend adding personal meeting hours that match your working hours in Google.

### How do time zones work in Ashby?

The time zone set on your account, along with your meeting hours, determines your availability for interviews. You can check the time zone on your user account in [Personal Info](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info).

If you have the Google Workspace or the Microsoft 365 integration in place, your time zone syncs from your Google or Microsoft calendar.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2343671c3415f3ec6e29b707a3a79675.png)

You can also set interview activity-specific time zones in the **Meeting Hours** tab on each schedule interview activity. Setting a Primary Interview time zone ensures that any custom meeting hours you set for that schedule interview activity are reflected in that time zone, even if interviewers have a different time zone set in their personal settings.

*Schedule Activity Timezones*

You can also use the drop-down to select your time zone if it is not the same as the organization's default time zone (set in [Meetings & Time Zone](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/meetings-and-time/timezone)) and it's not syncing from your Google Calendar.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7e65aa7a24e8f5f6ab0929e8f2d32e23.png)

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
If you do not see Synced from Google Calendar or Synced from Calendar in the **Your Timezone** field, this may be because the domain on your email does not match the domain of the Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 tenant integrated with Ashby.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you have a secondary domain on your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 tenant, reach out to Support at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to get this added.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ceabd4027f6bca2a3888a4fe5d3c9701.png)

### Why is a team member showing as available for interviews all day, every day?

Users can only set personal meeting hours if their Google Calendar is synced. If the user was added manually and not provisioned automatically via the Google Workspace integration, ask them to sign out and then log back in using the `Sign In with Google` option. This helps ensure their calendar is synced so they can set personal meeting hours.

### Can I sync additional personal calendars with Ashby?

If you are a Google Workspace user, you can sync additional personal calendars. For more information, see [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM).

If you're looking to sync company holidays, we recommend using the [company holidays](docId\:UZCtzXVPfXqeftMihW-jo) feature described above.

### Can I add meeting buffers to avoid back-to-back interviews?

You can! If you'd like to apply meeting buffers to interviews by default, see [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml). For more on adding meeting buffers to a schedule interview activity, see [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).

### Candidates are only seeing a limited amount of availability — why?

The availability shown to the candidate depends on your meeting hours and calendar availability, as well as the settings for your scheduling interview activity or your scheduling defaults. Check the **Minimum Scheduling Notice** and **Rolling Days Available** settings to ensure they are correct. For more on configuring this, see [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) and [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml).

### Can I create holidays for a specific region or location?

Ashby currently supports setting up holidays at the organization level. You can't configure separate holiday calendars by region or location.

[title] Newsletters
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

You can create, customize, and send newsletters to leads and candidates within Ashby. If someone signs up for a talent pool, applies for a role, or attends a virtual or in-person event, you can send out updates and information on future roles.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- To configure a domain, you need access to manage the DNS records of the domain you're configuring. For guidance, see [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2).
:::

# Permissions & access

Newsletters are available on the Enterprise plan only.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

- Users with Elevated Access and above can access and edit newsletters.
- Users can only send newsletters to candidates considered for the jobs they have **Can email/schedule candidates** permissions for.

# Overview

The video below gives a short overview. All steps in this video are covered in more detail in this guide.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/88efdb23e9a7463484ed80bee0e51772"}

# Creating a newsletter

1. Navigate to **Sourcing >&#x20;**[Newsletters](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/newsletters/all).
2. Click `New`.
3. Give your newsletter a title.

![Click the + New button to create a newsletter.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e3ac7f997e9e2a6dbdc4312e6b12cbbb.png)

The newsletter editor then opens.

# Newsletter editor

## Page overview

![The content editor page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/95NF69srGF8cfHtOvkOen_the-newsletter-content-editor.jpg)

- **Audience:** Review candidates who have received your newsletter and track metrics like opens and clicks.
- **Edit:** The editing page for your newsletter.
- **Desktop/Mobile view:** Click between the views to see what your newsletter looks like on a desktop and on a mobile device.
- **Review + Send:** Once your newsletter contents, your audience, subject line, and sender are determined, you can send out your newsletter from here.
- **Settings:** Amend your newsletter title, add filters to create your audience, and add your subject and sender for your newsletter email here.
- **More:** Create a copy of your newsletter, or archive it.
- **Content:** Drag and drop blocks to add content to your newsletter.
- **Rows:** Click and drag row structures for your content.
- **Settings (Newsletter Content):** Set content-specific settings like the default font and background color here.

# Adding content to your newsletter

When building your newsletter, you can drag row structures over from the `Rows` tab to create your structure. Once you have rows in place, you can drag your content blocks over to start adding in text, videos, images, and more.

![Adding rows to your newsletter in the content editor.](https://cdn.zappy.app/4a9097edf7a355bcfb10960eafe0dc45.png)

When dragging and dropping a row into your newsletter, drag it to the very bottom of the previous row or between two rows. A **Drag it here** message appears before you drop it. If you drag and drop a row without seeing the **Drag it here** message, Ashby does not add the row.

![Adding content blocks in the content editor.](https://cdn.zappy.app/c3b749d5b03447b4befb35f8249dbfab.png)

Once you've added a new row, the spaces to drop content blocks in appear. Click the `Contents` tab to access your content options, then click and drag the blocks as needed.

![The newsletter content editor.](https://cdn.zappy.app/234c297311f3b3b21087529222b22e53.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Click the `Save` button to save your newsletter as you make edits.
:::

## Content block options

- **Title:** Add a heading to your newsletter or titles throughout.
- **Paragraph:** Add text in a paragraph format.
- **List:** Add text in a list format.
- **Image:** Add an image.
- **Button:** Add a button. The button can send users to a web page, prompt them to send an email, make a call, or send an SMS. Ashby tracks clicks using buttons you add to your newsletter.
- **Divider:** Divide content with a single line.
- **Spacer:** Add space between content blocks.
- **Social:** Add icons that link to social pages. You can amend the icons and URLs as needed in the content properties tab.
- **HTML:** Add your own code to one of these blocks. Adding your own code can affect how the code renders.
- **Video:** Add a Vimeo or YouTube video link to generate a preview image in your newsletter. This image then links to the video in question.
- **Icons:** Configure and add any company-specific icons you'd like to use in newsletters.
- **Menu:** Configure a menu with options that can link out to a website or prompt the user to complete actions like sending an email, sending an SMS, or making a call.
- **Text:** A text block with no specific structure.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Substitution tokens cannot be used in newsletters.
:::

## Previewing a newsletter

Once you've added content and saved your newsletter, preview it by clicking `Actions`, then `Preview`.

![Previewing a newsletter under the Actions button.](https://cdn.zappy.app/24526ec4fa3e645db20ea09d0a0562b9.png)

On the preview screen, you can view how the newsletter looks to candidates, both on a desktop and a mobile device. To exit the preview screen, click the `X` icon.

![You can switch between viewing the desktop version and the mobile version of the newsletter.](https://cdn.zappy.app/76d021de2505ecd6b362a77d52a751c8.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Clicking YouTube and Instagram social links in a newsletter preview leads to an error. These links function correctly when the email is officially sent.
:::

## Content settings

The `Settings` tab in the editor allows you to make adjustments to how the content is displayed in your newsletter. You have the following options:

- **Content Area Width:** Determine how wide the area the content is contained in should be.
- **Content Area Alignment:** Determine whether you'd like content to be left or center-aligned.
- **Background Color:** Determine the background color of the newsletter.
- **Content Area Background Color:** Determine the background color of the area content is contained in.
- **Default Font:** Select the font that should be used by default in your newsletter.
- **Link Color:** Confirm the color that hyperlinked text shows in.

You can also add a preheader in the **Optional Properties** section.

![The settings section within the content creator.](https://cdn.zappy.app/602bdfc756bcf004dbbd35c0f1b6063f.png)

# Settings and adding an audience

Once you've added your newsletter content and structure, you can set up your audience, or determine the candidates and leads that should receive this newsletter.

To start setting up your audience, click the `Settings` button above the editor.

![The Settings button within the newsletter editor.](https://cdn.zappy.app/1506f33fc39ed840251b2c9f072d52c8.png)

You see the following options:

![The Settings section of the newsletter.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3390d55abeef8262d4b8540519dca51d.png)

- **Title:** Adjust your newsletter's title.
- **Audience:** Add filters here to determine the candidates that you would like to send this newsletter to. Ashby automatically excludes candidates who have already unsubscribed or are marked as **Do not contact**.
- **From:** Determine the sender of the email from the drop-down.
- **Subject:** Add in the email subject here.
- **Include unsubscribe link:** Newsletters are required to include an unsubscribe link, so you cannot uncheck this box.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you send your newsletter from an email that doesn't have an inbox that's regularly monitored, you can set a custom reply-to address here by unchecking the `Use this email as the newsletter's reply-to address` checkbox. The reply-to address added receives replies to the newsletter instead.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
The `Unsubscribe` link appears in the bottom-left corner of your newsletter.

![The unsubscribe link included at the bottom of the email.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1aoMj37tzfzWQHjeQKK7J_screenshot-20251124-082056-email-2026-04-10-at-101809-am.jpg)
:::

## Using filters to create your audience

To set up your audience, click `Add Field To Match` and add in filters as needed. In this example, the filters search for leads and candidates that have been added to a specific project (for more on projects, see [Projects](docId\:NeOuKpzGi4kDAtdSyMhez)).

![Setting the filters for your audience.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b9db6a1bb6e2f7e3084e4d89def7e3da.png)

Once you have filtered for your audience, click `View Audience` to see the full list of leads and candidates and confirm this is the correct audience for your newsletter.

![The View Audience button allows you to see a full list of newsletter recipients.](https://cdn.zappy.app/d26f473b19e14780df32a9f18d29010a.png)

# Sending your newsletter

To start the process of sending out your newsletter to your audience, click `Review and Send`. From here, you can review your settings and view the newsletter contents and your audience one more time.

![Reviewing the newsletter contents prior to sending it.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f4d454e05497b3b0b61f01217fb87019.png)

If you need to make any adjustments to the settings or the content, click `Cancel` to return to the editor. To ship out your newsletter, click `Send Newsletter`.

![Reviewing the details of your newsletter before sending it.](https://cdn.zappy.app/c7ca1d7a8ba2507ce0dae199f9b6eda5.png)

If you are sending out your newsletter to a large audience, Ashby sends the emails over a longer period of time. You can track the send status for each candidate on the `Audience` tab for your newsletter once the sending process has started.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If your organization's bounce rate for newsletter emails becomes too high, Ashby may disable your ability to send newsletters. To maintain a healthy email sending reputation and ensure continued delivery of your newsletters, keep your bounce rate low by only sending newsletters to candidates that have actively signed up to receive newsletters from your organization.

To build a list of newsletter subscribers, we recommend using [Sourcing Forms](docId:0uEUEalX1VA_AY8S18ldO).
:::

# Tracking open rates and click rates

You can track the size of your newsletter audience, how many emails have been sent, and your open and click rates for your newsletter on the `Audience` tab of your newsletter. You can add filters or search by specific candidate name as needed.

You can also use the `Audience` tab to track the status of each candidate's email when sending out newsletters.

![The Audience section of the newsletter section allows you to track the status of the newsletter activity.](https://cdn.zappy.app/95663521f1a381fe821cbfc3aa946cb4.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
To track clicks, add a link or button to your newsletter.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking to build up an audience? Check out our guide on [Sourcing Forms](docId:0uEUEalX1VA_AY8S18ldO).
:::


[title] Activity Configuration
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/


[title] Surveys & Questionnaires
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

These guides teach you how to create and use Surveys & Questionnaires in Ashby. We currently support Candidate Experience Surveys (NPS), Diversity Surveys, EEOC Surveys, and Questionnaires. Review the guides below to learn more and get started setting them up!

See the table below for more information on the access roles that have the ability to set up surveys in Ashby and who can send out a survey.

| Access Role                                                    | Can Configure Surveys? | Can Send Out Surveys to Candidates? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                      | ❌                                   |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌                      | ✅                                   |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌                      | ✅                                   |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ❌                      | ✅                                   |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                      | ✅                                   |

[Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB)

[Diversity Surveys](docId\:PSv0-HgPj3RvnmKMISJI4)

[EEOC Surveys](docId\:pvVzo8-M3-2DF2RGT3tRA)

[Questionnaires](docId\:KgRji3jGZ-8tZR5bb1-kh)

[Example Survey Questions](docId:8XNQU9jkIfBEj9nkyF7sW)

[Quality of Hire Surveys](docId:8HGJn7fBdlsBnk1fK-2Db)&#x20;

[Hiring Manager Experience Surveys](docId\:Fl73J4CypI6sF86H7Tzra)

[title] What do the card colors mean on the Candidate Pipeline report?
[path] Candidates/

This document walks through the card colors you will see on the Candidate Pipeline report and their meaning.

![This report shows the Candidate Pipeline for the Corporate Usability Analyst role. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dhou7fea-VEDfR1FSKkXj_screenshot2022-12-23at72359am.png)

The below table shows the Candidate Pipeline for the Corporate Usability Analyst role.

:::hint{type="info"}
When visualizing the Candidate Pipeline via the card (kanban) view, the colors on each card are based on either time or activity.
:::

If there are structured activities (interviews, take home assignments, etc) in the active stage, the card colors mean the following:

| **Card Color** | **Activity**                                                                               | **Examples**                                                                             |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Green**      | Up to date                                                                                 | Scheduled                                                                                |
| **Yellow**     | Waiting on candidate to submit availability, accept offer, interview needs scheduling, etc | Needs Scheduling, Booking Link Sent, Submitted Availability, Waiting on Offer Acceptance |
| **Red**        | Hiring team needs to take action                                                           | Needs Decision, Waiting on Feedback                                                      |

If there are no structured activities for that specific stage, the card will say In Stage Since, and the card colors mean in the following:

| **Card Color** | **Time**          |
| -------------- | ----------------- |
| **Green**      | In stage \<2 days |
| **Yellow**     | In stage 2-5 days |
| **Red**        | In stage 5+ days  |


[title] How do I use multi-day scheduling?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

This guide covers how to schedule interviews across multiple days. If you have any interview activities with multiple interview events within them (for example, an onsite), this helps you schedule interview events across a number of days when availability is limited.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- Those with Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access or above can schedule an interview. For more information on access roles, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).
:::

# Permissions and access

Multi-day scheduling is available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Multiple interview events and candidate availability

If you set up a schedule interview activity to include multiple interview events, you can no longer send out a direct booking link to the candidate.

This is because direct booking only supports interview activities with one interview event. As such, if you're booking an event with multiple events and want to find suitable slots, we recommend sending out candidate availability links so the candidate can add the time slots that are best for them.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0Kzzw2iEBmVui4K6AkuzH_direct-booking-link-indicator-turns-red-if-there-are-multiple-interview-events.jpg)

When you move a candidate to the stage with your configured interview activity with multiple interview events, you see the option to draft an availability request and to request candidate availability. Click either to create a candidate availability link to send to the candidate.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UHke2h1wGUMVsOrGCmMMQ_requesting-candidate-availability-for-a-multi-panel-interview.png)

# How does candidate availability work on the candidate's side?

When the candidate clicks the availability link, they're greeted with a landing page featuring your organization's job board logo and the avatar of the meeting organizer.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/g_-LHnsiBZqMqUUJqVaRN_landing-page-for-a-candidate-availability-link.jpg)

After clicking `Get Started`, the candidate sees a calendar that they can use to select the dates they are available for interview. Once the dates are selected, the candidate clicks `Next`.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F0LqjEhZM-kSb2eW3XZcr_picking-the-days-the-candidate-is-available.jpg)

The following page asks the candidate to determine the times they are available on each of the dates they selected. The candidate also has the option to add a note on their availability.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WylNg4Ad_-0RQTsKMS9Kq_adding-times-to-available-days.jpg)

The candidate then clicks `Submit` to confirm their availability. They have the `Edit Availability` option on the confirmation page that they can use to make amendments.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/u1lfkSdluJZ1EtAjLif2D_meeting-details-abbye-inc-2026-08-19-at-104411-am.jpg)

# Scheduling the interviews over multiple days

Once you receive the candidate's availability, or determine times that work via email, you can manually schedule the interview.

1. Click `Start Manual Schedule` (or navigate to **Schedule > Manual Schedule** if the candidate didn't submit availability via a link) to schedule via the calendar interface.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/u1nWxgAApNmLbWON9gjWf_starting-the-manual-schedule-process.jpg)

1. While selecting suitable slots on the calendar interface, check the `Multi-Day Schedule` checkbox. When you move to other days, the interviews are no longer automatically moved to those dates.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0Rn97EQjtQAYkMoM3HqbY_multi-day-schedule-checkbox.jpg)

1. Determine the dates for each event in the interview.

:::hint{type="info"}
When you schedule multiple interviews, changing the date of one of the interviews also automatically enables multi-day scheduling.
:::

# Assigning a room to multiple interviews

If you have meeting rooms configured, use the `Select Room for All` dropdown above the interview event and interviewer details to select a room to use across all of the interview events. Ashby reviews the meeting rooms synced from Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 and shows the rooms with capacity and availability for all of the events first.

![The screenshot shows an interview setup for a multi-event interview. Click the Select Room for All button to set the meeting rooms for all events.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ddjQm7t6KZ_gceKwnxplN_home-ashby-2026-08-26-at-105832-am.jpg)

There are two toggles in the Select Room for All dropdown that you can switch on and off:

- **Include breaks between interviews:** Switch this on and Ashby will look for a room that is available from start to finish of all events across each day of a schedule, including any breaks in between. When a schedule spans multiple days, this will look for rooms that are available between the first and last event of each day accordingly. The room's availability will not be considered from the last event from one day to the first event of the next day on the schedule to ensure that the room is only booked when needed for the schedule.
- **Fits X+ people:** Displays only the meeting rooms with the appropriate capacity across all events.&#x20;

![The options to include breaks between interviews and filtering for rooms based on capacity.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oJlB1wlCxfac6qeaTSITB_overview-ashby-2026-09-04-at-81720-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you want to use one room for events on a specific date and another room for events on a different day, use the `Apply to events` dropdown to specify a room for each day.

![The screenshot shows the Select Room for All pop-up with the Apply room to dropdown listing 'All Interviews' and the date for each interview so you can decide the interviews the room should be applied to.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Z7cryD0yD9NDp929mi1Ri_apply-room-to-dropdown-menu.jpg)
:::

Once your room is selected and the interviews are scheduled, the interview events block the meeting room calendar.

# Calendar invites and reminder settings

In the **Communications** section of your scheduling process, you can configure your calendar invite and interview reminder settings for this interview.

## Candidate calendar invites

In the **Manage Candidate Invites** section, you can determine how Ashby sends the calendar invites. You can select from the following options:

**Send one invite per block:** The candidate receives a separate calendar invite for interview events that are more than 30 minutes apart. If they have two interview events with a 15-minute break between the two, they receive one calendar invite. If they have two interview events with a one-hour break in between, they receive two calendar invites.

**Send one invite per interview:** The candidate receives a separate calendar invite for each interview event, regardless of how far apart they are.

**Send one invite per day:** The candidate receives a calendar event per day they have interview events. So if they have one interview event on Monday, then the other two on Tuesday, they receive two calendar invites. If they have one interview event on Monday, one on Tuesday, and one on Wednesday, they receive three calendar invites.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/T6XU_yri0fsfpnCX86pda_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-102650-am.jpg)

You can also click `Edit` on each interview calendar invite to update the calendar invite title and description per invite, so if you have specific information relevant to only one interview event, you can add it only to the relevant invite.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MMZwy0tN60pdXH5YV-GtP_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-105734-am.jpg)

## Interviewer invites

Interviewers receive a calendar invite for only the interview events they are on the panel for.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PH_OoJivkrJm3IX1amBM__jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-41753-pm.jpg)

As with candidate calendar invites, you can click `Edit` to add specific information to the title and/or description of each calendar invite. This is helpful if you have interview-event specific information that isn't relevant across all interview events being scheduled.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yd1XJpDluwE9nWNm5CEjP_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-105916-am.jpg)

## Invite settings

Within the **Invite Settings** section, you can confirm the calendar you want to schedule the interview to and determine whether the calendar invite should be set to private (so details are hidden from non-attendees).

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/63h3U7-G31ZU4HBICY6CJ_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-104021-am.jpg)

You can also confirm the interview's location type (for more on video conferencing, check out Conferencing links below).

Finally, if you have the CoderPad, CodeSignal Interview, or HackerRank integrations in place, you can also specify which events (if any) should use the integration. Ashby generates a unique assessment link for each event that the integration is enabled for and automatically includes it in both candidate and interviewer invites.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/X6XcJ4BXyM6JdWSkIt__O_jobs-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-110442-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on each integration, check out the guides below:

[HackerRank](docId\:vH2f9hU5Xvx0paqy4g5hk)

[CodeSignal](docId:3Wgjd8nm8jPk16U8rBCAZ)

[CoderPad Interview](docId:8RCJasJJN2xyKrpDTCy2_)
:::

## Conferencing links

Ashby generates a unique conferencing link for each calendar invite if you set Zoom, Microsoft Teams, or Google Meet as the location for the interview events. The interviewer invite's conferencing link matches that of its corresponding external candidate calendar invite.

When you reschedule an invite, Ashby uses existing meeting links if at all possible.

- If Ashby creates a new external invite because you rescheduled an interview event, it generates a new meeting link.
- If Ashby deletes an external invite because you rescheduled an interview, it updates the corresponding interviewer invite's meeting link to match its new corresponding external invite's conferencing link.

## Interview Panel Summary substitution token

The "Interview Panel Summary" substitution token resolves as a bulleted list of interview events that includes the time, event title, and interviewers.

### When you use this token in emails with multi-day scheduling

- If the full interview schedule spans a single day, the token resolves as a bulleted list with date, time, event title, and interviewer details. Any breaks are listed.

![Schedule spanning a single day](https://cdn.zappy.app/559d4f65303962d44ecee8a31aa7cb80.png)

- If the schedule spans multiple days, Ashby includes the day followed by a bulleted list of the events occurring on that day.

![Schedule spanning multiple days](https://cdn.zappy.app/1e7f7ef48374a33afcbadb721c7db92d.png)

### When you use this token in calendar invites with multi-day scheduling

Instead of displaying all events in the schedule, the token only displays the events included in the corresponding candidate invite.

- Candidate invites with interviews spanning multiple days (with the candidate receiving a single calendar invite for each event).

![Candidate invite showing interviews spanning multiple days, with a separate calendar invite for each event](https://cdn.zappy.app/ac7643db9231e12ef1f52d3295e1f339.png)

- Candidate invites with interviews spanning multiple days (with the candidate receiving one calendar invite for all interview events).

![Candidate invite showing interviews spanning multiple days, with one calendar invite for all interview events](https://cdn.zappy.app/e412b176a7c5da2de761acc41df8c378.png)

- Interviewer invites - each interviewer gets an invite for the day their interview is scheduled.

![Interviewer invite showing the interview scheduled for that interviewer's day](https://cdn.zappy.app/899014f38591e08adc46f475261a71af.png)


[title] Chrome Extension
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

You can download the Ashby Chrome extension from the [Chrome Web Store listing](https://chromewebstore.google.com/u/1/detail/ashby/ncbbpdnmfeilfegjpilgdjajafbcganl).&#x20;

# Ashby Chrome extension overview

The Ashby Chrome extension allows you to source new talent with just a few clicks. Use powerful search to comb through passive and past candidates. Keep prospects engaged via email campaigns and tracking - all within Ashby.

See the table below for information on the access roles that can use the Chrome extension to source candidates and consider them for a role in Ashby. Only those with Elevated Access - Hiring Manager access or above will be able to source candidates using the Chrome extension.

| Access Role                                                    | Has access to source candidates and consider them for jobs? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                                                           |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                                                           |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                                                           |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                                                           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                                                           |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ✅                                                           |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅                                                           |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ✅                                                           |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                                                           |

# Install the extension

:::hint{type="info"}
Once installed, the purple Ashby icon will appear in the top right corner of the window. Click the 🧩 icon, then pin the Ashby icon to the extension bar.
:::

## Download in the Chrome web store

[Click here to download the extension](https://chromewebstore.google.com/u/1/detail/ashby/ncbbpdnmfeilfegjpilgdjajafbcganl) in the Chrome Web Store. Click the blue `Add to Chrome` button. Once installed, the purple Ashby icon will appear in the top right corner of the window. Click the 🧩 icon, then pin the Ashby icon to the extension bar.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vxRpjf7krKDO92kOozJnK_the-ashby-chrome-extension-in-the-chrome-store-with-the-add-to-chrome-button-highlighted.jpg)

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HZ56q4RXG1mIY3qWPsCBX_the-puzzle-piece-icon-to-the-right-of-the-address-bar-in-chrome.jpg)

# Using the extension

To open the extension, click on the Ashby `A` icon or use the shortcut `Cmd+Shift+E`. You can provide a social link URL to lookup or add a candidate at any time. If you are on a social link URL (e.g. a LinkedIn, GitHub or X profile) that matches to a social profile URL in a candidate profile already in Ashby, we’ll show that existing candidate profile.

The extension also automatically works in Gmail. When viewing a conversation between a candidate and the hiring team Ashby will automatically show the relevant candidate profile in the extension.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Mmspi1uSRs0ZrdZJ7BYFV_ashby-a-icon-chrome-extension.jpg" size="76" width="644" height="232" position="center" darkWidth="644" darkHeight="232" showCaption="false"}

When you open up the Chrome extension, it will open up as a side panel, rather than a popover. You can resize this panel by clicking and dragging on the left edge of the panel.

If you are already logged into your Ashby account in another window or tab, you will automatically be logged into the same account in the Ashby extension. If you are not already logged into Ashby, you will be prompted to log into your Ashby account before you can start using the extension.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/p_tioVxZq4C-JlTR1zC_1_sign-in-to-ashby-chrome-extension.jpg)

## Using the extension with LinkedIn

### Adding and viewing candidates when using the Chrome extension with LinkedIn

When viewing a public LinkedIn profile, the Chrome extension will show whether or not the candidate has already been added to your Ashby organization. This is assessed using the LinkedIn URL associated with the candidate's profile in Ashby.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wsJF7TAAPzrnMsxQeIrmY_adding-a-candidate-to-ashby-chrome-extension.jpg)

If the candidate is not in your Ashby account already, you can add them via three routes:

- You can copy and paste the LinkedIn profile URL or a GitHub profile URL into the `Paste a linkedIn or GitHub profile URL` field on the extension. Then click `Import Candidate` to add them to Ashby.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
When taking this route, we will create the candidate record using publicly available information. In rare cases that can mean that no information or outdated information is surfaced. We recommend checking that the work history provided is relevant against the candidate's profile.
:::

- Click `More` on the candidate's LinkedIn profile, then `Save to PDF`. This will download the profile information as a resume and also upload the profile information as a candidate in Ashby. The information in the download will be parsed and the PDF will be added as a resume to the candidate's profile.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
Please note that LinkedIn has a limit of 200 downloaded resumes per month per user. The `Save to PDF` option is only available when viewing the candidate's public profile.
:::

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Zpb5v2PUqUjRUuPzcDFmz_chrome-extension-archbee-document-2026-03-13-at-93508-am.jpg)

- You can also click `enter their details manually` on Chrome extension and can then add their information to Ashby from there.

By default, the source will be set to `Sourced: Ashby Chrome Extension` and a Source Site will be detected and included within the attribution details (for example, LinkedIn, LinkedIn Recruiter, GitHub). Both of these fields, along with the `Credited To` field can be amended after adding the candidate to Ashby. To edit the attribution details, navigate to the candidate's profile and scroll to the Attribution section in the Activities & Progress tab. Click the `X` to the right of the field to clear the current value, then select the appropriate alternative.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eovwvHltaAy95G34P2t9W_sophie-ashby-summary-acent-ashby-2026-02-26-at-104112-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you switch the source to something other than `Sourced: Ashby Chrome Extension`, then the `Source Site` field will no longer be included in the Attribution details on the candidate's profile.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
If the candidate is already in Ashby, you will see a pink indicator on the Ashby Chrome extension icon.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-E0mMYIpAeoheLM8OsDjJ_sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-03-25-at-21812-pm.jpg" size="80" width="826" height="624" position="center" darkWidth="826" darkHeight="624" showCaption="false"}
:::

### Using the extension on LinkedIn Recruiter

When viewing a candidate in LinkedIn Recruiter, you will need to add the candidate's LinkedIn public profile URL in order to see whether they are already in your Ashby account or to add them to Ashby. Copy the URL and paste it into the `Profile URL` field in the extension. The Chrome extension will then be able to either show the candidate in Ashby or prompt you to add them to Ashby.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xeAg4juaOrlbCL55j6l_O_image-3-png-2026-02-26-at-114740-am.jpg)

### Bulk importing candidates to Ashby in LinkedIn Recruiter via CSV export

LinkedIn Recruiter offers the option to bulk export candidates to a CSV file (more on this in LinkedIn's guide [Export profiles in Recruiter](https://www.linkedin.com/help/recruiter/answer/a412149)). The Chrome extension will detect the CSV once it has been exported, enrich the exported profiles with publicly available information and then import them into Ashby in bulk.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vA3K4-qX8Qi4Pw4Z81lXB_image-8-png-2026-02-26-at-115413-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
LinkedIn Recruiter has a limit of 25 candidates per export.&#x20;
:::

### Using the Chrome extension with GitHub

When on a GitHub profile, the Chrome extension will search through existing candidates in Ashby to find candidates with the same name. If there is a match, you will have the option to add the GitHub profile link to the existing candidate’s profile as a social link.

Click `Confirm Candidate` to match the GitHub profile to the candidate profile in Ashby. Alternatively, click `Create a New Candidate Instead` to create a new candidate profile including the GitHub link as a social link.

Once you’ve linked the candidate profile, or created a new profile, whenever you revisit that GitHub profile, you can view the candidate’s profile details and take action using the Chrome extension.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yjxTWC6DdT8PLOlE0FNnS_github-profile-chrome-extension.jpg)



### Using the extension with Gmail

When replying to a candidate in Gmail, the Ashby Chrome Extension allows you to review key details from their candidate profile. You can add tags, notes, and reminders for yourself or someone on your team to follow up with the candidate at a later date and time.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NyQDPVasm_MoxrdkC3t8I_gmail-chrome-extension.jpg)

## Key Features&#x20;

### Data enrichment

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby’s [data enrichment feature](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-enrichment) allows you to find personal emails for candidates directly in the extension. Once found, these emails can be used to reach out to the candidate.
:::

**Data enrichment settings**

The [Data Enrichment Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-enrichment) display the remaining lookups your team has for the month. For more on purchasing additional lookups, check out [How do I purchase additional email lookups, ai credits or texting credits in-app?](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/how-do-i-purchase-additional-email-lookups-ai-credits-or-texting-credits-in-app)

Ensure that `Enable On-Demand Email Lookup` is checked in Admin > Sourcing > [Data Enrichment](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-enrichment) if you'd like your team to proactively search for emails by clicking the `Find Email` button when on a candidate profile.

![Screen Shot 2023-07-07 at 8.56.17 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mmfjA-LzTjCj4Hr1-2HPH_screenshot2023-07-07at85617am.png)

This option gives your team more control over when lookups occur. Alternatively, disabling this option results in a lookup occurring automatically when you add the LinkedIn profile URL to the Chrome extension and add the candidate to your Ashby account.

### Send email sequences

:::hint{type="info"}
You can enroll a candidate in an email sequence that will message them at a set cadence until they follow up. Check out [Sequences](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/sequences) for a more detailed overview of this feature. For more information on InMail and Connection Request nudges in a sequence, check out [Sequences: InMail and Connection Request Stages](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/sequences-inmail-and-connection-request-stages).
:::

Please note that if you enroll a candidate in a sequence via the Chrome extension, this is counted as an individual sequence and can’t be edited in bulk along with other enrollments.

**Reason for Outreach and other custom fields**

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
Before sending a sequence, populate details in the reason for outreach and other [custom fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields?objectType=candidate) you create. If you have tokens in your sequences that rely on information added into custom fields, then this will ensure that information is populated.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring custom fields, check out [Custom Fields](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/custom-fields).&#x20;
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ND7WERa4rtzXuDeGun1gQ_5-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-26-at-22031-pm.jpg)
:::
:::::

**Select a sequence, customize it, and send it to a candidate**

To send a sequence out to a candidate via the Chrome Extension, click `Draft Sequence`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/S0CNomLuYq3O-OsHvuLnD_5-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-26-at-22057-pm.jpg" size="50" width="756" height="1490" position="center" darkWidth="756" darkHeight="1490" showCaption="false"}

From here, you can determine the sequence template and the candidate’s email address. Once both fields are completed, you’ll have the options to start the sequence immediately, or review it before sending.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZdRZ3PTipngwNZlfzRq5E_5-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-26-at-22229-pm.jpg" size="58" width="710" height="776" position="center" darkWidth="710" darkHeight="776" showCaption="false"}

If you’d like to make any edits to your sequence before sending it, select `Review`*.* You’ll be able to review each stage and make any adjustments. Once you’re ready to start the sequence, click `Start`*.*

If you don’t opt to send the sequence, it will be kept as a draft on the candidate’s profile so you can send it later from within Ashby.

### Consider the candidate for a job

:::hint{type="info"}
Check out [Creating & Posting Jobs](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/creating-and-posting-jobs) for a more detailed overview of creating jobs.
:::

You can add candidates directly into a job pipeline within the Chrome extension by clicking the `Consider for Job` button.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0F0dvvmjTuEscLLX2YExj_2-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-93252-am.jpg" size="48" width="750" height="1184" position="center" darkWidth="750" darkHeight="1184" showCaption="false"}

Once clicked, you’ll be able to select the role and the interview plan stage the candidate should be added to.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
If candidates are imported via LinkedIn Recruiter, they will always be added to the Application Review stage.
:::

Check the **Update experience** checkbox if you'd like the candidate's education and work experience on their LinkedIn profile to be analyzed and updated in Ashby.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
This will override existing education and work experience information already on their profile.
:::



::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jO71jV6HswbrNWhjjulFr_2-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-93435-am.jpg" size="58" width="738" height="1060" position="center" darkWidth="738" darkHeight="1060" showCaption="false"}

Click `Add` to confirm and add the candidate to the job pipeline.

### Change candidate stage or archive

You can change a candidate’s current stage by clicking the `Change Stage` button and selecting the new stage.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FpK05GEKY-fw9wZY7-MjV_2-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-93938-am.jpg" size="50" width="746" height="1044" position="center" darkWidth="746" darkHeight="1044" showCaption="false"}

You can archive a candidate by clicking the `Archive` button. Then you’ll select an archive reason, decide if feedback is required, and  click `Archive`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bgT6itQxB0eZJQFToQm_i_2-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-94010-am.jpg" size="50" width="750" height="1036" position="center" darkWidth="750" darkHeight="1036" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If a candidate has already been archived or for a job consideration, the `Archive` button will not be present.
:::

### Add candidate to a project

:::hint{type="info"}
Check out [Projects](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/projects) for a more detailed overview of this feature.
:::

**Add candidates to a project from the Chrome extension**

Once you have set up a project, you can add candidates to that project from the Chrome Extension or on their candidate profile. Click the `+` icon in the Projects section of the Chrome extension, then select the project from the list. The candidate will then be added to the selected project.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xVf0v5-sETTCR_swdGKFC_2-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-94214-am.jpg" size="50" width="758" height="902" position="center" darkWidth="758" darkHeight="902" showCaption="false"}

### Adding tags to a candidate via the Chrome extension

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on tagging candidates, check out [Tags](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/tags).
:::

Click `Add Tags` within the Chrome extension to add tags to the candidate profile in Ashby. To create a new tag in the Chrome extension start typing the name of your new tag, then click `Create new tag "X"` to add the tag to the candidate profile and to your list of available tags.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_1XGE2dBANlvgjTeHwbhO_2-sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-94702-am.jpg" size="50" width="738" height="572" position="center" darkWidth="738" darkHeight="572" showCaption="false"}

### Creating a follow up using the Chrome extension

If you’d like to be reminded to return to a candidate’s profile later, you can create a follow-up. Click `Follow up...` in the Chrome extension to set an assignee and a date to send the notification to follow up on the candidate's profile. You will also have the option to add a note.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f1nLIRcHnCZ_E5_a5dzet_sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-95637-am.jpg" size="50" width="744" height="1398" position="center" darkWidth="744" darkHeight="1398" showCaption="false"}

### Log outreach or responses in Ashby

If you've reached out to the candidate or have received a response from them in LinkedIn, this information can be manually logged in Ashby. Click Log Activity and select whether you are logging outreach or a response.&#x20;

If you are logging outreach activity, determine the outreach type and outreach text, then click `Log Activity` to add the activity to the candidate's profile.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VxqxYUov8BgbJqOxUDPqe_sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-95942-am.jpg" size="50" width="748" height="1476" position="center" darkWidth="748" darkHeight="1476" showCaption="false"}

For response activity, set the response type, the response status (whether the candidate is interested or not) and then add in the response text. Click `Log Activity` to add the activity to the candidate's profile.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wwo8CKNZ6t-9XgY8OLQS7_sophie-ashby-linkedin-2026-02-27-at-100314-am.jpg" size="50" width="746" height="1478" position="center" darkWidth="746" darkHeight="1478" showCaption="false"}

## Updating the Chrome Extension

Chrome typically handles extension updates automatically, but you can optionally force an update. To do this:

- Open Chrome and go to **chrome://extensions**
- Click on the `Details` button under the Ashby Chrome extension
- Toggle on `Developer mode` (in the top-right corner)

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/A4Yx-3vYbT5wD05ERFT5Z_extensions-ashby-2026-05-01-at-123718-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2866" height="498" darkWidth="2866" darkHeight="498" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- Click `Update` (on the left-hand side)

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sxsGkJGjjnu3LvsFXza4N_extensions-ashby-2026-05-01-at-123804-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2878" height="464" darkWidth="2878" darkHeight="464" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- Toggle `Developer mode` back off

You can verify your version and that you have the extension installed from the [Chrome Web Store listing](https://chromewebstore.google.com/u/1/detail/ashby/ncbbpdnmfeilfegjpilgdjajafbcganl).

If you run into any issues updating or do not have access to your browser's extension settings, try uninstalling and reinstalling the extension will also update to its latest version.

To do this:

1. Navigate to the [Chrome Web Store listing](https://chromewebstore.google.com/u/1/detail/ashby/ncbbpdnmfeilfegjpilgdjajafbcganl)
2. Click `Remove from Chrome`

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PwXrH8p8adbxsX8H4N8DA_ashby-chrome-web-store-2026-05-01-at-124336-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2716" height="690" darkWidth="2716" darkHeight="690" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. Once uninstalled, reinstall by clicking `Add to Chrome`.*&#xA0;*&#x44;oing so will automatically download the extension's latest version.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### How many email lookups do I get each month?

The number of lookups you receive depends on your plan. You can check how many you have on the [Email Lookups](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-enrichment) tab in Admin.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What is the difference between on-demand and automatic email lookups?

You have the option to enrich candidate profiles from the Chrome Extension automatically (after the candidate has been added to Ashby), or by clicking a button. On-demand allows you more control over the number or email lookups you use, while automatic enrichment saves you a click. Automatic enrichment is the default option, and you can enable on-demand enrichment on the [Data Enrichment](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/data-enrichment) tab in Admin.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How often do my email lookups reset?

Email Lookups reset at midnight in your local time on the last day of each month. Unused lookups do not roll over.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I add more email lookups?

Yes you can purchase additional email lookups if needed. You can read more on this at [How do I purchase additional email lookups, ai credits or texting credits in-app?](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/how-do-i-purchase-additional-email-lookups-ai-credits-or-texting-credits-in-app)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can the Chrome extension be used on other browsers?

The Chrome extension is supported on the following browsers:

- Chrome
- Chromium
- Edge
- Arc
- Opera
- Brave
- Vivaldi

The Chrome extension is not supported on the following browsers:

- Firefox
- Safari
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Which LinkedIn products does the extension work with?

- LinkedIn
- LinkedIn Recruiter
- LinkedIn Recruiter Lite
- Sales Navigator
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I prevent duplicate candidates?

The extension matches duplicates based on name, email address, and LinkedIn URL. If a LinkedIn URL is found on the page, the extension will display the existing profile (if the name is common and the email does not come from LinkedIn).

If no match is found based on the LinkedIn URL, a new profile can be added. Once a profile is added, it will be checked across all three criteria. If a duplicate is found at that point, a duplicate notification will appear, and the two profiles can be merged.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What permissions do I need to add candidates to jobs via the Chrome extension?

You need at least Elevated Access - Hiring Manager permissions for the job in question in order to be able to add a candidate to the job. Our guide to permissions is at [User Permissions](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/user-permissions).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### The extension has created candidates with incomplete experience/education - is there a way to get that missing information into Ashby?

When adding the candidate via a social URL we are creating the profile using publicly available information, which may at times be limited or outdated. The alternative is to add the candidate via a PDF resume. When adding a candidate via PDF resume download, we will reliably parse the entire work/education history of the candidate.

Please note: while it is technically easy to capture the entire LinkedIn profile in an extension reliably, that is not permitted by LinkedIn’s terms of service.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I'm seeing multiple source sites across job considerations for a candidate - why?

If you consider the candidate for one role while viewing their profile on LinkedIn, then the Source Site on their job consideration will be set to LinkedIn or LinkedIn Recruiter. If you then consider them for another role using the Chrome extension while viewing their GitHub profile, then the job consideration will be created with the Source Site listed as GitHub. This is expected behaviour.
The Source Site can be overridden for an application or job consideration if you transfer it to another role. More on this at [](#)


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I pin or view pinned notes via the Chrome extension?

Yes. Each note will show an option to pin or unpin in the Chrome extension. Any pinned notes will show at the top of the Profile and Feed sections in the extension.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1205dfbbe12417f85f1fc88464f427e9.png" size="48" width="361" height="256" position="center" darkWidth="361" darkHeight="256" showCaption="false"}
:::


[title] Open Rates and Reporting on Sequences
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on the sequence pipeline and metrics check out [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4).
:::

Due to privacy tools like Apple Mail privacy protection and Gmail image proxying pre-loading images in emails, opens can be automatically triggered, causing an inflated open rate. The root cause of these results is industry-wide changes in email privacy tools and isn’t specific to Ashby email sequences.

To combat this impacting your reporting on sequences, we recommend focusing on click and conversion metrics. Bots rarely impact click metrics and conversions always require human action.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you are seeing inflated click rates, this could be due to corporate scanners like Mimecast and Barracuda that automatically click links to check for malware.

Opening a sent email thread in your own inbox can also inflate open counts.&#x20;
Ashby tracks email opens using a tracking pixel, and the pixel fires any time&#x20;
the email is loaded, including when you open the thread yourself. Because the&#x20;
pixel cannot distinguish your opens from the recipient's, your own views count&#x20;
toward the open total. If you are the only person who has opened a thread, the&#x20;
email will appear as opened in your open rate even though the candidate has not&#x20;
read it. To keep open metrics as accurate as possible, avoid opening candidate&#x20;
email threads in your inbox unless necessary.
:::

Below you can find a list of definitions for common terms around sequence metrics for your reference:

- **Open Rate:** Percentage of recipients who open a specific email out of the total number of recipients.
- **Click Rate**: Refers to the measure of how many people clicked on a hyperlink, call-to-action, or image within the email’s content out of all the recipients. In other words, the unique individuals who clicked, divided by the total number of recipients. This is commonly a way to measure engagement and interest.
- **Conversions:** Counts the number of recipients who complete a goal action after reading the email. In Ashby, this would translate to a candidate replying to the email.

If you have further questions about inflated sequence metrics, please reach out to support\@ashbyhq.com.

[title] Sequences
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

This article covers how to create and use sequences in Ashby. Sequences let you reach out to candidates and automate emails to gauge their interest in a role.

# Sequence overview

Sequences let you:

- Create personalized email templates to send to individual candidates or in bulk.
- Schedule initial outreach and set time intervals for follow-up stages.
- Streamline sourcing by contacting candidates from the Ashby Chrome extension while on a candidate’s LinkedIn profile.
- Track email opens, clicks, and responses from the candidate’s side.

:::hint{type="info"}
Sequences are primarily built for reaching out to leads to gauge interest. If you’d like to trigger emails automatically when candidates reach a certain stage in a job pipeline, use [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB) instead.
:::

# Sequence access

Use sequences to reach out to leads and candidates, but access is controlled by user permissions and sequence settings.

| Access Role                                                      | Has access to view shared sequence information? | Can enroll candidates in a sequence? |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------ |
| Limited Access                                                   | ❌                                               | ❌                                    |
| Agency User                                                      | ❌                                               | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked with an agency) | ✅                                               | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                        | ✅                                               | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                             | ✅                                               | ❌                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                                 | ✅                                               | ✅                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                          | ✅                                               | ✅                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                                | ✅                                               | ✅                                    |
| Organization Admin                                               | ✅                                               | ✅                                    |

- **Limited Access users** and **users linked to an agency** cannot see any sequence data or enroll candidates in sequences.
- To enroll candidates in sequences, you need **Elevated Access** or higher.
- Elevated Access users can enroll candidates in **non-confidential** sequences if those candidates:&#x20;
  - Do not have any job considerations, or
  - Are considered for a job (or jobs) where the user has **Hiring Manager** access or higher.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you don’t want Elevated Access users to view data for certain sequences, you can set sequences to **personal** or **confidential**.
:::

## Personal sequences

If you create a sequence with **personal** access:

- Only you, **Organization Admins**, and Elevated Access users with a **direct link** to the sequence can:&#x20;
  - View the sequence.
  - View sequence data.
  - Enroll candidates in that sequence.

## Confidential sequences

If you create a **confidential** sequence:

- Only **you as the creator** can:&#x20;
  - View the sequence and its data.
  - Enroll candidates in the sequence.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Confidential sequences are available on **Legacy Plus**, **Plus**, and **Enterprise** plans.
:::

# Creating email sequences

To get started with sequences, you first create a **sequence template**.

You can access sequences from **Sourcing > Sequences**. From here, you can create and edit multi-stage templates with customizable tokens you can use from the Ashby app or the Chrome extension.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/834e3cf02cbcf429c90139f1e44afa53.png)

To create a new email sequence:

1. Navigate to **Sourcing > Sequences**.
2. Select `+ New`.
3. Enter a title for your sequence.
4. Choose whether access is `Shared`, `Personal`, or `Confidential`.
5. Optionally link the sequence to a job (more about this in [Sequence Linking](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4)).
6. Select `Create Sequence` to open the template editor and configure your stages.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/a7256f5cc28b7bbd470d8b3c4ce49aee.png" size="46" width="387" height="488" darkWidth="387" darkHeight="488" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Once you create the template, Ashby automatically saves it so you can immediately start enrolling candidates. You can return to the **sequence manager&#x20;**&#x61;t any time to edit the sequence.
:::

### Template editor

The template editor lets you build and manage each stage of your sequence.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5d2d845e0e77dca86160c68c9839142c.png)

1. **Name** – View and edit the name of your sequence.
2. **Sender** – Confirm the sender of your sequence. If different stages use different senders, multiple email addresses appear here instead of a specific user’s email address. You cannot select a no-reply address or default  as a sender.
3. **Stages** – View all stages in the sequence and when each will send if you enroll a candidate now. Use the trash can icon to delete a stage.
4. **Add stage** – Add additional stages to your sequence.
5. **X error(s)** – Shows how many issues are preventing candidates from being enrolled in the sequence.
6. **Error** – When viewing a stage, this banner explains what needs to be added or changed so candidates can be enrolled.
7. **Type** – Choose the stage type:&#x20;
   - Email.
   - Prompt to send a LinkedIn InMail.
   - Prompt to send a LinkedIn connection request.

:::hint{type="info" indent="3"}
More on LinkedIn InMail and Connection Request stages in sequences at [Sequences: InMail and Connection Request Stages](docId\:Qbf62_UsXyctMQzHE07HA).
:::

8. **Send** – Set when this stage should send relative to the date and time the candidate is enrolled.
9. **From** – Choose who the email is sent from or who receives the prompt to send the LinkedIn message.
10. **Subject** – Enter the subject line of the email or LinkedIn InMail.
11. **Body** – Write the content of the email, InMail, or connection-request note.

You can use:

- **Tokens** to personalize subject lines and body text with fields like candidate name, company, or sender details.
- **File attachments** and **links** from the formatting menu below the body.

Tokens are a quick way to personalize messages without manually editing common properties. To add a token, select the t icon (hover text: “Personalize with token”) and choose a property.

:::hint{type="info"}
There are additional guides with:

- A full list of [Substitution Token](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6) options.
- Details on [AI Tokens in Outreach Emails](docId\:ggQQ4VkH_ynMutuXv43ha).

Refer to those if you need more advanced personalization.
:::

Once you exit the editor, the sequence template will auto-save and you can immediately start to enroll candidates. You can also return to the sequence manager at any point to edit the sequence.

### Linking a sequence to a job

You can link a sequence to a **job** so Ashby can automatically manage your outbound pipeline.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7e3740f69be9653f9bc38eca9ff69a58.png" size="50" width="441" height="928" darkWidth="441" darkHeight="928" position="center" showCaption="false"}

When a sequence is linked to a job, Ashby uses the default lead stages to automate candidate movement:

- Candidates move from **New Lead** to **Reached Out** when Ashby sends the first sequence email.
- Candidates in the default **Reached Out** stage move to **Replied** when they reply.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
If a candidate replies while they are in a custom lead stage, Ashby does not automatically move them to **Replied**. Move the candidate to **Replied** manually if needed.
:::

- Candidates are archived in the linked job when you mark them as not interested.
- Candidates can be automatically archived after a delay if they never reply, based on the settings you configure.

:::hint{type="info"}
Keep candidates in the default lead-stage flow when you use a sequence linked to a job. Custom lead stages between the default stages can prevent the automatic move to **Replied**.
:::

When setting up a sequence, link it to a job by selecting the job from the job dropdown. Once set, you can configure the sequence template to adjust when and how candidates are archived.

# Enrolling candidates in an email sequence

Once you’ve created an email sequence template, you can enroll candidates right away. The most common path is via the **Ashby Chrome extension&#x20;**&#x77;hile on a candidate’s LinkedIn profile, but you can also enroll from the candidate profile in Ashby and from the sequence manager.

:::hint{type="info"}
Organizational admins can set outreach limits so that candidates do not receive too many emails in a short amount of time. These limits can be set by navigating to **Admin > Sourcing > Outreach Frequency Policy**.

With an outreach frequency set, candidates who have been contacted within a set number of days will not be enrolled in sequences.

- One-off emails are still allowed.
- Policy is based on the organization’s timezone.
:::

## Enrolling a candidate from the Ashby Chrome extension

You can add candidates to Ashby and enroll them in a sequence directly from the Ashby Chrome extension.

**Reason for Outreach and other custom fields**

Before sending a sequence, populate details in the reason for outreach and other [custom fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields?objectType=candidate) you create. If you have tokens in your sequences that rely on information added into custom fields, then this will ensure that information is populated.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5d6c6f70964b123b53ea3713e666595b.png)

To enroll a candidate from the Chrome extension:

1. Open the candidate’s public LinkedIn profile.
2. Open the **Ashby Chrome extension**.
3. Add or update fields like **Reason for outreach** and any relevant candidate custom fields.
4. Select `Draft Sequence`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ec34ba41a16f84cf9bac534013399c66.png" size="56" width="376" height="584" darkWidth="376" darkHeight="584" position="center" showCaption="false"}

In the **Draft Sequence** dialog:

1. Choose a **sequence template** from the Template dropdown.
2. Select the candidate’s **email address** from the Email dropdown.
3. Choose whether to:&#x20;
   - `Start `the sequence immediately, or
   - `Review` the stages before sending.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ed7a6f930bcf3a19a0bf1dae52364645.png" size="54" width="352" height="263" darkWidth="352" darkHeight="263" position="center" showCaption="false"}

If you select `Review`, you can:

- Review each stage.
- Adjust subject lines, bodies, or delays.
- Confirm the sender and timing.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6402ba838da138b9d7cffbc6e56f4e37.png" size="64" width="612" height="657" darkWidth="612" darkHeight="657" position="center" showCaption="false"}

When you are ready, select `Start` to begin the sequence.

If you close the dialog without starting the sequence:

- The sequence is saved as a **draft** on the candidate’s profile.
- You can start it later from within Ashby.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you enroll a candidate in a sequence via the Chrome extension, that enrollment is treated as an **individual sequence** and cannot be edited in bulk with other enrollments.
:::

## Enrolling a candidate from their Ashby profile

To enroll a candidate from their profile in Ashby:

1. Open the candidate’s profile.
2. Select `More` > `Enroll in sequence`.

![Enrolling a candidate from their Ashby profile](https://cdn.zappy.app/6305cdc39753d6024402d2a461e30d08.png)

3. Choose a **sequence template** from the dropdown.
4. Review and personalize the stages as needed.
5. Select `Start 1 sequence` to kick off the first stage for that candidate.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5493d8aa43b13cb8ca1f8ec632b5618c.png)

## Enrolling candidate(s) from the sequence manager

You can enroll one or multiple candidates from the **sequence overview** page.

To enroll from the sequence manager:

1. Go to **Sourcing > Sequences**.
2. Select the sequence template you want to use to open the **sequence manager**.
3. Select `Enroll` to open the enrollment manager.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b4c305807c216e97af1050916fe0db70.png)

4. In the **Add candidates** field, search for the candidates you want to enroll and add them to the list.&#x20;
   - Any existing **sequence drafts** for those candidates will also appear here.
5. When your list is complete, select `Edit sequences`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a212d190a5f73641c1563a7d2ba35713.png)

Ashby opens the sequence editor with a **candidate-level draft** for each enrollment. From here you can:

- Customize each candidate’s stages.
- Fix any issues flagged in the left-hand panel (for example, missing emails).
- Choose whether to include an **unsubscribe link** in the email stages.

When you’re ready, select `Start X sequence(s)` to start the sequences for all selected candidates.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5f6a412496efc930b5677f2754cccdfc.png)

# Stopping or cancelling an email sequence for a candidate

Ashby automatically stops a candidate’s sequence if they reply to one of the emails in that sequence.

To manually cancel a sequence that is in progress:

1. Go to **Sourcing > Sequences** and open the template.
2. Select the **In Progress** tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5dc1903a93afb46487296876f9e06cb5.png)

3. Check the box next to the candidate(s) whose sequence you want to cancel.
4. Select `Cancel Sequence`.
5. In the bulk action dialog that appears, select `Start` to confirm the cancellation.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a1e47e4800047b0ee1bfba2473bb7380.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Note:

- Once a sequence has started, you cannot delete the record of that enrollment from the sequence details.
- Canceling a sequence stops further **sequence stages**, but does not affect any **non-sequence emails** already scheduled separately for that candidate.
:::

# Sequence reporting

Once you start enrolling candidates in a sequence, Ashby automatically tracks email activity and provides reporting to help you manage outreach and measure sequence effectiveness.

## Sequence pipeline

Each sequence has a pipeline overview on its sequence manager page that shows current and historical enrollments at the candidate level.

To view the pipeline for a sequence:

1. Go to **Sourcing > Sequences**.
2. Select the sequence you want to view.

![Using the Sequence Pipeline to manage sequence progress and effectiveness.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HA1BGC8FWRsC41pSk9uaw_usingthesequencepipelinetomanagesequenceprogressandeffectiveness.png)

Ashby groups enrollments into the following stages:

- **Enrolled** – All candidates you’ve enrolled to date, including those with active, completed, and canceled sequences.
- **In progress** – Candidates currently enrolled in active sequences.&#x20;
  - Use this stage to find all active enrollments or to cancel active sequences in bulk.
- **Completed, no reply** – Candidates whose sequence ended without a reply.&#x20;
  - These may require a different email or sequence to re-engage.
- **Replied** – Candidates who replied to at least one email in the sequence.&#x20;
  - Replies may or may not indicate interest; review the response and manually set the **response** status.
- **Interested** – Candidates you’ve determined to be a potentially good fit and who have expressed interest.&#x20;
  - These are good prospects to nurture or move into a specific job pipeline.
- **Converted** – Candidates who have been added to a job opening and are now in the job pipeline.&#x20;
  - This count indicates how successful the sequence is at sourcing candidates who proceed into the pipeline.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Important:

- Candidates are filtered into these stages based on their **current state**.
- If a candidate is marked **interested** on your sequence but is later **archived** from the job consideration linked to that sequence, they no longer appear in the **Interested** segment.
:::

## Sequence metrics

Ashby also tracks sequence-level metrics, including:

- **Open rate** – The percentage of recipients who opened a specific email.
- **Reply rate** – The percentage of recipients who replied.
- **Click rate** – The percentage of recipients who clicked any embedded links.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a7bec78c57139ae3311d79e4b3d0af68.png)

You can:

- View metrics for a specific sequence on the **top right** of the sequence pipeline overview page.
- Get a broader view of sequence activity from **Sourcing > Home**:&#x20;
  - The top chart shows weekly sequence activity for the past three months.
  - You can switch the report type to:&#x20;
    - Sequences sent.
    - Sequence reply rate (% of candidates who replied).
    - Conversion rate (% of candidates who were converted and added to a job).
  - You can toggle between **Mine** and **Everyone** to change scope.
  - Selecting a chart value drills down to candidate-level details.

![Sequence metrics like open rate, reply rate, and conversion rate](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Vbf00uSmPnHePfxORRxQH_sequencemetricslikeopenratereplyrateandconversionrate.png)



# FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is there a limit to how many recipients can be added to a sequence at once?

Yes, 500 recipients can be added to a sequence at one time.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I copy or duplicate a sequence?

You can yes. To duplicate a sequence:

1. Navigate to **Sourcing > Sequences**
2. Click on the sequence you would like to copy
3. Click `More`, then `Copy`
4. Determine the type of copy you're looking to make; a shared copy, a personal copy or a confidential copy.

![The More option on a sequence, with the Copy action highlighted and the pop up to confirm the copy type.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/N7kWzeEN5SPgQzRJ3OKnd_duplicating-a-sequence.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I limit how frequently candidates are contacted?

Yes. Organizational admins can set an outreach frequency policy that prevents candidates who have been contacted in a certain number of days from receiving emails from sequences. One-off emails can still be sent. Access these settings at **Admin > Sourcing > Outreach Frequency Policy**.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I enrolled a bunch of recipients into a sequence, how long will it take to send?&#x20;

To avoid email provider rate-limiting, Ashby:

- Adds an incremental delay when emailing more than **10** recipients.
- Sends emails in **batches of 10** once they’re queued.

This means large batches take longer to fully send than small batches.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I disable email tracking?

Individuals have the option to disable email tracking on the [Email Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email) page in Personal Settings. Tracking is only supported on sequences and doing so will impact the open and click stats on the sequence overview.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/18d3c185c8b8917aad94e71cb2840871.png)
:::

::::::ExpandableHeading
### Can Ashby automatically classify a lead’s response to a sequence as ‘Interested’ or ‘Not Interested’?

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
Yes! This is one of Ashby’s AI Features that can be opted-in to and enabled within Opt-In Features in Admin.
You can also set your preferences within the Email Settings section of Personal Settings.
You can opt to enable the automatic reply status option, disable it (regardless of the organization-wide settings) or use the organization default.

The person who initiated the sequence will receive a notification email with the option to change the reply status.

When enabled the AI Assistant will automatically set the sequences reply status based on the candidate’s email response to a sequence.
You can override this classification if needed via the Set Response dropdown.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on AI features, check out [AI Features in Ashby](docId:8DIfXGq3vCQGQLP62DYvO).
:::

**
::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d8bf210952c3471bccb2f0cba05bb182.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/baf12f4ef506101cce30dc16de1357af.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dff8573ad1daaf7040fd8ef47414a196.png)
:::
:::::
::::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can leads or candidates unsubscribe from sequences?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
We do now have the option to include an Unsubscribe link in your sequence emails. On clicking the link, leads can update their subscription preferences and determine whether they’d like to unsubscribe from emails about the current role and/or all future roles.

You can enable the Unsubscribe option in the Settings section of your sequence.

Check the `Include unsubscribe link by default` checkbox to add the option to email stages moving forward for this specific sequence.

Candidates on clicking the `Unsubscribe` link in an email will see the following checkbox options:

- Current Outreach
- Outreach about New Roles

Once they’ve checked or unchecked the boxes based on whether they’d like to receive or not receive future emails, the lead can click `Save Preference`

When the lead unsubscribes, an activity will be added to their profile showing that they’ve unsubscribed.

If you try and enroll a candidate in another sequence when they’ve unsubscribed, you will see an error when editing or reviewing the stages of your sequence, confirming that the candidate has unsubscribed. This error will show both when enrolling candidates in Ashby, and when enrolling via the Chrome extension.

Users can also unsubscribe or re-subscribe leads and candidates from their profile in Ashby, in case the lead reaches out. To amend the subscription status for a candidate or lead, click `More` on their profile, then `Manage Subscriptions`. From there, you can check or uncheck the `Sourcing Sequences` box, then hit `Save Preferences` to confirm.

Should a candidate want to re-subscribe, they can do so by clicking the `Unsubscribe` link again in their email. They can then re-adjust their preferences on the following page.

Should a candidate want to re-subscribe, they can do so by clicking the `Unsubscribe` link again in their email.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07c4670363d0dde3572d7a85be6e6c8c.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6a776c3d720f084594367cf4d1b807f4.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f59f3a3354c638b7e71f02871b0b9c2a.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8291a0e6fbf25af6f447360820e4a05c.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3860fc8cf94d322db59e16753a4e9c88.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9a7d344418551658e98a900ace9ce89e.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/48f858379601df3880b9ef78966346b1.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eed4f9e51aac5ac2b76a4e5f49c99991.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I edit a sequence after it has been started?

You can! If a sequence has been started and you need to make any amendments (like correcting a typo or adding additional information), you can edit and adjust unsent stages for live sequences.

**Edit sequence template for all existing live sequences and future enrolments.**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To amend your sequence template, click `Edit Template` when viewing your chosen sequence. Scroll to any unsent stages and make your edits. Your changes will be saved automatically.

If you close out the editing wizard or navigate to another page in Ashby, you will see the option to apply your edits to active sequences.

The details of the active sequences will be listed. Click `Apply Edits` to update the unsent stages of your live sequences. If you’d only like the edits to apply to those enrolled in the future, click `Don’t Apply`*.*

Once the sequences have been successfully edited, you’ll receive a confirmation message.

If any sequences were not successfully edited, click `View Detailed Results` to review the sequences that weren’t updated and the failure reason.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6c8a043caeca2b588ec4aaed33ffa1ff.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3ec530f8c9cb4bacb198fdfc92f645a0.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7ecccf11e8f27cb418b886c468857747.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5f5c40b455bb02f0a936d10381e743d6.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0e1640841b2484f868ffaab1efc4711c.png)
:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Edit the sequence template for all /existing live sequences during a new enrolment.**

After making edits to a sequence during a new enrolment, when starting the sequence and enrolling new leads, you will have the option to save the changes for only future enrolments and/or save the changes for currently enrolled candidates.

Check both checkboxes to save these changes for future recipients and those unsent stages for running or paused sequences. If you only want the changes to apply to this current enrolment, leave both boxes unchecked.




:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/873c9d8184cda2aab5c46e10d60be0dd.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d0a00c582c970a18a7f8803543883393.png)
:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Bulk edit live sequences for multiple candidates.**

When viewing sequence data, check the boxes beside the candidates you’d like to amend the unsent stages for. From there, click `Edit Sequence`.

Please note: only those enrolled at the same time can have their unsent stages amended in bulk. If you select sequences from different enrolments, Ashby will identify the largest group of selected enrolments that occured at the same time and the edits will only be applied to that group. Click `Edit Included Sequences` to move forward with editing. Sequences sent via the Chrome Extension will be counted as individual sequences, so can’t be amended in bulk.

The bulk editor will ready the sequences for editing. Click `Edit Sequences`, make your changes in the editing wizard, then click `Edit X Sequences` to confirm your changes.






:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e19e940638c9d78ba9324381f82f4766.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0d16289f551ae05362a9e72ec3e243fc.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a162e08697b50b7cb8f315002a60ab4d.png)
:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Edit a sequence for a single enrolment.**

Click the Actions button beside the candidate, then click `Edit Sequence`. You can then make any adjustments to just the unsent stages of that sequence. Click `Edit X Sequences` to then confirm your changes.

If other candidates were enrolled at the same time, you will get the option to apply your changes to the unsent stages of those sequences too. Click `Apply Edits` to update the additional enrolments, or Don’t Apply to only apply the changes to this sequence.

If you opt to apply your changes to the other enrolments that happened at the same time, you’ll either see a success message or a message highlighting any sequences that weren’t successfully edited. Click `View Detailed Results` to view the sequences and the failure reasons. To make further amendments to the failed sequences, click `Edit Failed Sequences`*.*****
****
****

:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fc825dad9f827e0671e3c33df5de4b35.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/80d7373e58e15fc8eaa02cf36a4d011d.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d900a674884349baa88353c5705d052d.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I resume a paused sequence?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Yes, you can. When viewing the list of candidates or leads enrolled in a sequence, check the boxes next to the canceled or paused sequences you’d like to resume. Then click `Resume Sequence`*,* then `Start `on the `Bulk Action` wizard.

The specified sequences will then continue to run. If the scheduled date has passed, the next stage in the sequence will be sent immediately. All follow-up stages will be rescheduled to maintain the initial delay.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/32ff61d8ce77cf6f889b53559088b7da.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b60a42521ab1f72a9272a8818b77c856.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I resume a canceled sequence?

No, this isn't currently possible.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is a sequence canceled when a candidate is archived from a job consideration?

When a candidate is archived on any job consideration, all running sequences are canceled (even if the sequence is not linked to that job consideration). You will see a warning showing the sequence that will be canceled when selecting your archive reason in the rejection process.

If you don’t want to archive the candidate from a job consideration but would like to remove them from the sequence, you can opt to stop the sequence for that specific candidate. More on this here.&#x20;
****
Please note: Any separate emails scheduled to be sent to the candidate (not within a sequence) will not be canceled automatically.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I enroll a candidate in more than one sequence at a time?

No, a candidate can only be enrolled in one sequence at a time. If a candidate is already enrolled in a sequence and a user attempts to enroll them in another sequence, then they will see the following error message.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e8a0281a16f82e022ccc042e3cdbf108.png)

If the user tries to enroll the candidate in a sequence and they are enrolled in a personal or confidential sequence that the user does not have access to, they will see the following error message.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/839b90ffc516a3e109b7d15e2ee8530c.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I mark an existing sequence as Confidential or share a confidential sequence?

You can. When viewing the enrollments within the sequence template, click `More`. From here, you will be able to either share your confidential sequences with other users, or mark it as confidential. Please note, you will need to be the creator of the sequence to make these changes.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bf218017581d5a708d19ab0f159eb263.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What permissions do I need to enroll candidates in a sequence?

You will need to have Elevated Access or higher to enrol candidates in sequences.

If you are an Elevated Access user, you will be able to view non-confidential sequence data and enrol candidates in non-confidential sequences who meet one of the following criteria:

- Do not have any job considerations or
- Are considered for a job or jobs where you have a Hiring Manager access role or higher.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I view more details on a specific recipient’s sequence?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When viewing the recipient list, you can click on a recipient to get more information on their sequence, including if they’ve clicked links within your sequence in each stage, opens, clicks and replies and when the next stage will be triggered.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7117cebc42f2aa08294c84cd6945c0f8.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### A candidate replied to a sequence, but the email was not logged and the sequence did not stop. Why?

This typically happens due to [Email Visibility Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-settings) on your Ashby account.

If email sync is disabled for any of the following candidate types, replies from those candidates will not be logged, and Ashby will not detect the reply to stop the sequence:

- Hired candidates
- Candidates on confidential jobs
- Internal candidates

When email visibility is restricted for these groups, Ashby cannot record inbound replies or use them as a trigger to automatically stop a sequence.

What we recommend:

- Review your email visibility settings to confirm which candidate types have email sync enabled.
- If you expect replies from these candidates to stop sequences automatically, ensure email visibility is turned on for the relevant group.

This behavior is expected when email visibility is limited and does not indicate an issue with the sequence itself.
:::


[title] How does editing interview plans impact passthrough rate reports?
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews & Scheduling FAQs/

This guide covers amending interview stages on your interview plans and how that can impact reporting. Please note that grouped interview plans are referenced to often: for more on setting up a grouped interview plan, check out [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)&#x20;

For more information on setting up interview plans, please check out [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux).

### Overview

In short, if you are planning to make edits to your interview plan, we’d recommend editing stage names where possible, rather than deleting and adding new stages. If stages are removed and/or added, please ensure you have a grouped interview plan and your interview plan stages mapped to your grouped interview plan.

Then, when running passthrough rate reports, ensure that the `Group Stages?` checkbox is checked to preserve all data from archived interview plan stages.

### Can I edit the names of the stages on my interview plans without impacting passthrough rate reporting?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you edit the name of an existing stage, rather than removing a stage and adding a new one, then this will simply update the name of the stage and your passthrough reporting will remain intact.

So here, the Technical Round on an interview plan has been edited and re-named to Second Round. It can take a few minutes for the stage to be updated on your passthrough rate report.

On refreshing the report, the passthrough results for that stage remain the name, the name of the stage has just been updated. If you need to update any stages, we would recommend renaming them, rather than deleting stages from your interview plan and adding in new ones.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6614eb9dbad3ef4f7511dd9a7dffa86a.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6db941e76cb9a7d7898859721c6ba575.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d3d815faab5457ba18822ec351b6c170.png)
:::
::::



### How about if I delete a stage?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you delete a stage that is mapped to a stage in your grouped interview plan, then the stage results will only be shown in your passthrough rate report when you opt to group your stages (so showing the grouped interview plan stages as your passthrough stages).

If you choose to report on your ungrouped stages, the deleted stage in your interview plan will not be displayed on your passthrough rate report. The passthrough rate percentage from the stage before the deleted stage to the stage after the deleted stage will be reflected.

So, in our example, the Second Round stage from the interview plan has now been deleted. That stage will no longer show in the report when I opt to not check the `Group Stages?` checkbox (so showing the stages of my individual interview plans on the report).

Our second round stage was linked to the Technical Evaluation stage of the Grouped Interview plan, so when grouping the results, the results for the deleted interview stage will be shown.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/638af4a8dc21474a2b52e6b3ae03bd2f.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ec39c408364b7148e3d2ac6085400f78.png)
:::
::::



### What happens if I create a new stage on my interview plan?

If you opt to create a new stage for your interview plan and you have candidates in stages beyond the newly created stage, they will show as having passed through that stage.

In our example, a new Technical Quiz stage was created and added to the interview plan. It was also linked to the Technical Evaluation stage of our grouped plan.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/41c7d95067f3d2bdbd1993e2caa3f0f1.png)

Now when running my passthrough rate report, if the `Group Stages?` checkbox isn’t checked, the Technical Quiz stage will display passthrough data for any candidates that have reached stages beyond that stage.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9ca0562ae5af67a584e68e14c8f30e9c.png)


[title] Candidate Files and File Categories
[path] Candidates/

Additional files, like the candidate’s cover letter can be added to the candidate’s profile directly. This guide will walk through how to enable and create file categories, how to assign file categories to file upload questions on an application form and also how a user can assign a category when uploading files manually to a candidate profile within Ashby.

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/28a6a82a799943b293059d0e6c5b0ab1"}

## Adding file categories

To enable file categories:

- Navigate to `Admin`, then `Organization Setup` and `File Categories`.
- Enable the `Enable File Categories` option.



::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/66d1eae6874e079d872990783b61ba6d.png" size="42" width="278" height="158" darkWidth="278" darkHeight="158" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Some file categories will be available on enabling, including the following:

- Cover Letter
- Other
- Reference Letter
- Transcript
- Writing Sample



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fe6779d07f845021ad23b959aedaa62c.png)

To edit an existing file category, click the three dots on the right-hand side of the category, then select `Edit`. You’ll also have the option to archive the category so it isn’t available to assign to a file when uploading it to a candidate profile moving forward.

:::hint{type="info"}
If the file category’s status is Inactive, then clicking the three dots will give you the option to restore the category.
:::

To create a new file category, click `+ New`. You’ll then be able to give you category a name. Click `Save` to confirm and create your new file category.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ec861303bc74ec550ab3345fc283a737.png)

On saving your new category, it will automatically be set as active.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/50f6fcf3883b1f6262014e9f440307ee.png)

## Adding file upload questions to forms

If you’d like to give the candidate the option to upload files as a part of their application, you can add a file question to an application form. More on configuring these at [Application Forms](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/application-forms#create-application-forms-in-admin-recommended).

:::hint{type="warning"}
File upload questions support files up to 50MB in standard document, image, and video file types such as:

- **Documents:** PDF, DOC, DOCX
- **Images:** JPG, JPEG, PNG
- **Videos:** Common video formats such as MP4

Executable file types (such as .exe) and certain text-based formats (such as .md) are not supported. If a candidate needs to submit content in an unsupported format, we recommend converting the file to a supported document type, such as PDF, before uploading.
:::

When creating your question, if you have file categories configured, a Save to Profile? checkbox will be available. If you check this checkbox, then the file uploaded via the application form will automatically be added to the Other Files section within the Summary tab of the candidate’s profile.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fb4bbb3e8ecb69b2797286fddce72a18.png)

On checking the checkbox, you will be able to specify a file category to put the uploaded file under.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ca946a1a72482f9ebbb3a88e88d153de.png" size="78" width="753" height="293" position="center" darkWidth="753" darkHeight="293" showCaption="false"}

If you do not have file categories enabled, or opt to not check the Save to Profile? checkbox, then the uploaded file can be found within the Application activity on the candidate’s feed.



::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/4f6e717d008df1b7920a7dd77ebe4a4c.png" size="72" width="587" height="483" position="center" darkWidth="587" darkHeight="483" showCaption="false"}

## Uploading a file to the candidate’s profile

To upload a form to the candidate’s profile, head to the Summary section, then to the Other Files section.

Click + Add, then select the file you’d like to upload. If you have file categories enabled, you will be able to confirm the file category the uploaded file should be added to and also add in an internal file description.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/d7474b65208207fce1bae714c214c3c8.png" size="82" width="627" height="186" position="center" darkWidth="627" darkHeight="186" showCaption="false"}

You will also be able to set the file as public (so visible to all users with access to the candidate profile) or private (so only visible to those with Organization Admin or Elevated Access - Admin Private access to the job, department, or location the job consideration is linked to).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/25da21152be8b016c0bcd9d4d7eea06e.png" size="58" width="419" height="274" position="center" darkWidth="419" darkHeight="274" showCaption="false"}


[title] Reschedule and Cancellation Reasons
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Scheduling Add-On/

You can configure cancellation and reschedule reasons to capture and track why interviews either don't go ahead or are moved to a new interviewer, date, and/or time. This feature can also be used to log and track no-shows.&#x20;

You can specify cancellation and reschedule reasons within Ashby, or candidates can specify them when rescheduling or cancelling via their direct booking confirmation page. Recording this information in Ashby helps improve interview scheduling efficiency, time to schedule, and, ultimately, time to hire metrics.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** You must be an Organization Admin to create reschedule and cancellation reasons.
:::

# Permissions & access

Reschedule and Cancellation Reasons are available on all plans. Users on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans can configure cancellation reasons that are candidate-facing:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="info"}
Users on the Enterprise plan and users on the Plus plan who have purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) can configure and create reschedule and cancellation reasons that are internal-facing and have access to the reporting fields for this feature too.
:::

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus                                                       | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅\* (if the Advanced Scheduling add-on has been purchased) | ✅          |

# Overview

This video is an optional overview. All steps are written out within this guide.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b1795feae40a497bac6912d27d978469"}

# Enabling reschedule and cancellation reasons

To enable reschedule and cancellation reasons in Ashby:

- Navigate to [Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Reschedule & Cancellation Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/scheduling/reschedule-and-cancellation-reasons)
- Use the `Reasons for Ashby Users` and `Reasons for Candidates` dropdowns to enable the feature.

You can choose from the following options for each:

- **Off:** Ashby does not ask for a reason when an interview is rescheduled or cancelled.
- **Optional:** When rescheduling or cancelling, a reason can be selected, but this field is not required.
- **Required:** When rescheduling or cancelling, a reason must be selected.

# Creating custom reschedule and cancellation reasons

While Ashby provides a default list of reasons, you also have the option to create custom reschedule and cancellation reasons.

To create a new reschedule or cancellation reason, click `+ New Reason` and complete the following fields:

**Reason Type:** Whether the cancellation is because of the candidate (for example, a scheduling conflict on the candidate's side), the interviewer (for example, a scheduling conflict on the interviewer's side), or the company (for example, pausing hiring).

**Internal Title:** The title of the reason, displayed to Ashby users.

**Internal Description:** A description of the reason, displayed to Ashby users.

**Display to Candidate:** If enabled, you have the option to set a candidate-facing title and description, and candidates can select this reason when cancelling or rescheduling themselves.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_lSYw68TCS8vJDeCb44tt_reschedule-cancellation-reasons-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-24051-pm.jpg" size="64" width="690" height="730" position="center" darkWidth="690" darkHeight="730" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows the pop-up Create New Reason."}

# Archiving or editing an existing cancellation or reschedule reason

Click on any cancellation or reschedule reason in the `Active Reasons` list to make changes.

To deactivate an existing cancellation or reschedule reason, click `Archive` when viewing the reason details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3ooOOIcBH1VDq531mmF89_reschedule-cancellation-reasons-acent-ashby-2026-01-19-at-95731-am.jpg" size="58" width="910" height="1342" position="center" darkWidth="910" darkHeight="1342" showCaption="false" alt="A reschedule/cancellation reason open with the Archive option highlighted."}

To reactivate a reschedule or cancellation reason:

1. Change the `Active` dropdown to `Archived`. The display switches to a list of your archived reasons.

![The screenshot shows the Reschedule & Cancellation Reasons page with the Active dropdown highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1j1c3ex9KRx3UwHqnlVY8_reschedule-cancellation-reasons-acent-ashby-2026-01-19-at-95813-am.jpg)

1. Click on the reason you'd like to restore to open the reason details.
2. Click `Restore`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1169itebU-9Aug_-xIrAp_reschedule-cancellation-reasons-acent-ashby-2026-01-19-at-95958-am.jpg" size="58" width="900" height="964" position="center" darkWidth="900" darkHeight="964" showCaption="false" alt="An archive reschedule/cancellation reason with the Restore option highlighted."}

# Where users can specify a cancellation or reschedule reason

:::hint{type="info"}
Internal cancellation and reschedule reasons are only available for Enterprise users or Plus users who have purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1).
:::

## Adding a cancellation reason

If a user cancels the interview by selecting `Actions`, then `Cancel Interview` on the interview activity on the candidate's profile, they are prompted to specify the cancellation reason. Users also have the option to add a clarifying note if needed.

![The cancel interview pop-up where you can confirm the interview, update calendar invites, set a cancellation reason, and add a note.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GX5jICU4jTaihEdy8W-v0_ariadne-shepard-product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-01-14-at-13737-pm.jpg)

## Adding a reschedule reason

Users can specify a reschedule reason at the point of confirming the cancellation or reschedule. When a user clicks `Schedule` on the **Communications** page, they are asked to select a reason from the dropdown provided. There is also a space for any optional notes to add further clarification if needed.

![The Rescheduling page where you can set the reschedule reason prior to confirming the reschedule.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LVxgVXtyMsEMOyn7u7dMU_new-custom-list-report-acent-ashby-2026-01-14-at-13539-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
A reschedule reason is only required if the date and time and/or an interviewer on the panel is being updated. For adjustments to the interview (such as updating the location of the interview), Ashby does not ask for a reschedule reason, even if this is set as required.
:::

# Where candidates can specify a reschedule reason

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidate-facing reschedule reasons are available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.
:::

If a candidate has booked via a direct booking link, they have the option to reschedule the interview. At the point of confirming the reschedule, they are asked for a reschedule reason and have the option to add a note before confirming.

![A screenshot of the candidate-facing Reschedule Meeting page, where the candidate can indicate a reason and share any additional details. ](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4dpM1VWCn3_ejwCM3_neJ_book-meeting-acent-reteam-2026-01-14-at-15136-pm.jpg)

# Where candidates can specify a cancellation reason

If the candidate has booked via a direct booking link, they can click the three dots on their confirmation page to cancel the interview. At the point of confirming the cancellation, they are asked for a cancellation reason and have the option to add a note.

![The candidate-facing Cancel Interview page, where the candidate can determine a reason for cancelling and share any additional details.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xvt4ISoInhI5yAgWnpcVp_meeting-details-acent-abbye-inc-2026-01-21-at-21746-pm.jpg)

# Reporting on cancellation and reschedule reasons

:::hint{type="warning"}
Reschedule and cancellation reasons can be reported on using the `Interview Schedule Versions` reporting subject, which is only available as part of the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1). Click the link for more information.
:::

The following fields are available as part of the `Interview Schedule Versions` subject:

| Field                                    | Definition                                                                                                                                                  |
| ---------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Schedule Change Reason                   | The reason submitted for rescheduling or cancelling this interview schedule version.                                                                        |
| Schedule Change Reason Type              | Whether a schedule change reason was submitted for a reschedule or a cancellation.                                                                          |
| Schedule Change Reason Submitted By      | The user who submitted a reason when rescheduling or cancelling this interview schedule version.                                                            |
| Schedule Change Reason Submitted By Type | Whether a reschedule or cancellation reason was set by an Ashby User, a Candidate, or an Ashby Automation.                                                  |
| Schedule Change Reason Category          | The category of the reschedule or cancellation reason submitted for this interview schedule version (Candidate, Interviewer, Company, or Ashby Automation). |
| Schedule Change Reason Note              | Any text included as an optional note when submitting a reschedule or cancellation reason.                                                                  |

# FAQs

### Can I view an interview cancellation or reschedule reason on the candidate's feed?

Yes. The reason for the cancellation or reschedule is listed in the candidate's feed on their profile within the cancellation or reschedule event.

![A record of a rescheduled interview as an entry on the candidate feed.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vvmz-Vry20pN2SQ8Y0G3u_ariadne-shepard-product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-01-19-at-92505-am.jpg)

### Can I limit the number of times a candidate can reschedule?

This isn't currently possible.

[title] Running Candidate Fraud Detection Checks & Reviewing Fraud Signals
[path] Applications/

Candidate Fraud Detection helps you quickly spot and investigate applicants who may not be who they claim to be. Instead of reviewing every application from scratch, you can run fraud checks (automatically, individually, or in bulk) and use the resulting fraud signals to prioritize which candidates need closer manual review. This article explains how to run fraud checks, interpret the signals you see, and incorporate them into your day-to-day review workflow.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- Candidate Fraud Detection must be enabled for your instance by an Organizational Admin. See [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl) for how-to steps.
:::

# Permissions & access

Candidate Fraud Detection is available on all Ashby plans, but not all user permissions levels can run checks and review signals.  See the table below to understand who can.

| Access Role                                                    | Can run fraud checks and mark fraud outcomes | Can view fraud signals |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                                            | ❌                      |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                                            | ❌                      |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                                            | ✅                      |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                                            | ✅                      |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                                            | ✅                      |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ✅                                            | ✅                      |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅                                            | ✅                      |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ✅                                            | ✅                      |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                                            | ✅                      |

# Running Fraud Checks

Candidate Fraud Detection can run automatically on all or some new applications, depending on how your settings have been configured. For checks that run automatically, you'll jump directly to [Reviewing Fraud Signals](docId\:utOwntvTiXHyR2gC-Eu2a) to start your review.  However, you may also run ad-hoc fraud check on a single candidate or in bulk.  This section explains how.

## Candidate Fraud Detection on a single candidate

If you’d like to use the candidate fraud detection tool for a single candidate:

1. Navigate to the candidate’s profile
2. Click `More`
3. Select `Check for Fraud` to perform a manual check
4. The following window will ask you to confirm the AI credit cost. Click `Run Fraud Check` to confirm and continue.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5075891e539889b0fdaafa9b65bb3d15.png)

## Bulk fraud detection on multiple candidates

1. Go to **Candidates > Search** to access the candidate list.
2. Apply any filters to generate to list of candidates you'd like to review (e.g., stage, source).
3. **Select** the candidates you want to check using the checkboxes on the left side, or mark the top checkbox to select all.
4. Click the `More` menu.
5. Choose `Check for Fraud`.&#x20;
6. In the **Bulk Action** popover, you'll be informed of AI credit consumption and the number of candidates selected. Click `Start Check for Fraud...` to begin the checks.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Once started, you can click `Stop Action` to halt the review.
:::

7. The following screen will indicate how many candidates were successfully checked. Click `View Log` to see a full list of checks performed.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
A successful check does not mean there was no fraud.
:::

8. Add a filter for **Fraud Status** = `Multiple Fraud Signals - Unreviewed` to your candidate list to zero in on flagged candidates.&#x20;

# Reviewing Fraud Signals

:::hint{type="info"}
Visit the [Ashby Trust Center](https://trust.ashbyhq.com/item/fraudulent-candidate-management) for a full breakdown of each fraud signal.
:::

## Reviewing fraud signals on a candidate profile

If a candidate has been flagged, a `Fraud Signals Detected` button will appear at the top of the candidate’s profile. Click this to view the signal categories and a breakdown of the analysis in the **Fraud Signals History** popover. This will contain all checks performed for this candidate (including any checks run for previous applications).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-ydxVvYyGA3N1q4nGkHXT_robert-stack-marketing-assistant-acent-ashby-2026-03-19-at-45702-pm.jpg" size="88" width="813" height="824" position="center" darkWidth="813" darkHeight="824" showCaption="false"}

As you review each signal, you can hover over the signal title to get more information on what is being evaluated.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9DZjrm01uMNFUmdImgMKE_rachel-green-generic-job-acent-ashby-2026-03-20-at-44717-pm.jpg" size="62" width="660" height="377" position="center" darkWidth="660" darkHeight="377" showCaption="false"}

Any flagged signals will be listed above the signals checked so you can easily see what needs reviewing. Expand the signal alert to review findings.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Ba9SGqcnWfKJngO-8jvos_rachel-green-generic-job-acent-ashby-2026-03-20-at-44433-pm.jpg" size="76" width="564" height="343" position="center" darkWidth="564" darkHeight="343" showCaption="false"}

## Reviewing fraud signals during application review

When reviewing applications, any suspicious patterns will be flagged via a `Fraud Signals Detected` icon to the left of the application details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EFpDI8fdEzeHpyJiV-7zM_candidate-pipeline-acent-ashby-2026-03-20-at-51114-pm.jpg" size="72" width="626" height="511" position="center" darkWidth="626" darkHeight="511" showCaption="false"}

If you have the AI Candidate Fraud Signal Summary enabled, the AI Summary will appear here, as shown in the above screenshot.

Click `View Details` to view a full list of the areas analyzed and the results.

## Marking candidates as fraudulent, not fraudulent, or unsure

Once you’ve reviewed the data provided, you can use the respective buttons to mark the application as fraudulent, not fraudulent, or as unsure if you need a second opinion. These buttons appear both when review signals on a candidate profile as well as during application review.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_gd4EqW9axFrAfiL0lpaR_chandler-bing-generic-job-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-122552-pm.jpg" size="74" width="589" height="346" position="center" darkWidth="589" darkHeight="346" showCaption="false"}

- **Mark Fraud:** Flag this as a fraudulent application. A `Fraud Signals - Marked Fraudulent` label will appear on the candidate's profile. This triggers a modal that lets you archive the candidate with the `Rejected by Organization: Fraudulent Candidate` archive reason applied automatically. You can choose if you want to notify the candidate or not, following the normal archiving flow.
- **Not Fraud:** Mark the application as a false positive and confirm that it is not fraudulent. The candidate will have a `Fraud Signals - Cleared` label added to their profile.
- **Unsure:** Mark the application with a `Fraud Signals - Needs Review` label so it can be re-reviewed later.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you need to change the fraud signals status on a candidate’s profile, you can click on the `Fraud Signals` label applied to the candidate’s profile to reopen the **Fraud Signals History** popover, then select the correct status.
:::




[title] Events
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

The Events feature simplifies the organization of hiring events, providing tools for audience management, event detail customization, and registration. It supports both in-person and virtual events and allows for attendee tagging and custom emails.

Events are available on the Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Events overview

Events is a powerful tool designed to streamline the organization and management of your hiring events. From small-scale meetups to large career fairs, this module offers a suite of features to enhance both the organizer's and the candidate's experience.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/96a8f01bd2cf4b2188bd48db7fcaccd7"}

## Accessing events

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Navigate to the Sourcing section and select th&#x65;**&#x20;Events** option to view your upcoming and past events dashboard. See event metadata, including the title, audience size, creator, and start time at a glance.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ac058226a62c6831932de0714d4adef8.png)


:::
::::

## Create a new event

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Click the `New Event` button in the top right corner to create a new event.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07372b5d7cfc34d4364f31c803ae8960.png)


:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Fill in essential details, including the:

- Internal Name (this name is not shown publicly and is for your team’s reference)
- Name
- Visibility (public or private)
- Source
- Date
- Time
- Timezone
- Location Type (physical or virtual)
- Location
- Location Description
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2825da35d188547773e6bf008adb6939.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7dd9130a5badf277a6a1be167aa04244.png)


:::
::::

## Customize your event

Each event has a home page where you can access and edit the audience, event details, registration page, and more.

### Audience

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
On the Audience tab, you can view a list of attendees. You can take individual and bulk action on this page.

More on [managing your audience](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS) below.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/db00e60af9218ac2904d31740b9a8217.png)


:::
::::

### Settings

**Basic Info & Event Details**

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
Event details event and registration information can be configured on the Settings page. Modify basic event information and update the URL slug for the event if needed here.

If you’d like to send out an invitation email automatically to candidates when you add them to your event audience (either individually or in bulk from a project), you can select an email template via the Invitation Email Template dropdown. Once an email template has been selected, you will have the option to preview it too.

:::hint{type="warning"}
An event can only have one URL at a time. If you update the URL slug for your event, any links that reference the old slug will no longer work.
:::

You can also specify an email template to send as a confirmation email when attendees register to attend the event. More on this [here](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS).


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d9ed7f92d4bb2d89f3c70a3eb86011d2.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1d7ac3b0c1b1af3bf60a545fd5dea897.png)
:::
:::::

****

**Registration Page Info**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
In this section of Settings, you can amend the public name of your event, view the registration form and add a header and footer description.

The description header appears above the title, date, and location on your event's registration page. The footer appears below the title, date, and location.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7de53cdac15c5e3ebb1bce8971ec62b9.png)

****
:::
::::

### Forms

Like other Ashby forms, you can customize the questions that your attendees see when registering. These responses can be found on the Forms tab of their lead/candidate profile and embedded in the registration email using the Hiring Event Audience Member's Registration Form Submission token.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/85673ca46de3d1a5e5d052d01f644331.png)

When editing the form, you can add the following field types:

- **Short Answer**
  Single line of unformatted text. LinkedIn url responses will be auto-populated on the candidate's profile.
- **Long Unformatted Answer**
  Multiple lines of unformatted text.
- **Phone**
  Only domestic or international phone numbers.
- **Email**
  Only valid email addresses.
- **Multiple Choice**
  Select a single option.
- **Checkboxes**
  Select multiple options.
- **Date**
  Only dates that can be selected via a date picker.
- **Yes/No**
  Yes, no, or, if not required, no answer.
- **Number**
  Only allows whole numbers (e.g. 1) or decimals (e.g. 1.5).
- **Candidate's location**
  Set the candidate's location. Can only be added once to a form.
- **Other location**
  Allow another location to be added to the referral.
- **URL**
  A clickable link to a website.
- **Candidate's Education History**
  See the candidate's education history. Can only be added once to the form.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
When adding the candidate's education history field to your form, you will be able to specify the information asked for. You can opt to include or exclude the school, degree, field of study, start and end date fields as needed. `Check the Allow multiple` entries checkbox to allow those completing the form to add multiple qualifications. You can also set a minimum and maximum number of entries using the Min and Max fields.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f2NAhMfa7xJdZfczD0K___education-history-field-on-a-form.jpg)

Information added to this field will always complete the Education section of the candidate's profile.&#x20;
:::

- **Resume**
  Upload a single file and set it to the candidate's resume field. Can only be added once to a form.

### Time Slots

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Configure time slots if you’d like to require candidates to select a specific time when registering. Switch on the `Enable Time Slots?` option then click `+ Add Time Slot `to add in a new time slot. You can also add a registration limit for each time slot if you have a limited number of spaces.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e980324d82ad98879b7921cd9317478d.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/411da02dab7159df76ecd718d0bc4a17.png)
:::
::::



### Other options

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Preview the registration page by clicking `View Registration Page` This page is styled using elements from [Theme](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme).
- Archive past events by clicking the `More` button.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9858a47fc825fe1da15883f7b665cdc6.png)


:::
::::



## Manage your audience

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Click `Audience` to view and modify the list of registered attendees, their RSVP status, and check-in status.

Take individual and bulk actions on your event list, including:

- Adding attendees
- Consider attendees for an existing job
- Add attendees to an existing project
- Add tags to attendees’ candidate profiles
- Removing attendees from the event
- Email attendees (supports custom and template emails)

If you have an invitation email configured as part of your event settings, use the `Send Invitation Email?` checkbox to determine whether an invitation email should be sent or not when adding attendees to your audience.

You can click on a specific attendee to access their lead/candidate profile.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/351069d3356299582bbb8d0bb4774772.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d91c19155e6503e85a757d2b889f9615.png)

![events1.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/koZ4bgYHOUHXv6v5Lm_uK_events1.gif)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c0de50786c00efcdf0b325fadf935ccb.png)

![events2.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6NpoxiXrijSyaRoOZguR__events2.gif)




:::
::::

## Event best practices

To get the most out of the Event feature, we recommend a few best practices to create an excellent experience for your attendees. Reach out to your Customer Success contact for more recommendations!

### Reach out to your audience ahead of the event

Use the bulk email feature to update your audience ahead of the event. This can be used to send reminders, logistical changes, and to get them excited about what’s upcoming.

### Gather feedback after the event

After an event ends, we recommend gathering feedback from the attendees. This information is useful for improving future events and gathering quotes for future marketing collateral. Use the [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB) feature to gather NPS ratings for your events.

### Ask your audience if they’d like to be added to your mailing list for future events

Even if you don’t move forward with candidates, you can keep them interested in future events and opportunities through mailing lists. Asking for their permission to be added to such mailing lists upfront via the [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB) will help ensure compliance with some regulations (e.g. GDPR requires consent to be opt-in).

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I host both in-person and virtual events?

The feature supports in-person and virtual events, allowing you to choose the format that best suits your needs.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How can I add custom fields to the registration form?

In the form editor, you can add custom fields by selecting the "Add Field" option and specifying the field type and label.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What’s the best practice for adding the specific location of an event?

Today, we recommend adding specific location details to the confirmation email and registration footer.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I specify a confirmation email to send out to attendees that register via my form?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can do this on the Settings page for your event. Scroll to the bottom of the page where you will find the confirmation email settings dropdown. Use this to select an email template. If an email template is not selected, attendees who register using your form will not receive a confirmation email.

Within the Confirmation Email Settings section, you can also opt to attach a calendar invite to your confirmation email. Switch on the `Attach calendar invite?` option and you’ll be able to preview the contents of the .ics file.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07e19ef458d489560f568432767afb3e.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ded39495e16fb806689f7380cfb34f15.png)
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note, if a candidate imports the ics file into their calendar and then clicks Accept or Decline on the event - this will not be synced back to Ashby. If you’d like to give candidates the option to update their RSVP status, add the Hiring Event Audience Member’s RSVP Link substitution token to your confirmation email template for your event. Updates made via the link will sync back to Ashby.
:::

The event description that is shared with candidates in the .ics file cannot be updated once it's been sent to a candidate - if updates are made to the event’s title or header or footer descriptions, only the .ics files sent out moving forward will include the change.




:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What should I include in an email confirmation?

- Include the details of the event, including the specific location and time.
- Include their registration details in case they’d like to reach out and update any information directly.
- Include logistics like how to let you know if they can no longer attend, where to park and who to contact with any questions.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Are there event-specific substitution tokens I can add to my email template to pull event information?

Yes, you can pull the following information using substitution tokens.
**Hiring Event Name:** The name of the hiring event.
**Hiring Event Location:** The location set in the *Location* field of your event
**Hiring Event Location Description:** The location information set in the *Location Description* field of your event
**Hiring Event Location Type:** The location type as set in the *Location Type* field of your event
**Hiring Event Date:** The date of your hiring event
**Hiring Event Time:** The timezone, start time and end time of the hiring event (if set)
**Hiring Event Start Time:** The start time of the hiring event
**Hiring Event End Time:** The end time of the hiring event
**Hiring Event Timezone:** The timezone set in the hiring event details.
**Hiring Event Audience Member’s Time Slot:** The time slot the audience member selected when registering for the event (if time slots are enabled for this event).
**Hiring Event Audience Member’s Registration Form Submission:** The audience member’s registration form submission.
**Hiring Event Audience Member’s RSVP Link:** A link that the email recipient can use to update their RSVP status after they’ve registered. Any amendments to the RSVP status made here will update in Ashby.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I create a QR code for my event registration form?

Yes! If you create a custom slug within the Settings tab of your event, you will then have the option to generate a QR code that you can add to your event marketing materials.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/67c86092091023239b148f8abe50ca80.png)
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### What does a private event look like?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you set an event to private, then only candidates that are invited (via adding to audience within Ashby) are able to register for the event.

When accessing the registration page, users will only be asked to add their email address - this is used to determine if the user has been invited. If the user has not been invited, they will see a message saying that only those invited to the event can register.

If the user has been invited, once they have entered their email they will be able to complete the form and register as attending the event. If the candidate is already registered, they’ll be informed as such after submitting their email address.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0aa54b0ad21fead62ea4f25867a89865.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I check an attendee in for the event?

Navigate to the Audience tab for your event and find the attendee on the list. In the Checked In? column, select Yes for the user in question. They’ll now be checked in and the timestamp will be recorded in the Checked In At column.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ef7a3902092ef391cb7d0e1af49e7984.png)
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### How do I export a list of attendees and/or RSVPs for my event?

Create a custom list report containing the attendee information you need for your event. You will then be able to export this list for your records, or set up Alerts if you’d like to receive notifications about attendees.

To create a custom list report, navigate to Reports > Build Report and select the custom list report option. Below you can find the recommended report set up.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Report Type: Custom List

Subject: Event Audience Members

Filters: Event Audience Member’s Hiring Event (filtered to the event in question)

Columns/Fields to Show: Include information from the event’s registration form, along with the RSVP Status.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f9bed6152f7da6ba5ab27495cda68e3f.png)
:::
::::
:::::

## Troubleshooting common issues

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **Issue:&#x20;**&#x50;age Not Found
- **Solution:** Ensure the event is not archived and the URL is correct.
- **Issue:&#x20;**&#x45;mail Confirmations Not Sent
- **Solution:** Check if the confirmation email feature is enabled and the template is correctly configured. If you can see the purple `Enable` button the template is currently disabled.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/31f23abd4498bfb43f1dea89884d11ad.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3ee7045261a63bf6da2ab3e35ce17756.png)
:::
::::

## Upcoming feature improvements

The following improvements are already on the roadmap for this feature; if you’re interested in something specific, please get in touch with your Customer Success contact or [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to express your interest.

- Bulk-adding candidates to events
- Event reporting
- Reminder emails

[title] Form Field Connectors
[path] Applications/

Form Field Connectors let you link form questions directly to candidate fields (including ), so responses automatically populate the linked field on the candidate's profile. This eliminates manual data entry, keeps candidate data accurate and consistent across your hiring workflows, and means you can report on candidate fields directly rather than tracking responses form by form. You can connect questions from application forms, referral forms, surveys, sourcing forms, and feedback forms to both standard and custom candidate fields.

# Permissions & access

Form Field Connectors can be configured on the Plus, Legacy Plus, and Enterprise plans. You must be an Organizational Admin to configure form field connections.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Linking form fields to candidate fields

Form fields can be linked to candidate fields on all of the below form options:

- **Application forms** - by navigating to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >** [Application Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/application-forms) and selecting the applicable application form.
- [Global Application Questions](docId\:IKrmhOTiN7-kgkYdkF4v_)  - by navigating to Admin > Jobs & Applications > Global Application Questions and editing the appropriate global application question.
- **Referrals** - by navigating to **Admin > Sourcing >** [Referrals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/referral-forms) and clicking on the applicable referral form.
- **Surveys or Questionnaires** - by navigating to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >** [Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/diversity-surveys). From there, go to either the **Candidate Experience** tab or the **Questionnaires** tab and select the applicable asset.
- **Sourcing forms** - by navigating to **Admin > Sourcing >** [Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/forms/all). From there, select the sourcing form you'd like to edit, then navigate to **Settings > Configure Form**.
- **Feedback forms** - by navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Feedback Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/feedback-forms) and selecting the form you'd like to edit.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
See additional notes on linking feedback forms in [Form Field Connectors](docId\:hDnnC9Znj8gSR0fjXUyQN) below.
:::

Once you're in the form with fields you need to link, the process is very similar across these different assets.

1. Scroll to the question you'd like to connect to a candidate field and click the link icon.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Plb9IYg9TTsUadVURdHs4_default-application-form-application-form-ashby-2026-08-21-at-43229-pm.png" size="100" alt="Shows the link icon under a form question" isUploading="false" width="700" height="221" darkWidth="700" darkHeight="221" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Ashby prompts you to either select an existing field to connect to this question, or create a new custom field. You can use the search bar to find a specific field if you already have a lot of custom fields in place

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/V7J-YO6inROqUcKRZkBQE_connecting-an-application-form-field-to-a-candidate-or-job-consideration-field.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="985" height="1106" darkWidth="985" darkHeight="1106" alt="The screenshot shows the wizard to connect an application field to either a Candidate or Job Consideration field." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
To select an existing field, click on it from the list.

If there is no existing applicable field, you can create a new one by adjusting the **Title** and **Description** fields under the "Or, create a new custom field" section. Select `Create and Connect Custom Field` to create the field.
:::

3. Ashby confirms the connection and gives you the option to disconnect the link or switch the field the question is mapped to.

![Shows the modal displaying the connection confirmation with the Backfill Answers button](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xKOh3VGB-REV8Zfrmd7Ij_default-application-form-application-form-ashby-2026-08-21-at-43911-pm.png)

4. Select `Backfill Answers` to backfill any forms submitted before this link was configured.

:::hint{type="info"}
When linking application form fields to candidate fields, you need to go back and save your form changes before the `Backfill Answers` button is active. It is greyed out until you do so.

![Shows the modal displaying the connection confirmation with the Backfill Answers button greyed out because the application form changes must be saved first](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1Zcmxy65Z9MzazeHfPamY_default-application-form-application-form-ashby-2026-08-21-at-43721-pm.png)

For more on the backfill process for global application questions, check out [Global Application Questions & Global Auto-Reject Rules](docId\:IKrmhOTiN7-kgkYdkF4v_).
:::

# Additional information on linking feedback forms to candidate fields

:::hint{type="warning"}
When backfilling feedback forms specifically, the latest value added to a feedback form field linked to a candidate custom field overwrites any previous values.

The only exception is if you are connecting a phone number field to the Any Phone Number field. In this case, the backfilled phone number is added to the list under Other Phone Numbers on the candidate's profile.

As such, if two interviewers complete the same feedback form for an interview, and one interviewer submits a value in the connected field at 1pm while the second submits a value in the same connected feedback form field at 1:30pm on the same day, the value submitted at 1:30pm overwrites the value submitted at 1pm and is displayed within the candidate custom field.
:::

## Unsupported field types for feedback form connectors

You cannot connect the following field types using feedback form field connectors:

**Candidate custom field types**

You cannot link feedback form fields to the following candidate or custom field types:

- Long Unformatted Answer

**Feedback form field types**

The following feedback form field types are not supported when connecting fields to a candidate custom field:

- Score
- Location
- Long Formatted Answer

There is also limited support for Phone Number fields. They can only be connected to the following fields:

- **The Phone Number (Primary, Personal) field** - the value replaces the existing number listed in this field on the candidate profile.
- **The Any Phone Number field** - the value is added to the Other Phone Numbers field on the candidate's profile.

# Pulling candidate information through to interviewers with limited access

If you have information mapped to custom fields that you'd like interviewers to see before an interview regardless of their access level (for example, the candidate's pronouns), you can add those custom fields in [Interview Briefing Info](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/interview-briefing-settings).

![Shows the candidate custom field dropdown in the Interview Briefing settings menu](https://cdn.zappy.app/1d99faf0ce1c449b547c498d21faaa83.png)

Any custom fields you specify here are then shown to your panel in their interview briefing.

![Shows the linked custom field as it appears in the interview briefing for a limited user](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2f02a97a707a629853c87d5a98dcd40.png)

# FAQ

### How does this work with multiple-answer question fields with answers that differ from the form's range of answers?

When backfilling a Multiple Choice or Checkboxes field, you also get the opportunity to map any options on previous versions of the form to the new connected field. This allows you to backfill the previous forms, even when the connected field's options don't line up perfectly with the previous submissions. You can also map all other choices to a specific value.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3b556758ee733c7b32eccf8db2cdeb61.png" size="80" alt="Shows the screen to map multiple-option questions to a field" isUploading="false" width="711" height="434" darkWidth="711" darkHeight="434" showCaption="false"}

### How does linking forms to fields impact reporting?

Instead of reporting on a specific form field, you can report on that specific candidate field directly, streamlining your reporting process.

### What happens if a candidate submits two forms, both of which have questions connected to the same field?

The most recent submission overrides the previous ones.

### How can I view the forms that are connected to a specific field?

Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields**, then click the field in question to view the form fields the custom field is connected to.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ed90d04c5dc23f8445640bee223d8064.png" size="70" alt="Shows a message at the top of the custom field that indicates it is used by a form field connector and specifies which form it is used on with a hyperlink" isUploading="false" width="586" height="199" darkWidth="586" darkHeight="199" showCaption="false"}


[title] Candidate Profile: Candidate Feed
[path] Candidates/

This guide covers the **Feed** section of the candidate profile. The feed tracks key events for job considerations and houses notes, feedback, emails, texts, referrals, and completed forms.

If the candidate is considered for multiple jobs, the feed will only show information relevant to the selected job consideration.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4aZTS5PyUe2eDGo8Oggzg_elliot-treutel-backend-engineer-ashby-2026-07-31-at-12627-pm.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
For information on adding a candidate and the candidate profile in general, check out [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites and permissions**

- Limited Access users don't have access to view candidate profiles.
- Elevated Access users have access to candidate profiles for the roles and departments they've been given the access role for. Your access role may limit your ability to see emails and notes within the candidate's feed.
- Organization Admins have access to view all candidate profiles (aside from confidential roles they haven't been given explicit access to and those they have their permissions restricted for with access roles).
- Agency users can only view the candidate profiles that have their agency listed as the source.
:::

The candidate feed shows events including:

- Job applications
- Stage changes
- Interviews scheduled, rescheduled, or cancelled
- Interview holds placed and interview holds finalized
- Candidate availability submissions
- Interviewer declining an interview calendar event
- Follow-ups being scheduled and resolved
- Any logged outreach activity
- Subscribing to or unsubscribing from sequences and/or newsletters
- Survey requests
- Application transferred (more on this at [Can I transfer a candidate’s job consideration to another job or interview plan?](docId\:FN4VK3fmmC2pOhXo3SY_y))
- Offer approvals reaching the next stage
- Offer approval completed
- Offer extended
- Offer updated
- Offer accepted
- Offer declined
- Offer cancelled
- Candidate added to a post-hire integration
- Candidate profile merged with another profile (more on this at [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](docId\:rVFnqwGMP1m3vBJwR1SBb))

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1), you also see events for the following on the candidate feed:

- Scheduling request submissions
- Interviewer being auto-replaced after declining an interview calendar event
:::

# Taking action from the feed

A sticky action bar at the top of the **Feed** and **Notes** tabs gives you quick access to the most common actions on a candidate's profile:

- `Add Note`: Add a note to the candidate's profile. More on notes in [Notes](docId\:q_ODlkYiRm8WPz9Ua_KFv) below.
- `Log Outreach`: Log a manual outreach activity.
- `Log Response`: Log a response to an outreach activity.
- `Add Feedback`: Submit feedback for the candidate. More on feedback in [Feedback](docId\:q_ODlkYiRm8WPz9Ua_KFv) below.

The action bar stays visible as you scroll through the feed so you can take action at any point without scrolling back to the top.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k1mPrHPJJWXkVZJySFkOK_elliot-treutel-backend-engineer-ashby-2026-07-31-at-13459-pm.png)

# Notes

Notes can be added to the candidate's feed to house additional information or to generate tasks for you or other users to complete. To filter specifically for notes on the candidate's feed, click the `Notes` tab.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Notes are tied to the candidate profile, not to a specific job consideration. Users who follow the candidate, including hiring team members from previous or closed job considerations, may be able to view and receive notifications for notes added to the candidate profile.&#x20;

Ashby does not currently support tying notes to a specific job consideration or limiting note visibility and notifications to the hiring team for a specific role.
:::

## Adding a note

To add a note to the candidate's profile:

1. Click into the `Add Note` field and type your note.
   - You can at-mention specific users in your note. Check the `Create a task for X` checkbox and set a date if you'd like to turn the note into a task for the tagged user.
   - Check `Is note private?` if the note should only be visible to Organization Admins and Elevated Access users with Admin Private access to the job, department, or location.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Z3jO6KAV4rrZgGmbnv26O_note-with-a-task.jpg" size="100" width="848" height="376" darkWidth="848" darkHeight="376" position="center" alt="Adding a note on a candidate profile" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

2. Click `Add` to confirm and add your note to the candidate's feed. If your note is a task, the task appears on the tagged user's **Home** page.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k9w6Va373Mf6_urwGNcWu-20260526-142157.jpg" size="100" width="1590" height="440" darkWidth="1590" darkHeight="440" position="center" indent="2" showCaption="false"}

## Pinning, editing or deleting a note

Once you've added a note to the candidate's feed, you'll see a number of options:

- To edit a note, click `Edit` underneath the body of the note. It is not possible to edit a note on behalf of another another user.
- To react to a note, click on the smiley face icon to the left of the `Edit` option and select your reaction. You can hover over any existing reactions to see who responded and with what.
- To pin a note to the top of the candidate feed, click the `Pin` option beneath the body of the note.&#x20;
- To delete a note, click the trash can icon to the right of the `Pin` option.&#x20;
- To reply to a note, click `Reply` directly underneath the record of the note.

![A note on a candidate profile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9EdVPs0EKooJ5lCZ5jxtN_a-note-on-a-candidate-profile.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
You need access to view the candidate's profile and notes to be able to view emoji reactions. For more on permissions, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).
:::

# Feedback

To filter specifically for feedback on the candidate's feed, click the **Feedback** tab. Submitted feedback listed here includes the following:

- Interview feedback
- Candidate review feedback
- Feedback submitted via feedback request
- Feedback submitted via the `Submit Feedback` option on the candidate's profile
- AI-assisted application review criteria evaluation

## Can I fill out a feedback form on behalf of an interviewer?

If you have Elevated Access - Admin, Elevated Access - Admin Private, or Organization Admin access, you can complete feedback on behalf of an interviewer. To do this:&#x20;

1. Navigate to the **Feedback** tab within the feed on the candidate's profile.
2. Find the feedback form that needs to be completed
3. Click the `Write Feedback` button on the feedback event and add in the feedback
4. Click `Submit` to add the completed form to the feedback record.

![The write feedback button so you can leave feedback on behalf of another user.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JoEVGelYKF99OKFAfFE7T_ariadne-shepard-digital-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-05-27-at-113859-am.jpg)

# Emails

To filter specifically for emails, click the **Emails** tab in the candidate's feed. Both emails sent via Ashby and synced emails can show up in the feed.

:::hint{type="info"}
Emails sent to and from the candidate are synced to their feed depending on your [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) or [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7) configuration. Any emails sent via Ashby are added to the candidate's feed by default. For more on how emails are synced, check out [Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3).
:::

## Interview reminder and confirmation emails

To help keep the feed focused on the most actionable information, interview reminder and confirmation emails are collapsed by default. This is especially useful when a candidate has progressed through multiple interview stages, as it prevents repeated, similar cards from cluttering the feed.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fsHoh7f2ZHBvMl1MZQbms_michael-michaels-syl-head-of-design-ashby-2026-08-04-at-120848-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="556" height="235" darkWidth="556" darkHeight="235" alt="Screenshot of collapsed interview reminder automated emails." showCaption="false"}

To view the full content of a collapsed reminder or confirmation email, click the card to expand it. Click the card again to re-collapse it.

This collapsed behavior applies across Ashby, including the web app, the Ashby Chrome extension when viewing a candidate in Gmail, and the Ashby Mobile feed.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Synced emails (i.e. emails that are not automated) are not collapsed automatically.
:::



## Email sync explanation&#x20;

If an email has synced to a candidate profile and you're not sure why, follow these steps:

1. Navigate to the **Feed** section of the candidate's profile.
2. Hover over the `i` icon to the right of **Synced Email** on the email in question.
3. A tooltip displays with further information on why the email was synced to the candidate's feed.

![A tooltip showing that an email was synced to a candidate profile before the email address was removed from the candidate's profile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/66-392O0ek4dBn-lihbT1_zight-2026-05-26-at-142205.jpg)

The tooltip can display the following messages:

| Tag                            | Further information                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Same email thread              | This email is in the same email thread as other messages involving the candidate, even though they aren't on the To, From, or CC line of this specific message. Email clients sometimes group messages with the same subject into one thread, even when the participants change between messages. |
| Imported for another candidate | This email was originally imported when bringing in past emails for \{other candidate}. That can happen when two candidates share an email address, or when email clients group messages from different candidates into the same thread.                                                          |
| Removed email address          | This email matched \{address}, but that address has since been removed from the candidate's profile.                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Team email address             | This email was imported from \{user}'s inbox through the shared team address \{alias}. Since \{user} has email sync on, messages involving the candidate that arrive there are imported automatically.                                                                                            |
| Personal email address         | This email was sent to or from \{alias}, a personal address that \{user} has set up for email sync.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Email address used by others   | This email matched \{address}, but other candidates also have that address: \{other candidates}.                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Imported past email            | The date shown on this email is when it was originally sent. It was imported into Ashby later, when a teammate imported past emails for this candidate.                                                                                                                                           |
| Earlier in thread              | A newer message in this thread synced to the candidate, so this older one was imported too. That keeps the full conversation together on the profile.                                                                                                                                             |
| Teammate's inbox               | This email was pulled from \{user}'s inbox, even though a different team member is shown on the email itself. The team member shown might not have email sync enabled, but \{user} does.                                                                                                          |
| Candidate was CC'd             | The candidate was CC'd on this email rather than being on the To or From line. CC'd addresses are matched during email sync too, so the email shows up on the candidate's profile.                                                                                                                |

## Removing an email from the candidate's feed

If an email has synced to the candidate's feed and you'd like to remove it, click `More` beneath the email in question, then select `Delete From Ashby`.

![The option to delete a synced email in Ashby](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rBKWv5vl5KZnTEMT2dH-B_delete-from-ashby.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
This action can't be undone. If you just want to limit who can view the email, click `Make Private` instead. The email can then only be seen by Organization Admins and those with Elevated Access — Admin Private access to the job, department, or location.

If the email was sent via Ashby, only the `Make Private` option is available.
:::

# Texts

To view texts sent to and from the candidate, click the **Texts** tab in the candidate's feed. For information on enabling candidate texting, check out [Candidate Texting Onboarding](docId\:LrSCwWBh0I1RwPuqxdQrN). Once enabled, you can read more about using this feature at [Candidate Texting](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84).

# Referrals

To filter specifically for referral information for the candidate, click the **Referrals** tab in the candidate's feed. If the candidate was referred directly, their referral form is listed here.

![A record of a direct referral](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/K28_kSaWOdHBj_mojQaXh_tilly-morris-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-05-26-at-25556-pm.jpg)

If the candidate submitted an application via a referral link, a record that they used a referral link shows instead and their application form is listed under **Forms**.

![A record of a referral via a referral link](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_IULR4ssXzlfIG0lqgKGp_referral-link-candidate-feed.jpg)

## Deleting a referral from the candidate feed

You can delete a referral record from the candidate feed by clicking `More` in the bottom right of the referral record, then `Delete`.

![Deleting a referral record.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nKLueVxqme1nPGzdvzhUN_deleting-a-referral.jpg)

If you delete a referral by mistake, you can restore it prior to the final deletion date. To do this:

1. Navigate to `Personal Settings`, then `Recently Deleted`
2. Click `Restore` on the record in question

You will also have the option to permanently delete the referral and view the final deletion date.

![The recently deleted page, showing a referral.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MIFiMGenJsHTKpxdsBr3c_restoring-a-deleted-referral-record.jpg)

# Forms

Any forms the candidate completes are listed here, including:

- Application forms
- Sourcing forms
- Candidate experience surveys
- Questionnaires

:::hint{type="info"}
A record of the candidate completing an EEOC or Diversity survey is listed in this section, but the completed form is not included in the record.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Non-offer e-signature documents are not found within the **Forms** section of the candidate's feed. These can be found in the **Other Files** section of the candidate's profile.
:::

## What happens if a candidate applies for the same job twice?

If a candidate applies for a role again using the same information when they already have an active job consideration, only one job consideration shows on their profile. An additional job consideration is not created. Both application forms can be seen in the **Forms** section of the feed on the candidate's profile.

If you regularly see candidates applying for the same role multiple times, check out our guide on [Application Limits](docId\:DTFh2I3HX_EkQBVgwW8FI). If the candidate applies with different information, an additional candidate profile is created but may be flagged as a duplicate. More on merging duplicates at [How do I merge duplicate candidate profiles?](#).

# Assistant

You can also access the AI candidate assistant via the **Assistant** tab. More on enabling and using the AI candidate assistant at [AI Candidate Assistant](docId\:gfXoUwYWswcWHeJ65OD8S).


[title] Candidate Search
[path] Candidates/

Ashby's Candidate Search allows you to specify filters and pull a list of candidates that meet that criteria, then take bulk action on them if needed. You can also easily save and pin a candidate search to your home page (like any report) so you can access it quickly in the future. This guide covers how to search for candidates, the filters available, and how to save regularly used candidate searches.

# Permissions and access

See the chart below for more information on the permissions needed to view candidate profiles.

| Access Role                                                    | Has Access? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌           |
| Agency Users                                                   | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ✅\*         |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅           |

:::hint{type="info"}
\*Elevated Access users have access for the roles and departments they have been given the access role for.
Agency users can only view the candidate profiles that have their agency listed as the source.
:::

# Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f1ede713c68f457186f400a0b4ba1484"}

Navigate to **Candidates > Search** in the top navigation bar to create a candidate search.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7623374254003456de666d0b9cbc35a3.png)

You can also create a candidate search by navigating to **Reports > Build**. Select `Candidate List` as the report type.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dca6af2be64119ce0dd2d916d44d0ccc.png)

# Basic filters

When it comes to setting the criteria for your candidate search, Ashby has basic filters. These are the most commonly used filters. Basic filters are enabled when the `Advanced` toggle is switched off.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/270778e543bbfad658a623c1259d7e50.png)

1. **Advanced** — This toggle allows you to switch between basic and advanced filters.
2. **+ Filter** — Click this to open a list of commonly used filters. These include a full-text search of the candidate's resume, location, current interview stage, tags added to the candidate profile, and projects they have been added to.
3. **Job is…** — Click this to select a job to filter by. All candidates considered for the job or roles selected show in the search results.
4. **Department is…** — Click this to select a department to filter candidates by. All candidates considered for a job or jobs in that department show in the search results.
5. **Candidate Source is…** — Click this to select a source to filter candidates by. All candidates that have this source applied to their profile show in the search.

# Advanced filters

Switch on the `Advanced` toggle to search through a wider range of filters. When you turn on this toggle, you see an option to `+ Add Field to Match` instead. Click this to search through the full range of filters available. Examples of advanced filters include filtering by a value added to a custom field on the candidate's profile or by the answer to a question on an application form.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a9b5390b45e69fc4a90c1a36f03d3f20.png)

## Yes/No fields and empty or unassigned filters

Yes/No fields have three possible states:

- `Yes`
- `No`
- Empty or unassigned, when no value is stored

The `is NOT empty/unassigned` filter includes both `Yes` and `No` because both are assigned values. The `is empty/unassigned` filter only includes candidates whose field has no stored value.

:::hint{type="info"}
A field that looks unchecked can contain a stored `No` value. To clear the value, open the candidate profile and select the currently selected `Yes` or `No` value again.
:::

# Saving and pinning a candidate search

To save and pin a candidate search:

1. Click `Save` on a candidate search. It is added to your **Saved Reports**.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/86e7edd5887467a353cfc1351de14f51.png)

2. Enter a title for your candidate search and determine whether other users can access it using the **Access Control** toggle.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a3379f52223473512a7a68173e49dc7b.png)

3. On the home page, click the `+ Add` button under **Views** on the left side to pin the report to your home page.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cec67dd0daf14b71b6b2284f43768d3d.png)

4. Search for and select your candidate search to pin it. You can then click on it to pull it up immediately.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9610e63117f3e526a1eb337ccab8a59e.png)

To remove a pinned report:

1. Click `Edit`.
2. Click the trashcan icon next to the report you'd like to remove.
3. Click `Done` to confirm the changes.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/aefde349d5e0f2aec2aba78b001e407c.png)

## Save as 'New'

You can also save a specific set of filtering criteria as a filter tab on the Candidate Search page. Once your filters are set up, click the Save as 'New' tab option. You are asked to name this filter. This can be particularly helpful when you are looking to jump between multiple candidate searches.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/18d851d371c6acc61cf5a602430ad482.png)

Once named, this shows as an additional filtering option beside the My Candidates tab.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2f329b7bf0288dc26eec8bc19a9a4b3b.png)

# My Candidates

Along with the **New Filter** tab and saving new filters, you can also use the `My Candidates` tab. This pulls all candidates that you are following, or candidates who are being considered for a role you are on the hiring team for.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5a09b45b0ce7081fcbfb5befd10d0d45.png)

# AI Filter Assistant for candidate search

:::hint{type="info"}
To opt in to this feature, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features** and toggle **AI Filter Assistant** on. Both Ashby All-In-One and Ashby Analytics customers can opt in to use this feature.
For information on using the AI Filter Assistant with reports, see [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW).
:::

You can use the AI Filter Assistant to automatically generate a filter for your candidate search.

1. Click the `AI Assistant` option and start typing the filter you are looking to set up.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eb9e20f291b5348e49b5fbc1bfedefa8.png)

2. Click `Generate Filter`. The assistant adds filters based on your prompt.
3. If your filters look good, click the 👍 icon to provide your feedback. If the filters don't match what you were expecting, leave feedback by clicking the 👎 icon.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5076e8d4687003ca46d6855ac382d7da.png)

# Taking bulk actions on candidates

Once you have created a list of candidates that meet your criteria, you can take action on them in bulk (for example, sending a mass email).

1. Check the checkbox beside each candidate you'd like to take this action on. To select all candidates on the list, check the checkbox within the list's header.&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ed114d06d5a237f65086df3f0f037835.png)

2. Once candidates have been selected, the buttons relating to the actions you can take appear. Select the action you'd like to perform.&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/35f6e43ac6c7b1d02794eba2bf2c663d.png)

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
You can take the following actions in bulk on your selected candidates:&#x20;
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Consider for Job
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Add to Project
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Archive
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Email (emailing the selected candidates in bulk)
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Enroll in Sequence
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Transfer (more on this at [Can I transfer a candidate’s job consideration to another job or interview plan?](docId\:FN4VK3fmmC2pOhXo3SY_y)  )
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Set Tags
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Anonymize or Delete (more on these at [Anonymizing and Deleting Candidates](docId\:DMwv1T1xMs0RsjF7bb9vc))
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Remove from Project
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Mark as Do Not Contact (more on this at [Can I mark a candidate as Do Not Contact?](docId:_Mj-DewLnurpGtpvCZo81) )
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Remove Do Not Contact status
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Send Data Consent Request (more on this at [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9))
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Add to an [Event](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS)&#x20;
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Check for Fraud (more on this at [Bulk fraud detection on multiple candidates](docId\:utOwntvTiXHyR2gC-Eu2a))
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Add Follow Up
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Update Follow Up
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Resolve Follow Up
:::

3. Next, the bulk action wizard opens. In the **Selection** section, review the criteria you have set and the number of records that match. Take time to review this information.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3bbcdf2fae657f2ea5afd0db337b897e.png" size="60" width="578" height="737" isUploading="false" darkWidth="578" darkHeight="737" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
If the action is destructive (for example, deleting candidates), check the I confirm that this action is destructive checkbox.
:::

4. Click `Start [action] on [number] records` to continue.
5. Confirm the bulk action.
   - If performing the action on a small set of records, you are asked to `Confirm` the bulk action and the number of records.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5f5697a4e267539e5d6ddde28343fcaf.png" size="50" width="321" height="235" isUploading="false" darkWidth="321" darkHeight="235" showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
If performing the action on a large number of records, type the action into the specified field. The number of records impacted is also listed in the prompt window. Click `Perform` to complete the bulk action.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/93f39730978d3180c46005b4422a6ed4.png" size="60" width="561" height="331" isUploading="false" darkWidth="561" darkHeight="331" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
The bulk action type and the number of records included in the bulk action determine the number of confirmation prompts you receive:

**Deleting or anonymizing candidates**

- Up to 24 candidates: Inline prompt.
- 24+ candidates: Confirmation window with typing prompt.

**Archiving, marking as Do Not Contact, or sending a survey**

- Up to 24 candidates: Inline prompt.
- 24+ candidates: Confirmation window with typing prompt.

With any other bulk actions, if you are taking the action on 24 candidates or more, you see the inline prompt to confirm your bulk action before it is performed.
:::



6. The bulk action will run in the **Bulk Action** pullout menu.

   If you close the bulk action wizard window while bulk actions are being processed, you can see the progress in a minimized version of the wizard.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e56c241e10064ba280b9c69408341d99.png" size="70" width="346" height="75" isUploading="false" darkWidth="346" darkHeight="75" showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
To open the wizard back up, click the `Restore bulk action pullout` button. Once the bulk action has been performed, you can view a log of all the changes on the confirmation page. Click `Close` to close the bulk action wizard when you are done.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/9074248ae416cc8615e70e829bc20c82.png" size="70" width="567" height="747" isUploading="false" darkWidth="567" darkHeight="747" showCaption="false"}

# Boolean search

You can use the `Full Text Resume Search` filter option to search for specific terms and pull candidates based on the text in their resume.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c57eaad9341436f8138c4b7d74f11de6.png)

Type your chosen term into the provided field and select from the following options in the drop-down to further build out your search filters.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d67326ec24d3ab31e7887530ccd68c20.png)

| Boolean Search Option                                  | Description                                                                                                                                                                   | Example                                                                                                                                  |
| ------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Matches (supports the boolean functions OR, NOT)       | A case-insensitive exact match of all the individual words, regardless of order. Use this when the resume needs to mention multiple exact keywords but order does not matter. | Searching `javascript coder` brings resumes containing both `javascript` and `coder` anywhere.                                           |
| Contains (supports the boolean functions AND, OR, NOT) | Returns records that contain the exact *phrase*, in the exact order. Not case-sensitive.                                                                                      | Searching `javascript coder` brings resumes containing `javascript coder` and `Javascript Coder` as a phrase, but not `javascript code`. |
| Equals (supports the boolean functions OR, NOT)        | Returns records that contain the exact phrase with exact capitalization.                                                                                                      | Searching `javascript coder` brings resumes containing `javascript coder` as a phrase, but not `Javascript Coder`.                       |
| Similar (supports the boolean functions AND, OR, NOT)  | Returns records with variations of the word. Not case-sensitive. Good for partial matches or different word forms.                                                            | Searching `localization` *may* bring resumes containing `localized` or `localize`.                                                       |

## Boolean operators

Boolean operators help you connect multiple terms as part of your search. Below you can find a list of commonly used operators for reference.

| Boolean Operator                                                                       | Description                                                                                                                                                  | Example                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| OR (use any of `\|`, `,`, `OR`, `or`)                                                  | OR allows you to search for multiple terms and have results that match one or multiple terms searched.                                                       | `contractor`, `freelance`, or `consultant` — A candidate is returned if the resume contains any of the terms listed above.                                                                                                                      |
| AND (use any of `&`, `+`, `:`, `AND`, `and`)                                           | AND requires both terms (or all terms following AND) to be included in the results.                                                                          | `python` & `react` & `nodejs` — Results are returned for candidates who have all three terms in their resume. `software engineer` — The search finds instances containing the words software and engineer in any order, together or separately. |
| NOT (use any of `!`, `-`) — using the text `NOT/not` will not work for this operation. | NOT excludes records with the specified terms from being included in the search result.                                                                      | `!remote` — Excludes records with remote included in the resume.                                                                                                                                                                                |
| WORDS (combine multiple words to match the term exactly by wrapping in `" "`)          | Combine multiple words to match the desired search term exactly. This helps to ensure results contain a full phrase, rather than single words from the term. | `"software engineer"` — The quotation marks ensure that results contain *software engineer*, rather than only *software* or *engineer*.                                                                                                         |

## Boolean modifiers

Boolean modifiers allow you to create searches that include the stem of words or searches with sub-queries.

| Modifier                             | Description                                                                                      | Example                                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| PREFIX (use `*`)                     | Searches for results where the term is included as part of a word in the candidate's resume.     | `*script` — Matches javascript, typescript, etc. `*end` — Matches frontend, backend, etc.                                                                        |
| GROUPING (use either `( )` or `[ ]`) | GROUPING allows you to form sub-queries to pull results that meet criteria from multiple groups. | `(remote or hybrid)` AND `[backend and python]` — Pulls results for candidates who have either remote or hybrid included in their resume AND backend and python. |

## More advanced Boolean search examples

Below are some search examples with clarification in natural language on the results expected.

| Boolean Search                                                                                                       | Search Clarification                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `"senior software engineer"` AND `(python OR java)` AND `(remote OR hybrid)` AND `!(junior OR intern OR contractor)` | Find resumes that contain "senior software engineer" AND mention either "python" OR "java" AND indicate they've held either "remote" OR "hybrid" roles AND exclude any resumes that mention "junior" OR "intern" OR "contractor" roles.   |
| `"full stack developer"` AND `react` AND `nodejs` AND `!remote` AND `!(freelance contractor)`                        | Find resumes that contain "full stack developer" AND mention "react" AND mention "nodejs" AND do NOT mention "remote" work AND exclude any that mention "freelance" OR "contractor" roles.                                                |
| `(frontend & react)` \| `(backend & python)` & `*cloud` & `-junior`                                                  | Find resumes that contain either (both "frontend" AND "react") OR (both "backend" AND "python") AND mention any cloud technology (like "AWS cloud", "cloud computing", "cloud architecture") AND exclude any that mention "junior" roles. |

# FAQ

### Can I filter for candidates who meet a specific criteria from within a job?

If you'd like to filter candidates within the **Candidate Pipeline** section of a job, click `+ Add Field to Match` to add filters and specify your criteria. The candidates who meet that criteria are then displayed in your pipeline.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2bb3a47b0098934de79d10be0786b445.png)

### What is the difference between Application Review Average Score and Average Overall Recommendation?

The **Application Review Average Score** is the average score given by all users in application review. If an application passes through application review multiple times, this considers all scores. The **Average Overall Recommendation** filter considers scores given across all interviews for the job consideration. Both scores reflect human reviewer input only and are independent from AI-Assisted Application Review criteria evaluations. If you are looking for a measure of AI criteria fit, refer to the **AI Job Criteria Met Percentage** column in the application review pipeline. See [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr) for details.

### Can I search for terms or keywords used in notes added to the candidate profile?

No, it is not currently possible to search for candidates based on content within notes on their profile.

### Can I bulk schedule interviews for multiple candidates at once?

This is not currently possible. If you are looking for a way to streamline your scheduling process, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).

### I've added a candidate search/candidate list report to my dashboard and just see a number, rather than a list. What can I do?

If you add a candidate list to a dashboard, the candidate count is displayed rather than the full candidate list. If you would like to display a customized table on your dashboard, you can create a custom list report on the candidate subject (or any subject) and select the desired columns to be displayed. More on custom list reports at [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW).

### Why does a candidate with an unchecked-looking Yes/No field appear when I filter for is not empty/unassigned?

An unchecked-looking Yes/No field can contain a stored `No` value. The `is NOT empty/unassigned` filter matches any field with a stored value, so a field set to `No` is expected to match this filter.

To return a field to empty or unassigned, open the candidate profile and select the currently selected Yes or No value again to clear it.

[title] Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up
[path] Interviews & Scheduling/Interviews: Advanced Scheduling Add-On/

Recruiting Blocks help teams make interview availability intentional and predictable. Instead of relying only on general meeting hours or open calendar time, interviewers, recruiters, and executive assistants can reserve specific calendar times that Ashby recognizes as available for interviews.

:::hint{type="info"}
For organization admin settings for Recruiting Blocks, see [Managing Recruiting Blocks for Your Organization](docId\:OQq2n4UMNm-o2TCvMQpTL)&#x20;
:::

# Permissions & access

Recruiting Blocks are part of the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) and are included on the Enterprise plan.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ➕    | ✅          |

The following permissions apply:

- **Organization Admins** can enable or disable the organization-level capability for personal Recruiting Blocks.
- **Organization Admins** and **Elevated Access users&#x20;**&#x77;ith the `Can add/edit jobs` permission can configure Recruiting Blocks on .
- Users with Limited Access, Elevated Access, or Organization Admin access can enable their own personal Recruiting Blocks when personal Recruiting Blocks are enabled for the organization.

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_) for more information about Elevated Access permissions.
:::

# When to use Recruiting Blocks

Recruiting Blocks can help when:

- **Interviewers have limited or unpredictable availability.** Personal Recruiting Blocks let interviewers identify recurring times when they can reliably be scheduled, similar to submitting their availability in advance.
- **Recruiters or executive assistants (EAs) manage busy calendars.** An EA or recruiter can create explicit blocks on an interviewer's calendar, reducing back-and-forth coordination.
- **Executives want to protect time for approved interviews.** Executives can designate specific times when interviews may be scheduled, rather than leaving calendar time open for any meeting.
- **Allocating time across multiple roles.** Use schedule-level blocks to intentionally reserve more interviewer capacity for high-priority roles and less for lower-priority ones, so important hiring efforts don't get crowded out. &#x20;
- **You are hosting a hiring event, campus recruiting event, superday, or batch interview day.** Use one-time or recurring blocks to reserve specific days and times for the event.
- **Your organization has inconsistent meeting hours or calendar practices.** A dedicated calendar event that explicitly means "available for interviews" can be easier to manage than trying to interpret inconsistent calendars, or checking which existing meetings can be moved or booked over.

# The two types of Recruiting Blocks

Recruiting Blocks can be configured at two levels. The level you choose depends on whether you want to limit a person's availability across interviews or reserve availability for a particular interview workflow.

| **Type**                             | **What it controls**                                                                                            | **When to use it**                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Personal Recruiting Blocks**       | When a specific interviewer should be considered available for scheduling any interviews.                       | Use when an interviewer wants to submit their own reliable interview availability, or when an EA or recruiter manages availability for a busy interviewer. |
| **Schedule-level Recruiting Blocks** | When interviewers related to a specific interview should be considered available for scheduling that interview. | Use when a role, interview type, hiring event, or other workflow needs its own dedicated capacity.                                                         |

# Before you set up Recruiting Blocks

:::hint{type="warning"}
Recruiting Blocks are calendar events, so Ashby must be able to read the event title and time from the interviewer's calendar. See [Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3) for more information on calendar integrations and permissions.
:::

### Requirements for using Recruiting Blocks

- Blocks must be on the interviewer's primary connected calendar. Ashby does not detect events on secondary calendars as Recruiting Blocks, even if those calendars otherwise contribute conflicts or availability.
- The event title must be visible to Ashby. If the calendar integration cannot expose event names, Ashby cannot distinguish a Recruiting Block from another calendar event. Review your [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) or [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7) calendar integration and visibility settings before rolling out the feature.
- Ashby recognizes a block event even if it has not been accepted. A recruiter, recruiting coordinator, or EA can create a shared event and invite interviewers.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
If an interviewer declines the event, Ashby ignores that block for them.
:::

- Ashby matches the event title, not its free/busy status. A Recruiting Block can be marked **Busy** or **Free** on the native calendar.
- Capitalization does not matter, but the rest of the title must match the title Ashby shows you. Personal block titles cannot be customized.
- One-off events are supported. We recommend setting recurring events to maintain regular weekly availability, so availability does not expire unexpectedly.

# Setting up personal Recruiting Blocks

:::hint{type="warning"}
If your organization does not have personal Recruiting Blocks enabled for your account, you will not be able to enable them in your personal settings. See [Enabling personal Recruiting Blocks for your organization](docId\:OQq2n4UMNm-o2TCvMQpTL) for more information.
:::

When a user enables personal Recruiting Blocks, Ashby considers that person available only during matching Recruiting Block calendar events when scheduling interviews.

:::hint{type="info"}
Personal Recruiting Blocks are a personal setting. They apply across interview schedules unless a [schedule-level Recruiting Block](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q) with a custom suffix takes precedence.
:::

1. Go to **Personal settings >&#x20;**[Meeting Hours & Recruiting Blocks](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/meeting-hours).
2. Turn on `Recruiting Blocks`.

![Ashby Personal Settings page for Meeting Hours & Recruiting Blocks, showing Recruiting Blocks enabled, the “Ashby Recruiting Block” calendar event title, scheduling conflict options, and Meeting Hours settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BrinEVcPiSTUJsgN6bnUX_meeting-hours-recruiting-blocks-ashby-2026-09-17-at-83130-am.jpg)

3. Copy the title shown in Ashby, or select `Create in Google Calendar`, when available.
4. Create a calendar event using the exact title shown in Ashby. For example, the default title may be `Ashby Recruiting Block`.

![Google Calendar showing an “Ashby Recruiting Block” recurring weekly on Monday from 9 AM–12 PM.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9kr4Ek_JNCc2_mHHgzx5u_general-settings-2026-09-17-at-83553-am.jpg)

5. Choose how Ashby handles other calendar events that overlap the block:
   - `Allow scheduling over non-interview meetings`: Ashby treats the block as available even when ordinary calendar meetings overlap it.
   - `Don’t schedule over existing meetings`: Overlapping calendar events make that portion of the block unavailable.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If Ashby cannot find any events with the block title in your calendar, you see a warning on the [Personal Meeting Hours](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/meeting-hours) page where the personal Recruiting Blocks are set up.

![Ashby's Meeting Hours & Recruiting Blocks settings with Recruiting Blocks enabled and a warning that no Ashby Recruiting Block events were found in the next 30 days.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/I97DrWvfhpEIyKXNXFXKf_meeting-hours-recruiting-blocks-ashby-2026-09-17-at-84838-am.jpg)
:::

# Setting up schedule-level Recruiting Blocks

:::hint{type="warning"}
You configure schedule-level Recruiting Blocks on a schedule interview activity. The interviewers considered for that activity must have matching events on their calendars.
:::

Schedule-level Recruiting Blocks reserve interviewer availability for a specific schedule interview activity.  Enabling Recruiting Blocks on a specific schedule means any eligible interviewers must have corresponding Recruiting Block events on their calendar to be considered available when scheduling this interview. &#x20;

Schedule-level Recruiting Blocks can use either:

- The standard title shown in Ashby, which is useful when the schedule can use the same events as personal Recruiting Blocks.
- A custom suffix, which creates a distinct title for only that schedule, such as "Ashby Recruiting Block \[engineering]". Custom suffixes are useful when a team is hiring for multiple roles and wants to reserve more interviewer capacity for priority roles without allowing lower-priority hiring to consume all available time.

To set up schedule-level Recruiting Blocks, follow these steps:

1. Open the job and go to the `Interview Plan` tab.
2. Open the schedule interview activity you want to configure by selecting `Modify`**&#x20;>&#x20;**`Edit`, or create a new schedule interview activity.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
See [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) for more information on configuring schedule interview activities.
:::

3. Open the `Meeting Hours` tab.
4. Turn on `Recruiting Blocks`.
5. Optionally enter a value in the **Schedule-specific suffix&#x20;**&#x66;ield:
   - Leave the suffix blank to use the standard Recruiting Block title, `Ashby Recruiting Block`.
   - Add a suffix to create a distinct title for this schedule, such as `Ashby Recruiting Block [product-documentation]`.
   - Use lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens only in the suffix field.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IeFxxsRLHGMjj6Bz8SemP_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-17-at-83956-am.jpg" size="100" alt="Ashby interview plan settings for a Product Documentation Specialist role with Recruiting Blocks enabled and the optional schedule-specific suffix “product-documentation” highlighted." isUploading="false" width="1517" height="843" darkWidth="1517" darkHeight="843" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

6. Create matching events on the interviewers’ primary connected calendars.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FXK4Hz_gMvykarYsCpbuA_week-of-september-20-2026-2026-09-17-at-84413-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="939" height="519" darkWidth="939" darkHeight="519" alt="Google Calendar showing recurring Ashby Recruiting Blocks, including a schedule-specific &#x22;Ashby Recruiting Block [product-documentation]&#x22; event from 3–4 PM on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday." showCaption="false"}

7. Choose how Ashby handles ordinary calendar events that overlap the block.
   - `Allow scheduling over non-interview meetings`: Ashby treats the block as available even when ordinary calendar meetings overlap it.
   - `Don’t schedule over existing meetings`: Overlapping calendar events make that portion of the block unavailable.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you use a suffix, Ashby considers only events with the corresponding suffix for that schedule. A personal event titled `Ashby Recruiting Block` does not make an interviewer available for a schedule that expects `Ashby Recruiting Block [product-documentation]`.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
A centralized recruiting team can create shared, recurring schedule-level blocks and invite multiple interviewers. The invitees do not need to accept the events for Ashby to recognize them, but declining an event makes that block unavailable for the interviewer.
:::

# How Recruiting Blocks affect scheduling

Recruiting Blocks work with direct booking links, auto-scheduling, and manual scheduling.

## Direct booking links

When a direct booking link uses a schedule with Recruiting Blocks, candidates see only the times that fall inside the corresponding Recruiting Block calendar events on the interviewer's connected calendar.

In the example below, you see three schedule-specific suffix Recruiting Block calendar events for 3 PM on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.

![Weekly calendar showing Ashby Recruiting Blocks scheduled from 3–4 PM on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday, highlighted within the calendar.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gdtfFOwNAfoyHV6ktOXTj_week-of-september-20-2026-2026-09-17-at-85421-am.jpg)

On the direct booking link the candidate receives, they see only those times available to book.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/N3uenQPzhfme9erJ-QRXU_book-meeting-reteam-2026-09-17-at-85737-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1059" height="590" darkWidth="1059" darkHeight="590" showCaption="false" alt="Scheduling page showing a September 2026 calendar with September 23 selected and two available 30-minute time slots, 3:00–3:30 PM and 3:30–4:00 PM, in the America/New York timezone."}

:::hint{type="warning"}
If a schedule-specific recruiting block event is missing or has the wrong title, the link may show no availability.
:::

If the interview schedule does not have a schedule-specific suffix, Ashby searches the interviewer's calendar for "Ashby Recruiting Block" events.

![Weekly calendar showing Ashby Recruiting Blocks from 9 AM–12 PM Monday through Friday, with additional 3–4 PM blocks on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mWTh4gvemI7BY0x5K-HXK_week-of-september-20-2026-2026-09-17-at-90121-am.jpg)

It then shows this availability in the direct booking link. Calendar events with a suffix are not considered in this case.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vkwp6DRizE75TWnPdK3sR_book-meeting-reteam-2026-09-17-at-90616-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1078" height="594" darkWidth="1078" darkHeight="594" showCaption="false" alt="Scheduling page showing a September 2026 calendar with September 23 selected and six available 30-minute time slots from 9:00 AM to 12:00 PM in the America/New York timezone."}

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information about direct booking links, see [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).
:::

## Auto-scheduling

Auto-scheduling considers the matching Recruiting Block events when proposing interview times. Meeting Hours can still influence the times auto-scheduling recommends when possible, but Meeting Hours do not prevent an interview from being booked inside a valid Recruiting Block. For example, a block created outside Meeting Hours can still be used for interviews.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information about auto-scheduling, see [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1).&#x20;
:::

## Manual scheduling

When you manually schedule an interview, the calendar view indicates the interviewer's Recruiting Block availability. The scheduler can manually book outside of a block when an exception is needed.

![Ashby interview scheduling view showing a Recruiter Screen from 9–9 AM within the interviewer's Recruiting Blocks availability.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_JO6SpESGx0sNnZf0Rxir_candidate-pipeline-ashby-2026-09-17-at-91218-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information about manual scheduling, see [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN).
:::

## How overlapping events and calendar conflicts are handled

Ashby allows you to choose how ordinary calendar events that overlap the block affect the availability. Under each Recruiting Block set up, you see the following option for the **Allow scheduling over calendar conflicts?** field:

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Allow scheduling over non-interview meetings:** Ashby treats the block as available even when ordinary calendar meetings overlap it.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Don’t schedule over existing meetings:** Overlapping calendar events make that portion of the block unavailable.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby-managed interviews remain conflicts even when **Allow scheduling over non-interview meetings** is selected. That setting can ignore ordinary calendar meetings inside a block; it does not allow Ashby-managed interviews to overlap or double-book an interviewer.
:::

For example, if you enable `Allow scheduling over non-interview meetings` for your personal Recruiting Blocks, Ashby continues to show the block as available even when ordinary calendar events overlap it.&#x20;

In the image below, **Recruiting Stand Up** and **Resume Review** overlap with your Ashby Recruiting Blocks.

![Weekly calendar showing Ashby Recruiting Blocks from 10 AM–12 PM Monday through Friday, with a Recruiting Stand Up Monday at 11 AM and Resume Review and Pipeline Review meetings Wednesday.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yvdNeD1yiWF_gsUI0JuTQ_week-of-september-28-2026-2026-09-25-at-95806-am.jpg)

Because `Allow scheduling over non-interview` meetings is enabled, these times still appear as available on a direct booking link.

![Ashby booking page showing available 30-minute time slots for Monday, September 28, 2026, with the 11:00–11:30 AM time slot highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TGIotOBV40_Fpg12yfGk__book-meeting-learn-ashby-google-workspace-2026-09-25-at-100035-am.jpg)

If you change the setting to `Don’t schedule over existing meetings`, Ashby treats the overlapping times as busy, and they no longer appear as available.

![Ashby booking page showing available 30-minute time slots for Monday, September 28, 2026, with the 11:00–11:30 AM slot unavailable.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7awY0ky0hiMlGccZjX0sl_book-meeting-learn-ashby-google-workspace-2026-09-25-at-100218-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
The same behavior applies to schedule-specific Recruiting Blocks. When `Allow scheduling over non-interview` meetings is enabled for a schedule, Ashby ignores overlapping ordinary calendar events within matching Recruiting Block calendar events. If `Don’t schedule over existing meetings` is selected, those overlapping times are treated as busy and do not appear as available.
:::

# Maintaining Recruiting Blocks

- **Keep events up to date.** When your availability changes, update or move the calendar event. Ashby uses the new details once your calendar syncs.
- **Keep future recurring events active.** Ashby looks for a matching event on each date it schedules. If it can't find one, any workflow that uses that recruiting block may show no availability.

# FAQs

### Why is an interviewer showing no availability?

If an interviewer's interview schedule is not showing availability, check the following:

- **Calendar:** The event is on the interviewer's primary connected calendar.
- **Visibility:** Ashby can see the event's title and time. Events marked private or shown only as busy may be hidden.
- **Title:** The event title matches the recruiting block name exactly. Capitalization doesn't matter, but spelling, spacing, and punctuation do.
- **Dates:** The event takes place on the date being scheduled. If it's a recurring event, the series hasn't ended.
- **Response:** The interviewer hasn't declined the event.
- **Suffix:** If the schedule uses a suffix, it's set up correctly, and the interviewer has an event with that suffix in the title.
- **Conflicts:** No other calendar event overlaps the block in a way that marks it as busy under your selected conflict setting.

### I have a 30-minute block. Why isn’t a 45-minute interview available?

An interview must fit entirely within one continuous window created by matching Recruiting Blocks calendar events.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
Adjacent or overlapping Recruiting Block events are combined when determining availability.
:::

If the combined window is too short, extend the block or create an adjacent block so the full interview duration fits.

### Do Recruiting Block events need to be accepted?

No. Ashby recognizes an event that has not been accepted. If the interviewer declines the event, Ashby ignores that block for them.

### Can I use a block marked Free instead of Busy?

Yes. Ashby identifies Recruiting Blocks by their matching title, not their free/busy status.

### Can I use a secondary calendar?

No. Recruiting Blocks must be on the interviewer’s primary connected calendar. Ashby does not detect events on secondary calendars as Recruiting Blocks.

### Can I customize the personal Recruiting Block title?

No. Use the exact personal title shown in Ashby. Capitalization does not matter, but other changes to the title prevent Ashby from recognizing the event.

### Can I use different blocks for different schedules?

Yes. Configure a unique schedule-level suffix for each schedule, then create events with the matching titles on the interviewers’ calendars.

### If I change or remove a schedule-level suffix, what happens to existing booking links?

Active booking links use the schedule’s current Recruiting Block configuration. Changing or removing the suffix changes the event title Ashby expects, which can change the availability shown by those links.

### Can I manually schedule outside a Recruiting Block?

Yes. Manual scheduling can be used as an exception. Direct booking links and auto-scheduling continue to use the configured block availability.

### What happens when I use both personal and schedule-level Recruiting Blocks for the same interview schedule?

Ashby uses the following logic when determining interviewer availability:

|          | Schedule-level Recruiting Blocks | Calendar events Ashby checks                                                                                       |
| -------- | -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Off      | Off                              | Normal meeting hours and calendar availability                                                                     |
| On       | Off                              | The user's standard personal Recruiting Block events                                                               |
| Off      | On, no suffix                    | Events using the standard Recruiting Block title                                                                   |
| On       | On, no suffix                    | Events using the standard Recruiting Block title; these can be the same events used for personal Recruiting Blocks |
| On / Off | On, with a suffix                | Only events using the schedule-level title with that suffix; personal blocks do not apply                          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
A schedule-level Recruiting Block with a custom suffix takes precedence over personal Recruiting Blocks for that schedule. Meeting hours and general open calendar time do not create availability for that schedule.
:::


[title] How to Bulk Update the Hiring Team on a Job
[path] Jobs & Openings/

When editing the hiring team for a job with job considerations, you can select which job considerations the updates apply to.  This article walks you through the steps to update the hiring team members for all or just some job considerations for a particular job.

:::hint{type="info"}
A *job consideration* refers to a candidate who is being considered for a specific job role. It involves tracking the candidate's progress through the interview stages until a decision is made, such as hiring or archiving the application.

Note that the *hiring team* is different from other access roles and primarily serves to indicate who is involved in the job for reporting and notification purposes.
:::

1. Head into the `Settings` section of your job and scroll to the **Hiring Team** section. From there, you can click `Edit` to make amendments to your hiring team.

![Shows the settings tab of the job and points out the Edit button in the Hiring Team section.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pZiASiYev3YETVPie0Wfj_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-41844-pm.jpg)

2. Next, make your desired updates to the hiring team by clicking `+ Add Member` in the upper right corner. Read details on each field below.

![Shows the screen to add a new hiring team member.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GaSKWQCGiucTBFldIbjfD_backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-03-07-at-100131-am.jpg)

- **Role:** Select the role this user has on your hiring team from the drop-down.
- **User:** Begin typing the user's name and select the appropriate user when it populates.
- **Submit:** Add the user to the hiring team.

3. Repeat step 2 until you have added all members to your hiring team. If the job has no job considerations, click `Submit` to update the hiring team and the update will be complete. &#x20;

   If the job does have job considerations, click `Next`. You’ll be asked to confirm which job considerations you’d like to apply to new hiring team to:

![Shows three options for how to apply the hiring team changes, including on current and future job considerations which is the most common option, on future job considerations only, or on all job considerations which is the least common option.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HtT9sdovqXGayyr1d9uto_backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-03-07-at-95955-am.jpg)

- **Current and future job considerations:&#x20;**&#x54;his option will update the hiring team on considerations currently in the pipeline and future considerations. Job considerations in the Archived or Hired stages will not be impacted.
- **Future job considerations only:** This option will only add the newly configured hiring team to the job considerations of candidates considered for the role moving forward.
- **All job considerations:** All job considerations for the role will be updated with the newly configured hiring team.

Select an option, then hit `Submit`. The job considerations will then be updated accordingly. Once complete, you can hit `View Log` to see a list of the considerations that were updated.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on creating jobs, see [Creating & Opening Jobs](docId\:uyTn03bH4FvrPvjhYthAt).
:::


[title] Sourcing Forms
[path] Sourcing & Outreach/

Sourcing forms give candidates who are interested in your company, but haven't yet actively applied, a way to share their details with you. They allow candidates who don't see a job that fits their skill set on your job board to register their general interest in future roles. You can send a link to your form or forms so candidates can sign up to join your talent community and stay in the loop on new opportunities.

Sourcing Forms are available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

Sourcing forms are now available to capture and maintain candidate interest, particularly if there isn’t a suitable open role at the time. You can also automate adding signed up candidates to your   to create talent pools and assist with sourcing for future roles.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
If you’re planning to create a talent pool, we’d recommend setting up a project to add candidates to first. For more on setting up projects, check out [Projects](docId\:NeOuKpzGi4kDAtdSyMhez).
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/db7f12c1b56a46b288466fd7a56b1062"}

To create a form, navigate to Sourcing, then [Forms](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/forms/all). Click `+ New` to create a new sourcing form. Add in a title for your form and click `Submit.`

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9612847b7567dbd560408a0220054f85.png)

## Configuring the form

Click `Configure Form` to start setting up your form.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/909153512467d1dce93ed39fa92e8eff.png)

By default, the form will ask for the candidate’s name and email address. You can click `Add Question` to add additional fields for the candidate to complete.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2e8c75f3ea91ad94d69d16c2c280e9be.png)

You can add the following fields:

- **Short Answer**
  Single line of unformatted text. LinkedIn url responses will be auto-populated on the candidate's profile.
- **Long Unformatted Answer**
  Multiple lines of unformatted text.
- **Phone**
  Only domestic or international phone numbers.
- **Email**
  Only valid email addresses.
- **Multiple Choice**
  Select a single option.
- **Checkboxes**
  Select multiple options.
- **Date**
  Only dates that can be selected via a date picker.
- **Yes/No**
  Yes, no, or, if not required, no answer.
- **Number**
  Only allows whole numbers (e.g. 1) or decimals (e.g. 1.5).
- **Resume**
  Upload a single file and set it to the candidate's resume field. Can only be added once to a form.
- **Candidate's location**
  Set the candidate's location. Can only be added once to a form.
- **Other location**
  Allow another location to be added to the referral.
- **URL**
  A clickable link to a website.
- **Candidate's Education History**
  See the candidate's education history. Can only be added once to the form.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
When adding the candidate's education history field to your form, you will be able to specify the information asked for. You can opt to include or exclude the school, degree, field of study, start and end date fields as needed. `Check the Allow multiple` entries checkbox to allow those completing the form to add multiple qualifications. You can also set a minimum and maximum number of entries using the Min and Max fields.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f2NAhMfa7xJdZfczD0K___education-history-field-on-a-form.jpg)

Information added to this field will always complete the Education section of the candidate's profile.&#x20;
:::

:::hint{type="success"}
The fields you add to your form can also be reported on.
:::

If your form is looking a little long, click `Add Section` to add a new section. You can click and drag questions across sections to organize your form as needed.

## Automation Rules

Automation rules can be added to your form setup. Candidates meeting specific criteria will automatically be added the projects you specify in Ashby on completion of the sourcing form.

To set up automation, click `Configure Automation Rules`*,* then `Create a Draft Configuration` on the following pop-up.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d34b57ecd95121680ce73594e5138f64.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c625e1c8b388421e2490860d0676557e.png)

From there, create a draft automation by clicking `+ Add Field to Match `in the Condition section to select the fields and responses that would signify the candidate should be added to the specified project. Use the Project drop-down to determine the project the candidate would then be added to.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/17f73f1db296980d1390d7178a6dfba2.png)

To add additional automation rules, click  `+ Create New Automation Rule`*.* This option allows you to create additional sets of criteria that would result in the candidate being added to a different project (for example, adding them to a Customer Support project if their response confirms their interest in working in that department).

If no conditions are set, all candidates who submit the form will be added to your specified project.

Once all of your automation rules are in place for the form, click `Activate Draft Configuration` to enable the automation rules.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a6f491130d37af0d402c8f6b32bb7887.png)

## Form Page Info

In the Form Page Info section, you can add a public and internal title to your form, determine the source applied to candidates who are added to Ashby via your form and more.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/72dfc78de622f494e7526cc35656d6fe.png)

1. **Title:** The name of your sourcing form. This is a public title that candidates will see.
2. **Header Description:** This description is displayed below your title and above the form that the candidate completes.
3. **Footer Description:** This description is displayed underneath the form fields that the candidate completes.
4. **Success Message:** The message that will show to candidates after they have successfully submitted the form.
5. **Submit Button Text:** Determine the wording on the button to submit the form.
6. **Slug:** The last segment on the form’s page URL. If this is left blank, the form’s ID will be displayed instead. If you'd like to create a QR code for your sourcing form, click `QR Code`, then `Download`.
7. **Internal Title:** An internal name for your sourcing form.
8. **Source:** Determine the source applied to a candidate added to Ashby via the form. More on creating sources at [Source Types and Sources ](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA).
9. **Confirmation Email Template:** Determine the email template sent to candidates after they’ve submitted the form. The confirmation email will come from [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com). More on creating email templates at [Emails](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ). Please note: Only substitution tokens for candidate information can be used in a template for your sourcing form.

## Publishing the form

Once your form, automation and form settings are in place, you can publish your form by clicking the `Draft` drop-down under the form title and selecting `Publish`.

Once the form is published, the options to view the form and copy the form URL will then be available on the right-hand side of the page.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e5eb518a330c6e8bd662ff1a466ca940.png)

If you’d like to add the sourcing form to the bottom of your job board, copy the form URL using the `Copy URL` button and navigate to Admin > Job Board > [Themes (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme).&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/aec0822472707065b9f3ba61c2033777.png)

You’ll then be able to add the form URL to a message in the Bottom Description field, either by adding the URL directly or by using the Link option in the toolbar to create a hyperlink.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d5c4ae7a81946f97c6cc11b5479102f5.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I allow leads to upload a resume and auto-fill the form from there?

You can! Within the Settings tab, you can check the `Show Autofill Field? `checkbox. Then leads will see the option to upload their resume on your form. Be sure to include a Resume field in your form.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5dd9e6e4ecbe3f0bd41932999f07c8fd.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I create a QR code for my sourcing form?

You can, yes. Once you've added your slug into the `Slug` field within the Form Page Info area of the Settings section of your sourcing form, you'll see a `QR Code` button. Click this to then have the option to download a QR code leading to your sourcing form.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e2d7f0940e5644628c783c2da018f6c6.png" size="78" width="576" height="68" position="center" darkWidth="576" darkHeight="68" showCaption="false"}
:::

::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I create a copy of a sourcing form?

You can. To create a copy of a sourcing form.

1. Navigate to **Sourcing > Forms**
2. Click on the form in question
3. Click `More` then `Copy`

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kIYQ2g6mqZNA14yABLpIJ_newsletter-form-acent-ashby-2026-05-01-at-24310-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Automation rules are not copied over with the new form. New rules would need to be configured.
:::


::::


[title] Send and Review Take-Home Assignments
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Assessments/

 This guide explains how to send take-home assignments, collect candidate submissions, and review completed work.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Before you begin, configure the take-home activity in [Set Up Take-Home Activities](docId\:jyUO0TCr0SMDW4Aqsv_zU).

Complete the `Assignment` field and configure reviewers before sending a self-submission link. Candidates need the assignment content to review and submit their work, and reviewers need to be assigned before the take-home can be sent.
:::

# Permissions & access

Take-home activities are available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
To send candidates a take-home assignment via email, Elevated Access users must have the `Can email/schedule candidates` permission or be an Organization Admin.

Users of all permission levels can review a submitted take-home assignment if they are assigned as a reviewer.

See [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_) for more information on user permissions.
:::

# Collecting candidate submissions

The take-home assignment activity automatically populates in the **Current Activities** section of the candidate profile once the candidate reaches that stage in your interview plan. The two options for capturing candidate submissions are self-submission and direct submission.

The self-submission option sends feedback forms directly to reviewers once the candidate submits their take-home assignment, while direct submission gives users more control by having them complete the upload themselves.

When you click `Collect Submission` on the take-home activity on the candidate's profile, you can choose to send the submission by email for self-submission or submit the assignment directly on behalf of the candidate.

![Candidate profile take-home activity with the Collect Submission option.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1WAyc7fP7sCwvZlgG05LM_thomas-smith-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-23420-pm.jpg)

## Sending a take-home assignment

Use the `Collect Submission` button to send the assignment and confirm the assignment details and reviewers before sending.

If you use an email template with a `Take Home Submission Link` token, send the message from the take-home activity.&#x20;

You can send the email immediately or schedule the email to be sent at a later time:

1. Click `Send via Email` from the take-home activity on the candidate's profile.
2. Confirm the take-home assignment details and reviewers.
3. Click `Draft Email`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VZk44AXj-gVLaWAme-0Lv_draft-email-option-for-take-home-assignment.jpg" size="70" alt="Draft Email option for sending a take-home assignment." isUploading="false" width="1160" height="882" darkWidth="1160" darkHeight="882" showCaption="false"}

4. Use the `Send` dropdown to select when to send the email.
   - **Immediately:** This will send the email to the candidate once the `Send`button is clicked.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/09VJ7oEGMiSulodrBYKz__astrid-lindstrom-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-94112-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="849" height="664" darkWidth="849" darkHeight="664" alt="Email composer for Astrid Lindstrom with the “Send” timing set to “Immediately” and the “Send” button highlighted." showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**At Date & Time:&#x20;**&#x53;elect a specific date & time for the email to be sent to the candidate.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/i3JMiZek_KcHc8gFxfkzA_thomas-smith-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-32344-pm.jpg" size="70" alt="Scheduled take-home email displayed under Current Activities." isUploading="false" width="1380" height="1060" darkWidth="1380" darkHeight="1060" showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**After Time Passed:&#x20;**&#x43;hoose a specific time and a day of the week for when the email should be sent.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rzLb01be0vY_DgMBM0Ivt_astrid-lindstrom-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-28-at-94627-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="848" height="670" darkWidth="848" darkHeight="670" alt="Email composer for Astrid Lindstrom with the send time scheduled for one weekday later at 9:27 AM CEST and the “Schedule” button highlighted." showCaption="false"}

5. Click `Send` or `Schedule`.

The scheduled email appears under **Current Activities** on the candidate's profile until it is sent. After it is sent, you can view it in the **Emails** section of the candidate profile feed.

## Self-submission (recommended)

With self-submission, the candidate accesses the assignment through the `Take Home Submission Link`. They use the linked landing page to review the assignment details and submit their responses as notes and/or file attachments. Once submitted, reviewers are automatically notified to review the assignment. Candidates can submit through this portal once per assignment.

![Candidate-facing take-home page with assignment details and submission controls.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2K9ETxbtxtJB7JP1tF5qG_example-submission-page.jpg)

### What the candidate sees

When you send a self-submission link, the candidate opens a branded landing page with your job board logo and brand colors. The page displays the assignment details from the `Assignment` tab set up in the take-home assignment settings.

Candidates can:

- Read the assignment instructions
- Open any links included in the assignment
- Add notes about their submission
- Upload file attachments
- Submit the assignment

:::hint{type="info"}
The notes field is included on the self-submission page and cannot be removed or customized.
:::

![Candidate-facing take-home assignment page with instructions, expected deliverable, file upload, notes, and a submit button.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Xu4N4NyY0a7XH1BDnHbw6_take-home-assignment-2026-09-24-at-93940-am.jpg)

## Direct submission

With direct submission, you can gather the details from the candidate via email and upload their responses to the take-home activity on their candidate profile.

1. Find the take-home activity and select `Collect Submission` > `Submit Directly`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tr1TaWpA4hoQR3tvJpRrt_camille-preaker-product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-24-at-20240-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="785" height="209" darkWidth="785" darkHeight="209" alt="Candidate profile in Ashby showing a take-home assignment waiting on submission, with the Collect Submission menu open and the Submit Directly option highlighted." showCaption="false"}

2. Upload the candidate's files and add any notes. Once you add all the take-home assignment information, select `Submit`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zYt1KxMZTna222RGsPYFY_camille-preaker-product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-24-at-20342-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="682" height="650" darkWidth="682" darkHeight="650" alt="Take-home Submission form in Ashby showing options to upload files, add notes, assign reviewers, and submit the candidate's take-home assignment." showCaption="false"}

Once you upload the submission, the reviewer is prompted to review the candidate's submission.

:::hint{type="info"}
Email sync with both Google Workspace and Microsoft 365 supports syncing file attachments, so take-home files sent via email appear in the candidate's feed and can be downloaded and added to the take-home activity for review.
:::

# Resetting a take-home assignment link

You can reset the take-home candidate submission link if the candidate runs into any issues with uploading. Click the `...` ellipsis on the take-home activity within the candidate's profile, then select `Reset the submission link`. This removes any already provided answers and files from the activity.

![Take-home activity menu showing the option to reset the submission link.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-CULtmqfopwZGN7xVzE-r_thomas-smith-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-43046-pm.jpg)

This option is only available for take-homes that both require and request reviewer feedback.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
If feedback isn't set as requested or required within the take-home settings, the activity no longer shows on the candidate's profile once the assignment is submitted.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7af87f642f4816b183c03e84b63f2a35.png" size="50" alt="Confirmation dialog for resetting a take-home submission link." isUploading="false" width="459" height="411" darkWidth="459" darkHeight="411" showCaption="false"}

# Change reviewers

You can change reviewers while preparing the take-home or after the candidate submits it:

:::hint{type="warning"}
Reviewers cannot be edited after all assigned reviewers submit feedback or feedback is skipped, and the activity is marked complete.
:::

1. Click `Collect Submission`, then select `Send via Email` or `Submit Directly`. The reviewers appear in the next steps.
2. Remove a reviewer with the trash can icon, or click `Add Reviewer Slot` to add another reviewer.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Iu4b6oK6ZK0oZhBCKygYy_send-take-home-assigment-page.jpg" size="80" alt="Send take-home assignment dialog showing assigned reviewers and submission options." isUploading="false" width="1180" height="894" darkWidth="1180" darkHeight="894" showCaption="false"}

3. If the candidate already submitted their assignment, click the `...` ellipsis next to `View Submission`, select `Edit`, and then replace the submission or change the reviewers.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/v7_JnMrFjwDtYYAOtfzRQ_thomas-smith-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-25804-pm.jpg" size="90" alt="Take-home submission menu showing the Edit option for changing reviewers or replacing a submission." isUploading="false" width="1622" height="578" darkWidth="1622" darkHeight="578" showCaption="false"}

# Notify and collect feedback from reviewers

## Reviewer notifications

When a submission is complete, reviewers are notified via email or Slack that the take-home is ready for review. Only assigned reviewers receive notifications by default.

![Email notification informing a reviewer that a take-home submission is ready.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hA1seIRmFC11jeU0Dl_en_email-notification-of-take-home.jpg)

## Take-home assignment briefing

Reviewers receive a take-home assignment briefing similar to an interview briefing, with a tab to download the candidate's submission.

![Take-home assignment briefing with a tab for downloading the candidate submission.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/o1m6bvyYb8gIIoObi8e82_take-home-activities-archbee-document-2026-04-20-at-25039-pm.jpg)

# FAQs

### Can I make take-home assignments anonymous for my reviewers?

In **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Take-home Assignment Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/take-home-assignments), you can check a box to set take-homes to anonymous. When checked, reviewers see a pseudonym instead of the candidate's name. This is an account-wide setting.

![Take-home Assignment Settings showing the anonymous reviewer option.](https://cdn.zappy.app/db83b498c288710cbf693de8d3c2f55a.png)

### Can I configure auto-reject rules for take-home assignments?

No, this isn't currently possible. Auto-reject rules are configured for the application process. More on this at [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota).

### Why didn't my automated take-home activity send?

Automated take-home activities require the **Assignment** tab in the take-home settings to be filled out.

This field is required for candidates to self-submit their work. If the **Assignment** tab is blank when a candidate moves into the stage that triggers the automation, the take-home email fails to send.

To resolve this:

1. Navigate to your take-home settings via the activity on the interview plan of the job, or via **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling >** [Take-Home Assignments](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/take-home-assignments) if you're amending a shared take-home.
2. Add text to the field on the **Assignment** tab.
3. Re-trigger the automation or manually send the take-home if needed.

Once you complete the **Assignment** tab, the automation sends successfully going forward.

### I'm getting an error: Missing Value for: Take Home Submission Link. Why?

You may see this error when trying to email out a take-home with a `Take Home Submission Link` substitution token (more about these at [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6)).

Take-homes must have an assignment and reviewers configured before they can be sent out.

If you use an email template with a `Take Home Submission Link` token, and you email a candidate via the normal `Email` button, this can result in a missing link error in your email template. Use the `Collect Submission` button on the take-home activity on the candidate's profile instead.

![Candidate profile in Ashby showing a Technical Quiz take-home assignment waiting on submission, with the Collect Submission menu open to send the assignment by email or submit it directly on the candidate's behalf.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1WAyc7fP7sCwvZlgG05LM_thomas-smith-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-23420-pm.jpg)

### Who receives notifications when the take-home assignment is submitted?

Only the reviewers will be notified by default when a candidate submits their take-home assignment.

If additional users need to be notified, you could opt to create a custom list report and configure an alert to send out notifications immediately when additional records are added to the report.

In your custom list report, you could opt to set up filters to only pull job considerations in your take-home stage (or stage group) and with the activity status Waiting on Feedback. This will ensure that only candidates awaiting feedback in your take-home stages will be listed in the report.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/96a5987fdaaa3d9bad5e88a2abac4537.png" size="80" width="738" height="298" isUploading="false" darkWidth="738" darkHeight="298" alt="Filters configured to match job considerations in the Take Home interview stage group with an activity status of “Waiting on Feedback.”" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) for more information on setting up custom list report alerts.&#x20;
:::

### Can I allow interviewers who aren’t reviewing the take-home access to view the candidate’s submission?

To let interviewers view a take-home submission without requiring them to submit feedback, add them as reviewers, and turn off required feedback for the take-home:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs**, open the job, and select the **Interview Plan** tab.
2. Click the take-home activity.
3. On the **Take-Home** tab, click the configured assignment name.
4. Set `Is Feedback Required by Default?` to `No`.
5. Click `Add Reviewer`, then assign the additional reviewers to reviewer slots.

[title] AI Report Interpretation
[path] Ashby AI Features/

When drawing up a report, you may want to generate a summary of the results to assist with interpreting your data. If you're generating advanced reports, the AI report interpretation tool can help with comprehending the report you've built.

The AI report interpretation tool is available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/891294815705489fb6ad1a93be952e09"}

## Enabling the AI report interpretation tool

If you'd like to enable the AI report intepretation tool:&#x20;

- Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > [Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access).
- Enable the `Report Interpreter` option

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DsScMKWsV0Ccs62cYdlWo_opt-in-features-acent-ashby-2026-01-30-at-110121-am.jpg)

## Using the AI report interpretation tool when viewing a report

Once you have the report interpretation tool enabled, when you navigate to a report or create a new report, you will see an additional `Interpretation` option.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k0QqtVB6JcZa_WUexeoJj_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-22446-pm.jpg)

Click `Interpretation`, then `Explain Report` to generate the report summary.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r2GvK6HXBN_OVf2WhKyq7_count-over-time-every-week-job-considerations-report-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-23448-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that the AI report intepretation tool will appear differently on reports using the old report builder view. When viewing report results in the old report view, click the sparkle icon to access the AI report interpreter.&#x20;


![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wOFDeU-eEOmqvYo9ckfgo_krishna-dm-ashby-slack-2026-01-29-at-22919-pm.jpg)

The summary and insights will appear on a pop-up on the right-hand side of the screen.
:::

The AI report interpretation tool will then provide a summary of the report and some insights. The summary can help you confirm the report is configured correctly and the insights will help you interpret your results.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JxY9H1tNn-4vMToc8smS2_count-over-time-every-week-job-considerations-report-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-23701-pm.jpg)

You can use the arrows to the right of each insight to open it for further information. The insight will also refer back to specific results to explain the interpretation.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vhsM6D8g7WFiQRXRwDDzY_count-over-time-every-week-job-considerations-report-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-24434-pm.jpg)

If you make adjustments to your report (for example, adding or removing a filter), then the report will show as out of sync. In these cases, we would also recommend regenerating the summary and insights. Click `Regenerate` if you'd like to run the AI report interpretation tool again.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/z71R0FiyK6vx_B5WMJJSo_count-over-time-every-week-job-considerations-report-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-23844-pm.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="680" height="742" darkWidth="680" darkHeight="742" showCaption="false"}

## Related reports

When AI Report Interpretation generates insights for a report, a **Related Reports** section also appears in the interpretation panel. Each suggested report highlights a follow-up analytical question based on your results so you can keep exploring your data without building the next report from scratch.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Related reports are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans. This feature is not available on Foundations, as it relies on the [AI-assisted report builder](docId\:kFMXauoRKZx6_EZbu32Po) .
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qgh5Mxyoc0aiVnsWyR-bS_job-posting-activity-report-report-ashby-2026-06-24-at-44247-pm.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="573" height="638" darkWidth="573" darkHeight="638" showCaption="false"}

To generate a related report:

1. In the interpretation panel, scroll to the **Related Reports** section.
2. Review the suggested topics to find one you'd like to explore.
3. Select `Create Report` next to the report. The report opens automatically in a new tab using the AI-assisted report builder, ready for you to review or adjust.

## Generating report titles and notes with AI

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that the AI Report Interpretation tool must be enabled if you'd like to generate report titles and notes with AI.
:::

You can also use Ashby's AI Report Interpretation tool to generate your report titles and a descriptive note to your report. When building a report, click on the pencil icon to edit your report title. From there, click the `AI Autofill`sparkles icon to generate a report title based on the report type, filters applied and the fields set to be shown.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oBBUqjtpBNNOBBeQkeJ8R_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-114105-am.jpg)

If you'd like to re-generate the report title, click the pencil icon to edit the title, then click the `AI Autofill`sparkles icon again.

If you're looking to add a descriptive note to your report, click the Note tab, then Add Note. From here, you'll have the option to add your own note but you can click `AI Autofill` on the note toolbar to generate an AI suggestion.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DsmVmD6Dz0iCUaYnwS98a_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-114037-am.jpg)

You can click `Insert` the suggestion to add it to your report. Don't want to include the Ai suggestion? Click `Discard` instead.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OG1UFuNAQ3tIGbQtGtwuY_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-114913-am.jpg" size="70" width="560" height="690" position="center" darkWidth="560" darkHeight="690" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are using the old report builder view, the option to generate a title using AI will be displayed as a sparkle icon beside the original report name. The option to add a note via AI `Autofill` will show up when you click in the `Note` field.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iPkG65ViL1bZ8Pc9x7dui_new-segmentation-report-acent-ashby-2026-01-30-at-35504-pm.jpg)
:::



## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What kind of reports can I use the AI report interpretation tool with?

The `Interpretation` option will show on all report types other than Candidate Pipeline and Candidate Search reports. It's available for reports built from templates and custom reports.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I'm trying out report templates and I'm not sure how the report is being put together. Help - I don't understand!

If you're starting out with some more advanced report templates and are confused as to what and how data is pulled to generate the report, each report template has a Prebuilt Report option listed under the report results. You can click this to get further information.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/43BpGXQaG1sTaBfjzxl9m_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-25455-pm.jpg)

Further information includes how to use the report and a breakdown of the data used. You can also view Ashby's Talent Trends report from here for further information about related benchmarks where applicable.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/inrViujUeU00MpSRgbiTz_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-25538-pm.jpg)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I use the AI report interpretation tool while viewing the report in a dashboard?

You can! While viewing the report in a dashboard, click the sparkle icon for the report in question. This is the `Explain Report` option that activates the AI report interpretation tool.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2b58BvtoY4KvFDVTRW0AC_zight-2026-01-27-at-150052.jpg)

The summary will then be generated in a pop up on the right-hand side of the screen.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does the AI report interpreter use AI credits?

No, the report interpretation tool does not use AI credits.
:::


[title] AI-Assisted Application Review
[path] Ashby AI Features/

***

Learn how to accelerate candidate reviews by using AI to evaluate applicants based on custom criteria. This feature helps your team identify top talent faster by automating the initial resume screening process directly within Ashby.

# Permissions & Access

AI-assisted application review is available on all Ashby plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions:&#x20;**&#x59;ou must be an **Org Admin** to enable the feature. To edit job-level criteria, you need **Elevated Access - Admin** or **Elevated Access - Admin Private** for that specific role.
:::

# Step 1: Enable AI-assisted application review

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features.**
2. If **Enable AI Features** is not enabled, turn it on it now. You will need to accept Ashby's terms for AI Features to continue.
3. Then, enable **AI-Assisted Application Review&#x20;**&#x66;rom the list of available AI feature tiles.

# Step 2: Define your review criteria

Criteria that you add to the job defines what the AI assesses. You can define resume criteria that the AI looks for within a candidate's resume as well as whether the candidate answered specific application form questions.

To define your criteria, navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select a job. In the job settings, navigate to the **AI Features** tab and select `Set up criteria`.

## Resume criteria

In the Resume criteria section, you can add criteria in multiple ways: add criteria suggested by AI based on the job posting, add previously used criteria from other jobs, or add custom criteria that you create for this role specifically.

To start adding criteria select `+ Add criteria` under the **Resume criteria** section.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4p-Z2FVblmtcjGBRhXche_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-21311-pm.jpg" size="86" width="850" height="452" position="center" darkWidth="850" darkHeight="452" showCaption="false"}

### Add suggested criteria or previously-used criteria

Select `Add from # suggestions` for suggestions generated by AI based on your job posting. You can also reuse criteria from other roles you have permission to access by selecting `Add previously used`.&#x20;

To add a suggestion, select `Add` in the **Action** column.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RwHVlFi0u_7e0Q95FQq-w_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-21618-pm.jpg)

### Creating effective custom criteria

Selecting `Add custom` instead of the suggested or previously-used options allows you to create your own criteria. You'll need to define the following:

- **Short title:** The name of your criterion. This appears in job settings, the application review page, and as a filter name.
- **Prompt:** The instructions used to evaluate applicants. Precise and clear prompts result in better AI performance.

### Tips on criteria effectiveness

:::hint{type="info"}
Write your criteria as if you were instructing a junior recruiter. Ensure the prompt is phrased so that any reader would reach the same conclusion.
:::

- **Stand-alone:** Criteria should be understandable without extra context. Instead of "Can assimilate feedback," use "Effectively incorporates feedback related to personal job performance."
- **Singular:** Focus on one skill per requirement. Instead of "Experience in Python and AWS," create two separate criteria for each.
- **Clear:** Avoid vague terms like "technical background." Specify the exact expertise required.
- **Specific:** Use measurable requirements, such as years of experience or specific previous job titles.
- **Objectively verifiable:** Ensure the requirement can be proven by looking at a resume. Instead of "has good taste," use "has led design for consumer SaaS products."

:::hint{type="info"}
Need help with constructing prompts? The [AI Prompting Toolkit playbook](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/blog/prompting-toolkit) in Ashby Academy walks through a simple three-step framework — define the outcome, design the output, and test and iterate — with examples you can adapt for your needs.
:::

## Application form criteria

You can evaluate whether a candidate answered long-form application questions in the **Application Form Criteria** section.

Toggle the `Did the Application answer the question?` option for individual questions. These are added as criteria for the review process.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This check only determines if the question was answered. Blank or unrelated answers are flagged as not meeting the criteria. This is only available for long, unformatted text fields.
:::

# Step 3: Validating and reviewing criteria

Once you have set up your criteria, it must be validated. Ashby checks your prompts on two dimensions:

- **Clarity and objectivity** to ensure that the criteria is clear and objective which means it can be appropriately evaluated by the AI.
- **Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) violations:** the AI also scans for implicit or explicit EEO violations and flags them.

## Validating criteria

To validate your criteria, select `Validate`. If all criteria pass validation, you'll see a pop-up indicating that.  Hit `Close` and proceed to the next section on Saving criteria and evaluating candidates.

If the system identifies issues, select `Review Criteria` on the pop-up to view warnings.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BsfloMNzFxBJz80B8eBPh_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-23444-pm.jpg" size="84" width="652" height="257" position="center" darkWidth="652" darkHeight="257" showCaption="false"}

## Reviewing flagged criteria

The flagged criteria will be identified with a warning. Select `Show details` under any warning to review why the criterion was flagged.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/US6GooQs6qTS59QsIFhLS_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-23839-pm.jpg)

We recommend to either update the criterion until it is no longer flagged, or remove the criterion all together before proceeding.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can proceed with flagged criteria but it is not recommended.
:::

# Step 4: Saving criteria and evaluating candidates

After validation is successful, select `Save and Evaluate all active candidates` to begin the initial evaluation. Depending on the number of candidates, this can take a few seconds to a few minutes.

You'll see a loading screen with the total number of candidates being evaluated and a progress status bar.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MQ1YV9_5FWo2AKjsRx6Q5_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-42353-pm.jpg)

If you are updating existing criteria, select `Save and re-evaluate all active Job Considerations` once you've made your updates.

# Review candidate evaluations

Ashby's AI assesses candidate resumes against each specific criterion and returns an evaluation status. The status may indicate the candidate meets, does not meet, or the AI was undecided on the criterion. Evaluation results can be seen on the candidate profile, as well as in the Application Review stage of the candidate pipeline for the role.

## Viewing results on the candidate profile

View full evaluations in the **Feedback** tab of a candidate profile.&#x20;

![The Feedback tab on a candidate profile displaying the AI evaluation results summary for various resume criteria.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ftZsObxEtrWbRD_Rz1w7W_alex-balistreri-group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-30652-pm.jpg)

Click on any criterion to see the reasoning for a status of meets, does not meet, or undecided. Select the expand all icon to see reasoning for all criteria at once.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HO912lCcBu_ZSH4YdzVuO_alex-balistreri-group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-30734-pm.jpg)

## Evaluation results in Application Review

Navigate to the specific job, select the `Candidate Pipeline` tab on the left, and click on the `Application Review` stage. Here, there is a column for evaluation results that provides a summary about how the candidate scored.  Hover over the results row to see more details.&#x20;

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1vBcVbiPg-e7UwzC_bI3o_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-42950-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
You can also add an **AI Job Criteria Met Percentage** column to see the percentage of AI criteria each candidate met. Select `Add Column` on the application review page and choose **AI Job Criteria Met Percentage**. Sort by this column to move the best-fit candidates (highest percentage) to the top of your review queue and identify the lowest-fit candidates (lowest percentage) at a glance.
:::

## Filtering by AI criteria

You can filter candidates by their evaluation status within your pipeline stages:

1. Select the `AI Criteria Quick Filter` option.
2. Select the criteria and statuses you want to view, such as any candidate who passed or the AI was undecided on a particular criteria.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CKvVTQxN9iRiPeJ-F0dHF_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-42705-pm.jpg)

3. Perform bulk actions on the filtered list as needed.

# Candidate experience & opt-out

## Automated processing legal notice

You can configure a message to display to candidates who may be impacted by automated AI review processes by following the steps below.

1. Navigate to **Admin > Data Management > Data Privacy and Compliance > Privacy & Legal** to configure a legal notice for candidates.
2. Locate the `Automated Processing Legal Notice` section and click on the `Legal Notice for All Jobs` that is displayed.
3. Configure the settings for when this message will display:
   - **Is Enabled?:** When off, candidates do not see the notice.
   - **Rule Scope:** Set criteria here when you want the message to show only based on certain criteria, such as for certain jobs only. Do not add a scope if you want it to apply to all jobs.
   - **Hide Evaluations if a Candidate Hasn't Seen this Legal Notice:** When enabled, AI-informed evaluations are hidden in either of these cases:
     - The candidate opts out of automated processing. In this case, the AI evaluation is skipped.
     - The candidate does not submit an application directly through the Ashby-hosted application form and therefore does not see the notice displayed under the `Submit Application` button.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wjnbuo2knBhOAsN-5WGBs_product-manager-moonfall-industries-demo-2026-09-24-at-102247-am.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="745" height="719" darkWidth="745" darkHeight="719" alt="Job application form showing Education History fields and a highlighted AI legal notice beneath the Submit Application button." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
Candidates who submit an application directly through the Ashby-hosted application form are deemed to have seen the notice.
:::

:::hint{type="warning" indent="3"}
If Hide Evaluations is enabled, a message will display on the candidate's evaluation results that says "The candidate has not seen the legal notice required by this job."&#x20;

This can happen when a candidate is added to Ashby through a path other than the Ashby-hosted job application, such as a direct referral, a manual add, the Chrome extension, or possibly Indeed Apply.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Page Title:&#x20;**&#x54;he title that candidates see at the top of the notice page.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
**Legal Notice Text:** The specific text displayed to candidates. This can be edited.
:::

4. Hit `Save` once you've adjusted the settings as needed.

Candidates see a `Learn More` link under the `Submit Application` button. Selecting this link is optional. Candidates can use it to read the notice, opt out of automated processing, or check whether they have already opted out, but they do not need to select it for their scores to be visible. You can view what this page looks like by selecting `View` in the top right corner when setting up the message.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f1u24TMZiV8C-FJj_8RUw_default-legal-notice-for-all-jobs-ashby-2026-09-24-at-101740-am.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="601" height="328" darkWidth="601" darkHeight="328" alt="Ashby legal notice settings showing the default notice enabled for all jobs, with the View button highlighted." showCaption="false"}

## AI opt-out filters

In your candidate pipeline, you can filter to see all candidates who have opted out of AI processing by following the below steps.

1. Navigate to the **Candidate Pipeline**.
2. Enable the `Advanced Filters` toggle on the right of the screen .
3. Select `+ Add Field to Match` on the left.
4. Search for "AI opt out" in the search bar and select the criterion.
5. Select Equals = `Yes`

# AI credits

AI-Assisted Application Review is priced per credit. One credit equals one evaluation of a single candidate (job consideration), supporting up to 50 criteria per evaluation.

**

| **Foundations AI credits**                | **Legacy Plus AI credits**                | **Plus AI credits**     | **Enterprise AI credits** |
| ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ------------------------- |
| 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide | 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide | 2,500/yr, per paid seat | 12,500/yr, per paid seat  |

###

Additional credits can be purchased in blocks. For more information, see our guide on [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm).

# FAQ

### If I edit my criteria, can I re-evaluate candidates?

Yes. If you edit a prompt or change criteria, select the Save and Re-Evaluate all active Job Considerations option to refresh evaluations.

### Can I flag AI evaluations if they are incorrect?

Yes. Select the three dots in the top-right corner of an evaluation to flag it as incorrect or misleading.

### Can I add evaluations as a column in Application Review?

Yes. Select `Add Column` on the job's application review page and search for the **Evaluations** column for a summary of how each candidate scored against your AI criteria. To see a numeric percentage of criteria met, search for **AI Job Criteria Met Percentage** — sort by this column to rank candidates from best fit (highest percentage) to least fit (lowest).

### What permissions are needed to edit job criteria?

You must either have `Elevated Access - Admin` or `Elevated Access - Admin Private` for the specific role, or be an `Organization Admin`.

### Does the AI evaluate education and work history if there is no resume?

Yes, if the information is listed on the candidate's Ashby profile, the AI considers it.

### Will I receive a notification when a candidate opts out?

There is no proactive alert sent to customers when a candidate opts out, but you can configure alerts to be sent using Ashby's reporting capabilities and the **AI Opt-Out** field. See [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) for more information.&#x20;

Additionally, the opt-out status is surfaced in-product: when reviewing an application, you'll see that the job criteria evaluation was skipped, along with the reason for the skip. You can also filter to view candidates who have opted out. See [AI opt-out filters](#) above for more info.

### Does AI-Assisted Application Review affect the Average Score?

No. The **Average Score** (also referred to as the Application Review Average Score) reflects the ratings given by human reviewers during the application review process and is calculated independently from AI criteria evaluations. If Average Score appears empty, no reviewer has manually scored that application yet. To measure AI-based candidate fit, use the **AI Job Criteria Met Percentage** column, which shows the proportion of AI criteria met for each candidate.


[title] Complete
[path] Integrations/Candidate Experience/

***

Complete and Ashby integrate to provide a seamless way to manage compensation and issue competitive offers to your top candidates.

# Permissions & access

The Complete integration is available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to set up this integration.
:::

# Connecting the integration

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin >** [Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and search for the [Complete integration tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/bc737410-d068-4062-9720-f7e2c03205a6).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for Complete` button.

![Complete integration settings in Ashby with the “Create API key for Complete” button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/30ybsnPJXHkBU5Jre_ncb_complete-ashby-2026-09-22-at-13610-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy the API key and store it in a secure place. You need this to complete the integration setup in Complete.
:::

3. Navigate to your Complete account and follow their [Integrations guide](https://complete-labs.notion.site/Integrations-b9a6cbd3521d4d4b8837ee548fc92681).

:::hint{type="success"}
When the integration is complete, a new "Search Candidates" bar appears at the top of the Complete dashboard. You can now search your candidate pipeline directly from Complete and quickly draft new offers with existing details from your Ashby.
:::


[title] Ashby Agents Use Case Library
[path] Ashby AI Features/

This library contains ready-to-use agent prompts organized by recruiting workflow. Each prompt is designed to be copied directly into a custom agent or used as a starting point for your own. Browse by category below, or jump to a specific use case using the table in each section.

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn how to use agents in Ashby, see:

- [Ashby Agents](docId:2ZUVVIXDetej4oDP_5Job)&#x20;
- [Using Ashby Agents in Slack](docId\:Z3ID-z7KseANUaMpToFjG)&#x20;
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Need help with constructing prompts? The [AI Prompting Toolkit playbook](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/blog/prompting-toolkit) in Ashby Academy walks through a simple three-step framework — define the outcome, design the output, and test and iterate — with examples you can adapt for your needs.
:::

# Categories

The list below contains the different categories of agent use cases contained in this library. Click on the category header to jump to that category and review use cases and prompts.

:::hint{type="info"}
Don't see a use case that meets your needs or still have questions?  Reach out to your Customer Success Manager for additional guidance.
:::

| **Category**                                                           | **Description**                                                                                                                                |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| [Interview prep and evaluation](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)          | Agents that help interviewers and recruiting teams prepare for interviews, compare feedback, and create more consistent evaluation processes.  |
| [Pipeline operations and process health](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8) | Agents that help teams monitor process health, spot stalled candidates, summarize pipeline status, and prioritize operational work.            |
| [Sourcing, outreach, and referrals](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)      | Agents that help recruiters source more effectively, personalize outreach, identify referral paths, and turn prospects into active candidates. |
| [Hiring strategy and planning](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)           | Agents that help teams learn from past hires, improve screening criteria, analyze offer outcomes, and support planning decisions.              |

# Interview prep and evaluation

| Use case                                                               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| [Interview question generator](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)           | Creates targeted interview questions for an upcoming interview by reviewing prior feedback, transcripts, and role requirements so interviewers can build on what has already been covered instead of repeating it.                                                                       |
| [Candidate feedback comparison](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)          | Summarizes interview feedback across candidates in the same stage so hiring teams can compare themes, strengths, and concerns in one place without making an automated hiring decision.                                                                                                  |
| [Interview analyzer / calibration guide](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8) | Produces a structured interview guide for a specific interview type, including competencies, example questions, green flags, red flags, and a scoring framework to improve interviewer consistency.                                                                                      |
| [Upcoming interview briefing](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)            | Prepares interviewers for upcoming conversations by summarizing who they are meeting, what stage the candidate is in, what has already been covered, and what they should focus on next.                                                                                                 |
| [Interview feedback assistant](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)           | Helps interviewers turn their notes into structured, evidence-based feedback that is easier to submit consistently and review later.                                                                                                                                                     |
| [Feedback form generator](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)                | Builds a structured feedback form based on context from the job and previous interviews to help create a competency-based feedback form for future interviews.                                                                                                                           |
| [Onsite candidate interview prep agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)  | A personalized interview prep agent that generates dual-output briefings — one for the recruiter/hiring manager and one for the candidate — by cross-referencing the interviewer's likely evaluation style, the candidate's resume and prior feedback, and Ashby's operating principles. |
| [Recruiter screen signal agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)          | An interview intelligence agent that selects the single most revealing resume accomplishment for a given role and generates a structured question sequence to probe the candidate's decision-making, ownership, and real impact behind it.                                               |

## Interview question generator

:::BlockQuote
You are an expert interview prep assistant for our hiring team.

Your job is to generate thoughtful, targeted interview questions for a candidate's upcoming interview for the \[Role] process.

Review all available prior interview feedback, scorecards, notes, and transcripts for this candidate.

First, summarize:
1\. What has already been validated
2\. What concerns or gaps have been raised
3\. What areas have not been tested yet

Then cross-reference that against the role requirements and interview focus for this stage.

Generate 8 to 12 interview questions that help the interviewer go deeper where it matters most instead of repeating prior conversations.

For each question:
\* Include a short rationale explaining why the question matters
\* Suggest follow-up probes for the most important questions

If prior interview information is thin or missing, say that clearly instead of filling gaps with generic questions.
:::

## Candidate feedback comparison

:::BlockQuote
You are a candidate feedback comparison assistant.

Take the \[Job Title] role and the \[Stage or Stage Group] provided by the user, then review all active candidates in that part of the process.

Summarize the submitted feedback for each candidate using only objective information from scorecards, written feedback, and other role-relevant materials in Ashby.

For each candidate, highlight:
\* The main strengths that appear in the feedback
\* The main concerns that appear in the feedback
\* Any unresolved questions or mixed signal

Then provide a cross-candidate comparison that makes it easy for the hiring team to see common themes and meaningful differences.

Do not make a hiring recommendation or rank candidates unless the user explicitly asks for a synthesis of themes only.

Present the output in a readable table or structured bullets, and cite the relevant scorecards anywhere feedback is referenced.
:::

## Interview analyzer / calibration guide

:::BlockQuote
You are an interview calibration assistant.

Create a structured interview guide for the \[Interview Stage] in our \[Role] hiring process.

Use the role context, interview purpose, and any relevant interview framework we have available.

Clearly define:
\* The competencies this interview is supposed to assess
\* What good signal looks like in practice
\* What interviewers should listen for

Then provide:
\* Example questions
\* Green flags
\* Red flags
\* A simple scoring or evaluation framework the interviewer can use consistently

The goal is to help interviewers gather better signal and stay aligned on what this stage is intended to test.
:::

## Upcoming interview briefing

:::BlockQuote
You are an interview briefing assistant.

Review my upcoming interviews for the next \[time period] and prepare a concise briefing for each one.

For each interview, include:
\* Candidate name
\* Role and interview stage
\* Interview time
\* The purpose of this interview if it is available
\* What has already been covered in prior interviews
\* What still needs to be tested or clarified
\* Any interview instructions or preparation notes

Prioritize the next 3 interviews first if there are many.

Keep the output concise, practical, and easy for an interviewer to skim before the meeting.
:::

## Interview feedback assistant

:::BlockQuote
You are an interview feedback assistant.

Help me turn my notes into structured, evidence-based interview feedback for the \[Interview Stage] in the \[Role] process.

Use the interview focus, the scorecard structure if available, and the notes I provide or that are visible in context.

Draft feedback that clearly separates:
\* What I observed
\* What strengths were demonstrated
\* What concerns or gaps I noticed
\* Any open questions

Keep the language specific and objective.

If the evidence is too thin to support a conclusion, say that clearly instead of overreaching.

Format the output so it is easy to submit into a feedback form.
:::

## Feedback form generator

:::BlockQuote
You are a feedback form design assistant for recruiting teams.

Your job is to build a structured interview feedback form recommendation for a specific job and interview context using the information available in Ashby.

When I ask for a feedback form, first review all relevant context you can access for that job, including when available:
\* Job title
\* Job description and role expectations
\* Interview plan and stage names
\* Existing interview types and interview instructions
\* Existing feedback forms already linked to the process
\* Opening details
\* Hiring team context
\* Prior candidate feedback patterns or interview transcripts if they help clarify what this stage is meant to evaluate

Your goal is to create a feedback form that helps interviewers capture specific, evidence-based signals for that role and stage. The feedback form should be focused on the competencies you are measuring for the role.

Your output should be 3–5 competencies to measure during the interview and a series of suggested questions to help the interviewers measure those competencies.

Follow these rules:
\* Build the form around the actual goals of the interview stage, not generic hiring advice.
\* Keep the form structured and easy for interviewers to complete quickly.
\* Prefer a small number of high-signal questions over a long list of vague ones.
\* Phrase every question clearly so both interviewers and AI-assisted features can interpret it reliably.
\* Use descriptions or helper text where needed to tell the interviewer what evidence to include.
\* Separate distinct competencies instead of combining multiple ideas into one question.
\* If the available context is incomplete or the stage purpose is unclear, say exactly what is missing and make the lightest reasonable assumptions.
\* Do not invent requirements, competencies, or expectations that are not supported by the job or interview context.
\* Do not use protected characteristics or proxy signals.
\* Do not make a hiring recommendation. Your job is to design the form, not judge a candidate.
\* If a similar feedback form already exists in the process, call that out and explain whether to reuse it, adapt it, or create a new one.

When you respond, use this format:

1\. Interview goal
Provide a short summary of what this interview appears to be assessing and how it fits into the job's process.

2\. Recommended form structure
List the proposed sections in order.

3\. Feedback form fields
For each field, provide:
\* Section
\* Field description / helper text for the interviewer
\* Why this field belongs in the form

4\. Reporting and connector notes
For any field that should be reportable or reused later, note whether it should be connected to a candidate custom field.

5\. A list of suggested questions tied to each competency that can be added to the briefing.

Additional design guidance: optimize for interviewer consistency, calibration, and downstream reporting. If I name a specific stage or interview, tailor the form to that exact part of the process. If I only name a job, infer the most likely use case and then offer 1 to 3 stage-specific form options.
:::

## Onsite candidate interview prep agent

:::BlockQuote
You are an expert recruiting and interview prep agent. Your job is to generate a personalized interview preparation package for an upcoming interview.

You will be given:
\- Candidate name and resume
\- Interviewer name, title, and interview focus/stage
\- Past interview feedback on the candidate (if available)

STEP 1 — ANALYZE THE INTERVIEWER
Research and reason about this specific interviewer:
\- What topics and themes are they likely to probe based on their previous interviews, function, and stage of the process?
\- What evaluation style do they likely use (behavioral, technical, values-based, case-based)?
\- What are they specifically optimizing for in candidates — what signals are they listening for?

STEP 2 — ANALYZE THE CANDIDATE
Cross-reference the candidate's resume and any prior interview feedback:
\- What are their 2–3 strongest signals that directly match what this interviewer is looking for?
\- What are 1–2 gaps or weak areas that may surface in this conversation — and how can the candidate proactively address or reframe them?
\- Are there any patterns in prior feedback (positive or critical) worth amplifying or recovering from in this round?

STEP 3 — MAP TO ASHBY'S OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Ashby's 10 Operating Principles are:
1\. Apply Principled Thinking Over Experience
2\. Reflect On and Optimize How You Use Your Time
3\. Apply Thoughtful Communication
4\. Prioritize Ownership
5\. Be Frustratingly Patient About Hiring
6\. Optimize For The Long Term, But Move With Urgency
7\. Aim High
8\. Implement Continuous Improvement
9\. Care Deeply About Customers
10\. Foster Constructive Debate and Feedback

Ashby's team attributes: Humble and Empathetic, Curious, Driven, Reliable, Transparent and Honest, Don't Take Themselves Too Seriously.

Identify which 2–3 principles and/or attributes are MOST RELEVANT to this interview stage. Map the candidate's strengths and prep areas to those principles specifically.

STEP 4 — OUTPUT: RECRUITER + HIRING MANAGER BRIEFING
Produce a structured briefing with:

Interview context
\- Interviewer name, role, and what this stage is evaluating
\- Top 2–3 themes the interviewer will likely probe

Candidate snapshot
\- Key strengths to watch for in this conversation
\- Risks or gaps to be aware of (and whether the candidate has been coached on them)
\- Relevant Ashby principles this candidate maps well (or less well) to

Suggested probes (optional)
\- 2–3 questions the interviewer could ask to surface the candidate's depth on flagged areas

STEP 5 — OUTPUT: CANDIDATE PREP PROMPT
Generate a short, encouraging message to send directly to the candidate. This must be no longer than 4 bullet points. Format it like this:

\---
Hi \[Name], here's your prep brief for your upcoming conversation with \[Interviewer] so you can be ready to shine and put your best foot forward:
\- \[What this interviewer cares about most — 1 sentence]
\- \[Your strongest asset to lead with in this conversation — 1 sentence]
\- \[One area to prepare a specific example for — 1 sentence]
\- \[One area of specific feedback from previous interviews to have the opportunity to improve or speak to tied to direct feedback referenced in previous feedback forms — 1 sentence]
\- \[A mindset or framing tip grounded in Ashby's principles — 1 sentence]
You've got this. Let us know if you have questions before the interview!
:::

## Recruiter screen signal agent

:::BlockQuote
You are an expert technical recruiter and talent assessor. Your job is to analyze a candidate's profile and identify ONE resume accomplishment that best signals high intelligence, initiative, and business impact — then help the recruiter probe that accomplishment deeply in the interview.

What you receive:
The recruiter will paste the candidate's full Ashby profile, which includes:
\- Resume text (work history, bullet points, achievements)
\- Job posting (role requirements, responsibilities, success criteria)
\- Interview plan (focus areas, competencies being evaluated, stage context)
Analyze all three together before making your selection.

Selection criteria:
Choose the ONE resume bullet or accomplishment that meets the most of these criteria:
1\. RECENT — happened within the last 3 years (or most recent role if unclear)
2\. LED or INITIATED — the candidate drove this, not just participated
3\. SPECIFIC — has a concrete outcome, metric, or named deliverable
4\. RELEVANT — maps to a core competency or responsibility in the job posting
5\. INTELLIGENCE SIGNAL — requires problem-solving, judgment, or original thinking (not just execution)
6\. UNEXPLORED — not already covered by the interview plan's structured questions
If two bullets tie, choose the one where the "why" behind their decision-making is least obvious — that's where the most signal lives.

Output format — return your output in exactly this structure:

\---
SELECTED ACCOMPLISHMENT
Quote the exact bullet or section from the resume you chose. One sentence max.

WHY THIS ONE
In 2–3 sentences, explain why this bullet is the best intelligence signal given the role and interview plan. Name what's ambiguous or impressive about it.

OPENING QUESTION
Write the exact question the recruiter should ask to open this thread. It should be open-ended, non-leading, and invite a narrative response. Format: "Tell me about \[X]. Walk me through what happened."

FOLLOW-UP QUESTIONS (4–5 questions)
Each follow-up targets one dimension. Label each:
\[WHAT] — What exactly did you do? (scope, ownership, specifics)
\[HOW] — How did you approach this? (methods, decisions, tradeoffs)
\[WHY] — Why did you choose this approach over alternatives?
\[IMPACT] — What was the measurable business result? How do you know?
\[REFLECT] — Looking back, would you do anything differently? Why?

WATCH-OUTS
List 1–2 things that would make this accomplishment less impressive if revealed in the interview (e.g., "team of 20 vs. solo", "inherited project vs. created from scratch"). Tell the recruiter what to listen for.
\---

Guardrails:
\- Do not select accomplishments that are vague or unverifiable ("helped grow the team," "contributed to strategy")
\- Do not select accomplishments already targeted by a structured interview question in the plan
\- Do not generate questions that can be answered with yes/no
\- Do not ask about things that can be inferred from the resume alone — probe what the resume can't tell you
\- If the resume has no strong signals, say so clearly and suggest the recruiter ask a behavioral question about a recent challenge instead
:::

# Pipeline operations and process health

| Use case                                                    | Description                                                                                                                                                     |
| ----------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| [Interview follow-up auditor](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8) | Finds candidates who may have stalled after interviews and highlights where follow-up may be missing, helping recruiters quickly spot who needs attention next. |
| [Job pipeline snapshot](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)       | Gives a quick summary of pipeline health for one or more jobs, including stage counts, bottlenecks, and where attention may be needed.                          |
| [Hiring intelligence agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)   | Pulls together patterns, trends, and signals across hiring activity to help teams quickly understand what is happening in a pipeline or hiring process.         |
| [Time-to-hire friction agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8) | Helps teams identify where hiring processes are slowing down so they can investigate stage delays, handoff issues, or operational bottlenecks.                  |
| [Pending task triage](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)         | Reviews pending recruiting tasks and helps users prioritize what to tackle first based on urgency, candidate impact, and team dependencies.                     |

## Interview follow-up auditor

:::BlockQuote
You are an interview follow-up auditor for our recruiting team.

Your job is to identify candidates who may have experienced a follow-up gap after interviews.

Start by finding candidates with recent interview activity, recent feedback, or recently completed interview stages in the last \[time period].

Then check whether there is evidence of:
\* Recent candidate communication
\* Process movement
\* A clear next step
\* Signs the candidate may be stalled

Flag candidates who appear to be waiting too long or missing a clear next step.

Group the results by job and current stage.

For each candidate, include:
\* The recent interview signal
\* The most relevant communication signal
\* A short assessment such as likely follow-up gap, needs review, or appears recently contacted

Use cautious language and only base conclusions on what is visible in Ashby.

If requested, draft a follow-up email or note for the highest-priority candidates.
:::

## Job pipeline snapshot

:::BlockQuote
You are a job pipeline snapshot assistant.

Review the pipeline for \[Job Title] or \[Job Titles] and provide a concise summary of current pipeline health.

Include:
\* The number of candidates in each major stage
\* Where the most volume is sitting
\* Any stages that appear backed up or unusually light
\* Whether the pipeline looks healthy relative to where the team likely needs candidates most
\* The top 2 to 3 areas that may deserve attention next

Present the result as a short leadership-ready summary with a simple table if helpful.
:::

## Hiring intelligence agent

:::BlockQuote
You are a hiring intelligence assistant.

Review the \[Team, Role, or Pipeline] hiring process and produce a concise but insightful summary of what is happening.

Highlight:
\* The biggest positive signals
\* Process risks
\* Bottlenecks
\* Conversion themes
\* Open questions based on the information available

Organize the output so a recruiting lead or hiring manager can quickly understand what deserves attention first.

Keep the analysis grounded in actual data and process evidence rather than speculation.
:::

## Time-to-hire friction agent

:::BlockQuote
You are a time-to-hire friction analysis assistant.

Analyze the \[Team or Role] hiring process and identify where candidates are slowing down or getting stuck.

Look for:
\* Stage delays
\* Repeated handoff issues
\* Slow feedback loops
\* Scheduling bottlenecks
\* Other operational friction points that could be affecting speed

Summarize the likely areas of friction, explain which stages appear most problematic, and suggest where the team should investigate further.

Keep the output focused on practical operational insight rather than abstract analysis.
:::

## Pending task triage

:::BlockQuote
You are a recruiting task triage assistant.

Review my pending recruiting tasks and help me prioritize what to do first.

Look across tasks such as:
\* Scorecards
\* Approvals
\* Surveys
\* Mentions
\* Follow-ups
\* Texts
\* Reviews

Group the tasks by urgency and likely impact.

Start with anything that is most likely to block a candidate, delay a teammate, or create a poor candidate experience.

Then suggest a recommended order to work through the rest.

Keep the output practical and action-oriented.
:::

# Sourcing, outreach, and referrals

| Use case                                                                     | Description                                                                                                                                                         |
| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| [Referral mapper](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)                              | Identifies likely warm connections between candidates and employees by checking work history overlap, making it easier to find referral paths or internal context.  |
| [Referral activity tracker](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)                    | Summarizes referral activity over time so teams can understand who is sending referrals, which referrals are progressing, and where follow-up may be needed.        |
| [Outreach generator](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)                           | Drafts personalized sourcing or recruiting outreach based on the role, candidate background, and messaging goals, while letting the user choose tone and emphasis.  |
| [Personalization agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)                        | Helps recruiters write more tailored, human outreach by highlighting the candidate's trajectory, standout achievements, and relevant signals from their background. |
| [Boolean string builder](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)                       | Generates sourcing boolean strings and target company suggestions based on the kinds of backgrounds, signals, or environments a team wants to find.                 |
| [Career overlap analyzer](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)                      | Reviews candidate pipelines to find work-history overlap with employees or other talent pools, helping teams spot referral opportunities and useful context faster. |
| [Candidate intake and consideration assistant](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8) | Helps recruiters turn a prospect or referral into a clean candidate record, identify missing information, and decide whether to consider them for a role.           |

## Referral mapper

:::BlockQuote
You are a referral-mapping agent for our recruiting team.

Compare this candidate's work history against our employees and recent hire history to identify people who may know the candidate or have meaningful overlap with them.

Look for overlap in:
\* Prior companies
\* Functions
\* Teams
\* Business areas
\* Dates where available

Prioritize same-company overlap during similar periods, or adjacent functions where a real connection is plausible.

For each likely match, include:
\* Employee name
\* The overlap
\* Why the connection may matter
\* A match strength rating
\* A recommended outreach angle

Do not assume people know each other just because they worked at the same very large company years apart.

Do not use location as a matching factor.

Flag uncertain matches clearly.
:::

## Referral activity tracker

:::BlockQuote
You are a referral activity assistant.

Review referral activity for the last \[time period].

If available, include both direct referrals and social or referral-link activity.

Summarize:
\* How many referrals were made
\* Which referrals progressed furthest
\* Which employees or referral sources are driving activity
\* Any standout candidates or referral trends
\* Where follow-up may be needed

Present the output in a concise summary with a simple table if helpful.

Keep the tone practical and useful for a recruiting team reviewing referral performance.
:::

## Outreach generator

:::BlockQuote
You are an outreach generation assistant for our recruiting team.

Your job is to create a personalized outreach sequence for a candidate for the \[Job Title] role.

Before writing, gather or confirm the inputs you need, including:
\* The job description
\* The candidate's background
\* Any themes we want to emphasize
\* The preferred tone such as warm, direct, concise, or consultative

Once you have enough context, write:
\* A first-touch message
\* 2 follow-up messages

The messages should feel thoughtful, specific, and human.

Reference relevant parts of the candidate's background where possible, explain why the role could be interesting, and avoid generic praise or spammy language.

Keep the messages easy to adapt and ready to use in sourcing outreach.
:::

## Personalization agent

:::BlockQuote
You are a personalization assistant for recruiting outreach.

Review the candidate's profile and background, then write a concise personalized note for the \[Job Title] role.

Focus on meaningful signals such as:
\* Career trajectory
\* Standout achievements
\* Product or company context
\* Evidence of how they work or what they care about

The message should feel thoughtful and intentional rather than generic or overly flattering.

Be specific about what stood out and why it seems relevant to the role.

Keep the tone human, punchy, and concise.

If the available background does not provide enough material for strong personalization, say so and fall back to the best available concrete signals instead of inventing details.
:::

## Boolean string builder

:::BlockQuote
You are a sourcing strategist.

Build a Boolean string for candidates for the \[Role] role based on the background signals we care about, such as experience in \[industry], \[function], \[tools], \[customer segment], or \[company environment].

Start by identifying the most relevant:
\* Title signals
\* Company signals
\* Experience signals

Then produce:
\* A Boolean string that is ready to copy into a sourcing tool
\* A short explanation of the search logic
\* A list of example target companies that match the profile

If multiple regions, related jobs, or equivalent titles are relevant, combine them thoughtfully into one search rather than producing a narrow result that misses good candidates.
:::

## Career overlap analyzer

:::BlockQuote
You are a career overlap analysis assistant.

Review candidates in the \[Job or Pipeline] pipeline and identify any meaningful overlap between their work histories and our internal team, recent hires, or other relevant internal groups.

Focus on overlaps that might create actionable context, such as:
\* Shared company experience
\* Adjacent functions
\* Periods where the timing makes a connection plausible

Sort the results by match strength and highlight the most actionable overlaps first.

If a candidate appears to have no meaningful overlap, say so clearly.

Keep the output practical for a recruiter who wants to quickly identify warm paths or useful context for outreach.
:::

## Candidate intake and consideration assistant

:::BlockQuote
You are a candidate intake and consideration assistant.

When I share a prospect, referral, or sourced candidate, help me turn that information into a clean recruiting record.

First, summarize what information is already available, such as:
\* Name
\* Email
\* Phone number
\* Social links
\* Relevant background

Then identify what important information is missing.

If I specify a \[Job Title], help me assess whether the candidate should be considered for that role based on the context available.

If I confirm that I want to proceed, prepare the information needed to create the candidate and consider them for the role.

Keep the output practical and focused on helping a recruiter move quickly.
:::

# Hiring strategy and planning

| Use case                                                          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| ----------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| [Hired candidate pattern finder](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)    | Looks at hired candidates for a role and surfaces repeatable background patterns that can help teams refine early application review criteria.                                                                 |
| [AI criteria creator](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)               | Helps teams translate successful-hire patterns into clearer AI review criteria for future applicants.                                                                                                          |
| [Compensation database agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)       | Uses an internal compensation framework or compensation knowledge base to answer repeatable compensation-related questions in a more consistent way.                                                           |
| [Offer decline debrief agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)       | Summarizes offer decline themes so teams can understand why candidates are saying no and spot patterns that may need process, compensation, or messaging changes.                                              |
| [Dashboard executive summary agent](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8) | Generates comprehensive weekly pipeline updates for a single department, covering interview activity, candidate flow, offer outcomes, rejection themes, and process efficiency insights across all open roles. |

## Hired candidate pattern finder

:::BlockQuote
You are a hired candidate pattern analysis assistant.

Review the resumes, applications, and visible profile data for candidates who were hired into the \[Job Title] role during the last \[time period].

Identify observable, role-relevant patterns that appear across multiple successful hires.

Focus on patterns like:
\* Career progression
\* Scope
\* Domain exposure
\* Repeated tools or skills
\* Tenure patterns

Ignore demographic or proxy signals such as age, graduation year, nationality, location, or anything else that could correlate with protected characteristics.

For each meaningful pattern that appears consistently, provide:
\* A short criteria title
\* A clear prompt that starts with "Look for..."
\* A one-sentence explanation of why the pattern matters

If the sample is too small or inconsistent to support strong criteria, say so directly instead of forcing weak conclusions.
:::

## AI criteria creator

:::BlockQuote
You are an AI criteria creation assistant for recruiting.

Based on our successful hires for the \[Role] role, create 5 to 8 clear criteria that could be used to evaluate new applicants at the application review stage.

Use only observable, role-relevant evidence from resumes, applications, and public professional profiles.

For each criterion, provide:
\* A short label
\* A prompt that explains what the AI should look for
\* A short reason for why this pattern appears meaningful among our successful hires

Avoid generic criteria like "strong background" or "good experience."

Also avoid any criteria that could directly or indirectly rely on protected characteristics.

If the data does not support a criterion strongly enough, leave it out.
:::

## Compensation database agent

:::BlockQuote
You are a compensation guidance assistant.

Using our internal compensation framework and role context, summarize the likely compensation range and key decision factors for a \[Role] hire in \[Region/Level].

Explain:
\* What inputs are available
\* What assumptions are being made
\* What important information is missing

Present the answer as a practical summary that helps a recruiter or hiring manager understand the likely compensation boundaries and tradeoffs without treating the output as a final approval.

If the available framework does not support a confident answer, say exactly what additional information is needed.
:::

## Offer decline debrief agent

:::BlockQuote
You are an offer decline debrief assistant.

Review declined offers from the last \[time period] for the \[Team or Role] hiring areas and summarize the biggest themes behind why candidates turned offers down.

Group the declines into practical categories such as:
\* Compensation
\* Scope
\* Timing
\* Competing offers
\* Process experience
\* Relocation or logistics

Only include categories supported by the available data.

Highlight any repeated patterns that may deserve attention from recruiting or hiring leadership.

Keep the output evidence-based and do not overstate conclusions when decline reasons are incomplete or inconsistent.
:::

## Dashboard executive summary agent

:::BlockQuote
You are a recruiter who is building strong rapport with executives. You hire for one specific department. You aim to deliver an update to the team on a weekly basis with the following information.

Review the following and provide a well-written, bullet-point formatted update covering all roles in the recruiter's department.

Include mentions of the following:
\* Number of candidates who completed the onsite interview stage by specific role in the last week
\* Number of candidates who are scheduled to complete the onsite interview stage in the following week
\* Number of candidates who completed the screen stage in the past week by specific role
\* Increase or decrease in total candidates in the application stage from the previous week, on a role-by-role basis
\* Increase or decrease in number of new leads added to each job from the previous week
\* The specific roles where the number of projected hires is less than the number of openings for that specific role
\* Common themes among candidates who rejected us in the past month on a role-by-role basis — look at their reasoning for withdrawing and identify themes within each role
\* Common themes among candidates we rejected — look at feedback from our feedback forms and identify common themes among why we rejected candidates, on a role-by-role basis
\* Names of candidates who are currently in the onsite interview stage and have already received a 3 or 4 on a feedback form in that stage
\* Names of candidates who are currently at the reference check or offer stage
\* Names of candidates who accepted an offer in the last seven days
\* Areas where we can improve our recruiting process in each individual role
\* Roles where we need to focus on building pipeline
\* Roles where we have inefficiencies in our process
\* Areas where efficiency has improved
\* Areas where we've trended to move faster or slower than previous months
:::


[title] AI Credits
[path] Ashby AI Features/

AI Credits are included across all Ashby All-in-One plans. While most AI features in Ashby are free to use without limitation, the ones that can run on a large volume of data (e.g. each inbound application) consume AI credits.

Features that consume AI Credits are: [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr) [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl) and [AI Talent Rediscovery](docId\:d-gjG_O-jKBQagm_KsMZe).

:::hint{type="info"}
For tips on managing your AI credits, see [Best Practices for Managing AI Credits](docId\:HgS5dAxBbQPPmIWE4q-vV) .
:::

# Included AI Credits

Every Ashby All-In-One plan includes some amount of AI credits at no additional cost.

Below are the included allotments of AI credits in each plan, as well as pricing for purchasing additional credits.

## AI credits included in Ashby All In One plans

**

| **Foundations AI credits**                | **Legacy Plus AI credits**                | **Plus AI credits**     | **Enterprise AI credits** |
| ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------- | ------------------------- |
| 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide | 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide | 2,500/yr, per paid seat | 12,500/yr, per paid seat  |

###

## Additional AI credits available for purchase&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
See [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE) to learn how to purchase more AI credits.
:::

- Additional AI credits available for purchase for annual / multi-year subscriptions:
  - +5,000 for $500/yr
- Additional AI credits available for purchase for month-to-month Foundations subscriptions:
  - +1,000 for $100/mo

# Bundling with AI credits

Ashby offers additional bundled AI credits when purchasing additional AI features.

Customers who purchase:

- Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On
- AI Notetaker

will receive additional AI credits as part of a bundle.

## Foundations & Legacy Plus bundle&#x20;

- +18,000 credits/yr per account when purchasing the AI notetaker bundle&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
Foundations & Legacy Plus customers cannot purchase the advanced scheduling automation add-on.
:::

## Plus bundle

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
+10,000 AI credits/seat/yr when purchasing the AI Notetaker bundle
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="2" indent="2"}
+10,000 AI credits/seat/yr when purchasing the Advanced Scheduling Automation bundle
:::

## Enterprise bundle

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
+10,000 AI credits/seat/yr when purchasing the AI Notetaker bundle
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
As of September 25th 2025 Enterprise customers have a new, higher, baseline of 12,500 AI credits/seat/yr. See the table below for details.
:::

## Bundle AI credit allotment table

Below is what your total included AI credit allotment looks like depending on the bundles you purchase:

|                                                             | **Foundations**                             | **Legacy Plus**                           | **Plus**                 | **Enterprise**                                                  |
| ----------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- | ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Baseline AI Credits**                                     | 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide   | 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide | 2,500/yr, per paid seat  | 12,500/yr, per paid seat                                        |
| **w/ Only AI Notetaker**                                    | 3,000/mo. Or 36,000 per year account wide   | 3,000/mo. Or 36,000 per year account wide | 12,500/yr, per paid seat | 22,500/yr, per paid seat                                        |
| **w/ Only Advanced Scheduling Automation**                  | 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide\* | 1,500/mo. Or 18,000 per year account wide | 12,500/yr, per paid seat | 12,500/yr, per paid seat\*\* <br />*(Adv. Scheduling included)* |
| **w/ Both AI Notetaker and Advanced Scheduling Automation** | 3,000/mo. Or 36,000 per year account wide\* | 3,000/mo. Or 36,000 per year account wide | 22,500/yr, per paid seat | 22,500/yr, per paid seat\*\* <br />*(Adv. Scheduling included)* |

:::hint{type="warning"}
- **Foundations** and **Legacy Plus** cannot purchase the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1) .
- \*Advanced Scheduling is included in **Enterprise**.
:::

# FAQ

### How many AI credits do I need?

We recommend estimating your needs by multiplying your historical applicants-per-role by your planned number of hires for the year.

### Will I be warned if I am close to using my credits?

Yes. Ashby provides an in-app warning when you reach 80% usage.

### Do unused credits roll over?

Credits are tied to your contract period and do not roll over to the next contract year.

### Where can I view my remaining credits?

Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Billing** to view your balance and purchase more.

### I already have the Advanced Scheduling Automation add-on - will I get the additional credits added to my account?

Yes. Your AI credit allotment will be adjusted per the above limits proactively. No further action will be needed.


[title] Substitution Tokens
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

You can add substitution tokens to your email templates to pull information from the candidate profile, upcoming interview details, and more when generating an email draft. This guide is a list of the substitution tokens available. For more information on configuring your templates, check out [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ).

:::hint{type="info"}
For substitution tokens that generate email content using AI, check out [the AI tokens section of this guide](#).
:::

# Candidate information

- **Candidate's First Name**: The first name of the candidate, as listed on their candidate profile in Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/33d6ffe6efaf4027bde7369c2b733ca0.png" size="80" alt="A substitution token pulling the candidate's first name from their profile." isUploading="false" width="636" height="135" darkWidth="636" darkHeight="135" showCaption="false"}

- **Candidate's Full Name**: The candidate's full name, as listed on their candidate profile in Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/fadbef98976a581e5561f1628246dee8.png" size="80" alt="A substitution token pulling the candidate's full name from their profile." isUploading="false" width="495" height="108" darkWidth="495" darkHeight="108" showCaption="false"}

- **Candidate's Company:** The most recent company the candidate has worked at, pulled from the **Experience** section of the candidate profile.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/2241c026839661c52f75191b590b7ac7.png" size="80" alt="A substitution token pulling the candidate's company from their profile." isUploading="false" width="658" height="212" darkWidth="658" darkHeight="212" showCaption="false"}

- **Candidate's School:** The most recent school the candidate attended. This information is pulled from the **Education** section of the candidate profile.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/249d9cc31dfbce3071e770eac3d020d4.png" size="80" alt="A substitution token pulling the candidate's school from their profile." isUploading="false" width="656" height="149" darkWidth="656" darkHeight="149" showCaption="false"}

- **Candidate's Current Title:** The candidate's most recent job title, pulled from the **Experience** section of the candidate's profile.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/496aabd93eca59c5dbcd0e28949ce7f2.png" size="80" alt="A substitution token pulling the candidate's most recent job from their profile." isUploading="false" width="652" height="156" darkWidth="652" darkHeight="156" showCaption="false"}

- **Candidate's Phone Number:** The candidate's phone number, pulled from their candidate profile in Ashby.
- **Candidate's LinkedIn Profile URL:** The candidate's LinkedIn profile link, pulled from their candidate profile in Ashby.
- **Candidate's Email Address (Primary, Personal):** The candidate's email address, pulled from the **Email (Personal)** field on their candidate profile.
- **Candidate's Candidate Profile Link:** The link to the candidate's profile in Ashby (as if it was copied directly from the address bar when viewing their profile). This can direct interviewers directly to the candidate's profile in Ashby if they have permission to view candidate profiles.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/da1d7b9a55e04db544fd98a7eb1fa5f4.png" size="80" alt="A substitution token pulling the candidate's profile link." isUploading="false" width="655" height="142" darkWidth="655" darkHeight="142" showCaption="false"}

- **Candidate Referrer's First Name:** The first name of the user who first referred the candidate to the organization. Use 'Job Consideration's Referrer's First Name' to reference the referrer for the specific application.
- **Candidate Referrer's Full Name:** The full name of the user who first referred the candidate to the organization. Use 'Job Consideration's Referrer's Full Name' to reference the referrer for the specific application.

# Sender and organization information

- **Sender's First Name:** The first name of the user the email is being sent from. If you are using another user's email address (more on this at [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx)), then they are seen as the sender. The sender's first name is pulled from the name field in their **Personal Settings**.
- **Sender's Last Name:** The last name of the user the email is being sent from. If you are using another user's email address (more on this at [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx)), then they are seen as the sender. The sender's last name is pulled from the name field in their **Personal Settings**.
- **Sender's Full Name:** The full name of the user the email is being sent from. If you are using another user's email address (more on this at [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx)), then they are seen as the sender. The sender's full name is pulled from the name field in their **Personal Settings**.
- **Sender's Job Title:** The job title of the user the email is being sent from. This is pulled from the **Job Title** field in the user's **Personal Settings**. If you are using another user's email address (more on this at [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx)), then they are seen as the sender.
- **Organization's Name:** The Organization name, pulled from the **Organization Name** field on the [Theme (Job Board) page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/d52b709ed808a1e3718bd6485c354f70.png" size="80" alt="A substitution token pulling the company's name from the Theme (Job Board) page." isUploading="false" width="801" height="148" darkWidth="801" darkHeight="148" showCaption="false"}

# Job consideration and hiring team information

:::hint{type="info"}
When pulling Hiring Manager, Recruiter, Recruiting Coordinator, or Sourcer information, those roles are determined by the roles outlined in the **Hiring Team** on the candidate's job consideration.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
The job title, team, team hierarchy, and posting title tokens can't be added to sequences currently.
:::

![The hiring team on a job consideration, where the substitution token pulls the hiring manager, recruiter, recruiting coordinator and sourcer roles from.](https://cdn.zappy.app/22f64ea0295a638e65b7112ffab04403.png)

- **Job Consideration's Hiring Manager's First Name:** The first name of the hiring manager listed in the candidate's job consideration. The name is pulled from the Hiring Manager's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Hiring Manager's Name:** The first name of the hiring manager listed in the candidate's job consideration in the **Hiring Team** section. The name is pulled from the Hiring Manager's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Recruiter's First Name:** The first name of the recruiter listed in the candidate's job consideration in the **Hiring Team** section. The name is pulled from the Recruiter's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Recruiter's Name:** The name of the recruiter listed in the candidate's job consideration in the **Hiring Team** section. The name is pulled from the Recruiter's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Recruiting Coordinators's First Name:** The first name of the recruiting coordinator listed in the candidate's job consideration in the **Hiring Team** section. The name is pulled from the Recruiting Coordinator's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Recruiting Coordinators's Name:** The name of the recruiting coordinator listed in the candidate's job consideration in the **Hiring Team** section. The name is pulled from the Recruiting Coordinator's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Sourcer's First Name:&#x20;**&#x54;he first name of the sourcer listed in the candidate's job consideration in the **Hiring Team** section. The name is pulled from the Sourcer's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Sourcer's Name:** The name of the sourcer listed in the candidate's job consideration in the **Hiring Team** section. The name is pulled from the Sourcer's name field within their **Personal Settings**.
- **Job Consideration's Referrer's First Name:** The first name of the user who referred the candidate for the job. Use 'Candidate Referrer's First Name' to reference the user who first referred the candidate.
- **Job Consideration's Referrer's Full Name:** The full name of the user who referred the candidate for the job. Use 'Candidate Referrer's Full Name' to reference the user who first referred the candidate.
- **Job Consideration's Title:** The title of the job the candidate is being considered for. The job title here is taken from the title listed internally on the role in Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e4456b5f3c76cdba0bae96e3091da509.png" size="80" alt="The job title pulled from the job consideration." isUploading="false" width="648" height="216" darkWidth="648" darkHeight="216" showCaption="false"}

- **Job Consideration's Team:** The department or sub-department assigned to the job the candidate is being considered for. For more on setting up departments, check out [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ead0af3b2d3b743652900970816faf5e.png" size="80" alt="The team pulled from the job consideration." isUploading="false" width="577" height="126" darkWidth="577" darkHeight="126" showCaption="false"}

- **Job Consideration's Team Hierarchy:** The complete team hierarchy for the role the candidate is being considered for (so both the team and sub-team are included). For example, Engineering|Product Engineering|Backend Engineer.

![The full team hierarchy as pulled from the job consideration.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e449dad205f7d1b3f007a10aeb16f413.png)

- **Job Consideration's Posting Title:** The job title listed in the posting for the job the candidate applied for. If the candidate did not apply for the role, the title on the job board posting for the role, or the job title as listed on the Jobs page in Ashby, is shown instead (in that order).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/83fea3022a41fb91a95cfc17995fc414.png" size="90" alt="The posting title as pulled from the job consideration." isUploading="false" width="660" height="115" darkWidth="660" darkHeight="115" showCaption="false"}

- **Job Consideration's Posting Description:** The description of the external job posting the candidate applied to. If the candidate didn't apply for the role via a job posting, then the description from the default job posting for the job is listed.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e80c9b7110e1aa13eef3a201e1c4316a.png" size="80" alt="The job posting description as pulled from the job consideration." isUploading="false" width="653" height="262" darkWidth="653" darkHeight="262" showCaption="false"}

- **Job Consideration's Application Form Submission:** Injects a candidate's application form answers into the email body as rich text.
  - The token includes all standard application question types (short text, long text, single/multi-select, dates, and URLs). With file uploads, only the file name is listed; the token doesn't include a link to the file or attach a copy of it to the email. If the candidate has left any fields blank, these display as "—" in the email. If there is no submission available, the token renders empty, but you can still send the email.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
This substitution token always excludes private fields, and it never sends them to candidates, regardless of sender permissions.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
This token behaves differently depending on the context the email is being sent in:
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
If you are looking at a specific job consideration for the candidate when drafting the email, the token renders the application's latest submission for that particular job consideration.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Without the specific job consideration (e.g., you're just looking at the candidate profile without a job consideration selected): it renders the candidate's most recent application, regardless of status (including applications that have been archived).
:::

![The application form submission details pulled from the job consideration.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3LRSoojNhxx7N3oUlYlOm_ariadne-shepard-marketeer-acent-ashby-2026-02-23-at-15423-pm.jpg)

- **Job Consideration's Street Address:** The street address assigned to the location linked to the job the job consideration is for.
- **Job Consideration's Postal Code:** The postal code assigned to the location linked to the job the job consideration is for.
- **Job Consideration's Compensation:** The formatted compensation for the job or job posting associated with this candidate email. This field shows one or multiple tiers of compensation, matching exactly how compensation appears on the job or job posting.
  - If a job has multiple postings with differing compensation, it shows the compensation set for the posting the candidate applied to.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iaQ2ts_ULMnQKsB99HaW2_compensation-on-a-job-posting.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2184" height="1184" darkWidth="2184" darkHeight="1184" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The compensation listed on a job posting."}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
If the candidate didn't apply via a job posting (e.g., manually considered for a job) or if postings don't have their own compensation defined, this token falls back to using the compensation set for the job. You can find the compensation set for a job in the **Settings** section of the job details.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n9KKmtsHisI_0-YpyVIvH_compensation-within-the-settings-section-of-a-job.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2237" height="1076" darkWidth="2237" darkHeight="1076" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The compensation tiers listed in the Settings section of a job."}

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring compensation tiers, check out [Compensation](docId:0Zkrmoq_22RNbDT3KwGuM).
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
The Job Consideration's Compensation substitution token is only supported for email templates and cannot be used in candidate texting templates. When used, the compensation information will always show on a new line in the email.
:::

# Interview booking links and information

- **Direct Booking Link:** Include the booking link generated by an interview activity. The candidate can then view interviewer availability and select a suitable time for their interview. More about direct booking at [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/19f39769fc55c5fa8123b0443cd7ad28.png" size="80" alt="The direct booking link as pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="626" height="183" darkWidth="626" darkHeight="183" showCaption="false"}

- **Candidate Availability Link:** Include the availability link generated by an interview activity. The candidate can then add in their availability and submit it so an interview can be scheduled manually. More about candidate availability links can be found at [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/71a56b1a8932984653003cab0c2c2acd.png" size="80" alt="The availability link as pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="785" height="192" darkWidth="785" darkHeight="192" showCaption="false"}

- **Take Home Submission Link:** A link that allows a candidate to submit their take-home submission. More on this at [Take-home Activities](docId\:hdevBy04F4IDGuOGM2kWH).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7d1ec6fa852ef52626a18296194d611c.png" size="80" alt="The take-home submission link as pulled from the take-home activity details." isUploading="false" width="778" height="202" darkWidth="778" darkHeight="202" showCaption="false"}

- **Interview Panel Summary:** A summary of the scheduled interview panel, showing interviewer names and the interview start time. The interview must already be scheduled for this information to be pulled into the email.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/77b3cd636cf0d943af1cba39f23012a4.png" size="80" alt="The interview panel summary pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="455" height="174" darkWidth="455" darkHeight="174" showCaption="false"}

- **Interview Panel Summary (for Upcoming Interviews in Interview Reminders):** A summary of the scheduled interview panel for interviews on the same day the email is sent. If you have interviews scheduled as part of the panel on other days, this token doesn't include them in the email.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/653d95fc2c8636b89b6c72743b7d0066.png" size="80" alt="The interview panel summary pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="500" height="228" darkWidth="500" darkHeight="228" showCaption="false"}

- **Calendar Invite Location (Video Conferencing Link, Phone Number or Custom):** Include the location listed for the interview in the calendar invite. This can be a Google Meet or Zoom link, a phone number, or a custom value. This is set within the **Location** field of the interview details.

![The interview location pulled from the interview details.](https://cdn.zappy.app/01b352c3c43681d771cb85a93e55aac6.png)

- **Interview Meeting Room:&#x20;**&#x49;f a meeting room is scheduled for this interview, list this in the email.
- **Interview(s) Total Time:&#x20;**&#x54;he total time of all interviews, listed in hours and minutes (for example, 1hr 45min).

![The interview duration pulled from the interview details.](https://cdn.zappy.app/7764083bda85f30d5cb4236b62b05c32.png)

- **Interview Title:** The title of the individual interview scheduled at the time of sending.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/489a178e1660f4cc7bc71dedde392a72.png" size="80" alt="The interview title pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="443" height="166" darkWidth="443" darkHeight="166" showCaption="false"}

- **Interview Start Date (First Date):** The start date of the interview. If multiple interviews are scheduled, this token lists only the date of the first one.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/eb392c253ee0b476ef65e1ee61ba40b4.png" size="80" alt="The start date of the interview pulled from the interview details" isUploading="false" width="580" height="159" darkWidth="580" darkHeight="159" showCaption="false"}

- **Interview Start Date (All Dates):&#x20;**&#x54;he start date of the interviews in the panel. If multiple interviews are scheduled, this token lists all dates.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/cafb39eca507c3cb7242c7fcd8538a61.png" size="80" alt="The start date of the interviews in the panel as pulled from the interview details" isUploading="false" width="522" height="167" darkWidth="522" darkHeight="167" showCaption="false"}

- **Interview End Date:** The end date of the interview. If multiple interviews are scheduled, this token lists the end date of the last interview in the panel.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f4b5f69178f118ffebf337593e57af98.png" size="80" alt="The interview end date pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="634" height="160" darkWidth="634" darkHeight="160" showCaption="false"}

- **Interview Start Time:&#x20;**&#x54;he start time of the interview. If multiple interviews are scheduled, this token lists the start time of the first interview.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7d8281db756dae12e5a7fbedcd8a22f9.png" size="80" alt="The start time of the interview pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="566" height="148" darkWidth="566" darkHeight="148" showCaption="false"}

- **Interview End Time:** The end time of the interview. If multiple interviews are scheduled, this token lists the end time of the last interview.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/393f64f8aa7504b817482bfc2366ded0.png" size="80" alt="The end time of the interview pulled from the interview details." isUploading="false" width="642" height="153" darkWidth="642" darkHeight="153" showCaption="false"}

- **First Scheduled Interviewer's First Name:&#x20;**&#x54;he first name of the first interviewer scheduled on the panel. This is designed for 1:1 interviews. If the interview panel has multiple interviewers, this token shows the first interviewer's first name.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6f2cddbcd1da3ca5f2b8fbddf465d2db.png" size="80" alt="The first name of the first interviewer scheduled on the panel pulled from their personal settings." isUploading="false" width="575" height="161" darkWidth="575" darkHeight="161" showCaption="false"}

- **First Scheduled Interviewer's Name:** The full name of the first interviewer scheduled on the panel. This is designed for 1:1 interviews. If the interview panel has multiple interviewers, this token shows the first interviewer's full name.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/738f7cd30c8e6a3e6b434bd8d258a774.png" size="80" alt="The full name of the first interviewer scheduled on the panel pulled from their personal settings." isUploading="false" width="596" height="171" darkWidth="596" darkHeight="171" showCaption="false"}

- **First Scheduled Interviewer's Job Title:** The job title of the first interviewer scheduled on the panel. This is designed for 1:1 interviews. If the interview panel has multiple interviewers, this token shows the first interviewer's job title.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/0a3975395ad15505c7b99ff579b2bead.png" size="80" alt="The first scheduled interviewer's job title pulled from their personal settings." isUploading="false" width="724" height="167" darkWidth="724" darkHeight="167" showCaption="false"}

- **First Scheduled Interviewer (Including Name, Job Title, Social Links):** The first interviewer's name, job title, and social links (taken from their **Personal Settings**) are displayed. This is designed for 1:1 interviews, and only the first interviewer's details are shown if multiple interviewers are on the panel.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5e61612e9a96c213197a26a91607181d.png" size="80" alt="The first interviewer's name, job title and social links pulled from their personal settings." isUploading="false" width="636" height="190" darkWidth="636" darkHeight="190" showCaption="false"}

# Other useful dates

- **Employment Start Date:** The start date listed in the most recent version of the offer extended. If the candidate has already accepted an offer, this token uses the start date listed in that offer instead.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/4f4386ef5d8a7d6b0c3d330532413eef.png" size="80" alt="The employment start date pulled from the offer details." isUploading="false" width="657" height="273" darkWidth="657" darkHeight="273" showCaption="false"}

- **Day of Week:** The day of the week on which the email is sent to the candidate. This is based on your timezone.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f443516ab4b8e0387ca83e41411963a2.png" size="80" alt="The day of the week the email is sent to the candidate." isUploading="false" width="371" height="172" darkWidth="371" darkHeight="172" showCaption="false"}

# Surveys and questionnaires

:::hint{type="info"}
Once a survey request has been created, each substitution token below is replaced with a link to the requested survey or questionnaire.
:::

- **Diversity Survey Link:** Include a link for the candidate to complete a diversity survey in the email. More on setting up and automating diversity survey distribution at [Diversity Surveys](docId\:PSv0-HgPj3RvnmKMISJI4).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/d585f6fb48399000a694d951815cb570.png" size="80" alt="A survey link pulled from the survey activity on the candidate's profile. " isUploading="false" width="624" height="158" darkWidth="624" darkHeight="158" showCaption="false"}

- **EEOC Survey Link:** Include a link for the candidate to complete an EEOC survey in the email. More on EEOC surveys at [EEOC Surveys](docId\:pvVzo8-M3-2DF2RGT3tRA).
- **Candidate Experience Survey Link:** Include a candidate survey link in your email. More on configuring candidate experience surveys at [Candidate Experience Surveys](docId:3diVXM9wKFoQpom5c4ncB).
- **Data Consent Request Link:** Include a link for the candidate to provide consent via a consent form. More on this at [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9).
- **Questionnaire Link:** Add a link to a questionnaire for candidates to complete. More on this at [Questionnaires](docId\:KgRji3jGZ-8tZR5bb1-kh).

# Events information

:::hint{type="info"}
The below substitution tokens pull details from an event you've created. You can add these tokens to event invitation or event confirmation email templates. For more on events, check out [Events](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS).
:::

- **Hiring Event Name:** The name of the hiring event.
- **Hiring Event Location:** The location set in the **Location** field of your event.
- **Hiring Event Location Description:** The location information set in the **Location Description** field of your event.
- **Hiring Event Location Type:** The location type as set in the **Location Type** field of your event.
- **Hiring Event Date:** The date of your hiring event.
- **Hiring Event Time:** The timezone, start time, and end time of the hiring event (if set).
- **Hiring Event Start Time:** The start time of the hiring event.
- **Hiring Event End Time:** The end time of the hiring event.
- **Hiring Event Timezone:** The timezone set in the hiring event details.
- **Hiring Event Audience Member's Time Slot:** The time slot the audience member selected when registering for the event (if time slots are enabled for this event).
- **Hiring Event Audience Member's Registration Form Submission:** The audience member's registration form submission.
- **Hiring Event Audience Member's RSVP Link:** A link that the email recipient can use to update their RSVP status after they've registered. Any amendments to the RSVP status made here will update in Ashby.

# AI tokens

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on using AI tokens in sequences, see [AI Tokens in Outreach Emails](docId\:ggQQ4VkH_ynMutuXv43ha).

You can opt in to use AI-Generated Email Tokens by heading to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access).
:::

- **AI Generated Feedback Summary:** Automatically create short, context-aware feedback summaries in non-sequence emails (like rejections, status updates, or next steps). This fits within the context of the surrounding email content, so it works both for rejections and for feedback you may want to give during the interview loop.

![An AI generated feedback summary token on an email template.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e4c8979946c32b9c5281b2a1ab49f8de.png)

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
You see a preview of the generated feedback, based on submitted scores and notes, and you need to approve it by selecting the checkmark to add it to the email. You can easily regenerate or delete the summary.
:::

![AI generated feedback produced by the AI token with the options to accept, regenerate or reject the generated content.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e0fa9b3619554bd33b4176422689a990.png)

# FAQs

### I'm seeing a Missing Value For message when pulling up an email template. Why?

This error shows when the value can't be found. This is particularly common when:

- You're trying to send a direct booking link, but an interview activity hasn't been generated and a booking link hasn't been created for the candidate. You can read more on booking links at [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).
- You're trying to send a candidate availability link, but an interview activity hasn't been generated and a candidate availability link hasn't been created for the candidate. You can read more on candidate availability links at [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).
- You're trying to send a survey, but the survey request and link haven't been generated yet.
- An interview hasn't been scheduled yet. Panel information can only be pulled for interview emails once the interview has been scheduled.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/51dac655543e89e6bcb6c50c0518db50.png" size="80" alt="An email with the Missing Value For: error." isUploading="false" width="814" height="307" darkWidth="814" darkHeight="307" showCaption="false"}

If you get a Missing Value For error for the Job Consideration's Compensation token, you can hover over the token to see why it's unresolved.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eXT-YHuvsQ4DN0weqfCp1_missing-value-error-for-compensation.png" size="80" alt="Hovering over the Missing Value for error for a compensation token will give you further information on the error." isUploading="false" width="1530" height="516" darkWidth="1530" darkHeight="516" showCaption="false"}

### Can I set a custom field as a substitution token?

You can, yes! Custom fields can only be configured on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

When creating your custom field, you can check the `Enable in Email Templates` box on the token's settings. You can now use this token in email templates. Substitution tokens don't support checkbox and long unformatted answer custom field types, and this option is only available for candidate, job, and employee custom fields.

If you'd like more information on configuring custom fields, check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/55a9cb9ad84eebd21aea3ba2132c2d60.png" size="80" alt="The option to Enable in Email Templates within a custom field's settings. " isUploading="false" width="585" height="452" darkWidth="585" darkHeight="452" showCaption="false"}

### Where does the timezone in the Interview Panel Summary token come from?

The Interview Panel Summary token uses the Interview Schedule's Primary Interview Timezone to decide the timezone shown in interviewer invites. This can be set or amended within the **Meeting Hours** tab of your schedule interview activity.&#x20;

![The Primary Interview Timezone field on a schedule interview activity.](https://cdn.zappy.app/d8863e0ac712bb9ee43afd05394e2d36.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidates see times in their own timezone, if a candidate location or timezone is set. If this is not provided, the token will default to the interview timezone in candidate-facing communication.
:::

### Can offer tokens be used like substitution tokens in email templates?

No, this isn't currently possible.

### Can I set custom text for a URL substitution link?

You can set custom text for a URL pulled into an email via a substitution token (like a direct booking link or candidate availability link).

1. At the point of drafting the email, select the email template using your URL substitution token.
2. Click the three dots to the right of the URL added to your email, then select `Set Text to Display`.
3. Type in your custom text and click `Continue` to update the display text.

![The option to set text to display instead of a URL](https://cdn.zappy.app/2c5d7033580e5e8b89c6469d5bdf4321.png)

### Do URL-type custom field tokens render as clickable links in emails?

Yes. When you use a URL-type custom field token in an onboarding email, Ashby renders the field value as a clickable hyperlink. Recipients can select the link instead of copying and pasting the URL.

### Is there a way to remove formatting from substitution tokens?

:::hint{type="info"}
Adding \_RAW to the end of any **numeric** or **currency** substitution token will strip formatting from the field. For example, a large number MY\_FIELD might be formatted as 1,000,000, but MY\_FIELD\_RAW would be rendered as 1000000. This can avoid problems when using Word Tables.
:::

### Can substitution tokens be used in newsletters?

No, substitution tokens cannot be used in newsletters.  To set up a newsletter, see [Newsletters](docId\:h9M9sIQyi8ESS69a3z0mr) .

[title] Offer Approvals
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

***

Offer approvals let you build a structured review process that must be completed before an offer can be created and sent to a candidate, helping ensure the right stakeholders sign off at every stage. This article explains what offer approvals are, how to create and configure an approval process, how to use approvals once they're active, and answers to common questions. For a broader overview of all approval options, see [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo).

# Permissions & access

Offer approvals are available on the Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

See the table below for information on the permissions required to configure approvals and to be an approver.

| Access Role                                                    | Can configure an approval? | Can make one-off edits to an approval process (if enabled)? | Can be set as an approver? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                          | ❌                                                           | ✅                          |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                          | ❌                                                           | ✅                          |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                          | ❌                                                           | ✅                          |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                          | ❌                                                           | ✅                          |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                          | ❌                                                           | ✅                          |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌                          | ❌                                                           | ✅                          |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌                          | ❌                                                           | ✅                          |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ❌                          | ✅                                                           | ✅                          |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                          | ✅                                                           | ✅                          |

:::hint{type="info"}
When an approval request is sent, users can approve or reject the request from their email. They do not need a specific access role or level of permissions to approve or reject an approval request via email or via Slack. They need at least Elevated Access to the role in question to view the candidate's profile prior to approving.
:::

# Create an approval process

An approval process consists of a sequence of one or more approval steps, each of which must be completed before an offer can be created and sent to a candidate. Each approval step consists of one or more stakeholders who must approve the terms of the offer before moving on to the next step in the process.

1. To create an approval process, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >** [Approvals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer), then click `+ New` in the top right corner of the page to begin configuring.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4cd086d54b801cb9d1cfcb0d36bc0e62.png)

2. Next, fill in the title of the approval process and add a scope, if necessary.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Adding a Scope allows you to filter which offers this process applies to by matching against fields on the associated job consideration. If an offer has multiple applicable processes, the process higher in the process list is used. Click `+ Add Field to Match` to add an additional filter to your scope.

Adding no scope means the process will apply across all offers, as a catch-all approval process.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-LEX2E8nTKkx278pTIxv4_approvals-ashby-2026-07-17-at-125506-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1286" height="1638" darkWidth="1286" darkHeight="1638" showCaption="false"}

3. Add the steps to complete your approval process. Here, you can define how many steps the approval process has and identify specific individuals or roles within the job consideration who must approve the offer.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qb5lHmeoOLsuJZF0KWQ6Q_approvals-ashby-2026-07-17-at-125821-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1276" height="1636" darkWidth="1276" darkHeight="1636" showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Each step has configurable options:
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Click the `pencil icon` next to the step name to give it a new name.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
By default, a new step `Always` applies.  Update the dropdown to `When condition matches` to define specific criteria that must be met to trigger the step.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
If you have multiple individuals who may approve an offer at a particular stage, but not all need to approve, you can toggle the option to "Receive approval from `all` of the following stakeholders" to "Receive approval from `any` of the following stakeholders."
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Select `Add Approver` to add one or more approvers to each step.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Select `Add Step` to continue adding steps.
:::

4. Select `Create` when you are ready to create and save your approval process.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you would like to require that an offer letter be generated prior to approval, navigate to **Admin > Offers > Settings** and toggle on the `Require Offer Letter Before Approval?` setting. Otherwise, the offer information will be sent for approval without a generated offer letter.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/h-H-FQ3xugz4m8hJM4Bua_offers-ashby-2026-07-17-at-11020-pm.png)
:::

# Managing approval processes

Offer approval processes can be managed by navigating to **Admin > Approvals > Offers**. On this page, you can take various actions to manage offer approval processes.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MH8PvOC4ujqU0LFGkPHfB_approvals-ashby-2026-07-17-at-12138-pm.png)

- Toggle between viewing your active and archived processes using the filter on the right side.
- Select the `Configure Reapproval Fields` button to configure which fields trigger a reapproval.  For more information on these settings, see [Offer reapproval fields](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo).&#x20;

## Approval process application order

The order in which approval processes are displayed on the **Approvals** page determine in which order they are applied to offers.  If multiple processes apply to a single offer, the one highest on this list will be used.

You can reorder approval processes in the list by clicking on the left side and dragging into place.

## Editing and archiving approval processes

If you click into an existing approval process from the list, you have the option to Edit, Copy, or Archive the process.

- Select `Edit` to make changes to the existing process.
- Select `Copy` to use this process as the foundation for a new process.
- Select `Archive` when the process is no longer in use.

:::hint{type="info"}
Archived processes can be restored by using the filter on the right side to view archived approval processes, selecting a process, and clicking `Restore`.
:::

# Using approvals

Once active, approvals apply to new offers. To submit an offer for approval:

1. Create the offer on the candidate's profile.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8907345efc067e7138a6809fd3f9bac3.png)

2. Fill out the offer details, then click `Submit` to confirm.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dffd1700b69b81b7eb3c2a2aceb72ea8.png)

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
If your organization has this setting configured, you may see a message stating that your organization requires an offer letter before it can be submitted for approval.  Click `Generate Offer Letter` to generate the letter and continue to the approval process.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ziV-ar97SdQaS3Z3ONVuC_darrel-erdman-infrastructure-engineer-ashby-2026-07-17-at-11523-pm.png)
:::

3. Review the approval process to confirm the correct approvers are listed, then click `Submit Request`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fabdf01fb7d71f46dec8eddfe475f470.png)

4. The approvers receive a notification prompting them to approve the offer. Once they submit their response, the process moves on to the next approver.
5. Once all steps are completed, you can send an e-signature request and offer letter to the candidate.

# FAQ

### What types of notifications can the reviewer receive?

Email and Slack. They also see an approval task on their **Home** page when logging in.

### How many processes can I have?

You can create unique approval processes that take effect under certain conditions. As only one approval process applies to each offer, the order of processes in the list determines the priority with which these processes take effect. You can optionally configure a default fallback process that runs when no other process applies.

### Is it possible to set the 'Hiring Manager' on the hiring team of a job as an approver instead of selecting a specific person?

Yes! You can select a pool of users as approvers based on their role on the job. You can choose from the Job Consideration's Recruiters, Recruiting Coordinators, Sourcers, and/or Hiring Managers.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cfb3a9a7c0183b8e93399bc35cc76195.png)

### Does a user need specific permissions to provide approval?

When an approval request is sent, users can approve or reject the request from their email. They do not need a specific access role or level of permissions to approve or reject an approval request via email or via Slack. They need at least Elevated Access to the role in question to view the candidate's profile prior to approving.

### Can I send a reminder to a stakeholder about approving an offer?

Yes, you can manually send a reminder. To do this:

1. Click `View Offer` on the candidate's profile to view the offer details and approval process steps.
2. Select `Send Reminders` next to the step where approval is still needed. You can see which stakeholders have yet to approve.
3. Determine which stakeholders should receive the reminder and add an optional message to accompany the original approval request information.
4. Click `Send Reminder to X Approvers` to send the reminder.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4e498c34803a424e42a4df041ba69786.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0e0c203b3491acc45adeb15a855ced8d.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b73db65534803edde70ee3821e21364d.png)

### Can a user be cc'd in to receive approval notifications?

Currently, only those involved in the approval process receive notifications about the approval flow.

### If an admin forces through an approval, does the approver receive a notification?

The approver does not receive a notification, but if they try to click `Approve`, they see that the approval already occurred and no action is needed.

### Can I set an approval chain via the API?

The enterprise offer approval API tool is only available on the Enterprise plan. When creating an approval, you have the option to set it to be managed via the API. This option is currently only available for offers.

To set up an API-managed approval process:

1. Navigate to [Admin > Organization Setup > Approvals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer) and click `+ New`.
2. Toggle on `Managed by the API?` in the **Steps** section.
3. Optionally, set up criteria in the **Scope** section if only offers meeting certain criteria should be managed via the API.

Once the approval chain has been received, the approval steps are added to the offer. When an offer is created and submitted, a `Waiting for external process` message appears in the offer overview, indicating that Ashby is waiting for an approval chain to be submitted via an API call.

:::hint{type="info"}
To pull data via the API to update the approval chain, you can use the [approvalDefinition.update](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/approvaldefinitionupdate) request.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7b2e0bb42c2e16d5024e9199c6fa2f32.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3636ea11a353dc3843f740533aa3f1b1.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/aef4fc68138f7fd88619dcf10b7957d8.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/79ee634485cdfa55f0cd9871157c0440.png)

### Will incomplete or blank offer fields be included in the email sent to an approver?

The offer approval email only includes fields that have been filled in, including offer custom fields.

### Why isn't the 'Hired' stage appearing in the dropdown when I click on 'Change Stage'?

The **Hired** stage does not appear in the **Change Stage** dropdown if there are active offer approvals set up in [Admin > Approvals > Offers](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer). You need to complete the offer process by clicking `Offer Accepted` within the offer's settings; once done, the candidate's stage automatically changes to **Hired**.

### Why am I seeing the message "Approval gap detected! Not all Offers are protected by approval processes"?

You're seeing this message because all of your existing offer approvals have scopes applied. Scopes are rules that determine which offers need approval based on specific conditions (for example, salary amount, department, or location). If an offer doesn't meet any of these conditions, it won't be sent through an approval process, creating a gap.

Ashby recommends creating a general (catch-all) approval process without scopes. This ensures that:

- All offers are protected by at least one approval process.
- Scoped approval processes still apply when their conditions are met.
- Offers that don't meet any scope conditions fall back to the general approval process.

[title] Emails
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/


[title] AI Notetaker Post-interview
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

***

When you've completed an interview where the AI Notetaker recorded the session, you can access the recording, full transcript, helpful summary notes, and the AI candidate assistant to assist with candidate evaluation. This article explains how to access and use these resources after the interview is completed.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- The AI Notetaker must have been enabled for your organization and the interview must have been set to record. See [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) and [Scheduling and Conducting Interviews with AI Notetaker](docId\:DHujlxck8syMCi5neuqbR) for more information.
:::

# Accessing the recording, transcript, and AI features

The interview recording, transcript, and summary are located under the `Recording` tab in the interview briefing. You can access the interview briefing from your Ashby homepage:

![Screenshot of the Ashby homepage showing interview briefings available for review.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tVyKD0T9m79VumhD5XoOF_home-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-113337-am.jpg)

Or from within the candidate profile under the `Interview Progress` section of the activity feed:

![Screenshot of the candidate profile activity feed showing the Interview Progress section with a completed recording.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zhOHfdHDLfZ9-dfQjqmJM_polly-pocket-scaled-customer-success-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-123339-pm.jpg)

Click into the briefing and navigate to the `Recording` tab.

On the left is the recording player, and on the right there are tabs to view the `Transcript`, `Notes`, or use the `AI Assistant`.

![Screenshot of the interview briefing Recording tab showing the recording player on the left and the Transcript, Notes, and AI Assistant tabs on the right.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/v2kzOOde_YUD0t6XlZpOL_interview-briefing-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-113859-am.jpg)

## Recording playback

When viewing the recording, you have standard playback options such as play/pause and volume adjustment. You can also enter Theater Mode, which opens the recording in full screen with the transcript listed on the right side.

Speakers are shown underneath the playback controls. Select `Hide Speakers` if you prefer not to show this information.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can also access the recording from the candidate's profile by selecting the `REC Available` status indicator on the interview activity in the candidate's progress feed.

![Screenshot of the candidate progress feed showing the REC Available status indicator on a completed interview activity.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lA2ktZCj_YXG014ByS97k_polly-pocket-scaled-customer-success-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-101647-am.jpg)
:::

## Transcript

The transcript includes a filter to search for specific keywords or topics. Results include timestamps; select a timestamp to jump to that specific part of the recording.

Ashby generates the transcript from each participant's audio stream individually to ensure accurate attribution.

## Notes and summary

In the `Notes` tab, you can view an interview summary and specific themes with supporting notes. These themes and notes include clickable timestamps that jump you to the relevant spot in the recording.

![Screenshot of the Notes tab in the interview briefing showing an interview summary and themed notes with timestamps.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QwmUnSimhw0_6elq0ksho_interview-briefing-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-114634-am.jpg)

## Sharing a recording

You can share a recording with colleagues from the **Recording** tab in the interview briefing or from the popup recording player. Anyone who can view a recording can share it with people who already have native access through access roles or permission scopes.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Users need specific permissions or access roles to share the recording with someone who doesn't already have access.  If you are unable to do so, review [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) for additional information on permissions required and reach out to your organizational admin if needed.
:::

### Sharing with colleagues

1. Navigate to the **Recording** tab in the interview briefing.
2. Select the `Share` button to open the sharing modal.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iz29DxjpA0FMMjEMayPZT_interview-briefing-billy-friesen-ashby-2026-07-29-at-40021-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1396" height="418" darkWidth="1396" darkHeight="418" alt="Points out the Share button on the top right side of the screen" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Search for and select the colleagues you want to share the recording with. The dialog indicates who already has access and who receives a new access grant. If you cannot grant new access, people without native access are not selectable, and the dialog explains why. Select `Continue`.
4. Optionally, edit the message that will be sent to recipients.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/a3NZdYF3x9YJjco473UU6_interview-briefing-billy-friesen-ashby-2026-07-29-at-40206-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="615" height="686" darkWidth="615" darkHeight="686" alt="Shows Add a message modal where you can type a message before sharing the recording" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Select `Share & send`.

Recipients receive an email notification containing your message and a link to view the recording.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can also share the recording via the same controls when viewing it directly on the candidate's profile in the pop up recording viewer.
:::

### Sharing a specific clip

You can share a specific clip from the recording, which is useful for drawing a colleague's attention to a particular part of the interview.

1. Navigate to the **Recording** tab in the interview briefing.
2. Select the scissors icon on the right side of the recording player controls.

![Screenshot showing the scissors icon and the time span bar to adjust to shared clip.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GYKH1Onnh6hBnTI_nKcwx_interview-briefing-jayson-moore-osinski-ashby-2026-08-25-at-32324-pm.png)

3. Click and drag the arrows to adjust the timespan of clip you'd like to share, or type the start and end timestamps into the timestamp fields directly.
4. If needed, you can adjust the timestamps in the modal manually by typing in a specific time, or by select the forward or back arrows to jump forward or backward in 5 second increments.
5. Select `Share this Clip` to open the sharing modal with the timestamp link pre-applied.
6. Add recipients and an optional message, then select `Share & send`.

Recipients receive a link that starts playback from the timestamp you selected.

### Sharing a specific moment

To share the recording starting at a specific moment (or timestamp), hover over the grey bar beneath the speaker list to reveal a `+` icon, and click where you'd like the moment to start.&#x20;

![Shows the purple plus sign icon that appears to select a moment at which to share the recording](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SmP93oLsfwhOyv6WP7MM1_interview-briefing-jayson-moore-osinski-ashby-2026-08-25-at-32136-pm.png)

Then, select `Share from this Moment` to send.

### Managing access

:::hint{type="warning"}
This ability is only available to users with the **Can grant meeting recording access** access role. See [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) for more information.
:::

After sharing a recording, you can view and manage who has access to it from **Recording** tab in the interview briefing. Select the down arrow next to the `Share` button and choose `Manage access`.



::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uMUVIk3Xs2eE_vTp5Svkk_interview-briefing-billy-friesen-ashby-2026-07-29-at-44448-pm.png" size="50" isUploading="false" width="319" height="136" darkWidth="319" darkHeight="136" alt="Shows the Manage access button nested under the down arrow to the right of the Share button" showCaption="false"}

The access management view shows users who were granted access through sharing in the **Granted Access** section, alongside roles with default access (based on their Ashby permissions) in the **Default Access** section. Hover over the `i` next to a granted access user to show who shared the recording with them and when.

To revoke access from someone you have shared with, select `Revoke access` next to their name.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2Vw-rWjw9nTQDFEVkn9v9_interview-briefing-billy-friesen-ashby-2026-07-29-at-44835-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="574" height="683" darkWidth="574" darkHeight="683" alt="Screenshot showing the Revoke access button" showCaption="false"}

### Recipient experience

When a colleague receives a shared recording, they get an email notification with your message and a direct link to the recording. If the link includes a timestamp, the recording opens at that moment.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nwcYEz7Hf20waaLnGJ0d9_fwd-ashby-interview-recordseph-ashbyhqcom-ashby-mail-2026-08-06-at-33021-pm.png" size="90" isUploading="false" width="616" height="471" darkWidth="616" darkHeight="471" alt="Screenshot of the email notification you receive when someone shares a recording with you." showCaption="false"}

Colleagues who don't have full Ashby permissions for the interview briefing are directed to a standalone recording page with access only to the recording, transcript, and notes. No other candidate or briefing details are available. &#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
A user can only re-share from this page if the setting to do so is enabled by an organizational admin.  See [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) for more info.
:::

![View of what a user sees when a recording is shared with them but they do not have access to the rest of the interview briefing information. Only the recording, transcript, and notes are accessible.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wp2zG965VkgcYyC34UTSX_interview-recording-ashby-2026-08-25-at-34200-pm.png)

## AI assistant

The `AI Assistant` tab navigates to the candidate assistant. Here, you can ask questions about the interview or candidate. Available information is based on user permissions, so if you have access to the candidate's full profile, you can ask broader questions.

![Screenshot of the AI Assistant tab in the interview briefing showing the candidate assistant interface.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NGoXuviOfapEKBMkyX5Va_interview-briefing-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-114826-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information, see our article on [AI Candidate Assistant](docId\:gfXoUwYWswcWHeJ65OD8S).
:::

# Using AI-generated content in candidate feedback

You can ask the AI assistant to generate answers for your feedback form if the form includes long, formattable text fields. Alternatively, you can use AI to autofill responses directly within the `Your Feedback` tab of the briefing. Ashby's AI provides objective, fact-based drafts without expressing opinions or making hiring recommendations.

:::hint{type="warning"}
AI-generated content is designed to assist interviewers, not replace them. Interviewers are still required to evaluate the candidate's performance and provide their own professional judgment.
:::

## How it works

- The system reads the feedback question and scans the transcript for relevant moments and examples.
- It generates a concise, evidence-based summary aligned to that specific question.
- Interviewers review, edit, or replace the suggestion. You must explicitly choose to insert the content before submitting feedback.

## Guardrails for objectivity

Auto-fill is limited to factual summarization to avoid bias:

- It does not rate or judge candidate performance.
- It is instructed to ignore personal or irrelevant attributes.
- Speaker names are removed before processing as a precaution.

## Using AI auto-fill on your feedback form

To use this feature, select `Autofill with AI` at the bottom of the feedback form.

![Screenshot of the feedback form in the interview briefing showing the Autofill with AI button at the bottom.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6ZUsNnjmRPTw0RPtKcJlW_interview-briefing-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-10438-pm.jpg)

The AI reviews the questions and generates suggestions, including timestamps for reference.

![Screenshot of AI-generated suggestions displayed in the feedback form with reference timestamps from the recording.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DkqDlzAJHN6Vto21F071k_interview-briefing-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-10257-pm.jpg)

You can provide further details to the AI to regenerate a suggestion. Enter your request in the `Add details or adjustments` field and select `Refine`. This is useful for adjusting formatting, changing the level of detail, or focusing on specific topics.

After review and refinement, select `Append` to add the content to the field or `Discard` if you choose not to include it.

:::hint{type="info"}
To view the recording and feedback form on the same page, select the cog icon in the upper right and change the view to `Column`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/il-i95yls3jC2HQ8QA_wW_interview-briefing-polly-pocket-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-10844-pm.jpg" size="72" width="1000" height="474" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the interview briefing with the feedback form displayed in column view alongside the recording player." darkWidth="1000" darkHeight="474" showCaption="false"}
:::

## Customizing the AI auto-fill prompt

You can add your own instructions to further customize how AI auto-fill should draft answers on your feedback forms, such as specifying that generated content should be concise or in bullet point format. Admins can add AI auto-fill instructions at a company-wide level, and users can add personal custom instructions for their own use.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
Need help with constructing prompts? The [AI Prompting Toolkit playbook](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/blog/prompting-toolkit) in Ashby Academy walks through a simple three-step framework — define the outcome, design the output, and test and iterate — with examples you can adapt for your needs.
:::

## Best Practices

Auto-fill instructions are most useful for guiding how AI Auto-fill formats and summarizes interview feedback. They work best for defining preferences to help match your organization's preferred feedback style, such as how responses should be structured, level of detail to include, and how interview evidence should be presented.

Good instructions usually focus on:

- Keeping feedback concise or within a specific length&#x20;
- Organizing evidence into bullets, sections, or themes&#x20;
- Using a preferred tone or company-specific verbiage
- Including specific examples or quotes from the interview transcript

:::hint{type="warning"}
Auto-fill instructions are not intended to tell AI how to evaluate a candidate. Interviewers should always review the generated feedback, confirm it accurately reflects the interview, and make their own recommendation or assessment.
:::

## Creating company-wide AI auto-fill instructions

To create company-wide custom instructions:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > AI Notetaker**
2. Click the **Auto-fill** tab
3. Add additional instructions into the **Auto-fill instructions** field.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OX-5nbwy0nT9LtUFfmWsd_auto-fill-tab-ai-notetaker.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2078" height="1144" darkWidth="2078" darkHeight="1144" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="The Auto-fill tab within the AI Notetaker section of Admin"}

4. Click `Save` to validate and save your changes.

:::hint{type="info"}
When you save AI auto-fill instructions, an extra validation step runs to evaluate your instructions and guide you towards best practices. &#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Lgyvu0-2aCe1uZgctUiWM_image.png)

If an issue is found, Ashby may still save your instructions, but parts of them may not work as expected (for example, if they conflict with underlying rules like asking for subjective evaluation of the candidate).
:::

## Customizing the AI auto-fill prompt on a user level

Users can add AI auto-fill instructions via two routes: when using AI auto-fill to complete a feedback form, or within **Personal Settings > Auto-fill Instructions**. Users can save multiple custom instructions and can enable or disable them on a case-by-case basis.

### Adding AI auto-fill instructions while completing a feedback form

When you add your feedback for an interview on the **Your Feedback** tab, the `Auto-fill with AI` button has a dropdown arrow to its right. Click this arrow, then click `+ Create custom instruction` to add a personal, reusable custom instruction.

![The dropdown menu to the right of the Auto-fill with AI button.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/B38H8y81LEbrzx6ttyBNt_interview-briefing-trudy-wilmott-ashby-2026-07-07-at-123323-pm.jpg)

The wizard asks for the following:

- A title for your instruction so you can easily identify it
- The instructions themselves

Check the `Default instruction` checkbox if you want this instruction automatically selected when you click `Auto-fill with AI`.

![The wizard to create a custom instruction.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Ryq1EFnW7uvSumkKNNlD1_custom-instruction-configuration-for-auto-fill-with-ai.jpg)

### Adding AI auto-fill instructions in Personal Settings

You can also manage personal AI auto-fill instructions within your personal settings. To do this:

1. Navigate to **Personal Settings > AI Auto-fill Instructions**
2. Click `+ Create first custom instruction`, or `+ New instruction` if you've already configured an instruction.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8IRGgbX_SviXarj651X1k_creating-a-new-instruction-for-auto-fill-instructions.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2894" height="964" darkWidth="2894" darkHeight="964" alt="The New instruction button to create a new auto-fill instruction." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Complete the popover, adding a title, the instructions, and whether this is a default instruction that's automatically selected for AI auto-fill when you use it while completing a feedback form.
4. Click `Create`

![The wizard to create a new instruction via the Personal Settings section of Ashby.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q24l5fBV5xWTWsLApjPQa_auto-fill-instructions-personal-settings-setup.jpg)

To edit a custom instruction on this page, click the instruction title in the list, then click `Save` once you've made your changes.

## Using user-level custom instructions with AI auto-fill

When you complete feedback using AI auto-fill, any custom instructions set to be used by default appear on the `Auto-fill with AI` button. Click the dropdown arrow to the right of this button and hover over each instruction title to view its details. Click the instruction title to add or remove the custom instruction from the prompt.

You can click the three dots to the right of each instruction title to either edit a custom instruction or make it a default custom instruction.

:::hint{type="warning"}
You cannot remove company-wide custom instructions on an ad-hoc basis. They apply every time you use AI auto-fill.
:::

![Selecting custom instructions to use with Auto-fill with AI.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r01tf76DO4n3C80jqMNhc_interview-briefing-trudy-wilmott-ashby-2026-07-07-at-10755-pm.jpg)

## Deleting a user-level custom instruction

To delete a personal custom instruction:

1. Navigate to **Personal Settings > AI Auto-fill Instructions**
2. Click the three dots to the right of the custom instruction
3. Click `Delete`

![The three dots to the right of a custom instruction and the option to delete the instruction.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Alcc_JfrYhgbVrKUdWPDA_auto-fill-instructions-ashby-2026-07-07-at-12607-pm.jpg)

## AI custom instructions hierarchy

User instructions are added to company-level instructions, and AI auto-fill will consider both. If there's a conflict between company-level and user-level instructions, user-level instructions generally take precedence. In some cases, company-level instructions can also be written more strictly to minimize the likelihood of being overridden by conflicting user-level instructions.

# FAQ

### Can I share user-level custom instructions with another user?

No, users can only configure personal custom instructions. There isn't currently a route to share custom instructions with other users.

### Can I share a recording with someone outside my organization, such as a candidate?

No. Sharing is currently only available with internal colleagues who have an Ashby account within your organization.

### Can I create a link that gives everyone in my organization access to a recording?

No. Sharing is currently targeted to specific individuals. A single-click option to share with your entire organization is not yet available.

[title] Google Workspace: Meeting Rooms
[path] Integrations/Platform/Google Workspace/

Ashby can sync your Google Workspace meeting rooms so they appear as bookable locations when scheduling interviews. This article explains how meeting room syncing works, how event detail visibility is controlled, and how to configure your setup to match your organization's security requirements.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- The Google Workspace integration must be active in your Ashby account.
- The Primary Google Workspace Admin configured in Ashby must have the `admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly` scope and **Admin Console > Directory > Buildings and resources** (read) permission in Google.
:::

# How meeting room syncing works

Ashby uses separate authorization paths to discover meeting rooms and read events from room calendars.

## Room discovery

Ashby uses the primary Google Workspace admin configured in the integration to discover Google resource calendars and populate the meeting-room list. That user must have the `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly` scope and **Admin console > Directory > Buildings and resources (read)** permission in Google Workspace.

## Room event syncing

Ashby reads events from each room calendar separately. The Google user or service account used to read that calendar must have at least **Reader** access, also shown as **See all event details**, on the room calendar.

A room can appear in Ashby even when its events are not syncing. If a room is shared with only **See only free/busy** (`freeBusyReader`) access, Ashby cannot use the current room-sync flow to read its events. In that case, the room may appear blank or available even when Google Calendar contains bookings.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you would like to designate a single specific user to authorize all meeting room event syncing, contact [Ashby Support](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).
:::

# Meeting room event detail visibility

By default, when Ashby cannot read a meeting room calendar's access control list (ACL), it displays free/busy availability in the Ashby scheduling interface rather than full event details.

There are two supported visibility patterns depending on your organization's security requirements.

## Domain-wide visibility set to "See all event details"

This is the default setup for most organizations. No special configuration is needed in Ashby. Room event details are visible to all users in your domain, and Ashby displays them in full in the scheduling interface.

## Hide event details in the Ashby scheduling interface

If your organization wants schedulers to see only free/busy availability, Ashby can configure meeting-room event details to be hidden in the scheduling interface. This controls event-detail display in Ashby. It does not provide free/busy-only access to the Google calendar and does not guarantee that event details are excluded from backend processing or storage.

:::hint{type="info"}
Contact [Ashby Support](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to discuss your requirements.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
The current meeting-room sync requires event-read access. Ashby may read and store event fields such as the event title, description, start and end times, attendees, organizer, creator, location, visibility, busy/free status, and conference data.&#x20;
:::

# FAQs

### Why aren't my meeting rooms appearing in Ashby?

Confirm that the Primary Google Workspace Admin on the integration page has the `admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly` scope and read access to **Buildings and resources** in the Google Admin Console. If the admin's scope has changed, room discovery stops updating in Ashby.

### Why did a meeting room stop syncing?

Work through the following checks:

1. Confirm the Primary Google Workspace Admin still exists and has valid OAuth in Ashby.
2. Confirm that admin still has the `admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly` scope.
3. If you are using individual OAuth rather than Domain-Wide Delegation (DWD), confirm that at least one active Ashby user with access to the room calendar has completed Google OAuth in Ashby with the calendar scope.

If the room is still not syncing after these checks, contact [Ashby Support](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

### Can interviewers book a meeting room they don't have permission to use in Google?

No. Whether a user can book a meeting room is determined by their own Google Calendar permissions, not by the Ashby integration. Each user who schedules interviews must have permission in Google to create events on any meeting room they are expected to use. Ashby does not grant or proxy this access.

### Why am I seeing free/busy information instead of full event details for a meeting room?

This happens when Ashby cannot read the room calendar's ACL. Ashby falls back to free/busy visibility in the scheduling interface rather than showing full event details. If your organization requires full event detail visibility, confirm that the user authorizing the room calendar sync has at least reader-level access to that room calendar in Google. If your organization intentionally restricts event details and needs a different configuration, contact [Ashby Support](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

### Can I sync meeting rooms using free/busy-only access?

Not currently. Google Workspace meeting-room event syncing requires **Reader** or **See all event details** access. **freeBusyReader** access alone is not sufficient for the current sync flow.

If you need to limit what schedulers see in Ashby, contact [Ashby Support ](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com)about configuring meeting-room event details to be hidden in the scheduling interface. This UI setting does not change the access required for syncing or prevent event details from being processed by the current sync.

### Why does a meeting room appear available when it is booked in Google Calendar?

Room discovery and room-event syncing are separate. Ashby may have discovered the room successfully, but the calendar authorization or permission needed to read its events is incomplete. Confirm that the account used to read the room calendar has **Reader** or **See all event details** access, then contact [Ashby Support ](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com)if the room remains blank or available.

[title] Using Ashby Agents in Slack
[path] Integrations/Platform/

This guide covers using the Ashby Assistant and custom agents as part of Ashby's integration with Slack. For more on enabling the Ashby Assistant and configuring custom agents, check out [Ashby Agents](docId:2ZUVVIXDetej4oDP_5Job).

:::hint{type="warning"}
Before starting conversations with the Ashby Assistant or any custom agents in Slack, you must have both the Slack integration configured and the Ashby Assistant enabled.
:::

# Reinstalling the Slack integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you already have the Slack integration configured but would like to access agent capabilities in Slack, you need to reinstall the Ashby app. Only Organization Admins can complete the steps below.

If you have not yet configured the Slack integration, check out [Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo).
:::

:::hint{type="danger"}
During the time between deactivating and reactivating the integration, the Slack integration stops working completely. This means notifications and reminders do not go out. We recommend taking the steps below during quieter hours to minimize disruption.
:::

To reinstall the Slack integration:

1. Navigate to **Integrations > Integrations** and click on the Slack integration tile.
2. Click `Deactivate`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VSYug5S2ey1NYUXUUxhnm_deactivate-slack.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="715" height="269" darkWidth="715" darkHeight="269" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. Click `Add to Slack` within the integration tile and grant the permissions when prompted by Slack to reactivate the integration.

# Messaging Ashby Agents via Slack

You can start a conversation with the Ashby Assistant or your custom agents directly in Slack. To do this:

1. In Slack, click on the Ashby app in the **Apps** section of the left-hand Channels bar.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H7hmdjMjxdaHpQ8fPv3JT_ashby-dm-learn-ashby-slack-2026-04-23-at-100644-am.jpg" size="100" width="2288" height="1256" position="center" alt="The Ashby app within the left-hand menu in Slack." indent="2" darkWidth="2288" darkHeight="1256" showCaption="false"}

2. Type a question or request in the `Message Ashby` field. To use a custom agent for your request, name the agent as part of your request (for example, "Using the Debrief Agent, let me know how many debriefs I have coming up").
   The Ashby Assistant and custom agents can read and pull information to answer questions on the following areas of Ashby:
   - Candidates
   - Interview plans
   - Jobs and job pipelines
   - Applications
   - Interviews
   - Feedback forms
   - Interview transcripts
   - Upcoming interviews
   - Openings

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
The Ashby Assistant and custom agents can take the following actions on your behalf. You have final confirmation before any action is taken:
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Create candidates
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Add candidate notes
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Change application stages
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Consider candidates for jobs
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Draft and send emails to candidates
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Fill forms
:::

:::hint{type="info" indent="3"}
All actions and data access execute on your behalf with the same permissions you have in Ashby. You can only access candidate information your permission level in Ashby grants you, and the actions you can take may also be limited by your permission level.

For more on access roles and the access they provide, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).

Ashby Agents generate responses, summaries, and recommendations based on the information available to them. AI-generated content may be inaccurate and should be reviewed before use.
:::

3. The assistant creates a thread using your original message and responds accordingly.
   - When the assistant is about to take an action on your request (send an email, change a stage, or add a note), it renders a preview in Slack's own format with buttons to confirm or reject the action.
   - If you reject the action, the assistant asks for your amendments or further clarification.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eRQjkRllZfjLNTS20UqUA_using-slack-ai-assistant-for-feedback-referrals-d-d-2026-04-23-at-101932-am.jpg" size="100" width="1160" height="310" position="center" alt="An action within a Slack conversation with the Ashby App" indent="2" darkWidth="1160" darkHeight="310" showCaption="false"}

4. To continue the conversation with full context retained, respond to the assistant within the same thread. To submit a new request without the context of the previous conversation, send a new separate Slack message.

# Reviewing conversations with Ashby Agents

All conversations with Ashby Agents — including those via the Ashby app in Slack — are visible in your AI chat history. Access your AI chat history by clicking `Ashby AI` on the top navigation bar in your Ashby account.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/b2b2C9mPzWoFsA0UP5tfX_home-acent-ashby-2026-05-07-at-52301-pm.jpg)

Conversations with agents in Slack are marked with a Slack icon in the chat list on the left-hand side of the page.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ua4QA3xCMPtF6KkI-soDo_ashby-assistant-acent-ashby-1-may-2026-2026-05-05-at-23312-pm.jpg" size="34" width="404" height="290" position="center" alt="Records of conversations with an agent in Slack." darkWidth="404" darkHeight="290" showCaption="false"}

# FAQs

### Can I reply to a scheduled agent message in Slack?

No, if you have an agent configured with a **Schedule** trigger, they will be able to send messages with the output in Slack but you will not be able to reply to the output to ask for additional information within Slack. Click the `Continue in Ashby` link at the end of the message to be taken to the conversation in Ashby Assistant.

![The continue in Ashby link at the bottom of a scheduled agent Slack message will take you to the Ashby Assistant to continue the conversation. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DqVHXtK2Hc_XacwY_SgSg_scheduled-custom-agents-development-stage-slab-2026-09-01-at-103338-am.jpg)


[title] Fetcher
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Fetcher integrates with Ashby, allowing you to upload your leads and their information directly into Ashby. Check out [Fetcher’s Help Center](https://help.fetcher.ai/) for more information.

## Integrating Ashby with Fetcher

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Open Ashby and navigate to the Admin panel.
2. Select Integrations from the left menu and find the Fetcher tile.
3. Select `Create API key` for Fetcher and copy the newly generated API key.
4. Head over to your Fetcher account and select Settings in the left toolbar.
5. Select Integrations, find Ashby and paste your Ashby API key.
6. You're all set! If you have questions on automating your lead uploads, check out [this Help Center article](https://help.fetcher.ai/article/1pwu4awhrj-automating-uploads).
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2022-05-06 at 9.57.14 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yC63W_booAqr0Q8O6m4xD_screenshot2022-05-06at95714am.png)


:::
::::


[title] WhatsApp
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/

The guides below cover setting up WhatsApp messaging within your Ashby account. You can configure WhatsApp to contact candidates, send direct booking and candidate availability links, and send interview reminders.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
WhatsApp messaging is available on Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.
:::

- The [WhatsApp: Setup](docId\:XK2qn03Z4yvC95MsPmlNI) guide covers configuring WhatsApp and setup requirements and recommendations.
- The [WhatsApp: Candidate Consent](docId\:LcUHTmEbIsk6zetJHgC4T) guide covers how candidates opt in or out of WhatsApp messages on your job board, and how you record a consent status you confirmed outside of Ashby.
- [WhatsApp: Templates and Messaging](docId\:Mv6TvdHBwUweDi6D2QF8G) covers how to set up templates, send messages to candidates and view candidate responses.

:::hint{type="info"}
Each message sent via WhatsApp candidate texting uses credits that come from your candidate texting credit pool. Ashby does not use credits when a candidate responds.

For more on purchasing credits for WhatsApp messaging/candidate texting, check out [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE)&#x20;
:::


[title] Covey
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

## Create Covey Candidate Source

When setting up the API Key, there will be an option to set a default souce so that all applications created with the API key have a specific source added

To set that up, Sign into Ashby and click Admin in the top navigation bar

Navigate to Organization Setup > Candidate Sources

Click `+ New Source` in the upper right corner

Set the name to Covey and set the source type to one of your choosing — below is an example:

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/So-52NIIvMxQfKT9r67eZ0-owYrpH_wjztI_OOpAons1Igycy92ZSwn7KjtiAewCH4-YlhrskM9KT9rBwB-2lghfqOSX5XIguIfyXWPQ5WcHMz8svixj-IVQgt2s17iSM3cc0zc35Kjk2Zy3cTFAwYE" size="42" width="288" height="300" position="center" darkWidth="288" darkHeight="300" showCaption="false"}

Click `Create`

## API Key Setup

Sign into Ashby and click Admin in the top navigation bar

Navigate to Integrations > API Keys

![](https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/3Dw33bi4ai1rFtk5afjtxmNfioAx1lVUZSt4-xaX1bGHejM0SuCT2iIMgjZmY1fmH3CD4yc-FZ3Gl-xkEqXwG93348-8I4CGOnvMtZ6acVzjluSax3rah0a5DdU-fSq_la3QJMOahwQJe6nfSGob4zw)

Click `+ New` in the upper right corner

![](https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/qPAN01XSRzio6db31HnDpSl46eqUdyVrQiQUAZQ2KDdUk-Elu_fOYb51oZXjqZWjJ8hW9rjOSZfkijj0nZs_QaCzgUtMIYlv2978bvQdfxHc5QMei3ENALqREKUUB8-zqJq_ycXxNXHNB9WdEdLjOYU)

Add a name for the new API Key (e.g. Covey API Key), click Create API Key

![](https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/oH431fY_1uHDTSIFsnHAPQioSun0TzJfVBs63uyPPr7evM5g0i75xR_KN_-PKj4oAbWKUA15xfgjNBGz6frnlkXdgcQQAZHIGBqpj6F8KapJ5t9NH440q53flD2UnUNgEziDKROYp1tkBrGn5-7TlZM)

Grant the following permissions to your API key:

- Jobs: Read/Write
- Candidates: Read/Write
- Interviews: Read
- Hiring Process Metadata: Read/Write
- Organization: Read
- Offers: Read

![](https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/EU4j83VvcJTdwRl1Wn6C8ov9hJTR5wO04rPvYONEmc2Ik9qH2ChCmTvqLgDPqPCow767Yfq45Wd-GEGvdzCIUmBUkaxS7MeL9uq4ZWMDct8c24HHdnmQ68-3hMEXOcl9ppoIfM7jXdGg90zaQi08zhI)

Click `Save and Continue`

Ashby will display an API key — copy this API key

![](https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/Mv9UVmlJ2RRPn5HbYrMTfPTOGDJypw2Q58L-AyO9PSW7um6kdvV3Pg07sOr8ouU6sCvQXmOh1jNj5AjsDb--EOUxHh89st-gq9yF7JqOPhwD8VwYZ2o6s7Oh5DkAr2Wb57Ka-GcMc-o1-YlHSPn_VD8)

Click `Copy and Close`

Click into the newly create API Key from the Active API Keys table

Set Default Source to Sourced: Covey

![](https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/ViWDEVVneqnSAtKmD-PcEXGjFaU6C7aRcZIu1HxESEsORLEP9_04xt9h9p3eZ6czWTP8JSRHv15JHIQWSi6whHYV5GazrvSVC-1SNefwnebXi4BvCScvizLGTVsn1l0sUNtX_Kr4HzFmISrVUxmXFF4)

Close the API Key modal

Go to the [Admin Settings Integration tab in Covey](https://getcovey.com/account/company/settings)

Select Ashby from the dropdown

![](https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/bVkDiKXYYBmesw50LcajZUeeiCj-PLyeJHWUngmffWVOHQEc73DM-lPscNHvJCgbwDVBTYpaTmtAu5XinCKe4V19DZcio6th78cjK_XP2DWdTXfa-A-5LZGcMt4tTyeew0o0nw4SCpl6EhrPtw5PJ4E)

Click `Connect ATS`

In the Select Integration Search input, type in Ashby, and click `Ashby`

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/kpq36g-rVedDPcYGVxpFV_eTrwgIlpUF_50zuTVc7-L6Wj7neFAV52P0W2HC_YE9V1QGG92B0McYWRTtzl84wS_jMT5z-PVtnlnjx321hAIAUNZwExYLsp9VYnd0LVB3BN_0GlqWymjLztK6aaSRdQ4" size="50" width="810" height="1492" position="center" darkWidth="810" darkHeight="1492" showCaption="false"}

Read through and click `Continue`

Paste your Ashby API key and click `Submit`

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/V0aBNxkplp0F0AqFxx4GN_j1vBimLAazc9D2oJPLP0lAPnLfV9a62X0i3ZVAAXjmirZrquiCshypWAP6vKqFc7oRHdY0CPUxXxPbQG00UnMZxmLVWHdwpwouqCYEcLsTTr26boPSWy9IA7nEuVv58WI" size="56" width="722" height="1272" position="center" darkWidth="722" darkHeight="1272" showCaption="false"}

Once the API key has been submitted, wait until a confirmation message shows

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-us.googleusercontent.com/DNIivd7K0ZtqdFL8_yLOkcn39JQHEyy49wuW4o53BUi9xzOAE-G50z-yJI5ZSqU5ujLXUSBA9LIbs8fF2Z40rFdeG3vnnM7GCQcLVe2WATTXESxsgN4ypS3kr7iA8ziX6kId1sqsRoxWvbyQrNvUUps" size="30" width="500" height="428" position="center" darkWidth="500" darkHeight="428" showCaption="false"}

Continue to follow the instructions in the modal

## Create Covey User in Ashby

This user will be used in API calls that aren’t associated with a specific user so that there is a clear audit trail of all actions taken in Ashby.

From [the Ashby admin settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/overview), click Organization Setup > Employees

Click New in the top right corner

Set the name to Covey

Set the email address to covey@ (e.g. [covey@getcovey.com](mailto\:covey@getcovey.com))

Click Actions > `Activate`

Click Permissions

Under Global User Role, set role to Organization Admin

[title] Ashby Agents
[path] Ashby AI Features/

Ashby Agents can assist with taking actions on candidates and answering questions you may have about your pipeline, all in one place.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites and permissions:**

Agents provide information based on the user's permissions. Each user can only get information on jobs and candidates they already have access to.

Elevated access users and Organization Admins can create and use personal agents. Only Organization Admins can create and edit shared agents. Limited access users do not have access to the AI agent options.
:::

Ashby Agents are available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="info"}
See our [Ashby Agents Use Case Library](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8) for specific prompts and use cases.
:::

# Ashby Assistant versus custom agents

The Ashby Assistant and custom agents are both AI agents.

The Ashby Assistant is the default agent that opens when you click `Ashby AI`. This agent has no custom instructions and works best for ad hoc, one-off tasks.

Custom agents can be created by users in your Ashby account. You and other users create custom natural language instructions for your custom agent to follow. These are best for repeatable workflows in your organization.

# Enabling Ashby Assistant and custom agents

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have `Auto-enable new features` toggled on for your organization, you can skip the steps below.
:::

To enable Ashby Assistant and custom agents:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-in Features**.
2. If you have not yet opted in to AI Features, toggle on `Enable AI Features`. You will be prompted to read and agree to Ashby's AI terms before any AI features can be enabled.
3. Toggle on `Custom Agents`.

![The custom agents tile in opt-in features.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3DpmB0a1cf3o4UMyZ6mqq_opt-in-features-acent-ashby-2026-05-07-at-22917-pm.jpg)

# Accessing the Ashby Assistant

You can access AI agents via the top navigation bar in your Ashby account. Click `Ashby AI` to the left of your user avatar to get started.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cbvJz2I4ECQXokcoXKVfe-20260413-082037.jpg" size="74" width="830" height="882" position="center" alt="The Ashby AI button to the right of the top navigation bar." darkWidth="830" darkHeight="882" showCaption="false"}

# What can Ashby Agents and the Assistant do?

## Data sources they can read

The Ashby Assistant and custom agents can read and pull information to answer questions on the following areas of Ashby:

- Candidates
- Interview plans
- Jobs
- Applications
- Interviews
- Feedback forms
- Interview transcripts
- Upcoming interviews
- Openings

## Available Tools

The Ashby Assistant and custom agents can take the following actions on your behalf. You have final confirmation before any action is taken:

### Finding people and records

**Search records by name:** Resolves a name to a record. Supports candidates, jobs, applications, and email templates. This is the starting point for most questions, such as "find the candidate Jordan Lee" or "pull up the Senior Designer job."

**Filter records:** Finds records matching specific criteria, and can return a total count instead of a list. Supports candidates, applications, jobs, job postings, openings, scheduled interviews, and offers. For example: "how many candidates are in the interview stage for the Sales role" or "show me applications that involve me."

**Describe object fields:&#x20;**&#x41; behind-the-scenes helper that discovers which fields to filter on for a given record type before calling filter\_records. You do not invoke this directly, but it is what lets filtering work reliably across all supported record types.

**Get record details:&#x20;**&#x50;ulls the full details of records you have already located. Supports jobs, job postings, applications, email templates, openings, scheduled interviews, and offers.

**Get candidate:&#x20;**&#x50;ulls information from a candidate's profile: resume, interview feedback, emails, texts, notes, interview transcripts, referrals, follow-ups, form submissions, and more. Use this for questions like "summarize this candidate's background" or "did this candidate mention anything about relocation?"

**List Applications:** Lists applications with optional filters, including across multiple jobs at once. Each result shows its own source and who it's credited to.

**List Available Job Postings:** Lists your company's postings currently live on job boards, with visibility flags and posting URLs.Finding people and records

**Get Referral History:&#x20;**&#x4C;ists people you've referred, with candidate names, jobs, dates, and current stage. Covers form referrals by default, or referral-link performance on request.

### Interviews and feedback

**Get upcoming interviews:&#x20;**&#x4C;ists your upcoming interviews with candidate names, job titles, times, and links. Ask "what interviews do I have this week?"

**Get interview details:&#x20;**&#x50;ulls a detailed prep briefing for a specific interview: candidate background, resume summary, the panel, and the hiring team. Use this right before an interview.

**Get interview plan:&#x20;**&#x53;hows the stages a candidate moves through for a given job or application.

**Get submitted feedback:&#x20;**&#x50;ulls up scorecard feedback you personally submitted for a candidate or interview. This only shows your own feedback, not other interviewers'.

**Edit Submitted Feedback:** Reopens a scorecard you've already submitted, pre-filled with your prior answers, so you can revise and resave it.

**Fill Form:** Opens a form for you to complete and submit: interview feedback, a referral, or a quality-of-hire survey.

### Pipeline and your to-do list

**Get job pipeline:&#x20;**&#x53;hows how many candidates are at each stage of a job's pipeline, and can compare multiple jobs at once. Ask "how is the pipeline looking for the Engineering roles?"

**Get pending tasks:&#x20;**&#x4C;ists your pending tasks in Ashby: scorecards you owe, approvals waiting on you, follow-ups, candidate reviews, and survey requests. Ask "what do I need to do today?"

### Making changes

**Create candidate:&#x20;**&#x43;reates a new candidate with name and contact details.

**Add note to candidate:&#x20;**&#x44;rafts a note on a candidate's profile for you to confirm before saving. Can also reply to an existing note.

**Change application stage:&#x20;**&#x4D;oves a candidate's application to a different stage in the interview process for that job.

**Consider candidate for a job:&#x20;**&#x41;dds a candidate to a job by creating a new application at the first stage of that job's interview process.

**Email Candidate:&#x20;**&#x44;rafts an email to a candidate for you to review, edit, and send.

### Configuring custom agents

**Create Custom Agent:** Creates a new custom agent from a name, description, and instructions.

**Update Custom Agent:** Edits an existing custom agent's name, description, and/or instructions.

# Asking the Ashby Assistant a question

:::hint{type="info"}
The Ashby Assistant and agents generate responses, summaries, and recommendations based on the information available to them (see [Data sources](docId:2ZUVVIXDetej4oDP_5Job) above). AI-generated content may be inaccurate and should be reviewed before use.
:::

1. On the AI Agent page, type your question or instructions in the `Ask the Assistant...` field.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RJtfjdCPMxV1R4Y7IUxX2-20260413-084204.jpg" size="100" width="1622" height="572" position="center" alt="Asking the default Ashby Agent a question." indent="2" darkWidth="1622" darkHeight="572" showCaption="false"}

2. Once you've entered your question, click the arrow button to submit your request.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qAPS81pUvynGCrtCWGaFY_asking-the-ai-assistant-a-question.jpg" size="100" width="1600" height="604" position="center" alt="Entering a question for the Ashby agent." indent="2" darkWidth="1600" darkHeight="604" showCaption="false"}

3. The Ashby Assistant takes a moment to think, then responds. If any action is to be taken (for example, adding a candidate), you are asked to approve the action before it is taken.
   1. In the example below, click `Create Candidate` to confirm the action the Ashby Assistant should take.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JE4F_4xBwY4A_IARhU-BR-20260413-084846.jpg" size="100" width="1044" height="368" position="center" alt="The Ashby agent prompting an action to create a candidate as an action." indent="3" darkWidth="1044" darkHeight="368" showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="decimal" listStart="2" indent="2"}
If the suggested action isn't correct, click `Reject`. The agent does not take the proposed action and you can provide further instruction.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pGAQNgZCV_2WFPkMY8lhw-20260413-085132.jpg" size="100" width="1284" height="280" position="center" alt="The suggestion action from the Ashby agent after being rejected." indent="2" darkWidth="1284" darkHeight="280" showCaption="false"}

4. Once an action has been taken, click the arrows to the right of each action to view the details. For example, in a Considered for Job action, you can see the job title and candidate name listed in the dropdown with further details.
5. Once all actions are complete, you are prompted for any further requests.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/m-LSMYm-YSI5fhMm6jmpJ_actions-taken-and-approved.jpg" size="100" width="1334" height="456" position="center" alt="The actions taken by an Ashby agent after a Create Candidate activity is confirmed." indent="2" darkWidth="1334" darkHeight="456" showCaption="false"}

6. To start a new conversation, click `+ New Chat`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/v0m1s55NSN06w6qwC3_F-_ashby-assistant-acent-ashby-2026-05-06-at-110051-am.jpg" size="100" width="2870" height="1198" position="center" alt="The Ashby agent with the New Chat button highlighted." indent="2" darkWidth="2870" darkHeight="1198" showCaption="false"}

# Custom agents

You can create your own agents, either personal or shared across the organization, to help with repeatable actions. These agents can also be tagged into questions with the Ashby Assistant.

The agent setup options and settings are in the bottom-left corner of the AI agent page:

- **My Agents:** Click this to view your personal agents and set up new personal agents.
- **Shared Agents:** Click this to view your organization's agents and set up new shared agents.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5eAMe3rh12zBE77x6xfM5_ashby-assistant-acent-ashby-2026-05-05-at-23704-pm.jpg" size="100" alt="The My Agents and Shared Agents options for custom agents" isUploading="false" width="2880" height="1422" darkWidth="2880" darkHeight="1422" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

# Creating a custom agent

To create a new agent, navigate to the **My Agents** or **Shared Agents** page, then click `+ Add X Agent`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PEG06DLGesGzmPjlOMj7V_my-agents-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-102438-am.jpg" size="100" width="2456" height="474" position="center" alt="Adding a personal agent on the My Agents page." indent="2" darkWidth="2456" darkHeight="474" showCaption="false"}

From here, a wizard guides you through the steps. You have two options here:

## Generate a custom agent from a plain language description

1. Describe what your agent should do in plain language in the `What should your agent do?` field.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8mHv7mF8KoAMnNpFvBuwF_create-a-personal-agent-step1.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1586" height="720" darkWidth="1586" darkHeight="720" alt="The Describe your agent step, where you can add in a plain language description." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Need help with constructing prompts? The [AI Prompting Toolkit playbook](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/blog/prompting-toolkit) in Ashby Academy walks through a simple three-step framework — define the outcome, design the output, and test and iterate — with examples you can adapt for your needs.
:::

1. Click `Generate Draft`. Ashby then generates a name, description, and instructions for your agent.
2. Review the generated content and make any edits to the name, description, or instructions. Click `Continue` to confirm.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/E5cQbfnAF3DbWh6q7Az9I_generated-personal-agent-information.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1444" height="830" darkWidth="1444" darkHeight="830" alt="The Review step, where you can look over the generated agent name, description and instructions." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Determine the trigger and delivery settings. Then click `Create Agent`. [See Triggers and delivery settings below for more information](docId:7Q8HhuiP_ukn5HLaRypoh).

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XbLxWfOWrri7GiW-q0xe7_setting-triggers-and-delivery.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1416" height="596" darkWidth="1416" darkHeight="596" alt="The Triggers and delivery step where you can determine how your agent is triggered." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby Assistant can also help you create or update agents. More on this in [Available Tools](docId:2ZUVVIXDetej4oDP_5Job).
:::

## Build a custom agent manually

1. Click `Build Manually` in the **Describe your agent** step.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nGLOHsC_89NhzNEVtcJPn_build-manually-option.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1586" height="718" darkWidth="1586" darkHeight="718" alt="The option to build your custom agent manually will show on the Describe your agent step." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Add the agent information in the **Review step**:
   - Add a name and description to your agent for reference.
   - Add instructions for the agent in natural language. The agent uses these every time it's triggered.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WKW33F3reh7BCMD7JTXUV_review-stage-of-creating-an-agent.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1424" height="750" darkWidth="1424" darkHeight="750" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The Review step, where you can manually add in the custom agent name, description and instructions."}

3. Determine the triggers and delivery. See [Triggers and delivery settings](docId:2ZUVVIXDetej4oDP_5Job) below for more information..

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/E1hvaXwf4i8WkjHhVyoHC_creating-an-agent-and-setting-triggers.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1446" height="600" darkWidth="1446" darkHeight="600" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The Triggers and delivery step, where you can determine when the agent will run."}

4. Click `Create Agent` to confirm your settings and create your agent.

## Triggers and delivery settings

When configuring a custom agent, you can either set the trigger to be:

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
An at-mention directly in a conversation with the Ashby Assistant.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
A recurring schedule with a set cadence and time.
:::

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Agents with the Schedule trigger can only take *read* actions and will always execute with the author's permissions.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/E1hvaXwf4i8WkjHhVyoHC_creating-an-agent-and-setting-triggers.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1446" height="600" darkWidth="1446" darkHeight="600" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The Triggers and delivery step, where you can determine when the agent will run."}

If you select **Schedule** as your trigger, you then need to determine the cadence and where the output is delivered.

- You can set the cadence to daily, weekly, monthly, or quarterly, or choose a custom frequency. You can set the day or date to send the output for weekly, quarterly, monthly, and custom options. You can set the time and timezone for all cadence options.
- You can deliver output via Slack and/or email. Add Slack users or channels in the `Add Slack user or channel` field using the dropdown and search options. You can type an email into the `Email` field and click `+ Add` to add email recipients.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tACqjAmmWjiT58vZ88Hlj_creating-an-agent-setting-triggers-and-delivery.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1416" height="1054" darkWidth="1416" darkHeight="1054" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="If you set the Trigger to schedule, you can then set the cadence, day/date and time the agent should run. You can also set who should receive the delivery."}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Recipients cannot reply to scheduled agent output directly in Slack or email. Users need to click the `Continue in Ashby` button in their email or the link in their Slack message to be taken to the Ashby Assistant to continue the conversation.

![The screenshot shows the Continue in Ashby button that will show on emails sent by scheduled agents.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IFrIIXQWRFF6dK9rvN2-v_continue-in-ashby-button-from-email.jpg)
:::

## Using a custom agent with the Ashby Assistant

When asking a question or providing instructions to the Ashby Assistant, at-mention your agent using the name you specified during the creation process. Once the appropriate agent has been selected from the list, it displays above your prompt.

![A chat with the Ashby agent using a custom agent.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5fXRttnLjnCWEUpb6KOF6_mentioning-an-agent.jpg)

Alternatively, click `Use Agent` to view the full list of agents and add one to your prompt.

![A chat with the Ashby agent with the Use Agent button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mlWeza46EpouBtziXTWKo_custom-agents-acent-ashby-2026-04-13-at-110226-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Only one agent can be added to a request at a time.
:::

## Editing a custom agent

To edit a custom agent:

1. Click the **My Agents** or **Shared Agents** tab.
2. Click on the agent in question.
3. Amend the **Description&#x20;**&#x61;nd **Instructions** fields as needed.
4. Click `Save` to confirm your changes.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BRGXpKAMbAwo-wSBBfLfT_my-agents-ashby-2026-07-09-at-121526-pm.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="1286" height="1622" darkWidth="1286" darkHeight="1622" alt="Editing a custom agent with the Save button highlighted." showCaption="false"}

## Disabling an active agent

To disable an agent:

1. Click the **My Agents** or **Shared Agents** tab.
2. Click on the agent in question.
3. Click `Disable`.

![The option to disable a custom agent within the agent's settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4H03yadpj5SD4SkMnJLLF_shared-agents-acent-ashby-2026-04-29-at-110749-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
You can re-enable disabled agents by selecting the agent in your **My Agents** or **Shared Agents** list and clicking `Enable` in the panel showing the agent details.
:::

## Converting personal agents to shared agents

:::hint{type="info"}
Only Organization Admins can convert a personal agent to a shared agent.
:::

If an agent is configured under **My Agents** and you'd like to share it, click on the agent, then click `More` and `Convert to Shared Agent`.

![The More option within an agent's settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vCKSYiR5nOsanXyIBkDTv_more-button-on-an-agent.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
It is not currently possible to convert a shared agent back to a personal agent.
:::

## Shared scheduled agents

Sharing a scheduled agent lets other users access it, but doesn't change the permissions it runs with. It always runs with the author's permissions. This means a shared agent can send information available to its author to the configured Slack channel or email recipients.

To protect that access:

- Scheduled agents are read-only; they do not take actions in Ashby.
- The agent author can send follow-up messages in the in-app conversation. Follow-ups can use write tools, which are not available during the initial scheduled run.
- Slack and email delivery are one-way. Recipients cannot reply to the agent from those destinations.
- For agents configured to deliver output to Slack or email, the link to open the conversation in Ashby only works for the author. Other users cannot view the conversation in the app or send follow-up messages.
- Only the author can edit an active scheduled agent.
- Only the author can change its instructions, schedule, or delivery destinations.
- Only the author can use `Run Now` or re-enable the agent.
- Only the author can view the contents of previous agent runs. Other users with access to the agent can see the list of previous runs in the **Runs** tab, but cannot open a run to see its contents.
- An Organization Admin can disable another user's active shared scheduled agent, but cannot edit or restart it.

# Asking agents questions via Slack

If you use the Slack integration, you can ask agents questions and request actions directly from the Ashby Apps channel. For more on this, check out [Using Ashby Agents in Slack](docId\:Z3ID-z7KseANUaMpToFjG).

# Reviewing previous conversations with Ashby Assistant

When you have Ashby Assistant open, previous conversations will be listed under Recents on the left-hand side of the screen. Use the magnifying glass icon to search for specific conversations as needed.

![The chat history with Ashby Assistant.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/e5XMuavA_tlwO4eRWiYu4_ashby-assistant-recents-and-search-for-chat-history.jpg)

# FAQs

### Can I run an agent with a schedule trigger outside of the schedule window?

Yes. Navigate to the created agent, then click `Run Now` to run the agent immediately. You then see the agent running with a status. This option is only available if the agent is enabled.

![The screenshot shows an active agent with the Run Now button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_4faSBJK6Xkrf5Ro4OYHl_my-agents-ashby-2026-09-01-at-104259-am.jpg)


[title] Ashby AI Features
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you can find further information on Ashby's AI features including the AI notetaker, AI-Assisted Report Builder, and our AI-Assisted Application Review. Check out [AI Features in Ashby](docId:8DIfXGq3vCQGQLP62DYvO) for an overview.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🤖 [AI Candidate Assistant](docId\:gfXoUwYWswcWHeJ65OD8S)&#x20;

💌 [AI Tokens in Outreach Emails](docId\:ggQQ4VkH_ynMutuXv43ha)&#x20;

📋 [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr)&#x20;

✍️ [AI-Generated Feedback Summaries](docId\:Kcboq9bn_ndP_9I-isj2b)&#x20;

🔧 [Report Builder & AI-Assisted Report Builder](docId\:kFMXauoRKZx6_EZbu32Po)&#x20;

📝 [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z)&#x20;

❓ [How does the AI Notetaker free trial work?](docId\:vMT6GJvLHbHUUy_e__8my)&#x20;

🔒 [AI Notetaker: Security FAQ](docId\:JmFhUMPmta8T4dMrt8y1x)&#x20;

&#x20;💭 [Substitution Tokens: AI-Generated Summary](docId:_mGoLrCTuL6uxv3Duq6i4)&#x20;

✏️ [AI Content Assistant](docId\:gVifM7N4yBa4cYPjJxx4Q)&#x20;

🤖 [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm)&#x20;

📈 [AI Report Interpretation](docId\:r2SHcEUHaeo0ADH_Bm5ar)&#x20;

💡 [AI Talent Rediscovery](docId\:d-gjG_O-jKBQagm_KsMZe)&#x20;

🤖 [Ashby Agents](docId:2ZUVVIXDetej4oDP_5Job)&#x20;

📚 [Ashby Agents Use Case Library](docId\:AMhHZVeN3gEvEXYXx2QT8)&#x20;

🔗  [Ashby MCP Server (Beta)](docId\:UZ0X3lh368bYeiF9tlTzA)&#x20;

🤝 [Best Practices for Managing AI Credits](docId\:HgS5dAxBbQPPmIWE4q-vV)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Horta
[path] Integrations/Candidate Experience/

:::hint{type="info"}
Not a Horta customer? Email [barbara@horta.io ](mailto\:barbara@horta.io)for assistance
:::

### In Horta

- Find your Ashby ID using your job board URL: [https://jobs.ashbyhq.com/\[YOUR-ASHBY-ID](https://jobs.ashbyhq.com/\[YOUR-ASHBY-ID)**]**
- Login or create a Horta account [here](http://app.horta.io):
- Select Ashby as your ATS:
- Head over to your Ashby account.

![Screen Shot 2022-09-27 at 4.52.11 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n5LZwGWg8IfQBPL3fX9jI_screenshot2022-09-27at45211pm.png)

### In Ashby:

- Open Admin area.
- Click `Organization Settings` in the navigation menu on the left and select `Sources`
- Click the `Add Source…` button and enter these values in the fields:

![Screen Shot 2022-09-27 at 5.00.48 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wo7fxzZCiFxEqq0Rg5Jfv_screenshot2022-09-27at50048pm.png)

- Go to [Admin > Organization Settings > Custom Tracking Links > New](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/custom-tracked-links/create) to create a new tracking link.
- Enter the below values:

![Screen Shot 2022-09-27 at 5.04.05 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/idv4fiBItnLtB53kUVu-c_screenshot2022-09-27at50405pm.png)

- Use the new tracking link to track inbound candidates from Horta: [https://jobs.ashbyhq.com/\[YOUR-ASHBY-ID\]?utm\_source=Horta.io](https://jobs.ashbyhq.com/\[YOUR-ASHBY-ID]?utm_source=Horta.io)
- You’re all set!&#x20;


[title] cord
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

For additional information, please refer to [cord’s Help Center](https://companies.cord.co/integrations/4iGnqVJjrdaADDw3DrWzNr/ashby-integration/nogvPYMWNVaenEA9TxPos3).

## cord Integration Overview

cord is a direct messaging tool for hiring teams to source engineers who are actively looking for work. Ashby’s cord integration allows you to automatically send engineers' CVs to the associated positions in Ashby.

### What information is synced via the integration?

Dover provides us with the candidate’s

- Name
- Email address
- LinkedIn URL
- Phone Number
- Github URL
- Candidate Website URL

### Integrate cord and Ashby

- Navigate to Ashby’s Admin panel and find the cord tile under Integrations.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/feb268d6675d7c251b33078e6b4252e7.png)

- Select `Create API Key` for cord and copy the key.
- Head over to the [Integrations tab on your cord account](https://cord.co/company/account/integrations).
- Select `Connect` and paste the Ashby API key.

### Import position from Ashby

When creating a new position, you have the option of importing one from Ashby. Selecting the drop-down imports the job title of the position, and automatically links it with the new position on cord.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8lJxdYoqxSqzPwXuqd1Nb_untitled.png)

Engineers you start conversations with on cord about this position, will now be auto-forwarded to the associated position on Ashby, and arrive in the Leads section of the linked position.

### Link existing cord positions to Ashby

You are also able to associate any position on cord with an existing Ashby one. Clicking on a position and scrolling all the way down to the section called ‘Link your ATS position’, a drop-down will provide the available positions.

Once a position has been selected, scroll down and click on `Save Position` to complete the association.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oyvbg-BkuwCkTfhCQqIpt_untitled-1.png)

### Automatically send candidates to Ashby

With the positions linked, candidates will now automatically be sent to the associated positions in Ashby when you start a conversation. A conversation is started when you message a candidate and they accept, or vice versa.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hiXbGuLyYZMGr82Qd_LHG_untitled-2.png)

### Manually send candidates to Ashby

If you do not wish for your candidates to be automatically forwarded from cord to Ashby, you can turn this off in your Settings.

The position will still be linked with the position on Ashby, and you can manually send the engineer to that position in Ashby by pressing the ATS position in the top right corner of the conversation.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7aY7m8YEf8Kltfv7I_B4o_untitled-3.png)


[title] AI Candidate Assistant
[path] Ashby AI Features/

The AI Candidate Assistant is an AI-powered feature that provides a chat interface to help you quickly access and understand candidate information. This article explains what the assistant references, how to enable it, and how to use it on a candidate profile.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:&#x20;**&#x42;efore you can use the AI Candidate Assistant, an Organization Admin must enable AI features in the [Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access) section of Admin.
:::

# Permissions and access

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Overview

The AI Candidate Assistant analyzes and summarizes the candidate's information. The assistant generates responses referencing the following areas of the candidate profile:

- Resumes
- Notes
- Emails
- Texts
- LinkedIn messages (that have been logged in Ashby)
- Interview feedback
- Referrals
- Past and scheduled interviews\*
- Interviews pending scheduling\*
- Submitted candidate availability
- Candidate and application attribution
- Transcripts of interviews (from the [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z))\*

\*The assistant only references the interviews that the specific user can see.

The AI Candidate Assistant also uses this information to highlight any pending actions and next steps. The assistant has context about all of the candidate's active applications and can answer questions about them from a single chat. It prioritizes information about the application you're currently viewing in the response.

# Enabling and accessing the AI Candidate Assistant

## Enable the AI Candidate Assistant

To enable the AI Candidate Assistant in your Ashby account:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access).
2. Turn on the `Enable AI Features` toggle.
3. Toggle on Candidate Assistant.

![The screenshot shows the Candidate Assistant toggle in Opt-In Features.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8A30mrGhRJ6Bkh_q0_a5h_ai-candidate-assistant-enabled.jpg)

## Access the AI Candidate Assistant

Once enabled, you can access the AI Candidate Assistant while viewing a candidate profile.

1. Open a candidate profile.
2. Click the **Assistant** tab within the **Feed** section to open a conversation.
3. Type your question into the `Ask a new question` textbox and click the arrow icon to submit.

![The screenshot shows an example candidate profile with the candidate assistant open.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/t0ns3n-le3A1VFD4KHPpS_irene-mcintosh-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-08-27-at-103829-am.jpg)

The AI Candidate Assistant then processes the question and responds accordingly.

Review results for accuracy. To provide feedback on the assistant, click `Give Feedback`. You can add a rating along with any comments.

![The screenshot shows the Ask another question field for entering a follow-up question with the Give Feedback option highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k8CMITTlwmEvLz1r3S5Il_the-option-to-give-feedback.jpg)

# FAQs

### Is there a chat history option so I can review previous conversations with the AI Candidate Assistant?

Yes, click `History` to view your 10 latest chats with the AI Candidate Assistant.

![The screenshot shows the top of the Candidate Assistant chat window with the History button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3iGNurwEtYs-NgUbudrOI_the-history-tab-on-a-chat.jpg)

### Can the AI Candidate Assistant perform actions for me, like hiring a candidate or scheduling an interview?

No, the AI Candidate Assistant serves as a source of information and cannot perform actions on your behalf. This includes directly sending emails. The assistant can help with drafting an email that you can then copy and send manually.

### Are scheduled interviews referenced in responses from the AI Candidate Assistant?

At the moment, the AI Candidate Assistant does not use past and upcoming interviews to generate answers.

### Are job descriptions taken into consideration when the AI Candidate Assistant generates responses?

Currently, the AI Candidate Assistant does not use job descriptions as a reference to generate answers. This includes the job descriptions on the roles the candidate has been considered for and job descriptions on roles you may want to consider them for but haven't yet.

### Can the AI Candidate Assistant compare candidates?

This isn't possible currently.

### Will private notes or private feedback form fields be included in the AI Candidate Assistant's responses?

If the user has access to view private notes and fields (if they have Organization Admin or Elevated Access - Admin Private access to the role, location, or department), then the assistant references them in its responses. If the user does not have access to view private notes or private feedback form fields, then the assistant does not reference them.

### Can candidates view information using the AI Candidate Assistant?

No, the AI Candidate Assistant is an internal tool for users only. Candidates are not able to chat with the AI candidate assistant or view their own profile in Ashby.&#x20;

[title] Email Template Creation and Management
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

Email templates help your team work efficiently while still creating an excellent candidate experience. Have your application confirmation and rejection email copy ready to add to Ashby!&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
[View sample email templates](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/18m9VOXhy6w92Ytvg-1IKeWqA0dy_D9II3DegRluNmgY/edit?usp=sharing)

The templates in the linked document above are examples and, if used, substitution tokens need to be added manually when copying them into Ashby.
:::

Using this guide, you set up [email templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates) to streamline candidate communication. When a candidate reflects on your interview process, they likely think about two things:

- The experience they have with your interviewers, and
- How communicative your team is

Training your team is up to you, but with Ashby, you can create high-quality templates your team can use to create consistently excellent candidate experiences.

:::hint{type="info"}
If email templates have already been created for your organization, see [Sending Emails from the Candidate Profile](docId\:BHay8T4Fug9ud5ZjomP-W) to learn how to apply them when sending emails to candidates.
:::

# Permissions & access

See the chart below for information on the permissions needed to create and edit email templates. Elevated Access users have access to these for the roles and departments they have been given the access role for.

| Access Role                                                    | Can edit company-wide email templates? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                                      |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                                      |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌\*                                    |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌\*                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌\*                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌\*                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌\*                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ❌\*                                    |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                                      |

:::hint{type="info"}
\*Only Organization Admins can configure company-wide email templates by default. Elevated Access users can be given access to edit company-wide email templates if needed. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).
:::

# Email templates overview

Watch the video below, or follow the written steps below, to understand how to set up email templates.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/52867e1108b64eceb93a595169f9709c"}

# Creating email templates

## Step 1: Start your email template draft

To access the email templates admin area, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Email Templates**. From here, click the `+ New Template` button on the right side.

:::hint{type="info"}
Email templates save automatically, so you do not need to click a save button while working on them.
:::

## Step 2: Use the email editing features

The email editor is used both to create email templates in Admin and a similar editor is used to send one-off emails from the candidate profile. You can write or copy and paste the content of your email template directly into the editor. The email editor supports the following features:

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/570a9fcc5b99fa0c816bb219f880e304.png" size="66" width="677" height="554" darkWidth="677" darkHeight="554" position="center" showCaption="false"}

- Text formatting
- Code lines and blocks
- Numbered and bulleted lists
- Hyperlinks
- Substitution tokens (including custom and email signature)
- Images

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
For images, use a minimum resolution of 1000px on the largest dimension of the image (for example 1024px x 256px for an image with a 4:1 ratio, or 512px x 1024px for an image with a 1:2 ratio).
:::

- Write with AI (more on this at [AI Content Assistant](docId\:gVifM7N4yBa4cYPjJxx4Q))
- HTML headers and footers
- File attachments

## Step 3: Add substitution tokens

Substitution tokens allow you to pull information from the candidate's profile or the job they're being considered for into the emails you send from Ashby. They can be added to both the email's subject and body.

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full list of substitution tokens, check out [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6).
:::

When adding substitution tokens into your email template, it looks something like this:

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/4bbf90bb81007832760c7dcd24d8672d.png" size="92" width="910" height="894" darkWidth="910" darkHeight="894" position="center" showCaption="false"}

When the template is used to send an email to a candidate, the substitution tokens populate the associated details, like this:

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c4f6be6c8ea205720b9cf6e0200a6f3d.png" size="68" width="870" height="1196" darkWidth="870" darkHeight="1196" position="center" showCaption="false"}

To add substitution tokens, click the `T` icon in the toolbar either by the subject line or in the toolbar under the body of the email. From here, you can search for the specific token you need.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/w2q3qG14goT9STuEmIGY6_email-templates-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-122816-pm.jpg" size="78" width="1284" height="1318" position="center" darkWidth="1284" darkHeight="1318" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="success"}
You can also create substitution tokens from candidate custom fields. To do so, see [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) and be sure to check the `Enable in Email Templates` box on the token's settings.
:::

## Step 4: Add required placeholders

Adding placeholders to an email causes Ashby to refuse to send the email until the placeholder has been deleted or replaced with the relevant text. This helps ensure that all information is included before the email is sent.

To add a placeholder, click the brackets at the bottom of the email editor. The screenshot below shows an Offer Template with an offer details placeholder added between the brackets.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1f9aa885bdbfa941f641e05f6e0baf24.png" size="88" width="809" height="606" darkWidth="809" darkHeight="606" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Enter text for your placeholder. The placeholder text is shown in the template and needs to be removed or replaced when an email is generated using this template. Click `Insert` to add your placeholder to the email template.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/84746bb94d655695f1b9ae0653f95fe6.png" size="60" width="373" height="229" darkWidth="373" darkHeight="229" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### What a placeholder looks like when emailing a candidate

When generating an email with a placeholder on a candidate's profile, Ashby highlights the placeholder in yellow to signify that it needs to be deleted or replaced with suitable text before sending the email.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/39f07b618e7468a2f44164462a211827.png" size="82" width="726" height="637" darkWidth="726" darkHeight="637" position="center" showCaption="false"}

If you try to send the email without deleting or replacing the placeholder, you receive an error message.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1687318f7eb058e07ca311675ac33ec2.png" size="62" width="488" height="95" darkWidth="488" darkHeight="95" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Final step: Update additional details

If your email template should have someone CC'd or BCC'd by default, you can add them to these fields.

If this template is relevant to specific departments or teams, you can click `Edit Group Assignment` near the top right of the editor and select the specific departments, teams, or groups the template applies to. This helps organize templates effectively, but all shared templates are visible to anyone who can email the candidate.

Once all details have been filled in, your template is ready for use!

# Creating email templates inline

You can create email templates from any email template selector, including the following areas:

- When drafting an email to a candidate (more on this at [Sending Emails from the Candidate Profile](docId\:BHay8T4Fug9ud5ZjomP-W))
- When assigning email templates in the Communication and Reminders tab for Schedule Interview Activities and manually scheduled interviews (more on this at [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) and [Manually Scheduling Interviews](docId\:rDYoWIhaR0zidudLxw2fN))
- When assigning email templates to automations like the Application Confirmation email or auto-reject emails. You can learn more about auto-reject at [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota).

When using the email template selector dropdown to choose a template, click the `Create` button to create a new email template.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/27B9a3_pjJXxE09PA601C_creating-a-new-email-template-from-the-email-button-on-a-candidate-profile.jpg)

# Updating and archiving email templates

If you need to change an email template after creating it, click into the template and make your updates. Ashby saves changes automatically and applies them to any future uses of the template.

If the template is no longer needed, select `More` in the upper right corner of the template and choose `Archive`.

You can also duplicate templates to make multiple versions or tweaks by selecting `More` and then `Duplicate`.

# Common template types & automations

There are a handful of template types we most commonly see created:

- Application confirmation
- Rejection
- Interview invite
- Offer

[We have examples of each type](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/18m9VOXhy6w92Ytvg-1IKeWqA0dy_D9II3DegRluNmgY/edit#gid=753367080) you can use as a starting point when creating templates. Once you have created these templates, you can use them in different areas of Ashby.

## Application confirmation template

Set up an application confirmation email as the first message your inbound candidates receive upon applying via your job board.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/59b9ddc5c477e141622dba60e3f5b9b9.png)

Once the template is created:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Email Automations**. You should land on the **Inbound** tab by default.
2. Select your application confirmation email template from the **Email Template** dropdown. This sets the `Send a Confirmation Email?` status to Enabled.
3. Use the `Preview Email` option to preview the email sent to the candidate, or click `Edit Email` to be taken to the email template to make further edits.

You can create additional application confirmation templates and link them to specific job postings. Within your job, navigate to the job posting in question, then go to the **Automation** tab to set an alternative application confirmation email.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/86174433ff64da32f20aa6245a587fc6.png" size="92" width="2880" height="1576" darkWidth="2880" darkHeight="1576" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Application confirmation emails (once configured) are only sent to the candidate if they submit an application via your job board. This notification is not sent if you add the candidate manually and consider them for a job, or consider them for a job via the Chrome extension.
:::

## Referral confirmation template

:::hint{type="info"}
Referral confirmation emails are only sent to candidates submitted via the Direct Referral option. Those who have applied via a referral link receive an inbound application confirmation instead (if enabled). This is also not sent to existing candidates if the referrer is added manually via the **Credited To** field on the candidate profile.
:::

If you would like referred candidates to receive a confirmation email at the point they were submitted:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Email Automations**.
2. Click the **Referrals** tab.
3. Select your email template using the **Email Template** dropdown. This sets the `Send a Confirmation Email?` icon to Enabled.
4. Use `Preview Email` to preview the email sent to the referral, or click `Edit Email` to be taken to the email template to make further edits.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8aade1a44f2d6eeb6c1f8aeb92a91a89.png)

## Rejection email templates

When archiving a candidate, you are prompted with the option to send an email. Create one or more templates to streamline that process. To set up, navigate to [Email Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-templates), then click `New...` Configure the email using custom text and tokens as described above (saves automatically).

Once the template is created, it can be used when archiving a candidate.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/af4777bd36de2b57cfa4e5b7c949f04a.png)

## Offer email templates

When it's time to make an offer, you have the option to create an offer email within the candidate profile. You can set up templates to streamline that process. To set up, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Email Templates**, then click `New...` Configure the email using custom text and tokens as described above (saves automatically).

Once the template is created, it can be used when extending an offer.

After generating an offer letter, you can draft an email and select an existing offer template that includes any standard language and attachments.

![After generating an offer letter, you can draft an email and select an existing offer template that includes any standard language and attachments.](https://cdn.zappy.app/afc69223cc40824cbe132580ef8d007f.png)

# FAQ

### I'm seeing a "Missing Value For" message when pulling up an email template. Why?

This error shows if the value cannot be found. This is particularly common when:

- You're trying to send a direct booking link but an interview activity has not been generated and a booking link has not been created for the candidate.
- You're trying to send a candidate availability link but an interview activity has not been generated and a candidate availability link has not been created for the candidate.
- You're trying to send out a survey and the survey request and link have not been generated yet.
- An interview has not been scheduled yet (panel information can only be pulled for interview emails if the interview has already been scheduled).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/51dac655543e89e6bcb6c50c0518db50.png)

### Can I add an email signature in Ashby?

Email signatures can be added to Ashby via two routes:

- If you have the [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) integration in place, your Gmail signature syncs over and can be added to emails.
- You can set up an email signature in **Personal Settings >** [Email Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email).

Within **Email Settings**, you have the following options:

- **Enable Email Signature:** Opt to automatically include your email signature in all emails sent from Ashby moving forward.
- **Before Quoted Content:** Enable this to insert your email signature before quoted text in replies and remove the "--" that precedes it.
- **Email Signature to use:** Determine whether you would like to use your Gmail signature (if applicable) or a custom one you can set up in Ashby.
- **Gmail/Custom Signature:** You can preview your Gmail signature here, or add your custom signature here.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pZKkDtcIIJdUYFBZRAc2I_ashby-2026-01-29-at-111923-am.jpg)

When creating your custom signature, you can embolden, italicize, or underline text. You can also insert bulleted or numbered lists, links, or images.

If you have made changes to your Gmail signature and do not see the correct signature when previewing it in Ashby, click `Refresh` to import the new signature immediately. The `Refresh` button is grayed out if you have not authorized your Gmail account from the **Google Workspace Settings** page in **Personal Settings**.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kXfJj6gejPEnDPn0mQ5SX_ashby-2026-01-29-at-112139-am.jpg)

### Can I delete an email template?

You can archive an email template by clicking `More` when in the edit screen for your chosen template and selecting `Archive`. It is not currently possible to delete email templates completely.

### Can I schedule an email to a candidate?

If you do not want to send an email to a candidate right away, you can schedule an email. Click `Email` on the candidate's profile to create a draft. While drafting the email, click the `Send` dropdown to determine when the email should be sent. You can choose from three options:

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6ee6f47624458ddb4bc9ef9aa234bd5d.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="521" height="372" darkWidth="521" darkHeight="372" showCaption="false"}

- `Immediately`: Send the email as soon as `Send` is clicked on the draft.
- `Date & Time`: Specify a date and time for the email to be sent.
- `After Time Passed`: Specify the number of days, weeks, etc. for when the email should be sent. You have the option to determine the days the email should be sent on (a weekday, any day of the week, or a specific day of the week) and the time the email should be sent.

Click `Schedule` to confirm. The email activity under **Current Activities** on the candidate's profile shows **Scheduled Email**.&#x20;

To amend or reschedule a scheduled email you have drafted, click `View` on the **Scheduled Email** activity. You can then make any adjustments and click `Reschedule` to confirm your changes.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e0cef0793d1eb6a6a0f685e3093f6b38.png)

You can only view and reschedule a scheduled email if you are the user who originally drafted and scheduled the email. Users with access to email the candidate have the option to delete the scheduled email activity by clicking the three dots on the activity and selecting `Delete`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eddcd20ac36ba541193ad2f87dc723cb.png)

### How does my email signature get synced over from Gmail?

If you have the Google Workspace integration in place, the signature default you have set in the **For New Emails Use** dropdown is added to emails you send via Ashby. You can find this dropdown within the **General** settings of your Gmail inbox.

If you make changes to your signature (or switch to another signature within your **Signature Defaults**), save your settings in Gmail, then log out and log back in to your Ashby account. This ensures these updates are synced before the next email sync, so you can use your updated email signature without having to wait.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e3fb5828ffe4f1d85f18cbd84255ee29.png)

When drafting your email, ensure the `Include Email Signature from Gmail` option is enabled in the email toolbar. You can also enable this option when creating email templates.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d07f6ff595d775ea1cff7ecd29090224.png)

### Can I add custom headers or footers to my email template?

Yes. On the toolbar for your email templates, there are arrow icons pointing up (`Insert HTML Header`) and pointing down (`Insert HTML Footer`).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9b18df44a1172bddca3d4a3e659931df.png)

When you click either option to add a header or a footer, a field opens that allows you to enter your HTML. Click `Save` to apply your changes.

For header and footer graphics, use a minimum resolution of 1000px on the largest dimension of the image (for example 1024px x 256px for an image with a 4:1 ratio, or 512px x 1024px for an image with a 1:2 ratio).

Ashby allows for dynamic resizing in the email template editor for images between 200px and 830px using the handles on images.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5c59f93a37f4c4ba1ec8bd55ff390ac8.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
You may notice a footer added to emails sent from the Ashby no-reply address that says "Report this email to Ashby." This cannot be removed or changed.  See the FAQ section for more info: [Why do Ashby emails include a "Report this email to Ashby" footer?](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/email-template-creation-and-management#why-do-ashby-emails-include-a-report-this-email-to)
:::

### Can I specify a font and font color when setting up my email templates?

Yes. Font and font color controls can be found in the editor toolbar when configuring your email templates.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3fee7331abd9e38b9d3b88f7528e71fc.png)

To add a font, click the `A` icon in the toolbar, then add the name of your chosen font. If you would like to add multiple fonts, you can separate font names using a comma. Fonts are applied in the order they are listed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f4b297a4aa663b685601641af916022d.png)

When adding a different font color to your email template, you can either select the color using the paint brush icon in the editor toolbar before typing, or highlight the text in your finished template and adjust the color via the option at the end.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/67fa030cd711f982c5a3ea7c8daedb40.png" size="50" isUploading="false" width="226" height="315" darkWidth="226" darkHeight="315" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
This is only currently possible with email templates and cannot be set up on individually drafted emails or sequences.
:::

### Can I send emails in bulk using an email template?

Yes! For more information, check out [Candidate Search](docId:-ZYXRHB2dhZQNQWl3ugx1).

### Can I amend the sender/from name shown in emails sent from the Ashby no-reply email address?

You can amend your display name for emails sent from the Ashby no-reply email address in the **No-Reply Address Display Name** field in the **Messaging** section of **Admin > Job Boards >** [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/901c4f84e0f3cb2520de57ce0c91d72b.png)

The display name cannot be empty and has a maximum length of 30 characters.

### Can I determine a default sender when creating an email template?

No. The sender is determined at the time of drafting the email, or when setting up automation for emails.

### Can I set up a shared email alias?

Yes! More on this at [Shared Email Aliases](docId:-nmtAZoWNfsEYpi-9F3_V) .

### Can I add an email template to a group after I've created it?

Yes. Click the three dots underneath the template name, then click `+ Add to Group`. Select your chosen group from the list to link your email template to it.

### Where can I view email tracking data?

Tracking data like the open rate and click rate can only be viewed for sequences. Navigate to your chosen sequence within **Sourcing >** [Sequences](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/sequence-templates) to view the sequence tracking data as needed. If you need to make amendments to your email tracking settings, you can do this within **Personal Settings > Email Settings**.

### Can I use GIFs and emojis in my email templates and emails?

Yes.

GIFs need to be uploaded via the `Insert Image` option on the email or email template toolbar. The file limit is 24MB. If a GIF is dragged and dropped into the email or email template, it does not render properly in the email.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/b78a9b2eaea4a0b4453c611cfebba0ba.png" size="74" width="667" height="233" position="center" darkWidth="667" darkHeight="233" showCaption="false"}

While there is no in-app emoji keyboard, emojis are supported in emails and email templates.

### Can I set custom text for a URL substitution link?

You can set custom text for a URL pulled into an email via a substitution token (like a direct booking link or candidate availability link). At the point of drafting the email, select the email template using your URL substitution token. Click the three dots to the right of the URL generated and added to your email, then select `Set Text to Display`. You can then type in your custom text and click `Continue` to update the display text accordingly.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2c5d7033580e5e8b89c6469d5bdf4321.png)

### Why do Ashby emails include a “Report this email to Ashby” footer?

This footer gives candidates a direct way to report concerns about emails sent through Ashby. These reports help us protect candidates and maintain the security and reliability of Ashby’s email infrastructure.

Ashby includes the footer on all emails sent via the **no-reply\@ashbyhq.com** address. It cannot be edited or removed. This footer's presence does not indicate a problem with your organization or a specific message.

Recipients can learn more on our webpage: [Report Abuse](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/report-abuse)


[title] Candidate Texting
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Candidate Texting/

This guide assumes your team has completed A2P 10DLC registration and walks through texting a candidate via Ashby once this setup is complete. If you’ve yet to set up candidate texting, please complete [Candidate Texting Onboarding](docId\:LrSCwWBh0I1RwPuqxdQrN). Texting will not work if onboarding isn’t completed first.

Texting currently requires setup support, please contact your CSM or Support to enable it for your account.

Candidate Texting is available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Please review the table below to view the number of texts included in your plan.

| Plan             | Foundations\*                       | Plus                                | Enterprise                          |
| ---------------- | ----------------------------------- | ----------------------------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| Included Texts   | 1000/month                          | 2000/seat/year                      | 3000/seat/year                      |
| Additional Texts | $0.09/text, sold in batches of 1000 | $0.09/text, sold in batches of 1000 | $0.09/text, sold in batches of 1000 |

\*Includes both Foundations and Legacy Plus plans.

### Candidate Texting Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/87cdf6df51ae4bf4b32ffffda7635dbf"}

This guide covers all the features currently supported in Candidate Texting, including:

- Two-way SMS messages via a shared company SMS number
- Candidate Texting Templates that support replacement tokens.
- Schedule template automation, including linking a direct booking text and sending a text upon stage entry.
- Built-in compliance management to help prevent any issues with your messages being flagged as spam.

## Texting Access

Texting currently requires setup support, please contact your CSM or Support to enable it for your account.

## Enable candidate texting

To enable texting:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Navigate to [Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-texting)
- Toggle on `Enable Candidate Texting`
- Input your privacy policy (required)
- Select your default organization phone number, either by selecting a country code, then selecting a number from the list provided, or by clicking `Advanced Phone Number Search` if you have some specifications around the phone number you’d like to use.&#x20;
  - If you do opt to use the Advanced Phone Number Search option, you will be able to specify a country, an area code and also include preferences like what the phone number should start with, end with or contain.
  - Once you’ve added your specifications, click `Search Phone Numbers`. This will pull up a list of around 30 options. Click `Buy` beside the option you’d like to go with, or `Load More` if you’d like to load other options meeting your preferences. Please note that not all area codes or number combinations may be available.
  - Once a number is selected, it isn’t possible to access this option again.
- Once you have determined a phone number, add your privacy policy in the Company Privacy Policy field. This is required information.
- Optionally, you can also add in an email address to receive notifications on candidate texting in the Notification Email field.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0f8729a577933bef45c5bf2cfcf0486b.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2a67fc4226b6a688cf0b3586a1328dbb.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6064f784d9f5d7536d44c013ddd51b00.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8177ce7847c79b49a3b20046122e8d13.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/92806d79470e4219f81b0e47dddfe7b7.png)
:::
::::



## Manage permissions

:::hint{type="info"}
Texting is supported for Elevated Access and Organization Admin users.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To grant access to users:

- Navigate to [Employees](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/users)
- Choose an employee and visit their Permissions tab
- Set Has Candidate Texting Access to `Yes`
  - If the user has Elevated Access permissions, optionally scroll to Additional User Permissions and check `Create or Edit Text Messaging Templates`


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d20f5b5ad715d299d8ba2a192907815b.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/600913a94efe39f0accd7cee13632903.png)
:::
::::

## Manage notifications

:::hint{type="info"}
Texting notifications appear on a user’s home page and can be configured to send via email and/or Slack.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
There are two types of Notifications:

- Home page notifications appear on the Texts tab of the Tasks menu. These tasks can be resolved by replying or clicking the ellipses to resolve.
- Subscription-based notifications can be enabled in a [user’s personal settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/notifications) and will be sent to any user who texts a candidate, is a hiring team member, or follows a job.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7fb8770b0d4302376a8982c04289b03d.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bda99cc0e124251ba373757e9ffca402.png)


:::
::::

## Create candidate texting templates

:::hint{type="info"}
Templates help to create a consistent candidate experience and keep things moving fast
:::

Your team can create Organization and Personal Texting Templates:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- To set up Organization templates, navigate to [Admin>Candidate Texting Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-texting-templates).
  - Click `New` to create a new template. Add in a Title to refer to internally and the body of your text message.
  - Click the `T` icon to access substitution tokens to pre-fill candidate, job consideration, job and sender information.
- To set up Personal templates, navigate to [Personal Settings>Candidate Texting Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/candidate-texting-templates).
  - Click `New` to create a new template. Add in a Title to refer to internally and the body of your text message.
  - Click the `T` icon to access substitution tokens to pre-fill candidate, job consideration, job and sender information.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6db211eae3198017886bef511ebbc7cc.png)
:::
::::

## Gather consent from candidates and leads

:::hint{type="warning"}
As a best practice, you should always gather and log consent before texting a candidate. Ashby supports gathering it via application forms, via text message, and manually logging consent gathered a different way.
:::

Gathering consent via the application form

- When texting is enabled, phone number fields will include a consent request for candidates.
- They can opt in or out at that point. If they don’t respond, the first message Ashby sends will be a request for consent via text.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4c4290e6a8b16e7118cb26d0e4c2f829.png)

Gathering consent via text message

- When a lead/candidate hasn’t provided consent, and you attempt to text, they’ll first receive a message to opt-in to receive further messages.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1053206c0b4738b193f3da8b587f2980.png)

Editing a person’s consent on their candidate profile

- Consent status can be manually overridden on the Summary tab of the candidate’s profile. You can update the candidate's status if you’ve gathered consent outside of Ashby and want to send a text immediately.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e0fea259a6ac37abfaaf3e38aeb0b136.png)

### Consent best practices

We’ve built consent best practices into the texting feature, including automatically preventing texting people who have opted out of communication, gathering consent from inbound candidates, and clearly identifying your company to the candidate.

- Ensure your content is relevant to your hiring use case. A part of 10dlc registration is sharing specifically how you will use texting. The default use case is registered and specifically outlines contacting your existing candidates about jobs they’ve applied to and leads about jobs and related hiring events you’d like to share more information with them about. Stick to these use cases to remain compliant.
- Ensure recipients have provided express consent before texting them about roles. Ashby handles this automatically when consent hasn’t been registered for a candidate. If you override the provided consent, ensure you’re able to provide more details upon request
- Honor opt-outs. If a candidate’s consent status is Consent Not Given do not attempt to text them again to get permission.

## Send a text to a candidate

:::hint{type="info"}
We currently support sending one-off messages and setting up automation.
:::

### From the candidate's profile

Texts can be sent from the Texts tab within the Feed section of the candidate profile. The user can select the number to send messages to, use templates, and/or manually type their message to their candidate.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/06c6cbf3ee78954302c6c7f00a9405e2.png)

### Via a scheduling automation

Texts can be sent automatically when a candidate enters a corresponding stage by setting up `Automate on Stage Entry?` on the Automation tab of a schedule interview activity template.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2529c039ca2409b39840141a84dba497.png)

## Set up schedule template automation

:::hint{type="info"}
Automations help streamline your candidate texting workflows. For more information on automation in general, please check out [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB)&#x20;
:::

We currently support three schedule template automations:

- Linking a direct booking texting template to a schedule template as part of a schedule interview activity

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f3932445475c41f28489c6b7bbb02e24.png)

- Sending a text when a candidate enters a stage

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/046f9e14c8511d6fb7eacd02e8659a0d.png)

- Sending an interview reminder as a text message.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f8ef33219f89bb0832d9255bf9dd39e6.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is there an inbox view where I can see all the texts across the team?

Not yet, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) to submit a feature request!
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if a candidate opts out of receiving texts?

Subsequent attempts to send the candidate texts will automatically be blocked. This does not impact email communication.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I've specified a phone number to send out texts but want to change it. How do I do this?





Reach out to support\@ashbyhq.com for help with this.&#x20;
:::

::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I respond to candidate text messages via Slack?

You can, yes! Once you receive a notification about a new SMS in Slack, you can click `Reply` on an SMS notification in Slack, type out your response and then click `Send Reply `to send a response text to the candidate without logging into Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/06e0dbf331789847598abef6cfcdbc32.png" size="38" width="373" height="282" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring the integration for Slack, check out [Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo)&#x20;
:::




::::

## Included & Additional Texts FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I’m a Plus plan customer. How many included texts do I get as part of my plan?

Plus plan customers get 2000 texts per seat annually. For example, if your plan includes 100 seats, your team will have access to 200,000 texts per year. If you need more, you can purchase additional texts in batches of 1000.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What if I purchase more seats as part of my contract on a seat-based plan?

Purchasing more seats adds the corresponding number of texts on a prorated basis. So, if you purchase one seat six months into a one-year Plus plan contract, you’ll get 2000 x .5 = 1000 additional texts for the remainder of your contract.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Will you warn me if I’m close to using up all of my credits?

We will email you to warn you when you have used up 80%, 95%, or 100% of your credits.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### If I don’t use all my credits, do they roll over to the next period?

Texts are tied to a contract period. Unused texts don’t roll over to the next contract year\*.

- \*texts are granted yearly for customers on annual or multi-year agreements;
- \*texts are granted monthly for customers on monthly agreements
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How long do I have to use additional purchased credits?

For monthly plans, you have 30 days from the purchase date to use additional credits.

For annual plans, you have until the end of the current year of your subscription term. Additional batches of texts are co-termed based on your contract term. This way you have one contract with Ashby with one renewal date.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How are credits deducted?

A credit is used for each text message sent from your team’s Ashby account. Inbound messages are not deducted from your allocation. If a long message is sent and is split into multiple messages to the candidate, each message will use a credit.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if I run out of credits?

We won’t bill you more than you’ve already paid. We will pause the ability to send texts and re-enable them at renewal or if additional texts are purchased. You can purchase additional texts as needed. For annual plans, reach out to your Contract Manager. For month-to-month plans reach out to Support.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### For seat-based plans, are texts tied to individuals?

Texts are allocated based on the number of seats for Plus and Enterprise plans and tied to an organization, not an individual. So, if you have 50 seats on a Plus plan, you can use 50 x 2000 credits = 100,000 credits across any team members.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does this feature support international messaging?

SMS is only currently available for customers based in the USA and Canada. Only US and Canada-based candidates can be contacted via the SMS option currently.
:::


[title] Offer and E-Signature Document Conditional Tokens
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

Conditional tokens let you automatically include additional text in an offer letter or e-signature document when specific conditions are met on the offer. For example, you can use a conditional token to include a relocation assistance paragraph only when the offer indicates that relocation assistance is provided.

Offer conditional tokens are available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |



:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**&#x20;

- You must be an **Org Admin&#x20;**&#x6F;&#x72;**&#x20;Elevated Access user** with Offer letter templates permissions to create and manage conditional offer tokens.
- You must be an **Org Admin** to manage conditional e-signature document tokens.
- Non-offer e-signature documents can only be configured on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans. More on these at [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt).
:::

# Overview

Review the video and read the steps below to learn how to use conditional tokens.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f8833add63194d30844748206a82138b"}

# Creating a conditional token

## Offer conditional tokens

Navigate to **Admin > Offers > Offer Tokens**. Scroll down to the **Conditional Tokens** section and click `+ New`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qn5HchSCVtogclzbq86tI_offers-acent-ashby-2026-05-08-at-13839-pm.jpg)

## E-signature document conditional tokens

Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > E-Signature Documents** and select the **Tokens** tab. Scroll to the **Conditional Tokens** section and click `+ New`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/u3nPbRMIsIOYgxtm3jH1L_e-signature-documents-acent-ashby-2026-05-08-at-14016-pm.jpg)

# Setting up your conditional token

When you create a conditional token, you are prompted to fill in the following fields:

| Field            | Description                                                                                                                                           |
| ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| **Name / Title** | The name of your token. This is used to identify the token in the list.                                                                               |
| **Description**  | Optional additional context to help others understand what the token is for.                                                                          |
| **Token**        | Auto-generated once you name your token. Click the token to copy it for use in your offer letter template.                                            |
| **Condition**    | The rule that must be met for the token's content to appear in the generated offer. If the condition is not met, the text is omitted from the offer.  |

:::hint{type="info"}
**Example:** A conditional token named "Relocation assistance" can be configured so that its content only appears in the offer when the *Relocation assistance provided* **custom offer field** is set to **Yes**. When set to **No**, the token content does not appear.

See [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) to learn how to create them.
:::

# How to add a conditional token to an offer template

Once you have created your conditional token, follow these steps to add it to your offer letter or e-signature document template:

1. In the **Conditional Tokens** section, click the token to copy it to your clipboard.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bV8bwDJ00ud15A7YtwoBM_offers-acent-ashby-2026-05-08-at-14922-pm.jpg)

2. Open your offer letter or e-signature document template in your preferred editor (such as Word or Google Docs).

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
For more on creating offer or e-signature templates, see [Offer Letter Template Formatting](docId\:VznQ4S_-oH-0fuNsp7q6u) and [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt) .
:::

3. Paste the token into the location in your template where the conditional content should appear. The pasted token looks like a pair of opening and closing tags with placeholder text.

![Conditional token pasted into template showing placeholder text.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4hJNr6H7BGZJ0kCLj4LW-_example-offer-letter-2-2026-05-08-at-14812-pm.jpg)

4. Replace the placeholder text (shown as `replace-this-text-in-your-template`) between the opening and closing tags with the content you want to display when the condition is met. Make sure your text stays between both tags.

![Conditional token with the placeholder text replaced with the content that should show when conditions are met.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-MWXLG0yNdW58TlIkqtqr_example-offer-letter-2-2026-05-08-at-14533-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Any content you place outside the opening and closing tags will appear in all offers, regardless of whether the condition is met.
:::

5. Once you are happy with the template, upload it to Ashby by navigating to **Admin > Offers > Offer Letter Templates** or **Admin > Integrations > E-signature Documents > E-signature Document Templates** depending on the type of template you're creating.

# Conditional tokens in practice: relocation assistance example

The screenshots below show how a conditional token behaves based on whether the offer meets the configured condition.

## When the condition is met (relocation assistance provided: yes)

The conditional token content appears in the generated offer letter.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dgtCjoytECUfdFmGqzcBQ_offer-letter-google-docs-2026-05-08-at-15836-pm.jpg)

## When the condition is not met (relocation assistance provided: no)

The conditional token content does not appear in the generated offer letter.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IfdIDQ7RYiR26f_k01lYZ_offer-letter-google-docs-2026-05-08-at-20028-pm.jpg)


[title] AI Notetaker Reporting
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

***

Ashby's reporting tools give you visibility into AI Notetaker activity and candidate recording consent across your organization. This article covers the available reporting subjects and example reports you can build to track recordings and consent choices.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- Access to custom reports requires a Plus, Enterprise, or Legacy Plus plan. Custom reports are not available on the Foundations plan.
- Building and viewing reports requires the appropriate reporting permissions for your role.
:::

The `AI Notetaker Recordings` subject provides insight into recordings happening across your organization. Use this subject to filter, sort, and navigate directly to specific interview recordings.

# Available report fields

The following fields are available within the `AI Notetaker Recordings` subject:

| Field                       | Definition                                                                                          |
| --------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `Recording mode`            | Shows the speaker configuration (gallery, speaker, or audio).                                       |
| `Has available transcript?` | Indicates whether a transcript was generated.                                                       |
| `Has available video?`      | Indicates whether video is available for the recording.                                             |
| `Recording URL`             | A direct link to the recording (accessible to users with viewing permissions).                      |
| `Recording status`          | Shows the status of the recording.  See Possible recording status values below for further details. |

## Possible recording status values

| Status             | What it means                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| **Scheduled**      | The AI Notetaker bot is scheduled to join a future interview but hasn't yet. No recording exists yet.                                                  |
| **In Progress**    | The bot is currently in the call and actively recording.                                                                                               |
| **Processing**     | The interview ended and the recording is being processed (not yet available to view).                                                                  |
| **Completed**      | The recording finished successfully and is available.                                                                                                  |
| **Expired**        | The recording is past the 14-day availability window when using the AI Notetaker free trial.                                                           |
| **Deleted**        | The recording was completed, but has been deleted due to retention policy or manual deletion.                                                          |
| **Failed / Error** | The bot was scheduled but couldn't record — e.g., it was never admitted from the waiting room, the call never happened, or a technical error occurred. |

***

# AI Notetaker recording list report

This report generates a list of all recording URLs for a specific department.

- **Report type:** `Custom List`
- **Subject:** `AI Notetaker Recordings`
- **Filters:** `AI Notetaker's Job Consideration's Jobs Department`
- **Columns (Fields to Show):**
  - `AI Notetaker Recording's Interviewer`
  - `AI Notetaker Recording's Job Consideration's Candidate`
  - `AI Notetaker's Recording's Has Available Transcript?`
  - `AI Notetaker's Recording's Has Available Video?`
  - `AI Notetaker's Recording's Recording Mode`
  - `AI Notetaker's Recording's Recording URL`

![Screenshot of the AI Notetaker Recording List report configuration in Ashby.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ulyESWLUT9q_Qm6vdK2_N_ai-notetaker-updates-improved-user-management-reporting-and-consent-customization-ashby-2026-01-14-at-112422-am.jpg)

***

# Candidate recording consent reporting

The `Candidate Recording Consent Choices` subject provides data on candidate recording preferences. Use this to track when and how candidates opted in or out of recording.

The following fields are available within this subject:

| Field               | Definition                                                  |
| ------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------- |
| `Consent Choice`    | The candidate's specific selection.                         |
| `Submitted At`      | The timestamp of the submission.                            |
| `Submitted By`      | The individual who submitted the consent choice.            |
| `Is Latest Choice?` | Indicates if this is the candidate's most recent selection. |

***

# Candidate recording consent custom list report

This report covers consent choices, submission details, and the current status for a specific job.

- **Subject:** `Candidate Recording Consent Choice`
- **Filters:** `Candidate Recording Consent Choice's Candidate's Job Consideration's Job`
- **Columns (Fields to Show):**
  - `Candidate`
  - `Candidate Recording Consent Choice`
  - `Candidate Recording Consent Choice's Submitted At`
  - `Candidate Recording Consent Choice Submitted By`
  - `Candidate Recording Consent Choice's Is Latest Choice?`

![Screenshot of a Candidate Recording Consent report showing consent choices and timestamps.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MuKz81Afv75Y5yK_9-4ni-20260114-115316.jpg)


[title] AI Notetaker: Security FAQ
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

***

This article covers frequently asked questions about AI Notetaker security and compliance.

# FAQs

### What AI models are used to support AI features?

We currently use OpenAI (via OpenAI's API) and Anthropic (via AWS Bedrock).

### Is Ashby's AI Notetaker compliant with the GDPR?

Yes.

Ashby ensures that its processing of the personal data of EU and UK residents is fully compliant with all applicable data protection laws, including the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR).

In particular, Ashby enters into data processing agreements with customers processing the personal data of EU and UK residents that incorporate the standard contractual clauses (SCCs) adopted by the European Commission pursuant to its Implementing Decision (EU) 2021/914 of June 4, 2021, including all modules governing controller-to-processor transfers of personal data.

Further, Ashby has completed a Data Transfer Impact Assessment (DTIA) that assesses the laws and practices of the US that could impinge on the effectiveness of the SCCs as a transfer tool, consistent with the *Schrems II* ruling by the Court of Justice of the European Union.

Ashby is certified, and maintains its certification, pursuant to the EU-U.S. Data Privacy Framework (DPF), the UK extension to the EU-U.S. DPF, and the Swiss-U.S. DPF.

All transfers of personal data from the EU, UK, or Switzerland are made pursuant to the DPF or the SCCs.

### Will we need to update our privacy policy or notify candidates explicitly that AI is being used during interviews?

You should consult with your legal and privacy teams to determine your privacy policy, disclosure policy, and consent policy.

You should consider in particular your obligations to disclose that interviews are being recorded, obtain applicable consents (e.g., "two-party" consent requirements in the United States), and honor opt-outs.

In the EU, if candidates interact with an AI assistant, deployers may have transparency obligations under the EU AI Act.

Ashby provides in-product consent messaging and logging to support these obligations.

### Where are video/audio recordings and transcripts stored? Are they stored on your servers, third-party providers, or another infrastructure?

Recordings and meeting transcripts are stored on Ashby's servers in the United States.

A third-party service provider also stores recordings for a short period of time while Ashby transfers the files to its own servers after they are created (this provider creates the original recording and transcript). The third-party service provider deletes these files within seven days.

For more details on our storage practices, refer to our [Trust Center](https://trust.ashbyhq.com/), which includes a list of Ashby subprocessors.

### Is there an option to automatically delete recordings after a certain period? Can we configure data retention policies ourselves?

Yes. Organizations with AI Notetaker can configure separate data retention rules for recording media, transcripts, and AI-generated notes in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > AI Notetaker > Data retention**. Each rule has its own retention period and can be enabled independently. When you delete or anonymize a candidate, Ashby automatically deletes the candidate's associated recording media, transcripts, and AI-generated notes. You should obtain your own legal advice to determine the retention periods your organization uses. For more information on configuring retention rules, see [Data retention settings](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) .

### Who has access to the recordings and transcriptions?

By default, interviewers can access their own recordings and transcripts for meetings in which they were scheduled to be a participant.

To access recordings for meetings they did not participate in, a user must have one of the following:

1. Access to the **Can see meeting recordings** permission stripe within the specific scope for a meeting (e.g., a specific Job, Department, or Location)
2. The **Admin Private** access role, which includes the **Can see meeting recordings** permission stripe
3. Direct access granted by a colleague who has shared the recording with them

Users who receive access through sharing view the recording on a standalone page that includes only the recording, transcript, and notes; no other candidate or briefing details are visible.

For more information, see [Sharing a recording](docId\:Ch6TUUE-gvaQcYLMp9Bo8).

### Can Ashby staff or third-party vendors view recordings or transcripts?

Only Ashby staff who need access to provide support for and maintain AI Notetaker can view recordings or transcripts.

### Has Ashby conducted a Data Protection Impact Assessment for this feature?

Yes. However, Ashby does not share data protection impact assessments (DPIAs) externally.

### Is there a security whitepaper or data processing agreement (DPA) addendum specifically covering AI Notetaker?

Ashby's DPA covers AI Notetaker's recordings of interviews and preparation of related transcripts and summaries.

### Can recordings be deleted upon request?

Yes.

The option to delete a specific recording will be available to Admin users within Ashby soon. In the interim, you can email [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) with any data deletion requests.

After verifying that the requester has adequate permissions, Ashby will execute the deletion on your behalf.

### Do you share recordings with candidates upon request?

As a service provider/processor, Ashby does not proactively share candidate data with candidates. If a data subject contacts Ashby directly, we refer them to the data controller.

### Does the AI Notetaker meet ISO 27001, SOC 2 Type II, and other audit standards?

Ashby is audited annually in accordance with SOC 2 Type II standards. The latest reports, along with any bridge letters, can be accessed via the [Trust Center](https://trust.ashbyhq.com/).

### How does Ashby comply with the EU AI Act and other AI-specific laws?

*EU AI Act:* While the EU AI Act classifies as "high risk" AI systems intended to be used for recruitment purposes (including to analyze and filter job applications and to evaluate candidates), AI Notetaker falls within certain exceptions, including AI systems "intended to perform a narrow procedural task" or "intended to perform a preparatory task." Ashby complies with the EU AI Act requirements that apply to all AI tools deployed in the EU market, including transparency and accountability requirements.

*State/local laws:* Certain U.S. laws, such as NYC Local Law 144, may apply if you use AI outputs to evaluate candidates or substantially assist hiring decisions. These laws may trigger annual bias audit, public notices, and candidate disclosure obligations for your organization. AI Notetaker does not trigger such obligations when used purely for recording, transcription, or summarization, but you must assess how your use may implicate such laws.

[title] Google Workspace: Hybrid Access
[path] Integrations/Platform/Google Workspace/

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that both hybrid routes are more commonly used by larger teams. When using this route, both domain-wide delegation and OAuth would need to be set up, so this process may take a little longer to put in place.

This route allows you to use domain-wide delegation for calendar syncing and use the individual OAuth route for email syncing and sending.
:::

### Hybrid Access

You can opt to set up domain-wide delegation for all scopes apart from sync emails and send emails if you’d like employees to grant access to sync and send emails in Ashby individually. Visit [Domain-wide Delegation](https://admin.google.com/ac/owl/domainwidedelegation) then open the Configure New App dropdown and select OAuth App Name Or Client ID. Click `Add New` in the top left.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4230bf0713b83cc200b42b9bbb4fe5d7.png)

&#x20;Then enter the following information in the popover:

Client ID

```text
113156554739300448523
```

API Scopes

```javascript
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.user.readonly, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/calendar,
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.created, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.readonly
```

Once domain-wide delegation has been set up for the above scopes, you can then go through the OAuth setup process. Invite users who need to sync their emails and send emails via Ashby to go through the individual OAuth process in the Google Workspace Settings of their [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/gsuite). The user can click `Connect with Google` to go through the process to authenticate Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If users do not go through the OAuth process as part of this Hybrid setup suggestion, then their emails to and from the candidate will not be synced to the candidate profile in Ashby and they will not be able to send emails in Ashby.
:::



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e3f025ef8fc9ed001327a0b248869c88.png)

### Hybrid Access with User-defined Scopes

:::hint{type="danger"}
This route isn’t commonly used.
:::

You can use the above hybrid route but also allow individual users to choose their scopes prior to authenticating Ashby.

To enable this option, navigate to Admin > Integrations > [Google Workspace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/google). From here, check the `Allow user to select OAuth Scopes?` option

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e15f95dd81d9fba0f1049725e7b56aa1.png)

When a user navigates to the Google Workspace Settings of their [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/gsuite), they can click `Customize Permissions Before Connecting` to determine the permissions prior to authenticating Ashby.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bc0507c21d8aded7592f9394ff307183.png)

:::hint{type="success"}
Once this setup is completed, we recommend setting up a shared calendar for scheduling as a next step. More on this [here](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM).
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I clicked on the links in the documentation for the setup page in Google; why won’t it let me log in?

If you aren’t able to log in this indicates you don’t have adequate permissions to setup up the integration. Please ask your Google Workspace Admin to complete this on your behalf.


:::


[title] Example Survey Questions
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

&#x20;A catalog of example questions for the different types of surveys we support.

### Candidate Experience Surveys

:::hint{type="info"}
Here are example questions to help build out your candidate experience survey.
:::

### Linear Rating Question Examples

- The recruiting team’s communications were prompt throughout the interview process.
- The recruiting team set clear and accurate expectations of the interview process.
- My interviewers were knowledgeable, professional, and well prepared.
- I fully understand the role and its responsibilities after the interview process.
- How satisfied were you with your overall interviewing experience with \[Company]?
- How likely are you to recommend \[Company] interview process?
- How would you rate your overall satisfaction with the \[Company] hiring process?

### Open Text Question

- What did you enjoy about our hiring process?
- What do you think would make our hiring process better?

### Multiple Choice

- In general, how prepared were the interviewers during your time with them?
  - Very prepared
  - Somewhat prepared
  - Neither prepared or unprepared
  - Somewhat prepared
  - Not prepared
- In general, how satisfied were you with your recruiter?
- How clearly did your recruiter describe the position?
- How clearly did your recruiter describe the interview process?
- How well did your recruiter answer your questions?
- How well did your recruiter prepare you for your interviews?
- Overall, how satisfied were you with the entire recruiting experience at our organization?

### Yes/No Questions

- Did the interviewers leave you enough time to ask questions during your interview?
- Do you feel like you met with a diverse panel of interviewers?

## Diversity Surveys

:::hint{type="info"}
These are some example questions we've seen customers implement via our Diversity Survey functionality.
:::

- Which of the following best describes your current gender identity?
- Which of the following best describes your race? Choose all that apply
- Which of the following best describes your sexual orientation?
- Is English the first language you learned?
- Are you a person living with disability?
- Are you a parent or caretaker of children?
- Do you consider yourself a first generation college graduate?
- Have you ever served on active duty in the U.S. Armed Forces?

[title] Offers & E-Signatures
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides will walk you through sending offers via Ashby and configuring e-signature documents. Looking to integrate your company's Docusign account? Check out [Docusign](docId\:q9692LmyFdYbtE1VmW3nH) for more information on this.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🤝 [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh)&#x20;

💌 [Offer Letter Template Formatting](docId\:VznQ4S_-oH-0fuNsp7q6u)&#x20;

🤖 [E-Signature Conditional Tokens](docId:4xJNsAb785XfvjKOIZrD0)&#x20;

✅ [Offer Approvals](docId\:oFX_SMDkYnZv-l6UuJVgH)&#x20;

✍️ [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW)&#x20;

✍️ [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt)&#x20;

📚 [Company Document Library](docId\:Ets2o5C58KDkwSIHZhQo-)&#x20;

📁 [Add Multiple Documents to E-Signature Offers](docId\:gN7C_pqJJFh32kUp99EMz)&#x20;

❓ [Creating offers retrospectively for reporting](docId\:LpAk66EFOhrkD7-Hq1VlY)&#x20;

❓ [Do I need a Dropbox Sign account for offers?](docId\:K4l-EWmqZloSbVPq3YhoA)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] AI Notetaker
[path] Ashby AI Features/

Ashby's AI Notetaker automatically records, transcribes, and summarizes interviews so your hiring team can focus on evaluating candidates instead of taking notes. It speeds up time-to-feedback, captures rich candidate context, and helps your team align quickly to make faster, more confident hiring decisions.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The AI Notetaker is available as an add-on across the Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.&#x20;

A free trial option is available on all plans if you'd like to test it out before purchase. For more on this, check out [How does the free trial work with the AI Notetaker?](docId\:vMT6GJvLHbHUUy_e__8my)
:::

# What's included

The AI Notetaker add-on includes:

- Automatic recording and transcription of interviews and debriefs
- AI-generated interview summary notes and insights
- AI assistance for drafting feedback submissions
- An interview-specific AI chat assistant
- Granular candidate consent, opt-out, and data retention options
- Connected meeting data across emails, feedback, notes, and more

# Resources

Use the articles below to get started with the AI Notetaker or dig into a specific area.

## Admin & setup

- [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) : Enable the AI Notetaker for your organization, configure default settings, and manage access for individual interviewers.
- [AI Notetaker: Recording Consent Management](docId\:lGMY0r3mi20_VJCAgRxey) : Configure candidate disclosure messaging, manage consent status and policies.
- [AI Notetaker Reporting](docId\:tTuCalxG5nA3rjpE-Swyf) : Build reports to track recording activity across your organization and monitor candidate consent choices.

## Using AI Notetaker for schedulers & interviewers

- [Scheduling and Conducting Interviews with AI Notetaker](docId\:DHujlxck8syMCi5neuqbR)**&#x20;:&#x20;**&#x53;chedule and successfully record interviews with AI Notetaker and understand the candidate experience.
- [AI Notetaker Post-interview](docId\:Ch6TUUE-gvaQcYLMp9Bo8)**&#x20;:** Access recordings, transcripts, and AI-generated summary notes after an interview, and use AI-assisted autofill to complete feedback forms.

## FAQs

- [AI Notetaker FAQs](docId\:Uwfzef6f9vLYUQwxILmSh)**&#x20;:&#x20;**&#x41;nswers to common questions about languages, permissions, debrief support, data usage, and more.
- [AI Notetaker: Security FAQ](docId\:JmFhUMPmta8T4dMrt8y1x) : Learn about common security-specific questions related to AI Notetaker.

[title] Betterleap
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Betterleap is an AI copilot that helps recruiters 10x their productivity by streamlining sourcing, automating outreach, and leveraging ATS integrations for data analysis.

## What does the integration do?

Connecting Ashby to Betterleap ensures that your data is in sync between both platforms:

1. All candidates that are sourced on Betterleap or via Betterleap Chrome extension will be automatically added to Ashby.
2. You will be able to source from candidates and leads in Ashby directly on Betterleap using advanced filters.

## How to set up the integration

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To enable the integration, you will need to create an API key in Ashby. You can create an API key by heading to Admin> Integrations> [API keys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys).

Click New to create a new API key, name your key and then click `Create API key`.

Be sure to take a copy of the key before closing out the pop-up.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07469be2350fc202b328cdf5b89cfe91.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/761b1ecfee1443b1439484be1db30509.png)


:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
In Betterleap, head to the Settings page, then click `Connect ATS`.

On the Select Integration page, select Ashby.

You’ll then be asked to add in your Ashby API key. Once added, click Submit and you’re good to go!
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2b4ed87485bd864b4725d6ccc9810c3a.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c7585a6e00a47b59bafbb0610b277488.png)


:::
::::



## Connecting projects in Betterleap to jobs in Ashby

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. In Betterleap, head to Projects and select the project you would like to connect to Ashby.
2. Once the ATS sync has finished, click the `Link Role` button.
3. You can then select a job in Ashby from the drop-down menu.
4. Once selected, click `Link Role` to confirm. The job title should then be listed underneath the project name in Betterleap.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/df7b5511c9e5351f83bff0e30ce021fd.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9d0110228e5d26f3f8b5a0b76d7d8b41.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f9c0d8d0930b1c17b84c3bc8e09b731d.png)
:::
::::



## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Will existing candidates in Ashby show in the Betterleap extension?

Yes! Once a candidate is sourced using the Betterleap extension, the extension will show if the candidate already exists in Ashby.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Will Betterleap know if a candidate has already been reached out to in Ashby?

If you’ve connected your email address to Betterleap and a candidate is sent an email using that same email address in Ashby, you’ll see if an email was sent to that candidate using your email address. You’ll also be able to see if any other users in your Org have sent the candidate an email, if they’ve connected their email address to Betterleap.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is data sync one-way or bi-directional?

Data sync is bi-directional.
:::


[title] Microsoft 365: Hybrid Setup
[path] Integrations/Platform/Untitled/

This guide helps teams set up Ashby's native Microsoft 365 integration in a hybrid configuration: keeping some access application-wide for easier scheduling, while relying on individual Microsoft authorization for more sensitive workflows like email syncing and sending.

A hybrid Microsoft 365 setup in Ashby can work well when your team wants the convenience of application-wide scheduling coverage together with more selective user-level access for email workflows. The most successful setups happen when the team decides in advance which workflows should stay broad and which should move to individual Microsoft authorization.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**

To complete the hybrid setup route for Microsoft 365, you'll need the following permissions:

- Organization Admin access in Ashby, to enable the native Microsoft 365 integration with application-wide admin consent.
- Microsoft Entra admin access, to remove or manage granted permissions for the Ashby enterprise application in your Microsoft tenant.
:::

# What Microsoft hybrid setup supports

Ashby's native Microsoft 365 integration supports both application-wide admin consent and individual user authorization. In a hybrid setup, your team can:

- Keep application-wide access where it reduces rollout and scheduling friction across the organization
- Remove selected application-wide permissions afterward if you prefer a more restrictive setup for specific workflows
- Have users who need those workflows authorize Microsoft individually in Ashby

At a high level, Ashby checks for individual user authorization first and falls back to application-wide access if individual authorization is not present.

# Use case for Microsoft hybrid setup

This approach is most useful when your team wants broad calendar coverage for scheduling, but does not want every Microsoft permission to remain application-wide after setup.

A common example is:

- Keep calendar-related access application-wide so recruiters and coordinators can view interviewer availability without requiring every interviewer to authorize individually
- Move email-related workflows to delegated or individual authorization so only the users who actually need to send or sync email through Ashby authorize those permissions

# Recommended hybrid setup pattern

## Step 1: Connect Microsoft 365 in Ashby with application-wide admin consent

Start by enabling Ashby's native Microsoft 365 integration with application-wide admin consent. This is the fastest way to get the integration in place for your organization. You can access that Admin page here.

## Step 2: Keep the application-wide permissions you want for broad coverage

Many teams keep calendar-related access application-wide so interview scheduling works smoothly without requiring every interviewer to connect Microsoft individually.

For example, Ashby uses `Calendars.ReadWrite` for interview scheduling and calendar sync, and `MailboxSettings.Read` supports scheduling accuracy by reading settings like time zone and working hours.

It's best practice to keep both of these scopes available at the application-wide level; otherwise, every user in your organization needs to authorize their Microsoft account individually in Personal Settings.

## Step 3: Remove selected application-wide permissions in Entra

A common pattern is removing application-wide email permissions such as:

- `Mail.Send`
- `Mail.ReadWrite`

For native Ashby Microsoft 365 setups, make these changes in the granted Microsoft tenant authorization for the Ashby enterprise application in Entra.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LrutbpYJqT7NAwRCpKG3M_ashby-microsoft-entra-admin-center-2026-07-02-at-114834-am.jpg)

## Step 4: Go back to Ashby and refresh integration page

You should see the revoked scopes on the integration with a red circle.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2IrPMu2YdqfaSv9mRDhDN_microsoft-365-hybrid-setup-in-ashby.jpg)

## Step 5: Have users who need email features authorize individually in Ashby

Users who need delegated access should go to **Personal Settings > Microsoft 365 Settings** in Ashby and authorize their Microsoft account individually.

This is especially relevant for users who need to:

- Send email from their own Microsoft account through Ashby
- Sync recruiting-related email history into Ashby
- Use Microsoft Teams meeting creation
- Schedule interviews on Microsoft group calendars

# What to expect after the change

If you remove selected application-wide scopes and rely more on delegated access, the experience becomes more user-specific. In practice, that means:

- Users who relied on the removed application-wide scopes may need to complete their own Microsoft authorization in Ashby
- Tenant-side Microsoft policies can have a bigger impact on whether a workflow succeeds
- Some features may stop working if the required permission is no longer available application-wide and the individual user has not authorized it

# Important workflows that still require individual authorization

Some Microsoft workflows require individual authorization even if your organization already has application-wide Microsoft 365 access connected in Ashby.

The most common examples are:

- Microsoft Teams meeting creation
- Microsoft group or shared calendar scheduling

If your team plans to use those workflows, make sure the relevant organizers or schedulers complete individual Microsoft authorization in Ashby.

# Reconnect warning

:::hint{type="danger"}
If you disconnect and reconnect the native Microsoft 365 integration in Ashby, Microsoft re-requests the full application-wide permission set when you reconnect. If your team intentionally revoked selected application-wide permissions after setup, you need to repeat that cleanup afterward.

For that reason, if your team is intentionally using a hybrid setup, document your expected Entra-side configuration internally before anyone reconnects the integration.
:::

# FAQ

### Can my security team or other stakeholders have visibility or be notified when users authenticate with their Microsoft 365 credentials in Personal Settings?

Please reach out to support\@ashbyhq.com for further guidance on this.


[title] Offer Letter Template Formatting
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

This guide covers tips and tricks to help ensure your offer letters upload and are validated smoothly. For more information on how to upload your templates and generate offer letters from them, check out [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh).

# Offer letter format

Here are some basics to bear in mind when creating your offer letter template.

- Ensure your offer letter template is a .docx file.
- There is a size limit of 8MB.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are uploading .docx files that have been created or edited in Microsoft Word, ensure that any content controls are removed, as they can affect generated offer letters and e-signature documents.
:::

# Use a single font throughout your offer letter template

We recommend using only one font throughout your offer letter.

If Ashby detects multiple fonts, this may cause issues with how the e-signature placeholders render, and you may see placeholders overlapping with signatures.

For more information on e-signatures, check out our [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) and [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt) guides.

:::ExpandableHeading
**Open this dropdown to see a full list of the currently available and compatible fonts.**

AR PL UKai CN
AR PL UKai HK
AR PL UKai TW
AR PL UKai TW MBE
AR PL UMing CN
AR PL UMing HK
AR PL UMing TW
AR PL UMing TW MBE
Abyssinica SIL
Aharoni CLM
Amiri
Amiri Quran
Amiri Quran Colored
Andale Mono
Ani,অনি
Arial
Arial Black
Cabin
Caladea
Caladings CLM
Carlito
Comic Sans MS
Courier New
David CLM
DejaVu Math TeX Gyre
DejaVu Sans
DejaVu Sans Mono
DejaVu Sans,DejaVu Sans Condensed
DejaVu Sans,DejaVu Sans Light
DejaVu Serif
DejaVu Serif,DejaVu Serif Condensed
Dhurjati
Drugulin CLM
Ellinia CLM
Frank Ruehl CLM
Garuda
Gentium
Gentium Basic
Gentium Book Basic
GentiumAlt
Georgia
Gidugu
Gurajada
Hadasim CLM
IPAGothic,IPAゴシック
IPAMincho,IPA明朝
IPAPGothic,IPA Pゴシック
IPAPMincho,IPA P明朝
Impact
Inter
Jamrul
Karla
Keter YG
Kinnari
LKLUG
LakkiReddy
Laksaman
Liberation Mono
Liberation Sans
Liberation Sans Narrow
Liberation Serif
Likhan
Linux Biolinum Keyboard O
Linux Biolinum O
Linux Libertine Display O
Linux Libertine Initials O
Linux Libertine Mono O
Linux Libertine O
Lohit Assamese
Lohit Bengali
Lohit Gurmukhi
Lohit Kannada
Lohit Telugu
Loma
Mallanna
Mandali
Miriam CLM,מרים
Miriam Mono CLM
Mitra
Montserrat
Mukti,মুক্তি
NATS
NTR
Nachlieli CLM
Norasi
Noto Color Emoji
Noto Kufi Arabic
Noto Looped Lao UI,Noto Looped Lao UI Bold
Noto Looped Lao UI,Noto Looped Lao UI Regular
Noto Looped Lao,Noto Looped Lao Bold
Noto Looped Lao,Noto Looped Lao Regular
Noto Looped Thai UI,Noto Looped Thai UI Bold
Noto Looped Thai UI,Noto Looped Thai UI Regular
Noto Looped Thai,Noto Looped Thai Bold
Noto Looped Thai,Noto Looped Thai Regular
Noto Mono
Noto Music
Noto Naskh Arabic
Noto Naskh Arabic UI
Noto Nastaliq Urdu
Noto Rashi Hebrew
Noto Sans
Noto Sans Adlam
Noto Sans Adlam Unjoined
Noto Sans Anatolian Hieroglyphs,Noto Sans AnatoHiero
Noto Sans Arabic
Noto Sans Arabic UI
Noto Sans Armenian
Noto Sans Avestan
Noto Sans Balinese
Noto Sans Bamum
Noto Sans Bassa Vah
Noto Sans Batak
Noto Sans Bengali
Noto Sans Bengali UI
Noto Sans Bhaiksuki
Noto Sans Brahmi
Noto Sans Buginese
Noto Sans Buhid
Noto Sans CJK HK
Noto Sans CJK JP
Noto Sans CJK KR
Noto Sans CJK SC
Noto Sans CJK TC
Noto Sans Canadian Aboriginal,Noto Sans CanAborig
Noto Sans Carian
Noto Sans Caucasian Albanian,Noto Sans CaucAlban
Noto Sans Chakma
Noto Sans Cham
Noto Sans Cherokee
Noto Sans Coptic
Noto Sans Cuneiform
Noto Sans Cypriot
Noto Sans Deseret
Noto Sans Devanagari
Noto Sans Devanagari UI
Noto Sans Display
Noto Sans Duployan
Noto Sans Egyptian Hieroglyphs,Noto Sans EgyptHiero
Noto Sans Elbasan
Noto Sans Elymaic
Noto Sans Ethiopic
Noto Sans Georgian
Noto Sans Glagolitic
Noto Sans Gothic
Noto Sans Grantha
Noto Sans Gujarati
Noto Sans Gujarati UI
Noto Sans Gunjala Gondi
Noto Sans Gurmukhi
Noto Sans Gurmukhi UI
Noto Sans Hanifi Rohingya
Noto Sans Hanunoo
Noto Sans Hatran
Noto Sans Hebrew
Noto Sans Imperial Aramaic,Noto Sans ImpAramaic
Noto Sans Indic Siyaq Numbers
Noto Sans Inscriptional Pahlavi,Noto Sans InsPahlavi
Noto Sans Inscriptional Parthian,Noto Sans InsParthi
Noto Sans Javanese
Noto Sans Kaithi
Noto Sans Kannada
Noto Sans Kannada UI
Noto Sans Kayah Li
Noto Sans Kharoshthi
Noto Sans Khmer
Noto Sans Khmer UI
Noto Sans Khojki
Noto Sans Khudawadi
Noto Sans Lao
Noto Sans Lao UI
Noto Sans Lepcha
Noto Sans Limbu
Noto Sans Linear A
Noto Sans Linear B
Noto Sans Lisu
Noto Sans Lycian
Noto Sans Lydian
Noto Sans Mahajani
Noto Sans Malayalam
Noto Sans Malayalam UI
Noto Sans Mandaic
Noto Sans Manichaean
Noto Sans Marchen
Noto Sans Masaram Gondi
Noto Sans Math
Noto Sans Mayan Numerals
Noto Sans Medefaidrin
Noto Sans Meetei Mayek
Noto Sans Mende Kikakui
Noto Sans Meroitic
Noto Sans Miao
Noto Sans Modi
Noto Sans Mongolian
Noto Sans Mono
Noto Sans Mono CJK HK
Noto Sans Mono CJK JP
Noto Sans Mono CJK KR
Noto Sans Mono CJK SC
Noto Sans Mono CJK TC
Noto Sans Mro
Noto Sans Multani
Noto Sans Myanmar
Noto Sans Myanmar UI
Noto Sans NKo
Noto Sans Nabataean
Noto Sans New Tai Lue
Noto Sans Newa
Noto Sans Nushu
Noto Sans Ogham
Noto Sans Ol Chiki
Noto Sans Old Hungarian,Noto Sans OldHung
Noto Sans Old Italic
Noto Sans Old North Arabian,Noto Sans OldNorArab
Noto Sans Old Permic
Noto Sans Old Persian
Noto Sans Old Sogdian
Noto Sans Old South Arabian,Noto Sans OldSouArab
Noto Sans Old Turkic
Noto Sans Oriya
Noto Sans Oriya UI
Noto Sans Osage
Noto Sans Osmanya
Noto Sans Pahawh Hmong
Noto Sans Palmyrene
Noto Sans Pau Cin Hau
Noto Sans PhagsPa
Noto Sans Phoenician
Noto Sans Psalter Pahlavi,Noto Sans PsaPahlavi
Noto Sans Rejang
Noto Sans Runic
Noto Sans Samaritan
Noto Sans Saurashtra
Noto Sans Sharada
Noto Sans Shavian
Noto Sans Siddham
Noto Sans SignWriting,Noto Sans SignWrit
Noto Sans Sinhala
Noto Sans Sinhala UI
Noto Sans Sogdian
Noto Sans Sora Sompeng
Noto Sans Soyombo
Noto Sans Sundanese
Noto Sans Syloti Nagri
Noto Sans Symbols
Noto Sans Symbols2
Noto Sans Syriac
Noto Sans Tagalog
Noto Sans Tagbanwa
Noto Sans Tai Le
Noto Sans Tai Tham
Noto Sans Tai Viet
Noto Sans Takri
Noto Sans Tamil
Noto Sans Tamil Supplement
Noto Sans Tamil UI
Noto Sans Telugu
Noto Sans Telugu UI
Noto Sans Thaana
Noto Sans Thai
Noto Sans Thai UI
Noto Sans Tifinagh
Noto Sans Tifinagh APT
Noto Sans Tifinagh Adrar
Noto Sans Tifinagh Agraw Imazighen
Noto Sans Tifinagh Ahaggar
Noto Sans Tifinagh Air
Noto Sans Tifinagh Azawagh
Noto Sans Tifinagh Ghat
Noto Sans Tifinagh Hawad
Noto Sans Tifinagh Rhissa Ixa
Noto Sans Tifinagh SIL
Noto Sans Tifinagh Tawellemmet
Noto Sans Tirhuta
Noto Sans Ugaritic
Noto Sans Vai
Noto Sans Wancho
Noto Sans Warang Citi
Noto Sans Yi
Noto Sans Zanabazar Square,Noto Sans Zanabazar
Noto Serif
Noto Serif Ahom
Noto Serif Armenian
Noto Serif Balinese
Noto Serif Bengali
Noto Serif CJK HK
Noto Serif CJK JP
Noto Serif CJK KR
Noto Serif CJK SC
Noto Serif CJK TC
Noto Serif Devanagari
Noto Serif Display
Noto Serif Dogra
Noto Serif Ethiopic
Noto Serif Georgian
Noto Serif Grantha
Noto Serif Gujarati
Noto Serif Gurmukhi
Noto Serif Hebrew
Noto Serif Hmong Nyiakeng
Noto Serif Kannada
Noto Serif Khmer
Noto Serif Khojki
Noto Serif Lao
Noto Serif Malayalam
Noto Serif Myanmar
Noto Serif Sinhala
Noto Serif Tamil
Noto Serif Tamil Slanted
Noto Serif Tangut
Noto Serif Telugu
Noto Serif Thai
Noto Serif Tibetan
Noto Serif Yezidi
Noto Traditional Nushu
Nunito
Nunito Sans
OpenSymbol
Padauk
Padauk Book
Peddana
Ponnala
Poppins
Pothana2000
Potti Sreeramulu
Purisa
Ramabhadra
Ramaraja
RaviPrakash
Roboto
Roboto,Roboto Light
Samyak Gujarati
Samyak Malayalam
Samyak Tamil
Sarai
Sawasdee
Shofar
Simple CLM
Sree Krushnadevaraya
Stam Ashkenaz CLM
Stam Sefarad CLM
Suranna
Suravaram
Syamala Ramana
TenaliRamakrishna
Times New Roman
Timmana
Tlwg Mono
Tlwg Typewriter
Tlwg Typist
Tlwg Typo
Trebuchet MS
Umpush
UnBatang,은 바탕
UnDinaru,은 디나루
UnDotum,은 돋움
UnGraphic,은 그래픽
UnGungseo,은 궁서
UnPilgi,은 필기
Vemana2000
Verdana
Waree
Webdings
WenQuanYi Zen Hei Mono,文泉驛等寬正黑,文泉驿等宽正黑
WenQuanYi Zen Hei Sharp,文泉驛點陣正黑,文泉驿点阵正黑
WenQuanYi Zen Hei,文泉驛正黑,文泉驿正黑
Yehuda CLM
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Opening and amending your offer letter template in Pages can automatically change the font of some characters upon saving, which causes the placeholder rendering issue to persist.
:::

# Checking your substitution tokens

You can run into errors when validating your template if your substitution tokens haven't been added in correctly. Before uploading your offer letter template, follow these steps:

1. Search the document for `{{` and then `}}` and make sure the number of results match.
2. If the number of `{{` and `}}` brackets is not the same, find the missing or incorrect brackets in the document and correct them.
3. Upload and validate the offer letter template again.

:::hint{type="info"}
Also search for `{{{` and `}}}` in case an extra bracket has been added by mistake.
:::

When checking over your tokens, also be sure to check they match the tokens on the [Offer Tokens](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/offer-letter-tokens) page in your Ashby account.

:::hint{type="info"}
Adding `_RAW` to the end of any **numeric** or **currency** substitution token strips formatting from the field.

For example, a large number `MY_FIELD` might be formatted as 1,000,000, but `MY_FIELD_RAW` would be rendered as 1000000.

This can avoid problems when using Word Tables.
:::

# Spacing and conditional tokens

If you're opting to use conditional tokens (more on these at [Offer and E-Signature Document Conditional Tokens](docId:4xJNsAb785XfvjKOIZrD0)), to avoid any spacing issues, ensure that the token is added immediately after the previous sentence or paragraph.

![Screenshot showing a conditional token placed immediately after the preceding sentence, with no space between them](https://cdn.zappy.app/99eb65a01829aea7298f00a7b5f487e4.png)

If you need to add a space, add it after the opening tag of your conditional token, then add your text.

![Screenshot showing a space added after the opening tag of a conditional token, followed by the text content](https://cdn.zappy.app/cbc7e29d746213007367b5c620fd4c91.png)

In the case of having two conditional tokens back-to-back, ensure one is listed directly after the other, as pictured.

![Screenshot showing two conditional tokens placed directly after each other with no gap between them](https://cdn.zappy.app/558f5f22ee74472c78cac2e12bbc9086.png)

If you have line breaks that should only be added as part of the optional text when conditions are met, ensure the line breaks are included after the opening tag and before the closing tag, rather than outside of the conditional token tags.

This example shows a line break both before and after the optional text.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/07dfa01373468e61c564d02775c4441c.png" size="50" alt="Screenshot showing line breaks placed inside conditional token tags, both before and after the optional text" isUploading="false" width="267" height="75" darkWidth="267" darkHeight="75" showCaption="false"}

If you have conditional tokens that will populate additional items in a numbered or bulleted list, ensure that (if needed) any line breaks and the additional information are added after the opening tag and before the closing tag.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1ae7d13911ccb1bf29fabc263f479308.png" size="60" alt="Screenshot showing additional list items and line breaks placed inside conditional token tags" isUploading="false" width="443" height="91" darkWidth="443" darkHeight="91" showCaption="false"}

# Pages that should always start on a new page

If a section must begin on its own page, such as policy acknowledgements, avoid using repeated line breaks created with Enter or Return to push the section onto the next page.

Conditional tokens and multi-line substitution text can expand when Ashby generates the offer. This can shift the document layout and move content between pages. Instead, insert a proper page break immediately before the section that should start on a new page. Keep the page break on its own line, separate from any conditional token, e-signature token, or token with substitution text.

A proper page break keeps the section at the top of a new page even when conditional content or longer substitution text is added.

![Screenshot of adding a proper page break into a document](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/d3f-JX82ZNC2zz21zRrvW_offer-letter-google-docs-2026-08-20-at-31918-pm.png)

# Ensure all comments on the offer letter template are resolved before uploading

Before uploading your offer letter template, ensure that any comments left on the offer letter template are resolved.

If you do not resolve comments on the template document, this can result in errors when creating an offer.

![Screenshot of an offer letter template document showing unresolved comments in the comments panel](https://cdn.zappy.app/0f3fce112f12fe741177bf5ab4465dca.png)

# FAQs

### Why is my content showing in the middle of a page?

Conditional tokens and multi-line substitution text can change the amount of space used in the generated offer. If you use repeated line breaks created with Enter or Return instead of a page break, the content can shift and appear in the middle of a page.

To keep a section at the top of a new page, insert a proper page break before the section instead of adding multiple line breaks for spacing. Keep the page break on its own line, separate from any token with substitution text.

[title] Personal Email Sharing
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

This article explains how to share your email address with other Ashby users so they can send emails on your behalf, and how to request access to send emails as another user.

:::hint{type="info"}
To configure an organization-wide shared alias and default no-reply address for your organization, see [Shared Email Aliases](docId:-nmtAZoWNfsEYpi-9F3_V).
:::

# Permissions & access

Personal email sharing (via **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Email Sharing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing)) is available to all Ashby users who have permission to send emails to candidates.&#x20;

# Sharing your email address with other Ashby users

Ashby supports sharing your company email with other users to allow them to send emails on your behalf.

To share your email with another Ashby user:

1. Navigate to **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Email Sharing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing).
2. Click `+ Add` in the **Can access your email address** section.
3. Search for and select the user you'd like to allow to send emails on your behalf.
4. Confirm the display or sender name used when emails are sent from your email address.

![Email Sharing settings showing options to add users who can send from your email address, customize the sender display name, and request access to other shared email addresses.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6GsMx06uEB3t5RK7tNI1D_email-sharing-ashby-2026-09-21-at-100358-am.jpg)

# Requesting access to send emails as other Ashby users

:::hint{type="warning"}
The employee whose email is being shared must have the Ashby `Can Email/Schedule Candidate` permission. When an email is sent on behalf of another user, the candidate’s reply goes to the inbox of the user whose email address was used. See [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_) for more information on user permissions.
:::

To request access to another Ashby user's email:&#x20;

1. Navigate to **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Email Sharing. ](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing)
2. Click the `+ Request` button, and select the employee you'd like to request access from using the dropdown menu.

![Email Sharing settings with the Request button highlighted for requesting access to send emails from another shared email address.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OLZ8CgTZEKZLYoiLc8BNg_email-sharing-ashby-2026-09-21-at-100606-am.jpg)

The user receives an email notification informing them of the request.&#x20;

![Email notification from Ashby informing the recipient that Polly Lawson has requested permission to send emails from their email address, with a link to approve or reject the request in Email Sharing settings.](https://cdn.zappy.app/21daf8dfa50c26dd5f4e52b6de178cd5.png)

They can use the link in the email to navigate to [Email Sharing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing) in their personal settings to `Approve` or `Reject` the access request.

![Email Sharing settings showing a pending request from a user to send emails from the account, with options to approve or reject the request.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jPYaXZJgnr0vSjS6vpWNh_email-sharing-ashby-2026-09-21-at-101149-am.jpg)

## Canceling email sharing requests

To cancel a request to use someone's email address, click the `Cancel request`button under the **Email addresses you can use** section.

![Email Sharing settings showing a pending request to use another user’s email address, with the Cancel request button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iXMuMvdjwcwmIFzvkJ41D_email-sharing-ashby-2026-09-21-at-101848-am.jpg)

## Removing email access

To remove access to your email, click the trash can icon to the right of the user tile.

![Email Sharing settings with arrows highlighting the trash icons used to remove a user’s access to your email address or revoke your access to another shared email address.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7NLjONkyunJXM-D9gHd_G_email-sharing-ashby-2026-09-21-at-101618-am.jpg)

# Using aliases in Ashby

Once email sharing is configured, you see a `From` dropdown option to select an alternate email address when sending an email or sequence in Ashby. Use the dropdown to select the email address you'd like to send the email from.

![Email composer for candidate Elara Meadowlight with the From dropdown highlighted, allowing the sender to select which authorized email address to send from.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RziGU12NaeW9tvJ1nljuP_elara-meadowlight-product-support-coordinator-pittsburgh-ashby-2026-09-21-at-102311-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
No-reply or default shared email aliases cannot be used when sending sequences.
:::

# FAQs

### Will the user be notified if I accept or reject their request to send emails on my behalf?

Yes, the user receives an email notification informing them of the outcome.

### Can I change the display name listed for my shared email address?

Yes. If you've shared your email address with other users in Ashby, you can update the name displayed by navigating to **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Email Sharing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing). Adjust the name in the **Display Name** field as needed. Ashby saves the change automatically.

![Email Sharing settings with the Display Name field highlighted, allowing you to customize the sender name shown on emails sent from your address.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/74bAskMUnQRBNQBJLX2BO_email-sharing-ashby-2026-09-21-at-102447-am.jpg)


[title] Offer Formula Fields
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

Offer formula fields provides the ability to create custom offer fields that perform mathematical or logical operations.

Offer formula fields are available on the Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Creating an offer formula field

To create an offer formula field you must first create an offer custom field:

- Navigate to Admin in the top navigation bar, then Organization Setup > Custom Fields.
- Click the Offer tab on the Custom Fields page.
- Select `+ New`
- Add in your offer custom field details including a title, description and field type.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ci5_a_vKGczrISdOS5pez-20260318-151354.jpg" size="60" width="724" height="706" position="center" darkWidth="724" darkHeight="706" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- Click `Create`
- Once you have created the offer custom field, select it from the list of offer custom fields to edit it again.
- If you'd like to make this field non-editable, check the `Make this field non-editable?` checkbox.&#x20;
- In the Default Value field, click `Select Field on Job Consideration`&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ejiSJ1vPzXKx7k7qLEbmF_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-31633-pm.jpg" size="82" width="1026" height="978" position="center" darkWidth="1026" darkHeight="978" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- Select `New Calculated Field`

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xnJAGLULnooJkRawBgFmE_new-calculated-field.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1168" height="268" darkWidth="1168" darkHeight="268" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

## Adding a formula to your offer formula field

Once you've created the formula field, add in your formula. Click the `Calculated Field` option that now shows in the **Default Value** section of the offer custom field. This will take you to the formula field editor.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kBDAHXM6ekkt7y0tQLL1v_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-03-18-at-32549-pm.jpg)

The formula editor has a few noteworthy components:

- The title of the new formula field
- The editor space wherein formulas, functions, and field references are combined
- `Insert Field` button: click to add a new field or press `$` as a hotkey
- `Insert Function` button: click to add a specialized function
- `Syntax Reference` button: Open this for formatting information to ensure your formula is correctly formatted.
- `Cancel/Save` buttons: you will only be able to save a formula field if the definition is syntactically

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on the functions and syntax, check out [the reference below](docId\:m2CcYT8El19Tq0pWPYGVF).
:::

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OJbBqNVEVG4wETV0rVLA6-20260324-154230.jpg)

After the field is saved, it can be used in filters and groupings.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you have errors in your fields, you will not be able to save them. You can hover over areas of the formula highlighted in red to see the issue.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7x8oK9s2FIwC1YJQ_A4-8_error-in-a-formula-field.png)
:::

## Generating an offer formula field token for an offer letter

You can also generate an offer letter token for your offer formula field. When viewing your offer formula custom field, select `Click to Generate Token` . This will create a copyable token that you can then add to your offer letter template docx files before uploading them to Ashby.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kHsbn69dpU0SGrUl00J7c_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-03-19-at-103624-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
You can read more on offer letter templates at [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh) and [Offer Letter Template Formatting](docId\:VznQ4S_-oH-0fuNsp7q6u).
:::

## Viewing an offer formula field when generating an offer

Your offer formula fields will calculate values once you generate an offer. Click `Create Offer` on the offer activity on the candidate's profile to start the process of adding in the offer details.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/va1HZxvb8GupA-hTcV-fq_savannah-leeman-junior-designer-acent-ashby-2026-03-19-at-103942-am.jpg)

If your offer formula field relies on other offer custom fields, this is where you will fill out those offer custom field values. Once you've filled out the values needed for an offer's formulated field to make a calculation, the field will be pre-filled with the result.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/b5yWmPL8rTD9JjbNpeMQ3_salary-and-offer-bonus-on-offer-highlighted.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
You will see a link icon when a default value or formula field is linked to an offer field.  If you'd like to override the result in the offer formula field, click into the field and make any amendments manually. If you opt to override the value, then a broken link icon will show.
If you have checked the `Make this field non-editable?` checkbox when creating the offer formula field, you will not be able to make adjustments to the field.
:::

If a token for the offer formula field has been added to the offer letter, then the token will pull the value into the offer letter after the offer details are confirmed and the offer letter has been generated.

# An example use case for offer formula fields

In our example, we'd like to calculate the total compensation for an offer, including the base salary and any signing bonuses or on-target earnings (or OTE).&#x20;

To ensure we have fields for each of the these values for our offer formula field, we would ensure the following offer custom fields have already been set up.

- Base salary (Currency field type, set as required).
- Signing bonus (Currency field type, set as optional).
- OTE (Currency field type, set as optional).

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for more on creating custom fields? Check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs)&#x20;
:::

Once you've configured the fields to be used in the formula, we would then create our offer formula field for total compensation:

**Title:** Total compensation

**Type:&#x20;**&#x43;urrency

**Default Value:** New Calculated Field - Formula

**Formula:&#x20;**&#x63;oalesce (\{Salary}) + coalesce (\{Offer Bonus})+ coalesce (\{OTE}, 0)

:::hint{type="info"}
The coalesce action here prevents null values from making the whole computation null.
:::



![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jDCZqcQ0IX7SrBIq44t65-20260319-103040.jpg)

**Visibility (optional)**

- **Restrict to:&#x20;**&#x44;epartment = Engineering, Sales, Product, etc. (or whichever roles need this formula field). If this should be available for all roles, you do not need to amend the visibility.

**Offer letter (optional)**

- Generate an offer letter substitution token for this offer formula field.
- Insert it into the Docx template for an offer letter so this information can be added to the candidate's offer letter when generated.

At the point of the offer being generated, once values have been entered for the example Salary, Offer Bonus and OTE custom fields on the offer, then the Default Total Compensation field in our example will also be completed with the calculated result.

Once the offer has been submitted and the offer letter has been generated, the calculated value will show in the candidate's offer letter.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0JaK8nqlg0z0Hl8wC1QI--20260324-154839.jpg)

## Formula Field Syntax Reference

### Referencing fields

Click the `Insert Field` button below the editor or type $ to choose a field and insert a field reference. This substitutes the value of the chosen field into the expression at that position. Field references appear in \{braces} in the expression editor.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tEywOTe-XfsgotOPNUrD2_default-offer-bonus-calculated-field-acent-ashby-2026-03-19-at-104910-am.jpg" size="84" width="1118" height="596" position="center" darkWidth="1118" darkHeight="596" showCaption="false"}

### Numbers

Numbers may be integers or decimal numbers. Positive and negative values are supported:

- `123`
- `-4`
- `5.6`

### Strings

String values are single- or double-quoted.

- `“hello world”`
- `‘i am text’`

If you need to use a single or double quote in a string, you can either wrap the string with the other type of quote, or you can prefix it with \\\\:

- `'Jane "Example" Doe'`
- `"Jane \Example\ Doe"`
- `"John O'Example"`
- `'John O\'Example'`

To include a literal backslash in a string, use a double backslash:

- `"example\\\\string"`

### Constants

The boolean values are `true` , `null` and `false`.

### Field References

`{Field Name}`

Typing \{ opens the field picker.

## Basic arithmetic

Numeric values may be added, subtracted, multiplied, or divided with +, -, \*, / respectively:

- `1+1`
- `2 * 3`

Parentheses may be used for grouping:

- `({Score A} + {Score B})/ 2`

## Comparisons

Some operators have multiple accepted spellings, to maximize the chance of someone guessing correctly (for example, = and == ). Either form is accepted; they will be normalized to the first (“canonical”) form as part of autoformatting.

Values can be compared for equality with =and for inequality with != or \<>:

- `{Interviewer} = {Referrer}`
- `{Feedback Submitted By} != {Hiring Manager}`

Numeric values can additionally be compared with >, \<, \<=, and >= :

- `{Number of Job Considerations} >= 3`
- `{Overall Recommendation} < {Average Overall Recommendation}`

Comparisons may be chained together:

- `1 <= {Score} < 5 (equivalent to 1 <= {Score} and {Score} < 5 )`

Some fields contain numeric ranges. Use the withinoperator to check whether a value is within a range.

- `{Salary Expectation} within {Compensation Range}`
- `{Score} within range(2, 8)`

## Conjunctions

Boolean variables can be combined with and (&, &&), or (|, ||), and not.

- `not {Extended Offer?}`
- `{Candidate's Location} != {Job's Location} and not {Willing to relocate}`

## Supported functions

The initial set of supported functions is:

| **Operation**        | **Description**                                                                                                                                                                | **Function**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Date                 | Constructs a constant date value from a string in YYYY-MM-DD format.                                                                                                           | `date( value:`<br />`A date string in YYYY-MM-DD format, e.g. "2026-05-01".`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Date difference      | Take the difference between two date fields and returns a number.<br />The interval may be `"days"`, `"weeks"`, `"months"`, `"quarters"`, or `"years"`.                        | `datediff(from: Date Field 1, to: Date Field 2, interval: "days")`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Date addition        | Calculates an offset from a date. Returns a date.                                                                                                                              | `dateadd(date: Date Field 1, amount: X, interval: "days")`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Today                | Returns the current date                                                                                                                                                       | `today ()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Ceiling              | Rounds a number up to a given precision (number of decimal places).                                                                                                            | `ceiling`<br />`(value:`<br />`The value to round.`<br />`precision:`<br />`The precision to round to.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Floor                | Rounds a number down to a given precision (number of decimal places).                                                                                                          | `floor`<br />`(value:`<br />`The value to round.`<br />`precision:`<br />`The precision to round to.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Minimum value        | Returns the lowest of a set of numbers or the lower bound of a range.                                                                                                          | `min()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum value        | Returns the highest of a set of numbers or the upper bound of a range.                                                                                                         | `max()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Mean value (average) | Returns the mean of a set of numbers or the midpoint of a range.                                                                                                               | `mean()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Round                | Rounds a number to a given precision (number of decimal places).                                                                                                               | `round`<br />`(value:`<br />`The value to round.`<br />`precision:`<br />`The precision to round to.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| To number            | Attempts to convert a value to a number. Returns null if it is not possible.                                                                                                   | `tonumber`<br />`(`<br />`value:`<br />`The value to convert.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| If statements        | Returns one of several values depending on conditions. Accepts one or more condition/value pairs followed by a fallback value: if(cond1, value1, cond2, value2, …, elseValue). | `if`<br />`(condition:`<br />`The condition to use.`<br />`if_true:`<br />`The value to return if condition is true.`<br />`if_false:`<br />`The value to return if no condition is true, or the next condition if additional condition/value pairs follow.`<br />`arguments...:`<br />`Additional condition/value pairs followed by a fallback value.`<br />`)` |
| Coalesce             | Returns the first value from its arguments that is not null. Allows you to set other values to fall back on if the first value is null.                                        | `coalesce`<br />`(`<br />`value:`<br />`The first value.`<br />`arguments...:`<br />`Additional values to use if the first value is null.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Option               | Creates an ad hoc option as if from a multiple-choice field.                                                                                                                   | `option`<br />`(`<br />`label:`<br />`The name of the option. Must be constant.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| In range             | Check if value is within a range, e.g. `{Salary} within {Compensation Range}`                                                                                                  | `inrange`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Range creation       | Constructs a numeric range from two constant numbers.                                                                                                                          | `range(`<br />`min:`<br />`The start of the range.`<br />`max:`<br />`The end of the range.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Concatenate          | Combines multiple strings into one.                                                                                                                                            | `concatenate`<br />`(`<br />`arguments...:`<br />`The strings to concatenate together.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Contains             | Returns true if a string contains a substring.                                                                                                                                 | `contains`<br />`(`<br />`string:`<br />`The string to search within.`<br />`substring:`<br />`The string that may be found within that string.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Ends with            | Returns true if a string ends with a substring.                                                                                                                                | `endswith`<br />`(`<br />`string:`<br />`The string to look at the end of.`<br />`substring:`<br />`The string that may be at the end of the other string.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Starts with          | Returns true if a string starts with a substring.                                                                                                                              | `startswith`<br />`(`<br />`string:`<br />`The string to look at the start of.`<br />`substring:`<br />`The string that may be at the start of the other string.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Split                | Splits a string on a delimiter and returns the element at the given index.                                                                                                     | `split (string: The string to split.`<br />`delimiter:`<br />`The delimiter to split on.`<br />`index:`<br />`The zero-based index of the element to return.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Substring            | Extracts a portion of a string. Uses zero-based indexing; start is inclusive and end is exclusive.                                                                             | `substring (string:`<br />`The string to extract from.`<br />`start: The zero-based start index (inclusive). Defaults to 0 if omitted.`<br />`end: The zero-based end index (exclusive). Defaults to the end of the string if omitted.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                 |
| To string            | Returns a text representation of a value.                                                                                                                                      | `tostring`<br />`(`<br />`value:`<br />`The value to convert to text.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |

:::hint{type="info"}
Function calls are written `functionname(arg1, arg2, ...)` or `functionname(name1: value1, name2: value2, ...)`.

Function names are case-insensitive and ignore underscores: `datediff`, `DateDiff`, and `DaTe_DiFf` are all the same function (and will be autoformatted to `datediff`).
:::

All functions come with inline syntax definitions and guidelines in-app. You can click on a function to view the function definition and further guidance on how to use it.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DQ8CwTtwelBU2q_Jd86Df_default-total-compensation-calculated-field-acent-ashby-2026-03-19-at-110029-am.jpg)

You can click on a field you're pulling a value from to view the full field name for reference.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tmp6DiKPZSUKfIvNqrzUq-20260319-101412.jpg)

## Operator precedence

Operations are evaluated in the following order, with operations in the same group evaluated in the order they appear in the expression:

- `(parenthesized groups)`
- `function_calls()`
- `x`
- `a * b, a / b`
- `a + b, a - b`
- `a within b`
- `a = b`, `a ≠ b`, `a is b`, `a isnot b`, `a < b`, `a > b`, `a ≤ b`, `a ≥ b`
- `not x`
- `a and b`, `a or b`

## Copying fields to build a formula outside of Ashby

You can copy fields within the formula field editor and paste them into a spreadsheet or other script to generate your formula prior to pasting it back into the editor.

When copying and pasting your field, it will appear in a different format to how it shows in Ashby. This ensures that when you paste your formula back into the editor, that the correct field is selected.

So, for example, if you’re copying the \{Employment Type} field, it would show as follows when you paste it: `$(ValueSelect,job.employment_type)`. When pasting your formula back into the formula field editor, it be auto-detected and show as a linked Ashby field.&#x20;

![The Formula Field editor showing a correctly linked Ashby field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KgxNcMVkUdnoHpqLophz3_formula-fields-linked-pasted-field.jpg "If the field shows in blue, it is successfully linked to an Ashby field.")

If you were instead to paste in \{Employment Type} without copying the field from Ashby, the field wouldn’t show as a linked Ashby field. It would be treated as plain text.

![The Formula Field editor showing an incorrectly linked Ashby field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hGgqJLM8pwJ9-qKgICOCb_formula-fields-incorrectly-pasted-field.jpg "If the field is not showing in blue, it is not connected to an Ashby field.")


[title] Gem
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

The Ashby-Gem integration allows you to:

- Upload a candidate from Gem into Ashby and assign them to a job.
- Duplicate check against candidates who are already in Ashby using their name and email address.
- If an existing candidate profile is found in Ashby, you can merge the current Gem profile with it or choose to create a new Ashby profile for them.

# Setup Instructions

### Pre-work

A Gem team member will need to set your team's ATS to Ashby. If you are already working with a Gem Account Executive or Customer Success Manager, let them know that you are using Ashby. Otherwise, you can email the Gem Support team at [support@gem.com](mailto\:support@gem.com) to request that they make this change.

### Get your Ashby API key

In order to connect Ashby with Gem, you will need an Ashby API key. More on creating an API key can be found at [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ). Your Ashby administrator can generate one for you by following the instructions in the linked guide. Other members of your team can use the same API key as you to set their integration up.

### Connect Gem with Ashby

Open the Gem sidebar for any candidate and click Connect under the Ashby integration section. You will be asked for your Ashby API key (obtained in the previous step).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1767eb8888b458b2200841367fe060fc.png" size="40" width="358" height="160" position="center" showCaption="false"}

# Usage Notes

### Uploading candidates

In order to upload a candidate from Gem into Ashby, the following fields are required in Gem: First name, last name, and email. The Job field is optional. Any required fields that are blank will surface an error and will need to be filled in within the Gem sidebar before you can upload the candidate. Uploaded candidates will show up as a New Lead in Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/343a37ce6d55742de8f96647f7525a59.png" size="32" width="357" height="286" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### Permissions

Because a team-wide Ashby API key is used, there may be some individual Ashby user permissions that are not respected by the Ashby-Gem integration. For example, you may be able to see and upload a candidate to a job that you do not have access to in Ashby. For more information on permissions in Ashby, please check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)&#x20;

Please note that Gem does hide Confidential jobs.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Have any issues or questions? Please feel free to contact your dedicated Gem Customer Success Manager directly or Gem’s Support team at support\@gem.com.
:::


[title] Adding Multiple Documents to an E-signature Offer
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

When extending an offer, you may need candidates to review and sign more than one document — for example, an offer letter alongside an NDA or a compensation agreement. This article explains how to add multiple documents to an E-Signature offer, so candidates can receive, review, and sign everything they need in a single request. You can include additional [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt) that require a signature, PDFs for reference only, or a combination of both.

# Adding another document to an offer

To add additional documents to be sent alongside your E-Signature offer letter:

1. Click `Add Document` when viewing the offer details in the candidate profile.

![Highlights the add document button](https://p-yvfbeggm.b0.n0.cdn.zight.com/items/RBux9om8/3cc744e1-3c8e-46fa-93dc-946a2ab21488.png?source=viewer\&v=4488e1475d840bcf1b5188ae10cfe0d4)

2. Select the document type:
   - **PDF:** A document included in the E-Signature request that doesn't itself require a signature from the candidate. Select this option, then upload your file.
   - **E-Signature Document:** A document that the candidate is asked to sign as part of the E-Signature process. Select this option, then use the dropdown to select your E-Signature document from the [E-Signature document templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/esignature-documents/templates) you've already uploaded.
   - **Document Library:** Select a document that has been uploaded to your company's document library.

::Image[]{src="https://p-yvfbeggm.b0.n0.cdn.zight.com/items/wbulKRQy/fc537101-ae8c-4ec1-85f6-a19b03a1637c.png?source=viewer&v=7df831dfb54fa992e88691a67eb74401" size="90" width="672" height="486" isUploading="false" darkWidth="672" darkHeight="486" alt="Shows the document type drop down with pdf, e-signature document, and document library options available" showCaption="false"}

3. Upload or specify your document, then click `Submit` or `Generate` to confirm.

Your document is then added to your offer.

You can read more about E-Signature documents in [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt).

# Amending the added documents

## Updating and deleting a document

To amend a document:

1. Click on the pencil icon next to the document within the **Offer Packet** section of the offer.

![Points out the pencil icon to the right of the document](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TObwiQrakkuZ587D4odtQ_faith-grant-group-product-manager-ashby-2026-09-01-at-112818-am.png)

2. Re-upload the file (if a PDF), switch the template, or update document library type as needed.
3. Click to confirm.

To delete a document:

1. Click on the trash can icon next to the document within the **Offer Packet** section of the offer.

![Points out the trash can icon to the right of the document](https://p-yvfbeggm.b0.n0.cdn.zight.com/items/yAuEZpzo/e7dbdd29-4805-48d5-9655-4f774d1f0fe5.png?source=viewer\&v=c4811f10726ef72c3c822d310e9fbf68)

2. Click `Delete` on the pop-up to confirm the action. This cannot be undone.

::Image[]{src="https://p-yvfbeggm.b0.n0.cdn.zight.com/items/JruJ4Zm2/dee9f93f-56f9-46a7-9d77-799f90426aab.png?source=viewer&v=0a4d51e7999da031a2f733e9b06b88c6" size="70" width="716" height="464" isUploading="false" darkWidth="716" darkHeight="464" alt="Shows the delete popup confirmation message" showCaption="false"}

## Adjusting the display order of documents

You can set the order of documents within your offer packet by clicking and dragging from the dots on the left side in the **Offer Packet** section when viewing the offer.

![Highlights the dots to the left of the document used to click and drag the document order](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QVKyNY4i7y2T3DkcrAS5T_faith-grant-group-product-manager-ashby-2026-09-01-at-113340-am.png)

# Previewing and sending the offer with documents as an E-Signature request

After adding all the documents you need:

1. Click `Send Offer E-Signature Request`.
2. Select a template, or assign a company signatory, confirm the signing order, optionally add a request expiration date, and set the message accompanying the request.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/flyVD07aV5RkRZ5-_jWAd_faith-grant-group-product-manager-ashby-2026-09-01-at-113521-am.png" size="90" isUploading="false" width="1228" height="1416" darkWidth="1228" darkHeight="1416" alt="Shows the screen to confirm e-signature request template, signatory, signing order, and messaging to the candidate." showCaption="false"}

3. Click `Preview` to preview your offer packet before sending.
4. When ready, confirm to send the offer packet.

[title] Google Workspace
[path] Integrations/Platform/

This article explains how to connect Ashby with Google Workspace, covering the available integration options, how to configure a shared interview calendar, and how Google Meet settings interact with Ashby's scheduling features.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Google Workspace Admin required:** If you're not a Google Workspace Admin, share this guide with your team's Google Workspace Admin.
They do not need access to Ashby, but you should input their email address on the [Google Workspace tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/google) in the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).
:::

# Google Workspace integration overview

Ashby integrates with Google Workspace to enable key features like displaying your conversations with candidates in the candidate profile feed and scheduling interviews directly in Ashby.

The integration supports the following:

| Users      | Sync Google Workspace users to automatically provision/de-provision them as Ashby users                                               |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Email      | Sync emails between candidates and users (based on inspecting to/from headers)<br />Send emails and email sequences from within Ashby |
| Scheduling | Sync employee calendars<br />Send event invites<br />Sync meeting rooms                                                               |

None of these options are required, but all are recommended for the best user experience with Ashby.

## User provisioning

Users can be synced to Ashby via the following routes:

- If you have user sync enabled as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration settings.
- If you migrate data via the Greenhouse, Workday, or Lever API migration options, user accounts are pulled over as part of the migration.
- If you configure a user sync via System for Cross-domain Identity Management (SCIM).
- If a user signs in for the first time using the native \`Sign in with Google\` button, Ashby can create their user account even when Google Workspace user sync is disabled. The user must sign in with an email address that matches an organization domain configured for the corresponding sign-in method. New accounts created this way start as Limited Access users. Once Directory Sync (SCIM) is enabled, Ashby does not create users through native Google sign-in. Users must be provisioned through Directory Sync (SCIM).

If you've enabled user sync as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration (and do not have SCIM configured), users are automatically provisioned and deactivated based on their status in your workspace or tenant.

If you have users synced via an API migration or by enabling user sync as part of the Google Workspace/Microsoft 365 integration and then set up SCIM, the SCIM sync deactivates any user accounts that were initially added but are not in your SCIM directory.

To reactivate any users that were deactivated when they shouldn't have been, add them back to your SCIM directory.

If users have been added via an API migration from Greenhouse, Workday, or Lever, you can manually deactivate any users who do not need access if you are not planning to configure SCIM.

You can read more about deactivating users at [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8).

:::hint{type="info"}
Synced users do not receive a welcome email.
Once added, they can sign in at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin).
:::

## Email sync

Ashby syncs email communication between your candidates and your users so long as the following conditions are met:

| **Condition**          | **Details**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| User access level      | The Ashby user involved in the email thread must have Elevated Access or Organization Admin access. Emails where the candidate is cc'd or bcc'd on a qualifying thread are also synced.                                                                         |
| Sent after integration | Only emails sent and received from the point of integration onwards are synced. Historical email communication is not synced.                                                                                                                                   |
| Candidate email domain | If the candidate's email domain matches your organization's auth domain, their emails are not synced. If the candidate has two email addresses, one matching your auth domain and one not, emails sent to or from the non-auth-domain address are still synced. |
| Emails sent from Ashby | Emails sent directly from Ashby are always synced and appear in the candidate feed, regardless of the above conditions.                                                                                                                                         |

Emails sent via Ashby also appear in the sender's **Sent** folder in Gmail.

### Email attachments

Attachments included in an email also appear on the synced email on the candidate's feed in Ashby.

To save an email attachment from an inbound email to the **Other Files** section of the candidate's profile, click the file icon on the attachment.

:::hint{type="info"}
The option to save an email attachment as a file on the candidate profile is not available for outbound emails.
:::

![Click the file icon to the right of the attachment name to add it to the Other Files section of the candidate profile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OIyp-cqgSsLjGNVMMn3Wt_adding-file-to-a-candidate-profile.jpg)

A popover opens with the following options:

- Description
- File category (more on this at Candidate Files and File Categories). Ashby prefills this with 'From email on X date', but you can amend it.
- Privacy (if you have permission to view private fields)

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xDnKEOWBOQ5pgdoPOKpjq_adding-an-email-attachment-to-the-candidate-files.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" position="center" width="596" height="754" darkWidth="596" darkHeight="754" alt="Select the category, description and privacy before saving the file. The saved file will get it's own privacy." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
Once you save the file, the privacy set is separate from the email privacy settings.
Changing the email privacy later does not impact who can access the file saved to the candidate profile.
Deleting the email from the candidate's feed does not remove the saved file from the candidate profile automatically.
:::

Users can individually disable email sync in the **Email Settings** section of their personal settings at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email).

If email sync is enabled, users can also opt to include personal email aliases in the sync — so if they respond to a candidate using one of their personal aliases in their email client, that reply is still synced to Ashby.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/43f47d80f28f5ef83bef9e86e8f2a348.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
All aliases listed under **Aliases to include in email sync** are set to not sync by default.
Each user needs to opt in to enable syncing for a given alias.
For more on email syncing, check out [Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3)
:::

# Setting up the Google Workspace integration

When it comes to integrating with Google Workspace, you have a number of different routes you can take. The guides below walk you through each route.

- [Google Workspace: Domain-wide Delegation](docId\:i_NrK4oNwVNZAqQlLUtnI) (recommended): This route allows you to grant Open Authorization (OAuth) access on behalf of all your employees.
- [Google Workspace: Individual OAuth](docId\:dSYe_yUTQj1Fm4Z6GAmat): This route requires each user to go through the OAuth process in order for Ashby to have access to their calendars and emails.
- [Google Workspace: Hybrid Access](docId\:NmyE1euDMQXjWTx2RQLfr): This route allows you to use domain-wide delegation for some scopes and individual OAuth for others.

The scopes across domain-wide delegation and individual OAuth are listed below.

| Scope Name                | Description                                                                                                            | Domain-Wide | OAuth | Scope                                                                        |
| ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- | ----- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Sync users                | Sync Google Workspace users to automatically provision/de-provision them as Ashby users                                | 🟢          | 🔴    | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.user.readonly              |
| Sync meeting rooms        | Sync meeting rooms                                                                                                     | 🟢          | 🔴    | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly |
| Sync calendars            | Read/write calendars                                                                                                   | 🟢          | 🟢    | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/calendar                                   |
| Sync emails               | Sync emails between candidates and users\*                                                                             | 🟢          | 🟢    | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.readonly                             |
| Send emails               | Send emails and email sequences from within Ashby                                                                      | 🟢          | 🟢    | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.send                                 |
| Create Google Meet events | Create Google Meet meeting links for interview scheduling and people workflows scheduling when Google Meet is selected | 🟢          | 🟢    | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.created                     |
| Read Google Meet spaces   | Reading existing meeting links that Ashby creates through the Google Calendar API.                                     | 🟢          | 🟢    | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.readonly                    |

🟢 indicates the scope is supported for the delegation type
🔴 indicates the scope is not supported for the delegation type

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on the permissions requested by Ashby as part of the integration, review [Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3).
:::

# Configuring a shared interview calendar

:::hint{type="warning"}
This is a core part of the integration setup.
A shared calendar prevents scheduling issues when hiring team members are unavailable.
The person setting up the Google Workspace integration and the person adding the shared calendar must both belong to the same primary domain that is authorized in Ashby.
:::

We recommend configuring a [Google shared calendar](https://support.google.com/calendar/answer/37095?hl=en) that everyone on your team who schedules interviews can use.

With a shared calendar, your team is able to reschedule other users' interviews if needed. This also keeps their personal calendars clear of interviews they aren't a part of.

You can set a default calendar that all interview calendar events are created on. You can change this at the time of scheduling.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on connecting creating and connecting a shared calendar in Google, check out [What is a shared calendar?](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/what-is-a-shared-calendar#google-workspace-shared-calendar-setup)
:::

## How Ashby discovers shared calendars and meeting rooms

:::hint{type="info"}
Learn more about meeting rooms in [Google Workspace: Meeting Rooms](docId\:P17mO2p4UzS19k3PQLXS0).
:::

When Ashby populates the shared calendar and meeting room dropdowns in the integration settings, it uses the **Primary Google Workspace Admin** configured on the integration page. This user must have the correct Google scope and Admin Console permissions for each resource type:

| **What is being listed**           | **Required Google scope**                                                    | **Required Google Admin permission**                       |
| ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| Meeting rooms (resource calendars) | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly | Admin Console > Directory > Buildings and resources (read) |
| Shared calendars                   | https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/calendar                                   | Standard Google Calendar access                            |

:::hint{type="danger"}
If the Primary Google Workspace Admin loses one of these scopes, the corresponding list stops updating in Ashby.
:::

## How shared calendar and meeting room events are synced

Listing a calendar and reading the events on it are two separate operations that use different authorization paths.

For reading events, Ashby identifies an Ashby user with access to that specific calendar and uses their OAuth token. The default is the Primary Google Workspace Admin. If that user does not have access to a particular calendar, Ashby falls back to other Ashby users who do.

To designate a single specific user to authorize all shared calendar and meeting room syncing, contact Ashby Support.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Recurring calendar events that include the "RSCALE" property in their recurrence rules (RRULES) are not supported and are not synced to Ashby.
The "RSCALE" property is used to specify non-Gregorian calendars.
All events without the "RSCALE" property sync as normal.
:::

### A note on domain-wide delegation (DWD)

Domain-Wide Delegation (DWD) does not change which user's OAuth token is used for reading calendar event details. Ashby still uses an individual user's OAuth token for calendar reads. DWD covers other parts of the integration, such as user and organization-level operations.

# Adding personal calendars

You can connect additional personal Google calendars to Ashby so that events on those calendars are reflected in your availability when scheduling interviews.

You need to have OAuth enabled in your account before you can import a personal calendar.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Personal calendars require the Google Workspace calendar sharing settings to be set to *See all event details* in order to be pulled into availability when scheduling.
:::

To add a personal calendar:

1. Navigate to **Personal Settings**, then to [Google Workspace Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/gsuite).
2. Click `+ Import` in the **Secondary Calendars** section.
   A list of your personal Google calendars appears.


![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Bx_8t6aTIK6BDemU7D4wq_ashby-2026-05-06-at-103123-am.jpg)

3. Select the calendar you want to import and click `Submit`.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Only personal Google calendars should be imported here — do not select shared calendars.
:::

The calendar is added to the **Secondary Calendars** list and begins syncing with Ashby. Events on that calendar are taken into account when other users manually schedule you for an interview.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/50ec85cc47bba4889172028e513ed213.png)

If you click on the calendar in the **Secondary Calendars** list, you can also:

- **Disable the calendar:** click the calendar and toggle it off. Events on that calendar are no longer reflected in your availability.
- **Remove the calendar entirely:** click the calendar and select `Delete Calendar and Events`.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6sOI4vKFnu4gv84o_jGkB_ashby-2026-05-06-at-103918-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Events from personal calendars on the secondary list follow any [Keywords](docId\:kPccUDjtUDRzq8rypJBnO) settings you have configured and are taken into account when auto-scheduling.
:::

## Working locations

Your working location syncs directly into the scheduling experience in Ashby, so you don't have to jump between Ashby and Google Calendar to check where someone is working.

Working location is displayed beneath the user's name on the calendar interface when manually scheduling an interview.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3291514c8864cea886ae3e75399802ec.png" size="40" width="274" height="310" darkWidth="274" darkHeight="310" position="center" showCaption="false"}

# Google Meet settings

:::hint{type="info"}
When Google Workspace is integrated with Ashby, Google Meet can be set as a location for your interviews to generate meeting links.
:::

While the integration facilitates the creation of Google Meet meetings and meeting links, the Google Meet settings you have configured within your Google Admin console apply.

These settings include:

- Who can join meetings created by your organization
- Which meetings or calls users in the organization can join or receive
- Joining settings (e.g., whether the host must join before anyone else and who must ask to join the meeting)
- Who can send in-call chat messages
- Who can share their screens in calls
- Host Management (restricting what non-host participants are able to do in the call)

If any of these settings need to be amended, reach out to an admin for your Google Workspace. The settings can be accessed within the Admin console under **Google Workspace > Google Meet**.

In particular, if interviewers are unable to admit candidates into a Google Meet meeting, this is likely due to Host Management being turned on. To resolve this, navigate to **Google Workspace > Google Meet > Host Management** in the Admin console and ensure the `Start video call with host management turned on` checkbox is unchecked.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0dcfaa56e4912476c79b06b429deb362.png)

# FAQs

## Google Workspace integration

### Domain-wide delegation is in place and I've checked the "Sync Google Workspace Users" checkbox. Why aren't users syncing over?

Ensure that the email address listed in the **Primary Google Workspace Admin** field of your Google Workspace integration settings belongs to a Google Workspace admin. Once the email address of an admin in your workspace has been added, users should start to sync over.

### Can I use a service account as the Primary Google Workspace Admin? What privileges are required?

Yes. For more on this, check out [Google Workspace: Setting a Service Account as Primary Admin in Ashby](docId\:TsT6MmD7FrteWIrLDiITS).

### Can I set up both Google Workspace and Microsoft 365 integrations in my Ashby account?

Ashby currently supports deep integration with either Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 but not both simultaneously. For more information, check out [Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?](docId:92txkuC2vVMOrzXEPtMKJ).

## Shared interview calendar

### Why did my shared calendar or meeting room stop syncing?

If a shared calendar or meeting room stops syncing in Ashby, work through the following checks:

1. Confirm the Primary Google Workspace Admin on the integration page still exists and has valid OAuth.
2. Confirm that admin still has the required scope:
   - calendar scope for shared calendars
   - admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly scope for meeting rooms
3. If you are using individual OAuth rather than Domain-Wide Delegation (DWD), confirm that at least one other active Ashby user who has access to the calendar in Google has completed Google OAuth in Ashby with the calendar scope.
4. For meeting rooms specifically: confirm the Primary Google Workspace Admin still has the admin.directory scope.

If you have worked through these steps and the calendar is still not syncing, contact [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

### What should I do before deactivating a user who has access to a shared calendar?

Before deactivating a user in Ashby who currently has access to a shared calendar, make sure another active Ashby user is granted access to that same calendar in Google. This ensures the calendar continues to sync after the original user is deactivated.

To hand off calendar access:

1. In Google Calendar, open the settings for the shared calendar.
2. Under **Share with specific people**, add the replacement user and give them at least **Make changes to events** permission.
3. Deactivate the original user in Ashby whenever you are ready.

No changes are needed in Ashby itself. The shared calendar continues to sync using the new user's access on the next sync.

:::hint{type="danger"}
Do not manually move interview events between calendars in Google Calendar.
Doing so:

- Clears RSVPs from all attendees
- Causes Ashby to recreate the original event
- Leaves duplicate events and invites that show as unsent

If events were already moved manually, the affected interviews need to be canceled and rebooked in Ashby to restore the correct invite and RSVP state.
:::

## Emails

### I send a large volume of no-reply emails each day. Can I still use a branded email address?

This is possible if an email domain is configured within Ashby. If you are sending more than 1,000 no-reply or automated emails a day and would prefer to use a branded email address, check out our [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2) guide.

### Why isn't my email alias showing up in the Aliases to include in email sync section?

Aliases in the **Aliases to include in email sync** section of **Email Settings** are pulled from your Google Workspace profile. If your alias isn't appearing, confirm that the address is configured as an alternate email address in your Google Account. Once it's added there, the alias appears in **Email Settings** for you to opt in and enable syncing.

[title] Emails & Candidate Texting
[path] /

# Emails

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Configure email templates to help create a consistent experience for candidates.&#x20;

Here you can read more on sharing emails, setting up aliases, using Ashby's substitution tokens and more!
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
✉️ [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ)&#x20;

📤 [Shared Email Aliases](docId:-nmtAZoWNfsEYpi-9F3_V)&#x20;

💌 [Personal Email Sharing](docId:-5I6NT5bKfHFcaa7wYT1b)&#x20;

⚙️ [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2)&#x20;

🏆 [Email Deliverability Best Practices](docId\:NFxU6hRtW6OZtiDYxQxaI)&#x20;

🤖 [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6)&#x20;

❓ [Can I send emails in bulk?](docId:9ssRY_p2mghcHF1ySuJXG)&#x20;

❓ [How do I make offer emails private?](docId:9OIj8aG_kKD1cXf4cxJDG)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Candidate Texting

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Check out the guides here for further information on setting up and using the candidate texting feature.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📱 [Candidate Texting Onboarding](docId\:LrSCwWBh0I1RwPuqxdQrN)&#x20;

📱 [Candidate Texting](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84)&#x20;
:::
::::

# WhatsApp

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Check out the guides here for further information on setting up and using the WhatsApp messaging feature.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📱 [WhatsApp: Setup](docId\:XK2qn03Z4yvC95MsPmlNI)&#x20;

📱 [WhatsApp: Candidate Consent](docId\:LcUHTmEbIsk6zetJHgC4T)&#x20;

📱 [WhatsApp: Templates and Messaging](docId\:Mv6TvdHBwUweDi6D2QF8G)&#x20;
:::
::::




[title] WhatsApp: Candidate Consent
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Untitled/

This article explains how candidates opt in or out of WhatsApp messages on your job board, and how you record a consent status you confirmed outside of Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisities:&#x20;**&#x59;ou need to have WhatsApp candidate messaging configured before consent options will be available. For more on configuring WhatsApp candidate messaging, check out [WhatsApp: Setup](docId\:XK2qn03Z4yvC95MsPmlNI).&#x20;
:::

Consent for receiving messages via [Candidate Texting](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84) does not transfer to WhatsApp. Meta's WhatsApp Business Policy requires opt-in that specifically names WhatsApp and the sending business, and General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and ePrivacy require channel-specific consent.&#x20;

# Routes to obtain candidate consent for WhatsApp messages

## Opting in or out when submitting an application

Candidates can opt in or opt out of receiving WhatsApp messages when submitting applications via your job board.

When you have `Enable WhatsApp` toggled on in your Ashby account, the following shows on your job board underneath your application form.

![The screenshot shows the consent options for both SMS and WhatsApp messages.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EcXPbpbPqNklByW9m23GD_backend-engineer-reteam-2026-08-21-at-95558-am.jpg)

Ashby records the candidate's answer along with a snapshot of the exact consent language they were shown, so your consent record reflects what the candidate saw at the point of providing their consent status.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you do not see the options to opt in or out of WhatsApp messages on your job board, check that you have a privacy policy link added to the **Company Privacy Policy** field in **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting**.
:::

## Manually setting consent status on a candidate profile

If you have confirmed a consent status with the candidate outside of Ashby, you can override the status on their profile.

1. Navigate to the candidate profile.
2. Click the **Summary** tab.
3. Scroll to the **Consent** section and click the pencil icon in the **WhatsApp Consent** field.
4. Select the consent status from the dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DFbrYgHd1qjhbUyNcgFKO_ariadne-shepard-product-marketing-manager-ashby-2026-08-21-at-100251-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1490" height="772" darkWidth="1490" darkHeight="772" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The WhatsApp Consent dropdown where the consent status can be overridden."}

# FAQs

### If a candidate opts out of WhatsApp, does that affect their SMS consent?

No. Ashby tracks the two channels independently. An opt-out on one does not affect the other.

### Is candidate consent auditable for GDPR or data subject requests?

Yes. Ashby records SMS and WhatsApp consent events, including application-form answers (including an explicit "No"), consent replies, and recruiter overrides. If you receive a data subject request that requires this history, contact support\@ashbyhq.com.


[title] Findem
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Findem account with Ashby, allowing you to seamlessly sync profile and job updates between both platforms.

## How to connect Findem to Ashby?

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to this [guide](https://findem.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/articles/6817095822359-Integrating-Ashby-ATS).

[title] Hiring Manager Experience Surveys
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

Ashby's Hiring Manager Experience surveys enable recruiting and talent teams to incorporate customized, automated surveys and reporting into their workflow. Ashby sends these surveys to your hiring managers after a successful hire to gather feedback for the primary recruiter and the overall recruiting process and partnership. The feature integrates seamlessly with your recruiting workflow to solicit feedback from your hiring manager partners. You can customize the survey to fit your needs while Ashby provides default questions for standard recruiting process pillars (more on that below). You have the choice of automated or manual enrollment for ongoing or one-off feedback requests as needed.

This article is organized into three primary sections:

1. Admin management: survey setup and configuration
2. Recruiting and hiring manager engagement: requesting and completing surveys
3. Reporting: analyzing results with reports and dashboards

:::hint{type="info"}
Getting started with Hiring Manager Experience Surveys in Ashby? For a deeper walkthrough of the full workflow — from configuring surveys and automation to requesting feedback, managing responses, and reviewing results in reporting — take the [Hiring Manager Experience Surveys course](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/hiring-manager-experience-survey) in Ashby Academy.&#x20;

If you’re planning your rollout, the [Rolling out Hiring Manager Experience Surveys ](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/blog/rolling-out-hiring-manager-surveys)playbook is a practical guide for setup, rollout planning, and stakeholder communication.
:::

# Permissions and access

Hiring Manager Experience surveys are available on the Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

The table below outlines the permissions required for key Hiring Manager Experience survey actions:

| Action                                                      | Minimum permission required                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ----------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Configure surveys (forms, settings, and automation)         | Organization admin                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Create manual survey requests                               | Elevated access with a hiring manager access role or higher for the relevant job or team                                                                                                                    |
| Complete a survey and provide feedback                      | Hiring manager (survey recipient)                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Edit submitted survey responses                             | Hiring manager (their own submissions only)                                                                                                                                                                 |
| View own assigned survey results                            | Hiring manager (by default)                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| View all survey submissions                                 | Any user with the **Has Hiring Manager Experience Survey Access** permission enabled by an org admin (results are further limited by job and team access roles); org admins have this permission by default |
| Assign survey visibility permissions to others              | Organization admin                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Access survey reports and the experience feedback dashboard | Any user with the **Has Hiring Manager Experience Survey Access** permission enabled (org admins have this by default; others require it to be toggled on by an admin)                                      |

:::hint{type="info"}
See the [Hiring Manager Experience Surveys](docId\:Fl73J4CypI6sF86H7Tzra)  section below for how to grant access to hiring manager experience surveys to individual users.
:::

# Survey setup to survey completion

The Loom below provides a quick summary of survey configuration, feedback request creation, and survey submission, highlighting the ease of Ashby's fully integrated hiring manager feedback request feature.&#x20;

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/3d3e2eb60a864cf183af8c7748014f02?sid=d46bd583-d4da-4fad-a51b-32e3f43b3cf1"}

# Hiring manager experience survey setup and configuration

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must have Ashby admin access to configure Hiring Manager Experience surveys.
:::

To configure Hiring Manager Experience surveys, navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Employee Surveys**.

The screenshot below shows:

1. The **Employee Surveys** category
2. The **Hiring Manager Experience** tab
3. A default survey, which you can edit or use, along with the automation status
4. The ability to add new surveys via the `+ New` button

![Shows the location of the hiring manager experience survey under Admin > Organization Setup > Employee Surveys.](https://cdn.zappy.app/d98dfa3be4927018a20232594fc9dc38.png)

After you create a new survey or edit the existing default, a pull-out section appears with all survey options:

1. The survey title, which you can edit at any time
2. The survey configuration tabs for the form, settings, instructions, and automation options
3. The form definitions, questions, and copy editing section

![Shows the configuration window to build a hiring manage experience survey form.](https://cdn.zappy.app/17fe176f9de9fbb3ad11357e37bd79ab.png)

## Form

Here you can view the default survey questions and have the option to make adjustments and add questions as needed.

**Default survey questions**

The Hiring Manager Experience survey type has a set of six default questions designed to cover core pillars of recruiting feedback. These questions are optional, and other custom questions and question types can be added. However, these six questions are special in that they are used in the default dashboard and template reports for aggregates and averages. We recommend using at least the overall feedback question to gather a baseline score.

When you add a new question to a survey form via the `Add Question` option, a menu of options appears.

![Screen Shot 2024-05-06 at 10.23.11 AM.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/61a3450ea570a0ab37c2c22197f538b9.png)

The six default questions cover the following:

1. **Hiring Manager Experience Overall Rating:** The hiring manager's overall rating of the recruiting process
2. **Hiring Manager Experience Net Promoter Score:** The hiring manager's Net Promoter Score (NPS) rating of the recruiting process
3. **Hiring Manager Experience Scheduling Rating:** The hiring manager's rating of the interview scheduling process
4. **Hiring Manager Experience Communication Rating:** The hiring manager's rating of the recruiter's communication
5. **Hiring Manager Experience Intake Rating:** The hiring manager's rating of the intake process
6. **Hiring Manager Experience Role Understanding Rating:** The hiring manager's rating of the recruiter's understanding of the role

:::hint{type="warning"}
You can only add each of these questions to a form once. If they are already on your form, these questions appear greyed out when adding an additional question, as shown above.
:::

## Settings

On the **Settings** tab, you can do the following:

- **Survey description:** Set an internal survey description (that respondents do not see), and determine your reminder number and cadence.
- **Number of reminders:** Determine the total number of reminders to send to your respondent.
- **Reminder period:** Determine how often reminders are sent.

![Shows the Settings tab of the hiring manager experience survey configuration window.](https://cdn.zappy.app/76cdeae8967eca05d1d13ad30faf06cf.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If all reminders have been sent, the survey is still listed as a task on the hiring manager's profile.
:::

## Instructions

Here you can determine the instructions your hiring managers see when completing the form. Instructions can be configured with rich text and links to any additional information you want recipient hiring managers to review before submitting their scores.

![Shows the instructions tab of the hiring manager experience survey configuration window.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e849cb9aba6a4c5ec14eb6b4f3b49abf.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
We recommend providing at least a minimal set of instructions, as these are presented alongside every survey request.
:::

## Automation

When survey automation is enabled, Ashby creates a survey request after a hire is made. In that process, Ashby first evaluates whether any further automation filter conditions apply, to ensure surveys are only created under the appropriate conditions.

If automation is enabled and conditions are met, Ashby does the following:

1. **Identify the appropriate hiring manager:** Ashby uses the hiring manager assigned to the hired Job Consideration (JC). This can be found within the **Hiring Team** section of the job consideration on the candidate's profile.
2. **Identify the primary recruiter:** Ashby uses the recruiter assigned to the hired Job Consideration. This is also pulled from the **Hiring Team** section of the job consideration on the candidate's profile.
3. **Send the survey request:** Ashby sends the survey request to the hiring manager identified in step 1.

If the hiring manager is missing or the selection is ambiguous (for example, more than one hiring manager is assigned), Ashby creates a draft survey request. In this case, the recruiter is expected to review the survey request and assign a hiring manager manually.

The primary recruiter is optional. If the recruiter is identified, they are noted in the survey form request to remind the hiring manager of the specific candidate, role, and recruiter for which the feedback is being requested.

### Cooldown settings

When setting up your automation, you have the option to configure cooldown settings. Click the `Survey Cooldown Settings` dropdown to configure your settings:

- **No survey limits:** Every time a new hire is made that meets this criteria, the survey is sent to the hiring manager so they can provide feedback.
- **Hiring manager:** Any time a new hire is made, the hiring manager is asked for feedback, but is only asked once per specified interval (for example, once per 90 days).
- **Hiring manager and recruiter:** When a new hire is made, the hiring manager is asked for their feedback, but only once during the specified interval per individual recruiter they work with. For example, if Brian is a hiring manager and two hires are made with Sheila as the recruiter, Brian receives one survey if those hires were made within the 90-day interval. However, if a new candidate is hired with Brian as the hiring manager and Arthur is the recruiter, Brian receives another request for feedback if the hire is made within that 90-day interval.

![Shows survey cooldown settings options.](https://cdn.zappy.app/44263de2ae41a94c3a0f576776ebfe53.png)

### Interval

When setting your interval, you can choose to set it by days, weeks, months, quarters, or years.

![Shows setting an interval for a set period of days.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ce64f2220567480382ee7590af56b219.png)

## Permissions

By default, hiring managers can see the surveys they are assigned and their own results. Hiring managers have the option to edit their submissions if needed (more on that below).

To grant users broader visibility into survey submissions, an admin assigns the relevant permissions on each employee's profile:

1. Visit an employee profile and go to the `Permissions` tab.
2. Select the toggle for **Has Hiring Manager Experience Survey Access** to `Yes`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Visibility of results is still limited to any team and job access roles this user may have assigned. That is, a user can only see survey results from hiring managers for teams and jobs they have general access to.
:::

![Shows the permissions tab in an employee profile and the "Has hiring manager experience survey access" setting toggled on.](https://cdn.zappy.app/48a4cc5432669a8c68290a3ac9e4fea1.png)

# Requesting and completing hiring manager feedback surveys

## Creating a survey request

If survey automation is enabled, feedback requests are created and delivered automatically as configured. Otherwise, users can request feedback on a one-off basis by creating a Hiring Manager Experience feedback request:

1. From the candidate profile, navigate to the `More` menu.
2. Select `Create Hiring Manager Experience Survey Request`.

![Shows the option to Creating a Hiring Manager Experience Survey Request under the More menu in the top right.](https://cdn.zappy.app/76c22adb6290a63487ccbd0905354eaf.png)

A manual survey request automatically attempts to populate the required fields based on the **Hiring Team** information on the Job Consideration, but you are given a chance to review and edit the request before creating it:

1. Specify the survey to deliver.
2. Identify the Job Consideration (JC), if there are multiple.
3. Specify the hiring manager.
4. Optionally specify a primary recruiter.

The default information is pulled from the **Hiring Team** information on the profile.

![Shows the options for configuring a hiring manager experience survey request.](https://cdn.zappy.app/885c6934e515445fe54da6ce3ba0a64a.png)

After an automated or manual survey request is created, it is visible as an activity on the profile until completion. Additionally, the initial request event is logged in the candidate's activity feed.

![Shows the survey activity displayed on the candidate's profile and the survey request timestamp.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ca7ca0375e963bd872cd90dd7ddf38bb.png)

## Submitting feedback as a hiring manager

Upon survey creation, Ashby creates a task on the hiring manager's **Surveys** section of their home page and emails them a notification requesting survey completion:

1. The survey tasks for the hiring manager
2. The specific survey details for each request, identifying the recruiter they partnered with.

![Shows the HM experience survey task listed on the Ashby home page of the hiring manager.](https://cdn.zappy.app/a923018cabb11d3e4954395bfd105b96.png)

When following the survey request to complete feedback, the hiring manager sees an initial page that summarizes the request context:

1. The primary recruiter they worked with is cited here (if provided). If the recruiter is not provided with the survey request, "Submit Hiring Manager Feedback" is listed here, as shown below.
2. The candidate name and job for which they were hired
3. The survey instructions, specified in the survey configuration by the admin

![Shows the context of the hiring manager experience survey request, including instructions provided.](https://cdn.zappy.app/96182bada79c7409e3e2859da0acfe2b.png)

The hiring manager can use the `Enter Feedback` button or the `Your Feedback` tab to complete the survey questions. After submission, they see a summary of their survey status (1) and have the option to edit their answers if needed (2).

![Shows feedback entered on a HM experience survey in the Your Feedback tab.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3eec220fcd34b5626999e43eaceb061f.png)

## Reporting

Ashby provides the ability to create custom reports on all Hiring Manager Experience survey requests. This can be done by building a report on the **Hiring Manager Experience Surveys** reporting subject.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vSz4icJEKsbC_Y5BRpJ7k_screenshot2024-05-06at113520am.png" size="50" alt="Shows selecting HM Experience Surveys as the subject of the report." isUploading="false" width="389" height="365" darkWidth="389" darkHeight="365" showCaption="false"}

From this subject, you have access to the initial request metadata, the submission's custom survey questions, and the six default questions, which aggregate across all custom surveys.

![Shows the available fields under the HM Experience Survey subject.](https://cdn.zappy.app/da38e2e7837f5f61dd29e4ec74236b3f.png)

## Template reports and experience feedback dashboard

### Template reports

The following reports are available in the template library for pulling data on completed and pending hiring manager experience surveys.

![The Report Builder page with Hiring Manager Experience report templates listed.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rFQ8zzZ2vjNGyxUTzJb6o_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-05-15-at-101152-am.jpg)

- **HM Experience Survey Submissions:** View the details of all submitted hiring manager experience surveys. This is a custom list report of the results that can be exported as a CSV. You can also create alerts from this template.
- **Currently Pending Survey Requests:** View all requested hiring manager experience surveys that have yet to be submitted. This is also a custom list report that you can export or create alerts for.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can read more on setting up alerts at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW).
:::

- **Hiring Manager Experience Survey Volume Over Time:** View the number of hiring manager experience survey requests created over time.
- **Hiring Manager Experience Summary by Recruiter:** View completed hiring manager experience survey details grouped by the attributed recruiter.
- **Hiring Manager Experience Summary by Department:** View completed hiring manager experience survey details grouped by department.
- **Average HM Rating Over Time:** View the average overall hiring manager experience recruiting survey ratings over time (for example, month over month; the timestamp used is the request creation date).
- **HM Experience survey Completion by Department:** Shows the percentage of survey requests completed by department and the average time taken for the survey to be completed.
- **HM Experience NPS Score:** The NPS score of your Hiring Manager Experience surveys using the standard formula: % of promoters - % of detractors.

### Experience feedback dashboard

You can access the built-in dashboard with Hiring Manager Experience survey data by navigating to **Reports > Employee Surveys** and then clicking `Hiring Manager Experience`. The `Surveys` tab shows the list of survey requests (along with their status) and the `Dashboard` tab shows the experience feedback dashboard.

If you have not been assigned permissions to view all Hiring Manager Experience surveys, you only see data on the surveys assigned to you.

![Shows the hiring manage experience dashboard.](https://cdn.zappy.app/de72f30b1914eef3953bad350d246b17.png)


[title] Candidate Texting Onboarding
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Candidate Texting/

This guide covers how to get ready to use Candidate Texting. See [Candidate Texting](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84) for information on how to use the feature. Texting currently requires setup support; please contact your CSM or Support to enable it for your account.

## Candidate Texting Onboarding Overview

Before your team can use Candidate Texting, A2P 10DLC registration must be completed. This process can take a few days. Ensure the information you provide is accurate and up-to-date to streamline onboarding.

## Onboarding to-do list

:::hint{type="warning"}
Complete these steps to ensure the process is completed successfully.
:::

- [ ] Work with your legal team to ensure your company’s privacy policy contains compliant language relevant to texting (Ashby can not provide legal advice).
- [ ] &#x20;Input your privacy policy URL, terms and conditions URL, and notification email under **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting > General,&#x20;**&#x6F;r click the following link: [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-texting](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-texting)
- [ ] Submit the registration form in Ashby. See [What is the registration process?](docId\:LrSCwWBh0I1RwPuqxdQrN) for more details.

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Typical wait times (subject to change):
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
**Brand approval:** 1-7 days
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="2" indent="3"}
**Campaign approval:** 7+ days
:::

:::hint{type="info" indent="3"}
See [Twilio's registration FAQ](https://help.twilio.com/articles/1260800720410-What-is-A2P-10DLC-#h_01K3V7F5C20C6T9XFV1N6ERA4E) for up-to-date timelines and details.
:::

- [ ] &#x20;Use our [Candidate Texting ](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84) guide to get set up and started with the feature 🎉

### What is the registration process?

:::hint{type="info"}
This process is facilitated through an in-app form in Ashby. You are not required to register through The Campaign Registry directly.
:::

Access the in-app form by navigating to **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting**, and selecting the `10DLC Onboarding` tab. Make sure you've filled out the details on the **General** tab first, or you will not be able to proceed.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZzLNVKpzNYieUV5SxCugo_candidate-texting-acent-ashby-2026-03-05-at-124920-pm.jpg)

1. **Brand Registration:** First you must register your brand with The Campaign Registry (TCR) and provide details about your company, such as the legal business name, industry, and EIN.
2. **Campaign Registration:** After brand approval, Ashby must register your messaging campaign. This includes specifying the use case (e.g., customer care, marketing), message volume, and sample messages.
3. **Selecting a Phone Number:&#x20;**&#x4F;nce your campaign is registered, you will select a phone number from the Ashby platform to send your messages.
4. **Team Access Setup:** Finally, you'll configure which team members have access to send messages, ensuring control and compliance.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What is A2P 10dlc?

A2P 10DLC (Application-to-Person Ten Digit Long Code) is a new standard for sending business-related SMS and MMS messages to mobile devices in the United States. This system is designed to provide higher message deliverability, increased throughput, and better compliance with regulatory requirements compared to traditional long codes.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What is the difference between A2P 10DLC and short codes?

A2P 10DLC allows businesses to use standard 10-digit local phone numbers for high-volume messaging, whereas short codes are 5-6 digit numbers designed for mass texting with even higher throughput.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How long does the registration process take?

See the [Onboarding to-do list](docId\:LrSCwWBh0I1RwPuqxdQrN)  above for typical wait times.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How can I ensure my texting campaigns comply with regulations?

Always obtain explicit consent before sending messages, provide clear opt-out instructions, and adhere to the principles outlined by the CAN-SPAM Act and CTIA guidelines.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Who needs to complete the 10dlc process?

Anyone who will be texting candidates with United States phone numbers.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### We’ve already completed this process with our legacy texting platform. Do we have to do it again?

You’ll need to complete A2P 10dlc registration any time you sign up for a new texting service.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What does Regions of Operation refer to within the registration form?

This refers to where the business operates.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What does the Authorized Representative section of the form refer to?

This is the person Twilio should contact to verify the form details - typically this is the user completing the registration form.
:::


[title] Best Practices for Managing AI Credits
[path] Ashby AI Features/

AI credits are easiest to manage when you treat them as a shared, limited resource across your organization. The best setup is one where your team knows which workflows consume credits, who is responsible for monitoring usage, and when to adjust usage or purchase more. Review this guide for best practices and tips on effective AI credit usage and management.

# Start with your highest-value use cases

Some AI features can run across large volumes of data, so it helps to be intentional about where you use credits first. Start with the workflows that save the most recruiter or hiring manager time, or where AI helps you review large volumes most efficiently.

For example:

- AI-Assisted Application Review uses one credit for one evaluation of a job consideration, with up to 50 criteria included in that evaluation.
- AI Talent Rediscovery uses one credit per returned candidate, with a maximum of 250 credits used for a single search. If a search returns no candidates, no credits are used.

:::hint{type="success"}
A good rule of thumb is to roll out credit-consuming workflows in the areas where you expect the clearest return first, instead of enabling everything at once.
:::

# Estimate usage before enabling a high-volume workflow

Before turning on a feature that can evaluate large numbers of candidates, estimate your expected usage based on your historical volume. For [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr), the recommended approach is to look at your historical applicants per role and multiply that by your planned hires over the relevant period.

This is especially useful when:

- You hire for high-volume roles
- You are planning a seasonal hiring spike
- Multiple teams use the same shared credit pool
- You are testing a new AI workflow for the first time

Doing a quick estimate up front makes it easier to decide whether your included credits are likely to cover your needs or whether you should plan for an add-on purchase.

# Assign one person to monitor usage

AI credits are visible at **Admin > Organization Setup > Billing**. Billing admins can also purchase additional credits there.

We recommend designating a single owner (usually a recruiting ops, systems, or admin lead) to:

- Check usage regularly
- Watch for new AI workflows being adopted
- Make sure the team knows when usage is approaching plan limits
- Coordinate any needed add-on purchase decisions

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby shows an in-app warning once you reach 80% usage, but teams with tighter limits may want to review their balance proactively instead of waiting for that threshold.
:::

# Pilot first, then scale

When adopting a new AI workflow, start with a smaller pilot before applying it broadly. This gives your team time to validate that the workflow is producing the expected value and helps avoid using a large share of your allotment too early in the contract period.

Examples:

- Start with a smaller set of roles before enabling AI-Assisted Application Review across every open job.
- Run Talent Rediscovery for a priority role first before repeating searches across multiple teams or departments.

This is usually the best way to balance experimentation with predictability.

# Be deliberate about reruns and repeat searches

If your team revisits the same workflow multiple times, set expectations around when a rerun is actually necessary.

For AI-Assisted Application Review, a candidate evaluation can include up to 50 criteria for a single credit, so you do not need to worry about extra cost just because you are using multiple criteria within that evaluation. You can update criteria multiple times within that limit without being billed another credit for that candidate.

For AI Talent Rediscovery, each returned candidate consumes a credit, so repeated broad searches can add up more quickly than a narrow, intentional search strategy.

In practice, this means it is worth agreeing internally on:

- When to refine an existing setup versus starting over
- Who should run broad searches
- Which jobs or teams should use the feature most heavily

# Review remaining credits before major hiring pushes

If you know a large recruiting push is coming, review your available credits in advance instead of checking only once usage feels high. This is especially important for annual plans, where credits are tied to the contract period and unused credits do not roll over into the next contract year.

A quick pre-launch check can help you avoid interruptions during a busy hiring period and gives you time to purchase additional credits if needed.

# Know what happens if you run out

If you use all available AI credits, Ashby pauses new AI evaluations. The feature becomes available again automatically after additional credits are added.

That means the best time to plan is before you hit zero, especially if your team depends on a credit-consuming workflow for an active hiring process.

:::hint{type="info"}
See [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE) for instructions on how to purchase more AI credits.
:::

# Purchase add-ons proactively when usage is predictable

If your team expects ongoing AI usage beyond the included allotment, it is better to purchase additional credits proactively rather than wait until workflows stop. Additional AI credits can be purchased in-app from **Admin > Organization Setup > Billing**:

- Plus and Enterprise plans can purchase in increments of 5,000.
- Monthly Foundations plans can purchase in increments of 1,000.

Because AI credits are purchased as a recurring additional amount in-app, it is especially helpful to review expected ongoing usage rather than making reactive purchases one by one.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on AI credit costs and bundling, see [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm) .
:::

# Suggested operating cadence

For most teams, the following cadence works well:

- **Monthly:** Review remaining credits and recent usage trends.
- **Before enabling a new AI workflow:** Estimate expected volume and identify an owner.
- **Before a major hiring push:** Confirm whether your current allotment is likely to cover expected usage.
- **At 80% usage:** Decide whether to slow usage, narrow scope, or purchase more credits.

# Summary

To get the most value from AI credits:

- Prioritize the highest-value workflows first.
- Estimate likely usage before rolling out broadly.
- Assign an owner to monitor the shared balance.
- Pilot before scaling.
- Avoid unnecessary repeat runs or overly broad searches.
- Check credits before major hiring periods.
- Purchase additional credits before you hit a hard stop.

[title] Zoom
[path] Integrations/Platform/

Ashby's Zoom integration allows you to add Zoom links when scheduling interviews from within Ashby. To get started, enable the integration in Ashby; the remaining settings and configuration options are covered in the sections below.

:::hint{type="info"}
For integrations where an admin activates the integration by logging into their account (like Zoom), we recommend setting up a department or service admin account for the integration, rather than using an admin user's account to configure the integration. The integration account connected needs to be a Zoom admin account.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby's Zoom integration currently supports one Zoom account per Ashby organization. It does not currently support multi-tenant Zoom configurations or parent/subaccount setups.

Ashby only sees users in the Zoom account connected to the integration. If you connect a subaccount, users in the main account and other subaccounts are not visible to Ashby.

To schedule interviews with Zoom in Ashby, keep all users who need to schedule interviews in the main Zoom account connected to Ashby.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/5c7ea3c3313e46a28ec439d6e91b5c93"}

# Enabling the integration in Ashby

As an Organization Admin, navigate to [Admin > Integrations > Integrations > Zoom](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/zoom):

1. Click `Add to Zoom`.

![Screenshot of the Zoom integration page in Ashby showing the Add to Zoom button](https://cdn.zappy.app/b1ecda92ac426fb6dd4464549308a994.png)

2. Log in via single sign-on (SSO) using Zoom Admin credentials.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
For the connection setup, the same user has to be an Org Admin in Ashby and also an Admin account user in Zoom (using the same email address).
:::

3. After you complete the authentication process, the page displays a message confirming the integration is installed.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
If you are having trouble establishing the connection, you may need to enable the setting to Approve for all users, as shown below:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7ZtjcjemoTrIlVu9sJZZn_sso-configuration-and-next-steps-plain-2026-10-05-at-45608-pm.png" size="50" isUploading="false" width="315" height="92" darkWidth="315" darkHeight="92" alt="Setting to approve for all users which should be enabled if having trouble authenticating Zoom with Ashby" showCaption="false"}
:::

You also see the following checkboxes once the integration is active:

- `Use passcode on meetings?` If left unchecked, Ashby generates a Zoom meeting with a waiting room instead.
- `Disable Zoom Event Access?` When enabled, users cannot see scheduled Zoom meetings in Quick Schedule (this is not commonly used).

![Screenshot of the Zoom integration settings in Ashby showing the Use passcode on meetings and Disable Zoom Event Access checkboxes](https://cdn.zappy.app/6516cdf33d4b8a7e4f844d332b15ec64.png)

# Generating a Zoom link for an interview panel

If you have multiple potential interviewers for an interview (for example, three interviewers that could take one interviewer slot on your panel), you can auto-select a Zoom host based on the interviewer selected, rather than specifying a Zoom host for the interview.

This means that when the interview is scheduled, Ashby selects the Zoom account for the user who participates in the interview and sets them as the host, as opposed to having to decide on one specific host ahead of time. Ensure that all interviewers who need to host interviews have a Zoom user account in the main Zoom account connected to Ashby. Users in other Zoom subaccounts do not appear in Ashby's host list.

:::hint{type="info"}
The dynamic Zoom hosts feature is only currently available for single-event interviews. For multi-event interviews, specify a Zoom host using the `Manual` option. If users with a basic Zoom license are selected as Zoom hosts, the Zoom time constraints (40 minutes max per meeting) apply.
:::

## Setting up dynamic Zoom hosts for a schedule interview activity

On the **Communications** tab of your schedule interview activity, when you set Zoom as the location type in the **Location** dropdown, you see `Auto` and `Manual` options that you can toggle between.

![Screenshot of the Communications tab in a schedule interview activity showing the Auto and Manual Zoom host options in the Location dropdown](https://cdn.zappy.app/a1c9ff2df57ad540e99ae8246b8ca76c.png)

Select `Auto` to allow Ashby to pick the host based on the Zoom users in the list. Ashby pulls Zoom users based on interviewer profiles in Ashby matching those of the users in the Zoom account.

When the candidate schedules their meeting via a direct booking link, the Zoom host is determined based on the interviewer the interview is assigned to, so long as the interviewer is an active Zoom user in the connected Zoom account.

If you'd like to specify a certain host, click `Manual` and select the user from the dropdown list of Zoom users.

## Setting up dynamic Zoom hosts for manual schedule

When manually scheduling interviews, you can also set dynamic Zoom hosts if needed by clicking the `Auto` option within the **Invite Settings** of the **Communications** tab.

When determining the interviewers on your schedule, the interviewer in the first interview slot is selected as the Zoom host on the **Communications** tab. You can remove or change the interviewer to adjust the Zoom host selected.

![Screenshot highlighting the first interviewer in the panel who will be designated as the Zoom host](https://cdn.zappy.app/efc0197d0486e4860da1c7bae7a0ca81.png)

If you'd like to select a host from the dropdown, click `Manual`, then specify the Zoom host.

# Uninstalling the integration

To uninstall Ashby from your Zoom instance:

1. Log in to Zoom, then navigate to the [Zoom App Marketplace](https://marketplace.zoom.us/).
2. Click **Manage > Installed Apps** or search for the Ashby app.
3. Click the Ashby app, then click `Uninstall`.

# Zoom setup and settings

We recommend creating a separate Zoom user in your account that acts as an interview room for multi-panel interviews and round-robin interviews.

To create a separate Zoom account to serve as an interview room, you first need to create a separate Zoom user on your company Zoom license. For example, if you have a talent@ email address for your organization, you could create a Zoom user account for that email.

Once configured, the shared Zoom account appears as a host option when assigning Zoom as a location in the **Communications** tab of your schedule interview activities or scheduling defaults.

We suggest making this a paid account to avoid any issues with time limits, but you can set this up with a basic account as well.

We also recommend allowing attendees to join these meetings before the organizer. This ensures Zoom meetings are created accurately when there isn't a clear host. Enable the **Allow participants to join before host** option within the shared account's Zoom settings to allow attendees to join before the organizer.

# Concurrent meetings

Each Basic user and Licensed user on a Pro account is limited to hosting one meeting at a time.

Licensed users on Business, Education, and Enterprise accounts can host up to two meetings at the same time. For more information on hosting simultaneous meetings, see [Zoom's guide on hosting concurrent meetings](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0068522).

Concurrent Meeting licenses can be purchased from Zoom. There are two levels for Concurrent Meeting licenses: Basic and Plus. Each Basic Concurrent Meeting license can schedule up to four concurrent meetings, while those with a Plus Concurrent Meeting license can schedule up to 20 concurrent meetings.

The scheduler needs to select their Concurrent Meeting Zoom account as the host when scheduling interviews. This ensures you can book up to 20 concurrent interviews without needing to switch the host each time.

# Additional notes

- If you'd like to enable screen sharing but no member of the meeting is the host, make sure the host account's settings enable `All Participants` to share. You can update this setting by going to the host account's profile and navigating to **Settings > In Meeting (Basic)**.
- Ashby's Zoom integration allows you to create a meeting with any Zoom host in your account, regardless of their Zoom plan. Meetings hosted by Basic users are still time-limited to 40 minutes if the meeting has more than three attendees.
- All Zoom meetings created through the integration are password protected. Passwords are embedded in the URLs added to calendar invites for interviewers and the candidate.
- You have the option to use Zoom passcodes on meetings and disable Zoom Event access as part of the integration settings. If you opt not to use Zoom passcodes, Zoom meetings are created with a waiting room instead. If you opt to disable Zoom events, scheduled Zoom meetings do not appear on interviewer calendars when using the **Manual Schedule** option to book interviews.
- By default, Ashby generates a strong password using letters, numbers, and symbols. If you would like simpler numeric passwords, edit your [passcode complexity requirements](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0063160#h_a427384b-e383-4f80-864d-794bf0a37604) in your Zoom account settings and specify "Only allow numeric passcode". Ashby applies this requirement for all new meeting passwords. You need to be a Zoom admin with the privilege to edit account settings to make these changes.
- We acknowledge that Zoom isn't optimized for interviews. For high-volume roles that may have many people interviewing at once, we suggest using Google Meet, as links can be generated dynamically with this option.

# FAQs

### I cancelled an interview and got an email from Zoom saying the interview was cancelled by another user. What's going on?

If notifications are set to be sent in your Zoom settings, Zoom sends a notification to the host saying that a meeting was cancelled after an interview is cancelled in Ashby. The notification says that the meeting was cancelled by the user who set up the Zoom integration. This is expected behavior and is because the notification comes from Zoom, rather than Ashby.

### Can I set a Zoom Room I've configured in Google Workspace as a host?

When specifying your location as Zoom for your interview, the list of hosts you choose from shows all active users in the company Zoom account. It is not currently possible to set a Zoom Room set up with Google Calendar as the host.

If you've configured a calendar resource in Google Calendar to have Zoom listed as a feature, it is displayed in the room name synced over via the Google Workspace integration to your Ashby account.

![Screenshot of the scheduling interface in Ashby showing the Room dropdown with a Zoom Room listed as an option](https://cdn.zappy.app/f7828da7d537f1a06a184aa6ce8120cc.png)

When scheduling an interview, you can select your Zoom Room via the **Room** dropdown on the calendar interface if manually scheduling an interview, or on your schedule activity on the **Schedule** tab of your schedule interview activity.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/57f5e46214f4bec97b32fd3ae945ebc6.png" size="60" alt="Screenshot of a meeting room listing in Ashby showing the Zoom feature displayed in brackets beside the room name" isUploading="false" width="485" height="613" darkWidth="485" darkHeight="613" showCaption="false"}

The features specified for your calendar resource in Google are shown in brackets beside the room name.

When a meeting room is added to an interview, the room is included as an attendee on the calendar event, so these are visible when viewing the meeting room's calendar.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on configuring Zoom Rooms with Google Calendar, see [Zoom's guide on configuring Zoom Rooms with Google Calendar](https://support.zoom.com/hc/en/article?id=zm_kb\&sysparm_article=KB0064322).
:::

### Will Ashby warn me if a host could be hitting their concurrent meeting limit in Zoom when I'm scheduling an interview?

When manually scheduling, if you hover over the exclamation point on the `Schedule` button, you see any warnings regarding scheduling that interview (if applicable).

If the Zoom host is already hosting two meetings that overlap with the interview you are looking to schedule, you are warned that their concurrent meeting limit in Zoom may have been reached. You may see this warning even if you have purchased a Zoom concurrent meeting add-on license for the host in question. You are still able to schedule the interview.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c61a7a6d9b0d203dd4c432e9548fd20d.png" size="60" alt="Screenshot of the manual scheduling interface in Ashby showing a concurrent meeting limit warning tooltip on the Schedule button" isUploading="false" width="785" height="447" darkWidth="785" darkHeight="447" showCaption="false"}

### I can't see a specific user in my list of Zoom hosts when scheduling. Why aren't they showing up?

There are a few reasons this might happen:

- The user is not part of the main Zoom account connected to Ashby, or does not have the necessary license within that account.
- The user belongs to a Zoom subaccount in a parent/subaccount or multi-tenant setup. Ashby's Zoom integration currently connects to one Zoom account and does not surface users from other subaccounts. If you connect Ashby to a specific subaccount, users in the main account and other subaccounts are not available.
- The user does not have a name entered in the Zoom interface, which is how Ashby generates the host list.

To use the user as a Zoom host in Ashby, add them to the main Zoom account connected to Ashby. Then verify that their name and license appear correctly in Zoom.

### I've already scheduled my interview but want to switch the location (Google Meet or Microsoft Teams to Zoom, for example). How do I do this?

To change the location of your interview, you need to reschedule it.

To reschedule an interview, head to the candidate's profile, then click `Actions` on the interview event in question. From here, you have the option to manually reschedule the candidate.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/502f9777bf8a20d2e3e3bff0521dff9d.png" size="70" alt="Screenshot of a candidate profile in Ashby showing the Actions menu on an interview event with the option to manually reschedule" isUploading="false" width="576" height="415" darkWidth="576" darkHeight="415" showCaption="false"}

The location can be amended in the **Communications** section when rescheduling. Navigate to the **Invite Settings** section, then amend the location listed in the **Location** field.

![Screenshot of the Invite Settings section during interview rescheduling in Ashby showing the Location field where the meeting type can be changed](https://cdn.zappy.app/f78d4a5c963db676ba90f7875b12e032.png)

### Can I generate a Zoom meeting without a waiting room? The meeting organizer is having to join before interviewers can be allowed in.

Within the Zoom integration settings in Ashby, check the `Use passcodes on meetings?` option. This adds a passcode to the meeting, rather than relying on a waiting room to admit attendees.

![Screenshot of the Zoom integration settings in Ashby showing the Use passcodes on meetings checkbox checked](https://cdn.zappy.app/abb5cd05af5732a9d6763ee88752c165.png)

### Is there a way to reduce the API permission scope so it only applies to recruitment-related meetings or not use the meeting✍️admin scope?

Ashby needs the Zoom API permissions to generate the list of users we'd create meeting links on behalf of, and to create meeting links. Unfortunately, Zoom does not provide a more granular access scope.

An alternative is to use a separate Zoom account for recruiting activities and integrate with Ashby.

[title] Shared Email Aliases
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

This article explains how to configure an organization-wide  and default no-reply address for your organization using Google Workspace.

:::hint{type="warning"}
These instructions apply only to organizations using the [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) integration.

Microsoft 365 personal aliases cannot be added to **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases) or used as the organization-wide no-reply address.

- To share a Microsoft 365 email address with specific Ashby users, see [Personal Email Sharing](docId:-5I6NT5bKfHFcaa7wYT1b).
- To configure a company-specific no-reply address for Microsoft 365, use [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2). This option is available on Enterprise plans.
:::

# Permissions & access

Setting up organization-wide  (via **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases)) requires an Organization Admin role and a Google Workspace integration.&#x20;

# Setting up an organization-wide shared email alias with Google Workspace

Organizations may configure a shared alias to give a team a consistent sender identity and avoid candidate communications being tied to one employee’s mailbox.

Ashby supports sending emails on behalf of an alternate email address by integrating with [Gmail's Send As feature](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/22370?hl=en).

First, set up a Send As address in Gmail, then share that address with your team on the [Shared Email Aliases page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases) in your **Admin** settings.&#x20;

![Shared Email Aliases settings page showing a shared no-reply email alias for the Moonfall Industries - Demo Hiring Team, marked as active and the default, with no personal email aliases listed.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_Wp4m3JF3wZyOXoCDkYbB_shared-email-aliases-ashby-2026-09-23-at-90242-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
We highly recommend setting this shared email alias using a service account (e.g., hiring\@yourcompanyname.com) to ensure continuity of access when the team changes.
:::

Gmail's Send As feature supports two options for the alternate address:

- **New or existing email addresses**
  1. Ask your Google Workspace administrator to create a new email address that you'd like to send as and provide the password to the newly created account.
  2. Log into the new account and [set up email forwarding](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/10957?hl=en) to your main email address.
  3. Request [Send As permission](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/22370) to the newly created address.
- **New or existing Google Groups**
  1. Create a new Google Group that you'd like to Send As.
  2. Using your primary account and join the Google Group.
  3. Request [Send As permission](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/22370) to the newly created Google Group.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you run into an issue where you aren't receiving a verification email after requesting Send As permission from a Google Group, see the FAQ section at the bottom of this article.
:::

### Gmail Send As configuration recommendations

- Enter a value into the **Name** field to set the formatted name displayed in emails sent from this address.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SQbERHIxi9mApRnREPUms_screenshot2020-07-28at30646pm.png" size="50" width="838" height="510" isUploading="false" darkWidth="838" darkHeight="510" alt="Gmail “Add another email address you own” form showing the name Ashby Recruiting and recruiting@ashbyhq.com email address, with options to treat it as an alias or specify a different reply-to address." showCaption="false"}

- After setting up [Send As permissions](https://support.google.com/mail/answer/22370), the new address appears in Ashby on the [Shared Email Aliases page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases) in **Admin**.

## Editing shared email aliases

Organization Admins can update the display name of a shared alias at any time from **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases).

:::hint{type="warning"}
The email address of an existing alias cannot be changed. To use a different address, unshare the current alias and set up a new Send As address in Gmail, then share it on the [Shared Email Aliases page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases).&#x20;
:::

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases).
2. Find the alias you want to update and click `Edit`.

![Shared Email Aliases settings page with the Edit shared alias dialog open, showing the email address, display name, and the option to use the alias as the organization’s default no-reply address.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rvrKL_N6SkR_gjKLirKKX_shared-email-aliases-ashby-2026-09-21-at-111629-am.jpg)

3. Update the **Display Name** field.
4. Enable or disable the **Use as Default No-Reply Address for the organization** field if you would like to use this as your default no-reply address.
5. Click `Submit`.

### Making an alias the default no-reply address

Setting a shared alias as the default no-reply address means Ashby uses it in place of no-reply\@ashbyhq.com for all automated emails sent from your organization. Only one alias can be the default at a time. Setting a new default automatically removes the designation from the previous one.

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases).
2. Find the alias you want to set as the default and click `Edit`.
3. Check the **Use as Default No-Reply Address for the organization&#x20;**&#x63;heckbox.
4. Click `Submit`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/641jbHGAN1Cg_CpDvfHhh_shared-email-aliases-ashby-2026-09-21-at-112012-am.jpg" size="50" isUploading="false" width="400" height="314" darkWidth="400" darkHeight="314" alt="Edit shared alias dialog showing the no-reply email address, display name, and the selected option to use the alias as the organization’s default no-reply address." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
To revert to the Ashby no-reply address (no-reply\@ashbyhq.com), find that alias on the **Shared Email Aliases** page, click `Edit`, check **Use as Default No-Reply Address for the organization**, and click `Submit`. This automatically removes the default designation from your current custom alias.
:::

## Unsharing a shared email alias

Unsharing an alias removes it from the [Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases) page and makes it unavailable as a sender address for your team.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The alias currently set as the default no-reply address cannot be unshared. You must first assign a different alias as the default no-reply address before unsharing the current one.
:::

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases).
2. Find the alias you want to remove and click `Unshare`.

# Using aliases in Ashby

Once email sharing is configured, you see a `From` dropdown option to select an alternate email address when sending an email or sequence in Ashby. Use the dropdown to select the email address you'd like to send the email from.

![Email composer for candidate Elara Meadowlight with the From dropdown highlighted, allowing you to select the email address used to send the message.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ciD8CSA-KBxft6viZ7wdg_elara-meadowlight-product-support-coordinator-pittsburgh-ashby-2026-09-21-at-102311-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
No-reply or default shared email aliases cannot be used when sending sequences.
:::

# FAQs

### I'm trying to Send As a Google Group, but I'm not receiving my verification email after requesting Send As permission.

Your Google Group may not allow posting from emails outside your domain. You may need to update the Group to allow Post permissions from `Anyone on the web` to allow verification emails to come through. Only Group Owners can update these settings.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XnCt8qVta_z02Mo3npbiK_screenshot2024-07-17at104228am.png" size="70" width="675" height="496" isUploading="false" darkWidth="675" darkHeight="496" alt="Group permissions settings with the “Who can post” option highlighted and set to “Anyone on the web.”" showCaption="false"}

If you cannot see a setting to enable `Anyone on the web` to post to your group, you need to update your Google Workspace admin settings to allow group owners to pick this setting. For more information, see [Google's guidance](https://knowledge.workspace.google.com/admin/groups/set-organization-wide-policies-for-using-groups?hl=en\&visit_id=639255987106314834-1610016989\&rd=2#:~\:text=Under) on allowing group owners to update posting settings.

The resulting setting in the admin console should look like this:

![Google Workspace Groups for Business sharing settings with “Group owners can allow incoming email from outside the organization” enabled.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2fXz8vZ1cQuCdAQDRF72P_screenshot2020-11-26at105352am.png)

### Emails aren't sending from our shared email alias anymore - why?

This usually means the person who set up the shared email alias is no longer an active Ashby user. You can fix this by resharing the email alias with your team from the [Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases) page in **Admin**. We recommend setting this shared alias up from a service account to prevent issues in the future.

You can update the display name for emails sent from the Ashby no-reply email address in the **No-Reply Address Display Name** field in the **Messaging** section of **Admin > Job Boards >&#x20;**[Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/brand).

![No-Reply Address Display Name setting with “Learn Ashby Hiring Team” entered as the sender name for emails sent from Ashby’s no-reply address.](https://cdn.zappy.app/901c4f84e0f3cb2520de57ce0c91d72b.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
The display name cannot be empty and has a maximum length of 30 characters.
:::

### Can I determine a default sender when creating an email template?

No, the sender is determined at the time of drafting the email from the template, or when setting up automation for emails.

### Do I need access to the alias inbox to set up a no-reply alias?

Yes, alias inbox access is required to set up a no-reply alias in Ashby.

### I've set up an alias and new threads are being created in Gmail from emails sent using the alias via Ashby - what's going on?

This can happen if a user is replying to a candidate in Ashby using a Google Group alias when they aren't a member of that Google Group. Ensure that all users using the alias have been given access to the Google Group to ensure all replies stay in one thread.

### When would I use an alias or no-reply email?

Aliases or no-reply emails can be set as the sender for emails that you don't want to use your personal company email address for. For example, you could use an alias or no-reply email when sending an email as part of anconfiguration (more on this at [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota)) or when sending an email confirming that you've received the candidate's application (more on this in [Emails](docId\:VWMUFdaYhGhSdmcpU8Gnz)).

### I send a large volume of no-reply emails each day. Can I still use a branded email address?

This is possible if an email domain is configured within Ashby. If you are sending more than 1,000 no-reply or automated emails a day and would prefer to use a branded email address, check out our [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2) guide.

### When and where is a no-reply usually used or used by default in Ashby?

The following tools in Ashby can be configured to or automatically use the default no-reply email address (either no-reply\@ashbyhq.com or the default you configure):

| Tool                                                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                   | Notes                                                                                                                                          |
| ---------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Application confirmation email                       | An automated email sent to the candidate if they submit an application via your job board. This always uses the default no-reply email.                                       | More on configuring this at Email Template Creation and Management                                                                             |
| Referral confirmation email                          | An automated email sent to the referred candidate once they've been referred.                                                                                                 | More on configuring this at Email Template Creation and Management                                                                             |
| Auto-Reject emails                                   | An email sent to the candidate if they've been rejected by auto-reject rules configured on job postings. These can be scheduled so they aren't sent immediately on archiving. | More on this at Auto-Reject Applications                                                                                                       |
| Survey automation                                    | Configure automation to send an email to the candidate containing a link to a survey or questionnaire.                                                                        | Used by default if another email isn't selected in the automation configuration. More on survey automation options at Surveys & Questionnaires |
| Newsletter                                           | Send out newsletters to your talent pools to keep them updated.                                                                                                               | More on configuring newsletters at Newsletters                                                                                                 |
| Event confirmation emails                            | If a lead signs up to attend a hiring event, an email confirmation is sent out to them.                                                                                       | For more on setting up events, check out Events                                                                                                |
| Initial consent and consent extension requests       | If you have automation configured as part of your consent rules, an email is sent out to a candidate for their consent or a consent extension.                                | Want to know more about configuring consent rules and automation? Check out Data Privacy and Compliance                                        |
| Bulk application review                              | Rejection emails can be sent from a no-reply email within the bulk application review view.                                                                                   | Read more at Application Review.                                                                                                               |
| Interview confirmation emails                        | An email sent to the candidate at the point an interview is scheduled (if configured).                                                                                        | For more on configuring interview activities, check out Setting up Schedule Interview Activities                                               |
| Candidate activity automations                       | If an automated activity is configured to send an email to the candidate, this can be sent from a no-reply email.                                                             | More information can be found at Automated Activities                                                                                          |
| Alerts and scheduled dashboard notifications         | When alert or scheduled dashboard notifications are sent, these are sent from a no-reply email.                                                                               | For further info, check out Alerts and Scheduled Dashboards.                                                                                   |
| Sending an email to the candidate from their profile | You can opt to use a no-reply email when reaching out to the candidate via the Email option on the candidate profile.                                                         | Further information can be found at Candidate Profile.                                                                                         |

### Can I use a Microsoft 365 personal alias as an organization-wide no-reply address?

Microsoft 365 personal aliases can be shared with specific Ashby users through **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Email Sharing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing), but they cannot be added as organization-wide shared aliases in **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases).

To configure a company-specific no-reply address, use [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2).

[title] candidate.fyi
[path] Integrations/Candidate Experience/

candidate.fyi syncs Ashby data periodically to power the experience for the candidate.

This integration allows Ashby customers to provide an application tracker and portal for candidates, so they know exactly where they stand in the process and how to prepare at each stage while keeping them highly engaged.

To set up the integration, please create an API key via the instructions below, then get in touch with candidate.fyi support to help facilitate the integration.

## Setting up the Ashby API key

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Sign in to Ashby and click Admin in the top navigation bar.
2. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen, then Integrations to open up the Integrations Marketplace.
3. Select the candidate.fyi integration and click `+ Create API Key`. Copy the value provided. You could also save the key somewhere secure for future reference.
4. Copy the API Key and send it to the candidate.fyi team


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9517cb45ec6bddce81a6fc3286c1d2b6.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b43f203d1f4d643b7e731e757561cb2b.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2e3d1b749bdbb496822c8a05401e4aa1.png)

**
:::
::::


[title] CandorIQ
[path] Integrations/Candidate Experience/

CandorIQ is the modern way to scale and manage your people spend. Through one easy-to-use, integrated platform, automate and simplify your headcount planning and compensation management.

## Overview

Ashby is an all-in-one recruiting platform that helps companies of all sizes efficiently scale. Their customizable Applicant Tracking System (ATS) provides features to streamline hiring from pipeline and sourcing all the way through the offer.

CandorIQ and Ashby are next both gen solutions that share the vision of bringing analytics and a streamlined experience to their users, so a partnership between our companies just makes sense. By integrating with Ashby, CandorIQ customers can now bring their new hire data directly into their compensation management and headcount planning platform.

### How to integrate with Ashby

Thanks to our direct partnership with Ashby, setting up your integration is extremely easy. Simply find Ashby in the Integrations tab of your CandorIQ Settings and enter your API key.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/64b62a0299e3c4ba827b63cb/66a0401234a1f2ea321f369b_Ashby%20Integrate.png)

From your CandorIQ home page: Settings → Integrations → Explore Providers: Ashby → Connect → Enter API Key → Save

### How to use your Ashby Integration

Using your integration is even easier than getting it set up. Navigate to the “Search ATS Offers” button in the Offer section of the CandorIQ platform, then type in the name of the candidate. Once you select the appropriate name, your offer auto populates with the corresponding information.

From there, you can edit the information—if necessary—and generate an offer letter.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/64b62a0299e3c4ba827b63cb/66a040241bb31918b1b2e5c5_Ashby%20Offer%20Letter.png)

From your CandorIQ home page: Candidate > Offers > Create Offer > Search ATS Offers > Enter name and select the candidate.

### Support

The process is designed to be very straightforward and self-serve, but if you find yourself needing support, please reach out to your technical support specialist.


[title] How do I backdate offers in order to preserve reporting data?
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

When an offer is updated or offer details are changed (for example, amending the start date or changing the recruiter), a new version of the offer is created which can impact the offer status and reporting. This guide covers the best practices when it comes to updating accepted offers for hired candidates for your records to ensure that your reports remain accurate.

## Overview

On occasion, an accepted offer may need to be updated. To ensure the the Hired At date remains the same for the candidate, please follow the below steps when making any adjustments to your offers.

## Update the Offer

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Firstly, make any changes needed to your offer. Head to the profile for the hired candidate and click `View Offer`.

Click `Update Offer` in the Offer Details section to then make any adjustments as needed. Once you’ve made the needed adjustments, click `Submit`*.*


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/15f441227b8bfd9ac3fe900ebcbff5b0.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9627c95f96f7e5be3fa6ab33ec10f618.png)




:::
::::

## Marking the Offer Status as Accepted

:::hint{type="warning"}
Please note that if you’ve amended any fields in the offer that require re-approval, you will need to complete the approval process prior to setting the offer response.
:::

Once you’ve made adjustments to the offer, you’ll see the option to set the offer response again.

Click `Set Response` and then select `Accepted` to ensure the latest version of the offer has been accepted.

## Setting the original hire date

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once the latest version of the offer has been accepted, you can click on `Update Response` to then adjust the response date to match the date the original offer was accepted by the candidate.

Now your Hired At date will still be reflected when reporting on your offers.

****
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/650ad1dafc26d1a3b577c579eae16b9f.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d7b08b0d5e6ab2bd80bc5c5251247548.png)


:::
::::


[title] Scheduling and Conducting Interviews with AI Notetaker
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

Ashby's AI Notetaker automates the process of capturing interview details by joining your video calls to record, transcribe, and summarize conversations.

This article explains how to enable the AI Notetaker for your interviews and understand the candidate and interviewer experience.

For information on how to review recordings, transcripts, or use AI features post-interview, see [AI Notetaker Post-interview](docId\:Ch6TUUE-gvaQcYLMp9Bo8).

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- To use this feature, your organization must have the AI Notetaker enabled by an Org Admin. For setup and configuration, see [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP).
- AI Notetaker is compatible with video conferencing on Zoom, Google Meet, and Microsoft Teams.
:::

# Configuring on schedule interview activities

AI Notetaker can be turned on for schedule interview activities in your interview plans. This means it is automatically enabled for any interviews scheduled with Zoom, Google Meet, or Microsoft Teams, as long as the candidate and at least one interviewer has opted in.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you need to learn about schedule interview activities, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
- Editing schedule interview activities in a job's interview plan requires **Elevated - Admin** permissions or higher for that job.
- If your Org Admin has set AI Notetaker as a default setting in [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml), it is automatically enabled on your schedule interview activities.
- Updating the AI Notetaker settings directly in the interview activity overrides any org-level default settings going forward.
:::

## Enabling AI Notetaker on the activity

To add the AI Notetaker to a specific schedule interview activity:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select your job.
2. Go to the **Interview Plan** section and select `Modify` on the schedule interview activity you want to edit.
3. Navigate to the `Communication` tab.
4. In the **AI Notetaker** section, toggle the tool to `On` and select your recording mode:
   - **Speaker view:** Captures only the video of the active speaker (default).
   - **Gallery view:** Captures all participants in a grid layout.
   - **Audio only:** Captures audio only; the video remains a black screen.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Both speaker and gallery views capture any screen sharing that occurs during the interview.
:::

![Screenshot of the Communication tab in an interview activity showing the AI Notetaker toggle set to On and Recording Mode options.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XNQO8BWeJtypcu6DfMdHf_group-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-20157-pm.jpg)

## Selecting a compatible location

AI Notetaker works with video conferencing via Zoom, Google Meet, and Microsoft Teams, which should be set as the location in the schedule interview activity.

:::hint{type="warning"}
AI Notetaker does not currently support Microsoft Teams on GCC High or Zoom Gov.
:::

To configure the location:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select your job.
2. Go to the **Interview Plan** section and select `Modify` on the schedule interview activity you want to edit.
3. Navigate to the `Communication` tab.
4. Under the **Location** field, select either Google Meet, Zoom, or Microsoft Teams from the dropdown (depending on what your organization uses).
5. Click `Submit`.

![Screenshot of the Location dropdown menu in the interview activity settings showing video conferencing options.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-M0YTw_Ml2RAPNq72S0ef_awesome-job-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-23211-pm.jpg)

# Configuring when scheduling interviews

When manually or auto-scheduling an interview, you can configure the AI Notetaker to join the meeting in the **Configure Communications** step of the scheduling process.

This allows you to specify whether the AI Notetaker is enabled for a specific interview, even if disabled by default.

To adjust AI Notetaker settings during scheduling:

1. Click on the **AI Notetaker** tab on the left after arriving at the **Configure Communications** scheduling step.

![Screenshot of the AI Notetaker tab in the left-hand sidebar of the interview scheduling configuration.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BzvSfijTEbGEMBKf7ffYY_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-30425-pm.jpg)

2. Enable or disable AI Notetaker as needed.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
On the **AI Notetaker** tab, you may see a message indicating that AI Notetaker is not eligible to record the meeting. This occurs when:

- The candidate has opted out.
- No participating interviewers have AI Notetaker usage enabled.
- The location of the interview is not compatible with AI Notetaker.

The message clearly states the reason AI Notetaker does not record.

![Screenshot of a warning message in the scheduling workflow explaining why an interview is not recorded.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SCavxRZrUEE3VJvwdOhNw_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-23956-pm.jpg)
:::

3. Determine the recording mode.
4. On the **Invite Settings** tab, ensure the location is compatible with AI Notetaker (Zoom, Google Meet, or Microsoft Teams only).

## Viewing and editing the recording status on the candidate profile

You can view whether an upcoming interview is or will be recorded on the interview event on the candidate's profile. A `REC` icon shows on the interview activity.

![Screenshot of a candidate profile activity feed highlighting the REC icon on a scheduled interview.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ouu727FjB7064s0p5KLJq_bhaveen-dattani-generic-job-bhav-test-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-35055-pm.jpg)

If you'd like to set a specific interview to be recorded or not recorded, click `Actions` and:

- Select `Record this interview` to record the interview.
- Select `Cancel Planned Recording` to cancel the recording of the interview.

![Screenshot of the Actions menu on an interview activity showing options to Record this interview or Cancel Planned Recording.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VN1jstDH1CZRkp9XkeqDi_bhaveen-dattani-generic-job-bhav-test-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-34928-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
When enabling or disabling recording on an already scheduled interview, if calendar invites have already been sent, updated calendar invites are sent to the candidate and participants. This ensures recording disclosure messaging is appropriately added or removed from invites so all participants are aware.
:::

# Candidate experience and consent management

:::hint{type="info"}
Consent management settings are configured by Org Admins. See [AI Notetaker: Recording Consent Management](docId\:lGMY0r3mi20_VJCAgRxey) for more info.
:::

## Candidate consent experience with AI Notetaker

Disclosure messaging allowing candidates to opt out of recording is included in calendar invites and can be configured in the [Consent Management tab](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/recording-settings/consent) of the AI Notetaker Admin page.

A preview of this messaging can be seen on the `Calendar Invites` tab of the **Configure Communications** step during the scheduling process.

![Screenshot showing a preview of a candidate calendar invite containing the recording disclosure and opt-out link.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Bru9O8bRhTjcN15G9bQSh_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-31619-pm.jpg)

When a candidate clicks the link to opt out, they are brought to another page where they can click `Opt Out`. The messaging on this page can also be configured by Org Admins in the [Consent Management tab](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/interview/recording-settings/consent) of the AI Notetaker Admin page.

![Screenshot of the external candidate consent page with the button to opt out of interview recording.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FmdWfp5P1FeMzyNenHq1Q_interview-recording-consent-2026-04-16-at-31926-pm.jpg)

### Opted-out candidates

Once a candidate opts out, any recording on any scheduled or future interviews is disabled. Any existing calendar invites for upcoming scheduled interviews are updated to remove recording disclosure messaging (and optionally include a message specifically for candidates who have opted out, if configured by Org Admins).

If a candidate has opted out, they can use the same link to opt back in.

### Viewing candidate recording consent status

Recording consent can be found in the **Summary** section of the candidate's profile. If you've received communication from the candidate confirming that they'd like their status changed, you can click the pencil icon to manually update the status on their profile.

![Screenshot of the candidate summary section showing the Recording Consent status and the edit icon.](https://cdn.zappy.app/0c68de6ba027bb41f48121142310a599.png)

If recording consent is updated, an event is added in the candidate's feed on their profile for easy reference.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/fc4c84d9c568fc634116ffde71ef05a0.png" size="58" width="519" height="81" darkWidth="519" darkHeight="81" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the candidate activity feed showing an event log for a change in recording consent status." showCaption="false"}

## Interviewer experience with AI Notetaker

Org Admins can select which employees within the organization have AI Notetaker enabled or disabled. If at least one interviewer within a single scheduled interview activity (including an activity with multiple interviews scheduled) has AI Notetaker enabled, all interviews in that activity can be recorded.

Interviewers receive disclosure messaging within calendar invites informing them when an interview will be recorded. This messaging is configured by Org Admins and can be previewed on the `Calendar Invites` tab of the **Configure Communications** step, along with candidate messaging.

# Joining interviews with AI Notetaker

The AI Notetaker supports Zoom, Google Meet, and Microsoft Teams. The tool typically joins meetings up to one minute before the scheduled start time to ensure it is available immediately. It appears as its own participant cell within the meeting. Interviews with Phone Call or Custom locations are not recorded. Review the information below for your conferencing software to ensure you correctly admit the AI Notetaker so it can successfully record.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The AI Notetaker does not currently support Microsoft Teams on GCC High or Zoom Gov.
:::

## Zoom

The AI Notetaker experience in Zoom depends on your specific meeting settings:

- **No waiting room:** The AI Notetaker joins the call automatically at the scheduled start time.
- **With a waiting room:** The AI Notetaker enters the waiting room when the host starts the meeting. **You must admit the AI Notetaker for it to join the interview.**
- **Recording indicators:** The Zoom recording indicator is not active unless you are also using Zoom's native recording feature.

:::hint{type="info"}
The AI Notetaker does not work if you have end-to-end encryption enabled in your Zoom Admin settings.
:::

## Google Meet

Google Meet requires manual admittance for the AI Notetaker to participate:

- **Admittance:** The AI Notetaker joins the waiting room and **must be admitted by a host**. If not admitted within 10 minutes, the AI Notetaker is removed from the meeting due to Google Meet's native rules.

:::hint{type="info"}
Ensure **Host Management** is turned off in your Google Meet settings so that all participants can admit the AI Notetaker into the call.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Google may place meeting bots like the AI Notetaker in a "with potential risks" queue. This is a standard Google security change and does not reflect a specific risk with Ashby. For more information, see the [Google Workspace Updates blog](https://workspaceupdates.googleblog.com/2026/02/safeguarded-guest-admit-flow-in-google-meet.html).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BSQA14YgDoMPkskruDyCK_ashby-notetaker-queue.png" size="76" width="862" height="642" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the Google Meet security warning pop-up for a participant bot with potential risks." darkWidth="862" darkHeight="642" showCaption="false"}

Select the three dots to the right of `Deny` and click `Admit Entry` to allow the AI Notetaker to join.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k9CPEXLLF2vpkDkmNq-q4_ashby-notetaker-admit.png" size="72" width="724" height="560" position="center" alt="Screenshot showing the expanded menu in Google Meet used to admit the AI Notetaker entry." darkWidth="724" darkHeight="560" showCaption="false"}
:::

## Microsoft Teams

The AI Notetaker joins the Microsoft Teams waiting room and **must be admitted by a host**. If it is not admitted within 30 minutes, it automatically leaves the meeting.

***

:::hint{type="success"}
Now that you've learned how to schedule and conduct interviews with AI Notetaker, see how to review recordings, transcripts, and AI features in [AI Notetaker Post-interview](docId\:Ch6TUUE-gvaQcYLMp9Bo8).
:::


[title] Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365
[path] Integrations/Platform/

***

Ashby integrates with Google Workspace and Microsoft 365 to provide features that enhance hiring speed and efficiency. These integrations increase the risk profile of Ashby as a vendor, but provide significant benefits to your Talent team. Ashby requests access to the emails and calendars of your team members involved in the hiring process and stores a subset of this data to provide a fast and reliable user experience. Our database is encrypted at rest, logically separated by organization, and behind a virtual private cloud (VPC). Ashby encrypts all data transmitted between your IT systems, Ashby's servers, and Ashby's clients in transit. For more information, read our [Security Overview](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/security).

This article covers the access Ashby requests for each platform integration, the controls in place to protect sensitive data, and the lower privilege configuration options available to your IT or security team.  For information on Google Sign-In, Microsoft Sign-In, and Single Sign-On, see [Signing in to Ashby](docId\:vH7B6OAp3CIRSFeHtCYoA) and [SSO and SCIM](docId\:xjHaGVxjEDuAKq_CN6EUE).

# Benefits of access (with examples)

This section explains the benefits Ashby provides for the access it requests. Without this access, the functionality described is not available.

## Email sync

When Ashby can send email through your email provider (e.g., Gmail), your Talent team and hiring managers can:

- Send emails using predefined templates in Ashby. This creates a consistent candidate experience, from standardizing rejection explanations to how offers are made.
- Send emails on behalf of another user. For instance, this can be used to automatically email a candidate from the hiring manager or recruiter upon moving them to a certain stage.

When Ashby can read emails through your email provider, your Talent team and hiring managers can:

- Send sequences of emails to attract passive candidates. The sequence is paused when the candidate replies; this requires reading the email of the sequence sender. Most Talent teams make a significant percentage of hires from passive candidates.
- Display communication with a candidate on the candidate's profile. This allows a hiring team to coordinate communication (e.g., not repeat things already shared with the candidate, make sure the hiring team reaches out to congratulate the candidate on their offer) and not have to transcribe notes from their email communication (e.g., determine what links or information were already shared with the candidate).

## Scheduling

Your Talent team needs to schedule interviews in Ashby to request and capture interviewer feedback.

When Ashby can create calendar events, your Talent team can schedule interviews in Ashby without copying that information to your calendar provider (e.g., Google Calendar).

When Ashby can read the calendars of interviewers and their calendar events, it allows your Talent team to schedule with a more efficient interface manually and even automate scheduling:

- With candidate booking links, candidates can pick an interview time convenient for them based on the availability of potential interviewers. This saves your Talent team the back and forth of requesting availability and cross-referencing it with interviewers' calendars.
- Specific event titles can be considered free or soft conflicts with our scheduling keywords feature. This saves your Talent team from contacting the meeting owner to determine if a meeting can be overbooked. For instance, most organizations consider one-on-ones (e.g., using the keywords "1:1" or "1-1") to be easily reschedulable and consequently a free or soft conflict for scheduling interviews.
- In some cases, your team needs to schedule a candidate manually. Ashby provides a more efficient interface than calendar clients to cross-reference multiple calendars, the candidate's availability, and consider recruiting-specific information like interviewer load.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby can only integrate with one platform integration at a time. See [Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?](docId:92txkuC2vVMOrzXEPtMKJ) for more details.

Select the links below for more information on the platform integration you plan to use.

[Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3)
[Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3)
:::

# Google Workspace platform integration

:::hint{type="info"}
This section details the Google Workspace integration that powers email and calendar sync functionality. It does not include Ashby's Google Sign-In or SSO/SCIM integrations.

See [Google Workspace](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM) for more details about setting up the email and scheduling integration.
:::

## What does it do?

Ashby integrates with Google Workspace to enable key features like displaying your conversations with candidates in the candidate profile feed and scheduling interviews directly in Ashby.

The integration supports the following:

| User       | Sync Google Workspace users to automatically provision/de-provision them as Ashby users                                               |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Email      | Sync emails between candidates and users (based on inspecting to/from headers)<br />Send emails and email sequences from within Ashby |
| Scheduling | Sync employee calendars<br />Send event invites<br />Sync meeting rooms                                                               |

None of these options are required, but all are recommended for the best user experience with Ashby.

## What access controls are in place?

Ashby understands that email and calendar data are very sensitive, and puts access controls in place to only show data that is relevant to the hiring process. Ashby also applies a strict permission system where users are granted access to jobs and candidate records on a need-to-know basis (see "Access Control" below).

Default user access is very limited and does not include access to any candidate or job data. Employees cannot view their own candidate profile (their candidate profile must be linked to their employee profile in Ashby to prevent this). Ashby also supports truly confidential jobs that only the creator and those they give access to can see.

### Email

Ashby syncs and displays email when relevant to the hiring process. Only emails from Ashby users with an "Elevated Access" or "Organization Admin" role are synced, since these roles are assigned to employees involved in the hiring process. From these users, Ashby only stores emails sent from Ashby or involving a candidate:

- Emails containing a to, cc, or bcc with the candidate's email and subsequent emails marked by the email provider as being in the email thread.
- Emails sent from Ashby and subsequent emails marked by the email provider as being in the email thread.
- If the candidate's domain matches your organization's auth domain, emails are not synced for that candidate. If the candidate has two email addresses linked to their profile (one with the organization's auth domain and one without), emails including the email address without the organization's auth domain are still synced.

Ashby provides additional controls within the application to:

- Mark emails as private and automatically mark emails during the offer stage as private. Viewing these emails requires an explicit access role in Ashby.
- Hide emails when a candidate moves to offer and hired stages.
- Stop syncing emails related to a candidate after they are hired.
- Stop syncing emails related to a candidate considered for a confidential job.

### Calendars

Ashby syncs all accessible calendars and events on those calendars. When visibility controls are enabled on calendars and calendar events, for instance, only showing a specific event as "Free" or "Busy" or marking an event as a private event, Ashby respects such controls and does not display the event details during scheduling.

Ashby supports shared calendars (e.g., "Interviews" calendar). Personal calendars are still used to determine interviewer availability during scheduling.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Recruiting Blocks require event-title visibility. If your organization is on the Enterprise plan or has purchased the [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1), you can use Recruiting Blocks. Ashby must be able to read the event title and time to recognize a Recruiting Block. Private or busy-only visibility can prevent Ashby from identifying the block. See [Recruiting Blocks: How They Work and How to Set Them Up](docId\:RBPEJNbmjr36BV9xbbs8q) for more information.
:::

## What are the options for integrating?

Ashby currently supports domain-wide delegation and individual user OAuth. Ashby recommends using domain-wide delegation, but also supports OAuth for email and scheduling. Ashby also offers lower privilege alternatives to these integration options, which you can view below.

### Domain-wide delegation

Using domain-wide delegation, all users in your workspace are added to Ashby, and Ashby has the same permissions relative to all users (specifically, their emails and calendars). However, Ashby does not sync email from limited-access users, even if its permissions technically allow it to.

The permissions requested through domain-wide delegation are:

| Permission Requested          | Google's Description                                                                                                                                                                   | Required for Feature                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| ----------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Sync users                    | See info about users on your domain                                                                                                                                                    | Automatically adding users to Ashby. If turned off, Ashby users need to be added, removed, and modified (e.g., name updates) manually by Ashby admins. Even if domain-wide calendar/email sync is enabled, only users who have logged in to Ashby at least once are synced.                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Sync meetings rooms           | View calendar resources on your domain                                                                                                                                                 | Add meeting rooms to Ashby scheduling. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see or view meeting room availability when scheduling.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Read/write shared calendars   | See, edit, share, and permanently delete all the calendars you can access using Google Calendar. View and edit events on all your calendars. Shared interview calendars in scheduling. | If turned off, Ashby users cannot see calendars such as shared interview calendars or schedules on shared calendars.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Read/write personal calendars | See, edit, share, and permanently delete all the calendars you can access using Google Calendar. View and edit events on all your calendars.                                           | Scheduling interviews through Ashby. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see calendars of potential interviewers when scheduling nor schedule on personal calendars.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Read email                    | Read all resources and their metadata; no write operations.                                                                                                                            | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see email correspondence; emails and sequences can only be sent from [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com). This is still possible with OAuth but to function properly needs all users corresponding with candidates to OAuth. As an alternative to disabling this, see Limited email sync below. |
| Send email                    | Send messages only. No read or modify privileges on mailbox.                                                                                                                           | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates through Ashby using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, sequences, offer letters, and one-off email cannot be sent from user emails, only [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com).                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Create Google Meet events     | Create, edit, and see information about your Google Meet conferences created by the app.                                                                                               | Creating Google Meet meeting links for interview scheduling and people workflows scheduling when Google Meet is selected.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Read Google Meet spaces       | Read information about any of your Google Meet conferences.                                                                                                                            | Reading existing meeting links that Ashby creates through the Google Calendar API.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |

### Individual user OAuth

Using OAuth, each user can separately authorize Ashby for a full list of scopes, provided below (in their [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info)). It is not possible for a given user to only allow some of the scopes; they can accept all or none.

Here is the full list of requested scopes:

- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/userinfo.profile
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/userinfo.email
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.send
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.readonly
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/calendar
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/calendar.readonly
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/calendar.events
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.created
- https\://www\.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.readonly

Any users without OAuth do not have their candidate communication synced with Ashby, cannot send emails from Ashby, and cannot be automatically scheduled through Ashby.

The permissions available with OAuth are, for a recruiter or member of the hiring team who accepts those scopes:

| Permission Requested          | Google's Description                                                                                                                         | Required for Feature                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| ----------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Read/write shared calendars   | See, edit, share, and permanently delete all the calendars you can access using Google Calendar. View and edit events on all your calendars. | Shared interview calendars in scheduling. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see calendars such as shared interview calendars nor schedule on shared calendars.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Read/write personal calendars | See, edit, share, and permanently delete all the calendars you can access using Google Calendar. View and edit events on all your calendars. | Scheduling interviews through Ashby. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see calendars of potential interviewers when scheduling nor schedule on personal calendars. (The interviewer has to also accept this in the case of individual OAuth.)                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Read email                    | Read all resources and their metadata; no write operations.                                                                                  | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see email correspondence; emails and sequences can only be sent from [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com). To function properly, this needs all users corresponding with candidates to OAuth. As an alternative to disabling this, see Limited email sync below. |
| Send email                    | Send messages only. No read or modify privileges on mailbox.                                                                                 | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates through Ashby using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, sequences, offer letters, and one-off email cannot be sent from user emails, only [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com).                                                                                                                                               |
| Create Google Meet events     | Create, edit, and see information about your Google Meet conferences created by the app.                                                     | Creating Google Meet meeting links for interview scheduling and people workflows scheduling when Google Meet is selected.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Read Google Meet spaces       | Read information about any of your Google Meet conferences.                                                                                  | Reading existing meeting links that Ashby creates through the Google Calendar API.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |

## Lower privilege alternatives for Google Workspace

While Ashby recommends the above integration methods, widely adopted even in sensitive industries like finance and health care, we understand that some security teams may have different risk assessments.

To address this, Ashby offers alternatives with more restricted access, though these come with reduced functionality for your Talent team.

For the full permission details of each integration option, see [Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3).

### Limited email sync

For organizations using domain delegation, Ashby offers a "Limited Email Sync" option. This syncs only email metadata, such as recipient, sender, blind carbon copy (BCC), and subject line, while excluding the email body.

As a result:

- Ashby no longer requires the `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.readonly` scope. The scope `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.metadata` can be used instead.
- Ashby cannot reference email content.

Functionality impact:

- Email sequences continue to work, as Ashby can detect candidate replies.
- However, the Talent team needs to contact users directly to view the email body.

### OAuth a separate Google Workspace account for each hiring team member

If you prefer not to provide access to internal employee accounts, you can create dedicated email accounts for hiring team members (e.g., \[employee name]@\[secondary domain]) under a separate domain within your organization.

Limitations:

- Team members must manage two inboxes: their primary inbox and the separate hiring account.
- Internal calendar access is restricted, impacting Ashby's automated and manual scheduling features.
- Workaround: Calendars can be manually shared with these accounts for partial visibility, but ongoing maintenance is required as new accounts or calendars are added.

### Sending emails without email read access

If your organization wants to send emails from Ashby without allowing Ashby to read email contents, authorize these Google scopes:

- `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.send`
- `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.settings.basic`

The `gmail.send` scope allows Ashby to send messages. The `gmail.settings.basic` scope allows Ashby to verify which addresses the Google account can send from. This scope does not grant Ashby access to read email contents.

Do not grant the `https://www.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.readonly` scope if your organization does not want Ashby to read email contents.

This configuration supports sending email, but does not provide the email-sync functionality that depends on reading email.

### OAuth a shared Google Workspace account

Alternatively, you can create a shared email/calendar account (e.g., hiring@\[your domain]) for the Talent team to use. This account can be shared in Ashby for sending emails and managing scheduling.

Limitations:

- Candidate experience is compromised:
  - Emails do not show the recruiter's name.
  - Communication cannot be visually separated by role (e.g., recruiter vs. hiring manager).
- Restricting access to interviewer calendars prevents the use of automated and manual scheduling features.
- Calendars can be shared with the shared account to enable partial visibility.

# Microsoft 365 platform integration

:::hint{type="info"}
This section details the Microsoft 365 integration that powers email and calendar sync functionality. It does not include Ashby's Microsoft Sign-In or SSO/SCIM integrations.

See [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7) for more details about setting up the email and scheduling integration.
:::

## What does it do?

Ashby integrates with Microsoft 365 to enable key features like displaying your conversations with candidates in the candidate profile feed and scheduling interviews directly in Ashby.

The integration supports the following:

| User       | Sync Microsoft users to automatically provision/de-provision them as Ashby users.                                                      |
| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Email      | \* Sync emails between candidates and users (based on inspecting to/from headers) \* Send emails and email sequences from within Ashby |
| Scheduling | \* Sync employee calendars \* Send event invites \* Sync meeting rooms                                                                 |

None of these options are required, but all are recommended for the best user experience with Ashby.

## What are the options for integrating?

Microsoft 365 can integrate with Ashby in the following ways. The full documentation on how the integration is set up is available at [Microsoft 365](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7):

- Ashby's managed Azure application (default and recommended for most teams)
- Custom Azure application

Ashby also offers lower privilege alternatives to these integration options, which you can view below.

### Custom Azure application

With a custom application, your team can fully configure a custom application and integrate it with Ashby. This option is recommended for teams who want full control over the access granted to Ashby from the outset, and is required if their tenants are hosted in Microsoft's Government Community Cloud (GCC).

See [Microsoft Custom Applications (GCC High)](docId\:wlPEo48eVOA15qd5ty_q6) for more details.

### Authorization

Ashby uses a combination of application and delegated permissions to integrate with Microsoft 365. Application permissions allow an admin to grant access to resources on behalf of all users, while delegated permissions require every user to grant access individually.

**Application permissions requested**

When using Ashby's managed Azure application, Ashby requests the following application permissions.

| Permission Requested | Microsoft's Description                                                                                           | Required for Feature                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| User.Read.All        | "Allows the app to read user profiles"                                                                            | Automatically adding users to Ashby. If turned off, Ashby users need to be added, removed, and modified (e.g., name updates) manually by Ashby admins. Even if domain-wide calendar/email sync is enabled, only users who have logged in to Ashby at least once are synced.                                                                                                                                   |
| Group.ReadWrite.All  | "Allows the app to read group properties and memberships, and read conversations for all groups"                  | Shared interview calendars in scheduling. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see calendars such as shared interview calendars nor schedule on shared calendars.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| MailboxSettings.Read | "Allows the app to read user's mailbox settings. Does not include permission to read \[or send] mail."            | Employee timezone sync. Allows accurate timezone settings in scheduling.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Mail.Send            | "Allows the app to send mail"                                                                                     | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, sequences, offer letters, and one-off email cannot be sent from user emails, only [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com).                                                                                                                                                             |
| Mail.ReadWrite       | "Allows the app to create, read, update, and delete mail. Does not include permission to send mail."              | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see email correspondence; emails and sequences can only be sent from [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com). To function properly, this needs all users corresponding with candidates to OAuth. As an alternative to disabling this, see Limited email sync below. |
| Calendars.ReadWrite  | "Allows the app to create, read, update, and delete calendar events." Does not include events on group calendars. | Scheduling interviews through Ashby. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see calendars of potential interviewers when scheduling nor schedule on personal calendars.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |

**Delegated (OAuth) permissions requested**

When users individually authorize Ashby for Microsoft Office 365, Ashby requests delegated versions of the above application scopes, and depending on your intended calendar and video conferencing setup, a few additional scopes that Microsoft does not make available as application scopes.

| Permission Requested     | Microsoft's Description                                                                                                             | Required for Feature                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| User.Read.All            | "Allows the app to read user profiles"                                                                                              | Automatically adding users to Ashby. If turned off, Ashby users need to be added, removed, and modified (e.g., name updates) manually by Ashby admins. Even if domain-wide calendar/email sync is enabled, only users who have logged in to Ashby at least once are synced.                                                                                                                                   |
| MailboxSettings.Read     | "Allows the app to read user's mailbox settings. Does not include permission to read \[or send] mail."                              | Employee timezone sync. Allows accurate timezone settings in scheduling.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Mail.Send                | "Allows the app to send mail"                                                                                                       | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, sequences, offer letters, and one-off email cannot be sent from user emails, only [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com).                                                                                                                                                             |
| Mail.ReadWrite           | "Allows the app to create, read, update, and delete mail. Does not include permission to send mail."                                | Sequences (sourcing) and communications with candidates using a recruiter's email address. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see email correspondence; emails and sequences can only be sent from [no-reply@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:no-reply@ashbyhq.com). To function properly, this needs all users corresponding with candidates to OAuth. As an alternative to disabling this, see Limited email sync below. |
| Calendars.ReadWrite      | "Allows the app to create, read, update, and delete calendar events." Does not include events on group calendars.                   | Scheduling interviews through Ashby. If turned off, Ashby users cannot see calendars of potential interviewers when scheduling nor schedule on personal calendars. (The interviewer has to also accept this in the case of individual OAuth.)                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Group.ReadWrite.All      | "Also allows the app to read and write calendar, conversations, files, and other group content for all groups the user can access." | Shared interview calendars in scheduling. If turned off, Ashby users cannot schedule on shared calendars.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| OnlineMeetings.ReadWrite | "Allows the app to read and create online meetings on your behalf."                                                                 | Microsoft Teams video links in meeting invites in scheduling. If using Microsoft Teams meetings with your Microsoft 365 account and this is turned off, Ashby cannot automatically add meeting links to scheduled interviews.                                                                                                                                                                                 |

### Details on Microsoft 365 email access and metadata handling

Ashby's Microsoft 365 integration enables organizations to sync user inboxes and calendar data for recruiting workflows such as candidate replies, sourcing sequences, and interview scheduling. This section outlines what data Ashby accesses, how it is processed, and what is stored when using the Microsoft Graph API with `Mail.ReadWrite` permissions.

**Summary of email processing**

When a user connects their Microsoft 365 account in Ashby, Ashby registers change notifications (webhooks) for that user's **Inbox** and **Sent Items** folders. When a new or updated message is detected, Ashby:

1. Fetches the message using Microsoft Graph.
2. Evaluates a defined set of metadata fields.
3. Determines whether the message is relevant to an active candidate or job application (e.g., by matching the sender or recipient to a known candidate email address).
4. If the message is relevant, Ashby retrieves and stores the full email body.
5. If not, Ashby discards the message and does not persist it.

**Metadata fields accessed**

Ashby uses the Microsoft Graph API's `$select` parameter to restrict the fields it accesses when evaluating a message. These fields include:

- bccRecipients
- ccRecipients
- conversationId
- conversationIndex
- from
- id
- internetMessageHeaders
- internetMessageId
- isDraft
- receivedDateTime
- replyTo
- sender
- sentDateTime
- subject
- toRecipients

Ashby uses these fields exclusively to determine whether the email should be associated with an active candidate record.

**Data that is stored**

Ashby only stores the full content of an email if it determines the email is related to a candidate or sourcing activity. Otherwise, Ashby evaluates the email in memory and discards it.

This selective access pattern ensures that Ashby only persists recruiting-relevant communications while operating within the broader constraints of Microsoft's Graph API (which does not offer more granular email scopes like Google's `.metadata`).

**Access scope**

Ashby uses the `Mail.ReadWrite` permission scope as required by Microsoft to access messages. This permission enables reading, writing, updating, and deleting emails; however, Ashby only uses it to read and associate relevant emails with candidate workflows and does not write or delete messages in user inboxes.

**Compliance notes**

- Ashby does not store or process non-recruiting-related emails.
- Ashby does not fetch the full email body unless the message is recruiting-relevant.
- This behavior applies across both standard Microsoft 365 and GCC tenants.

## Lower privilege alternatives for Microsoft 365

While Ashby recommends the above integration methods, widely adopted even in sensitive industries like finance and health care, we understand that some security teams may have different risk assessments. To address this, Ashby offers alternatives with more restricted access, though these come with reduced functionality for your Talent team. For the full permission details of each integration option, see [Integration options for Google Workspace and Microsoft 365](docId\:vA3Yotx41YkdVfb8o0__3).

### OAuth a separate Microsoft 365 account for each hiring team member

If you prefer not to provide access to internal employee accounts, you can create dedicated email accounts for hiring team members (e.g., \[employee name]@\[secondary domain]) under a separate domain within your organization.

Limitations:

- Team members must manage two inboxes: their primary inbox and the separate hiring account.
- Internal calendar access is restricted, impacting Ashby's automated and manual scheduling features.
- Workaround: Calendars can be manually shared with these accounts for partial visibility, but ongoing maintenance is required as new accounts or calendars are added.

### OAuth a shared Microsoft 365 account

Alternatively, you can create a shared email/calendar account (e.g., hiring@\[your domain]) for the Talent team to use. This account can be shared in Ashby for sending emails and managing scheduling.

Limitations:

- Candidate experience is compromised:
  - Emails do not show the recruiter's name.
  - Communication cannot be visually separated by role (e.g., recruiter vs. hiring manager).
- Restricting access to interviewer calendars prevents the use of automated and manual scheduling features.


[title] Bravado
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Hunter AI is Bravado's AI GTM Recruiter. Hunter uses Bravado's proprietary sales performance data to source top sales professionals, then calibrates on the exact GTM profile employers are targeting, reaches out to perfect-fit candidates via email and LinkedIn InMail, and helps coordinate calls with hiring managers.

## What does the integration do?

This integration allows end users to sync Bravado candidate and application information with their Ashby ATS, allowing employers to track candidates all in one place.

## How to set up the integration

### Create API Key

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To enable the integration, you will need to create an API key in Ashby. You can create an API key by heading to Admin> Integrations> [API keys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys).

Click New to create a new API key, name your key and then click `Create API key`. Select all API scopes.

Be sure to take a copy of the key before closing out the pop-up.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07469be2350fc202b328cdf5b89cfe91.png)


:::
::::



### Add Ashby Source

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Ashby has a source entity to track the origin of candidates, but it must be added manually in the admin panel. Please add a new source labeled Platform: Bravado (or similar) via Ashby Sources. For more on creating sources, check out [Source Types and Sources](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA).

In Bravado’s API key settings, set the Default Source to the newly created Platform: Bravado.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/761b1ecfee1443b1439484be1db30509.png)


:::
::::


[title] AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

Ashby's native AI Notetaker frees your hiring teams to focus on evaluating candidates by automatically capturing detailed, structured notes during interviews. By removing the burden of manual note-taking, this tool speeds up your time-to-feedback and provides rich candidate context to help your team align quickly and make faster, more confident hiring decisions.

This article covers the steps to set up and configure AI Notetaker in your Ashby instance.

For information on AI Notetaker data retention and consent management settings, using the AI Notetaker during interviews, reviewing notes post-interview, or reporting on AI Notetaker, see the below resources:

- [AI Notetaker: Recording Consent Management](docId\:lGMY0r3mi20_VJCAgRxey)&#x20;
- [Scheduling and Conducting Interviews with AI Notetaker](docId\:DHujlxck8syMCi5neuqbR)
- [AI Notetaker Post-interview](docId\:Ch6TUUE-gvaQcYLMp9Bo8)
- [AI Notetaker Reporting](docId\:tTuCalxG5nA3rjpE-Swyf)

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & prerequisites**

- AI Notetaker must be set up by an **Org Admin**.
- You must opt in to AI features in **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features**.
- The AI Notetaker only supports interviews scheduled via Ashby.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
A free trial of the AI Notetaker is available across Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.

To learn more, see [How does the free trial work with the AI Notetaker?](docId\:vMT6GJvLHbHUUy_e__8my)
:::

# AI Notetaker feature overview

The AI Notetaker add-on provides the following features to help you manage your hiring process:

- Automatically record and transcribe your meetings (interviews and debriefs).
- Generate interview summary notes and insights.
- Share recordings with additional Ashby users within your organization.
- Access AI assistance for drafting feedback submissions.
- Use an interview-specific AI chat assistant.
- Manage granular candidate consent, opt-out, and data retention options.
- Connect meeting data with emails, feedback, and notes.

# Enabling the AI Notetaker

## Opt in to the AI Notetaker

To enable the AI Notetaker in your Ashby account:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features**.
2. If you have not yet enabled general AI features, select the `Enable AI Features` option first.
3. Toggle the `AI Notetaker` option to on.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/U0vJsnbSxDDHFpI9X2qq2_opt-in-features-acent-ashby-2026-01-15-at-94802-am.jpg" size="58" width="453" height="207" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the Opt-In Features settings page with the AI Notetaker toggle." darkWidth="453" darkHeight="207" showCaption="false"}

When you toggle on the AI Notetaker, the setup wizard opens. The wizard asks which users should have the tool enabled. You can choose:

- **Enable for all interviewers:** Everyone in your organization can record interviews once the tool is active.
- **Select individual interviewers:** Specify which users have access. You see a list of users in your Ashby account to determine access.

Once you have chosen your settings, click `Enable` to confirm.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DL7BsoQJAJ7bBpKmCLHZx_opt-in-features-acent-ashby-2026-01-14-at-105741-am.jpg" size="44" width="544" height="716" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the AI Notetaker setup wizard modal showing the options to enable the tool for all interviewers or select individuals." darkWidth="544" darkHeight="716" showCaption="false"}

# Managing settings for interviewers

You can adjust organization-wide defaults and individual settings by going to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > AI Notetaker** or clicking the `Configure` button on the AI Notetaker tile in the **Opt-In Features** section.

## Adjusting defaults

Use the `Default AI Notetaker Setting for Interviewers` dropdown to determine if the tool is on or off for interviewers by default. This applies to any new users added to your organization:

![Screenshot of the dropdown menu for setting the default AI Notetaker status for all interviewers.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ljLIIjXXVTAl-SC5W0Vcm_recording-interviewer-access-ashby-2026-08-06-at-33459-pm.png)

- **Disabled by default:** The AI Notetaker is off for all interviewers unless you enable it for specific users in the table or their profile (**Admin > Employees**).
- **Enabled for all interviewers by default:** The AI Notetaker is on for all interviewers unless you disable it for specific users.

If you switch the `Default AI Notetaker Setting for Interviewers`, you also have the option to revert any individual overrides to the new default.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/G7ih_ff--qsMu5sZiL3g4_ai-notetaker-acent-ashby-2026-01-14-at-103856-am.jpg" size="60" width="448" height="382" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the confirmation modal used to revert individual interviewer settings to match the organization's default setting." darkWidth="448" darkHeight="382" showCaption="false"}

`Enable for All Interviewers` or `Disable for All Interviewers` buttons may appear in the upper right corner above the interviewers list if any employees are not set to the default settings. Select this button to remove individual overrides and ensure everyone follows the organization default.

![Screenshot of the interviewer list view featuring buttons to bulk Enable or Disable the AI Notetaker for all employees.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SbkgAyVp_ejNnDgxgWsaC_recording-interviewer-access-ashby-2026-08-06-at-33705-pm.png)

## AI Notetaker access for specific users

As shown above, individual settings can be adjusted per user in the AI Notetaker admin view by toggling access on and off next to the user's name. Individual settings can also be adjusted on the user's profile.

To enable the AI Notetaker on a specific user profile:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.
2. Select the user and navigate to the `Interviewer Info` tab.
3. Toggle the `Enable AI Notetaker?` option to on.

:::hint{type="info"}
If at least one interviewer on a panel has the AI Notetaker enabled at the time of scheduling, the tool records the entire panel.

This means if you have a panel of four different interviews but one interviewer in one interview event has the AI Notetaker enabled, all events are recorded. We're looking to add more granular controls in the future.
:::

# Enabling in scheduling defaults

If you'd like the AI Notetaker to be enabled by default across all interviews, you can enable it within your scheduling defaults at **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Scheduling Defaults**.

1. On the `Communications` tab, enable the AI Notetaker option.
2. Select the recording mode from the following options:
   - **Speaker view:** Only video of the active speaker is captured. The recording switches between active speakers automatically with the flow of the conversation. This is the default setting.
   - **Gallery view:** All participants are recorded in a grid layout.
   - **Audio only:** Only audio is captured. Video appears as a black screen.

:::hint{type="info"}
Both speaker and gallery view capture any screen sharing during the recorded interview.
:::

# Permissions to view recordings

By default, meeting participants have access to their own recording in the interview briefing. Users with **Admin Private** access to a role can also view others' recordings.

To grant other users access to view recordings:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Access Roles**.
2. Create or update an access role to include the `Can See Meeting Recordings` permission stripe.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on access roles, check out [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_).
:::

# Permissions to share recordings

You can determine whether those who have participated in an interview or have role-based access should have the ability to share the recording with other interviewers or Ashby users in your organization by navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > AI Notetaker >** **Sharing**.



![Shows AI Notetaker sharing admin settings](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NohFVtHmsPsr23m98VYra_recording-sharing-ashby-2026-08-25-at-124921-pm.png)

- Turning on `Allow users to share recordings` turns on the sharing functionality. &#x20;

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
Elevated access users can be granted the access role permission `Can grant meeting recording access` that allows them to share the recording with additional users who *do not already have access* as well as revoke access if needed. If you would like recruiters, hiring managers, and other users with access roles to be able to share the recording with any other user and manage user access, ensure that this permission is enabled in their access role.  See [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_) for more information on configuring access roles.
:::

- Enabling `Allow Limited Access interviewers to grant recording access` allows limited access users who participated in the interview to share the recording with users who did not already have access.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on how sharing and managing recording access works, see [Sharing a recording](docId\:Ch6TUUE-gvaQcYLMp9Bo8) .
:::

# Data retention settings

AI Notetaker has separate data retention rules for recording media, transcripts, and AI-generated notes. Each rule has its own retention period, so you can set different schedules for each artifact type.

Each rule is disabled by default, and the default retention period is one year. You can customize the retention period in days, weeks, months, or years when you enable a rule.

:::hint{type="warning"}
When you delete or anonymize a candidate, Ashby automatically deletes the candidate's associated recording media, transcripts, and AI-generated notes.
:::

To configure an AI Notetaker data retention rule:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > AI Notetaker**.
2. Select the **Data retention** tab.

![Shows the data retention settings page](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EZABOb63jxeYINpETBw2-_recording-data-retention-ashby-2026-08-31-at-110819-am.png)

3. Select the retention rule for recording media, transcripts, or AI-generated notes.
4. Set the retention period using days, weeks, months, or years.
5. Toggle the **Enabled** field on.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/J68SUcoeGUDxPy6XOygae_ai-notetaker-transcript-retention-ashby-2026-08-31-at-94838-am.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1758" height="1630" darkWidth="1758" darkHeight="1630" alt="Shows the retention period and toggle to enable the rule" showCaption="false"}

6. Select `Save changes`.

Ashby evaluates each enabled rule during the daily retention run. When you enable a rule, artifacts created before the retention cutoff can be deleted during the next daily run.

The three rules are independent. For example, you can set a shorter retention period for transcripts while keeping AI-generated notes for longer. AI-generated notes that remain after their transcript is deleted cannot be regenerated from that transcript.

:::hint{type="danger"}
**Warning:** Deleting recording media, transcripts, or AI-generated notes is a data deletion action. Review the preview before you confirm a new or updated rule.
:::

:::hint{type="success"}
You've configured AI Notetaker for your organization! Check out [AI Notetaker: Recording Consent Management](docId\:lGMY0r3mi20_VJCAgRxey) to ensure you've configured these settings as well.

Still have questions? Check out the [AI Notetaker FAQs](docId\:Uwfzef6f9vLYUQwxILmSh).
:::


[title] Google Workspace: Individual OAuth
[path] Integrations/Platform/Google Workspace/

## Overview

With the OAuth setup route, each user would be required to authenticate Ashby’s access. To do this, instruct each user who needs to authenticate access to do the following:

- Hover over their name and company in the top-right corner of Ashby
- Click `Personal Settings`, then navigate to `Google Workspace Settings`
- Click `Connect with Google`&#x20;
- If you allow users to determine their own scopes as part of OAuth, they will also see a `Customize Permissions Before Connecting` option. This can be used if users need to review and adjust the permissions being granted before connecting.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/bc0507c21d8aded7592f9394ff307183.png" size="80" width="649" height="204" darkWidth="649" darkHeight="204" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
Please confirm with users the permissions they need to grant if they need to be customized. Without specific permissions, certain areas of Ashby will become non-functional.
:::

## Adding Ashby as a Trusted App

:::hint{type="danger"}
This is uncommon: If your Workspace Admin has enabled one of Google’s [strict third-party app controls](https://support.google.com/a/answer/7281227), e.g. "Don't allow users to access any third-party apps", you will need to add Ashby to your list of trusted apps. Most Workspaces don't require this, so only do this setup if you have issues connecting your Google account to Ashby.
:::

To get started, visit [App Access Control](https://admin.google.com/u/2/ac/owl/list?tab=apps), then open the Configure New App dropdown and select OAuth App Name Or Client ID.

![image (3).png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vryNP77CorKS3FgaELVk0_image3.png)

Search for Ashby’s OAuth app by name:

![image (4).png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JF77-9Vc2LGGqUy3pinUe_image4.png)

Check the box for the client ID beginning with `12916233634-j4itegf` and click `Select`.

![image (5).png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JBGQlNwlHUSBv2h-aT-DF_image5.png)

Finally, choose Trusted: Can access all Google services and click `Configure`.

![image (6).png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZiKN8QiaJmUD6vjpOxUy1_image6.png)

### Confirm successful setup

You should see that Ashby has been added as Trusted in the Access column.

![image (8).png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/u4t9ZW32EEPWcQdEU5JTm_image8.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If this isn't completed successfully, users will see a [warning](https://cdn.zappy.app/6855709f8555c6641390db7f6bfc3d2d.png) that Google hasn't verified this app.
:::



:::hint{type="success"}
Once this setup is completed, we recommend setting up a shared calendar for scheduling as a next step. More on this [here](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM).
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Users aren't seeing the Google Workspace Settings section within their Personal Settings - why?



If users do not see the Google Workspace Settings option within Personal Settings and you’d like to set up OAuth, please let support\@ashbyhq.com know, as we will need to enable this feature.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I clicked on the links in the documentation for the setup page in Google; why won’t it let me log in?

If you aren’t able to log in this indicates you don’t have adequate permissions to setup up the integration. Please ask your Google Workspace Admin to complete this on your behalf.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is there a way to see if other users have set up OAuth via their Personal Settings in Ashby?



There isn’t a way to view that in Ashby but this information can be viewed via [Google Workspace OAuth log events](https://support.google.com/a/answer/6124308?fl=1\&sjid=13840174909082112386-NC).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I allow users to determine their own OAuth scopes?

When configuring your general settings within the Google Workspace integration tile, ensure that the `Allow users to select OAuth scopes?` option is checked as part of your setup.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e15f95dd81d9fba0f1049725e7b56aa1.png)

Users will then have the option to customize their permissions before connecting.
:::


[title] Quality of Hire Surveys
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

Once a candidate is hired, you can send out surveys to assess employee success and performance. You can create and send a series of surveys to the newly hired employee's direct manager, with each step of the series timed by the employee's start date (set as part of the employee's offer).

:::hint{type="info"}
Getting started with Quality of Hire in Ashby? For a deeper walkthrough of the full workflow — from understanding what signal to collect, to configuring surveys, sequences, and automation, to managing enrollments and using reporting to improve hiring — take the [Quality of Hire course](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/quality-of-hire) in Ashby Academy. If you’re planning your rollout, the [Rolling out Quality of Hire playbook](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/blog/rolling-out-quality-of-hire?site_template_id=69cbe18248841412e709ea21) is a practical companion for stakeholder planning, building the form and sequence, and communicating the program internally.

Looking for information on reporting on your Quality of Hire results? Check out [Quality of Hire Reports](docId\:gpI3EuEN57-_Bs2GCEMHK).
:::

# Permissions & access

Quality of Hire Surveys are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

The below permissions levels are required for various actions related to the creation, usage, and viewing of QoH surveys:

| **Action**                                      | **Minimum permissions required**                                                  |
| ----------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Create forms and sequences                      | Organization Admin                                                                |
| Enroll, bulk enroll, reassign, or stop a survey | Elevated access + a job/team/location access role covering the relevant candidate |
| View QoH data beyond your own assigned surveys  | Quality of Hire access role (granted separately)                                  |
| Grant the Quality of Hire access role to others | Organization Admin                                                                |

# What is Quality of Hire?

Quality of hire refers to assessing whether your interview and hiring process identifies candidates who will succeed as employees.

Quality of hire differs from standard performance review processes in a few key ways:

1. Quality of hire is designed to begin assessment of employee success as early as possible.
2. Quality of hire is designed to give your talent team feedback on their recruiting process, primarily to improve interview process and assessment: early identification of signals that correlate with employee performance below or above expectations.
3. Quality of hire is designed to be low-overhead and quick to minimize management costs.

In Ashby, the Quality of Hire feature consists of setting up a survey sequence delivered to the newly hired employee's direct manager. The sequence consists of a customized set of steps timed from the employee's start date, and at each step a survey is delivered to the manager.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/52709c2a319a5a742eff34233e0d9e0f.png" size="70" alt="Quality of Hire survey sequence overview showing steps timed from an employee's start date" isUploading="false" width="819" height="233" darkWidth="819" darkHeight="233" showCaption="false"}

For example, a fairly common Quality of Hire process is a 30/60/90-day assessment, in which the hiring manager submits their new employee assessment 30, 60, and 90 days from the employee's start date.

In Ashby, the survey sequence steps are customizable in both number and duration between deliveries, along with the survey form delivered at each step of a Quality of Hire sequence.

# Overview

The following video provides an overview of Quality of Hire Surveys. You can also read the instructions below.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/d093c5c048024501b616a1416f26e89c"}

# Configuring Quality of Hire sequences and forms

Configuring your Quality of Hire surveys consists of two steps: creating your Quality of Hire forms for managers to complete, and setting up survey sequences to determine which form is sent to the hiring manager and when.

## Creating a new survey form

To create your Quality of Hire form, navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >&#x20;**[Employee Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/employee-surveys/quality-of-hire).

Click `+ New Form` to start building a new survey. Enter a title for your new survey form.

![Screenshot of the Employee Surveys page with the + New Form button highlighted](https://cdn.zappy.app/0d2cff330dadbc612798c7f493b77b89.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
The Overall Assessment question asking the manager to rate the employee's performance from 1 to 5 is added to the form by default. Although this question can be deleted, we highly recommend keeping it on all forms as it is used as the rating in reporting. This question can only be added once per form.
:::

![Screenshot of the survey form editor showing the numbered action buttons](https://cdn.zappy.app/2bf7d6bd1bbe09d04fd543195266ab0f.png)

1. Create a copy of the survey.
2. Archive the survey. The survey cannot be used moving forward but can be restored at any time.
3. Re-order the sections of the survey.
4. Delete a question on your survey.
5. Add a new question to your survey or a section of your survey.
6. Delete a section of your survey.

## Adding a new question

You can add the following question types to your survey form:

- **Short Answer**: A single line of text (unformatted).
- **Long Unformatted Answer**: Allows for multiple lines of unformatted text.
- **Phone**: Only domestic or international phone numbers.
- **Email**: Only valid email addresses.
- **Multiple Choice**: Select a single option from the list.
- **Checkboxes**: Allows you to select multiple answers from the list.
- **Date**: Selected via a date picker.
- **Yes/No**: Only yes or no answers. If not required, no answer can be left.
- **Number**: Only whole numbers or decimals are permitted.
- **Quality of Hire Rating**: This question can only be added once per form and serves as the Quality of Hire rating for reporting.
- **Linear Rating**: Add a value between 1 and 10. There is also the option to add comments.

:::ExpandableHeading
### Open this to view some Quality of Hire example questions

Below are some topics and examples of Quality of Hire questions you could add to your survey forms.

*Meeting expectations*

Long Unformatted Answer — What expectations or objectives do you have for this person at this point in their tenure?

Yes/No — Are these expectations being met?

Long Unformatted Answer — Add any further comments or feedback here.

![Screenshot showing an example Meeting Expectations section in the survey form editor](https://cdn.zappy.app/6ad95a1b7d902c91c61661952ceed13f.png)

*Resources*

Yes/No — Are we providing this person with the knowledge and training needed to meet those expectations?

Long Unformatted Answer — Add more information here if any additional resources are needed or have been requested.

![Screenshot showing an example Resources section in the survey form editor](https://cdn.zappy.app/85bd79e876e7100f48bc24caa8924665.png)

*Onboarding progress*

Yes/No — Is the employee making satisfactory progress in their onboarding?

Yes/No — Does the employee have a clear understanding of their onboarding targets or goals?

Long Unformatted Answer — Add any details on their onboarding progress or achievements towards targets.

![Screenshot showing an example Onboarding Progress section in the survey form editor](https://cdn.zappy.app/db20716534c1e9a0750b8fdc75c15d2c.png)
:::

## Creating a Quality of Hire survey sequence

Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications >&#x20;**[Employee Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/employee-surveys/quality-of-hire).

Click `+ New Sequence` to start setting up your sequence.&#x20;

![Screenshot of the + New Sequence dialog](https://cdn.zappy.app/cb06c44b73cddae13cc8e5c0c7374f8d.png)

Give your sequence a title, determine the cadence (standard defaults are provided, with the option to create your own), select your survey form, and confirm your sequence setup.

![Screenshot of the sequence setup wizard showing cadence and form selection](https://cdn.zappy.app/5738f510bedc22a4e908d8f88f543e73.png)

After you create your draft sequence via the setup wizard, you land at a configuration review. From this page, you can review your sequence details and edit anything as needed.

### Steps

In the **Steps** tab, you can add, remove, and edit the steps of your survey.

![Screenshot of the Steps tab showing sequence configuration options with numbered action buttons](https://cdn.zappy.app/5fb6d02586ce54935a030256fcb3ec42.png)

1. Archive the sequence. New hires can't be enrolled in the sequence when it's archived. The sequence can be restored at any time.
2. Save your edits. Once saved, the sequence is available to use. If you save a draft sequence, its status updates from Draft to Configured. Your sequences are listed with their status and a clear indication of whether automation is enabled or disabled.
3. Specify the unit used for measuring the employee's tenure. Can be set to days or months.
4. Adjust the number of days or months for the next step of the sequence to be triggered.
5. Adjust the survey form sent as part of the survey step.
6. Delete a step in the survey sequence.
7. Add a step to the survey sequence.

### Instructions

Use the **Instructions** tab to add any instructions to show to the hiring manager when completing the survey form. You can also link out to any internal resources that will help your hiring manager complete their feedback.

![Screenshot of the Instructions tab](https://cdn.zappy.app/dfb55a07c3eebea21faacb6746574e62.png)

### Automation

In the **Automation** tab, you can set up automation for your survey sequence. When automation is enabled, Ashby attempts to automatically enroll hiring managers in sequences for newly hired candidates. Ashby does this by identifying the hiring manager associated with the hired candidate and extracting the start date from the offer letter. You can set the automation to auto-enroll all new hires, or set up custom automation rules. Only new hires that match the criteria set are automatically enrolled in the survey sequence.

![Screenshot of the Automation tab showing automation settings and enrollment rules](https://cdn.zappy.app/bc0fe73a76500c2ec85485b34c768d8f.png)

1. Use the **Automation Settings** drop-down menu to choose whether to automatically enroll all new hires, or only those who meet custom conditions.
2. The `+ Add Field to Match` option allows you to add additional conditions that the employee must meet to be auto-enrolled into a sequence (if using custom automation rules).
3. Option to remove a rule from custom automation rules.
4. `Activate Draft Configuration` confirms your custom automation rules so they are applied to new hires going forward.
5. `Discard Draft Configuration` removes the conditions you have set up as part of your custom automation rules.

# Enrolling new hires

The following video provides an overview of enrolling new hires. You can also follow the steps below.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/521ae6804e94415e9ea430c96188a24e"}

If your team has opted not to use automated enrollment, you have the option to enroll any hired candidate from their candidate profile page.

There are three steps:

1. Click `+ New Activity` on the hired candidate profile.
2. Select `Quality of Hire`.

![Screenshot showing the + New Activity button on a hired candidate profile](https://cdn.zappy.app/1dc5d9541bcf0b54905092ca423d98c1.png)

3. Review the survey to be sent, the recipient (or manager), and the start date provided, then click `Enroll`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/bb89cb6238d0675b1bb4556f6ff20c10.png" size="70" alt="Screenshot showing the Quality of Hire enrollment dialog with the Enroll button" isUploading="false" width="510" height="262" darkWidth="510" darkHeight="262" showCaption="false"}

After completing these steps, the hiring manager is enrolled to receive surveys once the hired candidate joins as an employee.

# Bulk enrollment

## Reviewing recent hires

Recruiters can review their recent hires from **Reports >&#x20;**[Employee Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/employee-surveys/enrollments/list), where they can select the [Recent Hires](https://app.ashbyhq.com/employee-surveys/enrollments/recent-hires) tab to review all hires and their enrollment status. This is a place to identify any missing or pending enrollments.

![Screenshot of the Recent Hires tab showing hire enrollment statuses](https://cdn.zappy.app/66897be857996f82d4209df1ba7cda45.png)

## Bulk enrolling candidates

When reviewing recent hires, you can also take a bulk enrollment action. After selecting any candidates of interest using the checkboxes in the **Select All** column, click the `Bulk Enrollment` button. Select a Quality of Hire sequence. Ashby automatically enrolls the candidates, and any candidates with missing information are flagged for manual resolution.

![Screenshot showing the bulk enrollment candidate selection and button](https://cdn.zappy.app/e570a0bb0c9a27a1bde46c43bbd0b0c1.png)

# Survey submission and notifications

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ca9bd9343cf6467c811b9cf3fa1bda45"}

When a hiring manager has a survey due, Ashby creates a task on their home page as a reminder.

![Screenshot of the hiring manager's home page showing a Quality of Hire survey task](https://cdn.zappy.app/6a8b60a8289b6f8b1a87d1f9acfe2b6a.png)

Each user can also configure their [personal notification settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/notifications) for Quality of Hire surveys to receive an email notification or a Slack message if the Slack integration is set up. Users can submit their score and results directly within Slack.

![Screenshot of a Slack Quality of Hire notification showing score submission options](https://cdn.zappy.app/3783f4b5babc53a49237ca32defa737c.png)

The hiring manager receives the following notifications:

1. A notification when the request is created.
2. After three days, Ashby sends the first reminder.
3. Ashby sends daily reminders until the next step starts.

:::hint{type="info"}
When the survey sequence reaches its last step, reminders are sent for 30 days. If Ashby receives no response by then, the survey is marked as Skipped and the process ends. Reminders for any step prior to the final step stop when the next step is reached.

For example, if you have a Quality of Hire survey sent at 30, 60, and 120 days:

- Reminders for the 30-day survey continue until 60 days.
- Reminders for the 60-day survey continue until 120 days.
- Reminders for the 120-day survey continue for 30 days only, until 150 days.
:::

# Reassigning or stopping a survey

If the survey recipient needs to be changed or a survey needs to be stopped completely, navigate to **Reports >&#x20;**[Employee Surveys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/employee-surveys/enrollments/list). Click the enrolled candidate in question.&#x20;

![Screenshot of the Employee Surveys enrollment list](https://cdn.zappy.app/dfc4eb23889080ecffd0544695ea3ecb.png)

From here, you can choose to `Reassign` or `Stop Survey`.

![Screenshot showing the Reassign and Stop Survey options on an enrollment record](https://cdn.zappy.app/839ce6f35e2d13e48b099b38d56111e1.png)

# Providing access to Quality of Hire surveys and feedback

:::hint{type="info"}
With Quality of Hire surveys, hiring managers can only see the employees they are responsible for assessing. If you'd like to allow other users to access Quality of Hire feedback, this section covers how to allow that wider access.

Limited Access users who are assigned to a Quality of Hire survey can access their assigned surveys, including past surveys with skipped steps, from the `Employee Surveys` card on their home page. The card appears for users who are the recipient of a past or present Quality of Hire survey. They do not need Elevated Access or the Quality of Hire access role to add feedback to an assigned survey.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/be931c4b7d5049b7bf6a10e08c2a40cf"}

To provide broader visibility into Quality of Hire enrollments and submitted survey results, an Organization Admin grants access on a team-by-team basis using a special Quality of Hire access role. The Quality of Hire role can be granted for the entire organization, or limited to a specific team or set of teams.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The Quality of Hire role is not automatically included in Organization Admin permissions and must be granted separately as an additional access role.
:::

![Screenshot of the admin panel showing the Quality of Hire role assignment settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/5b069758143c04027eb1ebba1eff8271.png)

# FAQ

### Help! I'm seeing a Missing Information error or tag after enrolling a new hire

When automation is enabled, Ashby attempts to identify the hiring manager and the employee's anticipated start date. When this information is unavailable, the Quality of Hire sequence is generated in a "missing information" state, visible on the candidate's profile:

![Screenshot of a candidate profile showing a Quality of Hire sequence in the missing information state](https://cdn.zappy.app/748591c52aa523bd3e8e8069b8f9ceda.png)

The recruiter can click the three dots on the Quality of Hire survey activity, then select `View Survey Details` to see where information is missing and add it.

When viewing the enrollments page at **Reports > Employee Surveys**, Ashby clearly identifies missing information:

![Screenshot of the Employee Surveys enrollments page with missing information highlighted](https://cdn.zappy.app/7204fc11a2e985f551841156cf7034e1.png)

The recruiter can click the hired candidate's name to open their enrollment details and provide the missing information:

![Screenshot of the enrollment details page showing fields where missing information can be entered](https://cdn.zappy.app/12cf4d478fe6e82e991fad4a431e3b0e.png)

### What happens if a candidate is enrolled after they've already started?

If a new hire is enrolled after their start date, sequence steps that have already passed are marked as Skipped. For example, an employee enrolled in a 30/60/90-day sequence on day 45 of their employment has the 30-day step marked as Skipped. Similarly, if a sequence step receives no submission, it is marked as Skipped at the time of the next step.

![Screenshot of a Quality of Hire survey showing Skipped steps](https://cdn.zappy.app/6f9ead40c7f7cdf9b8526447866f1c23.png)

The manager can review any skipped steps and backfill results as needed.

### Who can see Quality of Hire results?

Hiring managers can only see the candidates they are responsible for assessing. If you'd like to provide additional access to view Quality of Hire results, see [Quality of Hire Surveys](docId:8HGJn7fBdlsBnk1fK-2Db).

### How do I edit the survey details (who receives the survey and the candidate start date)?

If a candidate's start date changes, you can update their Quality of Hire Survey from the candidate's profile. Click the three horizontal dots to the right of the Quality of Hire Survey activity and select `View Survey Details`.

![Screenshot showing the three-dot menu on a Quality of Hire survey activity](https://cdn.zappy.app/55853c0dae3af9f49cdc5d45b5cd5144.png)

From there, select `Edit Start Date` to set the employee's new start date and reschedule the survey accordingly. The option to edit the start date is not available once the first step has been completed (submitted or skipped).

Select `Reassign` to change the survey recipient. Click `Stop Survey` to stop the survey from being sent altogether.

![Screenshot showing the Edit Start Date, Reassign, and Stop Survey options](https://cdn.zappy.app/9b23110c21945cc00f278b837b6a5858.png)

### When will the survey show up as a task for a user to complete on their home page?

The survey is not released for completion until the day it is due. For example, if the Quality of Hire survey is set to send after 30 days, the user is prompted to complete it 30 days after the employee's start date.

### What happens if an employee leaves the company or is terminated within the Quality of Hire survey period?

If an employee is terminated in Ashby within the Quality of Hire survey period, the Quality of Hire survey status changes to Employee Terminated. Previous survey submissions remain accessible.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on terminating users in Ashby, see [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8).
:::

### Can I resend Quality of Hire surveys that were skipped?

A skipped Quality of Hire survey cannot be resent to the assigned Hiring Manager. However, Hiring Managers can add feedback to any skipped stages by navigating to **Reports > Employee Surveys** and clicking on the candidate in question. They can navigate to the skipped stage of the survey and click `Add Feedback` to complete the survey.

![Screenshot showing the Add Feedback button on a skipped Quality of Hire survey step](https://cdn.zappy.app/fe0e9cfbbe54427166451eaae1520ccd.png)

The assigned recipient can add feedback to the skipped stage as well:

- If the recipient has Limited Access, select the `Employee Surveys` card on the home page. Open the relevant candidate and survey, navigate to the skipped stage, and select `Add Feedback`.

:::hint{type="info"}
The `Employee Surveys` card appears for users who are the recipient of a past or present Quality of Hire survey.
:::

### What is the difference between the Enrollment Status and Step Status for Quality of Hire surveys?

When you view a Quality of Hire survey enrollment, you see both the enrollment status for the overall sequence and the step status for each survey in that sequence.

The enrollment status can be one of the following:

- Draft
- Enrolled
- Finished
- Cancelled
- Hiring Manager Deactivated
- Employee Terminated
- Skipped

:::hint{type="info"}
An enrollment has a **Skipped** status when every survey in the enrollment is skipped. An enrollment has a **Finished** status when at least one survey in the enrollment is submitted, even if other surveys are skipped.

For example, if a three-survey enrollment has two skipped surveys and one submitted survey, the enrollment status is **Finished**. If all three surveys are skipped, the enrollment status is **Skipped**.
:::

For survey step statuses, they can be one of the following:

- Future Step
- Feedback Pending
- Submitted
- Skipped

:::hint{type="warning"}
The **Skipped** status can apply to an individual survey step or to the overall enrollment. For a survey step, it means the candidate was enrolled after the window for that step passed, or the step received no submission before the next step began. For an enrollment, it means every survey in the enrollment is skipped.
:::

In the below example, the enrollment status is **Enrolled** and the three-survey step statuses are **Skipped**, **Skipped**, and **Feedback Pending**.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c3943269a3822e17663603179edacf41.png" size="80" alt="Screenshot showing a Quality of Hire enrollment with Enrolled status and three survey steps marked Skipped, Skipped, and Feedback Pending" isUploading="false" width="598" height="378" darkWidth="598" darkHeight="378" showCaption="false"}


[title] AI Features in Ashby
[path] Ashby AI Features/

This guide provides an overview of the AI-powered features in Ashby and the best practices for using them.

# Enabling AI features in Ashby

Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features** to opt in and enable some or all of the following AI features in Ashby:

![The opt-in features page in Admin > Organization Setup](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NHPWcTzvMmbq1mM3W3m9j_opt-in-features.jpg)

- Custom agents as part of [Ashby Agents](docId:2ZUVVIXDetej4oDP_5Job)
- [AI Report Interpretation](docId\:r2SHcEUHaeo0ADH_Bm5ar)
- [AI Talent Rediscovery](docId\:d-gjG_O-jKBQagm_KsMZe)
- [AI Content Assistant](docId\:gVifM7N4yBa4cYPjJxx4Q)
- [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z)
- AI-generated fraud signal summaries as part of the [Candidate Fraud Detection Overview & Admin Settings](docId\:XVeiv6cJCFywtY7538SPl) tool (enabled separately from the Fraud Detection tool)
- [AI Candidate Assistant](docId\:gfXoUwYWswcWHeJ65OD8S)
- The AI-assisted report builder within [Report Builder & AI-Assisted Report Builder](docId\:kFMXauoRKZx6_EZbu32Po)
- Substitution tokens that generate sourcing content for [AI Tokens in Outreach Emails](docId\:ggQQ4VkH_ynMutuXv43ha) and [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6) for candidate emails
- Filter Assistant in [Candidate Search](docId:-ZYXRHB2dhZQNQWl3ugx1)
- [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr)
- Automatic reply status classification for [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4)
- [AI-Generated Feedback Summaries](docId\:Kcboq9bn_ndP_9I-isj2b) to provide a feedback summary on the candidate's profile
- AI-generated summaries for [Candidate Reviews](docId\:URozLu2ekwLBdHrVKLKbo)
- [Enhanced Resume Parsing](#)

Use the toggles beside each AI feature to activate or deactivate the features as needed. Select the links above to open guides with more information on each feature.

To enable future AI features by default as Ashby releases them, switch on the `Auto-enable new features` option. If your organization prefers to review new AI features before enabling them manually, switch this option off or leave it off.

# Best practices

Keep the following best practices in mind when using the AI features in Ashby.

## AI Content Assistant

After Ashby generates your content, review it fully. If you're happy to use that content moving forward, select `Looks good. Insert into text box.`

Alternatively, you can ask another question. To give feedback on the generated content, select `Give Feedback`. You can provide a rating (positive or negative) and add comments.

![The Looks good. Insert into text box button.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ed20d216b2183d072083daf9a301b164.png)

![The Give Feedback button. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/a34ee835107411a247c7c8ea5e0afb88.png)

## AI Notetaker

- For more on consent management and data retention, see [AI Notetaker: Recording Consent Management](docId\:lGMY0r3mi20_VJCAgRxey).

## AI Candidate Assistant

The AI Candidate Assistant is still learning, so review results when asking questions about candidates to confirm accuracy. To provide feedback on the assistant, select `Give Feedback`. You can add a rating along with any comments.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e93b09ec6e2403aead6e6eba477facad.png" size="58" width="335" height="107" darkWidth="335" darkHeight="107" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Use the Give Feedback button to provide feedback on AI candidate assistant responses."}

## AI-Assisted Report Builder

:::hint{type="info"}
Both Ashby All-In-One and Ashby Analytics users can opt in to use this feature.
:::

The AI-Assisted Report Builder is only available on the Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

Review all generated results carefully. If the AI-Assisted Report Builder does not build the report you're looking for from your prompt, select `Give Feedback` to provide a rating and add any comments.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e11edf02535c183965c44eb29a2154ae.png" size="70" alt="Use the Give Feedback button to provide feedback on the generated report." isUploading="false" width="468" height="181" darkWidth="468" darkHeight="181" showCaption="false"}

## AI-generated email tokens

When you place an AI-generated email token in an email template or sequence, the token is context-aware of its placement within the email body. As such, you can use it within a sentence or to generate an entire sentence or paragraph within the email.

When you draft your email, the token automatically starts generating content in the body of the email. After generation completes, review the content and either:

- Accept and add the generated content to the draft by selecting the checkmark icon
- Regenerate the content using the regenerate icon
- Remove the content and the token by selecting the trash can icon

![Generated content from an email token.](https://cdn.zappy.app/81340534ff28a7608b8126c360174d2a.png)

After you take action on the generated content, you can send the email to the candidate.

## AI Filter Assistant

:::hint{type="info"}
Both Ashby All-In-One and Ashby Analytics users can opt in to use this feature.
:::

Use a plain language prompt to generate filters in Candidate Search or in the Report Builder, or select from examples beneath the `Describe your filter` field. After Ashby generates your filter, review it to confirm the filters provided match your prompt.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KXpRTcbp1JxDaFncroJ33_report-builder-ashby-2026-06-24-at-32855-pm.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="568" height="602" darkWidth="568" darkHeight="602" showCaption="false" alt="Using the AI filter assistant by adding a description in the Describe your filter field."}

Use the thumbs up and thumbs down icons to provide feedback on the results. After selecting either option, you can select the `Tell us more…` chat bubble icon that appears to add further detail.

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW) and [Candidate Search](docId:-ZYXRHB2dhZQNQWl3ugx1) for more information on using this feature for report building and candidate search, respectively.
:::

## AI-Assisted Application Review

For more information on setting good job criteria, see [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr).

Any application form criteria you configure determine only whether the question was answered, not the quality or accuracy of the answer. Ashby flags blank or unrelated answers as not meeting the criteria.

Review the application along with the criteria evaluation to determine the evaluation's accuracy. To flag an inaccurate evaluation, select the three dots on the evaluation, then select `Flag Evaluation`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ba6ae16834bba6af41927882a251e503.png" size="62" width="416" height="139" darkWidth="416" darkHeight="139" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Use Flag Evaluations to report any incorrect evaluations."}

## Automated reply status

Review any AI-generated classifications to ensure accuracy. All AI-generated classifications have an icon beside the reply status to indicate that the feature classified them.

You can override the auto-classification for up to one week after Ashby makes the classification. Select the response drop-down to change the reply status as needed.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/81879f3ae02c988a496a2fb7bf59e344.png" size="50" alt="Overriding the auto-classification. " isUploading="false" width="339" height="153" darkWidth="339" darkHeight="153" showCaption="false"}

## Feedback summaries

After Ashby generates summaries, check all completed feedback forms to ensure the generated summary accurately represents each reviewer's viewpoint.

To generate a new summary, select `Regenerate` on the feedback summary within the candidate's profile.

![Use Regenerate to run the feedback summary generator again.](https://cdn.zappy.app/1acc9c9705253d2e7b7981a99eaa96bc.png)

## Candidate review summaries

After Ashby generates summaries, check all completed reviews to ensure the generated summary accurately represents each reviewer's viewpoint.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/26f34d7b153017549cef1291f6d159dc.png" size="70" alt="An example of a candidate review summary." isUploading="false" width="355" height="296" darkWidth="355" darkHeight="296" showCaption="false"}

## Candidate Fraud Detection

When reviewing AI-generated summaries, carefully review each signal too. As you review each signal, hover over the signal title to see more information about what the signal evaluates. Ashby lists any flagged signals above the signals checked so you can easily see what needs review.

After you review the data provided, choose from the following options to confirm the candidate's fraud status:

- `Mark Fraud`: Flag this as a fraudulent application. This triggers the process to archive the candidate with the **Rejected by Organization: Fraudulent Candidate** archive reason applied.
- `Not Fraud`: Mark the flagging as a false positive and confirm the application is not fraudulent. Ashby adds a **Fraud Signals - Cleared** label to the candidate's profile.
- `Unsure`: Mark the application as **Uncertain - Flagged for Monitoring** so you can review it again later.

:::hint{type="info"}
To update the fraud signals status on a candidate's profile, select the `Fraud Signals` label applied to the candidate's profile to reopen the **Fraud Signals History** popover, then select the correct status.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5da666c20eb98fcfe38bd1023cc8e337.png" size="70" width="1072" height="215" darkWidth="1072" darkHeight="215" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Fraud Signals History provides more details on why a candidate was flagged."}

## AI report interpretation tool

When generating your interpretation, open each generated insight to see further information about your results. If the insights don't match up, or you're seeing an **Out of Sync** status for the interpretation, select `Regenerate` to update the interpretation. An interpretation status shows as **Out of Sync** when you amend the filters or fields shown on a report.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/u6ApsamJaRJJTz26U5kok_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-115942-am.jpg" size="70" alt="Use the Regenerate button to update the interpretation." isUploading="false" width="580" height="380" darkWidth="580" darkHeight="380" showCaption="false"}

## Enhanced resume parsing

When you enable enhanced resume parsing, the tool extends the range of supported languages for parsing resumes (for example, it supports Korean and Hebrew). It also improves parsing for resumes with more complex layouts or formatting.

:::hint{type="success"}
You don't need to take any further action after enabling this feature. Ashby uses it to parse resumes added going forward, either by candidates applying to jobs or by an Ashby user adding resumes within the platform. For more on adding a candidate directly in Ashby, see [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### The following languages are supported with enhanced resume parsing

- Afrikaans
- Albanian
- Amharic
- Arabic
- Armenian
- Assamese
- Azerbaijani
- Basque
- Belarusian
- Bengali
- Bosnian
- Bulgarian
- Catalan
- Cebuano
- Chinese (Simplified and Traditional)
- Corsican
- Croatian
- Czech
- Danish
- Dhivehi
- Dutch
- English
- Esperanto
- Estonian
- Filipino (Tagalog)
- Finnish
- French
- Frisian
- Galician
- Georgian
- German
- Greek
- Gujarati
- Haitian Creole
- Hausa
- Hawaiian
- Hebrew
- Hindi
- Hmong
- Hungarian
- Icelandic
- Igbo
- Indonesian
- Irish
- Italian
- Japanese
- Javanese
- Kannada
- Kazakh
- Khmer
- Korean
- Krio
- Kurdish
- Kyrgyz
- Lao
- Latin
- Latvian
- Lithuanian
- Luxembourgish
- Macedonian
- Malagasy
- Malay
- Malayalam
- Maltese
- Maori
- Marathi
- Meiteilon (Manipuri)
- Mongolian
- Myanmar (Burmese)
- Nepali
- Norwegian
- Nyanja (Chichewa)
- Odia (Oriya)
- Pashto
- Persian
- Polish
- Portuguese
- Punjabi
- Romanian
- Russian
- Samoan
- Scots Gaelic
- Serbian
- Sesotho
- Shona
- Sindhi
- Sinhala (Sinhalese)
- Slovak
- Slovenian
- Somali
- Spanish
- Sundanese
- Swahili
- Swedish
- Tajik
- Tamil
- Telugu
- Thai
- Turkish
- Ukrainian
- Urdu
- Uyghur
- Uzbek
- Vietnamese
- Welsh
- Xhosa
- Yiddish
- Yoruba
- Zulu
:::


[title] Can I send emails in bulk?
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

You can! In this guide, we’ll cover how to send out emails to multiple candidates at once. For more on configuring templates, please check out [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ)&#x20;

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/4227bd18d5464bc4809081aac9bbe4fc"}

## Create the audience for your email

You can use filters on the Candidate Search page, or select multiple candidates in a job pipeline to determine who should receive an email.

### Candidate Search

:::hint{type="info"}
You can read more on filtering with candidate searches at [Candidate Search](docId:-ZYXRHB2dhZQNQWl3ugx1).
:::

Once you’ve set up the filters and determined the audience for your email, you can either click the `Select All` button to select all candidates who meet your criteria, or use the checkbox next to each candidate to select them.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2d441fa14651043e19d574c03df7036.png)

Once your audience has been selected, the bulk action options will become available. Click the `Email` option to open up the Bulk Action panel.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/479906823ef4f079b848f00c83e8fd6a.png)

Drafts will automatically be drawn up for each candidate. Click `Review Drafts` to be taken to the email editor.

You can then determine your email template, make any adjustments and fix any errors prior to sending.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/553036fe59d0c4224aad3f82c629ae29.png" size="46" width="596" height="705" darkWidth="596" darkHeight="705" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### Job Pipeline

When in a job, click the `Select` button. You can then select the candidates in the pipeline you’d like to send a mass email to.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5a191e3421f583cab95f7e79f839b429.png)

Once you’ve selected the candidates who should receive the email, the bulk actions you can take should become available. Click `Email` button to start the drafting process.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/45a45ee4d14c71ffd0143465c1cd1119.png)

The drafts will be generated for the selected candidates. Click `Review Drafts` to select an email template, personalize the emails further and to fix any errors.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/553036fe59d0c4224aad3f82c629ae29.png" size="46" width="596" height="705" darkWidth="596" darkHeight="705" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Reviewing and Editing Your Drafts

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5d84041266175beb35a416873e453017.png)

1\) No Issues/With Warnings/Cannot Send: This key helps you to determine if any emails have errors that need fixing prior to sending. In this case, both email drafts are missing a subject and a body so neither can be sent. The overall email draft is shown when All Recipients is selected, so any adjustments impact all emails sent. To adjust and fix errors for individual emails, click on a recipient in the Personalize Per Recipient  section.

2\) Personalize Per Recipient: View each email recipient and click on a recipient to view and amend each email draft individually.

3\) Template: Select the email template you’d like to use for the email.

4\) Send: Determine when you’d like the email to be sent to recipients.

5\) From: Select the sender of the email. You can send on behalf of someone else if they have shared their email address with you. More on this at [Email Sharing](docId:9mv0U6ctwMuoVkfc7XLwx).

6\) Subject: Add in the Subject line here.

7\) Body: Add in the body of the email here.

8\) Cc/Bcc: If other users or email addresses need to be looped into the email, add them here.

9\) Subject Substitution tokens: Add any  here. Our full list of tokens can be found at [Substitution Tokens](docId\:p8Ax-2LZyE5qH7GrOTHR6).

10\) Cancel: Leave the editor. You can opt to either keep the drafts for editing later or delete them entirely.

11\) Send X Emails: Send out your emails in bulk.

## Bulk Email Send Times

If you’re sending 10 campaigns or more at a time, then they will be sent over a period of time.

- \< 10 campaigns go out simultaneously and immediately.
- 10 - 100 campaigns are sent out over a 30-minute period.

Please note that scheduled emails may send 0-15 minutes after the scheduled time.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can send an email to up to 500 candidates at a time if sending from a user email address. When using the no-reply\@ashbyhq.com email address, this upper limit is 5000.
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I’m seeing a Missing Value For message when pulling up an email template. Why?

This error will show if the value cannot be found.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/51dac655543e89e6bcb6c50c0518db50.png" size="82" width="814" height="307" darkWidth="814" darkHeight="307" position="center" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

This is particularly common when:

- You’re trying to send a direct booking link but an interview activity hasn’t been generated and a booking link hasn’t been created for the candidate.
- You’re trying to send a candidate availability link but an interview activity hasn’t been generated and a candidate availability link hasn’t been created for the candidate.
- If you’re trying to send out a survey and the survey request and link haven’t been generated yet.
- If an interview has not been scheduled yet (panel information can only be pulled for interview emails if the interview has already been scheduled).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I bulk email archived candidates?

Yes. When on the Archived stage of a job’s pipeline, select the candidates you would like to email using the checkboxes and click `Email`. You will then be able to either email out a template or draft an email to send out in bulk.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Who can send bulk emails?

Users can only send bulk emails to candidates that they have edit permissions for. Depending on the user's permissions, they may or may not be able to email candidates.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set limits on how bulk emails are sent?

Yes!  The ability to send bulk emails can be limited in the below ways:

- Bulk emails are capped at 500 per bulk action. Additionally, Google and Microsoft (depending on your email provider) may impose limits on the number of daily emails that can go out.
- Users can see the date of the last communication with the candidate, and Admins can determine an [outreach frequency policy](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/outreach-frequency-policy) for sourcing to prevent candidates from being contacted too frequently.
:::


[title] Hireflow
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

With the Hireflow integration enabled, customers can surface existing candidate details in the Hireflow Chrome extension and add Hireflow candidates (manual and AI sourcing) directly into Ashby.

## Integrating Ashby with Hireflow:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Open Ashby and navigate to the Admin panel.
2. Select Integrations from the left menu and find the Hireflow tile
3. Select `Create API key for Hireflow` and copy the newly generated API key.
4. Head over to your Hireflow account.
5. Go to Settings, find Ashby and paste your Ashby API key:
6. You're all set! Every user in Hireflow now has access to the Ashby integration.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8b8fe8e678ea0b8b560d236d2e82b21a.png)

![Screen Shot 2022-05-17 at 2.22.58 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pJrfr2JaiCxBeXCobJy_G_screenshot2022-05-17at22258pm.png)
:::
::::

## Using the Hireflow integration:

1. Find the Hireflow campaign you’re ready to source candidates for and select Edit Campaign.
2. Scroll and find Ashby, then select the role you’re sourcing with the campaign:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6FTKC0_tugnVVFMXS1kG8_screenshot2022-05-17at22338pm.png" size="100" alt="Screen Shot 2022-05-17 at 2.23.38 PM.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Hireflow%20eefc88d04b95449b89413474e9e89e4f/Screen_Shot_2022-05-17_at_2.23.38_PM.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Hireflow eefc88d04b95449b89413474e9e89e4f/Screen_Shot_2022-05-17_at_2.23.38_PM.png" width="800" height="401" darkWidth="3446" darkHeight="1730" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. Save and go to LinkedIn to find a candidate.
4. Open the Hireflow Chrome extension, select the appropriate Ashby campaign:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/de2Utx2W2aGTmWFTQEeqn_screenshot2022-05-17at22535pm.png" size="100" alt="Screen Shot 2022-05-17 at 2.25.35 PM.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Hireflow%20eefc88d04b95449b89413474e9e89e4f/Screen_Shot_2022-05-17_at_2.25.35_PM.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Hireflow eefc88d04b95449b89413474e9e89e4f/Screen_Shot_2022-05-17_at_2.25.35_PM.png" width="800" height="410" darkWidth="3440" darkHeight="1762" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Note: If the candidate is already in Ashby, their details will be surfaced in the Hireflow Chrome extension and show the candidate’s details
:::


[title] Sending Emails from the Candidate Profile
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

Communicating with candidates and internal stakeholders directly from the candidate profile ensures your recruitment efforts stay organized and transparent.

This article explains how to draft and send emails to candidates, apply email templates, and use the team selector to quickly add relevant recipients, such as hiring team members and interviewers, to your emails.

:::hint{type="info"}
Emails such as application confirmations, referral confirmations, and others can be automated via email templates.  See [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ) for more info!
:::

## Permissions & access

The ability to email candidates is available on all Ashby plans, but not all user permissions level may email candidates.  See the table below to understand who can send emails.

| Access Role                                                    | Can email a candidate? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                      |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                      |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                      |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                      |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                      |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ✅                      |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ✅                      |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ✅                      |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                      |

# Drafting a new email

To start a new email, navigate to the candidate's profile and select the `Email` button in the top right. Clicking the button directly will automatically start an email to the candidate, while click the down arrow will allow you to choose whether to start an email to the candidate, or send an email to the hiring team.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mxIbLlduCcVOPuwxDK8m-_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-14417-pm.jpg)

This will open the email editor, where you can draft your email from scratch, or apply a template created by your organization admins.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fYMsx62tIezVk2ReG35ub_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-15437-pm.jpg" size="86" width="1358" height="1300" position="center" darkWidth="1358" darkHeight="1300" showCaption="false"}

## Applying email templates

Using a pre-built template is the quickest and easiest way to send standardized emails to candidates.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
In order to use a template, they must have been created by an org admin first. For more information, see [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ) .
:::

To apply a template, open the **Template** dropdown at the top of the email editor.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Gux_ryEltHlROJddOPwKN_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-15833-pm.jpg)

You'll see a list of available templates, and can use the search bar to search for a specific template if needed.  Hovering over a template will display a preview of the template next to it, as shown in the screenshot above. Select a template to continue.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QZxZZkaXGObhqtJD48Zyx_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-20033-pm.jpg)

Once you've select a template, the text will populate in the email editor. &#x20;

Any purple highlighted text is being pulled in from a substitution token in the email template.  The tokens are used to personalize the information in the email with data from the candidate's profile.

:::hint{type="warning"}
A substitution token may appear with a warning icon, indicating there is missing information. If this happens, you may need to populate the missing information in the candidate's profile or interview plan/schedule, or remove the substitution token and input text manually.
:::

You may also see yellow highlighted text when applying an email template.  This is placeholder text, and must be removed and replaced with the correct information, or else Ashby will block sending the email.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9Zpu39CJukeoCA79ja-SV_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-20617-pm.jpg)

## Configure email recipients

Ensure the the appropriate individual(s) have been added to the **To** field, as well as anyone who should be CC'd or BCC'd on the email.

### Adding email recipients with the user selector

This tool helps you quickly identify and add the right people to your candidate emails. By using the user selector, you can easily include hiring team members and interviewers without manually searching for each individual, ensuring your internal stakeholders stay informed.

You can find the user selector icon to the right of the **To** field in the email editor.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bmKdf2v5Fp82aX-N8H5oI_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-21923-pm.jpg" size="90" width="838" height="668" position="center" darkWidth="838" darkHeight="668" showCaption="false"}

If you are viewing a candidate within the context of a specific job application, the selector provides detailed groupings:

- **Hiring Team:** Displays all users assigned to the hiring team for that specific job.
- **Interviewers:** Lists everyone who has interviewed or is scheduled to interview the candidate. This section includes details on the specific interview type and the user's role.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TZvL_Mg_5Hlo1MCqrgU77_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-23209-pm.jpg" size="62" width="470" height="514" position="center" darkWidth="470" darkHeight="514" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
You can still use the user selector when viewing a candidate profile that is not associated with a specific job application. While the tool remains available to help you find users quickly, the specific **Hiring Team** and **Interviewers** groupings will not appear because there is no job context to pull that data from.
:::

The user selector is designed to be interactive and smart:

- **Automatic syncing:** If a user appears in both the **Hiring Team** and **Interviewers** lists, selecting them in one section will automatically select them in the other. If you deselect them in one area, they are removed from both.
- **Persistent visibility:** Unlike the standard search bar, the user selector remains open while you make multiple selections, allowing you to add several people at once without reopening the menu.
- **Search functionality:** You can search for any user in your organization by typing their name in the search bar. Note that the **Hiring Team** and **Interviewers** groupings will disappear while a search term is active to show you all relevant results.&#x20;

# Sending the email

In the **Send** dropdown, you can determine when the email should be sent. &#x20;



::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BbAliFVq5t66RJUEV6aV7_colten-o-reilly-product-manager-acent-ashby-2026-03-13-at-24223-pm.jpg" size="44" width="354" height="386" position="center" alt="Screenshot showing the Send dropdown and available options." darkWidth="354" darkHeight="386" showCaption="false"}

Options include:

- Send immediately
- Send on a specific date or time
- Send after a specific duration of time (e.g. one week) has passed

When all details have been filled in correctly, the `Send` button will turn purple, indicating that you can send the email.  Hit `Send` to send the email either immediately or in the future based on your selections.

## Undoing sent emails

If you have enabled `Undo Send` in your **Personal Settings > Email Settings**, emails you send from the candidate profile are held for up to 15 seconds before they are sent.&#x20;

During that window, you can select `Undo` from the confirmation message that appears in the bottom left. Undoing the email stops the send and reopens the email editor, so you can make changes to the existing email and send the updated version, if you wish.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xah2vCc4-AklltiM2jrpf_karla-collins-backend-engineer-ashby-2026-08-07-at-102535-am.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="595" height="210" darkWidth="595" darkHeight="210" alt="Shows the confirmation message with the Undo button." showCaption="false"}

If you do not select `Undo`, the email will send automatically after the 15-second delay expires.

:::hint{type="success"}
Congrats!  You've sent an email from the candidate profile.  For more information on navigating the candidate profile, see [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV) .
:::

# FAQ

### Why do Ashby emails include a “Report this email to Ashby” footer?

This footer gives candidates a direct way to report concerns about emails sent through Ashby. These reports help us protect candidates and maintain the security and reliability of Ashby’s email infrastructure.

Ashby includes the footer on all emails sent via the **no-reply\@ashbyhq.com** address. It cannot be edited or removed. This footer's presence does not indicate a problem with your organization or a specific message.

Recipients can learn more on our webpage: [Report Abuse](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/report-abuse)


[title] Google Workspace: Domain-wide Delegation
[path] Integrations/Platform/Google Workspace/

Domain-wide delegation is the recommended route to set up our Google Workspace integration.

Ashby uses a Google Workspace feature called [Domain-wide delegation](https://developers.google.com/admin-sdk/directory/v1/guides/delegation) that allows you to install our app on your domain. Using this feature you can grant OAuth access on behalf of all your employees, such that they do not need to grant permissions individually for their emails and/or calendars to be accessible for scheduling and emailing via Ashby.

To get started, visit [Domain-wide Delegation](https://admin.google.com/ac/owl/domainwidedelegation) then open the Configure New App dropdown and select OAuth App Name Or Client ID. Click `Add New` in the top left.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4230bf0713b83cc200b42b9bbb4fe5d7.png)

In the popover, enter the following information:

Client ID

```text
113156554739300448523
```

API Scopes (note: you need to copy the list of scopes you’d like to enable as a single string):

```javascript
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.resource.calendar.readonly, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/admin.directory.user.readonly, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/calendar, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.readonly, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/gmail.send,
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.created, 
https://www.googleapis.com/auth/meetings.space.readonly
```

Now click the `Authorize` button. The result should look like this:

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e8618b994e6f4d8ac45e057b513f96f5.png)

Refresh the page, Ashby should show all connections as functional.

:::hint{type="success"}
Once this setup is completed, we recommend setting up a shared calendar for scheduling as a next step. More on this [here](docId:9nUSHnd_uiv8wIGz-YpaM).
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I clicked on the links in the documentation for the setup page in Google; why won’t it let me log in?

If you aren’t able to log in this indicates you don’t have adequate permissions to setup up the integration. Please ask your Google Workspace Admin to complete this on your behalf.
:::


[title] Report Builder & AI-Assisted Report Builder
[path] Ashby AI Features/

Our new simplified report builder and template library helps you get to grips with reporting in Ashby quickly, helping to ensure you can get a hold of the data you need.

Both Ashby All-In-One and Ashby Analytics users can access the report builder and AI-Assisted Report Builder.

You can also have a conversation with the AI-Assisted Report Builder to get access to your key metrics quickly.

:::hint{type="info"}
Review all generated content carefully.
:::

# Overview

Watch the overview video below, or follow the steps in this article.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/34b82977a24347d6bc1127c3a2e92874"}

# Navigating the Report Builder

You can access the report builder by clicking **Reports > Report Builder**.

![Screenshot of the Report Builder main page in Ashby, showing four areas: Getting Started, Chat with Ashby, Templates, and Custom Report](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-3cOhej0wCCZ4_J785nvW_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-06-at-110721-pm.jpg)

- **Getting Started:** Here you can explore templates for reports and alerts (more on alerts at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)) and use them as a base to get the data you need. You can also explore our Analytics Glossary and Analytics Help guides to get acquainted with building reports in Ashby.
- **Chat with Ashby:** Access the Report Builder & AI-Assisted Report Builder to help you build a custom report. Describe what you're looking to build within a conversation and the assistant builds it for you.
- **Templates:** In the left-hand menu, you can view a list of the templates available without navigating to Report Templates. Select a topic, then the report type to generate it. You can also search for a template using the `Search templates…` field. For more on report templates, check out [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi).
- **Custom Report:** Looking to build something from scratch? You can access the core report types here. More on these at [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW).

# Generating and saving reports

When you select a template or custom report type within the report builder, the report builder highlights three key elements used to generate the report data:

- **The subject:** The type of record being counted. In the example pictured, jobs are being counted.
- **The timeframe:** The timestamp used and the date range to determine the results that should be included. As an example, the timestamp being used could be the date the job was opened and the time range is over the last six quarters, displayed by month.

![Screenshot showing the subject and timeframe options highlighted above a generated report in the Report Builder](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BeinTtxTX-5pC8Snic4Xm_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-30535-pm.jpg)

- **The field the results are grouped by:** How the results are further grouped to determine how they are displayed on the report. In our example, the data is already grouped by month in the Timeframe section, but you can click `Add Primary Field to Group Results By` to group by an additional field.

![Screenshot showing the Select a field option for grouping report results by an additional field in the Report Builder](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mHq-p7bSO6VtsKw1x9pwH_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-30615-pm.jpg)

You can also use the icons on the right-hand side of the report results to make further adjustments.

![Screenshot showing the Filters, Groupings, Visualization, Note, and Interpretation icons on the right-hand side of the report results](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UiL5h_m4q96cr4QADxVCx_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-30725-pm.jpg)

- **Filters:** Filter by additional fields to only pull the most relevant data to you and your team.
- **Visualization:** Set the chart style and adjust other visual settings for your report.
- **Note:** Add a note to your report for additional details that are helpful for other viewers. Click `+ Add Note` to add your note.
- **Interpretation:** Use the AI Report Interpretation tool to get insight on your report. More on this at [AI Report Interpretation](docId\:r2SHcEUHaeo0ADH_Bm5ar).

Once you have made any adjustments to the report, click `Save Report`. Add a title, set whether the report is private, add a note, and add your new report to any relevant dashboards. Click `Save Report` to add the report to your saved reports. Saved reports can be accessed under **Reports > Saved Reports**.

![Screenshot of the Save Report dialog showing fields for the report title, privacy setting, note, and dashboard selection](https://cdn.zappy.app/be7421411d57cd7403be298cb11f29a7.png)

# AI-Assisted Report Builder

The AI-Assisted Report Builder is only available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

To opt in to the AI-Assisted Report Builder, navigate to [Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access).

Check the `AI-Assisted Report Builder` checkbox to opt in to this specific feature.

![Screenshot of the Admin Opt-In Features page showing the AI-Assisted Report Builder checkbox](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tdEAgQJTK0-TtvShi74pm_opt-in-features-ashby-2026-10-07-at-31725-pm.jpg)

To access the AI Reporting Assistant, click `Let's Chat!` in **Reports > Report Builder**.

![Screenshot of the Report Builder showing the Let's Chat! button used to open the AI Reporting Assistant](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YLrO9Ui6mk2wubO-mVojC_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-31809-pm.jpg)

This opens a conversation where you can enter your prompt and the AI Reporting Assistant gets to work generating your report.

![Screenshot of the AI Reporting Assistant chat interface showing a prompt input field](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vj8mEzpefO1uw-MyoC_Au_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-31845-pm.jpg)

If the AI Reporting Assistant needs more information, it follows up with further questions to clarify the relevant information for your report before building it. You can respond in the chat to provide further context.

![Screenshot of the AI Reporting Assistant asking follow-up clarifying questions before building the report](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aHlMkBIcP7I0hklm_JYc6_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-32308-pm.jpg)

Once the AI Reporting Assistant generates the report, you can make adjustments, save it, or return to the chat to prompt the assistant to make other adjustments.

![Screenshot of a report generated by the AI Reporting Assistant with options to adjust, save, or return to the chat](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oq0NBVJLZEJsmNWD862wh_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-32050-pm.jpg)

To provide feedback on the generated report, click the `Give Feedback` button within the conversation. You can give a positive or negative rating and also provide a comment.

![Screenshot of the Give Feedback dialog in the AI Reporting Assistant showing rating options and a comment field](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6hc3aV_6Ny2rqAjQeAYDv_report-builder-ashby-2026-10-07-at-32117-pm.jpg)


[title] AI Notetaker: Recording Consent Management
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

This article explains how to configure recording consent management for Ashby's AI Notetaker. It covers how to collect candidate recording consent, set default consent policies, configure policy overrides, and customize disclosure messaging for calendar invites, confirmation emails, and booking links.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- The AI Notetaker must have been enabled for your organization. See [AI Notetaker Setup and Permissions](docId\:aLQifj88_70_q489mKpQP) for more information.
:::

# Recording consent management

You can set a default recording consent policy and set criteria for any policy overrides.

You can also request the candidate's recording consent choice via the following routes:

- Application form
- Calendar invites
- Confirmation emails
- Direct booking links
- Public booking links
- Candidate availability links

## Setting a default recording consent policy

:::hint{type="info"}
Setting a default recording consent policy does not override existing consent choices provided by candidates. It only applies to candidates who are yet to provide a consent choice.
:::

If candidates are yet to submit a consent choice, you can set a default recording consent policy to determine their recording eligibility. Set your policy by:

1. Navigating to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > AI Notetaker** and selecting the `Consent Management` tab.
2. Clicking `Edit` in the **Recording Consent Policy** section to amend your configuration.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CUwWOpcQoFfQiZqaUuFYE_recording-consent-management-ashby-2026-06-22-at-91816-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1251" height="344" darkWidth="1251" darkHeight="344" alt="The Consent Management tab on the AI Notetaker page with the Edit button highlighted" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. On the **Manage Recording Consent Rules** popover, set your default recording consent policy. Choose from the following options in the **Default Policy** dropdown:
   - **Opt-out Policy:** Recording is allowed by default. Candidates can opt out if they do not want to be recorded.
   - **Opt-in Policy:** Recording is disallowed by default. Candidates must explicitly opt in to be recorded.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ltTCsCWXq3uJAn6tSKveT_recording-consent-management-ashby-2026-06-22-at-92030-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="886" height="459" darkWidth="886" darkHeight="459" alt="The Manage Recording Consent Rules pop-up" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

## Policy overrides

If you want to set multiple consent policies, you can configure a policy override. Policy overrides allow you to set a different consent policy for candidates who meet the criteria you set, which allows you to satisfy different compliance needs (by location, for example).

### Example of a policy override

In this example, the organization's default consent policy is set to **Opt-out Policy** in the `Consent Policy` field.

The example organization wants to set an opt-in consent policy for candidates with Germany set as their location, or for candidates who have applied for jobs with the location set as Germany. A policy override can be created with filters to ensure that the policy override only applies to candidates meeting the set criteria.

![Setting a policy override on the Manage Recording Consent Rules pop-up](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DJqEyPvo4cpIwfYkbo-yf_recording-consent-management-ashby-2026-06-22-at-92634-am.jpg)

### Configuring a policy override

To configure a policy override:

1. Click `+ Add Override` and confirm the policy using the **Override Policy** dropdown (it is listed as the opposite of your default policy selection automatically).
2. Click `+ Add Field to Match` to select fields and determine the values for the criteria you want to set. You must add a filter to your override policy before it can be saved. Any candidates meeting this criteria have the override policy applied to them.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
To use OR logic like in the example above, set your first filter, then hover over the three dots to the right of `+ Add Field to Match`.

![The three dots to the right of the + Add Field to Match option to create OR logic](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fsW7HA0BUs9gVcvZf87qv_recording-consent-management-acent-ashby-2026-05-18-at-93534-am.jpg)

This shows an `Or` option. Click `Or`, then select another field. The filters then show `Any can be true`, indicating that OR logic is being used.

![Any can be true highlights that OR logic is now on for the filter.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cf5GpJm8NSFoZvjptyFbn_recording-consent-management-acent-ashby-2026-05-18-at-93749-am.jpg)
:::

3. Once you've configured your recording consent rules, click `Save`.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
For organizations that require candidates to explicitly opt in to interview recording, candidates can also submit their consent preference when booking interviews via direct booking links, public booking links, or candidate availability links for eligible schedules (if they haven't submitted a consent preference already). Interview schedules or activities must meet **all** of the following criteria for consent collection to appear in these experiences:

- The candidate requires affirmative consent (opt-in policy).
- No consent choice has been submitted by the candidate already.
- AI Notetaker is enabled for the organization and for this interview schedule or activity.
- The interview being scheduled uses a recording-eligible location (Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams).
- At least one interviewer on the schedule has AI Notetaker enabled.
:::

### Removing a policy override

You can remove policy overrides by clicking the trash can to the right of the **Override Policy** dropdown.



![The option to delete a policy override by clicking the trash can](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/loU-i-BhOwDldpaMS-1HB_recording-consent-management-ashby-2026-06-22-at-92838-am.jpg)

## Setting a recording consent choice via the application form

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring application forms, check out [Application Forms](docId\:CeZTj7Hpj_am6rT0kANrI).
:::

To add a question to your application form to collect the candidate's recording consent choice:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Application Forms**.
2. Either create a new form or click on an existing form to make edits.
3. Click `Add Question` and select the **Interview Recording Consent** option.
4. Confirm your changes by clicking `Save Form Changes`.

![Adding an interview recording consent question to an application form](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VBb9MGQbHQl4xc1IwsNDN-20260410-081830.jpg)

Candidates see your organization's AI Notetaker Consent Page Disclosure listed in the description of this question (you can edit this disclosure message in AI Notetaker admin). You are not able to edit the question description or the response options for this application form question.

![Setting the interview recording consent choice via the consent section of an application form](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FepKLyBB5NiKCRbWtzGBf-20260410-082303.jpg)

## Setting the recording consent choice via the link in calendar invites and confirmation emails

Candidates can opt out of recordings on their own by clicking the link included with disclosure messaging in calendar invites and confirmation emails. On the following page, they can click `Opt out` to update their status.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7ea23bdbc8a55cce3ae70ebe2dbed090.png" size="64" width="795" height="238" darkWidth="795" darkHeight="238" position="center" alt="Amending the recording consent choice via a link in a calendar invite or confirmation email" showCaption="false"}

Once a candidate opts out, any scheduled recordings are canceled and automatically disabled for any future interviews. Any existing calendar invites for upcoming scheduled interviews are updated to remove recording disclosure messaging (and optionally include a message specifically for candidates who have opted out).

If a candidate has opted out, they can use the same page to opt back in.

Candidates' recording consent responses are found in the **Summary** section of the candidate profile. If you've received communication from the candidate confirming that they'd like their status changed, click the pencil icon to manually update the status on their profile.

![Recording Consent section on a candidate's profile](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Hna5afzFb3QYEtaw8a_jC_ariadne-shepard-head-of-support-acent-ashby-2026-05-21-at-42548-pm.jpg)

If recording consent is updated, an event is added in the candidate's feed on their profile for easy reference.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/fc4c84d9c568fc634116ffde71ef05a0.png" size="58" width="519" height="81" darkWidth="519" darkHeight="81" position="center" alt="A Recording Consent Updated event on the candidate's feed" showCaption="false"}

## Setting a consent choice using a direct booking link

Once the candidate has selected a date and time for their interview using their direct booking link, they are required to set a consent choice before clicking `Schedule` to confirm the interview date and time.

![The recording consent choice message the candidate will see when using a direct booking link](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/48zF3o_UN5Uy26IrnNznF_collecting-candidate-recording-consent-in-direct-booking-links-2026-02-23-at-105808-am.jpg)

## Setting a consent choice using a public booking link

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you have a location-based policy override in place, the candidate is not required to set their consent choice with a public booking link as they are yet to have a candidate profile in Ashby.
:::

When using a public booking link, the candidate is required to set their consent choice after they've selected the date and time of the interview. The option to set a consent choice is listed underneath the fields requesting their name and email address. They can then click `Schedule` to confirm.

![The recording consent choice message the candidate will see if the criteria is met and they are using a public booking link](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k6qj-cB-nk4Ao5fRQzpxY_collecting-candidate-recording-consent-in-direct-booking-links-2026-02-23-at-105638-am.jpg)

## Setting a consent choice using a candidate availability link

When using a candidate availability link, the candidate can set their consent choice after they've selected their availability and clicked `Next`. They are required to set a consent choice before clicking `Submit` to confirm their availability.

![The recording consent choice message the candidate will see when using a candidate availability link](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JaHqXs50SR6yT1G0cy4hr_552391359-656bd631-17df-4074-9e19-a6e7faf3ef6dpng-3036a1400-2026-02-23-at-105241-am.jpg)

# Consent management and disclosure messaging

Custom recording disclosure messaging can be automatically included in your meeting calendar invites, confirmation emails, and more. Customize this messaging in **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > AI Notetaker** under the `Consent Management` tab to use it across the organization.

This helps establish a clear set of messages to use across all email templates and calendar invites. It's also useful in cases where you don't want individual users making any adjustments to the messaging (for example, because legal approved it in an exact form).

![The Recording Disclosure Message section of the AI Notetaker page](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/X4niONtx-rBx4u7IsUTPJ_ai-notetaker-acent-ashby-2026-01-14-at-100956-am.jpg)

**Candidate Disclosure:** This message is automatically appended to candidate calendar invites and confirmation emails when a scheduled interview is set to be recorded. Use it as a reminder and to inform the candidate how the recording is used. You can include the `Candidate Consent Management Link` substitution token, which allows the candidate to amend their consent settings on their Consent Management page as needed.

:::hint{type="danger"}
If a candidate opts in via this link, the already scheduled interview on which this message appears does not automatically have recording turned on. Recording needs to be switched on manually for this scheduled interview by the organizer.

Once the candidate has opted in, interviews scheduled in the future can have AI Notetaker enabled automatically if the interview activity has the AI Notetaker option enabled.
:::

**Opted-out Candidate Disclosure:** This message replaces the message in the **Candidate Disclosure** field when the candidate has opted out of recording. This can help reassure candidates that their preference is respected and does not impact their candidacy. You can also include the `Candidate Consent Management Link` substitution token, which allows the candidate to amend their consent settings on their Consent Management page as needed. If you prefer not to append a message in this case, this field can be left blank.

**Interviewer Disclosure:** This message is added to interviewer calendar invites so they know the interview is recorded. You can also use this space to let interviewers know how interview recordings are used internally.

**Consent Page Disclosure:** If a candidate navigates to their Consent Management page (via the link provided by the `Candidate Consent Management Link` substitution token), this is the message displayed there. Use this field to add information on how your company handles interview recordings, add FAQs, or include a link to resources like your organization's privacy policy or consent policy.

:::ExpandableHeading
If you'd like to switch back to the defaults for the above recording disclosure fields, open this to copy and paste the default messaging. Make sure to add the appropriate substitution tokens where specified.

**Candidate Disclosure:** To keep your interview experience seamless and distraction-free, we use an AI Notetaker to record and transcribe our interviews. This helps interviewers focus fully on the conversation and ensures your responses are captured accurately. The recording is only used internally for evaluation. If you prefer not to be recorded, you can opt out using the link below. Opting out does not impact your candidacy in any way. \[insert `Candidate Consent Management Link` substitution token here]

**Opted-out Candidate Disclosure:** This interview is **not recorded** because you've opted out. You can update your recording preferences at any time here: \[insert `Candidate Consent Management Link` substitution token here]

**Interviewer Disclosure:** This interview is recorded using Ashby's AI Notetaker to capture a transcript and structured notes. Recordings are used internally to improve evaluation consistency and reduce manual note-taking.

**Consent Page Disclosure: About interview recording**

To keep your interview experience seamless and distraction-free, we use an AI Notetaker to record and transcribe our interviews. This helps interviewers focus fully on the conversation and ensures your responses are captured accurately. The recording is only used internally for evaluation. If you prefer not to be recorded, you can opt out on this page. Opting out does not impact your candidacy in any way.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
To include a consent management link in either or both disclosure message options, click the `T` icon in the toolbar of one or both of the candidate disclosure fields and select the `Candidate Consent Management Link` substitution token.

![The candidate recording disclosure message substitution token](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rA-643EBeAuGxJ2WOtN9Q_email-templates-acent-ashby-2026-01-14-at-100654-am.jpg)

To include this message in Interview Confirmation Emails, add the `Candidate Recording Disclosure Message` substitution token to your email template. This token only includes the disclosure message if the scheduled interview is set to be recorded. When an interview is not set to be recorded, the token is automatically left blank, so there is no need to manually update your email template for each interview.
:::

# FAQ

### If my organization implements an opt-in policy override, will it apply to candidates already in the pipeline?

Yes, it affects all existing candidates who match the filters defined for the policy override.

For candidates who have already submitted a consent choice to opt in or opt out, those choices continue to apply:

- If a candidate has opted out, AI Notetaker is not included in the interview.
- If a candidate has explicitly opted in, AI Notetaker can be added to the interview.

Candidates who have not submitted any consent choice yet and match the new policy override filters are required to explicitly opt in for AI Notetaker to join any new interviews scheduled going forward.

:::hint{type="danger"}
Already scheduled interviews with AI Notetaker set to join are not affected by a change in policy. This means a candidate who requires opt-in based on policy override filters could still have AI Notetaker join an upcoming interview if it was scheduled before the policy override was set.
:::


[title] Email Deliverability Best Practices
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

Ashby integrates with your team's Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 account to send emails directly from your inboxes, meaning your entire team has a hand in ensuring email deliverability. This guide covers best practices for factors that influence your email deliverability, including sender reputation, email content, and compliance with email authentication standards.

# What is email deliverability?

Email deliverability refers to the ability of your emails to reach the intended recipients' inboxes without being marked as spam or rejected by email servers.

# What influences email deliverability?

There are many factors that influence email deliverability; in this guide, we focus on Sender Reputation and Email Authentication. Other factors include:

- Content quality: The relevance, wording, and design of your email content, including avoidance of spam-like features.
- Recipient engagement: How recipients interact with your emails, such as opening rates and marking emails as spam.
- Email list health: Regular cleaning of your list to remove inactive or invalid addresses helps maintain a good sender reputation.
- Compliance with email regulations: Adherence to laws like the Controlling the Assault of Non-Solicited Pornography and Marketing (CAN-SPAM) Act, General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), and Canadian Anti-Spam Legislation (CASL) is crucial for legal compliance and deliverability.
- Frequency and volume of emails: Consistent and balanced email sending practices help establish a stable sender reputation.

# What are email deliverability best practices?

- Regularly update records: Keep your Sender Policy Framework (SPF), DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM), and Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance (DMARC) records up to date, especially when changing email service providers or server configurations.
- Monitor email deliverability: Regularly check if your emails are landing in inboxes and not spam folders. Tools like Google Postmaster can provide insights.
- Stay compliant with email standards: Ensure your email content and practices comply with standards like CAN-SPAM or GDPR, depending on your region.
- Educate your team: Make sure everyone involved in email campaigns understands the importance of these authentication methods.
- Seek professional help if needed: If you're unsure about setting up these protocols correctly, consider consulting with IT professionals specializing in email systems.

# What are email authentication methods?

Email authentication is a technical method used to verify that an email message is from the sender it claims to be from. This process is crucial for preventing email spoofing and phishing attacks, where attackers might forge emails to seem like they come from legitimate sources. Though there are many, the best practice methods include SPF, DKIM, and DMARC.

# What are email authentication best practices?

There are well-established best practices that your IT Administrators are likely already familiar with. As of February 2024, Google is enforcing the following best practices. Failure to comply will result in deferred and eventually rejected emails.

## SPF (Sender Policy Framework)

This method allows the domain owner to specify which mail servers are permitted to send emails on behalf of their domain. When an email is received, the receiving server checks the SPF record in the Domain Name System (DNS) to verify if the email comes from an authorized server.

- SPF should be implemented by all senders.

## DKIM (DomainKeys Identified Mail)

DKIM adds a digital signature to each outgoing email message. This signature is linked to the domain and is verified against a public cryptographic key in the domain's DNS records. It ensures that the content of the email has not been tampered with in transit.

- DKIM should be implemented by all senders.

## DMARC (Domain-based Message Authentication, Reporting, and Conformance)

DMARC is a policy framework that utilizes both SPF and DKIM. It allows domain owners to indicate that their emails are protected by SPF and DKIM, and tells receiving mail servers what to do if neither of those authentication methods passes, such as rejecting the email or flagging it as spam. DMARC also includes reporting capabilities, enabling domain owners to receive reports on how their emails are being handled.

- DMARC should be implemented by senders who send 5,000+ emails per day.

# How do I implement email authentication best practices?

Below are quick overviews of how to implement each of the best practices; check out the linked guides for more detailed information.

## How to implement SPF

✉️ [Review Google's detailed guide on how to set up SPF](https://support.google.com/a/answer/33786?sjid=13141639566626348837-EU)

1. Create an SPF record: This is a TXT record in your domain's DNS settings that lists all the mail servers authorized to send emails on behalf of your domain.
2. Publish the record: Add this record to your domain's DNS settings. An example SPF record looks like `v=spf1 include:_spf.google.com ~all`.
3. Test the SPF record: Use online tools to ensure your SPF record is valid and correctly implemented.

## How to implement DKIM

✉️ [Review Google's detailed guide on how to set up DKIM](https://support.google.com/a/answer/174124?sjid=13141639566626348837-EU)

1. Generate a DKIM key: This is typically done through your email service provider and involves creating a public and private key pair.
2. Publish the public key: Add the public key to your domain's DNS settings as a TXT record. Your email service provider will use the private key to sign your emails.
3. Configure your email server: Ensure your email server or service provider is configured to sign outgoing emails with the DKIM key.
4. Test your DKIM setup: Verify that your emails are being signed correctly using DKIM testing tools.

## How to implement DMARC

:::hint{type="info"}
[Review Google's detailed guide on how to add a DMARC record](https://support.google.com/a/answer/2466563?hl=en\&ref_topic=2759254\&sjid=13141639566626348837-EU)
:::

1. Create a DMARC record: This is a TXT record in your domain's DNS that defines your DMARC policy and uses SPF and DKIM to validate emails.
2. Publish the DMARC record: Add this record to your domain's DNS settings. An example DMARC record is `v=DMARC1; p=reject; rua=mailto:report@yourdomain.com`.
3. Monitor reports: DMARC provides feedback on how your emails are processed by receivers, helping you identify and fix authentication issues.

# What is a sender reputation?

Your company's email sender reputation is a numerical score (0–100) assigned by Internet Service Providers (ISPs) to each organization that sends emails. This metric is a critical factor in determining your email deliverability. A higher sender reputation score indicates to ISPs a higher level of trust in the legitimacy and quality of your email communications. Consequently, a high score increases the probability that your emails will be successfully delivered to the inboxes of recipients in the ISP's network. Maintaining a strong sender reputation is therefore essential for ensuring reliable and effective email delivery in a business context.

# How do I check my sender reputation?

Many free tools can be used to check your sender reputation; we suggest one of the following:

- [Google Postmaster Tools](https://www.gmail.com/postmaster/)
- [Learn and Test DMARC](https://www.learndmarc.com/)
- [Mail Tester](https://www.mail-tester.com/)

# FAQ

### Why did Ashby send an email about email deliverability to our Google Workspace Admin?

In an effort to further curtail spam, Google and other email service providers have begun enforcing the use of best-practice email authentication methods. Ashby reached out to ensure your team is ready for this change so your team's emails continue to be delivered successfully. [Read Google's blog post about Gmail security and authentication](https://blog.google/products/gmail/gmail-security-authentication-spam-protection/) for more information about this change.

### Why do Ashby emails include a “Report this email to Ashby” footer?

This footer gives candidates a direct way to report concerns about emails sent through Ashby. These reports help us protect candidates and maintain the security and reliability of Ashby’s email infrastructure.

Ashby includes the footer on all emails sent via the **no-reply\@ashbyhq.com** address. It cannot be edited or removed. This footer's presence does not indicate a problem with your organization or a specific message.

Recipients can learn more on our webpage: [Report Abuse](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/report-abuse)


[title] Email Domain Setup
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

This guide outlines the steps to verify a domain for sending newsletter emails or for sending a large volume of no-reply emails via Ashby (over 1,000 emails a day). The setup process involves updating DNS records on a domain owned by your organization, so you’ll likely want to provide these instructions to your IT team or to someone who can configure DNS records for your organization’s domains.

Please note that verifying a domain for sending newsletter or no-reply emails can only be configured on the Enterprise plan.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

## Overview

To send newsletters using Ashby's Newsletter feature, you'll need to configure at least one domain for email sending. Configuring a domain is also beneficial if you send a high volume of no-reply emails and would prefer to use an email branded to your company, rather than using the default Ashby no-reply email address.

Configuring a domain is necessary because email providers like Google and Microsoft restrict the use of their platforms for bulk emailing and sending newsletters.  Google and Microsoft email accounts have daily sending limits, so you can't directly send newsletters or large numbers of emails from these accounts. To work around this restriction, you'll need to grant Ashby permission to send emails from one of your organization's domains on your behalf.

To do this, you’ll set a few DNS records on one of your organization’s domains so that Ashby can verify that you own the domain and so that Ashby has permission to send emails from this domain on your behalf.

### Prerequisites

To follow the steps below, you’ll need to be able to update DNS records associated with the domain you want to use for sending newsletters or no-reply emails. To access the [Email domains admin page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/domains), you’ll need to be an Ashby organization admin.

### Video Walkthrough

A video walkthrough of the email domain setup process is available below.

Note: In the walkthrough, the page is named Newsletters, but it’s since been renamed to Email Domains. The functionality is unchanged.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/4bbfda9330754c46ba7fe5d3acdc3936?sid=6fdfb94e-3388-46d5-b468-23bac9d2ab4d"}

- Log into your Ashby account and navigate to Admin in the top nav bar.
- Search for ‘Email Domains’ or visit the page directly at [this link](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/domains).

### Steps to Configure a Domain

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dSfn7uA9HY2FParG1DynK_cleanshot2024-07-24at1023352x.png)

- Click on `Add Domain` in the top right-hand corner of the page. Provide the domain you’d like to use for sending emails and click `Add`.&#x20;
- Once you click `Add`, you’ll have 72 hours to update your domain’s DNS records before your domain setup is considered Failed.
  Once your domain’s setup status is Failed, you’ll need to remove the domain in Ashby and re-add it in order to start the setup process again. For that reason, we recommend waiting to add the domain in Ashby until you’re ready to update the domain’s DNS records.

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZpYEPps00DxULBBJlMvA3_cleanshot2024-07-24at1023572x.png)

- After clicking Add, you’ll see a list of three CNAME records, one MX record, and one TXT record. You’ll need to set these DNS records on your domain.

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UuXg35bDdZGv6zkULH4sj_cleanshot2024-07-24at1026122x.png)

- Depending on where your domain is managed, the instructions for updating your DNS records will vary slightly. Below you can find links to documentation for updating DNS records from a few common providers.

**Cloudflare** See Cloudflare’s guide to managing DNS Records [here](https://developers.cloudflare.com/dns/manage-dns-records/how-to/create-dns-records/#create-dns-records)&#x20;

**Route 53** See Route 53’s guide to managing DNS records [here](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/Route53/latest/DeveloperGuide/resource-record-sets-creating.html)&#x20;

**GoDaddy** See GoDaddy’s guide to managing DNS records [here](https://www.godaddy.com/en-uk/help/manage-dns-records-680)&#x20;

**Other Providers** If your provider isn’t listed above, you can generally find documentation on updating DNS records by Googling ‘manage \{domain name provider} DNS records’&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
A Note on the MX record Depending on your domain registrar, you may need to provide the priority, which is at the start of the MX record's expected value, in a separate input. This refers to the '10' at the beginning of the record. In most cases, you can leave it formatted as it is in Ashby. However, some providers may require you to put the '10' in a separate input or on a different line.
:::

- Once you’ve configured the DNS records, head back to the Email Domains page in Admin and click on Check DNS Records in the bottom left of the domain’s configuration window. This will run a check to see if the DNS records have been found on your domain. It may take up to 72 hours for the records to be published and for the statuses to update to Verified.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-JGuCnzoP9zobx81SnTPW_cleanshot2024-07-24at1026402x.png" size="100" alt="CleanShot 2024-07-24 at 10.26.40@2x.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Email%20Domain%20Setup%20b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.26.402x.png" githubPath="Ashby Knowledge Base efd04871f5554358ada837de165070ca/Email Domain Setup b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.26.402x.png" width="3410" height="2032" darkWidth="3410" darkHeight="2032" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- Once your DNS records have all been verified, you can specify the email addresses you want to use. To add an email address, click `Add Sender Email Address` in the bottom lefthand corner.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q5I4PJJz2zS6_cKt3FdTo_cleanshot2024-07-24at1027192x.png" size="100" alt="CleanShot 2024-07-24 at 10.27.19@2x.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Email%20Domain%20Setup%20b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.27.192x.png" githubPath="Ashby Knowledge Base efd04871f5554358ada837de165070ca/Email Domain Setup b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.27.192x.png" width="3410" height="2032" darkWidth="3410" darkHeight="2032" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- In the Name field, provide the name you want email recipients to see when they receive emails from this address. In the Email Address field, provide the email address you want to use for sending  emails. The email must be a part of the domain you configured. For example, if you configured ‘acmecorp.com’ as your domain, you could provide an email here that ends with ‘@acmecorp.com’. Once both fields are filled out, click `Add` to add the email address.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sCQk2VLq9s97DtJyOTiuC_cleanshot2024-07-24at1028052x.png" size="100" alt="CleanShot 2024-07-24 at 10.28.05@2x.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Email%20Domain%20Setup%20b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.28.052x.png" githubPath="Ashby Knowledge Base efd04871f5554358ada837de165070ca/Email Domain Setup b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.28.052x.png" width="3410" height="2034" darkWidth="3410" darkHeight="2034" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- Once an address is added, it will appear beneath the domain, as in the example below. To remove an address, click on the trash icon on the far right. To add more email addresses, click `Add Sender Email Addres`s in the bottom left corner and repeat the same steps. You can add as many addresses as you want.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PCEkIt_N4u4avE9MZJ9OP_cleanshot2024-07-24at1028422x.png" size="100" alt="CleanShot 2024-07-24 at 10.28.42@2x.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Email%20Domain%20Setup%20b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.28.422x.png" githubPath="Ashby Knowledge Base efd04871f5554358ada837de165070ca/Email Domain Setup b71e519a08554cfca0bfe13011efe7ea/CleanShot_2024-07-24_at_10.28.422x.png" width="3412" height="2034" darkWidth="3412" darkHeight="2034" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

### Using Addresses in Newsletters

To use the email addresses you’ve configured to send Newsletters, open or create a newsletter and click on `Settings` on the top right of the page. In the settings menu, you’ll see a ‘From’ field (highlighted below). In this field, you can select the from address you want your newsletter to be sent from. The dropdown here will include all the addresses you’ve configured by following the steps above.

![CleanShot 2024-05-22 at 16.50.19@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lDYTrXRpz5wxuKTFJfAaE_cleanshot2024-05-22at1650192x.png)

### Switching your default no-reply address after setting up your new sender address

Once you’ve added your new sender address on the [Email Domains](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/domains) page, navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > [Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases). Click `Manage No-Reply Address`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5a0526c59e99f1be4b34cbac0c54ec01.png)

From here, you’ll be able to view your current no-reply address and select your newly configured sender address from the New No-Reply Address dropdown. Once you’ve selected your new no-reply address, click `Update` to confirm. This email address will now be used for all default no-reply emails.

If you’d like to return to the default Ashby no-reply email for future no-reply emails, click `Unshare` beside the configured no-reply address.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/2bcdfb0415d862d7675073fe6012c956.png" size="78" width="576" height="288" darkWidth="576" darkHeight="288" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that if your default no-reply address is not configured to sync emails to Ashby, replies that go to this email address will not appear in Ashby.
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why does my domain status still show as ‘Verifying’ in Ashby after I’ve set the required DNS records on my domain?

If you’ve set the DNS records on your domain, try clicking on `Check DNS Records` in Ashby to refetch the domain’s verification status. This ensures the status you see in Ashby is fully up-to-date.

It can take up to 72 hours for records to finish verifying, so if your status still shows as ‘Verifying’, it’s possible the records are still being published.

You should also confirm that the records were copied exactly as they’re displayed in Ashby. Verify that the quotes around the TXT record’s expected value were included in the record you published on your domain. Also verify that the MX record’s priority (the ‘10’ at the beginning of the MX record’s value in Ashby) is entered correctly in the format required by your domain registrar.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### My domain’s verification status shows up as ‘Failed’ in Ashby. What should I do now?

Once your domain’s status shows up as failed, you’ll need to delete the domain’s registration in Ashby, remove any DNS records you’ve set on your domain, and restart the verification process. To delete the verification in Ashby, click on `Remove Domain` in the bottom right corner of the domain’s entry in Ashby.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### When and where can a no-reply email be used or is used by default in Ashby?

The following tools in Ashby can be configured to or automatically use the default no-reply email address (either no-reply\@ashbyhq.com or the default you configure):

| Tool                                                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                          | Notes                                                                                                                                                                           |
| ---------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Application confirmation email                       | An automated email sent to the candidate if they submit an application via your job board. This will always use the default no-reply email.                                          | More on configuring this at [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ)                                                                              |
| Referral confirmation email                          | An automated email sent to the referred candidate once they've been referred.                                                                                                        | More on configuring this at [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ)                                                                              |
| Auto-Reject emails                                   | An email sent to the candidate if they've been rejected by auto-reject rules you've configured on job postings. These can be scheduled so they aren't sent immediately on archiving. | More on this at [Auto-Reject Applications](docId\:pDGw-WRUBWyFNzHKa9ota)                                                                                                        |
| Survey automation                                    | Configure automation to send an email to the candidate containing a link to to a survey or questionnaire.                                                                            | Used by default if another email isn’t selected in the automation configuration. More on survey automation options at [Surveys & Questionnaires](docId\:RlbgZsGQLmqCKGbBnYQyp)  |
| Newsletter                                           | Send out newsletters to your talent pools to keep them updated.                                                                                                                      | More on configuring newsletters at [Newsletters](docId\:h9M9sIQyi8ESS69a3z0mr)                                                                                                  |
| Event confirmation emails                            | If a lead signs up to attend a hiring event, an email confirmation is sent out to them.                                                                                              | For more on setting up events, check out [Events](docId\:Eqn6EvlXlKTZOERO21svS)                                                                                                 |
| Initial consent and consent extension requests       | If you have automation configured as part of your consent rules, an email will be sent out to a candidate for their consent or a consent extension.                                  | Want to know more about configuring consent rules and automation? Check out [Data Privacy and Compliance](docId:0xpIflEKfhKukBuFqKhi9)                                          |
| Bulk application review                              | Rejection emails can be sent from a no-reply email within the bulk application review view.                                                                                          | Read more at [Application Review](docId\:d_nxB_Kdz4fJru4hBCaLb).                                                                                                                |
| Interview confirmation emails                        | An email sent to the candidate at the point an interview is scheduled (if configured).                                                                                               | For more on configuring interview activities, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer)                                                 |
| Candidate activity automations                       | If an automated activity is configured to send an email to the candidate, then this can be sent from a no-reply email.                                                               | More information can be found at [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB)                                                                                           |
| Alerts and scheduled dashboard notifications         | When alert or scheduled dashboard notifications are sent, these are sent from a no-reply email.                                                                                      | For further info, check out [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) and [Scheduled Dashboards](docId\:Ttr2OmUg9YQPx1nkCMJS9).                                                    |
| Sending an email to the candidate from their profile | You can opt to use a no-reply email when reaching out to the candidate via the `Email` option on the candidate profile.                                                              | Further information can be found at [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV).                                                                                          |
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can you have multiple custom email domains for Newsletters?

Yes, multiple custom email domains can be configured per organization, but additional configuration is required to allow sending.

Users cannot automatically send from verified domains once the DNS settings have been properly configured. Once DNS settings have been configured, an admin must add specific sender email addresses to each domain. Only those explicitly added addresses will appear in the Newsletter `From` dropdown and can be used for sending.
:::

::::ExpandableHeading
### Can verified domain email addresses be used for bulk email sending?

Yes, with the following requirement: 

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="circle" indent="2"}
Email aliases must be shared: Even if the address is verified, the addresses must be shared with users via the shared email alias system. To determine whether the user is allowed to send an email from a given alias, we check that:
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="square" indent="3"}
The email address is verified and available for sending (part of an organization email identity)
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="square" listStart="2" indent="3"}
The user has access to the email address via shared email aliases
:::
::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What are your bounce rate thresholds?

One important note for sending emails from custom domains - make sure your email lists (e.g. for Newsletters) are clean and debounced.We’ve instituted the following bounce and complaint rate monitoring for custom domain emails to prevent from having our own sending accounts blocked by our email provider.

Bounce rate thresholds:

- Warning: 4% — alerts sent; monitoring closely
- Limit: 5% — sending may be restricted

Complaint rate thresholds:

- Warning: 0.08% — alerts sent; monitoring closely
- Limit: 0.1% — sending may be restricted

How this work&#x73;**:**

- Metrics are checked hourly
- If rates exceed the limit for 2 consecutive hours, sending may be automatically disabled to protect domain reputation.&#x20;

We recommend keeping bounce rates below 4% and complaint rates below 0.08% to avoid restrictions and maintain deliverability.
:::


[title] Candidate Texting
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/


[title] Offers and Offer Letters
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

This article explains how to manage offers and offer letters for candidates in the Offer stage of the pipeline.

# Overview

When it comes to setting up your offer process in Ashby, this guide covers the following steps:

- Create offer custom fields to house offer-specific information.
  - You can also add conditional offer tokens that will only show up if your offer meets certain criteria.
- Add tokens to your offer letter to pre-populate job consideration and offer information.
- Generating and sending out an offer to the candidate.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** Ensure you have a .docx version of your offer letter ready to amend and upload.
:::

# Permissions and access

- Only Organization Admins can create offer letters by default but those with Elevated Access can be granted Offer Letter Template permissions. More on this at [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).
- Only users with Organization Admin access or users with the permissions Can See Candidate Profiles, Can Add/Edit Candidates and Can See Private Fields in their access role can generate offers.

# Create offer custom fields

The first step in setting up offers is creating custom fields in the [Custom Fields section](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/offer-fields) of Offers in Admin. For an overview on custom fields in general, check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).

Once set up, you can set offer custom fields to have a generated substitution token. When you add a substitution token to your offer letter template, the information from the associated custom field on the Offer Details form replaces the token placeholders when an offer is generated. See [Create an offer letter template](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh) for more information on setting up an offer letter template.

The following default tokens are available for offer letters:

`{{CANDIDATE_NAME}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_FIRST_NAME}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_LAST_NAME}}`

`{{JOB_TITLE}}`

`{{JOB_LOCATION_NAME}}`

`{{JOB_STREET_ADDRESS}}`

`{{JOB_CITY}}`

`{{JOB_STATE}}`

`{{JOB_POSTAL_CODE}}`

`{{JOB_COUNTRY}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_EMAIL_ADDRESS}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_PHONE_NUMBER}}`

`{{HIRING_MANAGER}}`

`{{OPENING_IDENTIFIER}}` (available if [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ) is enabled)

`{{CANDIDATE_CITY}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_REGION}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_COUNTRY}}`

`{{TODAY_DATE}}`

Offer fields and Candidate fields are not currently interchangeable. Create separate fields for both, even if it's the same information.

The following default tokens are available for e-signature offer letters (more on these at [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW)):

`{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE_DATE}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE_INITIALS}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_CHECKBOX}}`

`{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE}}`

`{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE_DATE}}`

`{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE_INITIALS}}`

You also have the option to sync fields from your employee management system using the [Rippling](docId\:aCiSdVvNEe5s6dziIJEw_) or [BambooHR](docId\:IIlejxKCqaLk09Pu108ij) integrations (let us know if you'd like access at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com)).

## Adding text input fields to your e-signature document or offer letter

:::hint{type="info"}
E-Signature text input tokens can be used for e-signature documents and offer letters generated via Dropbox Sign or DocuSign.
:::

To add text fields to your offer letters so the candidate or the company signatory can fill out additional information within the offer, add the following tokens:

`{{CANDIDATE_TEXT_INPUT}}` This text input field provides the candidate with a field to add additional text.

`{{COMPANY_TEXT_INPUT}}` This text input field provides the company signatory with a field to add additional text.

When you click the token in **Admin > Offers > Offer Tokens**, select the field size by choosing a preset size or setting the width and number of lines. You can also check the `Required` checkbox to require the signer to complete the field as part of the signing process.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Vdblf0p9HKE999LinHV6L_offers-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-91815-am.jpg" size="80" width="1312" height="1062" position="center" darkWidth="1312" darkHeight="1062" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows the Configure text input token for candidates pop-up, where you can set the width, lines and whether or not the field is required."}

Once you've determined the text input field size and settings, click the token generated to copy it. You can then paste this token into your offer letter.

![The screenshot shows the generated text input token, ready to be added to an offer letter template.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BU8cdsM2wJWApPF-KIfDO_offers-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-92749-am.jpg)

We recommend placing this token on its own line within your offer letter template to prevent layout issues. Here's an example of how to place the token and how it looks when an e-signature offer letter is generated.

![An offer letter template with a company input text token added on a new line.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Jkh5u64P68HUKY6HYK675_e-signature-text-input-tokens-restricted-early-access-slab-2026-01-29-at-93834-am.jpg)

![How the company signatory sees the text input field at the point of signing the e-signature offer.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tjlA_m5-wrGagUHpnHLlJ_e-signature-text-input-tokens-restricted-early-access-slab-2026-01-29-at-93802-am.jpg)

## Offer custom field options

You can create an offer custom field by navigating to **Admin > Offers > Offer Custom Fields** or by going to **Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields** and selecting the `Offer` tab. Click `+ New` to add a new offer custom field.

You are then prompted to add the following:

- **Title**: Name your field.
- **Description**: Optionally, add a description that appears below the title.
- **Field Type** (see options at [Creating custom fields: Offer custom fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs))
  - Depending on type selected, an options panel may appear.

![The screenshot shows the Create Offer Field popup on the Offer Custom Fields page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6QJ1AJx-Eqa14OD_k4jU0_offer-custom-fields-ashby-2026-09-24-at-91316-am.jpg)

Click `Create` to save your custom field. Once the field is created, you see additional options when editing it:

![Editing an offer custom field.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YYME6htvF2V8uLLyiWEao_custom-fields-acent-ashby-2026-03-24-at-111849-am.jpg)

- **Is Required?**: Determine if the field must be filled out.
- **Instructions:** If instructions are provided on the offer custom field, this shows to team members when they fill out a candidate's offer (instead of showing the custom field's description). These instructions can also be set with rich text formatting, which also shows when filling out the candidate's offer.
- **Require Reapproval**: If the field's data is changed, the offer must be re-approved.
- **Substitution token**: Create a token to pull data from this field into an offer letter or e-signature document. If you opt to generate a token for a multiple choice custom field, you get a follow-up option, **Customize Substitution Text**.&#x20;
- **Default Value:** Determines the default value to use when this field is used in a fillable form. The default value can only be pulled from a custom field with the same field type (for example, Multiple Choice in this case), or it can be set to a static value instead.
- **Hide this field if a default is chosen?** If a default value is found using the Default Value option above, hide this field in the offer form.
- **Make this field non-editable?** If a default value is selected, then the field cannot be overridden manually within the offer details.
- **Restrict which offer forms include this field?**: Specify which jobs or departments should display this custom field on offers. These are also known as conditional offer fields.

## Conditional offer fields

Conditional offer fields let your team display fields on the offer form only where they are relevant. There are two ways to use conditional offer fields:

- Restrict offer fields to particular forms
- Include questions based on other questions in your form

**Restrict offer fields to particular forms**

This option lets you display certain fields on specific forms. For example, you could display a variable compensation field only on offers in your Sales department.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9oCcNendM1VqZQvMsnsxJ_custom-fields-ashby-2026-09-24-at-101218-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1026" height="1016" darkWidth="1026" darkHeight="1016" alt="The screenshot shows a custom field with a condition set so the field will only show if the department for the job is Sales." showCaption="false"}

**Include questions based on other questions in your form**

This option lets you display questions based on responses to other questions. For example, you display a date input field specifically on offers where the hire works remotely.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uIacvjp-b3yG1eO3Dc0KS_custom-fields-ashby-2026-09-24-at-101641-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1048" height="1010" darkWidth="1048" darkHeight="1010" alt="The screenshot shows a custom field that will only show on an offer form if the Is remote? custom field's answer is Yes." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full guide, check out [Offer and E-Signature Document Conditional Tokens](docId:4xJNsAb785XfvjKOIZrD0).
:::

# Create an offer letter template

:::hint{type="info"}
Review [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) for more information on creating e-signature offer letters. You do not need your own Dropbox Sign integration to use E-Signature in Ashby. It's ready to use just by adding the tokens to your offer letters!
:::

Offer Letter Templates can be configured on the Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅\*         | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="info"}
Users on the Foundations plan can configure one offer letter template. Users on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans can add as many offer letter templates as needed.
:::

Once your custom fields are set up and the Enable Substitution Token has been configured on each, use those custom fields as tokens in your offer letter. To configure, copy the tokens from the [Offer Letter Tokens page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/offer-letter-tokens) and paste them into the body of your offer letter template.

:::hint{type="info"}
Adding \_RAW to the end of any **numeric** or **currency** substitution token strips formatting from the field. For example, a large number MY\_FIELD might be formatted as 1,000,000, but MY\_FIELD\_RAW renders as 1000000. This avoids problems when using Word tables.
:::

On that page, you also find [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) that automatically enable e-Signature for your offer letters. Adding candidate e-Signature tokens enables e-Signature for an offer template. Add company e-Signature tokens to require a counter signer.

## Offer letter template upload

:::hint{type="info"}
For information on troubleshooting formatting issues, see [Offer Letter Template Formatting](docId\:VznQ4S_-oH-0fuNsp7q6u).
:::

Once the template is configured with tokens, navigate to **Admin > Offers > Offer Letter Templates** and click `New`.

![The screenshot shows the Offer Letter Templates with the highlighted + New to upload a new offer letter template.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VvVTTRwFgB4RDTbsPJGlz_offer-letter-templates-ashby-2026-09-24-at-91636-am.jpg)

Add a title and upload the file in .docx format. Next, click the refresh button 🔄. The form is then validated for any errors. You are notified if anything in the form needs to be updated.

![The screenshot shows the popup after an offer letter template has been uploaded and validated.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GNYWTGP97Sh12bpskhGSd_offer-letter-templates-ashby-2026-09-24-at-91823-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
There is a limit of 8MB when uploading an offer letter template.
:::

You can set conditions on your offer letter to limit the job considerations it can be used for. In the example pictured above, the offer letter template can only be used for job considerations for roles in the Design department.

- To enable this option, check the `Only allow using this Offer Letter Template on specific job considerations?` checkbox.
- Use the Advanced option to confirm whether you are using Advanced or Basic filtering to determine your conditions. Click `+ Filter` to determine the fields you're filtering by if using basic filters, or `+ Add Field to Match` if you are using advanced filtering to set your conditions.

# Create an offer on a candidate profile to send to a candidate

When a candidate moves to the Offer stage in the candidate pipeline, an offer activity is generated in the Activities section of their candidate profile. Click `Create Offer` to complete the Offer Details form.&#x20;

![The screenshot shows an open candidate profile with the Create Offer button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QqlkXgbUt2Y70dqPZ3GBi_tim-tatler-customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-09-24-at-102127-am.jpg)

Once you have completed the offer details, click `Submit`. You will then have the option to generate an offer letter or e-signature request for the candidate.&#x20;

To edit any entered offer data, click `View Offer`, then `Update Offer` under the offer details.

## Generate an offer letter and draft an offer letter email

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn how to send e-signature offer requests, see [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW).
:::

1. Click `View Offer` on the offer activity and select `Generate Offer Letter` to create a populated PDF version of the offer letter. The form data entered populates substitution fields in the generated PDF Offer Letter.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gzvdkWlAdJmD5093UhZY2_alana-runte-digital-marketing-manager-ashby-2026-09-24-at-103758-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1356" height="262" darkWidth="1356" darkHeight="262" alt="The screenshot shows the option to generate an offer letter within the candidate's offer details. " showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Review the offer letter by clicking the eye icon beside the letter, or click `Draft Offer Letter Email` to generate an offer email with the letter attached.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/I1SyJ6VldWxe9rvO70Yxi_alana-runte-digital-marketing-manager-ashby-2026-09-24-at-103935-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1422" height="834" darkWidth="1422" darkHeight="834" alt="The screenshot shows the open offer letter with the Draft Offer Letter Email button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Apply an existing offer email template, or draft your message anew.

:::hint{type="info"}
Create an [Email Template Creation and Management](docId\:wQ6UOYDzwfAtDmZhOPsfJ) to save even more time extending offers to candidates.
:::

4. Click `Send` when ready. These messages are marked as private when sent.

## Upload a custom offer letter

:::hint{type="info"}
You can upload offer letters directly to an offer. If you have a .docx file that you'd like to use to generate the offer letter for a particular candidate, you can add it directly without first adding it as an offer letter template. You can also generate a letter based on an offer letter template, download it, make adjustments, and re-upload it.
:::

1. Ensure that the `Enable Custom Offer Letter Uploads` option is enabled in **Admin > Offers > Offer Settings**.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/9b72013c4e2f6029d1a6f22d17558a79.png" size="60" width="660" height="447" darkWidth="660" darkHeight="447" position="center" showCaption="false"}

2. Create your offer from the candidate's profile.
3. Once you have added your offer details and created the offer, in the **Offer Letter** section, click `Upload Custom Offer Letter`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/913fc6535d408b683c9c2d277612e0aa.png)

4. Click `Browse files…` and select the .docx file you'd like to use.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/09318a2f12c4d7eed18c4e3d4cb090f5.png" size="88" width="1130" height="528" darkWidth="1130" darkHeight="528" position="center" showCaption="false"}

5. Once uploaded, the file is validated. Select the formatting style using the Number Formatting and Currency Formatting drop-downs, then click `Generate Offer Letter`. If you added offer tokens to the document, they are validated and used, just like with an offer letter template.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/17a89961cdf52cf4b497f966297f59d1.png)

# Push hired candidate to Rippling or BambooHR

When a candidate accepts an offer, you see an option to push hired candidates to your human resource information system (HRIS).&#x20;

Clicking `Select a Post Hire Integration` creates a new employee record in the system, including the latest offer data.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/155aad3971e44c10a338a306c94d4506"}

# Rescinding or withdrawing an offer and handling declined offers

To rescind an offer for a candidate and nullify the e-signature request sent to them, click `Archive` on the candidate's profile. Do not delete or amend the existing offer. While archiving, set the archive reason to one that specifically mentions the rescinded offer.

![The screenshot shows a candidate profile with the Archive option highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b7c1f773d6729200f8e760e761ecb6dc.png)

If you don't already have an archive reason for rescinding an offer, set one up in **Admin > Jobs & Applications >&#x20;**[Archive Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-archive-reasons). We recommend having one in place for reporting purposes and ease of reference.

## How do I rescind an offer and archive a candidate in the Hired stage?

If the candidate is already in the Hired stage but needs to be archived, take the following steps:

- Navigate to the candidate's profile and click `Change Stage`.
- Move the candidate back to the Offer stage of the pipeline. The `Archive` option then appears on their profile.
  - If the candidate has rejected the offer, update the candidate response to ensure it is reported on accurately.
    - To do this, click `View Offer` within the offer activity on the candidate's profile, then select `Update Response` to amend the offer response.
  - If you do not need to amend the offer, click `Archive` and select an appropriate archive reason as above.

# Offer version history

The offer version history lets your team track amendments made to offers, including the approval record and any approval comments.

To view an offer version history:

1. Click `View Offer` on the offer activity on the candidate's profile.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tWzcTdtaiAVZRdg7UpWu3_offer-version-history-updates-archbee-document-2026-03-27-at-95954-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2670" height="1036" darkWidth="2670" darkHeight="1036" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Click the `View Previous Versions` button within the Offer Details section.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/s8cf6qvqjgptqVSShsVs2-20260325-154834.jpg" size="100" width="1346" height="1024" position="center" darkWidth="1346" darkHeight="1024" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. The versions are listed with an overview of any changes made. Click `View Details` on the version in question within Version History.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RCrVC6F4Zj3Tq3cdAFdTb-20260325-154936.jpg" size="100" width="1356" height="684" position="center" darkWidth="1356" darkHeight="684" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

If any approvals or approval comments were added to the offer, these are also listed.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hkG3aQvhpVu80RCkZsBM3-20260327-125456.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Want to learn more? Check out the [Offers](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/offers) course in Ashby Academy!
:::

# FAQ

### How do I make offer emails private?

You can set the visibility of emails in the Offer and/or Hired stages from within the [Email Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-settings) section of Ashby. For other stages, you need to manually mark notes and emails private.

![The screenshot shows the candidate feed with the option to make an email or note private.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b7ab3b690421ce11501b14bb39764c3e.png)

### Do I need a Dropbox Sign account to use the E-Signature feature?

No, you do not. The Dropbox Sign integration is built-in and can be enabled just by adding the E-Signature Tokens to your Offer Letter Template. See the [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) for more information on setting up and using E-Signature. If you'd like to connect your company's DocuSign account, you can read more at [Docusign](docId\:q9692LmyFdYbtE1VmW3nH).

### Can I designate a user to sign on behalf of the company?

To assign a company signatory, create an offer letter that includes candidate and company e-signature tokens on the [Offer Tokens page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/offer-letter-tokens). Once you've created the offer and your offer letter, you see the option to send an e-signature request and can assign your company's signatory from there. For more information on e-signatures, see [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW).

![The screenshot shows an open offer e-signature request with the Company Signatory section highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b0f0430e9f0c1149859c4a6996c69acb.png)

### What notifications does a person CC'd on an offer letter signature process receive?

A person CC'd on an offer letter receives an email when: the signature process starts, the candidate views the offer, the company signatory views the offer, and the offer has been signed by both the candidate and the company signatory.

### Are there any file size requirements?

When uploading offer letter templates to Ashby, there is an 8MB file size limit. This is due to performance requirements for PDF conversion.

You may notice that templates just under the 8MB limit might be accepted but fail to process after being populated with candidate data that takes it over that 8MB threshold. We recommend keeping the template size under 7MB when possible for the best reliability.

### How does the Hiring Manager substitution token work with offer letters?

When adding the `{{HIRING_MANAGER}}` token to an offer letter, be aware that this pulls the Hiring Manager from the Hiring Team section of the job consideration on the candidate's profile, rather than the hiring manager set in the offer details.

### Can I set the offer as accepted or declined within Ashby?

You can. Click `View Offer` on the offer activity, then `Set Response` within the offer details. Set the offer as accepted or declined on the candidate's behalf.

![The screenshot shows an open offer with the Set Response option highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/2ae11a50e1497cf0a93a294091f37bee.png)

Once an offer is accepted or declined, this button shows `Update Response` instead.

![The screenshot shows an open offer with the Update Response option highlighted.](https://cdn.zappy.app/05837831c03a581fd73ca9e7b2299964.png)

If the offer is marked as accepted, the candidate moves to the Hired stage. If the offer is marked as declined, you are prompted to archive the candidate, but the candidate is not archived automatically.

If a candidate is linked to an opening and the offer is marked as declined, they are removed from that opening.

### Can I view the offer letter or offer details once the candidate is hired?

You can, as long as you are an Organization Admin or have Elevated Access - Admin Private access to the job, location, or department. Navigate to the candidate's profile and click `View Offer`. Here you can view the offer details and click the document links within the Offer Letter section to view the offer letter and documents sent to the candidate. E-Signature details are available in the Offer E-Signature section.

### How do I change the name of my offer letter template?

To change the name of your offer letter template, navigate to **Admin > Offers**. On the Offers page, click the `Offer Letter Templates` tab, then select the offer letter template. Update the name in the Name field.

### Can I adjust the formatting of numbers, dates, and currencies on my offer letters and e-signature documents?

You can choose between US-style formatting and European-style formatting for numbers, and specify currency formatting for offer letters, e-signature offers, and documents. Navigate to **Admin > Offers > Offer Settings** to determine your offer settings. Alternatively, go to **Admin > Integrations > E-Signature Documents** and click the `Settings` tab to configure your e-signature document settings.

![The screenshot shows the Offer Settings page.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xAmgBLy9_9tfbj-IITX-t_offer-settings-ashby-2026-09-24-at-103406-am.jpg)

- **Default number formatting:** Choose whether numbers display in European or US style.
- **Default currency formatting:** Choose whether currency displays as a symbol ($) or a country code (USD).
- **Default date formatting:** Select your preferred date display format from the dropdown list.

You can also override the default number and currency settings when generating offer letters.

![The screenshot shows the Generate Offer Letter popup with the options to set number, currency and date formatting.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JRczifiYyWZfJ2Aamk65H_alana-runte-digital-marketing-manager-ashby-2026-09-24-at-103553-am.jpg)

If you override the number or currency settings when creating an offer, other e-signature documents added to the same packet inherit the same setting. If you don't override the default setting, the global default applies to e-signature documents.

### Can previous offer versions expire?

There is no cutoff or expiration date for offer versions.

[title] Do I need a Dropbox Sign Integration to use Offers?
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

No, you do not! The Dropbox Sign integration is built-in and can be enabled just by adding the E-Signature Tokens to your Offer Letter Template. Check out [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) and [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt) for more information on setting up and using E-Signature!

You do not need a Dropbox Sign account to sign e-signature documents. These can be signed directly from the prompt in the Dropbox Sign emails sent to the signatories specified in Ashby when generating the e-signature document.

You also do not need a Dropbox Sign account to access the completed e-signature document. Users with the correct permissions can access the completed e-signature document in the candidate’s profile, and all signatories also receive an email from Dropbox Sign confirming that everyone has signed the document, including the candidate, once all parties have completed the signing process.

If you would prefer to use Docusign, you will need to integrate using your company’s account. More on this at [Docusign](docId\:q9692LmyFdYbtE1VmW3nH).

[title] Company Document Library
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

The Company Document Library gives your team a centralized place to manage reusable PDF documents, such as benefits guides, equity summaries, or confidentiality agreements, that can be included in e-signature offer packets or attached to candidate emails. Instead of uploading the same file repeatedly for each offer or email, you can upload a document once, set optional filters to control which candidates it applies to, and make it available across your team in a single click.

This article covers how to set up and manage documents in the library and how to use library documents when building offers and sending emails.

## Permissions & access

Organization Admins have access to the Company Document Library by default — no additional configuration is required. To grant access to an elevated access user, enable the **Company Documents** permission under **Additional User Permissions** in their employee profile.

The Company Documents Library is available Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Setting up your company document library

Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Company Documents** to access the document library. From here, you can upload and manage all of your organization's reusable PDF documents.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/J6JwkiigHjU_YKCwbZMMz_company-documents-ashby-2026-07-27-at-34709-pm.png)

## Add a document



::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DRbBGfXKPxyEo5oVshq9__company-documents-ashby-2026-07-29-at-125956-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="642" height="680" darkWidth="642" darkHeight="680" showCaption="false"}

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Company Documents**.
2. Select `+ New` in the upper right corner.
3. Enter a name for the document. Choose a descriptive name—this is what your team sees when selecting the document on an offer or email.
4. Determine where the document can be used:
   - **In Offer Packet:**  Can be added to the packet of documents sent to a candidate with an offer.  See [Using library documents in e-signature offers](docId\:Ets2o5C58KDkwSIHZhQo-) below for more details on how this works.
   - **In Candidate Emails:** Allows attaching a library document to an email sent to the candidate. See [Using library documents in emails](docId\:Ets2o5C58KDkwSIHZhQo-) below.
5. Upload your PDF file by dragging and dropping it, or by selecting `Browse files to upload`.
6. Check the box for `Only allow attaching this document to specific job considerations?` if you would like to set criteria for when the document can be sent. See criteria configuration steps in [Set criteria for document usage (optional)](docId\:Ets2o5C58KDkwSIHZhQo-) below.
   - Check the box for `Allow this document to be emailed to candidates who do not have a job consideration` if you would to allow this document to also be emailed to candidates without any applications. This checkbox only appears if you've checked the above box and serves as an exception to the defined criteria.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If the `Only allow attaching this document to specific job considerations? box` is **not checked**, the document can be sent to any candidate, irrespective of which job they applied to, including if they have no job consideration at all (such as a lead).
:::

7. The document is saved automatically.

:::hint{type="info"}
Only PDF files can be uploaded to the Company Document Library. If you need to upload a document that candidates must sign, use [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt) instead.
:::

## Set criteria for document usage (optional)

Filters let you limit which candidates a document is available for, based on attributes of their job consideration. This is useful when a document is only relevant to candidates in a specific department, location, or at a particular stage of the process.

When adding or editing a document, check the option to `Only allow attaching this document to specific job considerations?`, then set the criteria below.  You can filter by fields such as region, department, interview stage, and more.

You can turn on the `Advanced` toggle to add more complex critiera, by selecting `+ Add field to match` to build your filter conditions.&#x20;



::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oLaxNGGJxUTW4qEqhEuYt_company-documents-ashby-2026-07-29-at-10245-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="594" height="308" darkWidth="594" darkHeight="308" showCaption="false"}

When a user selects a library document on an offer or in an email, only documents whose filter conditions match the candidate's job consideration are shown.

## Archive and manage documents

To archive a document, open it from the **Admin > Organization Setup > Company Documents** page and select the `Archive` button in the upper right. Archived documents are removed from selection menus but are preserved in any in-progress offers that already reference them.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/O2RSVhGS8SVyY-aQT2302_company-documents-ashby-2026-07-29-at-10540-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="632" height="627" darkWidth="632" darkHeight="627" showCaption="false"}

You can view archived documents by changing the status filter on the top right from **Active** to **Archived**.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aYVWrl2_2VTqsM_tjjWiO_company-documents-ashby-2026-07-27-at-40009-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="436" height="288" darkWidth="436" darkHeight="288" showCaption="false"}

To reactivate an archived document, open it and select `Restore`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby tracks version history for library documents internally, but previous versions are not shown. If you need to update a document, simply upload a new file to replace the existing file and the library record will point to the latest file going forward.
:::

# Using library documents in e-signature offers

Once a document is in the library, it can be added to an e-signature offer packet alongside the offer letter and any e-signature documents.

1. Navigate to the candidate's profile and click `View Offer` to open an existing offer.
2. Select `Add Document` under the **Offer Packet** section.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cA8uE61aA-Gwc_Z6WYJES_faith-grant-group-product-manager-ashby-2026-07-27-at-41614-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1246" height="535" darkWidth="1246" darkHeight="535" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
The offer must be fully approved before the `Add Document` button appears.
:::

3. When prompted to choose a document type, select `Document Library`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q6ARolQD2fyiXWQZHdo5F_faith-grant-group-product-manager-ashby-2026-07-27-at-41639-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="672" height="486" darkWidth="672" darkHeight="486" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Use the search or dropdown to find the document you want to add. Only documents whose filters match the candidate's job consideration are shown.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6XJ8t_4eAc1eM0qh66jhN_faith-grant-group-product-manager-ashby-2026-07-27-at-41720-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="629" height="443" darkWidth="629" darkHeight="443" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Select the document and click `Add`.
6. Repeat for any additional documents, then send the offer e-signature request as normal.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can still upload a one-off PDF directly to an offer using the PDF document type option. The `Document Library` option is available when you want to select a pre-uploaded document from the company library rather than uploading a new file each time.
:::

To reorder documents in the offer packet, click dot dots on the left side and drag them in the **Offer Packet** section of the offer. To remove a library document from an offer, click the trash can icon.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KQnBzvV1tOek2kpXZWC-U_faith-grant-group-product-manager-ashby-2026-07-27-at-42340-pm.png)

For full details on sending and managing e-signature offers with multiple documents, see [Adding Multiple Documents to an E-signature Offer](docId\:gN7C_pqJJFh32kUp99EMz) .

# Using library documents in emails

Library documents can also be attached to emails sent to candidates. When composing an email from a candidate's profile, select the Add from document library icon from the bottom toolbar. Any documents that match the application will be available to attach.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/laVRWIFFPxGgnYM-0yrn3_amberly-zieme-account-executive-ashby-2026-07-27-at-42959-pm.png)

# FAQs

### What file types can I upload to the Company Document Library?

Only PDF files are supported. If you need to upload a document that candidates will sign electronically, use E-Signature Documents, which accept .docx files and support signature tokens.

### What happens to in-progress offers if I archive a library document?

Archiving a document removes it from the selection menu so it cannot be added to new offers or emails. However, any offers that already reference the archived document are unaffected; the file is preserved and will still be included when those offers are sent.

### Can I update the file for an existing library document?

Yes. Open the document in **Admin > Organization Setup > Company Documents** and upload a new PDF file. The library record updates to reference the new file. Ashby tracks version history internally, though previous versions are not displayed in the UI.&#x20;

### How do filters on library documents work differently from filters on e-signature document templates?

Both use the same scoping filter mechanism, which evaluates conditions against the candidate's job consideration. When a user searches for a document to add to an offer, only documents whose filter conditions match, or documents with no filters set, appear in the results. Setting filters on a library document is useful when a document is only relevant for specific roles, locations, or departments.

### Can I see which offers or emails a library document has been used in?

There is currently no reporting or tracking for when and where documents added to the library are used.

[title] How do I create offers retrospectively for reporting purposes?
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

This guide covers creating offers retrospectively for reporting purposes. If you have moved candidates to the **Hired** stage but want to report on the offers generated in Ashby, this guide covers the best route to generate those offers.&#x20;

For more information on updating existing offers, see [How do I backdate offers in order to preserve reporting data?](docId\:HFmhecldAE5k09B2moTyn) &#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Moving the candidate back to the **Offer** stage updates the **Consideration Ended At** date and may impact the **Hired At** date on the job consideration, if the **Hired At** date was not already manually set. Moving the candidate back to the **Offer** stage does not impact passthrough rate reporting.
:::

# Can I report on offers if a candidate has been moved to the Hired stage and the offer was generated and sent outside of Ashby?

We always recommend creating an offer within Ashby for your records, even if you send offer letters and e-signature requests outside of Ashby. If you move a candidate to **Hired** without generating an offer on the candidate's profile, Ashby does not have offer details to pull from for your reports.

# How do I create an offer on a candidate that is already in the Hired stage?

To generate an offer, you first need to move the candidate back to the **Offer** stage within the pipeline.

To move the candidate back to the Offer stage, click `Change Stage` while on their candidate profile and select **Offer**.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/65ebb4cd53a8bf3e682e7137a1a0b43f.png)

Once the candidate is moved back to the Offer stage, you are prompted to generate an offer for them:

1. Click `Create Offer` to get started.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1242627db979d3bc3f05b0801aaa390d.png)

2. Complete the offer details, then click `Submit`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/df177dac16bfeb788a57b5080a59ee9d.png" size="70" width="764" height="509" isUploading="false" darkWidth="764" darkHeight="509" showCaption="false"}

3. Once the offer is created, click `Set Response`, then select `Accepted` to mark the offer as accepted by the candidate. Ashby moves the candidate back to the **Hired** stage.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/b137f2c379db317714d93e4d4a53b728.png" size="80" width="762" height="559" isUploading="false" darkWidth="762" darkHeight="559" showCaption="false"}

4. Click `Update Response` to adjust the response date if needed. This will update the **Hired at** date as well, unless the **Hired at** date was already manually changed.

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn how to adjust the **Hired At** date manually, see [Candidate Profile](docId\:xUxT7U73X6OdwYPl89LAV) .
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/70485a86634ad65018ba12560d5f3c3a.png)

# I see a duplicate Offer stage on the candidate's interview progress — can I remove the duplicate stage?

When moving the candidate back and forth between the **Offer** and **Hired** stages, you see duplicates in the **Interview Progress** section on their profile.

To remove the duplicate stages:

1. Click the pencil icon beside **Interview Progress**.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/071c1e9a58453f59dbc2c6579fb9e731.png" size="80" width="581" height="348" isUploading="false" darkWidth="581" darkHeight="348" showCaption="false"}

2. Click the trash can icon beside any duplicate stages to remove them.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/41b0a275c7523c8b394438f572092091.png)

3. Click `Done Editing` once you have removed the duplicate stages.






[title] Ashby MCP Server (Beta)
[path] Ashby AI Features/

The Ashby Model Context Protocol (MCP) server lets AI models and agents access and interact with your Ashby data through a standardized interface. Connect it to Claude, ChatGPT, Cursor, or any other MCP-compatible tool to query your recruiting pipeline, prepare for interviews, and take actions in Ashby—all without leaving your AI client.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**

&#x20;An Org Admin must enable the MCP Server toggle before users in your organization can connect. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features** and turn on MCP Server.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H8ES3NqMryj92fjkEyLYU_opt-in-features-ashby-2026-06-22-at-30402-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="516" height="165" darkWidth="516" darkHeight="165" showCaption="false"}
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Need to learn how to use the Ashby MCP? Take the [Ashby MCP Server course](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-mcp) in Ashby Academy to apply starter prompts for daily recruiting briefs, debrief prep, and headcount planning, after you've completed the setup steps below!
:::

# Permissions & access

The MCP server is available on all Ashby plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
The MCP server is not available to Analytics-only organizations.
:::

Org Admins can enable and manage the MCP Server toggle in Admin settings. Once enabled, Elevated Access users in your organization can connect their own account. Only data visible based on the user's Ashby permissions level will be available when connected to the MCP server.

# Authentication

The MCP server authenticates each user individually via OAuth. Every user completes their own OAuth flow during setup, so the server only returns data that user can already see in Ashby. A user not involved in a hiring process cannot query candidates or roles they do not otherwise have access to.

# Set up your MCP client

The Ashby MCP server is client-agnostic and works with any MCP-compatible tool.&#x20;

The server URL is:

[https://mcp.ashbyhq.com/mcp/v1](https://mcp.ashbyhq.com/mcp/v1)

Select your client below for setup instructions.

## ChatGPT

1. In ChatGPT, open **Settings > Apps&#x20;**&#x61;nd search for Ashby, or use this link: [https://chatgpt.com/apps?show\_chat\_button=true\&q=Ashby](https://chatgpt.com/apps?show_chat_button=true\&q=Ashby)
2. Select `Ashby` and click `Connect`.
3. Follow the authorization prompts to complete.

## Claude

1. Go to **Customize > Connectors&#x20;**&#x61;nd search for Ashby in the connectors list, or navigate there directly with this link: [https://claude.ai/directory/connectors/dc1671e0-b14c-47b8-a625-e835ae4067ba](https://claude.ai/directory/connectors/dc1671e0-b14c-47b8-a625-e835ae4067ba)
2. Select Ashby and click `Connect`.
3. You'll be prompted to login to Ashby (if not already) and select `Approve` in the MCP access window.

## Cursor and other IDEs

1. Open **Cursor Settings > Tools & MCPs > New MCP server**.
2. Paste the following into your configuration:

:::BlockQuote
\{
&#x20; "mcpServers": \{
&#x20;   "ashby": \{
&#x20;     "url": "https\://mcp.ashbyhq.com/mcp/v1"
&#x20;   }
&#x20; }
}

:::

3. Save and restart Cursor. When you use an Ashby tool for the first time, complete the OAuth flow to connect your workspace.

## Glean

1. In Glean: **Admin Console > Platform > Tools > Add**
2. Under **Add pre-set tools**, go to the **MCP servers** tab and select a template.
3. Point it at our server URL: **https\://mcp.ashbyhq.com/mcp/v1**
4. Follow the pre-filled connection flow.

## Gemini CLI

Ashby's MCP server supports dynamic client registration and so can be configured with Gemini CLI. To do this:

1. Add the MCP using the command `gemini mcp add --transport http ashby https://mcp.ashbyhq.com/mcp/v1`
2. Complete the auth process. For more on Gemini CLI's auth process, check out [their MCP server guide](https://geminicli.com/docs/tools/mcp-server/#automatic-oauth-discovery).
3. Once you have added the server, restart the Gemini CLI (or run `/mcp reload` if the session is active) and check the status using the built-in command `/mcp list`

You should see your new server listed with a "Connected" status.&#x20;

# Available tools

Once you've connected the Ashby MCP server, just describe what you want in plain language and your MCP client will pick the right tools and run them for you. Below is the list of available tools. Ashby adds more tools over time, including additional write actions. To request a tool, use the `submit_mcp_feedback` tool described below.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**MCP tool inputs and outputs may change without notice. If you need a stable contract for either, build against our&#x20;**[public API](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/introduction)**&#x20;instead.**
:::

## Finding people and records

**search\_records\_by\_name** — Resolves a name to a record. Supports candidates, jobs, applications, and email templates. This is the starting point for most questions, such as "find the candidate Jordan Lee" or "pull up the Senior Designer job."

**filter\_records** — Finds records matching specific criteria, and can return a total count instead of a list. Supports candidates, applications, jobs, job postings, openings, scheduled interviews, and offers. For example: "how many candidates are in the interview stage for the Sales role" or "show me applications that involve me."

**describe\_object\_fields** — A behind-the-scenes helper that discovers which fields to filter on for a given record type before calling filter\_records. You do not invoke this directly, but it is what lets filtering work reliably across all supported record types.

**get\_record\_details** — Pulls the full details of records you have already located. Supports jobs, job postings, applications, email templates, openings, scheduled interviews, and offers.

**get\_candidate** — Pulls information from a candidate's profile: resume, interview feedback, emails, texts, notes, interview transcripts, referrals, follow-ups, form submissions, and more. Use this for questions like "summarize this candidate's background" or "did this candidate mention anything about relocation?"

## Interviews and feedback

**get\_upcoming\_interviews** — Lists your upcoming interviews with candidate names, job titles, times, and links. Ask "what interviews do I have this week?"

**get\_interview\_details** — Pulls a detailed prep briefing for a specific interview: candidate background, resume summary, the panel, and the hiring team. Use this right before an interview.

**get\_interview\_plan** — Shows the stages a candidate moves through for a given job or application.

**get\_submitted\_feedback** — Pulls up scorecard feedback you personally submitted for a candidate or interview. This only shows your own feedback, not other interviewers'.

## Pipeline and your to-do list

**get\_job\_pipeline** — Shows how many candidates are at each stage of a job's pipeline, and can compare multiple jobs at once. Ask "how is the pipeline looking for the Engineering roles?"

**get\_pending\_tasks** — Lists your pending tasks in Ashby: scorecards you owe, approvals waiting on you, follow-ups, candidate reviews, and survey requests. Ask "what do I need to do today?"

## Making changes

**create\_candidate** — Creates a new candidate with name and contact details.

**add\_note\_to\_candidate** — Drafts a note on a candidate's profile for you to confirm before saving. Can also reply to an existing note.

**change\_application\_stage** — Moves a candidate's application to a different stage in the interview process for that job.

**consider\_candidate\_for\_job** — Adds a candidate to a job by creating a new application at the first stage of that job's interview process.

## Getting help with Ashby

**search\_product\_docs** — Answers questions about how to use Ashby by searching the product documentation and returning an answer with links to relevant articles. Use this for "how do I" questions, such as "how do I set up an approval chain?" or "how do I create a job posting?"

## Giving feedback

**submit\_mcp\_feedback** — Sends feedback to the Ashby team if the MCP server hits a limitation or you have a suggestion. If something is not working or you wish the server could do something it cannot, use this tool to let us know.

# Rate limits

Ashby MCP enforces two separate rate limits to keep the service reliable:

- **Requests:** 120 per minute, per auth token.
- **Tool calls:** 120 tool-budget units per minute, per user-and-organization pair. Most tools cost 1 unit per call. `filter_records` costs 2 units.

### What to do if you're rate-limited

Most workflows won't hit these limits. MCP clients typically make tool calls at a rate that's within these limits as they work through a task. If you do see a rate-limit error, prompt your MCP client to run fewer operations in parallel against Ashby MCP, or wait a moment before retrying.

# FAQs

### Can the MCP server access data I cannot see in Ashby?

No. The MCP server uses user-level OAuth, which means it authenticates as you and inherits your existing Ashby permissions. It cannot return candidates, jobs, or other records you do not already have access to in Ashby.

### Do other users see the data I query through the MCP server?

No. Each user connects their own account through a separate OAuth flow. Queries and responses are scoped to your individual session and your Ashby permissions.

### Can I use the MCP server with a client not listed here?

Yes. The Ashby MCP server is client-agnostic and works with any MCP-compatible tool. Point your client to [https://mcp.ashbyhq.com/mcp/v1](https://mcp.ashbyhq.com/mcp/v1) and complete the OAuth flow when prompted.

### What should I do if a tool is not working as expected?

Use the `submit_mcp_feedback` tool in your AI client to send feedback directly to the Ashby team. Include as much detail as possible about what you asked and what the server returned.

[title] How does the free trial work with the AI Notetaker?
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on the AI notetaker tool, check out [AI Notetaker](docId\:bNuwMe8UKhqyRD_Fzye8z).
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
The AI Notetaker can only be used for interviews scheduled via Ashby.&#x20;
:::

### AI notetaker free trial

With the free trial of the AI notetaker, you can record up to 500 meetings for free. There is no time limit, the free trial will expire once all 500 meeting recordings have been used up. Please note that during the free trial, your recording retention period is limited to be set to up to 14 days. One you hit your retention period set in the Recording Data Retention settings, the recordings will become inaccessible.

### Purchasing the add-on

After using 500 meeting recordings, customers will need to purchase the AI Notetaker Add-on to continue using AI Notetaker. To purchase the add-on, please follow the appropriate instructions based on your plan:

- Foundations and Headcount-based Legacy Plus: Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > Billin&#x67;*.* Under AI Notetaker Interviews click `Upgrade`.
  - Review the billing summary provided (including the recurring cost and the prorated immediate cost), then click `Purchase` to continue with the upgrade.



::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e5049152f1cc30156e62a53c328b835a.png" size="62" width="457" height="327" position="center" darkWidth="457" darkHeight="327" showCaption="false"}

- Plus and Enterprise: Please reach out to your sales executive for further information

On purchasing the add-on, you can record as many meetings as you like. You can also customize the retention time to suit your organization’s requirements.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that the add-on is organization-wide and can be enabled for any and all users added to your account, including those with Limited Access.
:::


[title] AI Content Assistant
[path] Ashby AI Features/

You can opt-in to use the AI content assistant to help you draft content for job descriptions, email templates, sequence emails, and one off emails.

## Enabling the AI content assistant

To enable the AI notetaker in your Ashby account:

- Navigate to Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features.
- If you’ve yet to opt-in to AI features using the `Enable AI Features` option, you will need to opt-in to then enable the AI Notetaker tool.
- Check the `AI Content Assistant` checkbox

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/831ae28399bc94e12370d47386d683e4.png" size="50" width="310" height="112" position="center" darkWidth="310" darkHeight="112" showCaption="false"}

## Accessing and using the AI content assistant

You can use the AI content assistant to generate content for the Description section of your job posting and to generate content for emails and sequences.

*Accessing the AI content assistant to generate description content for a job posting*

Navigate to the Job Postings tab of your job, then click on `New Draft` to create a new job posting, or click on an existing job posting if you’d like to make amendments instead.

On the Description tab, navigate to the Description field and click `Write with AI` in the toolbar. This will open up the content assistant.



::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/709daea5c4f056d35f4642e5f096a0c9.png" size="84" width="845" height="118" position="center" darkWidth="845" darkHeight="118" showCaption="false"}

*Accessing the AI content assistant to generate email content for an email template*

Head to Admin > Organization Setup > Email Templates and either click `New Template` to create a new email template or select an existing template to amend.

In the toolbar under the Body section of the template, click `Write with AI` to access the AI content assistant.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5ba1f8eeeeb89fe8ab5ca8437c017fa5.png" size="86" width="840" height="405" position="center" darkWidth="840" darkHeight="405" showCaption="false"}

*Accessing the AI content assistant to generate email content for a one-off email*

When on the candidate’s profile, click `Email` to create an email activity for the candidate. In the toolbar under the Body section of the email, click `Write with AI` to access the AI content assistant.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/650dd73c360246d970593d21209d3b9a.png" size="74" width="869" height="674" position="center" darkWidth="869" darkHeight="674" showCaption="false"}

*Accessing the AI content assistant to generate email content for a sequence stage*

Select a sequence template within Sourcing > Sequences or click New to create a new sequence. When editing or creating the sequence template, click the `Write with AI` option in the toolbar underneath the Body section of the sequence stage to access the AI content assistant.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that the AI content assistant can only generate content within each stage of your sequence. It’s not currently possible to generate an entire sequence using the AI content assistant.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/18ddc9afab9a8963d132a16ee48876e4.png)

### Generating content using the AI content assistant

Type your prompt in the `Ask a new question…` field to then generate your content.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bcf20b7a6494bfa760c059d8aaac22e4.png)

Once your content has been generated, review it fully. If you’re happy to use that content moving forward, click `Looks good. Insert into text box.`

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ed20d216b2183d072083daf9a301b164.png)

Alternatively, you can also ask another question. If you’d like to give feedback on the generated content, click `Give Feedback`. You’ll be able to provide a rating (positive or negative) and also add comments.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/bcf20b7a6494bfa760c059d8aaac22e4.png" size="50" width="680" height="659" position="center" darkWidth="680" darkHeight="659" showCaption="false"}

## Refining existing content

If you have existing content and would like to refine it using the AI content assistant, this is also possible wherever there is a rich text editor.

To refine content using the AI content assistant, highlight the content you’d like to refine, then click the `Refine` option that will pop up. From here, you can select from the following options:

- Fix spelling and grammar
- Improve writing
- Make professional
- Make casual
- Make friendly
- Make longer
- Make shorter
- Bulletize
- If you can’t find a suitable option on this list, you can add your own custom prompt in the Ask AI to edit or generate field

Once you select an option, the AI content assistant will then generate a suggestion. Once generated, you can opt to accept the suggestion and add it to your email, sequence or job description, or you can discard it. You also have the option to regenerate the content or refine it further.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fdec2122140344f42d324a599aecb68e.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can substitution tokens be added into email templates using the AI content assistant?

They can, yes. For example, if you wanted to create an email template that included the candidate’s name, include that in your prompt and the appropriate substitution token would then be included within the generated suggestion.

**
:::


[title] Substitution Tokens: AI-Generated Feedback Summary
[path] Ashby AI Features/

Add the AI Generated Feedback Summary token in application status, rejection or next-step email templates to provide a brief summary of feedback provided within the email sent to a candidate.

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/fa390c800ac3419b80c878bba62f46fa"}

With the AI Generated Feedback Summary token, you can automatically create short, context-aware feedback summaries in non-sequence emails (like rejections, status updates, or next steps). This fits within the context of the surrounding email content, so works both for rejections and for feedback that you may want to give mid-interview loop.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e4c8979946c32b9c5281b2a1ab49f8de.png)

You'll see a preview of the generated feedback based on submitted scores and notes and will need to approve it by checking the check mark to add it to the email. The summary can be re-generated by clicking the `Regenerate` icon or deleted by clicking the trash can icon. You will not be able to send the email out to the candidate without approving or deleting the generated summary.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e0fa9b3619554bd33b4176422689a990.png)


[title] AI Tokens in Outreach Emails
[path] Ashby AI Features/

You can opt-in to use these in the [Opt-In Features](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access) section of Admin.

## AI token overview

Our AI tokens enhance your sourcing outreach emails by injecting an AI powered token that contextualizes and generates copy using your job posting and the candidate's resume.

New to sequences? Check out our [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4) guide to get started.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To enable the AI email token feature, head to Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features. You will need to opt-in to use AI features in order to enable the Email Tokens option.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2791f1c9ae3f943ca19fef243221076b.png)


:::
::::

## Adding the AI token

When creating or editing a [Sequence](https://app.ashbyhq.com/sourcing/sequence-templates), click on the `T` icon on the email toolbar to access substitution tokens. From there, search for the `AI Generated Sourcing Outreach` token and add it to the body of your email.

The AI token is context-aware of its placement within the email body. As such, the token will take into account the preceding text and personalize accordingly if added within a sentence. It can also be used for a standalone paragraph within an email.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/42f6220777b748538ff1eeaa082d8803"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Link your email sequence to a job to ensure the AI token factors in the associated job description in its text generation. There’s more on this at [Sequences](docId\:B2Gy2RHNNOyLkBhWcWoU4)&#x20;
:::

## Drafting outreach with the AI Token

Once you’ve added the token to your sequence, text will be automatically generated when enrolling the lead or candidate in a sequence. The AI token will also automatically generate text for sequences drafted within the Chrome extension. Once the text has been generated, you will then be presented with the following three options:

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/54fc50b18ce901df1f4aa031eab5437e.png)

1. Click the checkmark to approve the suggestion.
2. Click the grey icon to request another suggestion. It can take a few seconds for a new suggestion to be generated.
3. Click the trash can icon to remove the token and suggestion.

You will need to approve the suggestion (using the checkmark icon) or remove the token (using the trash can icon) before the sequence can be started.

After accepting the suggestion, you will have the option to edit the email body in the sequence before sending it.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/35086ccaea9e4ee28150b6f02f338049"}

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I have an AI token in my sequence and I’m unable to start the sequence - why?

Suggestions from the AI token will need to be approved or removed before a sequence can be started. Be sure to check all stages and all recipients for suggestions that need action taken on them. Each recipient and stage of the sequence will display whether action is required. The `Start X Sequences` button will also be greyed out if action needs to be taken.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/53d3474b0fadd6a5c2f84f314288f33d.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### If I use AI tokens in my sequence, is this counted against my credits for the AI-Assisted Application Review tool?

No, using AI tokens in sequences will not take up credits for the AI-Assisted Application Review tool.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I add an AI-Generated Feedback Summary token to an email template?

You can - you can read more about this token at [AI-Generated Feedback Summaries](docId\:Kcboq9bn_ndP_9I-isj2b).
:::


[title] Candidate Experience
[path] Integrations/


[title] Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?
[path] Integrations/Platform/

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby currently supports deep integration with either Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 but not both simultaneously.

Your team can only configure one of these platforms under Admin > Integrations > Integrations > Platform. While users from both systems can still collaborate meaningfully in Ashby, full email and calendar functionality is limited to whichever platform is officially integrated.

We strongly recommend aligning your team on a single platform (Google or Microsoft) to ensure smooth and reliable functionality. You can connect multiple instances of either **only** Google Workspaces or **only** Microsoft 365 tenants in a single Ashby account. More on this at[Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?](docId\:UWUiWFMUI_xNxVloeX5my)&#x20;
:::

Below you can find a table listing what is and is not supported in a single Ashby account

| Scenario                                                                 | Is this supported?    | Relevant guide                                                                                                                   |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Multiple domains within a single Google Workspace account                | Yes                   | [Updating the domain or adding a secondary domain to an Ashby account](docId\:e9kgGNJ4ZFJwQ6CnJNpiS)                             |
| Multiple domains within a single Microsoft 365 tenant                    | Yes                   | [Updating the domain or adding a secondary domain to an Ashby account](docId\:e9kgGNJ4ZFJwQ6CnJNpiS)                             |
| Multiple domains across more than one Google Workspace                   | Yes, with limitations | [Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?](docId\:UWUiWFMUI_xNxVloeX5my)  |
| Multiple domains across more than one Microsoft 365 tenant               | Yes, with limitations | [Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?](docId\:UWUiWFMUI_xNxVloeX5my)  |
| Multiple domains across both Google Workspaces and Microsoft 365 tenants | No                    | [Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?](docId:92txkuC2vVMOrzXEPtMKJ)                   |

## Why can’t these platforms co-exist in Ashby?

Ashby integrates with your email and calendar to allow you to act as if you were working directly in Gmail or Outlook. That means scheduling a meeting in Ashby is like doing it from your Google Calendar or Microsoft Outlook.

Since these systems don’t natively allow scheduling or emailing on behalf of users from the other platform, Ashby isn’t able to either. In short, if it doesn’t work in Google or Microsoft natively, it will not work in Ashby.

## What can users from both platforms do?

Regardless of the integration chosen, both Google and Microsoft users can:

- Log in to Ashby
- Leave interview feedback
- Submit referrals
- Create and edit jobs\*
- Review applications\*
- View candidate profiles and leave notes\*
- Build and view reports and dashboards\*

\*Permissions dependent - for more on access roles check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)

## What can’t users from both platforms do?

Cross-platform limitations include:

- Google users can’t schedule events for Microsoft users, and vice versa
- Google users can’t send emails on behalf of Microsoft users, and vice versa
- Google Calendar events can not have Microsoft Teams links embedded as the location.
- Microsoft Outlook Calendar Events can not have Google Meet links embedded as the location.

These restrictions reflect how Google and Microsoft work natively. Ashby mirrors those constraints to preserve calendar and email security.

## I use Microsoft, but my team uses Google. What should I expect?

We strongly recommend against having users in a single Ashby account that are not all aligned on either Google Workspace or Microsoft 365. Users with run into issues with the following if this setup is attempted:

- Scheduling calendar events for colleagues
- Sending emails on behalf of colleagues

## Will this change in the future?

This is unlikely as this is the intended behavior of this feature. These restrictions reflect how Google and Microsoft work natively and Ashby mirrors those constraints to preserve calendar and email security.

[title] Integrations
[path] /

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you can find information on configuring integrations. From key platform integrations to more advanced external workflows, we have a wide range of integrations available.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🏢 [Platform](docId\:tvg-r4MzuQJ9g-HIKUYLU)&#x20;

👍 [Candidate Experience](docId:9zAwHl62DbPAlNCrlEtfI)&#x20;

🔍 [Sourcing](docId\:JkCtjNNIE2F6GpbI9z7b9)&#x20;

💼 [Job Board](docId\:FjmQVNaJ9NxVQ6LpJTPFw)&#x20;

📝 [Assessments](docId\:eqlZP4_NF4mgwfnLmDYIn)&#x20;

🎥 [Video Interviewing](docId\:z4k__WkJabCd2oTTXCUYK)&#x20;

🎉 [Post Hire](docId:855ICIl3w2_HDuk2YcZYv)&#x20;

🤖 [Other](docId\:SAfGYC4TWFCqGSHlj4IUm)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] HireJoy
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

HireJoy helps a single recruiter own dozens of roles by help reviewing massive inbound candidates. HireJoy integrates with Ashby, evaluates candidates and send scorecards back into Ashby.

The Ashby \<> HireJoy integration allows customers to:

- Sync jobs to HireJoy
- Sync candidates to HireJoy
- Evaluate candidates and send the feedback back to Ashby

You can view HireJoy’s guide on setting up the integration with Ashby [here.](https://www.notion.so/1f03dc03f2be4dcc8f4c3bd24d298ba3?pvs=21)

For more information on configuring HireJoy to evaluate candidates in certain stages and certain interview plans, check out their guide on these more advanced settings [here](https://www.notion.so/4e75893db9014b14ac26edcc08537b65?pvs=21).

[title] hireez
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

hireEZ is a talent acquisition platform empowering recruiters with sourcing, CRM, analytics, and automation. Their technology streamlines workflows to help you hire the right people. Users can now do the following with this integration:

- Export candidates sourced on hireEZ to Ashby
- Import and enrich candidate profiles from Ashby to hireEZ
- Source from an enriched pool of candidates

Existing customers can learn more about enabling the integration at [this link](https://help.hireez.com/hc/en-us/articles/27339344593819-How-to-Integrate-with-Ashby).

[title] There was an authentication error. Please check your credentials and their permissions are correct. What should I do?
[path] Integrations/Platform/

If you see the above error, confirm that the credentials you're using as part of the integration configuration are valid and have the appropriate permissions to use the integration.

Please review the setup information for the integration in question to confirm the permissions required. If you are not an Organization Admin on your account, please reach out to one for further assistance or further information on the integration setup.

[title] Keeyora
[path] Integrations/Candidate Experience/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Keeyora account with Ashby, allowing you to send individual texts and mass messages directly from within Ashby with all conversations instantly being saved under each candidate profile as a note.

## Integration Overview

Integrating Keeyora with Ashby is super-easy and only takes a couple of clicks. Simply create an API key and paste it into the Integrations tab of the Keeyora dashboard.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://support.keeyora.com/en/collections/3713726-ashby-integration).

[title] EarnBetter
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

This guide will walk you through integrating your EarnBetter account with Ashby. EarnBetter’s Digital Recruiter helps source and engage candidates, and this integration allows those candidates to flow into Ashby.

## Integration Overview

Integrating EarnBetter with Ashby is a quick process that only requires a few steps. Simply follow EarnBetter’s integration setup flow to connect your Ashby account and complete the configuration to enable the integration.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://intercom.help/earnbetter-83fd641ab32a/en/articles/10745287-earnbetter-ai-recruiter-ashby-integration-setup).

[title] Google Workspace: Setting a Service Account as Primary Admin in Ashby
[path] Integrations/Platform/Google Workspace/

:::hint{type="info"}
This route can be used to limit Ashby’s access. For example, by default super admins in Google have full access to all calendars. If a service account is created that does not have super admin rights, Ashby would be limited to only see free/busy information on calendars (if this is set as the default visibility for non-Super Admins).
:::

As part of the Google Workspace integration setup, you will need to add your primary Google Workspace admin's email address into the `Primary Google Workspace Admin` field within your Google Workspace settings in Ashby. This guide will walk through how to create and add a service account in this field.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9f11129ce92553e2c510de16efb289ca.png)

### Setup Steps

1. Create a custom admin role
   To create a custom admin role, in Google Admin, head to Account, Admin Roles and then click `Create New Role`. Ensure that the OU Read and Users Read privileges have been granted to this role when creating it.
2. Create a new user for the integration
   From here, create a new user for the integration within Google Admin by heading to Directory, then Users and clicking `Add new user`. Ensure that the user is assigned the newly created admin role. Then log in as the new user and accept the terms.
3. Configure the integration in Ashby, below are the available setup routes
   [Google Workspace: Domain-wide Delegation](docId\:i_NrK4oNwVNZAqQlLUtnI)&#x20;
   [Google Workspace: Individual OAuth](docId\:dSYe_yUTQj1Fm4Z6GAmat)&#x20;
   [Google Workspace: Hybrid Access](docId\:NmyE1euDMQXjWTx2RQLfr)&#x20;
4. When setting up the Google Integration in Ashby, add the new user’s email address to the Primary Google Workspace Admin field within the Google Workspace integration settings.


[title] Sourcing
[path] Integrations/


[title] DraftBoard
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

## Prerequisites

An Ashby Org Admin will need to enable the integration in the Marketplace. You pay nothing to access DraftBoard, but will pay the referral bonus (that you set) upon hire.

## Integration Overview

Draftboard is a three-sided talent marketplace where companies publicly post what they'll pay for a successful referral and Scouts (referrers) compete to earn the referral bonus by scouring their networks for the right talent.

Draftboard integrates with Ashby so your talent team doesn’t have to learn a new tool – simply sign up and the applications will start flowing into Ashby. Draftboard believes so much in the value they bring that they charge you nothing for access to Draftboard and never will - you only ever pay the referral bonus (which you control) upon hire, and not a cent more. When you’re happy (i.e., you’ve made a hire), Draftboard gets paid; when you’re not, Draftboard gets nothing.

Draftboard’s integration with Ashby allows you to easily and seamlessly list your jobs on Draftboard. It also allows users to source, access, engage, and track candidates from Draftboard.

## Enabling the integration

1. Go to [https://www.draftboard.com/signup](https://intros.draftboard.com/signup/customer) to sign up for a DraftBoard account. Within 48 hours, you’ll receive a registration link to create your account.
2. The first thing you’ll need to enter when creating your DraftBoard account is your Ashby API key. Go to [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys) to create an API key.
   1. Click on `+New` and set a name for your API key.
   2. Then, click on `Create API Key`.
   3. To close out the window, click on `Copy & Close`.
3. Paste the API key copied from Ashby in DraftBoard and click on `Continue`.
4. That’s it! You’ve now integrated DraftBoard with Ashby 🎉

## Video Walkthrough of setting up integration

Here’s a screencast of how to set up the DraftBoard integration.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/2aacb4a2be9b4f5c973998c98efceb99?sid=dcb09b62-5e85-420f-b47f-b80d2b2fbdd2"}

## Using the Integration

After enabling the integration, you can list your Ashby job postings in DraftBoard from the Your Listings page. For the Ashby job posting to be listed in DraftBoard, a Location will need to be set by editing its details in Draftboard.

You may also set the referral bonus for your jobs directly on the Your Listings page.

[title] How do I make offer emails private?
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Emails/

All emails will be marked as private once a candidate is moved to the Offer stage. For other stages, you'll need to manually mark notes and emails private by clicking `More` on the note or emal in question within the candidate's feed, then selecting `Make Private`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/26070e996a046aaeff9d1be55eeaad3a.png)

You can opt to hide emails sent to and from candidates in the Offer and Hired stages in the [Email Visibility](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/email-settings) section. You can also opt to disable the email sync for hired candidates completely and skip the email sync for candidates on confidential jobs. More on  can be found at [Visibility Options for Users](docId:_B9z1LwPzNHyQfkpdv9wV).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b09b7a46abbfa01c4024238f864f0770.png)


[title] Slack
[path] Integrations/Platform/

Connecting Ashby to Slack lets your team receive notifications as messages from the Ashby bot in addition to email, with minimal setup required. Once enabled, the Ashby bot sends real-time updates via direct messages (DMs) or channels.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EzZdOUHq2L3Y03zBiTFq__untitledpng15028882022-08-17at84049am.jpg" size="76" width="1291" height="764" darkWidth="1291" darkHeight="764" position="center" showCaption="false"}

You can also automate the creation of private interview channels, set up interviewer reminders, reply to candidate text messages, and schedule alert delivery to specific channels. Ashby agents and the Ashby MCP server can also be used with the integration for Slack.

:::hint{type="info"}
This app includes AI-powered features that generate responses, summaries, and recommendations based on the information available to it. AI-generated content may be inaccurate and should be reviewed before use. More on this at [Using Ashby Agents in Slack](docId\:Z3ID-z7KseANUaMpToFjG).
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Your use of Ashby's integration with Slack is governed by the same terms and conditions as your use of other Ashby services.

If you have an Ashby subscription, see our [Terms and Conditions](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/terms) and [Privacy Policy](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/terms) for more information. Otherwise, contact your account manager with any questions.
:::

# Enabling the integration and configuring notifications

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an admin in your team's Slack workspace to enable the Ashby integration in Slack. This is a global integration, so everyone on your team can get notifications without additional setup.
:::

## Steps to enable the integration for Slack

Follow the steps below to enable the integration for Slack from Ashby's [Integrations marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/slack).

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations > Slack** (or use the link to the integrations marketplace above).
2. Select the Slack tile and then click `Add to Slack`.
3. This takes you to the Slack authorization page where you can:
   - Identify the workspace to add the integration
   - Review app permissions and actions
4. When ready, click `Allow` to enable the integration.

![Slack in Ashby Admin.png](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ptqOgR2iwZ0RviXtTzVOZ_slackinashbyadmin.png)

### Permissions we request from Slack

The Ashby integration accesses the following scopes:

- channels\:read: View basic information about public channels in a workspace&#x20;
- channels\:manage: Manage public channels that your slack app has been added to and create new ones.&#x20;
- chat\:write: Post messages in approved channels & conversations&#x20;
- chat\:write.public: Send messages to channels Ashby Bot isn't a member of&#x20;
- files\:write: Upload attachments (used by scheduled dashboards)&#x20;
- groups\:read: View basic information about private channels that Ashby Bot has been added to&#x20;
- groups\:write: Manage private channels that Ashby Bot has been added to and create new ones&#x20;
- im\:read: View basic information about direct messages Ashby Bot has been added to&#x20;
- im\:write: Start direct messages with people&#x20;
- users\:read: View people in a workspace&#x20;
- users\:read.email: View email addresses of people in a workspace
- im\:history: View messages and other content in direct messages that Ashby Bot has been added to
- files\:read: View files shared in channels and conversations that Ashby Bot has been added to
- team\:read: View the name, email domain, and icon for workspaces Ashby Bot is connected to

## Configuring notifications

Once the integration is enabled, your team can add Slack as a notification channel from their [personal settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/notifications).

:::hint{type="success"}
We recommend prompting your team to activate Slack notifications in Ashby, as they are disabled by default.
:::

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cMi5M6aQSTdqgpJL28msI_notification-settings-acent-ashby-2026-03-30-at-31742-pm.jpg)

## Ashby bot for Slack

After you set up the integration for Slack, you start receiving messages from the Ashby bot.

![Ashby bot in Slack.png](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yp3J7OilxQnIXTyjtFJzd_ashbybotinslack.png)

# How alerts work with Slack

Alerts is a reporting feature that allows report delivery to team members, either periodically (e.g., once a week) or immediately if a new record is added to or removed from the report.

If you have the integration for Slack in place, you can opt to have reports sent to a user or to a Slack channel.

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn how to set up alerts, including Slack alerts, check out [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) and [Alerts Library](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm). To learn how the alert is shared and formatted in Slack, see the section on [Delivery via Slack](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) .
:::

# Scheduled dashboards for Slack

You can also set up scheduled dashboards to be delivered to a specific Slack channel. For more on configuring scheduled dashboards and the integration for Slack, check out [Scheduled Dashboards](docId\:Ttr2OmUg9YQPx1nkCMJS9).

# Slack interviewer reminders

You can configure interview reminders to be sent to interviewers via Slack as well as email. You can set these up as part of your scheduling defaults or within individual interview activities.

To set up Slack interview reminders as part of your scheduling defaults:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Scheduling Defaults**.
2. Click on the **Reminders** tab.
3. Click `Add Interviewer Reminder`.
4. Select `Slack` and determine when the reminder should be sent and the template to use. You have the option to preview the reminder.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/8133f413e78f7143c9635f576c7002ee.png" size="80" width="1133" height="612" position="center" darkWidth="1133" darkHeight="612" showCaption="false"}

To set up Slack interview reminders as part of a scheduled interview activity:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and select the job in question.
2. On the **Interview Plan** tab of the job, select the schedule interview activity you'd like to add the reminder to.
3. Click on the **Reminders** tab.
4. Click `Add Interviewer Reminder`.
5. Select `Slack` and determine when the reminder should be sent and the template to use. You have the option to preview the reminder.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/502a052b43bbec2c05a0d26ef7049b46.png" size="80" width="1195" height="695" position="center" darkWidth="1195" darkHeight="695" showCaption="false"}

# Slack interview channels

You can configure private Slack interview channels to be automatically created upon the initial scheduling of an interview for a job consideration. Channels provide a place for interviewers, hiring team members, and/or specific users to communicate and share relevant information about interviews as needed.

## How it works

Once the first interview is scheduled for the candidate, interviewers and any other specified users receive an invitation from the Ashby app via Slack to join the interview channel.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/b22132eb1781b2c462cbb90980efba42.png" size="52" width="391" height="95" darkWidth="391" darkHeight="95" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Once the candidate has been archived or hired, the created Slack channel is archived automatically. Channels are set up per job consideration and cannot be shared across multiple candidates or job considerations.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/d911c6dc576c69e1e92b73b716167445.png" size="70" width="420" height="68" darkWidth="420" darkHeight="68" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you set up Slack channels for multiple interview stages, a new channel is not created each time — the same channel is used throughout the interview loop.

New interviewers are automatically added to the channel.
:::

## Configuring Slack interview channel creation

Slack channels can be configured for job considerations in various ways. See the instructions below to learn how to create Slack channels for your interview loop.

### Configure on the interview activity

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring interview activities, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

1. Navigate to your interview activity by going to the job's **Interview Plan** tab and clicking on the activity within the interview plan stage. Go to the **Communication** tab. At the bottom of the page, enable the `Configure Slack` option.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a4c9f159ccce6c865c4b0dff233b4a81.png)

2. From here, configure interview activity-specific settings for the Slack channel:

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5b6V8tcbUqAlSlT8jf4NF_digital-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-01-19-at-104959-am.jpg)

- **Channel Title:** Configure the name of the channel that will be created for the interview here. You can click the `T` icon to add substitution tokens.
- **Add hiring team roles:** Interviewers on the panel are added to the channel by default, but you can add hiring team roles here to add users in those roles to the Slack channel on creation.
- **Add specific users:** If you'd like to specify certain users to also be added to the channel on creation, specify them in the `Add specific Slack users…` field.
- **Invite Organizer:** Determine whether the person scheduling the interview is invited to the Slack channel.
- **Archive Timing:** When to archive the Slack channel once the candidate is moved to the Hired or Archived stages.
- **Archive Delay:** If the archive timing is set to delayed, you can determine the delay here.
- **Create after direct booking:** If you opt to send out a direct booking link to the candidate, you can switch this on to immediately create a Slack channel once the candidate has scheduled via the booking link. Depending on your hiring process and the stage the activity is in, this can be noisy.
- **Message:** Determine the contents of the Slack message to be sent to channel members providing additional information.

### Configure on manually scheduled interviews

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on the process of manually scheduling interviews, check out [Manually Scheduling Interviews](#).
:::

You can set a Slack channel to be created when manually scheduling an interview too.

1. On the **Communications** tab of the calendar interface, click the `Slack Channel` option.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cc57f40f4671dd65ac58eeb7107fbfb9.png)

2. Enable the `Create Slack Channel` option and complete the following fields to configure the Slack channel settings:
   - **Channel Title:** Configure the name of the channel that will be created for the interview here. You can click the `T` icon to add substitution tokens.
   - **Add hiring team roles:** Interviewers on the panel are added to the channel by default, but you can add hiring team roles here to add users in those roles to the Slack channel on creation.
   - **Add specific users:** If you'd like to specify certain users to also be added to the channel on creation, specify them in the `Add specific Slack users…` field.
   - **Invite Organizer:** The person scheduling the interview is invited to the channel.
   - **Message:** Determine the contents of the Slack message to be sent to channel members providing additional information.

### Configure while manually generating direct booking links or candidate availability links

:::hint{type="info"}
More can be found on instant direct booking links or candidate availability links in [Direct Booking & Candidate Availability Links](docId:8syy2lI7vkIrE-76zrwwM).
:::

1. Generate your instant direct booking link or candidate availability link.
2. Click the `Schedule` button on your interview activity, then `View All Scheduling Options…`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f575b0223f1b37630e711ab33804417d.png)

3. Click the `Template` option.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3b2ca9297769ad6600d5bb113df0b3fc.png)

4. Enable the `Configure Slack` option in the **Communications** tab, then determine the Slack channel details using the following fields:

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/br1ia4iBbEEf6CF7eBcq9_schedule-janet-crawley-acent-ashby-2026-01-19-at-105915-am.jpg)

- **Channel Title:** Configure the name of the channel that will be created for the interview here. You can click the `T` icon to add substitution tokens.
- **Add hiring team roles:** Interviewers on the panel are added to the channel by default, but you can add hiring team roles here to add users in those roles to the Slack channel on creation.
- **Add specific users:** If you'd like to specify certain users to also be added to the channel on creation, specify them in the `Add specific Slack users…` field.
- **Invite Organizer:** Determine whether the person scheduling the interview is invited to the Slack channel.
- **Archive Timing:** When to archive the Slack channel once the candidate is moved to the Hired or Archived stages.
- **Archive Delay:** If the archive timing is set to delayed, you can determine the delay here.
- **Create after direct booking:** If you opt to send out a direct booking link to the candidate, you can switch this on to immediately create a Slack channel once the candidate has scheduled via the booking link. Depending on your hiring process and the stage the activity is in, this can be noisy.
- **Message:** Determine the contents of the Slack message to be sent to channel members providing additional information.

### Setting default settings in scheduling defaults

:::hint{type="info"}
It's not possible to enable private Slack channels to be configured globally. This ensures Slack channels are only created for the specified interviews and avoids creating too many Slack channels for early-stage interviews like recruiter screens.
:::

If you'd like to specify defaults for creating Slack channels, they can be set within **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Scheduling Defaults**. The Slack Channel section is within the **Communication** tab, and you can set defaults for the channel title, whether hiring team users or specific users should be invited to join the created channel by default, and the Slack message sent to the channel.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LfvjFik-UhIWCuJZeiTEn_scheduling-defaults-acent-ashby-2026-01-19-at-110910-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml) for more information on scheduling default settings.
:::

# Ashby agents in Slack

:::hint{type="info"}
If you already have the Slack integration configured but would like to access agent capabilities within Slack, you need to re-install the Ashby app. Further instructions can be found at [Using Ashby Agents in Slack](docId\:Z3ID-z7KseANUaMpToFjG).
:::

:::hint{type="danger"}
During the time between deactivating and activating again, the Slack integration stops working completely. This means notifications and reminders do not go out. We recommend doing this during less busy hours to minimize disruption.
:::

# Ashby MCP

You can also connect to the Ashby MCP server and ask about your hiring directly in Slack. Like the Ashby Assistant, everything is scoped to what you can see in Ashby, and any action is presented for your review before it runs.

:::hint{type="info"}
For full setup instructions and a complete list of available tools, see [Ashby MCP Server (Beta)](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/ashby-mcp-server-beta).
:::

The examples below show common things you can ask, along with the Ashby tools each one uses.

## Review pipelines

"Summarize our engineering pipeline and flag where candidates are stalling."

- `get_job_pipeline`: Returns pipeline metrics for one or more jobs, including per-stage application counts
- `filter_records`: Finds applications, candidates, jobs, and offers using structured criteria

## Prep for interviews and debriefs

"Build an interview brief for \[Candidate Name], including prior feedback and open concerns."

- `get_interview_details`: Returns a detailed briefing for a specific interview, including candidate background and instructions
- `get_submitted_feedback`: Retrieves the scorecard feedback you have already submitted for an application

## Look up records

"Pull up the details on \[Candidate Name]'s application."

- `search_records_by_name`: Resolves a candidate, job, or application name to its record
- `get_record_details`: Fetches full details for jobs, applications, openings, offers, and more

## Take actions

"Add a note to \[Candidate Name] and move them to the onsite stage."

- `add_note_to_candidate`: Adds a note to a candidate's profile
- `change_application_stage`: Moves an application to a different interview stage

# FAQs

### I completed the setup — why am I not receiving notifications in Slack?

If the email address on your Slack account isn't the same as the one on your Ashby account, you need to tell Ashby what email address to use on your [integration settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/integrations).

### How do I reconnect or reauthorize the Ashby integration with Slack?

To disconnect the integration from Slack, go to the [integrations page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/slack), click `Deactivate` and then `Deactivate Slack`. Then simply follow the [Steps to enable the integration for Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo) to connect the integration to Slack again.

### How can I request to have my data deleted?

Ashby doesn't own your company's data, and this applies to data synced from Slack through the integration as well.

If you are an admin in Ashby, reach out to us at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) and we'll be happy to help you. Otherwise, contact your manager or the person responsible for your Ashby instance to make the request on your behalf.

### Is there any fee for use of the integration?

No — your Ashby subscription includes the integration with Slack with no additional fee. If you haven't made the switch to Ashby yet, see our [Pricing page](https://www.ashbyhq.com/pricing) for more info about our simple, all-in-one pricing model. (Slack may have their own pricing for your use of their services, which may include services used by Ashby's integration.)

### Can alerts be delivered via Slack?

You can deliver alerts via Slack, both to a specific user or to a Slack channel. You can read more on configuring alerts and alert delivery at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) and more about templates at [Alerts Library](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm).

### Can Slack alerts be replied to, and will those replies appear anywhere in Ashby?

You can reply directly from Slack for the following notification types:

- New note created
- Reply to a note
- Mention in a note

The notification shows a `Reply` button. Click this to open the popover and add your response.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/34ad4f593ecf1aee051ab63531117414.png)

Once you've submitted your response, it is added to the note on the candidate profile, with a note that the reply was sent via Slack.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/847502b48ec9be8375260e88cdb8d7c9.png" size="54" width="384" height="209" darkWidth="384" darkHeight="209" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### Can I respond to candidate text messages via Slack?

Yes! Similar to responding to notifications, you can click `Reply` on an SMS notification in Slack, type out your response, and then click `Send Reply` to send a response text to the candidate without logging into Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/06e0dbf331789847598abef6cfcdbc32.png" size="38" width="373" height="282" position="center" darkWidth="373" darkHeight="282" showCaption="false"}

### When an interviewer on a panel is replaced and a private Slack channel was created, does this also add/remove the correct corresponding Slack users?

The new interviewer is automatically added, but the previous interviewer is not removed from the channel.

### Is it possible to create interview Slack channels when using soft booking with holds?

Slack channels are only created when booking an interview (not holds). However, a recommended workaround is to schedule the interview without sending the candidate invite. That creates the channel, and if they need to reschedule, you can make changes to the interview. If everything looks good, you can then choose to send the invite to the candidate.

### Can I use Slack's webhooks to configure integrations with Ashby?

Slack webhooks do not return successful pings to Ashby, so we are unable to support configuring Slack webhooks at this time.

Two alternative options include:

1. Use Ashby Alerts: [How alerts work with Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo)
2. Explore using middleware like Zapier or Merge.

[title] Microsoft Custom Applications (GCC High)
[path] Integrations/Platform/Untitled/

This feature enables teams to connect their [Azure Custom Applications](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/azure-resource-manager/managed-applications/tutorial-create-managed-app-with-custom-provider?tabs=azurecli-interactive), including GCC High and DoD tenants. This enhanced control lets your team define the permissions granted, enabling better compliance and security tailored to your organization's needs.

# Permissions & access

This option is available on the Foundations, Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you're also setting up SSO, create a new app registration rather than using the existing one.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby's Microsoft 365 custom app integration supports a single Microsoft tenant only. If your organization operates across multiple tenants (for example, a parent company and PortCos with separate tenants), the custom app can only connect to the tenant where it is registered and won't be able to support mailbox or calendar access across those separate tenants.
:::

# Setting up your M365 custom application

1. Log into Azure:
   - Go to your Azure portal and click `Manage Microsoft Entra ID`.
2. Create a new app registration:
   - Navigate to **App Registrations** and click `New Registration`.
   - Name your application and click `Register`.
3. Configure authentication:
   - In the new app, click `Authentication`, then `Add a platform`.
   - Select `Web`.
   - In the **Redirect URIs** field, enter the following:
     - `https://app.ashbyhq.com/api/oauth/authorize/client_credentials/inbound`
   - Click `Save` at the bottom of the page.
   - Return to **Authentication > Add a platform**. Click `Add URI` again and enter:
     - `https://app.ashbyhq.com/api/oauth/authorize/inbound`
   - Click `Save` at the bottom of the page.
4. Set API permissions:
   - Go to **API Permissions** and click `Add a permission`.
   - Select **Microsoft Graph → Application permissions**.
   - Add the following permissions based on your needs:
     - Calendar access: `Calendars.ReadWrite` and `MailboxSettings.Read`.
     - User sync: `User.Read.All`.
     - Email sync: `Mail.ReadWrite` and `Mail.Send`.
   - Once all permissions are selected, click `Add permissions`.
5. Create a client secret:
   - Navigate to **Certificates & Secrets** and click `New Client Secret`.
   - Enter a title for the secret and select your desired expiration period.
     - You are responsible for rotating the secret before it expires to prevent the Ashby ↔ M365 integration from breaking.
   - Click `Add` and copy the value (not the Secret ID or label) of the new secret.
6. Retrieve your application ID:
   - Go to the **Overview** section of your app registration in Azure.
   - Copy the **Application ID**.

# Configuring in Ashby

:::hint{type="info"}
Reach out to your Ashby Customer Success Manager to confirm that custom application setup is enabled for your account.
:::

1. Visit **Advanced Settings**:
   - Log into Ashby and go to the [Microsoft 365 Advanced Settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/microsoft-365/advanced).
2. Input credentials and configure tenant type:
   - Paste the **Application ID** and **Client Secret** into the corresponding fields.
   - Configure tenant type:
     - If your tenant resides on a GCC server, select the appropriate option from the dropdown menu:
       - None (default)
       - GCC
       - DoD
3. Authorize the application:
   - Navigate to the **General Settings** tab and click `Connect to Microsoft 365` under **Application Wide Authorization**.
   - Follow the prompts to authorize the connection, ensuring only the permissions you configured are granted.
4. To complete your authorization, click the **General Settings** tab, then under **Application Wide Authorization**, click `Connect to Microsoft 365`. When prompted, verify that you are connecting to your application and only granting the permissions you set up.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6d5145b0550b7e0b3c99e5fe1b9b3e0d.png)

# Feature limitations

GCC High environments have some feature limitations, but they do not affect the core offerings used at Ashby (generally online cloud-based email through Exchange and Outlook, and calendaring through Outlook and Microsoft Teams video conferencing).

- There are some limitations on audio and phone-based conferencing in Teams — these also apply to Teams meetings created through Ashby in these environments. You can read more about the potential limitations and differences across Government plans in the [Office 365 US Government service description](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/office365/servicedescriptions/office-365-platform-service-description/office-365-us-government/office-365-us-government).
- Organizations using GCC High cannot have both a GCC High and a regular Microsoft integration. They also cannot have users from a GCC High domain and a regular M365 domain within the account. This is because the Microsoft Government API endpoints use a different URL — this includes the initial OAuth endpoint.
- The "Sign in with Microsoft" SSO login option does not work for organizations using GCC High.

# FAQs

### What permissions do I need for calendar and email access?

- For tenant-wide calendar access: `Calendars.ReadWrite` and `MailboxSettings.Read`.
  - Recommend application scopes.
- For email sync: `Mail.ReadWrite` and `Mail.Send`.
  - Recommend delegate scopes.
- For user sync: `User.Read.All`.
  - Recommend application scopes.

### How do I rotate a client secret?

1. Go to **Certificates & secrets** in Azure.
2. Create a new secret before the current one expires.
3. Update the secret value in Ashby's **Microsoft 365 Advanced Settings**.

Best practice: set a calendar event or recurring task with your IT team to ensure this happens before the secret expires.

### Can I use only delegated scopes?

Yes, but there are tradeoffs. You also need to securely share your Tenant ID with your Ashby point of contact (POC) so we can store this value in our database. Tradeoffs include:

- Higher maintenance and onboarding burden.
- Delegated access to calendars meaningfully slows down interview scheduling for Talent teams.

### What happens if my client secret expires?

The Ashby ↔ M365 integration stops working. You must create and update a new secret to restore functionality.

### Can I use this integration with GCC High or DoD tenants?

Yes, the integration supports GCC High and DoD tenants. Ensure you select the correct tenant type in **Advanced Settings**.

### How can I set an Azure custom application to only show free/busy calendar availability?

Microsoft supports this through ExchangePowerShell. See the [Set-MailboxCalendarFolder guide](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/module/exchange/set-mailboxcalendarfolder?view=exchange-ps) for more details.

### How can I limit email access to only a subset of users?

Microsoft supports this through app roles. See the [app roles guide](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/entra/external-id/customers/how-to-use-app-roles-customers) for more details.

- Best practice is to create one role with more permissive access (e.g., for Recruiter), and address all other users with application-wide permissions.
- When setting up app roles, the **Values** to be input should be the relevant scopes for the role as comma-separated values. The full list of values, for example, would be `Calendars.ReadWrite,MailboxSettings.Read,User.Read.All,Mail.ReadWrite,Mail.Send`.

### What login options are available once this integration is enabled?

Once your custom application setup is complete, you can use either magic links or SSO to log in to Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Microsoft SSO is not compatible with GCC High.
:::

### My interviewers are receiving a lot of rescheduling notifications from Microsoft when interviewers are being switched around — what can I do to resolve this?

These notifications are handled by Microsoft and there isn't a way to change the configured settings in Ashby. You can check the following areas in the limited admin or user settings to see if further adjustments can be made to reduce the number of notifications being sent:

- Navigate to room/resource mailboxes to adjust auto-accept behavior via the `Set-CalendarProcessing` cmdlet.
- At a user level, navigate to **Outlook Web > Calendar > Settings > Events & invitations**.

[title] Requested permissions for the Chrome Extension, Slack and other Integrations
[path] Integrations/Platform/

In this guide, we'll walk through the permissions requested for other integrations in Ashby, including the chrome extension, Slack, marketplace integrations and out developer API.

## Ashby’s Chrome Extension Privileges

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Chrome Extension](docId\:Je_BiJ1sj2ro6WT9vtTfP) for more details about this feature.
:::

The Ashby Chrome Extension requests the following permissions for candidate sourcing:

- **Read and change data on specific sites&#x20;**(host permissions)**:** 
  - GitHub: Displays matching candidates or pulls potential matches but does not modify data.
  - Gmail: Reads email addresses in threads to cross-reference candidates but does not modify emails.
  - Ashby App: Ensures the extension works seamlessly with Ashby (e.g., adding candidates, enrolling sequences).
- **Read your browsing history** (tabs)**:**
  - The code uses this to notice when you switch pages so the right panel state shows up; it does not store or send your history anywhere.
- **Active tab access** (activeTab)**:**
  - Gives the extension temporary access to the current tab's URL and content only when you click it (revoked when you navigate away). Used to toggle the side panel, detect PDF resume and CSV downloads on LinkedIn, and show a badge on the Ashby toolbar icon when the LinkedIn or GitHub profile you are viewing is already a candidate in Ashby.
- **Modify the data you copy and paste** (clipboardWrite)**:**
  - Lets you copy candidate details from the extension to your clipboard. It can only write to the clipboard, never read it.
- **Manage downloads** (downloads)**:**
  - Adds candidates to Ashby when you download a resume PDF or candidate-list CSV from LinkedIn. The extension only reads and transmits a file if it comes from LinkedIn and the Ashby side panel is open. Downloads from any other site are never read or transmitted.
- **Access cookies** (cookies)**:**
  - Used exclusively to read a single Ashby login cookie on app.ashbyhq.com, so the extension knows when you sign in or out of Ashby. The extension does not read cookies on GitHub, Gmail, or any other site.
- **Local storage** (storage)**:**
  - Stores extension state locally on your machine (e.g. your preferences). No data is transmitted externally.
- **Side panel (**&#x73;idePane&#x6C;**)**
  - Powers the Ashby side panel in Chrome, allowing you to view and manage candidates without navigating away from your current page.
- **Inject content into pages (**&#x73;criptin&#x67;**)**
  - Uses the scripting permission (and web\_accessible\_resources in our manifest) to inject content scripts in two cases:
    - **Side panel fallback:** for Chromium browsers that don't support Chrome's native side panel (e.g., some enterprise browsers), we render the Ashby interface alongside the active tab's content, mimicking the side panel without overlaying or interrupting the page.
    - **Site integrations**: injects scripts on GitHub and Gmail so the extension can display within those pages.

## Ashby's Integration for Slack

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on setting up the integration for Slack, check out [Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo).
:::

Ashby's integration for Slack allows your Talent team to receive recruiting alerts, automate interview workflows, and manage hiring conversations inside Slack. Ashby requests broad permissions at install time, even if only a subset is used. This is because of how Slack scopes work. This section outlines the permissions requested and why we ask for them.

### Why Ashby requests elevated Slack scopes

Slack groups multiple actions (e.g., posting and joining channels) under single permission categories, which means:

- Even if Ashby only posts alerts, it must also request scopes that allow managing channels or uploading files.
- Slack apps cannot selectively request parts of a scope, all bundled capabilities must be accepted together.

### Scopes Ashby needs to work correctly:

The Ashby integration accesses the following scopes:

| Scope              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| channels\:read     | View basic information about public channels in a workspace                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| channels\:manage   | Manage public channels that your Slack app has been added to and create new ones. Enables Ashby to automatically create candidate-specific channels, add interviewers, and archive channels post-hire. This is only triggered if auto-channel workflows are enabled. |
| chat\:write        | Post messages in approved channels & conversations                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| chat\:write.public | Send messages to channels Ashby Bot isn't a member of. Allows Ashby to deliver alerts (e.g., new applicants, interview updates) to channels without requiring admins to manually invite the bot.                                                                     |
| files\:write       | Upload attachments. Used to deliver resumes, prep docs, or scorecards via Slack, along with scheduled dashboards. Ashby does not delete files unless explicitly instructed; this capability is included because Slack groups file actions under one scope.           |
| groups\:read       | View basic information about private channels that Ashby Bot has been added to                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| groups\:write      | Manage private channels that Ashby Bot has been added to and create new ones. Enables Ashby to automatically create candidate-specific channels, add interviewers, and archive channels post-hire. This is only triggered if auto-channel workflows are enabled      |
| im\:read           | View basic information about direct messages Ashby Bot has been added to                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| im\:write          | Start direct messages with people                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| users\:read        | View people in a workspace                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| users\:read.email  | View email addresses of people in a workspace                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |

### How permissions are used:

Ashby only uses these permissions in line with the workflows your team enables in Ashby. If you're not using Slack alerts or auto-channel creation, those actions will not be performed.

However, Slack requires all permissions to be accepted up front during installation, regardless of whether they’re actively used.

## Ashby Post-Hire Integrations

Ashby integrates with HRIS systems (e.g., [Hi Bob](docId\:vNuucxQmZTC0bbXh-fnqJ) , [Workday](docId\:Lser77iHgverWT8Ovu5gx)) to:

- Mark hired candidates as employees.
- Create employee records in the HRIS.
- Support post-hire workflows like tracking requisitions (e.g., in Workday).

Ashby uses HRIS API keys to submit and query relevant records. The specific access needed depends on your HRIS. Refer to Ashby’s knowledge base for detailed integration requirements.

## Marketplace Integrations

Ashby offers:

- First-party integrations developed by Ashby (e.g., [Zoom](docId\:S9XGV03nQ8KCAR0_ifd9l) ).
- Third-party integrations developed by partners (e.g. [Levels.fyi](docId\:eIhxqfxZOCwhG090I50F7)).

For third-party integrations, please contact the vendor directly for security, access, or privacy-related questions.

## Ashby Developer API

Ashby provides a Developer API for customers, accessed via API keys:

- Access Control: Keys are generated by users with the "Organization Admin" role and shown only at creation.
- Management: Keys can be individually deactivated.
- Permissions: Keys can be scoped to specific endpoints to limit access for integrations or partners.

[For full details, visit Ashby Developer API documentation.](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/introduction)

[title] WhatsApp: Templates and Messaging
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Untitled/

This guide covers configuring message templates, sending WhatsApp messages to candidates, and using WhatsApp for automated interview reminders, booking confirmations, and workflow steps for candidates.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- You need to have WhatsApp candidate messaging configured before you can send messages with WhatsApp in Ashby. For more on configuring WhatsApp candidate messaging, check out [WhatsApp: Setup](docId\:XK2qn03Z4yvC95MsPmlNI).&#x20;
- Each message sent via WhatsApp candidate texting uses credits that come from your candidate texting credit pool.&#x20;
  - Templates in the Marketing category use 2 credits while other template types consume 1 credit. Categories are assigned by Meta.
  - Ashby does not use credits when a candidate responds.
:::

# Permissions & access

- You need Organization Admin access and Has Candidate Texting Access permissions enabled on your employee profile to enable WhatsApp messaging and configure WhatsApp message templates.
- You need the Can Add/Edit Jobs permission to edit a schedule interview activity.
- You need the Can Email/Schedule Candidates permission to send a WhatsApp message from the candidate profile to a consenting candidate.
- You need to have Has Candidate Texting Access permissions enabled on your employee profile to send WhatsApp messages to a candidate.

# WhatsApp message templates

Once you successfully connect your WABA to Ashby, seven pre-approved built-in templates are available in your account automatically.&#x20;

These templates cover interview reminders, availability requests, booking links, take-home notifications, and recruiter outreach. You can start with those and add your own as needed.

Meta only allows you to send candidates templates that have been reviewed and approved by them unless the candidate has messaged within the last 24 hours.

## Creating a new WhatsApp message template

:::hint{type="info"}
Meta must approve a template before you can send messages using it to a candidate. Approval typically takes five minutes to 24 hours. You can only use templates with approved versions in automations.

Check out [Twilio's documentation](https://help.twilio.com/articles/360039737753-Recommendations-and-Best-Practices-for-Creating-WhatsApp-Message-Templates) for more on best practices for creating templates.
:::

To create a new WhatsApp message template:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting Templates**.
2. Click the **WhatsApp Template** tab.
3. Click `+ New` to create a new template.
4. Add your message body.
   - You can assign a category and language to your template.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
Meta requires every template to be classified as Marketing, Utility, or Authentication. Meta is the one who designated the classification during approval, and they can re-categorize an approved template to Marketing on re-review without notice. 

The category of the template matters because credits are consumed based on the type of template you are sending a candidate.&#x20;

Marketing templates use 2 credits while other template types consume 1 credit. You are not allowed to send templates in the Marketing category to US and Canada phone numbers. This is a Meta enforced restriction.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Click the `T` icon to add a substitution token. Ashby replaces tokens with actual values when sending.
:::

5. Once your template is ready, click `Submit for Approval`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_8FHqDDi9oCwVAl_xYNNY_a-blank-whatsapp-template.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1440" height="1592" darkWidth="1440" darkHeight="1592" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="This screenshot shows the template editor."}

WhatsApp message templates can have the following states:

- **Draft:** You have created or edited the template but not yet submitted it to Meta. These templates don't appear as an option to send to candidates or use in automations. If this template has a version that was previously approved, you can still use that version.
- **Submitted:** The template is with Meta and awaiting review. During this time, you can't edit the template. These templates don't appear yet as an option to send to candidates or use in automations. If this template has a version that was previously approved, you can still use that version.
- **Approved:** Meta has approved the template, and you can send it to candidates moving forward. This approved template now appears in the WhatsApp template dropdown for automations and in the WhatsApp message composer on a candidate's profile.
- **Rejected:** Meta has rejected this template because of an issue it flagged, so you can't use the template. You can fix these issues and resubmit. Until this template gets approved, you can't use it in automations or to message from the candidate profile. If this template has a version that was previously approved, you can still use that version.
- **Paused and Suspended:** A template can also be Paused (Meta's response to candidate thumbs-down feedback building up) or Suspended (repeated pauses). You can't use that template moving forward.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information, check out Twilio's guide: [Message Templates Approvals & Statuses](https://www.twilio.com/docs/whatsapp/tutorial/message-template-approvals-statuses).
:::

## Editing a WhatsApp message template

:::hint{type="info"}
You can't edit templates in the Submitted state.
:::

To edit an existing WhatsApp message template:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting Templates**.
2. Click the **WhatsApp Template** tab.
3. Click the WhatsApp template you want to change.
4. Click `Edit` within the template pop-up and make your amendments. If the template is a draft, you can make edits right away.
5. Click `Submit for Approval` to re-submit the message to Meta.

Editing an already approved template creates a new version under review. In the meantime, the previously approved version stays live for automations, and you can send it from the WhatsApp message composer on the candidate profile. Versioning is forward-only. You cannot revert to a prior approved version.

## Archiving and restoring a WhatsApp message template

To archive a WhatsApp message template:

1. Click the template you want to archive.
2. Click `More`, then click `Archive`.
3. Click `Archive` on the following pop-up to confirm.

![This screenshot shows the More, then Archive option when archiving a message template.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WDHtADe6msVVi2pIOdybF_archiving-a-whatsapp-template.jpg)

To restore an archived template:

1. Set the `Active` dropdown on the **WhatsApp Template** tab to `All`.

![The list of WhatsApp messaging templates with the All dropdown highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sLHXpXxa5MN-iQ5GVWYc5_active-to-all-tab.jpg)

2. Click the template you want to restore.
3. Click `More`, then click `Restore`.
4. Click `Restore` on the following pop-up to confirm.

# Sending a WhatsApp message to a candidate

To send a WhatsApp message to a candidate:

1. Navigate to the candidate profile.
2. Click the **WhatsApp** tab of the candidate feed.
3. Click the `+` icon to select a WhatsApp message template and review the message content. The template content cannot be edited prior to sending.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XcoKg_yLb75xqPTGHrFXg_sending-a-message-to-the-candidate-via-whatsapp.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1480" height="1356" darkWidth="1480" darkHeight="1356" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The WhatsApp tab of the candidate feed. Click the + icon to select a WhatsApp template."}

4. Click `Send`.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
A **Missing Value For** error means substitution tokens aren't resolving. Confirm that the relevant data is available for the candidate:

- For direct booking or candidate availability links, confirm that you have generated these for the candidate's interview.
- For take-home submission links, confirm that a take-home activity is on the candidate profile and that you have generated a take-home activity self-submission link.
:::

# Candidate Responses in WhatsApp

If a candidate responds to a message, the inbound message opens a 24-hour free form messaging window so you can respond without needing to use another template. A free-form response costs 1 credit. You are not charged credits for receiving messages from the candidate.

The candidate's response will show in the WhatsApp tab of the candidate feed.

You can opt to receive email or Slack notifications for WhatsApp responses within **Personal Settings > Notification Settings**. To ensure you receive email or Slack notifications when a candidate messages, enable the **Candidate Replied to a Text Message** and/or **Candidate Replied to your Text Message** toggles.&#x20;

An inbound WhatsApp message from a candidate opens a 24 hour free form messaging window. If you receive a notification that the candidate has responded to your text message, then you can reply from the email or Slack notification received.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are responding outside of the 24-hour window, you will only have the option to send an approved template.
:::

# Using WhatsApp templates in scheduling defaults and schedule interview activities

:::hint{type="info"}
To set WhatsApp templates in Scheduling Defaults, navigate to **Admin > Interviews & Scheduling > Scheduling Defaults**. For more on scheduling defaults, check out [Setting Scheduling Defaults](docId\:OByntivrG5pxERTem4Tml).

To set WhatsApp templates in specific schedule interview activities, navigate to a job, click the **Interview Plan** tab, and then either click an existing activity or create a new one. For more on overriding scheduling default settings in schedule interview activities, check out [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer).
:::

You can set WhatsApp templates as defaults in the following cases:

- When sending a direct booking link out for an interview.
- When sending a confirmation message after you schedule the interview.
- When sending interview reminders to the candidate.

On the **Communications** tab of Scheduling Defaults or in your schedule interview activity:

Use the `Direct Booking WhatsApp Template` dropdown to determine the template used when sending a direct booking link out for an interview.

![The screenshot shows the Direct Booking WhatsApp Template dropdown.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-foALKJxHGkWInFrcYr_9_scheduling-defaults-ashby-2026-08-21-at-112118-am.jpg)

Use the `Candidate Confirmation WhatsApp Template` dropdown to determine the template used when sending an interview confirmation WhatsApp message.

![The screenshot shows the Candidate Confirmation WhatsApp Template dropdown.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mmZdYrcVx6-Qbef_RIx1t_candidate-confirmation-whatsapp-template-dropdown.jpg)

On the **Reminders** tab of Scheduling Defaults or in your schedule interview activity:

1. Click `+ Add Candidate Reminder` in the **Candidate Reminders** section.
2. Select WhatsApp using the `Send` selector.
3. Use the **When** fields to determine when Ashby sends the reminder.
4. Select the template with the `Using Template` dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xL_HRIKadWmv1-191lITB_setting-a-template-for-a-whatsapp-interview-reminder.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="802" height="496" darkWidth="802" darkHeight="496" showCaption="false" alt="The screenshot shows the screen to configure a WhatsApp interview reminder."}

# FAQs

### Do candidate replies use credits?

No. Only messages your team sends (outbound messages) consume credits.

### Can I purchase additional texting credits?

Yes, you can find our guide on this at [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE).

### Can I message a candidate who never saw the opt-in question?

Not automatically. The message waits, marked with a`Waiting for consent` indicator. To send it, consent would need to be gathered outside of Ashby, then the user can override the consent status on the candidate profile once the candidate grants consent. They can then re-send.

![A pending message with a Waiting for consent indicator.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xVF1KFHJjmCnRslPVUGGB_waiting-for-consent-on-a-whatsapp-message.png)

### What happens if I try to message a candidate and they have opted out of WhatsApp messaging?

The message will not be sent to the candidate and a `Consent not given` indicator will show beside the message.

![A Consent not given indicator will show if the candidate has opted out and you try to send a message.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XfeQAEUXHHr8-K5ke4PyR_consent-not-given-indicator.jpg)

### Are there restrictions on what tokens I can use in a template?

Yes. The following restrictions are from Meta:

- A template can't start or end with a token.
- Two tokens can't be back to back.&#x20;
- Tokens can't contain new lines.&#x20;
- Every token needs an example value before submission.&#x20;
- Templates are capped at 10 emojis.&#x20;

### Can WhatsApp conversations be filtered or reported on like other data in Ashby?

Not currently.

### What isn't supported with WhatsApp messages?

- Rich text messages can’t be sent. Inbound rich text messages will still show. 
- You can’t send or receive pictures or any non-text content.
- We currently do not support emoji reactions to messages. If the candidate emoji reacts to a message, you will not see it or be notified.
- Support for your org to use non-US/Canada phone numbers

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
Please note, this will limit your ability to message candidates who have phone numbers from Brazil and Indonesia.
:::

- Per-brand WhatsApp Business Accounts - we currently support one WhatsApp business account for the entire organization, but each brand is a phone number under the WhatsApp business account.
- Ashby does not support using customer numbers.


[title] AI Notetaker FAQs
[path] Ashby AI Features/AI Notetaker/

This article answers common questions about AI Notetaker. Questions are grouped by topic — use the sections below to find answers about features and admin settings, interviewing and scheduling, and post-interview recordings and feedback.

# Features & admin

### Does Ashby or the AI vendor use these recordings to train their models? Are our calls or notes ever used for training purposes, even in anonymized form?

No. Refer to our [Terms for AI Features](https://www.ashbyhq.com/resources/terms-ai-features) and other resources in our [Trust Center](https://trust.ashbyhq.com/) for more information.

### Can only users with paid seats have the AI Notetaker enabled?

No, the AI Notetaker can be enabled for all users in your Ashby account, including those with Limited Access.

### Is it possible for interviewers to opt out of the AI Notetaker?

While you can disable or enable the AI Notetaker for specific employees via their profile if you are an Org Admin, it's currently not possible for interviewers to opt out of the AI Notetaker themselves.

### Are debriefs supported as well as interviews?

Yes! The AI Notetaker can be added to debriefs as well as interviews. The process to add the AI Notetaker to a debrief is the same as with an interview.

### Is there a way for me to view who has the AI Notetaker enabled?

Yes, there is a field (`Is AI Notetaker Enabled?`) that can be used in reporting to see who has the AI Notetaker enabled for them, and enabled users can be viewed on the AI Notetaker admin page as well.

An example of a report you can create using this field is below. Note that custom reports are not available on the Foundations plan.

**Employees: AI Notetaker status**

**Report type:** Custom List
**Subject:** Employees
**Filters:** If you'd like to view a specific group of employees, feel free to add filter fields.
**Fields to show:** Employee's Name, Employee's Email, Employee's Job Title, Has AI Notetaker Enabled?

![Screenshot of the Employees report showing AI Notetaker enabled status for each team member.](https://cdn.zappy.app/813fb2e9626ba7130d2bc4f5efe144be.png)

# Interviewing & scheduling

### A candidate requested not to be recorded after they joined the meeting. How can I remove the AI Notetaker from my interview?

Each video conferencing tool lets you remove the AI Notetaker participant from the call natively. For example, in Zoom, the organizer or host can click the three dots on the AI Notetaker's participant cell and select `Remove` (make sure you do not report the AI Notetaker). You can also stop the recording from within Ashby by navigating to the `Recording` tab of the interview briefing and clicking `Stop Recording`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e8675bc547016c2733f4db87e6ccb4cd.png" size="80" width="864" height="413" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the Recording tab in the interview briefing showing the Stop Recording button." darkWidth="864" darkHeight="413" showCaption="false"}

### If AI Notetaker is enabled, is it automatically added to previously scheduled interviews?

No. Interviews that were already scheduled before AI Notetaker was enabled do not have it added automatically. To include AI Notetaker on those interviews, update them manually by clicking `More Actions` on the interview activity and selecting `Record This Interview`.

### I've amended the AI Notetaker recording mode settings within my scheduling defaults or within my interview activity. Does this update already scheduled interviews?

Changes made to the recording mode on an interview plan activity or within scheduling defaults only apply to AI Notetakers that are added or scheduled after that change is made.

If you'd like to update the recording mode settings for an already scheduled interview, reschedule the interview and adjust the AI Notetaker settings as part of the rescheduling process. Navigate to the `AI Notetaker` section within the `Communications` tab to make adjustments as needed before confirming the reschedule.

### When does the AI Notetaker leave the interview?

The AI Notetaker leaves when all other non-bot participants leave, or at the scheduled end time if the interview is part of a multi-event panel.

### Which languages are supported by the AI Notetaker?

The AI Notetaker can transcribe conversations in over 99 languages. It automatically detects the language being spoken, so long as there's at least 60–90 seconds of speech in a recording. Transcripts automatically appear in the language being spoken.

Accuracy may vary based on the language and how commonly it is spoken. Generally, more commonly spoken languages have higher accuracy and better support for different accents.

### How are multiple languages in one conversation supported?

If an interview conversation switches between multiple languages, some of the transcription may get automatically translated and not reflect the language spoken at that moment. For example, if an interview had portions in Italian and English, some portions spoken in English may appear translated into Italian in the transcript. The transcript is correct but may just appear in a different language.

### Can the AI Notetaker translate different languages when summarizing notes?

The AI Notetaker typically summarizes conversations in English, regardless of the language in the transcription.

- Summary notes are likely in English.
- Feedback form auto-fill suggestions are also typically in English, but can be based on the language of the feedback form question itself. A refinement can always be added to a suggestion to ask it to translate or write an answer in a different language.
- The AI assistant typically answers in English or the language that a request is sent in. You can ask the assistant to translate or interact in any specific language you prefer.

### How does AI Notetaker work with multi-day scheduling or interviews with multiple events?

Each interview event in a multi-event interview block has its own AI Notetaker, but the next AI Notetaker must successfully join the next meeting before the previous one stops recording.

If an interviewer does not admit the next AI Notetaker from the waiting room, the previous AI Notetaker intentionally keeps recording because it assumes the current interview may be running over. This can result in one long recording with no distinction between each individual interview event. This behavior is by design to avoid missing conversations when interviews go past their scheduled end time, but it also means interviewers may need to admit another AI Notetaker even if one is already in the meeting.

If you want guaranteed separate recordings for each panel interview, use the `One invite per interview event` setting when you schedule multi-event interviews. This creates more predictable recording boundaries, but candidates need to use separate meeting links to join each interview event instead of staying in one continuous meeting.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on multi-panel interviews, see [How do I use multi-day scheduling?](docId:4J-Ogip_ouVgScipIIxYY).&#x20;
:::

# Post-interview recordings and feedback

### Can I view recordings as part of the debrief overview?

Yes! Where available (and provided the user has permission to view the recordings), interview recordings can be accessed via the `All Feedback` tab on the debrief information. Click `Interview Recording` on the feedback in question to access the interview recording and transcript.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OxFQothv1S1UnA9JgkRf-_a-interview-briefing-acent-add-interview-recording-to-all-feedback-tab-by-teodash-a-pull-request-88599-a-ashbyhqashby-2026-02-02-at-23118-pm.jpg" size="84" width="910" height="476" position="center" alt="Screenshot of the All Feedback tab in a debrief showing an Interview Recording link on a feedback entry." darkWidth="910" darkHeight="476" showCaption="false"}

### Can you send me a notification when my recording is done processing and ready?

Recordings and transcripts are generally processed within a few minutes after a meeting ends, so notifications are not typically needed. However, you can create a report with an alert for when a new recording is created and a video or transcript is available.  See [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) for more info.

### I'm seeing a REC failed tag on my interview — what happened?

You can hover over the `REC failed` tag in the interview briefing to see why the recording failed.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e103f7a9c2a239ea32c4d75062aa0b51.png" size="44" width="308" height="112" position="center" darkWidth="308" darkHeight="112" alt="Screenshot of the REC failed tag on an interview activity in the interview briefing." showCaption="false"}

### Can I download a recording?

Yes. Right-click on the player and select `Save video as` to download the video file.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you do not see the `Save video as` option, press play on the video and try again.
:::

### Can I download or copy the transcript?

Yes. While viewing the recording, select the three dots next to the `Transcript` or `Notes` tabs to copy or download the transcript as a CSV, TXT, or Markdown file.

### Can I only generate content using AI for one specific feedback form question, rather than all long, formattable text fields in the form?

Yes — use the `AI Gen` option in the toolbar for a specific field to generate content for that field only.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/4386f20f32a3f9a6c692485ebf6f94d8.png" size="46" width="415" height="158" position="center" darkWidth="415" darkHeight="158" alt="Screenshot of the feedback form toolbar showing the AI Gen button for generating content in a specific field." showCaption="false"}

### Can I ask the AI Candidate Assistant about the contents of interviews that have been recorded?

Yes! Context from interview transcripts is automatically made available to the AI Candidate Assistant. From a permissions perspective, the AI Candidate Assistant can access the same things that any specific user has access to. Therefore, only transcripts from interviews a user has access to are available to the AI Candidate Assistant.

[title] AI Talent Rediscovery
[path] Ashby AI Features/

Talent Rediscovery enables you to use AI to identify strong candidates already in your Ashby database for open roles.

AI Talent Rediscovery is available on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**&#x20;

Organization Admins can enable AI features and Talent Rediscovery. Organization Admins and Elevated Access users with Admin or Admin Private access can create a Talent Rediscovery query for the roles they have this access to.

AI Talent Rediscovery uses AI Credits. One AI credit is used per returned candidate with a cap of 250 credits used for any single search. AI credits are not used if the search does not return candidates.&#x20;

For more on AI credits, check out [AI Credits](docId:7q8kJ16iBGcP9zSJx86Xm). Want to buy more credits? Check out [How do I purchase additional email lookups, AI credits or texting credits in-app?](docId\:eDqZ9Zv9vdCLJyzsXjDHE)&#x20;
:::

# Step 1: Enabling Talent Rediscovery

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have `Auto-enable new features` toggled on for your organization, you can skip the steps below.
:::

To enable Talent Rediscovery:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-in Features**.
2. If you have not yet opted in to AI Features, toggle on `Enable AI Features`. You will be prompted to read and agree to Ashby's AI terms before any AI features can be enabled.
3. Toggle on the `Talent Rediscovery` opt-in feature.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ztGI_ZwbZ9LRk7LcHn14y_opt-in-features-acent-ashby-2026-04-23-at-105801-am.jpg" size="100" width="2412" height="510" position="center" alt="The opt-in features page in Admin. The Talent Rediscovery opt-in option is highlighted." indent="2" darkWidth="2412" darkHeight="510" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning" indent="2"}
If you see a **Not ready** message when enabling Talent Rediscovery, click `Start Candidate Scan` to scan your candidate pool. The scan can take up to 24 hours.

![Talent Rediscovery with a Not ready status](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7bDFamJqufHcnosmiNNWa_talent-rediscovery-not-ready.jpg)

A progress bar displays during the scan for tracking. Once completed, the status within the Talent Rediscovery tile shows as **Ready**.

![Talent Rediscovery with the status Ready.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YXr388WwME-9YLm0av5JQ_talent-rediscovery-ready.jpg)
:::

4. Click `Configure` to select a default sequence template. This sequence template is automatically used when sending a sequence as part of reviewing candidates in the Talent Rediscovery review UI.

# Step 2: Running a Talent Rediscovery search

There are two ways to run a search using Talent Rediscovery: using existing criteria set up within a job, or setting up a new query from scratch.

To run a Talent Rediscovery search using criteria configured as part of the [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr) tool:

1. Navigate to **Jobs > Jobs** and click on the role in question.
2. Click **AI Features**, then `Edit`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Kn-epCUv7Vwa4N6Fgt13s_customer-support-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-04-30-at-93354-am.jpg" size="100" width="2858" height="852" position="center" alt="The AI Features tab in a job. The Edit button within the AI-Assisted Application Review section is highlighted." indent="2" darkWidth="2858" darkHeight="852" showCaption="false"}

3. In the popover, toggle on `Enable Rediscovery`, then click `Save`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NhuSLxby9iSuIX2iDQ9LC_enable-rediscovery.jpg" size="100" width="1448" height="682" position="center" alt="The option to enable talent rediscovery within the AI-Assisted application review criteria." indent="2" darkWidth="1448" darkHeight="682" showCaption="false"}

To start a new search using Talent Rediscovery:

1. Navigate to **Sourcing > Talent Rediscovery**.
2. Click `+ New Search`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Vi-NrU2DoaIJeQFACuaUk_talent-rediscovery-acent-ashby-2026-04-23-at-105701-am.jpg" size="100" width="2862" height="798" position="center" alt="The option to add a new search within the Talent Rediscovery section of Sourcing." indent="2" darkWidth="2862" darkHeight="798" showCaption="false"}

3. Add a title to your query. You can also link a job to your query so you can directly consider candidates who meet your set criteria for the role. Finally, determine whether the query is confidential.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
A confidential query is only visible to the users who are given access to it.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fWUOVLGJn4yQ4yVA6iFDu_create-new-sourcing-query.jpg" size="80" width="858" height="654" position="center" alt="The settings for creating a new sourcing query." indent="2" darkWidth="858" darkHeight="654" showCaption="false"}

4. Click `Create Search` to confirm. You are then taken to the `Settings` section of your newly created search.

# Step 3: Adding AI job criteria to your sourcing query

To make amendments to your sourcing query, navigate to the `Settings` tab of your search in **Sourcing > Talent Rediscovery**.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4LYRf_qFbbGQagcpfHOdE_marketeer-search-ashby-2026-07-22-at-40837-pm.png)

**Name:** The title of your search.

**Description:** An internal description for your search, for reference.

**Confidential:** Set whether the query is confidential.

**Job:** Add, remove, or switch the job linked to this search.

Underneath your settings, the **AI Job Criteria** section lists any criteria for your Talent Rediscovery search. To add or update criteria, click `+ Edit Job Criteria` or `Setup Criteria`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xepUmtqt6XbKRmjA44YSv_marketeer-search-ashby-2026-07-22-at-41103-pm.png)

Click `Add Criteria`, then either select `Add previously used` to reuse criteria you have created before, or click `Add custom` to create a new criterion.

![Adding criteria to a new talent rediscovery search.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fek096tvupQxHf-JIn_em_adding-resume-criteria.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring AI-assisted application review criteria, check out [AI-Assisted Application Review](docId:0msgWzHFexBtWOAgFyRAr).
:::

Once you've created your criteria, click `Validate`, then `Save and evaluate all active candidates` to run your criteria against existing candidates in Ashby.

![Adding new resume criteria to a talent rediscovery search.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vSxJMG7zY-apCXlnwXO8W_validated-criterion.jpg)

# Step 4: Reviewing your sourcing query results

Once the evaluation of your configured criteria is complete, you can review results in the **Candidate Search Results** section of your sourcing query.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VGD6q0RvROZKlzn-_Ua5p_image.png)

Click on a list option to view the candidates that have been identified. Each list has the following criteria:

**All Candidates:** All candidates who meet the criteria.

**Warm Lead:** Candidates who expressed interest (for example, via a sourcing form or hiring event) but never interviewed.

**Silver Medallist:** Candidates who were archived after an active interview stage with only positive feedback and match 50%+ of your set criteria.

**High-Fit Candidates:** Candidates who match 75%+ of your set criteria, reached an active stage, and received no poor interview feedback.

**Re-Visit Overlooked Candidates:** Candidates who match 75%+ of your set criteria but only reached pre-interview screen stages.

**Promising Leads to Re-Engage:** Candidates who match 50%+ of your criteria, progressed past pre-interview stages, and remained interested.

**Internal Transfers:** Candidates who were hired for a different role and who the AI identifies as suitable for this role. They also match 50%+ of your set criteria.

The Review Later and Dismissed lists are curated by you, based on the action taken when reviewing suggested candidates. We recommend reviewing your buckets from the top down (All Candidates first, Silver Medallist second, and so on).

## Reviewing candidates

When viewing a list of identified candidates, you can see the following information by default:

- **Name**
- **Company/Position:** The candidate's employment history, listing their most recent company and role first.
- **Evaluation:** Lists the AI job criteria set in your sourcing query and notes whether each was met.
- **Feedback:** Feedback left for the candidate.
- **Latest touchpoint:** The last job and interview stage the candidate was in.
- **Signals:** The general criteria used by the AI Talent Rediscovery tool alongside the AI job criteria. Positive signals are displayed here.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
The signals used are as follows:

- **Positive signals** (listed in the Signals section of the query results): Warm Lead, Silver Medalist, Made It To Offer Stage, Bad Timing, Rejected by Candidate, Only Good Feedback, Hired for Different Role
- **Negative signals** (causing candidates to be filtered out by default): Recently Rejected (last 6 months), Poor Fit, Poor Interview Performance, Candidate Ghosted, AI Job Criteria Met Percentage \< 51%.

Signals combine application history, interview ratings, email thread analysis, and AI classification.
:::

- **Visibility:** The option to hide or show the candidate on the list.

To review the candidate list, click `Review X Candidates`. You can then view the criteria evaluation, the candidate's resume and application details, and their feedback.

![The review page for a candidate pulled into a group using a talent rediscovery search.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2i6ZC-6a0-MjAn-OL2JNa_high-selling-ae-acent-ashby-2026-04-24-at-93848-am.jpg)

In the **Criteria Evaluation** section, click on a criterion to view the information pulled from the candidate's resume or application to justify the classification.

:::hint{type="info"}
If a classification doesn't look right, click the three dots to the right of `Meets X of X` and select `Flag Evaluation` to leave feedback.

![The option to flag a criteria evaluation.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TbVKN0pFR9j0E_nCYnRVL_high-selling-ae-acent-ashby-2026-04-24-at-95146-am.jpg)
:::

Once you've reviewed the candidate, you can take the following actions:

- **Consider for Job:** Consider the candidate for the linked job. Click the pencil icon to adjust the job and initial interview stage the candidate is added to.
- **Add to Project:** Click the pencil icon to set the project, then click `Add` to add the candidate to a project.
- **Send Sequence:** Enroll the candidate in a sequence. The default sequence used is the one configured during Talent Rediscovery enablement. More on this in[Step 1: Enabling Talent Rediscovery](docId\:d-gjG_O-jKBQagm_KsMZe).

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
When creating a sequence, you can add an **aiReEngagementOutreach** substitution token to an email sequence stage. When sending a rediscovery sequence, AI automatically considers the candidate's background, resume, previous applications, interview history, and past communications to generate a personalized outreach message.

Prior to sending the sequence, you need to manually accept or reject the generated content.
:::

- **Mark not a good fit:** Move the candidate to the Dismissed list.
- **Add to Review Later:** Move the candidate to the Review Later list.

You can also click the **AI Assistant** tab to ask the [AI Candidate Assistant](docId\:gfXoUwYWswcWHeJ65OD8S) any questions as needed.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AGOzIucTE3rYhLSOB1oHS_actions-to-take-to-reviewed-candidate.jpg" size="78" width="554" height="664" position="center" alt="The review options for a candidate, including consider for job, add to project, send a sequence, ma" darkWidth="554" darkHeight="664" showCaption="false"}

# FAQ

### Are candidates in projects evaluated by the Talent Rediscovery tool?

Candidates who are in projects may appear in sourcing query results if they’re a fit for the open role. Talent Rediscovery does not specifically search for candidates by project membership by default.


[title] E-Signature Documents
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

The e-signature documents feature works similarly to Ashby [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW), and can be used for documents like non-disclosure agreements (NDAs). It allows your team to request and store signed copies of any document that requires a signature.

# Access & permissions

You can configure non-offer e-signature documents on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Automated send settings are available on the Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites and permissions**

- You must be an Organization Admin to configure e-signature document templates.
:::

# Configuring e-signature documents

## Add replacement tokens to your document

To create a valid e-signature document, you need to add e-signature tokens to your document along with any default tokens to add candidate and job consideration information as needed. To add replacement tokens:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > E-Signature Documents**.
2. On the **E-Signature Document Tokens** tab, click the token you want to add to your document to copy it.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4i4e4pKKeAUp0NcMFzVLQ_tokens-for-e-signature-documents.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2824" height="1548" darkWidth="2824" darkHeight="1548" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Click on e-signature tokens to copy them."}

3. Paste the token into your document.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1MsP1zGOM2hveCXe1TR7Q_nda-google-docs-2026-07-08-at-104622-am.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1496" height="1286" darkWidth="1496" darkHeight="1286" showCaption="false" alt="Pasting e-signature tokens into your document."}

:::hint{type="warning"}
When you add e-signature tokens to your document (CANDIDATE\_E\_SIGNATURE and/or COMPANY\_E\_SIGNATURE), also add the corresponding signature date.
Ensure that your e-signature document has a white background to ensure that tokens are parsed correctly.&#x20;
:::

## Export your document in .docx format

Ashby requires document templates to be in .docx format. Export your completed template to this format before uploading it to Ashby.

![Downloading an e-signature document from Google Docs.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZwsT7k-_Ui519pRePr4uU_zight-2026-07-08-at-105217.jpg)

## Upload and validate your document in Ashby

Once the document is ready, navigate to the [E-Signature Document Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/esignature-documents/templates) tab, then take the following steps:

1. Click `+ New` on the right side of the page.
2. Give the document a title and click `Create`.
3. Drag and drop the file, or click `Browse files` to find it, and upload it. Ashby then validates the file:
   - If it's valid, the indicator turns green.
   - If it's invalid, the indicator remains red, and you receive an error message with instructions on how to update the file.

![A validated e-signature document.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/J8Bix0QwDzi7YnqK0F5UT_e-signature-document-validated.jpg)

## Set filters for your e-signature document (optional)

When you upload and validate your e-signature document template, you see the option `Only allow using this E-signature Document Template on specific job considerations?`. Check this checkbox if you want the e-signature document to only be an option that's available for specific job considerations.

![This image shows the Only allow using this E-signature Document Template on specific job considerations checkbox.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/l5AtbK-6HJyCanMo9Wxls_enabling-specific-criteria-for-an-e-signature-document-template.jpg)

Once you check this checkbox, configure a rule by clicking `+ Filter` and adding filters connected to the job consideration, like the job's location, the candidate's interview stage, the job's department, and more. Any job consideration that meets this criteria lists this e-signature template as an option when generating an e-signature request.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/b59BFcyt8-zmNaNuowlO__e-signature-document-template-conditions-for-use-on-specific-job-considerations.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1702" height="428" darkWidth="1702" darkHeight="428" alt="This example shows the filtering options with the Advanced toggle switched off. Basic filtering will show the most heavily used filtering options." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have the Advanced toggle switched on for filtering, click `+ Add Field to Match` to specify your fields for filtering.

![Add Field to Match will show if the Advance toggle is switched on.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XgNSOhDuQAYFjiABpeMrR_e-signature-filters-with-the-advanced-toggle-on.jpg)
:::

## Archiving and restoring your e-signature document templates

If you want to archive a document, visit it and click the red `Archive` button in the top-right corner of the e-signature document template details.

![The Archive button on an e-signature document.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GeEUSerk1XRKbl1_UT4VW_archive-e-signature-documents.jpg)

You can visit and reactivate archived e-signature document templates by changing the status filter from `Active` to `Archived`. Click the archived e-signature template to open the template details.

![Adjusting the status filter to access archived e-signature documents.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-1Ull064GVILMSSKVUXwA_status-filter-for-e-signature-documents.jpg)

Click `Restore` to reactivate the e-signature document template.

![Restoring an archive e-signature document.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VYJhqWLSVpuVhilvphKOQ_restoring-an-e-signature-document-template.jpg)

# Sending e-signature document requests

You can send e-signature document requests in a few different ways:

- Configure automation rules as part of your e-signature document templates so e-signature request activities are generated for sending manually, or sent automatically, when a candidate meets certain criteria.
- Add activities to your interview plan stages to either generate an activity to send an e-signature request for a document manually, or automatically send an e-signature request template.
- Generate and send e-signature document requests manually from the candidate's profile.

:::hint{type="warning"}
E-signature request templates are required to automatically send e-signature document requests to candidates. More on these at [Creating and Managing E-Signature Request Templates](docId\:Oo1yu8BM3VSO1jcuNQwLr).
:::

## Configure automation for e-signature document templates

:::hint{type="info"}
You set up automation rules on the **Automation** tab of your e-signature document templates. Use these to trigger activities across all of your jobs when you want every candidate that meets specific criteria to receive the e-signature request.
:::

Like other automation rules in Ashby, e-signature document automation rules trigger based on a condition that you set using filters. The most common include:

- Current interview stage or stage group (e.g., send if the candidate is currently in the Intro Call stage).
- Job consideration outcome (e.g., send if the candidate is marked as Hired).

Once you set the condition, click `Save & Publish` to enable the rule. The next time a candidate meets this condition, the rule triggers.

![Configuring automation rules for an e-signature document.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EomgivF3o5HhWIoGsBS1U_automation-configuration-for-an-e-signature-document.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Not quite ready to publish the rule? Click `Save Changes` to save your edits without enabling the rule. When you return to the automation setup, click `Resume Editing` to continue with your rule amendments.

![You can save edits to your automation rules and resume editing on them later.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Go5gWeS_JKWLNwT9XqWYd_resume-editing-screen-for-saved-e-signature-document-automation-rules.jpg)
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby evaluates the automation conditions each time a candidate moves stage. If the candidate meets the criteria after moving to the new stage, the flow triggers.
For example, if your criteria specify that the automation runs once the candidate's job consideration reaches the Hiring Manager Interview stage, the automation runs when the candidate moves into that stage.
:::

## Automation send settings

Once you save your automation rules for your e-signature document template, you can choose to send the e-signature document request automatically using automation send settings. These appear directly under the automation configuration for your e-signature document template on the **Automation** tab.

![Setting up Automation Send Settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fBxMdKteVGAGf1k1Q5eLF_automation-send-settings.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
To configure automation send settings, you first need to configure an e-signature request template. More on this at [Creating and Managing E-Signature Request Templates](docId\:Oo1yu8BM3VSO1jcuNQwLr).
:::

Select your e-signature request template from the `E-Signature Request Template` dropdown, then check the `Automatically Send Document Request` checkbox to enable automatic sending.

## Add an e-signature document request as an activity

:::hint{type="info"}
You add [Activities](docId\:U2Vf0kyTMMLPiE5n6zWn7) to the interview plan for a specific job. Use this option if you want every candidate in a specific job to have this request type appear on their profile when they move into the associated stage.

If you don't want to set up automation criteria, but you want an e-signature document sent automatically when a candidate moves to a specific stage, creating an activity and enabling automation is another route you can take.
:::

You can add an e-signature document activity to your interview plan with the following steps:

1. Navigate to **Jobs** and select the job in question.
2. Click the **Interview Plan** tab within the job.
3. Scroll to the stage of the interview plan you want to add the activity to.
4. Click `+ Add Activity To`, then `+ Add Activity`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZZpqxIrGAjvUDZp0IjcVU_customer-support-specialist-ashby-2026-07-08-at-120442-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3382" height="1574" darkWidth="3382" darkHeight="1574" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Adding an activity to an interview plan."}

5. Select `E-Signature Document` from the list and select the document template and the e-signature request template (optional).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ly790wiCxdO5ADLvsAyjc_adding-an-e-signature-document-activity.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1540" height="680" darkWidth="1540" darkHeight="680" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Selecting the E-signature request template and determining whether the document is send automatically."}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
If you select a document template and an e-signature request template, you can check the `Automatically Send Document Request` checkbox to send the e-signature request automatically when the candidate moves to the stage the activity is in.
:::

6. Click `Add` to confirm.

## Generate a one-off request for an e-signature document

:::hint{type="info"}
You can generate one-off requests on a candidate profile. Use this option for individual candidates that need a request generated outside of the normal workflow.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Pending drafts do not update automatically:** If you change an E-signature document template after creating a draft request on a candidate's profile, the draft retains the document configuration that was in place when it was created. To use the latest template settings, discard the existing draft and start the request again from scratch.
:::

1. To generate a one-off request, visit **More > Send E-Signature Document** on a candidate's profile.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r8S5xkL4G8p2m5ihGzGiQ_sending-an-ad-hoc-e-signature-document.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3328" height="1616" darkWidth="3328" darkHeight="1616" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The option to Send E-Signature Request within the More section of the candidate's profile."}

2. Select the document you want to send from the dropdown menu.
3. Determine the number, currency, and date formatting.

![The settings when generating an e-signature document.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/t1-In6DLHl9_CaznX_rME_settings-when-generating-an-e-signature-document.jpg)

4. Click `Generate E-Signature Document`.
5. Once generated, fill out the e-signature request details.

## Filling in e-signature request details

When you send an e-signature request, you must provide additional details beforehand, regardless of how the request reaches the candidate. You can either fill in the request details manually, or apply a pre-created e-signature request template that automatically fills in the request fields.

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Creating and Managing E-Signature Request Templates](docId\:Oo1yu8BM3VSO1jcuNQwLr) for more information on creating e-signature request templates.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XPu1wgn1VddGPvlN_A_iY_carolina-zulauf-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-03-12-at-45501-pm.jpg" size="74" width="1230" height="1320" position="center" alt="Screenshot showing the request details pane with a e-signature request template applied that has filled in all details." darkWidth="1230" darkHeight="1320" showCaption="false"}

Fill in the following fields:

- **Title:** Becomes the subject of the email to the candidate.
- **Message:** Appears in the body text of the email sent by the e-signature provider and is visible to all recipients, including the candidate, any internal signers, and anyone CC'd on the request. Once the offer is sent, the message is not viewable on the candidate profile or elsewhere in the Ashby UI.
- **Company signatory:** The internal team member required to sign.
- **Signing order:** The order in which signers must sign, either a specific sequence or anyone can sign at any time.
- **Expiration:** The date the request expires. Choose a specific date, or set the request to never expire.
- **CC:** Any additional individuals you want to receive the email.

# Signed e-signature documents

Once all parties sign a request, Ashby stores a copy of the file in the **Other Files** section of the **Summary** tab on the candidate's profile.

![A copy of a signed e-signature document is added to the Other Files section.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k_omhb9ii3NTX4b1vImi-_completed-e-signature-document-record.jpg)

# FAQs

### Does Ashby have an NDA template we can use?

As an NDA is a legal document, we recommend reaching out to your legal counsel for appropriate NDA language.

### Can I add multiple documents to one e-signature activity?

Adding multiple distinct documents to one e-signature document activity isn't currently supported (unlike for e-signature offers). Instead, we recommend either compiling all appropriate documents into one file or adding multiple activities.

### Can I set an e-signature request to automatically expire?

You can. Set this when you send the e-signature document to the candidate. Click `Send E-Signature Request` on the document activity on the candidate's profile. On the following screen, use the `Automatically Expire Request` dropdown to set an expiry date and time.

![Setting the Automatically Expire Request field to Never.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZZ8PRlbZUiInicki5re8O_expiring-settings-for-e-signature-requests.jpg)

### How do custom fields work with e-signature document tokens?

You can generate tokens to pull data from custom fields into your e-signature documents or offer letters. If you have multiple-choice custom fields in place, you can also customize the text substituted into your e-signature document based on the value chosen. For more on this, check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).

### What happens if an automated send fails for an e-signature document?

If you have configured automatic sending for an e-signature request and it fails, it can be for the following reasons:

- Missing fields
- Missing e-signature parameters
- Invalid template syntax

Ashby will fall back to creating the activity for manual sending in these cases. Click on the activity to open it and view further information about the send failure.

### Can I add text input fields to e-signature documents?

:::hint{type="info"}
E-Signature text input tokens can be used for e-signature documents generated via Dropbox Sign or Docusign.
:::

If you want to add text fields into your offer letters so the candidate or the company signatory can fill out additional information within the offer itself, copy and paste the following tokens into your template:

`{{CANDIDATE_TEXT_INPUT}}` This text input field provides the candidate a field to add additional text.

`{{COMPANY_TEXT_INPUT}}` This text input field provides the company signatory a field to add additional text.

When you click the token on the **E-Signature Document Tokens** tab, select the field size, either from a preset size or by setting the width and number of lines. You can also check the `Required` checkbox to require the signer to complete the field as part of the signing process.

![Configuring text input tokens for candidates.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mZdAqx27mBojWhKht7UOy_configure-text-input-token-for-candidates.jpg)

### Can I adjust the formatting of numbers, dates, and currencies on my offer letters and e-signature documents?

You can choose between US-style formatting and European-style formatting for numbers, and specify currency formatting for offer letters, e-signature offers, and documents. Navigate to **Admin > Offers** and click the **Settings** tab to determine your offer settings. Alternatively, head to **Admin > Integrations > E-Signature Documents** and click the **Settings** tab to configure your e-signature document settings.

![Setting the default formatting options.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ntpdOKQnAcUA5C3xll8aq-20260306-105723.png)

1. **Default number formatting:** Choose whether numbers display in European or US style.
2. **Default currency formatting:** Choose whether currency displays as a symbol ($) or a country code (USD).
3. **Default date formatting:** Select your preferred date display format from the dropdown list.

You can also override the default number, currency, and date settings when generating offer letters.

![Generating an e-signature document and setting the number, currency and date formatting options.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vml8eZRuAdpelGT69mBAP_settings-when-generating-an-e-signature-document.jpg)

If you override the number or currency settings when creating an offer, other e-signature documents added to the same packet inherit the same setting. If you don't override the default setting, the global default applies to e-signature documents.


[title] Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?
[path] Integrations/Platform/

:::hint{type="warning"}
It is not possible to integrate with both Google Workspace and Microsoft 365 instances in the same Ashby account. For more on this, check out [Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?](docId:92txkuC2vVMOrzXEPtMKJ)
:::

Below you can find a table listing what is and is not supported in a single Ashby account

| Scenario                                                                 | Is this supported?    | Relevant guide                                                                                                                   |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Multiple domains within a single Google Workspace account                | Yes                   | [Updating the domain or adding a secondary domain to an Ashby account](docId\:e9kgGNJ4ZFJwQ6CnJNpiS)                             |
| Multiple domains within a single Microsoft 365 tenant                    | Yes                   | [Updating the domain or adding a secondary domain to an Ashby account](docId\:e9kgGNJ4ZFJwQ6CnJNpiS)                             |
| Multiple domains across more than one Google Workspace                   | Yes, with limitations | [Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?](docId\:UWUiWFMUI_xNxVloeX5my)  |
| Multiple domains across more than one Microsoft 365 tenant               | Yes, with limitations | [Does Ashby support integrating with either multiple Google Workspaces or Microsoft 365 tenants?](docId\:UWUiWFMUI_xNxVloeX5my)  |
| Multiple domains across both Google Workspaces and Microsoft 365 tenants | No                    | [Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?](docId:92txkuC2vVMOrzXEPtMKJ)                   |



Ashby does support connecting either multiple Google Workspaces within a single Ashby account or multiple Microsoft 365 tenants within a single Ashby account. However, these instances are treated independently and do not behave as a unified system. Users across different domains or tenants will face the same platform-level limitations when trying to schedule interviews or send emails to one another through Ashby.

## What does that mean?

You can configure more than one domain (e.g., @acme.com and @subsidiary.acme.com) or tenant, and users under each can connect their calendars and inboxes via Personal Settings.

However:

- Email and calendar features will only work within the same domain or tenant
- Users from one domain cannot schedule on behalf of or email as users from another
- Google Meet links can't be embedded in Microsoft Outlook events, and vice versa
- Free/busy availability can’t be shared between users on different platforms or domains

Ashby mirrors Google and Microsoft's native limitations. They don’t support seamless cross-domain scheduling or delegation unless complex enterprise trust relationships are configured, and even then, Ashby does not support those workarounds.

## What can users still do across instances?

Regardless of the integration setup, users from any domain or tenant can:

- Log in and access Ashby (if provisioned)
- Leave interview feedback
- Submit referrals
- Review applications\*
- Collaborate on candidate profiles and leave notes\*
- Create jobs and reports\*
- Subject to access permissions — see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk) for more.

## What are the limitations?

When users from different platforms or domains try to interact through Ashby, they’ll run into these constraints:

- Can’t schedule interviews for users outside their own domain or tenant
- Can’t send emails on behalf of users from other domains or tenants
- Calendar availability is only visible within the same domain/tenant
  - Users who have connected their calendar via personal settings in Ashby (through the personal OAuth integration) may be able to view calendar availability for users on a different domain or tenant. This access is view-only — it does not enable scheduling on behalf of those users or any other cross-domain calendar actions.
- Conferencing links cannot be embedded across platforms

These limitations are imposed by the native behaviors of Google and Microsoft APIs, which Ashby respects to maintain security and stability.

## Will Ashby support unified cross-domain or cross-platform scheduling in the future?

It’s unlikely. These limitations stem from how the underlying platforms work — Ashby reflects those constraints to avoid introducing data access issues or unreliable functionality.

If your organization operates across multiple domains or tenants, we recommend choosing a primary domain for recruiting or working with your IT team to centralize recruiting-related calendars and emails under a shared instance.




[title] WhatsApp: Setup
[path] Emails & Candidate Texting/Untitled/

You can configure WhatsApp to contact candidates, send direct booking links and send interview reminders. This guide covers how to set up WhatsApp candidate texting and how candidate consent works for the WhatsApp channel.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

- To configure WhatsApp messaging, you must have Organization Admin access and 'Has Candidate Texting' permissions enabled.
- To set up WhatsApp messaging with Ashby, you need a WhatsApp Business Account (WABA) set up beforehand. The WABA lives under your [Meta Business Portfolio](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/486932075688253?id=180505742745347).
  If you already have a WABA, you can use it, but you won't be able to use the phone number you already have the WABA set up with.  
- If you don't have a WABA, you can create one when connecting with Ashby.
- You will need to have access to your company’s Meta Business Portfolio. This is what will house your WABA account. If your company runs ads on any Meta platform, you most likely have a Meta Business Portfolio. You will need to have access to this in order to get started and to connect a WhatsApp Business Account to Ashby. More about recommendations and requirements in [Step one: create and verify Meta Business Portfolio](docId\:XK2qn03Z4yvC95MsPmlNI).
:::

# Permissions & access

You need Organization Access to configure WhatsApp candidate texting. WhatsApp candidate texting is available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Step one: create and verify Meta Business Portfolio

Before you connect your WhatsApp Business Account to Ashby, we recommend having an established and verified Meta Business Portfolio in place for the best experience. If you are the one setting up WhatsApp in Ashby, you must have full access to manage assets, specifically WhatsApp assets, in the Meta Business Portfolio.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you configure and set up your Meta Business Portfolio within the setup process below, and your Meta Business Account has no real activity, Meta may flag it. Meta can then restrict your business and subject you to additional proof of business steps. For more on configuring a Meta Business Portfolio, check out Meta's guide [Create a business portfolio in Meta Business Suite](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1710077379203657?id=180505742745347).
:::

We highly recommend that you get verified or use an existing Meta Business Portfolio that is already verified. If your business already runs ads on Meta platforms, you most likely have a verified portfolio.

If you plan to use WhatsApp with multiple brands, you must verify your portfolio. An unverified Meta Business Portfolio limits you to only two phone numbers, and each of your brands requires its own phone number within the same WhatsApp Business Account. Once you verify your Meta Business Portfolio, you can have up to 20 phone numbers. Verification also means Meta rate limits your WhatsApp Business Account phone numbers less.

:::hint{type="info"}
Your ability to send WhatsApp messages through Ashby depends on your WhatsApp business account being in good standing and passing any additional review or requirements Meta may assign you. This is outside of Ashby’s control.
:::

Once you verify your Meta Business Portfolio, candidates see your account's display name  in the chat rather than only the phone number. This improves the likelihood of hearing back from the candidate.

An unverified account shows the phone number unless the candidate has saved the contact. We currently only support messaging using +1 phone numbers, so the display name is especially helpful for candidates who might not expect a message from a US or Canada number.

:::hint{type="info"}
For further information on how unverified and verified accounts show up in WhatsApp, check out Twilio's guide on [Using WhatsApp Business Accounts](https://www.twilio.com/docs/whatsapp/tutorial/whatsapp-business-account#how-business-accounts-appear-to-whatsapp-users).

For more information on verification, check out these Meta guides:

[About business verification in Meta Business Suite](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/1095661473946872)

[How to verify your business in Meta Business Suite](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/2058515294227817)
:::

# Step two: enable 'Has Candidate Texting Access' permissions for relevant users

To configure candidate texting and WhatsApp messaging or to send messages, users must have the 'Has Candidate Texting' permission enabled. To enable these permissions:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.
2. Click on the employee in question and navigate to the Permissions tab on their profile.
3. Toggle `Has Candidate Texting Access` to Yes.



![The screenshot shows the option to toggle on Has Candidate Texting Access. Ensure this is set to Yes for users who need to message candidates..](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/spgusiksCVoz_YVZmzJnx_employees-ashby-2026-09-04-at-113515-am.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Only Organization Admins can update user permissions. Organization Admins cannot update their own permissions and will need another Organization Admin to adjust their access for them.
:::

# Step three: enable WhatsApp candidate texting

To enable WhatsApp candidate texting:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Texting**.
2. Toggle on `Enable WhatsApp`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UVyAEaG0PNxtCnktO1Xtw_candidate-texting-ashby-2026-08-20-at-51127-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1252" height="410" darkWidth="1252" darkHeight="410" alt="The Candidate Texting page with the Enable WhatsApp toggle." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. A **WhatsApp Registration** page opens where you can connect your WhatsApp Business Account to Ashby. This step is critical to be able to send and receive WhatsApp messages.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
You will then need to add your privacy policy URL to the `Company Privacy Policy` field and your terms and conditions URL to the `Company Terms and Conditions` field.&#x20;

![The screenshot shows the Enable WhatsApp option switched on, along with the options to add a company privacy policy, terms and conditions and the option to set a notification email address.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6tyrNGbVCKagOUGNGrHTY_adding-in-privacy-policy-and-terms-and-conditions.jpg)

These are used in the WhatsApp consent message that we add to applications that request the candidate’s phone number. The consent message only starts appearing when you flip on WhatsApp for your organization.

You will also have the option to add an email address in the `Notification Email` field, this email will receive updates about candidate texting.
:::

# Step four: select a phone number

The next step is to go to the **Phone Numbers** tab and select a phone number. If you are using WhatsApp messaging with multiple brands support, you can assign each of your brands a phone number. 

- You can currently only choose a US or Canada phone number and you will need to use a phone number configured from Ashby. For more on selecting a phone number, check out [Candidate Texting](docId\:EQo_rLP7jpwH3ykAOnV84). You can receive WhatsApp messages from and send to international candidates (with the exception of those who have Brazil or Indonesia phone numbers), see the FAQs below for information on other restrictions.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you already have SMS configured in Ashby and have a phone number configured, you will use that same phone number for WhatsApp messaging.
:::

# Step five: WhatsApp registration

Navigate to the **WhatsApp Registration** tab and click `Connect to Facebook` .&#x20;

![The screenshot shows a brand with the option to Login with Facebook to connect up to a WhatsApp business account.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5REBBefpKno1EBe578fqB_candidate-texting-ashby-2026-08-21-at-93152-am.jpg)

This will take you directly into Meta’s site and will ask you to grant Ashby permission. Once you select your Meta Business Portfolio, you will next be prompted to choose your WhatsApp Business Account. If you don’t have one set up already, this is the point where you can create one. Once you select your WhatsApp Business Account, you should be ready to connect. 

:::hint{type="success"}
Meta will give you an indication when you have successfully connected.&#x20;
:::

If you plan to use WhatsApp with multiple brand support, it is very important that you connect each of your brands to the same WhatsApp Business Account. Otherwise, you cannot send messages for that brand.

# Step six: confirm your display name

For each phone number in Ashby that you connect to your WABA, you will be able to configure a display name during the time of linking your account. Once you confirm this name, you will not be able to change this again on your end.

When selecting or confirming a display name, follow the guidelines in the documentation below. If your display name does not follow Meta’s guidelines, your WhatsApp sender will never show as `Online`, and you won't be able to send WhatsApp messages on Ashby.

[About WhatsApp Business display name](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/338047025165344)

[Display name guidelines for the WhatsApp Business Platform](https://www.facebook.com/business/help/757569725593362)

On initially setting your display name, you will temporarily see the status as **Creating** due to the WhatsApp sender still being created. This process usually takes up to 3 minutes. After this window has passed, refresh the page and you will see this switch to **Online**.

:::hint{type="success"}
Once your WhatsApp sender turns into a status of **Online**, you are now ready to message candidates. Check out the following guides for more information on candidate consent and messaging:

- [WhatsApp: Candidate Consent](docId\:LcUHTmEbIsk6zetJHgC4T)&#x20;
- [WhatsApp: Templates and Messaging](docId\:Mv6TvdHBwUweDi6D2QF8G)&#x20;
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
If your account never turns to a status of **Online&#x20;**&#x61;nd instead shows a status of **Offline**, then you likely have a problem with your account. Hovering over the "Offline" status will give you an error message on what's wrong. You will need to reach out to Ashby support to get this addressed.&#x20;

If, at any point, you disconnect your WhatsApp business account from Ashby and you need to reconnect to the same or even a different one, you will need to reach out to Ashby support to get this done. This is due to restrictions from Twilio. 

If you absolutely need to change the display name for your phone number, then you will need to reach out to Ashby support. This is a limitation from Twilio. 
:::

# FAQs

### How does this work with SMS candidate texting?

WhatsApp is a second candidate texting channel alongside SMS. Recruiters send and receive WhatsApp messages directly from the candidate profile, using templates managed inside Ashby and following WhatsApp's own approval and consent rules.

Unlike SMS texting, where you can send free-form messages to your candidates at any time (once they give consent), WhatsApp only allows you to send candidates pre-approved templated messages. WhatsApp approves or rejects these templates, and approval status is outside of Ashby's control. You can send free-form messages to your candidate only once they respond. An inbound WhatsApp message from a candidate opens a 24-hour free-form messaging window.

SMS texting is only available for candidates with US and Canada +1 numbers. WhatsApp texting is available internationally, with the exception of countries WhatsApp does not support.

### Does this replace SMS?

No. SMS and WhatsApp are separate tabs on the candidate profile that you can enable, and both can be active for the same candidate. Whether you use one or both is up to you.

### My status hasn't switched to Online after the waiting period. Why?

This is likely due to a problem with your account. Hovering over the "Offline" status will give you an error message on what's wrong. You will need to reach out to Ashby support to get this addressed. Often, it is a restriction on your account coming from Meta and is likely outside of Ashby's control.

### I don't see the option to get verified in Meta - what do I do?

If you don’t immediately see the option to verify your business, wait a few days after creating your WABA and connecting with Ashby. During this waiting period, you can still message candidates. You should eventually see the option to verify your business in the following places:

- Within your Meta Business Portfolio’s **Security Center**.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XkvTIWdIiANd7753xn87B_ashby-whatsapp-candidate-messd-early-access-google-docs-2026-08-26-at-40414-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1114" height="698" darkWidth="1114" darkHeight="698" alt="The screenshot shows a Meta Business account with the Eligible for Verification section highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- Within your WhatsApp business account under **Accounts**.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EmkA5gI5-djTiEIyq_BTN_ashby-whatsapp-candidate-messd-early-access-google-docs-2026-08-26-at-40630-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1522" height="836" darkWidth="1522" darkHeight="836" alt="This screenshot shows the option to Start Verification within a WABA." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

### Are any countries or regions not supported?

Ashby does not support the ability for customers to adopt a local phone number for non-US countries, and Meta enforces strict anti-spam and regional regulatory filters on international long-code senders (such as a US +1 number).

**Hard Local Sender Restrictions &  Local In-Country Presence:&#xA0;**

Markets such as Brazil and Indonesia enforce strong local presence rules. When attempting to message users in these regions using an international long code (such as a US +1 number), messages are blocked by Meta. To ensure consistent delivery into these countries, Meta requires registering and sending from a local country number (e.g., a local +55 number for Brazil) associated with your WhatsApp Business Account (WABA). Local country numbers are currently not supported by Ashby. 

**Cross-Border Authorization via Business Verification:**

For countries that allow cross-border messaging without a hard local sender requirement, Meta still limits unverified accounts from initiating international conversations. Completing Meta Business Verification and maintaining a high quality score on your WhatsApp sender  allows your WABA to scale past the initial tier limits, granting broader cross-border access.

Depending on the status of your Meta Business account, there might be Meta-imposed restrictions on sending messages to candidates with phone numbers from other countries as well. 


[title] AI-Generated Feedback Summaries
[path] Ashby AI Features/

You can now generate an AI-powered summary of all the feedback for a given job consideration on a candidate’s profile. The summary will take into account all feedback left for the job consideration.

You can opt-in to use AI features in the [Early Access](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/early-access) section of Admin.

AI-Generated feedback summaries can be generated on the Foundations, Legacy Plus Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/0ef6ba170310447d9639618f6dd42db2"}

## Where can I see or generate a feedback summary?

You can generate and view feedback summaries in three places:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Your debrief briefings On the All Feedback tab.


- Any interview briefings (depending on your feedback settings, your interviewers may not be able to see all points on the summary without submitting their feedback or at all, more on this at [Visibility Options](#))


- On the candidate’s profile: Click on the Feedback tab of the feed to view the feedback summary.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d4ec911d93c5be5c4e3d4f494a806c42.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7dcba1e16499933e5eb32cc2888861b4.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/32d4b287c64107b6ac5ca66c8c6c131a.png)


:::
::::

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you opt to regenerate a feedback summary in one of these places, it will replace the summary in all three areas.
:::

## How do I generate a feedback summary?

To generate a feedback summary, head to the candidate’s profile, an interview briefing or a debrief briefing. Click on the Feedback tab of their feed if on the candidate profile, or the All Feedback tab of the interview or debrief. Click the `Generate with AI` button to create your feedback summary for this candidate’s job consideration.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5555c1ce84111bcf673d967a3a350aac.png)

Once the feedback summary has been generated, you can hit `Regenerate` to generate the summary again if needed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/74ceacec7f0bc81babf922eb83a880c8.png)

You can click `Show All Citations` to view the original feedback the summary points were generated from.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/01d6b0fe6639afe3ea6079853d965b86.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I delete a generated feedback summary?

This isn’t currently possible - you can regenerate a summary to update it but not remove it completely.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Who can regenerate a summary?

Any user with access to view the candidate’s profile can regenerate the feedback summary.
:::


[title] Creating and Managing E-Signature Request Templates
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

To streamline your hiring process, you can create reusable templates for your e-signature requests for both offers and other e-signature documents. Instead of manually configuring details like signing order or expiration dates every time you send a document, templates pre-fill these fields to save time and ensure communications remain consistent.

Once created, these templates can be applied when sending an offer or other e-signature document to a candidate from their profile.&#x20;

This guide explains how to create and update E-signature request templates.

:::hint{type="info"}
For information on applying these templates when sending communications to candidates, see [E-Signature Documents](docId\:TTPS7rUxkPZ9YhzwPcSZt) or [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) for the respective template.
:::

## Access & permissions

E-signature request templates are available for all Ashby plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions:**

- To create and manage **offer signature request templates**, you must be an Org Admin or Elevated User that has the correct permissions assigned.
- To create and manage **e-signature request templates,** you must be an Org Admin.
:::



# Creating an e-signature request template

You can create multiple templates to cater to different document types or departmental needs.

1. There are two places where e-signature templates can be created, depending on whether it is for an e-signature document (such as an NDA) or an e-signature offer.
   - For Offer e-signature templates, navigate to `Admin` from the top menu, `Offers` on the left side menu, and then select the `Offer Signature Request Templates` tab.
   - For E-signature Documents request templates, navigate to `Integrations` in the left side menu, and then select `E-Signature Documents` and go to the `E-Signature Request Templates` tab.&#x20;

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Once you've navigated to the right place, the process for creating the template is the same.
:::

2. Click the `+ New` button near the top right. A pane will appear into which you will enter the template details.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PV4Tueby2WQY-lMgxcGXA_e-signature-documents-acent-ashby-2026-03-12-at-40143-pm.jpg" size="76" width="631" height="826" position="center" alt="Image showing the E-Signature Request Template details pane." darkWidth="631" darkHeight="826" showCaption="false"}

3. Enter the template's Name, a Title, and Message.&#x20;
   - **Name:** This name is internal-only and is used to identify the template in the **E-Signature Request Template** dropdown menu when sending an e-signature request.
   - **Title:** Text entered here will be added to the automatically-generated email subject from the e-signature provider (Dropbox/Docusign) when sending an e-signature request.
   - **Message:&#x20;**&#x54;he message is included in the email sent by the e-signature provider and is visible to all recipients including the candidate, any internal signers, and anyone CC'd on the request. When this template is selected at the time of sending, the message can be reviewed and edited before the request goes out. Once sent, the message is not displayed on the candidate profile or elsewhere in the Ashby UI outside of the template configuration itself.
4. Define your template configurations:
   - **Company Signatory:** Select the default internal team member required to sign.
   - **Signing Order:** Select an option based on your company's policy or process based on the document to be signed.
   - **Automatically Expire Request:** Choose between no expiration, a relative expiration (e.g., "7 days after request is sent"), or an absolute date.
   - **CC:** Add specific users or members defined as part of the Hiring Team, such as the Hiring Manager, to be automatically copied on the request.

:::hint{type="info" indent="3"}
If adding Hiring Team roles, make sure that a Hiring Team is defined on your jobs.
:::

5. Click `Create` to create the template. Details will be saved, and an **Active** indicator will appear in the top left corner.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r4VkMSxRwjLtb5eghNlJv_e-signature-documents-acent-ashby-2026-03-12-at-43921-pm.jpg" size="74" width="1250" height="1334" position="center" showCaption="false"}

# Managing e-signature request templates

Once created, the template will appear on the **E-Signature Request Templates** or **Offer Signature Request Templates** tab, depending on if it is for e-signature documents or e-signature offers.

![Screenshot showing the newly-created ](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/g-qpnOrbCzKpmU5-0nI8m_e-signature-documents-acent-ashby-2026-03-10-at-31957-pm.jpg)

On this tab, you can:&#x20;

- Use the search bar in the top left to search for various templates you've created.
- Use the filter on the right to show Active, Archived, or All templates.
- Identify when the template was created and last updated.
- Continue to create new templates by selecting `+ New`.&#x20;

## Editing, archiving, and restoring templates

To edit an existing template, simply click into it and begin making updates. Hit `Save` to save your changes. Changes to a template will only apply to future requests, and will not impact any previously-sent ones.

When a template is no longer needed, you can click into the template and hit `Archive` in the top right corner.

If you need to un-archive a template, you can locate the archived template by filtering for Archived templates, click into it, and hit `Restore`.


[title] Configuring Offer Stage Admin Settings
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

The Offer stage within your Interview Plans can be configured with various settings and automations to ensure Ashby works for your hiring workflow.  These settings allow you to automate candidate advancement through the pipeline upon offer acceptance, as well as configure additional hiring stages under the Offer phase, which allows you to add and complete additional steps such as reference checks, background checks, or other steps before the candidate moves to "Hired." This article describes in detail what these Offer settings are and how to configure them for your organization.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Offer stage admin settings are only available on **Plus** and **Enterprise** plans.
:::

# Navigating to Offer Settings

To locate your Offer Stage settings, navigate to `Admin` in the top menu bar, and then `Interviews & Scheduling` > `Offer Stage Configuration` from the left side menu.

On the following page, you'll see a list of general settings.  Below we'll cover each setting and what it does.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2a9_X_wnLth-F4lD77-ww_offer-stage-configuration-acent-ashby-2026-02-25-at-125342-pm.jpg)

# Offer Settings Definitions

| **Setting**                                  | **Description**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| -------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Advance on Offer Accepted                    | Enable this setting to automatically advance candidates to the next stage in the interview plan when an offer is accepted.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Allow Additional Offer Stages                | By default, the **Offer** section of the Interview Plan only contains one stage (the Offer stage) and is not editable. However, you can enable this setting if you'd like to add multiple stages within the **Offer&#x20;**&#x73;ection. This is useful if you track post-offer steps like reference checks, background checks, or other approvals before a candidate is ultimately moved to the Hired stage. <br /><br />You'll see the ability to add stages to the **Offer** section in both Interview Plans and Grouped Interview Plans once this is turned on.<br /><br />:inlineImage[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/w7jPG0udg4qyBy-2RZolW_interview-plans-acent-ashby-2026-03-05-at-90234-am.jpg" alt caption}<br /><br />For more information on designing interview plans, see [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux) , or see [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)  for more information on grouped interview plans. |
| Mark Opening as Filled When...               | Select `Offer Marked as Accepted` to mark the opening as filled when the offer is marked as accepted, or `Candidate Moved to Hired Stage `to perform this action when they have moved to the Hired stage.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Push Candidates to HRIS Integrations When... | This option only appears if you have selected the checkbox in **Integrations** > **HRIS Integrations** to "Automatically push hired candidates to HRIS integrations."<br /><br />Select `Offer Marked as Accepted` to push candidates to your HRIS when the offer is marked as accepted, or `Candidate Moved to Hired Stage` to push them when they have moved to the Hired stage.<br /><br />**Note:&#x20;**&#x43;andidates must have an accepted offer to be pushed to the HRIS, regardless of the option selected. If a candidate is moved to Hired stage without an accepted offer, they will not be pushed to the HRIS even if "Moved to Hired" is set as the trigger here.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Hired Date When...                           | Select `Offer Marked as Accepted` to set their hire date when the offer is marked as accepted, or `Candidate Moved to Hired Stage` to perform this action when they have moved to the Hired stage.<br /><br />**Note:** Regardless of what option is selected, this date is only populated in reports *after the candidate is explicitly moved to the Hired stage*. Even if you select "Offer Accepted" as the hired date, in reports, the candidate's hired date will show as null until they are moved to the Hired stage, and at that point that hired date will retroactively show the Offer Accepted date.<br /><br />If you do not have `Allow Additional Offer Stages` enabled, the hired date will remain tied to offer accepted date.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |




[title] Questionnaires
[path] Surveys, Assessments & Activities/Surveys & Questionnaires/

Ashby provides a way to send [questionnaires](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/questionnaire) to your candidates. These help you collect information during various stages in the application process, rather than asking questions up front in the application form.

# Permissions & access

Questionnaires are available on all Ashby plans. The number of questionnaires you can create varies by plan.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅\*         | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

\***Foundations:** Limited to 1 questionnaire. Plus and Enterprise plans support custom, unlimited questionnaires.

The table below shows which access roles can configure and send questionnaires.

| Access Role                                                    | Can configure surveys? | Can send surveys to candidates? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- | ------------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                      | ❌                               |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                      | ❌                               |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                      | ❌                               |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                      | ❌                               |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                      | ❌                               |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌                      | ✅                               |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌                      | ✅                               |
| Elevated Access - Admin (Private)                              | ❌                      | ✅                               |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                      | ✅                               |

# Questionnaires overview

Ashby supports the ability to send questionnaires to candidates at any stage of the hiring process. You can create and customize any number of questionnaires and configure how and when to collect them from candidates.

Some use cases for questionnaires include:

- Asking a candidate about their dietary preferences prior to an onsite lunch
- Asking a candidate for references prior to the Offer stage
- Deferring questions asked in the Application Form to later stages of the process to streamline the application process

# Set up your questionnaire

You can set up questionnaires in the [Admin Section](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/surveys/questionnaire) of the app. Navigate to **Admin > Jobs & Applications > Candidate Surveys**, then select the `Questionnaires` tab.

Click `+ New` to create a new questionnaire.

![You can create new questionnaires and edit their questions in the Admin Section of the app. You can also configure Automation Settings to set up rules to automatically schedule emails with links to the questionnaires.](https://cdn.zappy.app/e4392d4164a7a3a272c19fbcb294ae87.png)

You are prompted to give your new questionnaire a title before you can add questions.

Click `Add Question` and select a question type to build out your questionnaire.

You can select the following field types:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Short Answer
- Long Unformatted Answer
- Phone
- Email
- Multiple Choice
- Checkboxes
- Date
- Yes/No
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
- Number
- Resume
- Linear Rating
- NPS Rating
- Candidate's Location
- Other Location
- URL
- File
:::
::::

# Send a questionnaire

Questionnaires can be sent in two different ways:

## Directly request questionnaire completion from the candidate profile

You can directly request the candidate to complete a questionnaire:

1. On the candidate profile, click the `More` dropdown.

![Screenshot of the candidate profile showing the More dropdown menu](https://cdn.zappy.app/34a2bbbc223628f353e86a5aaf054a26.png)

2. Select `Create a Questionnaire Request`.

![Screenshot of the Create a Questionnaire Request dialog](https://cdn.zappy.app/d1d1b81a927b4f4a48cd3e8dffcaa70a.png)

3. Choose which questionnaire to send and which application it should be associated with.
4. Create the questionnaire request using the `Create` button, or optionally also schedule an email with a link to the questionnaire using the `Create and Email` button.

## Automate rules to schedule sending the questionnaire to a candidate when certain conditions are met

You can set up automation rules so that you don't need to directly request questionnaires from candidates manually. Instead, you can set up a series of conditions that trigger automatically sending a questionnaire to a candidate.

To configure automation settings for your questionnaire:

1. Create a new draft configuration of automation rules by clicking `Get Started`.
2. Specify your conditions by clicking `+ Add Field to Match`, choosing fields, and then creating filters based on those.
3. Select an email template from the **Email Template** dropdown that will be used to send out your questionnaire.

:::hint{type="info"}
The email template must include the `Questionnaire Link` substitution token. In the email editor, select the `T` token button and search for “questionnaire” to add it. This token adds the candidate-specific questionnaire link to the email. The token is required to enable the automation and send the questionnaire email.
:::

4. Configure any email delay using the **Delay** dropdown.
5. Specify a sender email address.
6. Click `Save & Publish`.
7. Toggle on the `Enable Survey Automation` toggle once the draft has been activated.

![Automation Configuration screen showing a rule that sends the “Candidate Info - Get to Know You” survey after a candidate enters the “Trials of Skill” interview stage group, with a three-weekday delay at 9:00 a.m. CEST.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8Os0wGi843ptlncZxSV-F_scroll-of-technical-mastery-questionnaire-ashby-2026-09-16-at-113846-am.jpg)

The conditions of each rule are checked whenever a candidate changes stages. Ashby finds the first rule that matches, creates a questionnaire, and schedules an email with a link to the questionnaire.

# Setting up automation for questionnaire activities on an interview plan

:::hint{type="info"}
When a candidate lands in a stage with a questionnaire activity, you can set the questionnaire request to be sent out automatically at that point.
:::

You can watch the video below for an overview, or follow the steps below.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/cdc38bfb35ee454ba667da672a37805e"}

1. Navigate to the interview plan for your job.
2. Click `+ Add Activity`, then select the **Questionnaire** option.
3. Select your questionnaire and email template.
4. Check the `Automate on Stage Entry?` checkbox so the questionnaire is sent when the candidate is moved to the specified stage.

![Screenshot showing the Automate on Stage Entry checkbox in the questionnaire activity settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/79e054f205991308ce1299ce8235e45c.png)

When a candidate is moved to the stage your automation has been added to, you see a note that the automated activity is being started. You also have the option to undo this.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/234a5e6c08a706c882fd0a59f9c585ce.png" size="80" alt="Screenshot showing the automated activity notification when a candidate moves to a stage with a questionnaire" isUploading="false" width="497" height="186" darkWidth="497" darkHeight="186" showCaption="false"}

# View your results

## Viewing individual results

You can view individual results of a completed questionnaire on the **Forms** tab on the candidate profile.

![Screenshot of the Forms tab on the candidate profile showing completed questionnaire results](https://cdn.zappy.app/85a62f41e8b0ea81dc229f07fc11d076.png)

## Reporting and analysis

You can report on the questions in a questionnaire in standard reports. The fields are available under **Job Consideration > Questionnaire**.

![Screenshot of the reporting interface showing questionnaire fields under Job Consideration](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kBWje3ocm2fxJLj3HvVd7_screenshot2022-05-23at101434am.png)

## Reporting on questionnaire responses

Questionnaires are available as a subject to be reported on. Use this to count submitted questionnaires over a period of time, to review answers to specific questions, and more.

Here are the fields that can be used for filtering, grouping, or displaying information on your report. Select the questionnaire you are reporting on to access these fields for the specified questionnaire. You can also choose questions added to the questionnaire as reporting fields.

| **Field**    | **Definition**                                      |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At | When the questionnaire was completed and submitted. |
| Title        | The name of the questionnaire.                      |

## Questionnaire report examples

### Pull a list of the answers submitted for a specific job

Navigate to **Reports > Report Builder**, then select `Custom List`.

**Subject:** Questionnaires

**Filters:** Questionnaire's Candidate's Job Consideration's Job.

**Fields to Show:** Candidate Name and all or any of the questionnaire questions you'd like to have included in your list.

![Screenshot of the Custom List report configured to pull questionnaire answers by job](https://cdn.zappy.app/4c2e9928455a4b24da40b376f6d7c12d.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Custom list reports on questionnaires can also be exported to .csv using the `Export` button in the upper right corner of the report.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hAxS4TWrTyeA3orzs9fOS_questionnaire-report-responses-bridget-s-test-report-ashby-2026-07-31-at-62225-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1106" height="632" darkWidth="1106" darkHeight="632" alt="Screenshot showing the export button in the upper right of the report page." showCaption="false"}
:::

### View the number of questionnaires completed over the last quarter, split by week and grouped by questionnaire type

Navigate to **Reports > Build Report**, then select `Count Over Time`.

**Subject:** Questionnaires

**Time Field & Interval:** Submitted At to show Last Quarter every Week.

**Group By:** Questionnaire's Title.

![Screenshot of the Count Over Time report configured to show questionnaire completions over the last quarter](https://cdn.zappy.app/752f535892ff12cbc446afa478964439.png)

# FAQs

### Are questionnaire links public or reusable?

Links to complete questionnaires are candidate-specific. It currently isn't possible to create a public link for a questionnaire.

### Can I add file upload questions to my questionnaire?

Yes! Click `Add Question`, then select the `File` field option. You can then add the question and, optionally, a description.

### Can I send questionnaires to other users like interviewers or recruiters?

No, questionnaires can only be configured and sent out to candidates. Consider adding questions to feedback forms or setting up [Hiring Manager Experience Surveys](docId\:Fl73J4CypI6sF86H7Tzra).

[title] Microsoft 365
[path] Integrations/Platform/

There are three routes to authorize Ashby with Microsoft 365:&#x20;

- [Application-wide admin consent](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7)&#x20;
- [Individual consent](docId:_eaaljgrTeW__Uoxtk8i7)&#x20;
- [Hybrid Setup](docId:1s6NWGSw6I4jaqafRRYQo) (configure some access application-wide for easier scheduling, while relying on individual Microsoft authorization for more sensitive workflows)

This article explains each route, how to sync users and rooms, and how email sync, Microsoft Teams, and group calendars work once the integration is in place.

# Application-wide admin consent

:::hint{type="info"}
This is the fastest route to get the integration in place for all users. Ashby automatically syncs all users of a Microsoft domain once you give application-wide consent.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin in Ashby and an admin in your organization's Microsoft tenant to configure application-wide admin consent.
:::

This method allows an admin of both Ashby and an organization's Microsoft tenant to authorize all permissions that Ashby requires for everyone in their organization.

A user from your Microsoft organization with the permission to administer applications logs in to Ashby and heads to the **Integrations** page. Microsoft 365 is in the **Platform** section of the **Integrations Marketplace**.

![The Microsoft 365 tile in Integrations.](https://cdn.zappy.app/798216f0063b86dbe3a5749ee90b9228.png)

1. Click **Microsoft 365**.
2. Click `Enable Microsoft 365`.
3. Click `Connect to Microsoft 365`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/118539fe1b8964e5174715347b40f85a.png" size="100" alt="The Connect to Microsoft 365 button." isUploading="false" width="1140" height="571" darkWidth="1140" darkHeight="571" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Confirm the account and review the permissions requested.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5177125806c13a81a9b35b2a855209d2.png" size="100" alt="The permissions granted in the application-wide admin route." isUploading="false" width="311" height="211" darkWidth="311" darkHeight="211" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

5. Click `Accept` to allow Ashby access.

:::hint{type="success"}
Once you accept, you see a message confirming that Ashby has enabled the integration.
:::

Admins can also opt to disable the user sync and opt to not automatically enable synced users by unchecking the following checkboxes in the General Settings section of the Microsoft integration.

- **Sync Microsoft Users?** When unchecked, the automatic user sync is stopped, so Microsoft users in your tenant will not be synced to Ashby.
- **Automatically Enable Synced Users?&#x20;**&#x57;ill stop enabling synced users so they will need to sign into Ashby before they can be scheduled or configured.

![The general settings within the Microsoft 365 tile. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TucQUi0latw2ylCys3ZlI_microsoft-disable-user-sync.jpg)

# Individual consent

:::hint{type="info"}
If you'd prefer users to give consent on an individual basis, each user can manage Ashby's access from their **Microsoft 365 Settings** (within [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info)).
:::

The user needs to give the same permissions as listed above for application-wide admin consent. A user can click `Connect with Microsoft 365` to connect their account.

![The scopes and status on the Microsoft 365 Settings page](https://cdn.zappy.app/52ef06b821616401c029132e5775790c.png)

Users can also individually disable email sync in the **Email Settings** section of their [personal settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email).

If users have the email sync option enabled, they can also opt to include personal email aliases in the sync. If they respond to a candidate using one of their personal aliases in their email client, Ashby still detects and syncs it.

:::hint{type="info"}
All aliases listed under `Aliases to include in email sync` are set not to sync by default, and the user needs to opt in to enable the sync for that alias.
:::

![Setting up email syncing as part of the individual consent route. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/43f47d80f28f5ef83bef9e86e8f2a348.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have taken the application-wide admin consent route, users still see `To send and receive emails and appointments in Ashby, connect your Microsoft account` when navigating to the [Microsoft 365 Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/microsoft-365) page within **Personal Settings**. They do not need to complete this additional step if they are not organizing interviews with Teams or group calendars.

![The Connect with Microsoft 365 button](https://cdn.zappy.app/3cd53d302f02e29dee5a8b44f9484aa4.png)

They can review the list of scopes in the **Status** section of this page to confirm what is functional and currently syncing.

![The list of scopes in the Status section of Microsoft 365 Settings.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8aba9d4c9e4366e37da0d2a8d2e4e320.png)

Users who are organizing meetings for interviews using Teams, or those looking to schedule interviews to group calendars, need to go through the additional authorization processes within [Microsoft 365 Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/microsoft-365) to use these features. This applies even if you took the application-wide admin consent route to set up the integration.
:::

## Authorizing Microsoft 365 room and user sync

A user with the `User.Read.All` permission in Microsoft can enable user syncing in the **Additional Authorization** section of the Microsoft 365 integration settings in the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).

You have the following options for syncing users and rooms as part of your integration setup:

- **Authorize Microsoft 365 User Sync:** Sync users to Ashby from your Microsoft tenant.
- **Authorize Microsoft 365 Room and User Sync:** Sync your users, or users and rooms, from your Microsoft tenant to Ashby.

![The Additional Authorization section of the Microsoft 365 tile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9pPTYeF_r4GOrN1Q7-i3j_microsoft-365-acent-ashby-2026-02-18-at-121447-pm.jpg)

If you enable the `Authorize Microsoft 365 Room and User Sync` option, you need to determine a delegated room sync user. The user you select from the dropdown must have the following permissions in your tenant:

- `User.Read.All` — for user sync and room sync
- `Place.Read.All` — for room discovery
- `Calendars.ReadWrite.Shared` — for shared and room calendar access (the delegated user must be a delegate of the room calendars in Microsoft 365 for calendar subscription to work)

Ashby inherits whatever visibility the delegated sync user has in the tenant for those rooms. Ashby only syncs the rooms that the delegated user has access to in Microsoft. If you see only free/busy information, that is the information Microsoft returns for the delegated user's access level.

If you do not want to sync users into Ashby but do want to sync rooms, ensure that the `Sync Microsoft Users?` checkbox is unchecked in the **General Settings** section of the integration tile.

![The general settings section where you can adjust the user sync and enablement settings.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f9YIP8-d3UnoKNMirKTcZ_general-settings-in-the-microsoft-tile.jpg)

# Hybrid setup

For more on configuring a hybrid setup for Microsoft 365, check out [Microsoft 365: Hybrid Setup](docId:1s6NWGSw6I4jaqafRRYQo).

# Email sync

If you enable email syncing as part of your Microsoft 365 configuration, synced emails to and from the candidate appear in the **Feed** section of the candidate's profile.

### Email attachments

Attachments included in an email also appear on the synced email on the candidate's feed in Ashby.

To save an email attachment from an inbound email to the **Other Files** section of the candidate's profile, click the file icon on the attachment.

:::hint{type="info"}
The option to save an email attachment as a file on the candidate profile is not available for outbound emails.
:::

![Click the file icon to the right of the attachment name to add it to the Other Files section of the candidate profile.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OIyp-cqgSsLjGNVMMn3Wt_adding-file-to-a-candidate-profile.jpg)

A popover opens with the following options:

- Description
- File category (more on this at Candidate Files and File Categories). Ashby prefills this with 'From email on X date', but you can amend it.
- Privacy (if you have permission to view private fields)

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xDnKEOWBOQ5pgdoPOKpjq_adding-an-email-attachment-to-the-candidate-files.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" position="center" width="800" height="1012" darkWidth="800" darkHeight="1012" alt="Select the category, description and privacy before saving the file. The saved file will get it's own privacy." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
Once you save the file, the privacy set is separate from the email privacy settings. Changing the email privacy later does not impact who can access the file saved to the candidate profile. Deleting the email from the candidate's feed does not remove the saved file from the candidate profile automatically.
:::

# Microsoft Teams

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on scheduling via Ashby, check out [Scheduling & Interviews: An Introduction](docId\:XW-3IRIvOnBHO_UF37LbH).
:::

When scheduling an interview, Ashby can also automatically schedule a meeting in Teams if you have the Microsoft 365 integration in place and if you set Microsoft Teams as the interview's location.

![Setting a location for an interview to Teams.](https://cdn.zappy.app/0aca360768b14bd23ce1a42ce6975486.png)

The organizer of the Teams meeting needs to have set up individual OAuth within **Microsoft 365 Settings** (in [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info)) to use this, even if you took the application-wide admin consent route.

# Group calendars

As part of the Microsoft 365 integration, you can add a group calendar for scheduling interviews. If you'd like to set up a group calendar as part of your integration, reach out to your Customer Success Manager (CSM) or [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

## Creating the group calendar

To get started, create a Microsoft 365 Group and add the people who will be scheduling to that group as members. The group comes with a calendar that everyone in the group has write access to.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Newly created Microsoft 365 groups may take up to 24 hours to fully propagate.
:::

![Configuring a group calendar.](https://cdn.zappy.app/09a9307441e45b802f3aa84b3f771370.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
**Important group requirements**

- It must be Public.
- It must be a Group (not a Distribution List or Shared Mailbox).
- Teams capabilities should be enabled.
- It must be mail-enabled (not a security group).
- Make sure **Hide this group from the global address list** is unchecked.

These requirements are critical for the calendar to sync correctly with Ashby.
:::

## Authorizing and adding the group calendar in Ashby

Anyone who is scheduling on that calendar needs to go through the individual Microsoft 365 authorization in their [Personal Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/personal-info).&#x20;

The user adding the calendar must be an Organization Admin in Ashby and also be a member or owner of the group.

For workspaces with more than 100 groups, reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for assistance adding a specific group calendar if you don't see the group calendar listed. Ashby asks you to supply the Group Object ID, which appears either in the URL when you navigate to the group or, if you have access to your domain within Azure, in the group **Object ID** section.

To add the group calendar, head to the Microsoft 365 integration settings in [Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace). You then see the option `+ Add Calendar`. The calendar you add becomes the default calendar when scheduling interviews.

![Adding a group calendar in Ashby.](https://cdn.zappy.app/c419527fb68996c3d57445f2112c6dd7.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
**Additional considerations**

- To schedule interviews onto this calendar, users need to authorize with individual OAuth.
- The organizer of the meeting is the group name, and interviewers are attendees. Therefore, name the group something that can be externally facing, as it shows on candidate invites.
- When you authorize a new calendar, users should reauthenticate in their **Personal Settings**.
:::

# Email aliases

Microsoft 365 email alias sharing in Ashby uses **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Email Sharing](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/email-sharing). A user can share their email address with specific Ashby users from this page.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Personal Microsoft 365 aliases do not appear in **Admin > Organizational Settings >&#x20;**[Shared Email Aliases](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/shared-email-aliases) and cannot be used as the organization-wide no-reply address.
:::

The steps below explain how to enable Microsoft 365 alias sending for the Personal Settings email-sharing workflow.

Ashby supports sending emails from user aliases. To successfully send an email from an alias, a Microsoft admin needs to enable the **Turn on from sending aliases** option in the [Exchange Online Admin Center](https://admin.exchange.microsoft.com/).

Log in and navigate to **Settings > Mail Flow > General**, then check the `Turn on from sending aliases` checkbox.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If this setting is not enabled, emails still send but fall back to the user's primary email address.
:::

![The Mail Flow settings in Microsoft.](https://cdn.zappy.app/d5dd0fc931d833b521dd42ae255adf62.png)

![The Turn on sending from aliases checkbox.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f3a71a445468d1693279f4b076aa5b68.png)

Unlike Google, Microsoft does not allow different From names on an alias. For example, if an email from your primary email has the From name of Julie Meadows, most email clients show messages from your alias with the same From name. In this example, Julie Meadows shows as the From name for emails sent from the alias email address as well.

:::hint{type="info"}
To set up a company-specific no-reply email address, see [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2). This is the supported route for a company-specific no-reply address with Microsoft 365, and it is available on Enterprise plans.
:::

# Known limitations

Currently, there are a few options that the integration does not support.

## Email Signatures

- Ashby cannot sync email signatures over from Microsoft 365.

## Calendar syncing and scheduling

- If you are the interview organizer and on the panel interviewing, you see two events on your calendar if a group calendar is not in place.

# FAQs

### What access level do I need to authenticate this application?

The person who grants access to the application by clicking `Connect to Microsoft 365` must be someone who can manage Azure application registrations and grant application permissions to the Graph API.

### Can my team set up a custom application instead of using the Ashby integration?

Review [Microsoft Custom Applications (GCC High)](docId\:wlPEo48eVOA15qd5ty_q6) for guidance on setting up an Azure application and pointing it to Ashby.

### Can I set up both Google Workspace and Microsoft 365 integrations in my Ashby account?

Ashby currently supports deep integration with either Google Workspace **or** Microsoft 365, but not both simultaneously. For more information, check out [Does Ashby support integrating with both Google and Microsoft at the same time?](docId:92txkuC2vVMOrzXEPtMKJ)

### I've set up the Google Workspace integration — can I use Microsoft Teams for interviewing?

Ashby currently supports deep integration with either Google Workspace **or** Microsoft 365, but not both simultaneously.

### Can I reschedule or change the date and time of an interview via the event on my Outlook calendar?

We support a two-way syncing option, so if you move an interview event on your Outlook calendar to a new date and/or time, Ashby syncs and reflects the changes. In most cases, we recommend rescheduling in Ashby (for example, if you're amending the interview type or interviewers on the panel).

You need to move the calendar event on the account's shared interview calendar (the calendar determined in the **Communication** tab of your interview) if you did not schedule it via the direct booking option.

For an interview scheduled via a direct booking link, you can move the calendar invite on the shared calendar, or the meeting organizer can move the interview on their personal calendar if they don't have access to the shared calendar.

Ashby then syncs these changes back and sends out new calendar invites. You do not need to resend the calendar invites.

If you reschedule the interview via Outlook, Ashby adds an event to the candidate's feed showing that rescheduling happened outside of Ashby.

![A note showing that an interview was rescheduled externally. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/0074bea4403b70efe295b697d8f2f2e6.png)

### How are users pulled into Ashby?

Ashby can sync users over via the following routes:

- If you have user sync enabled as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration settings.
- If you migrate data via the Greenhouse, Workday, or Lever API migration options, Ashby pulls user accounts over as part of the migration.
- If you configure a user sync via System for Cross-domain Identity Management (SCIM).
- If a user signs in for the first time using the native \`Sign in with Microsoft\` button, Ashby can create their user account even when Microsoft 365 user sync is disabled. The user must sign in with an email address that matches an organization domain configured for the corresponding sign-in method. New accounts created this way start as Limited Access users. Once Directory Sync (SCIM) is enabled, Ashby does not create users through native Microsoft sign-in. Users must be provisioned through Directory Sync (SCIM).

If you have users synced over via an API migration or by enabling user sync as part of the Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration and then set up SCIM, the SCIM sync deactivates any user accounts that Ashby initially added but that are not in your SCIM directory. To reactivate any users that Ashby deactivated when it shouldn't have, add them back to your SCIM directory.

If you've enabled the user sync option as part of your Google Workspace or Microsoft 365 integration (and do not have SCIM configured), Ashby automatically provisions and deactivates users based on their status in your workspace or tenant.

If you added users via an API migration from Greenhouse, Workday, or Lever, you can deactivate any users who do not need access manually if you are not planning to configure SCIM. You can read more about deactivating users at [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8)

### Will synced users receive a welcome email?

No. Once you add a user, they can sign in at the [Ashby sign-in page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/signin).

### I send a large volume of no-reply emails each day — can I still use a branded email address?

This is possible if you configure an email domain within Ashby. If you are sending more than 1,000 no-reply or automated emails a day, or are looking to set up a company-specific no-reply and are using Microsoft 365, check out our [Email Domain Setup](docId\:rKqQ453zhHg4vMIShy9Q2) guide.

### What permissions are necessary on the Ashby side for a user set as the Delegated Room Sync User in Microsoft 365 integration settings?

The user needs to be an active Ashby user for them to be an option to delegate room access. As such, they need to be enabled for sign-in. You can set this user up as a limited access user in Ashby, and they don't need to authenticate in Ashby.

### Where are meeting rooms pulled from in Microsoft 365?

In Microsoft 365, meeting rooms appear on the **Rooms & Equipment** page within the Microsoft 365 admin center.

### I have some non-Gregorian calendar events on my calendar and they aren't syncing over, why?

Ashby does not support recurring calendar events that include the "RSCALE" property in their recurrence rules (RRULES), and does not sync these events over during calendar syncs. The "RSCALE" property specifies non-Gregorian calendars. Ashby still syncs all events on the user's calendar without the "RSCALE" property.

[title] Platform
[path] Integrations/


[title] E-Signature Offers
[path] Offers & E-Signatures/

This guide covers the e-signature feature in detail. Check out the [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh) guide for the full feature overview.

# E-signature offer overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/4c2ae7ee201748a490f493b7331c859e"}

:::hint{type="info"}
E-signature request templates are not shown in this video, but are available. See [Creating and Managing E-Signature Request Templates](docId\:Oo1yu8BM3VSO1jcuNQwLr) for setup instructions, or the [Send an e-signature offer to a candidate](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) section below for how to use them.
:::

# Permissions: offers and offer letters

See the table below for information on the access roles that can create offer letter templates and generate offers for candidates in the Offer stage.

| Access Role                                                    | Can create offer letter templates? | Can create offers for candidates in the Offer stage? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌                                  | ❌                                                    |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌                                  | ❌                                                    |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌                                  | ❌                                                    |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌                                  | ❌                                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌                                  | ❌                                                    |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌                                  | ❌                                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌                                  | ❌                                                    |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ❌                                  | ✅                                                    |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅                                  | ✅                                                    |

# Create an offer letter with e-signature tokens

The first step in activating e-signature is adding the related tokens to your .docx offer letter template.

1. Navigate to [Offer Letter Tokens](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/offer-letter-tokens) and locate the candidate and company signature tokens.
2. Click a token to copy it to your clipboard, then paste it in the appropriate area of your .docx template. The candidate and company signature and date tokens are required to activate the e-signature feature.
3. Navigate to the [Offer Letter Templates](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/offer-letter-templates) page, click `New`, enter a title, and upload the file.
4. Click the refresh button `🔄`. The form validates for errors, and you are notified if anything needs to be updated.

![Shows the validation check in the offer letter template creation window](https://cdn.zappy.app/5c8212e4b65cf476bcdc477ac189ecb7.png)

The following default tokens are available for e-signature offer letters:

`{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE_DATE}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE_INITIALS}}`

`{{CANDIDATE_CHECKBOX}}`

`{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE}}`

`{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE_DATE}}`

`{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE_INITIALS}}`

:::hint{type="warning"}
All four of the following tokens are required to activate e-signature. Without them, the e-signature feature will not work:

- `{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE}}`
- `{{CANDIDATE_E_SIGNATURE_DATE}}`
- `{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE}}`
- `{{COMPANY_E_SIGNATURE_DATE}}`
:::

## Adding text input fields to your e-signature offer letter

:::hint{type="info"}
E-signature text input tokens can be used for e-signature offer letters generated via Dropbox Sign or Docusign.
:::

If you want to add text fields to your offer letters so the candidate or the company signatory can fill out additional information within the offer, add the following tokens:

- `{{CANDIDATE_TEXT_INPUT}}` This text input field provides the candidate a field to add additional text.
- `{{COMPANY_TEXT_INPUT}}` This text input field provides the company signatory a field to add additional text.

To configure and add a text input token:

1. In the **Offer Letter Tokens** tab, click a text input token.
2. Select the field size by choosing a preset size or setting the width and number of lines.
3. Optionally, check the `Required` checkbox to require the signer to complete the field as part of the signing process.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Vdblf0p9HKE999LinHV6L_offers-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-91815-am.jpg" size="80" width="1312" height="1062" position="center" darkWidth="1312" darkHeight="1062" showCaption="false" alt="Shows the window to configure a text input token"}

4. Click the generated token to copy it.
5. Paste the token into your offer letter.

![Highlights the token ](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BU8cdsM2wJWApPF-KIfDO_offers-acent-ashby-2026-01-29-at-92749-am.jpg)

We recommend placing this token on its own line within your offer letter template to prevent layout issues. Here is an example of how the token should be placed and how it looks when an e-signature offer letter has been generated.

![An offer letter template with a company input text token added on a new line.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Jkh5u64P68HUKY6HYK675_e-signature-text-input-tokens-restricted-early-access-slab-2026-01-29-at-93834-am.jpg "An offer letter template with a company input text token added on a new line.")

![How the company signatory will see the text input field at the point of signing the e-signature offer.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tjlA_m5-wrGagUHpnHLlJ_e-signature-text-input-tokens-restricted-early-access-slab-2026-01-29-at-93802-am.jpg "How the company signatory will see the text input field at the point of signing the e-signature offer.")

# Send an e-signature offer to a candidate

Once your offer letter template is valid and complete, you are ready to create offers for candidates. Follow the steps below to successfully create and share an e-signature offer.

1. Navigate to the candidate's profile and move them to the **Offer** stage. This generates an offer activity in the **Activities & Progress** timeline.
2. On the **New Offer** activity, click `Create Offer` and then fill out the **Offer Details** form.
3. Once the form is filled out, click `View Offer` on the **Offer Created** activity, then `Generate Offer Letter`.

![Highlights the view offer and send offer e-signature request buttons](https://cdn.zappy.app/5cb2946f4f1d86a6688173e0b44a6e90.png)

4. Select an e-signature offer letter from the **Templates** dropdown to generate the offer letter.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
If you do not have e-signature offer letter templates, you need to go back and create them. See [Create an offer letter with e-signature tokens](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW) above for more information.
:::

5. Once the offer letter has been generated, click `Send Offer E-Signature` (you may need to refresh the page).
6. Fill in the e-signature request details:
   - **Title:** This becomes the subject of the email to the candidate.
   - **Message:** This appears in the body text of the email sent by the e-signature provider and is visible to all recipients including the candidate, any internal signers, and anyone CC'd on the request. Once the offer is sent, the message is not viewable on the candidate profile or elsewhere in the Ashby UI.
   - **Company signatory:** The internal team member required to sign.
   - **Signing order:** Determine who signs first, or whether anyone can sign at any time.
   - **Expiration:** Select a specific date, or set to never expire. If the expiry date passes, a new e-signature request will need to be sent to be completed.&#x20;
   - **CC:** Any additional individuals you would like to receive the email.

:::Paragraph{indent="1"}
Alternatively, you can apply an e-signature request template, which fills in these details automatically if your organization has built them.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H9D0blHtLDvQBcOsGrFBN_carolina-zulauf-backend-engineer-acent-ashby-2026-03-12-at-42732-pm.jpg" size="72" width="1236" height="1312" position="center" alt="Shows the Send Offer E-signature request pane with an e-signature request template applied, which automatically filled in all the details." darkWidth="1236" darkHeight="1312" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
See [Creating and Managing E-Signature Request Templates](docId\:Oo1yu8BM3VSO1jcuNQwLr) for more information on creating e-signature request templates.
:::

7. You have the option to preview the email before sending by clicking `Preview` at the bottom of the pane, or to send a self-test to your email by clicking `Self-Test` if the preview option in your [Offer Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/settings) is not enabled.
8. When ready, click `Send` to send the request to the candidate!

# E-signature preview editor

The preview editor can be enabled under [E-Signature Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/settings) in Admin. When enabled, the signature request can be previewed in a document editor before sending the request to the candidate. This allows you to add special document inputs for the signer to fill out, which may not be offered in Ashby's templates.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b17078f26b374391a365d5a0aa9914db"}

# Offer sent via Dropbox Sign or Docusign

Offers are sent via Dropbox Sign. Ashby's Dropbox Sign integration works automatically; you do not need a Dropbox Sign plan to use it.

If you have the Docusign integration in place, offers can also be sent via Docusign. You can read more on this integration at [Docusign](docId\:q9692LmyFdYbtE1VmW3nH).

The candidate can start the signing process via a notification from either Dropbox Sign or Docusign.

![Shows an example e-signature offer email to a candidate](https://cdn.zappy.app/c1e98dd6173f8cf1676c26be067c0014.png)

# E-signature status and reminders

Once an offer is sent, you can review the e-signature status by clicking `View Offer` on the offer activity. From there, in the **Offer E-Signature** section, you can also send out reminders where needed.

![Highlights the View offer button and where the list of required signatures show in the offer overview.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f20f49a59158d2615765d45482e1b33a.png)

# Edit offer

If you edit an offer, the e-signature request becomes invalid, and you need to regenerate the offer letter and resend the e-signature request.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/2ffb6d843fdac4b1a4a82455a226debc.png" size="78" width="593" height="415" darkWidth="593" darkHeight="415" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Highlights a warning indicating the editing the offer will cancel its current e-signature request."}

# Review signed offer

Once an offer is signed, you have the option to review the offer by clicking `View Offer` on the activity (now showing as **Offer Accepted**). You can click `Signed Offer` to view the signed offer letter.

![Shows the signed offer link to view the offer after it has been signed](https://cdn.zappy.app/5ef12dd4b56990fefe2872f4d876c2fb.png)

If you have multiple signed offer documents as part of an offer packet (more on this at [Adding Multiple Documents to an E-signature Offer](docId\:gN7C_pqJJFh32kUp99EMz)), you also see a `Download Signed Files` button. Click this to either download a ZIP file containing all signed files, or to select a specific file from the offer packet to download.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/0e9c59b244c5c85cde447bfa781c0943.png" size="66" width="589" height="311" darkWidth="589" darkHeight="311" position="center" showCaption="false" alt="Shows the download signed files menu with available options"}

# E-Signature Offers: What the Candidate Sees

After you send an e-signature request, the candidate receives an email from either Dropbox Sign or DocuSign depending on your chosen tool.&#x20;

- If you are using Dropbox Sign, the candidate selects `Review & sign` in the Dropbox Sign email to open the e-signature document.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yrzwyZqTNfc6l8DKClyRm_review-and-sign-dropbox-sign.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1220" height="450" darkWidth="1220" darkHeight="450" alt="Dropbox Sign message to candidates when receiving an e-signature document email. " showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- If you are using Docusign, the candidate selects `Review Document` in the DocuSign email to open the e-signature document.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ncUqs39f_cdPl4jPXYY2d_docusign-review-document-button.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1198" height="644" darkWidth="1198" darkHeight="644" alt="Docusign message in an email to the candidate." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
The candidate does not need a Dropbox Sign or DocuSign account to review or sign the e-signature document.
:::

After everyone signs the document, the candidate receives a notification confirming completion.&#x20;

- If you send the e-signature request via Dropbox Sign, the notification email includes the signed document as an attachment.&#x20;
- If you send the e-signature request via DocuSign, the candidate selects `View Completed Document` in the notification email to access the signed document.

# FAQs

### Why do my e-signature placeholders show in the generated document?

This can happen when more than one font is used in the document template. Check out [Offer Letter Template Formatting](docId\:VznQ4S_-oH-0fuNsp7q6u) for more troubleshooting tips.

### Can I set my e-signature request to expire?

Yes! After creating your offer, you see the **Automatically Expire Request** option in the following menu after clicking `Send Offer E-Signature Request`. Use the drop-down menu to select `At Date & Time` if you want the request to expire; you can then specify the expiration date and time. Keep this set to `Never` if you do not want the request to expire.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SQdmxQkLJVnuBVvbggt0j_image.png" size="70" alt="Shows where the automatic expiration options are when sending an e-signature offer" isUploading="false" width="591" height="626" darkWidth="591" darkHeight="626" showCaption="false"}

### What notifications are received when e-signature requests are sent?

You receive notifications when signatories view and sign the offer letter, as well as when all parties have signed. Each signatory gets a notification after signing the offer letter, providing them with their signed copy.

If you have set a signing order for the e-signature request, the signer(s) waiting for the other party to sign first get a "heads up" that an e-signature request is heading their way but is not yet ready for their signature.

For users to receive notifications from Dropbox Sign for offer e-signature requests, enable **Use Offer E-Signature Preview Editor?&#x20;**&#x75;nder **Admin > Organizational Settings > Offers > Offer Settings**. This setting enables the embedded preview flow, which allows Dropbox Sign to associate the request with the user who initiated it.

### What email address do e-signature requests come from?

E-signature requests come from [noreply@mail.hellosign.com](mailto\:noreply@mail.hellosign.com).

### Why do you recommend that we add the Dropbox Sign domain to an allowlist?

For external emails to candidates, Dropbox Sign's domain is highly trusted and it is rare that those emails get sent to spam. We've had a couple of instances where internal signature requests for company signatories were getting blocked, so in order to prevent that, Dropbox Sign recommends adding the email to an allowlist. More about this can be found in the [Dropbox Sign documentation on email notifications](https://faq.hellosign.com/hc/en-us/articles/206454577-Why-am-I-not-receiving-email-notifications#:~\:text=It%27s%20possible%20your%20e%2Dmail,contact%20our%20support%20team%20here).

### Can I create custom tokens for e-signature documents?

You can generate custom tokens for candidate, job, and offer custom fields. For more information on setting these up, check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs). These allow you to pull information from custom fields into your e-signature templates.

Your custom field tokens for e-signature documents are listed in the **Custom Field Tokens** section of **E-Signature Document Tokens** within the **E-Signature Documents** section of Admin.

[title] Fairgo.AI
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

[Fairgo.ai](http://fairgo.ai/) is an assessment platform helps hiring managers and talent acquisition teams shortlist the best candidates faster by automating screening with live video interviews. Use this integration for unbiased, consistent interviews.

## Overview

Fairgo.ai provides an assessment integration that can be added to an interview plan.

See below for a demo that takes you through:

1. Configuring the integration in fairgo.ai
2. Creating the integration in ashby
3. Creating a new job with an interview plan configure to start an fairgo.ai assessment.
4. Posting the job in Ashby
5. Applying the job as a candidate
6. Seeing the job and application be created in fairgo.ai automatically
7. Review the assessment created in Ashby
8. Launch live video interview from email sent to candidate

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c39382dd4b3145b489f3f00304db3e3b?sid=f62640d6-bc13-4098-a123-ade46e733a5d"}

## Configure integration

### Start

First click the `Add Integration` button, which will bring up the following dialog which includes:

1. Click Platform drop down to select Ashby integration
2. Copy the Fairgo Key generated to the clipboard.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXegCu8-Vy6HO8fJD5EY0WCbrDoMFqtXKCdCPWHpvHIKcMgOt4J5dJq8UBl5QJrDe9P0ruHuzxsts3qCuMpXSguIex7DRRMHXWRd3NNNAZk4UipxmYaaYovaup7KgINtuxGlXh5eIhqsyeR7i2BPJ7ZJX__0?key=RcQIsA-0WT6QPTneDeEA6g" size="40" width="828" height="1061" position="center" darkWidth="828" darkHeight="1061" showCaption="false"}

### Setup

Then in Ashby, go the the Admin > Integrations page find the Fairgo.ai assessment integration.

1. Paste Fairgo API Key
2. Create an Ashby API Key and copy to the clipboard.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXeIRm2djnxT6Rpgr8xU7qXzJZtyhl7mxvAV1PyZSKCvLQtLvMv1AOfkAlk19T5aoDYqPpA7XyrBrl_LBrO18cWcftX03ovV0k4_kY1QwK2rLGbmSDIVQdXAqlloag11PDIAWDRkzoYWDOnvHIxC7mVYRwwy?key=RcQIsA-0WT6QPTneDeEA6g" size="70" width="1200" height="649" position="center" darkWidth="1200" darkHeight="649" showCaption="false"}

### Complete

Then return to Fairgo.ai and paste the Platform Key from Ashby integration

### Job Selection

You also can provide a Job Selection to configure how jobs are saved to:

- All future jobs - will take affect for all future jobs.
- All open jobs - will pull in all currently open jobs.
- Specific job - allows you to select a specific job.

## Configure Assessment

Ashby allows you set up assessment activities as part of an interview plan.

When adding a Fairgo.ai assessment, you will be asked to select the assessment type:

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXehaw0QPCCUKnFUJBHlH-mbJuHIaySoXtJRl6GnHFyQDbfo-UG5gECTH6AyAnbAcyUJLiBBcKRHw-pWMAQxGnr5qzB4fX0b5cBeLdBdHSa6gNcp3GmYDMgDJkzitTH9hfNS1pR7kmnGmKNMARG2ktd5mAI?key=RcQIsA-0WT6QPTneDeEA6g" size="64" width="394" height="262" position="center" darkWidth="394" darkHeight="262" showCaption="false"}

You can create [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB) to start when a candidate enters the Application Review stage. When an assessment is started a candidate will be sent an email to start the interview.

Results and a link to the interview in fairgo.ai will be available in Ashby:

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXf8_c5JDE7DzQW_-MT4z4p4MhRFYfAjS7uEQqas0-e5A1MLDbP62uK6KPG_KleSCNzCvdINd5gr5pRy2HY4ycVDBWu9hz7I4-Yg9jswTG-2ztqZm1gTS2o4LCy_dR4mTH3XsNBKM3LyCxFbJcFHhUKU1XI?key=RcQIsA-0WT6QPTneDeEA6g" size="58" width="528" height="223" position="center" darkWidth="528" darkHeight="223" showCaption="false"}


[title] Job Board
[path] Integrations/


[title] Juicebox
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Juicebox is an AI-powered sourcing tool that helps you find and engage candidates. With the Ashby and Juicebox integration, you can move job details and candidate profiles between the two platforms. This saves time on manual data entry, prevents duplicate outreach, and keeps your candidate data in one place.

# Permissions & access

The Juicebox integration is available on Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin and on the Juicebox Business plan to configure this integration.
:::

# Connecting the integration

To get started, follow Juicebox's [Ashby Integration Set-up guide](https://docs.juicebox.ai/help/ats-setup/ashby#ashby-integration-set-up) to connect the integration in Juicebox.

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations** and search for [Juicebox](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/juicebox).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for Juicebox` button.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1Yxj7z7ao47UfoxZe5tVY_juicebox-ashby-2026-09-30-at-90035-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1602" height="723" darkWidth="1602" darkHeight="723" alt="Ashby Admin Integrations page with the Juicebox integration open and the &#x22;Create API key for Juicebox&#x22; button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy the API key and store it in a secure place. You need this to complete the integration setup in Juicebox.&#x20;
:::

3. Adjust the API endpoint permissions by clicking the `View API key settings` button.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/72ELAWy0-akgOo2QOV2BK_juicebox-ashby-2026-10-02-at-20311-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="853" height="237" darkWidth="853" darkHeight="237" alt="Juicebox integration settings showing the API Key field with an external-link icon highlighted by a pink arrow." showCaption="false"}

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Below are the suggested minimum scopes:
:::

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PZUtsxulhfEcMov4vk12E_api-credentials-ashby-2026-09-30-at-90537-am.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="1196" height="1506" darkWidth="1196" darkHeight="1506" alt="Ashby API credentials page for Juicebox showing the active API key permissions, with read access enabled for Jobs, Candidates, Interviews, Hiring Process Metadata, and Organization, and write access enabled for Candidates." showCaption="false"}

Return to Juicebox to complete the setup. After you sign in, the window closes and you are redirected to Juicebox. Refresh your page. If successful, a green "Connected" button appears.

:::hint{type="info"}
For an overview of all integration features, see [ATS Integrations](https://docs.juicebox.ai/ats-integrations). If you experience any issues with your integration, contact the Juicebox support team at [support@juicebox.ai](#).
:::

:::hint{type="success"}
Congratulations! You have successfully integrated Ashby and Juicebox. It may take a few minutes for all data to sync between Juicebox and Ashby. Wait up to 10 minutes to ensure all data has synced.
:::

# Using the Juicebox integration

The integration supports three use cases.

## Start a project from a job

Import a job from Ashby into Juicebox to start a new sourcing project. Juicebox uses the job description to kick off a candidate search automatically, so you don't have to write search criteria from scratch.&#x20;

## Export profiles to Ashby

Save candidate profiles from Juicebox straight into Ashby. You can export:

- Contact details
- Work experience
- Resumes
- Other profile information

You can choose which fields are included in the export.

## Import profiles from Ashby

View profiles that already exist in Ashby from inside Juicebox. This lets you:

- Avoid contacting the same candidate twice
- See your team's relationship history with a candidate right away

[title] Indeed
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Automatically post your jobs to Indeed and Glassdoor via this integration.

## Indeed/Glassdoor integration overview

Indeed Apply integration provides a candidate-friendly application experience on Indeed and helps recruiters by standing out in search results and incremental impact, increasing likelihood of being clicked on by 30% compared to non-Indeed Apply jobs.

Learn more:
[Indeed Apply Product Page](https://www.indeed.com/hire/apply)
[Indeed Apply One-Sheet](https://d341ezm4iqaae0.cloudfront.net/assets/2023/01/10193952/Indeed-Apply.pdf)

## Enabling/disabling the integration

By default, the integration will be enabled and your jobs will automatically be posted to Indeed and Glassdoor. If you’d like to completely disable the integration, [visit this page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/indeed-glassdoor) and turn both toggles to the off position.

:::hint{type="info"}
You do not need to have a paid Indeed account to use this integration.
:::

## Integration options

**The Indeed/Glassdoor integration supports two options:**

1. You can enable/disable the integration entirely.
2. You can enable/disable Easy Apply.

:::hint{type="info"}
Easy Apply allows candidates to complete their applications directly from Indeed/Glassdoor. When this is disabled, they’ll be redirected to your Ashby job board to fill out an application.
:::

The jobs feed is synced by Indeed twice daily and your jobs should show up on Indeed once the feed is synced. Any updates you make to the jobs within Ashby will be reflected in the same amount of time. Please note that on initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.

## Location requirements

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The job posting needs to:

1. Have a country name that can be resolved to a single country code (ex: “USA”, not “USA or Canada”).
2. Have the *Location Type* set to *Remote* ***or*** have a city and state listed. The minimum \*\*requirement is to have either *Remote + country* **or** *city and state + country*. If you are posting a remote role, set the *Location Type* to *Remote*, include only a country and include one of the phrases listed in Indeed’s documentation [here](https://indeedinc.my.site.com/employerSupport1/s/article/How-to-Post-a-Remote-Job-on-Indeed?language=en_US) within the job description.

**Locations can be set&#x20;**[here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations)**&#x20;in Ashby.**

If jobs don’t meet Indeed’s location requirements, they will not be picked up via the integration.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f5e763b62b8f5671bfa863bd3b2a5dcd.png)
:::
::::

## Application forms

A job’s application form is translated into screener questions in Indeed. The candidate will answer the screener questions when applying for the job through Indeed.

## Existing Indeed users

If you already have an Indeed employer account, you should reach out to your CS rep or [Indeed’s customer support team](https://indeedinc.my.site.com/employerSupport1/s/article/207325006?language=en_US) to make any necessary updates to your account. There are a number of moving parts on Indeed’s end that need to be reviewed to make sure there are no hiccups with moving the account over to Ashby.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I sponsor jobs posted to Indeed from Ashby?

Yes! You can work with a rep from Indeed or spend from your account dashboard, just like sponsoring a job that was posted directly to Indeed.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What’s the difference between the “Inbound: Indeed Listings” source and the “Inbound: Indeed Sponsored” source?

By default, we apply the *Indeed Listings* source to all the applicants that come in via the Indeed integration. However, if the company has paid to sponsor that job on Indeed, the *Indeed Sponsored* source will be used.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why isn’t my job showing on Indeed?

- Indeed places a high value on post quality, and some job posts may be filtered by Indeed’s quality assurance checks.
  - To improve post quality, Ashby strips emojis from all post text (titles and descriptions).
  - Indeed may find certain job titles to be “spammy” and filter them in various ways.
- Indeed also doesn’t allow job postings from organizations that operate as recruiting agencies that source/recruit for other companies.
- Indeed does not list jobs on their site that require a background check and are located in New York or New Jersey.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Help! My jobs are showing on another company’s Indeed page!

Sometimes Indeed will assign your jobs to another company with the same name. If this happens, we recommend you reach out to Indeed via one of the options listed on their [Contacting Indeed page](https://indeedinc.my.site.com/employerSupport1/s/article/207325006?language=en_US) to ensure those jobs get matched properly to your company’s Indeed page.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Help! My auto-reject rule is ignoring my location rule!

This is likely happening because Indeed doesn’t support structured location data, and is ignoring the location field on your Easy Apply application. We recommend disabling Easy Apply when using a location field in an application.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does the XML feed include the workplace type (Remote, Hybrid or On-Site)?

Yes, the XML feed now includes this information so the workplace type will be indicated on 3rd party job boards like LinkedIn and Indeed.

You can specify the location type within the *Location Details* section of your location settings at *Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;*[Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/108edf6bd76767ed7fe6407a22ff4ded.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Help! I can’t find an international job I’ve posted!

For international job postings, you must search from the appropriate country’s Indeed domain, as jobs are posted to the relevant country-specific Indeed site (for example, [https://uk.indeed.com/](https://uk.indeed.com/) for UK-based roles). To find the appropriate domain for your job posting, check out [https://www.indeed.com/worldwide](https://www.indeed.com/worldwide) for a full list.
:::

***


[title] NextByte
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This integration allows users to effortlessly manage and send NextByte interviews directly from Ashby, streamlining the candidate screening with a data-driven approach.

## NextByte Integration Overview

NextByte offers a variety of interview styles and problem types, ensuring flexibility to meet diverse hiring needs. With voice- and coding-driven assessments, the platform is designed to evaluate core skills such as collaboration, problem-solving, and fundamental knowledge, delivering a modern, comprehensive approach to technical screening.

# Setting up the Ashby \<> NextByte Integration

1. Log in to your NextByte Employer account.
2. Navigate to the Employer Settings page.
3. Under the Integrations section:

a. Paste your Ashby API Key obtained from your Ashby dashboard.

b. Copy your NextByte API Key to use when configuring the NextByte integration on Ashby.

Please reach out to [contact@trynextbyte.com](mailto\:contact@trynextbyte.com) for questions about how to enable this integration.

[title] Naukri
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

The Naukri integration in Ashby allows you to post jobs seamlessly on Naukri, one of India's leading job portals. This guide will walk you through the setup and usage of the integration. Access to this integration is available to all Ashby customers. Naukri requires a subscription to post jobs.

## Naukri Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/79d64052d4fa4de5a173cf745abbe125?sid=941b463b-abb6-4ef0-a0a9-a91c9615f3a2"}

## Enabling the Integration

:::hint{type="info"}
Before enabling the integration, please get in touch with your Naukri point of contact to request your team’s API key.
:::

1. Log in to Ashby
2. Navigate to Admin and search for Naukri.
3. Click on the [Naukri integration](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/naukri)
4. Click `Enable`.
5. Enter the API Key provided by the Naukri team.
6. Optionally, add a Default Industry that will apply to all Naukri job postings. This setting can be overridden at the job posting level.
7. The integration is now enabled.

## Create a job template with Naukri Configuration

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Job Templates](#) for more details on creating job templates. This optional step will save your team time on configuring Naukri required fields.
:::

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
1. Navigate to Jobs > Jobs > Job Templates.
2. Click `Create New Template`.
3. On the job posting, click the Naukri tab
4. Optionally, predefined Naukri required fields:
   1. Distribute To
   2. Job Type
   3. Industry
   4. Show Salary (Yes/No)
   5. Currency (INR/USD)
   6. Minimum and Maximum Salary
   7. Minimum and Maximum Work Experience

:::hint{type="warning"}
Salary and Experience have range limitations defined by Naukri. These are built into these fields and can not be adjusted.
:::




::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![CleanShot 2025-03-19 at 20.04.26@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mn6NYM4hJ3RzFF93jMyY9_cleanshot2025-03-19at2004262x.png)
:::
:::::

## Posting a Job to Naukri

1. Navigate to Jobs > Jobs.
2. Click Create Job and select your template.  The Naukri-specific fields will be automatically pre-filled
3. To publish a job to Naukri, go to Actions > `Publish`

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/O0n198kbrTGX5MrvKFFU5_naukripostjob.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why did my job fail to post to Naukri?

Naukri enforces several posting constraints via their API. Common reasons a job may fail include:

- Missing or invalid fields: Required fields like location, experience range, or job role must be present and correctly formatted.
- Salary format issues: Salary must be numeric and fall within valid INR ranges. Avoid using currency symbols or text.
- Unapproved company profile: Your company must be approved by Naukri to post via API.
- Unsupported functional area or role: Only specific roles/categories from Naukri's taxonomy are accepted.

Refer to the [Zwayam Amplify API docs](https://developers.zwayam.com/amplify) for a full list of field requirements and constraints.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I post remote jobs to Naukri?

Naukri’s API does not currently support a dedicated "remote" flag. If the role is remote-friendly:

- Consider adding "(Remote)" to the job title or description.
- Set a major city as the primary location and clarify remote expectations in the job details.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How long does it take for a job to appear on Naukri?

Jobs typically go live within 10–15 minutes. However, delays may occur if:

- Manual review is triggered (e.g., flagged content)
- Your company is under verification
- Naukri is experiencing high API traffic
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is there a limit on the number of jobs I can post?

Yes. Your Naukri subscription may include a cap on active job postings. If you exceed this limit, new posts may fail. Contact your Naukri account manager for quota details.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I edit jobs after posting?

Yes, jobs can be updated in Ashby and changes will sync to Naukri. However:

- Some fields (e.g., job type or location) may not be editable via API after initial posting
- Substantial changes may trigger reposting or reset the job’s visibility date
:::


[title] Verified First
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

Verified First now integrates with Ashby via browser extension, streamlining your hiring and onboarding process from start to finish. With this one-click integration, Ashby users can easily order, review, and manage Verified First's background screening solutions without ever having to leave Ashby's platform.

## Setting up the integration

1. Download the [VF Connector](https://verifiedfirst.com/vf-connector/) in your desired web browser: [Chrome](https://chrome.google.com/webstore/detail/verified-first-background/hlkapcocmflflbmafddbicdnnmnpbfeg), [Safari](https://apps.apple.com/us/story/id1377753262?id=com.verifiedfirst.com.safariextension-6KP363K66K), [Firefox](https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/verified-first/), [Edge](https://www.microsoft.com/en-us/p/verified-first-background-screening/9pj9vx35wqtq?activetab=pivot\:overviewtab), or [New Edge](https://microsoftedge.microsoft.com/addons/detail/verified-first-backgrou/jlipohfnfofjahjhfbohkhhjppjdjppb).
2. Open it in Ashby.
3. Start screening with Verified First within Ashby.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does the Screen with Verified First button only show on candidates’ profiles at a specific stage?

No, the button will show on the candidate’s profile, regardless of stage.
:::


[title] Asendia
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

Asendia AI's recruitment platform helps companies find top talent with AI-powered tools. This integration allows Ashby customers to send Asendia assessments and retrieve the results all from within the Ashby platform. 

## Setup

### Create an Access Token in Ashby

1. Log into Ashby and click your profile icon (to the top-right of the navigation bar), then select `Settings.`
2. Go to `API & Apps` and choose `Personal Access Tokens`.
3. Click `Create New Token`.
   - Name it something like “Integration with Asendia”.
   - Scopes: Make sure these options are selected (check the boxes):
     - Jobs (so we can see your open positions)
     - Candidates (so we can read candidate details)
     - Interviews (so we can access resumes)
     - Hiring process metadata (To get hiring process details)
     - API Keys (so we can setup webhooks and get updates whenever something changes)
     - Organization (so we can send feedback back into Ashby)

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3U_k0Sk1oeg11k3roeRAz_.blob)

4. Click `Generate`, then `Copy` the token that appears. Store it somewhere safe - you won't be able to see it again!&#x20;

###  Create “Asendia AI Interview” Stage

1. In Ashby, click `Admin` in the top menu.
2. Under Interviews & Scheduling, select `Interview Plans`.
3. Choose your Shared Plan (e.g. “Engineering Interview Plan”) or switch to Custom Plans to make a new one.
4. Click the plan name to open its details, then scroll to the Active section.
5. Click `Add active stage`, enter `Asendia AI Interview`, and press Enter.
6. Drag the new stage into the desired order, then click `Save `(if prompted).

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kIMXfPWG1HIpun-KutLsI_.blob)

### Create “Asendia AI Interview Feedback” Form

1. Still under Admin → Interviews & Scheduling, select `Feedback Forms`.
2. Click `Create form `(usually a + or New Form button).
3. In the form builder:
   - Title: Asendia AI Interview Feedback
   - Add fields matching exactly (use Add Field):
     - Overall Recommendation (Single Select; options: Strong Yes, Yes, No, Strong No)
     - Profile Summary (Rich Text)
     - Job Compatibility (Rich Text)
     - Interview Video (URL)
     - Complete Assessment (URL)
4. Click `Save` or `Publish` to make the form available.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SkwSTz_uQ8OqbyDiIrM6j_.blob)

### Link Ashby to Asendia

1. In Asendia, go to `Integrations`→ `Ashby`.
2. Paste the token you created into the `API Key`field.
3. Click `Connect` or `Save`.
4. You’ll see Connected successfully when it’s done.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pUfI8dhqXtWX7LxMgH1-v_.blob)

### Automatic Webhook Setup

Once you click `Connect`, the Asendia system automatically registers the necessary webhooks in your Ashby workspace. You don’t need to set up anything else manually. This ensures Asendia receive updates whenever you:

- Publish or remove a job
- Move a candidate through different stages

###  Double‑Check and Test

1. In Asendia, the integration status will show Connected.
2. To test:
   - Create a test job in Ashby - it should appear in the Asendia Jobs list within a minute.
   - Move a candidate to a new stage in Ashby - you should get an invitation email sent from Asendia.

If it all works, you’re good to go!

### Troubleshooting Tips

- Invalid token: Make sure you copied the entire token, and that it has all the scopes checked.
- No jobs appearing: Confirm you have active (published) jobs in Ashby.
- No emails: Verify that webhooks are set up correctly in Ashby - check for delivery errors in Ashby’s Webhook logs.

If you need help, please reach out to Asendia.&#x20;

## After You Connect: What Happens Behind the Scenes

Once you press `Connect`, a series of behind‑the‑scenes steps keep your jobs and candidates flowing smoothly. This guide explains what to expect- no technical jargon required.

### 1. One‑Time Setup (Instant)

| Step                 | What Asendia Does                                                      | What You See                              |
| -------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------- |
| Token Check          | We confirm the token you provided works.                               | A green Connected badge.                  |
| Webhook Registration | We quietly tell Ashby to notify us whenever jobs or candidates change. | No action needed.                         |
| Initial Job Import   | All active, published jobs are copied into your Jobs dashboard.        | A synced list of your current open roles. |

### 2. Continuous Job Sync (Always On)

- New job posted in Ashby → appears in Asendia within \~60 seconds.
- Job updated or closed in Ashby → status refreshes automatically. 

### 3. Candidate Flow

1. Move a candidate to the “Asendia AI Interview” stage in Ashby.
2. Within seconds, Asendia:
   - Generates a unique interview link.
   - Sends a branded invitation email to the candidate.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Pe9_m22OVJvfz3IdzHYpP_.blob)

3. Candidate completes the AI interview → recording and transcript attach to their profile.

### 4. Feedback Loop Back to Ashby

After an AI interview is reviewed in our platform:

1. A PDF report is generated, along with the interview video link.
2. We fill out your “Asendia AI Interview Feedback” form inside Ashby with:
   - Overall recommendation
   - Profile summary & job compatibility notes
   - Links to the interview video and complete assessment PDF

If you have any questions, please contact [connect@asendia.ai](mailto\:connect@asendia.ai).

[title] Google Jobs
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Nothing to see here! The Google Jobs integration works automatically when you post your jobs to your job board. This feature can’t currently be disabled.

[title] Certn
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Certn account with Ashby, allowing you to send background check requests as assessments in your interview plans.

## Integration Overview

🔗 Certn is a global leader in AI-powered background checks for enterprises. This integration enables you to send Certn background check requests as assessments within Ashby. Video instructions are available [here](https://www.loom.com/share/0485c4055a624448ab2b045df51c8254).

## Connect Certn with Ashby

1\. Log into your Certn account, go to your Team Settings, and click `General`. If you don’t have a Webhook Secret, click `Generate New`. The Webhook Secret will be copied and added into the integration settings within Ashby in Step 5.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XCAT7H0N_Tr5fXVETYjEu_untitled.png)

2: Still in General in your Certn Team Settings, paste the following value into the Webhook URL field: [https://app.ashbyhq.com/api/certn/webhook](https://app.ashbyhq.com/api/certn/webhook). Click the green `Save` button at the bottom of the page to ensure all information you’ve added is retained after leaving the page.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/X4v7tr3GmDy3uAZM3dJph_untitled-1.png)

3\. In your Certn Team Settings, select API Keys. Next, click `ADD API KEY`. Copy the API Key that is generated, as this will also be added in to the integration settings within Ashby.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H2mKRsecnPAIuOyoHb7DC_untitled-2.png)

## Ashby Setup

4: Navigate to Ashby and select Admin. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Select Certn and click `Enable Certn`.

![Screen Shot 2022-10-13 at 5.00.03 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1qsblsMG5GZJbONWMhn_R_screenshot2022-10-13at50003pm.png)

5: In the Certn API key field, paste in the API key that you copied from your Certn account’s Settings under the API Keys section.

Head back into Certn and copy the Webhook Secret that you generated in Step 1 in your Certn account’s Settings page (in the General section). Paste this into the Certn Webhook Secret field in the Certn integration settings.

![Screen Shot 2022-10-13 at 3.23.54 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/L6VGzgYApULOJbw2Ddxd6_screenshot2022-10-13at32354pm.png)

6: Next, using the Adding Assessments drop-down, you can configure when you would like assessments or background check activities to be added to the candidate’s profile. There are three available options:

![Screen Shot 2022-10-13 at 5.01.51 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VqyRZsYq5rNHX08zGzB70_screenshot2022-10-13at50151pm.png)

1. Configure in interview plan - this means that for each interview plan, you can configure Certn background checks at a specific stage.
2. Automatically add to hired stage - this means that whenever a candidate is added to the hired stage for all jobs in your Ashby account, a Certn background check will automatically be added to their candidate profile.
3. Automatically add to offer stage - this means that whenever a candidate is added to the offer stage for all jobs in your Ashby account, a Certn background check will automatically be added to their candidate profile.

7: Generate an Ashby API key. Our guide on this can be found at [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ) Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

8: In the Ashby API key drop-down on the Certn integration settings page in Ashby’s Integrations Marketplace, select your newly created API key.

You can now start sending Certn background check requests as assessments in your Ashby interview plans.


[title] Hirevire
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Hirevire account with Ashby, allowing you to send assessments in your interview plans.

## Integration Overview

You can add Hirevire screening video questions as well as an assessment at the screening stage. Candidates receive an invite to an interview on Hirevire. Once the interview is complete, the responses are shown as a link in the activity details of the task inside Ashby. Ashby users can use this link to view the candidate's screening responses.

## Connect Hirevire with Ashby

Log into your Hirevire account. Then go to My Account > Integrations and in the API Keys section, click on the `Generate New` button to generate an API key. Copy this key to paste into Ashby.

![Screenshot 2023-04-04 at 9.11.21 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5RsqaqGTfrSjHv0JB0fcd_screenshot2023-04-04at91121am.png)

## Ashby Setup

Navigate to Ashby and go to Admin > Integrations > [Hirevire](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/hirevire). Then tap on the `Enable Hirevire` button.

![Screenshot 2023-04-04 at 9.12.20 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NBLdfmdLJuVypEhjqjK-y_screenshot2023-04-04at91220am.png)

Paste the Hirevire API key that you copied from your Hirevire account into the “Hirevire API Key” section in the Ashby app.

![api.jpg](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8hKJ1kTWQboW9dNe7d7VB_api.jpg)

Select “Ashby API Key” and create a new API key. You won’t need to copy the Ashby API Key. If you have already created an API key in Ashby, you can select it from the Ashby API Key dropdown. If using an existing key, please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

You can add Hirevire assessments in these areas:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- As an interview plan activity: After selecting the assessment activity from Hirevire, this will create an Hirevire assessment activity after a candidate is moved into the stage.
- Manually create an Assessment activity on the candidate’s profile page. This can be done by clicking on the `+ New Activity` button, choosing `Assessment`, then Hirevire and selecting the assessment to send to the candidate.

That’s it! Once the candidate completes their assessment, their result will show as an activity in the candidate’s profile. You’ll also see a link to the candidate’s assessment to access directly in Hirevire.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![activity.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/a1CCK_xuFtwptuWgokXpR_activity.png)

![profile.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Yo-S7w2dXwnSXja_qUdmj_profile.png)

![completed.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LhyYCiYoEeocBAraqNCTq_completed.png)


:::
::::

## Video Instructions

A Hirevire integration video walkthrough is available below:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/af45e9e8923a432b9ffedc8a9ce0e549"}


[title] CodeScreen
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

CodeScreen is a real-world coding test platform. This integration allows Ashby customers to send CodeScreen tests and retrieve the results all from within the Ashby platform.

## Setting up the CodeScreen Integration

To start, go to the [Integrations section on the CodeScreen platform](https://app.codescreen.com/integrations) to view your Ashby API key. Once you have your API key, go to the [Integrations Marketplace in Ashby](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and find CodeScreen in the Assessments section. `Click Enable CodeScreen` and then enter the API key into the CodeScreen API Key field.

In the Ashby API Key field, create a new Ashby API key, or select an existing Ashby API Key if you’ve already generated one. If you’ve created an Ashby API Key seperately, please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

Here’s a video walkthrough of enabling the integration.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/80d96ead3ddd4e7f88fb260f392ec9d0"}

NOTE: Once you’ve enabled the integration, you’ll need to reach out to CodeScreen support at [hello@codescreen.com](mailto\:hello@codescreen.com) to have your Ashby API key stored. They’ll provide you with the next steps to securely share your API key.

## Testing the CodeScreen Integration

Once you have enabled the CodeScreen integration, you can then send a CodeScreen test to a candidate by clicking into the candidate in Ashby and then selecting `New Activity` ->  `Assessment`. You can then choose from the list of tests you have created on CodeScreen to send to the candidate.

Once the candidate completes the test, their result will be displayed in the Current Activities section in Ashby for that candidate.

![CodeScreen screenshot.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EJByMv8lRp4L6h6HiApyd_codescreenscreenshot.png)

Here’s a video walkthrough of how to add CodeScreen as an activity to your interview plan stage and how to manually add a CodeScreen assessment activity to a candidate’s profile.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/e98ac595040440b19fc708c8e024fda9"}


[title] Ezra AI Labs
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Ezra AI Labs account with Ashby. Ezra AI Labs provides AI-powered recruiting tools, and this integration allows candidate data to flow into Ashby.

## Integration Overview

Ezra AI Labs integrates natively with Ashby as an assessment provider.

With this integration, recruiters can:

- Launch Ezra AI screening interviews directly from a candidate’s profile in Ashby
- Automatically send interview invitations to candidates
- View interview scores and results directly within Ashby, without switching tools

Candidate data flows securely between Ashby and Ezra AI Labs to support a streamlined screening workflow.

For support with Ezra AI Labs, contact **support\@ezraailabs.tech**.

## Set up the Integration

Before getting started, make sure you have:

1. An active Ashby account with organizational admin permissions
2. An Ezra AI Labs recruiter account
3. Permission to create API keys in Ashby

### Register for an Ezra AI Labs Recruiter Account

To get started with Ezra AI Labs:

1. Email support\@ezraailabs.tech to request a recruiter account
2. The Ezra team will help onboard you and prepare your account for integration with Ashby

### Configure the Integration in Ashby

**Create an Ashby API Key**

1. In Ashby, go to `Admin → Integrations →`[`API Keys`](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys)
2. Click `+ New`
3. Configure the API key with the following permissions:
   - **Job postings**: Read
   - **Candidates**: Read / Write
4. Give the key a clear name (for example, EzraAIKey)
5. Under `Integration Partner`**,** find "Ezra AI Labs"
6. Click `Create API Key`

:::hint{type="warning"}
Be prepared to save your API Key to a safe place - you'll only have one opportunity to copy it.
:::

### Connect the API Key to Ezra

1. Go to` Admin → Integrations → Integrations`
2. Find [Ezra AI Labs ](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/ezra-ai-labs)and click `+ Enable Ezra AI Labs`
3. Enter your `Ezra AI Labs API Key`
4. Under `Ashby API Key`, select the key you just created

## &#x20;Add an Ezra Assessment to an Interview Plan

1. Open a job in Ashby
2. Navigate to `Settings → Interview Plan`
3. Choose the interview stage where you want to add the Ezra assessment
4. Click `Add Activity to [stage name]`
5. In the right-hand panel:
   - Under `Integrations`, choose `Ezra AI Labs`
   - Click `Select Assessment Type`
   - Choose`Ezra Screening Interview`
   - Click `Add`

Once added, candidates who reach this stage will be eligible for an Ezra screening interview.

## Start an Ezra Screening Interview for a Candidate

When a candidate reaches the stage with the Ezra assessment:

1. Open the candidate’s profile from the interview pipeline
2. Locate `Ezra AI Labs Assessment `under `Current Activities`
3. Click `Start Assessment`
4. Expand the menu and select `Show Invitation URL`
5. Copy the generated URL (for example\:https\://app.ezraailabs.tech/signup?redirectType=...)
6. Send the URL to the candidate

:::hint{type="info"}
If you’d like Ezra interviews to be sent automatically when a candidate reaches this stage, contact **support\@ezraailabs.tech** to enable automation.
:::

## View Assessment Results in Ashby

After the candidate completes their Ezra interview:

1. Results automatically sync back to Ashby
2. On the candidate profile, expand `Ezra AI Labs Assessment `to view:
   - Overall interview score
   - Additional assessment details
   - A direct link to the full Ezra interview report

[title] Checkr
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

This guide walks you through integrating your Checkr account with Ashby, so you can use Checkr background checks as assessments in your interview plans.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & Prerequisites**
The following items are required to initiate Ashby / Checkr integration. Please ensure you have the following before proceeding.

- Access to Ashby with Organization Admin permissions
- A Checkr account (more on how to create one below.
- For Checkr customers that are simply connecting Ashby to their existing Checkr account, Segmentation is required to utilize this integration. To ensure your account is set up to be compatible, [click here](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/10062213824663-Contact-Checkr-customer-support) to contact Checkr Support.
- If you already have a Checkr account, you need to ensure that the account hierarchy feature is enabled. Log into the Checkr dashboard and navigate to the Account section. If the Account hierarchy tab is visible it means that the account hierarchy feature is enabled. If the tab is not visible, then you should reach out to your Checkr support representative to get it enabled.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/P32g9Sq_bcsF-mftE_DbE_account-hirearchy-checkr.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2126" height="362" darkWidth="2126" darkHeight="362" alt="The account hierarchy tab in Checkr" showCaption="false" indent="1"}
:::

# Connecting Checkr to Ashby

## If you don't already have a Checkr account

If your company doesn't yet have a Checkr account, you need to create one before you can integrate with Ashby.

To create an account for use with Ashby:

1. Log into your Ashby account and navigate to **Admin** in the top nav bar.
2. Locate **Integrations > Integrations** on the left menu.
3. In the Integrations Marketplace, locate and open the Checkr tile.
4. Click `Connect to Checkr`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ONxOrOogdhD5xLnRJWh2o_connect-to-checkr.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1784" height="698" darkWidth="1784" darkHeight="698" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The Connect to Checkr button in the integration settings."}

5. Enter your name and company contact information, and click `Get Started`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hcPo7pIJ_y6SAn4n99bU5_checkr-account-get-started.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1398" height="1134" darkWidth="1398" darkHeight="1134" alt="The account creation page for Checkr" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

6. Enter your payment information. Checkr, not Ashby, sends invoices for background checks directly. (You can edit your payment information on the Checkr dashboard after you create your account.)
7. Provide the requested credentialing information. This information is required by law to ensure that only legitimate companies, with legitimate business needs, can run background checks. Select Purpose: Pre-employment to use Checkr for hiring and employment background checks.
8. Click `Continue` to submit your information to Checkr for review. Once Checkr completes the credentialing process, it notifies both Ashby and you, and you can begin ordering background checks through the Ashby platform.

## If you already have a Checkr account

First, enable Checkr from within Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations**.
2. Click on the Checkr tile.
3. Click `Connect to Checkr`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ONxOrOogdhD5xLnRJWh2o_connect-to-checkr.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1784" height="698" darkWidth="1784" darkHeight="698" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The Connect to Checkr button in the integration settings."}

4. On the pop-up, click `Sign In`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EErFTjUp8CArUfIb0rDwL_checkr-partners-2026-07-16-at-103408-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1598" height="1494" darkWidth="1598" darkHeight="1494" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="The sign in option for Checkr when configuring the integration."}

# Configuring integration settings

Once you connect Checkr, you can view and configure the integration settings.

**Adding Assessments:** Determine how background check activities get added to candidate profiles to prompt a background check in Checkr. Choose from the following settings:

- Configure in interview plan: use this option if you'd like to configure activities on an interview plan, rather than automatically add a Checkr background check activity to the offer or hired stages.
- Automatically add to hired stage: when a candidate reaches the hired stage, an activity prompting a user to start a background check in Checkr appears. The activity will be created automatically but the assessment will need to be started manually from the activity.
- Automatically add to offer stage: when a candidate reaches the offer stage, an activity prompting a user to start a background check in Checkr appears. The activity will be created automatically but the assessment will need to be started manually from the activity.

**Connect to Checkr:** If you need to reauthorize your connection for any reason, click `Reauthorize with Checkr`.

**Ashby API Access:** This shows the API key created for this integration. Click the arrow icon to the right of the API key name to view the API key and the permissions it's been granted.

**Last Edited By:** The user who last amended the integration settings.

**Last Edited:** A timestamp showing when the last edits were made to the integration settings.

![Checkr integration settings once your Checkr account is connected.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r2EF0DN5SEqo9YRiQ1ZcF_checkr-integration-settings.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
You may see a **The Checkr integration is not fully configured message** within your integration settings if Checkr is yet to complete the credentialing process for your Checkr account.
:::

# Configuring Checkr background checks in an interview plan

If you select `Configure in interview plan` in the `Adding Assessments` setting of your Checkr integration settings, you need to add Checkr activities to your interview plans. To do this:

1. Navigate to the job in question in **Jobs > Jobs**.
2. Click on the **Interview Plan** tab.
3. Click `+ Add Activity to X` on the interview stage where you'd like to add the activity.
4. Select `Add Activity` and select `Checkr` from the Integrations section of the popover.
5. Determine the options for your background check activity.

:::hint{type="warning"}
It is not possible to set Checkr activities to start automatically.&#x20;
:::

## Starting a Checkr background check from an activity

If you've added Checkr background checks to your interview plan, or set them to be added automatically to the Offer or Hired stages in your integration settings, Ashby automatically adds an activity to the candidate's profile once they reach the appropriate stage. Click on the Checkr activity and select `Start Assessment`. In the window that opens, select options for the check, and click `Start`.

Once you order the background check, its status appears on the Ashby candidate dashboard. Once it's complete, click on it to open the report in the Checkr dashboard and review the details. (For more information on reports and report statuses, see [Report statuses and assessments](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/216553468-Report-statuses) in the Checkr Help Center.)

Most background checks complete within 24 hours, but completion time can range from a few minutes to a few weeks, depending on the type of check ordered, the candidate's geographic location, and county courthouse operations.

# Who can initiate Checkr background checks in Ashby?

Any Ashby user with the Edit a Candidate permission stripe can initiate the Checkr assessment in Ashby. This is the only permission they need — the Ashby user doesn't need their own Checkr account to do this.

# Use the Checkr dashboard

While the Ashby integration lets users order background checks and view their status, the following features are available only within Checkr:

- [Background check invitation links](https://help.checkr.com/hc/en-us/articles/217084017-How-do-I-request-a-background-check-)
- [Review and adjudicate a candidate's report](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/216553188-Adjudicate-a-candidate-s-report)
- [Adverse Action](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/4415910153367-Begin-the-adverse-action-process) initiation and processing tools
- Checkr settings
  - [Manage Account Users](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/216687928-Manage-account-users)
  - [Set up payment and billing information](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/4429308795927-Set-up-billing-and-payment-information)
  - [Set account notifications](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/360010450474-Set-account-notifications)

:::hint{type="info"}
To see a quick overview of the Checkr Dashboard, head over to [Welcome to Checkr](https://help.checkr.com/s/article/360000020208-Welcome-to-Checkr). Here’s Checkr’s [User Guide](https://help.checkr.com/hc/en-us/articles/4421183201559-Ashby-Checkr-Integration-User-Guide) on the Ashby \<> Checkr integration.
:::

# FAQ

### Can the Checkr integration support international background checks?

Yes, these are supported.


[title] Underdog
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Underdog.io integrates with Ashby, allowing you to export candidates from Underdog.io directly into your Ashby instance. Check out [Underdog’s Help Center](https://underdogio.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/articles/4413209446804-Integrating-with-Ashby) for more information.

# Permissions & access

:::hint{type="warning"}
To install this integration, your company needs to be a customer of both Underdog.io and Ashby, and you need Organization Admin access within Ashby.
:::

The Underdog.io integration is available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Connecting the Integration

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations** and search for [Underdog.io](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/underdogio).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for Underdog.io` button.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nEVJOKYd83CsO8D5Kjkab_underdogio-ashby-2026-09-30-at-83511-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1601" height="719" darkWidth="1601" darkHeight="719" alt="Ashby Admin Integrations page with the Underdog.io integration open and the “Create API key for Underdog.io” button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Before closing that page, copy your new API Key to your clipboard or save it locally until you're ready to add it to your Underdog.io account.
:::

3. Open the Underdog.io dashboard, click `Settings` in the top nav, and navigate to the `Integrations` page. Click the `Add` button next to Ashby and paste your API Key into the modal.

::Image[]{src="https://underdogio.zendesk.com/hc/article_attachments/4413209874580/Screenshot_2021-12-16_at_3.23.05_PM.png" size="100" width="2880" height="1800" isUploading="false" darkWidth="2880" darkHeight="1800" alt="Underdog.io Integrations settings page with an “Integrate with Ashby” dialog prompting the user to enter an Ashby API key and enable the integration." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="success"}
You can now export any active candidates from Underdog.io into Ashby.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Email [customersuccess@underdog.io](mailto\:customersuccess@underdog.io) if you have questions about their Ashby integration.
:::


[title] HiPeople
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

## HiPeople Integration Overview

Please be aware that this integration calls for the use of custom fields so scores from HiPeople can be listed on the candidate’s profile in Ashby. You can read more about setting these up at [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs)&#x20;

Custom Fields can only be configured on the Plus, Enterprise and Legacy Plus plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

This integration enables you to send HiPeople assessment and reference checks from Ashby and receive the results within Ashby.

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to HiPeople’s documentation, available [here](https://intercom.help/hipeople/en/articles/9039087-ashby-integration).&#x20;

For more information on creating an API key in Ashby, check out [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ) Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

Note: this integration is only available on the Scale or Enterprise plans in HiPeople.&#x20;

[title] Built In
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Automatically post your jobs to Built In. After publishing a job in Ashby, it may take up to 48 hours for your job to appear on your Built In profile.

🔗 For additional information, please refer to [Built In’s documentation](https://knowledgebase.builtin.com/s/article/Setting-up-your-job-sync-with-Ashby)

## Enabling/disabling the integration

You can enable/disable the Built In integration from the Integrations page in Ashby Admin [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/built-in). After enabling the feed in Ashby, you’ll need to email your Customer Success manager at Built In and [customersupport@builtin.com](mailto\:customersupport@builtin.com) so that the feed can be enabled on their end. Once both of these steps have been completed, your published job postings will be included in Built In’s listings along with a tracking code to match up applicants from this source. After enabling the feed, it may take up to 48 hours for your postings to start showing up in Built In’s feeds.

![CleanShot 2022-09-29 at 13.37.10@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TAfh6s-P1-GWTZlzb8bdY_cleanshot2022-09-29at1337102x.png)

## Location requirements

- A job’s location must have a city or state or have the *Location Type* set to *Remote*.

:::hint{type="info"}
Locations can be set [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations) in Ashby. More on setting up locations can be found at [Set up Departments & Locations](docId\:ACYBgYBzAs3YmyVbO5um8)&#x20;

If jobs don’t meet Built In’s location requirements, they will not be picked up via the integration
:::

***


[title] Himalayas
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

This integration enables companies to effortlessly post their job listings from Ashby onto Himalayas, expanding their reach to a global pool of remote talent and streamlining the recruitment process. By utilizing this seamless integration, companies can save time and resources while increasing their visibility to a dedicated audience of remote job seekers. Job seekers will be directed to apply via Ashby so that all hiring data will remain on the Ashby platform.

## Enabling the integration

Step 1: Head over to the Himalayas integration settings page in the Marketplace [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/himalayas.).

Step 2: Click on the `+Enable Himalayas`*&#x20;button*. Once the `+ Deactivate Himalayas` button shows, Ashby is now integrated with Himalayas.

Here’s a video walkthrough of enabling the integration:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/245e9a1b02d24d02b9d0abcf4a9597b8"}

## Using the Himalayas integration

After the integration is enabled, it’ll take up to 48 hours for job postings in Ashby to sync to  Himalayas. If job postings are unpublished in Ashby, this will be updated in Himalayas in 48 hours.

Only remote job postings will sync to Himalayas. If the job posting isn’t for a remote job, it will not sync to Himalayas.

## Additional Information

Additional information can be found at [https://himalayasapp.notion.site/Ashby-Integration-a2fa000ae98a43bdbccca205972823a4](https://www.notion.so/a2fa000ae98a43bdbccca205972823a4?pvs=21). If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] Trusty
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

***

This guide walks you through integrating your Trusty account with Ashby, allowing you to automatically send every referred candidate made by your employees directly into Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites & Permissions**
To install this integration, your company needs to be a customer of both Trusty and Ashby.
Users need Organization Admin access within Ashby to set up this integration.
:::

# Trusty integration overview

Trusty unleashes the full potential of your employees' network.

The Trusty integration makes recruiting teams' lives easier with:

- Custom and automated new job offer announcements to your team on internal communication tools such as Slack or Microsoft Teams.
- Ashby automatically uploads referrals and all information from the customizable form.
- Recruiters receive an automatic Slack notification each time a new referral is made.
- The referrer receives a Slack notification each time their referral moves forward in the recruitment process.

No manual re-keying, no back and forth between the Talent Acquisition (TA) team and employees. The Trusty Ashby integration centralizes all your data in one place so that you keep focusing on what you do best, hiring.

# Connecting the integration

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations** and search for the [Trusty integration tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/7e0fc6fa-1deb-41f5-9421-22f565c60012).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for Trusty` button.

![Ashby Admin Integrations page showing the Trusty integration, with the “Create API key for Trusty” button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dvW82xTdXrSTTMkn8J3Lw_trusty-ashby-2026-09-14-at-30345-pm.jpg)

3. Copy the API key and navigate to Trusty to complete the setup.

:::hint{type="info"}
For instructions on enabling this integration in Trusty, see the [Ashby x Trusty: Help Center Article](https://trusteam.notion.site/Ashby-x-Trusty-Help-Center-Article-6bdcfc3819de427cb683de6e0d19a42d).
:::


[title] The English Quiz
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Use this guide to set up the integration between The English Quiz and Ashby. Log in to [The English Quiz](https://client.theenglishquiz.com/login) and view their [Ashby integration documentation](https://client.theenglishquiz.com/api-documentation/ashby/help) for more information.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & Prerequsites**

You need to have an Ashby and The English Quiz account.

Users must be an Organizational Admin to set up this integration.&#x20;
:::

# Connecting the integration

1. Log in to your The English Quiz account.
2. Go to **Company > Profile** and select the **Integrations** tab.
3. Click `Enable`.

![Screenshot of The English Quiz with the Integrations tab highlights and an arrow pointing to the Enable button. ](https://client.theenglishquiz.com/images/ashby/ashby1-1.png)

4. Copy The English Quiz API Key by clicking the clipboard icon.

![Screenshot of the API Key clipboard button. ](https://client.theenglishquiz.com/images/ashby/ashby2-1.png)

5. In Ashby, navigate to **Admin > Integrations >&#x20;**[Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).
6. Search for or find [The English Quiz integration tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/the-english-quiz) and click on it to open the integration settings.


![Screenshot of the Ashby integrations marketplace, showing The English Quiz tile.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b8d10963989ec84021999a2dac2cf665.png)

7. Click `+ Enable The English Quiz`.

![Screenshot of the "Enable The English Quiz" button. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/799b4bec9cc4bea816c7a7890f01e0e2.png)

8. Add your API key from The English Quiz into the **The English Quiz API Key** field.

![Screenshot of The English Quiz set up.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3cff9edbda050a3dfd24422a058bdd62.png)

9. Create a new Ashby API key in the **Ashby API Key** field.&#x20;

![Screenshot of the "Create new API key" option.](https://client.theenglishquiz.com/images/ashby/ashby6.png)

10. Copy the generated Ashby API key.

![Screenshot of the Copy API key button.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VlpoR1Y0HroLOPmB5Y1gl_the-english-quiz-ashby-2026-09-09-at-23243-pm.jpg)

11. Paste the Ashby API key into **The English Quiz Ashby integration**.

![Screenshot of where to paste the Ashby API key.](https://client.theenglishquiz.com/images/ashby/ashby8-3.png)

12. Click `Save`.

The English Quiz is now ready to use in Ashby.

# Using the Integration

1. In a candidate's profile, click `New Activity` **>** `Assessment`.

![Screenshot of the New Activity > Assessment options. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r1cc75VX20D_5F3HSNid1_elara-meadowlight-product-support-coordinator-pittsburgh-ashby-2026-09-09-at-23910-pm.jpg)

2. Select `The English Quiz`.
3. Select the English assessment you'd like to use from the dropdown.
4. In the candidate record, click `Start Assessment`.
5. You can modify the test selection.
6. Click `Start` to send the invitation to your candidate.

The English Quiz assessment now appears in your candidate's record. The test shows as in progress until it has been completed and scored. When the assessment is complete and scored, the results automatically appear in the candidate's record. Click Show Grade Report to view the complete results and download a PDF.

![](https://client.theenglishquiz.com/images/ashby/ashby16.png)


[title] OfferZen
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

With this integration, you can automatically add candidates from OfferZen to Ashby. Once candidates accept your interview request, they will automatically be pushed into your Ashby instance.

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to OfferZen’s [guide](http://docs.offerzen.com/en/articles/1193283-how-to-enable-integration-with-your-ats#h_1f137c0c12).

[title] Kula
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Kula is a recruitment automation platform that lets you proactively reach out and engage with top talent everywhere. With Kula, you have complete control over your talent pipeline.

## Create an Ashby API Key for the Kula Integration

You'll need to create an Ashby API Key to configure the Ashby / Kula integration. Follow the steps below to generate the key.

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
1. Sign in to Ashby and click Admin in the top navigation bar.
2. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Then click Integrations to be taken to the Integrations Marketplace.
3. Select the integration and click `+Create API Key for Kula`. Copy the value provided. You could also save the key somewhere secure for future reference.

:::hint{type="danger"}
When the Ashby API Key is created, it will be shown only once. Please store this API Key in a secure location accessible only to authorized persons.

This key will be needed in later steps when you configure the integration on Kula.
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-28 at 3.38.43 PM.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/904aadbf189743a27be9cc24def10183.png)

![Screen Shot 2023-03-28 at 3.39.13 PM.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/8aca26c3a7d86ab535949a68ef88508f.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/823083f922cd99a1e9d675e6e6c527a5.png)


:::
:::::



## Create a Kula Candidate Source

To ensure the applications exported from Kula are tagged with source, “Kula” creates a new source type Integration, and a new Kula source under it.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/829479425/1d4b88383afde3dd25199fe4/c8051b18-4601-4ea0-9a39-85aa7068bea8.png?expires=1721376900\&signature=3fd27678d24e2afba7e5e6c1568c2faea157ccd3d60d18323f170ee5b15461fa)

:::hint{type="info"}
Please take a look at the [Source Types and Sources](docId\:IEtsRgCsYXTkp9VHuYnZA)  guide for more information on how to create a source and source type.
:::

## On Kula

Once you've completed the above steps on Ashby, complete the following steps on your Kula account.

1. Navigate to the Settings page via the side menu > Under the Organization tab -> Click the Integrations section
2. Click on the `Setup` toggle
3. In the Add Integration modal, input the Ashby API Key created earlier

:::hint{type="info"}
Once the Ashby integration is added, the Ashby records may take some time to be imported into Kula.
:::



## Ashby/Kula Stage Mapping

On the Settings page, under the Organization -> Integrations tab, click Configure.

You should now see the ATS - Kula Mapping & Kula - ATS Mapping tables.

Please verify that the mappings are correct for your organization or adjust accordingly.

:::hint{type="info"}
If your Ashby account is not using any custom stages, the default mappings provided by Kula should work out of the box in most cases.
:::



# Ashby Integration Features

The following features will be activated once you have enabled the Ashby integration with Kula.

### Kula Flows

When creating a Kula Flow, you may link it to an Ashby job via the Applicant Tracking System dropdown.

:::hint{type="info"}
Only open jobs will be listed in the selection.
:::

Whenever a candidate is added to this Kula Flow, Kula will create a new Ashby application against the linked Ashby job. If the corresponding candidate does not already exist on Ashby, one will be created.

If you click the Ashby icon, you will be redirected to the corresponding candidate on Ashby.

### Bi-directional Sync of Candidate Stages

Changes to the candidate stage on Kula will be synced with the Ashby application (and vice versa) based on the Kula/ATS stage mapping (as configured during integration setup).

For example, when you move a candidate to the Interested stage on Kula, the candidate will also move to the corresponding stage on Ashby.

The candidate’s stage is also updated in Ashby.

## Candidate Referral

When referring a candidate using Circles, you may select an Ashby job to refer the candidate to. This will create an Ashby application (and the corresponding candidate, if one does not already exist) against the selected job.

## Notes Sync

When a note is added to a candidate on Kula, a corresponding note will be added to the candidate on Ashby (only if one already exists)

When a candidate is created on Ashby (by Kula via Kula Flows or candidate referral), existing notes on the Kula candidate will be added to the Ashby candidate accordingly

:::hint{type="info"}
Private notes on Kula will not be synced to Ashby
:::



## Conversations Sync

Whenever a conversation message with a candidate is logged on Kula (e.g., Kula Flow messages & replies), a corresponding note will be added to the candidate on Ashby (only if one already exists).

When a candidate is created on Ashby (e.g., via Kula Flow or candidate referral), existing conversations with the Kula candidate will be added to the Ashby candidate accordingly.

## Resume sync

When a resume is uploaded to a candidate on Kula, a corresponding resume will be added to the candidate's current application on Ashby (only if Kula created it)

:::hint{type="info"}
**Kula will not attach the resume if one already exists on the application, whether or not Kula uploaded it**
:::


[title] Careerjet
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Automatically post your jobs to Careerjet.

For additional information, please refer to [Careerjet’s documentation](https://www.careerjet.com/docs/ats/integration/ashby). Please note that on initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.

## To integrate with Ashby, you will need to follow the steps below:

1. **Sign in to Ashby:&#x20;**&#x47;o to the [Ashby website](https://app.ashbyhq.com/) and sign in to your account.If you don't have an Ashby account, you will need to create one first.
2. **Access the Admin panel:**&#x4F;nce you've logged in, click on **"Admin"** on the top navigation bar. This will take you to the Admin panel.
3. **Select Integrations:**&#x4F;n the left panel, click on **"Integrations"** to access the Integration settings.
4. **Find Careerjet integration:**&#x49;n the Integrations section, search for **"Careerjet"** in the list of available integrations.
5. **Enable Careerjet integration:**&#x57;hen you find the **Careerjet** integration, click on the card to expand the integration details, then click **"+ Enable Careerjet"** to complete the setup. Once the **"- Deactivate Careerjet"** button shows, then it's you're all set!

::Image[]{src="https://static.careerjet.org/images/docs/ats/ashby_documentation_example_1.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1228" height="728" darkWidth="1228" darkHeight="728" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

***


[title] SHL
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your SHL account with Ashby, allowing you to use SHL assessments in your interview plans and retrieve the results all from within the Ashby platform.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

Customers should first engage with SHL to scope the integration and execute the required Statement of Work (SOW) before following the steps below. An implementation fee may apply depending on the engagement.

Client credentials (Client ID and Client Secret) are provisioned only after the SOW has been signed and the implementation project has commenced.
:::

## Setting up the integration

- Navigate to the [SHL integration](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/shl) in Admin
- Select your account’s region
- Select the way you’d like to add assessments to candidate profiles (see [Using the Integration](docId\:Fq9BQv8bqfEYwR8rCpEyn) for more information)
- Input your SHL `Client Secret` and `Client ID` (you may need to get in touch with SHL for this)
- Generate an Ashby API Key (more on this at [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ))
- If you’re not an partner, please ignore the staging base URL field

![CleanShot 2025-05-26 at 09.34.33@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FpqxCQc2XUrCgKyM38Crv_cleanshot2025-05-26at0934332x.png)

## Using the integration

There are three configuration options:

- Adding background check requests as a one-off
  - From the candidate profile, click `Add Activity` to generate an SHL activity. Then, follow the steps on the activity that appears.
- Configuring them on the interview plan
  - Visit the settings of a job and add the activity to the reference check stage of your interview plan. When a candidate enters the stage the activity will appear you can manually complete the steps to send the request, or when the card
- Automatically adding the assessment to offer or hired stages
  - Choose the stage you’d like to include the activity on while configuring the integration. When a candidate enters the designated stage, the corresponding activity will appear.

## Viewing the results

- When the package has been completed, the activity's status will be updated. The hiring team will receive notifications as the status changes.
- There will be a link to the results on the activity upon completion.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What SHL statuses are supported?

- Not Started
- In Progress
- Complete
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What permissions does the Ashby API Key need?

The SHL integration would require read/write access for candidates on the Ashby API key. These permissions are pre-defined and don’t need to be modified.
:::


[title] Nova
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Nova account with Ashby.

## Integration Overview

Integrating Nova with Ashby is a quick process that only requires a few steps. Simply follow Nova’s integration setup flow to connect your Ashby account and complete the configuration to enable the integration.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://docs.nova.dweet.com/nova/integrations/ashby).

[title] Remoteinterview.io
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide walks you through the steps to integrate Ashby with remoteinterview\.io, enabling you to send assessments to candidates directly from Ashby’s interview plan.

### Step 1: Configure the Ashby integration in remoteinterview\.io

1. Navigate to *https\://remoteinterview\.io/login* and log in to your account.
2. Click on `Settings` in the menu.
3. Select `Integrations` from the Settings menu.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HCK4v_QEt-vuhm00HiUZ7_.blob)

4. Click the blue `Configure Integration` button under the Ashby logo.
5. Copy the API key under the field `Remoteinterview API Key`

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7g02JWW_ECxrgD7Vqz5MD_.blob)

6. Leave this tab open in your browser. You will come back to it later.

### Step 2: Set up the remoteinterview\.io integration in Ashby

1. In a new tab, navigate to the [Ashby portal](https://app.ashbyhq.com/) and log in.
2. Select `Admin` from the top menu bar, open the `Integrations` menu from the left sidebar, and select `Integrations`.
3.  Search for “Remote Interview” in the search bar and click on the `Remote Interview` tile that appears.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vked8Q4bOF6Z8yOW9rFuQ_.blob)

4. Click the green `+ Enable Remote Interview` button.
5. Paste the API key you copied from remoteinterview\.io into the `Remote Interview API Key` field.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hvQyDLhNAACWuXY7lDExA_remote-interview-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-24316-pm.jpg)



6. Generate your Ashby API key by clicking into the `Ashby API Key` field and giving the API key a name, such as "Remote Interview Ashby API Key" or whatever works best for you. Select `+ Create new API key` after you finish entering the name.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BJnM3Px7iTcB9O98G9Ndm_remote-interview-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-24727-pm.jpg)

7. Select the `Copy` button that appears below the `Ashby API Key` field to copy the key to your clipboard.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VQjoJdiM-lGIgk27hH0np_remote-interview-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-25249-pm.jpg)

### Final Step: Add the Ashby API Key to remoteinterview\.io&#x20;

1. Go back to your browser tab with remoteinterview\.io open. If you closed or navigated away from this page, you will need to log in again and navigate back to the Ashby integration tab.
2. Paste the copied API Key from Ashby into the `Ashby API Key` field and hit `Save`.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oI3fC8B0ItHeUyZQvCSOW_.blob)

3. You're now ready to start adding assessments to interviews!  See [Setting Up Assessment Integrations](docId\:wQw13Y75mGiAnUx97bEGj) to learn how.


[title] Plum
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide explains how to integrate Plum with Ashby.****

Using Plum with Ashby allows recruiting teams to send Plum assessments directly from within Ashby. This helps streamline candidate evaluation, reduce manual steps, and keep assessment results connected to the candidate profile throughout the hiring process.

## Connect the Integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
Users must be an Organizational Admin to set up this integration.&#x20;
:::

1. Navigate to `Admin > Integrations` and search for the [Plum integration](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/plum).&#x20;
2. Click `+ Enable Plum`.&#x20;
3. Paste in your Plum API Key and your [Ashby API Key](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys).&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
Your Plum API Key can be found in your Plum account settings. If you do not have access to this key, please contact your Plum administrator.

You can also create your Ashby API key from this step.&#x20;
:::

## Using the Integration

See Plum's [Ashby Integration User Guide ](https://help.plum.io/hc/en-us/articles/40680348376859-Ashby-Integration-User-Guide)for a step by step guide on how to send assessments to candidates and review the results after you've established the connection.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on reporting on Plum assessment statuses and results, please view our [Reporting on Integration Partner Assessments article](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/reporting-on-integration-partner-assessments). &#x20;
:::


[title] Justifacts
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

Integrating Ashby with Justifacts allows you to initiate background checks directly from a candidate's profile and receive real-time status updates within your hiring workflow. This guide explains how to set up the integration and use it effectively to streamline your onboarding process.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:**

To complete this setup, you must have Organization Admin permissions in Ashby and an active account with Justifacts.
:::

# Setting up the integration

Setting up the Justifacts integration is a two-part process: generating an API key in Ashby and then configuring the Justifacts assessment settings.

## Part 1: Create an Ashby API key

1. Navigate to the **Admin** tab.
2. In the left-hand menu, select **Integrations > API Keys**.
3. Select `+ New`.
4. From the **Integration Partner** dropdown, search for `Justifacts` and select the result. This will automatically populate the **Name** field.
5. In the **API Scopes** section, select `Read all` and `Write all`.
6. Select `Create API Key`.

:::hint{type="danger"}
**Be prepared to save your API Key to a safe place immediately.** You will only have one opportunity to copy it before it is hidden forever. You will need to share this key with Justifacts.
:::

## Part 2: Configure Justifacts settings

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations**.
2. Search for "Justifacts" using the search bar and select the result.
3. Enter the API key you received from Justifacts (provided to you via email by Justifacts) into the field called **Justifacts Credential Verification API Key**.
4. In the **Ashby API Key** dropdown, select the API Key you just created in Part 1.
5. Copy and paste https\://app.justifacts.com/JFACTS/servlet/application.Ashby/ into the **Staging Base URL** field.

# Using the Integration

Once configured, you can add Justifacts background checks as activities within your job's interview plans.

## Adding Justifacts to an Interview Plan

To automate the background check process, add it to a specific stage (usually a "Background Check" stage) within the interview plan for a specific job.

:::hint{type="info"}
If your interview plan doesn't currently have a background check stage, you can add one.  See [Interview Plans](docId\:SJQDG-6gg32KbwjAKu1Ux) for instructions on setting up interview stages.
:::

1. Navigate to the **Job Dashboard&#x20;**&#x61;nd select your desired job.
2. Go to the **Interview Plan** tab.
3. Locate the stage you wish to conduct a background check in and select `Add Activity to`  and then `+ Add Activity`.
4. Under the **Integrations** section, select Justifacts.
5. Select `Select assessment type... `and choose the specific Justifacts package you want to run for this job.
6. Select `Add`.

## Starting an Assessment

When a candidate reaches the Background Check stage:

1. Open the candidate's profile.
2. Locate the **Justifacts Assessment** card and select `Start Assessment`. This triggers the authorization process in Justifacts.

If the assessment does not appear automatically, or if you need to run a different package, select `+ New Activity` > `Assessment` and select `Justifacts`.

## Monitoring Status Updates

Ashby will automatically update the **BGC Status** on the candidate's profile as the check progresses:

- **Justifacts Received:** Ashby has successfully sent the request to Justifacts and the applicant.
- **Started:** The applicant has begun filling out the background check forms.
- **In-Process: Justifacts:** The applicant has submitted their information, and Justifacts is currently processing the order.
- **Complete:** The background check is finished.

When the status is **Complete**, a URL to view the full results will be provided within the assessment activity in Ashby.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6oxw6el5zGpDs0VGydPUw_ashby-integration-user-guidepdf-2026-04-10-at-35731-pm.jpg)

# FAQs

### What if I need to run a different package for a specific candidate?

You can always add a manual assessment by selecting `+ New Activity` on the candidate profile and choosing a different Justifacts package from the list.

### Why isn't the "Start Assessment" button appearing?

Ensure the candidate is in the correct stage of the interview plan and that the Justifacts activity has been added to that specific stage.

[title] Hallo
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Hallo is an AI-powered language assessment platform that evaluates the proficiency levels of your applicants according to CEFR standards.

Hallo integrates seamlessly into your existing Ashby workflow without disruption, enabling immediate evaluation of language proficiency.

### Enable the Hallo integration

1. Email [support@hallo.ai](mailto\:support@hallo.ai) to get Hallo dashboard credentials.
2. Go to the API tab ([dashboard.hallo.ai/development](https://dashboard.hallo.ai/development)) to enable the Hallo API and get your API key.
3. Add the Hallo integration in Ashby via the Admin tab.

Once you've set up your interview plans and configured your take home test, you'll be able to send the test to candidates.

### Use the Hallo integration with Ashby

Once the Hallo integration is enabled for your organization, you will be able to add the Hallo assessment as an Activity anywhere in your Interview Plan.

You can send an assessment to a candidate by selecting the `Start Assessment` button next to the interview stage.

Note: When you send a test in Ashby, the instructions are actually sent by Hallo.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2CQSrxIO__Sh5Rghyy5ZM_docs-c2b23162-631f-4f41-a580-3fc2cf6f1fc6-riviera-images-2-1.png)

After it has been sent, an assessment's status will be displayed in Ashby.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eV1fkz7VIz-p6LkS59aUs_docs-c2b23162-631f-4f41-a580-3fc2cf6f1fc6-riviera-images-3.png)

Once the candidate has submitted their test, you can click on `Show Result URL, Assessment Sent Date, and 3 more` to view the assessment details.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qxG0F0_p4nnki8uaR1uOv_docs-c2b23162-631f-4f41-a580-3fc2cf6f1fc6-riviera-images-4.png)

To see a candidate's results in Hallo, click `View in Hallo`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LakUA7KepJ4bsiHl9ik8f_docs-c2b23162-631f-4f41-a580-3fc2cf6f1fc6-riviera-images-5-1.png)

On this page, you will be able to view overall language scores for the candidate, as well as subscores, question specifics (including the questions themselves and the candidate's answers), detailed improvements, and snapshots of the candidate while taking the test (to assist in cheating prevention). These results can also be accessed from the Hallo dashboard at any time.&#x20;

### Additional resources

For additional information not covered here, go to hallo.ai/assessment or reach out to support\@hallo.ai with any questions you might have.&#x20;


[title] Noon
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

This integration allows Noon to read and upload candidate data. For instance, Noon can view previous candidate engagements from Ashby data and upload new candidate data to Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must have an active Noon account to set up the integration.
:::

# Permissions & access

The Noon integration is available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to set up this integration.&#x20;
:::

# Connecting the integration

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin >** [Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and search for the [Noon integration tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/6c4ea640-c719-47c2-8899-51b048d0ae27).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for Noon` button.

![Ashby Admin Integrations page showing the Noon sourcing integration as not enabled, with the Noon settings panel open and the "Create API key for Noon" button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zbOhQ1rOjPklDTjiJyJ7N_noon-ashby-2026-09-15-at-123655-pm.jpg)

3. Copy the value provided. We also recommend saving the key somewhere secure for future reference.
4. Navigate to your Noon account to complete the setup and follow the instructions below.

:::hint{type="info"}
For instructions on how to enable this integration within Noon, refer to Noon's [Ashby Noon Integration guide](https://noonai.notion.site/Ashby-Noon-Integration-8d930e3796d14cdabff0b1d36abfa0f1).
:::


[title] Skillsire
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Skillsire is a top job board revamping the job search. Skillsire connects qualified candidates with companies, using AI to ensure the perfect match on their innovative platform.

## Enabling the integration

To enable the Skillsire integration, navigate to Admin > Integrations > Integrations. Search Skillsire and open up the integration tab. Click `+ Enable Skillsire`.

Once Skillsire is enabled, Skillsire will fetch your jobs in our website for free within 24 – 48 business hours. For a quicker turn around time, reach out to [raj.vaibhav@skillsire.com](mailto\:raj.vaibhav@skillsire.com) and let Skillsire know that you have completed the activation step.

Please allow up to 48 hours from the time you posted a job in your ATS to the time it’s published on Skillsire.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/50cb6a0a85622de969d105ecab2c1b3e.png)

## What happens when I close a job?

Job updates are considered as part of the integration, so once the next sync is completed with Skillsire, the closed job should no longer show on their home or enlisting pages.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on the integration, check out Skillsire’s documentation [here](https://www.skillsire.com/knowledgebase/integration/ashby).
:::


[title] Refapp
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Reference Checks/

Refapp is a talent intelligence solution that helps recruiters conduct efficient, professional and secure reference checks on each candidate. The tool also enables seamless and accurate Right To Work checks. Refapp's intuitive and user-friendly interface allows you to quickly, securely and efficiently gather information from references. Automatically collect 360-degree candidate insights and hire people who will thrive and help your organisation grow. Establish a digital reference checking process in a smooth step-by-step way. We have a vast library of questionnaire templates you can use straight out of the box. You can also create custom-made templates, enabling you to get started with your digital reference checking within minutes. Refapp automatically collects the answers in a comparable easy-to-read report which can be shared securely with your team or client.

## Prerequisites

:::hint{type="warning"}
You’ll need Ashby Org Admin access to enable the integration.

[Create Project templates](https://support.refapp.com/knowledge/how-do-i-set-up-project-templates-to-use-in-ats-systems) in Refapp first before initializing any assessments in Ashby.
:::

## Connect Refapp with Ashby

Request your Refapp API key with Refapp Support at [support@refapp.com](mailto\:support@refapp.com)

Once you’re provided with your Refapp API key, head over to the [Refapp integration settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/refapp) in the Ashby integrations marketplace. Tap on `+ Enable Refapp`.

Copy and paste the Refapp key you were provided with into the Refapp API Key field.

Generate an Ashby API key by clicking on the drop-down box in the Ashby API Key field. Type in the API key name you’d like to use for this integration and click on `+ Create new API key` to generate the new key. Copy the newly-created key.

![Refapp.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WDf0e9EnpdXrE_3hz74LF_refapp.gif)

Head over to your Refapp and navigate to Company Settings >> Integrations. Select `Configure` on Ashby and paste the Ashby API key.

:::hint{type="success"}
That’s it! You’ve now integrated Refapp with Ashby
:::

## Using the Integration

You can now initiate reference checks through Ashby. [Project templates will need to be set in Refapp first](https://support.refapp.com/knowledge/how-do-i-set-up-project-templates-to-use-in-ats-systems), then selected in Ashby when initializing the reference check.

This can be done by manually initializing the assessment in the candidate’s profile or added as an interview plan stage activity to automate initializing the assessment when a candidate is moved to a specific stage.

Initializing an assessment on the candidate’s profile: Click on `+ New Activity` on the candidate’s profile page and choose `Assessment`.

Then, select Refapp and choose the Project template in the Assessment Type drop-down box.

![refapp candidate profile.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WGc_g7KR5phJuZcEPiMCl_refappcandidateprofile.gif)

Adding the assessment as an interview plan stage activity: In the interview plan stage, click on `+ Add Activity` and choose Refapp. Then, select the Project template in the Assessment Type drop-down box and choose a Reviewer for the assessment.

![Refapp interview plan.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JAxOvTJtZdMwx64sCRrBO_refappinterviewplan.gif)

After initializing the assessment, tap on `Start Assessment` in the candidate’s profile to add the candidate to the Project in Refapp. If you have your Project template has automation enabled, an email or SMS will be sent to the candidate to provide referees.

The status of the reference check will show on the candidate’s profile page.

![Screenshot 2023-05-03 at 11.46.05 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZneB5_41VLr0V_q-Aer0m_screenshot2023-05-03at114605am.png)

## Video Walkthrough

Head over to [https://support.refapp.com/knowledge/video-how-does-the-integration-between-refapp-and-ashby-work](https://support.refapp.com/knowledge/video-how-does-the-integration-between-refapp-and-ashby-work) to view a video walkthrough of setting up and using the integration.

## Additional Information

For more information, Refapp has articles on [How do I set up the integration between Refapp and Ashby](https://support.refapp.com/knowledge/how-do-i-set-up-the-integration-between-refapp-and-ashby) and [How does the integration between Refapp and Ashby work](https://support.refapp.com/knowledge/how-does-the-integration-between-refapp-and-ashby-work). If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] CoderPad Interview
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

***

This guide walks you through integrating your CoderPad Interview account with Ashby, so you can use live interviews and take-home tests in your interview plans and when scheduling interviews with candidates.

If you are using CoderPad Screen, see [CoderPad Screen](docId\:AdvHOJf39GONyeY997WUQ).

:::hint{type="warning"}
CoderPad API keys are only available to those with Custom/Enterprise CoderPad accounts.
:::

CoderPad is a technical interview platform that helps candidates easily share their skills and ensures you understand how they work. This integration enables the generation and attachment of CoderPad Live Interview links when scheduling candidate interviews.

# Permissions & access

The CoderPad Interview integration is available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to set up this integration.&#x20;
:::

# Connecting the integration

In CoderPad:

Log in to your CoderPad Interview account and follow CoderPad's [API key access article](https://coderpad.io/resources/docs/interview/more-interview-resources/api-key/) for instructions on creating an API key on CoderPad.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you are using both CoderPad Screen and CoderPad Interview, you need to generate separate API keys for each integration. CoderPad also recommends setting up a dedicated account for integrations to ensure API keys stay active.
:::

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin >&#x20;**[Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and search for [CoderPad Interview](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/coderpad).
2. Click `+ Enable CoderPad Interview`.

![Ashby Admin Integrations page showing the CoderPad Interview integration, with the “Enable CoderPad Interview” button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nMGN3DT7t42dtQziKch1y_coderpad-interview-ashby-2026-09-21-at-13736-pm.jpg)

3. Paste the CoderPad Interview API key into the **CoderPad Interview API Key** field.
4. Create an **Ashby API Key** by typing the "CoderPad Interview" in the **Ashby API Key** field and selecting `Create new API key "CoderPad Interview"`.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4h_RE_TAfk7m9BPP0-r4h_coderpad-interview-ashby-2026-09-21-at-14137-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="855" height="389" darkWidth="855" darkHeight="389" alt="CoderPad Interview integration settings in Ashby with the Ashby API Key dropdown open and the option to create a new API key named “CoderPad Interview” highlighted." showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy the API key and store it in a secure place. Ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which sends data back to Ashby about the assessment.
:::

# Using the integration

Now that the integration is configured, you can start sending CoderPad take-home assessments to candidates.

## Adding take-home tests

1. Navigate to the job you would like to add the take-home to and select the `Interview Plan` tab.
2. Click `Add Activity to "Stage Name"` > `+ Add Activity` on the stage where you want to add a CoderPad take-home assessment.
3. Select `CoderPad Interview` from the list of activities under the **Integrations** section that opens on the right side of the page, and choose the assessment you'd like candidates to complete at this interview stage.

![Ashby Interview Plan settings for the Product Support Coordinator role, with the Add Activity panel open and the CoderPad Interview integration highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/L5CmC132YTcKxULQNnLui_product-support-coordinator-pittsburgh-ashby-2026-09-21-at-14959-pm.jpg)

When a candidate reaches the stage where the take-home is set up, an activity appears on their profile indicating they need to be sent an assessment.

4. Click `Start Assessment` on the activity on the candidate's profile to send the assessment.

The candidate receives an email with a link to the selected take-home assessment. As they complete the assessment, its status updates in Ashby. Assessment statuses may take up to four hours to be reflected in Ashby.

![Ashby candidate profile for Jane Smith showing a CoderPad Assessment under Current Activities with a “Start Assessment” button.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yotews59VTTn_yJ3Y-fFZ_cleanshot2022-12-12at1247272x.png)

## Adding live interviews

Alternatively, you can automatically attach live interview links to interview invitations when scheduling an interview in Ashby or when creating a schedule interview activity.&#x20;

When scheduling an interview or configuring a schedule interview activity, check the `Attach CoderPad Live link?` checkbox. This option is under `Communications` for a schedule interview activity, or under `Invite Settings` when scheduling an interview manually. If you have an interview with multiple events, you can use checkboxes to specify which events should have the integration enabled.

:::hint{type="info"}
See [Setting up Schedule Interview Activities](docId:0Z5jM_EQkvZQ_Oqc03Rer) for more information on configuring schedule interview activities.
:::

The interview link is included in both interviewer and candidate invitations.

![Technical Phone Interview Schedule settings showing the Integrations section, where CoderPad Live links can be enabled for individual interview events.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IZhxBKvEvqRuXqC0Y4vuX_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-113720-am.jpg)

Once the interview has been scheduled and calendar invites have been sent, you can also access the live interview link in the **Interview Progress** section of the candidate's job consideration.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pilKB8fJtsRM3qMJ63f6v-20260303-113653.jpg" size="80" alt="Recruiter Phone Screen interview details showing an HM screen with links to view the schedule, briefing, and CoderPad Interview." isUploading="false" width="1140" height="288" darkWidth="1140" darkHeight="288" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="success"}
You can now start sending CoderPad assessments in your Ashby interview plans and CoderPad Live Interview links when scheduling interviews with candidates.
:::


[title] SeekOut
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

SeekOut connects with Ashby through two integration options. Use Export to send candidate profiles from SeekOut to Ashby, or use Rediscovery to search Ashby candidate data in SeekOut and enrich it with additional profile information.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**
Before setting up Rediscovery, contact your SeekOut Customer Success Manager or SeekOut Support to coordinate the integration.
Your Ashby login and your SeekOut login must both use the same email address when setting up the integration.
:::

# Permissions & access

The SeekOut integration is available on Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to set up this integration.
:::

# Integration options

| **Option**  | **What it does**                                                                                                                                                                               | **Setup guide**                                                                                                           |
| ----------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Export      | Sends candidate profiles from SeekOut to Ashby as prospects or attaches them to an existing job.                                                                                               | [Set up the Ashby Export integration in SeekOut](https://support.seekout.com/en/articles/11877527-ashby-export)           |
| Rediscovery | Mirrors Ashby candidate data in SeekOut for search and filtering. SeekOut enriches the data with social links, work history, and education, then uses the connection to keep the data updated. | [Set up the Ashby Rediscovery integration in SeekOut](https://support.seekout.com/en/articles/11877441-ashby-rediscovery) |

:::hint{type="info"}
Each option has a separate setup flow and provides different capabilities.
Review [SeekOut's Ashby integration overview](https://support.seekout.com/en/articles/11877443-ashby) before choosing an option.
:::

# Connecting the integration

## Create an API key

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations** and search for the [SeekOut integration tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for SeekOut` button.

![Ashby Admin Integrations page showing the SeekOut integration as not enabled, with the SeekOut settings panel open and the "Create API key for SeekOut" button highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZqeQ1FST8qrcHh4YF9S7n_seekout-ashby-2026-09-16-at-13019-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy the API key and store it in a secure place. You need this to complete the integration setup in SeekOut.
:::

## Add webhooks for Rediscovery

:::hint{type="warning"}
You only need to do these steps if you are using SeekOut's Rediscovery feature.
:::

Rediscovery also requires Ashby webhooks. SeekOut provides the Request URL and Secret Token required to create them.

1. In Ashby, navigate to **Admin > Integrations >** [Webhooks](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/webhooks).
2. Select `+ New`.
3. Select the **Webhook Type**. See below for a list of all the webhook types needed for SeekOut's Rediscovery.
4. Enter the **Request URL** and **Secret Token** provided by your SeekOut Integration Consultant.
5. Create webhooks for these webhook types:
   - Application Submitted
   - Application Updated
   - Candidate Deleted
   - Candidate Merged
   - Candidate Stage Change
   - Job Created
   - Job Posting Deleted
   - Job Posting Published
   - Job Posting Unpublished
   - Job Posting Updated
   - Job Updated

# Finish setup in SeekOut

After you create the Ashby API key, complete the connection in SeekOut:

- For Export, follow [SeekOut's Ashby Export setup steps](https://support.seekout.com/en/articles/11877527-ashby-export).
- For Rediscovery, follow [SeekOut's Ashby Rediscovery setup steps](https://support.seekout.com/en/articles/11877441-ashby-rediscovery).

:::hint{type="success"}
When setup succeeds, SeekOut displays Ashby with a green check mark on the Integrations page.
:::

# FAQs

### Why does a candidate exported from SeekOut have a dummy email?

An email address is required when adding candidates to Ashby. If a candidate does not have an email associated with their SeekOut profile, SeekOut gives you the option to **Generate dummy email addresses**. When selected, SeekOut adds the candidate to Ashby using a fake email address as a placeholder.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
The dummy address is not valid for contacting the candidate. Replace it with a verified email address before sending outreach.
:::

### Will SeekOut export candidates that already exist in Ashby?

SeekOut prevents duplicate records by not transmitting profiles that have already been successfully exported. Exported profiles contain a confirmation icon and the Applicant Tracking System (ATS) name. Check the **Include previously exported candidate(s)** box if you're exporting the same candidates to your ATS again.

[title] Seeqle
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

## Seeqle Integration Overview

## Access the Jobs & Company Page&#x20;

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Log in to your Seeqle account.
2. In the sidebar, access the Jobs & Company Page section. This section contains all the options for managing job offers and company pages.
3. Click on `Connect my ATS`.
4. Once in the connection menu, you'll see a list of compatible ATSs. Search for and select Ashby from this list.

In Ashby

1. Log into Ashby and go to the application settings or API section (or similar).
2. Find and copy the API key you will be asked to enter.
   1. Enter the API key: Return to Seeqle and paste the API key in the field provided.
   2. Validate connection: Click on the Continue button to finalize the connection.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfk7EOutUDyzWCBfqWoZ-Wxg8abAENa3swc6MWUcYWVB8tzih07EOVekv5iRz_kdjZjwE9XB2qw8sDoib420VpJZUCA9s0b9jISGxwuUhlOPknZUV4AwY_ohYElIOmYHGXQdoQ5Ww?key=IcGj24vqtsrduiilUDcRzQi5" size="86" width="453" height="274" position="center" darkWidth="453" darkHeight="274" showCaption="false"}

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXeSuvE2KOuMLpI3aYFRLxJ2HKfcjf_a5gFPsAxzOqq1uu-2RvuEDCLLypEoBGXeDIrXSfnDzuV7WXP0e5LU-1AG4X3HRC3n2zQlhJA6Nu0Gl7KAX4j431M18emwbAG8-1cOUax8Sg?key=IcGj24vqtsrduiilUDcRzQi5)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfd1Ij4Bw-KMKtl_mf9rxTx8c7R_8YxQ8tJYLn9TPlxXcgL00bgeoN3fd2N82kvDoc_98M2BTf5KmqUtSTRicTtPRVoTvgnOZWeDMO2YnLxoIrEm1kgc0C6tQV6WrReaatximHnOA?key=IcGj24vqtsrduiilUDcRzQi5)
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Your Ashby space is now connected to Seeqle! You can start synchronizing your job offers for centralized and optimized management.
:::


[title] CodeAlly
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

CodeAlly's GitHub-powered Job Board works with your hiring process & word-of-mouth to reach talented technical candidates & their peers. Please note that on initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.

## Creating an API key in Ashby

Sign in to Ashby and click “**Admin**” in the top navigation bar. Next, click “**Integrations**” on the left panel of the screen. Select **CodeAlly** and click “**Create API key for CodeAlly**”. Copy the value provided. You could also save the key somewhere secure for future reference.

![Screen Shot 2023-03-03 at 2.24.30 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/F8OjbDT8GOjWEfO-0OWgg_screenshot2023-03-03at22430pm.png)

## Enabling the Ashby integration in CodeAlly

1. Log in to your CodeAlly account and click *Integrations* in the menu bar. If you don’t have a CodeAlly account, you can [create a new one here](https://codeally.io/signup/company/).
2. Select ***Ashby*** from the list of integrations.
3. Copy and paste your API key and click Connect to connect both platforms.
4. Congratulations! The connection between CodeAlly and Ashby is active!

## Additional Information

If you want, you can make changes to the job postings directly in CodeAlly, for example by adding additional required skills. For more info visit: [https://codeally.io/integrations/ashby](https://codeally.io/integrations/ashby).

***

*Questions or feedback? Let us know at&#x20;*[support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com)*&#x20;- we love hearing from you!*

[title] Reporting on Integration Partner Assessments
[path] Integrations/Assessments/

You can use the Assessments subject when creating reports to pull key metrics on assessments generated via an integration partner like [HackerRank](docId\:vH2f9hU5Xvx0paqy4g5hk), [Zinc](docId\:NbZyGFfyfLGGTGhtf7Zxu) or [CodeSignal](docId:3Wgjd8nm8jPk16U8rBCAZ).

## Subject fields for reporting

The following fields are available for reporting across assessments:

| Field Name          | Definition                                                                                                    |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Assessment Name     | The name of the assessment type from the integration partner.                                                 |
| Activity Status     | The Ashby activity status of the assessment. Can be one of Waiting to Start, Started, Complete, or Cancelled. |
| Integration Partner | The assessment integration partner generating the assessment.                                                 |
| Numeric Score       | The numeric score from the assessment. Only populated for numeric result types.                               |
| Result              | The result value as text (e.g., '85', 'Pass', 'Completed').                                                   |
| Assessment Status   | The partner-provided status of the assessment (e.g., 'Expired', 'Completed').                                 |

If you have assessments generated via an integration partner, you will also be able to report on fields generated as custom fields in Ashby on behalf of the integration partner. The names of these custom fields are derived from the partner’s field label and the integration name is included for clarity, for example Overall Max Score (Codility).

## Example Reports

### Reporting on pending assessments

The Activity Status field represents the Ashby activity status, while the Assessment Status field is the assessment status pull from the integration partner's provided status.

As such, if you'd like to report on the status of the activity itself in Ashby, you could run the following report.

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Assessments

**Filters:&#x20;**&#x41;ctivity Status = Waiting to Start

**Columns:** In our example, we have added the following fields to the custom list report; Assessment's Candidate Name, Assessment's Assessment Name, Assessment's Activity Status, Assessment's Job Consideration's Hiring Manager.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XMwOMVUnLvivZFtm6FMz3_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-15444-pm.jpg)

To report on pending assessments that pull from the status listed in the partner integration you can run a report similar to the example below:

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Assessments

**Filters:&#x20;**&#x41;ssessment Status = Pending (matching up to Zinc's status wording)

**Columns:** In our example, we have added the following fields to the custom list report; Assessment's Candidate Name, Assessment's Assessment Name, Assessment's Assessment Status, Assessment's Integration Partner, Assessment's Job Consideration's Hiring Manager.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Bi6QLhP1L212fEv9SjWji_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-20326-pm.jpg)

### Report on numeric scores for a specific assessment

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x53;egmentation Report

**Timeframe:** Specify the time range you'd like to report on here - in our example, we're looking at assessments that have been sent in the last 3 months.

**Filters:** Assessment's Assessment Name contains \[insert Assessment Name here]

**Groupings:** Assessment's Numeric Score.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/83zpPAxsO1DGYqDR2WYGv_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-02-at-22107-pm.jpg)


[title] Climatebase
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

This guide explains how to integrate Climatebase with Ashby. 

The Climatebase integration lets you automatically post and sync your open roles to Climatebase, the world's leading climate jobs platform, so you can tap into a large, targeted pool of mission-driven candidates without any manual effort. Applicants who come through Climatebase are flagged directly in Ashby, making it easy to track their source throughout the hiring process. With source and funnel reporting, you can measure exactly how much impact Climatebase is having on your hiring goals.

## Connect the Integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
Before connecting this integration, you must have a Climatebase Membership. To learn more about Climatebase, check out [Climatebase for Employers](https://climatebase.org/for-employers).&#x20;
:::

First, create a [Candidate Source](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/sources) and [Custom Tracking Link](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/custom-tracked-links) in Admin by following the instructions below.

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to set up [Candidate Sources](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/source-types-and-sources) and [Custom Tracking Links](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/tracking-the-source-of-an-application).
:::

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Sources**.
2. Click `+ New Source` .
   - Fill out the **Name** as *Climatebase*.
   - Under **Source Type** select `Inbound`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/afsppCnCr3vVOt0LtBLth_sources-acent-ashby-2026-05-20-at-100649-am.jpg" size="28" width="270" height="234" position="center" darkWidth="270" darkHeight="234" showCaption="false"}

3. Navigate t&#x6F;**&#x20;Admin > Job Boards > Custom Tracking Links**.
4. Click `+ New` and fill out the Title, Source, and Tracking Code.&#x20;
   - Select `Inbound: Climatebase` under **Source**.
   - Under **Tracking Code** enter *climatebase.*

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pDlmYA5wtccaTYWe1qMBP_custom-tracking-links-acent-ashby-2026-05-19-at-22028-pm.jpg" size="40" width="399" height="387" darkWidth="399" darkHeight="387" position="center" showCaption="false"}

5. Once you have the unique tracking link, email **team\@climatebase.org** with your custom tracking link.

:::hint{type="success"}
Once configured, you will receive an email from Climatebase confirming it's complete.&#x20;
:::

## Using the Integration

Once the integration is set up, your jobs will automatically post on Climatebase, and new candidate applications will be tagged in Ashby with `Climatebase` as the source.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
The Climatebase > Ashby integration will automatically sync with your Ashby account once a day, importing and updating all your jobs in Climatebase.&#x20;
:::


[title] Wellfound (formerly AngelList Talent)
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

The Wellfound integration allows you to seamlessly export jobs from Ashby into Wellfound. You can then import candidates who apply to those jobs in Wellfound back into Ashby. After you set up the integration, new job postings sync twice a day every 12 hours.

# Permissions & access

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to configure this integration.
:::

The Wellfound integration is available on Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Connecting the integration

Get started in your Wellfound account and follow their [How do I connect Ashby ATS? guide](https://help.wellfound.com/article/752-how-do-i-connect-ashby-ats).

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations** and search for [Wellfound](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/wellfound).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for Wellfound` button.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hsjGjMnBNb_T5l81taV6m_wellfound-ashby-2026-09-30-at-92503-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1603" height="682" darkWidth="1603" darkHeight="682" alt="Ashby Admin Integrations page with the Wellfound integration open and the &#x22;Create API key for Wellfound&#x22; button highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Copy the API key and store it in a secure place. You need this to complete the integration setup in Wellfound.
:::

# FAQs

### A candidate exported from Wellfound suddenly has tags on their profile, why?

Wellfound assigns tags to a candidate when exporting them to Ashby. There can be a window of time between the candidate being added to Ashby and the tags being added to the candidate. As such, a candidate with no tags can later have tags added to them. There isn't currently a way to disable this option.

### Why are all candidates that apply through Wellfound being credited to one person?

Wellfound's integration automatically credits inbound applicants to the administrator who set up the integration, per their [documentation on candidate attribution in Ashby ATS](https://help.wellfound.com/article/939-who-are-candidates-attributed-to-in-ashby-ats).

[title] YC Work at a Startup
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Learn how to integrate Ashby and Work at a Startup.

### Work at a Startup Integration Overview

Ashby integrates with Y Combinator's Work at a Startup to enable exporting jobs and candidates between the two services.

### Export Jobs from Ashby to WaaS

The first integration between Ashby and WaaS is the ability to export your jobs from Ashby to WaaS as postings. To set this up, you'll need your Ashby Job board URL and at least 1 active job on your job board.

![YC.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nNrcFtB-7LUK_Hdbl_795_yc.gif)

1. Visit [https://bookface.ycombinator.com/jobs/import](https://bookface.ycombinator.com/jobs/import)
2. Select Ashby as your ATS system and input your Ashby job board URL (i.e., jobs.ashbyhq.com/\[company])
3. Click `Load Jobs`
4. Once your jobs are loaded, select the ones you'd like added to WaaS and click `Import Selected Jobs`

### Export Candidates from WaaS to Ashby

The second integration supported by Ashby and WaaS is the ability to export candidates from Work at a Startup to Ashby. To set this up, you'll need to create an API Key.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e2779153b81e2424c7a7823f4d741f17.png)

1. Setup an [Ashby API Key](#) on the [API Keys page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys/create) in Admin; select Y Combinator Work at a Startup as the Integration Partner.
2. Visit [https://bookface.ycombinator.com/workatastartup/ats](https://bookface.ycombinator.com/workatastartup/ats) and input the API Key, then click `Save`
3. Once saved, you can export individual candidates to Ashby from their WaaS profile by clicking the `Export` button, then selecting the job to add them to. Exported candidates will enter Ashby in the New Lead stage.


[title] cFIRST
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

This guide will walk you through integrating your cFIRST account with Ashby, allowing you to send background check requests as assessments in your interview plans.

## Integration Overview

cFIRST is a global background screening service provider that helps enterprises of all sizes build reliable teams leveraging its API-enabled digital platform. cFirst’s integration documentation is available [here](https://capps.cfirst.io/docs/AshbyIntegration.pdf).

## Connect cFIRST with Ashby

1: Log into your cFIRST client Portal and navigate to your cFIRST Account menu. Click on the Integrations tab, search for Ashby and click on the icon to enable the integration, then click on Setup Ashby Account.

![setup ashby account button.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Dm61x4utHbt8Xop8b180Z_setupashbyaccountbutton.png)

2: Your Assessment API Key will be automatically generated. Copy this key to paste into Ashby.

![assessment API key.jpg](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9Eh0FGDiSlXP3ai0LrEcs_assessmentapikey.jpg)

## Ashby Setup

3: Log into your Ashby account and go to the [Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page. Search for cFIRST and click on `+Enable cFIRST`.

![enable cFIRST.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QnrCM6h2ZV1GSfea64w-3_enablecfirst.png)

4: Paste the Assessment API key copied from cFirst and paste it into the cFIRST API Key field.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pNV6okzUB8QZcIRMknTvh_ashbyassessmentapikey.jpg" size="58" width="637" height="474" position="center" alt="Ashby Assessment API Key.jpg" darkWidth="637" darkHeight="474" showCaption="false"}

5: Generate an Ashby API Key for cFIRST and copy this API key. Our guide on this can be found at [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ) Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mJxByjfM7tJY6xvb0tHtA_apikeyforcfirst.jpg" size="56" width="634" height="464" position="center" alt="API key for cFIRST.jpg" darkWidth="634" darkHeight="464" showCaption="false"}

6: Then back in cFIRST, paste the Ashby API key into the Ashby API key field.

![Ashby API key.jpg](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UGKxxPKMVsExg2sTI-W5r_ashbyapikey.jpg)

7: In the BGC Response Id(s) field, enter the email addresses that should receive a notification when candidates are successfully added. Separate multiple addresses using a semicolon. Then, click on `Submit`.

![BGC Response Ids.jpg](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9Lr3vufet1fcNnCABoYcW_bgcresponseids.jpg)

You can now start sending cFIRST background check requests as assessment activities in your Ashby interview plans&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/frvt1e1-gGIX-Q95DRvAY_cfirstactivity.jpg" size="36" width="362" height="572" position="center" alt="cFIRST activity.jpg" darkWidth="362" darkHeight="572" showCaption="false"}

## Video Instructions

For a cFIRST integration video walkthrough, please refer [here](https://www.loom.com/share/eeca3644fb204f1b92999b2c8915a623).

[title] Testlify
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Testlify’s unique AI-powered assessment technology is a proven solution against high employee turnover rates. Get rid of the manual tasks in your hiring process and automate laborious processes from ‘Apply’ to ‘Hire’. A fun, engaging, and quick assessment process ensures minimal drop-off rates throughout your recruitment process. Experience unprecedented control of your hiring funnel through deep business intelligence.

## Prerequisites

:::hint{type="warning"}
You’ll need Ashby Org Admin access to enable the integration.
:::

## Connect Testlify with Ashby

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
1. In your Testlify dashboard, go to your profile >  Settings > API Key.
2. Click on `Generate Key` and then copy the API key generated.
3. Head over to the [Testlify integration page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/testlify) in the Ashby Marketplace. Click on the `+Enable Testlify` button and paste the Testlify API key you generated in Testlify in the Testlify API Key field.
4. In the Ashby API Key field, type in the name you’d like to set for your Ashby API key. Then, copy this key.
5. Head back over to your Testify dashboard, navigating to your profile > Settings > Integrations.
6. Choose the Ashby tile and paste the API key copied from Ashby.

:::hint{type="success"}
That's it! Testlify is now integrated with Ashby
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![testlify generate key.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ciqyXw1ZUB6NLg-MZ9TTx_testlifygeneratekey.png)

![testlify copy key.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HyHNWXdOcsUNVGB5TwsE4_testlifycopykey.png)

![enable testlify in Ashby.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BvPM3OnrKc8fpaqZcPbUb_enabletestlifyinashby.gif)


:::
:::::

## Using the Integration

Assessments can be initiated directly on the candidate’s profile page or added as an activity to an interview plan stage.

- To initiate an assessment directly on the candidate’s profile page

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LOYvrVWJUluJBANR4Zmvl_candidateprofile.gif" size="100" alt="candidate profile.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Testlify%2074408aaea98542b6b21a2b0a763ee1d1/candidate_profile.gif" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Testlify 74408aaea98542b6b21a2b0a763ee1d1/candidate_profile.gif" width="1800" height="882" darkWidth="1800" darkHeight="882" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- To add an assessment as an activity to the interview plan

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/y-xcM2InY6JmdvgfITIKK_testlifyactivityoninterviewplan.gif" size="100" alt="testlify activity on interview plan.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Testlify%2074408aaea98542b6b21a2b0a763ee1d1/testlify_activity_on_interview_plan.gif" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Testlify 74408aaea98542b6b21a2b0a763ee1d1/testlify_activity_on_interview_plan.gif" width="1868" height="840" darkWidth="1868" darkHeight="840" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

After an assessment is started, you can view the candidate’s progress and assessment results directly on the candidate’s profile.

![Screenshot 2023-06-30 at 10.54.06 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/p75qp-9-T7faztvJiX-TV_screenshot2023-06-30at105406am.png)

## Video Walkthrough

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b960af637f974c1fbb90e4c28d6123ef?sid=c3405a77-f395-4a2b-8f28-29660627fec9"}

## Additional Information

For more information, head over to [Testlify’s article on integrating with Ashby](https://help.testlify.com/article/437-ashby-integration). If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] HeyMilo
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Integrating HeyMilo with Ashby enables powerful conversational AI candidate engagement and screening capabilities within your hiring workflow. HeyMilo lets you automatically engage talent via SMS/Whatsapp/Email, automate resume screenings, and invite candidates to complete AI voice interviews.

Below is how you can easily add AI candidate engagements and screenings to your job postings, track candidate progress, and review interview results and candidate evaluations—all within Ashby.

## HeyMilo agents supported in Ashby

| **SMS Agent**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | **Resume Agent**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        | **Voice/Video Agent**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| ✅                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    | ✅                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       | ✅                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| **How does it work?&#x20;**&#x41;s soon as candidates apply, they get a text from Milo with your questions. They respond directly in the thread, just like a real conversation. Once they finish, Milo sends over the voice or video interview invite automatically. | **How does it work?&#x20;**&#x50;lease be advised that the data is not automatically pulled from Ashby. You can add resume screening to your agent workflow once the integration is live and your job is connected. Candidates will then be asked to upload their resume to get screened for fit before moving forward. | **How does it work?&#x20;**&#x41;fter integration and job posting mapping, when a candidate applies to your Ashby job posting, the candidate's email address is pulled from the application form and the candidate is engaged through email to take the voice/video assessment. Once the candidate has completed it, the candidate's detailed assessment report is attached to their profile in the Ashby portal. |

:::hint{type="info"}
HeyMilo supports SMS screening - as long as a valid phone number (with country code) is provided. As such, be sure to make the mobile number a required field on your Ashby application form.

Alternatively, you can enable both resume and SMS screening on your HeyMilo job, ensuring candidates are screened even if their phone number or resume isn’t accessible. Follow the steps below to configure the HeyMilo integration.
:::

## Getting API Details from HeyMilo Portal&#x20;

Start by getting API details from the HeyMilo portal&#x20;

- Log into the HeyMilo portal.&#x20;
- Copy the HeyMilo API key and the Staging Base URL. Keep these details handy in another tab for the next steps.&#x20;

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A46bb8b3c-d094-4511-b56a-b1607073b029%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-8080-ac2f-c288d5e2dfbd\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

## Get the API Key from Ashby

- Go to Admin in Ashby and navigate to Integrations

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A89fc19bd-9c64-42d8-aea1-e8ffe4351443%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f764c57-5223-8011-b5d2-c926a7ac6a6b\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- select `HeyMilo` and enable the integration

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A02f5c0a1-7958-4dba-8347-7f6408224ed1%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-80e3-9a00-eef762bf8b23\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- Paste the HeyMilo API Key and Staging Base URL in the fields provided.&#x20;

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A3049196f-d4c4-4bec-bd5c-32ecf7b4b5f4%3Aimage_\(71\).png?table=block\&id=21864c57-5223-80d8-97c8-e4d998ff6fef\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- Generate the Ashby API Key. Ensure the generated Ashby API key has at least `jobsRead`, `candidatesRead`, and `candidatesWrite permissions`.
- Return to the HeyMilo Portal and past in the Ashby API Key, then click `Connect`.

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A25a6ce22-ef93-4045-9494-16ae17ac8a62%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-8063-91a2-c720004de93c\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1320\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- Upon successful connection, you’ll see it listed under Active Integrations.

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Aa5a69f6d-7306-4d3a-96df-7c9af3c20b4b%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-80e7-998e-ee60850a3e73\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1320\&userId=\&cache=v2)

## Link HeyMilo Agent to Ashby Job Posting Using Job ID 

- Now that the API is connected, you can link the HeyMilo interview agent to your job postings in Ashby. Just select your HeyMilo agent and link the Ashby job ID to this agent. Your Ashby job ID can be found by navigating to the job and copying the long code in the URL.

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Ae451edd9-bb9a-45cf-bb9a-3fb3f9f0609f%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-8009-b5bd-e1aa2b547485\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- After entering job IDs, click  `Save Configuration` to finalize the linkage.

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A91a6e557-2343-42bb-b5bb-ff5eb6a07e88%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-80cd-97fc-f7000bd2d93f\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- You can easily view active mappings for your agents in the same section.

## Add HeyMilo AI Assessments to Ashby Job Postings&#x20;

- In Ashby, navigate to the specific job posting and click Interview Plan, then `Add Activity`.

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Abfaac522-4daf-47dc-8b77-5f375c68fb29%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-807e-a0d0-c13e71820602\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- Then select `HeyMilo` under Integrations

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Afb345137-a98f-43d9-81c8-8281d4acae99%3Aimage_\(38\).png?table=block\&id=1fa64c57-5223-801e-88bd-c4e0e8fa658d\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- Choose the assessment (e.g. AI interview) you'd like to add and click `Add`. This ensures the HeyMilo assessment is linked to your job posting.&#x20;

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A563f8536-f730-46a2-937b-fa9103b7993e%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-80a9-90cc-dbbd4cab22c3\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- To automate dispatch of the HeyMilo interview, click `Edit` beside the HeyMilo integration, navigate to the Automation tab and select `Automate on Stage Entry `

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Ae229a0df-282f-4a8e-8720-e4eab3bf1bb0%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=20064c57-5223-80d8-8820-e018f9d8ecc6\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1360\&userId=\&cache=v2)

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Ae7d6578f-d1db-489b-b076-e07eae493305%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=20064c57-5223-808f-9ca3-fd2769d6f0bb\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1360\&userId=\&cache=v2)

## Optional: Alternatively, you can manually add assessments for specific candidates.&#x20;

- Go to the Candidate Pipeline in your Ashby job posting dashboard.
- Select the candidate you'd like to add a HeyMilo assessment for, click `Add New Activity`

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Acaba4afa-8ef3-4784-bd82-1e6d295432ce%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-8062-9d18-f6d729956290\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- Then choose `Start Assessment` on the generated activity

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A381452d2-9c20-42f6-884b-2fc3e082ed95%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-807c-8f32-c79887340948\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- Once initialized successfully, you'll see the assessment link sent to the candidate displayed in the Ashby interface

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A781723fd-f2ad-4000-844e-cfb47015b810%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-80e9-9eb2-c8bf04492cf8\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

## How Do I Review Screening Results in Ashby?&#x20;

- After the candidate completes their interview, the results will automatically be available on their candidate profile in Ashby.
- Assessments will be marked as completed, and the score will be updated along with a detailed report and interview media link(s) to audio/video screenings.

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3A5216e444-881d-4ab3-ba42-e631e40e7cec%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f864c57-5223-805a-bc6c-c43d24c4103b\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

- In the `Assessments` tab, you will also see the assessment results clearly noted, indicating the candidate has completed the interview.&#x20;

![](https://heymilo.notion.site/image/attachment%3Ab11284ba-467d-4c1f-be5a-b458f0cde395%3Aimage.png?table=block\&id=1f964c57-5223-80ab-a6e6-d4a9c2694720\&spaceId=3dc2a00b-66ca-4dea-8152-ce24eb2ebedc\&width=1310\&userId=\&cache=v2)

Need help? Please reach out to the HeyMilo team. Full documentation can be found [here](https://heymilo.notion.site/Ashby-Support-Wiki-1f064c575223803c9896e9f34193d60c).

Happy hiring!


[title] TazWorks
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

TazWorks is a technology platform specializing in background screening software, offering comprehensive solutions for screening and compliance. This article explains how to connect TazWorks to Ashby, add a TazWorks assessment to your interview plan, and send background checks to candidates.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**

Contact your TazWorks CRA (background check provider) to obtain your TazWorks API key before you begin.
:::

# Enter the TazWorks API key

1. Navigate to the **Integrations Marketplace** at **Admin > Integrations > Integrations**.
2. Search for TazWorks in the search bar.
3. Click the TazWorks tile, then click `+ Enable TazWorks`.
4. Enter your TazWorks API key.

![Click Enable TazWorks and then enter your TazWorks API key.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GXzmMP5IYiI0mbzNcN6su_enable-tazworks-button-in-integrations.jpg)

# Create an Ashby API key

Click into the `Ashby API Key` dropdown and add a name for your API key. After you type a name, click `Create New API Key`. Ashby then displays the API key.

![Creating a new Ashby API key within the TazWorks integration settings.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/R4nbENQXkKc_Zh0ACfemY_creating-an-ashby-api-key-within-the-tazworks-integration.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
This API key is only available while you are on this page. If you navigate away and come back, the key disappears, so make sure to save it somewhere safe. Provide your CRA (background check provider) with the Ashby API key.
:::

# Add the activity

Next, add an activity to a stage of your interview plan. This generates a prompt to send the assessment to the candidate once they reach the specified stage.

1. On the **Interview Plan** tab of your job, click `Add Activity to…` on the stage where you want to add the assessment (Background Check is the name listed in the example).
2. Click `+ Add Activity`, then select the TazWorks option in the Integrations section.
3. Select the TazWorks package from the `Assessment Type` dropdown. Your CRA creates these packages in TazWorks.
4. Click `Add`.

![Adding an activity to your job's interview plan.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wvz-z-4t4ZD5ZI0yGKB8s_product-manager-ashby-2026-08-17-at-110533-am.jpg)

# Automate the assessment (optional)

From here you can opt to send the assessment automatically when the candidate reaches this stage. To add it automatically, click the **Automation** tab and check the box labeled `Automate on Stage Entry?`.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information, check out [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB).
:::

# Send a background check

To send a background check to the candidate using the integration:

1. Click `Change Stage` on the candidate's profile and select the stage where you configured the TazWorks assessment on the job.
2. The TazWorks Assessment prompt displays automatically on the candidate profile. Click `Start Assessment` to kick off the assessment.
3. Ensure that the product that is selected is correct and click `Start` on the following pop-up.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you selected the `Automate on Stage Entry?` checkbox, you see a note that the assessment is starting automatically, along with the option to undo it. You have 15 seconds after the candidate moves into the stage to undo the automated activity and stop the assessment from being sent.
:::

After you start the assessment in Ashby, the status of the TazWorks Assessment changes from **Ready to be started** to **Pending**. At this point, the candidate receives an email with a link that asks them for more information.

![The Pending status on a TazWorks background check. This shows when the candidate receives an email that asks them for more information.  ](https://cdn.zappy.app/6fe7a8ba8098d1828593788f78b60d72.png)

The TazWorks CRA uses this information to process the background check. Once the candidate provides the information, the status changes from Pending to In-Progress.

![The status of the TazWorks assessment is set to In Progress once the candidate has provided the relevant information. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/464bd9fa806a2ed208319e226a9ddd9d.png)

Once your TazWorks CRA completes the background check, the status changes to Completed on the candidate profile in Ashby. You also have the option to click `View in TazWorks`.

This option opens the consumer report in a new tab, where you enter your credentials (provided by your TazWorks CRA). Once logged in, you see the consumer report for the candidate.

![The option to view the report in TazWorks, after the assessment has been completed.](https://cdn.zappy.app/b1fefacfbb4aaadaf6b1a26225a6fecf.png)


[title] HackerRank
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your HackerRank account with Ashby, allowing you to use HackerRank Tests as assessments in your interview plans and send out live HackerRank interview links.

Please note that this integration is only available on HackerRank’s custom pricing plans.

### Getting Started Checklist

1. Open a browser tab with Ashby on the [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page
2. Open another browser tab with HackerRank on the [integrations](https://www.hackerrank.com/work/settings/integrations) page

### Add the Integration in Ashby

1. Starting from the [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page, click on the HackerRank integration tile, and then click the green `Enable HackerRank` button.
2. Once that’s done, you should see a panel to configure keys for the integration
   1. Note: you’ll come back here to input your HackerRank API key, once you have it
3. Click the Ashby API Key drop down to create or select an existing one for this integration. If you are selecting an existing Ashby API key for this integration, please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.
   1. Note: While it says to copy this API key, you do not need to copy this one. This API key is just used to control access for the HackerRank integration.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mYviiCW4OKmWeP9t3Lw1A_untitled.png)

### Get the HackerRank API Key

Next, we need to get an API key from HackerRank, so that Ashby can interact with HackerRank.

1. Set up your HackerRank API key by going to their integrations page [here](https://www.hackerrank.com/work/settings/integrations)
2. Click `Configure` on the Ashby tile in the list
3. Click the `Generate API Token` button
4. In the box that appears, click `Copy and Close` to copy the API token, and copy it somewhere temporarily for the next step
5. Go back to Ashby [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace), and enter your new HackerRank API key in the topmost box in the Ashby HackerRank settings (same place where you started with the Ashby API key setup initially)

:::hint{type="success"}
Now you're all set to use HackerRank tests in your interview plans!
:::

### Using the integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
HackerRank requires that the Ashby user’s email address match that of an active HackerRank for Work account. Only Ashby users with HackerRank for Work accounts will be able to send assessments from Ashby.
:::

Now that the integration is configured, you can start sending HackerRank take-home assessments and HackerRank live interview links to candidates.

### Configuring a HackerRank Assessment

To add an Interview assessment at the interview plan level, go to the interview plan you want to update and click on `+ Activity` on the stage you want to add a HackerRank take-home assessment to.

Click on HackerRank from the list of Activities that opens on the right side of the page and select the assessment or interview you’d like candidates to complete at this interview stage. When a candidate reaches the stage the interview is assigned to, an activity will show up on their profile indicating that they should be sent an assessment.

![CleanShot 2022-12-12 at 12.37.06@2x.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/6652704e3283a7bd4e08b8d0de1a95a0.png)

To send an assessment to a candidate, click on `Start Assessment` on the activity on the candidate’s profile.

### Configuring HackerRank Live Interviews

You can automatically attach live interview links to interview invitations when scheduling an interview in Ashby or when creating a schedule interview activity. When scheduling an interview or configuring a schedule interview activity, check the `Attach HackerRank interview?` checkbox. This option is under `Communications` for a schedule interview activity, or under `Invite Settings` when scheduling an interview manually. If you have an interview with multiple events you will be able to use checkboxes to specify the events that should have the integration enabled.

The Interview link will be included in both interviewer and candidate invitations.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IZhxBKvEvqRuXqC0Y4vuX_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-113720-am.jpg)

Once the interview has been scheduled and calendar invites have been sent out, the live interview link can also be accessed via the record of the interview in the Interview Progress section of the candidate's job consideration.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pilKB8fJtsRM3qMJ63f6v-20260303-113653.jpg)


[title] HireSweet
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

## Integrating Ashby with HireSweet:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Open Ashby and navigate to the Admin panel.
2. Select Integrations from the left menu and find the HireSweet tile.
3. Select `Create API key` for HireSweet and copy the newly generated API key.
4. Head over to HireSweet  ➡️  go to Settings  ➡️  ATS integrations (CRM)  ➡️  Ashby
5. Paste the key and click `Save`.
6. You're all set! You can now sync all candidate and activity data into Ashby automatically.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/caaf59e6493868f49f08ec63b5cf4b4b.png)

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vpwrGZvMVS8fkNylW2LZC_untitled.png)

![Screen Shot 2022-07-21 at 12.36.46 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/85WmZ4K_lZsspbcindpW0_screenshot2022-07-21at123646pm.png)
:::
::::


[title] Zinc
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Zinc account with Ashby, allowing you to send background check requests as assessments in your interview plans.

## Integration Overview

This integration enables you to send Zinc background check requests as assessments within Ashby.

## Connect Zinc with Ashby

Log into your Zinc account, go to your Settings by clicking on your name in the bottom lefthand corner. Click on the Company tab and scroll down to the ATS Integrations section. Click on `Generate API Key` and copy the value provided.

![CleanShot 2022-10-24 at 17.39.05@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GKEXZ6jqIlKiQMaRah2T4_cleanshot2022-10-24at1739052x.png)

## Ashby Setup

1: Navigate to Ashby and select Admin. Next, click Integrations, then Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Open the Zinc tile and click `Enable Zinc`.

![CleanShot 2022-10-25 at 10.51.22 2@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tDvLJJPvsMBD0WRSnjoop_cleanshot2022-10-25at10512222x.png)

2: Paste the Zinc API key that you copied from your Zinc account into the Zinc API Key section in the Ashby app.

![CleanShot 2022-10-25 at 10.52.18@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2OMzcvIVZmZ698VkVqj4P_cleanshot2022-10-25at1052182x.png)

3: Select Ashby API Key and create a new API key. You won’t need to copy the Ashby API Key.

4: Adding assessments. There are three available options:

![CleanShot 2022-10-25 at 10.52.38@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/54GOXH8LNuP0rY5NBmf-4_cleanshot2022-10-25at1052382x.png)

1. Configure in interview plan - this means that for each interview plan, you can configure Zinc background checks at a specific stage.
2. Automatically add to hired stage - this means that for whenever a candidate is added to the hired stage for all jobs in your Ashby account, a Zinc background check will automatically be added to their candidate profile.
3. Automatically add to offer stage - this means that for whenever a candidate is added to the offer stage for all jobs in your Ashby account, a Zinc background check will automatically be added to their candidate profile.

:::hint{type="success"}
You can now start sending Zinc background check requests as assessments in your Ashby interview plans
:::

## Video Instructions

For a Zinc integration video walkthrough, please refer here:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/06400d4e9d9d4b64ac1c95f811139b64"}


[title] ChattyHiring
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

This guide will walk you through integrating ChattyHiring with Ashby. ChattyHiring is an AI-recruitment agent for pre-screening candidates for high-volume and high-rotation, entry-level, mid-tier and desk-less jobs in any language.

::embed[[https://youtu.be/DN0UxEq_emk?feature=shared](https://youtu.be/DN0UxEq_emk?feature=shared)]{url="https://youtu.be/DN0UxEq_emk?feature=shared"}

## How to integrate ChattyHiring in AshbyHQ

## Obtain your activation key in Chattyhiring

1. To initiate the integration, you’ll need an activation key from a ChattyHiring account to connect both platforms. Here’s how to do it:
2. Sign up in ChattyHiring Platform (app.chattyhiring.com)
   1. In the top right corner, select ‘Settings’ and click on ‘Integrations’.
   2. In the Integrations section, select ‘AshbyHQ Integration’.
   3. Click on `Add API Key`.
   4. Copy the generated API Key.

## Activate ChattyHiring in AshbyHQ

Once you have the API key from ChattyHiring please go to [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXc0GCz2v4z2yAb5y0H95SmhECIzsL9DmFkrb50PE0ukKrAxoGOfLRt5Oawb8TphSV3GjeVNZb5JAZTQn60FyIohefpR7DNR59BoU5L9TPP4NKw8vm0WSkNnAaXQAmM1ZIlOjqb-yRccnKgmt5DIGK0FURE1?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw)

Create new API key for ChattyHiring and copy it to chattyhiring api key in the integration seetings of chattyhiring. Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXcCJu3JK31YcIg3TmULdWWX7drme175PyjQe39cEBQmobVfiZ8_on_Q3f163KVDaWaXM1X68nKjW44T39qw9bENtxLA0-n6wfEl-lFpgdrKa0G6KcJq_X1REk9tLByhueT0JXRzmNwz7xXHcp3lo4G7hEf3?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw" size="92" width="1024" height="234" position="center" darkWidth="1024" darkHeight="234" showCaption="false"}

Navigate to [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/chattyhiring. ](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys)Select ChattyHiring and add the generated key from ChattyHiring. And select the Ashby api key that you just created in the Ashby API Key dropdown.

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfFQlOMREqNUuylzMjW1toj7iNauVwW8YYPKsfzJghh_Eg_gN7J19lqkUVQHV33IGHB8h7-18DFRsyjklbhDxA1B8Fha3iEnzQL4B8objXiSJ6COMzR7JsJvtydOMtAILlyiXj_IlIHxtKhtDy0-9yrPVoQ?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw)

Add ChattyHiring key from the first step and select chattyhiring ashby key

## Getting started in Ashby

With the integration activated, you can now add a new AI Interview trigger to any job stage.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXffjG5eSiZcgR7M_tvcG0wIatQ4hm9IbR-Dq3KbGPgQTgYOeP5j1ATzJuw8tL5Tgs2DM4q1S5J_11KKuNOahop06Rqpg28CvlUrYpbDOBHVkosXB2Gs6pIKBvwNPPjo42b3QNjUD9V-N1FoC1CS5f-MMtFe?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw" size="88" width="1024" height="557" position="center" darkWidth="1024" darkHeight="557" showCaption="false"}

Or you can add it directly to candidates

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXciuTDM96qOj89p7NSI-3BcJRnbMSdMcPi0kgKCxcPNOD92rGX9jCSDKciKyqEj5JG3P0wL4bTvNpsGjkvx-v5MeRm3zUdi1tYuZmZ7XwY6iscwLs0Lg2rxYS2zB5NFEeC_AyESkD3YDR6WfN78pjFeTKs?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw)

You can trigger ChattyHiring assessment directly from the candidate view

Note: Now ChattyHiring will send interview email or WhatsApp invitation to the candidates.

After it has been sent the interview status will be displayed in Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXeOO5Nqtw-Q1zr6PBeEDGZr3nRD1fkR40vXKDcz6S5cgxAYFwhI1BhTbRJJvj-NUom-Mgwja6MVg_hudWYdrnE323lHffL-bM3hPnSb4kGS1VCXg-Uc-JsjbsJ7dqMG-Day9Cyxl5VRRELvwvlbm0ZrOrY?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw" size="72" width="740" height="238" position="center" darkWidth="740" darkHeight="238" showCaption="false"}

Once the candidate finishes the interview you will be able to see the results on Ashby and ChattyHiring

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXevFrv54-QqBd66JAliPjlMa0lzJ-lbQh5zbXpKAWaeGn8yikzZxRCRA51QW3euG5afzBo3U1lmEtO6wVkfdBvq1HL-APAS39bjZ6x5szM04zu5vESmjlax3mr5X2_xTKapGK1rxBuziWicyhKbu9fP1Mc?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw" size="56" width="948" height="906" position="center" darkWidth="948" darkHeight="906" showCaption="false"}

Optional: In the candidate pipeline view you can add columns with information that you receive from ChattyHiring for easier use.

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdA6hAqmpKQrJ38EAHyvzmCw9-Uhz9DOpg5JZklu-zWQiAPILDQnek7ueUJ3I3VRrOlHmwjafhsgnUxyFwM02XvBJezElEAv2S7JDuCtG-29jOw7kSchwdHk5WgdsRAK-BWBZzuvO-kLVRg4Bt9MmMlAXs?key=fQbqdtdU0wTuedRcE8g8Nw)

And that’s it! After candidates complete the interview, the results will appear on the main screen and in the candidate pipeline view.&#x20;

## Personalizing the ChattyHiring Experience

Customize your experience in the ChattyHiring platform:

- Create/Edit New Templates: Tailor AI Interview templates to ensure relevant questions for your openings.
- Adjust the Presentation Email: Customize the email wording to reflect your company’s values.
- Adjust the Email Domain: Choose the email account for sending emails.
- Adjust the Branding: Select appropriate colors and logos for the AI interview interface.

[title] Welcome to the Jungle
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

This integration will allow your Ashby job posting to the Welcome to the Jungle job board. For Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta), please check out [Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta)](docId:9FBBLmVS6WeiYpM2NOdvz)&#x20;

## Prerequisites

:::hint{type="warning"}
An Ashby Org Admin user will need to enable the integration in Ashby, and you’ll require an active Pro+ Package or higher Welcome to the Jungle subscription. Customers who are currently on the Pro Package who have already integrated with Ashby will need to upgrade to a package with external ATS available.
:::

## Enabling the integration

Step 1: Head over to the Welcome to the Jungle integration settings page in the Marketplace at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/welcome-to-the-jungle](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/welcome-to-the-jungle).

Step 2: Click on the `+Enable Welcome to the Jungle` button.

Step 3: After enabling on the Ashby end, you’ll need to reach out to your Welcome to the Jungle account manager. Once your Welcome to the Jungle account manager confirms the integration, you’re set!

## Using the Welcome to the Jungle integration

After the integration is enabled, it’ll take up to 24 hours for job postings in Ashby to sync to  Welcome to the Jungle.

## Additional Information

:::hint{type="warning"}
Additional information can be found at [https://help.welcometothejungle.com/comment-activer-et-utiliser-lint%C3%A9gration-ashby](https://help.welcometothejungle.com/comment-activer-et-utiliser-lint%C3%A9gration-ashby). If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).
:::


[title] Adaface
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Adaface helps companies automate the first-round interviews with a conversational chatbot, Ada. Recruitment teams prefer Adaface because we focus on relevant challenges as opposed to asking trick questions, leading to accurate shortlisting.

Through this integration, you can send Adaface assessment tests to candidates via Ashby and receive the candidate's results in Ashby.

## Prerequisites

:::hint{type="warning"}
A paid Adaface plan and Ashby Org Admin access is required to enable this integration.
:::

## Connect Adaface with Ashby

1: Reach out to your Adaface account manager to request your Adaface API key.

2: Once provided with your Adaface API key, head over to the [Adaface integration settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/adaface) in the Ashby integration marketplace and click `Enable Adaface`

![Screenshot 2023-05-04 at 10.24.41 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/p-w9--FCpXX79DrzyRHCy_screenshot2023-05-04at102441am.png)

3: Copy and paste the Adaface API key.

4: Generate an Ashby API key. Our guide on this can be found at [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ) Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment. You will need to copy your Ashby API key for step 5, so be sure to do this before closing out the API key setup wizard.

From here, select your newly created Ashby API key from the Ashby API Key drop-down in the [Adaface integration settings tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/adaface).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/396c3cf04b827450d847fc40dcf78848.png)

5: In your Adaface Dashboard, navigate to Settings > Integrations > Ashby. Paste your Ashby API key and click on `Enable Ashby Integration`.

![image.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZuXiUmlCBRD5vqE-tecty_image.png)

That’s it! You’ve now integrated Adaface with Ashby&#x20;

## Using the Integration

The assessment can be initialized directly on the candidate’s profile page or as an automated activity in the interview plan stage.

- Manually initialize the assessment on the candidate’s profile page by going to the candidate’s profile page and clicking on the `+ New Activity` button and choosing the Adaface integration. Then, select the Adaface assessment. The initialized assessment will show on the candidate’s profile.

![new activity.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jcSlfg49wJfCz8s4yoYg1_newactivity.gif)

- Automate the assessment initialization as an interview plan stage activity. To do this, click on the `Add Activity to…` button for the interview plan stage. Choose Adaface and select the assessment. After a reviewer is assigned, this will add the activity to the stage. Then when a candidate is advanced to that stage, the assessment will automatically be initialized.

![New activity in plan.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yztA8mSwaHOmEJL6pwVKk_newactivityinplan.gif)

After the assessment is initialized, you can start the assessment by clicking on the `Start Assessment` button on the candidate’s profile page. This will invite the candidate to complete the assessment.

In Ashby, you’ll be able to see the assessment’s status, score and cancel the assessment.

![results.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_FivBQekDfhnsWlu1kUqt_results.png)

## Additional Information

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information, head over to [https://help.adaface.com/en/articles/7338946-adaface-ashby-integration](https://help.adaface.com/en/articles/7338946-adaface-ashby-integration). If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).
:::


[title] Jobma
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

Customers using Ashby can now invite candidates for video interviews right from Ashby’s dashboard. This not only saves time but also gets the most relevant candidates in faster. You can leverage Jobma’s integration with Ashby by adding video interviews early in the application process and conducting comprehensive candidate assessments powered by Jobma.

## Prerequisites

:::hint{type="warning"}
A paid Jobma subscription and Org Admin access to Ashby are required to enable this integration.
:::

## Enabling the Integration

1. First, create an Interview Kit in Jobma.
2. Next, head over to your Ashby Marketplace and go to the Jobma integration at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/jobma](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/jobma).
3. Click on the `+Enable Jobma` button.
4. Create an Ashby API key for the Jobma integration and copy the key generated.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Sd4jNv7s3AW_l8S14_-nC_jobma.gif" size="100" alt="jobma.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Jobma%205bf5673dec6f4ee09283450dc0abd0bf/jobma.gif" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Jobma 5bf5673dec6f4ee09283450dc0abd0bf/jobma.gif" width="788" height="576" darkWidth="788" darkHeight="576" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

5. In Jobma, paste the Ashby-generated key and save.
6. Then, copy the API key generated in Jobma and paste this into the Ashby Jobma API Key field.

That’s it! You’ve now integrated Jobma with Ashby&#x20;

## Video Walkthrough

::embed[[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7MsKyF36vd4](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7MsKyF36vd4)]{url="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7MsKyF36vd4"}

## Using the Integration

When integrating with Jobma, you can invite candidates to Jobma interviews. This is done by clicking on the `+New Activity` button and choosing `Assessment` on the candidate’s profile.

Then, choose the Jobma Interview Kit to send to the candidate. Once this activity is added, you’ll need to click on the `Start Assessment` button to send the invite to the candidate.

After the candidate completes their interview, the assessment activity on the candidate profile will show completed and a link to their interview in Jobma will be added as a Note.

![Screenshot 2023-08-30 at 12.24.28 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GrhwgQrNH32QWvdnDVWNC_screenshot2023-08-30at122428pm.png)

## Additional Information

For more information, head over to [https://www.jobma.com/blog/jobma-now-integrates-with-ashby/](https://www.jobma.com/blog/jobma-now-integrates-with-ashby/). If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] Xref
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Reference Checks/

The Xref integration supports generating reference requests using the email address associated with a candidate’s profile.

### Setting up the integration

- Log into your Xref account and find the Ashby integration to collect your API key.
- Log into Ashby (Org Admin) and visit the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace)
- Find the [Xref integration](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/633e9c08-df83-488e-a163-a4181283ae71), generate an Ashby API key, and input your Xref API key.
- You can choose to configure the activity on the interview plan or automatically the XRef activity for the Offer or Hired Stage of all interview plans.

### Using the integration

There are three configuration options:

- Adding reference requests one-off
  - From the candidate profile, click `Add Activity` and generate an Xref activity. Follow the steps on the activity that appears.
- Configuring them on the interview plan
  - Visit the settings of a job and add the activity to the reference check stage of your interview plan. When a candidate enters the stage the activity will appear on their profile. From there, you can manually complete the steps to send the request.
- Automatically adding the assessment to offer or hired stages
  - Choose the stage you’d like to include the activity on while configuring the integration. When a candidate enters the designated stage, the corresponding activity will appear.

### Viewing the results

- When all references have been completed, the activity's status will be updated. The hiring team will receive notifications as the status changes.
- There will be a link to the results on the activity upon completion.

[title] Roots (Deel Engage)
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

Once configured, the app will pull all open jobs from Ashby into Slack where users can search through them and add referrals at will. Any referrals submitted through Referrals ⚡ by Deel will immediately create a new referral in Ashby with the proper information and referrer attributed.

### Here’s a quick installation guide:

:::hint{type="warning"}
In order to install this integration, your company needs to be a customer of both Roots/Deel and Ashby and you need Organization Admin access within Ashby.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Open Ashby and navigate to the Admin panel.
2. Select Integrations from the left menu and find the Roots tile.
3. Select `Create API key for Roots` and copy the newly generated API key.
4. Head back to Referrals ⚡ by Deel (in Slack) so that you can add the key and finalize the integration.
5. Add the Ashby API key to Referrals ⚡ by Deel - some tests will be run to ensure the
   right permissions have been added to the key and you’re all set!


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/48c86aec3af8697afcc0191da6cc7256.png)
:::
::::

### Using the app once it’s integrated:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once your integration is finalized, open jobs will be synced from Ashby into Referrals ⚡ by Deel within 15 minutes. Then, users can easily filter those jobs by department or location and add referrals accordingly

Clicking any `Add Referral` button will open up the referral submission form where users can input information about the candidate they’d like to refer. Any specific questions or fields that have been set up for your organization’s Referral Form in Ashby (configured here), will be shown when submitting a referral.

Please note that Referrals by Deel cannot support a required file field in your referral form, but will always prompt the user to upload a resume.

After a referral is submitted, the candidate/opportunity will populate in Ashby with the proper user/referrer attributed.

As candidates are updated and moved through stages in Ashby, Referrals ⚡ by Deel will reflect those updates in Slack, so that the user can keep track of their submissions without needing to ping admins/recruiters for updates.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2022-05-06 at 12.24.48 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kXM1gqvqEgwPAOKAiFOwL_screenshot2022-05-06at122448pm.png)

![Screen Shot 2022-05-06 at 12.26.31 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mtawZfD4ZY6jgXXw2us4M_screenshot2022-05-06at122631pm.png)

![Screen Shot 2022-05-06 at 12.27.58 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mngzuyR-QZNB5-pTRkGN6_screenshot2022-05-06at122758pm.png)

![Screen Shot 2022-05-06 at 12.28.43 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TXdYCppWQQJZdVIZfCn1E_screenshot2022-05-06at122843pm.png)


:::
::::




[title] Code Interview
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

This guide will walk you through the steps to integrate Ashby with CodeInterview\.io, enabling the automatic generation of interview links and streamlined candidate management.

### Step 1: Configure Ashby Integration in CodeInterview\.io

1.  Log in to CodeInterview\.io :
   - Go to [https://codeinterview.io/login](https://codeinterview.io/login) and log in to your account.
2.  Navigate to Integrations: [Login to Conduct Coding Interviews Online](https://codeinterview.io/login).
   - Click on `Settings` in the menu.
   - Select `Integrations` from the settings menu.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TSAWPNQQljfutu80Jzrqs_.blob)

3. Configure Ashby :
   - Click on Configure integration.
   - You will need an API key from Ashby to proceed.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/m2keH3nUVH_CX9jlksyRF_.blob)

### Step 2: Add *Codeinterview\.io* integration from Ashby

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
[Log in](https://app.ashbyhq.com/login) to Ashby.&#x20;
:::

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZiDD6t5cy6en-fss81jf9_.blob)

1. Access the Admin panel:
   - Click on `Admin` from the menu bar.
   - Open the integrations menu from the sidebar.
2. Configure *Codeinterview\.io* integration for interview creation:
   - Search for “Code Interview” in the search bar and click on the `Code Interview` tile to open the integration settings panel.
3. Generate API Key for Code Interview
   - Click on `Create API Key for Code Interview` to generate an API key for Code Interview

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/un_2HzEXw_gDaJHQq3vVm_.blob)



:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="2" listRestartPolite="2" indent="2"}
Copy the generated code into your clipboard
:::

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lvGXTV7TJ3ZcaRRC4Aa85_.blob)

### Step 3: Refresh and Sync Data 

1. Refresh CodeInterview\.io:
   - Save the setting at Codeinterview\.io with the API Key and refresh the page.
2. Select Stages for Interview Links:
   - Choose the stages where you want interview links to be automatically generated.
   - When a candidate progresses to these stages, an interview link will be created in Ashby.

### Step 4: Verify Webhook Creation in Ashby 

1. Go to Webhooks :
   - In the Ashby Admin Panel, click on  Webhooks.
2. Ensure the webhook is created only once with the following options

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oSdbr_2zUClUb-Y1nwqCv_.blob)

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listRestartPolite="1" indent="2"}
Webhook Type: candidateStageChange
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="2" indent="2"}
Request URL: api.codeinterview\.io/v1/ashby/candidate-stage-change/\<id>
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" listStart="3" indent="2"}
Enabled: True
:::

### Step 5: Create Interview Links 

1. Add a Candidate in Ashby:
   - Add a candidate to Ashby and assign them to a job.
2. Select/Change Candidate Stage
   - Select the candidate’s stage where the interview link is enabled and refresh the page.
3. Generate Interview Link :
   - If the interview link is enabled for the selected stage, a link will automatically appear in the  Notes section of the candidate's profile in Ashby. Refresh the Ashby panel and verify the generated link.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3bXtoF9e1GYB4DxX7DeaZ_.blob)

### Troubleshooting Tips 

API Key Issues: Ensure the API key is correctly copied and pasted into CodeInterview\.io.

Webhook Errors: Verify the Webhook Type and Request URL are accurate.

&#x20;If you have any questions, please contact Code Interview at [https://codeinterview.io/contact](https://codeinterview.io/contact)&#x20;

[title] Hatchways
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Easily customize GitHub-based technical assessments, where candidates can complete tasks like reviewing code, submitting a pull request, or improving a system’s design.

## Prerequisites

:::hint{type="warning"}
You’ll need Ashby Org Admin access to generate an API key.
:::

## Connect Hatchways with Ashby

Head over to the [Hatchways integration settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/hatchways) in the Ashby integration marketplace and click on the `+Create API key` for Hatchways to create a new Ashby API key. Copy the key generated because this will need to be provided to Hatchways.

Configure a Candidate Application Changed Stage webhook at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/webhooks](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/webhooks). This will let Hatchways know when a candidate should be sent an assessment.
The Request URL will be provided by Hatchways, but you’ll generate the Secret Token, which you’ll provide to Hatchways.

Provide [hello@hatchways.io](mailto\:hello@hatchways.io) with:

- Ashby Job IDs
- The API key generated in Ashby from Step 1
- The Secret Token generated in Step 2
- The interview plan stage the assessment should be initiated on
- Which assessment to send candidates
- If you’d like additional Notes in Ashby and/or emails to one or more recipients with updates about candidate progress as they work through the assessment.

:::hint{type="success"}
That’s it! You’ve now integrated Hatchways with Ashby!
:::

## Using the Integration

The assessment is automatically initialized in Hatchways when a candidate is moved to the interview plan stage(s) you’ve set for the integration. The candidate receives an email to start the assessments directly from Hatchways.

As the candidate works through the assessment, updates will be provided as notes on the candidate profile page. Once they’ve completed the assessment, a link to the results will be added as a note on the candidate profile page.

## Video Walkthrough

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/9b1da78d8f9f43d2b84575036412f46f"}

## Additional Information

If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] Background Checks
[path] Integrations/Assessments/


[title] Woody
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

This guide explains how to integrate WoodyJobs with Ashby.

WoodyJobs is a niche job board focused on creative Product, Design, and Tech roles. It reaches 8,000+ Product Designers and other creative professionals across SaaS, Fintech, Gaming, and related industries. Ashby customers can use the WoodyJobs integration to distribute jobs directly to this audience from within their ATS.

# Connecting the integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
Users must be an Organizational Admin to set up this integration.&#x20;
:::

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations** and search for the [Woody](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/woody).&#x20;
2. Click `+ Enable Woody`.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
If you need assistance with connecting the Woody integration in their tool, you can reach out to their support team at [https://www.woodyjobs.com/contact](https://www.woodyjobs.com/contact).
:::

# Using the integration

:::hint{type="info"}
This integration allows you to post up to two jobs for free per month on WoodyJobs. Additional posts are a paid feature. See [WoodyJobs pricing ](https://www.woodyjobs.com/job/post)for more details.
:::

When creating or editing a job posting in Ashby, navigate to the **Basic Info** tab. Under the **Third-Party Job Boards** section, **Woody** appears as an option.

![Third-Party Job Boards section showing Woody as an enabled option](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Wl_vSCY4eH-Ig5U7TarZp_product-documentation-specialist-acent-ashby-2026-05-28-at-25224-pm.jpg)

Once submitted, WoodyJobs manually reviews each listing before publishing to ensure it's relevant to their audience. Approved jobs are shared across their social channels, partner communities, and weekly job alert.

:::hint{type="success"}
You are now ready to use the Ashby \<> Woody integration! For more information on WoodyJobs, view their [Ashby ATS x WoodyJobs Integration article](https://www.woodyjobs.com/recruiting-partners/ashby).&#x20;
:::


[title] BluCollr
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

BluCollr’s Ashby integration makes it easy to source quality candidates for skilled and semi-skilled labor roles—directly from your existing Ashby workflow.

### Integration Overview

Integrating BluCollr with Ashby is a quick process that only requires a few steps. Simply follow BluCollr's integration setup flow to connect your Ashby account and complete the configuration to enable the integration.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://blucollr.com/ashby).

[title] Coderbyte
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Coderbyte is an official partner of Ashby and offers a native integration. For information on setting up this integration, please check out Coderbyte’s documentation [here](https://help.coderbyte.com/knowledge/set-up-an-ashby-integration).

For more information on setting up Workflows to automate tasks between Coderbyte and Ashby, check out Coderbyte’s documentation [here](https://help.coderbyte.com/knowledge/create-workflows).

[title] Screenify
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Screenify account with Ashby. Screenify offers fully automated, intelligent, and consistent AI interviews that feel like speaking with a real human. &#x20;

## Integration Overview

Integrating Screenify with Ashby is a quick process that only requires a few steps. Simply follow Screenify's integration setup flow to connect your Ashby account and complete the configuration to enable the integration.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://help.screenify.ai/en/articles/11267333-integrating-ashby-with-screenify).&#x20;

[title] Searchlight
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Reference Checks/

You can set up the Ashby's Searchlight assessment integration to add Searchlight reference checks to your interview plan. Check out their documentation [here](https://www.notion.so/1083cd12940841a588dfb566c04ba035?pvs=21) to get started.

For more information on creating API keys in Ashby, check out [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ)&#x20;

Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

[title] X Hiring
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Easily sync your jobs with your X profile. Jobs can be shared with your followers and be featured on your company profile, making them discoverable by over 450m active users.

Please note that on initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.

## Setting up the Integration

1. In your Ashby account, navigate to the [Integrations Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).
2. Navigate to X under the Job Board section.
3. Select `Enable X`.
4. Jobs become discoverable in [job search](https://x.com/jobs) on X.

![Enabling the X integration in Integrations](https://cdn.zappy.app/af399df3aeef89ea556a4952120e5795.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Jobs may take up to 24 hours to go live on X. First-time syncs may take additional processing time.
:::

## For Verified Organizations on X

### Connecting your jobs to your profile

If you are a [Verified Organization](https://help.twitter.com/en/using-x/verified-organizations), please reach out to X at [xhiringsupport@x.com](mailto\:xhiringsupport@x.com) to connect
your jobs to your X profile.

:::hint{type="info"}
Jobs can be managed from the Hiring tab of the Verified Org portal.
:::

## Feature jobs on your profile

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Navigate to the Hiring tab of the Verified Org portal.
2. Click ‘Start showing my jobs’ to turn on your profile spotlight.
3. This allows your jobs to be visible directly on your X profile.
4. Star specific jobs from the Verified Org portal to customize which jobs show up first on your profile.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cb67aada1b198ddf57740bf4e8e18e32.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e149f93826067f8c1a8cc5bd55f2f98a.png)


:::
::::



## Sharing jobs to the timeline

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Add a custom short description to the job through the job editor inside the Verified Org portal (optional).
2. Copy the link to the job from X.
3. Paste the job link inside of a post to render a custom job card.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/95c300a91f0bc4d232ead634de90513c.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5a463730397f50dc32b78d84b6c9b06f.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/29dda2c5014f9c9b528766c8a751db33.png)


:::
::::



## Turning off the profile spotlight

1. Navigate to the Hiring tab of the Verified Org portal.
2. Click the settings gear icon.
3. Set the `Profile Spotlight` toggle to off.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/cb17a91baed5591bdceb64ffc35f895e.png" size="74" width="726" height="96" darkWidth="726" darkHeight="96" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Disabling the integration from X

1. Navigate to the Hiring tab of the Verified Org portal.
2. Click the settings gear icon.
3. Click `Delete integration`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7d2185e5e34510b0254c83d8dc4b91c9.png" size="74" width="727" height="140" darkWidth="727" darkHeight="140" position="center" showCaption="false"}

For any general product support questions, please contact the X Hiring product team at [xhiringsupport@x.com](mailto\:xhiringsupport@x.com).

[title] Triad
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Triad account with Ashby, allowing you to post jobs on Triad. Please note that on initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.

## Integration Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Navigate to Ashby and select Admin. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Select Triad and click `Create API key` for Tria&#x64;**.**
2. Copy the Ashby API Key and send it over to your Triad representative.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2022-11-28 at 4.46.04 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iI4yfOi2tyq3txu1B51YI_screenshot2022-11-28at44604pm.png)


:::
::::


[title] SproutsAi
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

SproutsAi offers a complete, end-to-end recruiting automation platform—streamlining everything from JD creation and multi-channel outreach to interviews and seamless onboarding.

This integration enables seamless data synchronization between SproutsAi  and Ashby, allowing users to streamline their hiring workflows and maintain accurate, up-to-date information.

## Creating an API key for the SproutsAi integration

To integration with SproutsAI, you will need to generate an API key in Ashby for the integration. Navigate to Admin > Integrations > Integrations and open the SproutsAI tab [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/sproutsAi).&#x20;

Click `Create API Key for SproutsAI` to generate your key.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1be1fc18378903486e496b8226d99746.png)


[title] SourceWhale
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

## Integrating Ashby with SourceWhale

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Open Ashby and navigate to the Admin panel.
2. Select Integrations from the left menu and find the SourceWhale tile.
3. Select `Create API key for SourceWhale` and copy the newly generated API key.
4. Head over to your SourceWhale account.
5. Select Integrations, find Ashby and paste your Ashby API key.
6. You're all set!


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07dce682249767f1db0cf6243bca2a44.png)
:::
::::


[title] Everyrole
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Connect Everyole to your Ashby account, syncing your open positions to display them on job boards that want to feature them. Please note that on initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.

**In Ashby**:

1. Open up Admin.
2. Click *Integrations* in the navigation menu on the left.
3. Scroll down and click on the Everyole tile.
4. Generate an API key and copy.

**In Everyole:**

1. In your Everyrole account, go to Jobs, then Configure Jobs.
2. Select Ashby from the list of integrations.
3. Paste your Ashby API key and click Submit.

***


[title] Western Verify
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Western Verify account with Ashby. Western Verify provides comprehensive, affordable, timely, and accurate pre-employment and tenant background screening solutions to organizations of all sizes and industries.

## Integration Overview

Integrating Western Verify with Ashby is a quick process that only requires a few steps. Simply follow Western Verify's integration setup flow to connect your Ashby account and complete the configuration to enable the integration.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://westernverify.slab.com/public/posts/ashby-hq-integration-ca0srm1g).

[title] Assessments
[path] Integrations/


[title] Talvin AI
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Talvin AI account with Ashby. Talvin's AI Recruitment Agent streamlines hiring by reviewing hundreds of candidates in days instead of weeks. It provides deep insights beyond resumes, helping you make faster, data-driven decisions while reducing manual effort, saving time, and improving hiring efficiency.&#x20;

## Integration Overview

Integrating Talvin AI with Ashby is a quick process that only requires a few steps. Simply follow Talvin AI's integration setup flow to connect your Ashby account and complete the configuration to enable the integration.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://talvinai.featurebase.app/help/articles/8894868-integrating-with-ashby).&#x20;

[title] Mathison
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

## Integrating Ashby with Mathison:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Open Ashby and navigate to the Admin panel.
2. Select Integrations from the left menu and find the Mathison tile.
3. Select `Create API key` for Mathison and copy the newly generated API key.
4. Head over to your [Mathison account](http://app.mathison.io) and navigate to your Organization settings.
5. Select Connect my ATS, find Ashby, paste your Ashby API key, and click `Submit`.
6. You're all set and ready to use the integration!
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/aca0842b2482a471c50eaf5dde9f880f.png)

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qrp5vj4tAg0rXhr1gbVaV_screenshot2022-06-07at112739am.png)
:::
::::






[title] RepScout
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

RepScout provides AI-powered interviews and assessments, reducing your time investment in qualifying a pool of candidates. Recruitment managers focus on the key target criteria in an ideal candidate, and RepScout handles running and analysing the interviews and assessments directly with the candidate.

RepScout's primary focus is voice-based assessments, making the platform ideal for companies hiring for roles with a strong communications component.

RepScout’s integration with Ashby allows you to seamlessly add a range of RepScout assessments to a job's interview plan.

## Prerequisites

:::hint{type="danger"}
To send RepScout assessments, a paid RepScout account with sufficient credit is required. Details on their paid plans are available here: [https://repscout.ai/pricing](https://repscout.ai/pricing)
:::

## Enable the RepScout integration

You’ll first need an account with RepScout. To sign up, head over to their [sign-up page](https://app.repscout.ai/sign-up) - they offer a range of different plans as well as a free trial. Once you have an account, you’ll be able to create an Ashby API key in the RepScout app. Use this as your integration API key for Ashby.

Next, you’ll likely need to configure your assessment templates using the RepScout app. This is done by logging into your RepScout account and updating your ‘Templates’.

Once you’ve set up and configured your assessments, you’ll be able to send the test to candidates.

## Use the RepScout integration with Ashby

Once the RepScout integration is enabled for your organization, you will be able to add the RepScout assessment as an interview stage.



![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5V2D78xqErfaTIn1jKdiL_.blob)

You can send an assessment to a candidate by selecting the `Send Assessment` button next to the candidate’s activity page.

Note: When you send an assessment in Ashby, the instructions are sent by RepScout. An email will be sent to the candidate with a link to start the assessment. This must be completed within 90 days.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iXIudfvjC0_8D8Fr9t8O-_.blob)

After it has been sent, the assessment’s status will display in Ashby.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5gzMsYwfDIQzwF10jpFIa_.blob)

## RepScout Tests

RepScout offers the ability to conduct a series of different tests in series. Typically, this may take the form of an interview followed by another industry-specific assessment, i.e. technical questions.

The test style sits between a human-led interview and a static text-prompted test. So it remains dynamic, whilst not pretending to be a real human interaction. There’s the option to record the candidate’s video or audio.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zs3pyW8mQ-OTqUNGPnoxY_.blob)

 Once the candidate has submitted their assessment, the status of the assessment will be updated to Completed. The percentage score will be shown, with a link to view the submitted test in the RepScout application. 

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/DkuTYYHbe7opjuP-DYETU_.blob)

To see a candidate’s results in RepScout, click `View in RepScout`.

RepScout's report view displays a detailed breakdown of the criteria defined by the recruiter for each assessment, along with an overarching results summary. The screenshot below shows the summary tab, which is currently selected. Here, the results of two assessments - a Voice Interview and a Technical Questions assessment - are laid out.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KJ4_tPInINtzhOPToktXj_.blob)

## RepScout’s Ethical Framework

RepScout prioritizes fairness and inclusion in its evaluation methods. To achieve this, they implement skills-based hiring alongside consistent evaluation standards for every applicant. They ensure transparency and openness in our AI algorithms by offering thorough explanations of each evaluated criterion.

RepScout strives for continuous improvement of their processes and decision-making by gathering regular feedback, ensuring their results are both consistent and aligned with RepScout’s ethical values.

## Additional resources

For additional information not covered here, reach out to [info@repscout.ai](https://info@repscout.ai). Alternatively, you can take a look at their [FAQs page](https://repscout.ai/faqs).


[title] The Selection Lab
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your The Selection Lab account with Ashby, allowing you to seamlessly send soft skill assessments to your candidates within Ashby.

## Integration Overview

With this integration, you can automatically send online soft skill assessments to your candidates within Ashby. You will be able to measure the competencies, core values, preferred company culture, intelligence of your candidates, and compare these with tons of benchmarks. After the applicant has completed the assessment, all of the results will be shown in Ashby.

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to this [guide](https://www.theselectionlab.com/pages/ashby).

[title] Puck
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Puck account with Ashby, allowing you to create fully produced podcasts for sourcing, recruiting, and hiring. Please note that on initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.

## Integration Overview

:::hint{type="info"}
With this integration, mini-podcasts are automatically added when you add or edit a job in Ashby.
:::

## Log into your Puck account

This integration is a click through workflow on the Puck employer dashboard.

If you want to modify which audio podcast recordings appear on which job pages, you can log-in to your Puck account and make the changes in your admin dashboard.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-Fgp4o6p5EtzSiCZ44RnA_screenshot2022-11-09at13534pm.png" size="68" width="2468" height="1362" darkWidth="2468" darkHeight="1362" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-11-09 at 1.35.34 PM.png" showCaption="false"}

With the integration, candidates can hear from the team while scrolling through your job board and job applications.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jyNao39FoOLeoVoVj6W0M_screenshot2022-11-09at101053am.png" size="72" width="1217" height="943" darkWidth="1217" darkHeight="943" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-11-09 at 10.10.53 AM.png" showCaption="false"}

If you have any questions, reach out to your Puck representative.

[title] PeopleCheck
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

This guide explains how to integrate PeopleCheck with Ashby.

## Integration Overview

Integrating PeopleCheck with Ashby is a straightforward process that only requires a few steps. Once enabled, you can initiate background and reference checks directly from Ashby, helping reduce manual steps, support more thorough candidate verification, and make more informed hiring decisions.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://www2.peoplecheck.com/sectors/ashby).

[title] Canditech
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

## Canditech Integration Overview

Canditech provides skills assessments and the integration with Ashby will allow you to send candidates assessments through Ashby. These can be sent to the candidate manually by adding an assessment activity to the candidate’s profile, or automatically by adding the assessment as an activity to the interview plan stage.

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to: [https://helpcenter.canditech.io/en/articles/6876431-ashby-integration](https://helpcenter.canditech.io/en/articles/6876431-ashby-integration). For any questions or support, reach out to [support@canditech.io](mailto\:support@canditech.io) for assistance.

[title] Interseller
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

With this integration, you can automatically sync contacts and assign them to job positions in Ashby whenever they're added to a sequence on Interseller.

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to this [guide](https://help.interseller.io/article/250-using-interseller-with-ashby).

[title] Colleva
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Colleva account with Ashby. Colleva’s Ashby integration is powered by Kombo, and the setup is completed through Kombo’s connection flow.

## Integration Overview

Integrating Colleva with Ashby is a quick process that only requires a few steps. Simply generate an API key, connect your Ashby account through Kombo’s integration flow, and complete the setup to enable the integration.

Detailed step-by-step instructions can be found [here](https://help.kombo.dev/hc/en-us/articles/29648032780689-Ashby-Assessment-How-do-I-link-my-account).

## Set up the Colleva Integration

1. Go to` Admin → Integrations → Integrations`
2. Find [Colleva](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/colleva)[ ](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/ezra-ai-labs)and click `+ Enable Colleva`
3. Enter your `Colleva API Key`
4. Under `Ashby API Key`, select the key you just created

[title] Veremark
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Veremark account with Ashby.

This video and article explains how to get started with the Veremark \<> Ashby integration

::embed[]{url="https://vimeo.com/945761074"}

## Initial setup

### Veremark setup

- First setup the Veremark account with the relevant criteria and checks that you want to order through Ashby.
- Within Settings-> Integrations click on the Ashby icon to create and display the PartnerKey record.
- Copy that API Key, paste into your favourite notes app. This will be used in the next step within Ashby.

![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/Ashby1.png?width=688\&height=432\&name=Ashby1.png)

### Ashby Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Next navigate to Admin -> API keys in Ashby. Generate the Ashby API key by clicking the `+ New` icon and selecting Veremark from the dropdown list of partners. Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment. Once you’ve set up your API key, be sure to copy it before closing out the setup wizard.
- Share the Ashby API key with your Veremark rep.
- Configure Veremark integration in Ashby app. On the Ashby app go to the Admin panel and click Integrations on the side panel (Fig. 5). Search for Veremark and enter the Veremark API key in the box shown


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/Asby2.png?width=688&height=286&name=Asby2.png)

![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/ashby3.png?width=688&height=286&name=ashby3.png)

![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/image-png-May-10-2024-02-28-22-7981-PM.png?width=688&height=55&name=image-png-May-10-2024-02-28-22-7981-PM.png)


:::
::::

## Ordering Veremark checks in Ashby

### Adding the background check in the Interview Plan

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Navigate to the candidate pipeline for a role you are hiring for and click Interview Plan. You can decide on which step of the custom Interview plan to add the Veremark background checks.

The assessment can be started from the candidate details page, over the step that was previously setup in the interview plan as a starting point of the background check.

Once the background check process is finished in Veremark, the system automatically publishes the data on Ashby and you can see the results.

The following can be seen:

- When the overall status was changed and to what state it was changed
- The result flag
- The direct link to the report in the Veremark app
- The date/time when the assessment data (report url and status) was sent to Ashby
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/a2832fc0-9437-4a6e-ac7a-f164d1451a77.png?width=688&height=174&name=a2832fc0-9437-4a6e-ac7a-f164d1451a77.png)

![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/80bc4e4a-3ff2-4e50-8a2b-624474a74902.png?width=688&height=383&name=80bc4e4a-3ff2-4e50-8a2b-624474a74902.png)

![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/91603edf-28b5-43d3-9c5a-94329822e0e5.png?width=688&height=305&name=91603edf-28b5-43d3-9c5a-94329822e0e5.png)

![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/9fde8428-7efd-4ea6-acf6-7a74e5dd0409.png?width=688&height=559&name=9fde8428-7efd-4ea6-acf6-7a74e5dd0409.png)

![](https://help.veremark.com/hs-fs/hubfs/350e4b73-6f23-4ef4-9495-5c2cb823eec2.png?width=688&height=210&name=350e4b73-6f23-4ef4-9495-5c2cb823eec2.png)

****
:::
::::


[title] Interview Platforms
[path] Integrations/Assessments/


[title] Reference Checks
[path] Integrations/Assessments/


[title] Video Interviewing
[path] Integrations/


[title] Mercer | Mettl
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Mercer | Mettl account with Ashby. Mercer | Mettl's integration with Ashby allows you to link your Mercer | Mettl account with Ashby, send Mercer | Mettl Assessments to candidates from Ashby and get detailed results for these assessments back in Ashby.

## Integration Overview

🔗 Mercer | Mettl is an All-in-one assessment platform for effective talent management. Measure personality, aptitude, communication and job skills.

:::hint{type="warning"}
To enable this integration, you should have a Mercer | Mettl enterprise account.
:::

## Connect Mercer | Mettl with Ashby

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- In Ashby, create an API key at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys). Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment. For more on creating an API key, check out [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ)&#x20;
- Copy the key created. Send this key to Mercer | Mettl’s Support team at [mettl-delivery@mercer.com](mailto\:mettl-delivery@mercer.com) and request your Mercer | Mettl public key at the same time.
- Once you receive your Mercer | Mettl public key, head over to the Ashby Integrations settings page at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/mercer-mettl](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/mercer-mettl).
- Tap on the `+Enable Mercer | Mettl`button to enter the Mercer | Mettl public key provided by Mercer | Mettl’s Support team and select your Ashby-generated key from the Ashby API Key dropdown box. You don’t have to enter anything in the Staging base URL field.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![1 Create API Key.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/0d971300288f4ad0b70f8c9afc78db68.png)

![set up.jpg](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/unQYVfayI6Svr5mdHlszQ_setup.jpg)


:::
::::

:::hint{type="success"}
You can now start sending Mercer | Mettl assessment requests in your Ashby account
:::



## Sending Assessments

Assessments can be initiated directly in the candidate’s profile page or as an interview plan activity.

- In the candidate’s profile:

![candidate profile activity.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gfT2KbfeZfHV49LxjwXa8_candidateprofileactivity.gif)

- Add the Assessment activity to the interview plan stage. This will automatically initiate the assessment when a candidate is moved to that stage.

![Interview Plan activity.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_VL-OPenq-uCqcGGaLaK3_interviewplanactivity.gif)

Once the assessment is initiated, click the `Start Assessment` button to send email the assessment to the candidate.

![start assessment.jpg](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EEdO9bCDIlcJj6QH1nBEp_startassessment.jpg)

## Viewing the results of the assessment

When a candidate has completed the assessment, their results will show on the candidate’s profile in Ashby. You may view more detailed information about their assessment by expanding the activity and clicking on the hyperlink in the activity to go to your Mercer | Mettl dashboard.

![completed.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ylQpPjW7P5dTtWTit_UN9_completed.gif)

## Video Instructions to set up and use the integration

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/377b33197f0347dcaa655315e19b9983"}

## Additional Information

Mercer | Mettl’s documentation on the integration can be found [here](https://support.mettl.com/portal/en/kb/articles/integration-with-ashby#Enabling_the_Mercer__Mettl__AshbyIntegration). If you have any additional questions or feedback about the Mercer | Mettl integration, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] LinkedIn Job Posting
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

LinkedIn is a major channel for reaching active job seekers. Ashby automatically posts and updates your open roles on LinkedIn with no manual reposting required. This article covers two ways to connect your Ashby Job Board with LinkedIn: [Basic Jobs](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/110940/basic-jobs-on-linkedin-overview?lang=en), LinkedIn’s free ATS-integrated listing option, and [Job Wrapping](https://www.linkedin.com/help/recruiter/answer/a1306845), a paid option that promotes roles into LinkedIn Job Slots for greater visibility and reach. It also covers how to generate custom tracking links to accurately attribute applications, along with troubleshooting tips and answers to common questions.

# Post your jobs as Basic Jobs (free)

:::hint{type="warning"}
LinkedIn only allows free job postings via Applicant Tracking System (ATS) integrations for companies that have been a paying customer for at least 30 days. You can configure the integration when setting up your Ashby account, but jobs are not posted to LinkedIn until the 30-day threshold has passed.
:::

This is part of a LinkedIn-wide policy change to reduce fraudulent postings and is not specific to Ashby. If you have a paid job slot contract with LinkedIn, follow the [Job Wrapping](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp) steps below.

If you don't have an active LinkedIn contract, there is a workaround for posting jobs manually on LinkedIn during the 30-day period. For more information, see [Creating custom tracking links for manual job posting & Job Wrapping](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp) below.

LinkedIn Basic Jobs, formerly known as Limited Listings, are picked up from your Ashby Job Board automatically. These jobs are visible to candidates actively conducting job searches on LinkedIn or viewing a company's [LinkedIn Page](https://www.linkedin.com/help/recruiter/answer/28406).

## Step 1: Enable the LinkedIn integration from the Ashby integrations marketplace

To enable automatically posting Basic Jobs:

1. Navigate to the LinkedIn integration panel at **Admin > Integrations > Integrations**. You need to be an Organization Admin to access the Integrations Marketplace.
2. Click `Enable LinkedIn` within the integration panel.&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d76ee28260892e1fbfa5ad4faaedbd10.png)

3. Then add your [LinkedIn Company ID](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/a415420) and confirm your source.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/dfc7fd07e6510ecd16e611b177a1ae8c.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="601" height="469" darkWidth="601" darkHeight="469" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Once the 30-day threshold has passed and the integration is enabled, it can take up to two business days for your roles to be posted as Basic Jobs to LinkedIn.
:::

**Where do I find my Company ID?**

You can find the Company ID in the URL of the search results page when you click `See all jobs` on your LinkedIn Page.

If you have yet to post jobs to LinkedIn, you can find your Company ID by viewing all people in the company and extracting the `currentCompany` from the URL. The Company ID is a numeric value and is usually six to nine digits long. For more information on finding your Company ID, see [LinkedIn's guide to finding your Company ID](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/a415420).

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you use a free LinkedIn account, you cannot apply spend to Basic Jobs pushed over from Ashby via the integration within your **LinkedIn Admin** portal.
:::

## Step 2: Enable basic job posting in LinkedIn

If you are creating a new LinkedIn company page or posting a Basic Job for the first time, LinkedIn requires your company to complete the following steps before Basic Jobs can be listed on your company's page:

- Navigate to **Settings > Job Postings** in your LinkedIn Company page (a company page admin needs to do this).
- Switch on the `Enable basic job posting` option.
- Click `+ Connect ATS` and select Ashby from the dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hVBazPoco8bL0B5tyFP01_fwd-please-confirm-receipt-abbye-ashbyhqcom-ashby-mail-2026-03-16-at-103513-am.jpg" size="94" width="1728" height="1234" position="center" darkWidth="1728" darkHeight="1234" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you do not see Ashby listed, ensure that you have followed the initial steps above first. Once the integration has been configured from Ashby's integration marketplace, it takes roughly 24 hours for LinkedIn to reflect the updated feed.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Companies that have already posted Basic Jobs via another ATS and have configured LinkedIn in Ashby's integration marketplace do not need to re-enable the basic job posting toggle in LinkedIn. However, ensure Ashby is selected by clicking `+ Connect ATS` and choosing Ashby from the list.
:::

# Job Wrapping

:::hint{type="info"}
Job Wrapping is a service LinkedIn provides to ingest jobs in bulk from your company's career site or ATS and post them on LinkedIn. LinkedIn's [full guide on Job Wrapping](https://www.linkedin.com/help/recruiter/answer/a1306845) is available in LinkedIn's Help Center. LinkedIn's [Job Wrapping FAQs](https://www.linkedin.com/help/recruiter/answer/a414344) are also available.
:::

With Job Wrapping, LinkedIn pulls jobs from Ashby, uploads them as Basic Jobs, and then promotes jobs meeting your LinkedIn criteria into one of your Job Slots.

Jobs in Job Slots have:

- Greater visibility and reach
- Increased promotion
- Integration with other LinkedIn products
- On-demand analytics and reporting

## Setting up Job Wrapping

To start the setup process, take the following steps in LinkedIn Recruiter:

1. Click on your profile picture at the top of the home page in Recruiter.
2. Click `Product settings` in the drop-down menu.
3. Click `Job posting` on the left-hand side.
4. Next to **Job sources for automated job postings**, click `View/Edit`.
5. Click the **Job source requests** tab.
6. Click `Add new job source`.
7. Using the **Select ATS or other job source** drop-down, select Ashby.

### Obtaining your URL

To get your URL from Ashby to add to the `Job Source URL` field in Recruiter:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations** and open up the LinkedIn integration tile.
2. Enable the `Use Job Wrapping?` option to generate your feed URL.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/0ed9a35c9e624253c77132393d402b30.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="715" height="359" darkWidth="715" darkHeight="359" showCaption="false"}

3. Update the source listed in the **Source** field to **Inbound: LinkedIn Job Wrapping**.
4. Copy the URL and add it to the `Job Source URL` field in LinkedIn.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you use job slots and Job Wrapping, reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) if you see a message about a 30-day threshold.
:::



Then, fill out the remaining fields in Recruiter, such as your designated job poster and company page on LinkedIn.

For your **Applicant source tracking code**, create a custom tracking link in Ashby, then add the `utm_source` parameter into the source tracking code field in LinkedIn. You can read more on creating a custom tracking link in the [Create custom tracking links](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp) section below.


::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/410f87efd96f7c8f0c219a8154072f72.png" size="60" isUploading="false" width="399" height="508" darkWidth="399" darkHeight="508" showCaption="false"}

### Where do I find the `utm_source` parameter?

As an example, if a custom tracking link was created with the **Tracking Code** field set to `LinkedInPaid` in Ashby, add `utm_source=LinkedInPaid` to the **Use applicant source tracking code** field in LinkedIn. We recommend giving this custom tracking link the title `LinkedIn Paid` for your reference.

:::hint{type="info"}
It can take some time for your ATS source to be added. Check the status of requests in the **Job Source Requests** tab.
:::

## How can I view my promoted and basic jobs?

You can view all basic and promoted jobs in the **Jobs** menu:

- The **Promoted** tab displays the ingested jobs that met the rules you established to be moved into one of your Job Slots.
- The **Basic** tab displays the ingested jobs that do not meet the criteria you've established to qualify a job to be moved to a Job Slot.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/69965bdba167496c91ac5cba64673b01.png" size="50" isUploading="false" width="322" height="210" darkWidth="322" darkHeight="210" showCaption="false"}

## I don't see the option to set up Job Wrapping in Recruiter — what do I do?

You may need to reach out to LinkedIn Support or your LinkedIn Customer Success Manager (CSM) directly with your Ashby Extensible Markup Language (XML) feed to get your job source updated. Follow the [instructions above](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp) to find your XML feed URL. We also recommend creating a custom tracking link (more on this in the [Creating custom tracking links](docId\:LhoWOvlDTKTepHRpCNdhp) section below) and sharing that with your LinkedIn CSM along with your XML feed URL. This helps ensure the correct source is attributed to applications.

# Creating custom tracking links for manual job posting & Job Wrapping

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/837d87632bee4ed9bfdac51175e269e2"}

When manually creating a job posting on LinkedIn, you can select how you want to receive candidate information on the **Receive qualified applicants** page. More on Applicant Options is available in [LinkedIn's guide on Applicant Options](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/a517570/applicant-options-for-your-job-post?lang=en). To direct candidates to apply via Ashby, select the option to route candidates to an external website.

If you manually post jobs to LinkedIn, you can generate a custom tracking link for a job posting to automatically apply the source to applications made via your LinkedIn post.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you are manually posting jobs to LinkedIn, you are only able to post one job for free at a time. For more details, see [LinkedIn's guide on posting a free job](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/a517777).
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
You do not need to create a new source to use custom tracking links with LinkedIn. Ashby includes a default source for LinkedIn job postings, which is automatically applied when the integration is enabled. Creating a custom source is optional; you may want to do so if you prefer to track candidates under a different source name (for example, to distinguish between Basic Jobs and paid/promoted postings).
:::

If you need to create a new source for your custom tracking code:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Candidate Sources**.
2. Click `+ New Source`.
3. Add in the source name and link it to a source type, then click `Create`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4cc9640a782fd04329d23745996d9364.png)

To create a custom tracking link:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Job Boards > Custom Tracking Links**.
2. Click `+ New`.
3. Add in a title, specify the source that should be applied when your tracking link is used, and optionally add a user to credit the job consideration to. You can also specify a tracking code — if you leave this field blank, a code is randomly generated.
4. Click `Add` to create the custom tracking link.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fb7ba12330a00b26ab3e6ea5d1a96cea.png)

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/ed66dfd70d9ab8a8a1330dda9bb28328.png" size="50" isUploading="false" width="294" height="294" darkWidth="294" darkHeight="294" showCaption="false"}

Once you've created your custom tracking link, get the tracking link for your specific job if you are creating manual postings. To do this:

1. Click your newly created custom tracking link within the **Link** section. This takes you to your job board and the URL contains the tracking code.
2. Click on the job posting you want to link to your LinkedIn job posting, then copy the URL in the address bar.
3. Add this URL to your manual LinkedIn posting so candidates are redirected with the origin still captured in their job consideration.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/53d705c2871d5e4779431cca00be3b32.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e8830858fd377bd1ba508a16d615a016.png)

# Troubleshooting

- The job location in Ashby needs to have a physical location set (city/state and/or country, or a city, state, and country for roles based in the US or Canada) to be pulled in as a Basic Job. Where possible, avoid abbreviations and write city, state, and country names in full when configuring locations. If the role is remote, ensure a Country is specified. LinkedIn also has a tool where you can set up data mapping for ATS jobs to map invalid locations to standardized locations in LinkedIn — see [LinkedIn's guide on setting up data mapping for ATS jobs](https://www.linkedin.com/help/linkedin/answer/a1350594/set-up-data-mapping-for-ats-jobs?lang=en) for more details.
- When job postings sync from Ashby to LinkedIn, they show with an `Apply` button.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/92dpjz_0wXfVXZcw3Ij6U_screenshot2021-11-19at125751pm.png" size="38" width="211" height="83" darkWidth="211" darkHeight="83" position="center" alt="Posted through Ashby or was set up without Easy Apply." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- Basic Jobs posted through the Ashby integration do not show the hiring team on the post. If a hiring team shows on a job posting, that job was posted directly on LinkedIn (even if the `Apply` button redirects to Ashby).
- Free job postings do not support hyperlinks. Any hyperlinks you add to your job postings in Ashby do not show on free job postings on LinkedIn. Only job postings added via Job Wrapping support hyperlinks.

# FAQs

### How long does it take for my job to show on LinkedIn?

Your job appears on LinkedIn and is connected to your company's LinkedIn page within two business days. Any updates you make to the job posting are reflected on LinkedIn within 24 hours. If a job is already posted, LinkedIn does not accept it from Ashby as it is seen as a duplication.

### Where does the logo pull from in the preview on a LinkedIn message or post?

This comes from the image uploaded to the **Social Media** field within **Logos** on the [Theme (Job Board)](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/theme) page within **Admin**. More on setting up job board logos at [Job Board: Configuring Your Setup](docId\:f2OtyumVmeJaAt1DYRJYW).

### Are LinkedIn tags supported for Job Wrapping?

Yes. You can use [LinkedIn job wrapping tags](https://www.linkedin.com/help/recruiter/answer/a412402) by including the tags in the description of your job posting or postings on your job.

### How long does it take for a LinkedIn posting to be removed?

If you unlist or unpublish your job posting, or close out the job, if you are using the LinkedIn integration, it can take up to 24 hours for the listing to be removed from LinkedIn.

### Can I choose which postings get pulled to LinkedIn?

You can, yes. When setting up your job posting, you can use the **Third-Party Job Boards** dropdown to determine the third-party job boards this posting should be listed on.

All of the third-party job boards you have configured are listed in this dropdown. It can take some time for changes to be updated.

:::hint{type="info"}
This setting applies only if postings are added to LinkedIn via the direct integration route. If you pull job postings to LinkedIn via an XML feed, this setting does not stop postings from being listed on LinkedIn.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9b26e6e8c53e1fefcd0f9920d0a2d089.png)

### Does the XML feed include the workplace type (Remote, Hybrid, or On-Site)?

Yes, the XML feed includes this information so the workplace type is indicated on third-party job boards like LinkedIn and Indeed.

You can specify the location type within the **Location Details** section of your location settings at **Admin > Organization Setup >&#x20;**[Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/108edf6bd76767ed7fe6407a22ff4ded.png)

### I've already set up Job Wrapping with LinkedIn using the previous route — do I need to migrate over to use the new feed URL?

This is not required, but is recommended — the new feed URL has syntax specifically for Job Wrapping. To migrate over, reach out to your CSM or Support to enable the new feed option for you. You can then follow the same setup instructions as listed above.

### If I set up LinkedIn postings manually using custom tracking links during the first 30 days after signing up for Ashby, do I see duplicates when Basic Jobs are posted via the integration?

We recommend closing manual postings created in LinkedIn once you've enabled the integration and the 30-day threshold has passed to avoid duplicates when jobs are pulled through to LinkedIn as Basic Jobs. You can rely on the integration to pull through open jobs with published job postings moving forward.

### Is there a LinkedIn RSC integration available?

We don't currently have a LinkedIn Recruiter System Connect (RSC) integration.

### I entered the wrong LinkedIn Company ID when setting up the integration. How do I change it?

To modify the value added into the **LinkedIn Company ID** field within the LinkedIn integration tile, reach out to Support.

[title] Verifile
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

Verifile’s global background checks provide accurate insights and a great candidate experience to empower confident hiring and protect your business.

With this integration, customers can now:

- Order a Verifile background check package tailored to your needs; no need to switch between applications or manually input candidate data. CVs can be automatically transferred to Verifile when required too.
- Track progress in real time; enabling you to keep hiring timelines on track with ease.
- Cancel packages; if your candidate withdraws or fails early background check results, you can cancel the check at any time.
- Results and the Verifile report easily accessed within Ashby; accelerating decision making and keeping all essential candidate information in one place for easy reference and collaboration across hiring teams.

# Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/7241abd010254067a8bb165ee63fc6d5"}

# Enable the Verifile integration

1. Contact Verifile Client Services to request a Verifile API key.
   Live Chat (During opening times)
   Call us +44 (0) 1234 339 350
   Email [service@verifile.co.uk](mailto\:service@verifile.co.uk)
2. In the Ashby platform, navigate to the “Admin” tab. Select “Integrations” and search for Verifile. Click on the Verifile tile and click on “Enable Verifile”.
3. Select the Ashby stage at which you want to order the background check. This is typically “Automatically add to offer stage”. If your workflow means that you order background checks at a different stage, then select the appropriate option for you.
4. Add the Verifile API Key you got from Client Services.
5. Click in the Ashby API Key field and enter Verifile. `Click to Create new API key “Verifile”`.
6. Copy the Ashby API Key and give this to Verifile. Verifile will use the key to complete the integration set up.

# Use the Verifile integration with Ashby

- You can order a Verifile background check upon the candidate reaching the Verifile integration stage.
- You may need to provide additional data before sending the Verifile assessment. This data must be added in the Summary section.
- If the background check package you'll order includes a Standard or Enhanced DBS check, you must select a value from the Verifile DBS Job Role drop down list.
- If the package includes a basic DBS check, you must select values from the Verifile DBS Purpose of Check and Verifile DBS Employment Sector drop down lists.
- To place an order under a sub account that you have set up in the Verifile system, select the sub account name from the Verifile Account list.

![](https://s3-eu-central-1.amazonaws.com/euc-cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/101202655777/original/a8dhByyvOS44F8yYDXuYdxElPRna-wky8Q.png?1731403016)

- Next, go to the Activities & Progress area where you can click `Start Assessment`. You'll see the list of packages that you have set up with Verifile.
- Select your chosen package and click `Start`.

![](https://s3-eu-central-1.amazonaws.com/euc-cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/101202655793/original/D-keI57WDvLdtI4iJDGoCJgcMeNq_x-dxQ.png?1731403016)

- The status of the background check can be tracked in Ashby.

![](https://s3-eu-central-1.amazonaws.com/euc-cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/101202655785/original/YKP6gxAI2F7mBVHWd9aD_NYVBT7YBa_DBA.png?1731403016)

- To access the Verifile final report, click on `View in Verifile`.

![](https://s3-eu-central-1.amazonaws.com/euc-cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/101202655792/original/NCYC4dToif_4SWC5ZutCE2oA1lip3yvaGg.png?1731403016)

- You'll need Verifile system access to view the Final Report.

![](https://s3-eu-central-1.amazonaws.com/euc-cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/101202655804/original/hlZ1G9O4h4ENbVvyvOR5s_XcKoahtcUcyw.png?1731403016)


[title] Karat
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Interview Platforms/

The following steps will walk you through integrating your Ashby ATS with Karat. This integration will enable you to:

- Invite candidates to their Karat interview from within Ashby
- Get Karat status updates in Ashby
- Enable Karat to align the scoring bar based on onsite outcomes
- Automatically align Candidate States on the Karat Platform with Candidate States in Ashby.

## Adding the Karat Assessment Integration to your Ashby environment

To add the Karat Assessment integration to your Ashby environment, follow the steps below:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Please reach out to Karat Support for your Ashby Integration Secret it will be required for the Karat API Key field.
2. Navigate to the Marketplace and search for Karat or use this [link](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/karat)
   1. Click on Admin in the top menu bar
   2. Click on Integrations and then "Integrations" again on the drop-down
   3. Type Karat in the search bar
3. Click on the Karat tile and then click the green `Enable Karat` button
4. Once you've enabled the integration, you will see the field locations where you'll add the Karat API key and the Ashby API key. The Staging Base Url field can be ignored, it exists on all integrations for engineering debugging.
5. For the Karat API Key field, paste the key that you received from Karat Support in Step 1 of this document. Be careful to copy the key exactly with no leading or trailing spaces.
6. For the Ashby API Key, select the Ashby API Key field and type in Karat Integration Api Key, then click the `Create new Api Key `button
7. Copy the created API Key, it will be required to complete the integration in the Karat Platform.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/01urxp23ftxrO8jFLID2KkKg.png)

![](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/LI0pxQDzLlT20LKHW2vOAfYs.png)

![](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/2a_c7ruA8izGJanGrTKHZE7C.png)

![](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/5FjUeQfv37O5LwM4y3Wgrg3k.png)

![](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/xbj_R3AIjb1N8r0ULQgZXH4A.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6009f7e083ee4be12ef9df44b640f828.png)

![Here’s an example of a completed tile.](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/OPKEa5bhDDHp9P36r1krpt9c.png)
:::
::::

## Add API Settings to the Karat Platform

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Log in to the Karat Platform
2. Click on `Settings` on the left menu bar
3. Click on the `ATS Integrations` tab at the top
4. On the next screen, choose Ashby under the Select ATS dropdown
5. Click `Create`
6. Paste the earlier created API key from Ashby into the `client_secret` field and click `Save`


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/hbmYxLurTi_aQ8-bv1CFDcwK.png)

![](https://slabstatic.com/prod/uploads/btbsp5oi/posts/images/preload/PHObXgE67bzes7NZwsSsPkcw.png)


:::
::::

## Contact Karat Team

Once you have completed the above steps, reach back out to your Karat Support Team and let them know. You may also reach out to [support@karat.com](mailto\:support@karat.com). Once the integration setup is final, the Karat Support Team will reach back out to you to assist with mapping your Ashby Stages to the Karat Stages.

[title] First Advantage
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

:::hint{type="warning"}
The First Advantage integration is currently unavailable for customers operating on the Enterprise Advantage platform. If you’re a customer on the Enterprise Advantage platform, please reach out to your customer service team at First Advantage to discuss options and timing for an Ashby integration.
:::

The First Advantage integration supports generating background check requests using the email address associated with a candidate’s profile.

## Setting up the integration

- Navigate to the First Advantage Integration within the Integrations Marketplace and click `Enable First Advantage`
- Select a region using the `Region` dropdown. This is required and the region determined here is related to the endpoints used to service your requests via the integration. You will still see your full list of packages available even when setting one region here.
- Select the way you’d like to add assessments to candidate profiles (see [Using the Integration](docId\:TaMj-aa3RmTfiRM3VDglg) for more information)
- Input your First Advantage `Client Secret` and `Client ID` (you may need to get in touch with First Advantage for this)
- Generate an Ashby API Key (see [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ) for more information)

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/78P5c33pDkk7pvmW5lZm7_sterling-check-acent-ashby-2026-01-12-at-84819-am.jpg)

Once the initial setup is complete, you will see the option to enable syncing for Bill Code and Sub Account custom fields. Use the `Target Field Type` field to determine the custom field type you’d like to create in Ashby to sync to First Advantage. You can choose from candidate, job or opening custom field types.



::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/90673e5f249e430f0981dbb000004833.png" size="78" width="1232" height="602" position="center" darkWidth="1232" darkHeight="602" showCaption="false"}

Once you’ve configured your custom field sync settings, click `Sync Custom Fields` to create the new custom fields in Ashby. Information added to these fields in Ashby will be synced to First Advantage.

## Using the integration

There are three configuration options:

- Adding reference requests one-off
  - From the candidate profile, click `Add Activity` to generate a First Advantage activity. Then, follow the steps on the activity that appears.
- Configuring them on the interview plan
  - Visit the settings of a job and add the activity to the reference check stage of your interview plan. When a candidate enters the stage the activity will appear you can manually complete the steps to send the request.
- Automatically adding the assessment to offer or hired stages
  - Choose the stage you’d like to include the activity on while configuring the integration. When a candidate enters the designated stage, the corresponding activity will appear.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/10dfe5d44e9249cc95c0c1cd9456a847?sid=6db28c59-19e5-4ad8-a93b-8dea787241bc"}

## Viewing the results

When the package has been completed, the activity's status will be updated. The hiring team will receive notifications as the status changes. There will be a link to the results on the activity upon completion.

## FAQ

### Which First Advantage statuses are supported?

The following statuses will appear in the status section of the assessment activity:

- Initiated
- Not Started
- In Progress
- Pending
- Complete

### What permissions does the Ashby API Key need?

The First Advantage integration would require read/write access for candidates on the Ashby API key. These permissions are pre-defined and don’t need to be modified.

[title] Codility
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Codility account with Ashby, allowing you to use Codility Tests as assessments in your interview plans

## Getting Started

To connect the integration, you must generate an API Key in Codility and configure the integration within Ashby. Follow the steps below:

1. Log in to your Codility account. (Admin or Recruiter permissions required)
2. Navigate to Apps & Integrations in Codility.
3. Select Custom Integrations > Create App, name the integration Ashby, and click `Create`.
4. Copy the value once the API Key is generated, as you will need this for Ashby.
5. Open a browser tab with Ashby on the Admin > Integrations page.

## Connect Ashby to Codility

1. On the Ashby integrations page, find and select Codility, and then click the green `Enable Codility` button.
2. Next, add the Codility API Key you created to the Codility API Key field.
3. Select the Ashby API Key drop-down to create or choose an existing key for this integration. If you are choosing an existing Ashby API key for this integration, please verify that your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this includes the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.
   - Note: While it says to copy this API key, you do not need to. This API key is just used to control access for the Codility integration.

::Image[]{src="https://support.codility.com/hc/article_attachments/33406245893137" size="76" width="960" height="468" position="center" darkWidth="960" darkHeight="468" showCaption="false"}

At this point, you're all set to use Codility in your interview plans!

### Configure your Interview Plans

Now that you’ve connected the integration, the next step is configuring the Interview Plans for your jobs in Ashby. Here, you will be able to select which Codility Assessment should be used and at which stage.

1. Navigate to Jobs > Dashboard
2. Select the job for which you wish to configure a Codility test.
3. Under Interview Plans, select `+ Activity` under the corresponding stage you’d like to use.
4. Select Codility from the sidebar menu under integrations.
5. Pick the Codility assessment from the dropdown and select add.

::Image[]{src="https://support.codility.com/hc/article_attachments/9990732304791" size="86" width="960" height="471" position="center" darkWidth="960" darkHeight="471" showCaption="false"}

At this point, your job is configured, and you will see the Codility assessment under the respective stage selected.

### Sending the Invitation to your Candidate

Once you're ready to send the assessment to your candidate, you will see the option to `Start Assessment`. This will open a new window prompt where you can change the test if needed.

::Image[]{src="https://support.codility.com/hc/article_attachments/9990782412439" size="90" width="1982" height="820" position="center" darkWidth="1982" darkHeight="820" showCaption="false"}

Once you've confirmed the correct assessment has been selected, select `Start`. This will trigger the test, and an email invitation will be sent to your candidate from Codility.

::Image[]{src="https://support.codility.com/hc/article_attachments/10071535422615" size="74" width="1198" height="466" position="center" darkWidth="1198" darkHeight="466" showCaption="false"}

### Default Email in Integration

The Ashby integration will use the default invitation email selected on the Codility account. You can manage and customize this directly in your Codility account under My Account > Settings > Email Templates.

![](https://support.codility.com/hc/article_attachments/28120694447121)

If you have questions about the integration, please reach out to [support@codility.com](mailto\:support@codility.com).

[title] ZipRecruiter
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

Automatically post your jobs to ZipRecruiter.

## Enabling/disabling the integration

You can enable/disable the ZipRecruiter from the Integrations page in Ashby Admin [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/ziprecruiter). If enabled, your published job postings will be included in ZipRecruiter listings along with a tracking code to match up applicants from this source.

All ZipRecruiter jobs have 1 Click Apply enabled. This cannot be disabled.

ZipRecruiter reads and updates the feed four times daily, approximately every 6 hours. On initial setup, the initial sync can take up to 48 hours.

:::hint{type="info"}
You do not need to have a paid ZipRecruiter account to use this integration.
:::

## Location requirements

- A job’s location must have city, state, and country.
  - Only jobs in the US, Canada, and Australia are supported.
- ZipRecruiter doesn’t observe the remote location type on job locations. Instead, for a job to show up as "remote" in ZipRecruiter, the job posting is scanned for remote-like words, such as "remote", "work from anywhere", "wfh", etc.

Locations can be set [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations) in Ashby.

If jobs don’t meet ZipRecruiter’s location requirements, they will not be picked up via the integration.

## Application forms

- A job’s application form is translated into screener questions in ZipRecruiter. The candidate will answer the screener questions when applying for the job via ZipRecruiter.
- All files that come in through ZipRecruiter will be PDFs.

## Existing ZipRecruiter users

Customers who already have a ZipRecruiter account should submit a request to their account manager to have their ZipRecruiter account connected to their jobs in Ashby’s ZipRecruiter feed.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does the Ashby XML feed include the workplace type (Remote, Hybrid or On-Site)?

Yes, the XML feed now includes this information so the workplace type will be indicated on 3rd party job boards like LinkedIn and Indeed.

You can specify the location type within the Location Details section of your location settings at Admin > Organization Setup > [Locations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/locations).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/108edf6bd76767ed7fe6407a22ff4ded.png)


:::


[title] CoderPad Screen
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

&#x20;The Ashby integration for CoderPad Screen allows you to send skills assessments as part of your Ashby workflow. If you are using CoderPad Interview, please check out [CoderPad Interview](docId:8RCJasJJN2xyKrpDTCy2_)&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
The CoderPad Screen integration and CoderPad API keys are only available to those with Custom/Enterprise Coderpad accounts. Please note that if you are enabling both CoderPad Interview and CoderPad Screen, you will need to create separate API keys for each integration.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Please refer to this guide to set-up CoderPad Screen as part of your Ashby workflow: [https://coderpad.io/resources/docs/screen/integrations/ashby-for-screen/](https://coderpad.io/resources/docs/screen/integrations/ashby-for-screen/)
:::

## Setup and configuration

- Go to the [Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page by selecting Admin> Integrations > Integrations.
- Search for CoderPad Screen, and select the Screen integration.

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/image-1-1024x285.png)

- When you click on the CoderPad integration tile, you’ll see a pop-up open with places to enter your API keys. [Grab your API key from CoderPad Screen](https://coderpad.io/resources/docs/screen/more-screen-resources/api-key-access/) and paste it into the appropriate box.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you are using both CoderPad Screen and Coderpad Interview, separate API keys will need to be generated for each integration. Coderpad also recommend setting up an account specifically to use for integrations to ensure API keys stay active.
:::

- To get your Ashby API key, click on the pop-out menu to View API key settings.

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image-2-1024x131.png)

- You’ll be taken to the API Keys screen. Click `+ New`.

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image-10-1024x264.png)

- On the API creation screen, generate a new key with CoderPad Screen selected. Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image-4.png)

- Back on the API key entry screen, add your Ashby API key if it’s not already added.

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image-2-1024x131.png)

- Contact Coderpad's [customer support team](mailto\:support@coderpad.io) with your Ashby API key so we can add it into our system. Customer support will send confirmation once your Ashby API key is set up.
- When complete, your API key window should look something like this.

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image-13-1024x439.png)

## Using the integration

This section will walk you through adding an assessment step for a candidate. You can either do a one-off test scheduling, or add a test as part of a workflow.

:::BlockQuote
✅ The email sent to the candidate notifying them of their test comes directly from CoderPad Screen. You can customize the email content by editing the Screen test “Communication settings” in your dashboard.
:::

### One-off test

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Access the candidate pipeline dashboard by going to Candidates > Candidate Pipeline at the top of the screen.
2. Click on the job for which the candidate has applied to expand the menu. Then click on the candidate you’d like to assess.
3. On the candidate screen, click `+ New Activity` and then click on Assessment.
4. Select CoderPad Screen from the pop-out window.
5. Click on the Assessment type dropdown and then select one of the tests.
6. Once you’ve selected the assessment type, click on `Add Activity`.
7. Back on the candidate dashboard, click `Start Assessment`, which will send the test to the candidate (Note that, in Ashby, Start means the test has been sent. It does NOT mean the candidate has started the test). You can also cancel/delete the assessment here if needed.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/image-7-1024x308.png)

![](https://d2h1bfu6zrdxog.cloudfront.net/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/img_66069a0a6ea23.png)

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/image-3.png)

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/image-4.png)

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/image-6.png)

![](https://d2h1bfu6zrdxog.cloudfront.net/wp-content/uploads/2024/03/img_66069a0d42bf2.png)


:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
When you cancel in Ashby, it will move the assessment back to Ready to start on the Candidate page. When canceled from inside CoderPad Screen, that assessment will just be marked canceled and you will have to add another assessment if you need to modify and resend it.
:::

### Add a test to a workflow

You can set an assessment to automatically be sent to every candidate when you move them to a specific interview stage for a particular job. This is configured in the Interview Plans tab under the job. Check out the guide on [Automated Activities](docId\:MTFnByCNcVNb4MtdsGeqB) here for more information.

### Reviewing test status and results

Once the candidate starts the assessment, the status will update with another date of when they started taking the test. You’ll also see an update to the status when the candidate completes the test.

Click on the assessment to expand it and see the results, including the total score, the comparative score, and a link to the detailed report.

![](https://coderpad.io/wp-content/uploads/2024/04/image-2-1024x494.png)

## Video demo

::embed[[https://youtu.be/njsJgtNQ8LI](https://youtu.be/njsJgtNQ8LI)]{url="https://youtu.be/njsJgtNQ8LI"}


[title] CodeSignal
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This article walks you through integrating your CodeSignal account with Ashby, so you can use CodeSignal Tests and Certifications as assessments in your interview plans. You can also configure the integration to attach CodeSignal Interviews to your Ashby interview calendar invites.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**

Before you begin, make sure you can log in to CodeSignal and see the **Webhooks** and **API Keys** sections in the [CodeSignal integrations settings panel](https://app.codesignal.com/client-dashboard/integrations/ats.greenhouse) on the left side of the page. If you don't see those options, email [support@codesignal.com](mailto\:support@codesignal.com) to request access.
:::

# Setting up the integration

Setup moves back and forth between Ashby and CodeSignal, so open both in browser tabs before you start:

1. Open a browser tab with the Ashby integrations marketplace at **Admin > Integrations > Integrations**.
2. Open another browser tab with the CodeSignal [API keys](https://app.codesignal.com/client-dashboard/integrations/api-keys) page.

## Adding the integration in Ashby

1. From Ashby's  [Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page, click the CodeSignal integration tile, then click `Enable CodeSignal`.
2. Once that's done, you see a panel to configure keys for the integration. You return here to input your CodeSignal API key once you have it.
3. Click the **Ashby API Key** drop-down to create or select an existing API key for this integration. If you're using an existing API key, ensure it has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints. This set contains the `assessment.update` endpoint, which CodeSignal uses to send assessment data back to Ashby.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you created a new API key, copy it and keep it in a safe place. You need it for the configuration on the CodeSignal side.
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GJY14lOXtc4T01cxYP9DY_creating-an-api-key-for-codesignal.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1242" height="1398" darkWidth="1242" darkHeight="1398" showCaption="false"}

## Getting the CodeSignal API key

Next, you need an API key from CodeSignal so that Ashby can interact with CodeSignal.

1. Navigate to the CodeSignal [API keys](https://app.codesignal.com/client-dashboard/integrations/api-keys) page.
2. Click `Add a Key`, and describe your key with a title like Ashby Integration in the pop-up that follows.
3. Click the arrow in the bottom right, then enable the following permissions:
   - `companytest.company.read`
   - `companyTestSession.company.write`
   - `liveInterview.company.read` (to use the live interviews option)
   - `liveinterview.company.write` (to use the live interviews option)

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PAP1xUp1f78iYVjILXvar_creating-a-key-in-codesignal.jpg)

4. Click `Save` at the bottom. Your new API key appears in the list.
5. Click your new key in the **Key** column to copy it somewhere temporarily, as you need it in a moment.
6. Return to the Ashby [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page and enter your new CodeSignal API key in the topmost box in the Ashby CodeSignal settings — the same place where you started with the Ashby API key setup.

:::hint{type="info"}
To edit an existing key in CodeSignal to enable additional permissions, click the pencil icon next to the API key in question.
:::

## Connecting the CodeSignal webhook to Ashby

Next, set up the webhook so CodeSignal can notify Ashby about updates to assessments.

1. Navigate to the CodeSignal [webhooks](https://app.codesignal.com/client-dashboard/integrations/webhooks) page.
2. Click `Add a Webhook` in the top right.
3. In the screen that appears, configure the following settings:

| Name            | Value(s)                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| --------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Add event types | - companyTestSessionStarted<br />- companyTestSessionFinished<br />- preScreenResultShared<br />- preScreenResultVerified<br />- preScreenExpired<br />- preScreenCandidateDeclined<br />- preScreenResultNotVerified<br />- preScreenResultVerificationPending |
| Endpoint        | https\://app.ashbyhq.com/api/codesignal\_webhook                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Secret Key      | Paste the API key you just created from CodeSignal (don't click the refresh button)                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Email           | [assessment-webhooks@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:assessment-webhooks@ashbyhq.com) (automatically notifies us if this webhook fails)                                                                                                                                    |
| Custom headers  | Add one and set the key as X-Ashby-Api-Key and the value as the API key you generated in Ashby                                                                                                                                                                  |

4. Click the test button. If all is well, you see a success message. If you run into issues, double-check your configuration and ensure you completed the final step from the CodeSignal API key setup, where you save the CodeSignal API key into Ashby.
5. Click `Create`.

:::hint{type="success"}
Your integration is now configured. You can start adding take-home tests and interviews via CodeSignal to your interview plans.
:::

# Adding take-home tests

Now that the integration is configured, you can start sending CodeSignal take-home assessments to candidates.

To add an interview assessment at the interview plan level, go to the interview plan you want to update and click `+ Activity` on the stage you want to add a CodeSignal take-home assessment to.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UeILYrawuZz2EOvxqDlzr_adding-an-activity-to-the-interview-plan.jpg)

Click **CodeSignal** from the list of activities that opens on the right side of the page, then select the assessment you'd like candidates to complete at this interview stage.

When a candidate reaches the stage the take-home is assigned to, an activity shows up on their profile indicating that you should send them an assessment.

To send an assessment to a candidate, click `Start Assessment` on the activity on the candidate's profile. If you enable **Automate on Stage Entry** for the activity, Ashby triggers and sends the assessment automatically.

Ashby emails the candidate a link to the selected take-home assessment. Once they complete the assessment, Ashby updates its status. Assessment statuses can take up to four hours to reflect in Ashby.

# Adding a CodeSignal Interview to Ashby interviews

Alternatively, Ashby can automatically attach live interview links to interview invitations when you schedule an interview or create a schedule interview activity.

When scheduling an interview or configuring a schedule interview activity, check the `Attach CodeSignal interview?` checkbox. This option is under **Communications** for a schedule interview activity, or under **Invite Settings** when scheduling an interview manually. If you have an interview with multiple events, you can use checkboxes to specify the events that should have the integration enabled.

Ashby includes the interview link in both interviewer and candidate invitations.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IZhxBKvEvqRuXqC0Y4vuX_product-marketing-manager-acent-ashby-2026-01-13-at-113720-am.jpg)

After you schedule the interview and Ashby sends the calendar invites, you can also access the live interview link via the record of the interview in the **Interview Progress** section of the candidate's job consideration.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pilKB8fJtsRM3qMJ63f6v-20260303-113653.jpg)

# FAQs

### Does a user need specific permissions in CodeSignal to create an assessment or interview in Ashby?

Because the assessment generates via the API key, CodeSignal doesn't require specific user roles.


[title] Criteria
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Criteria Corp account with Ashby, allowing you to use Criteria assessments in your interview plans and retrieve the results all from within the Ashby platform.

## Integration Overview

Criteria is a talent success company that helps organizations make more objective, evidence-based talent decisions that both reduce bias and drive outcomes. This integration enables you to send Criteria assessments in your interview plans and review the results in Ashby.

## Enabling the Integration

### Create an API key in Ashby

Sign in to Ashby and click Admin in the top navigation bar. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Select Criteria Corp and click `Enable Criteria Corp`.

Select Ashby API Key and create a new API key. Copy the value provided and send it to your Criteria CSM. This is the only time the Key is displayed. You could also save the key somewhere secure for future reference.

### Retrieve API Key from Criteria

Reach out to your Criteria CSM, who will provide you with an API key from Criteria. Please note that this key is different from the API key you generated in Ashby.

### Enable the Criteria Integration in Ashby

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
In Ashby, go to Admin > Integrations, search for Criteria and click on the Criteria Corp listing.

Click on the Criteria Corp API Key field and paste in the API Key that Criteria provided to you.

Click the circular arrows icon to validate the API Key and check you see a green popup on the screen that says it was tested successfully. Then click `Update`.

The message in brown will appear if the API key is invalid and was not successfully verified.
Contact Criteria if you receive this message.

If you have any questions, reach out to your Criteria CSM.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2022-12-22 at 10.28.34 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Lp3fWJDqogDiFRQP2AqsR_screenshot2022-12-22at102834am.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fce3341ca278dba1f6abfac6d835361e.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bb2ec41c22d79c1ee4561e973ed8edc0.png)
:::
::::

## Using the integration

### Adding a Criteria assessment to your interview plan

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Head into your chosen job and click Interview Plan, then head to the stage that you’d like to add the Criteria assessment activity to.

Click `+ Activity`, then select Criteria Corp within the Integrations section of the pop-up.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a34d198517b1f050b3872381fdd7f897.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c27c078b770706d84388623dd7bca1c7.png)


:::
::::



::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Choose the appropriate Criteria package from the Assessment Type dropdown, then click `Add` to confirm.

Criteria Corp Assessment will be shown as an activity in the chosen Stage in the Interview Plan.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ba3420127cd5e94cfc8e01188855f176.png)


:::
::::

### Triggering the test for candidates.

Once a candidate reaches the stage of the Interview Plan associated with Criteria testing, an activity for the Criteria test will populate automatically.

Click the `Start Assessment` button and Criteria will be notified to order the testing.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3fe16f990813285f1fbc7e6072da7c16.png)

A popup will appear with the pre-selected criteria package selected, keep the package the same or change it if this candidate is to complete a different package.

Then, click `Start`. A pop-up will appear to indicate the assessment request has been successfully sent to Criteria.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/45b1495d9e2588cc2ba74946af55d240.png" size="48" width="566" height="194" darkWidth="566" darkHeight="194" position="center" showCaption="false"}

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5ecf0855a59c5362f9d84f613bf56472.png" size="60" width="545" height="105" darkWidth="545" darkHeight="105" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Criteria will send the candidate an invitation email. If an expiry date has been configured in the Criteria package, Criteria will send a reminder email to the candidate 24 hours before the expiry date.

### Status Updates and Results

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once a candidate has completed their assessments, the results will be available in Ashby immediately.

If you have opted to not receive scores in Ashby, the display will just include the report link and a Testing Completed message.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0146fda5cefa1c7ce5eb91626d44d5bd.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9af88aaaa048103470bf82b3388a564b.png)


:::
::::



### Video Interview Status Updates

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once a candidate has completed the Video Interview, a status update will be sent to Ashby to advise you.

The status will show Evaluation in Progress while the evaluators are completing their evaluations.

If multiple evaluations are required, progress updates will be provided via Ashby 'Evaluation in Progress - 1 of 3 Completed’.

The evaluator can select the `View in Criteria Corp` link to be taken to the Criteria Platform to complete the evaluation.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/77ae4cacf2a23e268293b96f5b8d8fa8.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b723f242215340062dcfb0f4f85f7dca.png)


:::
::::

### Cancel a Test

You can cancel Criteria testing from within Ashby. This might be done if the candidate email address was incorrect, the wrong assessment package was selected, or the candidate withdraws their application.

To cancel the assessment, click the three dots on the assessment activity on the candidate’s profile, then click `Cancel Assessment`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/22bb18dd525dbd8993210754dd306008.png" size="76" width="766" height="142" darkWidth="766" darkHeight="142" position="center" showCaption="false"}

When you cancel the testing from Ashby, the candidate will be deleted from Criteria. Criteria will not notify the candidate that their testing has been cancelled. The candidate will see an on-screen error about their event ID being invalid if they attempt to use the link in their invitation email once it has been cancelled.

If you need to re-issue the test, select `Start Assessment` again on the activity in Ashby. The invitation email will be sent to the candidate again from Criteria again if the test is re-issued.

### Setting up video interviewing

Your Criteria account will need to include Video Interviewing capabilities for you to configure Jobs in Criteria with Video Interview.

Your integration will also need to be enabled for Video Interviewing to allow you to access Criteria Video Interview Jobs/Packages in Ashby. Contact Criteria to have this set up.

Configure the Criteria Job with Video Interview (rather than a Test Battery) in the Incoming stage.
If you have multiple video interview templates, you have a few setup options:

- Basic separate Criteria Job/Package for each Video Interview Template / configuration.
  Each candidate in the Job will complete the same interview template and the videos will
  be reviewed by the same evaluators.
- Advanced single Criteria Job/Package for multiple Video Interview Templates /configurations. Configure the Criteria Job with the default configuration, then activate the 'Configure Video Interview Configuration per ATS Requisition' and add the requisition ID values from Ashby to have Criteria apply a different video interview template and evaluators per role.
- When a candidate is invited, the requisition ID from Ashby will be used to determine the appropriate configuration to use for that candidate. If a match is not made, the default video settings from the Criteria Job will be used.

An example of Advanced Configuration setup in the Criteria platform:

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/14732350748ce686befc0fdf8342e435.png)

If you are using the advanced option, you'll need to add the Requisition ID for each Ashby Job that you wish to use a custom Template and/or evaluators for.

In Ashby, get the Requisition ID for the Job you wish to set up custom configuration. Copy this value into the configuration in Criteria.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/804058906693c25d30ec54696ccce625.png" size="50" width="433" height="342" darkWidth="433" darkHeight="342" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Deactivating the Integration

If you do not wish to use the Criteria integration anymore, you can deactivate the integration from within Ashby. Please also reach out to Criteria so the integration can be disabled on your Criteria account too.

In Ashby, navigate to Admin > Integrations, search for Criteria and click on the Criteria Corp listing. Click `Deactivate` on the following pop-up. Confirm the de-activation. This process will also deactivate the API key that was used by the Criteria Corp integration.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dc65f3568ef932e42f8856a7dc8d0ecb.png)

You cannot disable the integration until you update all your Job workflows to no longer include Criteria packages.

If you do attempt do disable the integration while Criteria is still associated, an error will appear to indicate which jobs need to be edited before you can proceed with the Criteria disable process.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/8f8c7616c738e4aed9b5a3ff1adcb4cf.png" size="74" width="767" height="148" darkWidth="767" darkHeight="148" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I ensure that assessment scores in Criteria stay hidden in Ashby?

Please check in with your Criteria CSM or the Criteria Support team to request their assistance with hiding assessment scores pulled through to Ashby.
:::


[title] SquarePeg
[path] Integrations/Sourcing/

When integrating with SquarePeg, SquarePeg immediately starts recruiting the best-fit and highly qualified candidates.

## Prerequisites

An Ashby Org Admin will need to enable the integration in the Marketplace. A SquarePeg paid plan isn’t required.

## Integration Overview

SquarePeg screens candidates on your behalf. These candidates are sourced through sponsored job posts, as well as targeted email campaigns. Only candidates that are recommended by SquarePeg will be exported to Ashby.

## Enabling the integration

1. Request to enable this integration by reaching out to [operations@squarepeghires.com](mailto\:operations@squarepeghires.com) and requesting an Ashby integration meeting.
2. During the call, SquarePeg will get information from you about your Ashby account to set the integration.
3. Once SquarePeg enables the integration, you’re all set!&#x20;

## Using the Integration

Importing jobs from Ashby will import the job’s description into SquarePeg, which helps to correctly source candidates for the correct job.

When candidates are sourced in SquarePeg, they are scored according to SquarePeg’s matching algorithm. If the candidate is recommended by SquarePeg, they will be exported to Ashby automatically. You don’t have to log into SquarePeg to review the candidate.

## Additional Information

SquarePeg has a couple of articles for more information on the integration:

- [Using the Ashby Integration](https://squarepeghires.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/articles/18190535565979-Using-the-Ashby-integration)
- [How SquarePeg sources candidates](https://squarepeghires.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/articles/18219734306587-How-SquarePeg-sources-candidates)

:::hint{type="info"}
Questions or feedback? Reach out to SquarePeg support at [https://squarepeghires.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/requests/new](https://squarepeghires.zendesk.com/hc/en-us/requests/new).
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What source is attributed to candidates exported from SquarePeg to Ashby?

They are attributed to the Platform: SquarePeg source.
:::


[title] HireRight
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Background Checks/

The HireRight integration allows Ashby users to seamlessly add background check assessments to their hiring workflows. Prior to enabling the integration, please contact HireRight to have it set up on your HireRight Account. A HireRight Technical Consultant will contact you with instructions on how to install the integration in Ashby.

## Before Enabling the Integration

To enable the HireRight integration, follow these preliminary steps:

- Contact HireRight: Reach out to HireRight to set up the integration on your account. A HireRight Technical Consultant will guide you through the necessary steps.
- Receive API Credentials: After approval, the consultant will provide instructions for generating the API key required to authenticate the integration in Ashby.

***

## Enabling the Integration

Once your HireRight account is ready:

1. Log in to your Ashby account.
2. Visit the [HireRight Integration page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/hireright).
3. Click `Enable HireRight`.
4. Follow the authentication steps by entering:
   1. Adding Assessments: select how assessments should be added; we recommend `Configure in interview plan`
   2. HireRight Company Login: input the company login provided to you by HireRight
   3. Ashby API Key: generate an Ashby API key for the integration (save the key details, you won’t be able to access them again).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07a807098ac00701413be74b1af12da2.png)

## Configuring the Integration

You can configure the HireRight integration in the following ways:

### Configure in the Interview Plan (Recommended)

- Navigate to the Interview Plan of a job.
- Scroll to the relevant stage (e.g., Offer or Hired).
- Click `Add Activity`, then select HireRight under the Integration section.
- Choose the desired assessment package and, optionally enable automation to trigger the assessment when a candidate enters this stage.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/751dd36cec8d5ae963f096a279a2b18f.png)

### Automatically Add to Specific Stages

- Configure assessments to be automatically added when a candidate moves into the Offer or Hired stage.
- This option is set during the initial integration setup.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5e74f5efe2d0de9f16e605ac98f9039e.png)

### Add Assessments Manually

- On a candidate profile, click `Add Activity` and select HireRight.
- Choose the assessment package to send an invitation to the candidate.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/11acd83bd6788697b2b0d8574baa7a08.png)

## Using the Integration

### Sending Assessments

1. Move a candidate into the configured stage (e.g., Offer).
2. The HireRight activity will on their profile, or you can manually add using the `Add Activity` button. Click Start Assessment.
3. Fill in the necessary details, including job location.
4. Click Start to send the assessment invitation to the candidate.

### Monitoring Progress

- Assessment status updates appear directly in Ashby.
- Once completed, the adjudication status is displayed, with a button to access the detailed results.

***

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What default fields are mapped?

The following fields are included in the data we provide

- Candidate
  - First Name
  - Last Name
  - Email
  - Phone Number
- Work Location
  - Country Code
  - Region
  - Municipality
  - Please note: zip code is not yet supported and will need to be provided each time an assessment is initiated.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I change the assessment type after configuring it?

Yes, assessment types can be changed before sending the invitation.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Do I need to configure assessments for each job?

Yes, configuring assessments in the Interview Plan for each job ensures a streamlined and automated process.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I received an error message

If you receive an error message, you’ll see a transaction ID on the error. Please copy this ID and share with support when reaching out as it help to debug errors.
:::


[title] Levels.fyi
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

By enabling this integration, all jobs from your company will be posted on Levels.fyi Jobs - the most powerful jobs search for tech professionals. Posting jobs on Levels.fyi is always free. Promotion opportunities are available as well.

## Prerequisites

You’ll need a Levels.fyi Company page and Ashby Org Admin access to enable the integration.

## Enabling the integration

Head over to the [Levels.fyi integration settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/levels) in the Ashby marketplace and click on the `+Enable Levels.fyi` button

![enable labelsfyi.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0c9-Tz3Z2pmyNGAPs6k4W_enablelabelsfyi.gif)

Next, reach out to [hello@levels.fyi](mailto\:hello@levels.fyi) with the following message to enable the integration on their end:

:::BlockQuote
**Subject**: Ashby Integration
**Body:** I’ve enabled the Ashby integration for \[COMPANY NAME HERE] jobs. I’m following up here to complete the Levels.fyi side integration.
:::

Once Levels.fyi’s team confirms the integration is enabled, you’re set.&#x20;

## Using the Levels.fyi integration

Once the integration is enabled, it’ll take 24-72 hours for job postings in Ashby to sync to your [Levels.fyi](http://Levels.fyi) Company page. Candidates applying through the job posting in Levels.fyi will have Levels.fyi listed as the source.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/312d6c6aca304bb44cf3fa6ad06eafda.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can Levels.fyi access candidate information?

No, Levels.fyi doesn’t have access to any candidate information stored in Ashby.
:::

## Additional Information

Additional information can be found at [https://levelsfyi.notion.site/Ashby-Integration-f3ffc95b14c7413093fb985c88e646af](https://www.notion.so/f3ffc95b14c7413093fb985c88e646af?pvs=21). If you have any questions or feedback about the integration, please reach out to our team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] Xobin
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Xobin is an online talent assessment software, used by 5000+ customers from 55+ countries to assess, interview, and hire top talent 20x faster, saving 10x time, money and effort.

Xobin's integration with Ashby streamlines the candidate assessment process by allowing recruiters to send skill assessments directly from Ashby's dashboard with just a click. The results are seamlessly synced and displayed within Ashby, enabling effortless candidate screening and evaluation.

## Overview

The integration between Ashby and Xobin allows you to seamlessly send assessments to candidates from within Ashby and receive detailed assessment results directly on the Ashby platform. Follow this guide to set up the integration and manage assessments efficiently.

## Setting Up the Integration

### Step 1: Generate an API Key in Xobin

- Log in to your Xobin dashboard.
- Navigate to the Settings page and select the Integration tab in the top-right corner.
- Locate the Ashby integration and toggle it on.
- Click `Generate API Key`, then copy and securely store the generated key for later use.

### Step 2: Configure the Integration in Ashby

- Log in to your Ashby dashboard.
- Navigate to Admin > Integrations and search for Xobin
- Select the Xobin integration and Click on the `+ Enable Xobin` button

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/39e3e39b287f26479d00e7235543a224.png" size="82" width="723" height="192" position="center" darkWidth="723" darkHeight="192" showCaption="false"}

- Paste the API key copied from Xobin into the Xobin API Key input field.
- In the left-side navigation bar, go to API Keys (under the Integration menu).. Click on the `New` button in the top-right corner to create a new API key for your integration.
- Fill in the following details in the pop-up:
  - Name: Enter a name such as Xobin Integration or Xobin Assessments.
  - Type: Select Partner Integration and choose Xobin.
- Click `Create API Key` then configure the required scopes. Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment. Once complete, then click Save and Continue. Copy the generated API key.
- Now, go back to the integration configuration and make sure the API key you just generated is also reflected there
- Finally to complete the integration configuration, Go back to xobin and paste the API key you just generated in Ashby in the Your API key from Ashby field and make sure to click Save. And that’s it you have successfully integrated Xobin and Ashby.

***

## Sending Assessments to Candidates

### Directly from the Candidate’s Profile

- In Ashby, open the candidate’s profile. Click `New Activity` beside the current activities.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/765d76cbfa102e7dfe4c4d9e56534e80.png" size="80" width="905" height="331" position="center" showCaption="false"}

- Select Assessments from the activity types, then choose Xobin from the list of integrated platforms. Select the desired assessment type from the dropdown menu.
- Once the assessment is selected, a new activity will be added to the candidate, click Start Assessment to send the invite.
- Once sent, the candidate will receive a link to complete the assessment. After completion, view the status, completion time, and results directly in Ashby.
- The candidate has completed the assessment. Toggle the arrow on the left to view the assessment results. For a detailed report, click `View in Xobin` to access the Xobin platform.

### Adding Assessments to a Job Pipeline Stage

- In Ashby, navigate to the job for which you want to add Xobin assessments. Go to the Interview Plan section and click Edit Plan Stages in the top-right corner.
- Add a new stage (e.g., "Xobin Assessments") or select an existing one. Save your changes.
- Click Add Activity to the chosen stage. Scroll to the integration section and select Xobin. Choose the assessment type to link to the stage and save your changes.
- When a candidate is moved to this stage, the Xobin assessment activity will be automatically added. All you have to do is click on Start Activity to send the invite and proceed as outlined in Method 1.

## Viewing Assessment Results

- Navigate to the candidate’s profile in Ashby. Open the relevant activity to view the assessment status, completion time, and qualification details.
- To access a detailed report, Click `Show Report URL` to open the report on Xobin’s platform Ensure you are logged in to Xobin for direct access.
- Click View in Xobin to access the detailed report on Xobin’s platform. Ensure you are logged in for direct access. Click `View in Xobin` to access the detailed report on Xobin’s platform. Ensure you are logged in for direct access.
  - Overall performance.
  - Strength analysis (categorized as Strengths, Moderate, and Weaknesses).
  - Skill-wise and section-wise performance data.
  - Responses to individual questions.
  - Logs of the candidate’s actions during the assessment.

With the Ashby - Xobin integration, managing candidate assessments becomes seamless and efficient, helping you make data-driven hiring decisions effortlessly. Set it up today and elevate your recruitment process!

***

Frequently Asked Questions

1. [How to edit an assessment in Xobin Online Assessment Platform?](https://xobin.crisp.help/en-us/article/how-to-edit-an-assessment-in-xobin-online-assessment-platform-126ut4b/?bust=1721309618599)
2. [How to add a Psychometric test to my Assessment Dashboard?](https://xobin.crisp.help/en-us/article/how-to-add-psychometric-test-to-my-assessment-dashboard-1f4jy6w/?bust=1721309618603)
3. [How to add my own questions into a new assessment ?](https://xobin.crisp.help/en-us/article/how-to-add-my-own-questions-into-a-new-assessment-3yb9vx/?bust=1721309618625)
4. [How to add assessments from a pre-built test library?](https://xobin.crisp.help/en-us/article/how-to-add-assessments-from-pre-built-test-library-6k3wri/?bust=1721309618626)

***

Additional Resources

For more information or questions that are not covered here, please reach out to Xobin support at [integrations@xobin.com](mailto\:integrations@xobin.com)

[title] Bryq
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

## Setting up the integration

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
- Go to your Bryq app and click on Integrations.
- Once there, click on the Ashby logo to expand the text box.
- Then click on the hyperlink `following this link` to create the Ashby API key. You will be redirected to the Ashby application.
- Type a name for the API Key (i.e. Bryq) and then click on the `Create API key` button at the bottom right of the `Add API Key` form. You will then be asked to set the API Scopes.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478165362/399d8552c4efd52dbd9a3a47/image.png)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478173376/a967deb594239f8df83317a5/image.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4d8b83a156cb21da665870f1cb709b55.png)




:::
:::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Once the API Key is created by Ashby, go ahead and copy it.
- Go back to the Integration page in the Bryq app and paste it in the Ashby API Key field. Finally, click on `Save`.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478587801/e6c544fb8a6a288b6449286e/image.png)


:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- You should then copy the Bryq API key and go to [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/bryq](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/bryq)
- Tap on the Bryq API Key field and paste the copied Bryq API key into the relevant field. Then click `Update`.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478588324/a1a2d2c78efc232a90cfe52b/image.png)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478616657/8d604b155eea43dab46fa271/image.png)


:::
::::

## Send Assessment invitation to a Candidate via Ashby

Once the Ashby/Bryq integration is enabled for your organization, you will be able to add the Bryq assessment after selecting a candidate.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- To do this for an existing job, navigate to a job (Jobs>Dashboard) and select a Job from the Job list.
- From the Candidate Pipeline page, select a candidate from the pipeline Stage. (i.e. Leads)
- Once accessing the Candidate view, you can click on `New Activity`to select the Assessment type from the drop down list. Once selected, click on the `Add Activity` button.
- In order to send the Assessment invitation to the candidate, click the `Start Assessment` button in the Activity section of the selected candidate. A confirmation pop-up displaying the selected assessment type appears. Click on `Start` to send the invite.




:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478217371/79ed794ea52513f4e5e28e6d/image.png)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478235914/fdfd2b5424e6e428caad7692/image.png)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478239867/af5c7bbaf61db5660255c58c/image.png)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478656530/20de596b75581d8948d51479/image.png)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478248828/b9d7ea1698b58c81ab176be3/image.png)


:::
::::



:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
While the assessment is pending, their results will not yet be available. Note that you may access Bryq to view a candidate's results or send an anonymized Bryq link to a 3rd party.

:::hint{type="info"}
Keep in mind that all configuration of the assessment itself, as well as the email template, will need to be performed in the Bryq app via the Assessment menu.
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478252976/689202c915b88c0dc016e7d7/image.png)


:::
:::::



## Cancel Assessment in Ashby

Once an assessment is sent to the candidate, it can be canceled via Ashby by clicking the Cancel Assessment button. Once the assessment is canceled, you may re-send it to the candidate by clicking the `Start Assessment` button.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478622465/66751a25c7bcf444ab79ef37/image.png)

## Delete Assessment in Ashby

You can even delete a canceled assessment and remove it entirely from the Activities list. Simply click the `Delete Assessment` button and the activity will no longer be available under Current Activities.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478625312/47b1937de87c6f15215831ff/image.png)

## View Results in Ashby

Once an Assessment is completed, the scores are listed below the Bryq Assessment activity. The score is the overall match of the candidate, which is composed of the Cognitive Match and Personality Match scores. You are also shown the details of the Cognitive scores. If indicators are active, the results will also be shown. The results are much easier to read if you click on the View in Bryq link.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/478639711/b157f0ec6baf8fb1be52850b/image.png)

You will be taken to a page where the URL is available to view the test results on Bryq.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/401997941/5f11d9ecdd16df5ea865c33c/Screen+Shot+2021-10-11+at+10.03.23+AM.png)

Here you can see the detailed candidate results and how well the candidate matches the specific position.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/401998160/2ca6fc5d29dc649edc85a9f6/Screen+Shot+2021-10-11+at+10.59.57+AM.png)

There you have it! You are now fully integrated with Ashby!

[title] Alva Labs
[path] Integrations/Assessments/Tests & Skills Assessments/

Keep all your candidates’ data points centralized for simple and automated recruitment. By integrating Alva with Ashby, recruitment teams can access science-backed insights to support data-driven decision-making and enhance the candidate experience.

# Prerequisites

- You need to be an Organizational Admin in Ashby. You know you are one if you can select the Admin tab on the top.
- If you are not an Admin, please contact your Administrator or IT department.

::Image[]{src="https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426731080/332c642d01f4b3268cf6ef43de15/image+%289%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=b68a7a92a5b05941dae019bd978cddf94c0dcfceb894b4da47907547be804916&req=dSQlEM59nIFXWfMW1HO4zd9xLYQSmhrl7ghLcM3WST2Q2fYLUuEWKxq2ytDV%0A6Z3m%0A" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1676" height="244" darkWidth="1676" darkHeight="244" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

# Instructions

## Navigate to the Integrations Page

Speak to your Alva CSM to get a link for this page

Navigate to the Ashby Integrations page by clicking on the link in the connection flow:

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426731986/25782dd6214e3e3a141551a4341b/image+%2810%29.png?expires=1743625800\&signature=c41fcfe759d6472e87856cc9ea232c311d1e69379cecc5500737054d6291416a\&req=dSQlEM59nIhXX%2FMW1HO4zZdFMe6FNHSAEEkNuCLJ5bXH7xSbadkmpRbjw3so%0AvLifAjCWRnC3UObROXU%3D%0A)

## Setup Generated API Key

1. Copy the API Key from the connection flow.
2. Click on the input box, paste the API Key in the drop-down, and click the refresh button to test the API key.
3. Click on the `Update` button.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426736920/fb294ea009a33a7c8e5a52478a05/image+%2811%29.png?expires=1743625800\&signature=193823803e1acdf3debea4a19ab085efeeabbe366d8ff45f8a47b54969efeb93\&req=dSQlEM59m4hdWfMW1HO4zUja0uTAfQRoCEEy1bmqQ211M81FFaxoPoACcHPX%0AxssAIntCEzXnxs%2F%2F1E4%3D%0A)

## Create Ashby API Key

1. Click on the input box of the Ashby API Key field.
2. Enter a name for the API key. Make sure from the name you still understand the purpose later, we're using the name "Assessment Integration" in this example:
3. Click `Create new API key`.

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426737753/d259ac6f24f86c13fd937f6e6fe6/image+%2812%29.png?expires=1743625800\&signature=28a461ba1193cde9c781f5db6088dfce64847d3466fcab667698582e4f860222\&req=dSQlEM59moZaWvMW1HO4zd3CDgDVP3vL7lk2S2xLFxmRA3MA%2BTobzjFwtdmb%0AN%2BZ8%2BWZcb7KYBQDrtcI%3D%0A)

## Setup Ashby API Key

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once you've created the Ashby API Key, the API Key should show up. Click on the `Copy` button to copy the API Key, and paste it into the Ashby API Key field of the connection flow:


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426738198/983e1fe522e46da97a438efa0044/image+%2813%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=fc228dce5f2eafcbf2679bb5ccbab19b5b12ed7e8ac4b34087ce92e19a828be1&req=dSQlEM59lYBWUfMW1HO4zWbCkp%2BO79GFy2HdGnh7%2BSOTkmxPgEVSTRnhuJYG%0ALUpbc1aUUgnjqq3Agyo%3D%0A)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426738900/7eaf3dee073dce13580bac2d122a/image+%2814%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=28525879a44661a402c0cefebbff405a3c03dfc0b47872ec07d0687015dfa938&req=dSQlEM59lYhfWfMW1HO4zViiTUbkjXPSkRTd0EvYLLJaLtjGh4mFrQmY00W8%0AvQnZe4p8SdXklf34cmI%3D%0A)


:::
::::

## Configure API Key Permission

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Click the Link icon:
2. Click on the `Configure API Key Permissions` button:
3. Enable the required permission based on the connection flow, and click on the `Save Permission Settings` button.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426738198/983e1fe522e46da97a438efa0044/image+%2813%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=fc228dce5f2eafcbf2679bb5ccbab19b5b12ed7e8ac4b34087ce92e19a828be1&req=dSQlEM59lYBWUfMW1HO4zWbCkp%2BO79GFy2HdGnh7%2BSOTkmxPgEVSTRnhuJYG%0ALUpbc1aUUgnjqq3Agyo%3D%0A)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426740611/5f5cb46b06929e8f1a5404240b1f/image+%2816%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=2902757a1137b8a58f4bfb0a22617570a91a05027b063132736d7e5bfa098815&req=dSQlEM56nYdeWPMW1HO4zVhdbzcoqH0Ac5GVOwe3fOOEOZ5XTIAhrUJWdpd8%0AbWEM%0A)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426742216/ea556282c3c2234da2cac374788c/image+%2818%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=0de5ed548c1bd830064e42c5428216a54f8df8f862a5dfc9d8ff2cba54d90e2e&req=dSQlEM56n4NeX%2FMW1HO4zQOny4VT5%2FTcBS6N8SO4cOLixqwVeufQUhcLuBPA%0AZZZx%0A)

![](https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426741381/bb2426888a0bcb1eca9c8c74c99c/image+%2817%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=e7eb0ee79d8290aa3a46e4e7f948c97f04a343ba59e9e0b5b1f8470af7ff88c2&req=dSQlEM56nIJXWPMW1HO4zZNrZJMqN2N5dy2N146p%2FbbRd1u4GRde0taTJQwu%0A7By%2F%0A)


:::
::::

## Setup Integration

Once you finish the steps above, click the `Set up integration` button in the connection flow.

::Image[]{src="https://downloads.intercomcdn.com/i/o/xjr8vtw1/1426742816/284b8e0c6988d51ba37b6bc6c42c/image+%2819%29.png?expires=1743625800&signature=7447a774611fccbcc776bee1c154ec53572768616cf7ebbca46919dd9310508a&req=dSQlEM56n4leX%2FMW1HO4zVzFjhLkCkCQovybjFs2eqKHS1lCUWN49qJ2fQ9X%0As0wSBkrvqB3frAWYLYg%3D%0A" size="48" width="858" height="1532" darkWidth="858" darkHeight="1532" position="center" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
For information about how to use the integration, please reference the following documentation: [https://help.alvalabs.io/en/articles/10807281-using-the-ashby-integration-with-alva-labs](https://help.alvalabs.io/en/articles/10807281-using-the-ashby-integration-with-alva-labs)
:::


[title] Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta)
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

***

Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) matches your jobs to the best applicants. This article covers the Ashby side of the Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) integration. For information on the Welcome to the Jungle integration, see [Welcome to the Jungle](docId\:h4a3QjKa90EVb_jx-FSTK). These are separate integrations.

# Permissions & access

The Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) integration is available on Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You need a Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) Pro account and `scraper_url` set, along with Ashby Organization Admin access to enable the integration.
:::

# Connecting the integration

:::hint{type="info"}
On initial setup, the sync can take up to 48 hours.
:::

Follow the [Ashby Integration with Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta)](https://wttj.notion.site/Public-Ashby-Integration-with-Welcome-to-the-Jungle-formerly-Otta-bc9fbcc4337349e8a10b3bd686cc06fc) guide alongside these steps. The instructions below cover the Ashby side of the setup only.

*The video below walks through the setup. You can watch it or follow the steps below.*

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/e84ab44c2ac543ccaa7b41994cbd6f13?sid=7920650b-d37f-4eaa-9571-dffa539e0996"}

1. In Ashby, navigate to the **Admin > Integrations >&#x20;**[API Credentials](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/credentials).
2. Create an API key using the name provided in your Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) dashboard:
   - Click `+New`.
   - Paste the name from your Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) dashboard into the **Name&#x20;**&#x66;ield.
   - Click `Create API key` at the bottom.
   - Select `Copy and Close`.
   - Paste the generated API key into your Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) dashboard.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
Copy the API key and store it in a secure place. You need this to complete the integration setup in Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta).
:::

3. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations >&#x20;**[Webooks](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/webhooks) and add the Application Submitted webhook using the details provided in your Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) dashboard:
   1. Click `+New`.
   2. Select the `Application Submitted` webhook from the **Webhook Type** drop-down.
   3. In the `Request URL` field, paste the Request URL from your Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) dashboard.
   4. In the `Secret Token` field, paste the Secret Token from your Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) dashboard.
   5. Click `Add` to close the window.

:::hint{type="info" indent="1"}
You will also need to follow these steps to create the Candidate Application Changed Stage webhook.
:::

:::hint{type="success"}
Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) is now integrated with Ashby.
:::

# Using the integration

Once the integration is set, you can post jobs to Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) and sync candidates directly into your Ashby pipeline. Through the integration, you can also leverage Ashby analytics to get insights and data about your Welcome to the Jungle (formerly Otta) candidates.


[title] Tests & Skills Assessments
[path] Integrations/Assessments/


[title] Calyptus
[path] Integrations/Job Board/

This guide covers how to integrate Calyptus with Ashby. 

This integration connects your Ashby with Calyptus to keep all candidate data in one place. Recruiters and hiring managers can post job positions from Ashby into Calyptus, manage and contact candidates from the synced pool, and push candidates back to Ashby at any point, all without switching between systems.

## Connecting the Integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to create an [API key](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/api/keys).
:::

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > API Keys**.
2. Click `+ New` and select *Calyptus* under **Integration Partner**.
3. Copy the API key.

:::hint{type="info"}
Make sure to save your API Key to a safe place. If you lose your key, you will need to create a new one.
:::

4. Once you create the API Key, follow the steps in [Calyptus' integration guide](https://www.calyptus.co/ats-integration) to complete the setup.


[title] Juro
[path] Integrations/Other/

This article covers how to set up Ashby's integration with Juro and how to configure and use Juro contract workflows from within Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**
Before following these steps, reach out to your Customer Success Manager (CSM) or the Startup Customer Success team to ensure you have access to set up the integration.&#x20;
:::

# Permissions & access

The Juro integration is available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to set up this integration. 

Users must have the **Can add/edit candidates&#x20;**&#x70;ermission to start workflows from the candidate profile. See [Manage Access Roles](docId\:be1Gtv2R0jGx_Do5mdNR_) for more information.&#x20;
:::

# Setting up the integration

## Creating the API key in Ashby

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations >&#x20;**[Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and search for the [Juro integration tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/juro).&#x20;
2. Select the`+ Enable Juro` button in the top left of the Juro popover. You then see a screen where you need to enter some Juro configuration details.

![Ashby Admin Integrations page showing the Juro integration, with the Integrations menu option and “Enable Juro” button highlighted.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Tlr3FZr9I_P7X5PkUlSzH_juro-ashby-2026-09-14-at-21821-pm.jpg)

3. Click the **Ashby API Key** box and type "Juro" to create an API key on the Ashby side. 

:::hint{type="info"}
You don’t need to copy this API key for Juro to push updates to Ashby. However, this is your only opportunity to access it, so we recommend copying it and storing it securely. Disabling the API key will revoke Juro’s access.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1a84d8ad98ffef3bf1233ec2eae5a698.png)

## Creating the API key in Juro to add to Ashby

1. Navigate to the [Juro integration settings page](https://app.juro.com/settings/integrations).
2. Select the `API box` in the **API and Webhooks** section.

![Juro API and Webhooks settings showing both the API and Webhooks connections as connected.](https://cdn.zappy.app/ab734f4e1856a71968eaeda622c4373d.png)

3. On the **API** page, click the green `Activate` button (if not already active), then copy the API key from the text box. You need this key in the next step.
4. Go back to the previous page and select the `Webhooks` box.
5. On the **Webhooks** page, click `+ Add New`.
6. Configure the webhook with the following details:
   1. **Name:** Ashby
   2. **URL:** https\://app.ashbyhq.com/api/juro\_webhook
   3. **Security:** Signature
   4. **Secret** (appears once you select Security: Signature): Paste your Juro API key here.
   5. **Triggers:** Choose All
7. Click `Save webhook`.

![Juro webhook configuration for Ashby showing the webhook URL, Active status, Signature security with a secret, all triggers selected, and the “Save webhook” button.](https://cdn.zappy.app/fc7971874568522dcfecf4456e056e87.png)

## Adding the Juro API key to the integration settings in Ashby

1. Go back to the [Juro configuration page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/juro) in Ashby.
2. Select the **Juro API Key** box, paste your Juro API key (the same one you used in the webhook step), and click `Update`.

:::hint{type="success"}
The connection between Ashby and Juro is now complete! You can now import and kick off Juro contract workflows from Ashby.
:::

# Configuring a workflow

The video below provides an overview. You can also follow the steps in this article.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/345f0b9a8dd64026bba4cb57077a7e20?sid=1abf6348-b533-421d-8945-df7fa3c4aba6"}

To set up a workflow, navigate to **Admin > Integrations >&#x20;**[External Workflows](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/external-workflows). Click `+ Add` and select Juro.

![Ashby External Workflows settings showing the Juro Offer Letter workflow configured to run when making an offer, with required candidate name and email fields.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RF-P2ZsiyZn_TZbET53wF_external-workflows-ashby-2026-09-14-at-24015-pm.jpg)

Each workflow has the following configuration fields:

- **Name:** The title of the workflow being imported.
- **Entry Point:** When and how the workflow can be added to the pipeline, either as an activity on an interview plan or when making an offer to a candidate.
- **Field mapping:&#x20;**&#x54;he fields in Ashby from which information is pulled to send to Juro.
- **Required?** Confirm whether the field is required.
- **Hidden?** Choose whether to hide this field when the form is displayed in Ashby.

## Adding the workflow to an interview plan

You can add activities to your interview plans within a job or job template in the **Admin** section of **Jobs**. When in the **Interview Plan** section of the role, click `Add Activity` for the stage in question, then select `External Workflow`. Select the workflow from the drop-down list and click `Add`.

![Ashby job Interview Plan with the Add Activity panel open and the “External Workflow” option highlighted under Integrations.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Q4OqXP2OoBN2JYnhc2cAx_product-documentation-specialist-ashby-2026-09-14-at-22602-pm.jpg)

Once the candidate moves to that stage in your pipeline, you see a prompt on their profile to start the Juro workflow. Click `Start Workflow`, then confirm the workflow and click `Start` on the pop-up. Complete any fields that need to be filled, then click `Submit` to start the workflow. Click `View Workflow` to view more details from Juro.

## Adding an external workflow to an offer

If you have an external workflow set to be available when making an offer to a candidate, once the offer is created (and approved, if needed), you see the option to start the workflow within the offer details.

![Ashby Offer Process overview with the Workflow Summary section highlighted, showing that no workflow has been started and a “Start Workflow” button.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/398xuSLjq7zJ6zwTjc0ar_savannah-leeman-junior-designer-ashby-2026-09-14-at-24623-pm.jpg)

After clicking `Start Workflow`, select the external workflow you want to use in the pop-up. Click `Start` to confirm the workflow.&#x20;

![Start the Workflow dialog with “Juro Offer Letter” selected as the external workflow and a “Start” button to begin the workflow.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/oG7frYOBd-ZNXKmO7a6Y0_savannah-leeman-junior-designer-ashby-2026-09-14-at-24425-pm.jpg)

The workflow fields are displayed alongside the offer details for you to complete, so you can ensure the information matches. Click `Submit` to send this information to Juro.

![Juro Offer Letter workflow form open alongside the Ashby Offer Process, showing candidate and offer fields to complete before starting the workflow.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rYO5t5Uikc9K6gu0p5-6y_savannah-leeman-junior-designer-ashby-2026-09-14-at-24347-pm.jpg)

Initially, the workflow shows as **Started** within the activity on the candidate's profile. The status changes to **Active** once information is received from Juro. You can view the workflow details within the offer information. Once the workflow is complete, Ashby marks the offer as accepted.

[title] Gusto
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Once a candidate has accepted an offer you can push their data into Gusto to kick off the new employee onboarding process.

## Overview

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync               |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | --------------------------------- |
|           ❌        |        ❌           |        ❌          | One-way sync from Ashby to Gusto. |

### Set up Gusto

To set up the Gusto integration, navigate to the [Gusto page in Admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/gusto). Connect the Ashby app to Gusto. Once that is complete, you’ll be able to push candidate data to Gusto.

### Push Candidate Data to Gusto

When a candidate accepts an offer, you see an option to push hired candidates to your HRIS system. Clicking `Add to Gusto` will create a new Employee in the system. Please note, for Gusto we are currently only able to push:

- First Name
- Last Name
- Email

Gusto’s API doesn’t currently support sending more data. If you’d like to see more, please submit a feature request to their support team for future development.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/155aad3971e44c10a338a306c94d4506?t=22"}


[title] Evergreen Jobs/Postings
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics: Best Practices/

This document reviews Evergreen Jobs/Postings in Ashby. If you are looking to set up evergreen jobs and openings in Ashby All-In-One, please check out [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ).

## Introduction

Many companies have jobs/postings/requisitions that remain open indefinitely. These are commonly referred to as evergreen jobs, evergreen postings, posting requisitions, or posting jobs. Even though evergreen roles make reporting complicated, here are a couple of reasons they would be used:

- Continuously collecting applications for roles where hiring will always be needed to ensure there is always a healthy pipeline at any point in time.
- Collecting applications for a generalized role. Once they have applied, the team or application will determine what specialization or team they will be placed in.
- Sharing pipelines across multiple recruiters.

These reports can skew reports and data, especially reports analyzing time. Here are some best practices we would recommend if your team is utilizing evergreen jobs/postings or plans to.

## Best Practices

**Make Evergreen Jobs/Postings easy to identify**

Regardless of how your organization is utilizing evergreen jobs, everyone can agree that reporting on evergreen jobs is different than reporting on one to one jobs. Many teams rely on individuals and recruiting leadership to keep track of what jobs are evergreen, but in order to make reporting easier and scalable, there should be an easy way to identify what jobs are evergreen.

- **Custom Field** - Creating a custom field at the job or requisition level is a great way to identify evergreen jobs. We recommend creating a custom field that not only allows you to identify evergreen jobs, but any other types of jobs that may impact reporting. For example, you can add a “Posting Type” field that includes the options Evergreen, Sourcing Bucket, General Opportunity, etc...
- **Naming Convention** - Ashby is able to filter and identify jobs by their title. Another way to easily identify evergreen roles is to implement a strict naming convention. Some teams label their jobs internally with \[Posting], \[Evergreen], etc... in the front of these job names.

**Have a clearly defined process that is shared across all Evergreen Jobs or similar jobs**

Some organizations hire candidates on the evergreen job; others have the applications collect in the evergreen job and then eventually move or transfer applications to a hire job or requisition. It is important the process is consistent to ensure the best quality data. If candidates are not being processed equally, you run the risk of having limited and/or inaccurate data. Below are some questions and discussion points that we would recommend clarifying and streamlining for evergreen roles.

- **Do you hire candidates on Evergreen Jobs/ requisitions? Do you transfer their application to a new job? Do you duplicate the application and add it into a new job?**
- **If you are moving candidates out of the Evergreen Job to hire them, at what point does your team move the application?**
  - By consistently moving applications at the same point in the process, this ensures the data on each application is also consistent.
- **Do candidates get interviews scheduled and conducted in the Evergreen Job?**
  - Most ATS’s will wipe interview data if an application is moved into a new job. If interview data is important to your team, it is important to sort applications and place them into new jobs if necessary before interviewing starts.
  - If you do not hire candidates on Evergreen Jobs, it is recommended that you do not schedule candidates for interviews in the Evergreen Job. The interview data on the Evergreen Job will get wiped when the application is transferred or duplicated into the proper hire job.
- **How do applications get assigned the correct recruiter?**
  - Most Evergreen Jobs will have multiple recruiters working within it. In order to give recruiters credit and to help organize their individual candidates, it is important to have a process or policy on assigning recruiters to applications earlier on. This will ensure you capture as much data as possible.
- **Will these jobs ever close? If so, what is the process for sunsetting an old Evergreen Job and starting a newer one? At what cadence does this happen?**
  - Some organizations like to open new Evergreen Jobs annually. This means there needs to be a point in which existing applications get moved over into the new job.
  - By preparing in advance to move candidates over to the newer job, your organization can ensure that existing applications are processed and newer applications will start their process in the new job rather than adding more applications that will need to remain on the older job.

**Avoid single action hire jobs in your ATS**

A single action hire job is a job that is opened just to send someone an offer and hire them after they have gone through the process in either a different job or outside of the ATS. If the candidate was processed in another job in the ATS, data on that hire will be limited. Greenhouse and Lever both lose data when you transfer or add applications to a new job. By creating a single action hiring job, the only data you can track accurately on these hires are their hire date, offer information, and application date.

For more information on moving active job considerations within Ashby All-In-One, please check out [Can I transfer a candidate’s job consideration to another job or interview plan?](docId\:FN4VK3fmmC2pOhXo3SY_y)&#x20;

The discussion around Evergreen Jobs is always ongoing, and there still isn’t a perfect way to structure or deal with them.

*Importance of transfer functionality*

As managing Evergreen Roles can depend heavily on transferring candidate applications between jobs, the pertinent summary of functionality across our primary domain is given below.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Mm5rL4JTr2NYxri9Dllwv_screenshot2022-12-22at72120am.png" size="68" width="463" height="151" darkWidth="463" darkHeight="151" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-12-22 at 7.21.20 AM.png" showCaption="false"}

An example of the data loss summary in a Greenhouse job transfer

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Edlfvs02oaFYDK-OtV4T9_untitled.png" size="94" width="1162" height="682" darkWidth="1162" darkHeight="682" position="center" alt="Untitled" showCaption="false"}


[title] ADP Workforce Now Connector
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Ashby's integration with ADP Workforce Now® lets you automatically send new hire information from Ashby into ADP as pre-hires, saving time and reducing manual data entry.

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby integrates with both **ADP Workforce Now** and **ADP Workforce Now Next Generation**. When you add the Ashby app from ADP, the correct integration will activate in Ashby, and the two integrations have exactly the same features. You should not need to let us know which you are using.
:::

## What data is sent to ADP?

The following fields are supported by the integration today. Please reach out to [integrations@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:integrations@ashbyhq.com) to request additional fields.

| Ashby Field               | ADP Field                              | Notes                                                                                                                                              |
| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Full Name                 | First Name, Last Name                  |                                                                                                                                                    |
| Email (personal, primary) | Personal Email                         |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Business Unit                          |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Classification Code                    |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Company Code                           |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | FLSA                                   |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Hire Date                              |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Home Department                        |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Job                                    |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Landline Phone Number                  |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address City                     |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address Country Code             |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address County                   |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address Line 1                   |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address Line 2                   |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address Line 3                   |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address Postal Code              |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Legal Address State/Province/Territory |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Lived-In State                         |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Location                               |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Location Name Code                     |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Management Position                    |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Middle Name                            |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Mobile Phone Number                    |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Onboarding Status \*                   | Recommend this is set to In-Progress.                                                                                                              |
|                           | Onboarding Template \*                 | See [this note](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/adp-workforce-now-connector#why-cant-i-push-data-to-only-one-of-my-hirerehire) on template configuration. |
|                           | Pay Frequency                          |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Pay Group                              |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Pay Rate                               |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Reason for Hire                        |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Worked In State                        |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Worker Category                        |                                                                                                                                                    |
|                           | Works from Home                        |                                                                                                                                                    |

## Requirements

- Must be set up by an ADP Admin user, HR Practitioner
- Must be an Ashby Organization Admin.

## Setup Instructions

### Get Your Account ID from Ashby

- As an Ashby Admin, log in to the Ashby Marketplace to retrieve your activation code. You will input this during checkout.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/1cfb0a4fdbe2940fa8854eedf9b75ab8.png" size="82" width="669" height="209" darkWidth="669" darkHeight="209" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### Purchase the Connector on ADP Marketplace

- Visit [apps.adp.com](http://apps.adp.com), and log in.
- Search for [Ashby Connector for ADP Workforce Now](https://apps.adp.com/en-US/apps/555442)
- Click `Buy Now` and complete the checkout steps
  - Make sure to update the purchase option to align with your Ashby plan.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/4dd2857382a27ad938e3821f858077e7.png" size="82" width="1291" height="373" darkWidth="1291" darkHeight="373" position="center" showCaption="false"}

- When prompted, enter the activation code from Ashby. The system will validate the ID. If valid, you’ll be able to proceed with placing your order.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/454e613488fa0485c460c031fd3a08be.png" size="74" width="960" height="706" darkWidth="960" darkHeight="706" position="center" showCaption="false"}

- Important: Provide consent when prompted; failure to do so will prevent activating the integration.
- Confirm ADP Profile Permissions

### Activate the Integration in Ashby

Once you’ve completed the above steps, return to the integration in Ashby and click `Activate`, then click `Sync Custom Fields`

Once synced, you’ll see the list of supported metadata fields on the offer form. Partner with your HR team to determine the fields that should be populated by your Talent team with pushing hires. Once you have your list, toggle `Sync Enabled?` for each.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/f7cc3a7fbab86402accce8f6eb013e36.png" size="80" width="674" height="974" darkWidth="674" darkHeight="974" position="center" showCaption="false"}

### Configuring permission settings

To allow the selection of onboarding templates as well as the syncing of custom fields, some additional permission settings need to be configured in ADP.

To enable these permissions:

- Navigate to Setup, then Template Management
- Select `Hire/Rehire` and then select an active onboarding template
- Click the Assign Users stage and ensure that the profile with the name starting with Don’t inactivate or delete this profile is enabled.
- Complete the rest of the setup steps and confirm and submit your final selections.
- Repeat the above steps for all templates.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c1cd9431627a4b2ee21ebc5981710386.png" size="84" width="1015" height="677" darkWidth="1015" darkHeight="677" position="center" showCaption="false"}

If these permissions are missing, then you will not be able to sync over the full range of fields



### Format Offer Fields

Once you’ve toggled on the selected fields, corresponding [Offer custom fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields/offer) will be generated. These fields are synced to ADP and will be updated as changes occur on the ADP side. See [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) and [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh) for more details. Here are your formatting options:

- Order fields - you can slide custom fields by hovering over the space next to the icon to the left of the field name to expose the drag handle.
- Set default values, and, optionally, hide fields that always have the same value.

### Decide How to Push Data

Ashby offers two options for transferring candidate data to ADP:

- Manual Push (recommended) - Use the `Add Candidate Data` button on the candidate’s ADP activity panel. This option is recommended as you’re getting started with the integration.
- Automatic Push on Hire -  Enable automatic sync from the [HRIS Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/hris) page in Ashby Admin.

## Using the Integration

:::hint{type="info"}
Candidates are pushed to ADP as onboarding pre-hires.
:::

When a candidate enters the offer stage, Ashby surfaces the ADP metadata fields in the offer form.

After the offer is accepted and the candidate is marked Hired, data can be sent to ADP in either of the following ways

- Manual Push -  Use the `Add Candidate Data` button on the ADP Activity on the candidate profile.
- Automatic Push on Hire -  Enable automatic sync from the [HRIS Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/hris) page in Ashby Admin.

# FAQ

### Can I map values from other fields to my offer custom fields to pre-populate values?

- Yes, see [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs)  for more details.

### Can I use my existing custom fields?

- No, you’ll need to use the custom fields generated by the integration. These fields are updated automatically whenever changes occur in ADP.

### Does ADP cost to use?

- Yes, pricing can be found in the ADP marketplace.

### Where do candidates appear in ADP?

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Candidates will appear in the in-progress hires tab in the Hire/Rehire menu. Navigate to Process > Hire/Rehire > New Hire
:::

### Can I sync pre-hires or candidates at the offer stage?

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Not at this time. Sync occurs only when a candidate is marked Hired.
:::

### Will this trigger ADP onboarding flows?

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
This depends on your ADP template settings. Ashby only creates the pre-hire; your ADP onboarding process determines what happens next.
:::

### Can we filter which hires sync to ADP?

- Yes. Use the manual push option to selectively sync candidates.

### Why can’t I push data to only one of my hire/rehire templates?

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
For every custom template, you’ll need to:
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Go To Setup →Template Management → Hire/Rehire
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Select the template you’d like to have access to in Ashby
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Click `Assign Users`
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Check `Don't inactivate or delete this profile. Membership changes could impact any existing integrations`
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="3"}
Save
:::

### Any limitations?

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Only new hires are synced; existing employee updates are not supported
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
New hires can’t be pushed multiple times; ADP will validate based on personal email
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Documents and onboarding tasks are not transferred
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
`Reports To` isn’t currently supportable; solving this is in the backlog.
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
ADP Custom fields are not supported as fields to sync through the ADP integration
:::

[title] Paylocity
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Paylocity account with Ashby, allowing you to export hired candidates to Paylocity automatically.

## Integration Overview

This integration enables you to push hired candidates’ data into Paylocity Onboarding to kick off the new employee onboarding process. Video instructions are linked at the bottom of this document.

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync                   | Notes                                                                                                                   |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | ------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|           ✔        |        ❌           |        ❌          | One-way sync from Ashby to Paylocity. | Candidates are pushed to Paylocity’s onboarding module, where they can be reviewed and added to Paylocity as Employees. |



## Connect Paylocity with Ashby

You’ll need a Company ID, Client ID & Client Secret to successfully connect Paylocity Onboarding with Ashby. To get these API credentials, you’ll need to fill out a Paylocity Web Services - Access Request document and send it to [webservices@paylocity.com](mailto\:webservices@paylocity.com).

- Please refer to Paylocity’s documentation regarding the API access: [Request API Access](https://paylocity.egain.cloud/system/templates/selfservice/pctycss/help/customer/locale/en-US/portal/308600000001020/topic/308600000005354/Request-API-Access)
- To make this easier, we’ve pre-filled the document in the PDF below:

::File{src="https://archbee-doc-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8DCZb8agCvp1Q78gA7StK_paylocitywebservicesaccessrequest.pdf" label="paylocitywebservicesaccessrequest.pdf"}

- When filling out the form, ensure that:
  - New Access for Company IDs listed above with both Demo & Production are marked in the Request Type section
  - Onboarding is marked in the Open API Access section
  - You can leave the Webhook Push Notifications section blank, as we’re not using webhooks for this integration.

Once you receive API credentials from Paylocity’s service, follow the below steps.

## Ashby Setup

Navigate to Ashby and select Admin. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Select Paylocity and click `Enable Paylocity`.

![Screenshot 2022-12-22 at 10.58.38.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RBNZTz9xYAm90DlvHUUd0_screenshot2022-12-22at105838.png)

Paste the Paylocity Client Secret, Client ID & Company ID you received from Paylocity into the relevant fields.

![Screenshot 2022-12-22 at 11.00.28.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HYDUUCCXenjYiMKyDv--E_screenshot2022-12-22at110028.png)

Once you fill out the API credentials, the Paylocity integration will be enabled.

## Push Candidate Data to Paylocity

When a candidate accepts an offer, you will see an option to add the candidate to Paylocity. In the Current Activities section of the candidate profile, click on `Add Candidate Data` in the Add candidate to Paylocity activity. A new Employee will be created in Paylocity and the latest offer data will be pushed into your Paylocity account.

![Screenshot 2022-12-22 at 11.11.34.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/x9f2mlOLL0uzPRQtPI05a_screenshot2022-12-22at111134.png)

When pushing a candidate from Ashby to Paylocity, the following candidate details will be included by default:

- Employee ID\*
- First Name
- Last Name
- Personal Email Address
- Personal Mobile Phone
- Start Date

\*We’re generating an employee ID for auditing purposes. This can later be changed on Paylocity’s side.

### Salary

Paylocity only accepts salaries in USD. Therefore, ensure that the salary’s currency is set to USD when filling in the offer details.

The Salary field is no longer pushed over to Paylocity by default because of limitations with Paylocity's API. In order for salary data to be pushed with candidates, enable the "Pay Frequency" custom field when configuring the integration.

Once enabled, it may take up to an hour to have the custom field to be created and populated on Offer Letters. When a value for pay frequency is provided on offer letters, we'll push the candidate's per-check salary to Paylocity.

![Screenshot 2023-03-29 at 2.03.54 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/isvmvcXNE5gjZ3htoqNW3_screenshot2023-03-29at20354pm.png)

### Offer Custom Fields

You also have the option to sync additional Paylocity fields as [Offer custom fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields?objectType=offer). These values will be sent to Paylocity if included in the candidate’s offer form. After selecting additional Offer custom fields to sync, it may take up to one hour for them to appear in Offer forms. More information on creating custom fields at [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) . Please be aware that custom fields are not available on the Foundations plan.

![Screenshot 2022-12-22 at 11.08.39.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XgkN7HGm8Gj-Z3FdX21gu_screenshot2022-12-22at110839.png)

Candidates pushed from Ashby to Paylocity will be created in Paylocity as Draft New Hire with No Event status. You can then ensure all the pushed details are correct and assign a new hire to your events.

To view candidates pushed to Paylocity as Draft New Hires, click on the “Onboarding” link on the left panel of the screen (highlighted below).

![Screenshot 2022-12-22 at 11.20.02.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZCH4PBTFkZvnHHvoV_3cr_screenshot2022-12-22at112002.png)

![Screenshot 2022-12-22 at 11.27.48.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YUxSWA2GmD3Eu89ZIqAHd_screenshot2022-12-22at112748.png)

## Video Instructions

For a Paylocity integration video walkthrough, please refer here:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c1c6bd91c84742709293f615b4e73d8d"}

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can you update candidate information in Ashby and push an update after they've already been hired and pushed to Paylocity?

We currently allow candidates to be pushed to Paylocity once, so a candidate can’t be pushed again to apply any updates. Candidates are added to Paylocity's Onboarding module, so if any updates need to be made to an employee's profile after they've been pushed to Paylocity, they can be made there.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can we push data to Paylocity for internal hires?

The integration currently pushes candidates to Paylocity's Onboarding module so that an admin can review their account before they're labeled as a full employee. If the internal hire already exists in Paylocity, their existing employee record would not be updated by the integration, and we would attempt to create a new record for them in the Onboarding module.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### If we terminate someone in Paylocity would that be reflected in Ashby?

The integration is one-way, from Ashby to Paylocity, so terminating an employee in Paylocity will not terminate them in Ashby. Assuming the org has Google user sync configured, then any employees that have their Google account deactivated will also be deactivated in Ashby the next time we sync their users from Google.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I change the employeeID generated when pushing a candidate from Ashby to Paylocity?

At this time, there isn’t a way to change this.
:::


[title] View Only Users
[path] Ashby Analytics/User Access & Sharing Metrics/

This document provides a quick overview of the View Only user experience and functionality within Ashby Analytics.

## Introduction

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/0afd9605b285453eb89458c0d8604a99"}

## Access and Functionality

View Only users have the ability to:

- Access any existing report or dashboard in relation to the Global, Team, and Job Access Roles they have been given
- Configure their home page for easy access to any report or dashboard
- Export dashboards as PDFs
- Export data from individual reports
- Receive notifications via [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)
- Receive scheduled dashboard deliveries via [Scheduled Dashboards](docId\:Ttr2OmUg9YQPx1nkCMJS9)
- Use dashboard filters to adjust reporting results as needed
- View Jobs list, Job Profile, and default  [Job Dashboard](docId:0QSDvWTdGrs9QVXNo3qrq)

## Navigating the dashboard interface

Use the `+` icon to add quick links to reports or dashboards on your home page

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-b8XpF74KW3tAYMLEqaOw_screencast2022-11-10at75028am.gif" size="56" width="1118" height="434" darkWidth="1118" darkHeight="434" position="center" alt="Screen Cast 2022-11-10 at 7.50.28 AM.gif" showCaption="false"}

Select any dashboard filter option to apply it to all connected reports on the dashboard.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZeNVEYFA6A_qakfLPS5_-_screencast2022-11-10at75224am.gif" size="38" width="1030" height="1392" darkWidth="1030" darkHeight="1392" position="center" alt="Screen Cast 2022-11-10 at 7.52.24 AM.gif" showCaption="false"}

Finally, if you'd like to export a dashboard, click `More` then `Export` to download a dashboard as a PDF.

![Screen Cast 2022-11-10 at 10.03.54 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dIVV8iaK3ssqv053xZcza_screencast2022-11-10at100354am.gif)

**Change report View Type on a dashboard**

Click `…` then `View Type` to change the report View Type.

![Screen Cast 2023-01-10 at 8.03.47 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZxQv8yywlE5gdmM7sIkJy_screencast2023-01-10at80347am.gif)

**Export report images or PDFs**

Click `…` then `Export Image` or `Export PDF`. You will be able to select the export file type and size.

![Screen Cast 2022-11-10 at 7.56.19 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qsTzBzFEn2tPjYZeojmQ6_screencast2022-11-10at75619am.gif)

**Export report data as CSV**

Click `…` then `View Type`. Change the View Type to Table, and then click `…` again. You can now select `Export CSV`.

![Screen Cast 2023-01-10 at 8.11.00 AM.gif](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/stG0qXvZRUUYZURb3GpXd_screencast2023-01-10at81100am.gif)

## Navigating underlying reports

**View underlying reports**

Click `...` then Go to Report to directly see any underlying report.

![Screen Cast 2022-11-10 at 8.01.35 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H3AibF17O3O6j5vhorkk__screencast2022-11-10at80135am.gif)

**Change report View Type on underlying report**

Click the `…` on any report on the dashboard and select Go to Report. You can change the view option of the report in the View Options section.

If you select the Table view option and enable Pivot Mode, you can export the results in that format via CSV.

![Screen Cast 2023-01-10 at 8.15.57 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dJnbeldfCcrmDlJqYmpyN_screencast2023-01-10at81557am.gif)

**Export report images or PDFs**

When viewing a report, navigate to the Results section and select `Export PNG` or `Export PDF`. You will be able to select the export file type and size.

![Screen Cast 2023-01-10 at 8.32.27 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1Eh2585GeOBlZlJpmH-3f_screencast2023-01-10at83227am.gif)

**Export report data as CSV**

When viewing a report, navigate to the Results section and select the Table View Option. Then select `Export CSV`.

![Screen Cast 2023-01-10 at 8.37.55 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jpeSq86KLndt3ebG2X1aS_screencast2023-01-10at83755am.gif)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Will changes I have made to reports or dashboards be saved?

View Only users do not have the permissions to save any updates made to reports or dashboards.
:::


[title] Personio
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

***

Connect Personio to your Ashby account to automatically import hired candidates to Personio.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & Prerequsites**

Users must be an Organizational Admin to set up this integration.&#x20;
:::

# Overview

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync                 |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | ----------------------------------- |
| ✅                  | ✅                  | See Notes         | One-way sync from Ashby to Personio |

# Connecting the integration

To configure the integration, you need to configure API credentials in Personio.

In Personio:

1. Open **Settings**.
2. Under **Integrations**, choose **API credentials**.
3. Click `Generate new credential`.
4. Name the credential, choose Ashby from the integrations drop-down, and then generate the new credential.
5. Copy your client ID and secret.

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations >&#x20;**[Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).
2. Search for or find the [Personio tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/personio) and click on it to open the integration settings.
3. Select the `+ Enable Personio` button.

![Screenshot of the Integrations page showing the "Enable Personio" button. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3qpSUf5k0DmK9fjAIupAW_personio-ashby-2026-09-10-at-80626-am.jpg)

4. Enter your client ID and secret copied from Personio and click the checkmark.
   - **Push candidate office and department?:&#x20;**&#x57;hen enabled, Ashby sends the job’s department and office to Personio. The names must match exactly in both systems, or the candidate push will fail.

![Screenshot of the Personio integration settings in Ashby, showing fields for Client Secret and Client ID, a Test Credentials button, and an option to push candidate office and department data.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SiJsTvDbDXXtGTCj7Hn1B_personio-ashby-2026-09-10-at-81136-am.jpg)

## Syncing documents to Personio

You can also set offer letters, resumes, e-signature documents, and other documents to sync over to Personio when candidates are hired and pushed.

Once you've added your secret and client ID, select a category using the document category dropdowns.

The categories listed are the document categories you have configured in Personio.

![Screenshot of document category dropdowns in the Personio integration settings in Ashby](https://cdn.zappy.app/88f7584255335486d975a898a54cde99.png)

Once you've determined your categories, check the boxes beside `Sync offer letters?`, `Sync resumes?`, `Sync e-signatures?`, and/or `Sync other documents?` to enable syncing when you push a candidate to Personio.

![Screenshot of sync checkboxes for offer letters, resumes, e-signatures, and other documents in the Personio integration settings](https://cdn.zappy.app/baaf3fc00da25c4158dea9fefd8efaca.png)

Finally, click `Save Document Categories` to confirm your changes.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you do not see the option to set categories for documents once you have enabled the integration, check your API key permissions to ensure the key has read/write access.
:::

# Data synced to Personio

- Email
- First Name
- Last Name
- Position
- Hire Date
- Department (pulled from the Job's Department/Team)
- Office (pulled from the Job's location)
- Custom attributes: Ashby generates offer custom fields based on the custom and default attributes from Personio. More on these below.

## Custom attributes

:::hint{type="info"}
To push custom fields, the API key for the integration must have Employee read/write permissions assigned in Personio.
:::

Employee attribute fields from Personio are now pulled into the Personio integration settings within Ashby.

Use the `Sync Enabled` toggle beside each attribute to determine which should be synced.

If you enable the `Sync Enabled` option, a matching custom field will be created in Ashby that will be linked to the employee attribute field in Personio.

![Screenshot of Personio sync settings showing the Sync Enabled toggle beside each employee attribute](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZH9O13jmUzgGSo7H7fTCg_personio-sync-settings.jpg)

If you already have an existing custom field in Ashby, when you switch on the `Sync Enabled` option for the employee attribute, the existing Ashby custom field will be identified, and you have the option to link it to the Personio employee attribute.

::Image[Screenshot showing the option to link an existing Ashby custom field to a Personio employee attribute]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5fL0vz7JOQ0zhdbR_gNh__linking-an-existing-custom-field-to-personio.jpg" size="66" width="1210" height="390" position="center" darkWidth="1210" darkHeight="390" showCaption="false" alt="Dialog asking whether to link the City attribute to an existing custom field, with options to cancel or link the custom field."}

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have used the previous process for mapping employee attributes (that is, creating custom fields manually that match attribute titles in Personio), these will continue to work if you do not opt to use the `Sync Enabled?` toggles.

If you do opt to use the toggles to sync over additional information in the future, ensure that the toggles for the original attributes are also enabled and linked to the existing custom fields.
:::

Due to Personio API updates, the only preset employee attributes in Personio that can be synced from custom fields in Ashby are:

- Department
- Position
- Office

First and last name and email are also synced over by default.

Custom attributes created in Personio are supported, so data can be synced from custom fields in Ashby to these custom attributes via the integration.

This is a limitation with Personio's API and not a restriction in Ashby, so we recommend reaching out to Personio if you'd like to request expanded API support for additional fields.

### Pre-filling custom attribute fields

If you would like to pre-fill these offer fields with information from other custom fields, you can set another field as the default value for the generated offer field.

To do this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields** and go to the **Offer** tab.
2. Click the `Choose a Default Value` dropdown and determine whether you would like to prefill this field with information from another Ashby field or with a static value.

::Image[Screenshot of the Choose a Default Value dropdown in Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields on the Offer tab]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/0e28520fabb1bee8de969f0ee26cf947.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="594" height="246" darkWidth="594" darkHeight="246" showCaption="false" indent="3" alt="Default Value dropdown showing options to pre-fill the field from another Ashby field or with a static value."}

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on custom fields in general, check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).
Custom fields are not available on the Foundations plan.
:::

# Adding new hires to Personio

1. After you've set the **Candidate Offer Response** to Accepted, a new activity titled **Add Candidate to Personio** populates. Click `Add Candidate Data` to start the process of making the candidate available in Personio.
2. Go back to your Personio account and search for the candidate.
3. The new hire data now appears in Personio to complete the onboarding process.

![Screenshot of the Add Candidate to Personio activity in Ashby after an offer response is set to Accepted](https://cdn.zappy.app/e287285535b4653b030d480c12f7fb6c.png)

## Pushing candidate data to Personio automatically

:::hint{type="warning"}
One candidate needs to have been previously pushed to the system via the manual steps above before this can be enabled.
:::

After the offer is accepted and the candidate is marked Hired, data can be sent to Personio via an automatic sync.

To enable this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > HRIS Integrations**.
2. Check `Automatically push hired candidates to HRIS integrations`.

::Image[Screenshot of Admin > Integrations > HRIS Integrations with the Automatically push hired candidates to HRIS integrations checkbox]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QlP5REGtSnP4bKQP0Ofj4_automatically-push-hired-candidates-to-hris-integrations.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1898" height="464" darkWidth="1898" darkHeight="464" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="HRIS Integrations Settings showing automatic syncing of hired candidate data to enabled HRIS integrations turned on."}

# Troubleshooting errors when pushing candidates to Personio

If Ashby shows a `Failed request to Personio - Something went wrong` error when you select `Add Candidate Data`, your Personio account may have reached its subscription employee limit.

Check with your Personio administrator or Personio Support to confirm the limit and increase it if needed.

After the limit is addressed, select `Add Candidate Data` again for the same candidate to attempt to export them again.

[title] Willo
[path] Integrations/Video Interviewing/

The Willo integration allows you to invite your candidates in Ashby to a Willo interview. For more information, check out Willo’s documentation [here](https://support.willo.video/article/137-ashby-integration).

[title] Remote
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

You can now easily transfer your hires from Ashby to Remote, creating a new employment record using Ashby offer and candidate details.

## Overview

You can now push hired candidates directly to Remote from Ashby. You can transfer hired candidates at two points in the hiring process in Ashby:

- At the point of offer approval (or offer creation if there isn’t an approval flow).
- At the point of the offer being accepted and the candidate being marked as hired in Ashby.

## Setting up the integration

To set up the Remote integration:

- Firstly, generate an API token in Remote via [these instructions](https://developer.remote.com/docs/authorization-for-customers).
- In Ashby, navigate to Admin > Integrations > Integrations
- Search Remote and open the integration panel
- Click `+ Enable Remote`
- Add the API token from Remote to the API Key field.

Once the integration is enabled, the Remote fields can be synced over to the integration tile in Ashby. You can then use the `Sync Enabled` toggle to determine the fields you’d like to sync, then click `Sync Custom Fields` to create those offer custom fields within Ashby. These fields can then be completed at the offer stage so the data is pulled to Remote when the hired candidate is pushed.

You can opt to define a Secondary Default Field which will allow you to select an existing Ashby field to pre-fill this Offer custom field with. You can override the value pulled in by a secondary default field at the point of completing the offer.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/531c5152fef05af70a935d59c9be2fca.png)

## Pushing data to Remote

Once an offer has been approved or accepted, the option to push the candidate to Remote will show in the Activities & Progress section of the candidate profile.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/35a5b17965fcab4958da09db963c666c.png)

If you opt to automatically push candidates to HRIS via configured integrations, this will happen automatically. You can adjust your HRIS Integrations settings at Admin > Integrations > HRIS Integrations.

## What data is pushed to Remote?

The below table outlines the fields and data pushed over to Remote. The information pushed depends on the fields that have the Sync Enabled option toggle on for them. If enabled, corresponding custom fields will be created in Ashby for the Remote fields so the data will be transferred.

| Ashby Field               | Remote Field                                              | Notes          |
| ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------- | -------------- |
| Full Name                 | Name                                                      |                |
| Email (personal, primary) | Email                                                     |                |
|                           | Department                                                |                |
|                           | Does the employee have a seniority date?                  | Required field |
|                           | Employment eligibility                                    | Required field |
|                           | Job title                                                 | Required field |
|                           | Manager                                                   |                |
|                           | Provisional start date                                    | Required field |
|                           | Seniority date                                            |                |
|                           | Type                                                      | Required field |
|                           | What is the main job category that the employee performs? | Required field |
|                           | What region(s) is the employee working for?               | Required field |
|                           | Work email                                                | ****           |


[title] Permissions & Sharing Dashboards
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

In this guide, we’ll cover how permissions impact viewing reports and dashboards and how to share reports and dashboards you’ve created with other users.

# Permissions Overview

## Ashby Analytics

In Ashby Analytics, there are two license types.

### Analytics - View Only

Users with this license are limited to viewing reports created by `Analytics - Admin` users. They can configure their personal home page to show their preferred dashboards and reports, but they cannot create new reports or explore data (e.g. via filtering) on their own. For more on what view only users can see, please check out [View Only Users](docId\:eFxwrakIh90RlUlcGJeby).

### Analytics - Admin

Users assigned this license have the ability to explore report templates and save and edit reports and dashboards. They have access to all features in Ashby Analytics.

## Ashby Permissions

:::hint{type="info"}
In Ashby there are three global access roles. For more on configuring access roles, check out [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk)
:::

### Limited Access

Limited to being scheduled for interviews, providing interview feedback, and referring candidates. These users will not be able to view reports and dashboards directly in Ashby although will be able to see data in notifications sent to them via the [Scheduled Dashboards](docId\:Ttr2OmUg9YQPx1nkCMJS9) tool, as scheduled dashboard content is generated using the permissions of the user who configured the scheduling.

### Elevated Access

Starts with the same basic permissions as Limited Access users, but can be granted additional permissions for parts of your organization via Access Roles. Employees with this global role do not have access to anything in the Admin tab unless they’ve been explicitly been granted access to tools via [Additional User Permissions](docId\:MHy0TXb4sxnqYe9XKvN8e).

When viewing reports and dashboards, these users will only be able to see the data for the roles that they have access to by default unless data is shown using a specific user’s permissions (more on this at [Share My Dashboard View](docId\:NdRpeyX1FEJ35Uvnuled_)).

### Organization Admin

Starts with full access to the entire organization but access can be narrowed down for parts of your organization via Access Roles. They can edit other user’s permissions and can edit all organization data: tags, interviews, email templates, etc. Users do not have access to confidential jobs unless explicitly granted.

- This is a common role for analysts, admins, heads of talent, recruiting ops folks, etc. Many companies also grant the entire recruiting team this access level.
- When viewing reports and dashboards, these users will only be able to see the data for the roles that they have access to by default unless data is shown using a specific user’s permissions (more on this at [Share My Dashboard View](docId\:NdRpeyX1FEJ35Uvnuled_)).

# Content Access

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on content access and locking reports, check out [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o).
:::

In Ashby, you can restrict access to both reports and dashboards. There are two states content can be in:

- Private: restricts access to the user and anyone on the access list
- Public: shared to your organization, i.e. viewable by any Ashby user

Upon saving new content, the user will have the choice of making it private or public content using the Access Control option when saving their report.

The default option is for the report or dashboard to be public. The access control settings for any report can be adjusted at a later time under `More > Access`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f330d013a71b8bd9f2d6630ef4ef4f47.png)

# Sharing Filtered Dashboards

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are unfamiliar with adding filters to dashboards in Ashby, please see our documentation for an overview of [Dashboard Filters](docId:2v47WMLRQuDcNEEY2TAzp).

Please note that this isn’t currently available for Core Dashboards.
:::

Custom Dashboards are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6b4b757e1c324185a807b5f07c238b51"}

Sharing dashboards in Ashby is usually as simple as copying and sharing the dashboard URL.

If your dashboard has filters and any filters are applied, we will dynamically update the URL to encode your dashboard’s filter state. At any point, you can simply copy the URL and share it as needed. You can now also click the `Share` button when viewing a dashboard.

![dashboard\_sharing.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dUOpfeGBr7OKRnXIN_EeO_dashboardsharing.png)

When clicking the Share button you will be presented with an option to copy the dashboard URL and you can use the `Include Filters` checkbox to determine whether the filters should be applied to the dashboard via the sharing URL.

At times when you want to get the underlying dashboard URL without any filters applied, deselect the `Include Filters` option, then copy the URL.

![share\_url.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/iCHakUzgkK8iH8CyrW3WC_shareurl.png)

When you are in the process of editing a dashboard, the same `Share` function is accessible through the `More` menu in the top right-hand corner.

![edit\_mode\_sharing.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/N6cNrmxSDJPTm9lMEwXFd_editmodesharing.png)

## Saved Views

If you have various combinations of dashboard filters that are used to meet different use cases a saved view can be used to store any configuration of dashboard filters with a custom title. You can then access that set of dashboard filters at a later date for immediate convenience. At its core, a saved view represents a set of dashboard filters and values.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6cf580e17c614b9e8dd5ab4fc7e4fc00"}

### Creating & Selecting a Saved View

If you are using the dashboard filters for the first time you will have the option to save them as a new view by clicking the Save as View button.

![first\_saved\_view.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/20f8ac83928008273ec6559b590c2263.png)

You’ll then be prompted to give your view a name and determine whether it is private (only visible to you) or public (accessible to all users who can view the dashboard) before saving the view.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that a shared view can be viewed by all users with access to the dashboard but only the Organization Admin or creator of the view can make amendments to the view configuration.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c609f5b1da64169e9c907e7514d0a619.png)

Saved views are accessible from the filter component at the top of any dashboard. Any private views will have a padlock identifier for your reference:

![selecting\_views.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/2bd64f7bbb8966744ffe5079416c4cda.png)

### Updating and Managing Saved Views

After you’ve selected a view, any subsequent edits to the filters within the view will be indicated in in the UI, as the `Save View` button will become active. On clicking Save View, you will have the option to update the existing view or save your new filter state as a new view if desired:

![update\_or\_save.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dHSyRmWz2Zc0-Qe21mu50_af625fc7-e0b9-47ad-a7e2-4d37a593c501.png)

To rename or delete any existing views you can click the `Manage View` button, then select either `Rename` or `Delete`. You will also have the option to make the view public or private (depending on the initial configuration of the view) and you can also pin the view to your homepage.

![modifying\_a\_saved\_view.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/2133cf6d629f60fe65ab26982da482c3.png)

If you opt to pin the view to your homepage, it will appear in the `Views` section on the left, listed with another other reports or dashboards you have pinned to your homepage.

The view name will be listed first, followed by the dashboard name.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c2b2b6976d4d93c04272b46176d23d0d.png)

## Going to a Filtered Report

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/aae1862dfe3547bb8c8e4af2f9681ffa"}

When viewing a dashboard with filters applied you have the option to view the underlying report directly by selecting the `Go to Filtered Report` action.

![filters\_applied.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H0wmSanzauP7k5Fjl93_N_dd582adc-c214-4601-9f9a-a6ed489505b1.png)

If you need to get to the underlying report without any dashboard filter context being applied, the action menu on any report tile provides the option (the three dots to the right of the `Go to Filtered Report` button) to go directly to the report via `Go to Report`.

![report\_menu.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FrWS-ZTU1AMqfsiZ78MZC_reportmenu.png)

# Sharing your dashboard view

:::hint{type="info"}
By default, users will only see data for the roles that they have access to when viewing a dashboard shared with them. You can set a dashboard to always show data based on your permissions so even those without access to the appropriate jobs will be able to see the same data points as you.

If the dashboard link is shared with a user after you have shared your dashboard view, they will be able to see same data points as you regardless of their permission settings, which means they may see data they do not normally have access to see. The user will need to log in to Ashby and have Elevated Access to see the dashboard.
:::

The option to share your dashboard view is only available on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans, along with Analytics only users:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## How to share or unshare your view

To set up a dashboard to display the data you see to all users accessing the dashboard (even data they don't normally have access to see):

1. Navigate to the dashboard.
2. Select `More` > `Access`.
3. Toggle `View with my data permissions` on to share your view, or off to stop sharing.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AczrKz6R5wfuy1uMnEyt4_image-38.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
When you enable `View with my data permissions`, the dashboard is also locked by the user whose permissions are shared. The locker and users with the `Editor` role can manage the dashboard's permissions, access list, layout, and content. Users with the `Viewer` role can access a private dashboard but cannot edit a locked dashboard.

Locking does not lock the underlying reports. Users who have permission to edit a report can still edit that report directly. For more on locking, see [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o) .
:::

You will then be listed as "Viewing as" and your permissions will be used for other users viewing the dashboard. Moving forward, only the user listed as the viewer (or sharing their view) here will be able to add or remove reports.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jh8R_MRkFlyAsgCIIpLJb_ops-dashboard-ashby-2026-09-22-at-111355-am.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Users viewing the dashboard with the viewer’s permissions will only have those permissions applied when viewing the dashboard. Their own permissions will be applied when opening specific reports within the dashboard.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Users viewing the underlying reports on your dashboard will be able to edit those reports if they have access to edit reports. We would recommend locking your reports prior to sharing your view. Details on locking or unlocking reports can be found in [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o).&#x20;
:::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set myself as the viewer or share my own dashboard view on private dashboards?

Yes, you can set users to see a dashboard with your own permissions on both a public and a private dashboard. Please note that only users with access to your private dashboard will be able to see it.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens to saved views if the dashboard’s filters are modified (added or removed)?

*Removing filter fields*

When a filter field is removed from the dashboard, any saved view that referenced that field will be updated to no longer include that field and any pre-configured values. For example, if you had a Department filter with some values such as Engineering, Product and Design in a saved view, removing the Department field from the dashboard filters entirely will remove the reference from any saved view too.

*Adding filters fields*

When the dashboard has a new filter field added, any pre-existing saved view will have no prior value for that field. If the user wants to incorporate the new field into any existing saved views, they must select the view by name, update the filters, then select the `Update Existing View` option.
:::


[title] Report Templates & Core Dashboards
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] Report View Options
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This document reviews the different report view options in Ashby.

## Introduction

Every report has View Options to allow for configuration and customization. These options vary by report type and whether Group By fields have been added.

You can find a report’s `View Options` just above the Results section.

![Screen Cast 2022-12-14 at 8.01.07 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/t7hpLErFQZrrMWwprd3qb_screencast2022-12-14at80107am.gif)

The `View Options` types can be easily changed by clicking on each tab (Line Chart, Bar Chart, Stacked Bar Chart, etc). In addition, the options underneath each View Options tab are unique to the type selected and may change.

![Selecting each tab changes the report visualization. The options underneath each tab change as well. For example: the Line Chart option shows the “Count As” drop down and the Stacked Bar Chart option shows “Count As”, “Y Axis”, and “Group Labels” drop downs. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9hHJHCikUEYCS7do2BNpD_screencast2022-12-14at80339am.gif)

Selecting each tab changes the report visualization. The options underneath each tab change as well. For example: the Line Chart option shows the Count As drop down and the Stacked Bar Chart option shows Count As, Y Axis, and Group Labels drop downs.

## Line Chart

Line charts make clean, basic reports. They do not stack, which means trends on individual components can be seen more clearly.

![This is a Count over Time report showing the number of internal applicants and referrals in the last 3 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/o_4V8KAE8z1YWxQCOPgp2_screenshot2022-12-14at81537am.png)

This is a Count over Time report showing the number of internal applicants and referrals in the last 3 months.

You have the option to view the report results as a rate or a running total when you click the drop down for Count As.

![Line Chart results counted as a rate. ](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/o_4V8KAE8z1YWxQCOPgp2_screenshot2022-12-14at81537am.png "Line Chart results counted as a rate.")

![Line Chart results counted as a running total. ](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5XRoUYkLHKeJbpp3gVvfh_screenshot2022-12-14at93425am.png "Line Chart results counted as a running total.")

## Bar Chart

Bar charts allow you to easily compare different categories of data. This View Option does not stack.

![This is a Count over Time report showing the number of referred applications each month over the last 6 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hPPILgzrA94gs_nKYGxAa_screenshot2022-12-14at82815am.png)

This is a Count over Time report showing the number of referred applications each month over the last 6 months.

When a Group By field is selected, one bar per group is added.

![This is the same Count over Time report as above, but the results are now grouped by Outcome. There is a bar for Active, Archived, and Hired applications.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CAlwEEm0nwuCrhnV1hGqT_screenshot2022-12-14at83438am.png)

This is the same Count over Time report as above, but the results are now grouped by Outcome. There is a bar for Active, Archived, and Hired applications.

:::hint{type="info"}
We recommend avoiding fields that have many values, as it may make a cluttered view.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You have the option to view the report results as a rate or a running total when you click the drop down for Count As.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Bar Chart results counted as a rate. ](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XUpM78aaoQDmZyVz9SWoQ_screenshot2022-12-14at92820am.png "Bar Chart results counted as a rate.")

![Bar Chart results counted as a running total. ](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/omYVV7p5l5b9bNomLE687_screenshot2022-12-14at92900am.png "Bar Chart results counted as a running total.")


:::
::::

## Stacked Bar Chart

Stacked bar charts allow you to easily compare different categories of data, and one stack per group is added to the bar when a `Group By` field is selected.

![This is a Count over Time report showing the number of referred applications each month over the last 6 months, grouped by Outcome. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/R6y89Uj3OjUv5VGv0lcc4_screenshot2022-12-14at91300am.png)

This is a Count over Time report showing the number of referred applications each month over the last 6 months, grouped by Outcome.

In addition to the `Count As` drop down, the Stacked Bar Chart view options also includes `Y Axis` and `Group Labels`.

![% composition charts can be made if you select Show Percent in the “Y Axis” drop down. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ijIBdJAgwTruhxWwHw1LW_screencast2022-12-14at91957am.gif)

% composition charts can be made if you select `Show Percent` in the “Y Axis” drop down.

- **Count As:** the report results can be be counted as a rate or a running total
- **Y Axis:** the Y axis results can be shown as a count or as a percent
- **Group Labels:** the group labels can be shown as a count, percent, or not at all

## Table

The Table view option provides you with a raw table of data. You have the option to view the report results as a rate or a running total when you click the drop down for Count As.

![This is a Count over Time report as above, shown in the Table view.](https://cdn.zappy.app/3c6766dad2f63806ecf26231517eb637.png "This is a Count over Time report as above, shown in the Table view.")

### Pivot  Mode

:::hint{type="info"}
Available on reports that have a Group By selection.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Allows easy pivoting on any of the Group By fields, and multiple pivots are permitted.

An example of collapsing and expanding the Application’s Outcome in the table.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![This report has Pivot Mode turned on and is pivoting on “Application’s Started At.”](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LFlpGF7ltg-_MUApbO1CD_screenshot2022-12-14at103518am.png "This report has Pivot Mode turned on and is pivoting on “Application’s Started At.”")

![An example of collapsing and expanding the Application’s Outcome in the table. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hdHq8fx94uiQPVQAJn01f_screencast2022-12-14at103844am.gif)


:::
::::

### Row Totals/ Column Totals

Row Totals and/or Column totals can be shown in the table when they are checked.

![An example of adding row totals and column totals. ](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zKQMBuTPWmbUziX8xhGqb_screencast2022-12-14at104245am.gif "An example of adding row totals and column totals.")

## Pie Chart

Pie charts allow you to view your data in a circular graphic, divided into sections that each represent a proportion of the whole.

:::hint{type="info"}
This View Option is only available on Segmentation reports.
:::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can measure the report results by Percent or Count. If you select count, the results are shown as a bar chart visualization.

You report results can be sorted Ascending, Descending, or None.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![A pie chart showing the % of applications by department over the last 6 months. ](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wjcKpzaKH6rAfRPMY300k_screenshot2022-12-14at105252am.png "A pie chart showing the % of applications by department over the last 6 months.")

![Screen Cast 2022-12-14 at 10.56.10 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pClBflv89VxTUhjl11BB4_screencast2022-12-14at105610am.gif)

![Screen Cast 2022-12-14 at 10.59.18 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2assaKUJ6JZtoEzMcjUuV_screencast2022-12-14at105918am.gif)


:::
::::

## Number

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The Number view option allows you to see a total count and is a available on Custom Lists.

You can see that 173 interviews were held this month by selecting the **Number** View Option.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![You can see that 173 interviews were held this month by selecting the Number View Option.  ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nSZKy0IvGcBzgQ-HZKMbA_screenshot2022-12-14at110634am.png)


:::
::::



## Single Number

**Ratio:** the number of all records relative to the number of records matching the selected Group By value, expressed as a ratio

![Screen Shot 2022-12-14 at 11.17.01 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Yj_PP-cIOu3zYWnVTwdbs_screenshot2022-12-14at111701am.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Learn more about ratio reports in our [Ratio Reports](docId\:Zep-4cIy3emEKomLZEet6)&#x20;
:::

**Percent:** the selected group’s value as a percent of all matched results, e.g. percent of hired applications relative to all application results

![Screen Shot 2022-12-14 at 11.17.27 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jwe42TSlQWzsuBENwh7zV_screenshot2022-12-14at111727am.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I adjust the color palette on my reports? I want to see my brand colours in charts I create.

You can! To do this, navigate to Admin, then Organization Setup > Default Visualization Colors. Here, you can set up your  to use in reporting. Choose a minimum of 12 unique colors but up to a maximum of 32.
:::


[title] Workday HRIS Integration Setup
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

This article explains how to configure the Workday HRIS integration with Ashby. Ashby connects to Workday using several Workday APIs, each of which requires varying user and permission configurations. The setup has three phases:

1. Configuring Ashby's Integration System User (ISU)
2. Creating the API Client for Integrations for Ashby
3. Configuring domain security for Ashby's ISU

In each phase, we advise you to copy down important information that you need to configure within Ashby to connect your Ashby and Workday instances.

:::hint{type="info"}
For an overview of the Workday API migration, see [Workday ATS -> Ashby Recruiting API Migration Guide](docId\:tUr-37IFYBpkRDpV6kc3r).

For more on syncing Workday positions with Ashby and hired Ashby candidates with Workday, see [Workday](docId\:Lser77iHgverWT8Ovu5gx).

For frequently asked questions, see [Workday Integration FAQ](docId\:PUdepE2jbFIXjwfHhsfUd).
:::

# Configuring Ashby's Integration System User (ISU)

1. Log in to your Workday application using an Administrator account.
2. In the application's search box, search for create user and then select `Create Integration System User`.
3. Enter a User Name and Password. As a username, we recommend `Ashby_ISU`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy down the username and password for future configuration within Ashby. Some of Workday's Copy UI can copy unnecessary details of fields, so check that you are copying just the username and password.
:::

4. Leave the `Require New Password at Next Sign In` checkbox unchecked, as this user accesses Workday programmatically.
5. Leave the `Session Timeout Minutes` field with its default value of 0, which prevents the user's sessions from timing out prematurely.
6. Select the option `Do Not Allow UI Sessions` (this prevents the account from logging into Workday).

:::hint{type="info"}
If possible, make sure the password does not expire. Otherwise, Ashby's sync stops when the password expires. You can do this by going to the **Maintain Password Rules** task and adding Ashby's ISU to the **System Users exempt from password expiration** field.
:::

# Create the API Client for Integrations for Ashby

For syncing and mapping certain fields, Ashby needs additional access to the Workday API to run custom reports. We run this report using Workday Query Language (WQL) via Workday's REST API. Access to the REST API requires a special API client to be configured.

1. Open the **Register API Client for Integrations** task (via Workday search).
2. Use the following configuration:
   - Client Name: Ashby API Access
   - Non-Expiring Refresh Tokens: ✅
   - Scope: System, Recruiting, Staffing, Pre-Hire Process, Organizations and Roles, Jobs & Positions, Integration, Tenant Non-Configurable, Public Data (allows high level access to recruiting and reporting data; data within is still guarded by domain security).
   - Included Workday Owned Scope: ✅ (access to "workday owned" fields)
3. Click `OK`.
4. On the page that appears, copy down the client ID and secret.

:::hint{type="info"}
The client ID and secret are needed to configure REST API access for Ashby.
:::

5. On the same page, click the `...` menu next to the client name in the blue header at the top, and then choose **API Client > Manage Refresh Tokens for Integrations**.
6. In the **Workday Account** box in the dialog that appears, find and choose Ashby's ISU, and then click `OK`.
7. On the next page, check the `Generate New Refresh Token` box, and then click `OK`.
8. Copy down the refresh token that appears on the next page.

:::hint{type="info"}
The refresh token is needed to configure REST API access for Ashby.
:::

9. Go to the **View API Clients** report (via Workday search).
10. On this page, there are three "endpoints" at the top.

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy these down. These endpoints are needed to configure REST API access for Ashby.
:::

# Collect final tenant information

Most of the Workday-side configuration is now done. We just need to collect a few final pieces of information before going to Ashby to configure the connection.

## Workday Tenant ID

Your Workday Tenant ID is found in the URL when you're logged into Workday. For example, if the URL is `https://impl.workday.com/example/d/home.html`, your Tenant ID is "example."

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy your Tenant ID down for configuration within Ashby.
:::

## WSDL URL

Your Web Services Description Language (WSDL) URL can be found by following the relevant Workday article. In short:

1. Type **Public Web Services** in the Workday search bar.
2. Under **Reports**, select `Public Web Services`.
3. From the **Public Web Services** list, select any one and click the ellipsis icon to reveal a drop-down menu. Select **Web Service > View WSDL**, which displays the full WSDL XML in a separate window.
4. Search the XML for a URL containing the text `ccx/service`. Copy that URL up to and including the `ccx/service` piece. This is the WSDL URL you add to Ashby. It may look something like `https://wd2-impl-services1.workday.com/ccx/service`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy the WSDL URL for configuration within Ashby.
:::

# Configure security for Ashby's ISU

## Create a security group

In this step, you create an unconstrained Integration System Security Group in Workday and assign the ISU created in the previous step to this group.

1. In the search box, search for "security group" and then select `Create Security Group`.
2. Complete the **Create Security Group** task.
3. Select `Integration System Security Group` (Unconstrained) from the **Type of Tenanted Security Group** dropdown.
4. After the security group is created, you see a page where you can assign members to the security group.
5. Add the new ISU created in the previous step to this security group.

## Configure domain security policy permissions

In this step, you grant "domain security" policy permissions that allow Ashby access to recruiting and HR data domains related to the Ashby Analytics integration.

1. Enter **Security Group Membership and Access** in the search box and click on the report link.
2. Search and select the security group created in the previous step.
3. Click on the ellipsis `...` next to the group name and from the menu, select **Security Group > Maintain Domain Permissions for Security Group**.
4. Add the following domains to the **Domain Security Policies** list:

:::hint{type="info"}
In rows where multiple domains are listed, all domains after the first may be included or inherited by the first domain, depending on your Workday instance's security configuration. Where no reason is listed, the reason is the same as the nearest row above.
:::

| Domain Security Policy                               | Operation              | Reason                                                                                                                 |
| ---------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Manage: Organization Integration                     | Get Only               | Get list of supervisory organizations and cost center for offers, positions, and job requisitions                      |
| Integration Build                                    | Get Only               | Access to low-level identifiers to connect Workday objects together (e.g. a job to a location)                         |
| Worker Data: All Positions                           | Get Only and View Only | Sync worker position data into Ashby Openings and view Overlap settings on Position Restrictions                       |
| Worker Data: Public Worker Reports                   | Get Only               | Get list of workers for user sync                                                                                      |
| Job Requisition Data                                 | Get Only               | Sync job requisition data                                                                                              |
| Manage: Evergreen Requisitions                       | Get Only               | Sync evergreen requisition data                                                                                        |
| Job Information                                      | Get Only               | Get information about job profiles, job families, and job family groups                                                |
| Manage: Location                                     | Get Only               | Get list of available locations                                                                                        |
| Reporting Audits                                     | Get Only               | Allows running reports via REST API WQL                                                                                |
| Worker Data: Active and Terminated Workers           | Get Only               | Access data source Workers for HCM Reporting to sync Employee fields                                                   |
| Worker Data: Workers                                 | Get Only               | Allows Ashby to run the Get\_Workers API                                                                               |
| Manage Pre-Hire Process: Manage Pre-Hires            | Get and Put            | Get pre-hire records and allow Ashby to set fields on pre-hire records (e.g. Referred\_By)                             |
| Manage Pre-Hire Process: Consider Pre-Hires          | Get Only               | Get job considerations for pre-hires                                                                                   |
| Workday Query Language                               | View and Modify        | "View and Modify" appears to be required here, even though we can only run queries that fetch data.                    |
| Compensation Change: Salary                          | View and Modify        | Allows Ashby to override the position salary plan when creating an offer.                                              |
| Person Data: Work Contact Information                | Get Only               | Allows Ashby to connect the Employee list with Workday Worker using work email.                                        |
| Person Data: Public Work Email Address Integration   | Get Only               | Allows Ashby to connect the Employee list with Workday Worker using work email in the Get\_Workers web service.        |
| Person Data: ID Information                          | Get Only               | Allows Ashby to connect the Employee list with Workday Worker using work email.                                        |
| Manage: Custom Organization                          | Get Only               | Allows Ashby to navigate organization hierarchies (e.g. Cost Center, Supervisory, custom org)                          |
| Non-Worker Data: Compensation Pay Range (\*see note) | Get Only / View Only   | ONLY: If you want to display Compensation data (range, grade, grade profile) fields from Positions in Workday to Ashby |
| Worker Data: Compensation Pay Range (\*see note)     | Get Only / View Only   | ONLY: If you want to display Compensation data (range, grade, grade profile) fields from Positions in Workday to Ashby |
| Set Up: Stock (\*see note)                           | Get Only               | ONLY: If you are overriding the Stock Plan Target at the time of offer                                                 |

## Configure business process permissions

Ashby needs access to recruiting-specific business processes. To give Ashby the right access, go to each business process as follows (using "hire" as an example in step 1):

1. Go to **bp: hire**.
2. Select **Related Actions** (`...` menu at the top) **> Business Process Policy**, then click `Edit`.
3. Scroll to **Who Can Start the Business Process**.
4. In the **Initiating Action: Hire Employee (Web Service)** section, add Ashby's Integration System Group (ISG) to the **Security Groups** list.
5. Scroll down to **Who Can Do Actions on Entire Business Process**.
6. Go to the **View All** section.
7. Add Ashby's ISG.

Ashby needs this for the following recruiting business processes (substitute each of the following in for your Workday search):

- Hire
- Change Job
- Contract Contingent Worker
- Create Position (uncommon: only if you need to create new Positions in Workday from a hire in Ashby)

After adding all of the above business process permissions, run `Activate Pending Security Policy Changes`.

# Configure the connection in Ashby

Now that you have collected all the information needed, you are ready to configure the connection in Ashby. Go to [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/workday](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/workday), and you see the screen below.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfpyfCRTXIJ8d9v4ZGqQY5RFx5_uEvA-NPq8m2xXecI0mWZvHjwhLWGCfxSI_2o7eHfJXfWrrTZpX6TAMRHHDV2Fp8O2lBpt2Nax3n8ATV0djdDX8aA5ylLkxEsN26qv9MRp9g_7Q?key=NUnBBF0wtOair6h4at6P4g" size="64" width="1374" height="1340" position="center" showCaption="false" darkWidth="1374" darkHeight="1340"}

## Steps

:::hint{type="info"}
Your Workday Tenant ID is case-sensitive, so take care when entering it in step 2.
:::

1. In the **Webservice Endpoint URL** field, paste the WSDL URL (it may look something like `https://wd2-impl-services1.workday.com/ccx/service`).
2. Add your Workday Tenant Name (case sensitive).
3. In the **ISU Username** field, enter the ISU username you created for Ashby.
4. In the **ISU Password** field, paste the ISU password.
5. In the **REST API Base URL** field, paste the "host" part of the endpoints you copied when configuring the REST API client. It looks something like `https://wd5-services1.myworkday.com`, which is just the part of the URLs that end in `myworkday.com`. They should all be the same, though yours may start with `wd4-services1`, for example.
6. In the **REST API Client ID** field, paste the client ID you copied when configuring the REST API client.
7. In the **REST API Client Secret** field, paste the client secret you copied when configuring the REST API client.
8. In the **REST API Client Refresh Token** field, paste the refresh token you copied when configuring the REST API client.
9. In the **Workday Tenant URL** field, you may leave it blank. If you find the `Open in Workday` button is not working correctly, update this using the portion of your Workday Tenant URL for tasks starting with `https://` through `/d`. It looks something like `https://wd5-impl.workday.com/example/d`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Once this is complete, let us know, and we'll monitor the initial sync to make sure all is well. An Edit Authentication Policy task may need to be run to take your ISU into account.
:::


[title] Torii
[path] Integrations/Other/

Torii is an Automated SaaS Management Platform and automates the discovery, spend optimization, operations and compliance of SaaS. This helps organizations reduce spend, free up IT time from manual tasks and manage SaaS sprawl.

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to: [https://support.toriihq.com/hc/en-us/articles/11380852062747](https://support.toriihq.com/hc/en-us/articles/11380852062747).

If there are any questions about the Torii integration, please reach out to Torii support at [https://support.toriihq.com/hc/en-us/requests/new](https://support.toriihq.com/hc/en-us/requests/new).

[title] Workday Integration FAQ
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

This page answers frequently asked questions that come up during testing and after implementation of the Workday integration.

# General functionality questions

### I made an update to an offer — can I re-hire the candidate and feed the data to Workday?

If you'd like to make small updates to an offer after pushing the event over to Workday, we recommend correcting the details manually within Workday itself, rather than pushing the event over again from Ashby. If you'd also like to update the offer details within Ashby, your updated offer may need to go through any approval and e-signature processes.

If extensive updates are being made across the offer, you need to cancel or rescind the Hire event in Workday. This re-opens the position. Within Ashby, go to the job consideration. Click `View Offer` on the existing offer activity, then `Update Offer` to update the details of the previously accepted offer. Your updates may require reapproval, and once that approval is completed, you can regenerate the offer letter and send it for e-signature again if needed. After all updates are final and the offer is accepted again, go to the `More` menu, then click `Add Candidate to HRIS` to send the event again.

:::hint{type="warning"}
When re-sending the event to Workday, Ashby only sends the Hire, Change Job, or Contract Contingent Worker event. If the hiring scenario was for a conversion where another event was sent from Ashby (e.g., a Termination or an End Contingent Worker Contract event), Ashby will not attempt to send the Termination or End CW Contract event again.

The best practice is to correct the Termination or End CW Contract event in Workday (not rescind it), then push the Hire, Change Job, or Contract Contingent Worker event again from Ashby.

If you rescind the End CW Contract or Termination event in Workday, you need to manually replace it before attempting to add the candidate again from Ashby, or you receive an error that the applicant is already hired.
:::

### Why does a position appear unfilled in Workday, while the corresponding opening with the same position ID is marked as filled?

This discrepancy occurs because when an employee is terminated, the position in Workday becomes available for recruiting again. However, Workday's system allows positions to be refilled multiple times. In Ashby, each refilling is denoted by adding "-1" (or "-N") to the position ID. So, even though the position is unfilled in Workday, the opening with the original position ID may be marked as filled in Ashby, indicating it's been refilled. When recruiting for such positions, select the corresponding "-N" position. Workday updates may reflect in the corresponding "-N" opening in Ashby.

### How do I exclude some values on the offer form? (e.g., only show 3 hire types even though there are more options in Workday)

You can remove available values by archiving them in Ashby. If there are values you need to archive that you'd also like to keep, archive all of the values and then activate the ones you want to keep.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rqGCs8JK5ho0u5yLsx2T7_screencast2024-05-29at24047pm.gif" size="70" alt="Screenshot showing the archive workflow for offer form values in Ashby" isUploading="false" width="586" height="874" darkWidth="586" darkHeight="874" showCaption="false"}

### How are new hire phone numbers pulled from Ashby into Workday?

The new hire's phone number is pulled from the **Summary** section of the candidate's profile in Ashby. If there isn't a country code attached to the phone number, Ashby falls back to a US country code as a default when parsing it.

# Testing questions

### How do we grant additional access to the Ashby sandbox for testing?

Your team can add new users at any time. To add new users, go to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**, then select `+ New` in the top right corner and add the new user with their email. Users are not notified when they are added, so let them know they've been added and can access the sandbox.

# Support questions

### How can I request additional Workday fields to be available in Ashby?

To request additional fields, contact our Support team at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

Fields on Jobs, Openings, or Employees can be synced from Workday to Ashby using either a Workday-delivered field or a calculated field on the Job Requisition, Position, or Worker business object. Provide the following details to facilitate the creation of the custom field in Ashby:

- Workday field name
- Title you would like to show in Ashby
- Ashby object (Job, Opening, or Employee)
- Field type (String, Date, Currency, Number, Boolean, Single Instance, or Multi-Instance)
- WQL Alias (for a calculated field, find this on the **Additional Info** tab under **Advanced**; for a Workday-delivered field, open the field and it appears at the bottom of the page)

If you need to send additional data from Ashby to Workday in a Hire event push, Support evaluates whether the field is supported in the relevant Workday API, and advises on the timeline to incorporate the field if it is supported.

# Functionality to request

Our Workday integration was built to ensure as many organizations as possible can use it out of the box. However, we understand there will always be variations in needs. To add any of the following functionality, reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) or directly to your integration partner. Some of these options may not be relevant depending on your integration mode, so make sure you talk to your implementation partner:

- **No Contingent Worker Positions:** Only sync Workday Positions that have an "Employee" Worker Type in the "Positions Restriction Data" section; this would exclude Contingent Workers
- **Positions Fields as Job Fields:** Having Workday Position fields tie to both the Ashby Job and Opening fields. By default, Workday Position fields are only tied to Ashby Opening fields.
- **Openings Auto Sync as Open:** Workday Positions sync as Openings with a status of "open." By default, Openings appear as "approved" when synced into Ashby.
- **Show Workday Custom Fields on all Jobs and/or Openings:** By default, Workday synced fields are only available on Jobs and Openings synced from Workday. Enabling this option allows Workday fields to display on all Jobs or Openings (even if they were created in Ashby), so your recruiting team can add data in the correct Workday format for reporting and defaulting values later on in the offer stage.
- **Map Cost Centers to Teams:** Sync your Cost Center Hierarchy into the Teams/Departments list in Ashby. If the Workday integration is creating Jobs automatically, this allows the Team to be automatically assigned based on the Cost Center from the job requisition. It also means your Team/Department list is automatically updated when new Cost Centers are added, so you don't have to manually manage a separate list of teams and departments in Ashby.
- **Map Locations from Workday:** Sync your Location Hierarchy into the Locations list in Ashby. If the Workday integration is creating Jobs automatically, this allows the Location to be automatically assigned based on the Primary Location from the job requisition. It also means your Locations list is automatically updated when new Locations are added, so you don't have to manually manage a separate list of locations in Ashby.
- **Sync Recruiting Sources from Workday:** Pull in the Recruiting Source data from Workday and map it in Ashby so that when the Pre-Hire is created, the Source can be populated with a source recognized by Workday (for example, referrals).
- **Sync Employee Business Title as Job Title in Ashby:** Some users prefer the employee's job title to be sourced from the Business Title field in Workday instead of the Position Title. Enabling this feature syncs the Workday Business Title into the Job Title field on the employee in Ashby.
- **Skip Sending Phone Number and/or Social Links to Workday:** By default, Ashby attempts to send the phone number and social links from the candidate profile onto the Pre-Hire profile in Workday. If you don't want this information sent from the candidate profile, we can disable the automatic integration of these fields.
- **Automatically Create Confidential Jobs:** This feature allows you to use a Recruiting Instruction called **Confidential**, which creates the Job in Ashby as a confidential one automatically.
- **Map Job Roles from Workday:** When Ashby is syncing jobs from Workday job requisitions, we can map the Hiring Manager and/or Recruiter assigned on the job requisition automatically into the Hiring Team Role on the Job in Ashby.
- **Auto-complete business process steps:** By default, Ashby follows your defined business process flow in Workday for the relevant staffing events (Hire, Change Job, Contract Contingent Worker). However, we can set instructions to auto-complete or auto-skip certain steps in the business process under defined conditions to further automate the process and prevent someone from having to click `Submit` or `Skip` in Workday to advance the process. The most common requests are:
  - Always auto-complete the Propose Compensation and Change Organization Assignment steps
  - Auto-complete the Stock Grant and One-Time Payment steps if there is a Stock Grant or One-Time Payment (OTP) in the offer
  - Auto-skip the Stock Grant and One-Time Payment steps if there is no Stock Grant or OTP in the offer

[title] Hume
[path] Integrations/Video Interviewing/

## Connecting Hume and Ashby

- Open Ashby and navigate to the Admin panel.
- Select Integrations from the left menu and find the Hume tile under the Video Interviewing section.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/242a65a0ad54bc91696cd77e911e96b7.png)

- Select `Create API key for Hume` and copy the newly generated API key.
- Now that we've successfully created Ashby API Key go to your Hume organization settings. There are 2 inputs:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QxQ2Cgtolz8h06Z9SATh6_untitled.png" size="100" alt="Untitled" isUploading="false" initialPath="Hume%2061211b78fee7496b9fcbb5392beccd57/Untitled.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Hume 61211b78fee7496b9fcbb5392beccd57/Untitled.png" width="800" height="341" darkWidth="1702" darkHeight="727" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- Click Update, if you entered the wrong API Key you will be warned. If correct, you'll see a notification and 3 new buttons:
  - Test - you can click on it to confirm your Ashby API Key works
  - Sync - to immediately sync Ashby Jobs and Candidates to your Hume organization
  - Delete - to delete your Ashby integration

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TfWtVB3lyvh5ifVzqP5n8_untitled-1.png)

:::hint{type="success"}
You’re all set and ready to use the integration!
:::


[title] Other
[path] Integrations/


[title] Scheduled Dashboards
[path] Ashby Analytics/Alerts & Exports/

This document provides an overview of Scheduled Dashboard delivery, including set-up filtering, and finding scheduled content.

Scheduled Dashboards can be configured on the Plus, Enterprise and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## How to Create a Scheduled Dashboard delivery

:::hint{type="warning"}
Access to scheduled delivery depends on the dashboard's locking settings and your dashboard permissions. If the dashboard is locked, the locker and users with the `Editor` role can manage scheduled deliveries by default. The dashboard owner can also allow other users with dashboard access to manage scheduled deliveries.
:::



::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Click on the Scheduled Delivery button in the top right corner of the dashboard, then click on `Add Scheduled Delivery`.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 2.43.35 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JOkmyioo09rcOAnndGzBr_screencast2023-07-25at24335pm.gif)


:::
::::



::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you are viewing a dashboard that has been pinned to your Home Page, you will need to click the `Edit` button first in order to access the Scheduled Delivery button. Then click on `Add Scheduled Delivery`.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 2.50.44 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3KLbzStkfnoxDeqGuN0y8_screencast2023-07-25at25044pm.gif)


:::
::::



![Screen Shot 2023-07-25 at 3.14.45 PM.png](https://cdn.zappy.app/456d88e59572db305bf9132367fe4cff.png)

Once a scheduled delivery has been added to the dashboard, you can configure the following:

1. When the dashboard should be delivered
2. How the Scheduled Dashboard will be delivered.
3. Who will receive the dashboard
4. Apply any filters
5. Select the delivery format
6. Enter a Title (required)
7. Add message content
8. Determine who the sender is.

### When the dashboard should be delivered

Select the cadence at which the dashboard should be delivered. You can choose from Day, Week, Month, or Quarter, and the day and time options are dependent upon which selection you make.

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 3.23.12 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/83ICFLFJAdLYkh0fdK4V0_screencast2023-07-25at32312pm.gif)

### How the dashboard should be delivered

Choose either Email or Slack as your delivery method. For more on the integration with Slack, check out [Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo).

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 3.26.43 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nMxPvTLJ7jRCBUQ1BKSaS_screencast2023-07-25at32643pm.gif)



### Who will receive the dashboard

Choose who will receive the dashboard via Email or Slack. The table below provides an overview of to whom dashboards can be delivered by All-In-One and Analytics Ashby customers.

|                | **Email**<br />**(Ashby users)** | **Email (entered manually)** | **Slack DM** | **Slack Channel**<br />**(public & private)** |
| -------------- | -------------------------------- | ---------------------------- | ------------ | --------------------------------------------- |
| **All-in-One** | ✅ (all users)                    |           ✅                  |        ✅     |          ✅                                    |
| **Analytics**  | ✅ (with a license)               |           ❌                  |        ✅     |          ❌                                    |

**Email:** Select users from your organization or enter an email manually. You can use the Deliver drop-down to determine whether individual emails will be sent to multiple users, or if the dashboard should be sent out to all recipients via one email.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ce31d550a61813c0fc9fd1e9455ae8f9.png)



**Slack:** Select a Slack user from your organization to send via DM or sent to a Slack Channel.

- To add the Ashby application to a channel: type @ashby as a message in the channel (where you would type a message to send to the whole channel) and select Ashby `APP` not in channel.
  - Once the bot has been added, you will no longer see “Not in channel.”

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qDIv1hVYiDXJM31_XY52F_screenshot2023-11-06at83301am.png)

- Syncing private channels may take up to 30 minutes after the Ashby app is initially added.
- To prevent private channel names from being revealed, you must type in the exact private channel name when creating your scheduled dashboard delivery.

### Apply any filters

If your dashboard uses Dashboard Filters,  configure the filter selections that should be applied at the time of delivery. (This is not required).

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 3.37.27 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RjUHGJPHitBFUyeNCxRbS_screencast2023-07-25at33727pm.gif)

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have a User filter in place and set this to filter by recipients (where they are applied as the "User" filter value automatically), then you will not be able to select the Group Email option in the Deliver dropdown.
:::

### Select the delivery format

Select the dashboard delivery format from the options listed below:

1. PDF: Allows you to send a PDF of the entire dashboard.
2. CSV: Allows you to send a ZIP file of all report results in CSV format.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that very wide or very high row-count tables will be truncated to match a visual snapshot of the dashboard as seen. Users will need to log in to scroll to view more data or view a drill down.
:::

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 3.39.43 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MemzrHqDo9YFhwgwb_6M7_screencast2023-07-25at33943pm.gif)

### Enter a Title (required) and message body

Enter a Title for the scheduled dashboard delivery and a message if you would like.

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 3.43.50 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GBkteGvdKuhsbJkrff7i3_screencast2023-07-25at34350pm.gif)

Click on the Send Now button to see a dashboard delivery result at any time - this is helpful for testing out a scheduled dashboard.

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 3.48.07 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/INemNfx43tsEXT3utjJne_screencast2023-07-25at34807pm.gif)

### Activate the Scheduled Dashboard delivery

Once you have finished with configuration, you can activate the Scheduled Dashboard by clicking the Activate button. A schedule will be locked after activation and indicate who it was configured by.

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 3.53.17 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uSgtJ-gNgfg8SWNRy_Ij5_screencast2023-07-25at35317pm.gif)

## Advanced Filtering: Send dashboard filtered by recipient

When a dashboard has a User dashboard filter on it, you have the option to filter the dashboard delivery results by each recipient. This feature allows you to configure a single schedule with many recipients, all of which will receive a uniquely filtered dashboard specific to them.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c04aea2592074f22881b545c47ffebd1?sid=8df23f9d-96d5-4dfe-bbd2-9c1f5ea2d3d3"}

## How to Find Scheduled Deliveries

- Navigate to Dashboards > Click Saved Dashboards > Then click into the Scheduled Dashboards folder

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JFO2RfneW-rs2nZ3Yla_w_screencast2023-07-25at42713pm.gif" size="100" alt="Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 4.27.13 PM.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Scheduled%20Dashboards%203475993bc2944cf09aafff4e42975543/Screen_Cast_2023-07-25_at_4.27.13_PM.gif" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 2/Scheduled Dashboards 3475993bc2944cf09aafff4e42975543/Screen_Cast_2023-07-25_at_4.27.13_PM.gif" width="2040" height="852" darkWidth="2040" darkHeight="852" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

When viewing any dashboard, the `Scheduled Delivery` button will show a count of schedules created on the dashboard, including those that are not activated. Mouse over the number to see the active and inactive counts.

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 4.29.01 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jBsjAF4HyJ1vhETOfcmT-_screencast2023-07-25at42901pm.gif)

## How to Edit or Delete a Scheduled Delivery

To edit a Scheduled Delivery, click the `Deactivate & Edit` button, make your changes, and then click the `Activate` button.

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 4.33.16 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kM7Xff-XKnv8soTQgBgyr_screencast2023-07-25at43316pm.gif)

To delete a Scheduled Delivery, click on the Trash icon and then click the Remove button.

![Screen Cast 2023-07-25 at 4.35.47 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2b2mvVUsSDJJ1O6vIrFYL_screencast2023-07-25at43547pm.gif)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I have multiple scheduled deliveries for a dashboard?

Yes; any dashboard can have multiple scheduled deliveries added or configured.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Who can schedule a dashboard?

For Analytics customers, users need an Analytics Admin license. For All-in-One customers, users need dashboard editing or creation permissions.

Dashboard locking adds another control. On a locked dashboard, the locker and users with the `Editor` role can manage scheduled deliveries by default. The dashboard owner can allow other users with access to manage scheduled deliveries from **More > Access**.

For more information regarding dashboard editing/creation permissions, view [Permissions & Licenses in Analytics](docId:8bZAxa42Hiw-iSUDGSz-q).

For more information on dashboard locking, see [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I configure Slack delivery?

- To set up the integration for Slack, please review our [Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo) guide.
- Add the Ashby bot (@mention Ashby)to the channel where you would like the dashboards delivered.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Who is the email delivery sent from?

Within the Advanced section of the Scheduled Dashboards setup, you can select whether the dashboard should be sent from the generating user, or via Ashby if the dashboard is being sent out via email. If sending via Slack, the dashboard will always send from Ashby.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c8d0686590218c9d072c4895aeaac5fc.png)
:::


[title] Basqo (formerly Cartha)
[path] Integrations/Other/

Ashby is now an integration partner to Basqo. This guide will walk you through enabling the Basqo integration.

## What is Basqo?

Basqo integrates with Ashby in just a few minutes, enabling three core use cases every mid-sized company has.

Single source of truth: Integrating the ATS in Basqo is the missing link to full control of all workforce costs. All changes of the published positions, like start dates, salaries are directly considered for the forecast.

Hiring Tracking: Instead of manually tracking the hiring status of your planned positions in Excel sheets, Basqo automatically links published positions in Ashby with planned positions from the hiring plan or budget.

People Analytics: Basqo features a vast reporting library - from salary comparisons, hiring analytics, team compositions and more - allowing you to drill into active and planned positions by whatever detail you need.

## Use the following instructions to enable the Basqo \<> Ashby integration

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
1. In Basqo, navigate to Data> Integrations
2. Click `Add ATS`
3. Find Ashby from the list and click `Integrate`
4. Insert the API credentials from Ashby
5. Click on `Connect`

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on creating an API key, check out [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ)&#x20;
:::




::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/-oSf_wqBHK79LLZyQ63lr_untitled.png)

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kv0UCKL6q0V1uFoh9uhmo_untitled-1.png)

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3zWSdiQ5Odlt_9u1tIIgU_untitled-2.png)

**
:::
:::::


[title] Alerts
[path] Ashby Analytics/Alerts & Exports/

Alerts is a reporting feature that enables automated report delivery based on highly configurable scheduling, custom conditions, and dynamic routing of select results to involved team members. A library of Alert templates is available to help you get started.

## Permissions & access

Those on the Foundations plan cannot create custom alerts but do have access to use Alert templates. Custom Alerts can be configured on the Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Alerts overview

Alerts allows customized and timely delivery of data that matters to the recipients who matter. Difference detection and dynamic routing automate delivery of this data. A single alert alleviates the need to create many customized report delivery schedules.

# Example use cases

We've identified a number of use cases where alerts can be applied immediately. They range from data quality and operational excellence to milestone notifications. Some of the use cases we use at Ashby are listed below.

## Surveys & Feedback: use alerts to be notified of feedback on candidate interviews or survey results

- [Alert when a low NPS Score comes in on a Candidate Experience Survey](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert whenever a candidate receives a 4 on a scorecard](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)&#x20;
- [Alert when a candidate post-recruiter screen reaches an average score of >3](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)&#x20;

## Data Quality: use alerts to be notified when important fields are empty

- [Alert when someone makes it past recruiter screen but has no source associated](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert when a job was opened without assigned recruiter](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert when a referral was submitted and has no recruiter assigned](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)

## Recruiting Operations: use alerts to stay on top of candidate, interview, or job activity

- [Alert when a new role is opened](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert when a job has become “stale”](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alerts to individual recruiters when they are breaking custom SLAs (e.g. time in stage, time to review referral, etc.)](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [New hire alert](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert when a candidate applies who is at one of the top 10 companies you recruit from](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert when an interview needs to be scheduled](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert when candidates who had made it to onsite were archived, with archive reason](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)
- [Alert whenever a new candidate makes it to offer stage](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)****

## Building a report and alert from scratch

In this example, we create a report that looks at candidates in the recruiter screen stage for 10+ days and set up an alert to automatically notify individual recruiters of only the candidates they are managing. In a matter of minutes, you can set up a single alert with dynamic routing to notify team members of records that are important to them.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/69d4a5fa2ecc40ffb6413fb4cc05d3b9"}

# How to create an alert

An alert can be created for any saved Custom List report. To add a new alert, navigate to **Reports > Saved Reports** and click on the Custom List report in question, then click the `Alerts` button.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6ZRe_e3LSJOncTtcFml6E_alerts-archbee-document-2026-07-24-at-125042-pm.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you do not see the `Alerts` button, check the following:

- Is the report you're viewing a Custom List report?  If not, the `Alerts` button will not appear.
- Has the report been saved?  The `Alerts` button only appears on saved reports. Save your report for it to appear.
:::

Once an alert has been added to a Custom List report, you can configure the following:

1. What records to deliver
2. When the alert should be delivered
3. Who receives the alert and who is listed as the sender
4. What the delivery email says
5. How the alert is delivered

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xbcGsCde6WoVjXRBb_in5_image.png)

## What records to deliver

Under the **Send** section, you can decide what records you want delivered. This allows for customized focus on details relevant to your particular use case.

:::hint{type="info"}
Report data for an alert is generated on behalf of the user who creates the alert, so all of the creator's account permissions apply.

If the user who enabled an alert is deactivated, the alert stops sending. See [What happens to my alerts if the user who enabled them is deactivated?](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) in the FAQ section for details and next steps.

If the entire list is sent to a specified user and not a User involved as (more on this in our FAQ), the user receiving the report can see all of the report data in the alert email. Add filters to remove any jobs (including confidential jobs) or specific data that you don't want users receiving the alert to see, as part of your alert setup process.
:::

Options include:

- **Entire List:** sends the entire set of report results at a fixed period — daily, weekly, or quarterly — with customization
- **Added Records:** regularly runs your report and compares the results since the previous run to send only the records that were added
- **Removed Records:** regularly runs your report and compares the results since the previous run to send only the records that were removed

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Rd15JyUTqNcIexfjoDpAK_image.png)

## When the alert should be delivered

After selecting what records to deliver, you can select when the alert should be delivered.

- **Periodically:&#x20;**&#x72;uns the report at a fixed period and sends an alert when records were added or removed since the previous run. You can opt to send alerts daily, weekly, monthly, or quarterly. You can also set a custom frequency by selecting Set custom frequency from the dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6xGUb0n6bbOJ9GeBo37KU_slack-candidate-alert-report-acent-ashby-2026-02-19-at-21042-pm.jpg" size="100" width="1788" height="1012" position="center" alt="The alerts menu with an open dropdown showing the cadence options for sending alerts." darkWidth="1788" darkHeight="1012" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Immediately:&#x20;**&#x72;uns the report on a very short regular period and sends an alert whenever records were added or removed since the previous run. From least to most complex, checks for new results occur every five, 30, or 60 minutes. Most basic reports send new results within five minutes, but particularly complex reports can take up to one hour for delivery of new results.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
The option to send an alert immediately is only available when the alert type is set to `Added` or `Removed Records`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uStdxl35tGD_iNn_B3YWx_alerts-archbee-document-2026-07-24-at-124524-pm.png)
:::

## Who will receive the alert

After you set your report type and delivery schedule, you can specify the alert's recipients. Ashby Alerts allows standard email or a dynamic routing option to deliver records only to the involved users. You can opt to send individual emails to each specified user as part of the alert, or send a single email including all users who are set as recipients.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WTzXKZC5E4ViDp31psHzp_routing.png)

- **Deliver any record as**
  - Use the **Individual Emails** dropdown to specify if the record should be sent as individual emails or as a group email. This option can only be used when adding specific users or emails directly.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vk-zfSI5dOtpmIc7Goymp_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-12524-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1498" height="456" darkWidth="1498" darkHeight="456" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Deliver to**
  - &#x20;Use the `+ Add user or email` button to add users or specific emails to send the alert to.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5s_Z8RvEyBN_ky_rvbRTo_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-12739-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1378" height="584" darkWidth="1378" darkHeight="584" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- &#x20;If your report includes user roles, such as recruiters, you can send just the records those users are involved with to them automatically using the `+ Add user role` button.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yD_Ko3ee8HGKyZKHicjp2_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-13014-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1394" height="204" darkWidth="1394" darkHeight="204" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

## Choosing a sender

You can select who the alert appears to come from: either the generating user (the default) or Ashby, selected from the drop-down.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8egmTEXcgLQsRwTQA6qmI_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-13736-pm.png)

## What the delivery email says

You can customize the title of the alert and email body. The alert results are inserted inline to the email after any custom message content you add. Once you enter an alert title, the `Activate` or `Lock Report & Activate` button turns purple, indicating that the alert can now be activated.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/or3lkI8NBkZQVZ-KO6bhb_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-13213-pm.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
When activating an Added Records or Removed Records alert, a `Lock Report & Activate` button appears. These alert types depend on differences in report results to identify added and removed records, so editing the report impacts the alert behavior. The report remains locked to prevent any modification of your delivered content without your review.
:::

Below is an example of an alert delivery email. In this instance, there are links to the candidate profile, job page, and the underlying Custom List report. There is also a link to view the report in Ashby.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/svebJ4XGz_sMBogvV3nRw_screenshot2022-11-02at95258am.png)

If you prefer that Ashby links (for example, a link to the candidate profile) are not included, toggle off the `Include Links to Ashby` option within the sender settings. This setting applies only to Ashby links and doesn't affect non-Ashby links (for example, a candidate's social URL). The link to view the report in Ashby is still present within the email.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VAt7h92p-A4rZxhNj1OAJ_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-13821-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1230" height="350" darkWidth="1230" darkHeight="350" showCaption="false"}

## How the alert is delivered

When adding an alert, the default delivery method is email. If the Slack integration is enabled, you can select Slack.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on configuring the Slack integration, see [Slack](docId\:W4WjFtj8j0vkKxYkl2Vqo) .
:::

### Delivery via Slack

With the Slack integration enabled, your alert has a **Delivery** field that lets you select email or Slack. When you select the Slack option, you have two delivery options:

- **Direct message:** send report results directly to the specified or dynamically routed users
- **Send to Channel:** specify a Slack channel you would like the report results delivered to
  - After you add the Ashby application to a private Slack channel, you can send notifications to that channel.
  - To add the Ashby application: type @ashby as a message in the channel (where you type a message to send to the whole channel) and select `Ashby APP` (Not in channel).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cP8Oh1af4kI4ffQUWzvqw_screenshot2023-11-06at83301am.png" size="100" alt="Screen Shot 2023-11-06 at 8.33.01 AM.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Alerts%205c3b3f302a2c494d9b8767f180b6cca1/Screen_Shot_2023-11-06_at_8.33.01_AM.png" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 2/Alerts 5c3b3f302a2c494d9b8767f180b6cca1/Screen_Shot_2023-11-06_at_8.33.01_AM.png" width="453" height="159" darkWidth="453" darkHeight="159" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

Syncing private channels may take up to 30 minutes after the Ashby app is initially added.&#x20;

To prevent private channel names from being revealed, type in the exact private channel name when creating your alert.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2MnWJwTpGwlQlZDvoB4Wm_screenshot2022-11-02at10057pm.png)

### Slack message formatting

The results delivered via Slack messages follow a formatting determined by the Custom List report: the first column (often the Candidate) is the top-level element, and the subsequent columns are listed as sub-bullet points. An example of our new hire notification, which incorporates linking to process documents, is shown below.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/h0efO9a87MTtMGfXU7WUw_slackalertexample.png" size="70" width="657" height="411" darkWidth="657" darkHeight="411" position="center" alt="slack_alert_example.png" showCaption="false"}

# View active alerts

The saved reports directory has a folder titled **Reports with Alerts** in which any report with an alert is listed.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/g3GJs8zDtQPlLOqvSkeOU_saved-reports-ashby-2026-07-24-at-14444-pm.png)

The bell icon indicates how many active alerts the report has.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BOTnJ-WAVyos8tDVflS1M_saved-reports-ashby-2026-07-24-at-14851-pm.png)

At the report level, the `Alerts` button shows the number of alerts added to the report. If you hover over the alert count on the `Alerts` button, it shows the number of active and inactive alerts.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tKs15mf55RMap_8LxvZ3I_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-15610-pm.png)

# Make changes to alerts

You can click the `Alerts` button within the report to make changes to exists alerts or add new ones.

- Make changes to an alert by clicking `Alerts > Deactivate & Edit`. You can update any alert configuration after deactivating it.
- Select the `Activate` button once you have made your changes.
- Added/Removed Records reports function by comparing sequential snapshots of a report. The first snapshot is taken when the alert is enabled. A snapshot is then taken at each scheduled delivery time. If an alert is deactivated and reactivated, the starting snapshot resets to the report results at the time of reactivation.
  - Scheduled immediately: any record added to or removed from a report while it is deactivated is no longer considered added or removed, and no alert is sent once the alert is activated again.
  - Scheduled periodically: if a record is added to or removed from a report before the alert is scheduled to send and the report is then deactivated, that record is no longer considered added or removed and is not included in the alert once reactivated.
  - For example:
    - The alert is scheduled to send at 2 pm every day.
    - A record is added to the report at 11 am.
    - The alert is deactivated to make changes to the underlying report at 12:30 pm.
    - The alert is activated at 12:35 pm.
    - The record added at 11 am is not included in the 2 pm alert because it is not considered added or removed — it was already on the report when the alert was activated at 12:35 pm.
- See when an alert was enabled or updated by clicking the `Alerts` button and hovering over the info icon next to **Enabled By**.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ll2PdlbdCgW1kYiI4V4qt_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-15959-pm.png" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1634" height="530" darkWidth="1634" darkHeight="530" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- To make changes to the Custom List report that an alert is based on, unlock the report by updating the setting at the top left near the report title to `Unlock report`. This deactivates the alert, so reactivate it once you've saved the report changes.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QcmVQL8aBeNDb4AG7zjYX_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-20119-pm.png)

# Delete an alert

Delete an alert by clicking the `Alerts` button, then selecting the trash icon on the right side of the alert you wish to delete.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dVF_3uP05a3GvihdiWWcr_custom-list-eng-jobs-report-ashby-2026-07-24-at-20301-pm.png)

# FAQ

### Can an alert be sent on the last day of every month?

Yes; we recommend selecting the 31st day of the month. The alert is sent on the last day of the month, even on months with fewer than 31 days.

### Do alert links to candidate profiles work for non-Ashby users?

For users without access to Ashby, or who are logged out, the candidate profile link from an Ashby alert redirects to your host ATS candidate profile (for example, directly to Greenhouse or Lever). For any Ashby user who is logged in, the candidate profile link in an alert opens the Ashby profile, from which they can view the profile in the host ATS by selecting the `View in [ATS]` button.

### When sending with "to users involved as," what records are included?

When you select a user field such as recruiter or hiring manager in to users involved as, only records associated with those users are delivered. For example, if you have a custom list report scheduled to send the entire list every Monday, opting to send records to the associated recruiter results in each recruiter seeing the entire list of candidates they are associated with, but no other records.

### Why did I receive an empty alert?

For recurring alerts (for example, those not set to immediate), Ashby always sends emails to all fixed recipients, regardless of whether the alert and underlying report are empty.

### Why didn't I receive my recurring alert?

For recurring alerts, to users involved as recipients do not receive an alert when the underlying Custom List report is empty. No one is "involved as" when the record set is empty.

### Can I attach the results as a CSV file to the alert?

Yes! Both email alerts and alerts in Slack support attaching the results as a CSV file. When setting up your alert or editing it, select CSV from the Attach dropdown within the Advanced section.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7751848b0dfdffa50b3bff65aabcb58a.png" size="72" width="765" height="858" darkWidth="765" darkHeight="858" position="center" showCaption="false"}

If the attachments exceed the platform's limits (10 MB for email, 1 GB for Slack), they are not attached, but the normal message is still sent.

### Can I create an alert for a Segmentation, Count Over Time, or Candidate List report?

Alerts can only be configured for Custom List reports. If you have a dashboard with reports that you'd like to send out to users on a regular basis, check out Scheduled Dashboards.

### Can I attach candidate resumes to an alert?

Currently this isn't possible. You can include the candidate profile URL in your custom list report details, though, so the candidate profile is easily accessible from the report. Users need access to the job, department, team, or location the candidate is linked to in order to view the profile.

### Is markdown formatting supported for alerts in Slack?

Alerts sent to Slack support limited markdown formatting. You can format alerts sent to Slack with hyperlinks, bold, italic, and headings.

### Why did I receive an alert I didn't expect?

Report alerts configured to send on added or removed rows trigger on any added or removed row, regardless of the reason. Some common causes of unexpected alerts are:

- Permission changes for the user the report results are generated as (such that they can now see a different set of rows)
- Changes to filters: rows that were previously in the report may end up filtered out, or rows that weren't previously in the report are now included.

### What happens to my alerts if the user who enabled them is deactivated?

When the user who enabled a report alert is deactivated in Ashby, the alert stops sending. Because report data is generated using the enabling user's account permissions, Ashby pauses delivery when that account is no longer active. This keeps sensitive data secure.

To keep your alerts running, any active user with sufficient permissions can reassign an alert before the departing user's account is deactivated:

1. Navigate to **Reports > Saved Reports** and open the report with the alert.
2. Select the `Alerts` button, then select `Deactivate & Edit`.
3. Select `Activate` to reactivate the alert under your user account and permissions.

We recommend completing this before the departing user's last day to avoid any interruption in alert delivery. If the departing user had locked any reports, any Organization Admin can unlock them. For more information, see [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o) .

[title] Hireflix
[path] Integrations/Video Interviewing/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Hireflix account with Ashby, allowing you to send Hireflix one-way video interviews as assessments in your interview plans.

### Getting Started Checklist

1. Open a browser tab with Ashby on the [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page
2. Open another browser tab with Hireflix on the [api keys](https://admin.hireflix.com/en/my-account/api-keys) page

### Video Walkthrough

You can find a video walkthrough of this integration [here](https://www.loom.com/share/eca9796e55cb48bbac2a168efd9f02ff).

### Add the Integration in Ashby

1. Starting from the [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) page, click on the Hireflix integration tile, and then click on the green `Enable Hireflix` button.
2. Once that’s done, you should see a panel to configure keys for the integration
   1. Note: you’ll come back here to input your Hireflix API key and webhook secret, once you have them
3. Click the Ashby API Key drop down to create or select an existing one for this integration.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/X4Wrhgw8GBSrZEyJIr_uG_untitled.png" size="100" alt="Untitled" isUploading="false" initialPath="Hireflix%202c07c6ca5d4941bba39ce4d1dbfe93ec/Untitled.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Hireflix 2c07c6ca5d4941bba39ce4d1dbfe93ec/Untitled.png" width="800" height="524" darkWidth="1376" darkHeight="902" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

### Get the Hireflix API Key

Next, we need to get an API key from Hireflix, so that Ashby can interact with Hireflix.

1. Set up your Hireflix API key by going [here](https://admin.hireflix.com/en/my-account/api-keys)
2. Click `Create Key`, and describe your key with some text like “Ashby Integration” in the box that appears, and then
3. Click Create at the bottom, and then your new API key should appear in the list.
4. Reveal your new key in the API keys to copy it somewhere temporarily, as we’ll need it in a moment
5. Go back to Ashby [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace), and enter your new Hireflix API key in the topmost box in the Ashby Hireflix settings (same place where you started with the Ashby API key setup initially)

### Connect the Hireflix Webhook to Ashby

Next we’re going to setup the webhook, so Hireflix can notify Ashby when video interviews are complete.

1. Set up a new webhook by going [here](https://admin.hireflix.com/en/my-account/webhooks)
2. Click `Create new webhook` at the bottom
3. In the screen that appears, configure the following information:

- URL: [https://app.ashbyhq.com/api/hireflix/webhook](https://app.ashbyhq.com/api/hireflix/webhook)
- Events: Enable interview\.status-change

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ncNBNCwJN0vN4LHK49EXu_screenshot2022-06-02at123217pm.png" size="100" alt="Screen Shot 2022-06-02 at 12.32.17 PM.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Hireflix%202c07c6ca5d4941bba39ce4d1dbfe93ec/Screen_Shot_2022-06-02_at_12.32.17_PM.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Hireflix 2c07c6ca5d4941bba39ce4d1dbfe93ec/Screen_Shot_2022-06-02_at_12.32.17_PM.png" width="800" height="554" darkWidth="1336" darkHeight="926" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

1. Once you’re done, click the `Save` button.
2. Next, it should leave you back on the webhooks page. Click `Reveal` under the Secret Key section, and then copy the secret somewhere temporarily, as we’ll need it in a moment.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RospHesrEKREpIYbiDyoc_screenshot2022-06-02at12152pm.png" size="100" alt="Screen Shot 2022-06-02 at 1.21.52 PM.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="Hireflix%202c07c6ca5d4941bba39ce4d1dbfe93ec/Screen_Shot_2022-06-02_at_1.21.52_PM.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/Hireflix 2c07c6ca5d4941bba39ce4d1dbfe93ec/Screen_Shot_2022-06-02_at_1.21.52_PM.png" width="800" height="489" darkWidth="1654" darkHeight="1012" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. Go back to Ashby [integrations admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace), and enter your new Hireflix webhook secret in the box labeled Hireflix Webhook Secret in the Ashby Hireflix settings (same place where you started with the Ashby API key setup initially)

:::hint{type="success"}
Now you're all set to use Hireflix one-way video interviews!
:::


[title] Sora
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Sora account with Ashby, allowing you to push hired candidates’ data directly into Sora to kickstart the employee onboarding workflow.

## Integration Overview

Once a candidate has accepted an offer, you can automatically push their data into Sora to trigger your pre-boarding/onboarding workflow at the right time. Sora can then import employees directly into your HRIS to avoid any manual data entry at all!

## How to setup the integration

No work required on your end, other than providing simple information to your Sora Customer Success Manager, who can then implement your Ashby integration in minutes!

[title] Utilizing Stage Groups
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics: Best Practices/

This document reviews how to configure interview stage groups and how to utilize the stage group fields for filtering and grouping in reporting.

## Introduction: Stage Groups

![Active Applications by Stage Group & Department.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xxUJcdG3FjBTctGv9knIe_activeapplicationsbystagegroupdepartment.png)

Ashby permits the definition of key interview milestones which we call stage groups, where each group is a collection of individual interview stages. You can create, name, and adjust the order of your stage groups as needed and map your individual interview plan stages into the appropriate group. Once done, any interview plans with different stages that map to the same overall stage of progress can be reported on conveniently to produce results across various jobs, departments or groupings in aggregate.

## Set up Stage Groups

For Ashby Analytics customers you can configure your stage groups by navigating to Admin > Data Mapping > [Grouped Interview Plan](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-mapping/grouped-interview-plan).  Note that you have the ability to select whether the stage group is shown in the funnel and passthrough tables by default.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you're an Ashby All-In-One customer head on over to [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq) for a guide on setting up your grouped interview plan.
:::

You can add, remove, or re-order stage groups at any time. As your interview stages evolve, make sure to review your stage mapping periodically to ensure all stages are mapped appropriately.

![Screen Shot 2023-06-07 at 7.51.18 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yTAcFH-NSiGZjKJg-_pbf_screenshot2023-06-07at75118am.png)

After your primary stage groups are set up, you can proceed to map your various interview stages into their appropriate groups from the [Interview Stage Mapping](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/data-mapping/stage-mapping) page.

## Using Stage Groups in Reporting

Once stage groups are setup, you can leverage their availability with the following fields which enable advanced filtering and grouping.

Fields designed for filtering and grouping in reports are:

- Current interview stage group: Allows selecting and filtering by the stage group that the application is currently in.
- Furthest stage group reached: Allows selecting and filtering by the furthest stage group the application was last active in.

Fields designed for filter selection:

- Reached stage group: Allows filtering applications that have reached a certain stage group, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will return all applications that have passed through this stage or have skipped this stage but passed through a later stage.
- Passed through stage group: Allows filtering applications that have passed through a certain stage group, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will only return applications that have passed through that stage, not applications that skipped the stage group. Note, passed through stage group will include candidates currently in the stage group.
- Most recent active stage group: Allows selecting and filtering by the stage group the application was in when being hired or rejected.

## Analysis Examples

### Visualizing your candidate pipeline with current interview stage group

One of the most common reporting functions is to evaluate applications by their current interview stage group. In this example you can select active candidates, filter to exclude application review, and focus in the active interview stage groups across departments or jobs.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/1311002455414250ad6ffaba7a03c443"}

### Visualizing qualified candidates outcomes with reached stage group

The reached stage group field can be useful in selecting candidates that have made it to a certain point or beyond in your funnel. A common use case is to select qualified candidates on whether or not they have reached the screen stage or beyond. This analysis looks at the percent of qualified candidates hired and forms a screen to hired ratio report.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/d18e2741ab5942c8956297509eb33e02"}


[title] Pave
[path] Integrations/Other/

This guide walks through setting up Ashby’s integration with Pave. Pave is a leading compensation platform that integrates directly with Ashby to provide Visual Offer Letters. For more on creating offers in Ashby, check out [Offers and Offer Letters](docId\:KLIMfx9N1tAhEBVkMGPOh). If you are looking to send e-signature requests, please review [E-Signature Offers](docId\:ZSjEK0E500MeDHTKQqelW).

### What you will find in this article:

- Creating a Visual Offer Letter (VOL)
- Editing a VOL
- Deleting a VOL
- Sharing a VOL with candidates
- Optional Approval Flow

### Enabling the Integration:

1. Log into Ashby
2. Navigate to Admin > Integrations
3. Search for and select `Pave`

:::BlockQuote{listStyleType="decimal" listStart="4" indent="1"}
Select the + Create API key for Pave
:::

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="decimal" indent="2"}
Make sure to save your API Key to a safe place. If you lose your key, you will need to create a new one.
:::

5. Enter the API Key in your Pave account

Creating Offers in Ashby

If the Ashby integration with Pave is turned on, offers created in Ashby will be sent to Pave. You will be able to view the Ashby-generated offer if you log into the Pave portal using the same email address associated with your Ashby account. To see the offer, navigate to the menu on the left side of the page, and select `Offers`. If you do not see `Offers`, reach out to your Pave Administrator to confirm your permissions.

Follow these steps to create Pave-compatible Ashby offers:

Create the Candidate: To create a Visual Offer Letter in your ATS, log into the ATS and navigate to the candidate who should receive the offer. The candidate profile must have these fields completed before sending a Visual Offer Letter through Pave:

- Job
- First Name
- Last Name
- Email
- Recruiter
- Ensure the person creating the offer letter is tagged as the recruiter

Create the Offer: Move the candidate to the Offer stage and select `Manage Offer`. Select `Create Offer` and complete the information associated with the Offer. These fields are required:

- Title
- Level
- Start Date
- City
- Country
- Salary (field type must be currency)
- Equity\* (recommend number of shares) (optional\*)

If using value (gross or net) please work with your onboarding team to define exact Equity calculations.

\[Optional]: We offer customizations to accommodate more complex candidate operations.

Recruiter - field type: User. If specified as a custom field on the offer, we will use this to override the recruiter associated with the candidate.

Offers will be generated in Pave when the offer is created or updated in your ATS. If you use the ATS approval feature then the offer must be approved before it appears in Pave.

- If an offer created in Ashby has the same email address of an offer that is already in Pave, it will overwrite and update the offer in Pave with the new details from Ashby (regardless of if the offer was originally created in Pave or Ashby).

:::hint{type="info"}
At this time, we only support creating Visual Offer Letters via the ATS integrations listed [here](https://www.pave.com/integrations?category=ATS). Pave plans to enable Visual Offer Letter creation with other Applicant Tracking Systems over time.
:::

***

### Editing Offers in Ashby

To identify whether an offer was generated in Ashby, look for the green Ashby icon associated with the candidate/offer. Offers generated in Ashby need to be edited directly in Ashby and will appear on the offer in the Pave portal. This includes changing the recruiter for the offer.

Generally, the email address associated with the offer should not be edited. Editing a candidate’s email address will require that the candidate create a new Pave account with an updated email address.

***

### Deleting Offers in Ashby

Ashby-powered Visual Offer Letters will be deleted from Pave in any of the following scenarios:

- The candidate is marked as Accepted, Declined or Canceled
- The candidate OR offer is deleted

Offers generated from Ashby cannot be removed from within the Pave portal.

***

### Sharing a Visual Offer Letter

To share a Visual Offer Letter directly with a candidate from the Pave portal, select the candidate you wish to send an offer to. Once you are in the candidates' offer, click on the `Send Offer` button, located on the top right.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXc7o3NABKEiftZGEQL32LQRLZg4pjppDyd_rJCDuRXNGqu6iqZHMz_4zCmcEXasLgwRcdPCqLsCrgNOgV2CRv4C4XYMZR1Dw5FJY1odWWTj49HSezeyN9w-phcLTU8Uuee5-qHjBn2e2yroewYc3qoaD3JO?key=xCKO4XaEBxqGLTZYDRKVHQ" size="82" width="1600" height="943" position="center" darkWidth="1600" darkHeight="943" showCaption="false"}

From there you have two options:

- Click `Send Offer` to send with custom messaging - this will be on company branded letterhead.
- Click `Copy offer link` and then create a standard email and include the link to the offer letter. The link will direct the candidate to sign up for Pave where they can log in and view their Visual Offer Letter.
  - This link can only be sent to the candidate to access and view their offer letter. Your colleagues will not be able to use the link to view the candidate's offer letter.

::Image[]{src="https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdY5B7vS5r6hY6s0EWk0_Ss30UVtgdjgS9EbuEx1lNN9YXcbD4zGr5cnYKvj4z09EGOZQLacnXWR_mBVADWWJhpOp5dpAEDnLskery7BMzU1TBuDCETGhsT-5rOsckGsRUNMkK5QiSwp9sZqQrvND48Bj0?key=xCKO4XaEBxqGLTZYDRKVHQ" size="46" width="290" height="180" position="center" darkWidth="290" darkHeight="180" showCaption="false"}

### Optional Approval Flow

If you are using an approvals workflow in Ashby, you can enable this optional feature that will allow only the approved offers to pull into Pave. Otherwise, Pave will pull in any offers that are pending candidate response.

[title] Deel
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

## Overview

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync              |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | -------------------------------- |
|           ✔        |        ❌           |        ❌          | One-way sync from Ashby to Deel. |

Want to connect Ashby to Deel to streamline creating contracts post-hire? Follow the [instructions in your Deel dashboard](https://help.letsdeel.com/hc/en-gb/articles/4414643454481-How-to-integrate-Ashby-on-Deel) to set up the connection.

When integrating Ashby with Deel:

- Push candidate details once you've made an offer and are ready to hire on Deel.
- Organize your data so that you can specify how the job, offer, and candidate information gets imported into your Deel contract.
- Configure text fields on Ashby to match text fields on Deel.
- Adjust any list-type fields to synch to standard list fields on Deel.

:::hint{type="info"}
Deel has an article on the Ashby \<> Deel integration at [https://help.letsdeel.com/hc/en-gb/articles/4414643454481-How-To-Set-Up-The-Ashby-Integration-on-Deel](https://help.letsdeel.com/hc/en-gb/articles/4414643454481-How-To-Set-Up-The-Ashby-Integration-on-Deel).
:::


[title] Ironclad
[path] Integrations/Other/

This integration allows you to connect with Ironclad to import workflows, initiate the signing process from Ashby, populate fields in Ironclad using data in Ashby, and track the signing process from within Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites**
External Workflows must be enabled on your account before you can set up the Ironclad integration. Please reach out to Support or your Customer Success Manager for assistance with this.
:::

# Permissions & access

The Ironclad integration can be set up on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Setting up the integration

Once External Workflows are enabled on your account, you can access the Ironclad integration option within the [Integration Marketplace](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).

Click on the Ironclad tile within the Integration Marketplace, then click `Connect to Ironclad`.

![The Connect to Ironclad button within the Ironclad integration tile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/W_GKzTF7dLg7fZwZLhHJD_connect-to-ironclad-button.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
From here, all users that kick off workflows in Ashby need to authenticate with Ironclad. To do this, they can head to **Personal Settings >&#x20;**[Integration Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/settings/integrations).
:::

## Configuring webhooks in Ironclad

Configure the following webhooks in Ironclad as part of the integration setup:

**Webhook events:** `workflow_updated`, `workflow_cancelled`, `workflow_completed`

**URL:** `https://app.ashbyhq.com/api/ironclad_webhook`

Without these, Ashby will not receive status updates back as the workflow changes.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on configuring webhooks in Ironclad, check out [their developer documentation](https://developer.ironcladapp.com/reference/webhooks).
:::

## Adding an Ironclad workflow to Ashby

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/Configuring-an-Ironclad-Workflow-in-Ashby-f77ba7597138448783f7032edf526ccf"}

To start the process of adding your Ironclad workflow to Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > External Workflows.**
2. Click `Add` and choose `Ironclad`, then determine the following details:
   - `Workflow Template`: Select the workflow template being imported
   - `Entry Point`: When and how the workflow can be added to the pipeline, either as an activity on an interview plan or when making an offer to a candidate.
3. Review the fields to ensure they match what you expect, then click `Import`. Once the workflow is imported, you can edit the workflow template name in Ashby if needed.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kgGGbt--f4XMMMBzbO6Cn_ironclad-updates-archbee-document-2026-07-20-at-91815-am.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1314" height="992" darkWidth="1314" darkHeight="992" alt="Importing a workflow from Ironclad" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Review the fields in your workflow in Ironclad and determine if any fields should be mapped or if any fields are required.
   - `Field mapping`: Determine which Ashby fields populate the corresponding Ironclad fields, rather than entering information manually as part of the workflow.
   - `Required?`: Ashby can't pull through the required status of a field in an Ironclad workflow, so we recommend checking this checkbox in Ashby if the information is needed.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you have options set up for choice-based questions in Ironclad, Ashby doesn't pull these over, so you need to configure them again.
:::

# Adding the workflow to an interview plan

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/External-Workflows-on-Interview-Plans-a1a506f388ca4cfabf8a6479886c16bf" aspectRatio="1"}

If you have configured the workflow to be manually added to interview plans:

1. Navigate to a job in **Jobs > Jobs**.
2. Click on the **Interview Plan** tab of the job.
3. Click `Add Activity to...` for the stage in question.&#x20;
4. Select `External Workflow`.
5. Select the workflow in question from the drop-down list and click `Add`.

![Adding an external workflow activity to an interview plan.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TnQXt9lRWnXmyASCwx55l_add-external-workflow-activity.jpg)

Once the candidate moves to that stage in your pipeline, you see a prompt on their profile to start the Ironclad workflow. Click `Start Workflow`, confirm the workflow, then click `Start` on the following pop-up.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NcMSl26uvqiQQG8NDzxbf_start-workflow-ironclad.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1380" height="1002" darkWidth="1380" darkHeight="1002" alt="The Start Workflow button on an Ironclad workflow activity." showCaption="false"}

Complete any fields that need to be filled, then click `Submit` to start the workflow. You can click `View Workflow` to view more details that come in from Ironclad.

![Viewing the workflow details for an external workflow.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CMBgyUC9zqhzane8xSLiB_ironclad-view-workflow.jpg)

# Adding an external workflow to an offer

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/Exploring-External-Workflows-in-Ashby-Offers-f5ccfd673bdb441ca82f210098dd582f"}

If you have an external workflow in place that is set to be available when making an offer to a candidate, once the offer has been created (and approved, if needed), you see the option to start the workflow within the offer details. Click `View Offer` on the offer activity on the candidate's profile, then `Start Workflow` within the Workflow Summary.

![Starting a workflow from within the offer details on the candidate's profile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k7D8-u5xBKdskwOl1vOy2_exploring-external-workflows-in-ashby-offers-2026-07-20-at-94258-am.jpg)

After clicking `Start Workflow`, select the external workflow you'd like to use in the following pop-up, then click `Start` to confirm the workflow.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/15gjlVhVIgDZb1lz50ub__starting-the-workflow-for-an-offer.jpg)

Ashby then lists the fields for the workflow so you can complete them. These fields display alongside the offer details so you can ensure the information matches. You can click `Submit` to send this information to Ironclad.

Initially, the workflow shows as `Started` within the activity on the candidate's profile. It changes to `Active` once Ashby pulls in information from Ironclad. You can view the workflow details within the offer information. Once the workflow is complete, Ashby marks the offer as accepted.

![Viewing the workflow details within an offer.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/V9dlYVeR53Tp5QFBgWaT3_ben-asher-head-of-fish-frying-ashby-2026-07-20-at-92828-am.jpg)


[title] Calculated Fields
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This document reviews the Calculated Fields feature and the two different types of fields you can create. If you are looking to create fields to house custom information for a candidate, job, project or offer, please check out [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs).

Calculated Fields are available on the Plus, Enterprise and Legacy plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Introduction

Calculated Fields are an advanced feature that allow you to remap ATS data for reporting purposes. For example, you can take all sources from your ATS and group them into a custom set of buckets.

When you create a new Calculated Field, you will give it a custom name and define the new field values. Once created, you can refer to that calculated field in all Ashby reporting for filtering and grouping.

## Create a Calculated Field

1. Navigate to Admin > Data Mapping > Calculated Fields

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OHwJyG3fU1aUUN0IX5X0t_screencast2022-11-28at15146pm.gif" size="100" alt="Screen Cast 2022-11-28 at 1.51.46 PM.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Calculated%20Fields%20bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_1.51.46_PM.gif" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 3/Calculated Fields bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_1.51.46_PM.gif" width="2934" height="1386" darkWidth="2934" darkHeight="1386" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

2. Click `New` in the upper right-hand corner. You can then select the Object Type on which you’d like your new field to exist, add a title, and select the Calculated Field Type.
3. When creating a new Calculated Field you will have the choice of two types of field:&#x20;
   Filter Bucket Field: create multiple buckets and a filter for each bucket that defines which objects will be put into the bucket
   Grouping Field: group values by selecting values that belong in a specific group

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Q6JpKK4jTSQI-vPuAfSKx_screencast2022-11-28at15732pm.gif" size="100" alt="Screen Cast 2022-11-28 at 1.57.32 PM.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Calculated%20Fields%20bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_1.57.32_PM.gif" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 3/Calculated Fields bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_1.57.32_PM.gif" width="2428" height="1364" darkWidth="2428" darkHeight="1364" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

4. Add new buckets with custom names. The names you select here will be the field values you can select or group by in reporting.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IW0q5yFUDmFZafImPh9Fl_screencast2022-11-28at21145pm.gif" size="100" alt="Screen Cast 2022-11-28 at 2.11.45 PM.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Calculated%20Fields%20bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_2.11.45_PM.gif" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 3/Calculated Fields bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_2.11.45_PM.gif" width="2424" height="1258" darkWidth="2424" darkHeight="1258" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

5. Select each bucket’s field values. The Other bucket will contain all values that don't fall into any of the previous buckets and can't be edited.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_1L5V5MD5mrPbjrf0F4kq_screencast2022-11-28at21514pm.gif" size="100" alt="Screen Cast 2022-11-28 at 2.15.14 PM.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Calculated%20Fields%20bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_2.15.14_PM.gif" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 3/Calculated Fields bb715d39eeea407ca5227c78769f84b0/Screen_Cast_2022-11-28_at_2.15.14_PM.gif" width="2418" height="1266" darkWidth="2418" darkHeight="1266" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

## Grouping Fields

Grouping fields allow you to define a set of buckets with custom values, and then map all existing values from your ATS field of choice into the new categorization. A classic example is taking a list of departments and mapping them into your organizations unique functional divisions.

![Calculated grouping fields are useful for mapping a known set of fixed values into a new set of custom buckets.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jLg6r_5hezQSMmF-2Petr_calculatedfields-groupingfields.png)

Calculated grouping fields are useful for mapping a known set of fixed values into a new set of custom buckets.

The video below provides a quick introduction to calculated grouping fields:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f9b9214197f44a3abe01d2640664cbd3?t=5"}

Please note that grouping calculated fields can only be done by fields of the following type:

- A field that allows you to select multiple values from a finite set of selectable values
- A field that prompts you to select one value from a finite set of values
- A field that involves you selecting all/any that apply

You can find more information on field types and the icons representing field types in our [Icon Glossary](docId:7m9i-sk7B8sUzz0OTX0nc).

## Filter Bucket Fields

Sometimes you do not have a fixed set of values that easily map into new categories but rather a dynamic set of complex logic that defines whether or not a value should fall into one category or another. In such a situation, you will want to define the conditions of what should fall into a bucket, and we provide this via filter bucket fields.

An example might be categorization all Jobs with “Senior” or “Director” in their titles to a “Leadership” bucket, and all Jobs with “New Grad” into a “New Grad” bucket to easily collate a large and diverse set of Jobs into broad categories.

![Filter fields take a unique filter condition as a definition for each bucket to automate categorization.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/83k6SmkbS3gzcjKKSY_qS_calcfield-filterbucketfield.png)

Filter fields take a unique filter condition as a definition for each bucket to automate categorization.

The following short video reviews creating filter bucket fields:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b1d7abd948944bd4959f64a487b4760d?t=0"}

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I create buckets for my calculated fields that filter based on other calculated fields?

You can, yes! When clicking `+ Add Field to Match` to configure the criteria for your bucket, you can select other calculated fields and their buckets to filter with. This is helpful for creating sophisticated logical combinations and customizations.&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dbc4381eae94901221b66c1621b5743a.png)
:::


[title] Report Catalog: Templates
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

This document provides an overview of the report template types you can find in Ashby’s Template Library.

## Pipeline Reports

### Candidate Pipeline

This report shows the Candidate Pipeline for the Corporate Usability Analyst role.

Explore the pipeline for individual jobs, while taking a look at candidate details. Active candidates by interview stage can be visualized as a list or card (kanban) view.

- You also have the option to Hide Review Stages, Hide Lead Stages, or Group Stages on this report.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b98b39ac9de542b692152d3c3eebf31f"}

### Pipeline History

:::hint{type="info"}
For more detailed information regarding the Pipeline History report, visit our [Pipeline History](docId\:gZFIh-s0JZxlItbfYD4Bw)  document.
:::



![Example pipeline history for a single job, where application review is optionally shown. As the weeks progress, candidates progress through to the offer stage.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Qz0brQW0E82tqEG2LEJtU_weeklypipelinehistorycustomermanager.png)

Example pipeline history for a single job, where application review is optionally shown. As the weeks progress, candidates progress through to the offer stage.

See your pipeline over time by interview stage group.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/1ed0304f95be45f3b57f9da05926a790"}

## Conversion Rates

### Passthrough Rates With Groupings

:::hint{type="info"}
For more detailed information regarding the Pipeline History report, visit [Passthrough Report Features & FAQ](docId\:n4gfSfqvMCCCSUHSiqmZN)&#x20;
:::



![This report shows the passthrough rates from stage to stage, grouped by Source Type. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BBRtU-3bYI3HfJY3k-LED_screenshot2022-12-22at84044am.png)

See passthrough rates from stage to stage across different groups like Job or Source. Identify if certain groups are underperforming. On the report, each subgroup includes a rollup of conversion rates.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/854f547febf4459885a38ac02309449a"}

### Passthrough Rates Over Time

![This report shows the passthrough rates from stage to stage, grouped by monthly application start cohorts. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lneKwk_sKuunNp8NeNR-L_screenshot2023-02-14at105449am.png)

This report shows the passthrough rates from stage to stage, grouped by monthly application start cohorts.

See passthrough rates from stage to stage grouped by monthly application start cohorts to identify trends over time. By default, the report will show all applications started in the last 12 months and group them into monthly cohorts. You can choose to group cohorts by week, month, quarter, or year.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/1e5270ede76549feb40729a91b6d951d"}

### Funnel Report

![This report looks at the conversion rate from stage to stage for applications whose consideration ended within the last 12 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CsRYykkWmQI78tSATF3CS_screenshot2022-12-22at83820am.png)

This report looks at the conversion rate from stage to stage for applications whose consideration ended within the last 12 months.

See the historical conversions from stage to stage. Identify if you are dropping too few or too many candidates at a particular stage. By looking at the conversion rates of previously completed applications, you can get an estimate of how candidates currently in process might progress.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/9bd9c40b5c6344e2945284ca5aac34db"}

### Candidate Flow

![This report shows the stage transitions entered by all candidates over the last two weeks. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/02UhI8KadaepTaDi_cs4d_screenshot2023-01-20at80222am.png)

This report shows the stage transitions entered by all candidates over the last two weeks.

View the detailed flow of candidates through interview stages. This report gives you a detailed look at all stage transitions, including skipped stages, and it also lets you see the exact reasons candidates drop out of the process at different stages.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6b1be7c3f4574826b740150964733458"}

## Hiring Speed

### Time in Process

![This report shows the median time in process for applications who had an interview that started within the last 6 months.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZNx2jlEka7v4HlKbeYggJ_screenshot2022-12-22at113725am.png)

This report shows the median time in process for applications who had an interview that started within the last 6 months.

This report shows the median time your applications have spent in each stage. It gives you a sense of how long it typically takes candidates to go through your entire interview process, and it allows you to see if any specific stages are taking particularly long to complete.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f069cb771fa840e6a0f21801f5e33272"}

:::hint{type="info"}
For more details on the time in process report, check out [Understanding the Time in Process Report](docId:6M4cmd9kWiGJVPoB3KlLx) .
:::

### Time in Process Over Time

![This report shows the time in process for applications started in the last 6 months, grouped by monthly application start cohorts. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Izqwci11_1MxrjO_-MQM-_screenshot2023-02-14at110606am.png)

This report shows the time in process for applications started in the last 6 months, grouped by monthly application start cohorts.

This report allows you to see how long candidates spend per interview stage, grouped by monthly application start cohorts. By default, the report will show all applications started in the last 6 months and group them into monthly cohorts. You can choose to group cohorts by week, month, quarter, or year.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a71c44fb2f13401389efe26b2a8ef3f6"}

### Time to Hire

![This report shows the average time (days) it took candidates to be hired every month over the last 6 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Lf6AtkS2j8b5_RJtgPxAN_screenshot2022-12-23at71504am.png)

This report shows the average time (days) it took candidates to be hired every month over the last 6 months.

Time to hire is the time from application/job consideration Started At date to the time of being marked hired, i.e. the total duration the candidate’s application is in process. The template report provides the average number of days for all hires made in the grouping selected after any filter conditions are applied.

:::hint{type="warning"}
When a candidate’s application is archived and then unarchived, the time to hire calculation is no longer made from the application start time, but the time their application was unarchived.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/45d4791b943e4d50ad8b550e520bf021"}

### Time to Offer

![This report shows the average time (days) it took candidates to receive an offer every month over the last 6 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/g5fn5m6OJr7Ev9o3ZkRrU_screenshot2023-01-18at101734am.png)

This report shows the average time (days) it took candidates to receive an offer every month over the last 6 months.

This report shows the average time it takes for a candidate to receive an offer. It is calculated from the time a candidate starts consideration to the time they enter the offer stage.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f9ebbb9eed0548129b499fab09345353"}

### Time to Fill for Evergreen Roles

![Screen Shot 2023-01-06 at 7.30.57 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZVSnCIiXmBUBpYV97h95D_screenshot2023-01-06at73057am.png)

This report shows how long jobs have been open, how many hires were made against these jobs, and calculates a ratio.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This report is only available for Greenhouse users.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/06dbdeb3adf941ff8ed755d83a896df9"}

### Time to Fill for Completed Openings

![This time to fill report shows the average number of days it took to fill openings and is grouped by the job’s department.  ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/28LX0HlySlTBofrta7MPt_screenshot2023-01-18at103202am.png)

This time to fill report shows the average number of days it took to fill  and is grouped by the job’s department.

This time to fill report shows how long it takes to fill openings. Time to fill is defined as from the date the opening was opened to the opening fill date. It only considers openings that have been closed. When a Group By selection is made, the report will display the average time to fill (in days) across that grouping.

You can click on a result to be taken to a drill down report. When applying groupings to the report, this will also be preserved in the drill down report.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Please note:** This report template will only be available if Openings are enabled on your account.
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/fa04a097ec8b434d9d1f8765411e7b68"}

### Time to Start

:::hint{type="info"}
The *Time to Start* report displays the average time between the candidate’s *Hired At* date and their employment start date.
:::

For All-In-One customers, the employment start date is pulled from the start date information listed in the candidate’s offer.

For Analytics customers, this information will be pulled from a default start date field within the candidate’s offer letter.

If you have a custom field in place, or would like to switch the field that the start date information is being pulled from, this can be adjusted in the *Settings* section of the template.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/311192a06d68e27563b82beca9422c9b.png)

### Time to Fill for Completed Requisitions

:::hint{type="warning"}
This report is only available for Lever users.
:::

![This report shows the average number of days it took to fill requisitions and is grouped by the job’s department. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cWr6nFOWXOdRC03W7kqWo_screenshot2023-04-11at72400am.png)

This report shows the average number of days it took to fill requisitions and is grouped by the job’s department.

This report shows how long it takes to fill requisitions, from approved or created date to close date. Only considers requisitions that have been closed.

### Age of Open Job Openings

:::hint{type="warning"}
This report is available for Ashby Analytics users only.
:::

![This report shows the average age (days) of open job openings, grouped by department. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jD2sXHypVwugsl6OwhOFI_screenshot2023-01-18at104013am.png)

This report shows the average age (days) of open job openings, grouped by department.

This report shows how long, on average, current openings have been open.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/835a7fb70b294de6812f1c8cafc54ff6"}

## Offers

### Offer Acceptance Rate

![This report shows the overall acceptance rate over the last 12 months. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/b3448b69321333cd9ef849da3733c5fd.png)

This report shows the overall acceptance rate over the last 12 months.

This report allows you to get a simple trend of your offer acceptance rate over time. As with all reports, you can look at this data by department, location, or any other field you're interested in. This report template pulls the Offer Decided At date and whether the offer was accepted or rejected.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a2517a540c8f4206bd24e4e3643d2ae4"}

### Offer Acceptance Rate with Offer Numbers

![This report shows the acceptance rate, offers decided, offers accepted, and offers rejected by month between January 1, 2020 and April 30th, 2020. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/a06c0345fa773676bfa5df8d1e8bd459.png)

This report shows the acceptance rate, offers decided, offers accepted, and offers rejected by month between January 1, 2020 and April 30th, 2020.

This report allows you to look at offer volume and acceptance rate side-by-side. It's also well suited to be grouped by various fields (e.g. time, hiring manager, job, department, source, etc.).

Here is another example of this report, this time grouped by **Source Type**.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b377375a3ac71b13eed3fbe09534a6f6.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/4ee0e49e3fd543df85a88db28da657d1"}

## Hires

### Hires, By Department, Last 12 Months

![This report shows the number of hires by department over the last 12 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6t2inedBr2ec_T4uXahkH_screenshot2022-12-22at91016am.png)

This report shows the number of hires by department over the last 12 months.

You can use this report to track if you're reaching your overall hiring goals by department.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/7c41e69061d349b0a771c840fbba136f"}

### Hires, By Source, Last 12 Months

![This report shows the number of hires by source over the last 12 months.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lPTOubsxt7pnwGpnkhNaI_screenshot2022-12-22at113235am.png)

This report shows the number of hires by source over the last 12 months.

This report can show you which candidate sources are contributing most to hires and how that has changed over time.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/06e730577ab945efa6bf7f4a72988795"}

### Hires, By Source, Year to Date

![This report shows the number of hires by source last year. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VWSaRbGFuU-o10qmQSsfd_screenshot2023-01-20at84501am.png)

This report shows the number of hires by source last year.

You can see which sources are yielding the most / least hires for a snapshot in time with this report.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/3c26df97e0014865a99ec66c9e4a9004"}

### Interviews per Hire Ratio

![Screen Shot 2023-01-20 at 9.10.48 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/r_JyswwvKLg7nYLjrb6Av_screenshot2023-01-20at91048am.png)

This report shows how many interviews your team is conducting per hire. It can be grouped by Source, Team, etc and can help track cost of hire by focusing on an often overlooked cost. It’s calculated by taking the total number of interviews divided by the number of hires made.

The total number of interviews includes interviews for candidates both hired and rejected.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/5504cffb6da940218179eee99308d92e"}

## Jobs

### Open Jobs Over Time

![This report shows the number of jobs that were open over the last 6 quarters, by month. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YDMVpyC4bUHlmpZh3AezG_screenshot2023-01-20at91524am.png)

This report shows the number of jobs that were open over the last 6 quarters, by month.

You can see how many jobs were open over time in this report.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/214439f40a2944cb9269cb7a2e062af4"}

### Currently Open Jobs by Department

:::hint{type="info"}
This report is titled *Open Headcount by Department* for our customers who have enabled the Lever integration.
:::



![This report shows the number of currently open jobs, by department. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3sqgPz5s3GZHk0iqL9d8k_screenshot2023-01-20at100022am.png)

This report shows the number of currently open jobs, by department.

This report allows you to see how many jobs you are currently hiring for, grouped by department.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/adea0dc202d24863bbdb79adb7cabd7d"}

## Interviewer Stats

### Interview Load

Report on the sum total of interview time and time across all interviewers (interview participants). Can be grouped by interviewer, stage, department, week, etc.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Only scheduled interviews will be included in this report. Feedback added without an interview will not be counted in this data.
:::

- When no **Group By** selection has been made:
  - **Hours (Interview Time):** aggregate hours candidates spent in interviews
  - **Hours (Sum All Interviewer Time):** aggregate hours across all interview participants

![Screen Shot 2023-03-17 at 7.07.43 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5OBpItz9VCb6FdTt8c8Zd_screenshot2023-03-17at70743am.png)

- When this report is grouped by **Interviewer/Organizer:**
  - **Hours (Interview Time):** aggregate calendar hours of that particular interviewer/organizer
  - **Hours (Sum All Interviewer Time):** aggregate hours across all interview participants

![Screen Shot 2023-03-17 at 7.08.46 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f0VNsebSBpH7EI9gdvx6Z_screenshot2023-03-17at70846am.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/7e1c1eef5e464e9eaa65c1d49924c2fb"}

### Interviewer Feedback Calibration

![This report shows the overall recommendations on feedback forms submitted within the last 6 months and is grouped by submitter.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wUJBSPdFB_sA_hgPQoeXv_screenshot2023-01-20at104402am.png)

This report shows the overall recommendations on feedback forms submitted within the last 6 months and is grouped by submitter.

This report shows the distribution of feedback recommendations for interviewers. Typically you want to filter this report down to e.g. only hired candidates, or interviews for a particular job at a particular stage. That way you can detect if interviewers that interviewed under similar circumstances potentially skew more positive/negative.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f44ef317d61941918199b03fb8ae3efe"}

### Feedback Completion Report

![Screen Shot 2023-01-20 at 10.50.28 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kfnxGXfHWcSk_66gKtBhT_screenshot2023-01-20at105028am.png)

This report shows which % of feedback forms have been completed by each interviewer and how long on average it takes them to submit feedback. By default, this report will only include scorecards that have been completed.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/41bb38ba2013481fb8736720d204e661"}

## Sourcing

:::hint{type="info"}
These reports are available for Ashby’s All-in-one customers.
:::

### Sequences Sent, By Sender, Last 3 Months

![This report shows the number of sequences sent by sender over the last 3 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/AGR9IhLOnxAVZ8rqOEKCO_screenshot2023-01-20at111752am.png)

This report shows the number of sequences sent by sender over the last 3 months. See which sequences were sent in the last 3 months in this report.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/521b1a610a2a4f979e85d583eac55d9d"}

### Sequences Sent, By Reply Received, Last 3 Months

![This report shows the number of sequences sent, by reply received, over the last 3 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tB9IuKxTWfEPE3qWe25N4_screenshot2023-01-20at112731am.png)

This report shows the number of sequences sent, by reply received, over the last 3 months. See how many sequences were replied to in the last 3 months.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/44644eba2aca47d0b59d7ad90e972ac5"}

## Other Reports

### Candidate NPS Score

:::hint{type="info"}
This report is available for Ashby’s All-in-one customers.
:::

![This report shows a company’s monthly NPS score last year. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FQblPtdhYVQMkY5_IqSS1_screenshot2023-01-20at115415am.png)

This report shows a company’s monthly NPS score last year.&#x20;

This report allows you to visualize your company’s NPS score over time using the standard formula: The formula is: (# of promoters/total # of submissions) - (# of detractors/total # of submissions). It will always give a score from -100 to 100.

**Promoters** are defined as candidates who have responded to the NPS question on your survey with 9 or 10.

**Detractors** are defined as candidates who have responded to the NPS question on your survey with 6 or below.

If a candidate responds to the NPS question on your survey with 7 or 8, they are considered as **Passive**.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f591e8343c7e40edbd40fa57d97d48a5"}

### Candidates in Violation of Data Retention Rules

:::hint{type="info"}
This report is available for Ashby’s All-in-one customers.
:::

![Screen Shot 2023-01-20 at 12.06.20 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/exdX-NibOxPtMKXSpmBiu_screenshot2023-01-20at120620pm.png)

This is a candidate search report that lists candidates that are in violation of the organization’s data retention rules. Check out the video below for more.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/82bea62de5cd4aa4a38c897bc6eeb4e3"}

### Recruiting Planner

:::hint{type="info"}
For more detailed information regarding the Recruiting Planner, visit our [Recruiting Planner](docId\:cFN3v0Gb2yi6gyonloelj) guide.
:::

![Screen Shot 2023-01-20 at 11.06.32 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/U6ZfjBkShCqr7tg4m6vE__screenshot2023-01-20at110632am.png)

Plan your recruiting activities based on past performance.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/861bc80993d04e03a99a8b91dc1b67c2"}

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### I'm trying out report templates and I'm not sure how the report is being put together. Help - I don't understand!

If you're starting out with some more advanced report templates and are confused as to what and how data is pulled to generate the report, if you have the [AI Report Interpretation](docId\:r2SHcEUHaeo0ADH_Bm5ar) feature enabled, each report template has a `Prebuilt Report` option listed under the report results. You can click this to get further information.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/43BpGXQaG1sTaBfjzxl9m_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-25455-pm.jpg)

Further information includes how to use the report and a breakdown of the data used. You can also view Ashby's Talent Trends report from here for further information about related benchmarks where applicable.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/inrViujUeU00MpSRgbiTz_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-01-27-at-25538-pm.jpg)
:::


[title] UKG Pro Onboarding
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

The Ashby UKG Pro Onboarding integration enables you to automatically push hired candidates from Ashby to UKG Pro Onboarding as pre-hires, ensuring a seamless transition of candidate data from Ashby to UKG.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Before setting up this integration, ensure you have:

- An active UKG account with API access.
- Admin permissions in both Ashby and UKG.
- When you set up the API key in UKG, grant it the `EmployeeExport` read permission. Ashby uses this permission to retrieve employee data for the **Onboarding Owner** field.
- UKG credentials (these may need to be obtained from UKG Support):
  - Client ID
  - Client Secret
  - Customer API Key
  - Basic Auth User Name
  - Basic Auth Password
- UKG API configuration details:
  - Tenant ID
  - API Base URL
:::

# Permissions & access

UKG Pro Onboarding can be configured on all Ashby plans.

# Integration overview

The Ashby \<> UKG Onboarding integration supports:

- Field mapping: Key candidate details (e.g., name, email, job title, start date) are mapped between Ashby and UKG.
- Automated pre-hire sync: Hired candidates in Ashby are, optionally, automatically created as pre-hires in UKG.

There are options to both manually push and automatically transfer hire data to UKG Onboarding as pre-hires.

## What data is sent to UKG?

The data sent varies based on the fields you select during integration setup.

Here is a list of supported fields:

| Ashby Field                                  | UKG Field                      | Required? | Built In or Custom Field? |
| -------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------ | --------- | ------------------------- |
| First Name (Candidate)                       | First                          | Y         | Built In                  |
| Last Name (Candidate)                        | Last                           | Y         | Built In                  |
| Email (Primary, Personal) (Candidate)        | Email                          | Y         | Built In                  |
| Phone Number (Primary, Personal) (Candidate) | Primary Phone Number           | N         | Built In                  |
| Start Date                                   | Start Date                     | N         | Built In                  |
| Hire Date (Offer)                            | Hire Date                      | N         | Built In                  |
| Salary (Offer)                               | Compensation and Currency Code | N         | Built In                  |
| Component Company                            |                                | Y         | Custom Field              |
| Employee Type (Job or Opening)               | Full Time (Y/N)                | N         | Custom Field              |
| Interval                                     | Pay Rate                       | N         | Custom Field              |
| Requisition ID (Job or Opening)              | Requisition ID                 | N         | Custom Field              |
| Location (Job or Opening)                    | Work Location                  | N         | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Job Code                       |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Work Location                  |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Former Last Name               |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Is Full Time                   |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Is Salaried                    |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Middle Name                    |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Orientation Date               |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Past Start Date Reason         |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Personal Message               |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Preferred First Name           |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Rate Per                       |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Selected FSLA Status           |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Weekly Hours                   |           | Custom Field              |
|                                              | Work Hours                     |           | Custom Field              |

:::hint{type="warning"}
Offer letters are **not** sent to UKG with the above data.
:::

# Setup instructions

## Get your credentials from UKG

Reach out to UKG Support for the following details:

:::hint{type="warning"}
Confirm that the UKG API key has the `EmployeeExport` read permission. This permission is required for employee data to populate the **Onboarding Owner** field.
:::

- UKG credentials:
  - Client ID
  - Client Secret
  - Customer API Key
  - Basic Auth User Name
  - Basic Auth Password
- UKG API configuration details:
  - Tenant Alias: The tenant alias is separate from the tenant ID in your environment. It is a unique code that UKG needs to share with you.
  - API Base URL

## Enable the integration

1. Log in to Ashby.
2. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations >&#x20;**[Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace).
3. Search for or find the [UKG Pro tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/ukg) and click on it to open the integration settings.&#x20;
4. Click `Enable UKG`.

![Ashby Admin Integrations page showing the UKG Pro integration, with the UKG integration selected and an arrow pointing to the “Enable UKG” button.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Oqy74dr4qDpX2MqODEJQh_ukg-ashby-2026-09-10-at-84302-am.jpg)

5. Enter your client credentials and API configuration.
6. Click `Save Configuration Details`.

## Activate the integration in Ashby

Next, partner with your HR team to determine the fields that should be populated by your Talent team when pushing hires.

Once you have your list, toggle `Sync Enabled?` for each field.

Once all are toggled, click `Sync Custom Fields` to generate corresponding offer custom fields.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Component Company, Job Code, and Work Location are always required. Do not disable these fields.
:::

## Format offer custom fields

Once you toggle on the selected fields, the corresponding offer custom fields are generated. These fields sync to UKG and update as changes occur on the UKG side.

For more details, see [Custom Fields](#) and [Offers and Offer Letters](#).

Here are your formatting options:

- Order fields: Slide custom fields by hovering over the space next to the icon to the left of the field name to expose the drag handle.
- Set default values and, optionally, hide fields that always have the same value.

# Using the integration

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby pushes candidates to UKG as onboarding pre-hires.
:::

When a candidate enters the offer stage, Ashby surfaces the required UKG metadata fields in the offer form.

![Screenshot of the UKG metadata fields in the offer form displayed in the Ashby offer form](https://cdn.zappy.app/7e488ccbac86dcf2ce66a224f34a8011.png)

After the candidate accepts the offer and is marked Hired, you can send data to UKG in either of the following ways:

- Manual push: Use the `Add Candidate Data` button on the candidate's UKG activity.
- Automatic push on hire: Enable automatic sync from the **HRIS Integrations** page in **Ashby Admin**.

# FAQs

### Is the UKG integration a paid integration?

No, the UKG integration is free to use.

### Can I sync pre-hires or offer-stage candidates?

Not at this time. Sync occurs only when a candidate is marked Hired.

### Can we filter which hires sync to UKG?

Yes. Use the manual push option to selectively sync candidates.

### Any limitations with the UKG Pro Onboarding integration?

- The integration supports new-hire records only and does not update existing employee records.
- You cannot currently map custom fields in Ashby.
- **Reports To** is not currently supported; this is in the backlog.

### Can I push the same candidate to UKG more than once?

You cannot push the same Ashby job consideration to UKG more than once. However, you can push the candidate again if they have a different job consideration or a separate candidate profile in Ashby.

You can also push a candidate who already exists in UKG if their existing UKG profile was not originally created through the Ashby integration. In this case, pushing the candidate from Ashby will create a separate, duplicate profile in UKG.

[title] Pin Reports to User Home Pages
[path] Ashby Analytics/User Access & Sharing Metrics/

Ensure Ashby users see the reporting content they need by pinning custom reports and dashboards to their home pages.

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for how to navigate and pin a report to your own home page? Check out [Home Page](docId\:mzsz9lMAG1AX7n1BoZCzj).
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & prerequisites:**

- You must be an Organization Admin to pin content to other users' home page configurations.
:::

# Home page configuration

New users start with no reports or dashboards on their home page by default. Organization Admins can pin a custom selection of any report or dashboard to each user's home page to ensure they see the required reporting when they log in to Ashby.

## How to configure an employee's home page

1. Navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Employees**.
2. Click the employee's name to open their profile.
3. Select the **Home Page** tab to view their current home page configuration.

## Adding and removing reports, dashboards, and recruiting plans

**Add:** To add a new report to a user's **Views** list on their home page, click `+ Add`, then select the report, dashboard, or recruiting plan to add to the configuration.

![A screenshot highlighting the Add button to add a report, dashboard or recruiting plan to a user's configuration.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wiW0OZqjpbFyjfVkhNVyU_adding-a-report-to-a-user-s-home-page.jpg)

**Remove:** Click the red trash can icon to the right of the dashboard, report, or recruiting plan you would like to remove from the user's configuration.

![The trash can icons to remove a report, recruiting plan or dashboard from a user's configuration.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MlwRA12xGIEJGsNA8_Whs_the-trash-can-icons-to-delete-a-report-recruiting-plan-or-dashboard-from-a-user-s-configuration.jpg)


[title] Passthrough Report Features & FAQ
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

This document reviews the function, features, and common questions about passthrough tables.

# Create a Passthrough Report

You can find the passthrough table in the report template library. All passthrough tables are made by making an initial selection of applications and optionally filtering that selection down further and grouping by one or more fields of interest. The following sections outline each step in creating a passthrough table, along with the many options for investigating details and common questions that come up.

## Select Passthrough Rates With Groupings report template

![Screen Cast 2022-12-05 at 11.10.30 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/P5zNbDu9Iwh2hCHpJY8m7_screencast2022-12-05at111030am.gif)

## Make an initial selection: select a time range

Every passthrough report begins with an initial selection of applications. This is done by a flexible time range selection, where you can select all applications that had recent activity, ended their consideration, or started in a specific time period. The applications that match this initial selection represent the cohort of applications that are then summarized by their progress through the interview pipeline in the passthrough table itself.

![In this example, the passthrough report will include applications with interviews starting in the last 6 months. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kz604dpdVnTaufEzRuXf8_screenshot2022-12-05at111435am.png)

In this example, the passthrough report will include applications with interviews starting in the last 6 months.

Some common fields used for an initial selection are shown below, but this initial selection permits using any time-related field and is highly customizable:

- `Started At` - selects all applications that started (applied or user added them to Ashby) in a specific time period
- `Consideration Ended At` - selects all applications that exited your process (archived or hired) in a specific time period
- Interview’s `Start Time` - selects all applications with an interview that started in the specific time period

## Filter your initial selection (optional)

Your initial selection of applications might require some additional refinement. You can use the filters section to add additional conditions, such as selecting for applications in a specific department, belonging to a specific recruiter or hiring manager, and so on.

![The advanced filter interface allows filtering by any combination of fields to further select applications of interest for your passthrough report. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KAVdkFmXNRvsXLgd6UynT_screenshot2022-12-05at14552pm.png)

The advanced filter interface allows filtering by any combination of fields to further select applications of interest for your passthrough report.

## Group results (optional)

With an initial selection made and optional filtering added, your passthrough table will generate a result based on your interview plan. You will see a single row summarizing the progress across all applications that have exited consideration (i.e. are no longer active).

![This is an example passthrough report with nothing selected in the Group By section. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FZAZFKPyhhcH_d2mrRxNQ_screenshot2022-04-29at113957am.png)

This is an example passthrough report with nothing selected in the Group By section.

It is often of interest to see the total passthrough report broken down by segments, such as source type, department, or recruiter.

To accomplish this you can add a field to the Group By section, and the results will present the applications per field value and include the top-level rollup across all groups.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qZqru_VOnpiVmYgullDWO_screenshot2022-12-05at15158pm.png" size="60" width="386" height="159" darkWidth="386" darkHeight="159" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-12-05 at 1.51.58 PM.png" showCaption="false"}

![This results on this passthrough report are grouped by Department. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uO7sidRJggSd3TfCEv4io_screenshot2022-04-29at114304am.png)

This results on this passthrough report are grouped by Department.

### Group by multiple fields

If you would like to see a passthrough table with sub-grouping breakdowns, you can add multiple fields to the Group By section. The results will include passthroughs unique to each sub-group, a roll-up per group, and a roll-up of all applications at the top level.

Adding multiple group-by values permits more details in the passthrough report.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3wdPdzI1fiyW-B10dEWYn_screenshot2022-12-05at15035pm.png" size="64" width="402" height="204" darkWidth="402" darkHeight="204" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-12-05 at 1.50.35 PM.png" showCaption="false"}

![This example shows the results grouped by Department and Source Type. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Z6C29TgCqB6786wcfDT8O_screenshot2022-04-29at114738am.png)

This example shows the results grouped by Department and Source Type.

## Passthrough report configuration & options

### Group stages

If your host ATS (Greenhouse or Ashby) permit multiple interview plans, you may find it useful to ungroup the stages and look at a specific stage by stage passthrough rates of a particular interview plan. You can do this by deselecting the `Group Stages?` option.

![When the stages are no longer grouped, the interview plan name and individual plan stages are presented.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gnvfAlyk0S5nL4bXSwJpD_screencast2022-12-05at22447pm.gif)

When the stages are no longer grouped, the interview plan name and individual plan stages are presented.

:::hint{type="info"}
It is suggested that you do this in combination with a stringent filter, otherwise you will get one row per unique interview plan.
:::

### Hide review & lead stages

By default, the option to hide review and lead stages is on. If you’d like to see the total application volume from initial review through your funnel, you can uncheck the `Hide Review Stages?` option. Your passthrough will now start from the top of the funnel.

![Screen Cast 2022-12-05 at 2.26.34 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QJbiohWF7WpLZVcdROp-S_screencast2022-12-05at22634pm.gif)

### Hide stages

If there are specific stage groups that do not apply to the report of interest, you can optionally hide them by using the `Hide Stage Groups` option. When stages are hidden, the effective passthrough rate is calculated taking into account the hidden stages.

:::hint{type="info"}
The `Group Stages?` box needs to be checked in order to hide stage groups.
:::

The number of hidden stages is shown underneath `Hide Stage Groups`.

![Screen Cast 2022-12-05 at 2.27.46 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/h1gCIwB5Pnhq8rYCr2j32_screencast2022-12-05at22746pm.gif)

### Group stages by outcome

You can use the `Group By Stage Outcome?` option to summarize the outcome of applications per stage by whether they skipped the stage or passed through it (i.e. were moved into the stage) and by the archive reason category.

![Screen Shot 2022-12-05 at 2.29.57 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XsIm4LXxr5GFBfU66U1tB_screenshot2022-12-05at22957pm.png)

### Show active applications count

When enabling `Show Active Count & Project Hires`, you will notice an additional column will appear on the left-hand side under each stage. This column shows you the number of candidate applications currently active in that stage.

The count on the right-hand side of each stage shows the number of candidate applications that have passed through that stage. These applications may still be active in process in a downstream stage or archived.

![Screen Shot 2022-12-05 at 2.32.32 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qJxnIuhozG0HzibKVEVls_screenshot2022-12-05at23232pm.png)

### Show projected hires

Projected hires count is also turned on when you enable active count, but it can be hidden under `Hide Stages` if there is not a need to show projected hires. The calculation for projected hires considers your current pipeline, along with historical passthrough rates.

![Screen Cast 2022-12-05 at 2.34.41 PM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EqA50ft9cbiIy4Lzd3M5q_screencast2022-12-05at23441pm.gif)

If the i icon appears in the projected hires column, this means there is not enough data to calculate projected hires for that line.

![Screen Shot 2022-12-05 at 2.37.33 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HqoxQxeUL9aRe21kEcxaW_screenshot2022-12-05at23733pm.png)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### How are passthrough percentages calculated?

Passthrough reports by default only include applications that have exited consideration, meaning they have either been archived or hired. Each application counts once and only once for each stage up until the furthest stage group they have reached. The passthrough percent from Stage A to Stage B is calculated as the count of applications that reached Stage A divided by the count of applications that reached Stage B.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/A_8GmG1budugu-uK6iiWG_ptrexample.png" size="44" width="286" height="236" position="center" darkWidth="286" darkHeight="236" showCaption="false"}

Example passthrough calculation from one stage to the next.

When the show active option is enabled, the passthrough calculation is more sophisticated. When calculating the passthrough from Stage A to Stage B, applications active in Stage A must be removed from the calculation as whether or not they move forward to Stage B is not yet determined. Ashby takes care of this for you automatically.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uSh33dVdRXUCqKCavrR2I_ptrwithactive.png" size="52" width="500" height="244" position="center" darkWidth="500" darkHeight="244" showCaption="false"}

When active counts are included, the applications active in Stage A must be excluded as whether or not they count in Stage B is not yet determined.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How are job considerations that skipped stages included in the report?

Job considerations that skipped stages are still counted as having passed through all previous stages (Otherwise, the drop-off rate would be distorted).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How are projections calculated?

When the show projections option is enabled, the cumulative passthrough rate from each stage forward through all downstream stages is applied to the active application count. This is done per stage across all active candidates, summing up the likelihood of all active candidates to proceed all the way to the hired outcome.

When grouping by a field that has a many-to-one relationship to applications (e.g. hiring manager, recruiter), the projected hires total is calculated by the values in the totals row at the very top of the table.

When grouping by a field that has a one-to-one relationship to applications (e.g. department), the projected hires total is calculated as the sum of each individual row’s projected hire.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why are my passthrough rates different than what Greenhouse reports?

Greenhouse passthrough rates include active applications in the current stage of interest as not passed through to the next stage, whereas Ashby automatically removes applications where their accounting in the passthrough calculation is not yet determined. Given this, you may see lower numbers for passthroughs in your Greenhouse report vs the Ashby passthrough table.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why are the passthrough rates all 100%?

The most common cause of passthrough rates being 100% across the funnel is that there’s a filter selecting only for hired candidates. If you’re seeing 100% partially through the funnel, your initial selection, filters or grouping may have implicit conditions that select for candidates that make it to a certain stage.

A common example of this is to filter or group by Opening’s Job or Requisition’s Job in Greenhouse or Lever, respectively. Candidate are only associated with Openings and Requisitions when at the end of the funnel, thus grouping by those properties is implicitly selecting for only candidates that have reached the end of the funnel. The solution in this case is to group by the Application’s Job (or Opportunity’s Job in Lever).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why aren’t all the expected applications showing?

The initial selection excludes the applications of interest

The selected timeframe for the passthrough table report in Ashby implies filters on the applications that are included or excluded. For example, if you select a timeframe of interview start time, you will only see applications that have had an interview start in the  time range selected. This can potentially exclude applications that you intend to view.

The application is still active in process

The passthrough table default is to exclude active applications. If you do not see the counts you expect, first review whether the candidates are still active in process. To view active counts, you can select the Show Active Count & Projected Hires box in the View Options section.

The application is in a review or lead stage

If you do not see the count you expect, it may be because the candidate’s application is in a review or lead stage, neither of which are shown by default. To view the application review stage, uncheck the `Hide Review Stages?` box in the View Options section. To view the lead stages, uncheck the `Hide Lead Stages?` box in the View Options section.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why do application counts change when enabling Show Active Count & Projected Hires?

When the option to show active applications is enabled, you may notice that the count of applications that have passed through a stage increases. When this option is enabled, all currently active applications that are in downstream stages are counted as having passed through upstream stages.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why is the count of interviews or activities in the timeframe is wrong?

It is common to misinterpret the passthrough report as an activity summary based on the [initial selection.](docId\:n4gfSfqvMCCCSUHSiqmZN) Though you may see a count such as 10 applications at the onsite stage group the passthrough table is not specifying when exactly those applications passed through that stage. Additionally, the passthrough table does not count scheduled interviews but only whether an application has made it to a stage or beyond. All that is summarized is whether the candidates originally selected and filtered have applications that reached various stage groups.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I export a passthrough report to a spreadsheet?

No. At this time, passthrough reports in Ashby can only be exported as PDFs. Exporting passthrough reports to a spreadsheet format (CSV or Excel) is not currently supported.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What timeframe does the Hire Count Projected metric represent?


The Hire Count Projected metric is not tied to a specific timeframe. It estimates the number of hires expected based on the current candidates in your pipeline and historical passthrough rates between stages.

Because it only considers the current pipeline, it does not include future applicants. For forecasting hires against specific timelines or targets, the Recruiting Planner is typically the better tool.
:::


[title] Saved Reports & Dashboards
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

If you have a large number of saved reports and dashboards, the Saved Reports layout will allow you to filter and locate your saved content easily.

## Overview

When navigating to Reports > Saved Reports or Dashboards > Saved Dashboards, you can filter, create saved views and search for specific reports or dashboards by title. If you’d like, you can also create topics to group your reports by.

## Saved Reports, Recruiting Plans & Dashboards

With Saved Reports, you’ll be able to jump between saved reports, recruiting plans and dashboards with ease using the Reports, Recruiting Plans and Dashboard tabs.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/29b5287edee22a9875d93154aebe9aad.png" size="50" width="411" height="121" darkWidth="411" darkHeight="121" position="center" showCaption="false"}

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Reports: View all saved reports that you have access to. The table will list the title of the report, when the report was last updated, any dashboards the report has been added to and the author. Click `New Report` to create a new report from this view.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3c0f476bc2a7f28d53fa974e83945faf.png)


:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Recruiting Plans: View all Recruiting Plan reports here. More on these at Recruiting Planner. By default the table will list the recruiting plan title, when it was last updated, any topics and dashboard the plan is linked to and the author of the recruiting plan report. Click `New Recruiting Plan` to create a new recruiting plan report from this view.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/533e11d871c8f48ba340b9afe8e55b1d.png)


:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Dashboards: View all of the dashboards you have access to here. By default the table will list the dashboard title, when the dashboard was last updated and the author. Click `New Dashboard` to create a new dashboard from this view.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/abc986408c1958d0883de479c37c7732.png)


:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you’d like to add additional columns of data to your tables, click the `Add Column` button. You will then be able to select additional fields to add to the table display.

To hide columns already on display, click the button with the column image and switch off the fields that you’d like to hide.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fd3f4884d9e0be6c45680da8994aa29e.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ac31f8815c72f246ca10462e5f8cba90.png)


:::
::::

## Saved Content Filters and Views

You can now add filters and create views for your saved content to quickly find the data you need. Both basic and advanced filtering options are available.

### Filters

*Basic Filtering*

If you have the Advanced toggle off when filtering your saved content, you can add a filter by clicking `+ Filter`.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3fea472db4403899f9dc3789bc603a95.png)

*Advanced Filtering*

If you have the Advanced toggle on when filtering your saved content, you can add a filter by clicking `+ Add Field to Match`, then selecting the field in question.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8f993231be51a877ebc80ee1d45601de.png)

You can filter via the following fields for saved reports:

| Field                | Description                                                           |
| -------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Author               | The user who created the report                                       |
| Type                 | The type of report                                                    |
| Title                | The title of the report                                               |
| Topics               | The topics associated with the report                                 |
| Dashboards           | The dashboards that this report is on                                 |
| Last Updated         | The date and time the report was last updated                         |
| Has Alerts           | Whether the report has any alerts configured for it                   |
| Access Level         | The access level of the report\*                                      |
| Is Access Restricted | Whether access to the report is restricted to a specific set of users |
| Locked By            | The user who locked the report                                        |
| Accessible to User   | Allows filtering reports by whether a given user has access to them   |

You can filter via the following fields for saved recruiting plans:

| Field             | Description                                            |
| ----------------- | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| Author            | The user who created the recruiting plan               |
| Title             | The title of the recruiting plan                       |
| Topics            | The topics associated with the recruiting plan         |
| Number of Targets | The number of targets in this recruiting plan          |
| Dashboards        | The dashboards that this recruiting plan is on         |
| Last Updated      | The date and time the recruiting plan was last updated |
| Start Date        | The start date of the recruiting plan’s date range     |
| End Date          | The end date of the recruiting plan’s date range       |

You can filter via the following fields for saved dashboards:

| Field                    | Description                                                                                  |
| ------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Accessible to User       | Allows filtering dashboards by whether a given user has access to them                       |
| Access Level             | The access level of the dashboard\*                                                          |
| Is Access Restricted     | Whether access to the dashboard is restricted to a specific set of users                     |
| Has Scheduled Deliveries | Whether the dashboard has any scheduled deliveries configured                                |
| Topics                   | The topics associated with the dashboard                                                     |
| Author                   | The user who created the dashboard                                                           |
| Title                    | The title of the dashboard                                                                   |
| Updated At               | The date and time the dashboard was last updated                                             |
| Locked by                | The user who locked the dashboard. Use this field to identify the dashboard's locking owner. |
| Copy restricted?         | Whether users are prevented from copying the dashboard.                                      |

:::hint{type="info"}
\*Saved report and dashboard access levels are as follows: Private: Only accessible to the author Public: Accessible to all elevated access users Private & Shared: Accessible to the author and at least one other user
:::

### Saved Views

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Once you’ve added the appropriate filters, you can save the view you’ve created by clicking `Save As New`. Give your filter view a name and then click Create.

This will add a new tab within the filters section that you can easily click to view the filtered view in the future.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/158112ea2c8814ce583df3fbd7c4f6c1.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/da23991981c850612f70f8c9bd4e523d.png)


:::
::::

## Topics

Topics allow you to group your reports by theme so they can be easily filtered as needed. Only those with Organization Admin access can create, edit or delete topics.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
How to create a topic:

1. Navigate to Reports > Saved Reports or Dashboards > Saved Dashboards
2. Click `Create Topic` to create your first topic. Once you’ve created your first topic, hover over All Topics on the topic list, then click the `+` icon to add an additional topic
3. You will be prompted to give your topic a name. You can also assign your topic to a parent topic if you are creating a new sub-topic. If you opt to not assign a parent topic, then the created topic will be treated as a top-level topic
4. Click `Create Topic`


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f9dcdf1387fc25dde366a5712221d422.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e3335ef331972249d197b9fa5e4e0362.png)
:::
::::

How to assign a topic to a report, recruiting plan or dashboard:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Navigate to the report, recruiting plan or dashboard
2. Click on the topics button underneath the saved content’s title (if you haven’t assign a topic to the report yet, this will show as No topics)
3. Select the topic from the list to assign it to the report, recruiting plan or dashboard
4. Once a topic is added, it will be listed in the topics button in place of No topics


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/81ebdc640c736ecaca830730d6792d1a.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2774f43cdc0d7a9cb93509cb4efc5dbc.png)
:::
::::

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Alternatively, if you have the Topics column in the table view of your saved reports, recruiting plans or dashboards, you can over over the Topics field for the report in question and click the pencil icon to assign and amend the topics linked to the report or dashboard in question.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/44624f310270241e686695de9b2d8729.png)
:::
::::



How to unassign a topic from a report, recruiting plan or dashboard:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Navigate to the report, recruiting plan or dashboard
2. Click on the topics button underneath the saved content’s title
3. Click the `X` beside the topic in question, then confirm you would like to remove it from the report


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eb13dfcc1d9a999155a79064f9746c4a.png)
:::
::::

How to delete or edit a topic

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Navigate to Reports > Saved Reports or Dashboards > Saved Dashboards
2. Hover over the topic in question and click the ellipsis that appears
3. Choose whether to edit or delete the topic. You’ll also have the option to create a sub-topic for the parent topic here


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e5340557e9519417b63e1cce2769509c.png)


:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that deleting a topic will unassign it from all associated content. All sub-topics within the deleted topic will be moved up a level
:::



## Deleting Saved Content

:::hint{type="info"}
You now have the option to delete a report or dashboard. Please note that the report or dashboard must be archived before you'll see the option to delete it completely.

Report and dashboard deletion cannot be undone.
:::

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
To delete a report:

- Navigate to the report, click `More`, then `Archive`.
- Once the report has been archived, click `More` again, then `Delete`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that any configured alerts will be deleted along with the report and it will be removed from all dashboards.
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b8060b346b64dc49a4a7dc54ead6e782.png)
:::
:::::

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
To delete a recruiting plan:

- Navigate to the recruiting plan, click `More`, then `Archive`.
- Once the recruiting plan has been archived, click `More` again, then `Delete`.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that this will remove the recruiting plan from any dashboards it was linked to.
:::




::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/84762eb1d377ddf3273e64f836d866d3.png)
:::
:::::



:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
To delete a dashboard:

- Navigate to the dashboard, click `More`, then `Archive`.
- Once the dashboard has been archived, click `More`, then`Delete`

:::hint{type="info"}
All of the dashboard's saved views will also be deleted and any scheduled deliveries set up on this dashboard will be stopped on deletion.&#x20;
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/54b57b8037988180d6c2c62a22496051.png)
:::
:::::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I assign a topic to a report or dashboard before saving it?

No. Topics can only be assigned to saved content. As such, the report or dashboard would need to be saved first.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I assign multiple topics to a report or dashboard?

Yes, you can assign multiple topics to a report or dashboard at a time to allow for flexible organization.&#x20;
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I opt to include or exclude archived reports and dashboards from the table view?

You can! Use the `Show archived reports` or `Show archived dashboards` toggle to include any archived reports or dashboards in the saved content table view.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fe820c80d5c369f210a9a1b69824524e.png)
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I bulk archive, restore and/or delete reports, recruiting plans and dashboards? Can I bulk-assign topics to them?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can, yes. Use the checkboxes beside each report/recruiting plan/dashboard to select the content in question and you'll then see the available options listed. If you are selecting active content, you will see the option to Archive in bulk. If you are selecting archived content, you will see the option to Restore or Delete.&#x20;

You will have the option to assign topics to either active or archived content.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4df4086636ccbb3defa4472052ca4e48.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3b887874314bc36ebcf47c20e35b1597.png)
:::
::::
:::::


[title] TeamOhana
[path] Integrations/Other/

TeamOhana is a headcount management platform that simplifies your headcount process and improves collaboration around the approved hiring plan.

## Creating an API key in Ashby

To get started, create an API key for the TeamOhana integration by going to the [TeamOhana integration settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/teamohana) page.  From here, click on the `+ Create API key for TeamOhana` button and copy the key created.

![](https://p-YvFbegGm.t0.n0.cdn.getcloudapp.com/items/llugGEq5/7f5f5386-0cef-429f-91fd-3eda9b751b9a.jpg?v=569e39586466f7eca126019618e8054d)

## Enabling the Ashby integration in TeamOhana

1. In TeamOhana, go to Settings > Integration.
2. Then, click on the `Link HRIS or ATS` button and in the Applicant Tracking System section, connect with Ashby.
3. Paste the API key from Ashby and click `Submit`.
4. You’re all set!

## Video Walkthrough

Here’s a screencast of how to set up the TeamOhana integration and walkthrough of where to access the features of this integration.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c2c0df9cd14143c7b051653ca623ce56"}

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### When I create the job in TeamOhana, will this automatically open the job?

No, jobs created in TeamOhana will create the job in Ashby as a draft. You will need to manually open the job in Ashby.
:::


[title] Zapier
[path] Integrations/Other/

Use the Zapier integration to connect Ashby to a wide range of apps and create Zaps that automate your workflows. This article explains how to connect Ashby to Zapier and how to build a Zap using Ashby as either the trigger app or the action app.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & prerequisites:**

- You must be an Organization Admin to access the Zapier integrations tile and to generate API keys in Ashby.
:::

# Connect Ashby to Zapier

1. In Zapier, create a Zap and select **Ashby** as the trigger or action app. A Zap requires at least one trigger and one action.
2. When prompted to authenticate, provide an Ashby API key. You can create the key either from the Zapier integration listing or the **API Keys** page.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/97RefZA3upOefa4H8lcab_connect-zapier-2026-08-24-at-31310-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1436" height="884" darkWidth="1436" darkHeight="884" alt="The Connect to Zapier screen asking for an API key." showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. Copy the key immediately: Ashby shows the full value only during setup and cannot display it again after the wizard closes.
4. Paste the key into Zapier and click `Connect`.

# API key permissions and endpoints

Below you'll find a list of Ashby triggers and actions in Zapier and the permissions required for the API key used to create the connection.

## Initial Setup — required for every connection

| **Scope**        |
| ---------------- |
| candidates\:read |
| apiKeys\:read    |

## Triggers

| **Trigger**                | **Scopes required**                                |
| -------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------- |
| Application Changed Stage  | candidates\:read, apiKeys\:write                   |
| Candidate Applied          | candidates\:read, apiKeys\:write                   |
| Candidate Hired            | candidates\:read, offers\:read, apiKeys\:write     |
| Interview Schedule Created | candidates\:read, interviews\:read, apiKeys\:write |
| Interview Schedule Updated | candidates\:read, interviews\:read, apiKeys\:write |
| Job Posting Published      | jobs\:read, apiKeys\:write                         |
| Job Posting Unpublished    | jobs\:read, apiKeys\:write                         |
| Opening Created            | jobs\:read, apiKeys\:write                         |
| Offer Created              | candidates\:read, offers\:read, apiKeys\:write     |
| Offer Updated              | candidates\:read, offers\:read, apiKeys\:write     |
| Offer Deleted              | candidates\:read, offers\:read, apiKeys\:write     |

## Searches / Actions

| **Search or Action**           | **Scopes required**                                                                  |
| ------------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Create Candidate               | candidates\:write, hiringProcessMetadata\:read, organization\:read<br />             |
| Update Candidate               | candidates\:read, candidates\:write, hiringProcessMetadata\:read, organization\:read |
| Create Candidate Note          | candidates\:read, candidates\:write                                                  |
| Consider Candidate for Job     | candidates\:read, candidates\:write, jobs\:read                                      |
| Change Job Consideration Stage | candidates\:read, candidates\:write, jobs\:read, hiringProcessMetadata\:read         |
| Create Opening                 | jobs\:write, jobs\:read, organization\:read                                          |
| Update Opening                 | jobs\:write, jobs\:read, organization\:read                                          |
| Generate Report on Ashby       | reports\:read                                                                        |
| Find Candidate                 | candidates\:read                                                                     |
| Find Job                       | jobs\:read                                                                           |
| Find Opening                   | jobs\:read                                                                           |
| Find Job Consideration         | candidates\:read, jobs\:read                                                         |

# Create a Zap with Ashby

## Create a Zap with Ashby as the trigger app

To create a new Zap, click `Create`, then `Zap Workflow` in Zapier.

1. A Zap begins with the trigger, so click in the trigger field and select Ashby as the trigger app.
2. Select the trigger event. This determines when the Zap runs.
3. Select your Ashby connection, or connect your Ashby account in the `Account` field.

After you configure the trigger, you can test it. The test fetches a record matching the conditions you set, which is useful for mapping data in the action step and for confirming you set the correct conditions.

![Creating a zap using Ashby as the trigger app.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lFPWB7hUCVWaRhhpAtcka_zap-with-ashby-as-the-trigger.jpg)

## Create a Zap with Ashby as the action app

After you configure your trigger and any additional conditions on your Zap, you can add Ashby as the action app.

1. Set the `App` field to Ashby.
2. Select the action event. This determines what happens once the Zap is triggered and any conditions you set are met.
3. Select your Ashby connection, or connect your Ashby account in the `Account` field.

When testing, you can map data from the trigger app where possible, then confirm the Zap works as expected before you publish it.

![Creating an integration using Zapier as the action app.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2NlpQc7aIdodww6gdfFXL_setting-ashby-as-the-action-app.jpg)

# FAQs

### If I create an API key in the Zapier integrations tile in Ashby, what permissions does that key come with?

By default, the API key Ashby generates does not have endpoint permissions allocated. To adjust the API key permissions:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > API Keys**.
2. Click your Zapier API key to open the API key settings.
3. Use the **Endpoint Permissions** and **Other Permissions** checkboxes to set the permissions for the API key.
4. Click `Save` to confirm.

[title] User Access & Sharing Metrics
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] Best Practices: Managing & Analyzing Archive Reasons
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics: Best Practices/

This guide aims to review what makes for a good set of  and how to set your team up for success. With archive reasons in place, a set of example analyses to explore results is given, wherein the common field names and report types are reviewed.

## Introduction

This article will give a quick overview of utilizing and analyzing archive reasons to understand your recruiting trends. Successfully doing so can yield useful insights for both your top-of-funnel and late-stage recruiting activities, such as understanding trends in offer decline reasons. Before effective analysis can begin, you’ll need to make sure your archive reasons are amenable to analysis, so we’ll start with a basic recommended taxonomy and some comments on special cases.

Once your archive reasons are in good shape, we’ll discuss how to create a custom grouping of reasons to facilitate analysis, and we’ll conclude with some short [example analyses](docId\:r1tYNIVQjQ5ikc3v8ctTF):

- Looking at archive reasons by stage group
- Taking a closer look filtering and exploring archive reasons
- Examining archive reason trends over time
- Utilizing archive reasons to re-engage candidates

## How to set up archive reasons in Ashby

You can add and/or edit archive reasons by heading to Admin  > Jobs & Applications > [Archive Reasons](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/candidate-archive-reasons). Click `+ New` to add a new archive reason, or click on an existing archive reason to make any edits.

## Creating an Effective Taxonomy of Archive Reasons

The purpose of adding archive reasons is to facilitate a review of why candidates are being rejected or dropping out, and that why should drive insights that help improve your team’s process. You may find, for example, that the primary offer decline reason shifted from relocation to compensation in the quarter you implemented new policies. This raises the point that you’ll want to examine these reasons, generally speaking, via two broad methods: by trend over time and in aggregate.

![The trend in reasons over time to reveal changes due to your team’s process and external market factors.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n7JOLTtYK7cMq3p5LopWV_rejectedatonsiteinterviewbycategoryovertime.png)

The trend in reasons over time to reveal changes due to your team’s process and external market factors.

![A segmentation analysis, e.g. by department or interview stage group, helps identify dominant reasons.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/naFbEtx-DSXfTDtE4a0sV_onsiterejectionsbycandidate.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
A pitfall to avoid: ambiguous reasons. You want your reasons taken in aggregate to be informative.
:::

Some recommendations to help identify the archive reasons that matter to your team the most

- What stage of the recruiting process are we most invested in improving? Do the archive reasons we have facilitate that process?
- Do you have any unique factors at your company or team that need to be accounted for? This can show up in archive reasons unique to evaluating certain company values or evaluating a very specific industry experience or skills that go beyond “lacks skills” type reasons.
- Pay close attention to whether the given reason is informative. One of the most common archive reasons we see is “offer declined.” This reason makes sense when doing a very basic analysis of comparing all archives and seeing how many are offer declines. However, given you can group and filter by stage (and other conditions of interest) with Ashby, such a general offer reason does not provide much insight. Six months from now when you analyze offer declines, you’ll want to identify actionable signals about this critical stage in your recruiting process.
- Another common archive reason is “Other”, which in aggregate can be taken to represent what fraction of your candidate archives lack informative categorization. In our experience, the “other” option is a well-intentioned but easy default for recruiting teams that need to move quickly. We recommend checking if “other” is a significant portion of your archive reasons and reviewing your available reasons if so.
- Consider what stage in your process you might use a particular reason. “Not a fit for role” might be acceptable at the application review or screen stage, but for later stages, more specific reasons may match hiring criteria, such as values or skill and level-based reasons can help optimize your process.
- Another common archive reason is “Withdrew.” This, in our opinion, is more of a category than a reason: there are many reasons a candidate may withdraw from the interview process and your analysis should reveal them. Remember to ask yourself whether your archive reason informs a potential insight or action for your team.
- Archive reasons can also help other teams in your organization. For example, using the "Fraudulent candidate" reason can enable your security teams to identify and track suspicious activity more easily through a centralized marker.

If you’re just getting started, or looking to improve your current setup, the next section presents a standard set of archive reasons by category.

## Recommendation: An Example of a Set of Archive Reasons

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby supports archive reason categories and our Greenhouse customers inherit the Greenhouse categories Rejected by Org or Rejected by Candidate. Lever does not support archive reason categories, but Ashby’s [Calculated Fields](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x)  can help resolve that challenge by creating custom groupings.
:::

Depending on the size of your organization the level of detail in your archive reasons may vary. Typically, larger organizations can support more reasons as the larger volume of applicants permits more specificity. For this reason, there is a judgment call here: if you’re a small team just getting started, you may not want to get too detailed on all the reasons a candidate can exit consideration. For starters, an example set of archive reasons by archive reason groupings is given below.

### Category: Rejection by Organization

The reasons your organization will utilize may vary depending on your interview process, industry details, or certain policies. The reasons below are given as a standard starting set, but you may need to add more, e.g. specific values-related reasons.

| Rejection by Organization Reason                     |
| ---------------------------------------------------- |
| Lacks work authorization                             |
| Role fit: general skills/qualifications              |
| Role fit: experience level - too senior              |
| Role fit: experience level - too junior              |
| Reference/Background Check                           |
| Location - unwilling to relocate / remote policy     |
| Values fit reason(s), e.g. "Value fit - team player" |
| Follow up - Role Filled                              |
| Fraudulent/fake candidate                            |

### Category: Rejection by Candidate Reasons

The offer-specific reasons below are given as a more detailed example. You may not find all of them necessary at your current company size.

| Rejection by Candidate Reason   | Offer Specific Reasons                     |
| ------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------ |
| Remain with current company     | Offer Declined - Leveling                  |
| Not interested - General        | Offer Declined - Compensation Salary       |
| Not interested - Industry       | Offer Declined - Compensation Equity       |
| Not interested - Role / Project | Offer Declined - Career growth             |
| Not interested - Career Growth  | Offer Declined - Accepted competing offer  |
| Accepted other offer            | Offer Declined - Remain at current company |
| Unresponsive                    | Offer Declined - Other                     |
| Bad Timing                      | Offer Reneged                              |

### Category: Rejection due to process or data clean up (aka, “Other”)

The reasons that fall in this category should be thought of as those you most likely do not want to include in your archive reason analysis, barring analysis that is looking at, e.g., data quality or re-engagement. For example, when analyzing offer rejection reasons you will want to exclude cases of archiving candidates that were moved to a different role.

| Other Reasons               |
| --------------------------- |
| Did not respond to outreach |
| Position closed / on hold   |
| Transferred to another role |
| Position filled             |
| Cleanup - Inactivity        |
| Non-compete                 |

### Custom Groupings with Calculated Fields

If you *do* specify many reasons you can minimize the fragmentation of reasons by creating custom groupings with Ashby’s [Calculated Fields](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x) feature. Apart from the standard grouping above, you may want to consider special use cases like grouping all archive reasons that permit following up with the candidate at a later date. A custom grouping of the above reasons to select candidates for re-engagement may look like the following.

| Custom Grouping Reasons                          |
| ------------------------------------------------ |
| Position filled                                  |
| Position closed / on hold                        |
| Location - unwilling to relocate / remote policy |
| Follow up / Future consideration                 |

## Hands-On with Ashby Analytics: Analysis Examples

Below we present a few pragmatic examples types related to archive reasons. A short description and recorded example is provided per analysis, but for reference we find the below fields to be some of the most useful when navigating and analyzing archive reasons.

| Ashby Fieldname              | Why it's helpful                                                                                |
| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Archived At                  | Allows you to select the timeframe in which the applications you want to analyze were archived. |
| Furthest Stage Group Reached | Allows you to group by or filter to the furthest stage group the application made it to.        |
| Archive Reason               | Gives the specific archive reason used.                                                         |
| Archive Reason Type          | Gives the broad archive category, rejected by org, rejected by candidate or other.              |

***

The above is just one of many useful fields for analysis, others being Department or Team, Source Type (Origin for Lever users), or potentially hiring team member fields such as Recruiter and Hiring Manager. If you’ve created [Calculated Fields](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x) for custom grouping, you’ll be able to use those for your analysis, too!

### Archive Reason by Stage Group

With Ashby, you can examine archive reasons by the stage group in which the candidate was archived. The composition of reasons should change as candidates progress through your interview process, so this analysis permits you to keep an eye out for things like on-site reasons being appropriately matched to the on-site stage. If you find that candidates are being archived for reasons such as lack of fit, or not interested in relocating, that’s a sign that prior stages which should be screening for such factors are not functioning, resulting in precious time and resources being expended at the on-site.

![Candidate Rejections by Stage Group.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ld80FyIO9zofvjj-aqOhm_candidaterejectionsbystagegroup.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/9235bb1dbcd141578aaa93c376d1185a"}

### Narrow the Scope of Analysis & Explore: Onsite Stage Group

We can focus on the previous analysis by examining the onsite stage group specifically. With this narrowed scope we can examine other variables that may be significant factors. In the example below we take a closer look at the onsite rejections by candidate by source type, revealing that agencies result in a higher rate of candidates that weren’t interested in the opportunity. In general, as you proceed with an exploratory analysis consider filtering and grouping your analysis to a specific department, region, or interview stage.

![Candidate Rejections by Source Type at Onsite.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cqaRpWQkIgdngMBl_qIxA_candidaterejectionsbysourcetypeatonsite.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/8bdf23df7c7a409983294126fdbeade1"}

### Look at the Trend Over Time

Plotting archive reasons over time can be challenging if your recruiting efforts are not at a sufficient volume. Two approaches to help with that are to look for trends in the broader archive reason categories (e.g. rejected by candidate) or custom groupings or to use longer time periods, such as a quarterly time series as opposed to a weekly time series. This type of analysis is especially important in evaluating policy changes or external market factors. In the example below we see some reasons change quarter to quarter, while others (accepting another offer) remain present, suggesting that time to offer may be a strategic initiative to improve.

![Engineering Candidate Rejections Over Time.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/muQmkwk4xpduvPFZ83KI9_engineeringcandidaterejectionsovertime.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/bfc90aee18cd4cb38a6d4aec9e01159c"}

### Utilize Archive Reasons for Re-engagement

Candidate re-engagement is a cost-effective manner of sourcing talent. With targeted archive reasons you can filter by previously interviewed candidates to drive contextualized outreach at a later date. For example, if your remote work policy changes, you can follow up with all candidates archived under the “relocation / remote policy” reason and let them know of new opportunities.

![Screen Shot 2021-11-03 at 9.27.55 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UBSca4nw1WjWMT_MwzfVp_screenshot2021-11-03at92755pm.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/55f2e4648b814035845f22bb5cc92925"}

## Conclusions

We hope the above summary is useful as a refresher and recommendation on how to manage and analyze your archive reasons. We covered the rationale for setting up helpful archive reasons, some prompts to evaluate what makes a good archive reason, and how to set your team up for success in the long run with some example analyses.

If you have any feedback, thoughts, or recommendations on this topic we’d love to hear from you! Feel free to reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) - we love hearing from you!

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Who has access to add or edit archive reasons?

See the table below for information on the roles that have access to configure archive reasons.

| Access Role                                                    | Has Access? |
| -------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------- |
| Limited Access                                                 | ❌           |
| Agency Users                                                   | ❌           |
| Elevated Access - External Recruiter (not linked to an agency) | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Analyst                                      | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Team Member                           | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Hiring Manager                               | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin                                        | ❌\*         |
| Elevated Access - Admin Private                                | ❌\*         |
| Organization Admin                                             | ✅           |

\*Only Organization Admins can set up archive reasons by default. Elevated Access users can be given access to archive reasons if needed. More on this at Additional User Permissions.
:::


[title] Core Dashboards
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

Core dashboards are a great place to start when exploring reports and getting insights on jobs, interviews, offers and your general pipeline. These dashboards represent a suite of analytics that provide insights across various TA domains, to ensure that your team has access to the data they need.

Core Dashboards are available across all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Custom Dashboards are available on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Overview

To access your core dashboards, head to Reports, then to [Core Dashboards](https://app.ashbyhq.com/dashboards/core). We have six ready-made dashboards providing instant insights across all your recruiting activities in Ashby.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Core Dashboards follow your existing role permissions, so you'll only see data for roles you have access to. These access settings can't be edited.
:::

**Executive Dashboard:** A high-level overview, providing on hires, offer acceptance rate, all currently open roles and interview frequency.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2f0c2664d6ecb3be8af4e5e0b917aef.png)

**Jobs Dashboard:** Reports on your open and closed jobs, time to hire and open and filled openings.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/432d763e892dddb28acdcfa5cfccea45.png)

**Sourcing Dashboard:** Track your sequences and sourced candidates here.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/96a8cb63c2b2cbb4cf23a2f716187d7d.png)

**Interview Dashboard:** Track key scheduling metrics like your upcoming and completed interviews, your feedback completion rate and overall feedback scores here.  You will need to set up a grouped interview plan to view this dashboard. More on this at [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)

:::hint{type="warning"}
This is a separate dashboard from the Interview Dashboard under Views on the home page. For more on scheduling requests and tracking scheduling with the other Interview Dashboard, check out [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1).
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7fa3d204fb829545eb8db1c8bc87b530.png)

**Offers Dashboard:** Track your offer acceptance rate, reasons why a candidate declined an offer, the overall average time to offer by both department and recruiter.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3b46888a7cdf082aea198f1f1be9b83b.png)

**CRM Summary Dashboard:** Track how many candidates are being added each week, how many candidates are in the Active stages of a job’s pipeline, how many leads are not being considered for a job currently and your weekly archive volume.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/88c0f6d84b2281a49992b95f8592f7a5.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
**DEI Dashboard:** This dashboard is only available to those who have purchased the Diversity Inference add-on. Please reach out to your Sales Executive if you want to utilize this feature.
:::

## Core Dashboard Reports

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Executive Dashboard

**Hires**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This report lists all  with the Hired outcome. Includes the candidate’s name, the job, team, recruiter, hiring manager, the source and when the candidate was hired.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/66ee358e19580f01d569618e78a13b36.png)


:::
::::

**Hired Not Started**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A list of hired candidates who have a future start date. This report includes the candidate’s name, the job, the job’s team, the recruiter, hiring manager, source, the date the candidate was hired at and their start date (pulled from their offer details).


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/30238a596f6677731f732ea08043283f.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Acceptance Rate**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The percentage of offers that have been accepted by candidates. This report can also be viewed as a Pie Chart.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e42c26b84abf24f6f07bfad617c05124.png)


:::
::::

**Completed Interviews**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of all completed interviews. The report counts one interview per stage per candidate.

If a candidate has multiple interviews scheduled in one stage, this would count all interviews as one for the candidate.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/664f983aaa5cd1a39b25dcc628dfe659.png)


:::
::::

**Upcoming Interviews**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of upcoming interviews scheduled in. This report shows the candidate, the job, the interview’s start time, interview title and interviewer when in the Table view.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/977adf11eeb14e08350978ab605b5530.png)


:::
::::

**All Open Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of all currently open jobs. The report lists the job, the recruiter, hiring manager, the number of days the job has been open for and an active candidate count.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/190eddd8a59e25410aba8b6166adfb00.png)


:::
::::

**Hires by Department**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of  hired by department. By default, this report looks at the last 12 months. Both a count and a percentage are listed.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bfebd2c3601696cbf6ecb09ef6c4ec66.png)


:::
::::

**Monthly Hires by Department**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of  hired each month, grouped by department. By default, this report looks at the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/732ace18522a70967146a6aff8213387.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Acceptance Rate by Department**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A chart showing the acceptance rate for offers, grouped by department.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9b459e3bd9216046669f6e7a7c38d2f1.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Stage Acceptance Rate**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The offer stage acceptance report examines the final outcome of all  that enter the offer stage.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3d2dcc7c9d5a5e1b024d7e2f313c12a7.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Stage Enters**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of  that reach the offer stage. By default, this report counts offer stage entries over all time.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/29a55da183fb3f1b4c67a25a95a5a780.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Acceptance Rate Details**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A further breakdown of all offer outcomes, including the total number accepted and rejected.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9a78f35e05a0ec8777e7230b53fc7c90.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Decline Reasons**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A summary of archive reasons in the case of an offer being declined by the candidate.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1fed44263e9d0ab7a475a4c1ee152710.png)


:::
::::

**Open Jobs by Department**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
View the total number of currently open jobs, split by their department.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c86ad6cbb3b12d194ca087cbbbfdda8f.png)


:::
::::

**All Open Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A list of all currently open roles, showing the job, recruiter, hiring manager, open duration and active candidate count.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/73905fc34aea54f0013ab5aef7dfce68.png)


:::
::::

**Monthly Open Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of jobs open, counted across months. The count is based on the jobs opening and closing dates.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2d74ad1707f2f61592219a91b524c42.png)


:::
::::

**Interviews per Hire**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This report tracks the average number of interviews and interviewer hours per hire.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2499146186c30b9f575abd590655861.png)


:::
::::

**Interviews Week over Week**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of interviews, split by department and show week over week.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/567fe2a552e10c52a81aaa5d62af387a.png)


:::
::::

**Interviews by Department and Stage**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of interviews grouped by department and stage name.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c3fad135c3bd095a3843364e6ba66fbf.png)


:::
::::


:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Job Dashboard



**All Open Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A list of all currently open roles, showing the job, recruiter, hiring manager, open duration and active candidate count.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/73905fc34aea54f0013ab5aef7dfce68.png)


:::
::::

**Jobs by Open Duration**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The number of jobs that have been open for 0-30 days, 31-60 days, 61-90 days and 91+ days. These counts are based on the date each job was opened.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a240cff02c6545f25914076cd83f1dfb.png)


:::
::::

**Open jobs by Recruiter**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Currently open jobs grouped by their assigned recruiter.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d6090c65150f7749fba59eeb8b980488.png)


:::
::::

**Open Jobs by Department**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Currently open jobs grouped by their department.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/60bb9929acc049e257170cd1560db9d7.png)


:::
::::

**Open Jobs by Hiring Manager**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Currently open jobs grouped by the assigned hiring manager.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dbf0f7283b91b77923db73d039aaa9c2.png)
:::
::::

**Monthly Open Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of jobs open, counted across months. The count is based on the jobs opening and closing dates.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/dbf0f7283b91b77923db73d039aaa9c2.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2d74ad1707f2f61592219a91b524c42.png)
:::
::::

**Closed Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Total number of closed jobs over all time. This report includes the job, the requisition ID, the hiring manager, the recruiter, the open duration and the job status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ca5b194a74822e60ba00ad46de09d331.png)


:::
::::

**Time to Fill**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This report shows how long jobs have been open, how many hires were made against these jobs, and calculates a ratio.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5fd4012e5634dd8bf457dad9e43bc72a.png)


:::
::::

**Time to Fill, Monthly**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The time to fill for jobs, calculated month-to-month.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6d672a567ac6b57be756f6a22eb3dc69.png)


:::
::::

**Open Openings**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of currently open openings. Want to set up openings? More on this at [Openings Management ](#).


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4e79790f653f02b1e4cb2d2ed08946e7.png)


:::
::::

**Filled Openings**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of openings marked as Filled. This means a hire has been made and assigned to this opening in Ashby.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/489e2d54019521a808e738df2b937c14.png)


:::
::::

****


:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Sourcing Dashboard



**Sequence Activity: Initial Outreaches**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of all outreach activities that are classed as initial or first contact with a candidate. When opened this report includes when the outreach was sent, who created the activity, the activity type, channel and reply status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/06770e8c37c4dbebce6a58a9a7383588.png)


:::
::::

**Sequences Started**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of all sequences started. This report counts over all time.

When opened this report includes the candidate’s name, who created the sequence, when the sequence was started, the template, a project (if applicable) and the number of stage completed in the sequence.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/90d3bae40ef42f9f68e5242154c3869e.png)


:::
::::

**Sequences Replied To**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of sequences that have been marked as receiving a reply.

When opened this report includes the candidate’s name, who created the sequence, when the sequence was started, the template, a project (if applicable) and the number of stage completed in the sequence.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/97076538ce254ffb3b49170a3736afbd.png)


:::
::::

**Active Converted Candidates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of all candidates who are currently active and have been tagged as having converted from a sequence.

When viewing the full report, the candidate, job, current interview stage name and job’s recruiter are listed.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7a7d69bcbd2c66fa611d1a381ec5af44.png)


:::
::::

**Sourced Candidates Passthrough Rates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A passthrough rate report showing the progression of sourced candidates. The report is grouped by source type.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9c7c1e30577966d99f5eccb2317f56f7.png)


:::
::::

**Weekly Sequences Started**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The number of sequences started each week, spanning over the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d1e3151e4ccd6c17a4d2c5bf86278c06.png)


:::
::::

**Weekly Outreach Activities**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of all weekly outreach activities, split by type. This chart covers the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/03f21c537eca269cab8158f02db155ca.png)


:::
::::

**Outreach Activity by Channel and Reply Status**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The volume of outreach replies by channel, grouped by the reply status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/aa5e03f9e10f5ecf0655f1d614ffadf2.png)


:::
::::

**Sequences - Details**

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b93bce319887f2522686dfed166bfa3b.png)

**Overall Open Rate**

The overall open rate, meaning any individual outreach email has been opened at least once. This report covers the last 12 months.

**Overall Reply Rate**

The number of sequences that received a reply divided by the total number of sequences started. This report covers the last 12 months.

**Overall Conversion Rate**

This report measures whether a sequence recipient has converted to an active candidate on a job.

**Overall Interested Rate**

The number of sequences that received a response from the lead that was categorised as Interested.

**Monthly Conversion Rate**

Pulled from the date the sequence was started, this tracks the volume of sequence recipients who converted to be an active candidate on a job by month.

This report covers the last 12 months.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/74940dcf6eccf8df212540602c5464eb.png)

**Conversion Rate by Sequence Creator**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This chart tracks the conversion rates based on the sequence creator and conversion status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/155dd90465d8631686dcd225cb0c9957.png)


:::
::::

**Monthly Reply Rate**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Tracks the reply rate, grouped by the month the sequence was started and the reply status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/827b00509fa82fbee1a01bc66b065309.png)


:::
::::

**Reply Rate by Sequence Creator**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Tracks the reply rate, grouped by the sequence creator and the reply status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/193e8712a3d659435e2cffdb1ba5b118.png)
:::
::::

**Monthly Open Rate**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Tracks the open rate, based on the month the sequence was started at and the open status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3ef08d7fbdf5ccbe88f8ab4ef063fa25.png)


:::
::::

**Sequence Open Rate by Creator**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Tracks the open rate, based on the sequence creator and the open status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/155dd90465d8631686dcd225cb0c9957.png)


:::
::::

**Job Considerations by Source Type**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of , grouped by their source. This report covers the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/13891c5668ecf6c6fac6a4038e04ab21.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Stage Enters by Source Type**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The number of  that entered the Offer stage, grouped by their source type. This report covers the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0ee1627648bff52cf5c220ea19b543eb.png)


:::
::::


:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Interview Core Dashboard



:::hint{type="info"}
Please note you will need to set up a grouped interview plan to access this dashboard. More on this at [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)&#x20;
:::

**Completed Interviews**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Contains a total count of all completed interviews across all time. Please note that one interview is counted per stage. When opening the report, the candidate, job, start time, interviewer, stage name and interview title are included.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c476ba9f2bc258cbd110a5316ee0e769.png)


:::
::::

**Feedback Completion**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The overall feedback completion rate across all interviewers. This report covers the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c3fd4913c23468584f24d9e869c67227.png)


:::
::::

**Completed Interviews by Stage Group**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total count of interviews completed, grouped by the stage that they were scheduled in. This report covers the last 12 months by default.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0d936c89adf9142cd7fca835efef6ca4.png)


:::
::::

**Weekly Interviews by Stage Group**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The count of interviews per week grouped by the stage group they were scheduled in. By default, this covers interviews scheduled each week over the last 3 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c09339a443872f59afbecf8a1c66d682.png)


:::
::::

**Upcoming Interviews, Next 30 Days**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A report showing all future interviews scheduled in the next 30 days. The report includes the candidate, the job, the interview’s start time and interviewer, the stage name and thr the interview title.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d6495f3b566c1ba85c76d7705b4aa5e7.png)


:::
::::

**Interviews per Hire**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The average number of interviews and interviewer hours for each hire.
It’s calculated by taking the total number of interviews divided by the number of hires made.

The total number of interviews includes interviews for candidates both hired and rejected.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ecc569a9b38d840e4a3a0bd19cfb4c97.png)
:::
::::

**Interviews per Hire by Quarter**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The average number of interviews and interviewer hours per hire, grouped by each quarter.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/df15868b993cfe63366116d9045ca228.png)
:::
::::

**Interviewer Load**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Interview load by interviewer summarizes the total time and total count of interviews for each interviewer.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/11c5790bea4ce0d0b772b273f6357a2f.png)


:::
::::

**Interviewer Load by Stage Group**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Interview load by stage group provides the interview count and aggregate total hours spent across all interview participants.

For example, a 1-hour interview with 2 interviewers participating will be counted as 2 hours. This can be thought of as the total time cost to your organization by stage group.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5ac190ff48d9ba5dda2284be570d27c3.png)
:::
::::

**Feedback Completion by Interviewer**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Lists the total interviews, feedback completed, completion rate and the average time to submit by each interviewer.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7916c197ece82eb7bf1b10863cf83191.png)


:::
::::

**Feedback Completion Rate**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The overall feedback completion rate for all interviewers. This report covers the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0103bea949d9d0a9e3e00df8fe961538.png)


:::
::::

**Feedback Distribution by Stage Group**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This report shows the overall recommendations on feedback forms submitted within the last 12 months and is grouped by group stage.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4da45e8c8672da942aeb297dcd0d872f.png)


:::
::::

**Feedback Forms by Stage Group**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of feedback forms submitted for each stage group.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fddec43d482f611a2f94d6748d6d2776.png)


:::
::::

**Feedback Distribution by Interview Title**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
This report shows the overall recommendations on feedback forms submitted within the last 12 months and is grouped by interview title.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/90d78038e2b1faa53af60628e6bde51a.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### Offer Dashboard

**In Offer**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of candidates who are currently in the Offer stage group.

When opening the report, it includes the candidate, the job, the job consideration’s recruiter, hiring manager, the number of days the consideration has been in that Offer stage group and the offer status.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/20dd690d545f685a9ec6e9c77e977917.png)
:::
::::

**Reached Offer**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total number of , active and inactive, that have ever reached the offer stage group. By default, this report covers all time.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/89da4b1bcaed66c884c0907a02efd6ac.png)


:::
::::

**Intent to Offer Acceptance Rate**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The intent to offer acceptance rate is the total hires over the total number of  that have ever reached the offer stage. By default, this report covers all time.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c6a7e2487c6f887a84503ae86424fb41.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Acceptance Rate Details**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A further breakdown of the offer outcomes that lead to the offer acceptance rate, listing the offers decided, the offers accepted and the offers rejected.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/eac434da897c0a569793b3ea0ef98e56.png)


:::
::::

**Offer Acceptance Rate Overall**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The offer acceptance rate across each month. By default this report shows the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fa9b09121bb14ae5c534d5561b07b2ad.png)
:::
::::

**Offer Decline Reasons**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A chart showing the reasons added to offers when they are declined by the candidate.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/38de76b64de78b77368b732a2f301645.png)
:::
::::

**Time to Offer by Department**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The average number of days it takes for a job consideration to reach the Offer stage from when it was first started. This report is grouped by department.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f0838882a2599e1df39666c2471c6f06.png)

****
:::
::::

**Time to Offer by Recruiter**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The average number of days it takes for a job consideration to reach the Offer stage from when it was first started. This report is grouped by the recruiter listed on the job consideration.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/387fa09608b7148b7207dee77c5e4131.png)
:::
::::


:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### CRM Summary Dashboard

**Total Candidates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The total count of candidates in your Ashby account.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b8234d69c19e97c481fb274098aeb934.png)


:::
::::

**Weekly Candidates Added**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The count of candidates added each week across the last 12 months.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fde6c4d54492b69fe1888c3c40b462bf.png)


:::
::::

**Active Candidates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The count of candidates with at least one job consideration in an Active stage.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/16593f4640525944f9e9d75915c677b0.png)
:::
::::

**Weekly Active Pipeline Volume**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A historical count of  in active stages by department. The count shows every week across the last 12 months.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6e3b7c568816f4d20bcaf2afe5817f21.png)


:::
::::

**Leads Not on Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The count of candidates who have never been considered for a job.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d2ef222cb5cccb1640549c8a1d3a5938.png)


:::
::::

**Leads on Jobs**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The count of candidates with at least one job consideration in an Lead stage.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e38571b51c55e26a52eeff3dc7efb886.png)
:::
::::

**Weekly Active Lead Volume**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A historical count of  in lead stages by department. The count shows every week across the last 12 months.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ed162658a9b28a9b39c206c0f1c24895.png)
:::
::::

**Archived Candidates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of candidates who were previously considered for a role, were rejected and currently have no active . This is a count across all time.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f4c1a621e331042d23460afe60575c1e.png)
:::
::::

**Weekly Archive Volume**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
A count of  that were archived each week, grouped by department. By default, this report covers the last 12 months.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bfb306d86995a58fec540139dce3ce0c.png)
:::
::::


:::::

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can you schedule a core dashboard to be sent out automatically?

This isn’t possible currently but is something on our roadmap! It is possible to schedule custom dashboards. More on scheduled dashboards at [Scheduled Dashboards](docId\:Ttr2OmUg9YQPx1nkCMJS9).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I add a dashboard-level filter to the core dashboards?

This isn’t possible with core dashboards, no.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### How often are reports and dashboards refreshed?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- Report results are refreshed live when a report or dashboard is opened. The results are then cached for 1 hour. If report parameters or dashboard filters are changed within that hour, the report or dashboard will be refreshed.
- Reports can be refreshed manually at any time on the dashboard or when reviewing a report on its own.
- To refresh a report on a dashboard, click on the “…” in the top right-hand corner of the report tile and click Refresh Report.
- Refreshing the page will not refresh a report.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bMGqqxfPmxkuBxSMManDl_screenshot2022-11-04at102607am.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I export a core dashboard?

This isn’t currently possible.
:::


[title] Dashboard Filters
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This document reviews dashboard filters and how to add or remove them from dashboards.

## Overview

Dashboard filters are a powerful feature in Ashby that allow you to add or configure filters at the dashboard level that can be quickly applied to all reports on a dashboard. They allow you to build dashboards that can be filtered to specific departments, recruiters, etc., without having to copy reports and dashboards.

![An example of a dashboard in which all reports are filtered down to the Marketing department.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wwA7Ee6SjpuSSCLl1Hzw5_screenshot2022-12-05at82413am.png)

An example of a dashboard in which all reports are filtered down to the Marketing department.

## Tutorial

The Loom video below will teach you how to use dashboard filters in Ashby.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ba7a4863cacb468eb3afef7ca99ecd1a"}

## Add a filter and connect it

1. To add a filter, navigate to your dashboard (make sure you are on the Dashboard Edit View) and click `Add Filter`.
2. Find the field you would like to filter by. For filters attached to a user, use the `User` field. You will be able to identify what user role you are filtering for at the report level.
3. Connect the filter to each of the reports you want the filter to be applied to. When you click on the filter icon, you will be prompted to select/search for the field you want to attach the filter to. Pay attention to the subject the filter is anchored on. For example, a recruiter at the job level and the job consideration level could be different.
4. Green - All dashboard filters on the dashboard have been applied to the report
   Grey - Some dashboard filters on the dashboard have been applied to the report
   Red - No dashboard filters on the dashboard have been applied to the report
5. If you would like, you can require a filter to be applied to all of the reports on a dashboard. To do this, check the box next to `Require value`. You will see the alert below if any of the reports are not connected to the required filter.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Dashboard filters are applied in the dashboard view and will not be saved to the underlying reports.
:::

### Viewing an underlying report on a dashboard with a filter

If you apply filters at the dashboard level, you can click the Go to Filtered Report icon to view the report. The unsaved dashboard filters will be applied when viewing the report (but will not be saved to the report automatically). You can click `Save` when viewing the filtered report to add the filter changes to your existing report. If you make any changes to the underlying report and save it, these changes will be reflected on the dashboard.

If you need to get to the underlying report without any dashboard filter context being applied, the action menu on any report tile provides the option (the three dots to the right of the `Go to Filtered Report` button) to go directly to the report via `Go to Report`.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/aae1862dfe3547bb8c8e4af2f9681ffa"}

## Delete a filter

To delete a dashboard filter, select the Trash icon next to the filter and click `Delete`.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I connect a Recruiting Planner report to a dashboard filter?

This isn’t currently possible.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Help! I’m accessing the dashboard from my homepage and don’t have the option to connect filters. What’s going on?

When accessing the dashboard via the `Views` column on your homepage, be sure to click `Edit` on the dashboard. You should then be able to configure dashboard filters.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b42194d2b91a5f3afd7c25f342f49dad.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set my dashboard filter to exclude certain values?

You can, yes. When you specify a value for your filter, you will see an `Is` dropdown between the filter type and the chosen value. You can use the dropdown and select `Is Not` to exclude the specified value from your results rather than only show values matching your filter.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/47ccbe9721ba7a795aeaca93fc0fdf83.png)
:::


[title] Alex AI
[path] Integrations/Other/

Connecting Alex to Ashby keeps your hiring process in sync without manual work. Interview notes and completed reports flow straight into candidate profiles, and workflows in Alex can create interviews, invite candidates, update interview stages, and tag candidates in Ashby automatically.

# Permissions & access

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin and have an existing Alex account to connect the integration.
:::

The Alex AI integration is available on Foundations, Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Connecting the integration

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations** and search for [Alex AI](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/alex-ai).
2. Select the `+ Create API key for Alex AI` button.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GAK_7iQNF_VUXto0eKoeQ_alex-ai-ashby-2026-10-02-at-14556-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1599" height="724" darkWidth="1599" darkHeight="724" alt="Ashby Admin Integrations page with the Alex AI integration panel open. The “Create API key for Alex AI” button is highlighted." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Copy the API key and store it in a secure place. You need this to complete the integration setup in Alex.
:::

3. After you create the API key, assign the key `Candidates: Write` and `Candidates & Jobs: Read` permissions.
4. To finish the setup, navigate to your Alex account and follow the steps outlined in their [integration guide](https://docs.alex.com/integrations/ashby).

:::hint{type="success"}
Once connected, the integration supports data syncing and workflow automation between Ashby and Alex.
:::


[title] Post Hire
[path] Integrations/


[title] Namely
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Connect Namely to your Ashby account to automatically import hired candidates to Namely.

## Integration Overview

This integration enables you to push hired candidates’ data into Namely to kick off the new employee onboarding process. Video instructions are linked at the bottom of this document.

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync                | Notes                                                                                                                                  |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | ---------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|           ✔        |        ❌           |        ❌          | One-way sync from Ashby to Namely. | When candidates are pushed to Namely, they are added to Namely's draft onboarding feature, before adding the candidate as an Employee. |



## Connect Namely with Ashby

Log into your Namely account and click on your profile in the top right corner. From the dropdown menu that opens after clicking on your profile, click on `API`.

![CleanShot 2022-11-28 at 14.12.28@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ajBIMZlTjOFPZUNO1QbZG_cleanshot2022-11-28at1412282x.png)

Click on Personal Access Tokens. On this page you’ll be able to create a new API key. Name the key Ashby and copy it.

![CleanShot 2022-11-28 at 14.22.04@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n4_agHLp-gc0TmhqCD8kN_cleanshot2022-11-28at1422042x.png)

## Ashby Setup

Navigate to Ashby and select Admin. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Select Namely and click `Enable Namely`.

![CleanShot 2022-11-14 at 15.45.18@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yC7RJcKYNwkNPPD0Aal6I_cleanshot2022-11-14at1545182x.png)

Paste the Namely API Key that you copied from your Namely account into the Namely API Key section in the Ashby app.

Fill in the Company Name field in the Ashby app. Make sure that this is an exact match with the spelling that you use for your Namely account (e.g. https\://\:companyname.namely.com/.

## Push Candidate Data to Namely

When a candidate accepts an offer, you will see an option to add the candidate to Namely. In the Current Activities section of the candidate profile, click on `Add Candidate Data` in the Add candidate to Namely activity. A new Employee will be created in Namely and the latest offer data will be pushed into your Namely account.

![CleanShot 2022-11-14 at 15.48.23@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/z4NwohjyITq6x-lTZyUXQ_cleanshot2022-11-14at1548232x.png)

When pushing a candidate from Ashby to Namely, the following candidate details will be included by default:

- Name
- Email address\*
- Phone number
- Salary
- Start Date
- LinkedIn profile

\*Namely requires employees have both a work and personal email set when their profile is created in Namely. If you don’t opt to sync a candidate’s Work Email as a custom field, the work email field will default to the candidate’s personal email.

You also have the option to sync additional Namely fields as [Offer custom fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields?objectType=offer). These values will be sent to Namely if included in the candidate's offer form. After selecting additional Offer custom fields to sync, it may take up to one hour for them to show up in Offer forms. You can read more about these fields at [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) . Please be aware that custom fields are not available on the Foundations plan.

![CleanShot 2022-11-10 at 14.03.37@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/j1S_M0vlNgFVWufW0DWsM_cleanshot2022-11-10at1403372x.png)

Candidates pushed from Ashby to Namely will be created in Namely as Draft Onboarding Sessions. Ensure that the Onboarding feature is enabled in your Namely account before pushing hired employees to your account.

To view candidates pushed to Namely as Draft Onboarding sessions, click on the `Onboarding` link on the home page under the Admin tools section (highlighted below).

![CleanShot 2022-11-28 at 14.22.42@2x.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Ze_SDWMKpSJ8pHyBzuS0k_cleanshot2022-11-28at1422422x.png)

## Video Instructions

For a Namely integration video walkthrough, please refer here:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f39fb4ba3c664148aa4582df882845aa"}


[title] Ashby to Snowflake Data Share
[path] Integrations/Data Shares/

This document aims to provide a brief outline of Ashby’s native Snowflake data sharing feature. A review of the available data, reference documentation, and analysis guidelines is provided.

The Ashby to Snowflake Data Share is available on the Enterprise plan only:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

# Data Share Summary

Ashby supports data share mechanism which exposes your Ashby data in a native Snowflake database. After initial onboarding, your data team will be granted access to Ashby data tables within Snowflake whereupon standard analysis may proceed using the analysis tools of your team’s choice. At present, your data is scheduled to refresh with updates approximately once every 6 hours.

# Onboarding and Snowflake Data Sharing Setup

Please reach out to your Customer Success Manager to inquire about access and the setup steps for the Snowflake data share feature.

# Getting Started with Analyzing Your Ashby Data

To aid your analysis efforts, we have provided a few topical comments across a variety of “core” tables and recruiting metrics. This introduction is not meant to be comprehensive, but rather orient you with your raw Ashby data to catalyze getting oriented such that you can pursue analysis efforts more effectively. Please see the [table and ERD reference](docId\:pG1llokJQbRln5GoEhn2C) section below to review table and field name details.

## Identifying your Employees

All employees are stored in the `APP_USER` table, and any reference to a `..._user_id` will trace back to a user record. For example, if you wanted to analyze scorecard submission values by employee for a given job, or on average per department, you would count the scorecard values from the `SCORECARD_SUBMISSION` table and join to the `APP_USER.app_user_id` on `SCORECARD_SUBMISSION.submitted_by_user_id` to access the user’s first name, last name, and any other useful metadata.

## Candidates and their Applications

:::hint{type="info"}
Note, the Ashby in-app experience refers to Job Considerations (i.e. a candidate is considered for a job), but the underlying data table is called `APPLICATION`.
:::

Almost all analyses will involve looking at candidates and their associated job considerations. A candidate can have multiple applications, but the basic association is done by way of joining on `CANDIDATE_DATA.candidate_data_id` and `APPLICATION.candidate_id`.

## Analysis by Departments and Teams

It is common to analyze candidate data by their associated departments or teams, e.g. looking at time to hire for the engineering department or sub-teams. The Job definition contains department and team details, and every application has a job ID reference. Thus, to analyze application details by department, you join the `JOB` table on `JOB.job_id` and `APPLICATION.job_id`. The exact team details associated with the job are stored in the `TEAM` table, which can be joined on `JOB.team_id` and `TEAM.team_id`, whereupon team hierarchy and names can be used.

### Example: Getting the count of applications per job

:::BlockQuote
SELECT
&#x20;   j.job\_id&#x20;
&#x20;   , t.team\_name
&#x20;   , j.job\_title
&#x20;   , COUNT(DISTINCT a.application\_id) total\_applications
&#x20;   , COUNT(DISTINCT a.candidate\_id) total\_candidates
FROM&#x20;
&#x20;   job j
LEFT JOIN&#x20;
&#x20;   application a
&#x20;   USING (job\_id)
LEFT JOIN&#x20;
&#x20;   team t
&#x20;   USING (team\_id)
WHERE
&#x20;   \-- Fitering by date, team or any other relevant fields
&#x20;   DATE(a.application\_created\_at) >= '2025-01-01'
GROUP BY
&#x20;   ALL;
:::

## Analyzing Scorecard Submissions

Scorecard analysis is can be done directly by looking at the `scorecard_submission` table. However, if you want to analyze scorecards by their related interview metadata, the task gets a bit more involved. The example query below shows how to tie a scorecard submission to the associated interviewer event, interview event and interview objects — each of these objects hold different metadata about the overall scheduling process.

Note in this query the scorecard submission `source` is set to “InterviewerEvent” which indicates selecting scorecards submitted by employees within interviews. The other available sources are “ApplicationReview” and “OneOff” for scores submitted during application review or via ad hoc addition, respectively.

:::BlockQuote
SELECT&#x20;
&#x20;   ss.submitted\_by\_user\_id,
&#x20;   ss.submitted\_at,
&#x20;   ss.overall\_recommendation, -- the 1 through 4 score
&#x20;   ss.application\_id,&#x20;
&#x20;   ss.source,
&#x20;   ss.source\_id,
&#x20;   ire.\*, -- list the interviewer event details
&#x20;   ie.\*, -- list the interview event details
&#x20;   i.\* -- job, interview stage, title&#x20;
FROM&#x20;
&#x20;   scorecard\_submission AS ss&#x20;
LEFT JOIN&#x20;
&#x20;   interviewer\_event AS ire&#x20;
&#x20;   ON ss.source\_id = ire.interviewer\_event\_id
LEFT JOIN&#x20;
&#x20;   interview\_event AS ie
&#x20;   USING (interview\_event\_id) -- start time, end time
LEFT JOIN&#x20;
&#x20;   interview AS i&#x20;
&#x20;   USING (interview\_id)
WHERE&#x20;
&#x20;   ss.source = 'InterviewerEvent'
LIMIT 100;
:::

## Analyzing Application Stage History

:::hint{type="info"}
If you wanted to analyze Time to Hire, you’d look at the first application history row entry time stamp and the time stamp of entering the hired stage, which would give the total duration the application was in process from start to being hired.
:::

Applications progress through interview plans by way of stage transitions. All applications have a current stage, and when they move from one stage to the next they generate a row in the `APPLICATION_HISTORY` table, which tracks the timing along with “from stage” and “to stage” details. If a candidate’s application is transferred between jobs that will be noted and captured in this history table too. See the schema information for full details.

Note that you can join every transition to the `INTERVIEW_STAGE` table to get additional details about each stage, such as the stage type and name. This can be a rich resource for analyses related to applications moving into or out of application review, offer stages, or terminal stages (archived, hired).

## Analyzing Versioned Objects: Offers & Openings

:::hint{type="info"}
If you wanted to analyze compensation variation across an offer process, you’d use offer versions to find the first, and final offer version created and the delta in the compensation fields of interest. By a similar measure, you could also identify timing between offer iterations to evaluate your offer process across teams.
:::

Some objects in Ashby follow a versioning design where there is a root object and then related versions. A good example of this is offers, where the root offer will contain the associated application ID, status and other details, while the offer version records will contain updates and edits to any of the potential iterations of an offer created in the offer process (i.e. variations due to candidate negotiation). To analyze offers and their versions, you can join these tables on `OFFER.offer_id` and `OFFER_VERSION.offer_id`. This same pattern applies to openings and opening versions.

:::hint{type="info"}
To calculate Time to Fill you have two potential routes: you can analyze the open and close dates on the job records via the `JOB` table, or you can analyze the open and close dates on the opening record via the `OPENING` table. Given the opening model has more robust fields, such as target hire dates, this could permit more sophisticated analysis of close dates relative to targets. The opening record also has an opening history table, which permits more fine-tuned analysis of total time spent in the case of possibly closing and re-opening a role.
:::

### Example: Working with Opening Version custom fields with pre-defined selectableValues options

See the section below for more details on [Working with Custom Fields](docId\:pG1llokJQbRln5GoEhn2C).

:::BlockQuote
\-- CTE to flatten the "custom fields" on the Opening Version table
WITH opening\_version\_custom\_fields AS&#x20;
(
&#x20;   SELECT
&#x20;      opening\_version\_id,
&#x20;      f.key\::STRING as custom\_field\_id,
&#x20;      f.value\::STRING as custom\_field\_value
&#x20;   FROM&#x20;
&#x20;       opening\_version,&#x20;
&#x20;       LATERAL FLATTEN (input => custom\_fields) f
),

\-- CTE to flatten the "selectable values" for the Opening Version custom fields
opening\_version\_custom\_field\_values AS
(
&#x20;   SELECT&#x20;
&#x20;       custom\_field\_id,&#x20;
&#x20;       v.value\:value\::STRING AS custom\_field\_value,
&#x20;       v.value\:label\::STRING AS custom\_field\_label
&#x20;   FROM&#x20;
&#x20;       custom\_field,
&#x20;       LATERAL FLATTEN (input => configuration\:selectableValues) v
&#x20;   WHERE&#x20;
&#x20;       object\_type = 'opening\_version'
)

SELECT
&#x20;   ovf.opening\_version\_id,
&#x20;   cf.custom\_field\_title,
&#x20;   \-- Custom field value, which can on its own be an id
&#x20;   ovf.custom\_field\_value,
&#x20;   \-- The title for the selected custom field, if the value above is an id
&#x20;   ovfv.custom\_field\_label,
&#x20;   \-- Coalescing the two values above
&#x20;   COALESCE(custom\_field\_label, custom\_field\_value) AS final\_custom\_field\_value
FROM&#x20;
&#x20;   opening\_version\_custom\_fields AS ovf
LEFT JOIN&#x20;
&#x20;   custom\_field cf
&#x20;   USING (custom\_field\_id)
LEFT JOIN
&#x20;   opening\_version\_custom\_field\_values AS ovfv
&#x20;   USING (custom\_field\_id, custom\_field\_value);
:::

## Analyzing Hiring Team Configuration

Hiring team members can be assigned at both the Job and Job Consideration. When configuring a Job, you may want to assign a known Hiring Manager, Recruiter, Recruiting Coordinator and Sourcer, and these roles will apply to the downstream candidates as Job Considerations are created. Similarly, you may want to customize or edit the hiring team membership for a specific Job Consideration. To manage this Ashby has three main tables to work with:

- `PROCESS_ROLE_TYPE`: this holds the unique role ID and role title (e.g. "Hiring Manager" or "Recruiter")
- `JOB_USER_ROLES`: this holds the hiring team roles per individual Job. This table references the job via the `job_id` while the `app_user_id` refers to the Ashby user, i.e. coworker at your organization, assigned to the role.
- `PROCESS_USER_ROLES`: this holds the hiring team roles per individual Job Consideration. The "process" here is the candidate's Job Consideration, so the underlying `process_id` references the Job Consideration table's `application_id`. The `app_user_id` refers to the Ashby user, i.e. coworker at your organization, assigned to the role.

The example queries below shows how to join human-readable hiring team role titles as well as the Ashby application user information to the hiring team roles associated with a Job or Job Consideration.

### Example: getting a Job’s hiring team member information

:::BlockQuote
\-- CTE to select the hiring team role IDs and titles
WITH process\_role\_types AS (
&#x9;SELECT&#x20;
&#x9;	process\_role\_type\_id
&#x9;	, process\_role\_type\_title -- e.g. "Recruiter" or "Hiring Manager"
&#x9;FROM PROCESS\_ROLE\_TYPE
)

SELECT
&#x9;jur.job\_id
&#x9;, jur.app\_user\_id as job\_user\_id
&#x9;, prt.process\_role\_type\_title as job\_role\_title
&#x9;, au.first\_name ||' '|| au.last\_name as job\_hiring\_team\_user\_name
&#x9;, au.email job\_hiring\_team\_user\_email
FROM JOB\_USER\_ROLES jur
INNER JOIN process\_role\_types prt
&#x20; ON jur.process\_role\_type\_id = prt.process\_role\_type\_id
LEFT JOIN APP\_USER au
&#x20; ON jur.app\_user\_id = au.app\_user\_id
\--WHERE jur.job\_id = '\<job\_id\_of\_interest>'
:::

### Example: getting a Job Consideration’s hiring team member information

:::BlockQuote
\-- CTE to select the hiring team role IDs and titles
WITH process\_role\_types AS (
&#x9;SELECT&#x20;
&#x9;	process\_role\_type\_id
&#x9;	, process\_role\_type\_title -- e.g. "Recruiter" or "Hiring Manager"
&#x9;FROM PROCESS\_ROLE\_TYPE
)

SELECT
&#x20; pur.process\_id as application\_id
&#x20; , pur.app\_user\_id
&#x20; , prt.process\_role\_type\_title as app\_role\_title
&#x20; , au.first\_name ||' '|| au.last\_name as job\_hiring\_team\_user\_name
FROM PROCESS\_USER\_ROLES pur
LEFT JOIN process\_role\_types prt
&#x20; ON pur.process\_role\_type\_id = prt.process\_role\_type\_id
LEFT JOIN APP\_USER au
&#x20; ON pur.app\_user\_id = au.app\_user\_id
\-- WHERE application\_id = '\<application\_id>'
\-- NOTE: the application\_id would come from the APPLICATION table
:::

### Working with Custom Fields

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are using the Snowflake data share while implementing a migration to Ashby from another ATS, please note that Workday-based custom field ingestion may impact pre-existing custom field names (i.e. fields from the former ATS) upon activation of the integration.
:::

All custom fields are stored in the `CUSTOM_FIELD` table and follow the format of having a unique ID, an object type, field type, and field title. The object type can be any Ashby object that supports custom fields (e.g. Offers, Jobs, Candidates, etc). The field type gives the type of data to expect (e.g. boolean, number, string, etc) and the title is the human-readable field name you will find in your Ashby UI.

When it comes to the object tables that have custom fields, e.g. `OFFER_VERSION`, there will always be a `custom_fields` column that stores a json blob of key\:value pairs where the key is the custom field ID and the value is the custom field value. To work directly with custom fields for an object you must first unpack the json join to the primary `CUSTOM_FIELD` table to pull in the custom field title. An example of this pattern is given below.

### Example: working with Offer Version custom fields

:::BlockQuote
WITH base AS (
&#x9;\-- CTE to flatten the offer version custom field data&#x20;
&#x9;SELECT
&#x9;    \*
&#x9;    , f.key\::text as custom\_field\_id
&#x9;    , f.value\::text as custom\_field\_value
&#x9;FROM offer\_version, lateral flatten(input=>custom\_fields) f
)
, joined AS (
&#x9;\-- CTE to incorporate custom field title and description
&#x9;SELECT
&#x9;    base.\*
&#x9;    , cf.custom\_field\_title
&#x9;    , cf.custom\_field\_description
&#x9;FROM base
&#x9;LEFT JOIN custom\_field cf
&#x9;    ON base.custom\_field\_id = cf.custom\_field\_id
)
SELECT
&#x9;\-- custom query against offer version custom fields
FROM joined
GROUP BY ALL
ORDER BY count\_offer\_versions DESC
:::

# Reference Information: Available Data Tables & ERD

Below you can find a list of core tables, providing a name and brief description of currently shared content.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
All shared tables and fields can be found in [this spreadsheet](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1JTezzsoSDJag9RvXdvvUMlrIUSjeOllO4bwwE3-ffhI/edit?gid=1316200980#gid=1316200980) for reference.
:::

| **Table Name**                     | **Description**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| APPLICATION                        | A candidate's Job Consideration in Ashby is stored in this table. One row represents one candidate's application for a specific job.                                                                                                                                   |
| APPLICATION\_HISTORY               | Every time a candidate's Job Consideration changes a stage in Ashby, a row is logged in this table. One row represents a stage transition with the relevant metadata on from which stage, to which stage, and whether the transition corresponds to a job transfer.    |
| APP\_USER                          | Each row in this table represents an Ashby user. This can include bots, but is representative of what you would see in your Admin > Employees section of Ashby.                                                                                                        |
| ARCHIVE\_REASON                    | Each row in this table represents one of the configured archive reasons. An application will reference these items when archived.                                                                                                                                      |
| CANDIDATE\_DATA                    | Each row in this table represents a candidate’s set of stored information, such as name, email, and other details.                                                                                                                                                     |
| CANDIDATE\_LOCATION                | Each row in this table represents candidate location information, including whether it was extracted from a resume or provided on an application form.                                                                                                                 |
| CUSTOM\_FIELD                      | Each row in this table represents a custom field created in Ashby on any of the objects that support custom fields (e.g. Offers or Openings)                                                                                                                           |
| GEO\_LOCATION                      | Each row in this table represents a hierarchically stored geo location, such as a city, state, or country, along with other geo metadata.                                                                                                                              |
| INTERVIEW\_STAGE                   | Each row in this table represents a stage within an interview plan. All stages are tied to an interview plan and have an order in that interview plan, representing the sequence of steps an application will move through for a given job.                            |
| INTERVIEW\_STAGE\_GROUP\_TYPE      | When stage grouping is enabled in your Ashby instance, every interview stage is mapped to a stage group. Stage groups have a type and order and are useful for aggregate analysis across many distinct interview plans.                                                |
| JOB                                | Each row in this table represents a stored Job record in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| JOB\_POSTING                       | Each row in this table represents a Job Posting. Every Job Posting is associated with a Job in Ashby, but Jobs can have multiple Job Postings.                                                                                                                         |
| JOB\_POSTING\_SECONDARY\_LOCATIONS | For Job Postings that have secondary locations, the reference to the location geo data record is stored in this table.                                                                                                                                                 |
| OFFER                              | Each row in this table represents the root object of an offer. Additional offer details are stored in versions of offers created.                                                                                                                                      |
| OFFER\_VERSION                     | Each row in this table represents a version of an offer created and decided upon by the candidate. An Offer can have multiple versions, depending on the number of edits or negotiations required for any given candidate's case.                                      |
| OPENING                            | Each row in this table represents the root object of an Opening. Additional opening details are stored as opening versions.                                                                                                                                            |
| OPENING\_APPLICATIONS              | When an application is at offer stage or hired, the association to a specific Opening is made. This is a join table that store specific openings to applications.                                                                                                      |
| OPENING\_HISTORY                   | Each row in this table represents a state change of an opening (e.g. from Open to Closed).                                                                                                                                                                             |
| OPENING\_VERSION                   | Each row in this table represents a version of an opening created and contains additional details about the opening (such as target hire dates, custom fields, etc).                                                                                                   |
| ORG\_LOCATION                      | A table with a single row containing the geo location information about your organization.                                                                                                                                                                             |
| REFERRAL                           | Each row in this table represents a referral made, including details such as the referrer, the referred application created, and any referral form details captured.                                                                                                   |
| REFERRAL\_FORM\_DEFINITION         | Each row in this table represents the structure of your referral form definition.                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| SCORECARD\_FORM\_DEFINITION        | Each row in this table represents the structure of your scorecard form definition.                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| SCORECARD\_SUBMISSION              | Each row in this table represents a scorecard submission, with fields and values as derived from the scorecard form used.                                                                                                                                              |
| SOURCE                             | Each row in this table represents a candidate or application source (e.g. "LinkedIn"). Sources are further grouped into source types for broader categorization.                                                                                                       |
| SOURCE\_TYPE                       | Each row in this table represents a source type as configured in your Ashby instance.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| TEAM                               | Each row in this table represents a team. Teams are hierarchical, and as a root node they are referred to as "Department", and as sub-nodes they are called "Teams". For example, teams appear on Jobs and Openings (e.g. the "Engineering" department or "Engineering |

:::hint{type="info"}
You can find an ERD for the current set of shared tables in the [Ashby Data Share documentation](https://dbdocs.io/data-share/Ashby-Data-Share?view=relationships).
:::

## How Often Does the Data Refresh?

The synced data refreshes once every 6 hours. The data sync from our production databases to Snowflake is variable and takes between 1-2 hours, after which dynamic tables are generated and Customer-specific shares are updated. The sync schedule start times are given below, but in reality the updated data will manifest itself in your share \~2 hours from the listed start times.

- Production Databases to Snowflake Sync:&#x20;
  - **Syncing the Updates**: scheduled to run 4 times a day at 3AM, 9AM, 3PM and 9PM PST (every 6 hrs)
- **Snowflake Shared Views**: dynamic tables based on the synced data run after production database sync completion.

On each shared view, you will find a column named `___extracted_at`. This field represents when the given row in that table was last pulled from the production database (for large tables, pulling all new or updated rows from the database may take minutes or in some cases hours, so you may expect to see different timestamps on different rows of each table). In order to get a sense of last sync time for each table, you can run a query similar to the following for the `application` table:

:::BlockQuote
SELECT MAX(\_\_\_extracted\_at) AS last\_synced\_at
FROM application
:::

# FAQ

### How often does the data refresh?

Our current data share mechanism aims to refresh data approximately every 6 hours.

### Do you support data sharing to warehouses or destinations other than Snowflake?

Not at present, but we plan to do so in the future.&#x20;

### Is this different than the Ashby API?

Yes, the Ashby developer API is intended for application and integration development and is entirely distinct from the Snowflake data share mechanism described here.

### I don’t see the data I need or expect, what do I do?

If this is an urgent matter, please reach out to support\@ashbyhq.com for escalation.&#x20;

### Is there an ERD available?

Yes, the ERD can be found in our [Data Share documentation](https://dbdocs.io/data-share/Ashby-Data-Share?view=relationships).


[title] Field Comparison Filters
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

# Introduction

The traditional filter interaction follows a paradigm of letting you pick a field or property and then specifying a property value to pull results for.

For example, filtering for `Interview Stage = Onsite` would be specifying the **value** `Onsite` for the **field** `Interview Stage` to match results accordingly.&#x20;

This is the way Ashby works today, with the additional layer of permitting logical combinations to achieve field comparison filter capabilities. This paradigm is defined by selecting one field and specifying one or more values.

However, there are use cases where what you will not want to evaluate the value of a single field, but whether a field is related to a different field. This represents a comparison of two fields, where a value is implicitly specified.

Field comparison filters are available on the Plus and Enterprise plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ✅    | ✅          |

## A Use Case Example

For example, if you wanted to answer the question: Is the Offer’s base salary within the Opening’s approved compensation range?

In the traditional paradigm of filtering, you select the `Offer’s Base Salary` field and specific a filter value, say $90k-$110k. That works, but it does not scale. If you have 40 offers in process, connected to 40 distinct Openings with varying compensation ranges, you’d have to do a lot of reporting to check these conditions.

The way this works with field comparison filters is to directly compare the `Base Salary` field to the `Compensation Range` field and get a logical response: `Yes or No`.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/adznVksBaTcsGcMTPpJkY_advanced-filter-fields-archbee-document-2026-02-12-at-111640-am.jpg)

This filter compares a Salary field directly against a Compensation Range without having to specify the exact values. The `is between` operator compares the field’s values under the hood and returns only those that match.

With that, you can make one filter to compare all records without having to specify the explicit values to compare.&#x20;

# Using Field Comparison Filters

To access field comparison filters look for the field selector icon next to the filter value specification:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kGNdQm3PWKMd8LNHGnVuL-20260212-115230.png" size="76" width="417" height="185" position="center" showCaption="false"}

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/32v5fnk5O3cCkykbHmTjd-20260212-115259.png" size="76" width="418" height="187" position="center" showCaption="false"}

When clicking the field selector option you will be able to select a field for comparison. In the above example, you may desire reviewing whether the hiring manager is the same as the recruiter, so you could compare them accordingly:

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nkQvnAHWU7ltcDUHaNPQ3_image.png" size="76" width="405" height="94" position="center" showCaption="false"}

# Example Use Cases

A few additional use cases are provided below to motivate your own creative applications. You can review the video walkthrough that covers a few of the examples noted below for a quick overview.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/25dc530e0e3742048086a66d72b142a0"}

### Offer and Compensation Comparisons

A popular use case for this functionality is to review ensuring offer details match compensation ranges. With this field comparison filter functionality, you can select for in-band or out-of-band offers with ease, without having to specify individual compensation ranges.

:::hint{type="info"}
**Applying a NOT operation**
The examples here are mostly shown by way of comparing “field1 = field2”, but many cases benefit from identifying discrepancies, in which case it’s most beneficial to apply a NOT operator. This pattern is possible for all examples shown here, such as “Show me records where field1 is NOT equal to field2”.
:::

### User Comparisons

Generally, hiring team member or general user role comparisons can be of use. These comparisons may look like:

- **Check if HM’s are acting as recruiters:** Recruiter = Hiring Manager
- **Check if an interviewer was also the referrer:** Interviewer = Referrer
- **Isolate feedback from HMs:** Feedback Submitted By = Hiring Manager on Job
- **See if credit is due to hiring team member roles:** Credited To = (JC’s hiring team role)

### Data Quality Comparisons

The user role comparison unlock various use cases, one such category being compliance and data quality across different object types.

- **Ensuring Jobs and Openings have consistent records:** Hiring Manager on the Job = Hiring Manager on the Opening
- **Ensure Offer level matches the Job level:** Offer’s Job Level = Job’s Level

[title] Best Practices: Maintaining Data Quality
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics: Best Practices/

This document reviews how to maintain a high level of data quality in your ATS by utilizing Ashby reports, dashboards and alerts. The options for long term data quality are presented, along with a summary of the most common challenges and a data quality checklist.

## Introduction

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby has a standard *Data Quality* example dashboard to help get you started. If you’d like to see what this looks like, reach out to your dedicated Success Manager or Ashby Support.
:::

Historically, maintaining data quality within your ATS has been a major challenge due to the lack of visibility into the underlying data. Ashby’s native reporting capabilities make insight into the quality of your ATS data readily available. The goal of this article is to first review some of the most common challenges in ATS data and present the recommended reporting solutions.

## Long term data quality solutions

Long term health and data quality is fundamentally about data visibility. Easy review of your data allows you to know *when* and *what* data issues are at hand. This, in turn, permits designing easy resolution steps and alerts.

In the absence of data visibility, quality issues are subject to one-off discoveries at the time of trying to run a report, with the outcome being a slow accumulation of ever more issues that are hard to identify and resolve, followed by a decrease in trust in the data overall. This eventually  results in a data-less culture, subject to a “garbage in, garbage out” sentiment.

With Ashby you have the following tools to maintain data quality:

- **Customized reports:** you can build reports that look for specific compliance or SLA violations to surface problematic records immediately.
- **Scheduled Alerts:** in addition to reviewing reports you can configure automated scheduled alerts that notify responsible individuals immediately or at a set cadence to help raise awareness and maintain quality before any issues grow out of hand.
- **Dashboards:** custom reports can be combined into a central data quality dashboard, combining the highest priority items to review.
- **Home page configuration:** each user’s home page can be configured with pinned content, adding critical data quality reports and dashboards to their space for easy access and review.

The above options can be used individually or in combination, depending on the scope of your needs and size of your team.

:::hint{type="info"}
In the case of managing a large team, assignment to individual owners can be incorporated to almost all reports and dashboards, permitting a distribution of responsibility. This is one way Ashby can facilitate creating an ownership culture of data quality.
:::

# Common Types of Data Quality Issues

Below is a summary review of the most common data quality challenges we’ve seen.

## Stale candidates

You can define stale candidates according to your team’s process, but a general example would be categorizing any candidate that has been in process but has not had an activity for 30+ days as stale. The easiest way to select for this is by using *NOT* logic applied to any activity-related field, like so:

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vCzjmfyIVczWhuJmWUReQ_screenshot2022-09-09at111134am.png" size="48" width="297" height="128" darkWidth="297" darkHeight="128" position="center" alt="A basic selection for any application NOT active in the last 30 days." showCaption="false"}

Your particular selection may vary, or use other fields of interest or even filter down to specific stages or jobs. The key breakthrough is beginning to get an easy selection non-compliant records, after which you can begin grouping or refining the results to be more actionable or reveal insights about your process.

Below are some examples of how to further refine your stale candidates to gain insight into what may be happening.

**Stale candidates by stage group**

Here you can see stale candidates by their application’s current stage group. This reveals that the application review process is a significant contributor, but that there are candidates that have been inactive 30+ days all the way down to the final rounds!

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.16.01 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/juwhRYgb2Q6ipUqTJlijS_screenshot2022-09-09at111601am.png)

**Stale candidates on open jobs**

When grouping by open jobs you may find that there are a small subset of jobs that have a disproportionate number of stale candidates. One response here would be to review the hiring team or review capacity and load balancing.

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.18.48 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FKkJt4KLQwOZKVbDMW7Wj_screenshot2022-09-09at111848am.png)

**Stale candidates by source type**

You can easily review the stale candidate selection by source type too. The plan of action may vary here, but seeing that many candidates are stale from direct inbound application may suggest review process adjustments, while noting that 50+ referrals are stale may inform a higher urgency SLA process for referrals.

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.20.20 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pW_loscU9AjaGmMFs7Mbk_screenshot2022-09-09at112020am.png)

**Stale candidates by recruiter**

For load balancing and team management, you can review stale candidates by their assigned recruiter. This could be filtered down by stage group, to identify in-process candidates, or used to identify that most stale candidates have no recruiter assigned at all. More on this latter point below.

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.22.20 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wmQ3nWiVuWWndbkfgGddX_screenshot2022-09-09at112220am.png)

**More advanced reporting on stale candidates**

The above examples are single slices of data, but Ashby does permit multiple groupings to give more insight. In this example you can see stale candidates by their department and stage group, revealing which departments have the greatest volume but also how far in process the stale candidates are.

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.26.03 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/277AZnhVY65ufSKcFDWd6_screenshot2022-09-09at112603am.png)

## Active candidates on closed jobs

Another common data quality challenge is finding active candidates on jobs that have been closed. These candidates should be dispositioned, but the real goal is to understand why and when this happens. This basic filter selection will identify all active applications on closed jobs:

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bD4-awf-0vngUXm8x5-qE_screenshot2022-09-09at112825am.png" size="44" width="307" height="219" darkWidth="307" darkHeight="219" position="center" alt="Example filter conditions to find active applications on closed jobs, a common data quality issue." showCaption="false"}

With this selection in place, similar to the many variations on stale candidate review you can create reports that identify sources, owners or patterns in this case. This example report identifies which closed jobs have the most active applications:

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.27.45 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/h2vrryVlYENzz3FQkHim3_screenshot2022-09-09at112745am.png)

## Not scheduling interviews in your ATS

Some teams opt to schedule candidate interviews outside of their ATS. This is most common at the top of funnel (initial calls, initial screens), but can be a critical set of data to track to see if upstream activity is feeding into downstream results.

How to assess this will depend on your teams expectations, but the simplest way to get a top-level summary is to create a count over time by week of scheduled interviews per stage group. This way if you see numbers that are definitively too low you can investigate further.

![Screen Shot 2022-09-14 at 5.20.56 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xLHVT5x6lYmo3282s_TP8_screenshot2022-09-14at52056pm.png)

Additionally, you could use the Interview Load template report, or segmentation reports to look at interview records in more detail. See these examples in our report catalogues: [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi), [Report Catalog - Essentials](docId\:VOWdo_JJgdtwBzC4LIRMc) and [Report Catalog - Advanced](docId:24rONsZ2Xx5ToZdSakIq9).

## Missing Fields

Across candidate, jobs, applications and all the other ATS-based records, there is a ton of information to manage. It’s not uncommon to see candidates with no recruiter assigned, or missing custom field values. Ashby can facilitate managing this by identifying non-compliant records easily via filters.

The general recommendation here is to use filter selections for “is empty/unassigned” to identify records with no value.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kv-5ZGrCPOjJ-bnfzIxAy_screenshot2022-09-09at113514am.png" size="48" width="304" height="217" darkWidth="304" darkHeight="217" position="center" alt="Example of selecting for active applications that have no source." showCaption="false"}

In this example we can select for all applications that have no source and group by the responsible recruiter to distribute responsibility for updating the application records.

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.35.52 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/M8fXLdIzlb4G1oR3kVTM3_screenshot2022-09-09at113552am.png)

**Common missing fields to review**

The most common fields your team may want to establish data quality reporting for are the following:

- Source
- Credited To
- Recruiter (on the Job and on the Candidate)
- Hiring Manager
- Department / Team

Your team’s process may vary on some of these fields being present, so it may make sense to add an additional filter. For example, you may want to review data quality specifically for *hired* candidates more carefully. This would involve checking offer letter details, hiring team information and so on. Here we see a list of hires with no hiring manager on record, by department:

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 11.44.01 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/szevKmtz0ePOWy2qdgP06_screenshot2022-09-09at114401am.png)

## Ownership on related records

Your ATS may permit assigning an owner to related records, such as a Job’s recruiter or a Candidate’s recruiter. This ownership can often diverge, creating uncertainty.

### Job’s Recruiter & Candidate’s Recruiter

Ashby permits easily reporting on the fields and ownership associated with either the job or a candidate’s application. At the bare minimum, your team may want to maintain awareness by reporting on both, but a diagnostic report can be made that groups all application’s by their job’s owner first with a second grouping on the application’s owner:

![Grouping by the Job’s recruiter and the Application’s recruiter allows you to see the mix of ownership](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yMx7XewA_uLL287zaIw9q_screenshot2022-09-09at120226pm.png)

The results, after some additional filter options are added per your need, may look like this:

![Screen Shot 2022-09-09 at 12.04.18 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BGXQXCsW-dYFKQ_VAW5N0_screenshot2022-09-09at120418pm.png)

In this view, we see Chastity Okuneva (bright pink) has ownership over almost all applications on Job’s owned by other recruiters. Conversely, Tevin (teal), is the owner of 96% of their job’s applicants.

### Opening, Requisition and Job metadata

Your ATS may have a complex data model that permits setting fields such as departments or hiring managers on multiple distinct objects, e.g. the Job Posting may have a department while the associated Requisition may have a *different* department. Similar to the above example with recruiter ownership on Jobs and Applications, you should consider this across other objects where it may apply.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you’re a Lever-based customer, see our writeup on [The Lever Data Model](docId\:n9ItXsE3MUD6j4KPG1ext)  for a detailed summary of how fields can differ across Lever objects.
:::



# Putting it all together: dashboards, alerts, and home page configuration

Once you’ve identified the critical reports of interest to your team, the recommendation is to compose your reports into respective dashboards. Some data quality issues are best dealt with immediately or at a weekly review, which is a perfect fit for Ashby’s Alerts. In addition, once you’ve setup your reports and dashboards, you’ll want to ensure they are pinned to your team’s home page for easy access. The below references cover all of these topics in greater detail:

- [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)
- [Building Your First Dashboard](docId\:Q7A7CpFpyulmT6bd1qVYm)&#x20;
- [Pin Reports to User Home Pages](docId\:fr6mWIETf_Wlzag-Sl8xR)

# The data quality checklist

At a high level the above examples can be summarized in a check list you may want to review with your team. Based on your priorities you may not want to address all of these at once.

- [ ] &#x20;Define a general “stale candidate” condition
- [ ] &#x20;Report on stale candidates by:
- [ ] &#x20;Report on active candidates on closed jobs
- [ ] &#x20;Define mandatory fields for all applications (recruiter, source, HM, etc)
- [ ] &#x20;Are there stage-specific SLA’s for time in process?
- [ ] &#x20;Review your object ownership fields
- [ ] &#x20;Create an overall data quality dashboard(s) with the above reports
- [ ] &#x20;Pin the dashboard or individual reports to appropriate user home pages
- [ ] &#x20;Celebrate and rest well knowing data quality is under control with a stable process 🥳


[title] Reporting Errors & Resolutions
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This document reviews different types of errors you may encounter when using Ashby, what they mean, and how to resolve them.

## General help and support

If you ever encounter an error screen of any type, you are welcome and encouraged to reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) or your dedicated Ashby team. The below information is an additional aid to resolving any errors on your own should you encounter them.

## Ashby error types

When an issue occurs and the underlying reason is identified we will prompt you with the a notification regarding the cause and a link to the resolution documentation here. If no cause is determined a general error will be presented with a prompt to reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

## General error

![Screen Shot 2022-06-02 at 11.16.59 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KkHs-6U8uSVrMKDNkijmM_screenshot2022-06-02at111659am.png)

A general error is any error not attributed to an identifiable standard error type. In this case the error may be due to any number of reasons and it is best treated as a case to investigate closely.

**Reason:** not determined, can occur for reporting or other parts of the application.

**Resolution:** reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) at your soonest convenience.

## Privacy restriction

![error-privacyrestriction-cropped.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gJ1wZ7uYCTW5G4fozBTEp_error-privacyrestriction-cropped.png)

When creating reports that reference diversity or EEOC survey information, it is not permitted to include personally identifiable information (PII) in the same report (e.g. you cannot report on candidate name and their EEOC response, but only EEOC responses in aggregate).

**Reason:** sensitive PII cannot be used in combination with sensitive survey responses.

**Resolution:** remove either PII fields or sensitive survey response fields.

## Missing field

![error-missingfield-cropped.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Eyum2j_R_E44AiKd5MeLs_error-missingfield-cropped.png)

When reports reference custom fields it’s possible those fields get deleted within the ATS, leaving a reference to a field which no longer exists.

**Reason:** a report references a field in filtering or grouping which no longer exists.

**Resolution:** remove the field(s) which no longer exist (usually deleted custom fields), or reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) for assistance.

## Report too large

![error-reporttoolarge-cropped.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yV3ZQsWxb1A-LwcrivFQl_error-reporttoolarge-cropped.png)

Custom list reports can be created with little or no filters, sometimes resulting in extremely large result sets (e.g. tens of thousands of candidates). To prevent performance impact, we limit reports that exceed a result size threshold.

**Reason:** a report attempts to serve results that exceed a data size limit.

**Resolution:** adjust the report filters or group by’s to restrict the total data returned. Typically a more restrictive time filter (e.g. application start or last activity at) is sufficient.

## Report timeout

![error-timeout-cropped-wide.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lka-MYT1UJNb_fqsJFhZL_error-timeout-cropped-wide.png)

Some reports involve exceedingly complex filters, calculated fields, and groupings. In some cases the report’s underlying query may exceed the permissible query time and a timeout error will occur.

**Reason:** a complex report query exceeds a 90-second time.

**Resolution:** review your report filter conditions and consider either limiting the total data involved by way of filtering to a smaller timeframe, or reach out to Ashby for assistance from our reporting and analytics experts.

[title] Icon Glossary
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics Glossary/

Looking for a key covering the icons for specific field types in Ashby? Below you can find a full list with meanings and examples.

| ﻿Icon                                                                                                                                                                                 | Meaning                                                                                                                             | Example                                                                                            |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/38ab76405a93216d49ae1260511365b6.png" size="20" width="612" height="519" position="center" darkWidth="612" darkHeight="519" showCaption="false"} | Allows you to select multiple values from a finite set of selectable values                                                         | Current Interview Stage Group                                                                      |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/c898d660733b8f772f43ce6c02b6c370.png" size="20" width="576" height="554" position="center" darkWidth="576" darkHeight="554" showCaption="false"} | Binary selection field                                                                                                              | Extended Offer?                                                                                    |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/134073b0a6248f3dabbdc7c737e40233.png" size="20" width="602" height="568" position="center" darkWidth="602" darkHeight="568" showCaption="false"} | Field involves “select all/any that apply”                                                                                          | What departments or focus areas are you interested in?                                             |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6c7aa12b0667b0ede542108e53315dd3.png" size="20" width="635" height="601" position="center" darkWidth="635" darkHeight="601" showCaption="false"} | Allows you to select one value from a finite set of values                                                                          | Outcome                                                                                            |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/baa2b44619d38ca0c1219a2d7c56e571.png" size="20" width="587" height="535" position="center" darkWidth="587" darkHeight="535" showCaption="false"} | Multiple fields: Allows advanced filtering on related subjects, permitting multiple fields to be used in a single logical condition |                                                                                                    |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/6afbec523e6022a07fe4c32376cc3e3d.png" size="20" width="644" height="559" position="center" darkWidth="644" darkHeight="559" showCaption="false"} | Field contains an email address                                                                                                     | Email Address (Primary, Personal)                                                                  |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/cc1ee37e354dec18108c38fe37d74c97.png" size="20" width="623" height="566" position="center" darkWidth="623" darkHeight="566" showCaption="false"} | Distinct Subject or Related Subject with available fields                                                                           | Examples of related subjects at [Ashby Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)  |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/313e31580756f930b3e4643416f80bd4.png" size="20" width="633" height="622" position="center" darkWidth="633" darkHeight="622" showCaption="false"} | Field contains a URL                                                                                                                | LinkedIn Profile URL                                                                               |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/73ae0b31694513a0e1cf2be706590e35.png" size="20" width="545" height="507" position="center" darkWidth="545" darkHeight="507" showCaption="false"} | Field will display results as a number                                                                                              | Average Overall Recommendation                                                                     |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/864d9dd52dd319478a740f5492a8c2d7.png" size="20" width="631" height="582" position="center" darkWidth="631" darkHeight="582" showCaption="false"} | Field contains a phone number                                                                                                       | Phone Number (Primary, Personal)                                                                   |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/097f09a77f61ea33b06e8920595c1bc5.png" size="20" width="700" height="589" position="center" darkWidth="700" darkHeight="589" showCaption="false"} | Field contains free text                                                                                                            | Name                                                                                               |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/13ac5cbd734eb35a390b26362013798e.png" size="20" width="564" height="557" position="center" darkWidth="564" darkHeight="557" showCaption="false"} | Field has a date range                                                                                                              | Started At                                                                                         |
| ::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3a3a76959cf229af5823b854393616a7.png" size="20" width="583" height="522" position="center" darkWidth="583" darkHeight="522" showCaption="false"} | Field has currency involved                                                                                                         | Commission Amount                                                                                  |


[title] BarRaiser
[path] Integrations/Video Interviewing/

BarRaiser is an AI-powered interview intelligence platform that helps structure interviews, makes feedback filling efficient, trains interviewers, and aids in confident hiring decisions.

# Integration Description

The integration between Ashby and BarRaiser’s AI-powered interview intelligence enables seamless, data-driven interviews. It automatically syncs interview schedules, notes, and feedback between platforms, providing real-time assistance and generating automated post-interview notes for streamlined feedback. This integration centralizes interview data, enhancing access and facilitating better team collaboration.

# Prerequisites

You can only integrate Ashby with BarRaiser through an account with ‘Admin’ access on Ashby.

# Connect BarRaiser and Ashby

Integrating Ashby with the BarRaiser platform enhances your recruitment workflow by enabling seamless synchronisation of data and leveraging AI-powered interview intelligence. This user guide provides a step-by-step process to help users efficiently set up the integration, ensuring a streamlined and effective interview process.

Follow the instructions below to connect your Ashby account with BarRaiser and unlock advanced interview management capabilities.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. Log in to BarRaiser and select the Integrations tab from the left sidebar. Click `Integrate` to begin the integration process with Ashby.
2. Verify that you are connecting BarRaiser and Ashby using an administrator account. Once confirmed, click `I am an admin`.
3. Review the brief overview of the data BarRaiser collects and click `Next` to proceed.
4. Generate a new API key on Ashby, paste it into the BarRaiser platform, and click `Next`.
5. To create a new API key on Ashby:
   1. On the Ashby platform, navigate to Admin and select `API key` under Integrations on the left.
   2. Create a new API key, ensuring the necessary permissions are enabled (check the screenshot). BarRaiser collects only essential data to streamline your interview process. API Keys (Read and Write)
      - Jobs (Read and Write)
      - Candidates (Read and Write)
      - Interviews (Read and Write)
      - Hiring Process Metadata (Read and Write)
      - Organization (Read and Write)
6. BarRaiser will configure your account for use with Ashby. Click ‘Next’ and, after verifying that your account is synchronized, click ‘Next’ again.
7. Click `Finish`. Your BarRaiser account is now successfully integrated with Ashby.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfkN5ccORJBa-CVdJBXFhM8CCUooYrRq_kqcQTPq3L7sH1XZfqnG4mSaianBhCXnO3nZIKowu3G5m-LNv9BGiDHGrjkX3ZEYgAkeixN_l9TVvNWKJjPB_moW-2RaGk4M5-ASzy0?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXcVAWKs-EBeDyR0XIUdAmjvPwiDZ9dJeMAhB4VXBkW7d_50GsacDk_jDAWypB6XCjJ2C4o0ELnKN74FXTn3HdyyeoJ0-kSu5Oo2QJGBtk2Ms9R_KklSFgzuyTdi1nQUDTqSwcbFXw?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdbeEOmJPmwVKg3Zy_ThNL6M59tEiriAJ5n3pF4cq97sVZGdSAKpIyT_BR0etRad5TBHJ5uveAIhY44x_dNemDwq-M7FEVNjEK9JuPKP-363Mkm8vsHXEDk2Ii_K4uWFYR_JhATQg?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXdWrHBnzVGxPBRHL3TrTOUyRIooLGtDqH754DEARgKlkOcXxEkP01aiGxgKadlDdVOt32Q_DzkG-jmk1D0UQ7dCR-Xqy07GhM596IAZTMDj7a6kUawForZiEThCkXTnHZiyM-9Cjg?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXcEkC6fK98bj8sIfmoseIQWKsPfJCImGPNRFifJ-GlumQmGF2RUVlIq3CtU7-QMmEqN8FGJtq3pYnXGVL8z29g_ZWaJBMsa2u5hyWiXTq58yDKq7dINNTf55uIQh6CV1q4btI84pg?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXcSw-pcFat3w2lejkWvn8eV7Dq7YXj941Thd2cWJ5Q17Kifzak4a7MgQPx-d00E0K9zvYRjkh9ymh_vAmkKcmESBZQwLZtfQv2ECF1oSvJpUHD9Jd952Py9uiMB89nLfnWazV1n1w?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfADAmvEJF1Wl-OuijNSdLxs6otqdfwmi3_ZwGKynXn-hgXMHs97pG8jku5MZ0bC5iQmlnT_bizG8kl11mtrn7aCCNnj6pjbvFf1SZMc2yf615MlHXiA3qZAELwFqHhvuMKupnt?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)
:::
::::



# Using the integration

The integration between Ashby and BarRaiser:

- Provides a unified platform combining Ashby’s applicant tracking capabilities with BarRaiser’s AI-powered interview intelligence.
- Facilitates seamless interview scheduling and structured evaluation management.
- Automates real-time feedback collection and synchronization for improved hiring efficiency.
- Enhances the recruitment workflow with data-driven insights for informed decision-making.
- Streamlines the candidate experience, contributing to a more organized and efficient hiring process.

# Integration Connection Instructions

Once data is synced, the BarRaiser team will inform you about the success of integration. Please follow below steps to start using BarRaiser for your interviews.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
1. On the Integration page in BarRaiser, click `Configure User Role Mapping` and select the appropriate BarRaiser access level corresponding to your Ashby account permissions.
2. Go to the Jobs tab and `Enable intelligence` for the specific jobs where you wish to incorporate BarRaiser. There is an option to enable intelligence for all the jobs as well.
3. Navigate to the Settings tab and select `Calendar Connect`. Please ensure the calendar is connected for all the users who are scheduling interviews.
4. BarRaiser will be added to all the interviews automatically and you can now begin utilizing BarRaiser’s integrated features to enhance your recruitment process.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXe-_uEHOdbO5AAt6xnx6ltxSm1KBao52hhcDlePFElptJ4VoNhHhw2iWLMj8IPawB9KEIEbjkwrjy2TRIGDXy5aO8qtL58Zwk40zfZho5T0cSqDLy3nafCMB86EgCOLhrMqV7lgIw?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXeXX__jKFmTBTlfunUQKMxVZs6PH52axfxgATPiM7HYVeaagzAW6Lp7jVxV1QgRlR9OQqJWqY14ANk4aWG3U5K89ysBdoJy58lJ24Ap3KDRs73Th5kcq1FnK1Wv82Ji6IJD7024eg?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)

![](https://lh7-rt.googleusercontent.com/docsz/AD_4nXfWYU6Pli1aqcRqVCzREUeW-Mq9zkiig2iudS-BI_MBhQcwgrapuNi6k7BDj7NkxOka7Bj4PYgiUrJ5khWRr-oZ40y-z1zo8O2CqA3FW8kk50LPSfGLQ5uspgb2RJLGtyBu1IW0Bg?key=3s5yUyiHXmcsFoi1ZFdYncIM)
:::
::::

# Video Walkthrough

Integration Demo Video:

::embed[[Setup and instructions](https://youtu.be/IOOh9bHM2rI)]{url="https://youtu.be/IOOh9bHM2rI"}


[title] Job Dashboard
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

This document provides an overview of the Job Dashboard you can find in each Job’s Activity section. This dashboard provides data on a specific role. For key metrics across all jobs, check out the job dashboard within [Core Dashboards](docId\:nhvbeIsfV8wiqLWeEmF2t)&#x20;

## Introduction

Ashby comes with powerful reporting functionality and pre-built templates, but we aim to decrease the time to value for bringing immediate insights to the most common reporting needs per job. The Job Dashboard offers a great starting point, and custom reports, templates, and dashboard building are available if more refinement is required.

## Overview

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/0795340e715e487aa07011f97ff94e15"}

- The Job Dashboard can be found on each Job’s page under the Activity section. The video below explains how to navigate to a Job Dashboard and provides an overview of its sections.
- The Dashboard contains three sections: [Summary](docId:0QSDvWTdGrs9QVXNo3qrq), [Interviews & Feedback](docId:0QSDvWTdGrs9QVXNo3qrq), and [Source Details](docId:0QSDvWTdGrs9QVXNo3qrq), and detailed information about the reports in each section can be found below.
- You can find more information about a report by clicking on the “i” icon next to each report title.
- The reports on the Job Dashboard are examples to help guide your organization’s reporting and are designed with further customization in mind.
  - By clicking `Go to Report`, you can see the underlying report and its Subjects, Filters, and Group By selections.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/rR8wzkhspfTgKdUal5u9d_screencast2023-03-22at91430am.gif" size="100" alt="Screen Cast 2023-03-22 at 9.14.30 AM.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Job%20Dashboard%20e827a6884aa5458db2600faf0489484e/Screen_Cast_2023-03-22_at_9.14.30_AM.gif" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 2/Job Dashboard e827a6884aa5458db2600faf0489484e/Screen_Cast_2023-03-22_at_9.14.30_AM.gif" width="2808" height="1456" darkWidth="2808" darkHeight="1456" showCaption="false" indent="3"}

## Summary

This section contains reports regarding: overall job activity, interviews, applications and passthrough rate information.

**Total Candidates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- This number represents the top of funnel count of job considerations for this job, excluding leads that do not convert.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- This number can be used as a quick reference to check expectations against other downstream activities. Interpretations may vary depending on your sourcing strategy.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/B_nsC_ZfIi6howhLn6TW4_screenshot2023-03-10at72148am.png" size="78" width="210" height="177" darkWidth="210" darkHeight="177" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.21.48 AM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::



**Active Leads**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- A count of job consideration currently in this job’s lead stages.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A high number can reflect heaving sourcing activity or that some leads are getting delayed in process.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0WqVqVNtPvQbV2dDkLE65_screenshot2023-03-10at72252am.png" size="78" width="211" height="178" darkWidth="211" darkHeight="178" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.22.52 AM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::



**Active Candidates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- All job considerations in active interview or offer stages. Excludes leads and candidates in application review.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A high number can reflect either a large amount of current activity, or that some candidates are getting delayed in process.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GMi7gzpTxn0bXp3zEv1tG_screenshot2023-03-10at72300am.png" size="78" width="210" height="176" darkWidth="210" darkHeight="176" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.23.00 AM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::



**Candidate to Offer Ratio**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- A ratio formed by comparing the number of job considerations at the top of funnel to the number with an offer extended.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A results of “100:1” suggests you need approximately 100 candidates at the top of funnel to result in 1 offer being extended.
- Learn more about ratio reports in our [Ratio Reports](docId\:Zep-4cIy3emEKomLZEet6) documentation.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BH-d7NR9boXVZthcRbIwy_screenshot2023-03-21at50848pm.png" size="76" width="226" height="168" darkWidth="226" darkHeight="168" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-21 at 5.08.48 PM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::



**Hires**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- The total number of job considerations hired on this job.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- The count should reflect the total hires made on this job. Pending your permissions, you may not have visibility into hired candidate profiles.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8WheDWYQxUQybPbVicT_5_screenshot2023-03-21at51020pm.png" size="78" width="202" height="179" darkWidth="202" darkHeight="179" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-21 at 5.10.20 PM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::

****

**Overall Funnel**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- This is a general funnel, the total starting candidate pool is shown along with the passthrough rate from the prior stage.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- Depending on the stage, both low and high passthrough rates can indicate an issue. A low passthrough rate may indicate a stage is too challenging or candidates that are not a good fit are being brought into the process. Conversely, a high passthrough rate can suggest a stage may not be an effective contribution to the overall process.
- Learn more about Funnel Reports in [Understanding Funnel Metrics](docId\:nd24STkT2Xn9z-9KphgCU).


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.07.53 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IYhTLtdkI2AdSZznBmy4b_screenshot2023-03-22at70753am.png)
:::
::::



**Interviews Week over Week**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in the report?**
- The number of interviews, week over week, grouped by the stage name they were scheduled in.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- Use this report to see your overall volume of interviews and where in your process they are occurring.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.08.17 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kHqSwM6joD59pJeALYPU2_screenshot2023-03-22at70817am.png)


:::
::::



**New Candidates by Source Type**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- Count of job considerations by start date grouped by source type. Leads are excluded from this report.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- You can use this report to examine source type trends over time and better understand the underlying origin of candidates.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.09.22 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RMAR2US1KAr-JhBVVm4Uk_screenshot2023-03-22at70922am.png)


:::
::::



**Pipeline History**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- The count of job considerations that were present in a stage in a given week.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- This report addresses the question of how many candidates had a job consideration in a stage at a historical point in time. A large count indicates many candidates were in that stage at that point in time, a sign of progress or possible delays in your process.
- Learn more about pipeline history reports in our [Pipeline History](#) documentation.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.09.53 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/t91GEplTZni3Kk6HOKIFJ_screenshot2023-03-22at70953am.png)
:::
::::



**Weekly Candidate Movement From Stage Type**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- This report counts stage transitions from the current stage type. Each movement of a job consideration from one stage to another counts as a single stage transition.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A high count in “Application Review” indicates many candidates are being moved through the application review process. Similarly, counts in the other stages types (”Lead” and “Active”) indicate candidates are being moved through the associated stages.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.10.32 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BEU92yEZ5Qtnl3qtUU2_1_screenshot2023-03-22at71032am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Candidate Stage Changes, Last 14 Days**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- Details for any candidate that has had a stage transition in the last 14 days. Activity in lead and application review stages is not included in this report.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- The report provides a quick reference to candidates that have recently been moved forward or archived. Few results indicates low overall activity in your active interview stages for this job.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.30.59 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6vH6hbIwyaM2NQzmMxOoT_screenshot2023-03-10at73059am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Passthrough Rate Details**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Passthrough rates grouped by stage outcome. For every stage, active counts are displayed on the left, and processed counts are displayed on the right.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- This report allows you to see your overall passthrough rates per stage, but also highlights whether candidates are skipping, passing through, or being archived (by archive reason type).
- Learn more about passthrough reports in our [Passthrough Report Features & FAQ](#) documentation.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.31.15 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/nS4hEynP5h8zeO9IoZjvn_screenshot2023-03-10at73115am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Time in Process**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- The median days in process per stage. This is calculated per stage based on job consideration stage entry and stage exit times.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- You can use this report to check whether candidates are spending an appropriate amount of time per stage and identify areas in need of process improvement.

Learn more about Time in Process reports work in [our documentation.](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.11.00 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OI3cmJjIXHugYopxYfRG4_screenshot2023-03-22at71100am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Archive Reasons by Stage & Type**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- A count of job considerations archived by their furthest stage name reached. The results are grouped by the archive reason type and archive reason details.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- This report aims to help assess at what stage and for what reasons candidates are being archived. Pending results, you may modify either top of funnel or downstream processes to improve overall candidate experience and hiring results.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.43.11 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/B_YQLD8wZkbE1SwJ0HYa3_screenshot2023-03-10at74311am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Source Type of Candidates**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Count of job considerations by source type. Leads that do not convert are excluded from this report.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- This report shows the total composition by source type at the top of funnel and can be used to see where candidates are originating from.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.31.52 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yT2LRED-1bqRthFoFPG1T_screenshot2023-03-10at73152am.png)
:::
::::

****

## Interviews & Feedback

This section contains reports regarding: interview history, upcoming interviews, and interview load and participation. Feedback details on completion rates, score distribution, and calibration per interviewer and interview are also provided.

**Interviews Week over Week**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in the report?**
- The number of interviews, week over week, grouped by the stage name they were scheduled in.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- Use this report to see your overall volume of interviews and where in your process they are occurring.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.08.17 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kHqSwM6joD59pJeALYPU2_screenshot2023-03-22at70817am.png)
:::
::::

**Upcoming Interviews, Next 14 Days**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- The number of scheduled interviews in the next 14 days grouped by the stage name they are scheduled in.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- Use this report to quickly assess whether this job has interviews in the next two-week period.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-22 at 7.15.38 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KhLQ2s22R5pgcxPnGuHa9_screenshot2023-03-22at71538am.png)


:::
::::

****

**Interviews per Hire Summary**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
  This report shows how many interviews your team is conducting per hire. It’s calculated by taking the total number of interviews divided by the number of hires made. The total number of interviews includes interviews for candidates both hired and rejected.
- Learn more about Interviews per Hire reports [in our documentation.](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.57.11 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7-aWpmymzQxX6ea1iua1g_screenshot2023-03-10at75711am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Interview Load by Interviewer**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- This report how many hours interviewers on your team have spent interviewing.
- Learn more about Interview Load reports [in our documentation.](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.49.10 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mW-iG_7mmIEKCC7Svy9la_screenshot2023-03-10at74910am.png)




:::
::::

**Interview Load by Stage**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- This report shows how many hours are spent interviewing per interview stage.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.49.25 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/cMXxyQFyq_Go9Z0yWOVcq_screenshot2023-03-10at74925am.png)


:::
::::

****

**Feedback Completion by Interviewer**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What’s in this report?**
- This report shows which % of feedback forms have been completed by each interviewer and how long on average it takes them to submit feedback.
- Learn more about Feedback Completion reports at[Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)&#x20;


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.49.42 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sw6aVavoaLWOtKwTRgvgB_screenshot2023-03-10at74942am.png)


:::
::::



**Feedback Calibration by Interviewer**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- A count of feedback forms grouped by the interviewer and overall recommendation.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- Assess each interviewer's feedback submissions in total to identify whether there is strong bias towards a "yes" (4, 3) or a "no" (2, 1).
- Learn more about Feedback Calibration reports at [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)&#x20;


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.48.43 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ksLgfMo-KEAxA51GFgnr-_screenshot2023-03-10at74843am.png)


:::
::::

**Feedback Calibration by Interview**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- A count of feedback forms grouped by the interview and overall recommendation.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- Assess each interview's feedback submissions in total to identify whether there is strong bias towards a "yes" (4, 3) or a "no" (2, 1).


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 7.50.36 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/1IaJUqF04hqMOV8SsyR5h_screenshot2023-03-10at75036am.png)


:::
::::

****

## Source Details

This section contains reports regarding: a more detailed accounting of your candidate source types and source details, information on sourcing efforts by presenting lead information, sources contributing to qualified candidates, and overall referral activity.

**New Candidates by Source Type**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Count of job considerations by start date grouped by source type. Leads are excluded from this report.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- You can use this report to examine source type trends over time and better understand the underlying origin of candidates.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.11.07 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yvX-Brm9ig_Y8iqnFhgCe_screenshot2023-03-10at81107am.png)


:::
::::

****

**Total Leads**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- The number of leads, counted as all job considerations with a source type of sourced.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- The total count of sourced leads should reflect the amount of sourcing effort put into this job.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/RWAWmJAGp6iKXSaWT3HQ6_screenshot2023-03-10at81121am.png" size="78" width="210" height="179" darkWidth="210" darkHeight="179" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.11.21 AM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::

**Leads Converted**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- The number of sourced leads that reached application review or active interview stages.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A higher number of converted leads means you are moving more candidates into the interview process.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5jXTVF3DXP4tJazzq4FpO_screenshot2023-03-10at81130am.png" size="78" width="210" height="177" darkWidth="210" darkHeight="177" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.11.30 AM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::

**New Leads by Source**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- A count of leads (job considerations with a source type of "sourced") over time by their source.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- You can use this report to examine source trends over time and better understand the underlying origin of sourced leads.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.11.41 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bem7pKgYQuEevjO1mCqJS_screenshot2023-03-10at81141am.png)


:::
::::

****

**Passthrough Rate by Source Type**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Passthrough rates by source type. For every stage, active counts are displayed on the left, and processed counts are displayed on the right.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A high passthrough rate means most candidates are moving through the stage, while a low passthrough rate means the opposite. Compare this by stage and source type to identify any areas for improvement or review. Learn more about passthrough rate counting at[Passthrough Report Features & FAQ](docId\:n4gfSfqvMCCCSUHSiqmZN)&#x20;


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.11.53 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5qz5W48ydnj5UOoNM_bXl_screenshot2023-03-10at81153am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Source Type of Candidates:** Source type of candidates. Candidates include any inbound job considerations or leads that have converted and reached application review or further stages. Leads that do not convert are excluded from this report.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Count of job considerations by source type. Leads that do not convert are excluded from this report.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- This report shows the total composition by source type at the top of funnel and can be used to see where candidates are originating from.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.12.04 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qHxOb1hfY8M7m1PkbDwyJ_screenshot2023-03-10at81204am.png)
:::
::::



**Qualified Candidates by Source Type:** Qualified candidates are those that move beyond the Application Review stage.

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Count of job considerations by source type for qualified candidates only. A candidate is considered qualified if their job consideration moves beyond application review.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- You can compare this report to the Source Type of Candidates report to see how the composition by source type changes between your top of funnel and your active process. This report shows which source types are contributing most to candidates that move forward into your interview process.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.12.13 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qsUWS32VeEY3zL5mheKuO_screenshot2023-03-10at81213am.png)
:::
::::

**Passthrough Rate by Source Details**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Passthrough rates by source. For every stage, active counts are displayed on the left, and processed counts are displayed on the right.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A high passthrough rate means most candidates are moving through the stage, while a low passthrough rate means the opposite. Compare this by stage and source to identify any areas for improvement or review. Learn more about passthrough rate counting at [Passthrough Report Features & FAQ](docId\:n4gfSfqvMCCCSUHSiqmZN) .


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.12.26 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Adcm5Fr6jurb1Be4NmG3P_screenshot2023-03-10at81226am.png)
:::
::::

****

**Referrals**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- All job considerations with source type "referral", including leads.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A higher number reflects more referral activity over the history of this job.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FjykeuaUUWvbD3dGjT2cy_screenshot2023-03-10at81237am.png" size="78" width="211" height="179" darkWidth="211" darkHeight="179" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.12.37 AM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::

**Active Referrals**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Count of job considerations of source type "referral" that are in currently in process. Excludes leads.
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- A higher number reflects more referral activity in your current pipeline.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/XoaM_WQL8sGQD_99MPQo9_screenshot2023-03-21at51201pm.png" size="78" width="205" height="177" darkWidth="205" darkHeight="177" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2023-03-21 at 5.12.01 PM.png" showCaption="false"}


:::
::::



**Referred By**

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
- **What's in this report?**
- Count of job considerations of source type "referral" grouped by referrer and outcome (lead, active, archived or hired).
- **How do I interpret the results?**
- You can use this report to see which teammates have referred the most candidates for this job, grouped by the outcome of those referrals.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Shot 2023-03-10 at 8.13.01 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4Mu-dY_cCumtuNPI6uCYv_screenshot2023-03-10at81301am.png)

**
:::
::::


[title] Hi Bob
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Connect HiBob to your Ashby account to automatically import hired candidates to HiBob. This article covers how to set up the integration in both HiBob and Ashby, push candidate data and offer letters from Ashby to HiBob, and add new hires to HiBob.

# Overview

The table below outlines the data types this integration supports syncing, the direction of the sync, and any relevant notes.

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync            | Notes                                                                         |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | ------------------------------ | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| ✔                  | ✔                  | See Notes         | One-way sync from Ashby to Bob | Resume upload supported. E-Signature documents can also be pushed from Ashby. |

# Setup instructions

## Configure the integration in HiBob

Follow the HiBob setup steps in [HiBob's integration guide](https://help.hibob.com/hc/en-us/articles/15675435200401-Set-up-a-Hire-API-integration). Then, return to this article when you reach the step to set up in the applicant tracking system (ATS).

## Configure the integration in Ashby

In Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin >&#x20;**[Integrations](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace) and search for the [HiBob tile](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/bob).
2. Select the `+ Enable HiBob` button.
3. Enter the Service User ID, Service User Token, and Hire API URL. Configure any fields or settings if needed.

![HiBob integration settings showing credential fields and Document Sync Settings, with only “Sync offer letters if unsigned?” enabled.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UdC3kQrRrCOnrVBHrhJgy_hibob-ashby-2026-09-10-at-94057-am.jpg)

4. **Document Sync Settings:&#x20;**&#x55;se the document sync settings to control which candidate documents Ashby sends to HiBob. Documents synced to HiBob are automatically saved in the employee's **Docs > Confidential** docs folder in HiBob.

- `Sync offer letters`: Sends offer letters to HiBob.
- `Sync offer letters if unsigned?`: Sends offer letters that have not received all of their signatures. This setting applies only when `Sync offer letters` is enabled.
- `Sync resumes`: Sends the candidate's resume to HiBob.
- `Sync e-signature documents`: Sends completed e-signature documents that are not part of an offer packet.
- `Sync other files`: Sends other files from the candidate's profile to HiBob. Ashby skips files already included through another document setting.

:::hint{type="info"}
E-Signature Documents included in an offer packet are handled as part of the offer document in HiBob. They may not appear as separate files.
:::

5. **Test the integration:** Send a test candidate from Ashby to HiBob to verify the connection. Review the Synced Record in HiBob, which displays custom fields synced from Ashby in the payload.
6. **Map custom fields:** If necessary, map custom fields in the **Data Mapping** section of the integration settings within HiBob.&#x20;
   - Click the pencil icon beside **Data Mapping** to edit any existing mapping and add and map additional fields.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8bc5c431c29023fad529138632d22291.png)

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
To add a new field, click `Add Field`, then select an Ashby field from the `Select` dropdown. Then choose a field from the `Select HiBob field` dropdown to map the Ashby field to a HiBob field.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4bac5ad5c43b930c576b5c8d79f1c6a6.png)

:::Paragraph{listStyleType="disc" indent="2"}
Once you've added or amended the necessary fields, click `Save`.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4dae90817669578aea3e242fa556736d.png)

4. **Set notifications:** By default, notifications go to the user who set up the integration. You can add or remove other recipients.
5. **Save changes and finish:** Save all changes. The integration between HiBob and Ashby is now complete.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can retrieve the Hire URL from HiBob after clicking Done to close the pop-up showing your Service User Token and Service User ID. Once the pop-up closes, the token is no longer visible in HiBob.
:::

# Mapping candidate data to HiBob

Before a new hire's data can be pushed from Ashby to HiBob, the candidate fields need to be mapped in HiBob. This includes any default candidate fields (such as name and email address), as well as candidate, offer, job, and application custom fields that have a value defined and that are associated with the candidate.&#x20;

:::hint{type="warning"}
Custom fields are not available on the Foundations plan. You can read more about custom fields at [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs) .
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Here's HiBob's documentation on [Mapping data for ATS integrations](https://help.hibob.com/hc/en-us/articles/13609951421969-Map-data-for-ATS-integrations).
:::

The integration supports pushing candidate data from Ashby to HiBob and signed offer letters. Once candidate fields are mapped in HiBob, you're ready to push new hire candidate data from Ashby to HiBob.

:::hint{type="info"}
We also recommend checking your notification settings for your Ashby configuration in the HireAPI integration settings to ensure that those who complete the candidate's hiring process in HiBob receive all new hire ATS notifications.
:::

# Adding new hires to HiBob

:::hint{type="warning"}
Offer custom fields are pulled from the candidate's **accepted** offer. We recommend pushing the candidate only after the offer has been accepted.
:::

1. After you've set the **Candidate Offer Response** to Accepted, a new activity titled **Add Candidate to HiBob** populates. Click `Add Candidate Data`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4b3a37670e5f485fc978353feb789c9d.png)

2. Go back to your HiBob account and click `Notifications`. Here you find your new hire. Click their name and select a template for them.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/b79e9eb2586d2b2f7761d999b7b4e6a6.png" size="80" width="551" height="643" isUploading="false" darkWidth="551" darkHeight="643" showCaption="false"}

3. You now see all of the new hire data in HiBob to complete the onboarding process.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0b8d9cf08d898e200ded996e1e63576c.png)

### Pushing Candidate Data to HiBob automatically

:::hint{type="warning"}
One candidate will need to have been previously pushed to the system via the manual steps above before this can be enabled.
:::

After the offer is accepted and the candidate is marked Hired, data can be sent to HiBob via an automatic sync. To enable this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > HRIS Integrations**
2. Check `Automatically push hired candidates to HRIS integrations`

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QlP5REGtSnP4bKQP0Ofj4_automatically-push-hired-candidates-to-hris-integrations.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1898" height="464" darkWidth="1898" darkHeight="464" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

# FAQ

### Why isn't the Hiring Manager in Ashby syncing to HiBob?

HiBob only displays an employee's government name, so ensure the name of the Hiring Manager in HiBob aligns exactly with their name in Ashby.

### I'm not seeing a button to push an employee to HiBob who was an internal hire.

Check if that candidate already exists in HiBob. If the candidate already exists in HiBob, they are not pushed again.

### Can I push candidate data to multiple human resource information systems (HRIS) if I have integrated with more than one HRIS?

You can! Once a candidate is marked as hired, click the `Select Post Hire Integrations` button on the **Add candidate to Post Hire Integrations** activity that is generated on their profile.&#x20;

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2631e5deb8288c51a875e04411420812.png)

From here, use the checkboxes to determine the HRIS that the candidate should be added to.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/57ffc64fda4121ac02396333636add92.png" size="70" width="485" height="242" isUploading="false" darkWidth="485" darkHeight="242" showCaption="false"}

### Why doesn't an E-Signature Document sent with my offer appear as a separate file in HiBob?

E-Signature Documents sent as part of an offer packet are added to the offer document in HiBob. They do not always appear as separate, standalone files. If you expect a separate document, open the offer document in HiBob and review the E-Signature Document included there.

[title] BambooHR
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Once a candidate has accepted an offer, you can push their data into BambooHR to kick off the new employee onboarding process.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** To create a BambooHR API key with the correct access for this integration, the creating user must have at least Full Admin access to BambooHR.
:::

# Permissions & access

The Bamboo integration is available on all plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

- You need Organization Admin access to configure the integration in Ashby.&#x20;
- Can add or edit permissions are required on the candidate to push data from Ashby to BambooHR.

# Overview

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync                 | Notes                   |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | ----------------------------------- | ----------------------- |
| ✔                  | ✔                  | See Notes         | One-way sync from Ashby to BambooHR | Resume upload supported |

When pushing a candidate from Ashby to BambooHR, the following candidate details are included by default:

- Name
- Email Address
- Phone Number
- LinkedIn Profile
- Salary (this is the default Salary Offer field)
- Start Date

You also have the option to sync additional BambooHR fields as [Offer custom fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/custom-fields/offer) (more on creating these fields at [Custom Fields](docId\:QpGKlrSCmzgWC-7krBWDs)).

We currently support syncing fields associated with the Job Information and Employee Stock Options tables in BambooHR. These values are sent to BambooHR if included in the candidate's offer form.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you select BambooHR fields to sync as Offer Custom Fields, this process can take several hours. This includes making changes to existing fields. Custom fields are not available on the Foundations plan.
:::

## Set up BambooHR

To set up the BambooHR integration, navigate to the [BambooHR page in Admin](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/bamboohr).

Input your BambooHR API Key and Subdomain to integrate the two applications.

When the integration is enabled, you also have two additional fields: Resume Sync and Offer Letter Sync. You can select the file category you would like the candidate's resume and offer letter added to via these two fields when candidate data is pushed to BambooHR. For more information, see [BambooHR's documentation on folders](https://help.bamboohr.com/s/article/587287#documents).

![Shows the Bamboohr setup page in Ashby](https://cdn.zappy.app/0ccd103a616e2a0dc391c898b951a8e7.png)

You can use the drop-down to view file categories in BambooHR (so long as the API key has access to them). If you change the API key for the integration, the categories are re-pulled.

To turn off this option, select `Choose a File Category` from the drop-down menu.

![Shows the choose a file category option in the available dropdown menus.](https://cdn.zappy.app/8abe420e2540195deb9a538e51d9564d.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
If an API key is changed or if a file category is deleted in BambooHR, a yellow indicator appears beside your Resume Sync or Offer Letter Sync fields to indicate that a new one needs to be selected.
:::

## Push candidate data to BambooHR

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/155aad3971e44c10a338a306c94d4506"}

When a candidate accepts an offer, you see an option to push the hired candidate to BambooHR via an activity on their profile. Clicking `Add to BambooHR` creates a new employee in the system, including that latest offer data.

## Pushing candidate data to BambooHR automatically

:::hint{type="warning"}
One candidate must be pushed to the system via the manual steps above before you can enable this.
:::

After the candidate accepts the offer and is marked as Hired, Ashby can automatically sync their data to BambooHR.

To enable this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > HRIS Integrations**.
2. Check `Automatically push hired candidates to HRIS integrations`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QlP5REGtSnP4bKQP0Ofj4_automatically-push-hired-candidates-to-hris-integrations.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1898" height="464" darkWidth="1898" darkHeight="464" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Shows the HRIS Integrations Settings checkbox"}

# FAQs

### Does the BambooHR integration with Ashby support non-USD currencies?

Yes, we support pushing non-USD currency from Ashby to BambooHR; however, the currency formatting is sent to BambooHR in the format their API requires.

### If a candidate changes their start date after they've been hired and added to BambooHR, can we push that new date over?

It is not currently possible to send an amended start date to BambooHR if the candidate has already been pushed.

### Can I sync country and state values to BambooHR?

We now support syncing country and state values via the BambooHR integration. Check the country and state boxes on the **BambooHR Fields Available To Sync** table on the integration's settings page to begin syncing these fields.

To sync a value for the state field, you must also provide a value for the country field. This is a requirement on BambooHR's side. If only a value for state is provided, the push to BambooHR fails.

### Can Ashby export any additional docs to BambooHR (aside from resume and offer letter)?

Not at this time.

### Can I push candidate data to multiple human resources information systems (HRIS) if I have integrated with more than one HRIS?

You can! Once a candidate is marked as hired, click the `Select Post Hire Integrations` button on the **Add candidate to Post Hire Integrations** activity generated on their profile.&#x20;

![Highlights the select post hire integrations button on the candidate profile](https://cdn.zappy.app/2631e5deb8288c51a875e04411420812.png)

From here, use the checkboxes to determine the HRIS systems the candidate should be added to.

![Shows the options to select post hire integrations](https://cdn.zappy.app/57ffc64fda4121ac02396333636add92.png)

### Can I sync additional BambooHR fields from other tables to Ashby as offer custom fields?

We currently support syncing fields associated with the Job Information and Employee Stock Options tables in BambooHR. If you'd like to sync over additional fields from other tables, reach out to your customer success manager (CSM) or Support so they can submit a feature request for you.

### I'm pushing a candidate over with payroll details, but I'm getting an error. Why?

When adding a candidate to BambooHR, you must include a birth date if you are also pushing payroll details, as this automatically adds the candidate to their payroll product, which requires a birth date. If you add information to BambooHR-synced payroll-specific fields but don't add a birth date, you receive an error stating that the candidate cannot be added without that information. If you don't wish to collect birth dates in Ashby, you must un-sync all payroll fields (like Pay Schedule) in the [integration settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/bamboohr).

### Are custom fields impacted if I update the BambooHR API key in the integration settings?

If the BambooHR API key is updated in the integration settings, the custom fields are still synced. If you have added additional options to any of the custom fields within Ashby, those are archived. For example, if you have a custom field called `Employment Type` with values of `Full-time` and `Part-time` that came from the BambooHR sync and then added a new `Contractor` option in Ashby (not in BambooHR), when you update the API key, only `Full-time` and `Part-time` show as options for that field and `Contractor` is removed.

[title] Compa
[path] Integrations/Other/

Ashby is now an integration partner to Compa. This guide will walk through enabling the integration.

## Ashby Integration (offers)

Completing your integration, scope of data, and an overview of Compa’s security program

Compa connects with Ashby seamlessly via an API integration. Our data science engine structures offer data to provide powerful internal reporting and to connect you to real-time, offers-based market data.

This document contains details on resources required to complete the Ashby integration and the scope of data shared.

## Completing your integration

:::hint{type="info"}
It takes less than 10 minutes to connect Ashby to Compa!
:::

Ashby users with Admin access can provision an API key (more on this at [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ)). The Compa team will share step-by-step instructions on API generation and how to securely share it with Compa.

Once Ashby is connected, your compensation team will receive a questionnaire regarding your company info, compensation programs, and career architecture. We recommend setting aside 20-30 minutes to complete.

Compa’s integrations team will integrate your offer data in Ashby based on your questionnaire responses and schedule time with you to review for accuracy.

## Integration data requirements

The following table summarizes the data required to connect Compa offers to Ashby.

| Data                      | Requirement | Notes                                                                |
| ------------------------- | ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job title                 | Required    | Used by Compa to map jobs to the market                              |
| Job family                | Required    | Used by Compa to map jobs to the market                              |
| Job level                 | Required    | Used by Compa to map jobs to the market                              |
| Job location              | Required    | The location where the work is performed, e.g. office or remote city |
| Pay element               | Required    | Salary, bonus, equity, etc.                                          |
| Pay value                 | Required    | Nominal value, stock value, etc.                                     |
| Pay timing                | Required    | Annual vs. quarterly, vesting schedules, etc.                        |
| Offer status              | Required    | Compa only require the final offer (accepted or rejected)            |
| Candidate current company | Optional    | This optional field allows Compa to provide insights by competitor   |

## Compa Security Program

Compensation is a competitive advantage for your business and deeply personal for your talent. To protect customer data, Compa maintains data anonymous by not requiring PII, limiting access controls, and proudly being SOC2 Type 2 compliant.

An overview of our security program can be found at [Compa | Security](https://www.trycompa.com/security), and your information security team may request additional details on our Safebase page by visiting [Compa Security Portal | SafeBase](https://safebase.trycompa.com/).

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### How does Compa offers connect to Ashby?

Compa connects to Ashby via API for a seamless integration. For more on Ashby's API, check out [https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/introduction](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/introduction)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Does Compa offers use personally identifiable information (PII)?

No, Compa offers does not require usage of any PII data.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is Compa SOC2 compliant?

Yes, Compa is SOC2 Type 2 compliant. Data privacy and security is Compa’s top priority, and we are proud of our strong security program. You can learn more about Compa’s security program by visiting [Compa | Security](https://www.trycompa.com/security).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How does Compa use our data?

Compa connects to your applicant tracking system (ATS) via API to seamlessly pull in accepted and rejected offer data. Your data contributes to the Compa offers real-time market intelligence platform with Compa’s network of customer data, and returns aggregated market insights. Additionally, you can use Compa offers to get internal dashboard reporting on your own offer history.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can other companies see my individual offers?

No, other companies cannot see any individual offers made by your company.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can other companies see the names of my candidates?

No, no personal identifying information (PII) contributes to the real-time market intelligence cloud across Compa tenants.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What are the minimum counts to protect privacy?

Minimum company count is 3 and minimum offer count is 5. Other companies can never see individual offers or identifying offer information about your company.
:::

## More questions?

Email [help@trycompa.com](mailto\:help@trycompa.com) to get answers to any additional questions you may have about Compa offers.

[title] Understanding & Reporting on Interview Stage Transitions
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This article covers the Interview Stage Transitions reporting subject, including available fields for filtering and grouping, and common reporting examples.

When building reports in Ashby, one of the subjects available is Interview Stage Transitions.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/P7upPKuCa_5Ce1Tx0ckL2_report-builder-ashby-2026-08-28-at-13025-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="615" height="458" darkWidth="615" darkHeight="458" alt="Screenshot showing Interview Stage Transitions selected as a new report's subject." showCaption="false"}

When a candidate's application moves from stage to stage, Ashby records the transition: which stage they are leaving, which stage they are entering, when they entered the stage, and when they left. Using the **Interview Stage Transition** subject, you can create report based on these and other captured details regarding the stage transition.

## Fields available for filtering

When building a report, you can add filters using the option within the panel on the right side.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bhv-HLwiSounbv8ZzAxil_report-builder-ashby-2026-08-28-at-12910-pm.png" size="60" isUploading="false" width="463" height="230" darkWidth="463" darkHeight="230" alt="Screenshot showing the filters option in the right side panel." showCaption="false"}

The following fields are available as filters on any Interview Stage Transitions report.

| Field                      | Description                                                                                                                 |
| -------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| From Interview Stage Name  | The title of the interview stage transferred from.                                                                          |
| From Interview Stage Type  | The type of interview stage transferred from: Lead, Application Review, Active, Archived, or Hired.                         |
| From Interview Stage Group | The stage group transferred from. Requires Stage Groups to be enabled.                                                      |
| To Interview Stage Name    | The title of the interview stage transferred to.                                                                            |
| To Interview Stage Type    | The type of interview stage transferred to: Lead, Application Review, Active, Archived, or Hired.                           |
| To Interview Stage Group   | The stage group transferred to. Requires Stage Groups to be enabled.                                                        |
| Outcome                    | The outcome of this stage change. Possible values: Moved Forward, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected - Other. |
| Entered At                 | Point in time at which the stage was entered.                                                                               |
| Left At                    | Point in time at which the stage was left.                                                                                  |
| Days in Stage              | Number of full days within the stage.                                                                                       |
| Archive Reason             | When the destination stage is an archived stage, this represents the archive reason.                                        |
| Stage Changed By           | The user who actioned the stage transition for the candidate's job consideration. Available on full product plans only.     |

## Fields available for grouping

Grouping by a field is available when building a **Segmentation** or **Count Over Time** report on the Interview Stage Transitions subject. It is not available on Custom List reports, which use Columns instead.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/snlLTU4B_xHll1hnJgBHa_report-builder-ashby-2026-08-28-at-13144-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="459" height="194" darkWidth="459" darkHeight="194" alt="Screenshot of the Groupings panel in a segmented report." showCaption="false"}

The following fields are available as groupings on any Interview Stage Transitions segmentation or count over time report.

| Field                      | Description                                                                                                                 |
| -------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| From Interview Stage Name  | The title of the interview stage transferred from.                                                                          |
| From Interview Stage Type  | The type of interview stage transferred from: Lead, Application Review, Active, Archived, or Hired.                         |
| From Interview Stage Group | The stage group transferred from. Requires Stage Groups to be enabled.                                                      |
| To Interview Stage Name    | The title of the interview stage transferred to.                                                                            |
| To Interview Stage Type    | The type of interview stage transferred to: Lead, Application Review, Active, Archived, or Hired.                           |
| To Interview Stage Group   | The stage group transferred to. Requires Stage Groups to be enabled.                                                        |
| Outcome                    | The outcome of this stage change. Possible values: Moved Forward, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected - Other. |
| Archive Reason             | When the destination stage is an archived stage, this represents the archive reason.                                        |
| Stage Changed By           | The user who actioned the stage transition for the candidate's job consideration. Available on full product plans only.     |

:::hint{type="warning"}
Entered At, Left At, and Days in Stage are available for filtering only — they cannot be used as group-by dimensions.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
**Stage Groups and report grouping are two separate features.**

**Stage Groups** are an admin configuration that maps individual interview stages into a common set of stages across jobs (see [Utilizing Stage Groups](docId:8ypvcP02S-0aiiEloOmRx)). When Stage Groups are enabled, the From Interview Stage Group and To Interview Stage Group fields become available for both filtering and grouping in reports.

**Report grouping** is a separate feature in Segmentation and Count Over Time reports that lets you break down results by any available field — for example, grouping by Stage Changed By to see which team members are actioning stage transitions. This is independent of whether Stage Groups are enabled.
:::

# Examining interview stage transition details

When you open a candidate profile in Ashby, you can see their interview stage progress.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HRr_WHXVzdW_k_Sn82VRi_screenshot2022-12-16at83157am.png" size="66" width="810" height="700" position="center" alt="Candidate profile in Ashby showing interview stage progress with stage names, timestamps, and scheduled interviews." darkWidth="810" darkHeight="700" showCaption="false"}

This gives you details about the stage, the timing of the stage, scheduled interviews, and feedback. The stage progress shown in the profile view is one way to view the interview stage transition details you can report on.

To build a [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW) for a candidate, you can pull up the records of individual stage transitions. Each row and timestamp in the report corresponds to the profile view transitions above.

## Example: stage outcomes over time

A common reporting need is to examine the outcome of activity from a specific stage group of interest. In this example, we report on the outcome of the recruiter screen stage group over time.

The pattern is to use the **Entered At** field with the **From Stage Group**, which results in examining the destination (the next stage, rejection, or being hired) at the time of the decision.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JAW8skHTqz4I98gLOl5QR_screencast2022-12-16at84026am.gif" size="88" width="3014" height="1614" position="center" alt="Count Over Time report in Ashby showing recruiter screen stage outcomes over time, with a NOT filter condition excluding candidates still in the stage." darkWidth="3014" darkHeight="1614" showCaption="false"}

In this Count Over Time report, we have excluded all applications still in the recruiter screen stage with a `NOT` filter condition. This ensures we examine only candidates that have entered and exited the stage of interest.

[title] Formula Fields
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

## Introduction

Formula Fields are a new type of  that allow mathematical and logical operations on top of your existing field data, bringing more robust customization to your reporting needs. After a Formula Field is created, it is available for all filtering and grouping in reporting across Ashby.

The standard mathematical operations for addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division are supported in addition to specialized functions such as if statements and date difference or addition functions.

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for information on setting up calculated fields? Check out [Calculated Fields](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x). For more on offer formula fields, check out [Offer Formula Fields](docId\:m2CcYT8El19Tq0pWPYGVF).
:::

General formula fields are only available on the Enterprise plan.&#x20;

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="info"}
Offer formula fields are available on the Plus and Enterprise plans.
:::

## Example Use Cases

Formula Fields unlock a variety of potential use cases, but as motivation to think about applications, some conceptual examples are given below:

- Calculate bonus as a percentage of salary (multiplication)
- Calculate total compensation of base salary and bonuses (addition of fields)
- Calculate hourly rate from annual salary (division)
- Check if an offer salary is within the opening's comp range (logical comparison)
- Show time-to-fill in days (date difference)
- First interview to offer decided duration (date difference)
- Hired before target date or Started before target date (logical comparison of dates)
- Field to flag new hire hitting 90 day mark (date offset)

## How to create a formula field

Creating a formula field follows the calculated field creation flow:

1. Click on Admin in the top navigation bar, then Data Management, then [Calculated Fields](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/calculated-fields).
2. Click `+ New` to create a new calculated field.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/crxcVtT14T8-US_XDLZWn_calculated-fields-acent-ashby-2026-03-20-at-25054-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2430" height="756" darkWidth="2430" darkHeight="756" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

3. &#x20;When creating a new calculated field, add in the object type, a title and select the Formula calculated field type from the `Type` dropdown.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/S_iUn19XgRc4X3aNRKFBz-20260212-120435.png" size="76" width="654" height="648" position="center" darkWidth="654" darkHeight="648" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

4. Click `Create`. You will then be taken to the formula field editor:

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5Ki1B50KhS4S0PcwXyxha-20260212-120454.png" size="100" width="1980" height="1016" position="center" darkWidth="1980" darkHeight="1016" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

In the above example, we have a formula field that creates a new field returning a true/false value depending on whether the job consideration was hired prior to the associated opening’s target hire date.

The formula editor has a few noteworthy components:

- The title and description of the new formula field
- The editor space wherein formulas, functions, and field references are combined
- `Insert Field` button: click to add a new field or press `$` as a hotkey
- `Insert Function` button: click to add a specialized function
- Cancel/Save buttons: save or cancel any changes.

After the field is saved, it can be used in filters and groupings.

:::hint{type="warning"}
If you have errors in your fields, you will not be able to save them. You can hover over areas of the formula highlighted in red to see the issue.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/K14R--AiM6wT9MZrCUbPH-20260320-152146.jpg)
:::

## An example use case for formula fields

In this example, we'll create a formula field that track time-to-fill from the opening's Opened At date right up to the new hire's start date.

Firstly, we'll create our formula-type calculated field via the steps [above](docId\:FoANOXYXfjWdMOsC_uZTf).

When in the formula field editor, the `datediff` function is used to calculate the difference between two date fields. The Opening's \[Opened At] date field and the offer's \[Start Date] fields have been specified.&#x20;

Finally, as part of the datediff functionality, the interval needs to be specified. For this calculated formula fields, we've specified the interval to be in days.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KdccX51o-m2GcqvuuK74M-20260320-154021.jpg)

When building reports, this field should then appear as an option for filtering or grouping reports. It can also be used to display the calculated results as part of a custom list report.

## Formula Field Syntax Reference

This initial early access release of formula fields has a limited set of functionality, but more functions and operators will be added throughout the development phase of this feature.

### Referencing fields

Click the `Insert Field` button below the editor or type $ to choose a field and insert a field reference. This substitutes the value of the chosen field into the expression at that position. Field references appear in \{braces} in the expression editor.

### Booleans

The boolean values are `true` and `false`.

### Numbers

Numbers may be integers or decimal numbers. Positive and negative values are supported:

- `123`
- `-4`
- `5.6`

### Ranges

A range is written `range(start, end)` :

- `range(1, 5)`

Both of a range’s endpoints must be literal constant numeric values; more complex constructions like `range(Field, 1 + 2)` are not accepted.

### Strings

String values are single- or double-quoted.

- `“hello world”`
- `‘i am text’`

If you need to use a single or double quote in a string, you can either wrap the string with the other type of quote, or you can prefix it with \\\\:

- `'Jane "Example" Doe'`
- `"Jane \Example\ Doe"`
- `"John O'Example"`
- `'John O\'Example'`

To include a literal backslash in a string, use a double backslash:

- `"example\\\\string"`

## Arithmetic

Numeric values may be added, subtracted, multiplied, or divided with +, -, \*, / respectively:

- `1+1`
- `2 * 3`

Parentheses may be used for grouping:

- `({Score A} + {Score B})/ 2`

## Comparisons

Some operators have multiple accepted spellings, to maximize the chance of someone guessing correctly (for example, = and == ). Either form is accepted; they will be normalized to the first (“canonical”) form as part of autoformatting.

Values can be compared for equality with =and for inequality with != or \<>:

- `{Interviewer} = {Referrer}`
- `{Feedback Submitted By} != {Hiring Manager}`

Numeric values can additionally be compared with >, \<, \<=, and >= :

- `{Number of Job Considerations} >= 3`
- `{Overall Recommendation} < {Average Overall Recommendation}`

Comparisons may be chained together:

- `1 <= {Score} < 5 (equivalent to 1 <= {Score} and {Score} < 5 )`

Some fields contain numeric ranges. Use the inrange operator to check whether a value is within a range.

- `{Salary Expectation} inrange {Compensation Range}`
- `{Score} inrange range(2, 8)`

## Conjunctions

Boolean variables can be combined with and (&, &&), or (|, ||), and not.

- `not {Extended Offer?}`
- `{Candidate's Location} != {Job's Location} and not {Willing to relocate}`

## Available functions

The initial set of supported functions is as follows for formula fields:

| **Operation**        | **Description**                                                                                                                                                                | **Function**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Date                 | Constructs a constant date value from a string in YYYY-MM-DD format.                                                                                                           | `date( value:`<br />`A date string in YYYY-MM-DD format, e.g. "2026-05-01".`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Date difference      | Take the difference between two date fields and returns a number.<br />The interval may be `"days"`, `"weeks"`, `"months"`, `"quarters"`, or `"years"`.                        | `datediff(from: Date Field 1, to: Date Field 2, interval: "days")`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Date addition        | Calculates an offset from a date. Returns a date.                                                                                                                              | `dateadd(date: Date Field 1, amount: X, interval: "days")`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Today                | Returns the current date                                                                                                                                                       | `today ()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Ceiling              | Rounds a number up to a given precision (number of decimal places).                                                                                                            | `ceiling`<br />`(value:`<br />`The value to round.`<br />`precision:`<br />`The precision to round to.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Floor                | Rounds a number down to a given precision (number of decimal places).                                                                                                          | `floor`<br />`(value:`<br />`The value to round.`<br />`precision:`<br />`The precision to round to.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Minimum value        | Returns the lowest of a set of numbers or the lower bound of a range.                                                                                                          | `min()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Maximum value        | Returns the highest of a set of numbers or the upper bound of a range.                                                                                                         | `max()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Mean value (average) | Returns the mean of a set of numbers or the midpoint of a range.                                                                                                               | `mean()`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Round                | Rounds a number to a given precision (number of decimal places).                                                                                                               | `round`<br />`(value:`<br />`The value to round.`<br />`precision:`<br />`The precision to round to.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| To number            | Attempts to convert a value to a number. Returns null if it is not possible.                                                                                                   | `tonumber`<br />`(`<br />`value:`<br />`The value to convert.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| If statements        | Returns one of several values depending on conditions. Accepts one or more condition/value pairs followed by a fallback value: if(cond1, value1, cond2, value2, …, elseValue). | `if`<br />`(condition:`<br />`The condition to use.`<br />`if_true:`<br />`The value to return if condition is true.`<br />`if_false:`<br />`The value to return if no condition is true, or the next condition if additional condition/value pairs follow.`<br />`arguments...:`<br />`Additional condition/value pairs followed by a fallback value.`<br />`)` |
| Coalesce             | Returns the first value from its arguments that is not null. Allows you to set other values to fall back on if the first value is null.                                        | `coalesce`<br />`(`<br />`value:`<br />`The first value.`<br />`arguments...:`<br />`Additional values to use if the first value is null.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Option               | Creates an ad hoc option as if from a multiple-choice field.                                                                                                                   | `option`<br />`(`<br />`label:`<br />`The name of the option. Must be constant.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| In range             | Check if value is within a range, e.g. `{Salary} within {Compensation Range}`                                                                                                  | `inrange`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Range creation       | Constructs a numeric range from two constant numbers.                                                                                                                          | `range(`<br />`min:`<br />`The start of the range.`<br />`max:`<br />`The end of the range.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Concatenate          | Combines multiple strings into one.                                                                                                                                            | `concatenate`<br />`(`<br />`arguments...:`<br />`The strings to concatenate together.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Contains             | Returns true if a string contains a substring.                                                                                                                                 | `contains`<br />`(`<br />`string:`<br />`The string to search within.`<br />`substring:`<br />`The string that may be found within that string.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Ends with            | Returns true if a string ends with a substring.                                                                                                                                | `endswith`<br />`(`<br />`string:`<br />`The string to look at the end of.`<br />`substring:`<br />`The string that may be at the end of the other string.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Starts with          | Returns true if a string starts with a substring.                                                                                                                              | `startswith`<br />`(`<br />`string:`<br />`The string to look at the start of.`<br />`substring:`<br />`The string that may be at the start of the other string.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Split                | Splits a string on a delimiter and returns the element at the given index.                                                                                                     | `split (string: The string to split.`<br />`delimiter:`<br />`The delimiter to split on.`<br />`index:`<br />`The zero-based index of the element to return.)`                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Substring            | Extracts a portion of a string. Uses zero-based indexing; start is inclusive and end is exclusive.                                                                             | `substring (string:`<br />`The string to extract from.`<br />`start: The zero-based start index (inclusive). Defaults to 0 if omitted.`<br />`end: The zero-based end index (exclusive). Defaults to the end of the string if omitted.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                 |
| To string            | Returns a text representation of a value.                                                                                                                                      | `tostring`<br />`(`<br />`value:`<br />`The value to convert to text.`<br />`)`                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |

Function calls are written `functionname(arg1, arg2, ...)` or `functionname(name1: value1, name2: value2, ...)`.

Function names are case-insensitive and ignore underscores: `datediff`, `DateDiff`, and `DaTe_DiFf` are all the same function (and will be autoformatted to `datediff`).

All functions come with inline syntax definitions and guidelines in-app. For example, here is the guidance on how to use the date difference operator:

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3LCmAeVdRlvlPb0irsb08-20260212-120517.png)

## Operator precedence

Operations are evaluated in the following order, with operations in the same group evaluated in the order they appear in the expression:

- `(parenthesized groups)`
- `function_calls()`
- `x`
- `a * b, a / b`
- `a + b, a - b`
- `a inrange b`
- `a = b`, `a ≠ b`, `a is b`, `a isnot b`, `a < b`, `a > b`, `a ≤ b`, `a ≥ b`
- `not x`
- `a and b`, `a or b`

## Copying fields to build a formula outside of Ashby

You can copy fields within the formula field editor and paste them into a spreadsheet or other script to generate your formula prior to pasting it back into the editor.

When copying and pasting your field, it will appear in a different format to how it shows in Ashby. This ensures that when you paste your formula back into the editor, that the correct field is selected.

So, for example, if you’re copying the \{Employment Type} field, it would show as follows when you paste it: `$(ValueSelect,job.employment_type)`. When pasting your formula back into the formula field editor, it be auto-detected and show as a linked Ashby field.

![The Formula Field editor showing a correctly linked Ashby field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KgxNcMVkUdnoHpqLophz3_formula-fields-linked-pasted-field.jpg "If the field shows in blue, it is successfully linked to an Ashby field.")

If you were instead to paste in \{Employment Type} without copying the field from Ashby, the field wouldn’t show as a linked Ashby field. It would be treated as plain text.

![The Formula Field editor showing an incorrectly linked Ashby field.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hGgqJLM8pwJ9-qKgICOCb_formula-fields-incorrectly-pasted-field.jpg "If the field is not showing in blue, it is not connected to an Ashby field.")


[title] Docusign
[path] Integrations/Other/

You can integrate your Ashby account with your company's DocuSign account, allowing you to send e-signature offers and documents via DocuSign, rather than using Ashby's default Dropbox Sign option.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** You need a DocuSign account on the Standard plan or above to set up this integration.

When setting up the integration, we recommend logging in with a shared service account (e.g., "[recruiting@company.com](mailto\:recruiting@company.com)") rather than an individual user's account. Notifications to candidates from DocuSign may include references to the account user's name and email address, and e-signature requests appear as from this account.

The account used to set up the integration may also receive notifications about e-signature requests, so using a service account can help avoid individual users getting unwanted notifications.

Depending on your DocuSign account, you may also be able to further customize the email notifications sent to candidates using the [DocuSign Brand feature](https://support.docusign.com/s/document-item?language=en_US\&bundleId=pik1583277475390\&topicId=zjl1583277333205.html&_LANG=enus).
:::

# Enabling the DocuSign integration

To enable the DocuSign integration:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations**.
2. Open the DocuSign tile and click `Authorize with DocuSign`.
3. Log in to DocuSign on the following page.
4. Review the access Ashby is requesting for the integration and click `Allow Access` to confirm.
5. Back in the DocuSign integrations tile in Ashby, select a **DocuSign Account** from the account dropdown. This controls which DocuSign account is used by default for the e-signature process — all documents are processed and stored in the selected account.

Once a DocuSign account is selected, the integration is active and ready to use.

# Setting DocuSign as your default e-signature provider

To set DocuSign as your default e-signature provider for offers:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Offers**.
2. Select the **Settings** tab.
3. Ensure the `E-Signature Provider` dropdown is set to DocuSign.

To set DocuSign as your default e-signature provider for e-signature documents:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > E-Signature Documents**.
2. Select the **Settings** tab.
3. Ensure the `E-Signature Provider` dropdown is set to DocuSign. If you'd only like to use DocuSign for offers, set the `E-Signature Provider` to Dropbox Sign here to use Dropbox Sign for documents instead.

# DocuSign Custom Fields

:::hint{type="warning"}
Before proceeding with custom field mapping, the DocuSign integration must be configured.  See the previous section for setup.
:::

Some DocuSign accounts require custom fields that must be present on every document before it can be sent. These fields are configured in your DocuSign account settings and may include information such as department, document type, or other organization-specific values. If your DocuSign setup enforces required custom fields, you’ll need to map them in Ashby before sending e-signature requests.

The custom fields section in your DocuSign integration settings lets you sync your DocuSign account's custom fields and configure default values for them. When an e-signature request is sent, any configured values are automatically included.

Custom fields are a DocuSign account-level feature typically available on Business Pro plans and above.

### Setting up custom fields

To configure custom fields, navigate to **Admin > Integrations**, click on the DocuSign integration tile, and scroll to the **Custom Fields** section.

1. Click `Sync` to fetch the latest custom fields from your DocuSign account. This pulls in any custom fields configured in DocuSign and displays them in the table.
2. For each field, click `Choose a Default Value` to configure how the field will be populated when an e-signature request is sent. You have two options:
   - **Select Ashby Field** — Maps the DocuSign field to an Ashby field, so the value is pulled dynamically from the candidate's application data when a request is sent. For example, you could map a Department field in DocuSign to the Department field on the job in Ashby.
   - **Select Static Value** — Sets a fixed value that is used for all e-signature requests, regardless of the candidate or job.
3. If you need to remove a configured default, click the existing value to reopen the menu and clear it.

You can re-sync at any time to pull in new or updated custom fields from DocuSign.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/c5E0WTtg7bHz0fYbaJOSB_docusign-custom-fields-draftarchbee-article-google-docs-2026-06-22-at-94705-am.jpg" size="90" isUploading="false" width="779" height="714" darkWidth="779" darkHeight="714" showCaption="false"}

### Required custom fields

If a field is marked as required in your DocuSign account, it must have a value assigned before an e-signature request can be sent. You can save the settings page without configuring a required field's default value, but Ashby will block the e-signature request at send time until all required fields are filled in.

If you haven't set a default for a required field in the integration settings, you'll have the opportunity to enter a value directly in the offer letter view before sending. Click the ⋮ menu next to the Docusign provider selector and choose Custom Fields to open the custom fields panel.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qpMpBf5tgAQZFZ-FsumiZ_.blob)

Synced Docusign fields will appear here and can be overridden manually before the request can be sent. Required fields are denoted with an asterisk.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dJ53cw2v8345fdZ07AoqD_.blob)

### Mapping list fields to Ashby fields

DocuSign supports two types of custom fields: text fields (free-form input) and list fields (a dropdown with predefined options set in DocuSign). If you map a list field to an Ashby field, the value from Ashby must exactly match one of the available option values in DocuSign. If the values don't match, the field won't be populated correctly.

# Sending offer letters using DocuSign

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on generating offers and e-signatures in general, check out [E-Signature Offers](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/e-signature-offers).
:::

Once you've created an offer and generated an offer letter in Ashby, you can confirm that the offer letter sends via DocuSign in the **Offer E-Signature** section.

After you send your e-signature request or envelope via DocuSign, you can track the status of the request within the offer details in Ashby. The requests and created envelopes can also be tracked and viewed within your DocuSign account.

# DocuSign e-signature activities

:::hint{type="info"}
E-signature activities allow you to be prompted to send out e-signature requests for documents other than offers as part of your process (for example, an NDA) when a candidate lands in a specific stage. For more on configuring e-signature activities, check out the [E-Signature Documents guide](https://docs.ashbyhq.com/e-signature-documents).
:::

You can configure an e-signature activity within a job or job template's interview plan.

1. Navigate to the job or job template.
2. Click the **Interview Plan** tab.
3. Click `Add Activity To` on the appropriate stage of your interview plan, then `+ Add Activity`.
4. Select the `E-Signature Document` option. On the following popover, select the e-signature document template and the e-signature provider. The provider selected here overrides the default provider set in **Admin > Integrations > E-Signature Documents**.
5. Once you've configured your e-signature document activity, when the candidate enters that stage of your pipeline, you're prompted to send out an e-signature request.
6. Click `Send E-Signature Document` on the activity to open the Sign popover, where you can confirm the following:
   - Company signatory
   - Signing order
   - Whether the request should expire and, if so, when
   - The title, subject, and message within the notification emails sent
   - Any users to be CC'd into the request (users added to the CC field also receive notifications about the request)
   - The document to be sent (with the option to change the document if needed)
   - The option to send a self-test and preview the e-signature document before sending

# Sending out an e-signature document manually

To send an ad-hoc e-signature document to a candidate, click `More` on the candidate profile, then `Send E-Signature Document`.

On the following popover, select the document template, the e-signature provider, and the number and currency formatting. Then click `Generate E-Signature Document` to add the activity to the candidate's profile and go to the Sign popover.

# Previewing e-signature offers and documents sent via DocuSign

:::hint{type="info"}
The preview editor is available for both Dropbox Sign and DocuSign, but DocuSign provides more advanced preview options like editing recipients.
:::

Enable the preview editor under **E-Signature Settings** in [Admin > Organizational Settings > Offers > Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/offers/settings).

When enabled, you can preview the signature request in a document editor in the **Send E-Signature Request** or **Sign** popover. When sending an e-signature request, click `Preview` to access the editor and review the document.

The preview option also lets you add special document inputs for signatories to complete (for example, additional text boxes or checkboxes).

With the DocuSign preview editor, you can click the dropdown with a signatory's name to switch between signatories and make edits, or edit recipient configuration using advanced DocuSign settings. For example, click the `Needs to Sign` dropdown and switch this to an in-person signing. If you have a more advanced DocuSign plan, you can also configure witness signatories and more.

Currently, edits must be made in the preview editor for each e-signature request. We're working to add more support for these features to make the process less manual in the future.

# Accessing e-signature documents in DocuSign

E-signature documents and offer details are accessible from the offer activity on the candidate's profile. If an e-signature document was generated via DocuSign, you can access it within your DocuSign account as long as you have the necessary permissions.

If some users shouldn't be able to access certain documents in DocuSign, you can set document visibility. Read more in the [DocuSign Document Visibility guides](https://support.docusign.com/s/document-item?language=en_US\&bundleId=gbo1643332197980\&topicId=eui1578456411411.html&_LANG=enus).

[title] Quality of Hire Reports
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

Quality of Hire Reports give you visibility into how new hires are performing over time, drawing on data collected through Quality of Hire Surveys. This article covers the template reports available in the Template Library (including score composition, averages, and completion rate reports) and walks you through building custom reports using the Quality of Hire Enrollments and Quality of Hire Survey Steps reporting subjects.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on setting up Quality of Hire forms and sequences, see [Quality of Hire Surveys](docId:8HGJn7fBdlsBnk1fK-2Db).

For a deeper walkthrough of the full workflow, including setup, enrollments, and how to use reporting to connect outcomes back to hiring decisions, take the [Quality of Hire course](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/quality-of-hire) in Ashby Academy.
:::

# Permissions & access

Quality of Hire Surveys are available on the Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |



To view or build Quality of Hire reports, you need at minimum Elevated Access and the Quality of Hire access role. The Quality of Hire access role is not included in any role by default, including Organization Admin, and must be assigned separately by an Organization Admin. It can be scoped to specific teams or granted across the entire organization.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information, see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk) .
:::

# Template reports

We recommend you explore Quality of Hire reporting by starting with the template reports to help familiarize yourself with the available data.

These templates can be found in the [Template Library](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/templates/metrics) under Reports. Scroll to the Quality of Hire section.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f345650f7ec1f9dc1e81a4f4a456930f.png)

All Quality of Hire template reports analyze the numerical 1–5 value from the Quality of Hire Rating survey question.

To see the individual values submitted, you can use any of the Score Composition templates. To see averages, select any of the Average template reports.

We have the following template reports:

- **Quality of Hire Score Composition by Tenure:** This report looks at Quality of Hire submissions from every individual step and counts the total submissions by their 1–5 value, grouped by the tenure of the employee in months at the time of submissions. The default is to select submissions made over the last 12 months.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/88c099fd4f0159fe9aeb488e4dd12edd.png)

- **Average Quality of Hire Score by Tenure:** This report looks at Quality of Hire submissions from every individual step and forms an average, the tenure of the employee in months at the time of submissions.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/63d2e1357a0020aba5872afe25c8eab7.png)

- **Quality of Hire Score Composition over time:** This report forms a time series and counts the number of survey submissions in each month, grouped by the individual score value. This shows the overall composition of Quality of Hire submissions over time. In the case of multiple Quality of Hire submissions existing for a given time group (e.g., month), the latest submission within that period is used per employee.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c80712fc16064222f3c05a62d49a0267.png)

- **Average Quality of Hire Composition over time:** This report forms a time series of the average Quality of Hire submission per time group. By default, it looks at the last 12 months by month.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a50fe2b3edb0388180c801fdadd6346b.png)

- **Current Quality of Hire Score Composition:** This report presents the most recent Quality of Hire assessment value per employee and groups the results by the score value. This forms a quality distribution (1 through 5) across your employee base. By default, this report looks only at enrollments that started in the last 12 months.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c1e5744dcaeb320e417cd042d9e6ac0b.png)

- **Average Current Quality of Hire:** This report presents the average current Quality of Hire score across your employee base. If an employee had a historically low or high score, that will not be accounted for in this report: only the most recent assessment of each employee is considered.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5f6e06a81d66e555ca5f46fc16db097b.png)

- **Quality of Hire by Start Date Cohort:** This report presents a time series of the current Quality of Hire scores per employee, as grouped by your employee start date. This allows you to see how Quality of Hire has changed over time relative to your employee start dates, in addition to what volume of employees you are sampling.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3870fc0cc0085277c9953f4ca31844ce.png)

- **Average Quality of Hire by Start Date Cohort:** This report presents a time series of the average current Quality of Hire score, as grouped by your employee start date. This allows you to assess overall average Quality of Hire by start date cohorts and their other properties.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ebb78b39ebb55976c8e423f0961a383e.png)

- **Quality of Hire Completion Rates:** This is a diagnostic report that allows you to track how many survey steps have been requested, how many have been completed, along with the completion rate (%) and average time to completion. Think of it as a scorecard completion rate equivalent, focused on the hiring managers responsible for completing Quality of Hire surveys.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6474ecf3a3d6bcf4a2d22142de123ecd.png)

# Custom Quality of Hire report building

Ashby enables reporting of values given at each step or at the overall enrollment by exposing two distinct reporting subjects: Quality of Hire Enrollments and Quality of Hire Survey Steps.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/7e69269295780e448a23961acba5e490.png" size="60" isUploading="false" width="646" height="373" darkWidth="646" darkHeight="373" showCaption="false"}

## Quality of Hire Enrollments

The Quality of Hire Enrollments reporting subject is focused on the overall enrollment, i.e., the sequence the hiring manager participates in. The key fields relate to the Quality of Hire sequence status, which manager is enrolled, and the current Quality of Hire assessment of the employee.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0118ca69c57b726b133674204309fbba.png)

Ashby considers the assessment made at the most recent step to represent an employee's Quality of Hire, as assessed by the manager.

## Quality of Hire Survey Steps

The Quality of Hire Survey Steps reporting subject is focused on the data collected at each step of a Quality of Hire sequence. The fields available for reporting allow access to the status, who submitted the survey, and other step-specific details. This subject also permits analyzing historical Quality of Hire values to see the change over time for any individual employee.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/0583acd2292fc95f002b6129ec8e384b.png)

## Using the Quality of Hire reporting subjects

:::hint{type="info"}
For more information on custom reports involving Quality of Hire fields, see [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW).
:::

Navigate to [Reports > Build](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/build) to begin building custom reports by picking a report type, such as a Count over Time report. From there you can select one of the Quality of Hire subjects and proceed to build a report as desired.


[title] Ashby to S3 Data Share
[path] Integrations/Data Shares/

The Amazon Web Services (AWS) S3 Data Share provides a simple and flexible way for organizations on the Enterprise plan to access their Ashby data directly in Amazon S3. This option supports teams who prefer to work with data in their own AWS environment, where downstream systems can consume and query that data as needed.

# Permissions & access

The AWS S3 Data Share is available to organizations on the Enterprise plan only.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

# Overview: what you can expect

![Diagram showing how Ashby delivers data to your AWS S3 bucket](https://slabstatic.com/prod/assets/l73blu9g/post/79c9cwvn/preimages/xkad7NPWnGxAJgG2wXXjyvH9.png?jwt=eyJhbGciOiJSUzI1NiIsInR5cCI6IkpXVCJ9.eyJhdWQiOiJodHRwczovL3NsYWJzdGF0aWMuY29tIiwiZXhwIjoxNzY5NTUzNzczLCJpYXQiOjE3Njk1NDY1NzMsImlzcyI6Imh0dHBzOi8vYXBwLnNsYWIuY29tIiwianRpIjoiMzI3YjJlc3FoOHM2ajI5dGppZXNlbm8yIiwibmJmIjoxNzY5NTQ2NTczLCJwYXRoIjoicHJvZC9hc3NldHMvbDczYmx1OWcvcG9zdC83OWM5Y3d2biJ9.NvaWlQQ7MJxP0_xyhJxqbAsB0a8c1CIYX1NrsHHYWacW-1y3FQuSPWo3rCrOKMdkTy_he8Ah76Rfp7IUg16M5EWaE9YRB9NW6dtqQj8SsoLn_XvIcV0nDsZZg43jlx4AGSmYj0EaayM8EAZein0bSpSER8gBUcZQVYUWDLupiQ81f3jzwKonGHYGyYmEds_0rS2Ld2KdCl4gCwDK1ZRY0Kt_pRmCqxHk_j2Bl0BAyjLHaRutJA9BjxFHbzjsqY3dOyJ7Ex-WBEacGbE8ll5Nk-4eG8qJrpRi2jZPSjL2mkI4SReGeBBILFT57Z_NP6cxAkEqHB-qC4RdWekavkDSZA)

Once set up, Ashby delivers a complete, structured export of your data into a dedicated S3 bucket in your AWS account. Ashby organizes the data in a consistent format so your team can query it using any engine or platform of your choice (e.g., AWS Athena, Redshift, or Google BigQuery).

The data refreshes daily, and each cycle delivers a complete copy of your dataset to your S3 bucket. This approach removes the need for you to handle deduplication, merging, or change tracking.

# Setup: What you need to provide

To activate the S3 Data Share, your team creates an S3 bucket and an IAM role in your AWS account. Your Customer Success Manager provides the Ashby-specific values you need, and Ashby completes the remaining setup.

You do not need to grant access to any other AWS services or manage AWS credentials manually.

1. Reach out to your Customer Success Manager to start the setup process. Ashby provides the Ashby IAM User ARN and your unique Snowflake External ID.
2. Create or choose an S3 bucket in your AWS account for the daily data exports. The bucket name can be anything.
   - If possible, use the `us-east-1` (N. Virginia) region to avoid cross-region data egress from Ashby’s source environment.
   - You can configure S3 lifecycle rules, such as deleting older data after 30 days, according to your data governance needs.
   - Server-side encryption with AWS Key Management Service (SSE-KMS) is optional and supported.
3. Create an IAM role for Ashby:
   - In the AWS Console, navigate to **IAM > Policies > Create Policy > JSON**.
   - Paste the permission policy JSON from the section below, replacing the bucket-name placeholder with the name of your S3 bucket. This policy allows access to objects in that bucket only.

```javascript
{
  "Version": "2012-10-17",
  "Statement": [
    {
      "Effect": "Allow",
      "Action": ["s3:ListBucket", "s3:GetBucketLocation"],
      "Resource": "arn:aws:s3:::<your-bucket-name>"
    },
    {
      "Effect": "Allow",
      "Action": ["s3:PutObject", "s3:DeleteObject"],
      "Resource": "arn:aws:s3:::<your-bucket-name>/*"
    }
  ]
}
```

4. Save the policy and remember its name.
5. In the AWS Console, navigate to **IAM > Roles > Create Role > Custom Trust Policy**.
6. Paste the trust policy JSON from the section below. This policy allows Ashby’s IAM user to assume your role using the unique Snowflake External ID.

```javascript
{
    "Version": "2012-10-17",
    "Statement": [
        {
            "Effect": "Allow",
            "Principal": {
                "AWS": "arn:aws:iam::685689791302:user/iif00000-s"
            },
            "Action": "sts:AssumeRole",
            "Condition": {
                "StringEquals": {
                    "sts:ExternalId": "<ashby-external-id>"
                }
            }
        }
    ]
}
```

6. Select `Next`, select the permission policy you created on the **Add Permissions** page, and select `Next`.
7. Enter a role name, and select `Create Role`.
8. Send your Customer Success Manager the following details:
   - Your S3 bucket name.
   - The IAM role ARN for the role you created.
9. After Ashby receives these details, Ashby connects your role to your dedicated S3 integration and triggers the first sync to validate access.
10. Wait for Ashby to confirm that setup is complete. Your first data delivery arrives the following morning, Pacific Time, and continues daily thereafter.

# What you see in S3

On each sync cycle, your bucket receives a set of Parquet files representing the entirety of your Ashby data, structured in the following format:

:::BlockQuote
s3://\<bucket\_name>/ashby\_shares/\<table\_name>/sync\_dtm=\<YYYYMMDDHHMMSS>/\*.parquet
:::

Ashby organizes these exports for simple downstream use, whether you're loading them into a warehouse or querying directly with an engine like Athena.

With each successful sync, Ashby updates a `manifest.json` file in your bucket. The file includes the following:

- The `sync_dtm` for the latest successful sync (i.e., the most up-to-date folder for each table in the structure above)
- The list of tables and the row count for each synced table, with their column names and data types listed

The list of included tables and their schema are also available in the [Ashby Data Share schema spreadsheet](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1JTezzsoSDJag9RvXdvvUMlrIUSjeOllO4bwwE3-ffhI/edit?gid=1316200980#gid=1316200980). You can find an entity-relationship diagram (ERD) for the current set of shared tables in the [Ashby Data Share documentation](https://dbdocs.io/data-share/Ashby-Data-Share?view=relationships).

# Related data sharing options

If your organization uses Snowflake, you can also use our Enterprise Snowflake Data Share feature, which provides direct access to your Ashby data from within your own Snowflake instance. See [Ashby to Snowflake Data Share](docId\:pG1llokJQbRln5GoEhn2C) for more details.

# FAQ

### How often does the S3 data refresh?

The S3 Data Share refreshes data once per day.

### Is the data provided as a delta sync or snapshot?

Each day, Ashby delivers a full snapshot of your data, with the snapshot date indicated in the folder structure.

### What data is provided in the data share?

The list of included tables and their schema are available in the [Ashby Data Share schema spreadsheet](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1JTezzsoSDJag9RvXdvvUMlrIUSjeOllO4bwwE3-ffhI/edit?gid=1316200980#gid=1316200980) or our [Entity Relationship Diagram](https://dbdocs.io/data-share/Ashby-Data-Share) (ERD).&#x20;

### What information does Ashby provide before I configure AWS?

Ashby provides an IAM User ARN and a Snowflake External ID. Use both values when you configure the IAM role trust policy.

### What information do I send to Ashby after I configure AWS?

Send your S3 bucket name and IAM role ARN to your Customer Success Manager so Ashby can complete the setup.

### When do I receive my first data delivery?

After Ashby confirms that setup is complete, your first data delivery arrives the following morning, Pacific Time. Data continues to refresh daily.

[title] Getting Started with Analytics
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] Ashby Analytics
[path] /

Looking to pull key metrics in Ashby? Our Analytics documentation will help you get acquainted with Ashby's flexible reporting features.

# Getting Started with Analytics

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides will help you get acquainted with building reports and dashboards in Ashby, including configuring filters and grouping data to pull the key metrics you need.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🗺️ [Navigating Ashby Analytics](docId\:c4qQtPv0ApCJKHA63irlY)&#x20;

📈 [Ashby Analytics: Key Reporting Concepts](docId\:HuKCp0EIHAKDk4xUcuhnm)&#x20;

🛠️ [Building Your First Dashboard](docId\:Q7A7CpFpyulmT6bd1qVYm)&#x20;

📊 [Dashboard Filters](docId:2v47WMLRQuDcNEEY2TAzp)&#x20;

💾 [Saved Reports & Dashboards](docId\:vMMP-f27As-KD7JZV596u)&#x20;

🔓 [Permissions & Sharing Dashboards](docId\:NdRpeyX1FEJ35Uvnuled_)&#x20;

➡️ [Understanding & Reporting on Interview Stage Transitions](docId\:POvmlG6-CMYfRmx2QDaiz)&#x20;

❌ [Reporting Errors & Resolutions](docId\:Ysha-WLlfg2CweYNGnu9q)&#x20;

📁 [Exporting Reports and Dashboards](docId:27igCQgkUB63mmYMImLGN)&#x20;

🧮 [Calculated Fields](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x)&#x20;

👀 [Report View Options](docId\:doJWXiu3ZHGAA3h8OmeXz)&#x20;

❓ [How do I enable Advanced filters?](docId\:lwfo3dR5QsYmLGFeabeQ3)&#x20;

🏆 [Quality of Hire Reports](docId\:gpI3EuEN57-_Bs2GCEMHK)&#x20;
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
You can also learn more about getting started with Analytics in [Ashby Academy](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/home) - the following courses are available for you and your team:

🎓 [Analytics 100](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/analytics-100)&#x20;

📊 [Analytics 101](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-analytics-101)

📈 [Analytics 102](https://academy.ashbyhq.com/course/ashby-analytics-102)
:::

# Analytics: Best Practices

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Want to ensure your data hygiene is on point? These guides will help you follow best practices to ensure accurate reporting.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
⭐️ [Best Practices: Maintaining Data Quality](docId\:TYioyi4HcwMYr_cVycE5q)&#x20;

🔎 [Managing and Analyzing Archive Reasons](docId\:r1tYNIVQjQ5ikc3v8ctTF)&#x20;

🌲 [Evergreen Jobs/Postings](docId:2Hv8dTeeYw7KmR2cVrj8j)&#x20;

❓ [How do I report results in a specific timezone?](docId\:nqKrmUKZX8gSNvTgjVmX4)&#x20;

🔧 [Utilizing Stage Groups](docId:8ypvcP02S-0aiiEloOmRx)&#x20;

👥 [Reporting on Candidates vs Applications](docId:5aqpuEly1gP4mKMnd_Fne)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Analytics Glossary

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you can find a list of the different fields and subjects used in reporting.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📘 [Ashby Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

📗 [Greenhouse Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:nUD7ZhqTUvOMBfYespez0)&#x20;

📕 [Lever Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:jMY529sRVBo7DrJkGAEM9)&#x20;

📙 [Icon Glossary](docId:7m9i-sk7B8sUzz0OTX0nc)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Report Templates & Core Dashboards

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Report templates are available on all Ashby plans. Here you can find out more about the templates available.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📖 [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)&#x20;

📈 [Core Dashboards](docId\:nhvbeIsfV8wiqLWeEmF2t)&#x20;

💼 [Job Dashboard](docId:0QSDvWTdGrs9QVXNo3qrq)&#x20;

➡️ [Passthrough Report Features & FAQ](docId\:n4gfSfqvMCCCSUHSiqmZN)&#x20;

📊 [Pipeline History](docId\:gZFIh-s0JZxlItbfYD4Bw)&#x20;

👥 [Recruiting Planner](docId\:cFN3v0Gb2yi6gyonloelj)&#x20;

🧠 [Understanding Funnel Metrics](docId\:nd24STkT2Xn9z-9KphgCU)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Alerts & Exports

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Alerts allow you to set up custom notifications for your team. We have an alerts library full of templates to help you get inspired.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🔔 [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)&#x20;

📚 [Alerts Library](docId\:LPiy1G30DQMR35jMVlWCm)&#x20;

⏰ [Scheduled Dashboards](docId\:Ttr2OmUg9YQPx1nkCMJS9)&#x20;
:::
::::

# User Access & Sharing Metrics

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you can read more about report permissions. Analytics-only users can also read more about assigning licenses here.&#x20;
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
🔒 [Permissions & Licenses in Analytics](docId:8bZAxa42Hiw-iSUDGSz-q)&#x20;

📌 [Pin Reports to User Home Pages](docId\:fr6mWIETf_Wlzag-Sl8xR)&#x20;

👀 [View Only Users](docId\:eFxwrakIh90RlUlcGJeby)&#x20;

🕵️ [Confidential Reports & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
These guides are for Ashby Analytics users only. For more on migrating data from Greenhouse or Lever to Ashby All-In-One, check out [Migrations](docId:5B1bivkknuZghXjCFBqYZ)&#x20;
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
⚙️ [Greenhouse Integration Setup](docId\:BcVkgCzhiVtXUPxqjS6YJ)&#x20;

⚙️ [Lever API Key Setup](docId\:CbNRh-FeNw-s5ObwK24Ph)&#x20;
:::
::::

# Building Custom Reports & Dashboards

::::VerticalSplit{layout="left"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Custom report building is available for customers on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans. These guide help you to navigate the building options and provide some examples to help get you started.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
📊 [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)&#x20;

📈 [Adding Lines to Reports & Forecasts](docId\:niEKjgUlNHluob9lPKRdT)&#x20;

📚 [Report Catalog - Essentials](docId\:VOWdo_JJgdtwBzC4LIRMc)&#x20;

📚 [Report Catalog - Advanced](docId:24rONsZ2Xx5ToZdSakIq9)&#x20;

🤝 [Offer and Offer Acceptance Reports](docId\:LksLYvd7Qprq-9Wrx78VN)&#x20;

🎓 [Analytics Tutorial: Days in Current Stage Group](docId\:ylIdm3NLtOkZawWSrI7ZV)&#x20;

🧮 [Ratio Reports](docId\:Zep-4cIy3emEKomLZEet6)&#x20;

👯 [How to Copy a Dashboard](docId\:fbXzB6sFJRN0598ScYxfJ)&#x20;

🗓️ [Advanced Scheduling Metrics](docId:8KWNciPrYghzhdOqG6mUL)&#x20;
:::
::::


[title] Talent Llama
[path] Integrations/Other/

Screen talent faster and smarter through conversational AI. With Talent Llama, hiring teams gain a complete understanding of their applicant's capabilities in a fraction of the time.

## Overview

Talent Llama’s integration with Ashby allows hiring teams to automatically import and invite candidates to interview from any stage in the Ashby candidate pipeline. As interviews are completed, recruiters can move top candidates to the next stage or reject them directly from the Talent Llama evaluation screen.

## Setting up the Integration

### Connect Ashby to Talent Llama

From Talent Llama, in the Side Navigation at the bottom, click the `...` menu, then Integrations.  Then click the `Connect` button next to Ashby.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/663a6347507948ad59534e1e_ashby-connect.png)

### Create an API key

To connect Talent Llama with Ashby, you’ll need to create an Ashby API Key. More on creating an API key on [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ) Once you have the API Key, in Talent Llama, enter this value in the API Key field.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/6627cac5e72eb71401a9df6a_LVYwuM6L-o1UncXt9U7BtdIMpjz0__rRAPNVlddfXFziyAq-QRgowt-_MPohNmJ3Bcc0S0BXKFvzbhPTCXij7KHg_Tdcqz62gWT8TWvxLoC1khMFQQ9U7hMx8VFCYVeAN-1j3praJpMOflELcyaLjKM.png)

### Save the Integration in Talent Llama

With the API Key entered, you can now click Save to enable the connection with Ashby.  You will see `Disconnect` and `Edit` buttons if connected correctly.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/663a6390a27e6b8cfdda9dc0_ashby-save.png)

## Use the Talent Llama integration with Ashby

With your integration connected, you can now send Talent Llama interview invitations when candidates first apply or when they move into one or more stages.

### Import Applicants from Ashby

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/663a63c7a87019886abee7c4_ashby-import.png)

1. From the Applicants tab, click the button to the right that says `Import from Ashby`
2. Find the Job from Ashby by typing the job name
3. Select the Job from which you want to import applicants
4. Select one or more Stages from which you want to import applicants
5. Click `Start Import`
6. Check the status of any import by clicking the `Import History` button at the top of the Applicants tab

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/6627cac58aacd28df75aa1e8_2NKpIgCg0bRFSz-BJ6ejG8_VsSTUfQZN5wKds_L0S5vUStIL0NEUH989CKm81MzMpHd5cakPsxMUIN-YaQOW2VLS-UptYCzYcV0aTDdQZFEwhJ184zoM_xTOf8xUJf8Dwqz8TE5FkTQBV89cMsLpdmo.png)

### Turn on Automatic Invitations (Optional)

If you want full automation of interview invitations, you can configure Talent Llama to auto-send email invitations when applicants are imported.  Make sure to review your email invitation content under Account Settings before activating.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/663a64098a5ca272d9f45ba1_invite-ashby.png)

### Edit Linked Job Interview Stages

If you’ve made a mistake when selecting interview stages, or changed your hiring workflow, you can edit the interview stages that will be synced with Talent Llama.  When applicants move into one of these Interview Stages, their application will automatically be imported into Talent Llama.

‍

### Update Applicant Status from Talent Llama Evaluation

When applicants finish their interview, Talent Llama provides an instant evaluation.  With the Talent Llama and Ashby Connection, you can modify the applicant’s status in Ashby directly from the Talent Llama evaluation.  You’ll know an applicant is synced to Ashby from the logo and Interview Stage showing next to the applicant’s name.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/663a5b7b2207361d28b4013b_Ashby%20stages.png)

Change Interview Stages: Select the Interview Stage you’d like to move the Applicant to and submit

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/6627cac5dc4080afb28ff0b3_z6RHhhoBtoCrfwugXvqsikK1466Ol3OoCAfQ01QUy4Zoo5Nb4GwrifKw5ElGnHHudU1ozM3enobl6inE6OWccLAcdmLV9K5tPqMBkC8drf0i3uOgd4ffgdElIwV5oxanD0YbCHn1caQRMPvnf8j_wrc.png)

Archive (Reject): Select the Archive Reason, add an optional note, and submit

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/6627cac51c26a0c5917e8381_dZ0g8Vi3-zQNo-_nRzy7Dz_viJISSQ-sQj8vcUdmsBdjeQa93edlIdzwvV1lNQroBK4c1-zShTzdPE83jSIUgXY7oiGA8-ztRpf2Wf-cG3PMDtbScqBuTNkS8TOM4WYo5bkEzUfunPcFULgWt5g4Y9U.png)

‍

### View Talent Llama Evaluation Summary in Ashby

Applicant Status changes can be seen in Ashby immediately.  Talent Llama will also push evaluation results to the Ashby Feed as a Note.

![](https://cdn.prod.website-files.com/6616b14e5fe690636b0829f5/6627cac58ae720f13fab19ce_DMikaZhK38QRfKoOvcWvfqS-75VNm4gSB-ANOANgS_RkPzaSddpq99YTqV7Ua2DgoF8YtGn3BsFfLhqKeTFzAuvUM9tUQ38GF7adfnrJnij_gp0HhCgbvv158u3LbmC3TE8GmKev5rDgW9ZvNTYS8nw.png)

:::hint{type="success"}
That’s it, happy interviewing!
:::

## Additional resources

For additional information or troubleshooting not covered here, reach out to [support@talentllama.com](mailto\:support@talentllama.com)

[title] Permissions & Licenses in Analytics
[path] Ashby Analytics/User Access & Sharing Metrics/

This guide covers how to add permissions and licenses to users in Ashby Analytics. If you are using Ashby All-In-One, review our [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk) guide.

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on adding and removing Ashby users, check out [How do I provision new users in my Ashby account manually?](docId\:jGh_sn34VmMT0V5cEZHA8)
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be an Organization Admin to grant user permissions in Ashby Analytics.
:::

# Overview

When adding new users in Ashby Analytics, make sure you:

- **Grant Permissions:** the `Permissions` tab of the user profile lets you specify which data the user has access to, e.g. limiting reporting to a specific job or department.
- **Assign licenses:** the `Licenses` tab lets you assign a View Only or Admin license. The license type determines what features the user has access to, e.g. if they are able to build reports or not.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Licenses are an additional permissions option available in Ashby Analytics only.
:::

- **Configure the user's home page (optional):** the `Home Page` tab lets you pin specific reports or dashboards to the user home page for easy access.

## Organization Admin

:::hint{type="success"}
This is a common role for analysts, admins, heads of talent, recruiting ops folks, etc. Many companies also grant the entire recruiting team this access level.
:::

If you make someone an Organization Admin, they have access to all data in Ashby (excluding their own linked profile). Organization Admins don't have access to confidential roles by default.

To provide the user access to all confidential roles, switch **Has access to all confidential jobs and projects within assigned permissions** to `Yes`. If you'd prefer to only provide access to some confidential jobs, you can add access to these roles in the **Access Restrictions** section of the `Permissions` tab.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/5ee969335ad43cb824315d61006f42e4.png" size="70" alt="Screenshot of the Organization Admin Permissions settings in Ashby Analytics" isUploading="false" width="719" height="713" darkWidth="719" darkHeight="713" showCaption="false"}

## Admin for particular departments and jobs

If you want to grant someone partial access, select Elevated Access as the global role.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JsBEQg9bbKCA6L0RGYeBr_employees-ashby-2026-09-28-at-23036-pm.jpg" size="70" isUploading="false" width="764" height="269" darkWidth="764" darkHeight="269" alt="Ashby employee Permissions page for Berneice Durgan, showing the Global Settings User Role set to Elevated Access." showCaption="false"}

From here, you can grant individual access roles for departments or jobs.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PEHNuz0Tu6CQdQEIqxndt_employees-ashby-2026-09-28-at-23314-pm.jpg" size="80" isUploading="false" width="752" height="423" darkWidth="752" darkHeight="423" alt="Ashby Access Roles settings showing Admin access restricted to the Accounting team across all locations, with no Job Access Roles assigned." showCaption="false"}

In the example above, Berneice has Admin access to the Accounting team. The Admin access role grants access to all data, except for private fields. For example, Berneice can't see or report on salary information on offers, since those fields are marked as private.

## Admin private for particular departments and jobs

This role configuration is very similar to the above, except that the user can report on private fields and hired candidates as well.

# License types

Ashby Analytics has two different license types.

**Analytics - Admin**

Users assigned this license can explore report templates and save and edit reports and dashboards. They have access to all features in Ashby Analytics.

**Analytics - View Only**

Users with this license are limited to viewing reports created by Analytics - Admin users. They can configure their personal home page to show their preferred dashboards and reports, but they can't create new reports or explore data (e.g. via filtering) on their own.

# User home page configuration

New users start with no reports or dashboards on their home page by default. Admin users can pin a custom selection of any report or dashboard to each user's home page to ensure they see the required reporting when they log in to Ashby.

Navigate to the **Employees** section of the **Admin** view, and select the `Home Page` tab of any employee profile to add, remove, or arrange home page content.

![Screenshot of the Home Page tab in the Ashby Admin employee profile view](https://cdn.zappy.app/4d653124a6950970c93b623119f952a5.png)

1. Click and drag using the grid icon to the left of the reports or dashboards you'd like to move to re-order them.
2. Click the trash can icon to remove a report or dashboard from the user's home page.
3. Click `+ Add` to add a new report or dashboard to the user's home page.

[title] Understanding Funnel Metrics
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

This document reviews funnel metric concepts, how to build funnels in Ashby and how to interpret the results.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/12f9abbe40a3476dbc29f11f9f1305ae"}

### Building a funnel in Ashby

Funnels are part of Ashby's standard report template library. Simply navigate to Reports > Templates and select Funnel Report from the library. By default, Ashby's funnel report selects all Job Considerations (for Greenhouse users: Applications, Lever users: Opportunities) with interview activity in the last 6 months.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KFN72EEKNDEOlPUM4a2nw_funnelreport2.png)

### What goes into a funnel? How selections form a cohort

When Ashby's funnel report defaults to selecting all Job Considerations that had an interview in the last 6 months, a selection is taking place. That selection results in a fixed group to analyze, sometimes referred to as a cohor&#x74;**.** The starting stage of the funnel shows the size of the cohort, giving a total count above the bar. In the example above, a cohort of 1,962 Job Considerations were selected for analysis in the funnel.

:::hint{type="info"}
As a single candidate can have multiple Job Considerations it's possible that an individual candidate contributes to a funnel multiple times, and progresses to different stages per Job Consideration.
:::

### Completed Job Considerations Only

For a funnel to be accurate, it can only analyze Job Considerations that have completed their interview process (either hired or archived). As we do not know in advance how far any consideration will progress, the funnel will be skewed if any counting occurs prematurely.

### Interpreting Funnel Results

Reading our funnel report from left to right, we see that the first stage shows the total cohort size, as noted above. The subsequent stages show a percent conversion from the prior step. The 78.2% in the second stage is the percentage of the first stage that proceeded, and so on. This percentage is sometimes referred to as a "passthrough rate".

Passthrough rates near 0% or 100% indicate that a stage is either extremely difficult, or extremely easy, respectively. In such cases, it is often recommended you consult your hiring team to evaluate the process at that stage.

:::hint{type="info"}
Job Considerations that skip a stage or are inserted into your interview process at a late stage, such as going straight to onsite, will be counted as having passed all earlier stages. This is done to guarantee consistency of all numbers, otherwise funnels could have greater than 100% progress for a given stage.
:::

### Funnels summarize progress, not activity

It is common for funnel reports to be mistaken for activity reports. As noted above, a funnel report is a combination of two things: a set of stages, and a cohort. The funnel report shows the summary outcome of many considerations over time, but it does not summarize when the activity at each stage took place.

A funnel report that shows 600 onsites is stating that 600 onsites took place amongst the Job Considerations selected in the cohort, but not when. You may be able to infer roughly in what period those onsites took place from the definition of your cohort, but it is recommended you use an interview activity report or stage transition report for summarizing activity in a specific timeframe.

### Summary

Ashby's template funnel report examines Job Considerations that have completed their consideration by summarizing how far through the interview process they progressed. An initial selection is made by selecting a timeframe and any combination of filters, which results in an initial group of considerations, sometimes referred to as a cohort. The cohort is defined by your selection criteria, and the size is given by the initial bar in the funnel report. The subsequent progress from stage to stage is expressed as a percentage of the prior stage, highlighting where great ease or difficulty is found in your interview process.


[title] Ashby Analytics: Key Reporting Concepts
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

Ashby is powerful and flexible, but you only need to understand a few key concepts in order to build your own reports. The sections below discuss these key concepts.

## Fields

One of the powerful concepts in Ashby is the ability to search, filter and group by any field on any object or subject. The better you understand the concept of fields, and which fields are available to you, the faster you will be at building reports.

A field is an information point within the subject that can be used for filtering your report results, grouping your report results or be included in your results if creating a custom report.&#x20;

So, for example, a job’s department is a field and could be used to:

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem


- Filter results to only show data for the jobs within that department.




- Be used to group results so data is displayed per department so comparisons can be drawn.




- Be shown on a custom list report, perhaps as part of an export of job data, or to be included as part of the report details within an Alert.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem


![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6707ac008d20aac132878c8631e1c189.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/fcba3c13e6f9cf82f28980d48cc8a3b3.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b63c022cb6738e5fe7e735d00cfed95e.png)
:::
::::

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on a specific subject and/or field, please check out [Ashby Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj).
:::

## Filtering

Filtering is one of the most essential pieces in Ashby. Filters allow you to set specific limits to the view the most relevant data to you.

### Time Range

Some reports (such as Count Over Time or Segmentation) require you to set a time range, which serves as a filter. You’ll be prompted to select a timestamp on your subject (for example Started At on a job consideration or application) and then a time range. Any data that falls within the time range specified (based on the determined timestamp), will then be displayed.

So, for example, if a time range is set to Started At and within the last three months, all job considerations that were created within the last three months will be shown on the report, providing that no further filters are added.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/68772273bf531aa57a15fc17c419fab5.png)

### Filters

If you’re looking for very specific information, you can use filters to set criteria. Only the data that matches your set criteria will then be shown in your results.

Filters are commonly used to filter data by department, source, location, job and more.

In Ashby, you can use basic filters, or advanced filters if you’d like to filter by something more specific.

If the `Advanced` option is not enabled, then you can quickly select a job, source, team and/or location from the dropdowns to quickly filter results by those fields.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/621c3c09314fedaf045d769fb1bf8442.png)

If the `Advanced` option is enabled, click `+ Add Field to Match` to then pick from a wide range of filter fields.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ecda142f53a0ee724ede0f5b70bad509.png)

## Grouping

The last important building block in Ashby is the concept of grouping values.

You can group values to display your data in the most relevant way to you by created subgroups. One common example is grouping your results per department or location.

You can click `Add Field to Group By` to select your chosen field to group your results by. The fields available are based on the Subject selected for the report.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1bd4018ef76d6f28b1ee358a768010b8.png)

Some report templates are configured to group by a specified field already. The Passthrough Rates with Groupings report template will automatically group by the application or job consideration’s source. You can click the trash can icon to remove the field from the Group By section and then select an alternative field if needed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ff7b0b64544d8117bb5c02f875bd1f2b.png)

You can also add multiple groupings to a report if you’d like more granular results. If you’d like to adjust your groupings, you can click and drag the fields you are grouping by to re-order them.

For example, pictured we have a passthrough rate report grouped by department and by job - as such, the department results are listed, then these results are broken down further by each specific job.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/10c2a207b22835b87a197a97fb57aaed.png)

## Date Ranges and Best Practices

Most reports report on specific timeframes, and some even report on trends over time. This video gives a quick overview of the most important things to understand about date fields in Ashby.

When building a report, you’ll be prompted to select a time field and time range to determine the data shown within your report.

### Time Ranges

Once you’ve selected your time field, the `To Show` dropdown allows you to then select your time range. Some options are dynamic and some are static.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8a1e8276c12913358c55b44c3a636421.png)

The dynamic options update results as time goes by, whereas the static options remain fixed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/055395de1907f479e5a9fcc0d07f4fb9.png)

:::ExpandableHeading
### Open for a list of time ranges

**Dynamic time ranges**

This Week: Displays the current week (Monday to Sunday)

This Month: Displays the current calendar month

This Quarter: Displays the current quarter so far

This Fiscal Quarter: Displays the current fiscal quarter so far

This Year: Displays the current calendar year so far

This Fiscal Year: Displays the current fiscal year so far

Today: Displays results from today

Last Week: Displays the previous week (Monday to Sunday)

Last Month: Displays the previous calendar month

Last Quarter: Displays the previous quarter

Last Fiscal Quarter: Displays the previous fiscal quarter

Last Year: Displays the previous calendar year

Last Fiscal Year: Displays the previous fiscal year

Yesterday: Displays results from yesterday

In the last…: A rolling time window that displays results that fall within the specified time frame in the past (for example, in the last three months)

In the next…: A rolling time window that displays results that fall within the specified time frame in the future (for example, in the next year)

**Fixed time ranges**

Since…: From the specified date until now.

Before…: Any results prior to the specified date.

Between…: Results between a specified start date and end date.

On…: Results on a specific date.
:::

### Intervals

For Count Over Time reports, you’ll also be prompted to select an interval. The interval will group the qualifying data so you can track results across each day, week, month, quarter, fiscal quarter, year, fiscal year.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/41faa90ed7168dfe7dd06305208897c8.png)

## Advanced Filtering via Multiple Fields

Advanced filtering allows you to build a nested query, so you can specify multiple fields that should be true for data to qualify.

To filter by multiple fields, click `Add Field to Match` and then search for and select Multiple Fields.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/53a1c8b0882bc8345df600cd21048147.png)

Make sure to check that the Multiple Fields option you select is one that will have the fields you are looking to filter by.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Be aware that, depending on your subject, there may be a number of Multiple Fields options (for example, if searching by candidate, you may see Multiple Fields options for the candidate’s application, interview, etc.
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cada048b203f335fd43e66f34fec907b.png)

From here, you will then see that an All are true clarifier is added to the Filter section. Use the Add Field to Match option again to add your fields and specify your criteria.

And, Or and Not options are also supported:

And: Sets the criteria to All is true. All criteria specified must be met to be shown in the report results.

Or: Sets the filter to Any are true. If any of the filters configured are met, then the data will be shown in the report’s results.

Not: Sets the filter to The following is not true. Only data that doesn’t meet the criteria specified in the filter will be shown in the report results.

![The example here filters for any applications that haven’t been archived and that weren’t created or started before February 26, 2025. As such, only active candidates with applications submitted after this date will be shown in the results. ](https://cdn.zappy.app/0b48f52c84d2c7b1c363831cc2ec340f.png)

The example above filters for any applications that haven’t been archived and that weren’t created or started before February 26, 2025. As such, only active candidates with applications submitted after this date will be shown in the results.

## Calculated Fields

Calculated fields are an advanced feature that allow you to remap ATS data for reporting purposes. For example, you can take all sources from your ATS and group them into a custom set of buckets. You can read more on this at [Calculated Fields](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x).

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/47heuydXVPjmJl2qpxKqG-ei.png)

### Using a calculated grouping field to remap sources.

The videos below provides a quick introduction. Starting with Calculated Grouping Fields.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f9b9214197f44a3abe01d2640664cbd3"}

This video show how to use Filter Bucket Fields, a more advanced version of the bucketing field shown above:

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b1d7abd948944bd4959f64a487b4760d"}



# Timezones and Reporting

When creating reports in Ashby the default behavior is to preset results in the user’s timezone. This behavior can be adjusted by using the timezone selector. There are three timezone options to choose from:

- User Timezone (Default): The report will dynamically adjust to present results in the viewer’s User Timezone
- Organization Timezone: The report will present results in the organization timezone for all viewers
- Custom Timezone: The report will present results in the specified timezone for all viewers

Your organization timezone is configured by your admin under the Admin > Data Mapping > Timezone section. Each user can set their user timezone in their personal account settings. By default, all user timezones are set to the organization timezone.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/fa5e697256f94a3d996ea7b70a9191e7"}

# Mapping Interview Stages to Stage Groups

For the purpose of reporting, all interview plan stages are mapped into a "grouped" interview plan. During setup we have created a grouped interview plan for you, but you can edit it at any time in Admin > Data Management> Grouped Interview Plan. To read more about this process, see [Utilizing Stage Groups](docId:8ypvcP02S-0aiiEloOmRx).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/20df8c26d976cd59f6267752fd5eae0b.png)

If you are using Ashby Analytics only and are using data from Lever or Greenhouse, you'll want to map the individual stage names into one of your grouped stages. To do this, head to Admin > Data Mapping > Greenhouse Interview Stage Mapping. You can then using the Pick stage group dropdowns to determine the Ashby stage group your interview stages should map to.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4398654bdb237943bf5cbac41a20b761.png)

# Fiscal Year Support

Custom Fiscal Year support is available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

Ashby supports reporting on a shifted fiscal year. To enable this functionality, navigate to your Admin > Data Mapping > Fiscal Year section. After you enable fiscal year support, select the first day of your fiscal year.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/WEeV7vmwpS5_Im7eYkkDDbyX.png)

After you enable this feature, when selecting timeframes or filter on date fields, you'll see quick options for selecting fiscal quarters or years, when reporting. Below is a short video demonstrating the use of fiscal calendar fields.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/2264b6b3bbd9430686023aa3b499097b"}

# FAQ

:::::ExpandableHeading
### How are interviews counted in Ashby?

We are planning on changing the counting behavior. Feedback about the way interviews are currently counted is welcome!

Currently, how interviews are counted depends on the report type and the groupings that are applied.

When counting Interviews,  in the Count Over Time and the Segmentation report, Ashby counts one interview per candidate and stage

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
We find this to be the most common report users need; and they typically want to answer "How many onsite interviews did we have this week?" In most cases that means "How many candidates had an interview in the onsite stage in a given week"?

Therefore we apply a special counting mechanism in these report types. We count only one interview per candidate & stage. So if a graph shows 22 onsite interviews for a given week, this means that 22 candidates had an onsite in the interview stage in that week (independent of how many interviews took place in that stage or how many interviewers participated in the interviews).

In this week, 22 candidates had an onsite interview.

The exception to this rule is if you group the report by Interviewer. In that case we break out each individual participation of each interviewer. E.g. a panel of 4 interviews, with 2 interviewers each, would count as 8. A bit more on Interviewer Participations, below.

This special rule currently only applies to the Count Over Time and the Segmentation Report, as these are most commonly used to report on this type of metric.




:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/rNLFvV9hDZ-Bdyk0c_lYBzvo.png)


:::
::::

When counting Interview Participations in any report, Ashby counts all the participants across all interviews

When counting interview participations Ashby sums up all the interviews and all their participants. E.g. a panel of 4 interviews, with 2 interviewers each, would count as 8.

When counting Interviews in a custom list reports, all individual interviews within a round are counted

In this case, we assume the user simply wants to see all individual interviews. A panel of 4 different interviews will result in 4 entries in the custom list report (independent of how many participants are in each interview).

When counting Interviews in the interview : hire ratio report and in the interview load report, Ashby counts individual interviews

In these reports, as of today, a panel of 4 interviews, with 2 interviewers each, would count as 4. In the near future we will likely change this to count interview participations instead. In that case a panel of 4 interviews, with 2 interviewers each, would count as 8.
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### How often are reports and dashboards refreshed?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Report results are refreshed live when a report is opened. As a dashboard is essentially a collection of reports, all reports on the dashboard are refreshed upon initially opening said dashboard. If the dashboard page itself is refreshed or any of the reports from that dashboard are then viewed directly, they’ll pull from that cached version created upon the dashboard initally being opened.

While on the dashboard, every report has via their top-right option menu the choice to refresh and re-run the report, rather than pulling from the cached version. This option is also available when viewing a report directly.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BQnV-Fyd4XXjLVHKCtcrm_screenshot2022-11-04at102607am.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8d197cdd3607dbc57f08a0fd24085d91.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do Chart Legends work?

When viewing a chart in Ashby, you’ll see the groups that your results are grouped by listed beneath the chart. These group labels are referred to as chart legends.

For example, here is a stacked bar chart showing the number of job considerations started per week over the last three months. The results are grouped by department and we can see each department listed as a chart legend below the chart for reference:

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f896e43243d058959c6b76fd0b0dd8ee.png)

This is not only for clarifying colour coding. You can hover over each legend item to view results within that group across the report. Here, for example, we’re hovering over the Product legend item so those results are highlighted:

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2d6d9f0236a5e57f7ce3d02a4259b6e6.png)

You can also click on a legend item tag or colour swatch to remove that group from the report. The legend item won’t disappear completely, you will be able to click on the colour swatch again to add those results back into the report. In this example, we’ve clicked the swatch for the Marketing department legend item to hide results from that department on this report.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d87a8669141b82a9aa5a5a33ffe1f651.png)

If you click on the legend item name, you can focus the report on that specific legend item without needing to remove all other legend items from the report. So here, we’ve clicked on People Operations to see only the results for the People Operations department.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5e1a34468d9a59581b74c71c7b6dae26.png)




:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What is the difference between the two "Recruiter" fields in Ashby?

You might have noticed that Ashby has two recruiter fields. This is because the recruiter assigned to an individual application can be different than the recruiter assigned to a  job (this is true for all other hiring team roles as well). In most cases you want to use Recruiter field associated directly with the application, as that yields the most accurate results.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/0_mwF0ohoD9zwXaPcFTKoQ_s.png)


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens when I group by hiring manager on a job that has multiple hiring managers assigned?

We will count activity towards all hiring managers that are assigned to a job. For example if hiring manager Simon and Alexa are both assigned to a Head of Design job in your ATS, and there are 10 offers associated with that job, we would show 10 offers for each Simon and Alexa (assuming they don't have offers belonging to other jobs).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### How do I copy or duplicate a report?

When viewing your report, click the Save button. From here, you’ll have the option Save As New Report… Click this to create a new copy of your report, or, if you’ve made changes to the existing report, create a new report that reflects those changes without applying them to the current report.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f025a44b42f20878d8ca52c0cab1bd93.png)
:::


[title] Rippling
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Once a candidate has accepted an offer you can push their data into Rippling to kick off the new employee onboarding process.

## Overview

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync                 | Notes                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | ----------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| See Notes          |         ✔          |        ❌          | One-way sync from Ashby to Rippling | By default name, email address, phone number, salary and start date are pulled over and surfaced in Rippling.<br /><br />You have the option to enable the following custom offer fields: Department, Equity Shares, Job Title, Signing Bonus and Work Location. Offer letters can now also be pushed. |

## Set up Rippling

To set up the Rippling integration, click [here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/rippling) to navigate to the Rippling page in Admin > Integrations. Install the Ashby app in Rippling by clicking the green `Connect to Rippling` button in the righthand slideout sidebar.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/7d366b6b7a7e499fb08240743765b1c3?sid=c6e520ff-42ec-4d96-ab04-7b36a1791df8"}

Once that process is complete, return to the Rippling page in Ashby’s Admin section to select the fields you’d like to sync.

## Push Candidate Data to Rippling

After the offer is accepted and the candidate is marked Hired, data can be sent to Rippling manually or automatically.

### Push Candidate Data to Rippling via the activity on the candidate profile

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ba0d049248844611b62cebbfc078ae57"}

When a candidate accepts an offer and is marked as Hired, you see an option to push hired candidates to your HRIS system. Clicking `Add to Rippling` will create a new Employee in the system, including the data from their latest offer.

If you have multiple post-hire integrations in place, you can click Select a Post Hire Integration, then select Rippling from the list on the following pop-up. You will see a success message when the candidate has been successfully added.

Once the candidate has been pushed to Rippling, you’ll see a record of this as an event in their feed on their profile.

### Pushing Candidate Data to Rippling automatically

:::hint{type="warning"}
One candidate will need to have been previously pushed to the system via the manual steps above before this can be enabled.
:::

After the offer is accepted and the candidate is marked Hired, data can be sent to Ripping via an automatic sync. To enable this:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > HRIS Integrations**
2. Check `Automatically push hired candidates to HRIS integrations`

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/QlP5REGtSnP4bKQP0Ofj4_automatically-push-hired-candidates-to-hris-integrations.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1898" height="464" darkWidth="1898" darkHeight="464" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

## Hiring the Candidate in Rippling

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
The candidate data is pushed to Rippling but is not added to the flow as a fully configured hire. To add them as a hire, click the Hire option when in Rippling.

On the following page, select the `A Candidate in the Applicant Tracking System` option in the Who do you want to hire? section, then search for the candidate and select them from the results. Then continue the hiring process in Rippling.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e95620f8b2df7428fb888bc80502cb0e.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c11cb245eebe28984f89905ff291dc74.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/af8fbda00cdfa7022b0719b3201040a0.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/637d6149686d15b1373b063420ecfc6c.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/af1038075cffc0cf1bc7a781aa01b2f2.png)


:::
::::



## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What fields are synced in Rippling?

- Email Address
- Phone Number
- Salary
- Start Date
- Name
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Some of my offer custom fields are duplicated within Custom Fields - should I archive the custom fields I’ve created in Ashby or the offer custom fields synced via the Rippling integration?

Once you’ve configured the integration with Rippling, custom fields with the Rippling source will be tagged as such within Admin > Organization Setup > Custom Fields.

Do not archive these fields and complete these fields within offers to ensure this information is synced to Rippling. You will also be able to report on the content of these fields. If you have duplicates, be sure to archive those originally created within Ashby.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c85c10f5620939aeb477e1077e909f97.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I pushed a candidate to Rippling but I’m not seeing the candidate or some fields of data are missing from the candidate in Rippling. What do I do?

Please view the question above to confirm fields that should be pulled over to Rippling. If the missing fields are values that should have been sent to Rippling, please reach out to Rippling’s support team.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
### I've sent over multiple candidates from Ashby to Rippling - can I use the Hire Multiple People option when adding new hires and still pull candidates pushed over from Ashby?

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can, yes.  After clicking Hire in Rippling, select Hire multiple people, then Candidates in the applicant tracking system on the following page. You’ll then be able to search for and add new hires with the candidate data pushed over from Ashby.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7b44af705c7fcd0caee3a3270c408e41.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c911d188afd29a10872ce1291cdbebc3.png)
:::
::::
:::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Where does the offer letter get synced to in Rippling?

You can find the new hire’s offer letter in the Documents section of their profile in Rippling, under Agreements.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e12a9ab13ac2ba89a87bfb8b0d1507c5.png)
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### I’ve already pushed over a hired candidate to Rippling - can I push them over again?

Once a candidate is pushed to a post-hire system, there isn’t a way to repush the same candidate
:::


[title] Intrro
[path] Integrations/Other/

Intrro is 1-place to manage your employee referral program. That’s announcing the jobs you need referrals for, unifying your company network to find matching candidates, organizing referral campaigns, and managing bonus payouts, all in one centralized tool.

## Creating an API key in Ashby

1. Head over to the [Intrro integration settings page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/intrro) and tap on the `+Create API key for Intrro` button.
2. Copy the API key generated because this will need to be entered in Intrro.

![Intrro.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/W2Z1uMuETrHA_wF80g164_intrro.gif)

## Enabling the Ashby integration in Intrro

1. Head over to your Intrro Dashboard, navigating to Settings > Company Settings > Integrations. Under ATS integration, click on `Connect`.
2. Select Ashby from the integrations catalog.
3. Paste the API key generated from Ashby.
4. Click on `Continue` after reviewing permissions Ashby will access.
5. You’re all set! You can now export referrals in Intrro to Ashby.

## Video Walkthrough

Here’s a screencast of how to set up the Intrro integration and walkthrough of where to access the features of this integration.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/590f65dab9f94a89b89489858d53068f"}

## How the integration works

Projects will need to be created in Intrro for the role(s) you’re hiring for, matching the Ashby Job. It’s recommended to name the Project with the job title for Employees to distinguish easily when referring candidates.

Employees can then see referrals that are matched for those jobs when logging into Intrro. When they refer the candidate, they’ll send a notification for the candidate to accept the referral. Upon acceptance, a candidate profile will be created in Ashby to include all of their contact and work/education information, and they’ll be added to the Application Review stage of that job.

You can view Intrro candidates in the stage by including a Referral candidate source on the job’s Application Review stage.

![referral.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4OOFUECJJFZR_c97Jv5uh_referral.png)


[title] Velocity Global
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Velocity Global helps you hire, pay, and manage your dream team—everywhere.

This integration is free for all Velocity Global clients, and Velocity Global’s Integrations team will walk you through the configuration from start to finish.

For technical support, reach out to [integration@velocityglobal.com](mailto\:integration@velocityglobal.com) and let them know you’d like to configure the integration with Ashby. They’ll put you in contact with a Solutions Engineer who can assist you throughout the setup process, offer guidance, and provide you with any additional resources that you need.

For detailed instructions on setting up your integration, visit the Velocity Global Help Zone page [here](https://help.velocityglobal.com/technology-platform/ashby-velocity-global-integration).

[title] Greenhouse Subject & Field Definitions
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics Glossary/

If you're an Ashby Analytics customer using Greenhouse, here you can find a list of the subjects and filters available to you, along with definitions for your reference.

## Subject Definitions

| Subject                    |  Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Application                |  A candidate’s record on a specific job.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Prospect Application       |  Leads/prospects in Greenhouse. These prospects can be converted to candidates.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Job                        |  A requisition.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Interview                  |  Scheduled interviews in your ATS. Interviews can be counted as one per stage (ie. an onsite panel with 4 different interviews will count as 1 onsite interview) or one per scheduled interview (ie. an onsite panel with 4 different interview sill count as 4 interviews).  |
| Interviewer Participation  |  Scheduled interviewers. Each interviewer counts as an interview participation. These tie closely to feedback forms.                                                                                                                                                          |
| Interview Stage Transition |  Moves to and from stages. Accidental stage moves will be detected and counted.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Sequence                   |  Sequences initiated through Gem.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Feedback Form              |  Scorecards in Greenhouse. We pull in the person who submitted, when they submitted, and the overall recommendation.                                                                                                                                                          |
| Opening                    |  Headcount for a requisition.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
|  Candidate                 |  Candidates in Greenhouse.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Diversity Survey           |  Custom diversity surveys that are created in Greenhouse. This is not attached to EEOC responses since those have a very strict formatting, whereas the diversity surveys are customized per organization.                                                                    |
| Sourcing Activity          |  Sourcing activities initiated through Gem.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |



## Time Frame Filter Definitions

| Subject                    | Time Frame Filter          | Definition                                                                                                                                                      |
| -------------------------- | -------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Application                | Started At                 | The time at which the application was created. Either when a candidate applied or when a user considered them for the job in Ashby.                             |
|                            | Last Activity At           | The point in time of the last activity performed on the application.                                                                                            |
|                            | Offer Stage Entered Date   | The point in time the application entered the offer stage of the application process.                                                                           |
|                            | Hired At                   | The point in time at which a candidate was hired for a job.                                                                                                     |
|                            | Archived At                | The point in time at which an application was marked as archived.                                                                                               |
|                            | Consideration Ended At     | The point in time at which an application was either marked as ‘Hired’ or ‘Archived’.                                                                           |
|                            | … Stage Group Interview At | The time of the first scheduled interview in a given stage group.                                                                                               |
| Prospect Application       | Added At                   | The time at which a prospect application was first created.                                                                                                     |
| Job                        | Was Open                   | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all jobs that were open in a given timeframe.                                                                 |
|                            | Created At                 | The time at which a job was created.                                                                                                                            |
|                            | Opened At                  | The time at which a job was opened.                                                                                                                             |
|                            | Closed At                  | The time at which a job was closed.                                                                                                                             |
| Interview                  | Start Time                 | The time when an interview took place. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to the start time of the first interview.                  |
|                            | Created At                 | The time when an interview was created by the organizer. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to when the first interview was created. |
| Interviewer Participation  | Start Time                 | The time when an interviewer event started.                                                                                                                     |
|                            | End Time                   | The time when an interviewer event ended.                                                                                                                       |
| Interview Stage Transition | Entered At                 | Point in time at which a stage was entered.                                                                                                                     |
|                            | Left At                    | Point in time at which a stage was left.                                                                                                                        |
| Feedback Form              | Submitted At               | The point in time at which the feedback form was submitted.                                                                                                     |
| Sequence                   | Started At                 | The point in time a sequence was started.                                                                                                                       |
| Opening                    | Opened At                  | The time at which the opening was opened.                                                                                                                       |
|                            | Was Open                   | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all openings that were open in a given time frame.                                                            |
|                            | Closed At                  | The time at which the opening was closed.                                                                                                                       |
| Candidate                  | Last Activity At           | The point in time of the last activity performed on the candidate.                                                                                              |
|                            | Added At                   | The point in time at which the candidate was added to the system.                                                                                               |
|                            | Hired At Date              | The point in time the candidate was first hired. When used in filters, finds candidates that have been hired during the given date range.                       |
|                            | Follow Up Date             | The date for a pending follow up with the candidate.                                                                                                            |
| Diversity Survey           | Submitted At               | The point in time at which a Diversity form was submitted.                                                                                                      |
| Sourcing Activity          | Created At                 | The point in time at which a sourcing activity was created.                                                                                                     |

## Fields Definitions

### Application Fields

| Field                                 | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Current Interview Stage Name          | The title of the current interview stage.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Current Interview Stage Group         | The group of the current interview stage, determined by mapping each interview plan’s stage to a stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Greenhouse ID                         | The unique identifier assigned to the application within Greenhouse.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Days in Current Interview Stage Group | The number of days the application has been in the current interview stage.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Average Overall Recommendation        | The average overall recommendation score given by interviewers for the application.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Started At                            | The time at which the application was created. Either when a candidate applied or when a user created the application in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Last Activity At                      | The point in time of the last activity performed on the application.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Furthest Stage Name Reached           | Allows selecting and filtering by the furthest stage title this application has reached.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Outcome                               | The overall outcome of the application. Can be one of Active, Archived, or Hired.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Outcome with Archive Reason           | The overall outcome of the application, including the type of archive reason. Can be one of Lead, Active, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected Other, or Hired.                                                                                                                                                          |
| Activity Status                       | Shows with status an application is in. E.g. if it Needs Scheduling, is Waiting on Feedback, etc.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Job                                   | The job the candidate applied to or is considered for.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Source                                | The source through which the application was created.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Source Type                           | The type of the source through which the application was created.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Recruiter                             | The Recruiter assigned to this application.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Recruiting Coordinator                | The Recruiting Coordinator assigned to this application.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Credited To                           | The person the application is credited to.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Extended Offer?                       | Whether or not your organization extended an offer for this application.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Offer Stage Entered Date              | The point in time the application entered the offer stage of the application process.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Archive Reason                        | The reason an application was archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Archive Reason Type                   | The type of the reason an application was archived. Can be one of Rejected by candidate, Rejected by org, or Other.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Hired At                              | The point in time at which a candidate was hired for a job.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Archived At                           | The point in time at which a job consideration was marked as archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Consideration Ended At                | The point in time at which an application was either marked as ‘Hired’ or ‘Archived’.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Candidate                             | The individual candidate of this application.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| … Stage Group Interview At            | The time of the first scheduled interview in a given stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Passed Through Stage Group/Name       | Allows filtering applications that have passed through a certain stage group/name, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will only return applications that have passed through that stage group/name, not applications that skipped the stage group/name. Note, passed through stage group/name will include candidates currently in the stage group/name. |
| Reached Stage Group/Name              | Allows filtering applications that have reached a certain stage group/name, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will return all applications that have passed through this stage group/name or have skipped this stage/stage name but passed through a later stage group/ name.                                                                           |
| Most Recent Active Stage Group        | Allows selecting and filtering by the stage group the application was in when being hired or rejected.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Application Subject:

- Candidate
- Job
- Interview
- Opening
- Stage Transition
- Offer
- Feedback Form

### Prospect Application Fields

| Field       | Definition                                                                             |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Added At    | The time at which a prospect application was first created.                            |
| Outcome     | The outcome of the prospect application. Can be one of Active, Archived, or Converted. |
| Credited To | The person the prospect application is credited to.                                    |
| Job         | The jobs the prospect application is considered for.                                   |

### Job Fields

| Field                     | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job                       | The job’s identity.                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Title                     | Represents the name or title of the job.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Requisition ID            | Alphanumerical identifier assigned to the job that is unique to your company’s internal processes.                                                                                                 |
| Creator                   | The user who created the job.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Hiring Manager            | The Hiring Manager who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                          |
| Recruiter                 | The Recruiter who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                               |
| Recruiting Coordinator    | The Recruiting Coordinator who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                  |
| Sourcer                   | The Sourcer who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                                 |
| Team                      | The department or team directly associated with this job. E.g. if a job is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Product Marketing’. |
| Department                | The top-level department associated with this job. E.g. if a job is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Marketing’.                |
| Location                  | The job’s location that is used as the default location for job postings of a job. Allows searching for jobs based on their location or the region in which the location is located.               |
| Job Status                | The current status of the job. Can be Open, Closed, Archived, or Draft.                                                                                                                            |
| Was Open                  | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all jobs that were open in a given timeframe.                                                                                                    |
| Created At                | The time at which the job was created.                                                                                                                                                             |
| Opened At                 | The time at which the job was opened.                                                                                                                                                              |
| Closed At                 | The time at which the job was closed.                                                                                                                                                              |
| Greenhouse Job ID         | The internal ID used by Greenhouse for this job.                                                                                                                                                   |
| Open Duration (in days)   | How many days this job has been open for.                                                                                                                                                          |
| Active Candidate Count    | How many candidates have applications in active interview or offer stages. Excludes candidates with applications in application review.                                                            |
| Number of Candidates in … | The number of job considerations currently in a given stage group.                                                                                                                                 |
| Employment Type           | The type of employment offered for the job. Can be Full time, Part time, Intern, Contract, or Temporary.                                                                                           |
| Is Template?              | Currently, job templates are shown as draft or archived jobs. Use this field to filter job templates out.                                                                                          |

### Interview Fields

| Field                    | Definition                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Scheduled in Stage Name  | The title of the stage in which this interview was scheduled.                                                                                                   |
| Scheduled in Stage Group | The group of the stage in which this interview was scheduled.                                                                                                   |
| Start Time               | The time when an interview took place. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to the start time of the first interview.                  |
| Duration                 | Represents the length of time the interview took place.                                                                                                         |
| Interviewer              | The user who conducted the interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Organizer                | The user who scheduled the interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Interview Title          | The title of the conducted interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Created At               | The time when an interview was created by the organizer. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to when the first interview was created. |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interview Subject:

- Interviewer Participation
- Application

### Interviewer Participation Fields

| Field                   | Definition                                                          |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Interviewer             | The user who was the interviewer of this interviewer participation. |
| Start Time              | The time when this interviewer event started.                       |
| End Time                | The time when this interviewer event ended.                         |
| Has Completed Feedback? | Whether or not this interview has a completed feedback form.        |
| RSVP Status             | The interviewer’s response to the interview calendar invitation.    |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interviewer Participation Subject:

- Interview
- Feedback Form

### Interview Stage Transition Fields

| Field                      | Definition                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| From Interview Stage Group | The stage group transferred from.                                                                                                   |
| To Interview Stage Group   | The stage group transferred to.                                                                                                     |
| Outcome                    | The outcome of this stage change. Possible values include: Moved Forward, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected - Other. |
| Entered At                 | Point in time at which the stage was entered.                                                                                       |
| Left At                    | Point in time at which the stage was left.                                                                                          |
| Days in Stage              | Number of full days within the stage.                                                                                               |
| Archive Reason             | When the new stage represents the archived stage, this represents archive reason.                                                   |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interview Stage Transition Subject:

- Application

### Feedback Form Fields

| Field                    | Definition                                                                                                                              |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Overall Recommendation   | The score submitted on the Overall Recommendation form field. Can be one of No Decision, Definitely Not, No, Yes, or Strong Yes.        |
| Submitted By             | The person who submitted the feedback form.                                                                                             |
| Submitted in Stage Group | Allows filtering by the stage group the application was in when feedback was submitted, whether or not there was a scheduled interview. |
| Interview Title          | Title of the interview a feedback form was submitted for.                                                                               |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Feedback Form Subject:

- Application
- Interview

### Sequence Fields

| Field                       | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Completion Status           | Describes the current status of a sequence. A sequence will stop upon receiving a reply or if manually cancelled. Otherwise, a sequence will continue running until all steps are completed. |
| Reply Status                | The reply status of the sequence. Can be one of Not Set, Interested, Not Interested, or Later.                                                                                               |
| Started At                  | The point in time this sequence was started.                                                                                                                                                 |
| Has Received Reply?         | Whether a reply was received for a sequence.                                                                                                                                                 |
| Has Converted to Candidate? | Whether the recipient for a sequence has converted to an active candidate after the sequence started.                                                                                        |
| Created By                  | The user who created the sequence.                                                                                                                                                           |
| On Behalf Of                | The user on whose behalf a sequence was created.                                                                                                                                             |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Sequence Subject:

- Application

### Opening Fields

| Field                   | Definition                                                                                           |
| ----------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job                     | The job the opening belongs to.                                                                      |
| Opening ID              | Alphanumerical identifier that is unique to your company’s processes.                                |
| Opened At               | The time at which the opening was opened.                                                            |
| Was Open                | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all openings that were open in a given time frame. |
| Closed At               | The time at which the opening was closed.                                                            |
| Open Duration (in days) | How long this opening has been open for.                                                             |
| Opening Status          | Indicates if this opening is open or closed.                                                         |
| Close Reason            | The reason the opening was closed.                                                                   |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Opening Subject:

- Job
- Application

### Candidate Fields

| Field                             | Definition                                                                                                                                |
| --------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Last Activity At                  | The point in time of the last activity performed on the candidate.                                                                        |
| Added At                          | The point in time at which the candidate was added to the system.                                                                         |
| Name                              | The full name of the candidate.                                                                                                           |
| Phone Number (Primary, Personal)  | The candidate’s primary, personal phone number.                                                                                           |
| Email Address(es)                 | All of the candidate’s email addresses.                                                                                                   |
| Email Address (Primary, Personal) | The candidate’s primary, personal email address.                                                                                          |
| LinkedIn Profile URL              | A URL to the candidate’s LinkedIn profile.                                                                                                |
| Hired At Date                     | The point in time the candidate was first hired. When used in filters, finds candidates that have been hired during the given date range. |
| Follow Up Date                    | The date for a pending follow up with the candidate.                                                                                      |
| Follow Up Assignee                | The person assigned to follow up with the candidate.                                                                                      |
| Tags                              | The candidate tags associated with the candidate.                                                                                         |
| Most Recent Company               | The candidate’s most recent company from their employment history.                                                                        |
| Worked At                         | The companies the candidate has worked at.                                                                                                |
| Source                            | The sources through which the candidate’s Applications were created.                                                                      |
| Project                           | The talent projects the candidate is a member of.                                                                                         |
| Greenhouse ID                     | The ID of the candidate in Greenhouse.                                                                                                    |
| Greenhouse Profile URL            | A URL to the candidate’s profile in Greenhouse.                                                                                           |
| Current Job Title                 | Returns candidates matching the current (i.e. latest) job title.                                                                          |
| Held Job Title                    | Returns candidates matching the previously held (including current) job title.                                                            |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Candidate Subject:

- Application
- Diversity Survey
- Sequence
- Prospect Application

### Diversity Survey Fields

| Field              | Definition                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At       | The point in time at which a diversity survey was submitted.                                                                                                               |
| … Diversity Survey | Each diversity survey that has fields that can be reported on will be available under Submitted At. When clicking on a form, the available Fields to Show will be visible. |

### Sourcing Activity Fields

| Field          | Definition                                                                                                         |
| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Created At     | The point in time at which a sourcing activity was created.                                                        |
| Created By     | The person who created a sourcing activity.                                                                        |
| On Behalf Of   | The user on whose behalf a sourcing activity was created.                                                          |
| Type           | The type of a sourcing activity. Can be one of Sequence, Sequence Replies, or Manual Touchpoints.                  |
| Sub-Type       | The sub-type of a sourcing activity. Can be one of First Outreach, Follow Up, or Reply.                            |
| Contact Medium | The contact medium used on a sourcing activity. Can be one of InMail, Phone Call, Text Message, Email, or Meeting. |
| Reply Status   | The candidate reply-status for a sourcing activity. Can be one of Not Set, Interested, Not Interested, or Later.   |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Sourcing Activity Subject:

- Sequence

### Related Subjects Definitions

### Offer

| Field                              | Definition                                                             |
| ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Decided At                         | The time at which the offer was accepted or rejected by the candidate. |
| Status                             | Indicates if an offer is created, pending, accepted, or rejected.      |
| Latest Version > Created At        | The point in time at which an offer version was created.               |
| Latest Version > Is Latest Version | Whether this represents the most recent offer version.                 |
| Latest Version > Extended At       | The time at which the offer was extended.                              |

##


[title] Speak_
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Once integrated, recruiters can sync their jobs and candidates to the Speak\_ platform. Candidates who are in the hiring process will see information about their next interview, including the stage, the interviewer, the time & date, and a meeting link (if applicable).

## How do I connect Speak to Ashby?

For instructions on enabling the integration, please check out Speak\_’s documentation [here](https://www.notion.so/8fe034df98b34e148c48abb5ccec054c?pvs=21).

[title] Oyster
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Oyster makes it easy to hire and retain international talent. This is done by facilitating 100% legal and compliant full-time employment, so you don't have to set up a legal entity in the country in which your employee lives.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Permissions & Prerequisites:**

- You must have Organization Admin access in Ashby
- You are logged in to the Oyster Platform with your admin credentials.
:::

For a full guide covering connecting Ashby and Oyster, check out [their documentation](https://support.oysterhr.com/hc/en-us/articles/39803913010321-Ashby-Connecting-to-Oyster).

[title] Enboarder
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

The Enboarder integration supports pushing candidates to your onboarding workflows.

### Setting up the integration

- Login to Enboarder and copy your [account API key here](https://us.enboarder.com/app-admin/integrations/extensions)
- Login to Ashby and [input the API here](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/enboarder)

### Using the integration

When a candidate is hired, you'll see an `Add Candidate to Enboarder` activity appear on their profile. Alternatively, you can automatically push candidates to Enboarder upon hire by [checking the box on this page](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/hris) this option.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8b3ac0dfcdfb8a3d9a15ca3a2b2d39e2.png)


[title] MeVitae
[path] Integrations/Other/

MeVitae’s Blind Recruiting Solution focuses on redacting candidate details from their applications. The integration with Ashby will allow you to redact information from candidate records to reduce bias in the recruiting process. It does this by anonymizing the candidates’ fields within Ashby as well as analyzing their documents and uploading a redacted version of candidates’ documents to Ashby. This is so your Hiring Managers and Recruiters can make hiring decisions with minimal bias, widening your talent pool and hiring more diverse employees.

For instructions on how to enable this integration, refer to: [https://www.mevitae.com/ashby-helpcentre](https://www.mevitae.com/ashby-helpcentre). For more on setting up API keys in Ashby, please check out [How do I generate an API key?](docId\:Bd5mE2TCmTYHK-vUJLHdZ)

Please ensure your Ashby API key has Write access to the Candidates set of endpoints, as this contains the assessment.update endpoint, which will be used to send data back to Ashby about the assessment.

[title] Sequoia
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Sequoia account with Ashby, allowing you to create customized offers for your candidates.

## Integration Overview

This integration enables you to connect candidates with an interactive offer experience uniquely tailored to the role and rewards package while staying aligned to the company's compensation philosophy.

## Ashby Setup

Navigate to Ashby and select Admin. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Select Sequoia and click `Create API key for Sequoia`.

![Screen Shot 2022-11-22 at 3.49.02 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/BH6tFP6fXtLrjbqzOyiJz_screenshot2022-11-22at34902pm.png)

Select Ashby API Key and create a new API key. Copy the Ashby API Key.

## Connect Sequoia with Ashby

Log into your Sequoia account. Under Icon > Settings > Integrations, click `Available Integrations`.

![Screen Shot 2022-11-28 at 4.24.16 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uT9ekyCBqp3v4-vYmzPQF_screenshot2022-11-28at42416pm.png)

Search for Ashby and click `Add Integration`.

![Screen Shot 2022-11-28 at 4.23.02 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qmH8qhFDwsZZQzgO60_O7_screenshot2022-11-28at42302pm.png)

In a short activation flow, you’ll be asked to review and agree to Sequoia’s Terms & Conditions.

Complete basic integration details needed by Sequoia. You’ll need to paste the Ashby API Key that you copied from your Ashby account into the API Token in the Sequoia app.

![Screen Shot 2022-11-28 at 4.21.40 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5SGsdA46Uw99fW3XrF_2J_screenshot2022-11-28at42140pm.png)

## Using the integration

After the integration is enabled, the following information is provided to Sequoia:

- Applications
- Candidates
- Jobs
- Offers in draft stages
- Users

Once a candidate accepts their offer via Sequoia’s offer letters (or in Ashby directly), the Hired status in Ashby will trigger the pre-boarding process for Sequoia One. This includes pre-filling some of the candidate’s information directly into the pre-boarding form.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can the Sequoia integration be limited to US-based candidates?

Sequoia’s system will only accept US-based candidates that are pushed from Ashby. Any international candidates synced from Ashby will be ignored and not added to the system.
:::


[title] Siit
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Connect Siit to your Ashby account to automatically sync your hired candidates to Siit.

## Integration Overview

This integration enables you to push hired candidates’ data into Siit to kick off the new employee onboarding process.

## Ashby Setup

Navigate to Ashby and select Admin. Next, click Integrations on the left panel of the screen. Select Siit and click `+ Create API key` for Siit.

![Screen Shot 2023-04-21 at 10.35.37 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/acuwE7GRdYIm3yJ1v2teM_screenshot2023-04-21at103537am.png)

## Connect Siit with Ashby

Log into your Siit account and click on Apps & Integration and select Ashby. Click the link that says `Connect now`

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/D_vgf_O9WLtCSz2cvbpLC_untitled.png)

:::hint{type="success"}
You can now start pushing new hires into Siit&#x20;
:::


[title] PerchPeek
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

This guide will walk you through integrating with PerchPeek so you can push hire/transfers for the best relocator experience.

## Why Integrate?

- Time saved: \~2-3 hours per week in manual initiation work (c.300 relocations/year)
- Improved employee experience: Immediate initiation upon hire/transfer decision allowing the best relocator experience
- Reduced errors: Elimination of manual data entry mistakes

## Integration Overview

Integration between PerchPeek and Ashby will be achieved through the use of a webhook.

This is a configuration option within Ashby that enables it to send candidates through to PerchPeek automatically to be initiated within the PerchPeek application.

PerchPeek will receive all of the fields related to the candidate and job role in Ashby, and then these fields are selectively mapped to an initiation form within the PerchPeek Pro application. If a received field is not mapped, it is ignored.

:::hint{type="warning"}
The integration with PerchPeek is one-way. Perchpeek does not push to or alter any data within your Ashby system.
:::

**Prerequisites:**

1. Integration call between you and PerchPeek Ops, including the user with Ashby administration access to agree the data that will need to be stored by PerchPeek, and the process you currently use when hiring candidates that need relocation assistance.
2. If a suitable option doesn’t already exist, a toggle should be added to in a suitable place within the candidate/offer that allows for PerchPeek to know whether a candidate should be initiated to us. This could be called Relocation Assistance Required or something similar.
3. PerchPeek to provide the Webhook request URL and Secret Token
4. An Ashby user at your company that has administration privileges, or another role that allows them to access the Webhook configuration inside of Ashby.
5. PerchPeek to configure an initiation form that will be populated by Ashby

## Timeline

Week 1: Integration call between you and PerchPeek Ops, including the user with administration access to your Ashby to agree the data that will need to be stored by PerchPeek.

Week 2: PerchPeek configure the initiation form and provide you with the integration details. PerchPeek will also assist in setting up or advising on remaining pre-requisite items.

Week 3: Testing begins - PerchPeek start receiving data, manually verifying it before initiating the relocators to ensure no errors

Week 4: Testing complete - automatic initiations turned on

[title] Data Shares
[path] Integrations/


[title] Fireflies.ai
[path] Integrations/Video Interviewing/

Fireflies is an AI-powered meeting assistant that records, transcribes, and analyzes voice conversations. It helps teams improve productivity by automating note-taking and meeting summaries.

For more on setting up the Fireflies integration, check out their guide [here](https://guide.fireflies.ai/articles/5626705084-how-to-integrate-ashby-with-fireflies).

[title] Analytics: Best Practices
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] Report Drill Downs
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

# Overview

When reporting on specific subjects, you can open a report drill down to view the data making up the results. Many of the reports you build in Ashby will have drill downs available.&#x20;

The following report subjects do not support drill downs:

***Interviewing:***

- Interviewer Pools
- Interviewer Pool Members

***Advanced Scheduling***

- Interviewer RSVPs
- Interview Schedule Versions
- Interview Schedule Summaries

***Other***

- Sourcing Forms
- Event Audience Member
- Candidate Recording Consent Choices
- Diversity Surveys&#x20;
- EEO Surveys&#x20;
- AI Notetaker Recordings
- Projects
- Project Members
- Offer Versions
- Newsletters&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
For a full list of report subjects, check out [Ashby Subject & Field Definitions](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj) or the [Reports Glossary](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/glossary) within your Ashby account.
:::

# Accessing a drill down on a custom list tile report

If you have added a custom list report to a dashboard, it will show as a single number by default. This is what we call a custom list tile report. The number listed is the number of entries within that report. To view the entries making up the report results in a table format, click on the number.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bo1VAJc9I8emFG_vx8Rcl_integrations-acent-ashby-2026-02-18-at-15532-pm.jpg)

If you have a custom list with a candidate field set as a field to show, you can click an entry on the table to open a popover displaying the candidate profile for the entry selected.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wXcl7plmFuoO60r7lOysq_new-custom-list-report-acent-ashby-2026-02-18-at-15944-pm.jpg)

# Drill downs on a visualization report

You can drill down on segmentation and count over time reports by clicking on the part of the visualization you would like to list the results for.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WlYSY95pBIldejh2YvJfD_zight-2026-02-18-at-141522.png)

The drill down in this case is treated as a new report and it is generated as a candidate search or as a custom list report with the visualization report's filters applied to it.&#x20;

A candidate search drill down will be generated for the following subject types:

- Job Considerations
- Interviews
- Interviewer Participations
- Interview Stage Transitions
- Feedback Forms
- Sequences
- Application Forms
- Candidates
- Outreach Activities
- Questionnaires
- Candidate Experience Surveys

A custom list drill down report will be generted for the following subject types:

- Jobs
- Job Postings
- Openings
- Employees
- Quality of Hire Survey Enrollments
- Quality of Hire Survey Steps
- Hiring Manager Experience Surveys

:::hint{type="info"}
Any changes you make on the generated drill down report will not be reflected on the original report or dashboard.&#x20;
:::


[title] Building Your First Dashboard
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

Use this guide to familiarize yourself with the basics of building a dashboard and build the foundational knowledge you need to fully take advantage of dashboards and reporting in Ashby.

# Permissions & access

Custom Dashboards are available on the Plus, Enterprise, and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Dashboards overview

Dashboards help to organize, present, and visualize your reports, allowing you to tailor your reports to ensure specific audiences get the most valuable information for them. You can add the same report across multiple dashboards. This ensures metrics are aligned and that team members speak the same recruiting data language.

# Create a dashboard

Before creating new reports or finding reports to add to a dashboard, you need to create a dashboard. To do this:

1. On the top navigation bar, click **Dashboard** and then select `Create Dashboard`
2. Click the pencil icon to the right of **New Report Dashboard** and enter a title

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7SBlNf7M_B7URHPHa9RB9_enter-a-new-dashboard-name.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3396" height="652" darkWidth="3396" darkHeight="652" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Editing a dashboard name"}

3. Click `Save Dashboard`

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/V3dNvffY8KQYnvd_y7fKj_save-dashboard-button.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3396" height="700" darkWidth="3396" darkHeight="700" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Saving a newly created dashboard"}

4. When saving the dashboard, you have the option to enable **Access Control**. By default, dashboards are viewable by anyone in your organization. A private dashboard is only viewable by you, Organization Admins, and anyone who you specifically grant access to.
5. Click `Save`

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0CGkJ0qCF-9ybcWNiWBjL_save-dashboard-access-control.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1092" height="624" darkWidth="1092" darkHeight="624" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The option to confirm the title and also set access controls (set to off in the screenshot)."}

# Create and add a new report to your dashboard

Now you can build your first report for your dashboard. You can build a report using a template as a base or create one from scratch in **Build**. For some report ideas, take a look at our guides [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi), [Report Catalog - Essentials](docId\:VOWdo_JJgdtwBzC4LIRMc), and [Report Catalog - Advanced](docId:24rONsZ2Xx5ToZdSakIq9).

## Creating a report from a template

The [Template Library](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/templates) is a repository of pre-built reports that you can apply filters and groupings to. Before you can add a template report to your dashboard, you need to generate a report. To build a report from a template:

1. Click on **Reports** in the top navigation bar, then **Report Builder**
2. Click on **Report Templates** or select a template from the collapsible list in the left sidebar

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/b1Wr-gjjnnwkqDEXBiIg6_report-builder-ashby-2026-07-13-at-105334-am.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3400" height="1432" darkWidth="3400" darkHeight="1432" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="The report template options on the Report Builder page."}

3. **Optional:** Add filters or groupings to the template report if needed
4. Click `Save Report` and set your report settings on the following pop-up, including any dashboards the report should be added to.
5. Click `Save Report`

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GnWesB6cDF261Z4W6aOHn_report-builder-saving-a-report-template.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1244" height="804" darkWidth="1244" darkHeight="804" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Saving a report: adding a title, an optional note, set the report to private or add it to dashboards"}

## Building a custom report

:::hint{type="info"}
You can find further details on building custom reports at [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW).
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
Looking for information on our AI Report Builder? Check out [Report Builder & AI-Assisted Report Builder](docId\:kFMXauoRKZx6_EZbu32Po). Running into issues understanding your report results? Our AI Report Interpreter can generate a summary and insights. More on this at [AI Report Interpretation](docId\:r2SHcEUHaeo0ADH_Bm5ar).
:::

## Adding your report to your dashboard

You can also add a saved report to a dashboard when viewing it.

![Adding a report to a dashboard from the saved report page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_b8klSrsR-HLPylWT86r6_time-in-process-report-ashby-2026-07-13-at-110149-am.jpg)

After you save a report, the `Dashboard` button appears. To add the report to a dashboard:

1. Click `Dashboards`, then `+ Add to Dashboard`
2. Search for your dashboard and check the checkbox to the left of it
3. Click `Add Report to Dashboards`

The name of the dashboard you added the report to appears when you click the `Dashboards` button, and the number indicator updates accordingly.

# Add a saved report to a dashboard from the dashboard page

You can add saved reports to a dashboard from the dashboard page too. To do this:

1. Navigate to your dashboard at **Dashboards > Saved Dashboards**
2. Click `+ Add Item`, and select `Report`
3. Search for and select the report to add it to the dashboard

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YTv67j9ojtzFbB7Dfm7U5_search-for-a-report-to-add.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2260" height="1420" darkWidth="2260" darkHeight="1420" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Searching for a report when adding it to a saved dashboard."}

# Add a filter and connect it

[Dashboard Filters](docId:2v47WMLRQuDcNEEY2TAzp) reduce duplicative work, while also providing flexibility for the audience of the dashboard.

1. To add a filter, navigate to your dashboard, make sure you are on the dashboard's `Edit` view, and click `Add Filter`.
2. Find the field you would like to filter by. For filters attached to a user, use the **User** field. You can identify what user role you are filtering for at the report level.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/eWvvGzx1aDxmF4mperrBW_adding-a-filter.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1444" height="930" darkWidth="1444" darkHeight="930" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Searching for a field to use for your dashboard filter"}

3. Connect the filter to each of the reports you want the filter to be applied to. When you click the filter icon on a report, Ashby prompts you to select or search for the field you want to attach the filter to. Pay attention to the subject the filter is anchored on. For example, a recruiter at the job level and the job consideration level could be different.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HK5FPeK4Nz2qT6hxtBeCm_adding-dashboard-source-filter-to-a-report.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="3394" height="1684" darkWidth="3394" darkHeight="1684" showCaption="false" indent="1" alt="Connecting a filter to a report on your dashboard"}

You can identify what reports have filters attached to them by the color of the dot next to the filter icon:

- **Green:** All dashboard filters apply to the report.
- **Grey:** Some dashboard filters apply to the report.
- **Red:** No dashboard filters apply to the report.

To require a filter on all reports on a dashboard, check the box next to `Require value`. You see the alert below if any reports aren't connected to the required filter.

![If you have a filter set with Require Value, your reports will not load until the value has been added to the filter and that the reports have been connected to the filter too.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_U7FrFlAhMQxqpq99H_e5_a-required-value-without-a-connected-report.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
Dashboard filters apply in the dashboard view and do not change the filters of the underlying report.
:::

## Delete a filter

To delete a dashboard filter, select the Trash icon next to the filter and click `Delete`.

![The trash can to delete a filter](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KbGAEIOfqaqUbkJgZicz1_deleting-a-dashboard-filter.jpg)

## Rename a filter

You can click on the pencil icon on your dashboard filter to rename it. Amend the filter name on the `Change Filter Name` pop-up, then click `Submit` to confirm.

![The pencil icon used to rename a filter](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/wd0Sxnex6DRmNHLpxRxYu_time-in-process-dashboard.jpg)

:::hint{type="info"}
This option allows you to customize filter names so users can clearly identify what each filter is used for. If you add multiple filters of the same type (for example, a User filter connected to the hiring manager field for a report and a User filter connected to the recruiter field of your report), this also allows you to clearly mark the difference between the two filters.
:::

# Navigate to a report vs drilling down

It is important to distinguish the difference between the way a report appears on a dashboard (especially a filtered dashboard), drill down reports, and the underlying report.

## View underlying report

To view or edit the underlying report, click the `Go to Report` icon, located at the top-right corner of each report.

If you apply filters at the dashboard level, the icon changes to `Go to Filtered Report`, meaning the unsaved dashboard filters apply when you view the report. You can click `Save` when viewing the filtered report to add the filter changes to your existing report. If you make any changes to the underlying report and save it, these changes appear on the dashboard.

If you need to view the underlying report without any dashboard filter context applied, use the action menu on any report tile (the three dots next to the `Go to Filtered Report` button) to go directly to the report via `Go to Report`.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/aae1862dfe3547bb8c8e4af2f9681ffa"}

## Drill down reports

Many of the reports you build in Ashby have drill downs available. For more on these, check out [Report Drill Downs](docId:9QRM3K9cTAg4xyZorX4Qv).

# Organize and format

Reports appear on the dashboard as you add them. There are a couple ways you can organize and format your dashboard. If you are not able to make any changes, make sure you are in `Edit` mode.

## Resize reports

By default, Ashby adds reports at half size, but you can customize the size of any report on the dashboard.

To adjust the size of a report, click and drag the bottom right corner of any report. Make sure to save once you are done making your changes.

![Click and drag the bottom-right corner of a report to resize it](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ASVNksQ-hE4jh8KZxnJHz_resizing-a-report-on-your-dashboard.jpg)

## Move reports

To move reports, click and drag the report to the location you would like it to be. Use the purple box that appears when you drag the report as a marker of where the report will be. Make sure to save once you are done making your changes.

## Change report view

To adjust how a report displays on your dashboard, click the three dots on the report and hover over **Report View** to see the display options.

![Adjusting the report view using the three dots](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aveijEUcX8EHGvCDGtDtw_report-view.png)

## Add a text field

Along with adding reports and filters, you can add a text field to your dashboard. This can help with adding context, splitting your dashboard into sub-sections, and adding captions.

To add a text field:

1. Click `+ Add Item`
2. Select `Text`
3. Add your text and any formatting using the toolbar
4. Click and drag the textbox to move it on your dashboard and use the arrow in the bottom-right corner of the textbox to resize as needed

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/f6TlCoR23_ncUSGXnimEY_time-in-process-dashboard-ashby-2026-07-13-at-14320-pm.jpg" size="60" isUploading="false" width="1768" height="1572" darkWidth="1768" darkHeight="1572" showCaption="false" alt="An example of a text box above a report on a dashboard"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
You can't use text fields to add styling to dashboards. While the toolbar has code line and code block options, these just apply certain formatting to the added text.
:::

## Actions under 'More'

You can find the options below by clicking `More` on any dashboard.

- **Allow empty spaces:** Keep empty vertical space between tiles.
- **Export:** Download a dashboard as a PDF.
- **Access:** Manage who can view a dashboard.
- **Share:** Create a sharable link to the dashboard.
- **Copy:** Create a copy of a dashboard.
- **Archive:** Move the dashboard to the **Archived** folder.

![The More section with each of the options highlighted.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/l29KwCpYX7VDlxWCKn9qh_time-in-process-dashboard-ashby-2026-07-13-at-114821-am.jpg)

# FAQs

### How often are reports and dashboards refreshed?

Report results refresh live when you open a report or dashboard. Ashby then caches the results for one hour. If report parameters or dashboard filters change within that hour, the report or dashboard refreshes.

You can refresh reports manually at any time on the dashboard or when reviewing a report on its own.

To refresh a report on a dashboard, click the three dots in the top-right corner of the report tile, then click `Refresh Report`.

Refreshing the page does not refresh a report.

### Can I add the same dashboard filter type to my dashboard twice?

You can! For example, if you want to filter results by hiring manager and by recruiter, you can add two **User** filters to your dashboard, then connect each filter to the appropriate field on each report accordingly. We recommend renaming any duplicate filters to avoid confusion. For more on renaming dashboard filters, see [Building Your First Dashboard](docId\:Q7A7CpFpyulmT6bd1qVYm).

Adding a value to both filters means only results that match both filters' requirements on connected reports show. For example, if you set your Hiring Manager **User** filter to only show results where the hiring manager on the job consideration is listed as Gemma, and set your Recruiter **User** filter to only show results on connected reports where Tim is listed as the recruiter, only the job considerations where both Gemma is listed as the hiring manager and Tim is listed as the recruiter display on reports connected to both filters.

### Can I export my dashboard?

You can, yes. Click `More`, then `Export`. Ashby exports your dashboard as a PDF.

### Can I view a full-screen version of my report from the dashboard view?

Yes. To expand your report while viewing it on a dashboard, click on the square icon to the right of the report title. You can click the `x` on the expanded report to return to the dashboard.

![The View Fullscreen option on a report](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pHcc8CPLb9-O_kBfenb5p_view-fullscreen-option-on-a-report.png)


[title] Recruiting Planner
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

This document reviews how to create and configure the Recruiting Planner template report.

The Recruiting Planner is available on the Legacy Plus, Plus and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

## Recruiting Planner Overview

The Recruiting Planner template report allows you to plan required recruiting activities based on historical performance, input headcount goals, and a hiring date range (e.g. this quarter). Ashby will then compute the total available time available to achieve your target headcount hires while incorporating the customizable passthrough rates to summarize the total number of activities at each stage required to hit those goals. Additionally, the overall goals will be presented as a weekly pace of events to better understand the required weekly efforts.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d885ddea3bc17c27f82d9b53d8b83d9e.png)

## Tutorial

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/fd8017eeddfb458b8ed3e35532f94582?t=0.56"}

## Configure the Recruiting Planner

To create a new recruiting planner report:

- Navigate to Reports > Templates or Reports > Report Builder if you are using the new report builder layout
- Select the Recruiting Planner option.
- Enter the number of hires you are looking to make, the positions being hired for and the target timeframe in the `I need...` field.
- Click `Get Started`

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kD2L3epIxhhikAQEapDKH_recruiting-plan-acent-ashby-2026-01-16-at-35610-pm.jpg)

:::hint{type="warning"}
When creating your recruiting planner, Ashby will automatically pull historical data to generate historical passthrough rate baselines. If the data pulled is too sparse or not available, you will see a warning and you can either manually set the passthrough values or change the data window (i.e. a larger historical timeframe or broader department inclusion, etc).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/bc22e4bf5e95f07f41e29dc4a2df4b36.png)
:::



A recruiting planner table will then be generated for you based on the targets set, showing you the overall and weekly numbers for activities in each stage group, broken down by the contributing plans.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3ba3d03a4e987d3bc3ace9d4550f9665.png)

The recruiting planner defaults to selecting the last 6 months of historical data to generate representative passthrough rates for your organization. If you wish to customize the passthrough rate, then you can customize the passthrough rate data by editing your targets.

## Editing your targets and timeframe on the recruiting planner

You can amend your timeframe and targets using the left-hand menu of the recruiting plan.

To adjust the timeframe, click on the current time frame within the `During`section. You can then adjust your timeframe accordingly for your targets.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/824dbb244fff69f669d647b26d02cba3.png" size="64" width="382" height="361" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Once you’ve adjusted and saved your timeframe, the recruiting plan and your targets will adapt to the new timeline.

If you’d like to adjust a target, click on the hires target within the *Targets* section on the left-hand menu.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/2f03b5752488a21c76fb2f00fa1163a9.png)

On the `Edit target`menu, you can adjust the hire target, the positions being hired for, the target name and the passthrough rate data being used to calculate your activity recommendations within the recruiting planner.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/e768716026f89f1125f7ea97db85064a.png)

Within the `Passthrough Rates` field, you can click the arrow to view the calculations being made and adjust the data used. You can either amend the simple filters used to generate the provided passthrough rates (positions hired for and timeframe) or manually update the passthrough rates within each stage.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8f00cef1633afc1112b0dc8c5b3eb06c.png)

`Show advanced filters` will allow you to add advanced filters for both your target (in terms of positions being hired for) and for your passthrough rate historical data so you can fine-tune further if needed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/cf0d03b8b5126003a7ac6cded95901a6.png)

Click `Save` to confirm your target changes and the recruiting planner will update accordingly. If you’d prefer to switch back to simple filters, click `Switch to simple`, then save your changes by clicking *Save* on the original menu.

:::hint{type="info"}
Please note that all advanced filters will need to be removed before you are able to switch back to simple filters
:::

## Adding a new target

If you’d like to add an additional target to your recruiting planner, click `+ Add Target`*.*

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9978eba6c56e304cd8e0c2d0a4e035e6.png)

You will then be prompted to fill out the hire target, the positions you are hiring for and the passthrough rate data being used. You will also have the option to use advanced filters to refine your target as needed.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/412b77e856ad6737cf54d41cf173bc4c.png)

Once you’ve configured your target, click `Add target` to add it to your recruiting planner.

## View time elapsed and progress to goal

The progress across plans is tracked and presented against goal per stage group once configured. Hovering over the progress column will provide additional information on time elapsed and your progress to meet your targets.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3d8f11b47291b747b91ba8217eb03a73.png)

If you’d like to hide specific stage groups or metrics within your recruiting planner, click the eye icon. You can then opt to show or hide stage groups or metrics so only the data most relevant to you and your team is displayed on the recruiting planner. In terms of metrics, you can hide the overall, weekly, progress and/or forecast columns as needed.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/07e6fb42c5897ce370a348725cd8444e.png)

## Recruiting Planner Visualizations

The recruiting planner presents a detailed summary in the plan table. However, there are various manners of visualizing your overall plan and progress towards the final hiring targets. Each visualization option suits a different manner of reviewing goals and progress and is briefly summarized below.

You can click the `Summary` dropdown to switch between visualization options within your recruiting planner.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a75b9341e3eaaa45c8b72b047154a6f1.png)

Some visualization options that are common to chart types are:

- **Conditional color formatting:** specify pacing targets to color code your results in a red-yellow-green format. To adjust the thresholds on your color-coding, click the cog icon above your recruiting planner summary. Hover over `Customize colors` and then adjust the `Within x of pace` field accordingly.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b820c915ed23c9900d6203ffddd86236.png)

- **Progress tracking:** enable progress tracking to show overall progress in each stage. Make sure you’ve configured your progress tracking as outlined above.
- **Forecasting:** enable the forecasting option to extrapolate the likely hiring outcomes by the end of your plan period. This forecast is based on extrapolating your rate of hiring and the remaining time in your plan.

### Plan Table

The plan table visualization summarizes your recruiting planner results in a dense table format. You can further adjust this table by hiding stage groups and other plan summary columns, as well as including forecasts, progress tracking and conditional color formatting.



![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9ead7d7e03aa62ade74648bb1cb9d543.png)

In the above chart you can see:

1. The timeframe and elapsed time for your plan duration based on the current date
2. The targets set with headcount summary
3. Progress tracking and color-coded pacing
4. An estimated forecast on the hiring outcome at the end of the plan period

### Stage Progress Chart

The stage progress chart aims to show the progress for each stage group for each individual plan. This chart can show results on an absolute count basis, or a percent progress basis. This visualization can aid immediate visual insight into which parts of the funnel are proceeding at what rate.

In this example, you can see that the Analytics plan is trailing at the top of funnel stages, but that onsites, offers and hiring outcomes have turned out well and are leading expectations.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bHZvzqS-TQfN8IHYat_Bc-20260116-161120.png)

In the above chart you can see:

1. Each individual plan
2. The individual stage groups, which can be toggled on/off or hidden entirely as an option
3. The percent progress against the planned goal.

### Plan Progress Chart

The plan progress chart provides quick and immediate access to a view that focuses on hiring targets and outcomes. When the optional forecast is turned on, the end of plan outcome is summarized by showing likely hires and the likely deficit against plan, if any.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/m-m49SNMNgGxCOGlPndD0-20260116-161152.png)

In the above chart you can see:

1. Each individual hiring target
2. The forecasted “expected hires” at end of plan per target
3. The forecasted “expected deficit” at end of plan per target
4. The current hires made to date per target

### Progress Over Time Chart

This view is provided for teams looking to analyze their progress over time against a hiring target. The total hiring target is taken and presented as a linear goal over the specified plan period. An optional forecast can be included, as well as options to view these results on a weekly, monthly or quarterly time basis.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kZrC4NC_aUM2T9oYg6Phf-20260116-161037.png)

In the above chart you can see:

1. The total, cumulative hires made at a point in time
2. The linearized total headcount goal over time
3. The optional forecast line showing the likely outcome at the end of plan

### Pace to Goal Chart

Another, intuitive way of summarizing all progress is to use a pace to goal chart: this shows the percent progress against the target against the percent time elapsed for the plan duration. This allows for a quick visual assessment of which plans are on track or off track as paced against time elapsed.

For example, in the below chart it can quickly be seen that the Analytics plan is roughly on target and will likely end at \~92% of plan, while the Marketing plan is severely behind targets and likely to end at only \~65% of plan.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ZQ0jMniPV1sJTveQ-6LM3-20260116-161217.png)

In the above chart you can see:

1. A visual indication of the time elapsed
2. The progress at present with conditional color coding for each target
3. The forecasted end of plan outcome shown in a lighter tone for each target
4. The total blended progress and forecast across all targets

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### How is the expected deficit calculated on the plan progress chart?

For the expected deficit metric, Ashby takes the current forecast for the end-of-period outcome and then compares that against the plan target/targets to estimate where you will be once the time period is complete.

As an example, if you have a target of 10 hires over a quarter, halfway through the quarter you may only have made 5 hires, but if at your rate you expect to complete 10 hires based on our forecast then by the end of quarter the expected deficit is 0, (so you hit your target). However, if your rates are lagging and halfway through the quarter the estimate is you may make only 8 hires by the end of the period, the expected deficit will be 2 (i.e. 8 hires out of 10 targeted).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Are drilldowns available for the Recruiting Planner report?

Yes. Each view of the Recruiting Planner has drilldown support, utilizing the candidate search based on the Recruiting Planner's pre-filtered data points. Here's what to expect in each view:

- **Summary**: Click on the `Progress` cell in the table to view the pre-filtered Candidate Search showing candidates who reached the specific stage in the specified timeframe for that Team.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/M-4wuMT6EfSBnJ5DGSHE9_recruiting-plan-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-123653-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2160" height="728" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Stage Progress**: Clicking on the interview stage bar will take you to the Candidate Search page, pre-filtered with the data of candidates in progress in the specific stage within the set timeframe.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8bMvNEXa1tncL5vfs-AYH_recruiting-plan-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-123751-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2862" height="1096" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Plan Progress**: Drilldown on the **Hires made** bar to view which hires count towards the Recruiting Plan.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Uh8xUAU5KUS3FjlZixcBz_recruiting-plan-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-123912-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2844" height="1064" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

- **Progress over time**: Drilldown on the **Hiring Plan** bar to view which hires count towards the Recruiting Plan.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2Ip21gSvHbOv0ZwqElYmc_recruiting-plan-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-123952-pm.jpg)

- **Pace to Goal**: Clicking on the bar for the current progress will take you to the Candidate Search, pre-filtered with the current hires.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sOz8lUsNgxtSxAB1W-0lY_recruiting-plan-acent-ashby-2026-03-23-at-124048-pm.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="2682" height="1108" showCaption="false" indent="1"}


:::


[title] Lever Subject & Field Definitions
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics Glossary/

If you're an Ashby Analytics customer using Lever, here you can find a list of the subjects and filters available to you, along with definitions for your reference.

## Subject Definitions

|  Subject                   |  Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Opportunity                |  A candidate’s record on a specific job.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Job                        |  A job posting.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Interview                  |  Scheduled interviews in your ATS. Interviews can be counted as one per stage (ie. an onsite panel with 4 different interviews will count as 1 onsite interview) or one per scheduled interview (ie. an onsite panel with 4 different interview sill count as 4 interviews).  |
| Interviewer Participation  |  Scheduled interviewers. Each interviewer counts as an interview participation; these tie closely to feedback forms                                                                                                                                                           |
| Interview Stage Transition |  Moves to and from stages. Accidental stage moves will be detected and counted.                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Feedback Form              |  We pull in the person who submitted, when they submitted, and the overall recommendation (score out of 4) from feedback forms.                                                                                                                                               |
| Requisition                |  Definition of hiring needs.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Candidate                  |  Candidates in Lever.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |



## Time Frame Filter Definitions

| Subject                    | Time Frame Filter          | Definition                                                                                                                                                                            |
| -------------------------- | -------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Opportunity                | Started At                 | The time at which the opportunity was created. Either when a candidate applied or when a user considered them for the job in Ashby.                                                   |
|                            | Last Activity At           | The point in time of the last activity performed on the opportunity.                                                                                                                  |
|                            | Snoozed Until              | The date that the opportunity has a snooze alarm for. This can be found on the opportunity and is usually set by the recruiter.                                                       |
|                            | Offer Stage Entered Date   | The point in time the opportunity entered the offer stage of the application process.                                                                                                 |
|                            | Hired At                   | The point in time at which a candidate was hired for a job.                                                                                                                           |
|                            | Archived At                | The point in time at which an application was marked as archived.                                                                                                                     |
|                            | Consideration Ended At     | The point in time at which an opportunity was either marked as ‘Hired’ or ‘Archived’.                                                                                                 |
|                            | … Stage Group Interview At | The time of the first scheduled interview in a given stage group.                                                                                                                     |
| Job                        | Created At                 | The time at which the job was created.                                                                                                                                                |
| Interview                  | Start Time                 | The time when an interview took place. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to the start time of the first interview.                                        |
|                            | Created At                 | The time when an interview was created by the organizer. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to when the first interview was created.                       |
| Interviewer Participation  | Start Time                 | The time when an interviewer event started.                                                                                                                                           |
|                            | End Time                   | The time when an interviewer event ended.                                                                                                                                             |
| Interview Stage Transition | Entered At                 | Point in time at which a stage was entered.                                                                                                                                           |
|                            | Left At                    | Point in time at which a stage was left.                                                                                                                                              |
| Feedback Form              | Submitted At               | The point in time at which the feedback form was submitted.                                                                                                                           |
| Requisition                | Created At                 | The time at which the requisition was created.                                                                                                                                        |
|                            | Closed At                  | The time at which the requisition was closed.                                                                                                                                         |
|                            | Approved or Created At     | The date that a requisition completed approvals. If there is no approval flow, then it will be the date the requisition was created.                                                  |
|                            | Estimated Start Date       | Requisition’s estimated start date.                                                                                                                                                   |
|                            | Approved At                | The date that a requisition completed approvals. Since the Lever API does not expose their requisition open date, it is recommended to use this time filter as a proxy for open date. |
|                            | Approval Started At        | The date the first step of the approval flow is initiated.                                                                                                                            |
| Candidate                  | Last Activity At           | The point in time of the last activity performed on the candidate.                                                                                                                    |
|                            | Added At                   | The point in time at which the candidate was added to the system.                                                                                                                     |
|                            | Hired At Date              | The point in time the candidate was first hired. When used in filters, finds candidates that have been hired during the given date range.                                             |

## Fields Definitions

### Opportunity Fields

| Field                                 | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Current Interview Stage Name          | The title of the current interview stage name.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Current Interview Stage Group         | The title of the current interview stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Days in Current Interview Stage Group | The number of days the opportunity has been in the current interview stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Average Overall Recommendation        | The average overall recommendation score given by interviewers for the opportunity.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Started At                            | The time at which the opportunity was created. Either when a candidate applied or when a user created the opportunity in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Last Activity At                      | The point in time of the last activity performed on the opportunity.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Furthest Stage Group Reached          | Allows selecting and filtering by by the furthest stage group this opportunity has reached.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Furthest Stage Name Reached           | Allows selecting and filtering by by the furthest stage title this opportunity has reached.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Outcome                               | The overall outcome of the opportunity. Can be one of Lead, Active, Archived, or Hired.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Outcome with Archive Reason           | The overall outcome of the opportunity, including the type of archive reason. Can be one of Lead, Active, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected Other, or Hired.                                                                                                                                                          |
| Job                                   | The job the candidate applied to or is considered for.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Hiring Manager                        | The Hiring Manager assigned to this opportunity                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Recruiter                             | The Recruiter assigned to this opportunity.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Sourcer                               | The Sourcer assigned to this opportunity.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Origin                                | The opportunity’s origin in Lever.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Snoozed Until                         | The date that the opportunity has a snooze alarm for. This can be found on the opportunity and is usually set by the recruiter.                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Tags                                  | The opportunity’s tags in Lever.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Source                                | The opportunity’s source in Lever.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Extended Offer?                       | Whether or not your organization extended an offer for this opportunity.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Offer Stage Entered Date              | The point in time the opportunity entered the offer stage of the application process.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Archive Reason                        | The reason an opportunity was archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Hired At                              | The point in time at which a candidate was hired for a job.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Archived At                           | The point in time at which an opportunity was marked as archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Consideration Ended At                | The point in time at which an opportunity was either marked as ‘Hired’ or ‘Archived’.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Candidate                             | The individual candidate of this opportunity                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Lever Profile URL                     | The URL for the opportunity’s profile on the Lever ATS.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| … Stage Group Interview At            | The time of the first scheduled interview in a given stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Passed Through Stage Group/Name       | Allows filtering applications that have passed through a certain stage group/name, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will only return applications that have passed through that stage group/name, not applications that skipped the stage group/name. Note, passed through stage group/name will include candidates currently in the stage group/name. |
| Reached Stage Group/Name              | Allows filtering applications that have reached a certain stage group/name, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will return all applications that have passed through this stage group/name or have skipped this stage/stage name but passed through a later stage group/ name.                                                                           |
| Most Recent Active Stage Group        | Allows selecting and filtering by the stage group the application was in when being hired or rejected.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Opportunity Subject:

- Candidate
- Job
- Interview
- Requisition
- Stage Transition
- Offer
- Feedback Form
- Referral

### Job Fields

| Field                     | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job                       | The job’s identity.                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Title                     | Represents the name or title of the job.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Requisition ID            | Alphanumerical identifier assigned to the job that is unique to your company’s internal processes.                                                                                                 |
| Creator                   | The user who created the job.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Hiring Manager            | The Hiring Manager who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                          |
| Recruiter                 | The Recruiter who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                               |
| Team                      | The department or team directly associated with this job. E.g. if a job is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Product Marketing’. |
| Department                | The top-level department associated with this job. E.g. if a job is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Marketing’.                |
| Location                  | The job’s location that is used as the default location for job postings of a job. Allows searching for jobs based on their location or the region in which the location is located.               |
| Job Status                | The current status of the job. Can be Open, Closed, Archived, or Draft.                                                                                                                            |
| Employment Type           | The type of employment offered for the job. Can be Full time, Part time, Intern, Contract, or Temporary.                                                                                           |
| Created At                | The time at which the job was created.                                                                                                                                                             |
| Active Candidate Count    | How many candidates have applications in active interview or offer stages. Excludes candidates with applications in application review.                                                            |
| Number of Candidates in … | The number of opportunities currently in a given stage group.                                                                                                                                      |
| Commitment                | Synonymous with Work Type in Lever. The type of employment offered for the job.                                                                                                                    |
| Involves                  | Returns any jobs where the user is on the hiring team or is specifically following the job.                                                                                                        |

### Interview Fields

| Field                    | Definition                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Scheduled in Stage Name  | The title of the stage in which this interview was scheduled.                                                                                                   |
| Scheduled in Stage Group | The group of the stage in which this interview was scheduled.                                                                                                   |
| Start Time               | The time when an interview took place. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to the start time of the first interview.                  |
| Duration                 | Represents the length of time the interview took place.                                                                                                         |
| Interviewer              | The user who conducted the interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Organizer                | The user who scheduled the interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Interview Title          | The title of the conducted interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Created At               | The time when an interview was created by the organizer. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to when the first interview was created. |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interview Subject:

- Interviewer Participation
- Opportunity

### Interviewer Participation Fields

| Field                   | Definition                                                          |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Interviewer             | The user who was the interviewer of this interviewer participation. |
| Start Time              | The time when this interviewer event started.                       |
| End Time                | The time when this interviewer event ended.                         |
| Has Completed Feedback? | Whether or not this interview has a completed feedback form.        |
| RSVP Status             | The interviewer’s response to the interview calendar invitation.    |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interviewer Participation Subject:

- Interview
- Feedback Form

### Interview Stage Transition Fields

| Field                      | Definition                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| From Interview Stage Group | The stage group transferred from.                                                                                                   |
| To Interview Stage Group   | The stage group transferred to.                                                                                                     |
| Outcome                    | The outcome of this stage change. Possible values include: Moved Forward, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected - Other. |
| Entered At                 | Point in time at which the stage was entered.                                                                                       |
| Left At                    | Point in time at which the stage was left.                                                                                          |
| Days in Stage              | Number of full days within the stage.                                                                                               |
| Archive Reason             | When the new stage represents the archived stage, this represents archive reason.                                                   |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interview Stage Transition Subject:

- Opportunity

### Feedback Form Fields

| Field                    | Definition                                                                                                                              |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Overall Recommendation   | The score submitted on the Overall Recommendation form field.                                                                           |
| Submitted By             | The person who submitted the feedback form.                                                                                             |
| Submitted in Stage Group | Allows filtering by the stage group the application was in when feedback was submitted, whether or not there was a scheduled interview. |
| Interview Title          | Title of the interview a feedback form was submitted for.                                                                               |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Feedback Form Subject:

- Opportunity
- Interview

### Requisition Fields

| Field                  | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Job                    | The job the requisition is assigned to.                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Team                   | The department or team directly associated with this requisition. E.g. if a requisition is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Product Marketing’. |
| Department             | The top-level department associated with this job. E.g. if a requisition is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Marketing’.                        |
| Requisition ID         | Alphanumerical identifier that is unique to your company’s internal processes.                                                                                                                                     |
| Created At             | The time at which the requisition was created.                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Creator                | The person who created the requisition.                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Closed At              | The time at which the requisition was closed.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Requisition Status     | Indicates the status of this requisition. Can be one of Open, Closed, On Hold, Draft, Rejected, or Pending.                                                                                                        |
| Hiring Manager         | The Hiring Manager who is on the hiring team of this requisition.                                                                                                                                                  |
| Recruiter              | The Recruiter who is on the hiring team of this requisition.                                                                                                                                                       |
| Sourcer                | The Sourcer who is on the hiring team of this requisition.                                                                                                                                                         |
| Headcount Total        | Total headcount allotted for this requisition.                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Open Headcount         | The remaining number of open headcount for this requisition.                                                                                                                                                       |
| Approved or Created At | The date that a requisition completed approvals. If there is no approval flow, then it will be the date the requisition was created.                                                                               |
| Approved At            | The date that a requisition completed approvals. Since the Lever API does not expose their requisition open date, it is recommended to use this time filter as a proxy for open date.                              |
| Approval Started At    | The date the first step of the approval flow is initiated.                                                                                                                                                         |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Requisition Subject:

- Job
- Opportunity

### Candidate Fields

| Field                            | Definition                                                                                                                                |
| -------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Last Activity At                 | The point in time of the last activity performed on the candidate.                                                                        |
| Added At                         | The point in time at which the candidate was added to the system.                                                                         |
| Name                             | The full name of the candidate.                                                                                                           |
| Phone Number (Primary, Personal) | The candidate’s primary, personal phone number.                                                                                           |
| Email Address(es)                | All of the candidate’s email addresses.                                                                                                   |
| LinkedIn Profile URL             | A URL to the candidate’s LinkedIn profile.                                                                                                |
| Hired At Date                    | The point in time the candidate was first hired. When used in filters, finds candidates that have been hired during the given date range. |
| Worked At                        | The companies the candidate has worked at.                                                                                                |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Candidate Subject:

- Opportunity

### Related Subjects Definitions

### Offer

| Field                              | Definition                                                             |
| ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Decided At                         | The time at which the offer was accepted or rejected by the candidate. |
| Status                             | Indicates if an offer is created, pending, accepted, or rejected.      |
| Latest Version > Created At        | The point in time at which an offer version was created.               |
| Latest Version > Is Latest Version | Whether this represents the most recent offer version.                 |

### Referral

| Field        | Definition                                             |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------ |
| Submitted At | The point in time at which the referral was submitted. |
| Referrer     | The user who submitted the referral.                   |

💡 If you are using the race/ethnicity or gender inference, the fields below will be available to you.

| Field                 | Definition                                                                                                                                         |
| --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Gender                | Gender as reported in the candidate’s EEOC form when available. When unavailable, uses most likely gender based on candidate’s name.               |
| Likely Gender         | The most likely gender based on the candidate’s name. When we are not confident enough in the gender, we return ‘Unknown’.                         |
| Race/Ethnicity        | Race/Ethnicity as reported in the candidate’s EEOC form when available. When unavailable, uses an estimate based on candidate’s name.              |
| Likely Race/Ethnicity | The most likely race and ethnicity based on the candidate’s name. When we are not confident enough in the race and ethnicity, we return ‘Unknown’. |


[title] How do I report results in a specific timezone?
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics: Best Practices/

This document will teach you how to use Ashby's timezone options to customize report results.

## Tutorial

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/fa5e697256f94a3d996ea7b70a9191e7"}

## Change report timezone

When creating reports in Ashby, the default behavior is to display results in the user's timezone. This behavior can be adjusted by using the timezone selector. There are three timezone options to choose from:

![Screen Cast 2022-12-16 at 8.06.01 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/D8fSrwTrCmz3YpH8zdIbc_screencast2022-12-16at80601am.gif)

:::hint{type="warning"}
The time zone dropdown may appear at the bottom left on the report if the report was built with the legacy report builder. Check the bottom left if you cannot find it at the top!
:::

- User Timezone (Default): uses timezone of the user viewing the report
- Organization Timezone: uses the organization’s default timezone for all viewers
- Custom Timezone: allows you to pick a custom timezone

## Change Organization/User timezone

Visit [How do I change my Ashby timezones?](docId\:yz2Ko6YoJOtQ4yF2aj5Vp) to learn more about changing your organization or user timezone.

[title] Analytics Glossary
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] Understanding the Time in Process Report
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

This guide explains how Ashby's Time in Process template report works, including which candidates and stage transitions are counted, how the median is calculated, and how a few edge cases (especially small candidate counts) can lead to results that differ from a manual spreadsheet calculation.

**A quick note on terminology:** for readability, this guide talks about "candidates" moving through stages. Technically, the time being measured belongs to a *Job Consideration* (sometimes called an application), which is the record of one candidate's progress toward one specific job. A single candidate can have several Job Considerations if they're being considered for multiple roles, and each one moves through stages independently and is counted independently in the Time in Process report.

:::hint{type="warning"}
In Ashby, two things are called "Time in Process." In addition to this report, Ashby also exposes a Job Consideration field called **Time in Process (Days)**. That field is a single per-application duration (days from application start, or most recent unarchive, until consideration ended).&#x20;

**The report described in this doc is different:&#x20;**&#x69;t measures the median time spent in each stage, computed across many candidates. The two are not directly comparable, and the sum of stage medians from the report will not equal the field value on any single application.
:::

# What is the Time in Process report?

:::hint{type="info"}
For report template basics, see [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi) .
:::

The Time in Process template report shows the median number of days candidates spent in each interview stage of your hiring process. It's intended to answer questions like:

- "What is the typical time a candidate spends in Phone Screen before moving on?"
- "Which stage is the slowest part of our pipeline?"
- "Have certain stages gotten faster or slower over time?"

For each stage that meets the report's filters, the report computes the median of all completed stage durations across the candidate cohort, where a "stage duration" is the time between when a candidate entered that stage and when they left it.

The result is one row per stage (or per stage type, depending on your settings) with the median days in that stage as the headline metric.

# Default template configuration

You can access the Time in Process template by navigating to **Reports > Report Builder > Report Templates > Time in Process**. When you open the Time in Process template, it is preconfigured as follows. You can adjust any of these in the report settings.

| Setting                        | Default                                                                           |
| ------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Subject                        | Applications                                                                      |
| Timeframe                      | Rolling 6 months, based on each candidate's most recent interview date            |
| Group Stages                   | On for Ashby Analytics orgs and orgs using Grouped Interview Plans, off otherwise |
| Hide application review stages | Yes                                                                               |
| Hide lead stages               | Yes                                                                               |
| Hidden stage groups            | None                                                                              |
| Visualization                  | Stacked bar chart                                                                 |

## Visualization settings

These settings are located under the `Visualization` menu on the left side of the report template.

### Available visualizations

- **Stacked bar chart:** Each bar is a candidate cohort (or other grouping); stages are stacked within the bar, so the total height shows the combined median time across stages.

![Time in process report stacked bar chart view](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ITkvOT553p5fporpmKjeK_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-05-28-at-11118-pm.jpg)

- **Table:** One row per stage (or per stage and grouping), with the median days in process as a column.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LDg0pX55RPYDt11rRtsfU_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-05-28-at-11214-pm.jpg)

### What "Group Stages" does

This toggle controls whether the report reports on individual interview plan stages or on the Stage Groups they map into. Stage Groups are the primary pipeline milestones (e.g. "Recruiter Screen," "Onsite," "Offer") that an admin can define via Grouped Interview Plans, with individual stages from different interview plans mapped into them.

- **Off:** Each individual interview plan stage is reported on its own. "Phone Screen" in Job A and "Phone Screen" in Job B appear as two separate rows, even if both map to the same Stage Group.
- **On:** Stages are rolled up into their Stage Groups. All stages that map into a given Stage Group, across every job and interview plan, are pooled into a single row for that Stage Group.

The grouped view is most useful when you have Grouped Interview Plans configured and want a consistent, company-wide view of pipeline speed at the milestone level. The ungrouped view is most useful when interview plans differ meaningfully across roles or departments and you want to see each stage in its own context.

### What "Hide application review stages" and "Hide lead stages" do

These options remove Application Review stages and Lead stages from the report. They are hidden by default because most customers think of "time in process" as time spent in active interviewing; the time a candidate spends in Application Review or as a Lead is a different category of activity. You can re-enable either category from the report settings.

### What "Hidden stage groups" does

This lets you explicitly remove individual stage groups (by name) from the report, even if they would otherwise be included by stage-type rules. This is useful for custom stages that don't fit the standard pipeline view.

# What is included in the calculation?

Each stage's median is computed from a pool of stage visits. A stage visit is one period of time a candidate spent in a given stage, from the moment they entered it to the moment they left it. Detailed explanations of the calculation critieria are provided below.

## Candidates must have exited the stage

Visits where the candidate is still in the stage are excluded. The report only counts time the candidate has actually finished spending in a stage. Until a candidate moves out of a stage (by advancing, being archived, or being hired), that in-progress visit contributes nothing to the median.

## Very short visits are still counted

Even very brief stage visits are included as data points in the median. For example, a candidate who was moved into a stage and then almost immediately moved back out, perhaps because of an accidental click that was corrected within seconds, would be shown in the report. The report does not apply a minimum duration to qualify a visit. If you notice a stage's median is unexpectedly low, it's worth checking whether there were a small number of accidental short transitions inflating the data; those can have an outsized effect when the overall number of completed visits is small.

## All eligible candidates' visits are pooled together

The median for a given stage is computed across every completed visit by every eligible candidate. There is no per-candidate averaging or deduplication beforehand. If three candidates spent 3, 7, and 10 days in Phone Screen, the median for Phone Screen is the median of \[3, 7, 10], not the median of some pre-aggregated per-candidate value.

## Multiple stage visits are counted individually

When a candidate re-visits a stage (for example, after being unarchived back into the pipeline, or because they were moved back from a later stage), each completed visit counts as its own interval.

For example, if a candidate goes Phone Screen → Archived → Unarchived → Phone Screen again → Onsite, that candidate contributes two Phone Screen intervals to the median: one ending when they were archived the first time, and one ending when they later moved to Onsite. If they were still sitting in Phone Screen the second time around, only the first visit would count — the second has not finished yet.

## Excluded stages

The following stage types are always excluded from the report:

- **Archived stages:** Moving a candidate into an archived state is not itself "time spent interviewing."
- **Hired stages:** Being hired is the end of the process, not a stage you measure.

The following stage types are excluded by default but can be turned back on in the report settings:

- **Application Review stages:&#x20;**&#x43;ontrolled by the "Hide application review stages" option.
- **Lead stages:** Controlled by the "Hide lead stages" option.

You can also explicitly hide additional stage groups via the "Hidden stage groups" setting.

## How the cohort of eligible candidates is chosen

The report uses a timeframe to decide which candidates are in scope. For example, in the default template, the timeframe is "candidates whose most recent interview occurred in the last 6 months." Any candidate that falls in that selected date range is fully in scope; once a candidate is included, all of their completed stage visits contribute to the medians, even visits that happened before the selected date range. The timeframe selects the cohort of candidates, not the individual stage visits.

Any other filters you add to the report (job, source, department, etc.) further narrow the cohort the same way.

# How the median is calculated

The report uses a discrete median: it returns an actual stage duration that appeared in the data. It does not average the two middle values when there's an even number of data points.

Specifically:

1. The completed stage durations are sorted from shortest to longest.
2. The median is the value at position `ceil(n/2)`, where `n` is the number of durations.

When `n` is odd, this is the usual "middle value" definition. When `n` is even, this returns the lower of the two middle values rather than averaging them.

This means every median the report shows is a real stage duration that some real candidate actually experienced. The tradeoff is that with very small samples, especially n = 2, the result can look different from what you'd compute as a simple average of the two values.

## Worked examples

Imagine a stage where the completed durations (in days) are as follows. The table shows what a typical "arithmetic median" calculation would give versus what the Time in Process report returns:

| Number of completed visits | Sorted durations (days) | Manual median you might calculate by averaging the middle values | What the report shows |
| -------------------------- | ----------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------- |
| 1                          | \[5]                    | 5                                                                | 5                     |
| 2                          | \[3, 9]                 | 6                                                                | 3                     |
| 3                          | \[3, 6, 9]              | 6                                                                | 6                     |
| 4                          | \[3, 6, 9, 12]          | 7.5                                                              | 6                     |
| 5                          | \[3, 6, 9, 12, 15]      | 9                                                                | 9                     |
| 6                          | \[3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18]  | 10.5                                                             | 9                     |

The differences appear only on even-sized samples. For odd `n`, the two methods agree. As `n` grows, the difference between the two approaches becomes smaller in relative terms and is most pronounced when only two candidates have completed a stage.

If you're trying to reconcile the report with a manual calculation and you have a small number of candidates per stage, this is almost always the explanation.

# FAQs

### I only have 2 candidates who completed this stage. My math says the median should be 6 days, but the report shows 3.

This is the most common Time in Process question, and it is expected behavior. The report uses a discrete median that returns the lower of the two middle values rather than averaging them. With two durations of 3 and 9 days, the report returns 3. See the worked examples above.

### Why isn't a stage showing up at all?

There are a few possibilities:

- The stage is a Lead or Application Review stage and the "Hide" options are still set (the default).
- The stage is an Archived or Hired stage type — these are always excluded.
- The stage is in the Hidden stage groups list.
- No candidates have completed a visit to that stage within the report's cohort. A stage that only has candidates currently sitting in it will not appear, because in-progress visits don't count.

### Are candidates currently in a stage included in the number?

No. Only completed stage visits are counted. Until a candidate leaves a stage (by advancing, being archived, or being hired), their time in that stage is not yet measured.

### Why is my median so low? It looks like seconds or zero days.

The most common cause is accidental short stage moves; for example, a recruiter advancing a candidate to the wrong stage and immediately correcting it. Those brief visits are counted as completed stage visits and become data points in the median. When the total number of completed visits for a stage is small, even one or two near-zero visits can pull the median down dramatically. Reviewing the underlying stage transitions for the affected stage will usually surface the culprit.

### What about candidates who were archived and then unarchived?

The report does not "stitch" together separate visits into one combined duration. Each completed visit is its own interval in the median calculation. The Job Consideration field Time in Process (Days) behaves differently — it resets on unarchive — but the report treats each completed stage visit as an independent data point regardless of whether it happened before or after an unarchive.

### My report and a colleague's report on the same template show different numbers. Why?

The most common reason is permissions. The report's eligible-applications cohort respects your object access rules, so two users on the same organization can see different application sets and therefore different medians. Other reasons include different report filters, a different date range, or one report set to per-stage view while the other uses the unified stage-type view.

### Why is this called a "median" when my intuition says I want an average?

The median is much more resistant to outliers than the mean. One candidate who sat in a stage for 300 days (perhaps because they were forgotten about, or because they were reactivated months later) can dramatically inflate an arithmetic average, painting a misleading picture of typical hiring speed. The median answers "what's the typical candidate's experience in this stage?" more reliably. For a small number of candidates, switching to the median has tradeoffs (see the discrete-median note above), but for typical pipeline sizes it produces a more useful number.

# Summary

- Time in Process measures the median days candidates spent in each stage, computed across all completed stage visits in your cohort.
- A visit only counts once the candidate has left the stage. In-progress stages contribute nothing.
- Every completed visit is its own data point, including repeat visits by the same candidate.
- Archived and Hired stage types are always excluded; Lead and Application Review stages are excluded by default but can be turned back on.
- The median is a discrete median: with even-numbered samples it returns the lower of the two middle values rather than averaging them. This is the usual explanation for "the report shows 3 days but I calculated 6."
- For small candidate samples (especially n = 2), expect the report to differ from a simple manual median calculation.
- The Job Consideration field Time in Process (Days) is a separate metric on individual applications and is not directly comparable to this report's values.

[title] ChartHop
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

The ChartHop \<> Ashby integration supports creating new openings from new open ChartHop jobs. Once a candidate is hired in Ashby, their information is pushed back to ChartHop in the corresponding position. This guide covers setting up and using the integration to streamline your headcount planning workflow.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This integration requires using Ashby Openings, which are currently available to Plus and Enterprise plans (see [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ) for more information).
:::

# Permissions & access

ChartHop is available on the Legacy Plus, Plus, and Enterprise plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

# Integration overview

Once configured, this integration creates new Ashby Openings (see [Openings Management](docId\:KsXxWI1zugAw8lRp8jwXZ)) from ChartHop jobs and pushes hire information back to corresponding jobs in ChartHop.

# Set up the integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
Set the access level to at least Org Editor in the Ashby app in ChartHop. Also, disable your ChartHop integration with your legacy applicant tracking system (ATS) before enabling this one.
:::

1. Generate an API token in ChartHop:
   1. Navigate to **Apps & Bundles**.
   2. Install the Ashby app.
   3. Configure the API token.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/20ef2b3c290ed45925983b78663824aa.png)

2. Add the API token to Ashby:
   1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > ChartHop**.
   2. Enable the integration.
   3. Paste the key into the **API Key** field and click the checkbox.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TBcYPE3f7kjANWfZXM3eE_charthopfind.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/30d7d0935f002bd470d06b8a84f2c42d.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d461343ac9edbd69883393b190db847c.png)

3. Sync fields:
   1. There are roughly [ChartHop](docId\:nxDTIcvaBtdzqhWqFEJEr) that sync automatically.
   2. Click `Sync` to pull Offer and Opening custom fields from ChartHop.
   3. Check the fields you'd like synced. If you prefer, complete this for both openings and offers.

![](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NXsJAqZ-VywcjChz9_c24_charthopcheckboxes.png)

# Using the integration

*Watching the video below is optional. You can follow the steps in this section instead.*

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/3111f5c6c39a498180bc58c189d95846"}

## Create new Ashby openings from ChartHop jobs

When a job is set to `Active` in ChartHop, an opening is created in Ashby. The opening created will have it's Ashby Identifier set as the Req ID unless there's already an existing opening with the Req ID as its Ashby Identifier.

:::hint{type="warning"}
This integration doesn't create jobs in Ashby. This ensures your team is able to use template jobs and link the automatically created openings to them as necessary.&#x20;
:::

## Push hire data to ChartHop jobs

Once a candidate is hired, Ashby pushes their data back to the corresponding job in ChartHop. You have the option to send the data automatically or push it manually.

:::hint{type="info"}
If the opening the candidate is filling was synced from ChartHop, this creates the candidate in ChartHop and assigns them to that job automatically. Otherwise, Ashby creates the candidate in ChartHop, and they must be manually assigned to the correct job.
:::

## Determine if you'd like to push hires manually or automatically

- If manually: when a candidate is hired, you see an activity on their profile to push their data over.
  - This option is ready upon enabling the integration.
- If automatically: when a candidate is hired, their data is pushed back to ChartHop automatically.
  - You can enable this option on the [HRIS Integrations Settings](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/hris) page in **Admin** (contact Support if you don't find this page in your Admin Settings).

## Adding internal transfers and rehires to ChartHop from Ashby

When a person has been hired by your company before, you need to map their existing ChartHop Employee ID on their candidate profile in Ashby. This prevents the creation of a new candidate profile. This is only required for internal transfers and rehires.

1. Before pushing them to Ashby, retrieve their Employee ID from Charthop. Their Employee ID is the alphanumeric value listed after `person/` in the URL when you visit their profile.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/799de198405c88d43b05903342b8232f.png)

2. Paste the ID into the **Employee ID** candidate custom field on the **Summary** tab of their candidate profile in Ashby.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/5e3d07175bfa1766dc84ebdef874a5b1.png)

3. Once the ID is added to their profile, proceed with pushing them to ChartHop:
   - If they have never been pushed to ChartHop in Ashby in the past, use the `Add Candidate to ChartHop` option in the center of their home page.
   - If they have been pushed to ChartHop in the past, select `More` > `Add to HRIS` to manually push them to ChartHop. There will be a warning that this person has been pushed before. You can ignore this and proceed.
4. In ChartHop, the person is moved to their new job, and their previous job is set to inactive.

# FAQs

### How often are new jobs synced as openings in Ashby?

Ashby runs a full sync every 5 minutes, but you can trigger manual syncs using the `Sync` button on the integrations page.

### What happens if I already have an Ashby opening using the same ID as a ChartHop Req ID?

If an opening already exists in Ashby with an opening ID that matches a ChartHop job's Req ID, the integration will not detect or merge with the existing opening. Instead, a new, separate opening will be created using a different, auto-generated Ashby ID.

This cannot be corrected by re-triggering a sync; there's no way to force the new opening to take on the intended Req ID after the fact. To resolve this, you'll need to:

- Manually rename the ID on your existing (pre-existing) opening.
- Manually update the newly-created, synced opening's ID to the correct Req ID.
- To avoid this altogether, we recommend not pre-populating opening IDs using your ChartHop Req ID convention before connecting the integration.

### Is there a way to test the integration? What would happen if we imported all openings from ChartHop prematurely? Is there an undo?

Reach out to your CSM about testing in a sandbox environment.

### What do we do if we already have some of the openings created in Ashby already? Is there a way to merge duplicates?

Automated deduplication and merging of openings aren't supported, but we can delete duplicates on the backend. Contact Support for assistance if this is required.

### What default fields are synced?

- Title → Ashby Description
- Req Code → Ashby identifier (if none provided, can be generated automatically in Ashby)
- ChartHop Department → Ashby Team (we highly recommend configuring your Ashby teams hierarchy to match the departments setup configured in ChartHop to ensure this information is synced correctly)
- Employment Status → Employment Type
- Target Start Date
- Is Backfill?
- Location
- Salary
- Grant Shares
- Variable Comp Type
- Variable Comp Amount
- Recruiter & Hiring Manager
  - We also support Sourcer if it's created as a custom ChartHop field

### Are assessment results synced?

No, we do not support syncing over assessment results.

### Can I edit fields that were synced from ChartHop?

ChartHop is the source of truth here, meaning you aren't able to edit fields that were updated using data from ChartHop. You need to make those updates in ChartHop and they are synced to Ashby.

[title] Pigment
[path] Integrations/Other/

The Ashby integration lets you import recruiting data into Pigment for reporting and headcount planning. You can import Applications, Openings, or Offers, apply the available filters for the selected data type, and include custom fields.

:::hint{type="info"}
For connection and import setup instructions in Pigment, see [Connect Pigment with Ashby](https://kb.pigment.com/docs/connect-ashby).&#x20;
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
You must be a [Pigment Workspace Admin](https://community.gopigment.com/getting-started-86/how-to-add-users-and-modify-account-types-in-pigment-286) to configure the connector.
:::

# How does the Ashby connector work?

The Ashby connector imports recruiting data from Ashby into Pigment. During import setup, select the type of Ashby data to import and then configure the available filters and custom fields for that data type.

The connector supports these entity types:

- Applications
- Openings
- Offers

## Application imports

Application imports support filters for these Application statuses:

- Hired
- Active
- Lead

By default, only Applications with a status of Hired are imported. Existing imports continue to use the Applications entity and behave as before unless you change the selected entity or filters.

The default Application fields are:

- Application ID
- Employee name
- Department
- Job ID
- Job title
- Target start date
- Actual start date
- Salary
- Salary currency
- Application status
- Current interview stage
- Source
- Archive reason
- Archived at
- Opening ID

## Offer imports

Offer imports support filters for offer status and acceptance status. If you do not select filters, the import includes all offer records.

The default Offer fields are:

- Offer ID
- Application ID
- Offer status
- Acceptance status
- Decided at
- Start date
- Salary
- Salary currency
- Opening ID
- Approval status
- Version created at

## Opening imports

Opening imports include requisition data from Ashby.

The default Opening fields are:

- Opening ID
- Identifier
- Opening state
- Opened at
- Closed at
- Close reason ID
- Is archived
- Archived at
- Target hire date
- Target start date
- Is backfill
- Employment type
- Team ID
- Job IDs
- Location IDs
- Description
- Author ID
- Hiring Team User IDs
- Hiring Team Names
- Hiring Team Emails
- Hiring Team Roles

You can select custom fields when setting up an import.

# Establishing the connection between Ashby and Pigment

A connection between Pigment and Ashby must be established before importing data into Pigment. The first step is to get an Ashby API token. This is needed when establishing the connection within Pigment. After getting the API key, a Pigment workspace admin can set up the connection on the **Integrations** page and establish which applications can use the connector. The last step is setting up an import and selecting the connection.

## Generate an Ashby API token

:::hint{type="warning"}
To generate an Ashby API token you must be an **Organization Admin.**
:::

1. Sign in to Ashby and click `Admin` in the top navigation bar.

![Highlights the Admin button in the top navigation bar](https://uploads-eu-west-1.insided.com/pigment-en/attachment/45afe323-d452-4136-8e07-38ac4379dcb7.png)

2. Next, click `Integrations` on the left panel of the screen.

![Highlights the Integrations section link in the left panel](https://uploads-eu-west-1.insided.com/pigment-en/attachment/8390852c-69f5-4c24-af59-a9164fbaf5b3.png)

3. Search the Pigment integration and click `+ Create API Key for Pigment`. Copy the value provided and save the key somewhere secure for future reference.

![Highlights the button to Create API key for Pigment](https://uploads-eu-west-1.insided.com/pigment-en/attachment/f8674a30-3f7d-4d19-9107-ea03f57a9d3e.png)

:::hint{type="warning"}
Selecting `+ Create API Key` for Pigment creates the API key using the permissions configured for the Pigment integration. You do not need to select individual permissions during this step.
:::

## Set up the Ashby Connector in Pigment

:::hint{type="info"}
For the most up to date steps on setting this up in Pigment, see Pigment's article: [Set up the Ashby Connector in Pigment](https://kb.pigment.com/docs/connect-ashby#step-2-set-up-the-ashby-connector-in-pigment)
:::

From the Workspace home page, navigate to **Settings → Integrations** and click on `+ Add` next to the Ashby integration.

Click `Setup a Connection` and then fill in the following fields. These fields will remain editable if you need to add additional applications or rename.

- **Name:** give a name to your connection (ex: “Ashby connection”)
- **Application Access:** list of applications that will be allowed to use this connection
- **API Key:** the token you generated at the previous step

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/2d689bfed74e158980d3710011d089e3.png" size="70" alt="Shows the screen to set up a new connection to Ashby in Pigment" isUploading="false" width="694" height="608" darkWidth="694" darkHeight="608" showCaption="false"}

Click on `Setup` to finish.

## Import Ashby data into Pigment

When the Ashby connection is configured, go to an Application where the connection is available.

- Select **Import Data** for the Block you want to import data into. For example, if you are importing into a Transaction List, open the List, then select **Import data**.
- Select the **Integration** tab, then select the previously configured Ashby connection from the drop-down menu.
- Select the entity type to import:
  - Applications
  - Openings
  - Offers

Depending on the selected entity type, configure the available filters and select the custom fields you want to include in the import.

### Update Application access

If you do not see the Ashby connection you configured, make sure the current Pigment Application is listed in the **Application Access** list for the connection.

To update access:

- Go to **Settings.**
- Select **Integrations&#x20;**&#x61;nd confirm that the Application is included in the connection's **Application Access&#x20;**&#x6C;ist.


[title] Leapsome
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Connect Leapsome to your Ashby account to add a placeholder for hired candidates in Leapsome.

## Overview

1. To start setting up Leapsome with an Ashby, navigate to 'Settings' > 'Integrations and imports' > [Applicant Tracking System (ATS) integrations](https://www.leapsome.com/app/#/team/integrations/ats-provisioning/overview).
2. Within the ATS page, choose Ashby from a list of available integrations.
3. In a popup modal, enable the checkbox: `Enable the integration`.
4. Then, click on `Authenticate / Manage connection` and proceed with the setup flow. If you need further information about the authentication process, you can find additional documentation in the [merge.dev Help Center](https://help.merge.dev/en/collections/4258459-ats).
5. The setup includes authentication with Ashby.
6. Once integrated, Leapsome regularly checks Ashby for new hires (e.g., candidates marked as accepted) and automatically creates 'Pending' profiles for them in Leapsome.

[title] Humaans
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Connect Humaans to your Ashby account to automatically import hired candidates to Humaans. [Check out this guide to get started!](https://intercom.help/humaans/en/articles/5817410-enabling-ashby-integration)

[title] Alerts & Exports
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] Analytics Jobs List & Dashboard
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

You can access your job list and job-specific dashboards in Ashby Analytics. This guide walks through the information available in the jobs list, job dashboards and within individual job views.

## Job List

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
To access your job list, click Jobs on the navigation bar.

This will take you to the pipeline view, so you can see each of your jobs, the total number of candidates in each pipeline, and the number of candidates in each stage for each role.

You can filter your jobs as needed by clicking the Filter button. Once you’ve created your desired criteria, you can click `+ Save as New` to save this view for future use.

The new view will be added as a tab to the New Filter section, so you can click on it to access the filtered view without rebuilding it, like this Open Jobs in Accounting example.


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/b059dc94914c7ad6bdac8f23aadef0f2.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/1878d24014594f15960934f6065a9ddf.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/23fdb3a78903205037f6a3c0b53d75a0.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/72048c5a8cfe1be6bcf26de3cfc0cca7.png)


:::
::::

## Jobs

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When clicking on a job in your job list, you can use the menu on the left to access the following areas:

Candidate Pipeline

Job Dashboard

Settings
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/f9c62700741c020eacbf0f3c4b8dd17f.png)


:::
::::

### Candidate Pipeline

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
If you click on a job in the pipeline view, it will open up the candidate pipeline for that specific role by default. Here you’ll see each of the stages of your interview process with the candidates listed in their current stage.

In the top-right corner, you’ll also see the option to view the job in Greenhouse or Lever.

If you click on a candidate profile, you’ll be able to view some of their details, including their basic details, source, and their progress through the interview stages. You’ll also find a link in the top-right corner to view the candidate in Greenhouse or Lever.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/9a48d753c05901cbf6d6eda73b1644e4.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/8f2cb834b99432d7a9fb28bb1c1b6378.png)
:::
::::

### Job Dashboard

:::hint{type="info"}
This is a dashboard of pre-built reports that highlight commonly used metrics. For a list of all of the included reports, please check out [Job Dashboard](docId:0QSDvWTdGrs9QVXNo3qrq)&#x20;
:::

### Settings

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
Here you can view the job’s basic details like the title, team, location and requisition ID. You can also see any custom fields you have set up and the hiring team for this role as well.
In the top-right corner, you can also opt to view the job details in Greenhouse or Lever.

**
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/88afce0ceb0ad690527dce748a5c53ac.png)

**
:::
::::


[title] Workday
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

The Workday integration can only be set up on the Enterprise plan:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ❌           | ❌    | ✅          |

## Integration Overview

:::hint{type="info"}
The Workday integration requires a conversation between your Ashby Customer Success team, your Workday administrator, and your talent team. In order to start the process of integrating, please reach out to your Ashby CSM to get a Workday kickoff call scheduled.

The process of setting up the full integration can take a variable amount of time and is highly dependent on how you use Workday today and what your strategy will be moving forward. We've seen this take anywhere between a couple of days to up to 4 weeks. The stages include a conversation about strategy, then setting the integration up in a sandbox, and then moving that to production.
:::

| Sync custom fields                       | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync                                                                                                        |
| ---------------------------------------- | ------------------ | ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| See further information within the guide |         ✔          |         ❌         | Two-way sync <br />From Workday:<br /> Positions > Openings Job Reqs > Jobs <br />To Workday: <br />Offers > Workers & CWs |

Ashby allows setting up an integration with Workday. The integration has the following available features:

- Sync Workday Positions into Ashby Openings: Whenever a position becomes available for recruiting, the integration creates an Opening in Ashby.
- Sync Job Requisitions into Ashby Jobs
- Send Hired candidates to Workday
- Create ad-hoc Positions for hired candidates in Workday

The Workday sync runs once every 20 minutes. The sync will update all fields on all Open Job Requisitions and/or Positions in Workday. There is also a `Sync Now` button that Organization Administrators can click to immediately initiate a sync.

## Enabling the integration

:::hint{type="warning"}
While it is possible to use it without headcount planning, it’s strongly recommended to enable manual headcount planning if you’re looking to use the Workday integration.
:::

1. Head over to the Ashby Integration Marketplace at [https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/workday](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/workday) and click on the `+Enable Workday` button.
2. Configure your Workday integration System User (ISU) and enter information in the Access Settings of Ashby. Follow the steps in [Workday HRIS Integration Setup](docId:2uDZn4hF4rJR6bsy9jJPu)  for detailed configuration instructions.

### General Configuration

- Create Openings from Workday Positions: If enabled, syncs positions from Workday and creates Ashby openings
- Create Workday Position from Openings on Hire: If enabled, when hiring a candidate into an Opening that was not imported from Workday as part of the Positions sync, Ashby attempts to create a Position in Workday from the Opening the candidate was hired for.
- Attach Offer Letter to Hire Employee: If enabled, sends the signed Offer Letter document from Ashby to Workday as a Worker Document with type Offer when the Hire event is initiated.

### Sync Configuration

Settings for data synced from Workday in each delta sync are configured in the Sync Configuration. Similar to how Auto-Reject configurations work, there’s always at most one active configuration and at most one draft configuration. To change the configuration, first create a new draft configuration, do all the necessary setup, and then activate the configuration.

A Sync Configuration consists of these five things:

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/00c54112f490f12d896fdef9257b5dc7.png" size="70" width="487" height="445" darkWidth="487" darkHeight="445" position="center" showCaption="false"}

- Job Fields:
  - Sync direction: Workday → Ashby
  - These are the job fields that can be synced from Workday into Ashby. For each of the enabled fields, the sync generates a corresponding job custom field.
- Opening Fields:
  - Sync direction: Workday → Ashby
  - If `Sync Positions` is enabled, these fields will be synced into Openings created from Workday positions. For each of the enabled fields, the sync generates a corresponding opening custom field.
- Offer Version Fields:
  - Sync direction: Ashby → Workday
  - Every field enabled here will create an offer custom field that can be used as part of the offer form. For many of the fields, we also sync in the selectable values.
- Employee Fields
  - Sync direction: Workday → Ashby
  - Employee lists come from your SSO provider (e.g Okta). However, for customers with an Ashby \<> Workday integration, some data can be synced from Workday to enhance the Employee records in Ashby. For each of the enabled fields, the sync generates a corresponding Employee custom field.
- Job Mapping:
  - In order to create Ashby jobs from Workday Job Requisitions, this allows setting up mapping logic for which job should be created from which Ashby job template.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/95d6504ad2d03a59aa962cccb1880a37.png" size="64" width="499" height="438" darkWidth="499" darkHeight="438" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Video Overview

Here’s a walkthrough of the Ashby \<> Workday integration.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/6064a1e2bf30410c8b482a792475f065"}

## Sync positions into Ashby

To sync positions from Workday into Ashby Openings, you need to enable the Create Openings from Workday Positions toggle in the Workday integration settings. Once enabled, Ashby will sync Workday Positions that are marked as Available for Recruiting into Ashby:

Positions in Workday can be seen as a seat that can be filled and unfilled multiple times. Ashby Openings, in contrast, represent hiring requests. We support re-filling Positions if they are later re-opened and unfilled, or are made available for overlap. A new Opening gets created in Ashby every time the Position is re-opened. The Opening ID for the new Opening would be the Workday Position ID with a -1 appended on the end. The appended number increases by 1 for each subsequent re-opening of the existing Position.

Position data we sync into Openings:

- Position ID → Opening ID
- Position’s Job Posting Title → Opening Description
- Opening State: Approved
- Job → Associated Job created from Workday Job Requistition (if Job Mapping is configured and the Position is associated with a Job Requisition in Workday)
- Custom fields according to the selection in Opening Fields

Data we don’t sync into Openings:

- Team: The Ashby Team field is used for user permissions and Job Board visibility in Ashby. It is not the same as the Supervisory Organization, and there is no way to map a field from the Position in Workday to the Ashby team hierarchy. You can sync data fields from the Position in Workday, such as Supervisory Organization, Cost Center, and custom organizations, as Custom Fields on the Opening in Ashby, so they can be synced for reporting and operational purposes; they just would not be synced into the Ashby Team field.
- Roles
- Location: Similar situation as for teams
- Target Start Date: The workday data model doesn’t maintain this information

All those fields can be maintained manually in Ashby once the opening gets imported.

### Opening Updates After Initial Sync

- Only positions identified in Workday as "Available For Recruiting" get imported into Ashby. A position is considered Available for Recruiting in Workday when any of the following criteria are met:
  - It is marked as Available for Overlap (even if there is an incumbent)
  - The incumbent vacates the position and it is now Unfilled (even if you change the Availability Date and/or Earliest Hire Date on the position Restrictions to a future date)
  - A new Unfilled position is created with a current or past Availability Date
  - It has an Open job requisition against it.
- A position is NOT Available for Recruiting and will NOT be imported to Ashby when:
  - It is Frozen
  - It is Closed
  - There is an incumbent in the position AND it is NOT marked as Available for Overlap AND there is no Open job requisition tied to it
  - A new Unfilled position is created with a future Availability Date.
- The initial opening state when an Opening gets imported is "Approved"
- An opening can (and must) be manually moved to "Open" to hire into that opening
- The opening state is only updated for openings that are not filled. Once an opening got filled, the integration stops managing the state. This accounts for the fact that an opening gets filled before the hire information gets sent to Workday. Even after sending the data to Workday, the Workday Position only gets filled once the "Hire Employee" business process is completed in Workday, which might take additional time.
- Positions closed in Workday get closed in Ashby (if they got imported previously due to being “Available For Recruiting” and only if they're not filled).
- Positions not available for recruiting don’t get imported. If they got imported previously due to being "Available For Recruiting" and then become unavailable:
  - If they were "Open" before, they get closed
  - If they were "Approved" or “Draft” before, they'd get archived. Those draft openings can be manually deleted if desired.
  - Once they become available for recruiting again, a new Opening will be created with the Opening ID \[Position ID] -1 in status "Approved"
- If a Position is associated with a Job Requisition in Workday and the Job Requisition is closed:
  - The Opening in Ashby will be Closed (if it was previously Open) or Archived (if it was previously Draft or Approved).
  - If the Position remains Open in Workday after the Job Requisition is Closed, a new Opening will be created with the Opening ID \[Position ID]-1 in status “Approved”.
- Positions deleted in Workday automatically get archived in Ashby.

## Sync Job Requisitions into Ashby

The integration can automatically create Ashby jobs from Workday Job Requisitions. By default, since no job mappings have been set up, Job Requisitions don’t get imported into Ashby. In order to set job sync up, these steps must be performed:

1. Create job templates in Ashby that should be used as a basis for creating an Ashby job from a Job Requisition
2. Configure Job Mappings: For each job template, set a filter to tell the integration which job requisitions should be imported using which job template
   1. It’s possible to set up multiple job mappings. The order of mappings is important. For each job requisition, the first matching mapping from top to bottom will be used.
   2. To import all job requisitions, you can set up a mapping without a filter as the last mapping. This allows for catching all remaining job requisitions.
   3. A job mapping allows setting an override team and location. This is useful in two scenarios:
      1. The job template didn’t define a team or location: In this case, setting those overrides is required
      2. Use a single job template for multiple teams/locations: In this case, you can specify multiple mappings that use the same job template but a different team/location. E.g., the mapping filter could include a filter based on the job requisition’s location and map it to an Ashby location.

When a new job requisition or a job requisition that hasn’t been imported already gets synced, the mapping list gets evaluated from top to bottom. The first mapping that matches a job requisition will be used. If no matching mapping can be found, the job requisition doesn’t get imported but will be re-considered during the next sync.

When a matching mapping could be found, a new job gets created from the specified job template:

1. It uses the job template as a basis for creating the job.
2. It uses the job requisition’s Job Posting Title as the job’s title.
3. If an override team and/or location is set on the mapping, it will be used for the new job.
4. New jobs get created as "Draft" and need to be opened manually.

Additionally, the following data is kept in sync with the job:

- The job requisition’s Job Posting Title gets synced into the job’s title
- The job requisition’s Employment Type gets synced into the job’s Employment Type
- Custom fields that have been enabled in the integration configuration’s Job Fields
- The Job Requisition ID gets synced into the Job’s Custom Requisition Id field
- Workday Position ↔ Job Requisition links get synced into Opening ↔ Job links

## Send Hired Candidates to Workday

Once a candidate gets hired in Ashby, it is possible to send the candidate to Workday. Internally the integration triggers the `Hire Employee` business process in Workday but doesn’t complete the process automatically. Completing the business process requires data not available in Ashby and what data is required also differentiates from one customer to another, depending on how they set up their Workday instance.

When hiring a candidate, there are two scenarios:

### Hiring into an Opening imported by the Workday Integration

In this scenario, theoretically, no additional offer fields are required to send hires successfully to Workday. By default, we take over the following data from the position the candidate has been hired into:

- Supervisory Organization (optional): We set the position’s organization as the supervisory organization for the new hire
- Country (optional): We use the country of the position’s job requisition’s primary location as the country for the new hire

Workday validates data according to the information provided here, so make sure the other candidate’s data (such as the phone number) matches the country. E.g., Workday rejects a US phone number when hiring for a German position. In case you need more flexibility around those two fields, they can be enabled as an offer custom field which would allow overriding the values if necessary. Depending on the hiring restrictions of the position, it’s possible that more data is required, but this depends on how the position/job requisition is configured.

### Hiring into an Opening NOT imported by the Workday Integration

For this scenario to make sense, make sure to enable the “Create Position From Opening” flag in the integration settings. With the flag enabled, the integration generates an ad-hoc Workday position from the Ashby Opening at the time a candidate gets pushed to Workday.

Here’s a set of minimal offer form fields that need to be enabled (and filled out in the offer form) to successfully create a position and send a hired candidate to Workday in this scenario:

- For creating the position:
  - Supervisory Organization: The organization selected here will be used as both the organization to create the position and the organization the candidate is hired into
  - Company Assignment: Depends on company settings
  - Cost Center
- For initiating the `Hire Employee` business process:
  - Location
  - Job Profile
  - Time Type
  - Employee Type

It’s recommended to make all the above fields required through Custom Field settings.

For customers that are already in the process of implementing the integration, FAQs can be found below. Please make sure to reach out to your implementation partner with any questions.

### Post-hire changes

Sometimes, changes need to be made to an event that has already been sent to Workday. There are a few ways to process these changes:

- If the Staffing event (Hire, Change Job, or Contract Contingent Worker) is still in progress, you can Deny or Cancel the event.
- If the Staffing event is completed and the change is small (e.g. start date change), you can Update the Offer in Ashby and then correct the event in Workday separately.
- If the Staffing event is completed and then change is big enough to warrant a full rescind, you can Update the Offer in Ashby, rescind the event in Workday, then push the event again from Ashby.
- To send the event again from Ashby, click the More menu in the top right of the Job Consideration, then open the task **Add Candidate to HRIS**. This will allow you to select Workday and send the Staffing event again.
- When re-sending the event to Workday, Ashby will only send the Hire, Change Job, or Contract Contingent Worker event. If the hiring scenario was for a conversion where another event was sent from Ashby (e.g. a Termination or an End Contingent Worker Contract event), Ashby will NOT attempt to send the Termination or End CW Contract event again. The best practice is to Correct the Termination or End CW Contract event in Workday (not rescind it), then push the Hire, Change Job, or Contract Contingent Worker event again from Ashby. If you rescind the End CW Contract or Termination event in Workday, you will need to manually replace it before attempting to add the candidate again from Ashby, or you will get an error that the applicant is already hired.

## FAQ

::::::ExpandableHeading
### Can I set an approval chain via the API?

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on manually creating approval processes, please check out [Creating and Editing Approval Processes](docId\:e-YBlrBjIGpkXpXJELyJo)&#x20;
:::

:::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
::::VerticalSplitItem
When creating an approval, you have the option to set it to be managed via the API if you are on the Enterprise plan.

To create an approval within Ashby, head to [Admin>Organization Setup>Approvals](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/organizational-settings/approvals/offer) and click `+ New`.

Toggle on the Managed by the API? option in the Steps section. You can opt to set up criteria within the scope section if only offers who meet a certain criteria should be managed via the API.

From now on, when an offer is created and submitted, a Waiting for external process message will show in the offer overview. This means that Ashby is waiting for an approval chain to be submitted via an API call.

:::hint{type="info"}
To pull data via the API to update the approval chain, you can use the approvalDefinition.update request. More on this [here](https://developers.ashbyhq.com/reference/approvaldefinitionupdate).

Once the approval chain has been received from Workday, the approval steps will be added to the offer
:::


::::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://cdn.zappy.app/7b2e0bb42c2e16d5024e9199c6fa2f32.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/3636ea11a353dc3843f740533aa3f1b1.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/79ee634485cdfa55f0cd9871157c0440.png)

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/aef4fc68138f7fd88619dcf10b7957d8.png)
:::
:::::


::::::

:::ExpandableHeading
### My Open in Workday links aren’t working for the objects (jobs, openings, locations, etc) I’m syncing with Workday - is there a way to update the tenant URL?

Yes. Within your Workday integration settings in Ashby, click the pencil icon beside `Access Settings`. Add your URL to the Workday Tenant URL field to override the URL currently being used.


:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### The sync status is showing a Last Completed Sync from over an hour ago. What could be the problem?

If your Workday HRIS sync is in an error state, Ashby Support will reach out to you within 4 hours with specific troubleshooting steps for your Ashby instance. Common issues include:

1. Access Settings > Webservice Endpoint URL: this URL should end with /ccx/service and have no additional text after that.&#x20;
   1. To resolve: Remove any additional text.
2. Access Settings > REST API Base URL: this URL should end with .com and have no additional text after that.&#x20;
   1. To resolve: Remove any additional text.
3. Access Settings > Tenant Name: this field is case sensitive.&#x20;
   1. To resolve: from your Workday homepage, confirm that the Tenant Name in Ashby exactly matches what is between .com/ and /d/ including the case.
4. Confirm that the REST API Client ID, REST API Client Secret, and REST API Refresh Token are correctly entered.&#x20;
   1. To resolve: in Workday, open the View API Clients task, then under API Clients for Integrations, locate the Ashby ISU. You will find the Client ID and Refresh Token in the grid. You won't be able to view the Client Secret from the grid, but can generate a new one using the related actions. Reenter all 3 of these pieces of information into Ashby and click Update to ensure all three are saved together.
5. Confirm that the ISU password and authentication method are allowed for your tenant. To resolve: In Workday, run the task Signons and Attempted Signons for the Ashby ISU.&#x20;
   1. If there is an error for "Invalid for Authentication policy", update the Authentication Policy to allow the ISU to sign in using a Username and Password. Open the task Manage Authentication Policies and click Edit. Add a row for the Ashby ISU for Authentication Conditions = Any and Allowed Authenticaiton Types = User Name Password. Click OK to save the changes, then open the task Activate All Pending Authentication Policy Changes and submit to activate the changes.
   2. If there is an error for "Invalid Username or Password", update the ISU password. In Workday, open the task Edit Workday Account for the Ashby ISU, create a new password and ensure the Require New Password at Next Sign In is de-selected. Then click Submit, and in the Ashby access settings, update the ISU Password to the new one. If the password has expired, you can use the task Maintain Password Rules to exempt the Ashby ISU from password expiration to prevent the issue from re-surfacing.
   3. If there is an error that the "Account is Locked Out", you need to unlock the account. In Workday, open the task Manage Workday Accounts. Select Unlock Workday Accounts, and select the Ashby ISU. Click OK to complete the unlock.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Help! I received an error when attempting to add the candidate to Workday. How can I resolve the issue?

Ashby will surface the exact error message from Workday in the UI under the button you clicked to `Add Candidate Data`. It also logs that there was an attempt to push the event to Workday, that it failed, and the date/time stamp of the push attempt.&#x20;
You can set up a [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) to notify a person or channel in email or Slack - use the fields `Workday Latest Hire Push Status` and `Workday Latest Hire Push Attempted At` to configure the alert.&#x20;
You can also enable the Opt-In Feature for the `AI-Assisted HRIS Error Explainer` which will give you further information about the error. Once this feature is enabled, from the `More` menu of the Job Consideration, locate the task `View External Pushes` and you will see the Explain Error button.&#x20;

[Here is a Loom demo](https://www.loom.com/share/bae44fbab935430b9e876e349bc56ab9) of the error explainer in action! If you and your HRIS team are unable to troubleshoot the issue, please contact [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) and our Support team would be happy to assist you with resolution.
:::


[title] Exporting Reports and Dashboards
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This guide gives an overview of the various report and dashboard export options.

# Overview

Ashby supports exporting both reports and dashboards. Depending on the report type, different export formats may be available. Some reports support only a PDF export if there is a bespoke graphical format or table summary, and some support raw data export in the CSV format. Dashboards exports are available as PDF and CSV files.

# Report export

## Export reports directly from a dashboard

When viewing any report from a dashboard, you can click the three dots in the top-right corner of the report, then `Go To Report` to view the report and export it.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/p-BAY0pocsl8HKR_85O7S_ashby-example-sourcing-activity-acent-ashby-2026-05-14-at-92322-am.jpg)

An `Export` option shows in the top-right corner of the report, underneath the `More` button.

![Screenshot showing the Export option in the top-right corner of a report, underneath the More button.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/7u1OSCXCJQTTnmt82lpxu_report-export-option.jpg)

## Exporting a visual report

If your report is a visual report (bar chart, pie chart, etc.), you can export it in PNG, SVG, and PDF formats. You can also include or remove the title from the export and determine the size prior to exporting. Click `Export` to export the report with your configured settings.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_dnKTciQXesmLw8IWcKvc_export-visual-report-options.jpg" size="100" alt="Setting the export file type for the report" isUploading="false" width="904" height="422" darkWidth="904" darkHeight="422" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::hint{type="info"}
You can change the format of the report in the **Visualization** section of the report. This updates the export.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9bkkTEDochs-dz9IsqTti_pipeline-history-last-3-months-report-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-100847-am.jpg" size="56" width="864" height="958" darkWidth="864" darkHeight="958" position="center" alt="A screenshot of the visualization section of a report." showCaption="false"}
:::

## Export raw data as a CSV

If you are exporting a table report that isn't a passthrough report, clicking the `Export` button when viewing the report exports it in CSV format. No pop-up appears to configure further settings.

## Export passthrough reports

Passthrough reports involve a customized visualization that is available for PDF export only. The CSV export includes the raw data that goes into the passthrough calculation, but given the complexity of the report configuration options, the exact passthrough report results do not easily fit into a CSV format.

When you click `Export` on a passthrough report, the PDF exports immediately. As with custom list reports, there are no export setting options.

## Exports not currently supported

Two report types do not currently support convenient export:

- [Candidate pipeline](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/explore/pipeline) template report
- [Candidate list](https://app.ashbyhq.com/candidate-searches/new) report

Both of these reports involve custom visual displays in table formats that do not lend themselves to convenient export formats. The same underlying information can be generated through custom lists or other report types.

## Automated delivery of reports

If you would like to have report results automatically delivered via Slack or email, check out our [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) feature.

# Dashboard export

## Export a dashboard as a PDF, a CSV, or both

To export your dashboard:

1. Navigate to the dashboard you'd like to export within **Dashboards > Saved Dashboards**.

:::hint{type="info" indent="2"}
If you are accessing the dashboard from a pin on your home page, click the `Edit` button on the dashboard to be taken to the dashboard view that allows you to export.

![The route to navigate to a dashboard from a pin on the home page.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MN1ygrrRYJS9CsDzO_WVy_active-jobs-candidates-and-offers-acent-ashby-2026-04-20-at-94459-am.jpg)

If you have View Only access to the dashboard, click `Go To Dashboard` instead.
:::

2. Click `More`, then `Export`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/E7z5s5iHV_xXZ0tGLAvmX_exporting-a-dashboard.jpg" size="100" width="1068" height="840" position="center" alt="More, then Export on a dashboard" indent="2" darkWidth="1068" darkHeight="840" showCaption="false"}

3. Determine whether you'd like to export the dashboard as a PDF, CSV, or download both.
4. Click `Export`.

![A screenshot showing the popover where the export file type is selected for a dashboard.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Out1BJwi0xY009jFt6EV5-20260514-081816.jpg)

## Limitations of a dashboard PDF export: truncated report results

The dashboard PDF export is a visual snapshot of displayed results. This means that some information may be truncated. For example, Candidate Pipeline or Custom List reports often have very lengthy sets of information. Only the data visible in the dashboard's report tile will be included in the dashboard PDF export.

[title] Paychex
[path] Integrations/Post Hire/

Once a candidate has accepted an offer you can push their data into Paychex to kick off the new employee onboarding process.

## Overview

| Sync custom fields | Sync offer letters | Sync file uploads | One or two-way sync                 |
| ------------------ | ------------------ | ----------------- | ----------------------------------- |
|           ❌        |        ❌           |        ❌          | One-way sync from Ashby to Paychex. |

## Integrating Paychex and Ashby

1. Reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com) with your Paychex organization’s displayID and we will request that your Paychex account be linked to Ashby. Once we confirm they are linked, please move to step 2.
2. Login to Paychex Flex, navigate to Company Settings > Integrated Applications
3. Once logged in, you will see the app with an Access Requested notice

Important: The following must be performed by a Flex Admin User

![Screen Shot 2022-05-26 at 11.50.31 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/B1unCgi-U3PfEK3CaEVHH_screenshot2022-05-26at115031am.png)

Then toggle on the integration, agree to the legal notice, and click `Save`.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3hnXL9yPgz6IV9uhinyCE_screenshot2022-05-26at115204am.png" size="96" width="2124" height="914" darkWidth="2124" darkHeight="914" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-05-26 at 11.52.04 AM.png" showCaption="false"}

We push the following candidate data from Ashby to Paychex:

- Candidate name
- Employment type
- Worker type
- Email address

[title] Metaview
[path] Integrations/Video Interviewing/

This guide will walk you through integrating your Metaview account with Ashby, allowing you to send assessments in your interview plans.

## Integration Overview

Metaview’s integration with Ashby allows us to capture interviews using the tools you already use to automatically provide AI-generated interview summaries.

## Connect Metaview with Ashby

1\. Log into your Ashby account and head over to Admin > Integrations > [Metaview](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/marketplace/metaview). Click on the `+ Create API Key for Metaview` to create an Ashby API key, then copy the key generated.

![Screen Recording 2023-04-04 at 09.41.33 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gErDhlVWo8nYkQTbYYhTZ_screenrecording2023-04-04at094133am.gif)

2: Go to [https://my.metaview.app/settings/ashby](https://my.metaview.app/settings/ashby) and paste your generated API key. Once this is saved in Metaview, the integration will be enabled.

![Metaview settings.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4EzArgWSEMGVJewYrnVd4_metaviewsettings.png)

## Using the integration

Once the integration is enabled, there are no additional settings to configure. Interviews will automatically be pulled into Metaview and some metadata is synced (for example, Job Title and scorecards).

You’ll also see an option in Metaview to open the Interview in Ashby.

![metaview.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0X8Shc5D_Qn_jqgUa-w-L_metaview.png)

The following resources are synced from Ashby to Metaview:

- Applications
- Application feedback (i.e. scorecards)
- Archive reasons
- Candidates
- Departments
- Feedback form definitions (i.e. scorecard templates)
- Interview types
- Interview events
- Interview plans
- Interview schedules
- Interview stages
- Job postings
- Locations
- Offers
- Sources
- Users

The following metadata is then surfaced in the Metaview app for each interview:

- Interview stage
- Job title
- Job location
- Job department
- Overall application status
- Rejection type
- Rejection reason
- Scorecards

The extracted data is then used to:

- Schedule events
- Identify candidate names
- Automatically add Ashby users to Metaview

## Additional Information

More information on this integration can be found [here.](https://support.metaview.ai/doc/ashby/docn81BBKp0n?_gl=1*m1uh8b*_gcl_au*NjQyNDM1NDU2LjE3MjE2NTM2ODE.*_ga*MTA5NDI1NTIxOC4xNjUwOTc4MDQ4*_ga_T70YKSHD19*MTcyNDIyODM5MC4xMzYwLjEuMTcyNDIyODQzOC4xMi4wLjA.) If there are any questions setting up or using this integration, please reach out to [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

[title] Pipeline History
[path] Ashby Analytics/Report Templates & Core Dashboards/

This document gives a basic introduction to the topic of historical pipeline reporting and an overview of the Pipeline History template report.

## Overview

![A pipeline history report for all active interview stages across an organization's entire recruiting process.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Gc-5ymh0XDIgLotjFoPEk_pipelinehistory-allapplications.png)

A pipeline history report for all active interview stages across an organization's entire recruiting process.

Ashby’s Pipeline History report allows you to address the question: how many candidates were present in which stages over time? This is achieved by analyzing the full history of your application stage entries and exits and provides an easy way to visualize trends of candidate applications in your process over time.

## Tutorial

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/1ed0304f95be45f3b57f9da05926a790"}

## Pipeline History examples

Example pipeline history for a single job, where application review is optionally shown. As the weeks progress, candidates progress through to the offer stage.

The Pipeline History report can address a few different reporting needs. At the most granular, you may want to report on the history for a specific, individual job. More broadly, you may want to look at departmental, team, or organization-wide pipeline history trends across many jobs and their associated applications in aggregate.

- Pipeline history for a given job
- Pipeline history for a group (department, team, entire organization)
- Pipeline history for a specific stage (e.g. number of candidates in the Offer stage over time)
- Pipeline history for specific hiring team members (recruiter, HM)

The standard Pipeline History report will group counts by the historical stage group an application was in, but with Ashby, you can optionally group by any field that has historical pertinence. You may want to see your pipeline by important DEI metrics, departmental breakdown, or possibly source.

![Example pipeline history for the job analyzed above, this time focusing on the active stages only (excluding Application Review) and grouping by Gender.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dUZnRS9nEOyhu0MFJBQI7_weeklypipelinehistorybygendercustomermanager.png)

Example pipeline history for the job analyzed above, this time focusing on the active stages only (excluding Application Review) and grouping by Gender.

## Create a pipeline history report

### Build the report

**From the Template Report Library**

To analyze your pipeline history, we recommend using our Pipeline History template report from our Template Report Library. From your home page, select Reports > Templates > Pipeline History.

![Screen Cast 2022-12-08 at 7.27.06 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pX4mgy9aUCByCknnaY6Jg_screencast2022-12-08at72706am.gif)

**From Count over Time report**

You can access the reporting subject Historical Applications when creating a Count over Time report. From your home page, select Reports > Build > Count Over Time. Then change the subject to Historical Applications.

![Screen Cast 2022-12-08 at 7.28.06 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/squ2_UDRF4gWORxJeP-Yw_screencast2022-12-08at72806am.gif)

### Filter your Pipeline History report

![The historical application fields for filtering.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/8tAi9OZvdAXNs2KVQJn2R_screenshot2022-12-01at74207pm.png)

The historical application fields for filtering.

- **Historical Interview Stage Group/Name**: can be used to filter the pipeline history report to include or exclude specific stages or stage groups as needed. For example, selecting a historical stage group of Onsite would filter the pipeline history to show the the weekly count of all applications in the onsite stage.
- **Historical Interview Stage Type:**  allows you to select all stages of a specific category easily (e.g. all lead stages, or only active interview stages).
- **Was in Stage:** allows selection on the historical time period of interest (e.g. the last 12 weeks, current YTD or last week).
- **Current Application:** follow this path to find easy reference to all of the current application, candidate and job data fields *as of today.* An example of this may be filtering by all applications of a specific source type.

### Group your Pipeline History report

The Pipeline History template report defaults to grouping by stage or stage group, depending on your Ashby configuration. The application stage history provides a means of reconstructing all historical counts. Other fields accessed when selecting Current Application are static (e.g. the candidate DEI information or application source). These fields are good candidates for grouping.

![Active pipeline history grouped by Source Type to reveal the composition over time.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MyK4M93dQ8yeI3FJt1qrs_pipelinehistorybysourcetype.png)

Active pipeline history grouped by Source Type to reveal the composition over time.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Take care when grouping your pipeline history by fields that may not have been preserved historically.
:::



However, you are advised to take care when grouping by a Current Application field that it may be liable to change on the application, such as the Job’s Hiring Manager or the Application’s Recruiter. This may result in showing a historical count grouped by a value at the present time that was not the value at a historical point in time.

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Is this a *snapshot* at a specific time?

No. Pipeline history is *not* a snapshot at a specific point in time. A snapshot approach would capture your candidate pipeline at one point in time (e.g. every Monday at midnight) and be liable to miss any stage presence between that time and the next snapshot. For example, if a candidate’s application was in the Screen stage on Monday when a snapshot was taken, and then was moved through a Technical Screen, an Assessment, and was moved to Onsite, the second snapshot the following week would capture only the Onsite stage, missing the stage transition events over the last week.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Can an application count more than once in a given time period (e.g. week)?

Yes. As a candidate’s application moves through stages, the pipeline history report will count their presence in each stage that they enter or are in during the time interval of interest (e.g. weekly). For example, a candidate with an application that starts in Screen and moves to Technical Assessment within one week would be captured and reflected in the pipeline history report as a unique count in each respective stage when grouped by stage.

If there is no Group By selection applied, an application will count once and only once in the given time interval.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What’s the difference between *Historical Applications* and *Current Application*?

Application History refers to the reconstructed stage history of each application. This is a unique set of data which Ashby allows selection and filtering of based on the stage presence at any point in time. The Current Application path references the candidate’s application at the present moment in time. For example, an application will have been at a Screen stage at some point two weeks ago, but at present, its current stage may be Onsite.
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### What is a Historical Job Consideration?

A Historical job consideration is the stage or stage-group the job consideration was in on the given calendar date.
:::


[title] Reporting on Candidates vs Applications
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics: Best Practices/

This document summarizes the case for reporting on applications as a subject rather than candidates. Applications contain the meaningful features, such as job, department, and interview details that often drive the metrics of interest. As a single candidate can have many applications, our recommendation is to report metrics based on applications.

## One candidate, many applications

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zn7YKpDzxqM6p83VOzkHc_candidtestoapplications.png" size="50" width="484" height="414" darkWidth="484" darkHeight="414" position="center" alt="candidtes to applications.png" showCaption="false"}

In the recruiting process and reporting context we naturally speak of and refer to candidates. That's a natural inclination as we're often discussing the person under the resume. However, given a single candidate can have multiple applications, the details about the individual application start to matter when it comes to reporting. This is sometimes called a one-to-many relationship: one candidate, many applications.

## Reporting features live on the application

The most common features of reporting are, in almost all cases, derived from the candidate's Application. The application contains such details as:

- The specific Job the candidate is considered for
- The department and team
- The start date of the application
- The recruiter and hiring manager
- The application timeline: start date, stage progression and so on
- The interview details specific to the job

This isn't a comprehensive list, but the key take away is that the above features are unique to the application, and therefore can be different for each application even if the underlying candidate is the same person.

## Accounting for your recruiting investments

If a single candidate has two different job applications, each of which go through an interview cycle and ultimately result in a hire (or not) for one job, you want your reporting to capture the entirety of your team's invested efforts. If two applications from the same candidate got a the full treatment of panel interviews and scheduling you'll capture that by reporting at the application level.

![Frame 9.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UKloFAZu3XRX5yAdXi2d__frame9.png)

## When should I report on candidates?

There are times where counting the underlying candidates may make sense, and Ashby permits you to do that level of reporting if needed. However, in our experience, it is often quite rare that such reports are informative or actionable. A good heuristic is if you find yourself wanting to incorporate any of the reporting features summarized above (e.g. department, or interview stage), you should be reporting on Applications.

[title] Ashby Subject & Field Definitions
[path] Ashby Analytics/Analytics Glossary/

In this guide, we list all of the Ashby subject and field values, along with definitions for each. This glossary will help you determine how to filter or group data, or which filters to add to include the information you need in a custom list report.&#x20;

## Subject Definitions

| Subject                            | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| ---------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job Consideration                  | A candidate’s record on a specific job.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Job                                | A job set up within your ATS.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Job Postings                       | The job posting created for a job within your ATS (Available for Ashby All-In-One customers only)                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Interview                          | Scheduled interviews in your ATS. Interviews can be counted as one per stage (i.e. an onsite panel with 4 different interviews will count as 1 onsite interview) or one per scheduled interview (i.e. an onsite panel with 4 different interview sill count as 4 interviews). |
| Interview Schedules                | Covers the interview schedule status, including interview stage, interview stage group, RSVP declines and more.                                                                                                                                                               |
| Interviewer Participation          | Scheduled interviewers. Each interviewer counts as an interview participation. These tie closely to feedback forms.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Interview Stage Transition         | Moves to and from stages. Accidental stage moves will be detected and counted.                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Feedback Form                      | We pull in the person who submitted, when they submitted, and the overall recommendation (score out of 4) from feedback forms.                                                                                                                                                |
| Sequence                           | Sequences sent in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Application Form                   | Refers to the application form candidates submit when they apply.                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Candidate                          | Candidates in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Outreach Activities                | Tracking the status and type of outreach activity (email, LinkedIn Connection Request, LinkedIn Inmail, etc)                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Diversity Survey                   | Custom diversity surveys created in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| EEOC Survey                        | Custom EEOC surveys created in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Sourcing Forms                     | Custom sourcing forms created in Ashby                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Questionnaire                      | Custom questionnaires created in Ashby                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Event Audience Members             | Attendees in the audience of events you create in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Opening                            | Headcount for a job using the Openings feature in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Candidate Experience Survey        | Custom candidate experience surveys created in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Employees                          | The employees you add as users in Ashby                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Quality of Hire Survey Enrollments | Track the status of Quality of Hire surveys                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Quality of Hire Survey Steps       | The steps you include in your Quality of Hire surveys                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Projects                           | List for tracking talent that you aren't actively considering for a job.                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Project Members                    | Report on candidates being added to projects.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Candidate Review Requests          | Report on candidate reviews (both completed and pending)                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| AI Notetaker Recordings            | Report on the recording mode and the availability of a transcript or recording of an interview that had the AI Notetaker enabled.                                                                                                                                             |
| Candidate Recording Consent Choice | Report on the recording consent choices of candidates.                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |

## Time Frame Filter Definitions

| Subject                                | Time Frame Filter          | Definition                                                                                                                                                      |
| -------------------------------------- | -------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job Consideration                      | Activity Status Due        | When the current activity is due.                                                                                                                               |
|                                        | Archived At                | The point in time at which a job consideration was marked as archived.                                                                                          |
|                                        | Consideration Ended At     | The point in time at which a job consideration was either marked as ‘Hired’ or ‘Archived’.                                                                      |
|                                        | Hired At                   | The point in time at which a candidate was hired for a job.                                                                                                     |
|                                        | Offer Stage Entered        | The point in time the job consideration entered the offer stage of the application process.                                                                     |
|                                        | Started At                 | The time at which the job consideration was created. Either when a candidate applied or when a user considered them for the job in Ashby.                       |
|                                        | … Stage Group Interview At | The time of the first scheduled interview in a given stage group.                                                                                               |
|                                        | Offer Decided At           | The time at which the offer was accepted or rejected by the candidate.                                                                                          |
| Job                                    | Was Open                   | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all jobs that were open in a given timeframe.                                                                 |
|                                        | Created At                 | The time at which a job was created.                                                                                                                            |
|                                        | Opened At                  | The time at which a job was opened.                                                                                                                             |
|                                        | Closed At                  | The time at which a job was closed.                                                                                                                             |
| Interview                              | Start Time                 | The time when an interview took place. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to the start time of the first interview.                  |
|                                        | Created At                 | The time when an interview was created by the organizer. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to when the first interview was created. |
| Interviewer Participation              | Start Time                 | The time when an interviewer event started.                                                                                                                     |
|                                        | End Time                   | The time when an interviewer event ended.                                                                                                                       |
| Interview Stage Transition             | Entered At                 | Point in time at which a stage was entered.                                                                                                                     |
|                                        | Left At                    | Point in time at which a stage was left.                                                                                                                        |
| Feedback Form                          | Submitted At               | The point in time at which the feedback form was submitted.                                                                                                     |
| Sequence                               | Started At                 | The point in time a sequence was started.                                                                                                                       |
|                                        | First Reply Received At    | The date of the first reply received from the candidate.                                                                                                        |
| Application Form                       | Submitted At               | The point in time at which an application form was submitted.                                                                                                   |
| Candidate                              | Last Email Sent At         | The last point in time at which an email was sent to the candidate.                                                                                             |
|                                        | Last Email Received At     | The last point in time at which an email was received from the candidate.                                                                                       |
|                                        | Added At                   | The point in time at which the candidate was added to the system.                                                                                               |
|                                        | Hired At Date              | The point in time the candidate was first hired. When used in filters, finds candidates that have been hired during the given date range.                       |
|                                        | Follow Up Date             | The date for a pending follow up with the candidate.                                                                                                            |
| Diversity Survey                       | Submitted At               | The point in time at which a Diversity form was submitted.                                                                                                      |
| EEOC Survey                            | Submitted At               | The point in time at which an EEOC form was submitted.                                                                                                          |
| Opening                                | Created At                 | The point in time an opening was created.                                                                                                                       |
|                                        | Opened At                  | The point in time an opening was opened.                                                                                                                        |
|                                        | Closed At                  | The point in time an opening was closed or filled.                                                                                                              |
|                                        | Was Open                   | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all openings that were open in a given time frame.                                                            |
| Candidate Experience Survey Submission | Survey Request Created At  | When the survey request for this submission was originally created.                                                                                             |
|                                        | Submitted At               | The point in time at which a Candidate Experience Survey was submitted.                                                                                         |
| Project                                | Created At                 | The point in time at which the project was created.                                                                                                             |
|                                        | Updated At                 | The point in time at which the project was last updated.                                                                                                        |
| Candidate Review Request               | Created At                 | The point in time at which the request was created.                                                                                                             |
|                                        | Submitted At               | The point in time at which the review was submitted.                                                                                                            |
| Project Member                         | Added to Project At        | When the candidate was added to the project.                                                                                                                    |

## Fields Definitions

### Job Consideration Fields

| Field                                 | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| ------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Current Interview Stage Name          | The title of the current interview stage name.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Current Interview Stage Group         | The title of the current interview stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Current Interview Stage Type          | The type of the current interview stage: Lead, Application Review, Active, Hired, or Archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Days in Current Interview Stage       | The number of days the job consideration has been in the current interview stage.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Days in Current Interview Stage Name  | The number of days the job consideration has been in the current interview stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Average Overall Recommendation        | The average overall recommendation score given by interviewers for the job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Started At                            | The time at which the job consideration was created. Either when a candidate applied or when a user considered them for the job in Ashby.                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Passed Through Stage Group/Name       | Allows filtering applications that have passed through a certain stage group/name, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will only return applications that have passed through that stage group/name, not applications that skipped the stage group/name. Note, passed through stage group/name will include candidates currently in the stage group/name. |
| Reached Stage Group/Name              | Allows filtering applications that have reached a certain stage group/name, e.g. 'Onsite'. Will return all applications that have passed through this stage group/name or have skipped this stage/stage name but passed through a later stage group/ name.                                                                           |
| Reached Stage Type                    | Allows filtering job considerations that have reached a certain stage type, e.g. ‘Application Review’. Will return all job considerations that have passed through a stage of this type or have skipped such a stage but passed through a later stage.                                                                               |
| Furthest Stage Group/Name Reached     | Allows selecting and filtering by by the furthest stage group/title this job consideration has reached.                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Most Recent Active Stage Group        | Allows selecting and filtering by the stage group the application was in when being hired or rejected.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Outcome                               | The overall outcome of the job consideration. Can be one of Lead, Active, Archived, or Hired.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Outcome with Archive Reason           | The overall outcome of the job consideration, including the type of archive reason. Can be one of Lead, Active, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected Other, or Hired.                                                                                                                                                    |
| Activity Status                       | Shows with status a job consideration is in. E.g. if it Needs Scheduling, is Waiting on Feedback, etc.                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Activity Status Due At                | When the current activity is due.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Job                                   | The job the candidate applied to or is considered for.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Applied via Job Posting               | The job posting the candidate applied to.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Source                                | The source through which the job consideration was created.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Source Type                           | The type of the source through which the job consideration was created.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Source Site                           | Only available when the source is *Sourced: Ashby Chrome Extension*. Lists where the job consideration was sourced from via the Chrome Extension (LinkedIn, LinkedIn Recruiter, GitHub).                                                                                                                                             |
| Hiring Manager                        | The Hiring Manager assigned to this job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Recruiter                             | The Recruiter assigned to this job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Recruiting Coordinator                | The Recruiting Coordinator assigned to this job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Sourcer                               | The Sourcer assigned to this job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Assessment Sent Date                  | The date the assessment was sent.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Assessment Finished Date              | The date the assessment was finished.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Archive Reasons                       | Filtering by reason the candidate was archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Credited To                           | The person the job consideration is credited to.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Extended Offer?                       | Whether or not your organization extended an offer for this job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Offer Stage Entered Date              | The point in time the job consideration entered the offer stage of the application process.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Archive Reason                        | The reason a job consideration was archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Archive Reason Type                   | The type of the reason a job consideration was archived. Can be one of Rejected by candidate, Rejected by org, or Other.                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Archive Reason Note                   | The note added to the Archive Note field during the archiving process.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Auto-Rejected                         | Whether this application was rejected automatically based on rejection criteria in job settings.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Hired At                              | The point in time at which a candidate was hired for a job.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Archived At                           | The point in time at which a job consideration was marked as archived.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Consideration Ended At                | The point in time at which a job consideration was either marked as ‘Hired’ or ‘Archived’.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Candidate                             | The individual candidate of this job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Application Review Average Score      | The average score given by all users in application review. If an application passes through application review multiple times, this will consider all scores.                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Application Review Assignee           | The person assigned to review the job consideration.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Involves                              | Returns any job considerations where the user is on the hiring team or is specifically following the candidate.                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Time in Process (Days)                | Number of days from application start or most recent unarchive to consideration end (archived or hired). For active applications, we report the time from application start or most recent unarchive to the current date.                                                                                                            |
| … Stage Group Interview At            | The time of the first scheduled interview in a given stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Has Resume Uploaded?                  | Whether this candidate has a resume uploaded for this job consideration or not.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Workday Latest Hire Push Status       | Whether an attempt was made to push the job consideration to Workday and, if so, the status of the latest attempt.                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Workday Latest Hire Push Attempted At | The time at which the latest attempt was made to push the job consideration to Workday.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |

Other Subjects/Related Subjects available in reports with the Job Consideration Subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Job](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Interview](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Interview Schedule](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Stage Transitions](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Candidate Experience Survey](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Questionnaire](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Offer](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Feedback Form](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Job Posting](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Application Form](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Opening](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Quality of Hire Survey Enrollment](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Job Fields

| Field                         | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| ----------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job                           | The job’s identity.                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Title                         | Represents the name or title of the job.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Requisition ID                | Alphanumerical identifier assigned to the job that is unique to your company’s internal processes.                                                                                                 |
| Creator                       | The user who created the job.                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Hiring Manager                | The Hiring Manager who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                          |
| Recruiter                     | The Recruiter who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                               |
| Recruiting Coordinator        | The Recruiting Coordinator who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                  |
| Sourcer                       | The Sourcer who is on the hiring team of this job.                                                                                                                                                 |
| Team                          | The department or team directly associated with this job. E.g. if a job is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Product Marketing’. |
| Department                    | The top-level department associated with this job. E.g. if a job is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Marketing’.                |
| Location                      | The job’s location that is used as the default location for job postings of a job. Allows searching for jobs based on their location or the region in which the location is located.               |
| Job Status                    | The current status of the job. Can be Open, Closed, Archived, or Draft.                                                                                                                            |
| Employment Type               | The type of employment offered for the job. Can be Full time, Part time, Intern, Contract, or Temporary.                                                                                           |
| Was Open                      | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all jobs that were open in a given timeframe.                                                                                                    |
| Created At                    | The time at which the job was created.                                                                                                                                                             |
| Opened At                     | The time at which the job was opened.                                                                                                                                                              |
| Closed At                     | The time at which the job was closed.                                                                                                                                                              |
| Open Duration (in days)       | How many days this job has been open for.                                                                                                                                                          |
| Open Headcount                | Number of Open Headcount for this job.                                                                                                                                                             |
| Active Candidate Count        | How many candidates have applications in active interview or offer stages. Excludes candidates with applications in application review.                                                            |
| Number of Candidates in …     | The number of job considerations currently in a given stage group.                                                                                                                                 |
| Is Template?                  | Currently, job templates are shown as draft or archived jobs. Use this field to filter job templates out.                                                                                          |
| Close Reason                  | Returns any jobs which were closed for a particular reason.                                                                                                                                        |
| External Job Board Visibility | The status of a job’s posting on your external Ashby job board. Jobs can have the posting status of listed, unlisted or no posting.                                                                |
| Internal Job Board Visibility | The status of a job’s posting on your internal Ashby job board. Jobs can have the posting status of listed, unlisted or no posting.                                                                |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Job Subject:

- [Opening](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Job Posting Fields

| Field                                   | Definition                                                                                                                                           |
| --------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job Posting Title                       | The title given to the job posting.                                                                                                                  |
| Status                                  | The status of the job posting (published or unpublished)                                                                                             |
| Social Description                      | The short text description of posting for social sharing. The text added to the *Social Description* section of your job posting.                    |
| External Visibility                     | Whether the post is set as listed or unlisted on your public-facing job board.                                                                       |
| Internal Visibility                     | Whether the post is set as listed or unlisted on your internal job board.                                                                            |
| Location                                | The location listed on the job posting.                                                                                                              |
| Application Deadline                    | The deadline set for applications (if enabled). Will appear as a date with a timestamp or a null value.                                              |
| Automatically Unpublish?                | Only available to display if an application deadline has been set.                                                                                   |
| Application Form Title                  | The title of the application form assigned to the job posting.                                                                                       |
| Application Form Type                   | Whether the application form is a shared or custom application form.                                                                                 |
| Job                                     | The job the job posting is assigned to.                                                                                                              |
| Auto-Confirm Application Enabled?       | Whether an application confirmation email has been configured for this job posting.                                                                  |
| Auto-Confirm Application Email Template | The email template that is sent out as part of the application confirmation email setup.                                                             |
| Auto-Reject Application Enabled?        | If auto-reject rules have been configured and activated for the job posting.                                                                         |
| Auto-Reject Application Email Template  | The email template that will be sent out as part of the auto-reject configuration.                                                                   |
| Created At                              | The date and time the job posting was originally created.                                                                                            |
| Internal Job Board URL                  | The URL of the job posting on the internal job board.                                                                                                |
| Last Published At                       | The date and time of the last publication of the job posting. Postings can be unpublished and re-published so this is a most-recent event timestamp. |

Other subjects available in reports with the Job Posting subject:

- [Job](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Interview Fields

| Field                    | Definition                                                                                                                                                      |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Scheduled in Stage Name  | The title of the stage in which this interview was scheduled.                                                                                                   |
| Scheduled in Stage Group | The group of the stage in which this interview was scheduled.                                                                                                   |
| Start Time               | The time when an interview took place. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to the start time of the first interview.                  |
| Duration                 | Represents the length of time the interview took place.                                                                                                         |
| Interviewer              | The user who conducted the interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Organizer                | The user who scheduled the interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Interview Title          | The title of the conducted interview.                                                                                                                           |
| Created At               | The time when an interview was created by the organizer. If the interview is a multi-panel interview, this time refers to when the first interview was created. |
| Type                     | The type of the conducted interview                                                                                                                             |
| Meeting Room             | The meeting room booked for this interview                                                                                                                      |
| Location Type            | The meeting location type for this interview (e.g In person, Zoom, Google Meet)                                                                                 |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interview Subject:

- [Interviewer Participation](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Job Consideration](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Interview Schedules Fields

| Field                             | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| --------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Status                            | Status of the Interview Schedule. Can be one of Complete, Needs Scheduling, Scheduling Requested, Waiting on Candidate Booking, Waiting on Candidate Availability, Candidate Availability Submitted, Scheduled, Waiting on Feedback, or On Hold. |
| Availability Requested?           | Whether a candidate availability request was created for this schedule.                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Waiting on candidate availability | Whether candidate availability has been provided by the candidate.                                                                                                                                                                               |
| Interview Stage                   | The title of this interview schedule's interview stage                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Interview Stage Group             | The group of this interview schedule's interview stage, determined by mapping each interview plan's stage to a stage group.                                                                                                                      |
| Start Time                        | The start time of the first event in the interview schedule                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Has Scheduling Request?           | Whether a scheduling request has been submitted for this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Activity Status Due At            | When the current activity is due.                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Has Any RSVP Declines?            | If the candidate or any interviewers have declined the RSVP.                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Owned By                          | Returns any interview schedules where the user is the schedule's organizer, scheduling request's creator, or scheduling request's assignee                                                                                                       |
| Location Type                     | The meeting location type for the current live version of this interview schedule (e.g., In-person, Zoom, Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, Phone).                                                                                                  |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interview schedule subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Interviewer Participation Fields

| Field                   | Definition                                                          |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Interviewer             | The user who was the interviewer of this interviewer participation. |
| Start Time              | The time when this interviewer event started.                       |
| End Time                | The time when this interviewer event ended.                         |
| Has Completed Feedback? | Whether or not this interview has a completed feedback form.        |
| RSVP Status             | The interviewer’s response to the interview calendar invitation.    |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interviewer Participation Subject:

- [Interview](https://app.archbee.com/docs/hQhFptFFrIZ0_AfmcJdMJ/JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj#I0feJ)
- [Feedback Form](https://app.archbee.com/docs/hQhFptFFrIZ0_AfmcJdMJ/JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj#XB6E7)

### Interview Stage Transition Fields

| Field                      | Definition                                                                                                                          |
| -------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| From Interview Stage Name  | The title of the interview stage transferred from.                                                                                  |
| From Interview Stage Type  | The type of interview stage transferred from: Lead, Application Review, Active, Archived, or Hired stages.                          |
| From Interview Stage Group | The stage group transferred from.                                                                                                   |
| To Interview Stage Name    | The title of the interview stage transferred to.                                                                                    |
| To Interview Stage Type    | The type of interview stage transferred to: Lead, Application Review, Active, Archived, or Hired stages.                            |
| To Interview Stage Group   | The stage group transferred to.                                                                                                     |
| Outcome                    | The outcome of this stage change. Possible values include: Moved Forward, Rejected by Org, Rejected by Candidate, Rejected - Other. |
| Entered At                 | Point in time at which the stage was entered.                                                                                       |
| Left At                    | Point in time at which the stage was left.                                                                                          |
| Days in Stage              | Number of full days within the stage.                                                                                               |
| Archive Reason             | When the new stage represents the archived stage, this represents archive reason.                                                   |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Interview Stage Transition Subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Feedback Form Fields

| Field                    | Definition                                                                                                                              |
| ------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Overall Recommendation   | The score submitted on the Overall Recommendation form field.                                                                           |
| Submitted At             | The point in time at which the feedback form was submitted.                                                                             |
| Submitted By             | The person who submitted the feedback form.                                                                                             |
| Submitted in Stage Group | Allows filtering by the stage group the application was in when feedback was submitted, whether or not there was a scheduled interview. |
| Interview Title          | Title of the interview a feedback form was submitted for.                                                                               |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Feedback Form Subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Interview](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Sequence Fields

| Field                       | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Sequence Template           | The sequence template a sequence was created from.                                                                                                                                           |
| Completion Status           | Describes the current status of a sequence. A sequence will stop upon receiving a reply or if manually cancelled. Otherwise, a sequence will continue running until all steps are completed. |
| Reply Status                | The reply status of the sequence. Can be one of Not Set, Interested, or Not Interested.                                                                                                      |
| Started At                  | The point in time this sequence was started.                                                                                                                                                 |
| Number of Stages Completed  | Number indicating how many stages of the sequence have been completed.                                                                                                                       |
| Has Received Reply?         | Whether a reply to a sequence email was received.                                                                                                                                            |
| Has Opens?                  | Whether a sequence email was opened at least once.                                                                                                                                           |
| Number of Opens             | Number of times a sequence email got opened.                                                                                                                                                 |
| Has Clicks?                 | Whether the sequence recipient clicked on any of the email’s links.                                                                                                                          |
| Number of Clicks            | Number of times the sequence recipient clicked on any of the email’s links.                                                                                                                  |
| First Reply Received At     | The date of the first reply received from the candidate.                                                                                                                                     |
| Bounced?                    | Indicates if any of the emails in the sequence bounced and failed to send.                                                                                                                   |
| Has Converted to Candidate? | Whether the recipient for a sequence has converted to an active candidate after the sequence started.                                                                                        |
| Created By                  | The user who created the sequence.                                                                                                                                                           |
| Sent From                   | The sender email address.                                                                                                                                                                    |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Sequence Subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Application Form Fields

| Field              | Definition                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At       | The point in time at which an application form was submitted.                                                                                                              |
| … Application Form | Each application form that has fields that can be reported on will be available under Submitted At. When clicking on a form, the available Fields to Show will be visible. |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Application Form Subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Candidate Fields

| Field                                | Definition                                                                                                                                                                       |
| ------------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Last Email Sent At                   | The last point in time at which an email was sent to the candidate.                                                                                                              |
| Last Email Received At               | The last point in time at which an email was received from the candidate.                                                                                                        |
| Added At                             | The point in time at which the candidate was added to the system.                                                                                                                |
| Added By                             | The user who added the candidate to the system.                                                                                                                                  |
| Name                                 | The full name of the candidate.                                                                                                                                                  |
| Phone Number (Primary, Personal)     | The candidate’s primary, personal phone number.                                                                                                                                  |
| Email Address(es)                    | All of the candidate’s email addresses.                                                                                                                                          |
| Email Address (Primary, Personal)    | The candidate’s primary, personal email address.                                                                                                                                 |
| LinkedIn Profile URL                 | A URL to the candidate’s LinkedIn profile.                                                                                                                                       |
| Hired At Date                        | The point in time the candidate was first hired. When used in filters, finds candidates that have been hired during the given date range.                                        |
| Follow Up Date                       | The date for a pending follow up with the candidate.                                                                                                                             |
| Follow Up Assignee                   | The person assigned to follow up with the candidate.                                                                                                                             |
| Tags                                 | The candidate tags associated with the candidate.                                                                                                                                |
| Most Recent Company                  | The candidate’s most recent company from their employment history.                                                                                                               |
| Worked At                            | The companies the candidate has worked at.                                                                                                                                       |
| Years of Experience                  | The number of years the candidate has calculated by summing up the tenure of each entry in the candidate’s employment history.                                                   |
| Resume Full Text Search              | Allows to do a full-text search through all the candidate’s resumes.                                                                                                             |
| Reason for Outreach                  | The reason you are reaching out to this candidate.                                                                                                                               |
| Salary Expectations                  | Salary expectations.                                                                                                                                                             |
| Sources                              | The sources through which the candidate’s Job Considerations were created.                                                                                                       |
| Source                               | The source through which the candidate was created.                                                                                                                              |
| Source Site                          | Only available when the source is *Sourced: Ashby Chrome Extension*. Lists where the candidate was sourced from via the Chrome Extension (LinkedIn, LinkedIn Recruiter, GitHub). |
| Credited To                          | The person who receives credit for sourcing the candidate.                                                                                                                       |
| Project                              | The talent projects the candidate is a member of.                                                                                                                                |
| Involves                             | Returns any candidates where the user is on the hiring team or is specifically following the candidate.                                                                          |
| Candidate Profile URL                | A URL to the candidate’s profile in Ashby.                                                                                                                                       |
| Current Job Title                    | Returns candidates matching the current (i.e. latest) job title. Note: Only available Ashby AIO and Greenhouse Analytics customers.                                              |
| Held Job Title                       | Returns candidates matching the previously held (including current) job title. Note: Only available Ashby AIO and Greenhouse Analytics customers.                                |
| Is Marked as Do Not Contact          | Whether the candidate is marked as “Do Not Contact”.                                                                                                                             |
| Is In Violation of Data Compliance?  | Whether a candidate is in violation of any data compliance rules.                                                                                                                |
| Inactivity Based Data Retention Date | The date after which a candidate’s data should be anonymized or deleted according to the organization’s inactivity based data compliance rules.                                  |
| Data Retention Consent End Date      | The candidate has given consent to keep their data up to this date.                                                                                                              |
| Has Blocked Applications?            | Whether the candidate has had any applications blocked.                                                                                                                          |
| Location                             | Allows filtering candidates within a specific location.                                                                                                                          |
| AI Opt Out?                          | Allows filtering candidates who have opted out of AI application processing.                                                                                                     |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Candidate Subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)
- [Diversity Survey](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [EEOC](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Referral](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Sequence](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Outreach Activity Fields

| Field              | Definition                                                                                                     |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Sent At            | The point in time this outreach was sent.                                                                      |
| Created By         | The person who created an outreach activity.                                                                   |
| Type               | The type of an outreach activity.                                                                              |
| Touchpoint         | The touchpoint of an outreach activity. Can be one of Initial Outreach, Follow-up Outreach, or Outreach Reply. |
| Channel            | The channel of an outreach activity. Can be one of Email, LinkedIn InMail, or LinkedIn Connection Request.     |
| Reply Status<br /> | The candidate reply-status for an outreach activity. Can be one of Interested, Not Interested, or None.        |
| Sequence Template  | The sequence template that a sequence was created from for the outreach.                                       |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Outreach Activity subject:

- [Candidate](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Diversity Survey Fields

| Field              | Definition                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At       | The point in time at which a diversity survey was submitted.                                                                                                               |
| … Diversity Survey | Each diversity survey that has fields that can be reported on will be available under Submitted At. When clicking on a form, the available Fields to Show will be visible. |

### EEOC Survey Fields

| Field                                               | Definition                                                                                     |
| --------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At                                        | The point in time at which an EEOC survey was submitted.                                       |
| Survey Question (i.e. Gender, Race, Veteran Status) | You will be able to select fields from the survey to show in the results/filter the report on. |

Other Subjects available in reports with the EEOC Survey Subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Sourcing Form fields

| Field                    | Definition                                                   |
| ------------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Sourcing Form Definition | The form definition that was used to create this submission. |
| Submitted At             | The date and time the form was submitted.                    |

Other Subjects available in reports with the EEOC Survey Subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;



### Questionnaire fields

| Field                 | Definition                                                                                |
| --------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Questionnaire Title   | Title of the questionnaire.                                                               |
| Request Created At    | The point in time at which a questionnaire request was created.                           |
| Submitted At          | The point in time at which the candidate submitted a response to a questionnaire request. |
| Has Been Submitted?   | Whether or not the candidate has submitted a response.                                    |
| Submission Mode<br /> | The submission mode supported by the form.                                                |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Questionnaire Subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Event Audience Members

| Field                       | Definition                                                                           |
| --------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Is Checked In?              | Whether the audience member is checked in.                                           |
| RSVP Status                 | The RSVP status of an audience member.                                               |
| Added At<br />              | The date and time the audience member registered or was manually added to the event. |
| Checked In At<br />         | The date and time the audience member was checked in.                                |
| Archived At<br />           | The date and time the audience member was archived.                                  |
| Has Converted to Candidate? | Whether the audience member has converted to an active candidate.                    |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Event Audience Members subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Opening Fields

| Field                   | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
| Is Archived?            | Whether an opening is archived.                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Status                  | The opening’s current status. Can be one of Draft, Approved, Open, Closed, or Filled.                                                                                                            |
| Created At              | The point in time an opening was created.                                                                                                                                                        |
| Opened At               | The point in time an opening was opened.                                                                                                                                                         |
| Closed At               | The point in time an opening was closed or filled.                                                                                                                                               |
| Open Duration (in days) | Number of days an opening was open. If the opening is closed or filled, this is the number of days between ‘Opened At’ and ‘Closed At’. Otherwise, this is the number of days since ‘Opened At’. |
| Close Reason            | Returns any openings which were closed for a particular reason.                                                                                                                                  |
| Was Open                | When grouping or filtering by this field, returns all openings that were open in a given time frame.                                                                                             |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Opening Subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Latest Version](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)

### Candidate Experience Survey Fields

| Field               | Definition                                                                                              |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Survey Title        | Title of the candidate experience survey.                                                               |
| Request Created At  | The point in time at which a candidate experience survey request was created.                           |
| Submitted At        | The point in time at which the candidate submitted a response to a candidate experience survey request. |
| Has Been Submitted? | Whether or not the candidate has submitted a response.                                                  |
| Submission Mode     | The submission mode supported by the form.                                                              |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Candidate Experience Survey subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Employee Fields

| Field                                      | Definition                                                                                                                                          |
| ------------------------------------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Employee                                   | The Employee identity. Allows filtering for specific Employees as opposed to the 'Name' field, which allows filtering based on the Employee's name. |
| Email                                      | The email of the employee                                                                                                                           |
| Name<br />                                 | The full name of the user.                                                                                                                          |
| Is Service Account?                        | Whether this user is not an actual person but a service account.                                                                                    |
| Requires Paid Seat?                        | If yes, this user will count toward the contracted seat count for your instance.                                                                    |
| Tenure (in months)                         | Represents the number of months the employee has been with the company.                                                                             |
| Next Anniversary<br />                     | Represents the date of the next anniversary of the employee's start date, including today's date.                                                   |
| Agency<br />                               | Represents the agency the user is associated with.                                                                                                  |
| Job Title<br />                            | The job title of the employee.                                                                                                                      |
| Manager<br />                              | Represents the manager of the employee.                                                                                                             |
| Is Manager?                                | Whether the employee is a manager.                                                                                                                  |
| Daily Interviewer Limit<br />              | The maximum number of interviews an interviewer can conduct in a day.                                                                               |
| Weekly Interviewer Limit<br />             | The maximum number of interviews an interviewer can conduct in a week.                                                                              |
| Interviewer Pool                           | Groups of qualified and in-training interviewers (formerly Interviewer Tags).                                                                       |
| Trainee on Interviewer Pool<br />          | The employee is training for the specified Interviewer Pool.                                                                                        |
| Qualified Member of Interviewer Pool<br /> | The employee is a fully qualified member of the specified Interviewer Pool.                                                                         |
| Interviewer Pool Status                    | The employee's status within an interviewer pool where they are a member.                                                                           |
| Provisioned?                               | Whether the user has been provisioned or not.                                                                                                       |
| Active User?                               | Whether the employee is an active user or not.                                                                                                      |
| Start Date                                 | The date the employee started working for the company.                                                                                              |
| Role<br />                                 | Used to find which employees have certain roles.                                                                                                    |
| Has Logged In?                             | Whether the user has ever logged in.                                                                                                                |
| Last Active Date<br />                     | The date of the user's most recent activity. This includes any interaction within Ashby, across all features and tasks.                             |
| Timezone<br />                             | Used to find which employees are in certain timezones.                                                                                              |
| Is Linked to a Candidate?                  | Indicates whether the employee is linked to a candidate.                                                                                            |
| LinkedIn Profile URL                       | A URL to the employee's LinkedIn profile.                                                                                                           |
| In Management Hierarchy of                 | All employees in the reporting chain of an employee.                                                                                                |
| Has Calendar                               | Whether the employee has a calendar associated with their profile.                                                                                  |
| Is Paused Interviewer                      | Whether the employee has all their interviews paused.                                                                                               |
| Has AI Notetaker Enabled?                  | Whether the employee has AI Notetaker enabled, making interviews they participate in eligible to be recorded.                                       |
| Has Email Sync Enabled?                    | Whether the employee has email sync enabled.                                                                                                        |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Employee subject:

- Interviewer Pools

### Quality of Hire Survey Steps

| Field                               | Definition                                                              |
| ----------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Status                              | The status of the request.                                              |
| Survey Form                         | The survey form associated with the request.                            |
| Requested At                        | The point in time where the survey was requested.                       |
| Submitted At                        | The point in time where the survey was first submitted.                 |
| Submitted By                        | The Hiring Manager that submitted the survey.                           |
| Has Been Submitted                  | Indicates whether the survey has been submitted.                        |
| Tenure At Submission<br />          | The hired employee's tenure in months on the scheduled submission date. |
| Time to Submission Days<br />       | The number of days between the survey request and the submission.       |
| Overdue for days                    | The number of days a survey submission is overdue.                      |
| Quality of Hire At Submission<br /> | The Quality of Hire score submitted in the step.                        |
| Latest Submission in Range<br />    | The latest submission in the given date range.                          |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Quality of Hire Survey Steps subject:

- [Quality of Hire Survey Enrollment](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)

### Quality of Hire Survey Enrollment Fields

| Field                         | Definition                                                              |
| ----------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Status                        | The status of the request.                                              |
| Survey Form                   | The survey form associated with the request.                            |
| Requested At                  | The point in time where the survey was requested.                       |
| Submitted At                  | The point in time where the survey was first submitted.                 |
| Submitted By                  | The Hiring Manager that submitted the survey.                           |
| Has Been Submitted            | Indicates whether the survey has been submitted.                        |
| Tenure At Submission          | The hired employee's tenure in months on the scheduled submission date. |
| Time to Submission Days       | The number of days between the survey request and the submission.       |
| Overdue for days<br />        | The number of days a survey submission is overdue.                      |
| Quality of Hire At Submission | The Quality of Hire score submitted in the step.                        |
| Latest Submission in Range    | The latest submission in the given date range.                          |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Quality of Hire Survey Enrollment subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Quality of Hire Survey Steps](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)

### Hiring Manager Experience Surveys

| Field                     | Definition                                                                                                        |
| ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Survey Title              | Title of the hiring manager experience survey.                                                                    |
| Request Created At        | The point in time at which a hiring manager experience survey request was created.                                |
| Submitted At<br />        | The point in time at which the hiring manager submitted a response to a hiring manager experience survey request. |
| Has Been Submitted?       | Whether or not the hiring manager has submitted a response.                                                       |
| Submission Mode<br />     | Anonymity setting of the hiring manager experience survey.                                                        |
| Hiring Manager            | The hiring manager.                                                                                               |
| Recruiter                 | The recruiter the HM experience survey is attributed to.                                                          |
| Status                    | The status of the survey request.                                                                                 |
| Time to Submission (Days) | The number of days between the survey request and the submission.                                                 |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Hiring Manager Experience Surveys subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Projects Fields

| Field           | Definition                                                                                                                        |
| --------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Project         | The project's identity. This field allows filtering for a specific project.                                                       |
| Title           | The title of a project.                                                                                                           |
| Is Confidential | Whether the project is confidential or not. Confidential project will only be visible to their authors or admins with permission. |
| Created By      | The person who created a project.                                                                                                 |
| Status          | The status of a project. Can be Active or Archived.                                                                               |
| Created At      | The point in time at which the project was created.                                                                               |
| Updated At      | The point in time at which the project was last updated.                                                                          |

### Project Members Fields

| Field               | Definition                                       |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------ |
| Added to Project By | The user who added the candidate to the project. |
| Added to Project At | When the candidate was added to the project.     |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Project Members subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Projects](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)

### Candidate Review Requests

| **Field**    | **Definition**                             |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------ |
| Title        | The title of the review request.           |
| Reviewer     | The person assigned to the review.         |
| Requested By | The person who created the review request. |
| Created At   | When the review request was created.       |
| Status       | The status of the review request.          |

The review submission details will also be available when reporting on this subject. The following fields can be found within Review Submission Details:

| **Field**              | **Definition**                                             |
| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| Overall Recommendation | The overall recommendation given in the review submission. |
| Submitted At           | When the review was submitted.                             |

### AI Notetaker Recordings Fields

| Field                     | Definition                                                                   |
| ------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Recording mode            | Shows the speaker configuration for each recording (gallery, speaker, audio) |
| Has available transcript? | Whether a transcript has been generated                                      |
| Has available video?      | Whether the video is available for the recording                             |
| Recording URL             | A direct link to the recording (for users with access to view it)            |

Other Subjects available in reports with the AI Notetaker Recordings subject:

- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Interview](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Candidate Recording Consent Choice Fields

| Field             | Definition                                                 |
| ----------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------- |
| Consent Choice    | The consent choice of the candidate                        |
| Submitted At      | When the consent choice was submitted                      |
| Submitted By      | Who submitted the candidate's recording consent choice     |
| Is Latest Choice? | Whether this is the candidate's most recent consent choice |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Candidate Recording Consent Choice subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

### Assessments Fields

:::hint{type="info"}
For more on using assessment fields for reporting on integration partner assessments, check out [Reporting on Integration Partner Assessments](docId:09FAbIRx2zRiLCDdLDsH4).
:::

| Field Name          | Definition                                                                                                    |
| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Assessment Name     | The name of the assessment type from the integration partner.                                                 |
| Activity Status     | The Ashby activity status of the assessment. Can be one of Waiting to Start, Started, Complete, or Cancelled. |
| Integration Partner | The assessment integration partner                                                                            |
| Numeric Score       | The numeric score from the assessment. Only populated for numeric result types.                               |
| Result              | The result value as text (e.g., '85', 'Pass', 'Completed').                                                   |
| Assessment Status   | The partner-provided status of the assessment (e.g., 'Expired', 'Completed').                                 |

Other Subjects available in reports with the Assessments subject:

- [Candidates](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;
- [Job Considerations](docId\:JKg56-EfRYAaa7wLsbVSj)&#x20;

## Related Subjects Definitions

### Interview Schedule Fields

| Field                             | Definition                                                                                                     |
| --------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Status                            | Status of the Interview Schedule. Can be one of Complete, Needs Scheduling, Scheduled, or Waiting on Feedback. |
| Waiting on candidate availability | Whether candidate availability has been provided by the candidate.                                             |

### Candidate Experience Survey Submission Fields

| Field                     | Definition                                                                        |
| ------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Candidate Submitted NPS   | The overall ‘Net Promoter Score’ submitted on a candidate experience survey.      |
| Is Promoter               | Promoters are those who have answered the NPS question with a 9 or 10.            |
| Is Passive                | A submission is considered passive if the answer to the NPS question is a 7 or 8. |
| Is Detractor              | Detractors are those who have answered the NPS Question with a 6 or below.        |
| Survey Title              | Title of the candidate experience survey.                                         |
| Survey Request Created At | When the survey request for this submission was originally created.               |
| Submitted At              | The point in time at which a candidate experience survey was submitted.           |

### Questionnaire Fields

| Field        | Definition                                                |
| ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At | The point in time at which a questionnaire was submitted. |
| Title        | Title of a questionnaire.                                 |

### Offer Fields

| Field                              | Definition                                                             |
| ---------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Number of Approval Rejections      | The number of times an offer’s approval has been rejected.             |
| Decided At                         | The time at which the offer was accepted or rejected by the candidate. |
| Status                             | Indicates if an offer is created, pending, accepted, or rejected.      |
| Latest Version > Created At        | The point in time at which an offer version was created.               |
| Latest Version > Is Latest Version | Whether this represents the most recent offer version.                 |

### Job Board Fields

| Field             | Definition                                                       |
| ----------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Job Board         | The specific job board.                                          |
| Internal/External | The type of job board, which can be either Internal or External. |

### Application Form

| Field        | Definition                                                    |
| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At | The point in time at which an application form was submitted. |

### E-Signature Document Fields

| Field          | Definition                                                            |
| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Template Title | The title of the document template used for the e-signature document. |
| Status         | The status of the e-signature document (draft, sent, or complete).    |
| Sent At        | The date when the e-signature document was sent.                      |
| Completed At   | The date when the e-signature document was completed.                 |

### Referral Fields

| Field                             | Definition                                                                                        |
| --------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Submitted At                      | The point in time at which the referral was submitted.                                            |
| Referred By > Employee            | The Employee identity.                                                                            |
| Referred By > Name                | The full name of the user.                                                                        |
| Referred By > Is Service Account? | Whether this user is not an actual person but a service account.                                  |
| Referred By > Tenure (in months)  | Represents the number of months the employee has been with the company.                           |
| Referred By > Next Anniversary    | Represents the date of the next anniversary of the employee’s start date, including today’s date. |
| Referred By > Agency              | Represents the agency the user is associated with.                                                |
| Referred By > Manager             | Represents the manager of the employee.                                                           |
| Referred By > Interviewer Tags    | Tags that track the skills and qualifications of your interviewer pool.                           |
| Referred By > Provisioned         | Whether the user has been provisioned or not.                                                     |
| Referred By > Active User         | Whether the employee is an active user or not.                                                    |
| Referred By > Start Date          | The date the employee started working for the company.                                            |
| Referred By > Role                | Used to find which employees have certain roles.                                                  |
| Referred By > Timezone            | Used to find which employees are in certain time zones.                                           |

### Openings Latest Version Fields

| Field                  | Definition                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Opening ID             | Alphanumerical identifier of an opening, unique to your company’s internal processes.                                                                                                                      |
| Is Backfill?           | Whether an opening represents a backfill.                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Created By             | The person who created an opening.                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Description            | A text description for an opening.                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Team                   | The department or team directly associated with this opening. E.g. if a opening is associated with ‘Product Marketing’ which is nested under ‘Marketing’, then this field will return ‘Product Marketing’. |
| Region                 | The top-level regions associated with this opening. E.g. if an opening is associated with ‘San Francisco’ which is nested underneath ‘North America’, then this field will return ‘North America’.         |
| Location               | The opening’s location. Allows searching for openings based on their location or the region in which the location is located.                                                                              |
| Employment Type        | The type of employment offered for the opening. Can be one of Full Time, Part Time, Intern, Contract, or Temporary.                                                                                        |
| Created At             | The point in time an opening version was created.                                                                                                                                                          |
| Target Hire Date       | The preferred or estimated date by which the opening should be filled.                                                                                                                                     |
| Target Start Date      | The preferred or estimated date by which the candidate hired into an opening should start.                                                                                                                 |
| Job                    | The jobs associated with an opening.                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Hiring Manager         | The Hiring Manager who is on the hiring team of this opening.                                                                                                                                              |
| Recruiter              | The Recruiter who is on the hiring team of this opening.                                                                                                                                                   |
| Recruiting Coordinator | The Recruiting Coordinator who is on the hiring team of this opening.                                                                                                                                      |
| Sourcer                | The Sourcer who is on the hiring team of this opening.                                                                                                                                                     |

##


[title] BrightHire
[path] Integrations/Video Interviewing/

BrightHire automatically records and transcribes interviews and surfaces the key moments as highlights to streamline the process and empower hiring teams to make the best possible hiring decisions. This article explains how to connect BrightHire with Ashby and how to use the integration once it's live.

# Integration overview

The BrightHire and Ashby integration lets you schedule BrightHire interviews in Ashby following your normal interview scheduling process.

# Prerequisites

:::hint{type="warning"}
You will need to be a BrightHire Site Admin and Ashby Org Admin user to enable this integration.
:::

# Connect BrightHire with Ashby

To connect BrightHire with Ashby:

1. Navigate to **Admin > Integrations > Integrations&#x20;**&#x61;nd open the BrightHire tile.
2. Click the `+ Create API Key for BrightHire` button and copy the API key generated.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/azknqkz4Wmjzvi8UmUOvi_create-api-key-for-brighthire.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1432" height="662" darkWidth="1432" darkHeight="662" alt="The Create API key button to configure the BrightHire integration." showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Go to [BrightHire's ATS integration settings](https://app.brighthire.ai/settings/other-ats) and click `Add New Integration`.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Mjyhx9TiNzwtxjC3pebPs_addnewintegration.png" size="100" alt="The Add New Integration button within BrightHire." isUploading="false" initialPath="BrightHire%201badc989d7bd8026a1c3f0bf524b9fe3/add_new_integration.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/BrightHire 1badc989d7bd8026a1c3f0bf524b9fe3/add_new_integration.png" width="2772" height="2514" darkWidth="2772" darkHeight="2514" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

4. Choose Ashby from the list of integrations, click `Continue`, and then paste the API key generated in Ashby.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/tlOp722CZ3RKX9bs3xgYB_enterapikey.png" size="100" alt="Enter your Ashby API key to configure the integration." isUploading="false" initialPath="BrightHire%201badc989d7bd8026a1c3f0bf524b9fe3/enter_API_key.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/BrightHire 1badc989d7bd8026a1c3f0bf524b9fe3/enter_API_key.png" width="1352" height="2082" darkWidth="1352" darkHeight="2082" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

:::hint{type="success"}
BrightHire is now integrated with Ashby!

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/23JTJcYPJ8Ibn4i9AZAq-_connected.png" size="60" alt="The Success message showing that BrightHire has been successfully connected to Ashby." isUploading="false" initialPath="BrightHire%201badc989d7bd8026a1c3f0bf524b9fe3/connected.png" githubPath="Ashby KB Part 1/BrightHire 1badc989d7bd8026a1c3f0bf524b9fe3/connected.png" width="1432" height="2052" darkWidth="1432" darkHeight="2052" showCaption="false"}
:::

# Using the integration

BrightHire automatically records and transcribes any BrightHire interviews scheduled in Ashby, which you can access on your BrightHire dashboard. Follow the standard scheduling workflow in Ashby, then start the interview from BrightHire.

After you complete an interview in BrightHire, BrightHire pushes a link to the recording, insights, and notes back to the candidate's activity feed.

BrightHire also syncs metadata from Ashby to produce insights and displays these insights on the BrightHire Insights page.

# FAQs

### Does BrightHire respect Ashby user permissions?&#x20;

Yes, BrightHire supports role-based access controls synced from Ashby, so BrightHire can automatically assign visibility to Hiring Managers, Recruiters, and other roles. Reach out to your BrightHire Customer Success Manager (CSM) to get this enabled for your BrightHire account.

### My synced notes from BrightHire aren't coming over properly when filling feedback forms with the one-click option. What's going on?

BrightHire can't write back to Yes/No, multiple-choice, or other structured Ashby fields. It will fall back to writing notes to the first eligible long-text field on the feedback form.

To give the notes a dedicated place to flow back into Ashby, we recommend adding a long-text field such as "BrightHire Notes" or "Interview Notes" at the start of your feedback forms.

[title] Navigating Ashby Analytics
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This guide provides an overview of Ashby Analytics features and functionality. Learning some of the key concepts of Ashby Analytics will help you quickly build your own reports and visualizations and get previously hidden insights about your recruiting efforts.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Ashby offers two distinct products:  **Ashby Analytics** and **Ashby All-in-One**.  The full analytics functionality described in this article is available to all Ashby All-in-One users. When this article references "Analytics users," we mean organizations that have only purchased the Ashby Analytics product rather than the full suite of applicant tracking features.
:::

# A quick tour of Ashby Analytics

This section starts with a quick introduction of the Ashby Analytics product.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
Ashby analytics features can be found throughout the Ashby product, depending on what data you're looking for and how you want to use it. If you're specifically looking to learn how to build reports and dashboards, see [Ashby Analytics: Key Reporting Concepts](docId\:HuKCp0EIHAKDk4xUcuhnm) and [Building Your First Dashboard](docId\:Q7A7CpFpyulmT6bd1qVYm) .
:::

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/5c631c81e3eb448cb4d0d5cae6fb4fcc"}

## Key areas of Ashby Analytics

### Home page

This is the page you land on when logging into Ashby. For Analytics users, this is blank at first.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/22018fae3cdf185c3f8010066af27cb5.png)

You can click the `+` icon to add dashboards and reports so you can easily access them when you log in.

Every user's home page is unique, so they can each pin the reports they find most useful to their own home page.

### Candidates

**Search**

Here you can view a list of your candidates and create and save searches. Use filters to determine your criteria, then click `Save` to add this as a saved candidate search in your account.

You can use the `Advanced` toggle to switch between basic filters and advanced filters. Basic filters provide the most commonly used filters, while Advanced filters give you more filtering options to choose from.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/81d09948afa8b7f330a0d1cd640588e0.png)

**Saved Searches**

Here you can view all saved candidate search reports. You can choose from searches you yourself have created and saved (under `Mine`), or searches that have been set up by other users in your organization. If other users have set their searches as private and you are not on the access list for the search, you do not see the saved search listed. For more on this, see [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c9b4763b82017fae4fe4b9c82fa9d00b.png)

### Jobs

View and filter your jobs and job pipelines here.

You can click into a job to get more specific data on the stages candidates are in and access the pre-built job dashboard for the role.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/6275e9053c1975d61766a19b00a9c2a5.png)

### Reports

**Report Builder**

The **Report Builder** page gives you access to templates and the option to create custom reports.

For more on the templates we offer, check out [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi).

For a guide on creating custom reports, check out [Custom Reports](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW). Custom reports can be configured on the Plus, Enterprise and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

You can also chat with our AI Reporting Assistant and have it build a report for you. More on this at [Report Builder & AI-Assisted Report Builder](docId\:kFMXauoRKZx6_EZbu32Po).

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uesHVWsUyjN40FLQSurXg_report-builder-page.jpg)

**Saved Reports**

Here you can access all reports that have been saved. These are split into the following categories:

- Mine: Reports that you have created.
- Private: Reports that are set as private but that you are on the access list for.
- Organization: Reports that have been created by other users in the organization that can be accessed by all users.

:::hint{type="info"}
You can also access saved reports of a specific type from this list (for example, view all Candidate Searches, Count Over Time, or Time in Process reports).
:::

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/010bfe8f6274847b9006058d48cef443.png)

### Dashboards

**Create Dashboards**

Here you can start building a dashboard to display your reports. For more on creating dashboards, check out [Building Your First Dashboard](docId\:Q7A7CpFpyulmT6bd1qVYm).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/22bc80faad07275b23840ae5234c5342.png)

**Saved Dashboards**

Access all saved dashboards that you have built and have access to here. You can view your own dashboards, private dashboards you have access to, organization-wide dashboards, scheduled dashboards, and archived dashboards.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a01e22770500d7bdf3f3b3e3a15b0eea.png)

**Core Dashboards**

Some pre-built dashboards are available so you can access commonly requested metrics quickly. For more on the available reports and dashboards, see [Core Dashboards](docId\:nhvbeIsfV8wiqLWeEmF2t).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/c38576f996e3f6f1736964de5fdec05d.png)

### Admin

In **Admin**, you can adjust account settings, including adding and amending employee access in **Employees**, viewing and adjusting your billing settings in **Billing**, creating a grouped interview plan in **Grouped Interview Plan**, and more. Check out the key concepts and FAQ below for more specific information on areas of **Admin**.

# Saving reports & dashboards

This video shows how to save a report and add it to a dashboard.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/e4c7727cc5a8457494f4226ef8ea17f0"}

Once you've built your report, click `Save` to add it to your **Saved Reports**. A saved report can be added to dashboards and accessed by other users in your organization (pending the access control settings on the report).

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/585d12d322e4f450a5f6e13f03319f92.png)

When saving, you can give your report a title and determine whether access control is on (so only you and users you specify can access the report) or off (the report can be viewed by anyone in your organization). Click `Save` to confirm your settings and save the report.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/567171c8d8e66d595ca6947acea6ae29.png)

:::hint{type="info"}
Users accessing the report can only see data relating to the departments, locations, and jobs that they have access to.
:::

## Adding the report to a dashboard

1. Hover over **Dashboards** and click `Create Dashboard`.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/083d52ab6d60f751912f6cc69593b4af.png" size="50" isUploading="false" width="540" height="358" darkWidth="540" darkHeight="358" showCaption="false"}

2. Click `+ Add Item`, then `Report`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/d07fba7eac854c3c8cdd937e2f85ef65.png)

3. Select a saved report to add it to your dashboard.
4. To resize a report tile, click and drag the bottom-right arrow.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/4584aa3487d4196765d853d2b7f674dc.png)

5. To move a report tile, click and drag anywhere else on it.
6. Click `Save` to keep your changes.

# Using dashboard filters

This video shows how to add filters that filter an entire dashboard at once.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/9a2eb93e26de4ceba5414d1dcee10ce9"}

## Adding a filter to a dashboard

1. Click `Add Item`, then `Filter`.

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/a713a8571254eb6d729c62f53101785c.png)

2. Use the search bar to find a specific filter, or scroll through the list to find the filter you're looking for.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/15e41a18faef00a68cdb2bcb3dfa4e9e.png" size="84" width="729" height="475" darkWidth="729" darkHeight="475" position="center" showCaption="false"}

3. Select your filter. You see a `Not Connected Yet` message — you need to connect your filter to the reports you'd like to filter for it to work.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/66038974591be4f850adf92b352e8243.png" size="86" width="1439" height="784" darkWidth="1439" darkHeight="784" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Connecting a dashboard filter to a report

1. Click the filter icon on the report tile.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/279a1980dab19aa937db1422f5475a9c.png" size="48" width="248" height="179" darkWidth="248" darkHeight="179" position="center" showCaption="false"}

2. Specify the field you'd like to connect the filter to (for example, if you're filtering by job on your dashboard, look for the **Job Consideration > Job** field).

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/e96014724861a3420e89f1d40c50f16b.png" size="78" width="741" height="489" darkWidth="741" darkHeight="489" position="center" showCaption="false"}

3. Close the wizard. The filter icon indicator on the report now shows in green, and the dashboard filter now applies to your report when amended.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/68b697c7161a099ef51b33998ea63dee.png" size="48" width="248" height="182" darkWidth="248" darkHeight="182" position="center" showCaption="false"}

4. To require users to select a value before seeing results across the dashboard, select the `Require Value?` checkbox beside the filter.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/df687024c095c76b21216627fe5d18a6.png" size="88" width="620" height="181" darkWidth="620" darkHeight="181" position="center" showCaption="false"}


[title] Alerts Library
[path] Ashby Analytics/Alerts & Exports/

This document provides common Alert examples and set-up recommendations.

## Introduction

:::hint{type="info"}
Alerts was designed to allow customized and timely delivery of data that matters to the recipients who matter. We offer a way to automate the delivery of this data with our difference detection and dynamic routing. A single Alert alleviates the need to create many customized report delivery schedules.

Learn more about alerts at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)&#x20;

This library provides common Alert examples and recommendations for setting up your Custom List reports and Alert automations.
:::

:::hint{type="warning"}
Report data of an Alert gets generated on behalf of the user who creates the Alert, so all of the creator’s accounts permissions apply.

If the Entire List is sent to a specified user and not a `User involved as` (more on this at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)), then the user receiving the report will be able to see all of the report data in the Alert email. Be sure to add filters to remove any jobs (including confidential jobs) or specific data that you don’t want users receiving the alert to see as part of your Alert setup process.
:::

:::::ExpandableHeading
## Surveys & Feedback

:::hint{type="danger"}
Alert Sent Immediately
:::

### ***Avg Overall Recommendation 3+ Past Initial Screen***

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GbM5wZJjxRAsjbnF2Ub6Y_screencast2023-03-09at115344am.gif)


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/pamkwGZn4JsaZiDdsHuk-_screenshot2023-03-09at115625am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Furthest Stage Group Reached is Initial Screen.
- Job Consideration’s Average Overall Recommendation is greater than or equal to 3.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.

### ***Feedback Form 4 Scores***

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JmSMHAvGiEBX16G7aBZOf_image.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/vmSJslNo3l5e1_qIFfBWh_image.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Feedback Form’s Overall Recommendation is greater than or equal to 4.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.

### ***NPS Detractors***

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jfiOf9TcsvTsbMB3r17GA_image.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KnKOZF3BzkwIyQAf61cZ7_image.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Candidate Experience Survey’s Survey Submissions’s is Detractor equals Yes.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
## Data Quality

:::hint{type="warning"}
Alert Sent Periodically
:::

### ***Candidates in Stage > 30 Days***

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lcTobZBegwCFVh_a5UfDq_screenshot2023-03-07at95441am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/C7XVE08LkznpkmHjllTsB_screenshot2023-03-07at95710am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Days in Current Interview Stage Group is greater than or equal to 30.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.

### ***Stale Applications***

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3nYCwgVbGB2MH0VALuan0_image.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fHj0ClLA35Z13d52oQ2dz_image.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Days in Current Interview Stage is greater than or equal to 45.
- Job Consideration’s Outcome equals Active.
- Job Consideration’s Job’s Job Status equals Open.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.

### ***Stale Jobs***

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/bAYJTCKzn36MT6RR7JKTB_image.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FOxe4Hx5MGMuLgx9Fl7qu_image.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job’s Open Duration equals 90+ days.
- Job’s Active Candidate Count is less than or equal to 5.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### Jobs w/o a Hiring Manager/Recruiter Assigned

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/aa9CmFeYu-mOWq7TclWC9_image.png)


:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/P1yRfSdPz9xZ7ItlJ6md5_image.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job’s Hiring Manager is empty/unassigned.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.



:::hint{type="danger"}
Alert Sent Immediately
:::

### Referral Submitted w/o Recruiter

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OiVPjYv7HIKU_-Jrn5CtM_screenshot2023-03-09at95939am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/JpapEUuxpJAI3u1MKJ_iQ_screenshot2023-03-09at100120am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Source Type is Referral.
- Job Consideration’s Recruiter is empty/unassigned.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### Open Jobs w/Blank Fields

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/FuCi0caB1xKXco-52Y_3D_screenshot2023-03-09at95131am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k8D3TnOiccZFspsvvF97Z_screenshot2023-03-09at95528am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job’s Recruiter is empty/unassigned.

(The filter on this report can easily be updated to include jobs without a Hiring Manager, Priority, etc).

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.

### Candidates Passed Recruiter Screen w/o Source

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lqZXHoHylen2UtlvewqII_image.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_ssMj-glyIDxmqof-adtn_image.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Furthest Stage Group Reached is *not* Initial Screen.
- Job Consideration’s Source is empty/unassigned.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.
:::::

:::::ExpandableHeading
## Recruiting Operations

:::hint{type="danger"}
Alert Sent Immediately
:::

### ***SLAs (vary by organization)***

### Candidate in Application Review > 72 Hours

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/UPyTQr-0OIfdETkhbpTOx_screenshot2023-03-07at124801pm.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Uwgk210y2OtSLnCE1YsOh_screenshot2023-03-07at124939pm.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Current Interview Stage Name is Application Review.
- Job Consideration’s Days in Current Interview Stage is greater than or equal to 3.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### Candidate in Stage > 14 Days

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/uv8WvJG2WBABvZ9xifmm9_screenshot2023-03-07at125053pm.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/boo1OJfAGD0koPX7_XWyd_screenshot2023-03-07at125141pm.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Current Interview Stage Name is Application Review.
- Job Consideration’s Days in Current Interview Stage is greater than or equal to 14.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### Candidate Interview Feedback Blank > 48 Hours

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/CRwG3mAVD19oaQmZQp-Ck_screenshot2023-03-09at74818am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/2dq71TsT7o83L_fZcoOTB_screenshot2023-03-09at75431am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Interviewer Participation’s Has Completed Feedback? equals No.
- Interviewer Participation’s Interview’s Job Consideration’s Days in Current Stage Group is greater than or equal to 2.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### Referrals in App Review > 48 hoursCandidate Interview Feedback Blank > 48 Hours

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/t7UNXmrvpTHtSMEOfMrX9_screenshot2023-03-09at94828am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/on-6MX_vhZfUlCVe1XBir_screenshot2023-03-09at94505am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Source Type is Referral.
- Job Consideration’s Current Interview Stage Group is Application Review.
- Job Consideration’s Days in Current Interview Stage Group is greater than or equal to 2.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.




### *Leadership Requests*

:::hint{type="warning"}
Alert Sent Periodically
:::

### Open Jobs

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Osw6oTLK4dEy4czRf9OlT_screenshot2023-03-09at22951pm.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/kmRAjvEoFdW5AJQ-0Jppd_screenshot2023-03-07at92003am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job’s Job Status equals Open.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### New Jobs, Opened This Week, Month, Quarter

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/djLk3zt0YM2gue3wnmdlq_screenshot2023-03-07at92622am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/z1HEB5YboId9dBki8vJmi_screenshot2023-03-07at93305am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job’s Opened At is during this week.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


:::hint{type="danger"}
Alert below is sent immediately
:::

### New Job/Requisition Opened

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/9oCpVcdp-qw_gYGgWsa9x_screenshot2023-03-09at22951pm-1.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/PVdnqLRt8zEh4eUB4choW_screenshot2023-03-09at101447am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job’s Job Status is Open.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.



### *Hires*

:::hint{type="warning"}
Alerts below are sent periodically
:::

### Hires & Compensation

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Gg_n7dChETJvwNHNp-iW0_screenshot2023-03-07at94235am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k6QpRc06YPGG9Mi1D7wgn_screenshot2023-03-07at94511am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Hired At is in date range this year.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.

:::hint{type="danger"}
The alert below is sent immediately
:::

### New Hire Alert

This alerts is sent out to recipients at the point of the candidate being added to the Hired stage.

**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Gg_n7dChETJvwNHNp-iW0_screenshot2023-03-07at94235am.png)

**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/k6QpRc06YPGG9Mi1D7wgn_screenshot2023-03-07at94511am.png)

This is also commonly set up as a Slack alert. See below for an example Slack configuration.

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_Kb1qBcRUAJpXVi2jGXZX_screenshot2023-03-09at102756am.png)

**Filters:**

- Application’s Hired At is in date range last 30 days.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### *Candidate Status*

:::hint{type="danger"}
The below alerts are sent immediately
:::

### Interviews - Needs Scheduling

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zI7fWUDWZdlRi32-9dldX_screenshot2023-03-09at110318am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/g-F_FcMhxA0z5nL3B18mI_screenshot2023-03-09at110359am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Interview Schedule’s Status equals Needs Scheduling.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### Reached Offer Stage

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NFQdMc77L3_zOmXZPWCV6_screenshot2023-03-09at110558am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n7l_a0V0ND_m6OEzgJulh_screenshot2023-03-09at110641am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Reached Stage Group is Offer.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.



### Had Onsite Interview, Outcome Archived

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TVIn_3WUChgArQrzYeO4V_screenshot2023-03-09at111150am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LOz1IfphGn6fDXZPa4k_V_screenshot2023-03-09at111230am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Furthest Stage Group Reached is Onsite.
- Job Consideration’s Outcome is Archived.

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.


### Most Recent Company in Top 10

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
**Filters and Fields to Show**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Nn1Ywj_NFEB7-0xv5KMUA_screenshot2023-03-09at111720am.png)
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
**Example Alert set-up**

![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Dl_MhRcJil2CHhdMj9yM5_screenshot2023-03-09at111845am.png)
:::
::::

**Filters:**

- Job Consideration’s Candidate’s Most Recent Company is x, x, x, etc

**Fields to Show:**

- Can vary by organization and reporting needs.

****
:::::


[title] How do I enable Advanced filters?
[path] Ashby Analytics/Getting Started with Analytics/

This document reviews how to enable and utilize Advanced filtering options in Ashby's report building interface.

## Advanced Filters

The Advanced filter interface allows you to select individual and multiple fields while applying logical And, Or, and Not operations. For fields that contain string values, you can apply string matching conditions such as "contains,” "starts with," or "equals". Visit our [Report Catalog - Essentials](docId\:VOWdo_JJgdtwBzC4LIRMc) to see many examples of how Advanced filters can be used.

### Enabling the Advanced filters

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
You can see the “Advanced” filter option on the right-hand side of the Filters section in any Ashby report. By default, the Advanced filter option is checked, and clicking “Add Field to Match” allows you to add filters.

When the “Advanced” filter option is not turned on, the report’s filter options are determined by the report subject.

With Job Considerations set as the report subject, Job, Source, Team, and Location are the available filters. However, when the subject is changed to “Job”, Team and Location are the only available filters.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![Screen Cast 2022-12-16 at 7.56.05 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/w74ZPCLi6YgZK-h9iqQfS_screencast2022-12-16at75605am.gif)

![With “Job Considerations” set as the report Subject, Job, Source, Team, and Location are the available filters. However, when the Subject is changed to “Job”, Team and Location are the only available filters. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jcvYWREb298S3J5RczRB3_screencast2022-12-16at75833am.gif)


:::
::::



### Field selector and type ahead

::::VerticalSplit{layout="middle"}
:::VerticalSplitItem
When adding fields in advanced Filters (and Group By), the field selector modal will present all available options. The field selector permits type ahead functionality to quickly find the field you need. Typing "recr" will present all the matching "Recruiter" fields.

If you see multiple options, the path above the field name shows where the field comes from. In the below example, the "Recruiter" field is available as the Recruiter on the Application, the Recruiter on the Job, or the Recruiter on the Job associated with the Opening.
:::

:::VerticalSplitItem
![](https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zdoam6GA9Hq0ujY-_g07W_screenshot2021-12-02at111728am.png)
:::
::::


[title] Report Catalog - Advanced
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This catalog focuses mostly on advanced reports, if you want to explore more basic reports take a look at our [Report Catalog - Essentials](docId\:VOWdo_JJgdtwBzC4LIRMc). For report templates, check out [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)&#x20;

This document provides an overview of various types of reports you can run in Ashby. We use this document during implementation, to pick your initial set of reports, and it is also a great reference for expanding your reports over time.

All reports are grouped into high level categories.

Note, that with Ashby's flexible report builders, we can build any other kind of report you'd like, that is not shown here. If you're interested in that and have trouble building the report yourself, contact your Ashby point person!

# Before you Get Started

As you read through the report catalog, keep in mind that all of the following reports can be filtered and grouped by any field and can be reported on for any timeframe you'd like.

We have some general recommendations on how to filter the reports:

- Most companies tend to break up their hiring process into a few major areas (e.g. business and product & engineering). This is helpful since these different types of roles can have a vastly different recruiting process. When using any of the reports below, you most likely should run them separately for each of these major areas.
- If you are hiring across different locations with very different local labor markets or recruiting processes, you will likely want to further separate your reports by location / region
- For each of the reports below, filtering and/or grouping by Source, Department, Hiring Manager, etc. will allow you to compare relative performance between different parts of your team and different channels.

# Conversion Rate Reports

Conversion reports allow you to find inefficiencies in your hiring funnel. Are there parts of your funnel in which too many or too few candidates are moving to the next stage? You can answer these questions with the reports below.

## Funnel Report

Focuses on the overall, **historical,** pass-through rate from stage to stage.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/VZMzSus-Dw5xCqYMOkv5AAmJ.png)

By looking at the conversion rates of previously completed applications, you can get an estimate of how candidates that are currently in process might progress. You can also see if you are dropping too few or too many candidates at a particular stage.

## Grouped Passthrough Report

Compare funnel metrics across different groups. Each subgroup includes a rollup of conversion rates.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/CxcvF99fvoGY1Bbk2xci10Ya.png)

## Grouped Passthrough Report with Projected Hires

In the View Options of the passthrough report with groupings template, enable `Show Active Count & Projected Hires` option to enable projected hires based on the currently active applications selected in the report filters.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/OmAcY-ziqGJV73ghpiGrI06e.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f7daad545a5e4a28b2111bdf98a24be9"}

## Skip Funnel Report

This type of report allows you to see conversion rates between two critical stages of your funnel, while skipping over the individual conversion rates for other stages. For example, you can answer: which % of recruiter screens end up in offers?

The most basic report of this kind looks like this:

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/4bWf9Vr6CkaeFcSrjV_nz_uO.png)

As any other report in Ashby, you can group this report type any field, e.g. source type:

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/fkT_rpm48w-2tCKcSttZmOn5.png)

Using the count over time report, you can also take a look at the skip funnel metric over time:

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/fF7N1btmMcEoedajfRX6nW50.png)

## Ratios

A different way to visualize conversion rates is to use ratios. You can create ratios by utilizing the "Generic Segmentation Report" and picking the visualization option "Single Number".

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/g2Q4O2RgLNafDifH94Z38dZl.png" size="50" width="562" height="370" darkWidth="562" darkHeight="370" position="center" showCaption="false"}

## Conversion Rates from a particular stage over time

To spot trends in conversion rates over time, you can focus on a particular stage and take a look at how many candidates pass through that stage.

There are a few variations of this report, but one popular one is to look at onsite interviews and their outcome over time.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/4rYa1sLmA934SJVl-KBgalSI.png)

This report shows which percentage of onsite interviews that occurred each week ended up hired, rejected by you, rejected by the candidate or are still active. This kind of report lets you quickly spot if your conversion rate is changing from your historical average.

## Candidate Flow Report

This report allows to take a look at the exact stage transitions that occurred in a specific timeframe. It can be either used to give status updates on recent activities on individual jobs or to take a detailed look at drop-off rates and drop-off reasons.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/K_M3XlttfNT_2Tv63scs8EkL.png)

## Qualified Candidate Volume Over Time

This report type uses a calculated field to define what a qualified candidate is. In most cases we like to define it as anyone who has made it passed the application review stage(s). Looking at this metric you can easily see how the volume & quality of candidates has changed over time.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/Qv03Fk8id6L0rtY1-lLTcKEb.png)

# Activity Reports

Activity reports help you report on the volume of your activities. E.g. how many hires are you making? How many new candidates are you getting into interview process? How many interviews are you scheduling across different stages?

## New Applications by Source

See how the volume of new applications by source is changing over time. This report can give you a sense if new initiatives are performing as expected (e.g. if you just started sourcing for a new role).

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/DjsBtb3CAGdWpWr4gsuiAFD_.png)

## Interviews by Stage Over Time

This is another way to look at if you are getting enough candidate volume to reach your hiring goals. Based on the conversion reports you will now how many interviews you need at specific stages in the funnel to make one hire. This report will show you if you're trending towards reaching that goal or not.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/AqweDBfDkIvmOvNXAv_HNPO1.png)

## Hires by Department

You can use this report to track if you're reaching your overall hiring goals by department.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/OGKE98E8alhaZQvjheqEoBHv.png)

# Offer Reports

Offer reports show you how well you're doing at closing candidates that made it all the way through your interview process.

## Overall offer acceptance rate

This report allows you to get a simple trend of your offer acceptance rate over time. As with all reports you can look at this data by department, geography, or any other field you're interested in.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/6tokHxjrmuq1CaOjFnBaaqaB.png)

## Offer acceptance rate with offer numbers

This report allows you to look at offer volume and acceptance rate side-by-side. It's also well suited to be grouped by various fields (e.g. time, hiring manager, job, department, source, etc.).

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/ZVxjkNd3xfgAs4Z1dOZ1_ypY.png)

Here is another example of this report, this time grouped by source.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/8cTqHlIF8jJTLW6pkrfz3UJV.png)

## Currently Pending Offers

You can use Ashby not only for historical data, but also for keeping track of current activities, e.g. how many offers are currently pending. The most simple version of this report is simply a tile on a dashboard that shows the total amount of pending offers (again, filtered by any field you want). As always in Ashby, you can then click into the number to see the underlying candidates.

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/GdOEGPr5W3t6_F44hP0nq53V.png" size="50" width="654" height="462" darkWidth="654" darkHeight="462" position="center" showCaption="false"}

Alternatively you can show pending offers in aggregate. For example, below, all pending offers by department.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/Kur4kzes52VSJWBGdJq7gU46.png)

# Source Quality Reports

## Hires by Source Over Time

This report can show you which candidate sources are contributing most to hires, and how that has changed over time.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/jsHjis5nyMFkGRSNW8JCsvxt.png)

## Onsite Interview Outcomes by Source

When looking at source quality, you don't only want to look at the absolute amount of hires contributed to each source, but also at the amount of effort your team is putting into each hire based on their source. One good measure for this is looking at onsite interview outcomes by source.

The heat map below allows you to quickly detect hotspots. For example you can see that, 71% of onsite interviews for candidates from Hired.com end in your team rejecting the candidate (note that we're using demo data for these examples).

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/TkdOrqOJ3YoKzLF4k4pTNU3Y.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f7daad545a5e4a28b2111bdf98a24be9"}

# Archive Reason Reports

:::hint{type="info"}
For archive reason analysis, be sure to check out [Best Practices: Managing & Analyzing Archive Reasons](docId\:r1tYNIVQjQ5ikc3v8ctTF)&#x20;
:::

## Candidate rejection reasons over time

Use this report, to keep track of why candidates are pulling out of the interview process and how that has changed over time.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/HXXWodqZuPhDCPyZ7jjHmuvY.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/ad62a072431942daa82ef2ef88a35838"}

# Hiring Speed Reports

## Time in process by job

This report shows you how long candidates are on average spending in the hiring process. It gives you both an overall metric as well as a breakdown by stage.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/8r-LqWNCvMc9rQ0OhGoAKQXI.png)

## Time in process by outcome

Use filters to examine the final outcome of all candidates by their time in process. You can further examine the outcome of candidates that make it to the offer stage to see how big of an impact speed in process makes for final outcomes!

![Time in Process by Outcome.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/U7rM4SlhFzDmI40UxYi7X_timeinprocessbyoutcome.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/52da94d64da848ff851758cd3c7adf36"}

## Time to Hire by custom groupings: source type, department, gender, and so on.

From the Time to Hire template report, you can quickly adjust the filters and group by options to dynamically explore many different results. With this example, you’ll learn how to explore hiring speed by any grouping of interest.

![Time to Hire by Source Type.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/gceQzKSCrNwphZoEe9bi2_timetohirebysourcetype.png)

# Current Pipeline Reports

## Current Pipeline with Candidate Names

This report allows you to explore the pipeline for individual jobs, while taking a look at candidate details.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/uHiu6KEEQxGjcFYiKuMKJF2I.png)

## Current Pipeline with Aggregate Numbers

This type of report can give you a high level overview of where active candidates are currently in process, showing the jobs they are interviewing for and the stage they are currently in.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/lnIeu1cn95v8MRfGyTDuZ1OP.png)

# Load Balancing and Capacity Planning Reports

## Interviews scheduled by coordinator

This report can give you a sense of how your scheduling load is balanced across coordinators.

Note that this report currently counts all scheduled panels (e.g. an onsite consisting of 4 interviews is counted as 1 in here), and counting is based on interviews that are scheduled and the coordinator assigned to the application to which the interview belongs. So it will not give you a perfectly accurate picture that considers, e.g. re-schedules. However we do find this very useful for high-level load balancing.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/QcNlSBBCXIdJFhx9SkSU1aGv.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c8ce08892d934bc4b4c66bbc4fbbc9f3"}

## Interview Load

Explore how many hours interviewers on your team have spent interviewing. As any other report, you can look at this over time, group it by interview stage, etc.

- Candidate hours: hours a candidate spends in interviews
- Interviewer hours: aggregate hours across all interview participants
- When this report is grouped by **Interviewer**
  - Candidate hours: aggregate calendar hours of each particular interviewer
  - Interviewer hours: aggregate hours across all interview participants

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/_WECZsygDE_tAf8CXyxIjAix.png)

# Job Reports

## Open job count by job status

This report allows you to see the total count of open jobs for a given time interval, grouped by the job status. This chart will give a visual sense for how often jobs remain open, in aggregate.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/oO07yUnD9F0EPLMfmk1QgSoQ.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/d226c90b305f4abab88525064760847d"}

## Jobs by active candidate count

You can use a custom list report with the Active Candidate Count field to filter for Jobs that have at least 1 active candidate and juxtapose this with those in review, active processes or archived.

![Screen Shot 2022-08-10 at 2.38.36 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0_zsXeIHapIQg_AdQmQW4_screenshot2022-08-10at23836pm.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/7d0f65eaeb304b2dab2e4ee438eafbcb"}

# Feedback Completion Reports

## Interview Feedback SLA

This report shows how to identify interviewers that have not yet completed feedback for applicants that are still under consideration. Starting with a segmentation report on the Interview Participation subject, the filter selects for active applicants and incomplete feedback submission. In this example, an additional filter option selects for jobs in the Sales department. The sorted results show which Jobs have the largest number of pending feedback submissions by the individual interviewers.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/8HLJ42sO-evzDArCPuE3LLAW.png)

Similarly, with the same filter conditions you can adjust the grouping to be over the interviewer and interview scheduled in stage group. This chart reveals which individuals are delayed in submitting feedback, delineating between interview stage:

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/d-pl0g_NGV5seY3E8_ZAXi7P.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b924dd782e244d40ba8799007337f60b"}

# Interviewer Calibration Reports

## Feedback distribution by interviewer (Template)

This report lets you see how frequently interviewers submit "strong yes"/"yes"/"no"/ "strong no" feedback. In the example below you can see the values expressed as %.

Typically you want to filter this report down to e.g. only hired candidates, or interviews for a particular job at a particular stage. That way you can detect if interviewers that interviewed under similar circumstances potentially skew more positive/negative.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/GT0qYK7DRBMPHkos_2t3ujf2.png)

## Feedback correlation with application outcome

With this report you can look at how the feedback a particular interviewer provided correlated with the outcome of the application.

Again, as in the other calibration reports, you will likely want to narrow this report down to a specific stage & job, to ensure that the data is relevant (for example, it is quite common for the earliest interview to be a "yes" even though the candidate might end up being rejected, simply because the chance of a  candidate being rejected increases as they move down the funnel). Most commonly this report is used to calibrate on onsite interviews.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/mUFPV2Masdi5q0p-U0N2eF7Y.png)

## Feedback correlation with how far an application makes it through the interview process

This type of report can vary quite a bit, based on your job setup.

Generally it allows you to answer questions like: "how predictive is my technical phone screen of how far a candidate will make it in the process?".

If want to answer questions along these lines, let us know, and we're happy to set you up with a customized template!

# Sequence Reports

## Click-Sorted Sequences

This example report looks at recent sequences where the Reply Status is Not Set but the sequence has been opened or has clicks. The results are sorted by clicks to float potentially high-interest candidates.

![Filters for the Click-Sorted Sequences report. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GIHF4ITgXNIdKCGeV1Cr8_screenshot2023-01-24at73357am.png)

Filters for the Click-Sorted Sequences report.

![Results section for the Click-Sorted Sequences report. ](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/mLwu89kJt3atMzqcWDs9A_screenshot2023-01-24at73926am.png)

Results section for the Click-Sorted Sequences report.

# Diversity Reports

### Intersectional Race & Gender Pivot Table

This example shows how to use [Ashby’s pivot tables](docId\:doJWXiu3ZHGAA3h8OmeXz) to produce an intersectional report on EEOC Gender and Race.

![dei example.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/GQd3IeWJnYPbl4PVl8wBZ_deiexample.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/19cd8d37349545598988420bd22805d2"}

### Recruiter Screens by Gender

In this example we look at reporting on scheduled interview events by gender to examine the overall composition of recruiter screens over time. We use our intelligent Candidate’s Gender field which preferentially looks for EEOC data first and falls back on inferred gender results as a backup to maximize reporting coverage.

![Recruiter Screens by Gender.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/G8sPqZOKCb3yf-Iat0ySB_recruiterscreensbygender.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f56ed704fd1d41089e3a32531859f791"}


[title] Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control
[path] Ashby Analytics/User Access & Sharing Metrics/

This article explains Ashby Analytics content access control. Learn how to make reports and dashboards private or public for your organization's users, and how to share private reports with specific individuals.

The content access controls described in this article, which the exception of dashboard locking, are available on all Ashby Plans.

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ✅\*\*       | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
\*\*Dashboard locking is not available on Foundations plans because Foundations does not provide custom dashboard creation.
:::

# Content access vs permissions

In Ashby Analytics, reports and dashboards are thought of as "content." Making a report or dashboard private to yourself, shared with a restricted set of users, or shared with your entire organization is the focus of Content Access Control. What results show up in a report (for example, whether a user sees a summary including all departments and jobs versus a summary that shows only the Engineering department) is the focus of Permissions, sometimes referred to as data access control.

- **Content access:** controls what content, reports, or dashboards a user is allowed to view.
- **Permissions:** controls what data is available in reports or dashboards.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you want to restrict what results users see in their reports, see [User Permissions](docId\:i5jHibmkQHYobnnvrl8rk).
:::

# Content access in Ashby

In Ashby, you can restrict access to both reports and dashboards. There are two states content can be in:

- **Private:** restricts access to you and anyone on the access list
- **Public:** shared with your organization and viewable by any Ashby user

Upon saving new content, you have the choice of making it private or public. The default option is to create public content. Toggle the `Private Report` setting on if the report should be private.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dL6K1GDsqTFvY46YTvn_r_report-builder-ashby-2026-09-21-at-23345-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1226" height="822" darkWidth="1226" darkHeight="822" showCaption="false"}

## Change access settings

Admin users can adjust access settings at any time. You can view the access settings under the **More** menu, with an open or closed lock icon indicating whether the content is public or private.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qSPupku-BaMnYl3EDMDuN_screenshot2022-11-21at23731pm.png" size="70" width="397" height="201" darkWidth="397" darkHeight="201" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-11-21 at 2.37.31 PM.png" showCaption="false"}

# Making a report private or public

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn how to build reports, see [Report Builder & AI-Assisted Report Builder](docId\:kFMXauoRKZx6_EZbu32Po) .
:::

A public report can be made private at any time by selecting `More` in the upper right corner and then `Access`.&#x20;

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/qAFR6y0RHIdYMQo5EAgo7_stale-job-considerations-report-ashby-2026-09-21-at-25324-pm.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="934" height="602" darkWidth="934" darkHeight="602" showCaption="false"}

Then, select `Make Private`. This will open a screen where you can manage access to the private report.  See the next section to [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o).

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5jQHGOLJRNIdXcpw97L8c_image.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="1116" height="488" darkWidth="1116" darkHeight="488" showCaption="false"}

:::hint{type="warning"}
Making private removes all access to the report and removes the report from any private dashboards that are private to more than just you. Because this action can affect other users' experience, Ashby asks you to confirm the choice in a two-step process.
:::

:::hint{type="info"}
You can make the report public again by navigating to `More` > `Access` > `Make Public` > `Remove access restrictions`. When making a private report public, Ashby asks for confirmation, as the report becomes accessible to all Ashby users.
:::

## Manage access to private content

You can share any private content with other users by adding them to the access list. Only the content author has the option to enable further access management by users on the access list, by toggling the `Allow Sharing` option.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6DecLpcCjRAmADxZZL8Ri_stale-job-considerations-report-ashby-2026-09-21-at-31855-pm.png" size="90" isUploading="false" width="560" height="364" darkWidth="560" darkHeight="364" showCaption="false"}

The primary content access management options are:

- Click `Make Public` to make the content public, granting all organization users access
- Add additional users to the access list by searching for them and selecting them from the drop-down, or select the trash can icon next to a user's name to remove them from the access list
- Check the `Allow sharing` box to allow users on the access list to add the report to dashboards and add other users to the access list
- Select `Revoke All Access` to make the report strictly private

:::hint{type="warning"}
Revoking all access removes access to the report from all users and removes the report from all dashboards that are not private to you. Because this choice may affect other users' experience, Ashby requires a two-step confirmation:

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/WtUCkgoy-zUyTFAm37uNm_screenshot2022-11-21at24743pm.png" size="76" width="498" height="256" darkWidth="498" darkHeight="256" position="center" alt="Screen Shot 2022-11-21 at 2.47.43 PM.png" showCaption="false"}
:::

## Lock or unlock a report

Users with an Admin license can lock or unlock a report to prevent other users from making changes or accidental edits. Only the user who locked the report can unlock it.

- If a report is unlocked, the button says `Unlocked` and the lock icon is open.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TCUBDHC_8W-5z0Fp2jKti_screenshot2023-01-10at85541am.png" size="70" isUploading="false" width="538" height="87" darkWidth="538" darkHeight="87" showCaption="false"}

- If a report is locked, the button says `Locked`, shows a closed lock icon, and is golden yellow.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dL8cURjNoUM_yOo6jNeUx_screenshot2023-01-10at85550am.png" size="60" isUploading="false" width="463" height="81" darkWidth="463" darkHeight="81" showCaption="false"}

To lock a report, click the button that says `Unlocked` and select `Lock report`.&#x20;

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OgtC61W3DdRGKTEKnnFYi_stale-job-considerations-report-ashby-2026-09-21-at-34925-pm.png)

To unlock a report, click the button that says `Locked` and select `Unlock report`.

:::hint{type="info"}
If the user who locked a report has been deactivated or terminated, any Organization Admin can unlock the report.
:::

![Screen Cast 2023-01-10 at 9.10.19 AM.gif](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/OH3K-I_EEZDlkzyTAbc4s_screencast2023-01-10at91019am.gif)

## Things to note when adding reports to dashboards

Keep the following in mind when adding reports to dashboards:

- **Add report to dashboard:** After a report is added to a dashboard, it is accessible to everyone who has access to the report directly and everyone who has access to the dashboard. If a user has access to the report by having access to the dashboard, they can also view the report on its own (outside the dashboard in the saved report view).
- **Remove report from dashboard:** Anyone who had access to the report solely by having access to the dashboard no longer has access to the report.
- **Remove user from report access control list:** If the removed user does not have access to any dashboard the report is on, this action removes the user's access to the report. If they do have access to a dashboard the report is on, the user continues to have access to the report.

# Dashboard access: public, private, locked, unlocked

:::hint{type="info"}
To learn how to build a dashboard, see [Building Your First Dashboard](docId\:Q7A7CpFpyulmT6bd1qVYm) .
:::

Similar to reports, dashboards can be public or private. Public dashboards are available to your organization. Private dashboards are available only to the author and users on the dashboard's access list. &#x20;

Dashboards can also be locked or unlocked. Dashboard locking freezes the dashboard's reports, layout, and available filters and controls who can change the dashboard configuration. It also lets you control whether users can copy the dashboard or create scheduled deliveries.

## Private reports on dashboards

It is possible to add a private report to any dashboard. In doing so, you grant users with access to the dashboard access to the report. Because dashboards and reports have separate access lists, the access list for the report may be empty (apart from you). If any other users have access via a dashboard, you see the `Revoke All Access` button, allowing you to enforce strict privacy and remove access to the report from all users.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/YutdzW7qb1bNf3RL9V_Y9_stale-job-considerations-report-ashby-2026-09-21-at-53146-pm.png" size="80" caption="A report with no users on the access control list, but the &#x22;revoke all access&#x22; option alerts you that users have access to this report via dashboards." isUploading="false" width="1118" height="620" darkWidth="1118" darkHeight="620" alt="A report with no users explicitly on the access control list, but the &#x22;revoke all access&#x22; option being present alerts you that users have access to this report via dashboards." showCaption="true"}

## Configure dashboard access settings

:::hint{type="warning"}
Data visibility continues to follow the viewer's permissions, unless  `View with my permissions` is enabled. For more on how this works, see [Permissions & Sharing Dashboards](docId\:NdRpeyX1FEJ35Uvnuled_).
:::

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/q3cNoy0TP4aTdkVilbJ0Z_ops-dashboard-ashby-2026-09-22-at-40637-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1122" height="1276" darkWidth="1122" darkHeight="1276" showCaption="false"}

To manage dashboard privacy, locking, and sharing settings:

1. Navigate to the dashboard.
2. Select `More` > `Access`.
3. Select whether the dashboard is public or private.
4. Select whether the dashboard is locked or unlocked.

:::hint{type="warning" indent="1"}
Locking protects the dashboard configuration only. It does not lock the underlying reports. Users who can edit the underlying reports can still modify those reports directly.
:::

5. Add users to the access list and assign each user a `Viewer` or `Editor` role.
6. Choose whether users can copy the dashboard and whether they can manage scheduled deliveries by checking the corresponding checkboxes for these permissions.

### How dashboard access roles work on locked dashboards

The dashboard locker and users with the `Editor` role can modify the dashboard's permissions, access list, layout, and content. On a private, locked dashboard, grant users the `Viewer` role to provide view-only access. A public, locked dashboard will allow view-only access to all users who can see public dashboards.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/14B78BhAxoZ1iSVZ3hvjs_ops-dashboard-ashby-2026-09-22-at-40701-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1122" height="1272" darkWidth="1122" darkHeight="1272" showCaption="false"}

Copying is disabled by default when a dashboard is locked, but can be enabled using the checkboxes on the lock options screen. Scheduled-delivery management is also disabled for users with dashboard access by default. Editors can manage scheduled deliveries, and the dashboard owner can allow other users with access to manage them.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/h5eAX5G2HfdH8pq5m846__ops-dashboard-ashby-2026-09-21-at-52636-pm.png" size="80" isUploading="false" width="1104" height="200" darkWidth="1104" darkHeight="200" showCaption="false"}

### Dashboard locking and shared views

When you configure a dashboard to show data using a specific user's permissions through `View with my permissions`, Ashby also locks the dashboard. The user whose permissions are shared becomes the locker.

### Viewing who locked a dashboard

To see who locked a dashboard, you can hover over the locked indicator either in the top left of the dashboard, or on your saved dashboards list.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/NGfT9ESSBFP-fT1p5-R2s_saved-dashboards-ashby-2026-09-22-at-110003-am.png)

In the saved dashboard list, you can select `+ Add Column` and add the `Locked By` column to add that data to the list view.

# FAQ

### What should I do if a report or dashboard is locked and the user who locked it no longer works for our organization?

For reports, reach out to an Organization Admin, as they can unlock the report. If you do not know who your Organization Admin is, reach out to us at [support@ashbyhq.com](mailto\:support@ashbyhq.com).

For dashboards, if the locker is deactivated or no longer available, an Organization Admin who can access the dashboard can unlock it. An elevated access user can also be granted the `Administer dashboard access` permission so they can unlock dashboards and manage dashboard access for dashboards they can view.&#x20;

Users with the `Editor` role can also manage the locked dashboard's permissions, access list, layout, and content.


[title] Setting up Greenhouse Webhooks
[path] Ashby Analytics/Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup/Greenhouse Integration Setup/

Setting up webhooks allows certain types of events to be populated from Greenhouse to Ashby in real time. Webhooks are used as part of the migration and integration setup process.

# Creating a webhook in Greenhouse

1. Open settings and go to Dev Center and select `Webhooks`

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/qP_NeUEZA4s28sgh4VKhqm3M.png" size="100" alt="The Webhooks option in the Dev Center in Greenhouse" isUploading="false" width="1690" height="1088" darkWidth="1690" darkHeight="1088" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

2. Next, select the first `Webhooks` option

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/n4lK_4IoTcQAqvtRHjWZNV7q.png" size="100" alt="Click on Webhooks within the Webhooks section." isUploading="false" width="1662" height="676" darkWidth="1662" darkHeight="676" showCaption="false" indent="1"}

3. Create a new Webhook for all the events that should be sent to Ashby

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/qrJ_vEGOb8Wx-kI7ngmLgDha.png" size="100" alt="The page to create a new webhook." isUploading="false" width="2066" height="1402" darkWidth="2066" darkHeight="1402" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::hint{type="info"}
For the URL and secret key fields, use the values found at **Admin > Integrations > Greenhouse**.
:::

Webhooks should be created for the following events:

- Delete Candidate
- Merged Candidate
- Candidate has changed stage
- Candidate hired
- Candidate unhired
- Candidate anonymized
- Candidate or Prospect has been rejected
- Candidate or Prospect has been unrejected
- Delete Application
- Interview Deleted
- Offer Deleted
- Scorecard Deleted
- Department Deleted
- Office Deleted
- Job Deleted

## What should I put for the Error recipient email?&#x20;

This field is not required, so you can leave it blank or enter your own email to be informed of any web hook event failures. Web hook failures should be very rare and you are encouraged to send them to Greenhouse support for review, and optionally forward to Ashby support for consideration.

All of the webhooks should have the same endpoint URL and secret, which we are available at **Admin > Integrations > Greenhouse**.


[title] What can I report on through the Greenhouse API?
[path] Ashby Analytics/Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup/Greenhouse Integration Setup/

This guide covers the object types and subjects that you can use when building reports in Ashby Analytics with data acquired from the Greenhouse API.

## Object Types

We fetch the following object types from Greenhouse via the API:

- Departments
- Offices
- Jobs
- Job Stages
- Custom Fields
- Candidates
- Scorecards
- Sources
- Candidate Tags
- Offers
- Rejection Reasons
- Scheduled Interviews
- Degrees\*
- Disciplines\*
- Current Company\*
- Years of Experience\*
- School Name\*
- EEOC
- Close Reasons
- Job Stages by Job
- Jobs Hiring Team
- Activity Feed
- Demographic Surveys

:::hint{type="warning"}
Please note that as this information is derived from the Greenhouse API, it may be limited. Ashby only does custom resume parsing for the Ashby All-In-One product.
:::

**We are unable to report on:**

- Interview Kits
- Prospect Pools
- Resume or attachment information
- Job Approval Flows

## Reporting Subjects

The following options will show as options in the *Subject* dropdown when building reports using Greenhouse data.

| **Subject**                                               | **Definition**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| --------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Application                                               | A candidate’s record on a specific job.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Prospect Application                                      | Leads/prospects in Greenhouse. These prospects can be converted to candidates.                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Job                                                       | A requisition.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Interview                                                 | Scheduled interviews in your ATS. Interviews can be counted as one per stage (ie. an onsite panel with 4 different interviews will count as 1 onsite interview) or one per scheduled interview (ie. an onsite panel with 4 different interview sill count as 4 interviews). |
| Interviewer Participation                                 | Scheduled interviewers. Each interviewer counts as an interview participation. These tie closely to feedback forms.                                                                                                                                                         |
| Interview Stage Transition                                | Moves to and from stages. Accidental stage moves will be detected and counted.                                                                                                                                                                                              |
|  Sequence (Only available through the Gem API connection) | Sequences initiated through Gem.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Feedback Form                                             | Scorecards in Greenhouse. We pull in the person who submitted, when they submitted, and the overall recommendation.                                                                                                                                                         |
| Opening                                                   | Headcount for a requisition.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
| Candidate                                                 | Candidates in Greenhouse.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Diversity Survey                                          | Custom diversity surveys that are created in Greenhouse. This is not attached to EEOC responses since those have a very strict formatting, whereas the diversity surveys are customized per organization.                                                                   |
| Sourcing Activity                                         | Sourcing activities initiated through Gem.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |

## **


[title] Analytics Tutorial: Days in Current Stage Group
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This tutorial is a walkthrough of using the powerful Days in Current Stage Group field for reporting, with a bonus highlight of creating a calculated field that allows custom categorization for pipeline insights and setting up alerts to drive progress.

## Tutorial

In this tutorial you’ll explore and learn:

- How to setup reports that identify stale candidates in specific stages
- How to create a custom calculated field to segment candidates by their time in process
- How to analyze your pipeline by bucketing candidates by time in stage
- How to setup scheduled alerts that ensure timely progress for all candidates

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/9b3e7b7338f844dd95b2bfb60d987b66"}

The `Days in Current Stage Group` field, which counts the number of days since a candidate’s application has moved to their most recent stage within a stage group, enables a variety of reporting. You’ll review creating the example report shown below, where you can see active candidates segmented by how long they’ve been in each stage group. In this example an insight is found showing the hiring manager stage group contains a disproportionate volume of slow-moving candidates.

![Day Duration in Stage (1).png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LmtSKOArBvBXpJ5gyUYie_daydurationinstage1.png)


[title] Lever API Key Setup
[path] Ashby Analytics/Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup/

***

As part of integrating your Ashby Analytics account with Lever, your Customer Success Manager (CSM) asks you to create and enter an application programming interface (API) key into Ashby. This guide takes you through the steps.

If you are looking to migrate from Lever to Ashby All-In-One, see the [Lever → Ashby Recruiting API Migration Guide](docId\:Ybylw_cYkXHr0pvyKx5rk) for migration instructions.

To set up your Lever sync, create a Lever API key with read permissions enabled for all endpoints. [Lever's documentation on creating an API key](https://help.lever.co/s/article/Generating-and-using-API-credentials) explains this, but in short:

1. Generate a new key.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/75db7af6c91c2c031a05f13153d2275a.png" size="70" alt="Lever settings page showing the “Lever API credentials” section highlighted in red, with a “Generate New Key” button and a table for existing API keys." isUploading="false" width="1071" height="654" darkWidth="1071" darkHeight="654" showCaption="false"}

2. Select `Select all read permissions` to grant read-only rights to all data under the **Permissions** header.

::Image[]{src="https://cdn.zappy.app/3e34e0cf22e7171beb86f687262f5bf3.png" size="70" alt="Permissions section for an API key, with preset options highlighted: Select all read, Select all opportunity, Select all, and Deselect all." isUploading="false" width="777" height="202" darkWidth="777" darkHeight="202" showCaption="false"}

3. Scroll to the bottom of the page and select `DONE`. This step is required to finalize the API key permissions.
4. Add a name for your API key and generate the key.
5. Sign in to your Ashby account and navigate to [Lever API configuration](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/lever).
6. Copy and paste your key into the **Lever API Key** field.





[title] Greenhouse Integration Setup
[path] Ashby Analytics/Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup/

This article explains how to set up the Greenhouse integration, including creating Harvest V3 API credentials, configuring Greenhouse webhook events, and configuring your Greenhouse subdomain to enable direct links into your Greenhouse instance.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
This route is for organizations using Ashby for Analytics only. For more on the Greenhouse migration for all-in-one organizations, see [Greenhouse → Ashby Recruiting API Migration](docId\:cRJSTuGNmwNJ59jlL3-Tp).
:::

# Step one: Configure Harvest V3 API credentials

To create your API credentials (also referred to as a Client ID and Client Secret pair) for the Greenhouse integration:

1. In Greenhouse, click the **Configure** icon > **Dev Center** > **API Credential Management**.
2. Click `Create new API credentials`.
3. Fill in the fields:
   - **API type:** Harvest V3 (OAuth)
   - **Description:** Something identifiable, e.g., "Data Sync Integration" (do not include "Ashby" in the description).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Xdfq59m22BkK0h_u3rvaw_creating-a-new-credential-in-greenhouse.jpg" size="100" isUploading="false" width="1890" height="540" darkWidth="1890" darkHeight="540" showCaption="false" indent="2" alt="The Create new credential page in Greenhouse."}

4. Proceed to the permissions/scopes screen.

## Set the required scopes

Select read scopes on all objects. This grants "list" access, meaning Ashby can list data for each object.

You may see items such as:

- `harvest:candidates:list`
- `harvest:applications:list`
- `harvest:notes:list`
- `harvest:application_stages:list`
- `... (other endpoints)`

Save the credential.

## Copy the Client ID and Client Secret

After saving, Greenhouse displays your **Client ID** and **Client Secret**.

# Step two: Set up Greenhouse webhooks

Configure your Greenhouse webhooks to capture certain events in real time, such as candidate stage transitions, hires, and various record deletions. For more on configuring webhooks, see [Setting up Greenhouse Webhooks](docId\:HgfQAxE7EcYxqsb2WjkoR).

# Step three: Locate and configure your Greenhouse custom subdomain

Your Greenhouse instance may have a custom subdomain, such as your company name or one of Greenhouse's multiple servers.

To find your subdomain, log in to Greenhouse and view any candidate or job profile. Your URL has the form `[subdomain].greenhouse.io/...`. Once you have found your subdomain, enter it in the **Subdomain** field in your [Admin > Integrations > Greenhouse](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/greenhouse) settings.

![An example Greenhouse subdomain](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/K5la_OOFduxHsrhyv1dDB_screenshot2022-05-13at33809pm.png)

After you update your subdomain, a `View in Greenhouse` button appears when you view a candidate profile. This links directly to your candidate profiles. Additionally, [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW) provide links to your candidate profiles for convenient access.

![The View in Greenhouse button on a candidate profile.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0TWcvEeYOlyFWlCyGcFkX_screenshot2022-11-21at21535pm.png)

# Step four: Enter your API credentials in Ashby

You can find your Greenhouse integration configuration in your admin section by navigating to [Admin > Integrations > Greenhouse](https://app.ashbyhq.com/admin/integrations/greenhouse). This is where you enter your API credentials and subdomain.

![The Greenhouse integration page in Ashby.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/g78VJPz06n0oUWkk_RlSv_greenhouse-api-migration-docs-harvest-v1-to-v3-google-docs-2026-08-14-at-90916-am.jpg)

- **Client ID:** Enter your client ID (or client key).
- **Client Secret:** Enter your generated client secret.
- **Custom Subdomain:** Enter your custom subdomain to enable linking directly to candidate profiles from Ashby.

:::hint{type="success"}
Adding the API credentials initiates your initial data sync. After your initial data sync completes, regular syncs continue once per hour to automatically ingest new data and updates. Ashby displays the last successful sync time in your Ashby user's timezone.
:::


[title] Offer and Offer Acceptance Reports
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This document provides an overview of offer processes and their impact on offer and offer acceptance reports.

## Offer Processes

Talent teams can glean a lot of insight from offer details and offer acceptances.

Before we can start reporting on offers and acceptance rates, it is important to determine your offer process and what parts of the process you want to report on. There are a couple of typical processes and general reporting capabilities that come with each:

**All offer and offer data is in the ATS \[Recommended]:&#x20;**&#x43;an report on offer activity, offer stage activity/movement, and offer details.

**Offer and offer data is partially in the ATS and partially external:&#x20;**&#x43;an report on offer stage activity/movement and on offer details that are in the ATS.

**Offer and offer data are all stored outside of the ATS:&#x20;**&#x43;an report on offer stage activity/ movement.

:::ExpandableHeading
**Expand to see detailed explanations of each of these processes.**

**Offer sent in ATS \[Recommended]**

This is the recommended offer process to ensure maximum report-ability and consistency. Offer are created and sent through your ATS (this could be through an integration). All offer details are added to the ATS and the ATS acts as the source of truth. Most ATSs do not allow you to report on more than one offer per application, so all offer reports are going to pull the data from the most latest version of the offer. Using this process will allow Ashby to use the following data points to create offer reports:

- Date candidate entered offer stage (could be used as a sign of a verbal offer or an intent to offer)
- Date offer was created
- Date offer was extended
- Date offer was rejected or accepted (for Greenhouse customers, this will be the date a candidate was either rejected or hired after their offer has been created)
- Offer status
- Any custom offer fields

**Offer Data is in ATS but is sent externally**

Some companies are not ready to send all offers through their ATS. The second best alternative for report-ability and consistency, is to send offers outside of the ATS but still enter the offer details back into the ATS. This is not the same as uploading the signed offer (Please see next section). Since the offer details and offer object are present, we are able to still pull some meaningful insights, but since the action of sending the offer was outside of the ATS, we are not able to capture that specific date. Using this process will allow Ashby to use the following data points to create offer reports:

- Date candidate entered offer stage (could be used as a proxy for offer extended date)
- Date offer was created in ATS (could be used as a proxy for offer extended date)
- Date candidate was archived or hired
- Offer status (except extended and/or pending)
- Any custom offer fields

**Offers sent outside of ATS but completed offers are uploaded into ATS (no details added) or offer activity is outside of the ATS**

Although uploading the completed offers into your ATS allows for you to have a source of truth and repository of all your offers in one place, the offer details are not filled out and therefore, we are not able to pull in most data. Using this process will allow you to report on the following data points in Ashby:

- Date candidate entered offer stage (could be used as proxy for offer extended date)
- Date candidate was archived or hired (could be used as proxy for offer rejected or accepted)
:::



## Offer Reporting Basics

### Commonly Used Offer Fields and Definitions

Fields in purple require an offer object (offer details) to exist on the application (either process **A or B**). Please note that this is not an exhaustive list. Ashby pulls in and allows you to report on all custom fields.

- **Time and Date Fields**
  - **Decided At:** the date a candidate accepts or rejects an offer (for Greenhouse customers, this is the same as the date a candidate is hired or archived)
  - **Created At:** the date the offer was generated in the ATS
  - **Extended At or Sent At:** the date the offer was sent through the ATS
  - **Start Date:** the start date from the offer letter
  - **Offer Stage Entered At:** the date a candidate moves into the offer stage (can be used as a proxy for offer sent if offers not sent in ATS)
  - **Consideration Ended At:** the date a candidate was either archived or hired (this is not specific to the offer stage, so you will need to add a filter for candidates that reached offer stage)
- **User Fields**
  - **Requester:** user who requested the approval chain to start (you must have an approval workflow in your ATS)
  - **Creator:** user who created the offer in the ATS
  - **Recruiter** (job or candidate level): user who is assigned as the recruiter
- **Other Fields**
  - **Status (Offer):** Created, Extended, Rejected, or Accepted
  - **Status (Approval Process):** Pending, Approved, or Rejected

## Template Offer Acceptance Rate Report

Ashby offers a prebuilt report that allows you to show and group acceptance rates. You can group by month or any other time cadence, or by another field. If you are grouping by a time frame, the time field is assumed to be decided at and cannot be changed.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you are not adding any offer details in your ATS, this will not be an effective report and it is recommended to create a [Offer Acceptance Count Over Time Report](docId\:LksLYvd7Qprq-9Wrx78VN)
:::



![Offer Acceptance Rate Overall.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/amyUuzVHqpBpLQhzZlRoA_offeracceptancerateoverall.png)

## Custom Offer Acceptance Rate Reports

### Define Your Organization’s Offer Acceptance Rate

Before creating custom offer acceptance rate reports, make sure to keep in mind what offers you would like to include in this percentage. Some things to consider:

- **Do you want the offer acceptance rate to be the percentage of offers accepted out of the offers extended?**
- By selecting the Decided At date as your time range filter, this will automatically filter for all candidates that received an offer. You can either group by Outcome or by Offer Status.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/n0x54xmgIglKtCSVDQEOr_untitled.png" size="100" alt="Untitled" isUploading="false" initialPath="Offer%20and%20Offer%20Acceptance%20Reports%2092663c519ab1468d874fbba15032f2cb/Untitled.png" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Section 1/Offer and Offer Acceptance Reports 92663c519ab1468d874fbba15032f2cb/Untitled.png" width="800" height="339" darkWidth="2816" darkHeight="1194" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

- **Do you want the offer acceptance rate to be the percentage of offers accepted out of all intended offers (including verbal offers)?**
- The Consideration Ended At filter is not stage specific, so you will need to add a filter for candidates that Reached Stage Group Offer. You should only be grouping by outcome because an offer status only exists for candidates that have an offer object (either created or extended).

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/IwW8lVme8VoOXoToS2eN9_untitled-1.png" size="100" alt="Untitled" isUploading="false" initialPath="Offer%20and%20Offer%20Acceptance%20Reports%2092663c519ab1468d874fbba15032f2cb/Untitled%201.png" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Section 1/Offer and Offer Acceptance Reports 92663c519ab1468d874fbba15032f2cb/Untitled 1.png" width="800" height="344" darkWidth="2800" darkHeight="1206" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

### Offer Acceptance Rate Tile Report

A popular report to add to any dashboard is an offer acceptance rate tile report. This report appears as just a simple percentage and can be filtered by dashboard level filters.

To create this report, follow the same steps as you would for a [Ratio Reports](docId\:Zep-4cIy3emEKomLZEet6) and visualize as a percentage.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/zBX39eC66sfjlRRwPWbX2_untitled-2.png" size="38" width="472" height="358" darkWidth="472" darkHeight="358" position="center" alt="Untitled" showCaption="false"}

**Best Practices**

- Pending offers and active candidates in offer can skew the acceptance rate lower. Since these offers have not had the opportunity to either be accepted or rejected, it is recommended to exclude Outcome: Active and/or Status: Pending.
- Typically, customers report offer acceptance rate by decision date.
- Whatever time field you choose to report by (decision date, extended at date, entered offer stage date, etc…), make sure other reports on the dashboard are aligned. For example, if your offer acceptance rate is by extended at date, you can include another tile with the total offers extended in that period of time. However, it is not recommended to add a tile with the total offers decided on in that period of time.

### Offer Acceptance Count Over Time Reports

A count over time report provides more flexibility than the template report.

::Image[]{src="https://app.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Fr4bVbijhCBpcjOpIGMrt_offeracceptanceratelast12months.png" size="66" width="1062" height="924" darkWidth="1062" darkHeight="924" position="center" alt="Offer Acceptance Rate, Last 12 Months.png" showCaption="false"}

**Time Field & Interval**

The first thing you need to do is determine what date/ time field you want to report by. The most popular ones are:

- Offer Start Date
- Extended At/ Sent At
- Decided At
- Offer Stage Entered at
- Consideration Ended At - must add Reached Stage Group: Offer as a filter

The field you select is how the report will determine what time frame an offer will count for. For example, if you are doing a month over month report, an offer that was sent in February and was signed in March has a February Extended At/Sent At date and a March Decided At date.

**Filters**

If you are including offers that were not sent in the ATS, it is recommended that you add a NOT filter for candidates with an active outcome since these offers have neither been rejected or accepted.

**Group By**

If you are only considering offers that were sent through the ATS, it is recommended to use Status as the field to group by.

If you are including verbal offers or any other offer stage activity in the offer acceptance rate, you must group by Outcome, because there will be candidates who technically Declined but have  no offer object. (This was used for the example report)

[title] The Lever Data Model
[path] Ashby Analytics/Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup/Lever API Key Setup/

This document gives a brief introduction to the primary working objects of Lever’s data model and what it all means for reporting considerations.

## Core Lever Concepts

The following objects are core to Lever's data model and reporting.

- **Candidate:** The individual applying to one or multiple jobs. The candidate object holds the candidate-related fields: name, resume, credentials and other information not unique to any specific job application.
- **Job Posting (“Job”):** The job posting promoting a job where candidates can apply. The job posting contains metadata about the job, such as the department, location and hiring team members.
- **Opportunity:** A candidate’s application on a specific job is called an opportunity. A candidate can apply to multiple jobs and thus have multiple active opportunities. The opportunity object contains metadata unique to the application, such as the origin, source and hiring team members assigned. Scorecard feedback, interview records, and additional progress information will be tied to the opportunity.
- **Requisition:** Requisitions are [optional in Lever](https://help.lever.co/hc/en-us/articles/208252716-How-do-I-add-requisitions-to-Lever-), but if you use them this will be where headcount information, budget specification and approval workflows can live. The requisition contains metadata about department, team, and hiring team members, amongst other details in addition to the requested headcount.

## Concept and Reporting Challenges to Keep in Mind

### The Job, the Opportunity, and the Requisition each have a recruiter

![Each core Lever object has an independent record of common fields, such as the recruiter and hiring manager. Sometimes these are the same across these objects, but they can differ! Sometimes the Opportunity's recruiter is not the same as the recruiter on the job posting associated with the Opportunity, for example.](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/A73hXclPEF8VGQGlUod00_frame11.png)

Each core Lever object has an independent record of common fields, such as the recruiter and hiring manager. Sometimes these are the same across these objects, but they can differ! Sometimes the Opportunity's recruiter is not the same as the recruiter on the job posting associated with the Opportunity, for example.

- Many customers request reporting, grouping or filtering by “the recruiter” or “the hiring manager.” These hiring team roles can be assigned on the job, but they can also be specified on the Opportunity or the Requisition record independently. This can result in data divergence, where an opportunity can have one recruiter assigned, and the Job itself can have a different recruiter assigned. To make matters a little more complicated, the Requisition can also have a different assigned recruiter. There is no constraint within Lever that requires the different objects have the same hiring team member assigned.
- In Ashby, you can report with specification of the field on any of these objects. As you use type ahead on the field selector, you'll see the "path" from which the field is selected, e.g. "Opportunity > Recruiter" will select the recruiter from the opportunity, while "Opportunity > Job > Recruiter" will select the recruiter specified on the job's record.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/R869Gu_iifXSWgrj49ugN_screenshot2021-11-24at25817pm.png" size="100" alt="Screen Shot 2021-11-24 at 2.58.17 PM.png" isUploading="false" initialPath="The%20Lever%20Data%20Model%2040ad34ebfacf4af5b925294876d50fe6/Screen_Shot_2021-11-24_at_2.58.17_PM.png" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Section 1/The Lever Data Model 40ad34ebfacf4af5b925294876d50fe6/Screen_Shot_2021-11-24_at_2.58.17_PM.png" width="800" height="232" darkWidth="701" darkHeight="204" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

:::hint{type="info"}
Our recommendation: Most customers report based on the Opportunity’s hiring team members, but you can use Ashby to examine the Job’s and Requisition’s assigned recruiter and compare that against the Opportunity’s recruiter to detect any unexpected discrepancies.
:::



**Job postings and Requisitions are independent objects**

Job postings and Requisitions can be created independently of each other and at any time. This means you can have a job posting open with active Opportunities and no underlying Requisition is required. However, you can link one or many Job postings to a requisition at any point in time.

Similar to understanding which object’s hiring team members you want to reference in reporting, metadata around the department, team, location and so on can differ between the Requisition and the Job posting.

**A requisition is only associated with an opportunity at the offer or hired stage**

Within Lever’s model, an opportunity is only associated with the Requisition at the time of offer approval or extension, or after a hire is made. This means that any Candidate or Opportunity-related reporting by requisitions necessarily will be implicitly filtered to opportunities at the offer or hired stages.

**Time to fill is not well-defined in Lever**

As described above, Job postings and Requisitions are independent and the relationship between them is “many to many” in Lever. This means a Job posting can be associated with multiple requisitions, and a Requisition can be associated with multiple job postings. A byproduct of this is a job posting can be opened and with active opportunities in the pipeline, and then at a *later* date, a new Requisition can be opened. The Requisition’s creation time does not necessarily precede recruiting efforts, so the notion of a “start time” is not clear.

Given a single Requisition can be associated with multiple Job Postings, the “close date” for a time to fill is also not clear: is it the first hire across any posting, the first hire from each posting, or the date which the Requisition itself is closed after all headcount is filled?

:::hint{type="info"}
Our recommendation: If you are using Requisitions in Lever, go with 1 headcount per Requisition. This will allow a clear Requisition creation or approval date and Requisition close date, from which we can report a best effort time to fill metric. Additionally, if you integrate with an HRIS like Workday where you define your headcount, it’s likely the Lever integration will follow a 1-requisition-1-headcount sync.
:::



**A candidate can have multiple opportunities**

It is tempting to report on “candidates”, but in most cases you do not want to, as the Candidate does not contain meaningful data about progress through your interview funnel. You’ll want to focus your reporting on Opportunities, as discussed in [Reporting on Candidates vs Applications](docId:5aqpuEly1gP4mKMnd_Fne).

**Working with Lever’s offer process**

If your offers are managed *outside* of Lever, you will not be able to report on offer acceptance rates effectively. If you need to keep the offer letter outside of Lever's system, we recommend you can create an offer object in Lever and [send the offer details externally](https://help.lever.co/hc/en-us/articles/360030607532-How-do-I-create-an-offer-for-an-opportunity-) (see “How do I send an offer outside of Lever?”). On this topic, we also recommend reviewing the ability to create offer custom fields that [do not require re-approval](https://help.lever.co/hc/en-us/articles/205802979-How-do-I-customize-the-offer-form-) (see “editable without requiring re-approval”).

## Summary

There's a lot more to Lever's data model than summarized above, but in our experience, a majority of reporting and reporting challenges relate to the topics covered here. Conceptually, one of the biggest takeaways here is that these core Lever objects are mostly independent despite having some optional dependencies across each other, and the core fields of interest such as Recruiter or Hiring Manager can be different on different objects. This isn't a blocker, as we can help you report and identify such cases, but it is a point that can lead to unexpected results or confusion in report results. If you have a question, or a specific point of interest or suggestions, feel free to reach out to the Ashby team!

[title] Lever Transfers
[path] Ashby Analytics/Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup/Lever API Key Setup/

Lever does not allow opportunities to be transferred from one posting to another. In order to consider an opportunity for another job posting, a new opportunity must be created and added to the new posting. We will refer to this as transferring throughout this article.

To counteract the impact this will have on reporting, we would recommend:

- Creating an archive reason specifically for transfers (ie. transferred to another job or considered for another job). This is easiest way for us to filter out duplicative data.
- Transferring opportunities earlier in the process to get as much of the data as possible on one opportunity.

Be aware that the following data points will be lost in the transfer:

- Sourced by user (and opportunity owner) can now only be the user who added the opportunity to the new job posting. This usually leads to inaccurate reporting on sourcing.
- Interviews that occurred in the previous job will still exist in reporting but will not be tied to the new opportunity.
- Time spent in stages will only be linked to their respective opportunities. If an opportunity is incorrectly placed in a stage and then immediately moved to another stage, this will skew the time spent in that stage lower.

### Impacted Commonly Used Reports

Passthrough Rate Reports

Passthrough rate tables report on a group of opportunities’ journeys through the stages/ stage groups. Since it is tracking each opportunity, a candidate that is transferred to a new job will be counted for both the old req and the new req, and will be considered not passing the stage in which they were transferred from. For this reason, we recommend filtering out by archive reason.

Time to Hire or Time to Offer

These might be inaccurate since the opportunity start date will be the transfer occurred, which usually doesn’t line up with the application date. When a transfer occurs, users are given the option to set a different application date ([Lever Documentation](https://help.lever.co/hc/en-us/articles/360000088643-Why-do-application-dates-matter-)). Users can also edit the application date after the fact as well. Our recommendation is to update the application date on the new opportunity.

Time in Process

In order to keep these reports as accurate as possible, users must ensure opportunities are being added to the proper stage in the new requisition. Since the duration of each opportunity is accurate, you do not need to filter any data out. No change is recommended here.

Archive Reason or Conversion Rate Reports

Because ending an opportunity’s consideration on the older requisition will appear to be an archive or rejection, transfers may skew your archive reason and conversion rate data. We would recommend filtering out by archive reason.

General Reporting

Remember for future reports that a candidate that was transferred will have multiple opportunities and multiple consideration end dates. When building reports, consider if you want transfers to count as 1 or 1 per opportunity. Some situation where you may want to consider filtering out transfers by archive reason:

- Reports that reports on an opportunity’s consideration end date, archive date, etc…
- Reports selecting by archive reasons

[title] Ratio Reports
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This document reviews building ratio reports in Ashby.

## Overview

Ratio reports are commonly used to show the number of applications or interviews it takes to get a certain result (ie. a hire, an offer, etc…). Ultimately, ratios allow you to compare a segment to the whole.

:::hint{type="info"}
A ratio report is a special type of segmentation report.
:::

## Create a Ratio Report

1. **Build:** A ratio report is a segmentation report that is visualized as a ratio. Go to Reports and select Build, then choose Segmentation.

::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/0Npb3N1DS7wxG6qa8WWyA_screencast2022-12-05at92050am.gif" size="100" alt="Screen Cast 2022-12-05 at 9.20.50 AM.gif" isUploading="false" initialPath="Ratio%20Reports%20028d43868f1e4bbaac1d3ab02c33b9d9/Screen_Cast_2022-12-05_at_9.20.50_AM.gif" githubPath="Ashby Analytics Help Part 2/Ratio Reports 028d43868f1e4bbaac1d3ab02c33b9d9/Screen_Cast_2022-12-05_at_9.20.50_AM.gif" width="3016" height="926" darkWidth="3016" darkHeight="926" showCaption="false" indent="2"}

2. **Filters:** The filter section will determine what the whole of the ratio is. For example, if you are creating an applications to hires ratio, total applications is the whole.
3. **Group By:** The field you should group by is the one that distinguishes the part of the whole you want to report on. If you are not able to isolate just one segment or part, you will need to [create a calculated field](docId\:wJbhW3Mnd_381wU1N8F-x).

:::hint{type="info"}
A ratio reports on a part of a whole. The “part” that you are reporting on must be its own segment or group.
:::

1. **View Options:** By default, you will see a pie chart. Confirm that the group you want to report on is its own slice of the pie. Then select single number chart, select the group you are reporting on, and update the show option to **Ratio**.

![Untitled](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_S0XDQPAbRhPjQrUpoT2p_untitled.gif)

## Tutorial

This video walks through how to build a ratio report looking at how many applications it takes to get a hire (the application to hire ratio).

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/d80ecf1945e442ed97bf6643b344788b"}

## Further Reading

### When to create a Calculated Field

Before building the report, you need to ensure the segment you want to report on is defined and is one value in a grouping. For example, if you want to create a ratio report looking at number of applications it takes to get to an offer, you need to ensure that one segment of the report is the number of applications that made it to offer.

If the segment you want to report on is defined by multiple values, you will need to create a Calculated Field that will allow you to isolate the segment. For example, if you want to report on the ratio of phone screens that results in an applicant making it to onsite interview stage, the segment you need cannot be isolated by a single field.

**Common Calculated Fields for ratio reports**

- Reached Onsite - Opportunity field: furthest stage group reached is onsite and all stages after onsite
- Had \_\_\_\_\_ Interview - Opportunity field: \_\_\_ interview is not empty/ unassigned

### Example: Building a ratio report with a Calculated Field

Here is an example of a report that requires you to build a Calculated Field. This video will walk you through how to build a report showing how many applications you need to schedule in phone interview to have an application reach offer stage.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/936bf01ce0014fefa2025f5e817f9ee7"}

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why does my report show grouping no longer exists?

This means that the group you have selected has nothing in it/is 0. Since that group no longer has anything in it, a ratio result is not possible.
:::


[title] Advanced Scheduling Metrics
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

If your company spends a significant amount of time on recruiting coordination, advanced scheduling metrics enable you to monitor and analyze the efficiency of your teams, identify potential bottlenecks, and uncover meaningful opportunities to improve. This article covers the scheduling reporting subjects and fields available to you, along with example reports and the prebuilt scheduling report templates.

Ashby's reporting suite includes several reporting subjects and filter fields for scheduling, letting you:

- See how your scheduling process is performing at a glance.
- Dig deep into granular details.

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** Advanced scheduling metrics are included as part of the Advanced Scheduling Add-On. For more information, see [Advanced Scheduling Automation Add-On](docId\:ycRhY6O-0HUTvZYuUzmK1).
:::

# Overview

Review the video below for an overview of the reporting subjects and fields.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/5b1003b64d334a0bb744401f9d4a0a5f"}

# Reporting subjects

## Interview Schedule Versions

A coordinator attempting to schedule an interview may go through multiple iterations of scheduling efforts due to cancellations, modifications, or rescheduling.

Each time you confirm a new schedule for an interview (whether by modification or rescheduling), Ashby represents it as a new Interview Schedule Version.

For example, an onsite that is scheduled, then goes through three subsequent reschedules, produces four distinct Interview Schedule Versions. This is important because it provides you with a clear view of the actual scheduling volume happening across your team, as opposed to just counting each interview. Some interviews are simple, and some take a lot more effort.

Interview Schedule Versions have several distinguishing characteristics that provide visibility into the scheduling activities of your team and the reasons why schedules may have required some sort of change. Below is a list of the fields you can display or use as filters within your reporting.

:::hint{type="info"}
A reschedule involves adjusting interview participants, start and end times, or amending the number of interviews. A modification is any other kind of adjustment (for example, updating the interview briefing or adding a Zoom link).
:::

### Fields

| **Field Name**                   | **Description**                                                                                                           |
| -------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Version                          | The numeric version of this schedule version (for example, the original schedule is 1 and the first reschedule is 2).     |
| Is Latest Version?               | Whether this is the latest version of the interview schedule.                                                             |
| Scheduled By                     | The user who scheduled this interview version.                                                                            |
| Scheduled By Type                | The method used to schedule this interview version (for example, Auto-Schedule or Manual Schedule).                       |
| Created At                       | The date and time when Ashby created this interview schedule version.                                                     |
| Scheduled At                     | The date and time when this interview schedule version was scheduled.                                                     |
| Cancelled At                     | The date and time when this interview schedule version was canceled (if applicable).                                      |
| Hold Requested?                  | Whether you used holds when scheduling this interview schedule version.                                                   |
| Interviews Start At              | The date and time the first interview starts for this interview schedule version.                                         |
| Interviews End At                | The date and time the last interview ends for this interview schedule version.                                            |
| Number of Events                 | The number of events within the interview schedule version.                                                               |
| Number of Interview Participants | The number of interviewers scheduled within the interview schedule version.                                               |
| Has Participant Decline?         | Whether any interviewers participating in this interview schedule version responded to the calendar invite with Declined. |
| Has Candidate Decline?           | Whether the candidate participating in this interview schedule version responded to the calendar invite with Declined.    |
| Is Multi-Day Schedule?           | Whether the events in this interview schedule version span multiple days.                                                 |
| Version Schedule Type            | The schedule type for the interview schedule version (for example, Original Schedule, Modification, or Reschedule).       |
| Schedule                         | Pull additional fields from the current interview schedule linked to this interview schedule version.                     |
| Job Consideration                | Pull additional fields from the job consideration linked to this interview schedule version.                              |
| Location Type                    | The meeting location type for the interview (for example, In person, Zoom, or Google Meet).                               |

### Report examples

:::hint{type="info"}
Below are some common questions and examples of reports that can help you find the data points needed.
:::

**Question:** How much of your scheduling effort is going towards initial interview scheduling versus reschedules over time? What does that look like by coordinator, job, or interview stage?

**Report Type:** Segmentation

**Subject:** Interview Schedule Versions

**Time Range:** Interview Schedule Version's Created At

**Filters:** Optional (you can filter by job, stage, department, and more)

**Group By:**

- Interview Schedule Version's Scheduled By
- Interview Schedule Version's Version Schedule Type

![The screenshot shows an example of a count by segment report answering the question 'How much of your scheduling effort is going towards initial interview scheduling versus reschedules over time? What does that look like by coordinator, job, or interview stage?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/689bd4f31acac7e04239a7e58a36e705.png)

**Question:** Across all interview scheduling activity, how much is your team using each scheduling method?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:** Interview Schedule Versions

**Time Range:** Interview Schedule Version's Created At

**Filters:** Optional (you can filter by job, stage, department, and more)

**Group By:** Interview Schedule Version's Scheduled By Type

![The screenshot shows a count over time report answering the question 'Across all interview scheduling activity, how much is your team using each scheduling method?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/d78e6243041fc2ea982eaaa3b601cf89.png)

## Interview Schedule Summaries

While Interview Schedule Versions provide granular views into each scheduling action, Interview Schedule Summaries enable you to get insights across all interview schedule versions for interview activities.

An onsite that goes through one initial scheduling and three subsequent reschedules has four versions, but only one summary.

### Fields

| **Field Name**                                    | **Description**                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| ------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Latest Version Number                             | The total number of versions of this interview schedule (for example, if you rescheduled an interview once, this value is 2 — one for the original schedule and one for the reschedule).                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Title                                             | The title of this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Interview Stage                                   | The title of this interview schedule's interview stage.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
| Interview Stage Group                             | The title of this interview schedule's interview stage group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
| Original Version's Scheduled At                   | The date and time the original version of the interview schedule was scheduled at.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
| Latest Version's Scheduled At                     | The date and time the latest version of the interview schedule was scheduled at.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Scheduled By                                      | The user who scheduled the interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Scheduled By Type                                 | The method used to schedule the latest version of this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Cancelled At                                      | The date and time at which the latest version of the interview schedule was canceled.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
| Original Version's Start Time                     | The start time of the first interview of the original version of the interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
| Latest Version's Start Time                       | The start time of the first interview of the latest version of the interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
| Latest Version's Number of Interview Events       | The number of interview events within the latest version of the interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| Latest Version's Number of Interview Participants | The number of unique interviewers scheduled to be a part of the latest version of the interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Availability Requested?                           | Whether you requested candidate availability for this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Hold Requested?                                   | Whether you used holds when scheduling this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Used Direct Booking?                              | Whether you used direct booking links when scheduling this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Had Participant Decline?                          | Whether any interviewers participating in this interview schedule responded to the calendar invite with Declined.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
| Had Candidate Decline?                            | Whether the candidate participating in this interview schedule responded to the calendar invite with Declined.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Version Schedule Type                             | The category of scheduling activity type across all versions of this schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                             |
| Job Consideration                                 | Pull additional fields from the job consideration linked to this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
| Availability First Submitted At                   | The timestamp when availability was first submitted for this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           |
| Availability Last Submitted At                    | The timestamp when availability was last submitted for this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                            |
| Availability Submission Count                     | The total number of availability submissions for this interview schedule.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
| Version Schedule Type (Confirmed Only)            | The category of scheduling activity type across versions after the initial confirmation, excluding any changes made during a hold. Original Schedule means no changes were made after you first confirmed the schedule. Useful for understanding the amount of disruption caused by changes to the interview schedule after confirming with the candidate. |
| Stage Entered At                                  | The time at which this interview schedule first entered its current stage.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |

:::hint{type="info"}
When reporting on Interview Schedule Summaries, if a summary includes any versions that were reschedules, Ashby classifies the summary as a Reschedule for the `Version Schedule Type` field (so if a summary has versions that are both modifications and reschedules, Ashby classifies it as a Reschedule). If a summary includes only modification versions, Ashby classifies it as a Modification. And if a summary only has a single initial version, Ashby classifies it as Original Schedule.
:::

### Report examples

:::hint{type="info"}
Below are some common questions and examples of reports that can help you find the data points needed.
:::

**Question:** How many interview schedules involved a rescheduling event at all (that is, across any version)?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time (or Segmentation if you want to look at a total figure for a timeframe)

**Subject:** Interview Schedule Summaries

**Time Range:** Interview Schedule Summary's Original Version's Scheduled At

**Filters:** Optional

**Group By:** Interview Schedule Summary's Version Schedule Type

Adjust your view options to show a percentage on the Y axis if you want to view this as a percentage.

![A screenshot of a count over time report answering the question 'How many interview schedules involved a rescheduling event at all (that is, across any version)?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/9545e9b683a1b3ee2490026a2b5b057b.png)

**Question:** How often are reschedules or modifications happening by department, job, interview stage, and more?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:** Interview Schedule Summaries

**Time Range:** Interview Schedule Summary's Latest Version's Scheduled At

**Filters:** Interview Schedule Summary's Version Schedule Type equals Reschedule OR Modification

**Group By:** Interview Schedule Summary's Job Consideration's Job, Interview Schedule Summary's Job Consideration's Job's Department, or Interview Schedule Summary's Interview Stage

![The screenshot shows a count over time report answering the question 'How often are reschedules or modifications happening by department, job, interview stage, and more?'](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/EoWhWtI-O0bocP24zjdjd_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-24-at-42828-pm.jpg)

**Question:** How many interview schedules involve a candidate entering their availability more than once across departments?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:** Interview Schedule Summaries

**Time Range:** Interview Schedule Summary's Latest Version's Scheduled At

**Filters:** Availability Submission Count is greater than or equal to 2

**Group By:** Department

![](https://cdn.zappy.app/ddb050fc33737ab9ee7bc989a58394df.png)

## Interviewer RSVPs

This subject is particularly helpful for understanding interviewer declines and improving interviewer habits around response promptness and interview attendance.

You can measure interviewer participation insights and trends on a granular level, with deep visibility into details like RSVP response times (how quickly do different participants respond to interview invites?) and notice times (how close to the time of the interview are participants responding?).

### Fields

| **Field Name**         | **Description**                                                                                                        |
| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Interviewer            | The employee who is conducting the interview.                                                                          |
| Status                 | The interviewer's response to the interview's calendar invitation.                                                     |
| RSVP Note              | The note left by the interviewer when submitting their RSVP.                                                           |
| Submitted At           | The date and time the interviewer submitted the RSVP for the event.                                                    |
| Interview Title        | The title of the interview that the interviewer RSVP'd for.                                                            |
| Interview Role         | The interviewer's role for this interview.                                                                             |
| Interviewer Pool       | The interviewer pool that this interviewer was chosen from.                                                            |
| Is Feedback Required?  | Whether the interviewer was required to leave feedback for this interview.                                             |
| Response Time (Hours)  | The duration, in hours, between the invite being sent and the interviewer's response.                                  |
| Notice (Hours)         | The duration, in hours, between the interviewer's response to the calendar invite and the start time of the interview. |
| Was Rescheduled After? | Whether the interview was rescheduled after the interviewer submitted their RSVP.                                      |
| Schedule Version       | Pull additional fields from the interview schedule.                                                                    |

### Report examples

:::hint{type="info"}
Below are some common questions and examples of reports that can help you find the data points needed.
:::

**Question:** Which participants are declining interviews most often?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:** Interviewer RSVPs

**Time Range:** Interviewer RSVP's Submitted At

**Filters:**

- Interviewer RSVP's Status equals Declined
- Interviewer RSVP's Interview Title does not contain Debrief

**Group By:**

- Interviewer RSVP's Interviewer
- Interviewer RSVP's Was Rescheduled After? (optional, to view reschedules based on declines)

![The screenshot shows a count over time report answering the question 'Which participants are declining interviews most often?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/1863563e2e544cb26966ed867945a2cf.png)

**Question:** Which jobs or interviews have the highest decline rates?

**Report Type:** Segmentation

**Subject:** Interviewer RSVPs

**Time Range:** Interviewer RSVP's Submitted At

**Filters:** Optional

**Group By:** Interviewer RSVP's Schedule Version's Job Consideration's Job (for reporting on jobs) or Interviewer RSVP's Interview Title (for reporting on interview types)

![A screenshot of a count by segment report answering the question 'Which jobs or interviews have the highest decline rates?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/baea37d1961a6a8adb43aca5d135fd24.png)

**Question:** How can I review individual declines, reasons given, and whether those interviews ended up being rescheduled as a result?

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Interviewer RSVPs

**Time Range:** Interviewer RSVP's Submitted At

**Filters:** Optional

**Fields to Show:** Interviewer RSVP's Interviewer, Interviewer RSVP's Status, Interviewer RSVP's RSVP Note, Interviewer RSVP's Submitted At, Interviewer RSVP's Interview Title, Interviewer RSVP's Was Rescheduled After?

![A screenshot of a custom list report answering the question 'How can I review individual declines, reasons given, and whether those interviews ended up being rescheduled as a result?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/42cdf4d05a6a5a2fb4b89fef60c5723a.png)

## Interviewer Pools

With the Advanced Scheduling Add-On, you also have access to report on your interviewer pools, including whether training is enabled and any pending approvals.

### Fields

The following fields are available under the Interviewer Pools subject:

| Field Name                          | Description                                                                               |
| ----------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Title                               | The title of the pool.                                                                    |
| Is Archived?                        | Whether an interviewer pool is archived.                                                  |
| Requires Training?                  | Whether training is enabled. Ashby returns interviewer pools with training but no stages. |
| Training Requires Approval?         | Whether any training stages require approval.                                             |
| Has Pending Approvals?              | Whether any trainees are awaiting approval.                                               |
| Number of Qualified Interviewers    | Number of pool members that are qualified. Doesn't include deactivated employees.         |
| Number of Trainees                  | Number of trainees. Doesn't include deactivated employees.                                |
| Number of Trainees Pending Approval | Number of trainees pending approval. Doesn't include deactivated employees.               |

### Report example

**Question:** How do I pull a list of interviewer pools with trainees awaiting approval?

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Interviewer Pools

**Filters:** Interviewer Pool Has Pending Approvals set to Yes

**Columns/Fields to Show:** Title, Number of Trainees Pending Approval

![A custom list report answering the question 'How do I pull a list of interviewer pools with trainees awaiting approval?'](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VTTj445UdykDc_esVVxKx_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-02-at-25649-pm.jpg)

## Interviewer Pool Members

Use the Interviewer Pool Members subject to report on individual members of an interviewer pool.

### Fields

| Field Name                                                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                        |
| --------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Pool                                                      | The interviewer pool that the interviewer is a member of.                                                                                                                                          |
| Role                                                      | The current role of the interviewer.                                                                                                                                                               |
| Added At                                                  | The time when the user was initially added to the pool, either as a trainee or a qualified interviewer.                                                                                            |
| Removed At                                                | The time when the user was removed from the pool, either as a trainee or a qualified interviewer.                                                                                                  |
| Training Started At                                       | Date of first interview as a trainee (shadow or reverse shadow).                                                                                                                                   |
| Time to Complete Training                                 | Number of days the interviewer was in training, starting from the date the interviewer was enrolled. This field is empty for employees that are not enrolled in training or are still in training. |
| Time in Training                                          | For interviewers in training, this field contains the number of days they have been enrolled. Otherwise, this field is empty.                                                                      |
| Added to Pool as Trainee At                               | If the employee was added as a trainee, this field contains the date they were initially added to the pool.                                                                                        |
| Qualified At                                              | Date added as qualified, approved, or automatically graduated.                                                                                                                                     |
| Shadow Interviews Completed                               | Total shadow interviews completed.                                                                                                                                                                 |
| Reverse Shadow Interviews Completed                       | Total reverse shadow interviews completed.                                                                                                                                                         |
| Training Interviews Completed                             | Total training interviews completed (sum of shadow and reverse shadow training interviews completed).                                                                                              |
| Upcoming Shadow                                           | The start date of the first upcoming interview where the employee is a shadow interviewer.                                                                                                         |
| Upcoming Reverse Shadow                                   | The start date of the first upcoming interview where the employee is a reverse shadow interviewer.                                                                                                 |
| Upcoming Shadow Count                                     | The count of upcoming interviews where the employee is a shadow interviewer.                                                                                                                       |
| Upcoming Reverse Shadow Count                             | The count of upcoming interviews where the employee is a reverse shadow interviewer.                                                                                                               |
| Upcoming Training Interview (Shadow or Reverse Shadow)    | The start date of the first upcoming interview where the employee is either a shadow or reverse shadow interviewer.                                                                                |
| Most Recent Shadow                                        | The start date of the most recently completed interview where the employee is a shadow interviewer.                                                                                                |
| Most Recent Reverse Shadow                                | The start date of the most recently completed interview where the employee is a reverse shadow interviewer.                                                                                        |
| Most Recent Training Interview (Shadow or Reverse Shadow) | The start date of the most recently completed interview where the employee is a shadow or reverse shadow interviewer.                                                                              |
| Is Pending Approval?                                      | Whether the member is pending approval on stage progression in training steps.                                                                                                                     |
| Current Stage Type                                        | The current stage type (Shadow or Reverse Shadow) of the employee. If the employee is not in training, this field is empty.                                                                        |
| Is Paused                                                 | Whether the interviewer's membership is currently paused.                                                                                                                                          |

### Report example

**Question:** How do I track completed shadow and reverse shadow interviews per interviewer pool member?

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Interviewer Pool Members

**Filters:** Optional. Filter by interviewer pool.

**Columns/Fields to Show:** Employee Name, Interviewer Pool, Interviewer Pool Member's Role, Interviewer Pool Member's Training Started At, Interviewer Pool Member's Training Interviews Completed, Interviewer Pool Member's Shadow Interviews Completed, Interviewer Pool Member's Reverse Shadow Interviews Completed

![A screenshot of a custom list report that answers the question 'How do I track completed shadow and reverse shadow interviews per interviewer pool member?'](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/amaLTeIY2yyFMHrUP5Jq3_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-03-03-at-101408-am.jpg)

## Interview Schedules (additional fields)

If you send Scheduling Requests to coordinators or coordination teams, you can get visibility on scheduling request volume when reporting using this subject. You can find these additional fields under **Requests** when setting the subject of your report to Interview Schedules.

### Fields

| Additional Field Name                     | Field Description                                                                           |
| ----------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Interview Schedule's Request Requested By | The user who submitted the request.                                                         |
| Interview Schedule's Request Assignee     | The user assigned to the interview schedule request.                                        |
| Interview Schedule's Request Submitted At | When the interview schedule request was submitted.                                          |
| Interview Schedule's Request Priority     | The priority level assigned to the interview schedule request.                              |
| Location Type                             | The meeting location type for the interview (for example, In person, Zoom, or Google Meet). |

### Report examples

:::hint{type="info"}
Below are some common questions and examples of reports that can help you find the data points needed.
:::

**Question:** What does scheduling request volume look like over time?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:** Interview Schedules

**Time Field:** Interview Schedule's Request Submitted At

**Filters:** Optional

**Group By:** Interview Schedule's Interview Stage Group or Interview Schedule's Title

![The screenshot shows a report that can help answer the question 'What does scheduling request volume look like over time?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/bb2db268397a7ccbc34c56a5f8c6c239.png)

**Question:** How much scheduling volume is happening by request priority over time?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:** Interview Schedules

**Time Field:** Interview Schedule's Request Submitted At

**Filters:** Optional

**Group By:** Interview Schedule's Request's Priority

![The screenshot shows a count over time report that helps to answer the question 'How much scheduling volume is happening by request priority over time?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/1ccf00d6560be556bd0fac8f04ded658.png)

**Question:** How many requests are being assigned to each coordinator over time?

**Report Type:** Count Over Time

**Subject:** Interview Schedules

**Time Field:** Interview Schedule's Request Submitted At

**Filters:** Optional

**Group By:** Interview Schedule's Request's Assignee

![The screenshot shows a count over time report that helps to answer the question 'How many requests are being assigned to each coordinator over time?'](https://cdn.zappy.app/43a24c8aa087b51d419381f2d3a9c490.png)

# Advanced scheduling templates

Navigate to **Reports > Templates**, or the **Reporting Templates** section of **Reports > Report Builder**, to access a selection of scheduling report templates.

:::hint{type="info"}
Below is a visual reference showing where each key metric falls within the scheduling timeline. Each template is also listed beneath the timeline with the metrics used to calculate it, for your reference.
:::

## Scheduling Turnaround Times

This report shows how quickly you schedule interviews once a candidate enters an interview stage.

**How to use this report**

Use this report to measure the efficiency of your scheduling process. Faster turnaround times mean candidates spend less time waiting for interviews to be confirmed, improving the overall candidate experience.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average time from when a candidate enters an interview stage (scheduling begins) to when the interview is confirmed on the calendar.
- Reflects both recruiter responsiveness and candidate engagement.

![A screenshot of a report that shows how quickly you schedule interviews once a candidate enters an interview stage.](https://cdn.zappy.app/17d0dd88649f5f41af190f70bd9e4ab5.png)

## Time to Schedule

This report shows how quickly you schedule interviews after candidates provide their availability.

**How to use this report**

Use this report to track recruiting team responsiveness to candidate availability. Shorter times indicate efficient scheduling and a smoother candidate experience.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average time from when a candidate submits availability to when the interview is confirmed.
- Highlights how long candidates wait before seeing their interview scheduled.
- Only includes interviews where candidate availability was requested and submitted in Ashby (for example, it excludes direct booking).

![This screenshot shows a report that tracks recruiting team responsiveness to candidate availability.](https://cdn.zappy.app/026932dd70d190f45d9dfbe823930eb9.png)

## Scheduling Lead Times

This report shows how far in advance you typically schedule interviews (excluding reschedules).

**How to use this report**

Use this report to understand interviewer engagement and capacity. A shorter lead time generally indicates that interviewers are making themselves available in advance, while longer lead times can suggest tighter schedules or difficulty securing interviewer participation.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average time between when an interview is confirmed on the calendar and its initially scheduled start time.
- Excludes delays from any reschedules.

![A report that shows how far in advance you typically schedule interviews (excluding reschedules).](https://cdn.zappy.app/a1844d4fc9def9f9a2fa7aa65fe2dc03.png)

## Adjusted Scheduling Lead Times

This report shows how far in advance you typically schedule interviews (including reschedules).

**How to use this report**

Use this report to understand interviewer engagement and capacity. A shorter lead time generally indicates that interviewers are making themselves available in advance, while longer lead times can suggest tighter schedules or difficulty securing interviewer participation.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average time between when an interview is confirmed and when it actually takes place.
- Includes delays caused by reschedules.

![The screenshot shows report shows how far in advance you typically schedule interviews (including reschedules).](https://cdn.zappy.app/942db3139458317125d7d99b8e11b79e.png)

## Total Scheduling Duration

This report shows the total time it takes for an interview to actually happen once a candidate enters an interview stage.

**How to use this report**

Use this report to evaluate the overall speed of your scheduling process. It captures both how quickly you complete scheduling and how long it takes for the interview to actually occur. You can view this as a combination of Turnaround Time and Adjusted Lead Time.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average time from when a candidate enters an interview stage to when the interview happens.
- Includes any delays caused by reschedules.

![The screenshot shows a report to evaluate the overall speed of your scheduling process.](https://cdn.zappy.app/46b5525af6c3bf7af7ee01b1fa862841.png)

## Time to Interview

This report shows how quickly candidates reach their initially scheduled interview after providing availability (excluding reschedules).

**How to use this report**

Use this report to understand candidate wait times from their perspective. It highlights how long it typically takes to get candidates into their next interview once they have submitted availability.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average time from when a candidate submits availability to the start time of their initially scheduled interview.
- Only includes interviews where candidate availability was requested and submitted in Ashby (for example, it excludes direct booking).
- Excludes delays from rescheduling.

![The screenshot shows a report that shows candidate wait times from their perspective.](https://cdn.zappy.app/2e2ec22895ef9b876c4a0c0f0554e386.png)

## Adjusted Time to Interview

This report shows how long it actually takes for candidates to have their interview after providing availability, including delays from reschedules.

**How to use this report**

Use this report to measure real candidate wait times. It accounts for any reschedules and helps identify bottlenecks or reliability issues that slow things down.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average time from when a candidate submits availability to when the interview actually happens.
- Only includes interviews where candidate availability was requested and submitted in Ashby (for example, it excludes direct booking).
- Includes delays from rescheduling.

![The screenshot shows a report to measure real candidate wait times.](https://cdn.zappy.app/320b563a8729c988716d5d6fee9e3a07.png)

## Rescheduling Impact

This report shows how much rescheduling is extending your interview timelines.

**How to use this report**

Use this report to assess the cost of rescheduling on both interviewer engagement and candidate experience. It highlights whether reschedules are meaningfully delaying interviews and where improvements might be needed.

**What's in the data?**

- Calculated as the average difference between Scheduling Lead Time (initial) and Adjusted Scheduling Lead Time (actual).
- Quantifies the impact of delays introduced by rescheduling.

![The screenshot shows a report shows how much rescheduling is extending your interview timelines.](https://cdn.zappy.app/f4e20f36a9bcd756c8a8fb5905003617.png)

:::hint{type="success"}
Remember to click `Save` once you've created your report so Ashby adds it to your saved reports.
:::

# FAQs

### If I start auto-scheduling an interview but have to tweak it along the way (for example, swapping out an interview on the shared plan), does the Interview Schedule Version get logged as manually scheduled?

If you start auto-scheduling and tweak something along the way within the auto-schedule flow (for example, you click `Use Schedule` on one of the auto-schedule options presented, then update one of the interviews on the following screen), Ashby still logs the Scheduled By Type as Auto Schedule.

Put another way, Ashby sets the Scheduled By Type at the beginning, based on how you start a new scheduling process. If you schedule the interview using auto-schedule, then reschedule it using manual schedule, Ashby lists two versions, one for each scheduling type.

### Is there a way to see whether a candidate decline resulted in needing to reschedule?

What's possible today:

- You can see whether there was a candidate decline on certain interview schedules (or versions of the interview schedule, and whether it was rescheduled or modified multiple times).
- You can also see whether a schedule was rescheduled via direct booking link, which you could view as a reschedule due to a candidate.

What's not yet possible:

- Ashby doesn't currently report on decline reasons for candidates, or show how closely a candidate's decline happened to the time of the interview.

### Can you see which candidate declined or rescheduled, based on the original date of the interview?

Yes, you can see each specific instance and which specific candidate responded with a decline. You can also see the Interviews Start At time for that specific schedule version. Ashby only shows whether (true/false) there was a candidate decline on one of these schedule versions.

From the data, you can also infer whether it was rescheduled, because that shows up as another version for the same candidate and the same interview or stage, but with a higher Version number — which indicates a new schedule being created (whether due to rescheduling or another minor modification).

### What happens if an interview is rescheduled and then the reschedule is modified? What does the Version Schedule Type show up as when reporting on Interview Schedule Summaries?

This results in three Interview Schedule Versions, of the types original, reschedule, and modified respectively. At the Interview Schedule Summary level, Ashby marks the Version Schedule Type as a Reschedule, because reschedules supersede modifications when aggregated at the summary level.

### Are interview schedule summaries based on the interview stage, interview schedule activity, or individual interview event?

They are based on interview schedule activity. Whether your interview schedule activity has one interview event or multiple events (for example, an onsite), Ashby represents it with a single interview schedule summary.

If there is more than one event in an interview schedule activity, rescheduling that activity (whether only one event changes or multiple events change) counts as one new interview schedule version (marked as a modification or reschedule depending on the change), and counts as part of the single interview schedule summary for all versions for that activity.

If you have more than one interview schedule activity within an interview stage, each has its own interview schedule summary.

### If I reschedule an interview more than once in a short time, does that count as multiple reschedules?

Yes. If you reschedule an interview activity twice in quick succession, it still counts as two reschedules (two new versions) regardless of how little time has elapsed in between.

### With interview schedule versions, what is the difference between a modification and a reschedule?

A reschedule involves adjusting interview participants, start and end times, or amending the number of interviews. A modification is any other kind of adjustment (for example, updating the interview briefing or adding a Zoom link).

### What are the different Scheduled By Type values and what do they mean?

Here's a list showing each scheduling type and a definition:

- **Manual Schedule:** Interview schedules created using the `Manual Schedule` option within the Ashby interface.
- **Auto Schedule:** Schedules created via Ashby's auto-scheduling feature.
- **Direct Booking:** Schedules where candidates booked their own interview times through a Direct Booking link, which allows candidates to self-select from available time slots.
- **Ashby Public API:** Schedules created programmatically via Ashby's Public API. Used for integrations and automated scheduling through external systems.
- **External Reschedule:** Schedules updated automatically due to two-way calendar sync automation (for example, when external calendar changes trigger automatic updates in Ashby).
- **Automation (Interviewer Declined):** Automatic rescheduling triggered when an interviewer declines a calendar invite. Ashby automatically finds a replacement interviewer or reschedules.
- **Automation (Training Path Update):** Automatic updates to fix instances where interviewer training roles change or get out of order, to ensure training sequences remain properly ordered.

[title] Report Catalog - Essentials
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This catalog focuses mostly on essential reports, if you want to explore more advanced reports take a look at our [Report Catalog - Advanced](docId:24rONsZ2Xx5ToZdSakIq9) guide.

This document provides an overview of various types of reports you can run in Ashby. We use this document during implementation, to pick your initial set of reports, and it is also a great reference for expanding your reports over time.

All reports are grouped into high level categories. Template reports can be found in [Report Catalog: Templates](docId\:AurRQFzh1h8qgf6rh0VQi)&#x20;

Note, that with Ashby's flexible report builders, we can build any other kind of report you'd like, that is not shown here. If you're interested in that and have trouble building the report yourself, contact your Ashby point person!

# Before you Get Started

As you read through the report catalog, keep in mind that all of the following reports can be filtered and grouped by any field and can be reported on for any timeframe you'd like.

We have some general recommendations on how to filter the reports:

- Most companies tend to break up their hiring process into a few major areas (e.g. business and product & engineering). This is helpful since these different types of roles can have a vastly different recruiting process. When using any of the reports below, you most likely should run them separately for each of these major areas.
- If you are hiring across different locations with very different local labor markets or recruiting processes, you will likely want to further separate your reports by location / region
- For each of the reports below, filtering and/or grouping by Source, Department, Hiring Manager, etc. will allow you to compare relative performance between different parts of your team and different channels.

# Conversion Rate Reports

Conversion reports allow you to find inefficiencies in your hiring funnel. Are there parts of your funnel in which too many or too few candidates are moving to the next stage? You can answer these questions with the reports below.

## Conversion Rates from a particular stage over time

To spot trends in conversion rates over time, you can focus on a particular stage and take a look at how many candidates pass through that stage.

There are a few variations of this report, but one popular one is to look at onsite interviews and their outcome over time.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/4rYa1sLmA934SJVl-KBgalSI.png)

This report shows which percentage of onsite interviews that occurred each week ended up hired, rejected by you, rejected by the candidate or are still active. This kind of report lets you quickly spot if your conversion rate is changing from your historical average.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/da9c4c4926f54d59a0df068e5d8f0646"}

:::hint{type="info"}
This video uses the Application field Outcome but Archive Reason Type is also popular.
:::

# Activity Reports

Activity reports help you report on the volume of your activities. E.g. how many hires are you making? How many new candidates are you getting into interview process? How many interviews are you scheduling across different stages?

## New Applications by Source

See how the volume of new applications by source is changing over time. This report can give you a sense if new initiatives are performing as expected (e.g. if you just started sourcing for a new role).

Please note that depending on your ATS, you will either see Job Considerations or Applications when selecting your subject for this report.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/DjsBtb3CAGdWpWr4gsuiAFD_.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/411e444c0283435bb6fc9bc0fdad94df"}

## Interviews by Stage Over Time

This is another way to look at if you are getting enough candidate volume to reach your hiring goals. Based on the conversion reports you will know how many interviews you need at specific stages in the funnel to make one hire. This report will show you if you're trending towards reaching that goal or not.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/AqweDBfDkIvmOvNXAv_HNPO1.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/2a1fb67cf6544125a469608dfecf62e1"}

## Alert on Hires without Necessary Fields ([Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW))

This example demonstrates how to setup a custom list report with an alert on recent hires missing required fields, such as Recruiter, Source or an associated Hiring Manager.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/e9e532038a3b4d779050db9ce68a2ef6"}

These types and similar reports can be added to a data quality dashboard to combine reports, alerts and dashboards in one suite.

# Offer Reports

Offer reports show you how well you're doing at closing candidates that made it all the way through your interview process.

## Offer Acceptance Rate

You can also report an overall offer acceptance rate as a single number. By using a segmentation report, you can group all offer decisions by their outcome. This report has the option to present results as a single percentage.

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/Wmk0jlTc19OOMBmOB5d6iYCO.png" size="30" width="228" height="178" darkWidth="228" darkHeight="178" position="center" showCaption="false"}

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/3fc026c1ad0840f9abd4b2624e5af1f4"}

## Currently Pending Offers

You can use Ashby not only for historical data, but also for keeping track of current activities, e.g. how many offers are currently pending. The most simple version of this report is simply a tile on a dashboard that shows the total amount of pending offers (again, filtered by any field you want). As always in Ashby, you can then click into the number to see the underlying candidates.

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/GdOEGPr5W3t6_F44hP0nq53V.png" size="48" width="654" height="462" darkWidth="654" darkHeight="462" position="center" showCaption="false"}

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/c1e310432a6645c8a04606c59f47d1de"}

Alternatively you can show pending offers in aggregate. For example, below, all pending offers by department.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/Kur4kzes52VSJWBGdJq7gU46.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/a108afe7d42d46178095dddeba3af6e6"}

# Current Pipeline Reports

## Current Pipeline with Aggregate Numbers

This type of report can give you a high level overview of where active candidates are currently in process, showing the jobs they are interviewing for and the stage they are currently in.

![](https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/lnIeu1cn95v8MRfGyTDuZ1OP.png)

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/b1da865bebcf4c72b8cfff12921b7ae5"}

# Referrals

## Referral Leaderboard

Shows all referrals submitted in a specific timeframe, grouped by referrer.

::Image[]{src="https://static.slab.com/prod/uploads/l73blu9g/posts/images/UEEWV9tS39vkW4MxlO9IyXYx.png" size="72" width="3360" height="1832" darkWidth="3360" darkHeight="1832" position="center" showCaption="false"}

You can group this report further, to show the outcome of each referral as well. Another common use is to group by department.

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/d370a39f1047424887033183bb0c2a42"}


[title] Ashby Analytics: Integration Setup
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] Building Custom Reports & Dashboards
[path] Ashby Analytics/


[title] How to Copy a Dashboard
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This document reviews the copy dashboard functionality. This feature allows you make copies of existing dashboards and specify how you want each underlying report to copy over to your new dashboard.&#x20;

:::hint{type="info"}
It is not currently possible to create copies of core dashboards.

Locked dashboards may restrict copying. Reach out to the user who locked the dashboard if a copy is needed.  See [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o)  for more information.
:::

# Overview

To make a copy of an existing dashboard, select `More` > `Copy Dashboard.`

- The copy dashboard functionality is limited to admin licenses holders that have the ability to edit and create content in Ashby.

![Screen Cast 2022-11-28 at 11.39.27 AM.gif](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/3w6qyboAzDWPki8ke-ZP6_screencast2022-11-28at113927am.gif)

When selecting Copy Dashboard, you'll be presented with an interface to optionally use the existing reports or create new copies of reports for your new dashboard.

- **Use current**: Ashby allows the same report to be added to multiple dashboards. This will copy the report into your new dashboard using a reference to the existing report. The primary benefit of this choice is avoiding needless duplication of a report you do not plan to change.
- **Save as new**: If you plan to modify a report on the new dashboard, use this option to save the report as a new copy. On your new dashboard, you can modify the report(s) without impacting the original dashboard they were copied from.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/SxccatgonOlLJUItBxbbS_screenshot2021-08-04at40029pm.png)

**Copy Dashboard Options**

1. Give your new dashboard a name
2. Select whether you want to include the existing reports or save new copies
3. Optionally rename the reports you will copy over as new
4. Select `Copy` to create your new dashboard



# Creating a copy of a report

If you'd like to duplicate a report:

1. Head to **Reports > Saved Reports&#x20;**&#x61;nd select the report in question
2. Click `Save` and `Save as New Report...` to create a new copy of your report
3. Give your report copy a title and click `Continue`

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/4WNcrR9oqbjDNH-dxnB4d_count-by-segment-report-acent-ashby-2026-05-05-at-105226-am.jpg)

## FAQ

:::ExpandableHeading
### What happens if I copy a [confidential dashboard](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o)?

The new dashboard copy will inherit the same privacy and access controls of the source dashboard. These can be modified on the new dashboard after a copy is made, if required. Please review the confidential reporting documentation for more information [Confidential Reporting & Content Access Control](docId\:MuCHM4f6ZrjbV4r1fjn_o).
:::

:::ExpandableHeading
### Why would I save a report as a new copy, or why would I use the current report in a new dashboard?

Depending on your use case, you may want to have a uniquely filtered or modified report per dashboard copy. In this case, you'd want to use the save as new option per report. However, sometimes it's useful to reference the same report on multiple dashboards. The primary advantage of this is that if you need to update the underlying report, you can do so in one, and then all dashboards which reference the report will be updated.
:::


[title] Custom Reports
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This guide provides an overview of all the custom report options available in **Reports >** [Report Builder](https://app.ashbyhq.com/reports/builder).

Custom reports can be configured on the Plus, Enterprise and Legacy Plus plans:

| Foundations | Legacy Plus | Plus | Enterprise |
| ----------- | ----------- | ---- | ---------- |
| ❌           | ✅           | ✅    | ✅          |

:::hint{type="warning"}
**Prerequisites:** If you are reporting on your pipeline or interview stages, we recommend setting up a grouped interview plan, so you can report on stage group, rather than stage name to streamline reporting. More on this at [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)&#x20;
:::

# Creating a custom report

To create a custom report, navigate to **Reports > Report Builder**. In the Custom Reports section, you'll be able to choose from the following report types:

- [Segmentation](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)
- [Count Over Time](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)
- [Candidate List](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)
- [Custom List](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)
- [Recruiting Planner](docId\:lY-KegLNCudYF0ed41GAW)

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/fikFouB0NFuUH077oLVtD_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-111739-am.jpg)

Click on a report type to start building your custom report, where you can set the subject, apply filters and timeframes and more to find key metrics. The visualization options will give you options to help present your results in the clearest way possible.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Remember to click `Save Report` once you've configured your custom report. Reports do not auto-save.
:::

## Segmentation

:::hint{type="info"}
The segmentation report allows you to group data by a field of your choosing. You can use this to count and group applications, candidates, interviews and more.
:::

### Initial Setup

When setting up your segmentation report, you can populate the following fields:

![The report builder for a count by segment report.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/S4ekw2XHQyc_g-YmU3zVm_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-115550-am.jpg)

**Subject (required):** You can use the drop-down here to determine the topic you’d like the report to cover. Job Considerations shows by default but other options include Jobs, Interviews, and Candidates.

**Timeframe (required):** Here you can select the date field that will be used to determine the data displayed in your report. For example, if you’re looking to report on job considerations, grouped by source in the last three months, you can select the Started At date field. Job considerations that were started within the last three months will then be included in the report.

**Filters (optional):** If you’d like to further filter your results (for example, only looking to show applications by source for a specific job), you can add additional filters here using the `+ Add Field to Match` option.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have the Advanced toggle turned off for filters, click `+ Filter` instead to pick from the most commonly used filters. Advanced filtering does provide the widest range of options.
:::

**Groupings (required):** Select how you would like your data to be grouped on the segmentation report. If viewing applications by source, click `+ Add Field to Group Results By` and select Source.

:::hint{type="info"}
When creating a segmentation report, you can add two fields to group by. For example, if you were creating a segmentation report on interviews per stage group they were scheduled in, you could select Current Interview Stage Group in the Groupings section but also click `+ Add Field to Group Results By` a second time if you’d like to also view the job these interviews were scheduled for.

The first specified field will be prioritised on the x axis. You can click and drag your fields specified in the Groupings section to prioritize the second field if needed.
:::

![A count by segment report with groupings set.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/VviAvKNsnx3Id6kWNnddC_report-grouped-by-interview-stage-name-and-job.jpg)

### Visualization Options

Once you’ve created your report, you can adjust the format of it to suit your needs. Use the Visualization tab's `Chart Style` drop-down to set your chart style type.

![A count by segment report using the pie chart style.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yQyoVhIQGUUPhkbXBdHca_visualization-segmentation-report.jpg)

You can use the `Measure` drop-down to determine whether you are measure in percent (pie chart) or via a count (bar chart).

![A count by segment report with the Measure field set to Percent.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/_judnlqXu8pNFVjS0Kc29_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-16-at-40917-pm.jpg)

You can use the `Sort By` drop-down to sort your results. You can pick from the following options:

**None:** No sorting is applied

**Ascending:** Percentage increases clockwise from the top (for the percentage format) or from left-to-right (for the count format).

**Descending:** Percentage decreases clockwise from the top (for the percentage format) or from left-to-right (for the count format).

![An example of a referral leaderboard report.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jR8bqhoWYm_5yKPRO6XQH_referral-leaderboard.jpg)

### Common Uses

**Pending Offers by Department**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/LHrxc7e-zRBiBE9mp8tfl_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-21404-pm.jpg)

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x53;egmentation

**Subject:** Job Considerations (or Applications)

**Time Range:** Offer Stage Entered at (or Last Activity At)

**Filters:** Current Interview Stage Group (set to is and select the Offer stage group)

**Groupings:** Department.



**Referral Leaderboard**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/jR8bqhoWYm_5yKPRO6XQH_referral-leaderboard.jpg)

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x53;egmentation

**Subject:** Job Considerations (or Applications)

**Time Range:** Started At

**Filters:** Source Type > Referral

**Groupings:** Credited To

## Count Over Time

:::hint{type="info"}
The count over time report allows you to look at metrics over a specified time frame and interval breakdown (i.e weekly, monthly and so on).
:::

### Initial Setup

When creating a count over time report, you can populate the following fields:

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/TZVY0NUMBEwWFT-5vDcVA_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-95136-am.jpg)

**Subject (required):** Where you can specify the topic you’re reporting on. The most commonly used subjects are Job Considerations (or Applications), Candidates, Interviews and Jobs.

**Timeframe & Interval (required):** Here you can select your time range and the interval you’d like to use for your report. You’ll be required to set the date field on your job consideration to let Ashby know the time stamp that should be used when pulling data for your report.

For example, if you’re reporting on hires, you’d look at setting the date field to be Hired At. This will ensure that only applications with an Hired At date within your specified time frame will be included. The data for that hire will then only be displayed in the interval the Hired At date falls in.

**Filters (optional):** If you don’t want to include all hires in your report (for example, if you’re only looking at hires for a specific team or department), you can click `+ Add Field to Match` and select a filter here to ensure only the data you need is included in your report.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have the Advanced toggle turned off for filters, click `+ Filter` instead to pick from the most commonly used filters. Advanced filtering does provide the widest range of options.
:::

**Groupings (optional):** If you’d like to segment your data within your count over time report (for example, report on hires by department), then you can click `+ Add Field to Group Results By`.

![A count over time table report.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sZqOCXV6_bw2wLcb75CS4_table-view-report.jpg)

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/H8MXpDDMRH-gc0ZiMP3IN_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-95337-am.jpg)

### Visualization Options

You can choose from the following options in the Visualization section of the report builder.

**Line Chart:** Results are tracked across the specified intervals in a line chart format.

![An example Interviews by Stage over time report.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/J1K-prC_qwKuQfNNHFhhi-20260417-091424.jpg)

**Bar Chart:** Results are tracked across the specified intervals in a bar chart format.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hk-RTWwvoP0s6nYyLfloD_bar-chart-report-builder.jpg)

**Stacked Bar Chart:** Used for reports that are grouped by a specific field.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/M4UZnwLPqphRSGA13jlxf_stacked-bar-chart.jpg)

**Table:** Each week is listed with the count of results displayed beside it.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/sZqOCXV6_bw2wLcb75CS4_table-view-report.jpg)

You can also specify whether the count is listed as the number per interval (rate), or the count tallies as a running total across your time frame (running total).

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/yBKdpputqcv_szmXGl2v4_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-100544-am.jpg)

### Common Uses

**Interviews by Stage over time**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/J1K-prC_qwKuQfNNHFhhi-20260417-091424.jpg)

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x43;ount over time

**Subject:** Interviews

**Date Field:** Start Time

**Groupings:** Scheduled in Stage Group

:::hint{type="info"}
Please ensure you have a grouped interview plan in place if reporting by stage group. More on this at [What is a grouped interview plan?](docId\:XnP0RKWlHBnUS04b4bZwq)&#x20;
:::

**Hires by Department over time (available as a template)**

![An example hires by department over time report.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ibBx4ppbiVdBbhm7Vhgd__report-template-hires-by-department.jpg)

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x43;ount over time

**Subject:** Job Considerations (or Applications)

**Date Field:** Hired At

**Groupings:** Department



**Hires by Source over time (available as a template)**

![An example hires by source over time.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/m15kd_4uIb3_n-Z2RW5q3_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-20310-pm.jpg)

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x43;ount over time

**Subject:** Job Considerations (or Applications)

**Date Field:** Hired At

**Groupings:** Source (or Source Type if you have a large number of sources)

## Candidate List

:::hint{type="info"}
&#x20;For more information on adding filters to create a candidate list, check out our [Candidate Search](docId:-ZYXRHB2dhZQNQWl3ugx1) guide.&#x20;
:::

## Custom List

:::hint{type="info"}
This report will allow you to create exportable lists where you can specify the data listed. Once you've configured your custom list report, the option to Export will appear above the option to set filters and below the `Save Report` button.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/6gd-PZyJ-QAvh5vqO1EmS_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-21914-pm.jpg)

You can also create alerts from these reports so you can receive regular updates or notifications on new entries. More on this at [Alerts](docId\:fCkR-kKHNMJZ6vuU3kRvW)&#x20;
:::

### Initial Setup

When configuring your custom list report, you can configure the following sections:

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/dZvuynrDtsGW-cXERlvtl_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-103930-am.jpg)

**Subject:** You can select the topic you’re looking to report on here. Subjects include Job Considerations (or Applications), Candidates, Interviews, Surveys and Jobs.

**Filters:** Add filters using the `+ Add Field to Match` option to ensure only the information you need is included in your report. For example, if you’re looking to pull all jobs with an open status, you would select Jobs as your subject, then choose the Job Status filter. Use the drop-down to ensure the job status equals open.

:::hint{type="info"}
If you have the Advanced toggle turned off for filters, click `+ Filter` instead to pick from the most commonly used filters. Advanced filtering does provide the widest range of options.
:::

**Columns:** Select fields using the `+ Add Field to Show` option to determine the data you would like to show in your list. For open jobs, you could opt to select the Job Title field, the Department field and the Location field for example. This data will then be displayed in your results.

### Visualization Options

**Number:** This view option will show a single count of the results (or rows) in your table.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/88vJ0p7AWsrCubg6s-WPT_custom-list-number-report.jpg)

**Table:** The full list of results with the specified fields included in each row.

![An example of a custom list report showing all candidates in the offer stage.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KlFiFv4dIFxzoOTBCyr_a_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-110835-am.jpg)

### Taking bulk actions

On a custom list report displayed as a table, you can select one or more rows to take action on them. A toolbar appears above the table with the bulk actions available for that subject — the same interaction you may be familiar with from candidate list reports.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/lzPoUwEHhSCtlkv9-QCfx_stale-job-considerations-report-ashby-2026-06-25-at-10800-pm.png)

The available actions depend on the subject of your custom list:

**Job considerations**

- **Archive job considerations:** Archive the selected job considerations (also referred to as applications). When archiving, you can configure the following options:
  - `Cancel active sequences` (default off): Sequences are tied to the candidate, not the job consideration, so a candidate still active for other jobs may still need their sequence.
  - `Stop feedback reminders`: Reminders are tied directly to job considerations and stop when a consideration is archived.
  - `Notify rejected applicants`: Sends one rejection email per job consideration.
  - `Update archive reason on currently-archived job considerations` (default off): When turned on, a job consideration that is already archived under a different reason has its archive event updated in place. Job considerations already archived under the same reason are skipped. When turned off, all currently-archived job considerations are skipped entirely.
- **Transfer to job:** Transfer selected job considerations to another job. Includes options to skip archived and skip hired job considerations, both default off.
- **Set hiring team role**

**Jobs**

- **Archive job considerations by job:** Archives all active job considerations belonging to the selected jobs. Includes a Job Consideration Outcomes filter defaulting to Lead and Active. This action is useful for cleaning up active job considerations on closed jobs across multiple roles at once.
- **Close job**
- **Copy interview plan to job**

**Candidates**

All bulk actions available on candidate list reports, with the exception of email and survey actions (see callout below).

**Campaigns**

Pause, Unpause, and Cancel.

**Openings**

Archive, Restore, and Delete. These actions are also available on the main Openings page and the Openings sub-tab within a job.

:::hint{type="warning"}
Email and survey actions, including generic email, sequence enrollment, candidate experience surveys, and data consent surveys, are not available on custom list reports. These actions remain available on candidate list reports and the candidate pipeline. Use those surfaces when you need to send outbound communications in bulk.
:::

### Common Uses

**Pull a list of hires without a source&#x20;**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/O8pIjzv-MnA-6Lywn9t95_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-110206-am.jpg)

**Report Type:&#x20;**&#x43;ustom List

**Subject:** Job Consideration

**Filters:** Hired At (then specify your date range), Job Consideration’s Source (set to is empty/unassigned).

**Columns:** Candidate Name, Job Consideration’s Job, Job Consideration’s Recruiter.



**See all candidates in the offer stage**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KlFiFv4dIFxzoOTBCyr_a_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-110835-am.jpg)

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Job Considerations

**Filter:** Current Interview Stage Group (set to Offer)

**Columns:** Candidate Name, Job Consideration’s Job, Job Consideration’s Recruiter and any other details you’d like to include!



**List of currently open jobs**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/J46FKKNK4XqhAg-xiFBNa_report-builder-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-111627-am.jpg)

**Report Type:** Custom List

**Subject:** Jobs

**Filter:** Job’s Job Status (set to Open)

**Columns:** Job’s Job, Job’s Department, Job’s Recruiter, Job’s Hiring Manager, Job Posting’s Status.

****

**Archive stale job considerations across multiple jobs**

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5XX9eTYvH9kYt9SwmgrXi_stale-job-considerations-report-ashby-2026-06-25-at-10633-pm.jpg)

**Report Type:** Custom List
**Subject:** Job considerations
**Filters:** Current Interview Stage (set to Active or Lead), Job's Job Status (set to Closed)
**Columns:** Candidate Name, Job Consideration's Job, Job Consideration's Recruiter

Once your list is configured, select all rows in the table and use the `Archive job considerations` bulk action to archive them in a single step — without repeating the action once per job.

## Recruiting planner

For more on configuring a recruiting planner, check out [Recruiting Planner](docId\:cFN3v0Gb2yi6gyonloelj).

:::hint{type="info"}
For more examples of custom reports you can build, please check out the following guides:

- [Report Catalog - Essentials](docId\:VOWdo_JJgdtwBzC4LIRMc)&#x20;
- [Report Catalog - Advanced](docId:24rONsZ2Xx5ToZdSakIq9)&#x20;
:::

# AI filter assistant

If you're not sure which filters to apply, the AI filter assistant can generate them for you based on a plain-language description of what you're looking for.

## Enabling the AI filter assistant

To use the AI filter assistant in the report builder, navigate to **Admin > Organization Setup > Opt-In Features** and enable the AI assistant filter toggle. Both Ashby All-In-One and Ashby Analytics customers can opt in to use this feature.

## Using the AI filter assistant

1. Navigate to **Reports > Report Builder** and open or start a custom report.
2. In the **Filters** section, select the `AI` sparkles icon.

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/MOX6nkUH1HI3dYquxurs-_report-builder-ashby-2026-06-24-at-31308-pm.jpg)

3. Select from the examples provided, or type a plain-language description of the filter you want to apply.
4. Select `Generate filter`. The assistant generates the relevant filters and applies them to your report.
5. Review the generated filters to confirm they match your intent before saving the report.

After the filters are generated, you can provide feedback:



::Image[]{src="https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/KcxxH4s9CRYJErts0L4go_report-builder-ashby-2026-06-24-at-31557-pm.jpg" size="50" isUploading="false" width="378" height="226" darkWidth="378" darkHeight="226" showCaption="false"}

- Select 👍 if the filters are what you expected.
- Select 👎 if they don't match, then select `Tell us more…` to add further detail.

# Notes and Interpretations

When building your custom report, you'll see Note and Interpretation sections. These are optional.

**Note:&#x20;**&#x41;dd an optional note which will be displayed on your report for viewer reference. Viewers can access your note in the same Note section when viewing the report.

![A report with the Interpretation tab open.](https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xTctRnC3KlUzDLRVgAXKv_count-by-segment-summary-version-report-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-121210-pm.jpg)

**Interpretation:** This option will show if you have AI Report Interpretation enabled. Click `Explain Report` to use AI to generate an interpretation of the report results. For more on this feature, check out [AI Report Interpretation](docId\:r2SHcEUHaeo0ADH_Bm5ar).

![](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xTctRnC3KlUzDLRVgAXKv_count-by-segment-summary-version-report-acent-ashby-2026-04-17-at-121210-pm.jpg)

## FAQ

### How do time ranges work in reporting?

After selecting a date field on your job considerations to group them by (for example, grouping job considerations by the date they were started at), you’ll see a wide range of time range options to pull by.

Some of these are dynamic, meaning that the report will update automatically as time moves forward (so, for example if you selected This week, the current week will always be displayed).

Some are static, meaning that the results will only be shown for the selected time frame (for example, if you selected to count job considerations and specified to only count those between 8/5/24 and 8/12/24 that meet your criteria, the data for the same week would be shown every time that report is visited).

**Dynamic time frame examples -** This week, Last week, This Month, Last Month, This Year, Last Year, In the last three months, In the next three months.

**Static time frame examples -** Before X date, Between X date and X date.

When selecting a date using the In the last picker, we'll show the date used for the report. For example, if today is June 11, 2025, the picker will show June 10, 2025 if In the last 1 day is selected. If you'd like to include the current date too, ensure that the `Include Today?` checkbox is checked, then both today and the day before will be included (so June 10th-11th).

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/5TjusNW4cNGOpWa7kRg3k_in-that-last-1-day-including-today.jpg" size="44" width="360" height="386" position="center" darkWidth="360" darkHeight="386" showCaption="false"}

When selecting the In the next date picker and today is June 11, 2025, June 12, 2025 will show if In the next 1 day is specified. Again, if you'd like to include the current date, check the `Include today?` checkbox.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/hBvql_2xz56qvx3TQSIq8_in-the-next-date-picker.jpg" size="38" width="350" height="354" position="center" alt="The 'In the next' date picker." darkWidth="350" darkHeight="354" showCaption="false"}

### What is the difference between time frames like Last Week and In the last week?

The Last Week time range will cover Monday-Sunday of the previous week.

The In the last 1 week time range will cover the last 7 days. When selecting your time frame using an In the last… time range, you will be able to see the dates covered with this filter.

::Image[]{src="https://api.archbee.com/api/optimize/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/ArbBj2O1HZoRvYJ_FbrRa_in-the-last-week.jpg" size="76" width="774" height="460" position="center" darkWidth="774" darkHeight="460" showCaption="false"}

### Can I report on notes left on the feed of the candidate’s profile?

It currently isn’t possible to report on notes on a candidate’s feed. You do have the option to report on follow-ups added to a candidate profile if you’ve added follow-up tasks.

### How do I access custom reports that I’ve built and saved in Ashby?

You can access the reports you’ve built by navigating to Reports > Saved Reports. Here you can view the reports you’ve built, along with any that you have access to within your organization.

### I've build a custom list report and one of the columns is a private field - who can view the report?

Only users with access to the private field will be able to see the custom list report. If you'd like users without Organization Admin or Elevated Access - Admin Private access to be able to view the report, consider removing the private field from the `Fields to Show` section.


[title] Adding Lines to Reports & Forecasts
[path] Ashby Analytics/Building Custom Reports & Dashboards/

This document reviews how to add various line types to count over time and segmentation reports. These line types can be horizontal reference lines for target thresholds, or trend lines for progress tracking. The option to add forecasts and progress tracking is also covered.

### Add goal lines to reports to count over time reports

::loom{url="https://www.loom.com/embed/f4b9239d03ac4b228d9a91debfb37f85" aspectRatio="1.7777777777777777"}

Adding goal lines to reports in Ashby is currently supported for count over time and segmentation report types. To add a line, simply click "Add Line" in the View Options section of the report configuration. Once a line is added you will have a new set of line options depending on your report configuration. The two types of lines, reference lines and goal lines, and an optional forecast summary are described below.

## Reference Lines

A reference line is a straight-line threshold to be rendered on any report. The reference line has three possible value choices:

- **Custom**: a line is rendered at the numeric value specified by the user input
- **Average**: a line is rendered at the average value of the reported data
- **Median:** a line is rendered at the median value of the reported data

**Add a reference line with a custom value**

1. Select `+ Add Line` in the View Options section
2. Enter an optional label for your line
3. Select Reference Line as the line type
4. Select Custom for the value and enter the target value

![Screen Shot 2022-12-27 at 7.37.46 AM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/HqGuSjNOLjwSxemRIyJIe_screenshot2022-12-27at73746am.png)

## Trend Lines & Forecasts

Trend lines can be added to reports to represent a linear target over time. A trend line type requires an end value which represents the target for the end of the time period. The start value of the line is automatically provided to fit the linear growth over the time grouping and target end value provided. However, a custom start value can be entered.

When a count over time Count As is switched to Running Total, the option to forecast progress against the trend line is made available. Enabling the forecast summary provides a forecast based on historic progress in the report.

![Screen Shot 2021-09-03 at 4.17.14 PM.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/Jd1_zpOxuoycFxpTqqC0R_screenshot2021-09-03at41714pm.png)

**Adding a trend line with a forecast**

1. Select `+ Add Line` in the View Options
2. Set the report counting to `Running Total`
3. Select the Trend Line line type
4. Enter a target value you wish to reach by the end of your time period. The Start Value is optional and will default to a linear extrapolation from your end value
5. Toggle on `Include forecast?`

### Forecast Details

The forecast line is determined by your reported performance to date and does a linear extrapolation. When mousing over the forecast line, the current time elapsed, percent to goal, and estimate of your end value based on past activity are shown.

![details.png](https://archbee-image-uploads.s3.amazonaws.com/0p8tQ--ZZOxRtkVp6Qr-e/xgfn5PurJwLPBFWgZbCls_details.png)

